IP Help Manual.pdf

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Interactive Petrophysics © 2010 Senergy Ltd

Senergy Software Ltd. Ternan House North Deeside Road Banchory Kincardineshire AB31 5YR Scotland

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Interactive Petrophysics © 2010 Senergy Ltd

DISCLAIMER REGARDING THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE INTERACTIVE PETROPHYSICS V3.6 YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT USE OF THIS SOFTWARE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK. BY DOWNLOADING/INSTALLING AND/OR USING THIS SOFTWARE YOU ARE CONSIDERED TO HAVE READ THIS DISCLAIMER AND AGREED TO ITS TERMS. THIS SOFTWARE AND THE ACCOMPANYING FILES ARE SUPPLIED "AS IS" AND WITHOUT WARRANTIES AS TO PERFORMANCE OR MERCHANTABILITY OR ANY OTHER WARRANTIES WHETHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE IS WITH THE END USER. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE SELLER OR ITS AGENTS OR RESELLERS BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. ANY LIABILITY OF THE SELLER OR ITS AGENTS OR RESELLERS WILL BE LIMITED EXCLUSIVELY TO PRODUCT REPLACEMENT OR REFUND OF PURCHASE PRICE. No part of this product may be reproduced, transmitted or translated by any means graphical, electronic, or mechanical - including photocopying, recording, taping or storage in an information retrieval system, without the expressed written permission of Senergy Ltd. Further copies of this document are available from Senergy Ltd on request. Although every care has been taken to ensure that the information in this software and associated documentation is accurate and up to date, software is, by its very nature, complex and changeable. Senergy Ltd and its agents or resellers therefore cannot be held responsible for any error or omission in this software and the associated documentation. The information in this software and the associated documentation is subject to change without notice.

Contents

Senergy

I

Table of Contents Foreword

0

Section 1 Getting Help for Interactive Petrophysics v3.6

2

1 Using ................................................................................................................................... the Online Help 4 2 Getting ................................................................................................................................... Program Updates 7 3 Frequently ................................................................................................................................... Asked Questions 9

Section 2 Database Management

11

1 Starting ................................................................................................................................... Interactive Petrophysics 16 2 Create ................................................................................................................................... a New Database 20 3 Open ................................................................................................................................... an Existing Database 23 4 Create ................................................................................................................................... a Database Shortcut 26 5 Set ................................................................................................................................... Default File Location 27 6 Explore ................................................................................................................................... Database Folder 29 7 Save ................................................................................................................................... the Current Well 30 8 Save ................................................................................................................................... All Wells to Database 35 9 Auto ................................................................................................................................... Save Options 37 10 Printer ................................................................................................................................... Setup 39 11 Database ................................................................................................................................... and Well Security 0

Section 3 Well Management

41

1 Date ................................................................................................................................... Time Wells 42 Create a New ......................................................................................................................................................... Well using the Date Tim e Reference 42 Define the......................................................................................................................................................... Date Tim e Form at for the Selected Well 45 Im port Well ......................................................................................................................................................... Log Data to a Date Tim e Well 48 Import ASCII .................................................................................................................................................. Data to a Date Time Well 48 Import LAS.................................................................................................................................................. Data to a Date Time Well 53 Interpret Date ......................................................................................................................................................... Tim e Data 56 Create a Time .................................................................................................................................................. of Day Log Plot 59 Export Tim......................................................................................................................................................... e Curves to a Depth Well 61

2 Load ................................................................................................................................... Wells from Database 67 3 Create ................................................................................................................................... New Well 71 4 Select ................................................................................................................................... Well to Display 73 5 Well ................................................................................................................................... - Save Current Well As... 78 6 Create ................................................................................................................................... / Edit Well List 81 7 Close ................................................................................................................................... Well 84 8 Delete ................................................................................................................................... Well 86 9 Reset ................................................................................................................................... Current Well 87 10 Manage ................................................................................................................................... Well Header Info. 88 11 History ................................................................................................................................... Module 97 Exam Diff ......................................................................................................................................................... 102

Index

II

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

12 Delete ................................................................................................................................... Parameter Sets 104 13 Plot ................................................................................................................................... Range Editor 106 14 Take ................................................................................................................................... Notes 112 15 Database ................................................................................................................................... and Well Security 0

Section 4 Curve Management

115

1 Manage ................................................................................................................................... Curves and Curve Sets 116 Create and ......................................................................................................................................................... Edit a New Curve Set 117 Add Sets......................................................................................................................................................... from a Set Dictionary 119 Copy Curves ......................................................................................................................................................... from an Existing Set 121 Copy Curves ......................................................................................................................................................... from an Existing Well 123 Delete Curves ......................................................................................................................................................... 128 Edit a Curve ......................................................................................................................................................... Set 129 Copy/Load ......................................................................................................................................................... Data into a Curve Set 130 Working w ith ......................................................................................................................................................... Curve Nam es 0 Using the Set ......................................................................................................................................................... Manager 0 Curve and ......................................................................................................................................................... Set Nam es 132 Curve Set ......................................................................................................................................................... Grouping 134 Curve Listing ......................................................................................................................................................... / Curve Edit 137 Curve Statistics ......................................................................................................................................................... 145 Working w ith ......................................................................................................................................................... Curves in Mutiple Wells 0

2 Manage ................................................................................................................................... Curve Headers 150 Edit Edit Edit Edit Edit

Curve ......................................................................................................................................................... Header General Properties 151 Curve ......................................................................................................................................................... Header Descriptions 156 Curve ......................................................................................................................................................... Header Statistics 156 Curve ......................................................................................................................................................... Header History 158 Curve ......................................................................................................................................................... Header Display 159

3 Manage ................................................................................................................................... Zones/Tops 161 Create a ......................................................................................................................................................... New Zone Set 162 Load Zone ......................................................................................................................................................... Tops from an External File 166 Create a ......................................................................................................................................................... TVDSS Zone Set 168 Copy a Zone ......................................................................................................................................................... Set 172 Edit a Zone ......................................................................................................................................................... Set 173 Delete a Zone ......................................................................................................................................................... Set 176 Edit a Param ......................................................................................................................................................... eter Set 177 Copy a Set ......................................................................................................................................................... Type to a Zone Set 179 Link Zones ......................................................................................................................................................... / Top Sets 180 Manage Multiple ......................................................................................................................................................... Well Zones / Top Sets 0 Create a ......................................................................................................................................................... New Zone 186 Set Zone......................................................................................................................................................... Colours 187

4 Manage ................................................................................................................................... Text Curves 189 Edit Text ......................................................................................................................................................... Curve Headers 190 Edit / Load ......................................................................................................................................................... Text Curve Data 190

5 Manage ................................................................................................................................... Picture/Core Photo Data 196 Edit / Load ......................................................................................................................................................... Picture Curve Data 197 Edit Picture ......................................................................................................................................................... Curve Headers 200

Section 5 Load Data from an External Source

203

1 Load ................................................................................................................................... External Curve Data 206 ASCII Load ......................................................................................................................................................... 207 Import ASCII.................................................................................................................................................. Data to a Time of Day Well 0

Index

Contents

Senergy

III

LAS / LBS......................................................................................................................................................... Load 218 Import LAS/LBS .................................................................................................................................................. Data to a Time of Day Well 0 Load LAS3 ......................................................................................................................................................... Data 224 Load LIS ......................................................................................................................................................... Data 228 Load DLIS ......................................................................................................................................................... Data 236 Specify Curves .................................................................................................................................................. to Load 238 Define DLIS .................................................................................................................................................. File Load Options 242 Load the .................................................................................................................................................. DLIS Data 244 Display the .................................................................................................................................................. DLIS Header Information 245 Define DLIS .................................................................................................................................................. File Global Options 247 Load Multiple .................................................................................................................................................. DLIS Files 248 Form ation Tester ......................................................................................................................................................... LIS/DLIS Loader 0 DBASE4 Load ......................................................................................................................................................... 248 LAS Batch ......................................................................................................................................................... Load 250

2 Load ................................................................................................................................... Zone Tops from an External File 0 3 Load ................................................................................................................................... Picture and Text Curve Data 256 Load Picture ......................................................................................................................................................... Curve Data 0 Load Text Curve ......................................................................................................................................................... Data 0

4 Using ................................................................................................................................... the Interval Loader 257 5 Using ................................................................................................................................... the Capillary Pressure Data Loader 264 6 Using ................................................................................................................................... the Well Attribute Loader 271 7 Real ................................................................................................................................... Time Data Link 279

Section 6 Save Data to an External File

291

1 ASCII ................................................................................................................................... Write 293 2 LAS ................................................................................................................................... Write 300 3 LIS ................................................................................................................................... Write 307 4 DLIS ................................................................................................................................... Write 314 5 DBASE4 ................................................................................................................................... Write 321 6 Save ................................................................................................................................... Zone Tops 323

Section 7 Working with Curve Data

327

1 Creating ................................................................................................................................... Interactive Petrophysics Curves 329 Conventional ......................................................................................................................................................... Curves 330 Array Curves ......................................................................................................................................................... 330 Lithology......................................................................................................................................................... Curves 334 Point Curves ......................................................................................................................................................... 341

2 Working ................................................................................................................................... with Interactive Curves 344 Interactive ......................................................................................................................................................... Curve Edit 345 Interactive ......................................................................................................................................................... Baseline Shift 349 Interactive ......................................................................................................................................................... Trend / Square Curve 352 Interactive ......................................................................................................................................................... Depth Shift 356 Depth Shift ......................................................................................................................................................... Other Curves 374 Interactive ......................................................................................................................................................... Block Depth Shift 375 Interactive ......................................................................................................................................................... Curve Splice 379 Splice Curves ......................................................................................................................................................... 384 Interactive ......................................................................................................................................................... Dip Picking 386

3 Curve ................................................................................................................................... Data Manipulation 390 Fill Data Gaps ......................................................................................................................................................... 390 Curve Rescale ......................................................................................................................................................... 392

Index

IV

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Curve Filter ......................................................................................................................................................... 393 Curve Average ......................................................................................................................................................... 395

4 Manage ................................................................................................................................... Picture/Core Photo Data 397 Edit / Load ......................................................................................................................................................... Picture Curve Data 398 Edit Picture ......................................................................................................................................................... Curve Headers 401

5 Manage ................................................................................................................................... Text Curves 403 Edit Text ......................................................................................................................................................... Curve Headers 404 Edit / Load ......................................................................................................................................................... Text Curve Data 404

6 Array ................................................................................................................................... Image Data 410 Curves to ......................................................................................................................................................... Array Data 411 Array Data ......................................................................................................................................................... to Curves 412 Create Acoustic ......................................................................................................................................................... Im age 413 Create Electrical ......................................................................................................................................................... Im age 416 Merge Im......................................................................................................................................................... ages 424

Section 8 View Well and Curve Data

428

1 Working ................................................................................................................................... with the Log Plot Display 430 Navigating ......................................................................................................................................................... the Log Plot Window 431 Log Plot Navigation .................................................................................................................................................. and Sizing 431 Using Zoom .................................................................................................................................................. in a Log Plot 434 Log Plot Display .................................................................................................................................................. Shortcuts 438 Log Plot Track ......................................................................................................................................................... Managem ent 443 Moving Curves .................................................................................................................................................. and Tracks w ithin a Log Plot 444 Define the ......................................................................................................................................................... Log Plot Form ats 446 Edit the Log .................................................................................................................................................. Plot Format 449 Define the........................................................................................................................................... Log Plot Grid Parameters 450 Define the........................................................................................................................................... Log Plot Curves Parameters 454 Define the........................................................................................................................................... Log Plot Shading Parameters 458 Set Default .................................................................................................................................................. Plot Format 461 Log Plot Styles .................................................................................................................................................. 462 Zones ........................................................................................................................................... 464 Numeric ........................................................................................................................................... 470 Depth /Time ........................................................................................................................................... Index 473 Variable Shading ........................................................................................................................................... 476 VDL Plots........................................................................................................................................... 481 Tadpoles ........................................................................................................................................... 484 Waveforms ........................................................................................................................................... 485 Pictures ........................................................................................................................................... 489 Images ........................................................................................................................................... 491 Dip Image........................................................................................................................................... 499 Annotations ........................................................................................................................................... 501 Log Plot File ......................................................................................................................................................... Output 510 Plot Output: .................................................................................................................................................. Main Plot 511 Plot Output: .................................................................................................................................................. Advanced Settings 519 Plot Output: .................................................................................................................................................. Curve Titles 522 Plot Output: .................................................................................................................................................. Plot Header 523 Plot Output: .................................................................................................................................................. Plot Footer 530 Ouput Plot .................................................................................................................................................. to the Deep Plot View er 531 Output Log .................................................................................................................................................. Plot Curves to a Crossplot 538 Copy Depth .................................................................................................................................................. Values to Clipboard 540 Using the......................................................................................................................................................... Plot Range Editor 540 Using the......................................................................................................................................................... Pre-Defined Plot Form at Files 541 Manage the ......................................................................................................................................................... Interactive Log Plot 542 Create a ......................................................................................................................................................... Horizontal Log Plot 544

Index

Contents

Senergy

V

2 Histograms ................................................................................................................................... 548 Curve Norm ......................................................................................................................................................... alization 574

3 Managing ................................................................................................................................... Crossplots 584 Working ......................................................................................................................................................... w ith the Crossplot Dialog 586 Working ......................................................................................................................................................... w ith the Crossplot Window 596 Working ......................................................................................................................................................... w ith Crossplot Areas 605 Working ......................................................................................................................................................... w ith Crossplot Overlay Files 608 Interactive ......................................................................................................................................................... Modifications in a Crossplot 612 Calculate.................................................................................................................................................. a Regression Line 616 Create a .................................................................................................................................................. User-Defined Line 624 Display a.................................................................................................................................................. Crossplot Section in a Log Plot 626 Crossplot.................................................................................................................................................. Dockable Zone Window 630 Crossplot ......................................................................................................................................................... Types 631 3D Crossplots .................................................................................................................................................. 632 Frequency .................................................................................................................................................. Crossplots 633 Pressure.................................................................................................................................................. Gradient Plots 637 Standalone .................................................................................................................................................. Pickett Plot 646 Multi-Well.................................................................................................................................................. Crossplots 649 Multi-Curve .................................................................................................................................................. Crossplots 651 Input Curves ........................................................................................................................................... in Multi Curve Crossplot 652 Define Multi-Curve ........................................................................................................................................... Discriminators 656 Define Multi-Curve ........................................................................................................................................... Crossplot Scales 656 Multi-Zone .................................................................................................................................................. Crossplots 661

4 3D ................................................................................................................................... Parameter Viewer 664 Select the ......................................................................................................................................................... Required Well 666 Specify 3D ......................................................................................................................................................... View er Param eters 667 Define 3D......................................................................................................................................................... View er Settings 669 View the......................................................................................................................................................... 3D Visualization 671 3D Visualization ......................................................................................................................................................... Exam ples 674

5 Multi-Well ................................................................................................................................... Correlation Viewer 678 Multi-Well ......................................................................................................................................................... Correlation View er 679

6 Well ................................................................................................................................... Map 701 7 Montage ................................................................................................................................... Builder 711

Section 9 Parameter Set Management

717

1 Load ................................................................................................................................... Parameter Set 720 2 Save ................................................................................................................................... Parameter Set to File 725 3 Print ................................................................................................................................... Parameter Set 728 4 Delete ................................................................................................................................... Parameter Sets 730

733

Section 10 Interpretation

1 Parameter ................................................................................................................................... Set Management 0 2 Basic ................................................................................................................................... Log Analysis 735 Define Input ......................................................................................................................................................... and Output Curves 736 Define Basic ......................................................................................................................................................... Log Analysis Param eters 737 Define Zones .................................................................................................................................................. - Clay Parameters 738 Define Density .................................................................................................................................................. Parameters 739 Define Sonic .................................................................................................................................................. Parameters 742 Define Archie .................................................................................................................................................. Parameters 744 Create Basic ......................................................................................................................................................... Log Analysis Interactive Log Plot 744 Equations......................................................................................................................................................... and Methodology 747

Index

VI

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

3 Clay ................................................................................................................................... Volume Analysis 749 Define Clay ......................................................................................................................................................... Volum e Output Curves 751 Clay Volum ......................................................................................................................................................... e Param eters 754 Create a New .................................................................................................................................................. Zone 0 Changing.................................................................................................................................................. Parameters on Screen 756 Define Zone .................................................................................................................................................. Depth Parameters 757 Linking Clay .................................................................................................................................................. Parameters 760 Clay Volume .................................................................................................................................................. Parameter Names 762 Clay Volum ......................................................................................................................................................... e Interactive Plot 767 Clay Volum ......................................................................................................................................................... e Equations and Methodology 772

4 Porosity ................................................................................................................................... and Water Saturation 777 Define Input ......................................................................................................................................................... Curves 778 Define Output ......................................................................................................................................................... Curves 783 Define the ......................................................................................................................................................... Plot Options 791 Porosity ......................................................................................................................................................... and Sw Interactive Plot 793 Define the .................................................................................................................................................. Zone Track 795 Define the .................................................................................................................................................. Gamma Ray Track 796 Define the .................................................................................................................................................. Porosity Input Track 797 Define the .................................................................................................................................................. Resistivity Track 798 Define the .................................................................................................................................................. Salinity Track 799 Define the .................................................................................................................................................. Matrix Track 803 Define the .................................................................................................................................................. Logic (PHIFLAG) Track 804 Define the .................................................................................................................................................. Water Saturation Track 805 Define the .................................................................................................................................................. Calculated Porosity Track 805 Define the .................................................................................................................................................. Lithology Track 806 Define the .................................................................................................................................................. Apparent Matrix Track 808 Define the .................................................................................................................................................. Comparison Tracks 811 Define the .................................................................................................................................................. Sand Lam Tracks 813 Porosity ......................................................................................................................................................... and Sw Param eters 814 Create a New .................................................................................................................................................. Zone 0 Define the .................................................................................................................................................. Zone Depths 819 Define the .................................................................................................................................................. Clay Parameters 823 Define the .................................................................................................................................................. Waters Parameters 825 Define the .................................................................................................................................................. Hydrocarbon Parameters 827 Define the .................................................................................................................................................. Matrix Parameters 830 Define the .................................................................................................................................................. Phi Logic Parameters 832 Define the .................................................................................................................................................. Sw Logic Parameters 835 Define the .................................................................................................................................................. Laminated Sand Parameters 839 Define the .................................................................................................................................................. Limits/Badhole Parameters 840 Define the .................................................................................................................................................. Density/Neutron Parameters 846 Define the .................................................................................................................................................. EPT Parameters 848 Define the .................................................................................................................................................. Sonic Parameters 850 Define the .................................................................................................................................................. Coal/Salt/Kill Parameters 851 Define the .................................................................................................................................................. MultiMin Parameters 854 Porosity ......................................................................................................................................................... and Sw Methodology 861 Porosity ......................................................................................................................................................... and Sw Equations 863

5 Cut-off ................................................................................................................................... and Summations 889 Create a ......................................................................................................................................................... Cutoff and Sum m ations Report 890 Define the .................................................................................................................................................. Input Curves 891 Define the .................................................................................................................................................. Reports Set Up and Default Cutoffs 895 Define the .................................................................................................................................................. Output Curves 897 Cut-off and ......................................................................................................................................................... Sum m ations Param eters 899 Manage Zone .................................................................................................................................................. Depths 902 Create a New ........................................................................................................................................... Zone 0 Manage Cutoffs .................................................................................................................................................. 904 Manage Reservoir ........................................................................................................................................... Cutoffs 905

Index

Contents

Senergy

VII

Manange ........................................................................................................................................... Pay Cutoffs 907 Manage Additional ........................................................................................................................................... Cutoffs 908 Manage Results .................................................................................................................................................. 909 Manage Reservoir ........................................................................................................................................... Results 910 Manage Pay ........................................................................................................................................... Results 912 Manage Additional ........................................................................................................................................... Results 913 Printing Cut-off ......................................................................................................................................................... and Sum m ation Results 914 Report w.................................................................................................................................................. ith Curve Listing 916 Report w.................................................................................................................................................. ith Interval Breakdow n 917 Example Output .................................................................................................................................................. Listing 919 Cut-off and ......................................................................................................................................................... Sum m ations Interactive Plot 922 Multi-Well Cutoff ......................................................................................................................................................... and Sum m ation 0 Cut-off and ......................................................................................................................................................... Sum m ations Equations and Methodology 925

6 Cut-Off ................................................................................................................................... Sensitivity Results 927 Cut-Off Sensitivity ......................................................................................................................................................... Work Flow 929 Cut-off Sensitivity ......................................................................................................................................................... Output Param eters 931 Cut-off Sensitivity ......................................................................................................................................................... Com putations 931 Cut-off Sensitivity ......................................................................................................................................................... Results Plot 933

7 NMR ................................................................................................................................... Normalization 938 T2 Distribution ......................................................................................................................................................... 939 T2 Advanced ......................................................................................................................................................... Setup 940 Norm alized ......................................................................................................................................................... Output T2 Distribution 941

8 NMR ................................................................................................................................... Interpretation 942 Define Input ......................................................................................................................................................... Curves 942 Define Output ......................................................................................................................................................... Curves 950 Define NMR ......................................................................................................................................................... Interpretation Param eters 954 Define Zone .................................................................................................................................................. Depths 955 Define T2.................................................................................................................................................. Cutoffs 956 Define Permeability .................................................................................................................................................. Parameters 957 Define Sw .................................................................................................................................................. Parameters 958 Define Sw .................................................................................................................................................. Fluids 959 Define Sw .................................................................................................................................................. Logic/Limits 961 Define Pc.................................................................................................................................................. Curves 963 Print the NMR .................................................................................................................................................. Interpretation Parameters 964 Define Perm ......................................................................................................................................................... eability 967 Define PC......................................................................................................................................................... Calibration 969 Define the ......................................................................................................................................................... PC Crossplot 976 Display the ......................................................................................................................................................... QC Com parison Plot 977 Display the ......................................................................................................................................................... NMR Interactive Plot 979 NMR Equations ......................................................................................................................................................... and Methodology 982 Basic NMR .................................................................................................................................................. Equations 983 NMR Tapered .................................................................................................................................................. Cutoff 985 Dual Water .................................................................................................................................................. Saturation Calculations 986 Limits .................................................................................................................................................. 991 Sw LogicFlag .................................................................................................................................................. 991 Other Calculations .................................................................................................................................................. 992 NMR T2 to .................................................................................................................................................. Pc Curve 993

9 Cased ................................................................................................................................... Hole 995 TDT Stand ......................................................................................................................................................... Alone 996 Define TDT .................................................................................................................................................. Stand Alone Parameters 997 Create a New ........................................................................................................................................... Interpretation Zone 0 Define Sigma ........................................................................................................................................... Parameters 999 Define SigMat ........................................................................................................................................... from Matrix Density 1000 Define SigMat ........................................................................................................................................... from Mineral Volumes 1001 Specify Parameter ........................................................................................................................................... Limits 1003

Index

VIII

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

TDT Stand .................................................................................................................................................. Alone Plots 1003 Create Interactive ........................................................................................................................................... Log Plot 1005 Create Clay ........................................................................................................................................... Volume/Sigma Crossplot 1008 Create Sigma/Porosity ........................................................................................................................................... Crossplot 1010 Output Curves, .................................................................................................................................................. Equations and Methodology 1013 TDT Tim......................................................................................................................................................... e Lapse 1015 Define TDT .................................................................................................................................................. Time Lapse Parameters 1017 Create a New ........................................................................................................................................... Interpretation Zone 0 Create Interactive .................................................................................................................................................. Log Plot 1018 Equations .................................................................................................................................................. and Methodology 1018

10 Auto ................................................................................................................................... Update of Analysis Modules 1020

Section 11 Advanced Interpretation

1023

1 Interactive ................................................................................................................................... Mineral Solver 1026 Mineral ......................................................................................................................................................... Solver Preprocessing 1029 XRD Weight .................................................................................................................................................. % to Volume % Conversion 1030 Mineral ......................................................................................................................................................... Solver 1032 Define Mineral .................................................................................................................................................. Solver Curves 1033 Define Mineral .................................................................................................................................................. Solver Parameters 1035 Create a New ........................................................................................................................................... Zone 0 Define Zones/Mixings ........................................................................................................................................... 1036 Define Waters/Clays ........................................................................................................................................... 1038 Define Sw ........................................................................................................................................... Logic/Limits 1040 Define Sw ........................................................................................................................................... Params 1043 Define Sonic/Neutron ........................................................................................................................................... 1046 Define Mineral .................................................................................................................................................. Solver Models 1047 Define Mineral .................................................................................................................................................. Solver Mixings 1060 Plot the ......................................................................................................................................................... Mineral Solver Results 1061 Interactive .................................................................................................................................................. Plot 1062 Interactive .................................................................................................................................................. Crossplots 1067 Combined .................................................................................................................................................. Model Results 1069 Mineral ......................................................................................................................................................... Solver Calibration 1074 Define the .................................................................................................................................................. Calibration 1076 Select Multiple .................................................................................................................................................. Wells 1078 Define Calibration .................................................................................................................................................. Discriminators 1079 Mineral ......................................................................................................................................................... Solver Equations and Methodology 1080 Mineral Solver .................................................................................................................................................. Workflow 1081 Equation.................................................................................................................................................. Solver 1083 Equations .................................................................................................................................................. 1084 Limit Equations .................................................................................................................................................. 1099 Output Equations .................................................................................................................................................. 1101 Mineral Types .................................................................................................................................................. 1105 Water Saturations .................................................................................................................................................. 1107 Iteration.................................................................................................................................................. Loops 1112 Final Calculations .................................................................................................................................................. 1113 PHIFlag .................................................................................................................................................. 1114

2 Monte ................................................................................................................................... Carlo Uncertainty Analysis 1116 Navigating ......................................................................................................................................................... the Monte Carlo User Interface 1117 Monte Carlo ......................................................................................................................................................... Uncertainty Analysis Workflow 1121 Define Monte ......................................................................................................................................................... Carlo Param eters 1122 Define the .................................................................................................................................................. Monte Carlo Model 1124 Define Clay .................................................................................................................................................. Volume, Porosity Sw and Cutoff 1126 Define Mineral .................................................................................................................................................. Solver Parameters 1127 Define the .................................................................................................................................................. Input Curves 1129 Define the .................................................................................................................................................. Dependencies 1131

Index

Contents

Senergy

IX

Define the .................................................................................................................................................. Output 1133 Define the .................................................................................................................................................. Monte Carlo Histograms 1140 Define the .................................................................................................................................................. Monte Carlo Crossplots 1142 Define the .................................................................................................................................................. Tornado Plot 1144 Batch Monte ......................................................................................................................................................... Carlo 1146 Select the .................................................................................................................................................. required Wells 1147 Define the .................................................................................................................................................. Batch Model 1148 Define the .................................................................................................................................................. Input Curves 1149 Define the .................................................................................................................................................. Output Curves 1150 Running.................................................................................................................................................. the Monte Carlo Batch 1151

3 Fuzzy ................................................................................................................................... Logic Curve Prediction 1154 Input Curves ......................................................................................................................................................... to Prediction Model 1155 Specify ......................................................................................................................................................... Prediction Discrim inators 1160 Create Prediction ......................................................................................................................................................... Model 1160 Display Prediction ......................................................................................................................................................... Model Statistics 1162 Run Prediction ......................................................................................................................................................... Model 1166 Equations ......................................................................................................................................................... and Methodology 1171

4 Multiple ................................................................................................................................... Linear Regression 1175 Input Curves ......................................................................................................................................................... to Regression 1176 Specify ......................................................................................................................................................... Regression Discrim inators 1179 Create Regression ......................................................................................................................................................... Model 1181 Run Regression ......................................................................................................................................................... Model 1182

5 Neural ................................................................................................................................... Networks 1184 Input Curves ......................................................................................................................................................... to Neural Netw orks Module 1185 Define the ......................................................................................................................................................... Training Settings 1190 Specify ......................................................................................................................................................... the Training Discrim inators 1191 Training......................................................................................................................................................... the Neural Netw ork 1192 Specify ......................................................................................................................................................... the Model Run Settings 1194 Running......................................................................................................................................................... the Neural Netw ork 1195 View Training ......................................................................................................................................................... Results 1197 Neural Netw ......................................................................................................................................................... orks Scenarios 1198

6 Cluster ................................................................................................................................... Analysis for Rock Typing 1201 Input Curves ......................................................................................................................................................... for Cluster Analysis 1202 Specify ......................................................................................................................................................... Cluster Analysis Discrim inators 1205 Specify ......................................................................................................................................................... Cluster Means 1206 Define Cluster ......................................................................................................................................................... Consolidation 1210 Define the ......................................................................................................................................................... Cluster Output 1212 Cluster ......................................................................................................................................................... Analysis Crossplot 1215 Theory of ......................................................................................................................................................... Cluster Analysis 1217

7 Principal ................................................................................................................................... Component Analysis 1223 Input Curves ......................................................................................................................................................... for Principal Com ponent Analysis 1224 Specify ......................................................................................................................................................... Principal Com ponent Analysis Discrim inators 1228 Specify ......................................................................................................................................................... Principal Com ponent Analysis Output 1229 Method......................................................................................................................................................... for Principal Com ponent Analysis 1231

8 Rock ................................................................................................................................... Physics 1232 Shear Sonic ......................................................................................................................................................... QC / Create 1233 Density ......................................................................................................................................................... Estim ation 1237 Fluid Substitution ......................................................................................................................................................... 1239 Equations .................................................................................................................................................. and Methodology 1254 Lam inated ......................................................................................................................................................... Reservoir Fluid Substitution 1262 Operational .................................................................................................................................................. Instructions 1263 Equations .................................................................................................................................................. and Methodology 1277 Elastic Im ......................................................................................................................................................... pedance 1301

9 Pore ................................................................................................................................... Pressure Calculations 1306

Index

X

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Density Estim ......................................................................................................................................................... ation 0 Overburden ......................................................................................................................................................... Gradient Calculation 1309 Pore & Fracture ......................................................................................................................................................... Pressure Gradient Calculations 1313 Running.................................................................................................................................................. the Model 1336 View ing.................................................................................................................................................. Output Results 1344 Fracture.................................................................................................................................................. Gradient Models 1350 Overburden .................................................................................................................................................. Gradient Curves 1358 Pore Pressure .................................................................................................................................................. References 1359

10 Saturation ................................................................................................................................... Height Modelling 1361 Capillary......................................................................................................................................................... Pressure Loader 1362 Capillary.................................................................................................................................................. Pressure Set-Up 1363 Curves Set ........................................................................................................................................... Up 1365 Correction ........................................................................................................................................... Parameters 1370 Data View ........................................................................................................................................... / Edit 1377 Capillary........................................................................................................................................... Pressure Crossplot 1383 Typical QC ........................................................................................................................................... Workflow 1390 Capillary.................................................................................................................................................. Pressure Functions 1392 One Equation ........................................................................................................................................... for all Pc Curves 1395 Separate........................................................................................................................................... Equation for each Pc Curve 1407 Discriminators ........................................................................................................................................... 1420 Saturation .................................................................................................................................................. Versus Height Curves 1422 SW Height ........................................................................................................................................... Input / Output Curves 1423 SW Height ........................................................................................................................................... Hydrocarbon Models 1424 Functions ........................................................................................................................................... Mixing Setup 1432 Log Sw ......................................................................................................................................................... Versus Height Functions 1433 Input Curves .................................................................................................................................................. 1434 Functions .................................................................................................................................................. 1436

11 Eastern ................................................................................................................................... European Resistivity Corrections 1444 EERC Interface ......................................................................................................................................................... 1445 EERC Theory ......................................................................................................................................................... 1453

12 Formation ................................................................................................................................... Test Analysis 1473 Define the ......................................................................................................................................................... Form ation Testing Param eters 1476 Define the .................................................................................................................................................. Project Data 1478 Select the .................................................................................................................................................. Required Wells 1479 Define the .................................................................................................................................................. Well Data 1480 Define the .................................................................................................................................................. Output Curves 1481 Define the .................................................................................................................................................. Filters 1482 Define the .................................................................................................................................................. Default Models 1484 Define the .................................................................................................................................................. Preferences 1485 Create Formation .................................................................................................................................................. Testing Crossplot 1487 Create and ......................................................................................................................................................... Analyse a Form ation Test Project 1489 Load Formation .................................................................................................................................................. Test Data into the Current Well 1490 Define the .................................................................................................................................................. Formation Test Parameters 1493 Save a Formation .................................................................................................................................................. Test Analysis Project 1495 Produce.................................................................................................................................................. the Draw dow n Analysis 1496 Produce.................................................................................................................................................. the Derivative Analysis 1500 Produce.................................................................................................................................................. the Spherical Analysis 1505 Produce.................................................................................................................................................. the Radial Analysis 1507 Form ation ......................................................................................................................................................... Testing Equations and Methodology 1509

Section 12 Working with Multiple Wells

1515

1 Working ................................................................................................................................... with Curves in Multiple Wells 1517 Manage......................................................................................................................................................... Multi-Well Well Header Info. 1517 Manage......................................................................................................................................................... Multi-Well Curve Sets 1521 Manage......................................................................................................................................................... Multi-Well Curve Headers 1525

Index

Contents

Senergy

XI

Multiple......................................................................................................................................................... Well Zones/Top Sets 1529

2 Working ................................................................................................................................... with Parameters in Multiple Wells 1535 Multi-Well ......................................................................................................................................................... Change Param eters 1536 Multi-Well ......................................................................................................................................................... Param eter Distribution 1542

3 Multi-Well ................................................................................................................................... Batch Operation 1553 4 Multi-Well ................................................................................................................................... Curve Statistics 1562 5 Multi-Well ................................................................................................................................... Correlation Viewer 1566 6 Multi-well ................................................................................................................................... Cutoff and Summation 1589 Launch ......................................................................................................................................................... Mutli-Well Cutoff and Sum m ation 1602 Output to ......................................................................................................................................................... a Single File 1603

Section 13 Calculation and Correction

1606

1 Use-Defined ................................................................................................................................... Formula 1608 2 Multi ................................................................................................................................... Line User Formula 1616 3 Basic ................................................................................................................................... Log Functions 1628 Density ......................................................................................................................................................... Porosity 1629 Matrix ......................................................................................................................................................... 1632 Rw Apparent ......................................................................................................................................................... / Sw 1634 Perm eability ......................................................................................................................................................... 1636 Derivatives ......................................................................................................................................................... 1637 Miscellaneous ......................................................................................................................................................... 1638 Conversions ......................................................................................................................................................... 1642 Conversions ......................................................................................................................................................... 2 1643 Horner Plot ......................................................................................................................................................... 1645

4 Temperature ................................................................................................................................... Gradient 1650 5 RW ................................................................................................................................... from SP 1652 6 True ................................................................................................................................... Vertical Depth Calculations 1654 TVD Model ......................................................................................................................................................... 1655 File or Keyboard ......................................................................................................................................................... Input 1658 Load Data ......................................................................................................................................................... from External Files 1659 Keyboard ......................................................................................................................................................... Entry of Deviation Data 1663 View the ......................................................................................................................................................... Calculation Results 1663

7 True ................................................................................................................................... Vertical / Stratigraphic Thickness 1665 8 Curves ................................................................................................................................... from Zones / Parameters 1670 9 Curve ................................................................................................................................... Integration 1673 10 Environmental ................................................................................................................................... Corrections 1676 Schlum berger ......................................................................................................................................................... Corrections 1687 Baker Atlas ......................................................................................................................................................... Corrections 1691 Halliburton ......................................................................................................................................................... Corrections 1694 Anadrill......................................................................................................................................................... Corrections 1698 Baker Hughes ......................................................................................................................................................... Inteq Corrections 1700 Sperry Sun ......................................................................................................................................................... Corrections 1703 Weatherford ......................................................................................................................................................... Corrections 1706 PathFinder ......................................................................................................................................................... 1709

Section 14 Connecting to External Databases

1714

1 Common ................................................................................................................................... Database Connection Tasks 1716 Create New ......................................................................................................................................................... Well and Load ALL External Curves 1716 Create New ......................................................................................................................................................... Well and Load SELECTED External Curves 1717

Index

XII

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

De-Select ......................................................................................................................................................... Curves during Im port 1718 Load Tops ......................................................................................................................................................... from an External Well 1719 De-Select ......................................................................................................................................................... Tops during Im port 1720 Edit Well......................................................................................................................................................... Properties 1721

2 Connection ................................................................................................................................... Protocols 1724 Apache ......................................................................................................................................................... HTTP Server 1724 Secure Shell ......................................................................................................................................................... 1725 The PGLWdblink ......................................................................................................................................................... Package 1726 The OpenWorks ......................................................................................................................................................... Link 1727 The Geolog ......................................................................................................................................................... Link 1731

3 PC ................................................................................................................................... Configuration 1734 PuTTY SSH ......................................................................................................................................................... Client 1734 Geolog Interface ......................................................................................................................................................... Connection 1736 OpenWorks ......................................................................................................................................................... Interface Connection 1739 ODM Interface ......................................................................................................................................................... Connection 1741

4 External ................................................................................................................................... Database Requirements 1742 Read/ Write ......................................................................................................................................................... to PETCOM DB 1743 GEOLOG6 ......................................................................................................................................................... 1749 OpenWorks ......................................................................................................................................................... 1760 ODM ......................................................................................................................................................... 1769 Shell LOGIC ......................................................................................................................................................... Database Loader 1774 Read / Write ......................................................................................................................................................... via OpenSpirit 1778

1787

Section 15 Tools

1 Shading ................................................................................................................................... Types 1788 2 Edit ................................................................................................................................... Global Sets 1791 3 Edit ................................................................................................................................... Zone Colors 1794 4 Edit ................................................................................................................................... Dip Symbols 1796 5 Edit ................................................................................................................................... Palettes 1798 6 Edit ................................................................................................................................... Default Lithology 1802 7 Edit ................................................................................................................................... Curve Aliasing 1806 8 Set ................................................................................................................................... Default Units 1818 9 Message ................................................................................................................................... Board 1821 10 System ................................................................................................................................... Defaults 1822 Edit Edit Edit Edit Edit Edit Edit Edit Edit

Curve ......................................................................................................................................................... System Defaults 1825 Curve ......................................................................................................................................................... Types Defaults 1827 Curve ......................................................................................................................................................... Alias Defaults 1829 Mineral ......................................................................................................................................................... Solver Mineral System Defaults 1831 Mineral ......................................................................................................................................................... Solver Mineral Equations Defaults 1832 Crossplot ......................................................................................................................................................... Overlay Set-up File 1833 Monte ......................................................................................................................................................... Carlo Defaults 1834 Unit......................................................................................................................................................... Conversions Defaults 1835 Neutron ......................................................................................................................................................... Tool Types set-up File 1836

11 'IP ................................................................................................................................... Proprietary' Protection System 1837 Install and ......................................................................................................................................................... Activate Protection 1839 Update Protection ......................................................................................................................................................... Options 1843 Uninstall......................................................................................................................................................... or Transfer Protection 1844 View Protection ......................................................................................................................................................... Options 1848

12 Options ................................................................................................................................... 1852 External......................................................................................................................................................... Database Options 1853 Well Options ......................................................................................................................................................... 1855

Index

Contents

Senergy

XIII

File Loader ......................................................................................................................................................... 1865 Well Folder ......................................................................................................................................................... Structure 1868 LAS 3 Configuration ......................................................................................................................................................... 1870 Miscellaneous ......................................................................................................................................................... Options 1871 Internet......................................................................................................................................................... Connection 1874 Custom......................................................................................................................................................... Toolbars and Menus 1875 Database ......................................................................................................................................................... and Well Security 1878 Curve Aliasing ......................................................................................................................................................... 1888 Corporate ......................................................................................................................................................... Search Folders 1889

1896

Section 16 User Programs

1 User ................................................................................................................................... Program Options 1898 2 New ................................................................................................................................... User Program 1902 3 User ................................................................................................................................... Program Code 1915 4 FORTRAN ................................................................................................................................... Guide 1922 5 Example ................................................................................................................................... User Programs 1925 Exam ple......................................................................................................................................................... User Program 1: Interp-Dem o 1925 Exam ple......................................................................................................................................................... User Program 2: Differentiate 1975 Exam ple......................................................................................................................................................... User Program 3: Norm alize Array 1981 Exam ple......................................................................................................................................................... User Program 4: Manage Well Header Info 1988

Index

1992

Index

Section

1 Getting Help for Interactive Petrophysics v3.6

Getting Help for Interactive Petrophysics v3.6

Senergy

1

2

Getting Help for Interactive Petrophysics v3.6

The following links enable you to find Help and Support when Installing and Working with Interactive Petrophysics. Using the Online Help Getting Program Updates Getting Program Support Frequently Asked Questions Useful Links

About Interactive Petrophysics To identify the current version of Interactive Petrophysics you are working with, Select About from the Help Menu.

Click the System Information Button to display the System Information Dialog.

Section 1.

Getting Help for Interactive Petrophysics v3.6 :

3

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Click Close the Close the About Interactive Petrophysics Dialog.

Related Topics What's New in Interactive Petrophysics Installation and Security Navigating the User Interface

Section 1.

Getting Help for Interactive Petrophysics v3.6 :

Senergy

Getting Help for Interactive Petrophysics v3.6

Senergy

1.1

4

Using the Online Help

The Interactive Petrophysics (IP) CD is shipped with comprehensive HELP documentation on the features, functionality and 'Equations & Methodology' implemented in the software. Documentation is provided both as a PDF file (IP Help Manual V36.pdf) and an 'online' HELP document. The PDF file is located in the IP program directory within the Users Manual subdirectory. The online document is accessed in a number of ways: 'Click' on the 'Help Topics' icon on the main IP 'Help' menu (shown below). Use the ' Contents' tab to browse to the required Help topic or use the 'Index' tab and type in a keyword. There is also a limited search facility in the 'Search' tab. Plus Help topics which the user would like to refer back to frequently can be added to the 'Favourites' tab. Or, alternatively Place the mouse cursor over the Module item in the IP main menu bar that you wish to get help on and 'press' the keyboard 'F1' button. This will automatically launch the help document at the correct chapter. All IP modules have a 'Help' button on the user-interface. These buttons will launch the interactive Help document when 'clicked'.

The 'Core' interpretation modules 'Clay Volume', 'Porosity and Water Saturation' and 'Cut-off and Summation' have their own interactive 'Parameter Help' files which are launched from each modules 'Parameter' display. The content of the 'Parameter Help' screen updates when the user moves the mouse cursor between parameter columns in the interface. The 'Install GCC Compiler' will install the GNU compilers necessary for compiling Fortran code in the 'User Programs' module. There is also a limited help prompt which appears on the Status Bar at the base of the IP main window, illustrated below:

Section 1.1 Getting Help for Interactive Petrophysics v3.6 : Using the Online Help

5

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The 'IP User Forum', is a web forum is managed by Senergy Software Ltd. to provide users with a resource for discussion of topics relating to IP and Petrophysics in general, and to enable users to share ideas, user programs, work flows that may be of use to the ever-expanding IP-user community.

Entry to the website is restricted to registered IP users and can only be accessed from the connection button within the IP program. Registration is quick and very easy. Once registered the user will have to log on with a User name and Password each time the user wants to visit the 'IP User Forum' site. To check the version of IP that a user has installed on their computer use the 'About' button.

Section 1.1 Getting Help for Interactive Petrophysics v3.6 : Using the Online Help

Getting Help for Interactive Petrophysics v3.6

Senergy

Related Topics Using the Online Help Getting Program Updates Getting Program Support Frequently Asked Questions Useful Links

Section 1.1 Getting Help for Interactive Petrophysics v3.6 : Using the Online Help

6

7

1.2

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Getting Program Updates

There are two methods for downloading Interactive Petrophysics Program Updates, either by downloading directly from the Senergy Software Ltd website, or by using the Check for Updates feature provided with Interactive Petrophysics.

Download an Update from the Senergy Website Interactive Petrophysics program updates can be downloaded from the Senergy Software Ltd website: http://www.senergyworld.com/iptm/ipdownloads Complete the required Registration Information to access the Interactive Petrophysics Download website and download the latest Program Update.

Use the Automatically Check for Updates Feature 1. From Windows Explorer, locate GetIPUpdate.exe in the Interactive Petrophysics Program folder (C:\Program Files\IntPetro36\GetIPUpdate.exe). Note: Interactive Petrophysics compares the current version number to the Program Update version number to determine whether a patch is available for download. The Get Updates Button will only be activated if a Program Update with a higher version number than the currently installed version is available.

Section 1.2 Getting Help for Interactive Petrophysics v3.6 : Getting Program Updates

Senergy

Getting Help for Interactive Petrophysics v3.6

8

2. Click Get Updates to download the latest Program Update (IP_Update.exe). 3. If required Click the Update History Link to View or Save the Update History File. Note: When a new Program Update is available an Update History PDF file will accompany the Update on the Senergy Software Ltd website. This document contains information on all the bug fixes and enhancements implemented in the accompanying Program Update. 4. From Windows Explorer, Double-Click IP_Update.exe to install the Program Update. Note: IP_Update.exe is a self-extracting zip file which runs automatically when opened. Note: Interactive Petrophysics must be CLOSED prior to running IP_Update.exe. 5. Click the Automatically Check for Updates Check Box for Interactive Petrophysics to check the Internet for updates every time Interactive Petrophysics is opened. Note: If a Program Update is available, the Information Dialog will be displayed:

Click Yes to download the latest Program Update Click No to continue to work with Interactive Petrophysics Click Cancel to ensure Interactive Petrophysics continues to Automatically Check for Updates.

Related Topics Using the Online Help Getting Program Updates Getting Program Support Frequently Asked Questions Useful Links

Section 1.2 Getting Help for Interactive Petrophysics v3.6 : Getting Program Updates

9

1.3

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Frequently Asked Questions

........................... add FAQ's

Related Topics Using the Online Help Getting Program Updates Getting Program Support Frequently Asked Questions Useful Links

Section 1.3 Getting Help for Interactive Petrophysics v3.6 : Frequently Asked Questions

Senergy

Section

2 Database Management

11

2

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Database Management

The Interactive Petrophysics (IP) 'Database' is a way of organizing multiple wells as an interpretation 'project'. The database consists of a number of binary data files (.DAT Files) , one per well, stored together in a user-selected PC directory / folder. When you open IP, the directory name of the current active database is displayed in the bottom left hand corner of the main IP window. Up to 9,999 wells can be saved into an IP database. Up to 2000 wells can be 'active' in memory at any one time. Each well can contain up to 1500 curves. Each well can contain up to 50 Curve Sets Each Curve Set can contain up to 3 million Depths. Up to 50 wells can be displayed simultaneously in a multi-well correlation plot. Each database well consists of the log curve data, general well information and the interpretation 'Parameter Sets' associated with the well. IP works with well data loaded into memory. Data can be loaded directly from an external database using the OpenWorks, GEOLOG, ODM, OpenSpirit or PETCOM Database links. Alternatively, data can be loaded through one of the 'Input' modules. When wells are loaded into memory and worked on, the 'external' database disk files are not immediately updated, unless the 'Autosave' function is turned 'on'. Therefore, one can load a well from the database, perform computations and edits to curve data in the well and then simply discard the changes, without affecting the original well in the database. Multiple wells can be loaded into memory (with the 'multi-well' program option) with a maximum of 2000 wells resident in memory at one time (although the database can store 9,999 wells, only 2000 can be loaded into memory and worked on concurrently). This assumes that enough physical memory is available on the PC. If, when many wells are loaded, the program appears to be slow, it is probably due to a lack of computer RAM. It is best to keep the number of loaded, inmemory wells to the ones necessary for the current interpretation session. The program has a mechanism to 'lock' any well that a user has opened. If another user tries to open the same well, a Confirm dialog will prompt the user stating that the Well is already open and asking if they wish to Open as a New Well. The second user then has the option to open the well as a new well (i.e. copy the well into memory as a new well). If this is done then a 'Save to the Database' operation will create a new well entry, in addition to the original well.

Section 2.

Database Management :

Database Management

Senergy

12

If the program crashes for some reason, the wells that were in memory will stay 'locked' if the user re-starts IP straight away. The user can either: wait approximately 4-5 minutes and the wells will unlock themselves, or delete the lock file IPDBLock, which can be found in the database root directory. NOTE: this file should never be deleted if there is any chance of more than one user currently using the database.

IP Users and Database Files In each IP database directory, there will be a subdirectory named after each user that accesses the database. This subdirectory contains two files: IntPetro.ini - this is the general configuration file. It keeps a record of the last item that was open in IP, including the last database, last well used, the dimensions of open log plots and Workarea information. For example, if the user was working on Well4 with a triple-combo plot open and then closed IP without first closing the plot then the next time IP was opened a Well4 triple-combo plot would be displayed. This file can be deleted but the next time IP is opened the user will be prompted to open a database. NOTE: deleting this file does not delete the items that were displayed but just the record of how they were displayed. IPDBProj.dat - stores the parameter Sets when performing multi-well work. This file can be deleted but the multi-well parameter Sets would be lost. NOTE: do NOT delete this file if there is a chance that more than one user is currently accessing the database. NOTE: there is another IPDBProj.dat file which can be found in the project directory. This is used only if the Test IP database is accessed.

Beginning in IP3.4 there are now two additional file types within the IP project directory which support the 'History' module. These are: IPDBWellxxxx_Hist.ald - this contains the actual details for the history event such as Clay Volume reports, parameters, JPG of environmental correction screens. This file is accessed when the user chooses to perform a difference comparison between parameters. IPDBWellxxxx_Hist.ale - contains a data set of history events that includes an entry for

Section 2.

Database Management :

13

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

each event, date, time, user, module and type. Within the IP project directory the following files are located: IPDBWellList - this file can be thought of as a table of contents for IP. This file should be deleted if a well has been removed from or added directly (by copying the IPDBWellxxxx. dat file from another database in Explorer) into the database. Once the database is reopened this file will be recreated with an updated list of available wells. NOTE: do NOT delete this file if there is a chance that more than one user is currently accessing the database. ipfolder.ico - this is the IP icon that appears on the database folder when a user generates a new IP database. IPDBLock - if IP closes incorrectly there is a possibility that IP will "lock" the well. The wells that were in memory will stay locked if the user re-opens IP straight away after it crashes. If the user waits 4-5 minutes the wells will "un-lock". However, a quicker way of getting the wells to un-lock is to delete the IPDBLock file. NOTE: do NOT delete this file if there is a chance that more than one user is currently accessing the database. Desktop.ini - is the desktop icon settings file.

Array Curve Data 'Conventional' log curves have one curve value per depth increment (the well 'Step') in an IP well. Array curve data can have multiple sample values per depth increment. The array can be one or two dimensional. A 'Z' dimension, where the depth sampling for the curve is greater than the normal depth sample, and a 'X' dimension, where multiple samples are stored for each depth level. Examples of array data are high resolution image data where the 'X' dimension will represent the values of the image around the borehole and the 'Z' dimension will be the high resolution depth sampling (~0.1 inch, 72 samples per 0.5 foot). Arrays can be of any size. Array data curves can be used as input to all IP modules. However, if the module was not designed to use array data then the value used in the module for each depth level will be the arithmetic average value of all the array samples at that depth level. Array data can use enormous amounts of memory. Therefore if the user intends to work with large intervals (> 100m) of image data (e.g. FMI) it will be necessary to have a relatively large amount of CPU RAM (+1 Gb). The program should work with smaller amounts of memory but it could be quite slow.

Curve Sets 'Curve Sets' are a way of managing the curves associated with an IP well or IP database. Curve

Section 2.

Database Management :

Database Management

Senergy

14

Sets have a 'Short' and 'Full' name. The 'Short Set Name', which has a maximum number of eight characters, is always prefixed to the front of any curve name, with a colon (:) separating the Set and curve name (e.g. R1:Gr would be the Gr curve in the R1 set). The 'Full Set Name' is a descriptor used by the user to document the purpose of the Set. A maximum of 50 Curve Sets can be created in a single IP well. All wells have a 'Default Set' which does not have a 'Short Set name'. Therefore a curve which is listed using its name only, for example - a curve name of Gr, would belong to the 'Default' Set. Curve names must be unique in each Set, but the same curve name can exist in several different Sets. Wells created in older IP versions, prior to version 3.2, will have all their curves saved in the ' Default Set'. Curves can be moved between Sets using the 'Manage Curve Headers' module or the ' Manage Curve Sets' module. Within the 'Manage Curve Sets' module curve Sets can be created and re-named plus a host of other functions.

Related Topics Starting Interactive Petrophysics New Database Open Database Create a Database Shortcut Set Default File Location Explore Database Folder Save the Current Well Save All Wells to Database Auto Save Printer Setup

Section 2.

Database Management :

15

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Section 2.

Database Management :

Senergy

Database Management

Senergy

2.1

16

Starting Interactive Petrophysics

When IP is started the Open Database Dialog is displayed providing the ability to select which database is to be loaded into IP.

Check Allow me to choose which Wells to load using Well List to display the Select Wells to Load Dialog prior to Opening the Database. The Required Wells can then be loaded as the database is Opened.

Section 2.1 Database Management : Starting Interactive Petrophysics

17

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Check Allow me to choose which Wells to load using Well Map to display the Well Map Display Dialog prior to Opening the Database. The Required Wells can then be loaded as the database is Opened.

If IP is not Shut Down correctly, the following dialog will be displayed the next time IP is opened, enabling IP to be started either normally or in Safe Mode.

'Start IP Normally' - this will attempt to start IP with all settings the same as they were when IP was closed down. If this option does not open IP then select the 'Start IP in Safe Mode'. 'Start IP in Safe Mode' - if this option is chosen then the IPDBList.ini file is deleted. This file contains a list of wells in the selected database. The user will then be asked to re-select the database wells once IP opens. This will create a new IPDBList.ini for the selected

Section 2.1 Database Management : Starting Interactive Petrophysics

Database Management

Senergy

18

database.

Advanced Options From the IP Startup Dialog Click Advanced Options to Display the Advanced Startup Options Dialog.

'Refresh user installation files?' - this option will overwrite the users installation files in their C:\Documents and Settings\username\Local Settings\Application Data\IntPetro35 folder with default files. NOTE: if the user has made changes to the files within this folder, notably the CPARMDEF.PAR or Default Plots folder, then rename the IntPetro35 folder before 'checking' the 'Refresh user installation files' and clicking the 'Start IP' button. This will enable the user to copy back the users files into the 'new' IntPetro35 folder. 'Restore IP configuration to defaults?' - this will restore IP back to its CD image state.

Related Topics Starting Interactive Petrophysics New Database Open Database Create a Database Shortcut Set Default File Location Explore Database Folder Save the Current Well

Section 2.1 Database Management : Starting Interactive Petrophysics

19

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Save All Wells to Database Auto Save Printer Setup

Section 2.1 Database Management : Starting Interactive Petrophysics

Senergy

Database Management

Senergy

2.2

20

Create a New Database

The 'New Database' button allows the user to manually type in, or browse to, a directory / folder location which will be used by IP as the project directory for a new database.

A new database can also be created from the Open Database Dialog. Start IP normally to display the Open Database Dialog.

Section 2.2 Database Management : Create a New Database

21

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Click the Create Button to display the New Database Dialog.

Browse for the required Database Location Folder and Click OK to Create the New Database and Open in Interactive Petrophysics.

Section 2.2 Database Management : Create a New Database

Senergy

Database Management

Senergy

Related Topics Starting Interactive Petrophysics New Database Open Database Create a Database Shortcut Set Default File Location Explore Database Folder Save the Current Well Save All Wells to Database Auto Save Printer Setup

Section 2.2 Database Management : Create a New Database

22

23

2.3

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Open an Existing Database

The 'Open Database' menu item allows the user to select the directory under which the database data files are stored. The user can EITHER select one of the 'Recent Databases' from the 'Database' list. In this case the program remembers the previous well and plots that were loaded when that database was last accessed and automatically reloads them. The last 10 'Recent Databases' will be stored and displayed in the window. The user has the option to delete an entry by selecting the line and pressing the Delete key on the keyboard. This can be useful if the list contains entries which are no longer active, if, for example a database folder has been moved / renamed.

OR, If the required database is not in the 'Recent Databases' list then the 'Browse for IP Database' option should be 'checked' and the database location entered. The 'Browse' button allows the user to search the computer disk or any Networked drives for the appropriate directory. The default Read / Write file location can optionally be changed to conform to the new database location. It is good practice to have the 'Default File Location' set to the 'Database Location', since this will mean that all files belonging to a project will be grouped together under one directory.

Section 2.3 Database Management : Open an Existing Database

Database Management

Senergy

24

If the user changes the 'Database Location', then the current database will be closed and the new database will be opened. In this case, the user will be asked whether the wells currently loaded into memory should be saved to the old database.

If the response is 'Yes' then the current wells will be saved to the old database. NOTE: Before the new database is opened, all wells loaded in memory will be removed from memory, therefore it is important to save the well data if it has changed. The 'Load Wells from Database' window will now be displayed to allow the user to select the wells to load into memory. Note: Once a Database is Opened, the Current Selected Well will be highlighted in the Database Browser.

Section 2.3 Database Management : Open an Existing Database

25

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Related Topics Starting Interactive Petrophysics New Database Open Database Create a Database Shortcut Set Default File Location Explore Database Folder Save the Current Well Save All Wells to Database Auto Save Printer Setup

Section 2.3 Database Management : Open an Existing Database

Senergy

Database Management

Senergy

2.4

Create a Database Shortcut

The Create a Database Shortcut feature, creates a Shortcut to the currently selected IP Database and places it upon the Windows Desktop. When Clicked the Shortcut will open Interactive Petrophysics with the currently selected database active. To Create a Desktop Shortcut: With the required IP Database Open, From the File Menu, Select Create a Desktop Shortcut. The Information Dialog will be displayed advising that the Database shortcut has been created to the Desktop.

If the Database Shortcut already exists, the following Confirm Dialog will be displayed.

Related Topics Starting Interactive Petrophysics New Database Open Database Create a Database Shortcut Set Default File Location Explore Database Folder Save the Current Well Save All Wells to Database Auto Save Printer Setup

Section 2.4 Database Management : Create a Database Shortcut

26

27

2.5

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Set Default File Location

The 'Set Default File Location' option is used by the program to define the 'input' and 'output' file locations.

The 'output' directory is especially important to set, since the output interpretation Parameter Sets are automatically written here, without the user being prompted to confirm the location, at the time they are created. The other directories are useful to set, but the user has full control over where the input files are loaded from and can override the default directory. 'Input Directory' : This is where the program will look to find input data files and input Parameter Sets. 'Output Directory' : This is where the program will save output data files and Parameter Sets. Normally, the input and output directories are the same. 'Use separate Input / Output directory for each well' : If this box is 'checked' then a new subdirectory called …\Well**** will be created for each well under the 'Output Directory' name, where **** is the database well number. This allows the user to group together, by well, all the text and format files that IP can output. When changing databases, the program looks to see if separate output directories are used and then sets this option automatically. However, it is good practice to 'check' this option when creating a new database, to make sure that it is set the way you want. NOTE: The Well subdirectory is created at the same time as a well is created in IP. In the Well**** folder are files specific to the well such as interpretation parameter Sets (.set) and well specific log plots (.plt), crossplots (.xpt),formulas (.frm), depthshifts (.sfo and .sft), text files (.txt),

Section 2.5 Database Management : Set Default File Location

Database Management

Senergy

28

and colour tables (.col). The rest of the information is saved in the binary IPDBWellxxxx.dat file. The IPDBWellxxxx.dat files should not be deleted as all IP related information for that well will be lost. Also within the Well subdirectory are further sub-directories. These are defined in 'Well Folder Structure'. 'Formula Directory' : This is the directory where the 'User formula' module saves equations, which can be recalled & re-applied later. The 'Browse' buttons allow you to search the disk structure to find the directory you want. The 'Same Directory for all' 'check' box sets the input, output and formula directories to the directory path defined in the 'Input Directory' field. 'Apply' applies the changes to the current session.

Related Topics Starting Interactive Petrophysics New Database Open Database Create a Database Shortcut Set Default File Location Explore Database Folder Save the Current Well Save All Wells to Database Auto Save Printer Setup

Section 2.5 Database Management : Set Default File Location

29

2.6

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Explore Database Folder

The 'Explore Database Folder' option provides the user with a shortcut to browse to the the current IP project directory/folder, without having to navigate the local hard drive or PC network.

Related Topics Starting Interactive Petrophysics New Database Open Database Create a Database Shortcut Set Default File Location Explore Database Folder Save the Current Well Save All Wells to Database Auto Save Printer Setup

Section 2.6 Database Management : Explore Database Folder

Database Management

Senergy

2.7

30

Save the Current Well

The 'Save Current Well As...' module can be accessed from the 'File' and 'Well' menu items.

The user has a number of options for storing the current in-memory well to either the currently active IP database or to another IP database folder. 3 radio buttons control how IP saves a single well. These are: 'Update selected well in the database' 'Create a new well in current database' 'Create a new well in another database'

The options are described fully below. 'Update selected well in database'. If the displayed well has already been saved to the current IP database, selecting this option and clicking the 'OK' button, saves any changes

Section 2.7 Database Management : Save the Current Well

31

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

you have made to the well to the IP database binary file. This option will not be available for a well that has been newly-created in the current IP session. 'Create a new well in current database'. This option can be used; either to save the currently-displayed well to the current IP database, but under a different well number. This is a method for creating a duplicate of an existing well in the database, or to create a completely new IP well, with a new 'binary' file, IPDBWellxxxx.dat, file in the current database. NOTE: the user is able to specify the database number that they wish to store a new, or duplicate, well to. The options are: 1. Do not fill in a Database Well Number - By leaving the 'Database Well number' text box empty, the program will automatically assign the next available database number to the well to be saved. This means that, for example, in a multi-well database where database well number 3 is vacant, IP will assign the next well to database number 3. If wells have been saved to consecutive database numbers, then the next well saved to the database will be assigned the next available number in the numbering sequence. 2. Fill in a Database Well Number - Typing a 'Database Well number' into the text entry box allows you to dictate where to save your in-memory well to. If you type in a Database Well number that already exists, you will be warned of the fact and asked to select a different Database Well number.

'Create a new well in another database'. Selecting this option allows you to save the currently-displayed well to a different database thus enabling the user to merge IP databases. This does not change or delete the well in the current database. The 'Database Name' text entry box and 'Select' button allow you to browse to another IP database folder where you would like to save the new well. NOTE: the Well Folder is not copied across only the IPDBWellxxxx.dat. The Well Folders containing any plot, crossplot formats etc. would

Section 2.7 Database Management : Save the Current Well

Database Management

Senergy

32

have to be manually copied across using Windows Explorer, making sure the Well number on the folder matched the newly created Database Well number. To get IP to recognise the copied Well Folders delete the username folder (containing IntPetro.ini and IPBDProj.dat files) in the new project and restart IP. Another way of merging two IP databases together is to make a copy of one database. Rename all the wells in that database so that the names of the wells in the copied database won't overwrite the wells in the other database. Once the wells have been renamed then copy these into the other database. Delete the IPDBWellList file found in the merged database folder. Delete the IntPetro.ini and IPDBProj.dat files found in the users folder within the merged IP database. When the merged database is loaded into IP the user will have to reload all the wells, this will then recreate the IPDBWellList for the merged database.

Section 2.7 Database Management : Save the Current Well

33

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Related Topics Starting Interactive Petrophysics

Section 2.7 Database Management : Save the Current Well

Senergy

Database Management

Senergy

New Database Open Database Create a Database Shortcut Set Default File Location Explore Database Folder Save the Current Well Save All Wells to Database Auto Save Printer Setup

Section 2.7 Database Management : Save the Current Well

34

35

2.8

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Save All Wells to Database

Selecting the 'Save All Wells to Database' option will update the database binary files (IPDBWellXXXX.dat) for the wells that are currently loaded into your PC RAM. For a newlycreated well, a new 'IPDBWellXXXX.dat' file will be created in the IP database folder. NOTE: if there is a gap in the IPDBWellXXXX numbering, then a newly-created well will, by default, be saved into the first vacant position in the database folder. If multiple new wells are created and data loaded into them; on 'Save All Wells to Database', IP prompts the user to create a new database entry for each new well: Selecting 'Yes to All' will save all new wells to the database as IPDBWellXXXX.dat files, without having to confirm the 'save' operation for each individual well. NOTE: If your IP database wells have consecutive binary file names, for example: IPDBWell0001.dat IPDBWell0002.dat IPDBWell0003.dat IPDBWell0004.dat IPDBWell0005.dat Then any new well will be saved to the next highest data file number i.e. IPDBWell0006.dat If, however, you have deleted a well from your database, removing the IPDBWell000X.dat file in the process, then a newly-created well will be saved into the first vacant IPBDWell000X.dat position. For example, if IPDBWell0002.dat has been deleted, as illustrated below, then the next new well saved to the database will, by default, be saved to this database binary file. IPDBWell0001.dat

IPDBWell0001.dat IPDBWell0002.dat (new well inserted into first vacant database

position) IPDBWell0003.dat

IPDBWell0003.dat

IPDBWell0004.dat

IPDBWell0004.dat

IPDBWell0005.dat

IPDBWell0005.dat

In IP Version 3.3 and later versions, the user is given the opportunity to choose the database number for multiple newly-created wells. On selecting the 'Save all Wells to Database' option a dialog will launch similar to that shown below:

Section 2.8 Database Management : Save All Wells to Database

Database Management

Senergy

You can choose a database number for each new well, or let IP assign database numbers automatically. If the user has opened an older database within IP v3.6 and attempts to save the wells, the following warning message appears:

This gives the user a chance not to save the wells in version 3.6 and thus not make them incompatible with the version of IP from which they originated.

Related Topics Starting Interactive Petrophysics New Database Open Database Create a Database Shortcut Set Default File Location Explore Database Folder Save the Current Well Save All Wells to Database Auto Save Printer Setup

Section 2.8 Database Management : Save All Wells to Database

36

37

2.9

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Auto Save Options

The 'Auto Save' window is used to set up the options for the saving of all well data at user-defined time intervals. This is equivalent to manually clicking the 'Save All Wells to Database' menu item at the same time intervals. The function is accessed under the 'File' menu item.

To set up the Automatic Backup facility the user should 'check' the 'Auto Save All Data every' check box and type in a value into the 'Minutes' text entry box to set the time interval for auto-saves. Clicking the 'OK' button applies the changes to the current session, but does not save the settings for subsequent sessions. Check the 'Ask Before Each Save' Box to prompt the user each time IP attempts to automatically save all the Well Data. The following Dialog will be displayed each time IP attempts to automatically save the Well Data.

Click 'Yes' to Automatically Save All the Well Data.

Related Topics Starting Interactive Petrophysics New Database Open Database Create a Database Shortcut Set Default File Location Explore Database Folder Save the Current Well

Section 2.9 Database Management : Auto Save Options

Database Management

Senergy

Save All Wells to Database Auto Save Printer Setup

Section 2.9 Database Management : Auto Save Options

38

39

2.10

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Printer Setup

The 'Printer Setup' menu item will bring up the standard WINDOWS printer selection dialog where the default printer for IP can be selected for this session.

This printer will be used for all printer output, except the Log Plot displays, in the case of Log Plots a different output device can be selected by the user from the hardcopy dialog screen.

Related Topics Starting Interactive Petrophysics New Database Open Database Create a Database Shortcut Set Default File Location Explore Database Folder Save the Current Well Save All Wells to Database Auto Save Printer Setup

Section 2.10 Database Management : Printer Setup

Section

3 Well Management

41

3

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Well Management

The 'Well Management' options, highlighted in blue in the following screen capture, allow the user to load, create, display and close wells in IP and to edit well name and well location data. IP will allow the user to have up to 2000 wells loaded into memory at any one time, depending on the amount of RAM your PC has. A PC with 512Mb of RAM will be sufficient to load and work on wells containing conventional curve data. A minimum of 2Gb of RAM will be required if you are working with acoustic/electric image data.

Related Topics Create New Well Load Wells from Database Select Well to Display Well - Save Current Well As... Create / Edit Well List Close Well Delete Well Reset Current Well Manage Well Header Info. Date Time Format Setup

Section 3.

Well Management :

Well Management

Senergy

3.1

42

Date Time Wells

The New Date Time Well Feature in Interactive Petrophysics v3.6 enables the user to load and interpret well log data that has been recorded by Date and Time. Data will normally come from LWD or MWD surveys. The Date Time fields in a survey data file, can take many forms. Full customization of the Date and Time field is available prior to loading the well log data. By viewing the data file before loading using a text editing application, for example, Notepad, you can then establish the Date Time format required for loading the well log data.

Related Topics Create a New Well using the Date Time Format Define the Well Default Date Time Format Import a Well Log Data file into a Date Time Well Import an ASCII data file into a Date Time Well Import a LAS/LBS Datas file into a Date Time Well Create a Date Time Log Plot Output Time Curves to a Depth Curve

3.1.1

Create a New Well using the Date Time Reference

The Create New Well feature creates a new, empty well, within the selected Interactive Petrophysics Database and enables the user to specify whether the Well Data is to be stored using either a Depth, Time or Date Time reference. A Time well records the data with reference to seconds or milliseconds. A Date Time well records the data with reference to the Year, Month, Day, Hour, Minute and second. To Create a New Well using a Date Time Reference: 1. From the Wells Menu, Select Create New Well to display the Create New Well Dialog. 2. Type the Well Name into the Well Name Field. Note: The Well Comment can be appended to the Well Name in the Well Name text box, by placing typing a space colon and then a space between the Well Name and the Well Comment.

Section 3.1 Well Management : Date Time Wells

43

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

For example '14/19-23 : Preliminary' will create a well name of '14/19-23' with a well comment of 'Preliminary'.

3. Select the Units Drop Down Menu to select the Date Time Unit.

This will change the Top Depth/Time and the Bottom Depth/Time text boxes to a Date Time format.

If the 'Top', 'Bottom', 'Step' and 'Units' boxes are left 'blank' then the well Depth/Time interval will be taken from the first data file (ASCII, LAS) loaded into the well. This gives the user the ability to allow the program to adapt the intervals in the well to the input file intervals.

Section 3.1 Well Management : Date Time Wells

Well Management

Senergy

44

If no wells are loaded at start-up or the database location is changed, a blank well is automatically created. Therefore, the 'Create New Well' menu function does not need to be run to load the first well into memory. Creating a new well does not automatically create a new well in the database (database disk file). This is only done when the well is saved to the database. The new well is initially created only in memory. 4. From the Wells Menu, Choose Select Well to display the Select Well Dialog.

5. Select the required Well and Click OK to display the newly created well in the Database Browser

Note: If the Database does not display in the Database Browser, Right Click the Browser and Select Show/Hide, then Show Active Wells Only to display the Current Well in the Database Browser.

Section 3.1 Well Management : Date Time Wells

45

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

6. From the File Menu, Select Save Current Well As ... to display the Save Well dialog and click OK to Save the Well to the Interactive Petrophysics v3.6 Database. 7. Select Import a Well Log Data file into a Date Time Well to load the Well Log Data into the new Well.

Related Topics Define the Well Default Date Time Format Import a Well Log Data file into a Date Time Well Import an ASCII data file into a Date Time Well Import a LAS Data file into a Date Time Well Create a Date Time Log Plot Output Time Curves to a Depth Well

3.1.2

Define the Date Time Format for the Selected Well

The Date Time format window allows the setting of the format for display of the Date Time field in all the IP modules including the Log Plot display. The Date Time Format dialog contains the controls to uniquely define each aspect of the Date and Time format and is divided into three sections, Date, Time and Date Time Separator. The Date section enables you to display the Day, Month and Year individually or together and has the ability to modify the Date format, the language the date will be displayed in and the separator that appears between the Day, Month and the Year. If a different language is selected, this will be

Section 3.1 Well Management : Date Time Wells

Well Management

Senergy

46

displayed when either the Short Name or the Full Name in the Month format drop down list is selected. The Time section enables you to specify the format of the time field with the required data file, providing options to display minutes, seconds and milli-seconds, and also the separator that appears between them. The Time Date Display section enables you to specify whether or not the time appears before the date and also a separator that appears between the time and the date. The default format of the Date and Time for each Well can be defined by using the Date Time Format Setup option listed in the Wells Menu. To specify the default Date and Time format for the selected well: 1. From the Database Browser, Select the Required Well.

2. From the Wells Menu, Select Date Time Format Setup to display the Date Time Format Dialog.

Section 3.1 Well Management : Date Time Wells

47

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The Output Format display, shown at the bottom on the window, shows what will be displayed in the log plot. The Editable Format display is what is displayed in all modules where the user can edit the Date Time to select the interval over which to run the module. Note: If the Date Time reference curve has not be setup when creating the well, the following information dialog will be displayed.

Related Topics Create a New Well using the Date Time Format Import a Well Log Data file into a Date Time Well Import an ASCII data file into a Date Time Well Import a LAS Data file into a Date Time Well Create a Date Time Log Plot Output Time Curves to a Depth Curve

Section 3.1 Well Management : Date Time Wells

Well Management

Senergy

3.1.3

48

Import Well Log Data to a Date Time Well

Data can be loaded into Date Time wells using either the ASCII or the LAS file loaders. The LIS and DLIS loaders will currently not work (IP3.6). Time files come with a multitude of different formats for the Date Time entry fields. Always ensure the required data file is opened in a text editing application, for example Microsoft Notepad prior to loading data into a Date Time well, so that comparisons can be made between the Text File Date Format and the Data Loader Date Format to ensure that the data is accurately loaded. Import an ASCII data file into a Date Time Well: The ASCII Data Loader enables ASCII format delimited data to be imported into an IP well. ASCII Data files that separate the data columns by using either a space, tab or comma to delimit the data columns can easily be imported along with any custom defined column delimiter. Import a LAS Data file into a Date Time Well: The LAS Data Loader enables Log ASCII Standard (LAS) and Log Binary Standard (LBS) data files to be loaded into an IP Well. IP will load either 'wrapped' or 'unwrapped' data from LAS files, versions 1.2 and 2.0 as well as LBS files. LBS files are AS files with the data encoded in Binary format.

Related Topics Create a New Well using the Date Time Format Define the Well Default Date Time Format Import an ASCII data file into a Date Time Well Import a LAS Data file into a Date Time Well Create a Date Time Log Plot Output Time Curves to a Depth Well

3.1.3.1

Import ASCII Data to a Date Time Well

The ASCII Data Loader enables ASCII format delimited data to be imported into an IP well. ASCII Data files that separate the data columns by using either a space, tab or comma to delimit the data columns can easily be imported along with any custom defined column delimiter. IP makes the assumption that decimal numbers use a decimal point as the delimiter. If the decimal point is not used in the decimal numbers in the ASCII file to be imported, the data will not be imported correctly.

Section 3.1 Well Management : Date Time Wells

49

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Date Time file format The Date Time stamp in the ASCII file can be in several formats : Date and Time in separate columns. The order can be Date,Time or Time,Date Date and Time in the same column. The order can be Date,Time or Time,Date Only Time column. Date is assumed from the start Date Time entry at the top of the form Regardless of the format found it is important that the Date Time format is setup to mimic the format in the file. See section 7 below.

To Import an ASCII data file using the ASCII Data Loader: 1. Open or create a New Date Time Well 2. From the Import/Export Menu, Select Load Data, ASCII Load to display the Load ASCII File Dialog.

Section 3.1 Well Management : Date Time Wells

Well Management

Senergy

50

3. Browse to Select the required ASCII data file, and click OK to display the ASCII Load Window. Note: Interactive Petrophysics makes an initial analysis of the data contained in the ASCII file and displays the data in the lower part of the ASCII Load window.

4. From the 'New Units' Drop Down Menu, Select Date Time to display the Start Time and Stop Time Fields. Select the 'New Well Step' (if not setup when creating the new well), this should be the same step as the input file.

Note: The Reference Depth Curve field will change to DateTime format and a Format Date button will display in the Data Formatting section. 5. Specify the 'Start Time' and 'Stop Time' as recorded in the ASCII data file.

6. Click the Format Date Button to display the Date Time Format Dialog. 7. Modify the Date Time Format to match the Date and Time format in the ASCII data file.

Section 3.1 Well Management : Date Time Wells

51

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

8. Click OK to display the Confirm dialog asking to Re-read input file with new date time format, click Yes to re-read the ASCII data file with the new Date and Time format and return to the ASCII Data Loader. 9. Specify the Data Formatting as contained in the ASCII data file.

10.Specify the Number of Data Columns contained in the ASCII data file and click Apply to set the Number of input columns in the ASCII Data Loader.

11.Specify the line at which the data starts in the ASCII data file and click Apply to set the Data starts at line field in the ASCII Data Loader.

12.Specify the line number to read the Curve Names from in the ASCII data file and click OK to set the Read curve names from line field in the ASCII Data Loader. If not line contains the proper curve names then these will have to be hand entered.

Note: The Curve Names will populate into the Data Parameters table.

Section 3.1 Well Management : Date Time Wells

Well Management

Senergy

52

The curve names for the Date and Time columns are important. The time column must be labeled 'Time' and the date column 'Date'. If the Date Time is in one column the the column must be labeled 'DateTime'. If the column headers are not labeled properly the following error message will appear.

13.Specify the line number to read the Curve Units from in the ASCII data file and click OK to set the Read curve units from line field in the ASCII Data Loader. If not line contains the proper units names then these will have to be hand entered.

Note: The Curve Units will be populated into the Data Parameters Table.

14.Click the Load button to Load the ASCII data file into the selected Interactive Petrophysics v3.6 Well. Note: A message will be displayed in the Status Bar confirming the LAS file has been successfully loaded.

15.The Curves will now be displayed in the selected well in the Database Browser. 16.Close the ASCII Load Window. 17. Create a Date Time Log Plot in the Interactive Petrophysics v3.6 Well. More information on the ASCII loader can be found in the normal ASCII load help.

Related Topics Create a New Well using the Date Time Format Define the Well Default Date Time Format Import a Well Log Data file into a Date Time Well Import a LAS Data file into a Date Time Well Create a Date Time Log Plot

Section 3.1 Well Management : Date Time Wells

53 3.1.3.2

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Import LAS Data to a Date Time Well

The LAS Data Loader enables Log ASCII Standard (LAS) and Log Binary Standard (LBS) data files to be loaded into an IP Well. IP will load either 'wrapped' or 'unwrapped' data from LAS files, versions 1.2 and 2.0 as well as LBS files. LBS files are AS files with the data encoded in Binary format. Mulitple embedded Datasets with different step sizes from either individual wells or from multiple wells within the same LAS file can be loaded.

Date Time file format The Date Time stamp in the LAS file can be in several formats, it is necessary to open up the file to view the format : Date and Time in separate columns. The order can be Date,Time or Time,Date Date and Time in the same column. The order can be Date,Time or Time,Date

Section 3.1 Well Management : Date Time Wells

Well Management

Senergy

54

Only Time column. Date is assumed from the start DateTime entry at the top of the form Regardless of the format found it is important that the Date Time format is setup to mimic the format in the file. See section 4 below.

To Import a LAS/LBS Data File using the LAS/LBS Data Loader 1. From the Input / Output menu, Select Load Data, LAS/LBS Load to display the Open Dialog.

2. Browse to Select the required LAS data file, and click OK to display the LAS/LBS Load Window. IP will populate the Data Parameters Table with the Data Parameters from the selected LAS file.

Note: The selected LAS file name will be displayed in the Title Bar of the LAS/LBS Load Window. Note: The IP Well Units and the Reference Curve will display Date Time, the Interval to Load will be displayed as a Time and Date format and a Format Date button will be displayed in the bottom left corner of the LAS/LBS Load window.

Section 3.1 Well Management : Date Time Wells

55

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

3. In the Data Parameters Table, Set the IP Name for the Time and Date fields. The curve names for the Date and Time columns are important. The time row must be labeled 'Time' and the date row 'Date'. If the DateTime is in one field the the row must be labeled 'DateTime'. If the row headers are not labeled properly the below error message will appear.

4. Click the 'View File' button to open the LAS file and view the Date Time format. Click the 'Format Date' Button to display the Date Time Format Dialog, then set the Date and Time format to the same format used in the LAS file.

5. Click Close to return to the LAS Load Window. 6. Type the Start Time and the Stop Time displayed in the LAS file into the Interval to Load section of the LAS Load Window.

7. Click Load to Load the LAS file data into the Well. Note: If a Curve already exists within the well, you will be prompted to either Overwrite, Rename or No Load the existing or all duplicate curves.

Section 3.1 Well Management : Date Time Wells

Well Management

Senergy

56

8. The Curves will now be displayed in the selected Well in the Database Browser.

9. Close the LAS/LBS Load Window. 10.Create a Date Time Log Plot in the Interactive Petrophysics v3.6 Well. More information on the LAS loader can be found in the normal LAS load help.

Related Topics Create a New Well using the Date Time Format Define the Well Default Date Time Format Import a Well Log Data file into a Date Time Well Import an ASCII data file into a Date Time Well Create a Date Time Log Plot

3.1.4

Interpret Date Time Data

Date Time (TOD) Wells are treated in IP the same as normal Depth Wells or Time Wells. All the functions and modules that are available to Depth wells are available to TOD Wells. This includes the User Formula, User Programming and the Interpretation Modules plus all the visualization modules. Of course most of the Interpretation modules will make no sense to run since most sensors are not on depth with each other. In most modules the Top and Bottom interval to run the module over will be displayed as a Date and Time entry.

Section 3.1 Well Management : Date Time Wells

57

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The Reference curves (the equivalent to the Depth curve in a Depth well) in TOD wells are called 'DateTime'. They have units of 'Time'. The values stored for the dates are double precision floating point numbers which represents the number of days since 1st Jan 1900. The fraction part of the number is the part days. If you view the numbers directly in IP they look like this :

The TOD curve was created in User Formula by copying the DateTime curve. If you work directly with the DateTime curve in a User Formula, Multi-Line Formula or User program then you will be working with values that represent the number of days since 1900. Hence if you wanted to shift a DateTime curve by 2 days you would just add or subtract 2.0 from its value. The standard log plot works with TOD wells. Create a Date Time Log Plot To view the TOD curve data in depth it is necessary to copy the data to a Depth Well. This is

Section 3.1 Well Management : Date Time Wells

Well Management

Senergy

58

done by the Output Time Curves to a Depth Well Module. This module allows you to specify the Date Time as well as the Depth intervals to copy. To copy data from a Depth well into a TOD well use the Copy Curves From Well module. This will allow you to copy a Petrophysical analysis from the Depth well which can then be displayed alongside the drilling data. When copying the data the user supplies the reference depth curve in the TOD well, which is used to align the depth data to the Time data. This can mean that the same depth data could be copied to many different Date Times in the TOD well, all having the same depth.

Related Topics Create a New Well using the Date Time Format Define the Well Default Date Time Format Import a Well Log Data file into a Date Time Well

Section 3.1 Well Management : Date Time Wells

59

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Import an ASCII data file into a Date Time Well Import a LAS Data file into a Date Time Well Copy Curves From Well

3.1.4.1

Create a Time of Day Log Plot

Once the required data has been loaded into the selected well, you are then able to create a Date Time Log Plot based upon the Date Time Curve data that has previously been loaded into the Interactive Petrophysics v3.6 Date Time well. To create a Date Time Log Plot: 1. From the Database Browser, Click and Drag the 3 Tracks Blank Log Plot from the IP Defaults Folder to Work Area 1 to display the Plot (3 Tracks Blank) Window.

2. From the Database Browser, Click and Drag the Date Time Curve to Track 1 of the Plot Window.

3. From the Database Browser, Click and Drag the other required Curves to the required Tracks in the Plot Window. 4. Click any Track Header to display the Log Plot Format Dialog then Click the All Tracks Button to display the Curve Parameters for All the Tracks.

Section 3.1 Well Management : Date Time Wells

Well Management

Senergy

60

5. Modify the Curve Parameters to display the Date Time Curve Data as required.

Note: Click Apply in the Log Plot Format Dialog to Apply the Changes and Keep the Log Plot Format Dialog open. Click OK in the Log Plot Format Dialog to Apply the Changes and Close the Log Plot Format Dialog. 6. From the Log Plot Menu, Select Save Plot Format to display the Write Plot Format to Disk Dialog.

Section 3.1 Well Management : Date Time Wells

61

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The Log Plot will now be displayed in the Database Browser and the Log Plot File Name displayed in the Title Bar of the Log Plot.

Related Topics Create a New Well using the Date Time Format Define the Well Default Date Time Format Import a Well Log Data file into a Date Time Well Import an ASCII data file into a Date Time Well Import a LAS/LBS Datas file into a Date Time Well Output Time Curves to a Depth Curve

3.1.5

Export Time Curves to a Depth Well

Interactive Petrophysics v3.6 enables Date Time Curve data to be copied into a Depth Well within the same Database as the Date Time Well. The module allows the user to select a time and a depth interval over which to copy the Data. Since in a DateTime well it is possible, and usually likely, that you will have multiple data values at one depth the module offers different methods of selecting which data to copy to the depth well. The module allows the user to create multiple Depth Time intervals. This allows LWD data from different dates but the same interval to be copied. Using this technique one could monitor the invasion profile of a zone over time as the LWD sensors pass the zone, firstly while drilling, and then later while coming in or out of the hole during a pipe trip.

To Output Time Curves to a Depth Well 1. From the Input / Output Menu, Select Output Time Curves to Depth Well to display the Time to Depth Window.

Section 3.1 Well Management : Date Time Wells

Well Management

Senergy

62

2. Select the Plot Setup Tab in the lower half of the Time to Depth Window to display the Plot Setup Parameters. 3. In the Plot Setup Tab, Specify the Parameters for the Primary Depth and Secondary Y Axis Curves (this is optional but can be useful for selecting the right data), the Top and Bottom Values for both, and the Start and Stop Time. The primary Y axis Depth curve is the curve which is used to align the Time data well to the Depth data well and hence must be the drilling depth associated with all the curves that are to be copied. Note: As the fields are edited in the Plot Setup Tab, the Time Depth Plot will be modified.

The plot has several options for zooming and scrolling : Right mouse click on the plot and hold down, drag the plot left/right/up/down. Place the cursor on an axis (Left, Right or Bottom axis) click and hold, and the axis can be dragged up/down or left/right. To zoom : Left mouse click and hold. Select an area from top right to bottom left. To un-zoom : Left mouse click and hold. Select an area from bottom left to top right. Any area can be selected for the un-zoom.

Section 3.1 Well Management : Date Time Wells

63

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

To zoom only the X axis or Y axis unclick the tick boxes at the base of the plot and use the same zoom function as above. 4. Select the Copy Data Tab in the lower half of the Time to Depth Window to display the Copy Data Parameters. 5. Specify the Copy Interval of the Time Curve to be copied into the Depth Well. Multiple intervals can be created by clicking the 'New Interval' button. This can be done manually or interactively using the red lines on the plot.

Note: As the Copy Interval fields are edited in the Copy Setup Tab, the Time Depth Plot will be modified. 6. Specify the Depth Well to Copy the Time Curves into; Well Name, Curve Sets, Depth Interval and Copy Options.

The New Well button will create a new Depth well in the same database using the entered depths. The name will be the same as the Time well's name, with the added '- Depth' string appended. Since there could be multiple data points at an individual depth the 'Data averaging method' drop down allows the use to select the required methodology. The options are : Mean : This will take the average value of all data points at the depth. Median : This will take the median (middle) value of all data points at the depth. This is useful for eliminating spikes. Earliest Time : This will take the first value. Useful for drilling type data like Rate of Penetration or RPM where you are interested in the value when the drill bit drills the formation and not any value when reaming or tripping. Latest Time : This will take the last value recorded at the depth. When discriminators are used the data at a depth will first have to pass the discriminators

Section 3.1 Well Management : Date Time Wells

Well Management

Senergy

64

and what is left will be averaged using the selected method. The 'Fill data gaps' if turned on will extrapolate depth gaps in curves in the depth well. The user can set the maximum gap width, which allows only small gaps to be filled. The Time Depth Plot will display the Depth Time Interval as a colored block. The block can be changed interactively by dragging the red lines at the edges. Multiple intervals will be shown in different colors.

7. Specify the Source and Destination Curve Names to be copied into the Depth Well plus any Sensor Length. In order to put the different LWD sensors on depth the user must specify the distance from the sensor measure point to the bottom of the drill string, where the depth measurement is taken. The Sensor Length is stored and is editable from the Curve header module. The sensor lengths will come from the drilling contractors reports.

8. Specify any Discriminators to apply to the Time Curve Data prior to loading into the Depth Well. The data has to pass the discriminator test to be included in the data being copied.

Section 3.1 Well Management : Date Time Wells

65

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

In the above example, the BONB (Bit On Bottom) curve reads 0.0 when drilling and 1.0 when off bottom. Setting the discriminator as above will only copy the data recorded when drilling. 9. Click Run to Copy the Time Curve Data into the Depth Well. 10.From the Well Menu, Click Select Well to display the Select Well Dialog.

11.Click OK to display the Depth Well in the Database Browser.

Section 3.1 Well Management : Date Time Wells

Well Management

Senergy

66

12.The copied Curve Data will be displayed in the Curve Set selected in the Time to Depth Window.

Related Topics Create a New Well using the Date Time Format Define the Well Default Date Time Format Import a Well Log Data file into a Date Time Well Import an ASCII data file into a Date Time Well Import a LAS/LBS Data file into a Date Time Well Create a Date Time Log Plot

Section 3.1 Well Management : Date Time Wells

67

3.2

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Load Wells from Database

The 'Load Wells from Database' option will allow the user to load wells into memory, where they can be worked on in IP. The selected wells in the IP database will be listed in a window similar to that shown below. When the window is launched, wells that are currently loaded into memory will be highlighted with a blue background colour. If well security has been set up using the 'Well Security' module then the screen may look very different to that shown below.

To Load wells into Memory: Highlight the wells in the list that you want to load into memory, using one of the following options: 'Click' on the 'Select All' button. 'Click' the 'Load' button, or Highlight an individual well to load. 'Click' the 'Load' button, or 'Click' on a well and, holding down the 'Shift' key, 'click' on a well further up/down the list to select all wells between the two end wells.'Click' on 'Load', or 'Click' on a well and, holding down the 'Ctrl' key, 'click' on additional wells in the list to select them individually.'Click' on 'Load'. The 'Well #', shown in the left-hand column of the table, corresponds to the IP 'Database well number'. This is used in naming the binary data files (IPDBWellXXXX.DAT) which store all the curves, parameter sets and plot formats for each IP well. The 'Database Well Number' is a common feature in many IP windows and is used to switch between wells on the main menu ' Well counter', illustrated below. Also, any 'Select Well' dialog will list the 'Database Well Number ' along with the 'Well Name'.

Section 3.2 Well Management : Load Wells from Database

Senergy

Well Management

68

The available wells list in the 'Load Wells from Database' interface can be sorted by any of the fields displayed in the window using the 'Primary Sort Order' drop-down list. 'The Secondary Sort Order' can be used to refine the sorting order of the 'Primary Sort Order' list.

Section 3.2 Well Management : Load Wells from Database

69

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The well API and UWI number can now be seen on the well loader screen by 'clicking' 'Display Well API' and 'Display Well UWI'. The wells can also be sorted by API and UWI. The column headers are now resizable which facilitates the display of long well names. The sort order can be reversed by 'clicking' the 'Reverse sort' box. Alternatively, by 'clicking' on a column header the column list will be sorted in ascending/descending order depending on the data type. 'Clicking' on the column header again reverses the sort.

Saving Well Lists: The 'Save Well List' and 'Load Well List' buttons allow the user to create and save a list of wells and then restore them at a later date. This can be useful if there are many wells in the database and the user only wants to work on a subset of the wells at any one time. NOTE: the well list will include all selected wells plus wells already loaded in memory. To save a well list of unloaded wells - highlight the wells to be included in the list and then click the 'Save Well List' button. To save a well list of loaded wells - just click the 'Save Well List' button. This assumes that

Section 3.2 Well Management : Load Wells from Database

Well Management

Senergy

70

the user only has the wells loaded that the user wants to make a list from. If the user has many loaded wells and only wants to make a list of certain wells then the user will have to close all wells (go to Database Browser, highlight all wells and right-mouse button click to display menu and select 'Close Well(s)'). Open the 'Load Wells from Database' and select the wells for the list and 'click' the 'Save Well List' button. Once the list has been created, 'Select All' and 'Load' to populate the Database Browser again. To load the well list click the 'Load Well List' button, which launches a 'browser' window in the IP project directory. Browse to the directory / folder where you saved the well list and select the required list. The 'Print' button allows the user to output the database well list to a printer, disk file or into the clipboard for inclusion in another document.

Related Topics Create New Well Load Wells from Database Select Well to Display Well - Save Current Well As... Create / Edit Well List Close Well Delete Well Reset Current Well Manage Well Header Info.

Section 3.2 Well Management : Load Wells from Database

71

3.3

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Create New Well

The 'Create New Well' menu function will automatically create a new, empty well and display the 'Create New Well' window. This allows the user to set the well name and depth/time intervals and depth Units for the well.

The 'Well Comment' (see 'Manage Well Header Info.') can be set from the 'Well Name' box by placing a colon, with a space before and after, ( : ) after the well name and appending the well comment. For example '14/19-23 : Preliminary' will create a well name of '14/19-23' with a well comment of 'Preliminary'. If the 'Top', 'Bottom', 'Step' and 'Units' boxes are left 'blank' then the well Depth/Time interval will be taken from the first data file (ASCII, LAS, LIS, DLIS) loaded into the well. This gives the user the ability to allow the program to adapt the intervals in the well to the input file intervals. If no wells are loaded at start-up or the database location is changed, a blank well is automatically created. Therefore, the 'Create New Well' menu function does not need to be run to load the first well into memory. Creating a new well does not automatically create a new well in the database (database disk file). This is only done when the well is saved to the database. The new well is initially created only in memory.

Related Topics Create New Well Load Wells from Database Select Well to Display Well - Save Current Well As...

Section 3.3 Well Management : Create New Well

Well Management

Senergy

Create / Edit Well List Close Well Delete Well Reset Current Well Manage Well Header Info.

Section 3.3 Well Management : Create New Well

72

73

3.4

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Select Well to Display

The 'Select Well to Display' option allows the user to select a well to be displayed, for example, in a log plot or to be worked on using the editing and interpretation modules. The selected well will subsequently become the 'active well' for any new IP module that is launched. The 'Well Name' is displayed on the title bar of the main IP window, and in any secondary, interpretation windows that are processing this well.

The 'Database Well Number' is displayed, in brackets, at the beginning of each line. A 'negative ' database well number means that the well does not currently exist in the database, only in memory. This 'negative' number will change to a 'positive' database well number after the well has been saved / added to the database. For example, in the following screen shot, two wells have negative database numbers (-5) and (-6), meaning that they exist only in memory.

Section 3.4 Well Management : Select Well to Display

Well Management

Senergy

74

The current, in-memory well can also be changed either : by clicking on the left / right arrows next to the 'Well' number on the main menu bar. by using the F11 (up) and F12 (down) keys. by typing the 'Database Well Number' you wish to see, into the 'Well' box.

The currently-displayed well name is also shown at the base of the main IP window along with its database number. The example 'captured' above shows that well A5 is the currently-selected well and it is database well number '76' in the 'MultiWell test' database.

Select - Well List In each of the modules listed below there is a 'Select - Well List' or 'Advanced Well Select' option. This opens a 'Select Wells' module which allows the user to select wells from currently loaded database wells and then to save the selected wells to a well list file. 'Multi-Well Batch Operation' 'Multi-Well Cutoff and Summation' 'Multi-Well Correlation' 'Multi-well Curve Statistics'

Section 3.4 Well Management : Select Well to Display

75

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

'Manage Multi-Well Header Info' 'Manage Multi-Well Curve Sets' 'Multi-Well Histogram' 'Multi-Well Crossplot' NOTE: well lists can also be created in the 'Well'

'Load Wells from Database' module.

The well list file can then be recalled in the two modules listed below as well as all the modules listed above. 'Multi-well Parameter Distribution' 'Multi-Well Change Parameters' Creating well lists is very easy to do. Wells must be loaded in memory so that they will appear in the 'Available Wells' column of the 'Select Wells' module. The 'Available Wells' can be dragged across individually using the mouse into the 'Selected Wells' column or a number of wells can be selected using the left mouse button and the 'Shift' key and then dragged across. They can also be selected individually using the chevron key '>' or collectively using the double chevron key '>>'. It is also now possible to select wells by double clicking on the well in the ' Available Wells' list and it will automatically move to the 'Selected Wells' list. The 'Sort' check box allows the user to arrange the 'Available wells' list in ascending alphabetic order, making the selection of individual wells easier when many wells are loaded in memory.The well selection is confirmed by clicking the 'OK' button. Once the wells have been chosen use the 'Save Well List' to open the 'Save Well List' module. Browse to a relevant folder; the default folder is the active database project folder, and enter a name for the well list and click 'Save'.

Section 3.4 Well Management : Select Well to Display

Well Management

Senergy

To retrieve a saved well list 'click' on the 'Select Well List' and the 'Load Well List' Module appears with any saved wells lists appearing as *.wst files.

Section 3.4 Well Management : Select Well to Display

76

77

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Related Topics Create New Well Load Wells from Database Select Well to Display Well - Save Current Well As... Create / Edit Well List Close Well Delete Well Reset Current Well Manage Well Header Info.

Section 3.4 Well Management : Select Well to Display

Senergy

Well Management

Senergy

3.5

78

Well - Save Current Well As...

The 'Save Current Well As...' module can be accessed from the 'File' and 'Well' menu items.

There are three options available when using the Save Current Well As Module. Update Selected Well in Database

Click OK to Update the Selected Well in the Current Database Create a New Well in the Current Database

Section 3.5 Well Management : Well - Save Current Well As...

79

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Specify the Database Well Number (if a User-Defined Numbering System is in use), Specify the New Well Name and Well Comment, Click OK to Save the New Well in the Current Database. Create a New Well in another Database

Specify the Database Well Number (if a User-Defined Numbering System is in use), Specify the Alternate Database Name, New Well Name and Well Comment, Click OK to Save the New Well in the Alternate Database.

Related Topics Create New Well Load Wells from Database Select Well to Display Well - Save Current Well As... Create / Edit Well List Close Well

Section 3.5 Well Management : Well - Save Current Well As...

Well Management

Senergy

Delete Well Reset Current Well Manage Well Header Info.

Section 3.5 Well Management : Well - Save Current Well As...

80

81

3.6

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Create / Edit Well List

IP uses the Create / Edit Well List feature to Create New or Edit existing Well Lists. Well Lists are used to select wells in a large multi-well project. Some Example Well Lists are: All the Cored Wells in a Field, All the Wells in a Block or All Wet Wells. From the Well Menu, Select Create / Edit Well List to display the Make or Edit Well List Dialog.

Select the required Well(s) from the Available Wells List, and Click the Move Button to Move the Selected Well(s) to the Selected Wells List.

Section 3.6 Well Management : Create / Edit Well List

Well Management

Senergy

82

In the Display with Well Name Box, Select the required Well Header Properties to be displayed with the Well Name in the Available Wells and Selected Wells List. Click the All Wells in Database Checkbox to display All Database Wells in the Available Wells List. Click the Make Well List Button to Display the Save Well List Dialog and Save the Selected Wells List to a Well List File (*.wst). Click the Load Well List Button to Load a Previously Saved Well List File (*.wst) into the Selected Wells List. NOTE: The Well Lists Dialog can also be launched from the Select Wells Dialog. The Select Wells Dialog is Launched from the Advanced Interpretation Modules.

The Create Well List Dialog can be launched from the following IP Modules: Well > Load Wells From Database Well > Create/Edit Well List Well > MW Options > Manage Multi-Well Header Info Well > MW Options > Manage Multi-Well Curve Sets Well > MW Options > Manage Multi-Well Curve Header View > Multi-Curve Crossplot View > Multi-Well Correlation View > Multi-Well Curve Statistics Interpretation > Multi-Well Cutoff and Summation Advanced Interpretation > Fuzzy Logic Advanced Interpretation > Multi-Linear Regression

Section 3.6 Well Management : Create / Edit Well List

83

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Advanced Interpretation > Neural Networks Advanced Interpretation > Cluster Analysis Advanced Interpretation > Principal Component Analysis The Load Well List Dialog can be launched from the following IP Modules: Well > Load Wells From Database Well > Create/Edit Well List Well > MW Options > Manage Multi-Well Header Info Well > MW Options > Manage Multi-Well Curve Sets Well > MW Options > Manage Multi-Well Curve Header View > Multi-Curve Crossplot View > Multi-Well Correlation View > Multi-Well Curve Statistics Interpretation > Multi-Well Cutoff and Summation Advanced Interpretation > Fuzzy Logic Advanced Interpretation > Multi-Linear Regression Advanced Interpretation > Neural Networks Advanced Interpretation > Cluster Analysis Advanced Interpretation > Principal Component Analysis Multi-Well > Parameter Distribution Multi-Well > Multi-Well Batch Multi-Well > Change Parameters

Related Topics Create New Well Load Wells from Database Select Well to Display Well - Save Current Well As... Create / Edit Well List Close Well Delete Well Reset Current Well Manage Well Header Info.

Section 3.6 Well Management : Create / Edit Well List

Senergy

Well Management

Senergy

3.7

84

Close Well

'Close well' allows you to remove an 'in-memory' well from RAM and optionally save any updates you might have made to the well to the IP database.

Select the well or wells you wish to close and remove from memory (use SHIFT or CTRL keyboard keys and mouse button to highlight multiple wells) and 'click' the 'OK' button. You will be asked to confirm whether the wells should be saved to the database. If the user selects 'No' then the wells won't be saved and will not be available the next time the user opens up IP with that database.

Related Topics Create New Well Load Wells from Database Select Well to Display Well - Save Current Well As... Create / Edit Well List

Section 3.7 Well Management : Close Well

85

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Close Well Delete Well Reset Current Well Manage Well Header Info.

Section 3.7 Well Management : Close Well

Senergy

Well Management

Senergy

3.8

86

Delete Well

This menu option allows you to entirely remove a well and all its sub-folders and associated files from within an IP database. NOTE: when this option is used not only will the IPDBWellxxxx.dat file be deleted but also the Wellxxxx folder plus the contents of the folder.

Select the well(s) you want to delete and click the 'Delete' button. This deletes the database well. If a selected well is currently loaded into memory the 'Delete' operation does not remove this well from memory, it just flags the well as not loaded from the database. In this case, the user must first use the 'Close Well' menu option to take the well out of memory. Then choose the 'Delete Well From Database' menu option, select the well and click 'Delete'.

Related Topics Create New Well Load Wells from Database Select Well to Display Well - Save Current Well As... Create / Edit Well List Close Well Delete Well Reset Current Well Manage Well Header Info.

Section 3.8 Well Management : Delete Well

87

3.9

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Reset Current Well

The 'Reset Current Well' option allows the user to undo all the operations performed on the current well in memory, back to the last time that the 'Save All Wells to database' or 'Save current well to database As' option was executed. The 'Reset Current Well' function closes the current well and re-opens it to its' 'last-saved' condition.

The user is prompted to confirm the intended operation.

Related Topics Create New Well Load Wells from Database Select Well to Display Well - Save Current Well As... Create / Edit Well List Close Well Delete Well Reset Current Well Manage Well Header Info.

Section 3.9 Well Management : Reset Current Well

Well Management

Senergy

3.10

88

Manage Well Header Info.

The 'Manage Well Header Info.' module allows the user to enter and save well 'Cultural' information and other important 'Position', petrophysical 'Default Parameters' and 'Logging' data fields for wells loaded to an IP database. There is also a 'History' button which will allow the user to display changes made to the well curves by different IP users connected to the same database. Well Header data can be loaded to IP in a number of ways: manually typing in text into the text-entry boxes for each database well. bulk loading header information for multiple wells from an external ASCII text file, using the ' Load Well Attributes' module. The external file can be space-, tab, comma-delimited or in a 'Fixed' format. loading header data from external data files (LAS, LIS, DLIS). loading header data from external databases using IP's 'External Database Connection' functionality. loading header data from an external database via an OpenSpirit Connection. The 'Manage Well Header Info.' module has been re-engineered in IP V3.3 and later versions to be 'user-configurable'. This means that the user has control over certain (editable) well data ' attributes' that are available for a well. 'Attributes' are parameters associated with a well and they can be divided into 'Cultural Attributes' or 'Log Attributes'. 'Cultural Attributes' are parameters to do with well ownership, location, operating dates etc.. and include such parameters as 'Operating Company', 'Location', 'Spud Date' - all those options found on the 'General' tab within this module. 'Log Attributes' include those 'logging' parameters found in the header sections of digital log curve (LAS, LIS, DLIS) files. Parameters such as 'Log Run Number', 'Mud Resistivity', 'Mud Filtrate Resistivity' are examples of 'Log attributes'. These data types are stored in the 'Logging' tab within this module. In addition, well location information (Latitude / Longitude, UTM easting / UTM Northing & UTM Zone) are loaded into the 'Position' tab. Rig reference elevations, water depths and log measurement datum's are stored as attributes that can be viewed on the 'Default Parameters' tab. Using the 'Tools' menu - 'Options' menu item, the user has the ability to 'add' attributes, set 'Alias' names or 'delete' attributes as necessary. See the 'Options' chapter, 'Well Options' and ' File Loader' topics for a full discussion of this functionality.

Section 3.10 Well Management : Manage Well Header Info.

89

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

'Well Header' information can be manually entered into 6 'tabbed' screens. These are: 'General' 'Position' 'Default Parameters' 'Logging' 'Plot Remarks' 'Plot Annotations'

'General' Tab The 'General' tab allows the user to set up ''Cultural information about a well, including its Well Name, Operating Company, Spud Date etc... The 'Well Comment' field is used to distinguish IP database wells which have the same physical well names. For example the user might perform a preliminary interpretation on a well and then carry out a 'final' interpretation. If the interpretations are both kept as separate wells in the IP database then the well comment field could be used to distinguish between them. For example one could have a comment field of 'Preliminary' and the other 'Final'. From the 'Comment with Well' drop-down menu four options are available: 'None' 'Well Comment' 'API' 'UWI' Depending on which is chosen then, within the program, anywhere the well name is displayed

Section 3.10 Well Management : Manage Well Header Info.

Well Management

Senergy

90

the 'Comment' is appended to the end of the well name (as shown in the screen below). This is useful if two IP database wells have the same physical well name, since it allows the user to very easily tell them apart. For the log plot hardcopy output there is an option on the output set-up screen to override this option.

The 'History' button will take the user to the 'History' module. A screen similar to the one below will be displayed.

'Position' Tab The 'Position' tab allows the user to enter well positioning information, which will enable the well to be viewed in the 'Well Map' and '3D Parameter Viewer' displays. If the 'Well Surface Position ' boxes are empty, loading an LIS, DLIS or LAS file, with Latitude and Longitude (LATI/LONG) fields in the respective File headers, will automatically fill in the Lat - Long boxes on the ' Positions' tab. The Lat - Long (DMS) radio button is for coordinates in degrees, minutes and seconds. Whilst the Lat - Long (DD) radio button is for degrees in decimal format. NOTE: if the subject well is in the southern hemisphere, the Latitude value will be loaded as XXXXXX S (South). If the UTMs radio button is toggled on, the corresponding UTM Northing will be prefixed by the '-' minus symbol to designate a southern hemisphere position.

Section 3.10 Well Management : Manage Well Header Info.

91

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

NOTE: if rectangular co-ordinates (UTM) have been mistakenly used as the LATI and LONG fields in the input LIS or LAS file header, IP will not accept/load them. The user must then manually type in the surface position UTM co-ordinates and specify a 'Zone' number in the appropriate boxes, after 'checking' the 'UTMs' radio button.

'Well Path' information, in terms of TVD reference curve and 'East Distance Curve' and 'North Distance Curve' from the surface location can be entered here. If the IP TVD Calculations module has been run for the well, these boxes will automatically pick up the calculated curves EDIST and NDIST, as long as the default curve names EDIST, NDIST, TVD and TVDSS are used. The user must select the TVD / TVDSS curve and 'Curve Type'. The user can choose the 'default' Well Surface Position display type (latitude/ longitude or UTM coordinates & Zone) for all wells in a database by selecting the Display type from the 'Well Options' dialog of the 'Options' module.

'Default Parameters' Tab The 'Default Parameters' tab allows the user to set values which are then used to populate modules that use these parameters/values. When loading log curves from LAS, LIS and DLIS format files, some parameters/values will be read from the file header. The parameters that are read into IP are listed under the Data Loading: LAS /LBS File input and LIS File Input sections.

Section 3.10 Well Management : Manage Well Header Info.

Well Management

Senergy

92

NOTE: The 'Logging Contractor' drop-down list serves an important function within IP. Setting the 'Logging Contractor' to one of the listed companies will set up that company's Neutron/Density crossplot overlays when a crossplot from within the Porosity/ Sw module is subsequently displayed. The choice of 'Logging Contractor' sets up the 'Neutron Tool Type' parameter for use in the 'Neutron Porosity' calculation in the Basic Log Analysis module and in the Mineral Solver module. The 'Logging Contractor' also sets up the default Neutron Tool Look-up tables which are used to correct Limestone matrix porosities to a Sandstone or dolomite matrix and to correct for formation salinity.

'Logging' Tab The 'Logging' tab is used to store Logging Run parameter information (log attributes) and mud data for up to 25 logging runs. The List of Logging Attributes is editable and extendable and, using the 'Tools' menu

'Options' menu item the user can modify the attributes that can be stored in

IP. If the 'Default Parameters' tab 'mud data' boxes (Rm, Rmf, Rmc, Rw and their respective temperatures) are blank, on the 'Default Parameters' tab, they can be populated directly from this form when appropriate log header information is loaded to IP.

Section 3.10 Well Management : Manage Well Header Info.

93

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The 'Logging' tab is populated automatically from the data loading modules (LAS, LIS, DLIS Loaders). The user selects the logging run (column) into which to load the data from the data loader window. An example from the LAS loader screen is shown below.

If a Logging parameter is currently not captured and stored within IP, the user can use the 'Tools' 'Options' functionality to set up a new log attribute and 'map' the external mnemonic to the IP log attribute name, so that the attribute can be saved within the IP database. See the 'Options' chapter for a full discussion of IP Well Attributes and Log Attributes.

'Plot Remarks' Tab

Section 3.10 Well Management : Manage Well Header Info.

Well Management

Senergy

94

On this tab the user has the facility to enter well specific log header remarks. These will then be used for each 'Log Plot Header' if the 'Header Remarks' is 'checked' on within the 'Plot Header' tab of the 'Plot output' module and a 'Plot Header' is selected.

If the user now opens up a log plot and the 'Plot output' module, under the 'Plot Header' tab they will see the entered remarks in the 'Header Remark Text' section at the bottom of the page.

Section 3.10 Well Management : Manage Well Header Info.

95

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The user could add more comments to the 'Header Remarks' if required and if the user wanted the additional comments to be available to all their well plots then the user should click on the "+" button 'Add to Defaults'. This will then add the comment to the 'Plot Remarks' tab of the ' Manage Well Header Info' module. If the user does not want to use certain comments then 'uncheck' the 'Select' box next to the comment.

'Plot Annotations' Tab Log Plot annotations can be stored on a well by well basis. They can then be loaded onto log plots, as required. The 'Manage Well Header Info' 'Plot Annotations' tab allows the user to edit the stored well annotations. There is more information on 'Annotations' in the Log Plot Display help chapter.

Section 3.10 Well Management : Manage Well Header Info.

Well Management

Senergy

Related Topics Create New Well Load Wells from Database Select Well to Display Well - Save Current Well As... Create / Edit Well List Close Well Delete Well Reset Current Well Manage Well Header Info.

Section 3.10 Well Management : Manage Well Header Info.

96

97

3.11

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

History Module

The 'History Module' has been developed in order that users can keep track of changes made to curves and wells within IP. The 'History Module' can be accessed via: 'Manage Well Header Info.' module, 'General' tab. 'Manage Log Curve Headers' module, 'History' tab.

'Manage Well Header Info' From within the 'Manage Well Header Info.' module and from the 'General' tab, there is a ' History' button. 'Clicking' on this brings up the following screen:

This is a list of relevant selected IP 'history events' that have occurred within the 'Active' well since the well's creation in the IP database. The 'history events' are listed in rows with a number of columns detailing the history. It is possible to sort, check for differences and remove 'history events' from within this module. Due to Interactive Petrophysics' complexity the 'History' module can easily attain a huge number of 'history events' very quickly. Therefore, there are numerous ways within the module of filtering the 'history event' information so that the user can quickly find the information that they require. The first layer of filtering is by using the 'Show' button. Once the user has decided to filter by well or curves then the second line of filtering can be deployed by filtering on event 'ID' or ' Event' name or 'Date' or specific 'Well/Curve_Name' or 'User_name' or 'Comments'. Plus, there is a 'Row Filter Options', which is found at the bottom of the 'History' module window. Underneath the window header are a number of buttons, 'Show', 'Delete', 'Difference', 'Run Report' and 'Parameters'. These will be described in more detail below. The 'Show' button has a drop-down menu which allows the user to 'Show All', 'Show Curves' or 'Show Wells'. Selecting 'Show All' will show all 'history events'. If 'Show Curves' is selected then all the curves which have had alterations made to them

Section 3.11 Well Management : History Module

Well Management

Senergy

98

will be displayed. Filtering using the 'Show Wells' will just show the events associated with the well name. 'Delete' button allows the user to permanently remove the selected rows from the history. The 'Difference' button only becomes active when just two event 'Type' parameter generating rows are selected (rows can be selected by 'clicking' on them and using the usual 'Shift' or 'Ctrl' keyboard buttons to select many rows or individual rows). The event 'Type' has to be the same for both the rows selected. When the 'Difference' button is clicked a program called 'ExamDiff' opens. This is a freeware visual file comparison tool.

This following screenshot displays the ExamDiff window with the differences between the two selected event type Trend Curve's.

'Run Report' button 'Parameters' button displays a screen capture of the parameters set for the selected type event. NOTE: the 'Parameters' button will only be active for type events which produce parameters, such as 'PhiSw', 'Clay Vol' etc. Under the buttons are a list of column headers. Common to all the column headers is the ability to sort the rows, ascending or descending, by left mouse button 'clicking' on the column header. Further functionality of the column headings is discussed below.

Section 3.11 Well Management : History Module

99

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

'ID' column - Right mouse button 'clicking' on the 'ID' column header brings up a dialogue box where it is possible to 'Enter an Event ID number to search on'.

The event 'ID' is a means for the IP program to keep track of software events. 'Event' column - lists all the different 'history event' types that have happened to the well. These include the running of interpretation modules, editing/depth-shifting modules, loading and saving data. To see the events by 'type', right mouse button 'clicking' on the 'Event' column header displays a list of the event 'types'. 'Click' on the 'type' to select.

'Date' - This column lists the date on which the 'history event' took place. Right mouse button 'clicking' on the 'Date' column header enables the user to filter the events by date. The date filter options are 'Before selected Date', 'After selected Date' and 'Between selected Dates'. The required dates can be either typed into the box or else the drop-down button allows the date to be selected from an interactive calendar.

Section 3.11 Well Management : History Module

Well Management

Senergy

100

'Well/Curve_Name' - This column can show curves and / or wells depending on the selection set in 'Show'. As the history module is only applicable to a single well then only one well can be selected, the 'Active' well. However, if the 'Active' well has been renamed at all then more than one well name may be displayed. This column's main use is filtering on selected curves. Set 'Show' to 'Show curves' and then right mouse button click on the 'Well/Curve_Name' column header. NOTE: the 'Row Filter Options' has to be set to 'Filter on curves only'. It is then possible to select the curve by either typing the name of the curve in the box or else using the drop-down list to select the curve from.

'Ticking' the 'Closest match on Well/Curve Name' will allow the user to type in a curve name and even if it doesn't match any of the available curves exactly, a curve name closely matching the entered name will be selected. 'User_Name' - Lists the users who have had interaction with the selected IP database. 'Comments' - These 'Comments' attempt to succinctly describe what changes have to

Section 3.11 Well Management : History Module

101

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

taken place to the Well, Curve, User_Name within IP. Right mouse button clicking on the 'Column' header displays a dialogue box where it is possible to type in a text string to search for within the 'Comments' column. 'Row Filter Options' 'Show Row Filter' - If 'Show Row Filter' is selected then a 'Row Filter' dialogue box appears next to the 'Parameters' button. The selected 'Row Filter' is visible and user editable. Any changes to the row filter can be applied by using the 'Apply' button.

See Below for example of using the Row Filter with the Comments Column:

'Manage Log Curve Headers' The 'History' module can also be accessed from within the 'Manage Curve Headers', 'History' tab by 'clicking' on the 'Show' button for a selected curve. The 'History' module opens with the history for the selected curve. However, the module has the same functionality as that opened up within the 'Manage Well Header Info.' module and any event can subsequently be selected by using the 'Show All' option from within 'Show'.

Section 3.11 Well Management : History Module

Well Management

Senergy

102

Related Topics Header Info.' module, 'General' tab. 'Manage Log Curve Headers' module, 'History' tab. ExamDiff

3.11.1 ExamDiff ExamDiff This is a freeware Visual File Comparison Tool developed by PrestoSoft. The program has many features and it is beyond the scope of this Help document to list them all. However, the main icons are listed below with a brief description of their function. - Enables user to select the two files that are to be compared. - This re-compares the selected files. - Use this icon to swap page position of the two selected files - View/Edit the first file (left hand side of page). - View/Edit the second file (right hand side of page). - Saves just the differences between the two files into a user defined file and directory. - Shows just the first file. - Shows just the second file. - Shows both files. - Re-orientates the compared file pages so that they are either adjacent to each other or else one on top of each other.

Section 3.11 Well Management : History Module

103

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

- Re-centres the 'splitter' bar. - Shows just the differences between the two files. - Moves to next difference up the page. - Moves to next difference down the page. - Current difference. - Options - Exit7

Related Topics Header Info.' module, 'General' tab. 'Manage Log Curve Headers' module, 'History' tab. ExamDiff

Section 3.11 Well Management : History Module

Senergy

Well Management

Senergy

3.12

104

Delete Parameter Sets

Selecting the 'Delete Parameter Sets' option will delete an interpretation 'Parameter Set' from the current, active well. This is helpful if the current 'Parameter Set' is found to be incorrect and the user wants to start an interpretation again from the beginning. This will not delete any Parameter Sets saved on the hard disk.

Only the 'Parameter Sets' associated with the currently-active well can be deleted. 'Other Sets' option - rather than have an exhaustive list of 'Parameter Sets' in the list, the 'Other Sets' option, if 'clicked' will launch the 'Manage Zones / Tops' module, from which the user can highlight the 'Parameter Set' to delete, then click the 'Delete' button. If the 'Multi Well' box is ticked then all 'Parameter Sets' are displayed for all wells. This enables

Section 3.12 Well Management : Delete Parameter Sets

105

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

fast deletion of 'Parameter Sets' across many wells - a warning message will appear before the Sets are deleted.

Related Topics Create New Well Load Wells from Database Select Well to Display Well - Save Current Well As... Create / Edit Well List Close Well Delete Well Reset Current Well Manage Well Header Info.

Section 3.12 Well Management : Delete Parameter Sets

Well Management

Senergy

3.13

106

Plot Range Editor

The 'Plot Range Editor' allows the user to define, save and recall multiple depth ranges and associated vertical scales settings ('Plot Ranges'), linked to a textual description (max. 20 characters in length). A new 'Plot Range' is added to a list so that, when its' name is selected from the log plot header, the active log plot will instantly update with the display characteristics of the 'Plot Range' for the active IP well. The module will allow the user to set 'Plot Ranges' to view, for example, over different reservoir intervals, over multiple reservoirs, over cored intervals, or over a perforated interval. The 'Plot Range' is applied to the current log plot by selecting a 'Range Name' from the drop-down list on the log plot header. Two Plot Range names are automatically created by IP. These are : '[Whole Well]' - this will display the entire well at the 'Full' vertical scale. '[Default Range]' - this will initially also display the entire well at the 'Full' vertical scale. The user can edit the top and bottom depth entries and vertical scale to more appropriate values. IMPORTANT: Once the user has defined a [Default Range], any 'interactive' log plot, which is subsequently launched from any of the IP program interpretation modules, will automatically launch using the [Default Range] depths. NOTE: If the user extends the depth range of a well, for example, by loading log curves with a deeper 'Bottom Depth' than the initial depth set up, then the [Default Range] will have to be manually edited to extend the bottom depth to the new value. In the 'Mineral Solver' module the [Default Range] is used to initiate the interval for analysis and to set the depths for the 'Model' interval. The user should therefore define the [Default Range] before beginning an interpretation. The square brackets '[ ]' around the 'Whole Well' and 'Default Range' plot range names indicate that these names are non-editable. All other user-created 'Plot Ranges' are fully editable. User-defined 'Plot Ranges' can be set up using the shortcut 'Plot Range' Icon on the right hand side of the log plot window, illustrated below. Plot display dimensions can then be quickly changed by selecting another 'Plot Range' from the list in the Log Plot Header, as illustrated below:

Section 3.13 Well Management : Plot Range Editor

107

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The 'Plot Range Editor' module is accessed in any of three ways: from the IP program main menu bar 'Well' Menu, from the 'Log Plot Menu' on the IP program main menu bar or, from the Header bar on a Log Plot display window.

The top and bottom depths for a log plot display can be changed in the 'Plot Range Editor' in a number of ways ; by manually typing in depth values into the entry boxes, or by pasting in depths from the IP clipboard (left mouse-button 'clicking' in a log track pastes

Section 3.13 Well Management : Plot Range Editor

Well Management

Senergy

108

the depth of the 'click' into the clipboard, right mouse-click in the Top Depth or Bottom Depth entry boxes, 'Paste', pastes the depth into the box, or by selecting a 'Zone/Tops' Set and selecting Zone top and bottom depths, plus 'tolerances'. Using a selected curve's top and bottom depths by using the 'Depth range from curve' option.

Manual Depth Entries Type the Top and Bottom depth values that you would like to use to define a log plot interval, and select the vertical scale for the plot, in the editor window. Type in a 'Range Name' and 'click' the ' Apply' button.

Plot Range Select from Zone/Tops Set Use the 'Select Zone/Tops Set' button to launch a dialog window which allows you to choose an available 'Zone/Tops Set' or 'Parameter Set' from a drop-down list. Then define the shallowest and deepest Tops that you wish to view in the log plot. The 'Tolerance' boxes allow the user to type in values, which will be added to the selected Top and Bottom Depths. In the example shown below the 'Tolerances' are set to start the log plot 100ft above the Top RN36 (-100) and end the plot 50ft below the Bottom RN12 (50). A negative 'Tolerance' value is subtracted from the associated Zone Top depth. A positive ' Tolerance' value is added to its associated Zone Top depth. Click 'OK' to close the 'Select Plot Range' dialog. The required 'Vertical Scale' can be selected from the drop-down list of appropriate values on the right hand side of the Plot Range Editor window. If 'None' is selected then the vertical scale for the plot range will be whatever is currently selected in the '[Whole Well]', '[Default Well]' or some other defined plot range.

Section 3.13 Well Management : Plot Range Editor

109

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Type in a 'Range Name' into the text entry box

If the 'Select Zones/Tops Set' functionality has been used, the 'Apply to all in-memory wells containing these explicit tops' check-box will be 'activated'. This check box, if 'checked' provides the user with a quick way to set up the same 'Plot Range' in multiple wells, if the in-memory wells contain the 'Zone/Tops Set' or 'Parameter Set' AND the wells also contain the explicit Tops names selected to define the 'Plot Range'. This would allow the user, for example, to define a 'Plot Range' over a reservoir section common to all wells

Section 3.13 Well Management : Plot Range Editor

Well Management

Senergy

110

in a multi-well IP Project. When the 'Apply' Button is 'clicked', an information window will be launched, similar to that shown below, confirming how many wells have been updated with the new Plot Range. The 'Depth range from curve' allows users to use a curve, which they know the top and bottom depths of, to be used to define the plot range. For example, if the user only wanted to display on a plot data from a particular LWD tool run then they would select a curve from the LWD tool run and the range would reflect the top and bottom depths of that particular log run.

Related Topics Create New Well Load Wells from Database Select Well to Display Well - Save Current Well As...

Section 3.13 Well Management : Plot Range Editor

111

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Create / Edit Well List Close Well Delete Well Reset Current Well Manage Well Header Info.

Section 3.13 Well Management : Plot Range Editor

Senergy

Well Management

Senergy

3.14

112

Take Notes

The 'Take Notes' menu item is found at the bottom of the 'Well' menu.

The 'Take Notes' option, when selected, opens a 'Notepad'-type text editor in which the user can record tips, notes and reminders regarding the well they are currently working on. The 'Notes' stays on-screen and can be accessed at any point in an interpretation, to record the users thoughts. The 'default' text file has a number of titles already entered for various IP modules. These titles can be edited and new titles added if necessary. When the user selects the 'Save' option, the text file is saved into the appropriate WELLXXXX subdirectory, in a folder called 'WellNotes'. If you change the well 'focus' in IP and select the 'Take Notes' option, IP will open the appropriate 'Notes' text editor for that particular well, if it exists, or a new, blank text file, ready for editing.

Section 3.14 Well Management : Take Notes

113

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

The 'Notes' can be easily output to a printer.

Related Topics Create New Well Load Wells from Database Select Well to Display Well - Save Current Well As... Create / Edit Well List Close Well Delete Well Reset Current Well Manage Well Header Info.

Section 3.14 Well Management : Take Notes

Senergy

Section

4 Curve Management

115

4

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Curve Management

Interactive Petrophysics wells are currently able to store up to 1500 log curves, which can be organized using curve 'Sets'. Up to 50 curve Sets can be created for each Interactive Petrophysics well. Curve Sets can be saved with different Step Sizes and Depth Interval Ranges, including Irregular Sampling (often used for Core Data Integration). With the addition of the flexible Sets with varying Steps some Interactive Petrophysics modules will not allow data to be input unless the data is of a certain Step. Each IP Well can contain up to 1500 Log Curves Each IP Well can contain up to 50 Curve Sets Each IP Curve Set can contain up to 3 Million Depths Curve data in Interactive Petrophysics is stored as floating point numbers, not as integers. A curve value can have a discrete integer value but it will be saved as that value but in floating point format. For example, 1 will be stored as 1.0000000. Curve Management Tasks can be completed for a Single Well or for Multiple Wells.

Single Well Curve Management Manage Curves and Curve Sets Manage Curve Headers Manage Zones / Tops Link Zones / Tops Sets

Multiple Well Curve Management Manage Multi-Well Well Header Info. Manage Multi-Well Curve Sets Manage Multi-Well Curve Headers Manage Multi-Well Zones/ Tops

Section 4.

Curve Management :

Curve Management

Senergy

4.1

116

Manage Curves and Curve Sets

The Manage Curve Sets module is used to manage the creation and deletion of Interactive Petrophysics Curve Sets. A maximum of 50 Curve Sets can be created per well. To View the Manage Curve Sets dialog: 1. Either From the Well Menu, Select Manage Curve Sets or Click the

Set Manager

Button to view the Manage Curve Sets dialog.

Date Time Curve Sets If the Selected Well is a Time of Day well, the Manage Curve Sets will display the Start Time and the Stop Time for the Selected Curve Set. The Start and Stop Time can be changed using the Edit Button for the Selected Curve Set in the Range Column of the Curve Set Definitions Table.

Related Topics Create and Edit a New Curve Set

Section 4.1 Curve Management : Manage Curves and Curve Sets

117

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Add Sets from a Set Dictionary Copy Curves from an Existing Set Copy Curves from Well Edit a Curve Set Copy/Load Data into a Curve Set Curve and Set Names Curve Set Grouping Curve Listing / Curve Edit Curve Statistics

4.1.1

Create and Edit a New Curve Set

The Manage Curve Sets Dialog is used to Create New Curve Sets within Interactive Petrophysics. 1. From the Manage Curve Sets Dialog, Type a New Short Name and Full Name in the next blank row of the table and Click OK to Save the Curve Set Names. Note: The Short Name is limited to 8 characters and it must be unique for the well. Underscore characters can now be used in the Short Name. The Full name is a label for describing the Set and can be of any length, although it is advisable to keep it short so that it can be read on the various windows that display the Set Full Name.

Section 4.1 Curve Management : Manage Curves and Curve Sets

Curve Management

Senergy

118

Note: When a new Short Name is entered, the Step column becomes active and the user can select either to create a 'Regular' curve Set or an 'Irregular' curve Set by using the drop-down menu. The regular curve Set will use the 'Default' depth curve as its depth curve until this is changed. The irregular Set will create its own depth curve with no values in it. Once the 'Update Sets' button is 'clicked' and the Set created then the user can only change the Set step type by using the 'Edit' button. 2. To rename a Curve Set, Type the new Curve Set Name in the Curve Set Table and Click Update Sets to Save the New Curve Set Name. 3. To delete a Curve Set, select the required Set, and then Click Delete Set. Note: This will delete the Set and all the curves contained in the Set. If it is only curves that need to be deleted, click the View Button for the required Set to list all the curves contained in the set, select the required curve and Click Delete Curve.

Section 4.1 Curve Management : Manage Curves and Curve Sets

119

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Related Topics Create and Edit a New Curve Set Add Sets from a Set Dictionary Copy Curves from an Existing Set Copy Curves from Well Edit a Curve Set Copy/Load Data into a Curve Set Curve and Set Names Curve Set Grouping Curve Listing / Curve Edit Curve Statistics

4.1.2

Add Sets from a Set Dictionary

The Interactive Petrophysics Manage Curve Sets module has the ability to create a Set Dictionary, which contains a list of Set Names that can be used in multiple Interactive Petrophysics databases.

The Set Dictionary contains a list of the Set Names, both Short and

Full Names, which can then be used in any Interactive Petrophysics database. Set Names contained in the Set Dictionary can either be Default Names or User-Defined Names. The Set Dictionary files are located in the Application Data Folder: C:\Documents and Settings\Username\Local Settings\Application Data\IntPetro36. The file SetDictionary.xml contains the User-defined Set Definitions and the file SampleSet Dictionary.xml contains the Default Set Definitions. To Open the Curve Set Dictionary: 1. Either Right Click the required Curve Set and Select Add Set Name to Set Dictionary to display the Set Dictionary Dialog.

2. Or From the Manage Curve Sets Dialog, Select the Add Sets from Dictionary. 3. From the Set Dictionary, Type a new Curve Name, Full Name and Check Irregular if required, Click Add to Save the New Curve Set to the Set Dictionary.

Section 4.1 Curve Management : Manage Curves and Curve Sets

Senergy

Curve Management

120

4. To edit an existing Set Name, Double Click the Set Name to enable the Set Name Text Boxes, Click Update to Save the Changes to the Set Dictionary List.

5. To Add a Selected Set to a Well, Select the Required Set and Click the Add Selected

Section 4.1 Curve Management : Manage Curves and Curve Sets

121

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Sets to Well to add the Selected Set to the Manage Curve Sets dialog. Note: The following Information Dialog will be displayed if the Selected Set already exists in the Manage Curve Sets dialog.

Related Topics Create and Edit a New Curve Set Add Sets from a Set Dictionary Copy Curves from an Existing Set Copy Curves from Well Edit a Curve Set Copy/Load Data into a Curve Set Curve and Set Names Curve Set Grouping Curve Listing / Curve Edit Curve Statistics

4.1.3

Copy Curves from an Existing Set

Curves can be copied or moved from one Curve Set to another using the Manage Curve Sets Dialog using a Click and Drag Action. 1. Select the required Curve from the Selected Curve List, then Drag to the new Curve Set.

Section 4.1 Curve Management : Manage Curves and Curve Sets

Curve Management

Senergy

122

Note: Select the required Action in the Drag Curves to New Set section.

Overwriting Existing Curves in IP If the user loads a number of files to IP which contain data with the same curve mnemonics they will be prompted that 'Curve XXXX already exists. OK to overwrite ?'.

The 'Overwrite' function in IP actually performs a 'replace and concatenate' operation, in effect an 'Auto-Splice', NOT a 'replace whole of existing curve with new data'. For example: An IP well has a GDCORE curve loaded over the depth interval 0-3000 ft A second DLIS file is loaded containing a curve GDCORE over the depth range 2500-6000ft On loading the second file a Warning Dialog will be displayed asking to Overwrite any Existing Curves. Selecting 'Yes' or 'All' (if there are other curves with existing versions) will prompt IP to replace the existing GDCORE curve from 2500-3000 ft and add/concatenate the new GDCORE data from 3000-6000 ft to the existing curve. If the user wants to completely replace the existing curve with a new curve you must first delete the existing curve from the IP database and then load the new curve from an external file.

Related Topics Create and Edit a New Curve Set

Section 4.1 Curve Management : Manage Curves and Curve Sets

123

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Add Sets from a Set Dictionary Copy Curves from an Existing Set Copy Curves from Well Edit a Curve Set Copy/Load Data into a Curve Set Curve and Set Names Curve Set Grouping Curve Listing / Curve Edit Curve Statistics

4.1.4

Copy Curves from an Existing Well

The 'Copy Curves from Well' module allows the user to copy specified curves from well to well, or within a single well, from one Curve Set to another. The destination and the source wells must both be loaded in memory.

The user selects the 'Source Well' and the 'Destination Well'. The module will show the depth ranges, units and database step for both wells. The 'Copy Depth Top' and 'Copy Depth Bottom' can be changed from the well defaults so that only a section of a curve will be copied.

Section 4.1 Curve Management : Manage Curves and Curve Sets

Curve Management

Senergy

124

The user selects the curves to copy by either dragging the curve from the 'Available Curves' box to the 'Selected Curves' box, or by using the left and right arrow buttons. The curve name in the destination well can be changed by either; editing the name under the 'IP Curve Name' column or by appending a suffix to all curves by typing in the suffix in the 'Add to Name' box and clicking the 'Add' button. The Curve Set for the copied curves can be defined by using the Output Set button. This shortcut menu enables the user to Create a New Set, Use the Default Set or Use an existing Curve Set.

The 'Fill data gaps' check box will, if 'checked', fill any gaps in the copied curves by extrapolating the data over the gaps. This can be useful if the two wells have different database step intervals. The module can be used to make a duplicate of a curve in a single well. In this case the 'Source Well' and the 'Destination Well' will be the same. The 'IP Curve Name' must either be changed or the curve copied into another 'Curve Set' in the well. This operation can also now be

Section 4.1 Curve Management : Manage Curves and Curve Sets

125

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

performed from within the 'Manage Curve Sets' module. The Copy Curve from Well module can also be used to copy curves from a Time of Day Well.

NOTE: It is important to ensure that the Source Well and the Destination Well are both Time of Day Wells. If the Source and Destination Wells are not the same type, for example Time of Day wells, the following Error Dialog will be displayed.

Section 4.1 Curve Management : Manage Curves and Curve Sets

Curve Management

Senergy

126

Delete Curves The 'Delete Curves' window will allow the user to delete one or more curves from a well. If the ' Select All' button is chosen, it will select all curves in the current display. By using the 'Default Set' button

the user can select curves by Set.

Section 4.1 Curve Management : Manage Curves and Curve Sets

127

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Related Topics Create and Edit a New Curve Set Add Sets from a Set Dictionary Copy Curves from an Existing Set Copy Curves from Well Edit a Curve Set Copy/Load Data into a Curve Set Curve and Set Names Curve Set Grouping Curve Listing / Curve Edit Curve Statistics

Section 4.1 Curve Management : Manage Curves and Curve Sets

Senergy

Curve Management

Senergy

4.1.5

128

Delete Curves

The 'Delete Curves' window will allow the user to delete one or more curves from a well. If the ' Select All' button is chosen, it will select all curves in the current display.

Related Topics Create and Edit a New Curve Set Add Sets from a Set Dictionary Copy Curves from an Existing Set Copy Curves from Well Edit a Curve Set Copy/Load Data into a Curve Set Curve and Set Names Curve Set Grouping Curve Listing / Curve Edit Curve Statistics

Section 4.1 Curve Management : Manage Curves and Curve Sets

129

4.1.6

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Edit a Curve Set

The Well Set Depths Editor can be opened from within the Manage Curve Sets Dialog, providing the ability to convert the current well depth intervals (top and bottom depths), the data sample (Step) Interval and provides the ability to specify Irregular Sampling. To display the Well Set Depths Editor: 1. From the Manage Curve Sets Dialog, Click Edit, in the Range Column of the Table to display the Well Set Depths Editor.

2. Type the new values into the Change To Section and Click Run to Save the Changes. Note: To convert a well from imperial units (ft) to metric units (m) or vice versa, change the 'units' and 'step' and leave the top and bottom depths blank. The program will calculate the new top and bottom depths in the new units.

Note: If the Step distance is modified, the program will automatically interpolate all curve data to produce continuous curves. Note: Once the 'Irregular Sampling' box is ticked all the other options become unavailable. The irregular sampling option means that core data or capillary pressure data is kept at the same sample step as the inputted data. Note: Use this dialog with extreme caution, data can be lost if the wrong depths or

Section 4.1 Curve Management : Manage Curves and Curve Sets

Curve Management

Senergy

130

sample increments are entered. A Confirmation dialog will prompt if any data is going to be lost.

Related Topics Create and Edit a New Curve Set Add Sets from a Set Dictionary Copy Curves from an Existing Set Copy Curves from Well Edit a Curve Set Copy/Load Data into a Curve Set Curve and Set Names Curve Set Grouping Curve Listing / Curve Edit Curve Statistics

4.1.7

Copy/Load Data into a Curve Set

Interactive Petrophysics has the ability to copy data from a Curve Set with a Regular Data Step to an Irregular Curve Set. To Copy a Curve from a Regular Step Curve Set to an Irregular Curve Set: Click and Drag the required Curve from the Curve Pane to the Curve Set in the Curve Set Table.

Note: A Confirmation Dialog will be displayed, either Click Yes to copy all the data into the irregular Set and the depths in the Curve Set will be expanded to accommodate the data being copied (for example when copying duplicates of irregular sets, for example a Core

Section 4.1 Curve Management : Manage Curves and Curve Sets

131

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Data Set) or Click No to copy data points that match the depths in the Irregular Curve Set (for example, when copying regular spaced data like log porosity into a core data Set). The first option is useful for making duplicates of irregular Sets, for example a core data Set. The second option will allow for the movement of regular spaced data like log porosity into a core data Set. Note: When loading data into an irregular Set the program will load the data into the same depth as is in the input file if this depth exists in the irregular Set or if the input depth is less than the tolerance setting. Hence, this allows data from different files to be aligned properly in the irregular Set if the depths in the files are just slightly different. If, for example, the user has a very high sampled dataset such as permeability probe data, then the user will need to change the tolerance setting to allow this data to be loaded. Irregular Set data should be useable just like regular Set data in the Cross Plot and Formula Modules. If a Curve already exists in a Curve Set it is being Copied to, the following Error Dialog will be displayed, informing that the Copy Process has been Stopped. Click OK to Close this Error Dialog.

When Copying a Curve into a Set where that Curve already exists, the Overwrite Option in the Manage Curve Sets Dialog must be used.

Related Topics Create and Edit a New Curve Set Add Sets from a Set Dictionary Copy Curves from an Existing Set

Section 4.1 Curve Management : Manage Curves and Curve Sets

Curve Management

Senergy

132

Copy Curves from Well Edit a Curve Set Copy/Load Data into a Curve Set Curve and Set Names Curve Set Grouping Curve Listing / Curve Edit Curve Statistics

4.1.10 Curve and Set Names The 'Curve and Set Names' option launches the 'Curve Select' window, which gives the user a handy window from which to 'drag and drop' curve names into IP modules. To Display the Curve Select Window: From the View Menu, Select Curve and Set Names to Display the Curve Select Dialog.

Section 4.1 Curve Management : Manage Curves and Curve Sets

133

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

All curve Sets for the active well are shown in the lower panel of the window. 'Clicking' between Set names changes the curve list in the upper panel to help to filter for the appropriate curve. If the Active Well is changed while the Curve Select Dialog is Open, Click the Refresh Button to Display the Curves in the Newly Selected Well.

Section 4.1 Curve Management : Manage Curves and Curve Sets

Curve Management

Senergy

134

Related Topics Create and Edit a New Curve Set Add Sets from a Set Dictionary Copy Curves from an Existing Set Copy Curves from Well Edit a Curve Set Copy/Load Data into a Curve Set Curve and Set Names Curve Set Grouping Curve Listing / Curve Edit Curve Statistics

4.1.11 Curve Set Grouping Curve Sets can be grouped using a color field, to enable easier sorting. The Default color for a Curve Set is Black, all existing Curve Sets will have the color Attribute set to Black.

If you change the color of a Curve Set that has the same color as other Curve Sets, the following Confirm Dialog will be displayed, asking if all Sets of the same color are to Change. Click Yes to

Section 4.1 Curve Management : Manage Curves and Curve Sets

135

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Change All Sets of the Same color, Click No to Change ONLY the color of the Selected Set.

If the color has been Changed for any Curve Sets, when the Close Button is Clicked in the Manage Curve Sets Dialog the following Dialog will be displayed requesting Confirmation of the Changes made. Click Yes to Save the Changes, Click No to Discard the Changes.

When Curves contained in a Curve Set are displayed in any Dialog, the Short Set Name is displayed in the Selected Set color beside the Curve Name. Below are some examples of IP Dialogs that show the Curve Set Short Name and the Curve Set color beside the Curve Name. The following example displays the Curve Set colors in the Database Browser.

Below is an example of the Curve Set color displayed in a List Box.

Section 4.1 Curve Management : Manage Curves and Curve Sets

Senergy

Curve Management

The following example shows the Curve Set colors in a Drop Down Menu.

Related Topics

Section 4.1 Curve Management : Manage Curves and Curve Sets

136

137

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Create and Edit a New Curve Set Add Sets from a Set Dictionary Copy Curves from an Existing Set Copy Curves from Well Edit a Curve Set Copy/Load Data into a Curve Set Curve and Set Names Curve Set Grouping Curve Listing / Curve Edit Curve Statistics

4.1.12 Curve Listing / Curve Edit The 'Curve Listing / Curve Edit' module can be used to : View and output curve data as ASCII listings, optionally sampled at a user-defined depth increment. View and output array curve data as ASCII listings with the ability to filter/ discriminate for positive values in 'sparse' arrays (for example, from conventional core analysis, SCAL , Capillary Pressure data arrays). See 'Output of Core Analysis Data from Array Curves'. View and edit curve and array data values in a tabular listing window. View a log curve preview of the selected log curve data. The log shows all the selected curve data at a fixed vertical scale, with the curve color and scale determined by the settings found within 'Manage Curve Headers'. PLEASE NOTE: the log preview is just a preview. For full log plot functionality then use the 'Log Plot' module. Curve listings can be activated by selecting the 'Curve listings / Curve Edit' menu item under the 'View' menu. It can also be accessed from within the 'Database Browser' window when a curve or curves are selected and the 'Show Data Listing (spreadsheet)' option is selected from the right mouse button activated menu. The 'Curve listings / Curve Edit' functionality allows the user to view curve and array data in a tabular format and to edit individual point values ('Allow Data Edits') or to perform 'range-type' edits which substitute values over a number of consecutive depth steps ('Fill Range' / 'Null Range'). It also allows users to check exactly what data is being used in defined Sets called by the various IP interpretation modules. To Display the Curve Listing Dialog: From the View Menu, Select Curve Listing / Curve Edit to Display the List Data Format

Section 4.1 Curve Management : Manage Curves and Curve Sets

Curve Management

Senergy

Dialog.

The Dialog is arranged on two tabbed screens. These are; 'Select Data' and ' Discriminators / Depths'.

The 'Select Data' Tab The window shown below allows the user to choose the curves to display.

Section 4.1 Curve Management : Manage Curves and Curve Sets

138

139

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Curves are selected either : by highlighting a curve and using the arrow buttons, or by clicking on a curve and dragging it into the 'Selected Curves' box. The order that the curves are displayed in the tabular listing is the same as the order (top to bottom) in the 'Selected Curves' box. To re-arrange the order, use the 'up' and 'down' arrows or click on a curve and drag it to a different position. The 'Display Format' box allows the user to set the precision of the displayed values. If the 'Expand Array Data' box is 'checked', array data will be displayed with all data values for both the 'X' and 'Z' array dimensions. Only array curves which have the same 'Z' dimensions can be displayed together. NOTE: IP cannot display 'normal' curve data and expanded array data in the same window. If the 'Expand Array' box is not 'checked', array data will be displayed at the normal sample increment (Step) for the well. In this case, the values displayed will be the average value for the array over the sample interval.

The 'Discriminators / Depths' tab The 'Discriminators / Depths' tab allows the user to select the data to be displayed. Up to 6

Section 4.1 Curve Management : Manage Curves and Curve Sets

Curve Management

Senergy

140

discriminators can be used and combined using 'and' / 'or' type logic. Discrimination can either be between a curve and a value or between two curves.

The 'Output Depth Range' allows the user to specify the range over which the selected curves will be displayed. A top or bottom depth can be entered or else the depth range can be selected by clicking on the zones icon and selecting a required zone from within the 'Select Zone Depths' window. The 'Display Depths Set' is a new feature that allows the user to see the data exactly as the interpretation modules see the data. This important to know, as all interpretation modules output data to the 'Output Set' data step. So the user could select input curves from different Sets which have different steps but the 'Output Set' may be a completely different step. In this example the Default Curve Set and the CALC Curve Set both have a different Step.

Section 4.1 Curve Management : Manage Curves and Curve Sets

141

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

From the Curve Listing Dialog, Curves are selected to view from two different Sets. One with a step of 0.1524, the other with an 'Irregular' step.

Note: Interactive Petrophysics will prompt the user to Select an Output Display Set, if one has not been defined.

Section 4.1 Curve Management : Manage Curves and Curve Sets

Curve Management

Senergy

142

Click OK to Return to the Curve Listing Dialog and Define the Output Display Set. From the Discriminators / Depths Tab, Specify the Output Display Set in the Display Depths Set. The Step for the Output Display Set will define the Step which appears in the Listing.

NOTE: If the 'Display Depths Set' is made the Default set then the curves from the 'Irregular' step set are displayed with many null values. The 'Data Listing frequency' allows the user to reduce the frequency of the displayed data. For example a value of 10 would display the data on 10 ft ( or 10 meter, depending on Well Depth unit) increments. 'All Levels' will display data at the 'well step' interval. Data can be scrolled left / right and up / down by using the scroll bars. The 'Page Up' / 'Page Down' keys on the computer keyboard will also scroll through the data. Columns can be rearranged in the display by clicking in the column header and dragging the column to a new position.

Section 4.1 Curve Management : Manage Curves and Curve Sets

143

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Multiple Columns can be Selected using the List Data Dialog. When Multiple Columns are selected the Curve Track will be displayed on the Right Side of the List Data Dialog.

There are 4 buttons which allow the user to make changes to the data in the 'List Data' window: NOTE: not all the buttons will be active if the 'Display Depths Set' selected is a Set which has a different step to the curves selected to view. In the screenshot above, the curves are from the 'Default' Set which has a step of 0.1524, whereas the 'Display Depths Set' selected was the 'Core' Set which has an irregular step. 'Allow Data Edit' : to edit data values in single cell mode; click the 'Allow Data Edit' button on the menu bar. The button will appear highlighted. This editing mode allows editing only one cell at a time. When editing is complete, click the 'Allow Data Edit' button again and it will return to its normal state. 'Fill Range' : Allows the user to select a range of cells and to linearly interpolate across a

Section 4.1 Curve Management : Manage Curves and Curve Sets

Curve Management

Senergy

144

range between two 'real' end values. The button can also be used to extrapolate data beyond a data range. In this case the user should highlight the data range-to-fill and include 2 rows of 'real' data above or below the 'range-to-fill'. The real values will be used to compute the missing data. 'Null Range' : Allows the user to select a range of cells and replace all values with the 'Null' value (-999). 'Undo' : Once a value is changed, the 'Undo' button becomes 'active'. This allows the user to reset data edits to their previous values by stepping cell-by-cell through the edited data range. Array data curves can only be edited in the 'Expand Array Data' mode. 'Edit Format' : the 'Edit Format' button allows the user to change the curves that are displayed in the window, 'click' and you will return to the set-up window where the curve selection can be changed. 'Output' : Output can be sent to the printer, clipboard or to an external ASCII text file. The 'clipboard' copy can be used to move data directly into other applications that accept clipboard text.

Output of Core Analysis data from Array Curves Core analysis data listings can be made from Array type curves using this module and by applying array curves as discriminators in the module set up. For example, where a very large 'sparse-sampled' array curve exists, containing only relatively few (none-null) data points, the 'Curve Listing/ Curve Edit' module can be tailored to output only the non-null values by adding a discriminator criterion, for example, set the output array curve as a discriminator curve and set 'Function' and 'Value' to '>' & '0' respectively. This will create a much smaller listing, which can be output to an ASCII text file for use in other applications, for example in a spreadsheet. NOTE: this facility has largely been made redundant as the user can now create irregular curve Sets and use the 'Display Depths Set' to list the curves at the Set step interval.

Related Topics Create and Edit a New Curve Set Add Sets from a Set Dictionary Copy Curves from an Existing Set Copy Curves from Well Edit a Curve Set

Section 4.1 Curve Management : Manage Curves and Curve Sets

145

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Copy/Load Data into a Curve Set Curve and Set Names Curve Set Grouping Curve Listing / Curve Edit Curve Statistics

4.1.13 Curve Statistics The 'Curve Statistics' module displays and outputs information about the curves in the current well. The module can also be used to find average values for curves over user-defined depth intervals. Discriminators can be used to define exactly which parts of a curve should be averaged. The program produces an ASCII file report which can be viewed with various standard PC viewers. The module is arranged on 3 tabbed screens. These are 'Curves', 'Report' and 'Discriminators' To Display the Curve Statistics Dialog: From the View Menu, Select Curve Statistics to Display the Curve Statistics Dialog.

The 'Curves' tab Curves are selected either : by highlighting a curve in the 'Available Curves' panel and using the arrow buttons to move

Section 4.1 Curve Management : Manage Curves and Curve Sets

Curve Management

Senergy

146

it to the 'Selected Curves' panel, by clicking on a curve and dragging it into the 'Selected Curves' box, by holding down the 'SHIFT' key and clicking on curve names to select a block of curves, then use the '>' button to paste the names into the 'Selected Curves' panel. by holding down the 'CTRL' key and clicking on individual curves to select them, then use the '>' button to paste the names into the 'Selected Curves' panel. by clicking the '>>' button to select all the curves in the current well. The order that the curves are listed is the same as the order in the 'Selected Curves' box. To rearrange the order, use the up and down 'Order' arrows or click on a curve and drag it to a different position.

The 'Report' tab The user can select the statistics that are to be saved in the output report, including an interactive selection of percentile values to return. The 'All Standard Statistics' checkbox, if 'checked' will tick all the statistics categories in the Report screen. To select / de-select individual statistics for the report, 'un-check' the 'All Standard Statistics' box.

Section 4.1 Curve Management : Manage Curves and Curve Sets

147

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The report can either be output as a 'Space Delimited' or 'Tab Delimited' text file for viewing in Notepad or as a 'Comma Delimited' (csv) file for viewing in a spreadsheet program. To output the '.csv' file using semi-colons instead of commas as the delimiter go to 'Tools' 'Miscellaneous Options'

'Options'

'CSV Delimiter'.

The depth range for the report defaults to the active well Top and Bottom Depths. The user can modify the report depth range by either: Manually typing in new depth values, or click' the 'Zone select' button, to the right of the Bottom Depth text box, to launch the 'Select Zone Depths' dialog, which can then be used to set up reports for particular formations, reservoir intervals or reservoir zones.

The 'Discriminators' tab

Section 4.1 Curve Management : Manage Curves and Curve Sets

Curve Management

Senergy

148

Discriminators can be used to further refine the selection of data. They are particularly useful if the user wants to find out the average value or net interval of a curve over an interval. For example: if the user wants to do a quick net sand count for an interval and use a gamma ray of less than 30 API to discriminate the sand interval (the above figure shows how this could be set up).

When the 'Run' button is clicked the user will be prompted for a file name in which to save the report. Once the report is created the file will be automatically opened and displayed. An example of a report is shown below. Well : A1 Date Run : 27/07/2005 11:01:09 Curve Mean Imp:GR

Units Median GAPI

Nulls Mode 0

Fail Disc Top Std Dev

Bottom

Net

Min

Max

2

2972.571

21.127

31.078

141.875

2951.293

Section 4.1 Curve Management : Manage Curves and Curve Sets

149 59.028 Imp:DT 64.691 Imp:NPHI 0.091 Imp:RHOB 2.614

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help 47.313 37.100 US/F 0 63.250 61.947 v/v_decima 0 0.076 N/A G/CC 0 2.626 2.681

Senergy

28.185 2

2951.293

2972.571

21.127

58.875

75.500

2951.293

2972.571

21.127

0.029

0.189

2951.293

2972.571

21.127

2.405

2.762

4.356 2 0.037 2 0.092

The 'Fail Disc' column reports the number of depth steps, within the selected depth range, that fail to pass any discriminator logic that has been set up by the user. The 'Net' interval is the number of good samples (non-NULL values) multiplied by the 'Well Step' interval. For a curve with all non-NULL data, the Net interval will not be equal to the Bottom minus Top depth, but will be equal to the Bottom minus Top depth plus one database sample increment. The 'Mode' is calculated by sorting the data into a 50 cell histogram and taking the highest cell height (need on average at least 3 values per cell). The 'Save' and 'Load' buttons at the bottom of the screen allow the user to save and re-load setup formats for the module.

Related Topics Create and Edit a New Curve Set Add Sets from a Set Dictionary Copy Curves from an Existing Set Copy Curves from Well Edit a Curve Set Copy/Load Data into a Curve Set Curve and Set Names Curve Set Grouping Curve Listing / Curve Edit Curve Statistics

Section 4.1 Curve Management : Manage Curves and Curve Sets

Curve Management

Senergy

4.2

150

Manage Curve Headers

The Interactive Petrophysics Manage Curve Headers Dialog has the ability to: View and Edit and Save the Log Plot Default Display Attributes of the Log Curves in a Well. View the Statistics of Curves in a Well. View the 'history' of log curves in an IP well (how they were loaded, what corrections/ math has been performed on them , by whom & on what date/time.) To display the Manage Curve Headers Dialog. 1. From the Well Menu, Select Manage Curve Headers to display the Manage Curve Headers Dialog.

Note: Log curve attributes are viewed on four separate 'tabbed' screens. The curve attributes are organized in 'grid'- type, tabular listings. The Column headings and contents of each table are described below, from left to right in each display. The 'In Name' column, which contains the Curve Name and its' curve Set name, is common to all tabs and is always the left-most column. The four tabs are: General - displays the log curve drawing attributes, like line color, default left and right log track scales, linear or log scaling. Descriptions - user editable curve descriptions and 'aliases' Statistics - curve statistics listings. History - curve history listings. 2. The 'control' buttons along the bottom of the window are described below. Click Update to save any changes to the Curve Names, Types or Display Parameters. Click Cancel to Close the Manage Curve Headers without Saving any Changes. Click Print to Send the Curve History Data to either a Printer, Clipboard or a File.

Curve Selection by TypeCurve Selection by Type Many of the IP calculation and interpretation modules select curves by 'Curve Type'. If multiple

Section 4.2 Curve Management : Manage Curve Headers

151

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

curves have the same 'type' then the curve selected will be the most recently-modified curve of the correct 'type' with the 'Final' flag set. If no 'Final' flags are set, the selected curve will be the most recently modified curve of the correct 'type'.

Related Topics Manage Curve Headers Edit Curve Header General Properties Edit Curve Header Descriptions Edit Curve Header Statistics Edit Curve Header History Edit Curve Header Display

4.2.1

Edit Curve Header General Properties

The 'General' Tab in the Manage Curve Headers dialog is used to view and edit curve display properties that will be applied any time a particular curve is added to a log plot.

The IP installation directory contains a file called CPARMDEF.PAR. See 'Tools' ® 'Defaults' ® ' Edit Curve System Defaults'. This is a text file which contains a list of common log curve mnemonics and a set of 'default' display characteristics. When a log curve is loaded into the program, from ASCII, LAS/LIS/DLIS, IP searches the CPARMDEF.PAR file to see if there is an entry for each curve mnemonic in the input file. If the mnemonic is found, IP will use the associated 'default characteristics' to fill in the display properties in the 'General' table. If a mnemonic is not found in the CPARMDEF.PAR file, the curve scales, curve 'type', curve color etc...will be left 'blank'. The user must then manually fill in the empty fields in the 'General' table.

Section 4.2 Curve Management : Manage Curve Headers

Curve Management

Senergy

152

If the user loads an unrecognized curve, then fills in the appropriate curve display characteristics on the 'General' tab, the curve display settings can be saved to an external file to facilitate loading the same curve mnemonic for other wells in the future. This is accomplished by using the right-mouse-button functionality in the 'In Name' column, described below. 'In Name' : This column lists the curve name that was originally used when the curve was loaded to IP. Where a curve has been loaded to a curve Set, other than the 'Default' Set, the curve name is prefixed by the 'Short Set Name', as shown in the window above. By 'clicking' the mouse cursor on a curve name in the 'In Name' column the user is given the following options : 'Add Curve Type to file'. This copies the Curve 'type' (see below) to the user defaults file, UserCurveType.OPT (See 'Tools' ® 'Defaults'). 'Add Curve Properties to file' copies the user-defined curve display attributes to the UserDefined Curve defaults file, CPARMDEF_USER.PAR (See 'Tools ® Defaults). IP uses the IP program file CPARMDEF.PAR and the user-defined file CPARMDEF_USER.PAR to save curve attributes to. If a CPARMDEF_USER.PAR file contains the same curve mnemonic as the CPARMDEF.PAR file but, for example, has a different curve color entry for that common curve, when that curve is loaded into IP from an external file, the CPARMDEF_USER.PAR settings take preference.

'Out Name' : To rename a curve, click in the 'Out Name' cell and type in the new curve name. To delete a curve from the 'Manage Log Curve Headers' interface, 'blank out' the text in the 'Out Name' box. The curve will be deleted when you click the 'Update' button. 'Units' : Type in curve units of measurement.

Section 4.2 Curve Management : Manage Curve Headers

153

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

'Curve Type' : The 'Curve Type' attribute is used by various modules to choose default curves. For example, when the user launches the 'Clay Volume' interpretation module, some of the input curve boxes will be automatically filled in with the appropriate gamma ray log or sonic log curve name if these curves exist in the subject well, because the curves have recognized 'Curve Types'. 'Curve Types' are assigned when a curve is loaded into the program. 'Curve Types' are stored in the CPARMDEF.PAR file in the same data line as each curve mnemonic. On the 'General' tab a drop-down box allows the user to set the 'Type' from the standard list. The standard types are defined in a user-editable file 'CurveType.opt' which is found in the IP program directory. To add a default type, edit this file with a text editor (Notepad) and add the new 'Type' to the list. See 'Tools' ® 'Defaults'.

'Curve Set' : The 'Curve Set' attribute allows the user to assign the Set that a curve belongs to. A drop-down box allows the selection of available Sets. To create a new Set click on the 'Edit Sets' button at the top of the window. This will launch the 'Manage Curve Sets' dialog. 'Lock' : the lock column allows a curve to be flagged as 'locked', so that its values cannot be accidentally changed. A 'tick' in this column will indicate the curve is locked. By clicking the 'Lock All' or 'UnLock All' button one can lock and unlock all curves in the well at the same time. This can also be achieved by 'clicking' on the 'Lock' column header. The 'Set Lock' button can be used to set the 'Lock' column flag depending on the curves currently displayed in the active well.

Section 4.2 Curve Management : Manage Curve Headers

Curve Management

Senergy

154

Left Scale', 'Right Scale', 'Log/Lin', 'Color' : These are default settings that will be used to set up the display parameters for each curve when it is selected for a log plot. 'Shift Inc' : This parameter is used to make a total 'block depth shift' to a curve (in depth step increments). A user can manually enter values or the 'Interactive Block Depth Shift' module sets it. To apply one shift increment to all the curves listed, enter a value into the top 'Shift Inc' cell and 'click' on the 'Shift Inc' column header this will then populate the entered value into all the 'Shift Inc' column cells. To make a shift of 10 feet to a curve with a data spacing of 2 samples per foot, a value of 20 would be entered. A positive value (e.g. 20) will shift a curve downhole. A negative value (e. g. -20) will shift a curve uphole. NOTE: it isn't now possible to use the 'Shift Inc' column to depth shift irregular curve Set data. The column will be grayed out over the irregular curves and a warning message will appear if the user attempts to depth-shift the curves using the 'Shift Inc' column.

Section 4.2 Curve Management : Manage Curve Headers

155

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

'Final' : This is a 'flag' that can be set to indicate that this is the final version of a curve. This can be used to select curves for output (see LAS Write) and is also used to preferentially select one curve over another, when curves are being selected by 'Curve Type'. Click in the column to set the Flag. The 'Set Final' button will set all the curves that are currently being displayed in the active Log Plot display as 'Final' curves. This can be very useful for quickly selecting the curves to output in digital form. When logs are loaded, their default attributes are looked up in a file called CPARMDEF.PAR (CparmDef_metric.par for the metric option), which is stored in the IP program directory. This file can be edited by the user to change or add new curves or defaults parameters. It contains the defaults for Crossplot and Histogram scales, as well as the log plotting scales. The file can be opened and edited by selecting the menu item 'Tools' ® Edit Curve System defaults'.

Related Topics Manage Curve Headers Edit Curve Header General Properties Edit Curve Header Descriptions Edit Curve Header Statistics Edit Curve Header History Edit Curve Header Display

Section 4.2 Curve Management : Manage Curve Headers

Curve Management

Senergy

4.2.2

156

Edit Curve Header Descriptions

The Descriptions Tab in the Manage Curve Headers Dialog allows the user to include comments associated with a curve and to set up curve 'Alias' names for use on 'hardcopy' log headers.

'Comments' Field : User-entered comments about a curve. 'Alias' Field : An 'Alias' name can be optionally used for the Hardcopy log output. Rather than using the IP curve ('In Name') names in the log headers the Alias name can be displayed, allowing more generic names to be used. 'Description' : Description of the curve. The curve description can be optionally output in a Log Plot header when it is plotted. The default text strings are set in the CPARMDEF.PAR file. Every time a curve is created the file is 'checked' to see if a default description exists for the curve and, if a description is found, it is loaded into this field.

Related Topics Manage Curve Headers Edit Curve Header General Properties Edit Curve Header Descriptions Edit Curve Header Statistics Edit Curve Header History Edit Curve Header Display

4.2.3

Edit Curve Header Statistics

The Statistics Tab in the Manage Curve Headers Dialog is a non-editable tab which gives basic information about the curves in a well.

Section 4.2 Curve Management : Manage Curve Headers

157

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

'Array Size' : This column will contain the array size for an array-type curve. For a non-array curve the cell will be empty. An array size of '12 x 60' would indicate 12 'X' value samples and 60 'Z' value depth increments. Therefore an array curve of this size would contain 720 data values per 1 normal curve data value. An example of Array curve Statistics is illustrated below, showing Borehole Televiewer (FMS) curves:

'Minimum', 'Maximum', 'Mean', 'Std. Dev.' : This gives the minimum value, maximum value, mean / average value and the standard deviation of the values for the curves. This average ignores Null (-999) data values. 'Top Depth', 'Bot. Depth' : The top and bottom depths for a curve are the first and last 'nonNull' values. 'Net Interval' : The net interval for a curve will be the number of 'non-Null' data values multiplied by the database step interval. Hence, if a curve has continuous data from top to bottom of a well then the net interval will be one database step more than the bottom minus top depth.

Related Topics Manage Curve Headers Edit Curve Header General Properties

Section 4.2 Curve Management : Manage Curve Headers

Curve Management

Senergy

158

Edit Curve Header Descriptions Edit Curve Header Statistics Edit Curve Header History Edit Curve Header Display

4.2.4

Edit Curve Header History

The Manage Curve Headers Dialog History Tab displays the Curve History Listings.

'Show Parameters' : This displays the history for the curve. More details can be found in the ' History Module' 'Create Module' : This displays the module name that created the curve. 'Create date' : This is the date the curve was created. The format of the displayed date is set by the users default regional settings, set in the Windows control panel. 'Create User' : This is the user name (computer logon name) of the person who created the curve. For databases created prior to version 3.0 this will be blank. 'Update Module' : This shows the module name that last changed the curve. 'Update date' : Time the module was last updated. 'Update User' : This is the user name (computer logon name) of the person who last changed the curve. All fields in the tables are editable, except the original input name ('In Name') and the data within the 'Curve Stastics tab. The listing 'Sort Order' can be changed from the drop-down menu list or by clicking in the curve column header. If the 'Reverse Sort' box is 'checked' then the sort order will be reversed.

Section 4.2 Curve Management : Manage Curve Headers

159

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Related Topics Manage Curve Headers Edit Curve Header General Properties Edit Curve Header Descriptions Edit Curve Header Statistics Edit Curve Header History Edit Curve Header Display

4.2.5

Edit Curve Header Display

The Manage Curve Headers Dialog Display Tab displays a Summary of the Log Plot, Histogram and Cross Plot Default Display Properties for all the Curves in the Selected Well. The Log Plot fields for which default settings can be defined using this Display Tab are the Left Scale, Right Scale, Log/Lin, color, Line Width, Line Style and Backup. For the Histogram and the Cross Plot the fields which the default settings can be defined are the Left Scale, Right Scale and the Log/ Lin fields.

All fields in the tables are editable, except the original input name, in the Name Column.

Section 4.2 Curve Management : Manage Curve Headers

Curve Management

Senergy

160

The listing 'Sort Order' can be changed from the drop-down menu list or by clicking in the curve column header. If the 'Reverse Sort' box is 'checked' then the sort order will be reversed.

Related Topics Manage Curve Headers Edit Curve Header General Properties Edit Curve Header Descriptions Edit Curve Header Statistics Edit Curve Header History Edit Curve Header Display

Section 4.2 Curve Management : Manage Curve Headers

161

4.3

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Manage Zones/Tops

The 'Manage Zones / Tops' module allows the user to manage Zones and Tops Sets. It has been enhanced in order to help with the 'Link Zones / Top Sets' module.

A 'Zone/ Tops' Set consists of a group of depth-delimited intervals. Each zone has a 'Name', a ' Top Depth' and a 'Bottom Depth' entry. Zones also have their default zone colours assigned by the IP program. The zone colours are user-editable. 'Parameter' Sets, which are used in the interpretation modules, are 'extended' Zone Sets in which each zone has a set of parameters (eg. Rw, Rmf, RhoClay etc) associated with it, in addition to 'Name', 'Top Depth' and 'Bottom Depth'. Zone / Parameter Sets have a 'Type' associated with them. These relate to the interpretation module used to create the parameters. Possible 'types' are: Tops : This is the generic user-created 'Tops' Set, referenced to Measured Depth. No parameters.

The program converts all the entered depths to measured depths in

order to display them. TVDss_Set : This is a 'Tops' Set that references TVDss depth. Depths entered as TVDss remain as TVDss depths. Basic_loganal : This is the 'Basic Log Analysis' module parameter Set Clay : This is the 'Clay Volume' module parameter Set.

Section 4.3 Curve Management : Manage Zones/Tops

Curve Management

Senergy

162

PhiSw : This is the 'Porosity and Water Saturation' module parameter Set. Cutoff : This is the 'Cut-off and Summations' module parameter Set. UP : This is the 'User Program' parameter Set. MonteCarlo : This is the 'MonteCarlo Analysis' module parameter Set. MinSolve : This is the 'Mineral Solver' parameter Set. NMR : This is the 'NMR Interpretation' module parameter Set. Pore_Pres_Grad : This is the 'Pore Pressure' module parameter Set TDT _Stand_Alone : This is the 'TDT Standalone' module parameter Set TDT_Time_Lapse : This is the 'TDT Time Lapse' module parameter Set The user can create Zone Sets of the type 'Tops' and 'Parameters' in this module. All Set types can be 'copied' or 'deleted' from within this module. The module window is launched with a list of all the Zone Sets that have been created for the current in-memory well. The module will display the link zone symbol

next to any linked sets.

Related Topics Create a New Zone / Tops Set Create a TVDSS Top Set Set Zone Colours Copy a Set Type to a Tops Set Type Copy a Zone Set Edit a Zone Set Delete a Zone Set Edit a Parameter Set

4.3.1

Create a New Zone Set

A New Tops Set can be created using the Edit Zone Tops Dialog. To create a new Tops Set: 1. From the Zone Sets Dialog, Click the New Tops button to display the Edit Zone Tops Dialog.

Section 4.3 Curve Management : Manage Zones/Tops

163

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Note: The New Zone Set Name must be typed into the Zone Set Name Text Box. Tops data can be entered in three ways: 1. Manually Type the Zone Tops Data into the Data Table. Note: Only the Zone Top Depth Value is required. The Zone Bottom Depth Value will be automatically updated when OK is clicked, corresponding to the 'Zone Top' depth of the next zone in the list, or to the 'Well bottom' depth if no deeper zone exists. The order the zones are added to the table is not critical because the program sorts the Zones /Tops in increasing depth order before loading them. 2. Click File to Import Tops Data from an ASCII File. Note: The format of a 'Tops' file is very simple. Data is entered on separate lines as 'Zone Name', 'Top of Zone', 'Bottom of Zone'; alternatively as 'Top of Zone', 'Bottom of Zone', 'Zone Name'. Separators between the parameters should be one-or-more blank spaces, a 'comma' or 'tab' character. Example text file formats are illustrated below. If the file is 'space-delimited' and the 'Zone Name' is listed first, then the name must not contain any blank spaces ('Top Zone A' ,for example is not allowed, but should be written as 'Top_Zone_A'. That is, with 'underscores' between the words). This does not apply if a comma or 'tab' delimiter is used to separate the parameters. If the bottom depths are omitted then the 'Zone Bottom' column will be blank. Lines that do not conform are ignored and the program skips to the next line. The following are examples of possible tops set files : Tab Delimited

Comma Delimited

Space Delimited

Comma Delimited without Bottom

7790 7875 Top

Top Gas Zone,

Top_Gas_Zone

Section 4.3 Curve Management : Manage Zones/Tops

Depths

Curve Management

Senergy Gas Zone 8270 8420.0 Bottom Gas 8420 8620 Bottom Water 7875 8225 Water

7790, 7875 Bottom Gas, 8270, 8420.0 Bottom Water, 8420, 8620 Water, 7875, 8225

7790 7875 Bottom_Gas 8270 8420.0 Bottom_Water 8420 8620 Water 7875 8225

164

Top Gas Zone, 7790 Bottom Gas, 8270.0 Bottom Water, 8420 Water, 7875

3. Paste Data from an External Spreadsheet Tops can be pasted from an external spreadsheet into the data table, in the external spreadsheet; select the required columns and Copy to the Windows Clipboard. Note: Interactive Petrophysics will only load data that has been selected as a continuous data 'block' in the spreadsheet. It will not load a number of discrete cells (captured using keyboard 'CRTL' button) from a worksheet. In the Edit Zone Tops Dialog, Click the Cell in the Data Table where the Initial Cell of the Pasted Data is required. Click the Paste from External Spreadsheet Button. Note: You can paste all three columns at once or one column at a time, clicking in the appropriate 'start' cell in the Data Table.

3. The 'Reference Depth Curve' list box enables the depth curve to be selected that is appropriate to the data that is being loaded into the Interactive Petrophysics well. For example, Fluid contact zones could be loaded using 'TVDSS' as the Depth Reference Curve if they are defined in an external file in TVDSS. The 'default setting' is the Interactive Petrophysics wells' DEPTH curve.

Section 4.3 Curve Management : Manage Zones/Tops

165

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

4. If you make a mistake when pasting multiple depth entries into the grid interface, the grid can be quickly cleared of data by clicking in each column header in turn and selecting the 'Clear Column' option, as shown below:

5. Click 'OK' to create the new Tops Set. The Tops Set name will be displayed in the ' Zone Sets' Dialog.

Section 4.3 Curve Management : Manage Zones/Tops

Curve Management

Senergy

166

Related Topics Create a New Zone / Tops Set Create a TVDSS Top Set Create a New Zone Set Zone Colours Copy a Set Type to a Tops Set Type Copy a Zone Set Edit a Zone Set Delete a Zone Set Edit a Parameter Set

4.3.2

Load Zone Tops from an External File

The format of a 'Tops' file is very simple. Data is entered on separate lines as 'Zone Name', ' Top of Zone', 'Bottom of Zone'; alternatively as 'Top of Zone', 'Bottom of Zone', 'Zone Name' . Separators between the parameters should be one-or-more blank spaces, a 'comma' or 'tab' character. 1. From the Input/Output Menu, Select Load Data then Load Zone Tops to display the Zone Sets Dialog.

Section 4.3 Curve Management : Manage Zones/Tops

167

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

2. Click the New Tops button to display the Edit Zone Tops Dialog.

2. Click File to Import Tops Data from an ASCII File.

Section 4.3 Curve Management : Manage Zones/Tops

Senergy

Curve Management

Senergy

168

3. Select the required Tops ASCII file and Click Open to Load the Tops Data into the Edit Zone Tops Dialog.

Related Topics Create a New Zone / Tops Set Create a TVDSS Top Set Set Zone Colours Copy a Set Type to a Tops Set Type Copy a Zone Set Edit a Zone Set Delete a Zone Set Edit a Parameter Set

4.3.3

Create a TVDSS Zone Set

The purpose behind the TVDSS Set is to define formation Tops and or Fluid Contacts in TVDss depth rather than measured depth (MD). This Set can then be transferred to other wells without the zone depths changing to the well's measured depth reference curve. The module produces an interpretation zone Set which has a calculation method that sets the MD zone tops and bottoms from entered TVDss depth parameters. Since this is a normal zone Set all the interactive functions associated with zone Sets can be used. The calculate method, which sets the MD zone tops from TVDss, is run manually from the parameter window which is launched from the 'Manage Zone /Tops' module. 1. From the Zone Sets Dialog, Click New TVDss to display the Edit Zone Tops Dialog.

Section 4.3 Curve Management : Manage Zones/Tops

169

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Note: A Zone Set Name must be entered. Zones could be entered at this stage but it isn't necessary. 2. Click OK to create the TVDss Zone Set and display the Zone Set in the Zone Sets Dialog.

3. Select the TVDss zone Set, in the example shown above it is called OWC, and click the ' Edit' button. The parameter listing will then appear. The first four columns are the standard zone Set entries. The next four are the parameters associated with the TVDss zone Set.

Section 4.3 Curve Management : Manage Zones/Tops

Curve Management

Senergy

170

'TVDss Top' : Enter the TVDss depth that will be used to calculate the MD zone top. If this parameter is left blank then when the 'Run' button is 'clicked' it is calculated using the MD ' Zone Top'. 'TVDss Bottom' : Enter the TVDss depth that will be used to calculate the MD zone bottom. If this parameter is left blank then no calculations will be made to the zone bottom. 'Use Well TVD Curve' : If 'checked' (default) then the calculation from TVDss to MD will be made using the TVDss curve entered in the well header 'Manage Well Header Info.' module. If not 'checked' then the curve in the 'TVDss Curve' column will be used. 'TVDss Curve' : Enter the curve to use to convert TVDss to MD. This is only used if the ' Use Well TVD Curve' isn't 'checked'. By selecting a TVT or TST depth curve then it is possible to use this module to work in TVT or TST depths. The 'Run' button will make the calculations from TVDss to MD.

Moving TVDss Tops to Multiple Wells In order to create the same TVDss tops Set in a group of wells, all with the same TVDss depth for each zone, then the following workflow should be followed. 1. Set up each wells' TVDss depth curve in the well header module 'Manage Well Header Info.'. 2. Create a TVDss tops Set in one well with the correct TVDss tops for each zone. 3. From the Multi-Well Menu, Select Multi-well Parameter Distribution. 4. Run the '' module from the well with the TVDss Set created in step 2. 5. Select the TVDss tops Set and the wells to distribute the Set to. Do not select any 'Common Tops/Zones set' since the tops in each well will be calculated from the TVDss parameters and not the MD zone tops or bottoms. 6. Click Distribute to Move the TVDss Tops to the Selected Wells and display the Confirm Dialog. 7. Click Yes in the Confirm Dialog to make a copy of the selected set. Note:The Copied TVDss Set can be viewed in the Multi-Well Correlation Window.

Section 4.3 Curve Management : Manage Zones/Tops

171

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Changing TVDss tops in multiple wells If a TVDss top needs to be changed in multiple wells at the same time then the 'Multi-well Change Parameters' module should be run. Here the 'TVDss Top' parameter can be selected and the value changed for all the selected wells. 'Click' the 'Re-Run Analysis' button to update all the TVDss top Sets. If the 'OK' button is 'clicked' then the value will be changed in the Set but the measured depths of the zones will not be changed.

Related Topics Create a New Zone / Tops Set

Section 4.3 Curve Management : Manage Zones/Tops

Curve Management

Senergy

172

Create a TVDSS Top Set Set Zone Colours Copy a Set Type to a Tops Set Type Copy a Zone Set Edit a Zone Set Delete a Zone Set Edit a Parameter Set

4.3.4

Copy a Zone Set

The 'Copy' operation will make a duplicate of a highlighted Set Name (either a 'Tops' or 'Parameter' Set) and then launch the 'Edit Zone tops' window with the Set name loaded into it. The Set will have the words 'Copy Of ' added to the Set name. The user then can change the Set name and click 'OK' to update the copied Set. 1. Click on the Zone / Tops Set name to highlight it. 2. Click the 'Copy' button. The highlighted Zone Set will be displayed in the 'Edit Zone tops' window.

Section 4.3 Curve Management : Manage Zones/Tops

173

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

3. Click 'OK' to save the copied Set to the Zone Sets Dialog.. Note: The Parameter Set Information Dialog is displayed if the Set to be copied is a 'Parameter' Set, to confirm that the Zone Tops or Names for the selected Set cannot be edited using the Edit Zone Sets Dialog, however, the zone colours can be changed. Changes to the Paramater Set can be made from the Zone Sets Dialog. Select the required Set and Click Edit to display the Zone Set Parameters Dialog.

Note: If the Selected Set is a 'Tops' Set, the Copied Set is displayed in the Zone Sets Dialog, where the zones depths, names and colours can be edited.

Related Topics Create a New Zone / Tops Set Create a TVDSS Top Set Set Zone Colours Copy a Set Type to a Tops Set Type Copy a Zone Set Edit a Zone Set Delete a Zone Set Edit a Parameter Set

4.3.5

Edit a Zone Set

To edit a Zone /Tops Set: 1. Click on the Zone / Tops Set name to highlight it. 2. Click the 'Edit Zones' button. The highlighted Zone Set will be displayed in the 'Edit Zone tops' window. Zones can be added , deleted and Zone names and top and bottom depths modified. The 'Zone Set Name' can also be changed.

Section 4.3 Curve Management : Manage Zones/Tops

Senergy

Curve Management

174

Note: The 'Output' button allows the user to output the data on the grid into a text file. This is particularly useful if the user wants to output all the tops from multiple wells into one document or spreadsheet table. To output the '.csv' file using semi-colons instead of commas as the delimiter go to 'Tools' ® 'Options' ® 'Miscellaneous Options' ® 'CSV Delimiter'.

Section 4.3 Curve Management : Manage Zones/Tops

175

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

3. Click Save to display the Confirm Dialog prompting to view the Output file in Microsoft Notepad.

Note: If the 'Edit Zones' button is 'clicked' when a linked Set has been selected then the following message appears.

The 'Edit Zone tops' module allows complete redefining of zone numbers and zone tops it is not possible to use it with a linked Set. The 'Edit' option has to be used instead.

Related Topics

Section 4.3 Curve Management : Manage Zones/Tops

Curve Management

Senergy

Create a New Zone / Tops Set Create a TVDSS Top Set Set Zone Colours Copy a Set Type to a Tops Set Type Copy a Zone Set Edit a Zone Set Delete a Zone Set Edit a Parameter Set

4.3.6

Delete a Zone Set

To delete a Tops Set; 1. From the Zone Sets Dialog, Click on a Zone /Tops Set to highlight it.

2. Click the 'Delete' button to delete the Zone Set from the selected well.

Related Topics Create a New Zone / Tops Set Create a TVDSS Top Set Set Zone Colours Copy a Set Type to a Tops Set Type Copy a Zone Set

Section 4.3 Curve Management : Manage Zones/Tops

176

177

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Edit a Zone Set Delete a Zone Set Edit a Parameter Set

4.3.7

Edit a Parameter Set

The 'Edit' button now opens up a 'Parameter' Set edit window. To display the Parameter Set Edit Window for a Parameter Set, Select the required Parameter Set and Click Edit. Note: If the 'ClayVol' Set was selected then clicking the 'Edit' button would open up the ' Clay Volume' parameter Set module.

To display the Parameter Set Edit Window for a Tops Set, Select the required Tops Set and Click Edit. Note: 'Tops' Sets can also be opened up in these windows. However, as there aren't any parameters within a 'Tops' Set then only zone names, depths and colours can be edited.

Section 4.3 Curve Management : Manage Zones/Tops

Curve Management

Senergy

Click Print in the Parameter Set Edit Dialog to display the Print Options Shortcut Menu.

Note: If 'Parameters to File' is selected the Save Parameters to File Dialog will be displayed. Click Save to display the Confirm dialog, prompting to view the Output file.

Related Topics Create a New Zone / Tops Set

Section 4.3 Curve Management : Manage Zones/Tops

178

179

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Create a TVDSS Top Set Set Zone Colours Copy a Set Type to a Tops Set Type Copy a Zone Set Edit a Zone Set Delete a Zone Set Edit a Parameter Set

4.3.8

Copy a Set Type to a Zone Set

The 'Copy as Tops' button allows any set type to be copied to a 'Tops' Set type. This can be useful if the user has zone names and depths defined in a 'Parameter' Set such as 'Cutoff' and the user wants to use these in a regular 'Tops' Set. NOTE: all the parameter information in the set which is being copied is lost, only the zone names, colours and depths are copied. To Copy a Parameter Set as a Tops Set: 1. From the Zone Sets Dialog Select the required Parameter Set and Click Copy as Tops to display

2. Click OK to create the New Top Set and Display the Top Set in the Zone Sets Dialog.

Section 4.3 Curve Management : Manage Zones/Tops

Curve Management

Senergy

180

Note: If this new Set is opened using 'Edit' then only the zones depths, names and colours are available for editing even though the original Set was a 'Parameter' Set but the new Set is now a 'Tops' Set.

Related Topics Create a New Zone / Tops Set Create a TVDSS Top Set Set Zone Colours Copy a Set Type to a Tops Set Type Copy a Zone Set Edit a Zone Set Delete a Zone Set Edit a Parameter Set

4.3.9

Link Zones / Top Sets

This module allows the user to link zones / Tops Sets. Once Sets are linked then they will have the same number of zones in each Set. Each zone will have the same 'Top Depth', 'Bottom Depth', 'Name' and zone colour. Changes made to any linked Set will result in changes being made to the other Sets to which the Set is linked. Hence, changing a zone top or zone name in one Set will change the top or name in all linked Sets. Creating or deleting a zone in one Set will create or delete the same zone in all the linked Sets. This is a very powerful option so it is essential that the user understands the consequences of linking Sets.

Section 4.3 Curve Management : Manage Zones/Tops

181

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

To display the Link Zones / Top Sets Dialog: 1. From the Well Menu, Select Link Zones / Top Sets to display the Parameter Set Links Dialog.

The module has 7 available columns in which to make up combinations of linked Sets called 'Groups'. Each group acts independently of each other. Each Set can only be in one group. The 'Available Sets' column lists all the sets in a well. The number in brackets [ ] next to the Set name is the number of zones within the set. To set up a group, 'drag' a Set from the 'Available Sets' column to one of the group columns. It is also possible to drag a Set from a linked group back to the 'Available Sets' column.

In the case illustrated above, the 'Linked Sets - Group 1' contains 'Clay Volume (Clay)'

Section 4.3 Curve Management : Manage Zones/Tops

Curve Management

Senergy

182

and 'Porosity / Sw (PhiSw)' Sets. There is an incompatibility between the zones as the ' Porosity / Sw (PhiSw)' Set has a red background colour. This is due to the 'Clay Volume' Set having 8 zones whereas the 'Porosity / Sw (PhiSw)' Set has 4 zones. Sets with different number of zones can not be linked and are therefore incompatible. The top Set (i.e. the Set at the top of the column) within a linked group column is always considered to be the 'Base Set' and the other Sets within the group are compared to this 'Base Set'. If the background colour is yellow then the Set has a different top or bottom depth to the 'Base Set'. The user can proceed with the linking but the depths in the Set will have to be changed to match the 'Base Set' depths. The user can reorder the Sets in a group by clicking and dragging Sets to different positions within a group. If the background colour is blue then the Set has different zone names to the 'Base Set'. The linking can proceed but the zone names will be changed to the names in the 'Base Set'. If the depths are different and also the names are different then the colour will be yellow. Only when the 'Ok' button is 'clicked' will the links be created. Warning messages will be given about different depths and names between the Sets. NOTE: be very aware that the all the Sets in a group will take the depths, zone names of the 'Base Set'. Re-order the group, if necessary, before 'clicking' 'Ok'.

Zone colours in all Sets will also be set to those of the 'Base Set'. The 'Ungroup' button when 'clicked' will automatically move all Sets in the 'Linked Sets'

Section 4.3 Curve Management : Manage Zones/Tops

183

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

column back to the 'Available Sets' column. However, this does not ungroup the Sets until the 'Ok' button is clicked'.

Linking Clay Volume module to Porosity Water Saturation module One good example of linking parameter Sets would be the linking of the 'Clay Volume' and the ' Porosity Water Saturation' (PhiSw) module parameter Sets. The 'Clay Volume' module is normally run first and the necessary zones are created. When the 'Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis' module is first run (by 'clicking' 'Ok'), before any zones are created, the following dialog will be displayed:-

Section 4.3 Curve Management : Manage Zones/Tops

Curve Management

Senergy

184

The options can only be selected in order. The second option can only be selected if the first has been selected and likewise, the third if the second has been selected. 1. The first option 'Copy Zones and Clay parameters from Clay Volume module' was available in older versions of IP. This will create the same zones in the 'Porosity Water Saturation' module as there are in the 'Clay Volume' module. 2. The second option 'Link Clay volume and PhiSw module zones' creates the link between the two modules. Hence, when tops are changed in one module they will be changed in the other. 3. The final option 'Link Clay parameters between modules' will link the Density, Neutron and Sonic clay parameters in the modules. Hence, when the user changes 'Rho Wet Clay' in the 'PhiSw' module it will change the 'ND Den Clay' parameter in the 'Clay Volume' module. The 'Clay Volume' module will also automatically re-calculate with the changed parameter before the 'PhiSw' module is re-calculated. The link works both ways so that when the user changes the 'ND Den Clay' parameter in the 'Clay Volume' module the ' Rho Wet Clay' parameter in the 'PhiSw' module changes. The 'PhiSw' module will be recalculated since the 'Auto update Porosity and Water Saturation' option will have been turned on. The linking of parameters is setup by new parameters added to both the 'Clay Volume' and 'PhiSw' modules.

Section 4.3 Curve Management : Manage Zones/Tops

185

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The 'Link PhiSw Clay' parameter turns on the clay link to the 'PhiSw' module. This parameter will only be active if the parameter sets are linked (the 'Linked Set' icon will be shown). NOTE: the 'Link Clay Paras' column in the 'Clay Volume' module relates only to the double clay indicators in the 'Clay Volume' module.

The

'Link Clay Vol' parameter turns on the clay link to the 'Clay Volume' module. This

parameter will only be active if the parameter sets are linked (the 'Linked Set' icon will be shown). It is possible to have the clay link going only one way. I.e. from 'PhiSw' to 'Clay Volume' but not the other way round. This can be set up by turning off the necessary parameters. To setup the links manually, without using the second and third options in the 'PhiSw Initial Setup Options' dialogue, the following steps should be taken. Link the 'PhiSw' and 'Clay Volume' modules using the 'Link Zones / Top sets' module.

Section 4.3 Curve Management : Manage Zones/Tops

Curve Management

Senergy

186

The two Sets must have the same number of zones. In the 'Clay Volume' module turn on the 'Link PhiSw Clay' parameter. In the 'PhiSw' module turn on the 'Link Clay Vol' parameter. On the 'Interpretation' menu select the 'Auto update Porosity and Water Saturation' option.

Related Topics Create a New Zone / Tops Set Create a TVDSS Top Set Set Zone Colours Copy a Set Type to a Tops Set Type Copy a Zone Set Edit a Zone Set Delete a Zone Set Edit a Parameter Set

4.3.11 Create a New Zone The Add New Zone Dialog is launched from the Interpretation Menu using the Parameters Modules; Clay Volume Parameters, Porosity and Sw Parameters and Cut-off and Summations Parameters. From either of the above modules, click the New Zone Button to Display the Add Zone Dialog.

To add a new zone, the user selects one of the existing zones from the window. The user

Section 4.3 Curve Management : Manage Zones/Tops

187

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

must 'click' on one of the three buttons 'Add Before', 'Add After', or 'Split Zone'. For the ' Split Zone' the user must give the depth to split this zone. The 'Copy Zone #' box is used to select which zone to copy the parameters from for the new zone. It is possible to add a new zone, for example, after zone 4 but copy the parameters from zone 1 into this new zone. NOTE: It is possible to add multiple zones, by specifying the Number of Zones required in the 'Number of Zones to Add' field. The zone depths are duplicated and then have to be changed manually. In the example below 2 zones are added after Zone 5.

Once the Zones have been added, the Zone Attributes (Name, Depths) need to be entered into the Parameters Dialog manually. Zones cannot overlap, but there can be a gap between zones.

Related Topics Set Zone Colours Clay Volume Parameters Porosity and Sw Parameters Cut-off and Summations Parameters

4.3.12 Set Zone Colours Interactive Petrophysics has a set of default colours that are assigned when a new Zone Set is created. These colours can be edited to conform to a user-defined colour scheme that can be applied throughout all wells in a project by using the 'Set Zone colours' tab of the editor. Zone

Section 4.3 Curve Management : Manage Zones/Tops

Curve Management

Senergy

colours can be selected from a drop-down list of 90 colours.

Related Topics Create a New Zone / Tops Set Create a TVDSS Top Set Set Zone Colours Copy a Set Type to a Tops Set Type Copy a Zone Set Edit a Zone Set Delete a Zone Set Edit a Parameter Set

Section 4.3 Curve Management : Manage Zones/Tops

188

189

4.4

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Manage Text Curves

The 'Text Curves' function allows the user to create a 'curve' containing text strings and then to view the text within a curve track on a log plot. It is useful, for example, for labelling RFT pressure points with actual pressure values or test comments, for labelling core or perforation top and bottom depths and for including core descriptions or test results from spreadsheet files. The 'Text Curves' function is located under the 'Edit' menu.

Related Topics Edit Text Curve Headers Edit / Load Text Curve Data Manage Zones / Tops Curve Management

Section 4.4 Curve Management : Manage Text Curves

Curve Management

Senergy

190

Load Data into IP

4.4.1

Edit Text Curve Headers

The 'Edit Text Curve Headers' dialog is similar to the 'Manage Curve Headers' dialog for conventional curve data. The editor allows the user to rename or delete text curves from the database.

To 'delete' a Text Curve, highlight the curve in the 'Out Name' column and hit the Delete key on the keyboard. Confirm the deletion when the prompt appears. To 'rename' a Text curve, highlight the curve in the 'Out Name' column, type in a new name and click on the 'Update' button.

Related Topics Edit Text Curve Headers Edit / Load Text Curve Data Manage Curve Headers Manage Zones / Tops Curve Management

4.4.2

Edit / Load Text Curve Data

The 'Edit / Load Text Curve data' option allows the user to create, load and edit text strings for display as 'Text Curves' from the dialog screen shown below. NOTE: Only one text curve is permitted per log track, in a log plot. From the Edit Menu, Select Text Curves, Edit / Load Text Curve Data To create a new 'Text Curve', the user must first click the 'Create New Curve' button. This launches a 'Curve Name' dialog, where a new curve name can be typed in. The Text

Section 4.4 Curve Management : Manage Text Curves

191

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Curve name should not contain any characters.The user should click 'OK' and then choose the newly-created curve from the 'Select Text Curve' drop-down menu at the top of the screen.

If a 'Text Curve' already exists, select it from the 'Select Text Curve' drop-down list. The user then has a number of options for adding text strings to the Text Curve: 1. Manually type in depth values and text strings into the window on the screen. 2. Paste data from an external spreadsheet, using the 'Paste from clipboard' facility at the top of screen. 3. Load data from an external ASCII format (tab delimited) file with column 1 being Measured Depth, Column 2 being 'shift' and column 3 being the 'text string' as illustrated below. Click on the 'Load' button to select the text file to be used to populate the table. 4. Load Formation / Zone Tops 'labels' from an existing Zones / Tops Set in the currentlyactive well. Click on the 'New from Zone/Tops' button and select the Set name from the drop-down list. The depth can be included with the label by (.txt).

The data are loaded and displayed in the window and can be edited on-screen if necessary.

Section 4.4 Curve Management : Manage Text Curves

Curve Management

Senergy

192

The 'Shift' column can be used to nudge individual text strings up or down on a plot. There is also an option to use a 'Depth Shift Curve', created in 'Interactive Depth Shift', to adjust the position of the text strings en masse. The Text Curve entries can be loaded and viewed in a log plot by: 1. 'clicking' in a log track header, or adding a new, blank track. 2. Select the first empty row in the 'Log Plot Format' table and choose the 'Text Curve' option in the 'Style' column at the right hand side of the window. NOTE: you must select the 'Style' before selecting the 'Text Curve' name or you will only be able to see 'conventional' log curve names in the 'Curve Name' drop-down list.

The 'Text Curve' can then be selected under the 'Curve Name' drop down list. A 'Font' button appears at the right hand side of the screen. This can be used to alter the

Section 4.4 Curve Management : Manage Text Curves

193

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

appearance of the text you wish to display. Text colour is controlled by the 'Line Colour' drop-down menu. The text can be 'left', 'right' or 'centre' justified in its' track, using the 'Left Scale' menu and can be 'wrapped' to fit to the track width using the 'Back Up' drop-down menu.

The text strings are linked to their depth 'anchors' by a tick and expandable bar. Where text strings are closely spaced, they may be offset relative to the anchor depth. The degree of offset can be changed, either by expanding the vertical display scale of the plot or by making the text curve track wider. The 'Right Scale' column allows the user to set the depth 'anchor' position. The anchor can be set to the left or right side of the text curve track, or turned 'off' by selecting the 'Anchor None' option.

Section 4.4 Curve Management : Manage Text Curves

Curve Management

Senergy

194

Text curves can be displayed in tracks along with 'conventional' curve data as shown below. The display order can be modified, for example to show a log curve on top of the text curve, by clicking in the track header, selecting the 'All Tracks' button and changing the 'Plot Order' at the right hand side of the 'Grid' tab.

Section 4.4 Curve Management : Manage Text Curves

195

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The 'Clear' button will delete all entries in the text grid. The 'Delete Row' button will remove a single row from the text grid, where the mouse cursor is currently placed.

Related Topics Edit Text Curve Headers Edit / Load Text Curve Data Manage Zones / Tops Curve Management Load Data into IP

Section 4.4 Curve Management : Manage Text Curves

Curve Management

Senergy

4.5

196

Manage Picture/Core Photo Data

The 'Picture Curves' tool allows the user to manipulate and display graphics files in IP log plot displays.

Two tools are included within the 'Picture Curves' menu item: 'Edit Picture Curve Headers' 'Edit / Load Picture Curve Data'

Related Topics Working with Curve Data Manage Picture/Core Photo Data Array Image Data Manage Text Curves

Section 4.5 Curve Management : Manage Picture/Core Photo Data

197

4.5.1

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Edit / Load Picture Curve Data

The 'Edit / Load Picture Curve Data' module is the main module for manipulating graphics (picture) data. A 'Picture curve' consists of a set of graphics files, for example a set of white light or UV core photographs. Each graphics file has a defined top and bottom depth which allows the picture to be scaled to the log data. The images are not stored directly, but the graphics file and path name to the pictures are stored in the IP database. When a graphics file is selected, it is loaded into memory and converted into a bitmap for display. IP recognizes the following graphics file formats: Bitmap, JPEG, GIF, TIFF, metafile (.wmf) and enhanced metafile (.emf).

Before any graphics file can be loaded, a 'Picture Curve' must be selected -'Select Picture Curve' - or a new one created 'Create New Curve'. The IP database can create and store up to 10 picture curves per well. To 'load' a new graphics file into a picture curve, 'click' the 'Load Graphics File' button or 'click' in a blank cell under the 'Graphics File Name' column header. A file browser dialog will allow you to select the graphics file to load. Once selected, you will be asked whether you want to make a copy of the picture, which will be stored in the wells 'Pictures' sub-directory. If a copy is made, then the picture file will be copied and renamed to a unique file name. It is good practice to copy the picture, as prompted, because all related images for the well will then be grouped together under one directory within the wells' own data directory in the IP database. This facilitates project saving and back-ups. Once a graphics file is loaded into the interface, it is necessary to enter the 'Top Depth' and '

Section 4.5 Curve Management : Manage Picture/Core Photo Data

Curve Management

Senergy

198

Bottom Depth' depths for the picture. These depths can be pasted in from an Excel spreadsheet using the 'Paste Rows' button. A 'Comments' field is available for the user to add a description for the file for future reference. To 'delete' a picture (an individual graphics file), 'click' in the row you wish to delete (do not 'click' on the 'Graphics file Name' cell because this will launch the file browser) and then 'click' the ' Delete Row' button. The 'Update Plots' button will refresh any active Log Plots with any new information that has been added to the picture curve. This is useful if you are trying to depth match the picture curve and conventional curve data. Depth shifting the pictures to log data can be done either : by typing in the 'Top Shift' and 'Bottom Shift' values, or by using the results of an interactive depth shift performed on the regular log data. To use the results of an Interactive Depth Shift operation: enter the appropriate depth shift curve generated by the 'Interactive Depth Shift' module. These are depth curves with a name of type 'DepOff$_££' (default name will be 'DepOff1_ds') where the '$' will be a number which depends on which track the depth shift was run in (for a one track depth shift this will be 1). The '££' will refer to the default extension the user set on the depth shift setup window (default is 'ds'). The depth offset curve is overwritten each time the interactive depth shift module is run, therefore, it will be necessary to run the image depth shifts straight after the interactive depth shift before the curve gets overwritten by another interactive depth shift. Another option would be to rename the depth offset curve using the Manage Curve Headers module straight after the interactive depth shift so that it does not get overwritten. Click the 'Apply Depth Shift' button to update the 'Top Shift' and 'Bottom Shift' depths columns. Individual pictures can be viewed by clicking the 'View' button which is found to the right-hand side of the 'Graphics File Name' column. This will bring up the 'Picture Viewer'.

Section 4.5 Curve Management : Manage Picture/Core Photo Data

199

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The 'Picture Viewer' allows the user to see the image at various resolutions. Options are available to send the picture directly to the printer or to copy it to the clipboard for inclusion in another document. Placing the cursor on the picture will display the log depth of the image at that cursor position at the base of the window. A picture can be split into two separate files by placing the cursor at the required split depth and then right mouse clicking. The following dialog will appear.

If the user confirms the split, the picture's current graphics file will be split at the requested depth

Section 4.5 Curve Management : Manage Picture/Core Photo Data

Curve Management

Senergy

200

and two new separate files will be created. The old picture file will not be altered but will no longer be used in the Picture curve. Splitting pictures can be very useful for core photographs in rubble zones where the core photo can not be made to match log depths. The split photos can then be separately depth matched to the log data.

Related Topics Working with Curve Data Manage Picture/Core Photo Data Array Image Data Manage Text Curves

4.5.2

Edit Picture Curve Headers

The 'Edit Picture Curve Headers' module displays information about 'Picture' type curves inside the IP database. This module is analogous to the 'Manage Curve Headers' module which works with the standard log curve data.

'Out Name' : To rename a picture curve, highlight the 'Out Name' and type in the new name. If you 'blank out' the 'Out Name' box the curve will be deleted from the well when you click 'Update'. 'Created Module': This displays the module name that created the curve. 'Create date': This is the date the curve was created. The format of the displayed date is set by the users default regional settings, set in the Windows control panel. 'Updated Module': This shows the module name that last changed the curve. 'Update date': Time the module was last updated. 'Comments': User-entered comments about this Picture curve.

Related Topics

Section 4.5 Curve Management : Manage Picture/Core Photo Data

201

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Working with Curve Data Manage Picture/Core Photo Data Array Image Data Manage Text Curves

Section 4.5 Curve Management : Manage Picture/Core Photo Data

Senergy

Section

5 Load Data from an External Source

203

5

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Load Data from an External Source

If the user wishes to load a large number of wells and/or a large volume of curve data into IP, there is potential for all the system memory to be filled before the data loading is finished, which could result in application stability issues. In this situation the user should consider loading the data in stages, saving and closing the loaded wells at each stage, freeing up system memory for the next loading stage. Once all the data is loaded then the user can re-open the wells. IP is able to use memory more efficiently if these steps are followed. the number of wells and curves that can be loaded simultaneously is limited by the amount of system memory available. there is a program limit of 1500 'conventional' curves per well. Array-type curves are treated as single curves in IP and therefore can be used to store a much greater volume of curve data. The 'Load Data' options are available under the 'Input / Output' menu. The ASCII Load module imports log curves, core analysis plug measurements and other data presented as text files. Input data files can be space-, tab-, comma- or 'Other' delimited The LAS/LBS Load module will load either 'wrapped' or 'unwrapped' LAS data from version 1.2 and 2.0 LAS files as well as LBS files. LBS are LAS files with the data encoded in binary format. The file name being loaded is shown in the 'LAS/LBS Load' header bar, as illustrated below. The LAS Load module loads LAS3 format data files into IP. LAS3 data files are able to store well data, such as core plug analysis results, DST Test results, Formation Tops in addition to log curves, in the same file. Data is partitioned .... See the Canadian Well Log Association website (http://cwls.org/las_info.php) for a full description of the LAS3 standard. The LIS Load module imports LIS (Log Information Standard) binary data into Interactive Petrophysics Curves. The DLIS Load module imports DLIS (Digital Log Interchange Standard) binary data into Interactive Petrophysics Curves. The Formation Tester LIS/DLIS Loader module loads curves specific to Formation Testing services from LIS or DLIS files. The module allows only curves of interest (by way of a Tool Type mask) to be loaded into Tool Specific Sets to be used in the Formation Test Analysis module. The DBASE4 Load module loads Curve Data into Interactive Petrophysics from a DBASE4 Database. The LAS Batch Load module loads multiple LAS files into newly-created or existing IP wells. The Load Zone Tops module loads Zone Tops Data. The format of a 'Tops' file is very simple.

Section 5.

Load Data from an External Source :

Load Data from an External Source

Senergy

204

Data is entered on separate lines as 'Zone Name', 'Top of Zone', 'Bottom of Zone'; alternatively as 'Top of Zone', 'Bottom of Zone', 'Zone Name'. Separators between the parameters are normally one-or-more blank spaces, a 'comma' or 'tab' character. The Picture Curves module is the main module for manipulating graphics (picture) data. A ' Picture curve' consists of a set of graphics files, for example a set of white light or UV core photographs. Each graphics file has a defined top and bottom depth which allows the picture to be scaled to the log data. The images are not stored directly, but the graphics file and path name to the pictures are stored in the IP database. When a graphics file is selected, it is loaded into memory and converted into a bitmap for display. The Text Curves creates, loads and edits text strings for display as Text Curves. The Interval / Spreadsheet Loader loads data into the IP program such as a facies-type interpretation, where a certain geological facies, represented by a numerical value, is assigned over a particular depth interval. The 'Interval Loader' can also be used to load periodic / discrete data, such as core plug analysis results (grain densities, porosities and air permeabilities) or wireline formation tester (RFT, RCI, FMT) pressure data. The Capillary Pressure Data Loader is designed to assist the entering of PC data into IP. A maximum of 100 plugs can be entered at any one time. It removes the need for using the Interval Loader to perform this operation. The new PC loader is designed to load data in columns. Extra data associated with the PC measurement can also be loaded at the same time The Load Well Attributes module bulk loads well 'cultural' data (attributes) into IP from an external text file or from a spreadsheet selection, either loading; into pre-existing, in-memory wells in an IP database, or into newly-created IP wells, populating these wells with well properties (attributes) from the external file. The Real Time Data Link module uses a Schlumberger proprietary data link technology (' Osprey Connect') enabling an IP user with appropriate security clearances from SIS or other third-party (logging service company) data providers to connect to a remote data server and download log curve and drilling data real-time into IP using WITSML data.

Related Topics Load External Curve Data Load Zone Tops from an External File Load Picture and Text Curve Data Using the Interval Loader Using the Capillary Pressure Data Loader

Section 5.

Load Data from an External Source :

205

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Using the Well Attribute Loader Real Time Data Link

Section 5.

Load Data from an External Source :

Senergy

Load Data from an External Source

Senergy

5.1

206

Load External Curve Data

This Chapter Outlines the available options for loading data into Interactive Petrophysics from an External Source. The ASCII Load module imports log curves, core analysis plug measurements and other data presented as text files. Input data files can be space-, tab-, comma- or 'Other' delimited The LAS/LBS Load module will load either 'wrapped' or 'unwrapped' LAS data from version 1.2 and 2.0 LAS files as well as LBS files. LBS are LAS files with the data encoded in binary format. The file name being loaded is shown in the 'LAS/LBS Load' header bar, as illustrated below. The LAS Load module loads LAS3 format data files into IP. LAS3 data files are able to store well data, such as core plug analysis results, DST Test results, Formation Tops in addition to log curves, in the same file. Data is partitioned .... See the Canadian Well Log Association website (http://cwls.org/las_info.php) for a full description of the LAS3 standard. The LIS Load module imports LIS (Log Information Standard) binary data into Interactive Petrophysics Curves. The DLIS Load module imports DLIS (Digital Log Interchange Standard) binary data into Interactive Petrophysics Curves. The Formation Tester LIS/DLIS Loader module loads curves specific to Formation Testing services from LIS or DLIS files. The module allows only curves of interest (by way of a Tool Type mask) to be loaded into Tool Specific Sets to be used in the Formation Test Analysis module. The DBASE4 Load module loads Curve Data into Interactive Petrophysics from a DBASE4 Database. The LAS Batch Load module loads multiple LAS files into newly-created or existing IP wells.

Related Topics Load External Curve Data Load Zone Tops from an External File Load Picture and Text Curve Data Using the Interval Loader Using the Capillary Pressure Data Loader Using the Well Attribute Loader Real Time Data Link

Section 5.1 Load Data from an External Source : Load External Curve Data

207

5.1.1

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

ASCII Load

The 'ASCII Load' module allows the user to import log curves, core analysis plug measurements and other data presented as text files. Input data files can be space-, tab-, comma- or 'Other' delimited. NOTE: IP assumes that all import files use the decimal point as the separator for decimal numbers. All input files into IP should conform to this standard. The module has been updated for IP Version 3.3 and later, to allow the user to more-easily create array-type curves and load data into them. This enhancement was primarily to facilitate the loading of array data files for use in the 'Capillary Pressure Analysis' module. However, the modifications also help to streamline the workflow for importing Core analysis plug data (e.g. Core Porosity, Core Permeability and Grain Density) directly into the program as array curves. Conventional core data is easily imported directly into IP by using a set with an irregular step. NOTE: if you want to load external data, stored in a spreadsheet, into IP arrays, it is much quicker to use the 'Interval Loader' module, which has a convenient 'Copy / Paste from spreadsheet' feature. The user opens the 'ASCII Load' module from the 'Input / Output'

'Load Data'

'ASCII

Load' menu item. The first window to be launched is a 'File Select' dialog which you can use to browse to the appropriate folder / file name to be loaded. After selecting a data file to load, the main 'ASCII Load' interface is launched. The IP program makes an attempt to analyse the format of the user-selected file and populates the panel in the lower part of the window with the data in the input file, together with curve names and curve units. The user should check the 'grid' entries and make sure it is all correctly filled in, before proceeding to load the file. If the format is not correct, the user must manually set the data format.

Section 5.1 Load Data from an External Source : Load External Curve Data

Load Data from an External Source

Senergy

208

The user interface is organized into a number of discrete 'panels'. These are: Well Properties Input File Defaults Data Formatting Load Set Selection Curve Definition Data Grid

Well Properties Panel In the Upper left hand corner of the interface, the 'Well Properties' panel displays the current

Section 5.1 Load Data from an External Source : Load External Curve Data

209

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

depth/time limits for the currently-selected IP well. The panel displays 'Well Name', 'IP Well Step', depth/time 'Units' and 'Top' and 'Bottom' depths/times.

NOTE: If the ASCII file to be loaded contains a Time of Day well, the Top Depth and Bottom Depth will be replaced with a Start Time and Stop Time. See Also: Import an ASCII data file into a Time of Day Well

'Well Name' - enter or edit the name of the well in the 'Well Name' box. A 'Well Comment ' (see 'Edit / Well Header Info.') can be set here by placing a colon symbol, with a space before and after, ( : ) after the well name and typing in the well comment after the colon. For example 'Test Well : Preliminary' will create a well name of 'Test Well' with a well comment of 'Preliminary'. 'IP Well Step' - this is the database 'Step' (curve data depth increment) for a well. If data has already been loaded into the in-memory well, then this box will be protected. For a new well it is necessary to enter a value here. Alternatively, the 'IP Well Step' will be determined from the first log curve file loaded to IP for the subject well. 'Units' - these are the IP well units ('Feet', 'Meters', 'Seconds' or 'Milliseconds'). A metric data file can be loaded into an imperial-units database and the data will automatically be converted. For 'time' indexed wells, the units can be set to either seconds or milliseconds. 'Depth Top' - top depth or top time in the ASCII file from which to load data. The units will be in the IP well units regardless of the units of the file. The top depth/time does not have to correspond to the file top depth/time. 'Depth Bottom' - bottom depth or bottom time in the ASCII file from which to load data. The units will be in the IP well units regardless of the units of the file. The bottom depth/time does not have to correspond to the file bottom depth/time. For a new well, the database interval

Section 5.1 Load Data from an External Source : Load External Curve Data

Load Data from an External Source

Senergy

210

will be set to the Top and Bottom depths/times. If the ASCII data in the file that is being loaded covers a depth interval greater than the current wells depth/time limits, the following message will be displayed.

Click 'Yes' to launch the 'Well Depths Editor' module, so that the IP well depth range can be extended.

Input File Defaults Panel This panel, in the top right-hand corner of the interface, is used to set up some key input file attributes.

'Null Value' - the user must enter the null value (absent value) which is used in the ASCII file being loaded. The default value is -999.00. The 'Multi-line data' option, if 'checked', allows the user to load data files where each depth level contains data that is found on more than one line in the input file. The user enters the number of lines per depth step. 'Fill data gaps' - this allows the user to automatically extrapolate across data gaps in the input data. This is useful, for example, if one is loading a one sample (1.0 ft step) per foot ASCII file into a two sample (0.5ft step) per foot well. The 'Maximum gap width' allows the user to set the maximum gap (in depth increments) to be filled.

Data Formatting Panels Two panels in the middle of the 'ASCII Load' screen allow the user to describe the formatting and content (curve names, curve units, curve types) of the input text file. These are shown below. The left-hand panel lets the user set the first line of 'data', the 'curve name' line and the 'curve units' line in the input file. The right-hand, 'Data Formatting', panel allows the user to define the separator character in the input file to be used in the 'Load' operation.

Section 5.1 Load Data from an External Source : Load External Curve Data

211

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

To correctly set up the file to load into IP the following steps should be followed: 1. Firstly, set the 'Data starts at line' number to that of the first line of data in the 'file-to-load'. Reference line numbers are shown in the left-hand margin of the data grid in the bottom part of the screen, with a red coloured background.

2. Click the 'Apply' button, next to the 'Data starts at line' entry box. The data line will be split into individual numbers using the attribute ('Spaces', 'Tabs', 'Commas', 'Other', 'Fixed') specified in the 'Data Formatting' panel of the window. If the user chooses a delimiter, other than 'Spaces', then 'blank' entries in the data will be ignored. For two attributes adjoining each other, a Null data value will be assumed to exist between them. For example, a data line reading: 1000.0,55.2,,100 with a 'comma' as the delimiter will load the line as 1000.0 55.2 -999.0 100.0. The parsed data is visible in the bottom row of the Formatting panel. The 'Fixed' format option allows the user to specify the format of the input data. This should only be necessary if the data has been generated using a Fortran type expression where one number can run into another. The user must enter the format of the data. This is done by entering the width of each input column separated by a comma. The following are valid format expressions: 8,8,8,8,10,12,12,12 - This can be simplified by using brackets 4(8),10,3(12) 8,10,12,8,10,12 - If an expression repeats you can leave out the repeat

8,10,12

10,10,10,10,10,10,1 - This could be simplified as 7(10) or just 10

Section 5.1 Load Data from an External Source : Load External Curve Data

Load Data from an External Source

Senergy

212

3. After the first line of data has been set and is verified to be correct, the user sets the 'Read curve names from line' and 'Read curve units from line' line numbers. Curve names can either be typed in, or, if they exist in the input file, they can be selected using the 'Read curve names from line' box. In this case, the user enters the line number of the curve names and clicks the 'Apply' button. Similarly, for Curve units, either select the line of the input file which contains the units and click the 'Apply' button, or manually type the units into the 'Curve Units' row. The curve names and units must be in the same format as the first line of data for this to work. 4. The program will check the 'Curve Name' entries in the input ASCII file against the IP Curve Defaults files (CPARMDEF.PAR & CPARMDEF_USER.PAR). Curve names that are included in these files will have their curve 'Types' automatically set. Curve types are shown in the Formatting panel, in row 3 from the top, as illustrated below. The user can manually assign a curve type to blank entries by clicking in the appropriate cell in the grid and choosing from the drop-down list. The 'Curve Type' row allows the user to select the curve 'type' that is attached to an input curve. Curve 'types' are used in IP to help with the auto-selection of curves and default curve display characteristics used in some calculation modules. 'Curve Types' can be set later in the 'Manage Curve Headers' module. The default curve type for each input curve is looked up when the file is scanned.

Load Set Selection Panel The 'Default Load Set' drop-down list box allows the user to select which Curve 'Set' to load the new ASCII data into. This can be set simultaneously for all curves, by selecting the required 'Set Name' from the 'Default Load Set' list.

Section 5.1 Load Data from an External Source : Load External Curve Data

213

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The 'Edit Sets' button allows the user to create new Sets using the 'Manage Curve Sets' module. If a new Set name is created, the user is prompted to use this Curve Set to load all curves into. A dialog similar to the following screen capture is launched. Click 'Yes' to set the new Curve Set for all curves to be imported. The 'Load into Set' line is updated.

The 'Reference Depth Curve' drop-down list allows the user to specify the Depth 'type' for the file to be loaded. This feature allows the user to load data files, for example, that have only a TVD or TVDSS depth curve as the depth reference. If a 'DEPTH' curve exists in the ASCII file, IP will display the following error message when you try to load the file.

In this case, the user must choose whether to change the 'Reference Depth Curve' to 'DEPTH' or to rename the 'DEPTH' curve to something else. For example, the name could be changed to ' DEPTHin', which IP will not interpret as a measured depth curve.

'Formatted Data' Panel The central 'grid' display in the 'ASCII Load' window displays the parsed input data, separated into columns, together with all the 'Curve Names', 'Curve Units', 'Curve Types', 'Load-into Set ' and 'Array size' and 'Array Index' settings.

Section 5.1 Load Data from an External Source : Load External Curve Data

Load Data from an External Source

Senergy

214

The Depth / Time Index 'Depth' / 'Time' Curve Units - For wells whose data is defined in terms of 'Depth', whether that is Measured Depth (MD) or True Vertical Depth (TVD or TVDSS) the depth curve must be labelled 'DEPTH' in the input 'Curve Name' box, but it does not have to be in the first column in the input file. For 'Time' indexed wells, the time curve must be labelled 'TIME'. The units for the ' DEPTH' or 'TIME' column are used to determine whether the depth needs to be converted to match the current well depths before loading. The units box should be 'M' for file depths in metres, 'FT' for file depths in feet, 'MS' for times in milliseconds and 'SEC' for times in seconds.

'Array Size' and 'Array Index' Selection The 'Array Size' row in the Formatting 'grid' allows the user to define the dimensions of the data in an array–type input file. A 'normal' curve, for example 'GR', would have an 'X dimension' of 1 and 'Z dimension' of 1. A Water Saturation (Sw) array file, for example, like that illustrated below, has an 'X dimension' of 6, (there are 6 columns of Sw and 6 columns of Pc values). A 'Z dimension' has to be chosen that will allow all plug depths to be saved into the array curve. Too low a 'Z dimension' and some closely spaced plugs will not get saved into the array. However, if the set into which the data is to be loaded has an 'irregular' step then the 'Z dimension' can be left at 1. As the IP 'Z dimension' will match the input dataset 'Z dimension'. 'Array Index' - the user should also define the array dimensions of the input data using the ' Array Index' row of the Formatted Data 'grid'. Using the same Water Saturation (Sw) example input file, you would type in the array index numbers for the Pc and Sw columns as shown below.

Loading Array Data Loading Capillary Pressure Data as Arrays: Capillary pressure data can also be loaded in the manner described here. The workflow is explained, using the example array data file illustrated below, which contains 2 curves 'Phi' and 'Gd' which are 'normal' one-dimensional curves and 2 two-dimensional arrays 'Sw' and 'Pc', each with six array elements. The data will be loaded into an 'irregular' step set which will keep the same depths as the original dataset.

Section 5.1 Load Data from an External Source : Load External Curve Data

215 Dept

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Phi

Gd

Sw

Pc

dec

gm/

dec

psi

h m

cc

209

1

2

3

4

5

6

1

2

3

4

5

6

0.2

2.68

1

0.8

0.6

0.4

0.2

0.1

0

5

10

20

50

60

0.18

2.64

1

0.95

0.64

0.42

0.22

0.11

0

5

10

20

50

60

0.16

2.66

1

0.92

0.63

0.53

0.23

0.13

0

5

10

20

50

60

0.15

2.69

1

0.88

0.62

0.49

0.29

0.19

0

5

10

20

50

60

1.2 209 3.6 209 4.5 209 5.7

1. Select the ASCII file containing the array data and, when the 'ASCII Load' module launches, the data panel at the bottom of the window is populated with the selected file. 2. Select the appropriate formatting separator ('Space', 'tab' etc..) for the input file. 3. Select the 'Data Starts at line' number and click 'Apply'. 4. If the data file contains curve names and curve units lines, set these numbers and click the associated 'Apply' buttons. The 'Formatted Data' panel will show all the data columns in the 'grid'. 5. Set the 'Default Load Set' to the required Curve Set by using the 'drop down' menu. If the required set does not exist then create it by using the 'Edit Sets' button. For this dataset an 'irregular' spaced step set will be used. 6. Examine the file and determine the dimensions of the required arrays. In the example, the Sw and Pc data each have 6 array elements (6 columns of data).

Section 5.1 Load Data from an External Source : Load External Curve Data

Senergy

Load Data from an External Source

216

7. Set the 'Array Size' in the first column of the 'Sw' data block, by clicking in the 'Array Size' cell in that column. A dialog pops up which allows you to set the 'Curve Dimensions'. The 'X Dimension' should equal the number of columns of data in the array. The 'Z Dimension ' setting can be used to load array data at a smaller depth increment than the current 'well step'. However, as the set into which the data will be loaded has an 'irregular' step then this 'Z Dimension' can be left at 1. Set the dimensions of any other arrays in the input ASCII file, 'Pc' in this example. See the examples given below: 8. On clicking the 'Load' button, IP will create the 'Pc' and 'Sw' arrays with dimensions based on the indices typed into the 'Array Index' row. This can be confirmed by looking at the ' Manage Log Curve Headers' module, 'Statistics' tab, as illustrated below:

If the data is viewed using 'View - Curve Listing / Curve Edit' and the 'Expand Array Data' box ticked, it can be seen that the imported data has the same depths as the original dataset.

Section 5.1 Load Data from an External Source : Load External Curve Data

217

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Operations Buttons The Operations buttons, located at the bottom of the user-interface are described below: Click the 'Load' button to load the ASCII data. The data will be loaded to the closest sample increment in the well. If a line cannot be read, then the program will skip it and proceed to the next line. Data can be in any depth order in the file. 'New File' - this allows the user to choose another file to load. 'Save Format' - the user can save the format of the file to disk. This is useful if one has a lot of files to load, with exactly the same format, which cannot be formatted automatically by the program. 'Load Format' - this will load the saved format. The 'Create New Well' button allows the user to create a new IP well and then sets this newly-created well as the well to load the ASCII data into. The 'Set Well' button sets the ASCII-read well 'focus'. This will be the well name into which the curve data will be loaded and is the Well name that is displayed at the top of the 'ASCII Load' window. The button can be used to load several ASCII files into different wells without having to close the window and re-open it. The user changes the well focus on the primary IP window by using the 'Well Navigation' buttons on the IP Toolbar and then 'clicks' the 'Set Well' button on the 'ASCII Load' window.

Overwriting Existing Curves in IP If the user loads a number of files to IP which contain data with the same curve mnemonics they will be prompted that 'Curve XXXX already exists. OK to overwrite ?'. The 'Overwrite' function in IP actually performs a 'replace and concatenate' operation, in effect an Auto-Splice, NOT a replace the existing curve with new data. This is illustrated below: Two ASCII files containing core porosity/permeability data with a common depth point at 3610M depth. CORE1.txt is loaded and the data displayed in IP. The CORE2.txt file is loaded and the 'Warning' message appears. Selecting 'Yes' or 'All' will allow IP to replace the common data point at 3610 M and add/concatenate the new data points to the existing curve.

Section 5.1 Load Data from an External Source : Load External Curve Data

Load Data from an External Source

Senergy

218

If the user wants to completely replace the existing curve with a new curve you must first 'delete' the existing curve from the IP database and then load the new curve from an external file.

Related Topics ASCII Load LAS / LBS Load LAS3 Load LIS Load DLIS Load DBASE4 Load LAS Batch Load

5.1.2

LAS / LBS Load

The 'LAS / LBS Load' module launches a 'Windows Explorer' dialog which is used to locate the 'file-to-load'. Select the 'file-to-load' from the 'browse' window. The selected LAS / LBS Format file will be loaded into the interface shown below. The program will load either 'wrapped' or 'unwrapped' LAS data from version 1.2 and 2.0 LAS files as well as LBS files. LBS are LAS files with the data encoded in binary format. The file name

Section 5.1 Load Data from an External Source : Load External Curve Data

219

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

being loaded is shown in the 'LAS/LBS Load' header bar, as illustrated below. The 'LAS/LBS Load' window is launched. This interface allows the user to select the curves to load into IP. It is now possible to load multiple datasets with different step sizes from individual wells or from multi-wells all from within the same LAS file.

The 'Embedded LAS Sequences' window allows the user to see if the LAS file that they have loaded is a concatenated LAS files. If it is then the LAS files will be listed in this window. By 'clicking' on each file in turn, the contents of the LAS file are displayed. Changes can be made before loading the data and moving onto the next concatenated file. By default, on loading a new LAS file into the interface, all curve rows have the 'Load' column 'checked', which flags these curves to be loaded into IP. You can manually 'un-check' curve names you do not wish to load. Clicking in the 'Load' Column header toggles between 'all selected' and 'none selected' states. If a few data rows are 'checked' and you click in the column

Section 5.1 Load Data from an External Source : Load External Curve Data

Load Data from an External Source

Senergy

220

header, the 'Load' selection is reversed. The first curve in the list, which should be 'Depth', does not need to be selected, since the data will be aligned to the primary depth curve that is defined by the 'Interval to Load (MD)' and 'IP Well Step', which are picked from the LAS file header data section. Depth data can be in feet in the LAS file and loaded into a metric depth units well. You can load part of the file by defining the interval under 'Interval to Load (MD)'. The 'Interval to Load (MD)' Top Depth / Bottom Depth, or Times, values will be in the 'IP Well Units', regardless of what units the file is recorded in.

NOTE: If the LAS file contains a Time of Day well and not a Depth Well, the Interval to Load will display the Date and Time Interval for the Time of Day Well. See also: Import a LAS/LBS Datas file into a Time of Day Well

If the 'Interval to Load (MD)' extends outside the IP wells depth range the following message will be displayed.

If 'Yes' is selected then the 'Well Depths Editor' module will be launched so that the well can be extended. For 'time data' wells, the depth units can be set to either seconds or milliseconds. The

Section 5.1 Load Data from an External Source : Load External Curve Data

221

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

primary input curve should be called 'TIME'. The 'IP Name' column lists all the curve names in the selected LAS File. You may manually change the curve name by typing in new text. Alternatively, a 'Curve Alias Defaults' file can be set up to load curves from various data sources / logging service companies to a common set of IP curve names. See the 'Tools'

'Defaults'

'Edit Curve Alias

Defaults' module. This is useful, for example, if the user has a corporate log naming convention and wants to load curves from external sources using the corporate mnemonics. The 'Units' name for a particular curve is picked up from the LAS file. You may manually change the curve 'Units' by typing in new text. If the user wishes to load data files that do not contain a 'Depth' curve, this can be achieved by setting the 'Reference Depth Curve' to the appropriate curve (TVDSS or TVD) included on the LAS file. Curves will be loaded in 'TVD' or 'TVDSS' mode. The 'Type' column allows the user to select the generic 'Curve Type' that is loaded for the input curve. 'Curve types' are used in IP to help with the auto-selection of curves and display criteria used in many interpretation modules. These can be set later in the 'Manage Curve Headers' screen. The default 'Curve Type' for each input curve is looked up in the CPARMDEF.PAR file in the IP Program directory, when the file is scanned. If a curve name entry is found in this external file, the curve display properties will be set up at load time.

'Load LAS Parameters' - if the 'Load LAS Parameters' box (top right-hand corner of the interface) is 'checked', then the well name and mud resistivity data will be loaded (if available in the LAS file). Two radio buttons control where, in the IP 'Manage Well Header Info.' module the LAS well parameters are stored.The options are: 1. 'Use Run # from file' - if selected, the LAS parameters are matched to the exact 'Run Number' column of the 'Logging' tab in the 'Manage Well Header Info.' module. 2. 'Start at Run' - if selected, allows you to manually type in a log 'Run Number' to populate with the LAS parameters. If the selected LAS file was created from an older version of IP (pre.V3.3) where the 'Write well parameters' option had been chosen, default curve display properties would be picked up from

Section 5.1 Load Data from an External Source : Load External Curve Data

Load Data from an External Source

Senergy

222

the file, in preference to the 'defaults' defined in either the CPARMDEF.PAR or CPARMDEF_USER.PAR files at load time if 'Load LAS Parameters' is 'checked'. If the selected LAS File was created by IP, and the 'Use Set Names' option was used in the export operation, IP will recreate the appropriate curve Sets when such a file is loaded back into IP. 'Add to Curve Name' - the 'Add to Curve Name' options of 'Prefix' or 'Extension' allow the user to add an extension to the names of all the curves to be loaded (for example, add a '1' to the curve names to denote they come from log run 1). Type the Prefix / Extension into the appropriate box and click 'Add'. NOTE: curve names with more than 10 characters will be truncated to 10 characters.

'Fill Data Gaps' - the 'Fill data gaps' option, when 'checked' allows the module to automatically extrapolate across gaps in the input data during the 'Load' operation. This is useful, for example, if one is loading a one sample per foot file into a two sample per foot well. The 'Max Gap width' text entry box allows the user to set the maximum gap to be filled. The 'gap width' is defined in database sample increments.

'Default Load Set' - the 'Default Load Set' entry box allows the user to individually select which Curve 'Set' to load the LAS/LBS data into. This can be set simultaneously for all curves, by selecting the required 'Set Name' from the 'Default Load Set' drop-down list. The 'Edit Sets' button allows the user to create new Curve Sets using the 'Manage Curve Sets' module. If a new Set Name is created, the user is prompted to use this Set to load all curves into. A dialog similar to the following screen capture is launched. Click 'Yes' to set the new Curve Set for all curves to be imported.

Section 5.1 Load Data from an External Source : Load External Curve Data

223

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

'Sort Alphabetically' - 'checking' this box will sort the curves in the LAS file in alphabetic order / 'unchecking' the box will reset the list to the LAS file curve order. 'Sort Using Curve Type' - if Curve 'Types' (generic names) are recognized, IP will sort the curves in ascending alphabetic order, according to their curve type. The 'Load' button loads the selected LAS data into IP. The 'New File' Button - this button can be used to select a new LAS file to load, without having to close the module and open it again. The 'Create New Well' Button - this button allows the user to create a new IP well and then sets this newly-created well as the well to load the LAS data into. The 'Set Well' button sets the LAS-Load well 'focus'. This will be the well name into which the curve data will be loaded and is the Well name that is displayed at the top of the 'LAS Load' window. The button can be used to load several LAS files into different wells without having to close the 'LAS Load' window and re-open it. The user changes the well focus on the main IP window by using the 'Select Well to Display' options and then 'clicks' the 'Set Well' button on the 'LAS Load' window. NOTE: It is possible to use the 'LAS Load' module to create a primary 'reference depth curve' without having a LAS file to load. To do this, click 'Cancel' when asked which file to load. On the 'LAS Load' window, shown above, enter the interval, step, and units for the desired primary depth curve.

Overwriting Existing Curves in IP If the user loads a number of files to IP which contain data with the same curve mnemonics they will be prompted that 'Curve XXXX already exists. OK to overwrite ?'. The 'Overwrite' function in IP actually performs a 'replace and concatenate' operation, in effect an 'Auto-Splice', NOT a 'replace whole of existing curve with new data'. For example: An IP well has a GDCORE curve loaded over the depth interval 0-3000 ft A second LAS file is loaded containing a curve GDCORE over the depth range 2500-6000ft On loading the second file the following 'Warning' message appears.

Section 5.1 Load Data from an External Source : Load External Curve Data

Load Data from an External Source

Senergy

224

Selecting Overwrite or 'All' (if there are other curves with existing versions) will prompt IP to replace the existing GDCORE curve from 2500-3000 ft with data from the new curve and to add/concatenate the new GR data from 3000-6000 ft to the existing curve. If the user wants to completely replace the existing curve with a new curve you must first 'delete' the existing curve from the IP database and then load the new curve from an external file.

Related Topics ASCII Load LAS / LBS Load LAS3 Load LIS Load DLIS Load DBASE4 Load LAS Batch Load

5.1.3

Load LAS3 Data

The module allows the user to load LAS3 format data files into IP. LAS3 data files are able to store well data, such as core plug analysis results, DST Test results, Formation Tops in addition to log curves, in the same file. Data is partitioned .... See the Canadian Well Log Association website (http://cwls.org/las_info.php) for a full description of the LAS3 standard. It can also be used to load LAS files. NOTE: this loader can not handle concatenated LAS files. Use the 'LAS/ LBS Load' for this. From 'Input / Output'

'Load Data'

'LAS3 Load', the module can be opened. The first

window to be launched is a 'Select LAS/LAS3 file' dialog from which the user can browse to the appropriate folder / file name to be loaded. After selecting a data file to load, the main 'LAS3 Load' interface is launched.

Section 5.1 Load Data from an External Source : Load External Curve Data

225

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

To Import Wells - drag/drop the 'Well', using the left-hand mouse button, from the right-hand 'Tree' view panel into the upper, 'Wells to Import' panel. Alternatively right-mouse-click on a well name and click the 'Add' button that appears on-screen. IP will read the LAS/LAS3 entries and will show a similar status window as that illustrated below while it is reading the file. The user has the option to terminate the 'import' operation at any time by clicking the 'Cancel' button. The 'import' operation will populate the 'Wells to Import' panel with the LAS/LAS3 well names. All the available LAS/LAS3 curves will be listed in the 'Curves to Import' list.

To Load Curves - drag/drop the individual curve names from the 'Tree' view panel into the

Section 5.1 Load Data from an External Source : Load External Curve Data

Load Data from an External Source

Senergy

226

lower, 'Curves to Import' panel. Alternatively, right-mouse-button-click on a curve name and click the 'Add' button that appears on-screen. The 'Curves to Import' panel will populate with the selected curves. To load all the curves for a selected well then drag/drop the 'Curve' title into the 'Curves to Import' panel. To Edit Imported Well Details - before importing the selected data into IP, the user may want to edit the well name or well details. This is achieved by right mouse button 'clicking' on the 'IP Well Name' in the 'Wells to Import' panel. A 'Properties' box appears. Select this and an 'External DB Well Properties' window opens up.

Any of the 'External Well' details can be changed by the user. When 'Apply' is 'clicked' then these changes are seen in the 'IP Well' column. The user can choose to leave all the well details as they are, in which case a new IP database well with the 'External Well' name will be created in the current IP database, or, if the LAS/LAS3 well already has a corresponding IP well name entry, that well can be selected from the well

Section 5.1 Load Data from an External Source : Load External Curve Data

227

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

drop-down list at the top of the screen. In this case, imported log curves will be written to the IP well, into the user-selected curve set. To Edit Imported Curve Details - individual log curve properties can be viewed in the 'Curves to Import' panel by right-mouse-button clicking on a curve name. The following dialog will be launched:

If you wish to make changes to the curve properties, make them in this dialog and click 'OK'. The 'Curves to Import' panel entry will update to reflect the changes made.

The 'Operations' buttons 'Load All' - the 'Load All' button will execute the import operation of wells / sets and curves from the LAS/LAS3 file into IP. 'Remove All' - the 'Remove All' button clears all the wells and log curves from the two right-hand panels of the 'Import into IP' screen.

External Database Interface 'Check-box' Options The following import options can be 'checked' / 'un-checked' on the 'Import into IP' tab in order to manage the way Well and Curves data are brought into IP from the LAS/LAS3 file:

'Overwrite Existing Curves'- if 'checked', when importing a curve or curves from the LAS/ LAS3 file into an existing IP well where the identical curve name(s) exist, the LAS/LAS3 file curves will overwrite the existing data in IP. If 'un-checked' the user will be warned that an identical curve name already exists in the IP well.

Section 5.1 Load Data from an External Source : Load External Curve Data

Load Data from an External Source

Senergy

228

'Use "Load Into Set" option' - if 'checked' and the curves are being imported to an existing IP well, the import operation will ignore the LAS/LAS3 file curve Set names and will write the imported curves into the user-selected IP curve Set (set up from the Well 'Properties' window). If the box is left 'un-checked', the LAS/LAS3 file curve Sets will be created in the IP database and curves will be loaded into them. 'Fill Gaps' - if 'checked', IP will automatically extrapolate across any small (up to 5 depth increments) data gaps existing in the imported curves during the import operation. If the user wishes to copy Core analysis data (e.g.Core porosity, Core grain density, Permeability) then the 'Fill Gaps' option should be left 'un-checked'. Importing continuous log curves and discrete core analysis data from LAS/LAS3 file to IP would therefore require a two step import operation, with 'Fill Gap' switched 'on' for continuous logs and 'off' for core data. 'Link Zones' - if 'checked', IP will import LAS/LAS3 file Tops information and link the entries to make a continuous IP Zone Set where the base of one formation is automatically taken as the next deepest Formation Top depth.

Related Topics ASCII Load LAS / LBS Load LAS3 Load LIS Load DLIS Load DBASE4 Load LAS Batch Load

5.1.4

Load LIS Data

The LIS Load module imports LIS (Log Information Standard) binary data into Interactive Petrophysics Curves. The 'LIS Load' module launches a 'Windows Explorer' dialog which is used to locate the 'file-to-load'. Select the 'file-to-load' from the 'browse' window. The selected LIS file will be scanned and the following window will then be displayed:

Section 5.1 Load Data from an External Source : Load External Curve Data

229

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The selected LIS File name is displayed in the 'LIS Load' dialog header, in the top left hand corner of the window, next to the Well name. The LIS 'File Scan' can be viewed or printed by 'clicking' the 'Print scan report' or 'View Scan' buttons, respectively. Listings can either be: 'Short' : containing only curve names and intervals, or 'Long' : containing a full listing of the LIS file structure. The 'show comments' check box, if 'checked', will include any comments found in the LIS file, in the short listing. A file 'LISscan.log' is automatically created in the project directory, which contains the results of the last LIS scan. The following is an example of a short listing of the above file, produced by clicking the 'View Scan' button:

Section 5.1 Load Data from an External Source : Load External Curve Data

Load Data from an External Source

Senergy

230

The internal LIS file sequences will be displayed in the box called 'Select File Sequence' on the right hand panel of the 'LIS Load' window . 'Click' on the file sequence row in the 'Select File Sequence' you wish to 'view' or 'load'. The curves in the selected file sequence will be displayed in the left hand 'grid' panel. Select the curves to load by clicking the 'Load' 'cell' opposite the curve name. By clicking the ' Load' label at the top of the right hand column the user can toggle between 'select all curves' and 'de-select all curves'. The 'Load' column is useful if the user only wants to load one or two curves out of a long list. Input curve names or curve units can be changed, during loading, by manually editing the 'IP Name' or 'Units' columns. A 'Curve Alias Defaults' file can be set up to load curves from various data sources / logging service companies to a common set of IP curve names. See the ' Tools'

'Defaults'

'Edit Curve Alias Defaults' module. This is useful, for example, if the

user has a corporate log naming convention and wants to load curves from external sources using the corporate mnemonics. By 'checking' the 'Append to curve Name - Service ID' box, the curve service ID (see full scan) will be appended to the 'IP Name'. The service ID is used in several programs, including IP, to extend the length of the curve name from four characters (LIS format limits curve names to four characters). All characters, from the 4th character onwards, are put into the service ID. Curve Sorting - Curve names in the Load 'grid' panel can be sorted either using the 'Sort Curves Alphabetically' check box or the 'Sort Curves using Curve Type' check box. These options may help in selecting a few required curves from a long list of available curves in the input LIS file. For example, If the user has set up the curve defaults file, CPARMDEF.PAR (See 'Tools'

'Defaults'

'Edit Curve System Defaults') to pick up

required curve names and has assigned curve 'Types', then IP will map the curve types to recognized curve names. Using the 'Sort Curves using Curve Type' check box will quickly 'filter' these curves from all those stored in the input file. Curve Type - The 'Type' column allows the user to select the curve type that is loaded for the input curve. Curve types are used in IP to help with the auto-selection of curves used in some modules. These can be set later in the 'Manage Curve Headers'. The default curve type for each input curve is looked up when the file is scanned. Curve Load Set - The 'Default Load Set' entry box allows the user to individually select which Curve 'Set' to load the LIS data into. This can be set simultaneously for all curves, by selecting the required 'Set Name' from the 'Default Load Set' list. The 'Edit Sets' button allows the user to create new Curve Sets using the 'Manage Curve Sets' module. If a new Set Name is created, the user is prompted to use this Set to load all

Section 5.1 Load Data from an External Source : Load External Curve Data

231

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

curves into. A dialog similar to the following screen capture is launched. Click 'Yes' to set the new Curve Set for all curves to be imported.

The 'Curve Step' drop down box allows the step to be selected for when populating the ' Load Set' column using the 'Default Load Set' drop down control. The 'Prefix' box is used when creating automatic set names. The set name will include this text (LIS_*)plus a numeric value in order to make it unique. 'Auto. New Sets' button is used to create a new set for each different step interval in the well. The set name will include whatever is in the 'Prefix' box plus a numeric value. Some curves in LIS files contain higher sample rate data that the normal frame spacing. The part listing, below, of a full scan shows this: Curve Name BS CS AVCL SCNL NPOR C1 C2

Service ID OBDTAB OBDTAB OBDTAB OBDTAB OBDTAB OBDTAB OBDTAB

Units File # IN 59 F/HR 59 V 59 59 PU 59 IN 59 IN 59

Size Byte 4 4 20 2 4 16 16

Num Rep Samp Code 1 68 1 68 1 68 1 79 1 68 4 68 4 68

The 'Rep' column displays the 'repeat count' of a curve in each frame of data. This packing of multiple values into the same frame is used for array data. If an array curve is selected to be loaded into IP then a similar, dimensioned array curve will be created. The 'Num Samp' column contains the number of samples per frame. The user can see that curves BS and CS have 1 sample per frame while curves C1 and C2 have 4 samples. The AVCL curve in the above example is in fact an array data curve with 5 samples in the array. This can be determined by looking at the Size Byte for the curve (20) and dividing this by the storage size for each value (4 bytes, Rep code 68). The 'IP Well Units' and 'IP Well Step' boxes are used to set the IP well database units and 'Step' if they have not been set up when the well was created. The 'Top Depth' and 'Bottom Depth' boxes are used to define the IP well depth range if it is not already defined.

Section 5.1 Load Data from an External Source : Load External Curve Data

Senergy

Load Data from an External Source

232

The user can manually type in the depth Interval to load using the 'Top Depth' and 'Bottom Depth' boxes, or 'double click' on a file sequence row will launch the following dialog:

This allows the actual file sequence depth range to be used as the 'Interval to Load'. Depth data can be in feet in the file and loaded into a metric depth units well. The user can load part of the file by defining the interval under 'Interval to Load'. The interval-to-load depth units will be in the well depth units, regardless of what units the file is recorded in. If the 'Interval to Load' extends outside the well interval the following message will be displayed.

If 'Yes' is selected then the 'Well Depths Editor' module will be launched so that the well can be extended. The 'IP Well Name' box allows the setting or editing of the well name. The 'Well Comment' (see

Section 5.1 Load Data from an External Source : Load External Curve Data

233

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

'Manage Well Header Info.') can be set from the well name box by placing a colon, with a space before and after, ( : ) after the well name and appending the well comment after the colon. For example '14/19-23 : Preliminary' will create a well name of '14/19-23' with a well comment of 'Preliminary'. The 'Load LIS Parameters' check box will allow the loading of any recognised parameters found in the LIS file. The 'Which Run' box allows the user to select which logging run the parameter data will be loaded into (see Manage Well Header Info.). The following table shows the LIS parameters currently recognized and loaded to IP by default. This list is user-editable from the ' Tools'

'Options'

'Well Attributes' and 'Log Attributes' modules.

Section 5.1 Load Data from an External Source : Load External Curve Data

Senergy

Load Data from an External Source

234

'Fill Data Gaps' - the 'Fill Data Gaps' check box will extrapolate the curve data over null

Section 5.1 Load Data from an External Source : Load External Curve Data

235

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

data gaps when loading. If not 'checked' this same function can be performed using the 'Fill Data Gaps' module. If the user wants to add an extension to the name of all the curves (e.g. add a '1' to the curve names to denote they come from log run 1), then type the extension in the 'Extension' box and click 'Add'. The 'OK' button will load the specified curves into the specified well and sets. 'New File' - this allows the user to choose another file to load. The 'Create New Well' button allows the user to create a new IP well and then sets this newly-created well as the well to load the LIS data into. The 'Set Well' button sets the LIS-Load well 'focus'. This will be the well name into which the curve data will be loaded and is the Well name that is displayed at the top of the 'LIS Load' window. The button can be used to load several LIS files into different wells without having to close the window and re-open it. The user changes the well focus on the primary IP window by using the 'Select Well to Display' options and then 'clicks' the 'Set Well' button on the 'LIS Load' window.

Overwriting Existing Curves in IP If the user loads a number of files to IP, which contain data with the same curve mnemonics they will be prompted that 'Curve XXXX already exists. OK to overwrite ?'. The 'Overwrite' function in IP actually performs a 'replace and concatenate' operation, in effect an 'Auto-Splice', NOT a 'replace whole of existing curve with new data'. For example: An IP well has a GDCORE curve loaded over the depth interval 0-3000 ft A second LAS file is loaded containing a curve GDCORE over the depth range 2500-6000ft On loading the second file the following 'Warning' message appears.

Selecting 'Yes' or 'All' (if there are other curves with existing versions) will prompt IP to replace the existing GR curve from 2500-3000 ft and add/concatenate the new GR data from 30006000 ft to the existing curve.

Section 5.1 Load Data from an External Source : Load External Curve Data

Load Data from an External Source

Senergy

236

If the user wants to completely replace the existing curve with a new curve you must first delete the existing curve from the IP database and then load the new curve from an external file.

Related Topics ASCII Load LAS / LBS Load LAS3 Load LIS Load DLIS Load DBASE4 Load LAS Batch Load

5.1.5

Load DLIS Data

The DLIS Load module imports DLIS (Digital Log Interchange Standard) binary data into Interactive Petrophysics Curves. To load a DLIS Data file into Interactive Petrophysics: From the Input/Output Menu, Select Load, DLIS Loader New to display the New DLIS Loader. Click Add Files to Locate and Open the required DLIS file. The DLIS Data file will be displayed in the Upper Pane of the New DLIS Loader (see below). NOTE: To display the Curves in the Lower Pane for the required DLIS Data file, click the required file in the Upper pane.

NOTE: Scanning the DLIS file can take some time, depending on the size of the file. The curve names in the DLIS file are displayed in the lower pane of the New DLIS Load window. The user

Section 5.1 Load Data from an External Source : Load External Curve Data

237

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

can view or print the DLIS scan results by clicking the 'Report Button' which then displays the Verification Listing Window. If curves have been encrypted by the logging company then they will appear with an 'x' in the ' Load' column. They will NOT be loaded into the IP database along with the other selected curves. Contact the logging company to get the curves unencrypted.

The 'DLIS File' will be displayed in the upper panel on the right of the 'DLIS Load' window. 'Click' on the file you wish to view or load. The curves in the file will be displayed in the lower pane of the New DLIS Loader.

Overwriting Existing Curves in IP If the user loads a number of files to IP which contain data with the same curve mnemonics they will be prompted that 'Curve XXXX already exists. OK to overwrite ?'.

The 'Overwrite' function in IP actually performs a 'replace and concatenate' operation, in effect an 'Auto-Splice', NOT a 'replace whole of existing curve with new data'. For example: An IP well has a GDCORE curve loaded over the depth interval 0-3000 ft A second DLIS file is loaded containing a curve GDCORE over the depth range 2500-6000ft On loading the second file a Warning Dialog will be displayed asking to Overwrite any Existing Curves.

Section 5.1 Load Data from an External Source : Load External Curve Data

Load Data from an External Source

Senergy

238

Selecting 'Yes' or 'All' (if there are other curves with existing versions) will prompt IP to replace the existing GDCORE curve from 2500-3000 ft and add/concatenate the new GDCORE data from 3000-6000 ft to the existing curve. If the user wants to completely replace the existing curve with a new curve you must first delete the existing curve from the IP database and then load the new curve from an external file.

Related Topics ASCII Load LAS / LBS Load LAS3 Load LIS Load DBASE4 Load LAS Batch Load 5.1.5.1

Specify Curves to Load

Specify Which Curves to Load into Interactive Petrophysics using the File Data Tab in the Lower Pane of the DLIS File Load Dialog. To select Curves for loading: Either manually 'check' the cells in the 'Load' column for each required curve Or Click the 'Load' label at the top of the right hand column the user can toggle between selecting / de-selecting all curves

Or, From the Filter Drop Down Menu, Select Load Mask to display the Select Mask File Dialog and Select a User Defined Mask File. NOTE: A mask file is a space-delimited text file, which lists the curve mnemonics to search for and an optional Interactive Petrophysics Display Name. The mask file has the file extension *.mask

Section 5.1 Load Data from an External Source : Load External Curve Data

239

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

All curves with names matching the mask entries will be shown in the curve list window. An example of a mask is shown below. Only the curve names and optional IP curve names are required: GR DT RHOZ RHOB

(looks for curve 'GR') (looks for curve 'DT') (looks for curve name RHOZ and loads it to IP as RHOB)

The 'Filter' drop-down list contains a number of masking options in addition to 'Load Mask': 'No Mask' - view all curves in the DLIS file. 'Selected' - if a number of masks have been applied and the curve 'Load' boxes have been 'checked', this will show the combined results of all the masks. 'IP Defaults' - if a curve name is known to IP, therefore having a default curve type (see ' Tools'

'Defaults'

'Edit Curve System Defaults') , that curve will, by default, be

'checked' to be loaded. Input curve names or curve units can be changed while loading, by editing the 'IP Name' or ' Units' columns. Alternatively, a 'Curve Alias Defaults' file can be set up to load curves from various data sources / logging service companies to a common set of IP curve names. See the ' Tools'

'Defaults'

'Edit Curve Alias Defaults' module. This is useful, for example, if the

user has a corporate log naming convention and wants to load curves from external sources using the corporate mnemonics. To remove any mask filters Select NO Mask from the Filter Drop Down Menu. The 'Description' column allows the user to see the curve description that accompanies the curve from the vendors DLIS file. The column width can be varied so that the whole description can be seen. The 'Type' column allows the user to select the curve type that is loaded for the input curve. Curve types are used in IP to help with the auto-selection of curves used in some modules. These can be set later in the 'Manage Curve Headers' module. The default curve type for each input curve is looked up when the file is scanned. The 'Load Set' column allows the user to individually select which curve set to load the data

Section 5.1 Load Data from an External Source : Load External Curve Data

Load Data from an External Source

Senergy

240

into. This can be changed for all curves at the same time by selecting the required Set from the 'Default Load Set' box. The 'Edit Sets' button allows the user to create new Sets using the ' Manage Curve Sets' module. The 'Vals' column displays the repeat count of a curve in each frame of data. This packing of multiple values into the same frame is used for array data (eg FMI image data curves). If an array curve is flagged to be loaded into IP, then a similarly dimensioned array curve will be created. 'Step' - DLIS files can contain data at various depth sample rates. The SCAN illustrated above, shows nine indices these are : 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

6 inches 1 inch 0.5 inches 3 inches 12 inches 18 inches 0.1 inches 0.2 inches 2 inches

(60 x 0.1") (10 * 0.1"). (5 * 0.1"). (30 * 0.1"). (120 * 0.1"). (180 * 0.1"). (1 * 0.1"). (2 * 0.1"). (20 * 0.1").

This spacing is also included on the DLIS load screen under the 'Step' column.

The 'IP Well Units' and 'IP Well Step' boxes are used to set the IP well database units and step if they have not been set up when the well was created. The 'Top Depth' and 'Bottom Depth' boxes are used to define the IP well interval if not already defined. Otherwise they will define the interval in the DLIS file over which to attempt the data load. Depth data can be in imperial units in the file and be loaded into a metric depth units well. The user can load part of the file by defining the interval under 'Interval to Load'. The interval to load depth units will be in the 'well depth units' regardless of what units the file is recorded in. If the ' Interval to Load' extends outside the well depth range the following message will be displayed.

If 'Yes' is selected then the 'Well Depths Editor' module will be launched so that the well can be extended.

Section 5.1 Load Data from an External Source : Load External Curve Data

241

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

If the user wants to add an extension to the name of all the curves (e.g. add a '1' to the curve names to denote they come from log run 1), then type the extension in the 'Add Extension to curve name' box and click 'Add'. The 'IP Well Name' box allows the setting or editing of the well name. The 'Well Comment' (see 'Manage Well Header Info.') can be set from the well name box by placing a colon, with a space before and after, ( : ) after the well name and appending the well comment after the colon. For example '14/19-23 : Preliminary' will create a well name of '14/19-23' with a well comment of 'Preliminary'. 'Load DLIS Parameters' - the 'Load DLIS Parameters' check box will allow the loading of any recognised parameters found in the DLIS file. The 'Use Run # from file' box allows the user to select which logging Run the parameter data will be loaded into (see Manage Well Header Info. 'Logging' tab) or the user can use the 'Start at Run' box to enter a run number that the DLIS data is to be loaded into. 'Fill Data Gaps' - the 'Fill Data Gaps' check box will extrapolate the curve data over null data gaps when loading. If not 'checked' this same function can be performed using the 'Fill Data Gaps' module. The 'Curve Step' drop down box allows the step to be selected for when populating the 'Load Set' column using the 'Default Load Set' drop down control. The 'Prefix' box is used when creating automatic set names. The set name will include this text (DLIS_*)plus a numeric value in order to make it unique. 'Auto. New Sets' button is used to create a new set for each different step interval in the well. The set name will include the entry in the 'Prefix' box plus the DLIS file 'Frame Name' for each step interval (which can be viewed using a DLIS Viewer in the Frame Summary section of the DLIS File). [Note: The DLIS standard groups all curves with the same step interval into 'Frames'] The 'OK' button will load the specified curves into the specified well and sets. If the user decides not to go ahead with the load once the 'OK' button has been 'clicked' then a 'Cancel ' button' is now available. 'New File' - this allows the user to choose another DLIS file to load. The 'Create New Well' button allows the user to create a new IP well and then sets this newly-created well as the well to load the LIS data into. The 'Set Well' button sets the DLIS read well focus. This is the well that is displayed at the top of the DLIS read window. The button can be used to load several DLIS files into different wells without having to close the window and re-open it. The user changes the well focus on

Section 5.1 Load Data from an External Source : Load External Curve Data

Load Data from an External Source

Senergy

242

the primary IP window by using the 'Select Well to Display' options and then clicks the 'Set Well' button on the DLIS read window.

Related Topics Load DLIS Data Load the DLIS Data Define DLIS File Load Options Display the DLIS Header Information Define DLIS File Global Options Load Multiple DLIS Files

5.1.5.2

Define DLIS File Load Options

Generic and Curve Set Options can be defined for the DLIS File Load Process using the File Options Tab in the Lower Pane of the DLIS Load Dialog. From the Lower Pane of the New DLIS Loader , Select the File Options Tab to display the File Options for the Selected DLIS File.

Automatically use Frames to Create New Curve Sets enables Curve Sets with a Specific Prefix to be created when the DLIS file is Loaded into the Interactive Petrophysics Database. NOTE If this is Selected the Curve Step and Load Set Options are unvailable. If this is NOT Selected the Curve Step and Any Existing Sets from the DLIS Data File can be selected from this section. Select the required Curve Step and Load Set to add to the DLIS Data Load.

Section 5.1 Load Data from an External Source : Load External Curve Data

243

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The following General Options can be either Selected or De-Selected. Extend the Well Interval if the Curves are Outside the Depth Range If the Depth Range for the Well in the DLIS Data File is greater than the Depth Range for the Well into which the data is being loaded, this will extend the Depth Range for the Well to accommodate the Depth Interval contained within the Well in the DLIS Data File. Extend the Set Interval if the Curves are Outside the Depth Range If the Depth Range for the Curve Set in the DLIS Data File is greater than the Depth Range for the Curve Set into which the data is being loaded, this will extend the Depth Range for the Curve Set to accommodate the Depth Interval contained within the Curve Set in the DLIS Data File. Load Curves with a High Sample Rate as Array Data High-rate sampling curves can be loaded into IP as Array Data Curves with more than one depth sample per database depth increment. If a high sample rate curve is detected then the 'Vals' column value will be >1. If this option is selected then all High rate Sampled Curves will be loaded as Array Data Curves. If the newly loaded curve names match existing curve names, Interactive Petrophysics offers the following choices: Ignore If the Curve Names match existing Curve Names, then the matching Curves will not be loaded. Insert New Data into the Existing Curve If the Curve Names match existing Curve Names, the new data will be loaded into the existing Curve. Create a New Curve with a Numerical Suffix If the Curve Names match existing Curve Names then a New Curve will be created with a Numerical Suffix.

Related Topics Load DLIS Data Specify Curves to Load Load the DLIS Data Display the DLIS Header Information

Section 5.1 Load Data from an External Source : Load External Curve Data

Load Data from an External Source

Senergy

244

Define DLIS File Global Options Load Multiple DLIS Files 5.1.5.3

Load the DLIS Data

Once the DLIS Load Parameters and File Options have been defined, the DLIS Load Process is launched by clicking the Next Button in the DLIS Load Dialog. Click the Next Button to display the Validation Window, listing all the required Actions to Load the DLIS Data.

Click Finish to Display the DLIS Load Progress Window.

Once the Load is complete, Click Done to Close the New DLIS Loader and make the Loaded

Section 5.1 Load Data from an External Source : Load External Curve Data

245

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Well(s) available to be displayed in the Database Browser. See Load Wells from Database.

Related Topics Load DLIS Data Specify Curves to Load Define DLIS File Load Options Display the DLIS Header Information Define DLIS File Global Options Load Multiple DLIS Files 5.1.5.4

Display the DLIS Header Information

The Upper Pane of the DLIS Load Dialog contains the Header Information for the Selected DLIS File(s). To Display the DLIS File Header Information: Load a DLIS File into the New DLIS Loader Either Hover the Mouse Button over the DLIS File in the Upper Pane to display the DLIS File Header Information.

Section 5.1 Load Data from an External Source : Load External Curve Data

Load Data from an External Source

Senergy

246

Or Right Click the DLIS File in the Upper Pane or and Select Browse File to display the DLIS File Header Information Dialog. Or Double Click the DLIS File in the Uppoer Pane to display the DLIS File Header Information Dialog.

Related Topics Load DLIS Data Specify Curves to Load Load the DLIS Data Define DLIS File Load Options Define DLIS File Global Options Load Multiple DLIS Files

Section 5.1 Load Data from an External Source : Load External Curve Data

247 5.1.5.5

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Define DLIS File Global Options

From the Upper Pane of the New DLIS Loader, Click the Options Button to display the GLOBAL Options Dialog.

Import Settings: Create a New Set for each File Sequence, Select to Create a New Set for each DLIS File to be loaded. Prefix: Specify a Prefix for DLIS Files to be loaded.

User Interface Settings: Show Tool Tips: Displays Tool Tips in the DLIS Load Dialog. Automatically Select the Active Well: Automatically Selects the Active Well in the DLIS Load Dialog.

Related Topics Load DLIS Data Specify Curves to Load Load the DLIS Data Define DLIS File Load Options Display the DLIS Header Information Load Multiple DLIS Files

Section 5.1 Load Data from an External Source : Load External Curve Data

Load Data from an External Source

Senergy 5.1.5.6

248

Load Multiple DLIS Files

The New DLIS Loader can be used to Load Multiple DLIS Data Files at once. Display the New DLIS Loader. Click Add Files and Select the First DLIS Data File. This file will appear in the Upper Pane of the New DLIS Loader. Repeat this step for each file you wish to include within the DLIS Data File Load.

Related Topics Load DLIS Data Specify Curves to Load Load the DLIS Data Define DLIS File Load Options Display the DLIS Header Information Define DLIS File Global Options

5.1.7

DBASE4 Load

The DBASE4 Load module loads Curve Data into Interactive Petrophysics from a DBASE4 Database. The user enters the DBASE 4 file name under the 'Database name' label and clicks ' Open' to open the database. The depths and curves in the database will be displayed. The ' Browse' button can be used to select the database.

Section 5.1 Load Data from an External Source : Load External Curve Data

249

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The user selects the curves and the depths to load and clicks 'Load' to load the data. If data is to be loaded into a new well then the depths, step and units set on the screen will define the well depths, step and units. If the well depths are already defined then the 'Top' and 'Bottom' boxes will define the data interval to load. The 'Units' box defines the units of the database. The user can load a metric database file into an imperial units well. For 'time' data wells, the units can be set to either seconds or milliseconds. The primary input curve should be called 'TIME'. The 'Null Value' box must be set to whatever Null value is defined in the database file. The default in IP is –999. The 'Depth Curve Name' box defines the depth curve name in the database file. Normally this will be 'Depth' but if the database defines the depth column with a different name this must be entered in this box. The 'Well Name' box allows the user to change the current well name. For a new well, this box will be blank and the well name can be entered. The 'Well Comment' (see 'Manage Well Header Info.') can be set from the well name box by placing a colon, with a space before and after, ( : ) after the well name and appending the well comment after the colon. For example ' 14/19-23 : Preliminary' will create a well name of '14/19-23' with a well comment of 'Preliminary '.

Section 5.1 Load Data from an External Source : Load External Curve Data

Load Data from an External Source

Senergy

250

The 'Set Well' button sets the DBASE 4-read well 'focus'. This sets the well name that is displayed at the top of the DBASE 4 read window. The button can be used to load several DBASE 4 files into different wells without having to close the window and re-open it. The user changes the well focus on the primary window by using the 'Select Well to Display' options and then clicks the 'Set Well' button on the DBASE 4 read window. Curve Load Set The selected curve data will be loaded into the curve set selected in the 'IP Load Set' box. The ' Edit Sets' button allows the user to create new sets using the 'Manage Curve Sets' module.

Related Topics ASCII Load LAS / LBS Load LAS3 Load LIS Load DLIS Load DBASE4 Load LAS Batch Load

5.1.8

LAS Batch Load

The 'LAS Batch Load' module allows the user to load multiple LAS files into newly-created or existing IP wells. Select the LAS file names from the 'Select LAS files to load' dialog box. IP reads the LAS file headers and extracts the well name, API Number, UWI, number of curves, the log depth interval, depth units and well step. The 'API Num.' and 'UWI' column can be turned off by 'un-checking' the 'Display API number' and 'Display UWI' check boxes. If the LAS file do not contain API or UWI numbers then the 'API Num.' or 'UWI' columns will not be displayed.

Section 5.1 Load Data from an External Source : Load External Curve Data

251

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Select the files to load by 'checking' in the 'Load' column to the left of the 'File Name' column. If the 'Load' column title is 'clicked', then the whole column will be set to the inverse of whatever has been set for the first file. This allows the user to quickly select or deselect all files. The number of files selected to be loaded can be seen in the lower left of the module screen. The order in which wells are listed and loaded to IP can be modified by the user before loading the LAS files. The user should 'left mouse' click in the margin to the left of the 'Load' column. A broad grey-coloured bar will appear above the well where the mouse was clicked. Drag the bar up or down to change the order in which the wells will be loaded into IP.

The 'File Name' column gives the name of the file to load. The file names cannot be edited in the table. If alternative files need to be loaded, click the 'Select Files' button. The 'Well Name' column shows the name of the well, taken from the LAS file header. If the

Section 5.1 Load Data from an External Source : Load External Curve Data

Load Data from an External Source

Senergy

252

file is to be loaded to an existing IP well, the name should be changed to the name of the IP well by 'clicking' in the 'Well Name' cell and selecting the correct well from the drop-down box.

The API as IP Well Name or the UWI as IP Well Name enables the API or the UWI to be used as the IP Database Well Name. If this option is selected, the Actual Well Name will appear as the Well Comment. The 'Load into Set' column allows the user to individually select which Curve Set to load the data into using the drop-down button to select the Curve Set. This can be changed for all wells at the same time by selecting the required Set from the 'Set Default load set' box. The 'Add Set' button allows the user to create new Curve Set names for selection. Curve Sets are created in the individual well when the data are loaded. The 'No. Crvs' column displays the number of curves in the file. This is non-editable. The 'Top Dep.' and 'Bot Dep.' columns initially give the depth range of the data specified in the LAS file header. These depths can be changed to limit the range of data to load to within specified depths. If the 'Create New Well for each file' box is 'checked', then the depths entered here will define the top and bottom depths of the new IP well. For an existing well, if the 'Top Dep.' and 'Bot Dep.' extend outside the current well interval the following message will be displayed.

Section 5.1 Load Data from an External Source : Load External Curve Data

253

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

If 'Yes' is selected then the 'Well Depths Editor' module will be launched so that the well can be extended. This well extension is not done automatically and the user must confirm the new depths and close the 'Well Depths Editor' module before the LAS file is loaded. The 'Units' and 'Step' columns initially give the depth curve units and data spacing specified in the LAS file header. If the 'Create New Well for each file' box is 'checked', then they will be used to specify the units and database step of the IP well. The user can set the same ' Step' for all LAS files in the 'Batch Load' operation by 'clicking' on the 'Step' column header title. This action will set all wells in the list to the 'Step' value shown in the top row of the grid. If the 'Create New Well for each file' box is 'checked' then the well name entered here will be the IP well name for the new well. If the 'Load files into wells with same name' box is 'checked' then the 'Use to Select IP well' panel becomes available. This offers three choices: 'Well Name' 'UWI' 'API Number' Depending on which option is selected then as long as the well name or UWI or API number of the selected LAS file matches a well within the IP database then the LAS data will be transferred. If no match occurs then an error message will appear and no transfer of data will take place. The 'Load LAS Parameters' check box will allow the loading of any parameters in the LAS header that are acceptable to IP (See Table in LAS /LBSFile Input). 'Checking' this option can pick up data such as mud and mud filtrate resistivity data and temperatures, if it is encoded in a known format.

Using 'Mask' Files or the 'CurveAlias' file The 'Use Mask to select curves' check-box allows an external text file (e.g.'LAS Mask.txt') to be created / used to decide which curves should be selected for loading. The external file format is very simple and consists of names of curves that should be loaded. One name per line. If the

Section 5.1 Load Data from an External Source : Load External Curve Data

Load Data from an External Source

Senergy

254

user wants the curve to be re-named during the 'Load' operation, then the new name for the curve should follow the original name. The following characters are acceptable to separate the 'external' curve name from the IP 'load' name: comma, space, tab and semicolon. An example mask file is given below.

CALI DEPTH DRHO DTLN GDCORE LLD LLD2 LLD LLS MSFL1 MSFLC PERMCORE PHICORE2; PHICORE RHOB RHOB1, RHOB SGR SP TNPH The 'Mask file name' entry box must contain the valid mask file name if the 'Use Mask to select curves' box has been 'checked'. The 'Edit Mask File' button can be used to create or browse to the correct file name. If no 'Mask' file is selected but the user has a 'CurveAlias.txt' file available, (See 'Edit Curve Alias Defaults'), then the loaded curves will be named according to the curve name 'mapping' in the 'Curve Alias' file. NOTE: this is automatically applied, the user does not have to manually select the 'Curve Alias' file. The 'Fill data gaps' option allows the user to automatically extrapolate gaps in the input data. This is useful, for example, if one is loading a one sample per foot file into a two sample per foot well. The 'Max Gap width' allows the user to set the maximum gap for filling, the gap is defined in database sample increments. The 'Load' button loads the LAS files and creates any new well as required. The 'Select Files' button allows the user to select different input LAS files to load. The 'View Curves' button will display a window that contains the names of the curves for the file that is currently selected (highlighted box in the data grid). The following is an example of a listing.

Section 5.1 Load Data from an External Source : Load External Curve Data

255

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The list can be used to create a Mask file for selecting the curves to load. The user must highlight the curves required and then 'right mouse' click on the window and select the 'Copy Curve names to clipboard'. This will then copy the curve names, but not units, to the clipboard which can then be used to copy into the Mask file. The 'Edit Mask File' can be used to create or edit a mask file. The user selects the file to edit or create and then the program will automatically open it up in 'NotePad', where the user can then modify it.

Related Topics ASCII Load LAS / LBS Load LAS3 Load LIS Load DLIS Load DBASE4 Load LAS Batch Load

Section 5.1 Load Data from an External Source : Load External Curve Data

Senergy

5.3

Load Data from an External Source

256

Load Picture and Text Curve Data

This Chapter Outlines the Picture and Text Curve Data Loading Processes. The Picture Curves module is the main module for manipulating graphics (picture) data. A ' Picture curve' consists of a set of graphics files, for example a set of white light or UV core photographs. Each graphics file has a defined top and bottom depth which allows the picture to be scaled to the log data. The images are not stored directly, but the graphics file and path name to the pictures are stored in the IP database. When a graphics file is selected, it is loaded into memory and converted into a bitmap for display. The Text Curves creates, loads and edits text strings for display as Text Curves.

Related Topics Load External Curve Data Load Zone Tops from an External File Load Picture and Text Curve Data Using the Interval Loader Using the Capillary Pressure Data Loader Using the Well Attribute Loader Real Time Data Link

Section 5.3 Load Data from an External Source : Load Picture and Text Curve Data

257

5.4

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Using the Interval Loader

The 'Interval Loader' module allows the user to load data into the IP program such as a faciestype interpretation, where a certain geological facies, represented by a numerical value, is assigned over a particular depth interval. The 'Interval Loader' can also be used to load periodic / discrete data, such as core plug analysis results (grain densities, porosities and air permeabilities) or wireline formation tester (RFT, RCI, FMT) pressure data. This module is very useful if the external data is presented in a spreadsheet form. The 'copy from spreadsheet' functionality can be utilized to load large amounts of spreadsheet data into the IP interface. The functionality has been extended in IP Version 3.3 and later versions, to allow the user to load Array-type data into IP using this module. Up to 200 curves can be loaded / created at one time, using this interface. See the section on ' Loading Array Data' later in this chapter. To Display the Interval/Spreadsheet Loader: sFrom the Input/Output Menu Select Load Data, Interval/Spreadsheet Loader Dialog.

The Interval Loader/Spreadsheet Loader Dialog will now be displayed.

Section 5.4 Load Data from an External Source : Using the Interval Loader

Load Data from an External Source

Senergy

258

Data can be loaded into IP in a number of ways using this module. The user can manually type values into the empty data table, or Load values from an ASCII data file. 'Click' the'New File' button to launch a 'file selection' dialog and browse to the ASCII file. If the ASCII file has been set up with a top and bottom depth then leave the 'No Bottom Depth' box 'un-checked'. However, if the ASCII file has only one depth column then 'tick' the 'No Bottom Depth' box.

The format of the ASCII input file should be a series of data lines with a 'Top Depth' entry,

Section 5.4 Load Data from an External Source : Using the Interval Loader

259

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

and / or a 'Bottom Depth' entry and then data values separated by spaces, tabs or commas. The 'Interval Loader' only reads lines with numeric data entries. Curve header text, curve names and curve units are not recognized or loaded. A minimum of three data columns must exist in the input ASCII file. For core analysis data input or when loading RFT pressure data, for example, type in 'Bottom Depth' values that are equal to the 'Top Depth' entries, followed by the Core porosities, air permeabilities or pressure values. The data file should load into the interface. Fill in the curve 'Name', curve 'Units', curve 'Set' entries for each column in the input file and 'Click' the 'Load' button. Data can also be copied and pasted into the interface from an external spreadsheet. Select the data range in the spreadsheet to be copied and copy it ('CTRL C' or righthand mouse button 'Copy') into the clipboard. NOTE: the 'Copy/ Paste' functionality only works with 'continuous' spreadsheet data ranges. 'Click' on the cell on the 'Interval Loader' grid into which to start the 'paste' operation. 'Click' the 'Paste' icon button at the base of the window. DO NOT use the 'paste' function from the drop-down menu obtained by right mouse clicking on a cell. This will only paste a single value into the selected cell.

The 'Header' rows of the 'Interval Loader' interface, with titles in cells with a grey background colour, are described below: The 'Name' row allows the user to set up curve names for each column of data loaded into the interface. The 'Units' row allows the user to set up curve 'Units' for each column of data loaded into the interface. The 'Type' row in the grid allows the user to select the internal IP curve 'type' that is

Section 5.4 Load Data from an External Source : Using the Interval Loader

Load Data from an External Source

Senergy

260

assigned to the input data. Curve types are used in IP to help with the auto-selection of curves used in some modules. Alternatively, these can be set later in the 'Manage Curve Headers'. The 'Set' row in the grid allows the user to individually select which Curve Set to load the curve data into. This can be changed for all curves at the same time by selecting the required Set from the 'Default Load Set' box. The 'Edit Sets' button allows the user to create new Sets using the 'Manage Curve Sets' module. The 'Array Sze' row allows the user to set up the 'dimensions' of curves to be created when the 'Load' button is clicked. (see 'Loading Array Data' for a full explanation). When the array size is set to contain multiple X array values the 'Array No.' row will be auto-filled with the appropriate number of columns. The 'Name' row is also populated for the entire array. The 'Array No.' row allows the user to set up the 'Array Index number' of a data column in an array-type curve. If the 'Delete Curves before write' check box is 'checked', IP will totally clear an existing IP curve of its data before writing newly imported data to it. If this box is not 'checked' (the default setting), this allows the user to append/concatenate new data to an existing curve in the database. Clicking the 'Clear All' button removes all data entries from the 'Interval Loader' screen. The 'Clear Row' button allows the user to remove all data entries from a selected row from within the 'Interval Loader' screen. The 'Clear Column' button allows the user to remove all data entries from a selected column from within the 'Interval Loader' screen. The 'Load' Button - clicking the 'Load' button executes the 'load' operation for the data currently visible in the interface. The 'New File' button - clicking the 'New File' button launches a 'Browse' dialog that the user can use to navigate to locate the file-to-load. The 'Paste' button - clicking the 'Paste' button pastes the data previously selected from an external spreadsheet into the interface. The user should first click in an appropriate cell in the grid to define the first cell for the 'Paste' operation.

Loading Array Data Loading Capillary Pressure Data as Arrays: Capillary pressure data can also be loaded in the manner described here. The workflow is

Section 5.4 Load Data from an External Source : Using the Interval Loader

261

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

explained, using the example array data file illustrated below, which contains 2 curves 'Phi' and 'Gd' which are 'normal' one-dimensional curves and 2 two-dimensional arrays 'Sw' and 'Pc', each with six array elements. The data will be loaded into an 'irregular' step set which will keep the same depths as the original dataset. Dept h m

209 1.2 209 3.6 209 4.5 209 5.7

Phi

Gd

Sw

Pc

dec

gm/ cc

dec

psi

0.2

2.68

1 1

2 0.8

3 0.6

4 0.4

5 0.2

6 0.1

1 0

2 5

3 10

4 20

5 50

6 60

0.18

2.64

1

0.95

0.64

0.42

0.22

0.11

0

5

10

20

50

60

0.16

2.66

1

0.92

0.63

0.53

0.23

0.13

0

5

10

20

50

60

0.15

2.69

1

0.88

0.62

0.49

0.29

0.19

0

5

10

20

50

60

1. Either, click the 'New File' button and browse to the appropriate ASCII file containing the array data (check the 'No Bottom Depth' box if the imported data does not have a bottom depth column). The data panel at the bottom of the window is populated with the selected file. Or, with an external spreadsheet open, copy / paste data into the appropriate column(s) in the Interval Loader module. 2. Either, manually type in curve names and curve units for each column of date or copy / paste them in from the spreadsheet source. If the curve name of one element within an array curve is subsequently changed then all the curve names within the array are changed. 3. Select Curve 'Types' from the drop-down list, where appropriate. 4. Examine the input file and determine the dimensions of the required arrays. In the example file, the Phi and Gd are conventional one-dimensional (1x 1) curves while the Sw and Pc data are arrays, each having 6 array elements (6 columns of data).

5. Set the 'Default Load Set' to the required Curve Set by using the 'drop down' menu. If the required set does not exist then create it by using the 'Edit Sets' button. For this dataset an 'irregular' spaced step set will be used.

Section 5.4 Load Data from an External Source : Using the Interval Loader

Load Data from an External Source

Senergy

262

6. Set the 'Array Size' in the first column of the 'Sw' data block, by clicking in the 'Array Size' cell in that column. A dialog pops up which allows you to set the 'Curve Dimensions'. The 'X Dimension' should equal the number of columns of data in the array. The 'Z Dimension' setting can be used to load array data at a smaller depth increment than the current 'well step'. However, as the set into which the data will be loaded has an 'irregular' step then this 'Z Dimension' can be left at 1. Set the dimensions of any other arrays in the input ASCII file, Pc in this example. 7. The 'Array No.' and 'Name' for each column of the array auto-populates. 8. On clicking the 'Load' button, IP will create the Pc and Sw arrays with dimensions based on the indices typed into the 'Array Index' row. This can be confirmed by looking at the 'Manage Log Curve Headers' module, 'Statistics' tab, as illustrated below:

If the data is viewed using 'View - Curve Listing / Curve Edit' and the 'Expand Array Data' box ticked, it can be seen that the imported data has the same depths as the original dataset.

Section 5.4 Load Data from an External Source : Using the Interval Loader

263

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Related Topics Load External Curve Data Load Zone Tops from an External File Load Picture and Text Curve Data Using the Interval Loader Using the Capillary Pressure Data Loader Using the Well Attribute Loader Real Time Data Link

Section 5.4 Load Data from an External Source : Using the Interval Loader

Senergy

Senergy

5.5

Load Data from an External Source

264

Using the Capillary Pressure Data Loader

The capillary pressure (PC) data loader is designed to assist the entering of PC data into IP. A maximum of 100 plugs can be entered at any one time. It removes the need for using the ' Interval Loader' to perform this operation. The new PC loader is designed to load data in columns. Extra data associated with the PC measurement can also be loaded at the same time. This new loader is very flexible as it is highly unlikely that all the input spreadsheet data is arranged in such a way that it will be able to be loaded with just one mouse click. An example of how data could be arranged in a spreadsheet for one-mouse-click loading into the Capillary Pressure Data Loader is shown further down this chapter -Click here to view this example.

The loader form, as shown above, consists of a grid where data can either be typed in or be cut and pasted in from a spreadsheet. There is a 'Paste' button which can be used for multiple data selection pastes or if the user right mouse clicks on a cell standard Windows cut/paste operations are available. 'Well' column - the form allows the loading of data into multiple wells at the same time. The user selects the well from a drop down of loaded wells. If 'Well' is left blank then the currently focused well is selected. If PC data is being entered for a well and then the user moves onto the next column the well will be assumed to be the same and the 'Well' cell will

Section 5.5 Load Data from an External Source : Using the Capillary Pressure Data Loader

265

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

be auto-filled in. 100 sets of PC data can be loaded in any one session. 'Depth' column - this can be typed in or pasted in from a spreadsheet using the 'Paste' button or else right mouse button 'click' on the cell and select 'paste' from the pop-up menu.

'Curve 1' row - the number of input curves is user configurable through use of the 'No. of Curves' selector. In the example above 'No. of Curves' is set at 2 so only two curve rows are seen. The 'Name' and 'Units' have to be manually entered by the user whereas the ' Type' can be selected from a drop down list for each of the curves. The value of the curve in the row can be typed in or pasted in from a spreadsheet using the 'Paste' button or else right mouse button 'click' on the cell and select 'paste' from the pop-up menu. 'Text Curve 1' row -the number of text curves is user configurable through use of the 'No. of Text Curves' selector. The 'Name' can be typed or pasted into the cell. 'PC' row - enables the user to define the 'Name', 'Units' and 'Type' of the PC curve which will be loaded via the 'PC' column. 'PC Sat.' row - enables the user to define the 'Name', 'Units' and 'Type' of the PC Saturation curve which will be loaded via the 'PC Sat' column. 'PC' column and 'PC Sat.' column - can be filled in by copying from a spreadsheet and then 'clicking' on the first cell and using the 'Paste' button. The number of rows of data can be

Section 5.5 Load Data from an External Source : Using the Capillary Pressure Data Loader

Senergy

Load Data from an External Source

266

upto a maximum of 100. 'Reference Depth Curve' - the depth entered per PC plug in the 'Depth' column can either reference the depth curve in the well or an entered reference curve. This allows the user to enter the depths as TVDSS. 'Default Load Set' - this is the curve Set that the PC curves will be created in. Sets can be selected from the drop down list or else new Sets can be created using the 'Edit Sets' button and the 'Add Set Names' dialogue. 'Depth Tolerance' - when loading data into an irregular step curve Set the program has to decide whether the depth of the data being loaded corresponds to depth already in the Set or whether a new depth in the Set has been created. The 'Depth Tolerance' parameter is the allowable difference between the two depths in order to count the depths as the same. 'PC Data Order' - allows the user to switch the column order to reflect how the PC data is arranged in the spreadsheet. 'No. of Curves' - the default number of curves is five though this can be changed to whatever the user requires by use of the 'up/down' arrows. 'No. of Text Curves' - the default number of text curves is two. 'Null Output Curves Before Loading' - if this is 'checked' on then previously created curves will be nulled before being over-written by the 'new' load. NOTE: this applies specifically to the core porosity and permeability curves. The array PC curves are automatically nulled before a 'new' load occurs. 'Skip Column When Pasting PC data' - this 'check' box relates to the core porosity and permeability data. It tends to be written in a single column in a spreadsheet whereas the Pc and Pc Sat. data takes up two columns. So when pasting the data in the core porosity and permeability data gets offset. To avoid this, 'check' the box on then the blank columns in the core porosity and permeability data are skipped over.

Section 5.5 Load Data from an External Source : Using the Capillary Pressure Data Loader

267

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Section 5.5 Load Data from an External Source : Using the Capillary Pressure Data Loader

Senergy

Senergy

Load Data from an External Source

268

'Paste' - using this 'Paste' button allows the user to select multi-rows or columns in a spreadsheet and to paste these in one go into the loader form. Unless the data is in the same layout as the loader form, which is highly unlikely, then a number of paste operations will have to be performed. 'Clear All' - allows the loader form to be cleared of all data entries. 'Clear Row' - will clear all cells in the current row to the right of the currently selected cell. 'Clear Column' - will clear all cells in the current column below the currently selected cell. 'Load' - when the 'Load' button is 'clicked' the necessary curves will be created. The PC curves will be created with an 'X' array size equal to the maximum number of rows used for the data entry. If this is less than the 'X' array size of the original curve then the size of the 'X' array will remain the same. Hence, the 'X' array size will always be the maximum needed to hold all the PC data. An example spreadsheet is shown below in a format which will allow it to be pasted into the ' Capillary Pressure Data Loader' in three copy and paste operations:

Section 5.5 Load Data from an External Source : Using the Capillary Pressure Data Loader

269

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Section 5.5 Load Data from an External Source : Using the Capillary Pressure Data Loader

Senergy

Senergy

Load Data from an External Source

270

NOTE: the Curve 1....2 ...etc 'Name', 'Units' and 'Type' can all be filled in by hand rather than copying and pasting them in from a spreadsheet.

Related Topics Load External Curve Data Load Zone Tops from an External File Load Picture and Text Curve Data Using the Interval Loader Using the Capillary Pressure Data Loader Using the Well Attribute Loader Real Time Data Link

Section 5.5 Load Data from an External Source : Using the Capillary Pressure Data Loader

271

5.6

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Using the Well Attribute Loader

The 'Load Well Attributes' module provides the user with a means to bulk load well 'cultural' data (attributes) into IP from an external text file or from a spreadsheet selection, either loading : into pre-existing, in-memory wells in an IP database, or into newly-created IP wells, populating these wells with well properties (attributes) from the external file. Well attributes are saved into the 'Manage Well Header Info.' interface for each IP well that has a data entry in the external text file. 'Well Attributes' can include such things as 'Well Name', 'Operating Company', 'Unique Well Identifier (UWI)', 'Spud Date', 'Completion Date', 'Well Completion Status', as well as the ' Permanent Datum', 'Rig Reference elevations', 'Latitude', 'Longitude' of a well. The full range of cultural data fields that are available to be loaded into IP are listed in the IP Configuration 'Options' tool, in the 'Well Attributes' section. The list of Well Attributes is 'dynamic', meaning that the user can modify entries and extend the list to store additional, new attributes. The 'Load Well Attributes' module is activated from the 'Input / Output'

'Load Data' menu

'Load Well Attributes' option.

Section 5.6 Load Data from an External Source : Using the Well Attribute Loader

Load Data from an External Source

Senergy

272

User Interface When the 'Load Well Attributes' option is selected, you are presented with a WINDOWS Explorer dialog which allows you to browse to the external text file containing the 'Well attributes' data you wish to load into IP. You should browse to / select the appropriate text file. The module window is then launched. The user interface comprises of : the 'Default Settings for New IP Wells' panel (top left) the 'Input Data Formatting' panel (top right) and the 'Data Visualization / Mapping Grid' in the bottom half of the screen. These are illustrated in the following screen capture:

Section 5.6 Load Data from an External Source : Using the Well Attribute Loader

273

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The data in the selected text file will be visible in the 'data viewer' panel, in the lower part of the screen. Initially the data will appear as continuous text strings in the first column of the grid, as illustrated below. Click on the appropriate 'Input Data Formatting' radio button for your input file, in the top-right-hand panel of the screen. This will parse the data into the correct format for the loading operation.

Input Data Formatting The 'Input Data Formatting' panel allows the user to set up the 'delimiter' that has been used to

Section 5.6 Load Data from an External Source : Using the Well Attribute Loader

Load Data from an External Source

Senergy

274

separate the data fields in the input text file. This allows the 'Well Attribute Loader' to resolve the input file into the appropriate data columns. Data can be loaded into the interface from a variety of text file formats. The acceptable text file formats are :

'Space-delimited' text, 'Tab-delimited' text, 'Comma-delimited' text and 'Other-delimited' text, for example semi-colon (;). 'Fixed', in which case the user defines the number of columns of text making up each data category, separated by a comma "," symbol in the Format entry window. The following are valid format expressions: 8,8,8,8,10,12,12,12 - This can be simplified by using brackets 4(8),10,3(12) 8,10,12,8,10,12 - If an expression repeats you can leave out the repeat 8,10,12 10,10,10,10,10,10,10 - This could be simplified as 7(10) or just 10 Examples of the file formats are shown below: Tab-Delimited Text File

Space-Delimited Text File

Section 5.6 Load Data from an External Source : Using the Well Attribute Loader

275

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Comma-Delimited Text File

Fixed Format Text File

In addition, IP can load data copied from a spreadsheet into the WINDOWS clipboard. The data is then pasted into the import 'grid' in the 'Load Well Attributes' screen by clicking on the 'Paste from Clipboard' button.

The order in which data is organized within the text file is not important because you will need to interactively set up 'mappings' between the input file data fields and the IP well attributes.

Default Settings for New IP Wells The 'Default Settings for New IP Wells' panel sets up the default 'Well Depth units' and 'Well Step increment' in order for IP to be able to create new IP wells in an existing database. The defaults, when they are set up, combine with the 'mapped' data fields from the external text file to create new in-memory wells when the 'Create New Well' button is clicked. The user then has to use the ' File'

'Save all wells to database' option to add the new wells to the active IP

database.

Section 5.6 Load Data from an External Source : Using the Well Attribute Loader

Load Data from an External Source

Senergy

276

The Data visualization Mapping Grid Well Header properties listed in the imported file have to be 'mapped', to internal IP 'Well Attributes' using the column header drop-down list in the tabular display. Clicking in a column header opens a drop-down list of the available IP well attributes that can be assigned to the input data. The user simply scrolls through the dataset, assigning appropriate attribute names to the data in the grid. You must assign a 'Well Name' attribute to one column in the grid.

If the imported file contains many more wells than you are using in your IP database, you can filter out the unwanted rows in the table by clicking, in the 'Select' column, only for the rows / wells you wish to import data into. If a well name already exists in memory in IP, when the 'Well Name' column is mapped, the inmemory well name will appear in the 'IP Well Name' column on the left-hand side of the grid, as illustrated above for well 30/1c-5. In this case any data columns that already have well attributes loaded into IP are highlighted in light green font on a white cell background. You then have the option to update the existing IP data, overwriting existing well attributes, or updating the inmemory well(s) only with new well attributes. This functionality is explained below: Two options buttons are used, in conjunction with the operations buttons at the bottom of the screen, to determine how well attributes are loaded into new or existing IP wells. These options are found in the middle of the screen. They are described below: 'Use Unique Well Identifier (UWI) as IP Well Identifer' : when 'checked' this option prompts IP to load the 'Unique Well Identifier' field in the input file, to the 'Well Name' data

Section 5.6 Load Data from an External Source : Using the Well Attribute Loader

277

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

field in the IP 'Manage Well Header Info.' module, rather than the 'Well Name' data field, if one is also present in the external file. When left 'un-checked' and both 'UWI' and 'Well Name' fields are present in the input file, the 'Well name' column will be loaded as the 'Well Name' attribute and the UWI will be loaded as the 'UWI' attribute.

'Overwrite existing IP Well header Information with new data from file' : when 'checked', this option instructs the IP program to replace any existing well attributes, in 'mapped' IP wells, with new data from the input text file. If the option is left 'un-checked' then IP will not update any existing well attribute entries if a new value / text string is found in the text file. Only currently-blank IP well attributes will be updated. The operations buttons are located along the bottom margin of the 'Load Well Attributes' screen. They are:

'Create New Well' button : If a data row is selected in the grid, but does not map to an inmemory IP well, a new IP well can be created by mapping some attributes and clicking the ' Create New Well' button. The new well will be assigned whatever depth unit and well step has been set up in the 'Default Settings for New IP Wells' panel. 'Add Column' button: If you wish to add a new column to the grid, for example, for a missing attribute in the input file, click the 'Add Column' button. A new, empty column will be appended to the right-hand side of the table to allow you manually type in the extra data. NOTE: you are only able to enter data into rows that are already 'mapped' to existing IP well names. If you enter text /values into such a row, click the 'Update' button to commit the new data into the IP well. 'All' button: Clicking the 'All' button will update an in-memory IP well with new attributes from the imported file. 'New File' button : This button launches a Windows Explorer dialog, allowing you to select a new file to load into the interface. 'Clear' button : This button clears all the entries in the mapping grid.

Section 5.6 Load Data from an External Source : Using the Well Attribute Loader

Load Data from an External Source

Senergy

278

'Save Format' button : saves the window configuration to an external 'Well Header format' (.whf) file, so that the format can be used to load multiple files of the same data format. 'Load Format' button : loads a format file that has previously been saved to an external file. NOTE: If the user has created a new well the 'All' button will need to be clicked in order to populate the header fields from the mapping grid.

Related Topics Load External Curve Data Load Zone Tops from an External File Load Picture and Text Curve Data Using the Interval Loader Using the Capillary Pressure Data Loader Using the Well Attribute Loader Real Time Data Link

Section 5.6 Load Data from an External Source : Using the Well Attribute Loader

279

5.7

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Real Time Data Link

The 'Real Time Data Link' module uses a Schlumberger proprietary data link technology (' Osprey Connect') enabling an IP user with appropriate security clearances from SIS or other third-party (logging service company) data providers to connect to a remote data server and download log curve and drilling data real-time into IP using WITSML data. IP can then be prompted, using a link to the 'Multi-Well Batch Operation' module, to run user-formulae or interpretation modules at a certain time increment. An interpretation workflow using, for example, the 'Clay Volume' computation, 'Porosity and Water Saturation' module and 'Cutoff and Summation' calculations can be set up to run unattended. The interpretation is updated depending upon the user-specified 'repeat' timer. The 'Real Time Data Link' module is launched from the 'Input / Output' menu

'Load Data'

'Real Time Data Link' option. The module is comprised of 2 windows. These are: The 'Real Time Data Link' window which is an IP interface and controls the data download and batch operation execution time intervals and starts/stops the 'Osprey Connect' window. The SIS 'Osprey Connect' window which, once activated, can be left to operate 'in the background'. A number of 'adaptors' are built into the 'Osprey Connect' interface to allow the user to connect to different sources of real-time drilling / logging data. These are: 'InterACT' (WITSML API 1.2.0 & WITSML API 1.3.1) 'InterACT - Drilling Files' (supports RT, RTT, Risk Xml files and Recorder Output files). 'IDEAL' 12 or 13 adaptor - connects to Schlumberger's 'IDEAL' LWD logging system 'Baker RigLink' (WITSML API 1.2.0 & WITSML API 1.3.1) 'Kongsberg SiteCom' (Sense Intellifield) (WITSML API 1.2.0 & WITSML API 1.3.1) (See http://www.intellifield.no/ for more information). 'Sperry INSITE Anywhere' (WITSML API 1.2.0) 'Wellstorm' (WITSML API 1.2.0 & WITSML API 1.3.1). (See: http://www.wellstorm.com/ for more information) 'Generic WITSML Source' (WITSML API 1.2.0 & WITSML API 1.3.1) An online 'Help' document is included with the 'Osprey Connect' package and can be launched from the 'Help' button on that interface. The user can configure the 'Osprey Connect interface to pick up log curves from the external data source, 'mapped' to IP curve names. These curves are then downloaded into IP and can

Section 5.7 Load Data from an External Source : Real Time Data Link

Load Data from an External Source

Senergy

280

optionally be used as input to the 'Multi-Well Batch operation' module. The Connection and operation steps are summarised in the diagram shown below and are detailed in the following discussion: (Note: If a well does not exist it will need to be created under Well > Create New Well. It is important that an approximate Top and Bottom depth is input at this stage, otherwise the 'RealTime Data link' will not be able to write data to the well. The absolute depth interval is not important as once data is being written to the well the 'Real-Time Data link' can extend the interval dynamically if needed.)

The discussion is organized under the following headings: 1. The 'Create Curves' Screen 2. Configure the Osprey Connect Interface 3. Set Up the Curve Mappings 4. Setting the 'Options' Panel. 5. The 'Connection to Osprey Connect' Panel 6. Visualizing the New Data

1. The 'Create Curves' Screen When the 'Real Time Data Link' is launched for the first time, you are presented with a blank ' Curves' window, illustrated below. This window requires you to create the 'empty' curves within IP, which will be used to store the 'external' real-time curve data. The 'external' curve names are subsequently 'mapped' to these IP curve names in order to transfer them in a logical manner into

Section 5.7 Load Data from an External Source : Real Time Data Link

281

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

IP. This window can also be launched from the 'Create Curves' button located at the bottom of the 'Real Time Data Link' window. IP defaults to a curve Set called Real in order to manage the imported data that is being downloaded from the remote data source. If this Curve Set does not currently exist in your IP well, it will automatically be created for you.

On clicking the 'OK' button, the following IP interface is launched. This window allows you to open and configure the 'DataLink2' connection and set up additional options with respect to how often IP looks for/ imports new data and whether an IP 'Batch Operation' is to be included in the process.

Section 5.7 Load Data from an External Source : Real Time Data Link

Load Data from an External Source

Senergy

282

The upper, 'Real Time Link Information' panel provides the user with updated status information on the active connection, when the 'Osprey Connect' adapter is working in the background.

2. Configure the Osprey Connect Interface 'Click' the 'Connect' button to launch the 'Osprey Connect' interface. The following screen is opened:

Section 5.7 Load Data from an External Source : Real Time Data Link

283

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

You must choose a data 'Source' from the 'Select a Source' panel. Click on a 'Source' option to highlight it. The 'Source Details' will be displayed below the list panel and a 'Login ' / Connection dialog will appear on the right hand side of the window. You must choose the appropriate Source Type for the data you wish to download and you need the login settings, including 'User Name' and 'Password' to establish the connection to the remote data server. You can save 'Connection Settings' (apart from passwords) by clicking the 'Save' menu option, see below. To restore 'saved' settings, instead of re-typing in connection details, use the 'Load' button.

When you have completed the Login details, click the 'Select Wellbore' button at the bottom of

Section 5.7 Load Data from an External Source : Real Time Data Link

Load Data from an External Source

Senergy

284

the window. The interface updates to show the 'Focus on Source' panel, illustrated below (at right), which is used to select the external well to download data from. Use the 'Tree View' window to locate the well you wish to download data from. Click on the 'well name' to highlight it, as illustrated below.

3. Set Up the Curve 'Mappings' Click the 'Connect to Wellbore' button, which becomes 'active' when a well is selected / highlighted. The following screen is launched. This interface is designed to allow you to set up the curve 'mappings' between the external Data Server / Well and the IP well. The window may be empty initially. Click the 'Click here...' message at the top of the window.

Section 5.7 Load Data from an External Source : Real Time Data Link

285

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The window should refresh to display the created IP curves and the available external curves ('data channels'), as shown below. The upper, 'Data Requested by the Application' panel contains the list of 'empty' IP curves in the REAL curve Set. The lower, 'Select from the Available Data Items' panel contains the list of available 'external' log curves. You should set up the 'mappings' between the IP curves and external log curves. To do this: Click in a row in the 'Requested Data' panel to highlight the curve. Scroll through the 'Select from the Available Data Items' panel to locate the equivalent 'external' curve. place a 'tick' in the 'Map' column for the external curve. The 'Mapped' column entry for the IP Curve will change from a Cross symbol to a tick symbol, as shown for the GR curve below, indicating that the curves are 'mapped'. Repeat the process for all the IP curves you wish to map to external data channels. When all IP curves are 'mapped', click the 'Start Transfer' button in the bottom right-hand corner of the window.

Section 5.7 Load Data from an External Source : Real Time Data Link

Load Data from an External Source

Senergy

286

Alternatively, clicking the 'Select Source' button will return you to the previous 'Osprey Connect' screen. You will be warned that you will lose any mappings you have made, and offered the chance to save them before returning to the previous screen.

This 'Osprey Connect' interface can then be closed, by clicking on the Windows 'Close' icon on the top-right-hand corner of the window. The 'Osprey Connect' connection continues to operate 'in the background'. The 'Real Time Data Link' window, 'Information' panel, illustrated below, gives details of the Adaptor Connection Status and how much data is being downloaded to the buffer. NOTE: data are stored only into the buffer, until the user clicks the 'Run' button at the bottom right-hand corner of the window. From the time the 'Run' button is clicked, data are then transferred / written to the selected IP well, into the mapped IP curves at the selected time increment.

Section 5.7 Load Data from an External Source : Real Time Data Link

287

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

4. Setting the 'Options' Panel The 'Options' panel on the 'Real Time Data Link' interface is used to set up a number of functions to initiate the loading and processing of the 'external' data within IP

'Select TVD Curve' - If the data to be imported uses a TVD depth reference, you must select a 'TVD' curve in the IP Well as the reference curve. 'Automatically Extend Well' - if 'checked', the default position, IP will automatically increase the well 'bottom depth' value as new data are loaded from the remote source. In this position the user does not have to keep returning to the well to manually extend the depth range when new log curve data is available, as drilling progresses.

Section 5.7 Load Data from an External Source : Real Time Data Link

Load Data from an External Source

Senergy

288

'Run Batch Operation' - if you wish to run a 'Batch Operation' periodically, using the curves that have been loaded from the external data Source, a Batch operation file (.fbt) can be set up from that module and selected using the 'Browse' button in this window. When the 'timer' is set up and running, the Batch operation will be run at the set time increment. 'Survey File Name' - if well deviation survey data are available from the external data source, they can be downloaded into IP. 'Run automatically every 'X' seconds' - The Up and Down arrow buttons allow you to change the time increment which controls the 'update' period that IP waits between downloads of realtime data from the buffer. Click the Up arrow to increase the time between downloads. Click the Down arrow to decrease the time period between downloads. The minimum time increment is 6 seconds. 'Run / Stop' - The 'Run' button, when clicked, initiates the automatic update timer to execute a download operation every X seconds, depending upon the user-selected time interval. When the 'Run' button has been clicked, it toggles to a 'Stop' button. In this condition, if the button is clicked the data download operation and Batch Operation are terminated.

5. The 'Connection to Osprey Connect' Panel The 'Connection to Osprey Connect' panel contains a number of 'control' buttons whose functions are described below:

'Connect' - Click the 'Connect' button to launch the 'Osprey Connect'' window. 'Disconnect' - Click the 'Disconnect' button to close the 'Osprey Connect' window. 'Show' - Click the 'Show' button to bring the 'Osprey Connect' window to the foreground. 'Start' - Clicking the 'Start' button is a shortcut to activate the 'Osprey Connect' interface- ' Start Transfer' option, without having to have the 'Osprey Connect' window in view. 'Stop' - Clicking the 'Stop' button is a shortcut to activate the 'Osprey Connect' - 'Stop

Section 5.7 Load Data from an External Source : Real Time Data Link

289

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Transfer' option, without having to have the 'Osprey Connect' window in view.

6. Visualizing the New Data If you have a log plot display on-screen with the 'mapped' IP curves selected in one or more curve tracks - as data are downloaded into IP, the log plot display will update, at the specified time increment, with any new data from the buffer. The Well depth range will also extend if this option is selected ('Automatically extend well') on the 'Real Time Data Link' interface.

What is WITSML ? Wellsite Information Transfer Standard Markup Language, "WITSML", was initially developed by the WITSML project, an oil industry initiative sponsored by BP and Statoil, and later by Shell, as a new standard for drilling information transfer. Initial participation is from the major service companies Baker Hughes, GeoQuest, Halliburton, Landmark and Schlumberger. As of the completion of WITSML V1.2 in March 2003, POSC has custody of WITSML and is managing the support and future evolution of WITSML through the WITSML Special Interest Group.

Related Topics Load External Curve Data Load Zone Tops from an External File Load Picture and Text Curve Data Using the Interval Loader Using the Capillary Pressure Data Loader Using the Well Attribute Loader Real Time Data Link

Section 5.7 Load Data from an External Source : Real Time Data Link

Section

6 Save Data to an External File

291

6

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Save Data to an External File

The 'Save Data' menu item includes all the tools for saving curve and 'Tops' data to external files. ASCII Write: Enables IP Data to be Saved as an ASCII file. Well Log Data from IP can be saved to the ASCII format using the ASCII Write Dialog. Well Log Data from an External Source that is saved in ASCII format can also be Loaded into IP using the ASCII Load Module. 'LAS Write': Enables IP Data to be Saved as a LAS (Log ASCII Standard) file. Well Log Data from IP can be saved to the LAS format using the LAS Write Dialog. Well Log Data from an External Source that is saved in LAS format can also be Loaded into IP using the LAS / LBS Load Module or the LAS3 Load Module. See the Canadian Well Log Association website ( http://cwls.org/las_info.php) for a full description of the LAS standard. 'LIS Write': Enables IP Data to be Saved as a LIS (Log Information Standard) file. Well Log Data from IP can be saved to the LIS format using the LIS Write Dialog. Well Log Data from an External Source that is saved in LIS format can also be Loaded into IP using the LIS Load Module. DLIS Write: Enables IP Data to be Saved as a DLIS (Digital Log Information Standard) file. Well Log Data from IP can be saved to the DLIS format using the DLIS Write Dialog. Well Log Data from an External Source that is saved in DLIS format can also be Loaded into IP using the DLIS Load Module. 'DBASE4 Write': Enables IP to be Saved to a a DBASE4 Database. The user can add to an existing 'DBASE 4' database or create a new database. 'Save Zone Tops': This module allows 'Zone and Tops Sets' to be saved to ASCII disk files. To display the Save Data Menu: From the Input / Output Menu, Select Save Data then the required Data Saving Module.

Section 6.

Save Data to an External File :

Save Data to an External File

Senergy

Related Topics 'ASCII Write' 'LAS Write' 'LIS Write' 'DBASE4 Write' 'Save Zone Tops'

Section 6.

Save Data to an External File :

292

293

6.1

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

ASCII Write

The 'ASCII Write' module is launched from the 'Input / Output'

'Save Data' menu item. The '

ASCII Write' window will always appear with the currently-displayed well as the first row of the ' Select Wells and Depth Intervals to output' grid box.

The window will always appear with the currently-displayed well as the first row of the 'Select Wells and Depth Intervals to output' grid box.

'Select Wells and Depth Intervals to output' Panel 'Use' : 'Check' this box to output an ASCII format file for the well. Clicking on the 'Use' column header the user can select or deselect which wells to output. first line. This allows the user to quickly select or de-select all wells. 'Well Name' : The user selects additional wells to output from the drop-down list box. If the column header is 'clicked' then all the wells currently loaded in memory will be added to the list. 'Top Dep.' : Enter the top depth of the output interval. 'Bot Dep.' : Enter the bottom depth of the output interval. 'Step' : The default value will be the current well step increment. The user may enter a new value to change the ASCII output well step. 'Ref Curve' : The default depth reference curve is the DEPTH curve. The user can change this to write an output file, for example to a TVD or TVDSS reference, if these curves exist in the well(s) to be exported.

Section 6.1 Save Data to an External File : ASCII Write

Save Data to an External File

Senergy

294

'File Name' : Enter the output file name. File names can be set using the 'Base File Name' and 'Apply' button or by 'clicking' the 'Use Well name as file name' button.

'Available Curves' Panel This list box will display the curves in the well whose name is displayed just below the 'Available Curves' label. To change the well, click on the well name displayed in the 'Select Wells and …' box. Curve names will be displayed in green when they occur in the 'Selected Curves' list. This allows the user to easily see which curves have been selected.

'Selected Curves' Panel This contains the selected output curves for all selected wells. It can contain curve names that do not exist for some of the output wells. If the 'Curve Aliasing' module is turned on then if a curve name cannot be found then a curve of the same 'Curve Type' will be selected instead. If a curve does exist for the well displayed in the 'Available Curves' box, then the curve name under 'Curve Name' will be in green, otherwise it will be displayed in black. By changing the well in the ' Available Curves' box the user can easily see which curves are going to be written for individual wells by looking for the green-coloured selected curves. The 'Output Name' column is editable and allows the user to change the names of the curves in the output file. Curves are selected by either highlighting a curve and using the arrow buttons or by clicking on a curve and dragging it into the 'Selected Curves' box. The order that the curves will be output is the same as the order in the 'Selected Curves' box. To re-arrange the order, use the up/down arrows or 'click' on a curve and drag it to a different position in the list.

Setting ASCII Output Properties Output File Names

Section 6.1 Save Data to an External File : ASCII Write

295

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

'Output Directory' allows the user to select the output directory where the ASCII files will be written. The 'Browse' button can be used to select this directory. If separate output directories for each well have been set up (see 'Set Default File Location') then the user can 'check' the 'Use the separate output directories' box to send the output files into these directories. This box will not appear in the window if the output directories have not been set up. 'Use Well name as file name' button replaces the output file name with the Well Name. The following characters / symbols cannot be used in a file name (\ / : ; , > <) and will be replaced by the 'underscore, '_', in the file name. 'Base File Name' box is used to create the default output file name. Appended to this base name will be '_W**' where ** is the database well number. The 'Apply' will update all file names with current 'Base File Name'. 'Append to file names' box is used to add a common piece of text onto the end of all file names. The 'Apply' will update all file names with the extension added. This can be useful for marking all result file names with a common comment such as "Final analysis". 'File name extension' box allows the user to change the file name extension (default is 'asc'). This is the text string added to the output file name set under 'File Name', to complete the output file name. If the 'Save in CSV Format' box has been 'checked' then the 'File

Section 6.1 Save Data to an External File : ASCII Write

Save Data to an External File

Senergy

296

name extension' name is set to 'csv'.

File Options

'Null Values' box allows the user to manually change the output curve 'Null'. The default value is '-999'. The 'Dec. places' box allows the user to define the number of decimal places that curves are outputted as. There is no limit to what can be entered but only reasonable values will be displayed in the outputted ASCII file. 'Checking' the 'All wells in one file' writes all currently-selected wells into a single ASCII file. A single output file name must be used. If the 'Output each curve set using set depths' is 'checked' then a separate data sequence per curve set is created using the set depth interval and step size rather than the Top Dep., Bot Dep. and Step as specified in the 'Select Wells and Depth intervals to output'. 'Save in CSV Format' allows the user to save the data in comma separated format which is then easier to import into EXCEL than text files. For German language Excel users there is a 'CSV Delimiter' option, within 'Tools'

'Options'

'Miscellaneous Options', to choose

to output the CSV file with semicolons instead of commas as the separator.

Curve Selection

Section 6.1 Save Data to an External File : ASCII Write

297

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

'Select Final Curves Current Well' button will automatically add all curves that have had their 'Final' flag (see 'Manage Curve Headers') set in the current well to the 'Selected Curves' box (well displayed under 'Available Curves'). 'Select Final Curves All Wells' button will move all final curves from all selected wells into the 'Selected Curves' box. 'Select All Curves All Wells' button will move all curves for all wells into the 'Selected Curves' box. 'Select All Curves in Set All Wells' button will move all curves for a selected set (use the drop-down menu in the box below the button to select the set) for all wells into the 'Selected Curves' box. 'Only output final curves' box, if 'checked', will only write curves in the selected curve list that have their 'Final' flag set. 'Use Set Names' box, if 'checked', will attach the Curve Set name to the beginning of the curve name. The 'OK' button outputs the files. The 'Save Format' and 'Load Format' buttons allow the user to save the set-up and restore it at a later date. 'Add Wells' gives the user the option of loading wells from the 'Select Database Wells' module - 'From Select Well Screen...' or from a created Well List - 'From Well List File'. The 'Clear all Wells' button will clear all the wells from the 'Select Wells and Depth…' box. It does not affect the curves in the 'Selected Curves' box. These can be cleared by clicking the

Section 6.1 Save Data to an External File : ASCII Write

Save Data to an External File

Senergy

298

double left chevron button.

Automatically Rename a Curve upon Export Output Curves can be automatically renamed when being exported to LAS/LIS/DLIS/ASCII files. This is achieved by changing the curve name in the Output Name column, and creating a Mask file which contains the new curve name to be used with the Output Name in the new data file. An example of a Mask file is below. When a new Mask file is created then the first four lines of text are added automatically. The curve names should then be added to the text file in pairs.

To automatically re-name the curve names upon export: From the Curve Rename Panel, Click the Browse Button to Select or Create the mask file. From the Curve Rename Panel, Click the Edit Button to Open the Mask file in Microsoft Notepad and Add the Curve Name Pairs. Note: The mask file should be saved from within Notepad. From the Curve Rename Panel, Click the Apply Button to Apply the Changes to the Output file definition. Note: The changes are applied on the Output Curve Name, the output name is located in the mask file and if found the name changed to the new curve name.

Section 6.1 Save Data to an External File : ASCII Write

299

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Related Topics 'ASCII Write' 'LAS Write' 'LIS Write' 'DBASE4 Write' 'Save Zone Tops'

Section 6.1 Save Data to an External File : ASCII Write

Senergy

Save Data to an External File

Senergy

6.2

300

LAS Write

The 'LAS Write' module is launched from the 'Input / Output'

'Save Data' menu item. The '

LAS Write' window will always appear with the currently-displayed well as the first row of the ' Select Wells and Depth Intervals to output' grid box.

'Select Wells and Depth Intervals to output' Panel 'Use' : 'Check' this box to output a LAS format file for the selected well. If the 'Use' column header is 'clicked' then the whole column will be set to the inverse of whatever has been set for the first line. This allows the user to quickly select or de-select all wells. 'Well Name' : The user selects additional wells to output from the drop-down list box. If the column header is 'clicked' then all the wells currently loaded in memory will be added to the list. 'Top Dep.' : Enter the top depth of the output interval. Default value is the top well depth. 'Bot Dep.' : Enter the bottom depth of the output interval. Default value is the bottom well depth. 'Step' : The default value will be the current well step increment. The user may enter a new value to change the LAS output well step. 'Ref Curve' : The default depth reference curve is the 'DEPTH' curve. The user can change this to write an output file, for example to a TVD or TVDSS reference, if these curves exist in the well(s) to be exported.

Section 6.2 Save Data to an External File : LAS Write

301

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

'File Name' : Enter the output file name. File names can be set using the 'Base File Name' and 'Apply' button or by 'clicking' the 'Use Well name as file name' button.

'Available Curves' Panel This list box will display the curves in the well whose name is displayed just below the 'Available Curves' label. To change the well, click on the well name displayed in the 'Select Wells and …' box. Curve names will be displayed in green when they occur in the 'Selected Curves' list. This allows the user to easily see which curves have been selected.

'Selected Curves' Panel This contains the selected output curves for all selected wells. It can contain curve names that do not exist in some of the output wells. If the 'Curve Aliasing' module is turned on then if a curve name cannot be found then a curve of the same 'Curve Type' will be selected instead. If a curve does exist for the well displayed in the 'Available Curves' box, then the curve name under 'Curve Name' will be in green, otherwise it will be displayed in black. By changing the well in the ' Available Curves' box the user can easily see which curves are going to be written for individual wells by looking for the green-coloured selected curves. The 'Output Name' column is editable and allows the user to change the names of the curves for the output file. Curves are selected by either highlighting a curve and using the arrow buttons or by clicking on a curve and dragging it into the 'Selected Curves' box. The order that the curves will be output is the same as the order in the 'Selected Curves' box. To re-arrange the order, use the up/down arrows or 'click' on a curve and drag it to a different position in the list.

Setting LAS Output File Properties Output File Names

Section 6.2 Save Data to an External File : LAS Write

Save Data to an External File

Senergy

302

'Output Directory' allows the user to select the output directory where the LAS files will be written. The 'Browse' button can be used to select this directory. If separate output directories for each well have been set up (see 'Set Default File Location') then the user can 'check' the 'Use the separate output directories' box to send the output files into these directories. This box will not appear in the window if the output directories have not been set up. 'Use Well name as file name' button replaces the output file name with the Well Name. The following characters / symbols cannot be used in a file name (\ / : ; , > <) and will be replaced by the 'underscore, '_', in the file name. 'Base File Name' box is used to create the default output file name. Appended to this base name will be '_W**' where ** is the database well number. The 'Apply' will update all file names with current 'Base File Name'. 'Append to file names' box allows the user to add any text onto the output file name by typing the text into the box and then clicking 'Apply'. This can be useful for marking all result file names with a common comment such as "Final analysis". 'File name extension' box allows the user to change the file name extension (default is 'las'). This is the text string added to the output file name set under 'File Name', to complete the output file name.

File Options

Section 6.2 Save Data to an External File : LAS Write

303

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The 'Null Values' box allows the user to manually change the output curve 'Null'. The default value is '-999'. The 'Dec. places' box allows the user to define the number of decimal places that curves are outputted as. There is no limit to what can be entered but only reasonable values will be displayed in the outputted LAS file. 'Write LAS wrapped data' box, if 'checked', will output the LAS data in wrapped format with multiple lines per depth increment. If not 'checked', then the data will be written as one line per depth increment. The file conforms to the LAS version 2.0 format. If the 'Write well parameters' box is 'checked', then the scales and other curve and well information will be written into the LAS file. Writing this extra data will not affect the integrity of the LAS file and its structure will still conform to the LAS version 2.0 format. Checking the 'All wells in one file' box will output all the selected wells into a single las file. A single output file name must be used. 'Use Descriptions' and 'Use Comments' options give the user a choice of either appending the curve description field (see 'Manage Curve Headers') to the curve name in the curve information section of the LAS file or appending the curve type and curve comment fields. This does not affect the validity of the LAS file structure, since these fields are added into a comment part of the LAS structure. 'LAS Version' allows the user to output the LAS file as Version 2.0 or Version 3.0. Version 2.0 is the original LAS standard. Version 3.0 LAS files include a wide variety of data and require LAS 3.0 data importers.

Section 6.2 Save Data to an External File : LAS Write

Save Data to an External File

Senergy

304

Curve Selection

'Select Final Curves Current Well' button will automatically add all curves that have had their 'Final' flag (see 'Manage Curve Headers') set in the current well to the 'Selected Curves' box (well displayed under 'Available Curves'). 'Select Final Curves All Wells' button will move all final curves from all selected wells into the 'Selected Curves' box. 'Select All Curves All Wells' button will move all curves for all wells into the 'Selected Curves' box. 'Select All Curves in Set All Wells' button will move all curves for a selected set (use the drop-down menu in the box below the button to select the set) for all wells into the 'Selected Curves' box. 'Only output final curves' box, if 'checked', will only write curves in the selected curve list that have their 'Final' flag set. 'Use Set Names' box, if 'checked', will attach the Curve Set name to the beginning of the output curve name. The 'OK' button outputs the files. The 'Save Format' and 'Load Format' buttons allow the user to save the set-up and restore it at a later date. 'Add Wells' gives the user the option of loading wells from the 'Select Database Wells' module - 'From Select Well Screen...' or from a created Well List - 'From Well List File'.

Section 6.2 Save Data to an External File : LAS Write

305

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The 'Clear all Wells' button will clear all the wells from the 'Select Wells and Depth…' box. It does not affect the curves in the 'Selected Curves' box. These can be cleared by clicking the double left arrow box.

Automatically Rename a Curve upon Export Output Curves can be automatically renamed when being exported to LAS/LIS/DLIS/ASCII files. This is achieved by changing the curve name in the Output Name column, and creating a Mask file which contains the new curve name to be used with the Output Name in the new data file. An example of a Mask file is below. When a new Mask file is created then the first four lines of text are added automatically. The curve names should then be added to the text file in pairs.

To automatically re-name the curve names upon export: From the Curve Rename Panel, Click the Browse Button to Select or Create the mask file. From the Curve Rename Panel, Click the Edit Button to Open the Mask file in Microsoft Notepad and Add the Curve Name Pairs. Note: The mask file should be saved from within Notepad. From the Curve Rename Panel, Click the Apply Button to Apply the Changes to the Output file definition. Note: The changes are applied on the Output Curve Name, the output name is located in the mask file and if found the name changed to the new curve name.

Section 6.2 Save Data to an External File : LAS Write

Senergy

Save Data to an External File

Related Topics 'ASCII Write' 'LAS Write' 'LIS Write' 'DBASE4 Write' 'Save Zone Tops'

Section 6.2 Save Data to an External File : LAS Write

306

307

6.3

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

LIS Write

The 'LIS Write' module is launched from the 'Input / Output'

'Save Data' menu item. The '

LIS Write' window will always appear with the currently-displayed well as the first row of the ' Select Wells and Depth Intervals to output' grid box.

'Select Wells and Depth Intervals to output' Panel 'Use' : 'Check' the cell(s) in this column to output an LIS format file for each selected well. If the 'Use' column header is 'clicked' then the whole column will be set to the inverse of whatever has been set for the first line. This allows the user to quickly select or de-select all wells. 'Well Name' : The user selects additional wells to output from the drop-down list box. If the column header is 'clicked' then all the wells currently loaded in memory will be added to the list. 'Top Dep.' : Enter the top depth of the output interval. Default value is the top well depth. 'Bot Dep.' : Enter the bottom depth of the output interval. Default value is the bottom well depth. 'Step' : The default value will be the current well step increment. The user may enter a new value to change the LIS output well step. 'Ref Curve' : The default depth reference curve is the 'DEPTH' curve. The user can change this to write an output file, for example to a TVD or TVDSS reference, if these curves exist in the well(s) to be exported.

Section 6.3 Save Data to an External File : LIS Write

Save Data to an External File

Senergy

308

'File Name' : Enter the output file name. File names can be set using the 'Base File Name' and 'Apply' button or by 'clicking' the 'Use Well name as file name' button.

'Available Curves' Panel This list box will display the curves in the well whose name is displayed just below the 'Available Curves' label. To change the well, click on the well name displayed in the 'Select Wells and …' box. Curve names will be displayed in green when they occur in the 'Selected Curves' list. This allows the user to easily see which curves have been selected.

'Selected Curves' Panel This contains the selected output curves for all selected wells. It can contain curve names that do not exist in some of the output wells. If the 'Curve Aliasing' module is turned on then if a curve name cannot be found then a curve of the same 'Curve Type' will be selected instead. If a curve does exist for the well displayed in the 'Available Curves' box, then the curve name under 'Curve Name' will be in green, otherwise it will be displayed in black. By changing the well in the ' Available Curves' box the user can easily see which curves are going to be written for individual wells by looking for the green-coloured selected curves. The 'Output Name' column is editable and allows the user to change the names of the curves for the output file. Curves are selected by either highlighting a curve and using the arrow buttons or by clicking on a curve and dragging it into the 'Selected Curves' box. The order that the curves will be output is the same as the order in the 'Selected Curves' box. To re-arrange the order, use the up/down arrows or 'click' on a curve and drag it to a different position in the list.

Setting LIS Output File Properties Output File Names

Section 6.3 Save Data to an External File : LIS Write

309

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

'Output Directory' allows the user to select the output directory where the LIS files will be written. The 'Browse' button can be used to select this directory. If separate output directories for each well have been set up (see 'Set Default File Location') then the user can 'check' the 'Use the separate output directories' box to send the output files into these directories. This box will not appear in the window if the output directories have not been set up. ''Use Well name as file name' button replaces the output file name with the Well Name. The following characters / symbols cannot be used in a file name (\ / : ; , > <) and will be replaced by the 'underscore, '_', in the file name. 'Base File Name' box is used to create the default output file name. Appended to this base name will be '_W**' where ** is the database well number. The 'Apply' will update all file names with current 'Base File Name'. 'Append to file names' box allows the user to add any text onto the output file name by typing the text into the box and then clicking 'Apply'. This can be useful for marking all result file names with a common comment such as "Final analysis". File name extension' box allows the user to change the file name extension (default is 'lis'). This is the text string added to the output file name set under 'File Name', to complete the output file name.

File Options

Section 6.3 Save Data to an External File : LIS Write

Save Data to an External File

Senergy

310

The LIS format only allows curve names of four characters. Therefore the module has to truncate IP curve names. However, it is possible to use the LIS format curve 'Service ID' to store the rest of the curve name. This is done by checking the 'Use service ID for long curve names' check box. If this option is turned 'on', the output names box contains a colon (:) which now separates the LIS curve name and the service ID name. 'Keep LIS File Open' option when 'checked' will not automatically close the LIS file after the 'OK' button is 'clicked'. This allows the user to append another LIS logical file to the current LIS physical file. This can be useful if the user wants to store different curves, or different depth intervals, from the same well into different LIS logical files. To do this the user selects the curves to be written into the first logical file, checks the 'Keep LIS File Open' and clicks ' OK'. The user then changes the curves to output and clicks 'OK' again. The file is finally closed when the user exits the module. By 'checking' the 'All wells in one file' box it is possible to write multiple logical LIS files into one physical LIS disk file. This allows the user to store multiple wells into one LIS file. 'Output each curve set using set depths' option when 'checked' outputs curves from different sets and with different steps into multiple logical LIS files within one physical LIS disk file. NOTE: - Set names cannot be output using LIS write. The 'Null' Value (-999.25) is hard-coded into LIS formatted files.

Curve Selection

Section 6.3 Save Data to an External File : LIS Write

311

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

'Select Final Curves Current Well' button will automatically add all curves that have had their 'Final' flag (see 'Manage Curve Headers') set in the current well to the 'Selected Curves' box (well displayed under 'Available Curves'). 'Select Final Curves All Wells' button will move all final curves from all selected wells into the 'Selected Curves' box. 'Select All Curves All Wells' button will move all curves for all wells into the 'Selected Curves' box. 'Select All Curves in Set All Wells' button will move all curves for a selected set (use the drop-down menu in the box below the button to select the set) for all wells into the 'Selected Curves' box. 'Only output final curves' box, if 'checked', will only write curves in the selected curve list that have their 'Final' flag set. The 'OK' button outputs the files. The 'Save Format' and 'Load Format' buttons allow the user to save the set-up and restore it at a later date. 'Add Wells' gives the user the option of loading wells from the 'Select Database Wells' module - 'From Select Well Screen...' or from a created Well List - 'From Well List File'. The 'Clear all Wells' button will clear all the wells from the 'Select Wells and Depth…' box. It does not affect the curves in the 'Selected Curves' box. These can be cleared by clicking the double left arrow box.

Section 6.3 Save Data to an External File : LIS Write

Save Data to an External File

Senergy

312

Automatically Rename a Curve upon Export Output Curves can be automatically renamed when being exported to LAS/LIS/DLIS/ASCII files. This is achieved by changing the curve name in the Output Name column, and creating a Mask file which contains the new curve name to be used with the Output Name in the new data file. An example of a Mask file is below. When a new Mask file is created then the first four lines of text are added automatically. The curve names should then be added to the text file in pairs.

To automatically re-name the curve names upon export: From the Curve Rename Panel, Click the Browse Button to Select or Create the mask file. From the Curve Rename Panel, Click the Edit Button to Open the Mask file in Microsoft Notepad and Add the Curve Name Pairs. Note: The mask file should be saved from within Notepad. From the Curve Rename Panel, Click the Apply Button to Apply the Changes to the Output file definition. Note: The changes are applied on the Output Curve Name, the output name is located in the mask file and if found the name changed to the new curve name.

Section 6.3 Save Data to an External File : LIS Write

313

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Related Topics 'ASCII Write' 'LAS Write' 'LIS Write' 'DBASE4 Write' 'Save Zone Tops'

Section 6.3 Save Data to an External File : LIS Write

Senergy

Save Data to an External File

Senergy

6.4

314

DLIS Write

The 'DLIS Write' module is launched from the 'Input / Output'

'Save Data' menu item. The '

DLIS Write' window will always appear with the currently-displayed well as the first row of the ' Select Wells and Depth Intervals to output' grid box.

'Select Wells and Depth Intervals to output' Panel 'Use' : 'Check' the cell(s) in this column to output a DLIS format file for each selected well. If the 'Use' column header is 'clicked' then the whole column will be set to the inverse of whatever has been set for the first line. This allows the user to quickly select or de-select all wells. 'Well Name' : The user selects additional wells to output from the drop-down list box. If the column header is 'clicked' then all the wells currently loaded in memory will be added to the list. 'Top Dep.' : Enter the top depth of the output interval. Default value is the top well depth. 'Bot Dep.' : Enter the bottom depth of the output interval. Default value is the bottom well depth. 'Step' : The default value will be the current well step increment. The user may enter a new value to change the LIS output well step. Irregular step data can be exported in its own "Frame", unless all data is exported in a single "Frame" by 'unchecking' the 'Output each curve set using set depths' checkbox. 'Ref Curve' : The default depth reference curve is the 'DEPTH' curve. The user can change this to write an output file, for example to a TVD or TVDSS reference, if these curves exist in

Section 6.4 Save Data to an External File : DLIS Write

315

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

the well(s) to be exported. 'File Name' : Enter the output file name. File names can be set using the 'Base File Name' and 'Apply' button or by 'clicking' the 'Use Well name as file name' button.

'Available Curves' Panel This list box will display the curves in the well whose name is displayed just below the 'Available Curves' label. To change the well, click on the well name displayed in the 'Select Wells and …' box. Curve names will be displayed in green when they occur in the 'Selected Curves' list. This allows the user to easily see which curves have been selected.

'Selected Curves' Panel This contains the selected output curves for all selected wells. It can contain curve names that do not exist in some of the output wells. If the 'Curve Aliasing' module is turned on then if a curve name cannot be found then a curve of the same 'Curve Type' will be selected instead. If a curve does exist for the well displayed in the 'Available Curves' box, then the curve name under 'Curve Name' will be in green, otherwise it will be displayed in black. By changing the well in the ' Available Curves' box the user can easily see which curves are going to be written for individual wells by looking for the green-coloured selected curves. The 'Output Name' column is editable and allows the user to change the names of the curves for the output file. NOTE: Array data with an X and Y dimension will be exported as 2 dimensions of samples per depth. All data samples are exported as the DLIS data type "FSINGL" - IEEE single precision floating point number. Curves are selected by either highlighting a curve and using the arrow buttons or by clicking on a curve and dragging it into the 'Selected Curves' box. The order that the curves will be output is the same as the order in the 'Selected Curves' box. To re-arrange the order, use the up/down arrows or 'click' on a curve and drag it to a different position in the list.

Section 6.4 Save Data to an External File : DLIS Write

Save Data to an External File

Senergy

316

Setting DLIS Output File Properties Output File Names

'Output Directory' allows the user to select the output directory where the DLIS files will be written. The 'Browse' button can be used to select this directory. If separate output directories for each well have been set up (see 'Set Default File Location') then the user can 'check' the 'Use the separate output directories' box to send the output files into these directories. This box will not appear in the window if the output directories have not been set up. ''Use Well name as file name' button replaces the output file name with the Well Name. The following characters / symbols cannot be used in a file name (\ / : ; , > <) and will be replaced by the 'underscore, '_', in the file name. 'Base File Name' box is used to create the default output file name. Appended to this base name will be '_W**' where ** is the database well number. The 'Apply' will update all file names with current 'Base File Name'. 'Append to file names' box allows the user to add any text onto the output file name by typing the text into the box and then clicking 'Apply'. This can be useful for marking all result file names with a common comment such as "Final analysis". File name extension' box allows the user to change the file name extension (default is 'lis'). This is the text string added to the output file name set under 'File Name', to complete the

Section 6.4 Save Data to an External File : DLIS Write

317

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

output file name.

File Options

'Write well parameters' outputs all of the well information into the DLIS file. This includes everything in the 'General', 'Position' and 'Default Parameters' tabs in the 'Manage Well Header Info' module and the logging run attributes from the 'Logging' tab. By 'checking' the 'All wells in one file' box it is possible to write multiple logical DLIS files into one physical DLIS disk file. This allows the user to store multiple wells into one DLIS file. 'Output each curve set using set depths' option when 'checked' (it is 'checked' by default) outputs curves from different Sets and with different steps into multiple logical DLIS files within one physical DLIS disk file. This operation is performed by outputting curves in multiple "DLIS Frame objects" - one per curve Set. 'Unchecking' this option outputs all of the curves into a single "Frame". NOTE: if IP (v3.5+) reads in these created DLIS files then the curve Set name can be retained by using the 'Auto. New Sets' button in the 'DLIS Load' module. NOTE: The 'Null' Value (-999.25) is hard-coded into DLIS formatted files.

Curve Selection

Section 6.4 Save Data to an External File : DLIS Write

Save Data to an External File

Senergy

318

'Select Final Curves Current Well' button will automatically add all curves that have had their 'Final' flag (see 'Manage Curve Headers') set in the current well to the 'Selected Curves' box (well displayed under 'Available Curves') . 'Select Final Curves All Wells' button will move all final curves from all selected wells into the 'Selected Curves' box. 'Select All Curves All Wells' button will move all curves for all wells into the 'Selected Curves' box. 'Select All Curves in Set All Wells' button will move all curves for a selected set (use the drop-down menu in the box below the button to select the set) for all wells into the 'Selected Curves' box. 'Only output final curves' box, if 'checked', will only write curves in the selected curve list that have their 'Final' flag set. 'Use Set Names' will pre-fix the curve name with the Set name. The 'OK' button outputs the files. The 'Save Format' and 'Load Format' buttons allow the user to save the set-up and restore it at a later date.

Section 6.4 Save Data to an External File : DLIS Write

319

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

'Add Wells' gives the user the option of loading wells from the 'Select Database Wells' module - 'From Select Well Screen...' or from a created Well List - 'From Well List File'. The 'Clear all Wells' button will clear all the wells from the 'Select Wells and Depth…' box. It does not affect the curves in the 'Selected Curves' box. These can be cleared by clicking the double left arrow box.

Automatically Rename a Curve upon Export Output Curves can be automatically renamed when being exported to LAS/LIS/DLIS/ASCII files. This is achieved by changing the curve name in the Output Name column, and creating a Mask file which contains the new curve name to be used with the Output Name in the new data file. An example of a Mask file is below. When a new Mask file is created then the first four lines of text are added automatically. The curve names should then be added to the text file in pairs.

To automatically re-name the curve names upon export: From the Curve Rename Panel, Click the Browse Button to Select or Create the mask file. From the Curve Rename Panel, Click the Edit Button to Open the Mask file in Microsoft Notepad and Add the Curve Name Pairs. Note: The mask file should be saved from within Notepad. From the Curve Rename Panel, Click the Apply Button to Apply the Changes to the Output file definition. Note: The changes are applied on the Output Curve Name, the output name is located in the mask file and if found the name changed to the new curve name.

Section 6.4 Save Data to an External File : DLIS Write

Senergy

Save Data to an External File

Related Topics 'ASCII Write' 'LAS Write' 'LIS Write' 'DBASE4 Write' 'Save Zone Tops'

Section 6.4 Save Data to an External File : DLIS Write

320

321

6.5

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

DBASE4 Write

This option allows the user to save data to a 'DBASE 4' database. The user can add to an existing 'DBASE 4' database or create a new database.

The user enters the DBASE 4 file name under the 'Database name' label. The 'Browse' button can be used to select an existing database. The user then selects the curves and depths to write as output and 'clicks' the 'Write' button. 'Database Null Value' - this text box selects the DBASE 4 null value number. '–999' is used in IP as the Null value number. 'Database Depth Curve Name' - this text box specifies the name of the depth column in the DBASE 4 file. This is for appending to an existing database. It must be known and will usually be called 'Depth'. 'Top Depth to write' and 'Bottom Depth to write' boxes allows the user to select the interval from the IP well to write into the DBASE 4 file. 'Merge Data with existing database' and 'Overwrite existing database' radio buttons allow the user to control how to access existing DBASE 4 files. These buttons have no effect if the database is to be newly created. 'Overwrite existing curves' - this check box, if 'checked', allows the user to change the data of an existing DBASE 4 curve. NOTE: this does not delete the existing curve but

Section 6.5 Save Data to an External File : DBASE4 Write

Save Data to an External File

Senergy

322

simply changes those values that overlap with the defined load interval. The 'Set Well' button sets the DBASE 4 write well 'focus'. This is the well that is displayed at the top of the DBASE 4 write window. The button can be used to write several DBASE 4 files from different wells without having to close the window and re-open it. The user changes the well focus on the primary window by using the ''Select Well to Display'' option and then 'clicks' the ' Set Well' button on the DBASE 4 write window. Curve Set names are ignored when writing to a DBASE 4 file. This is due to the limitation of the DBASE 4 structure where the curve names are stored as column header names, which are limited to 10 characters. This means the user must be careful not to select the same curve name from different Sets.

Related Topics 'ASCII Write' 'LAS Write' 'LIS Write' 'DBASE4 Write' 'Save Zone Tops'

Section 6.5 Save Data to an External File : DBASE4 Write

323

6.6

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Save Zone Tops

This module allows 'Zone and Tops Sets' to be saved to ASCII disk files.

The user selects the Zone Set or Sets to output and chooses the output format. The user clicks the 'Save As..' button to write the file to disk. The 'Save for all Wells' option allows all the selected 'Tops Sets' to be output for all currently loaded wells. This can be useful if the user wants to output all Tops in an IP Project into the same file. The 'PetrelTM format' radio button, if 'checked', will output a file which is compatible with the PetrelTM tops loader. Two options are available: The 'Version 1' options includes header information which allows Petrel to automatically load the file.

Section 6.6 Save Data to an External File : Save Zone Tops

Save Data to an External File

Senergy

324

The 'Legacy' option does not include the header information. The Petrel format includes the X, Y and Z location of the top. The 'X' and 'Y' being the UTM coordinates and the 'Z' the true vertical subsea depth. Petrel will not be able to load the file unless the UTM's are included. Hence, to use this format, UTM curves will have to be created in IP. This can be achieved using the east distance (EDIST) and north distance (NDIST) curves output by the 'True Vertical Depth' module and then converted to UTM's in the 'User Formula' module, if necessary. The Petrel format can be output without the UTM curves, but the file will not be useable by Petrel. The 'Force negative TVD curve' 'check' box option, when 'checked', forces all depths in the selected TVD curve to be output as negative numbers below Mean Sea Level. If not 'checked', the TVD output will be exactly the same depth format as the TVD curve stored in IP. Example of an IP Tops format file: $Interactive Petrophysics Well Tops: 04/09/2003 $ TOP BOTTOM ZONE_NAME $Well: XYZ 4, Top Set: Final Tops 10723.5 10860.5 C Sand 10860.5 10909.5 B Sand 10909.5 10945.5 C1 sand 10945.5 10952.5 Mid Shale 10952.5 10998. A Sand 10998. 11420. Base Sand

Example of a Petrel tops format file. #Interactive Petrophysics Well Tops in Petrel format: 04/09/2003 VERSION 1 BEGIN HEADER REAL X REAL Y REAL Depth REAL Time STRING Type STRING Horizon Name STRING Well Name STRING Symbol REAL Measured Depth STRING Pick Name STRING Interpreter REAL Dip Angle REAL Dip Azimuth END HEADER #Well: XYZ 4, Top Set: Final Tops 7685.63281 87331.5 -7316.20557 -999 HORIZON "C Sand" "XYZ 4" Unknown 10723.5 "" "" -999 -999

Section 6.6 Save Data to an External File : Save Zone Tops

325

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

7644.66895 87373.54688 -7439.94434 -999 HORIZON "B Sand" "XYZ 4" Unknown 10860.5 "" "" -999 -999 7631.57666 87387.21875 -7485.13965 -999 HORIZON "C1 sand" "XYZ 4" Unknown 10909.5 "" "" -999 -999 7621.95898 87397.3125 -7518.32959 -999 HORIZON "Mid Shale" "XYZ 4" Unknown 10945.5 "" "" -999 -999 7620.08496 87399.28125 -7524.77979 -999 HORIZON "A Sand" "XYZ 4" Unknown 10952.5 "" "" -999 -999 7607.85742 87412.1875 -7566.6626 -999 HORIZON "Base Sand" "XYZ 4" Unknown 10998. "" "" -999 -999

Related Topics 'ASCII Write' 'LAS Write' 'LIS Write' 'DBASE4 Write' 'Save Zone Tops'

Section 6.6 Save Data to an External File : Save Zone Tops

Section

7 Working with Curve Data

327

7

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Working with Curve Data

This topic provides a definition of the Curve Types that can be created from within Interactive Petrophysics. Conventional Curves are sampled at the Well Step Interval, they can be populated with a single numeric value or null values. Curves created in Interactive Petrophysics using the Create Curve Dialog are saved using the existing Well Step for the selected Well. The blank curve can be used subsequently in another editing mode such as Interactive Curve Edit, to create, for example, a facies or other flag-type curve Array Curves can contain numerous data values at a single depth-entry. The Array curve permits the display of data such as core analysis data points (porosity, permeability, grain density) at the actual depth that the core plug was cut, not at the IP database depth, which is the load-depth rounded to the nearest 'well step' interval (6 inches / 0.1524 m), as happens when loading conventionally from an ASCII file. Lithology Curves in Interactive Petrophysics are "flag" type curves with values mapped to Lithology Bitmaps (stored in Lithology.opt). They provide a graphical representation of a lithology curve with associated Fill Shadings in the Log Plot Display. Point Curves appear in the Interactive Petrophysics Log Plot as Points within a Log Plot Track. The resulting points can be output to the Clipboard as a list of Depth Measurements. One example of how this data might be used is to locate the exact points where Formation Pressure Tests, Fluid Samples, or Sidewall Cores are to be taken. Picture / Core Photo Curves consist of a set of graphics files, for example a set of white light or UV core photographs. Each graphics file has a defined top and bottom depth which allows the picture to be scaled to the log data. The images are not stored directly, but the graphics file and path name to the pictures are stored in the IP database. When a graphics file is selected, it is loaded into memory and converted into a bitmap for display. Text Curves contain "Text" strings which can then be viewed in a Log Plot Track in the Log Plot Display. It is useful, for example, for labelling RFT pressure points with actual pressure values or test comments, for labelling core or perforation top and bottom depths and for including core descriptions or test results from spreadsheet files. The 'Edit' menu provides the functionality for editing / splicing / filtering and rescaling input curves. Additional modules allow the user to 'create Array curves', create 'Lithology' curves and create 'Point curves'. NOTE: a log plot has to be open in order for all the options to be available for selection.

Related Topics

Section 7.

Working with Curve Data :

Working with Curve Data

Senergy

Creating Interactive Petrophysics Curves Working with Interactive Curves Curve Data Manipulation Manage Picture/Core Photo Data Manage Text Curves Array Image Data

Section 7.

Working with Curve Data :

328

329

7.1

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Creating Interactive Petrophysics Curves

This topic provides a definition of the Curve Types that can be created from within Interactive Petrophysics. Conventional Curves are sampled at the Well Step Interval, they can be populated with a single numeric value or null values. Curves created in Interactive Petrophysics using the Create Curve Dialog are saved using the existing Well Step for the selected Well. The blank curve can be used subsequently in another editing mode such as Interactive Curve Edit, to create, for example, a facies or other flag-type curve Array Curves can contain numerous data values at a single depth-entry. The Array curve permits the display of data such as core analysis data points (porosity, permeability, grain density) at the actual depth that the core plug was cut, not at the IP database depth, which is the load-depth rounded to the nearest 'well step' interval (6 inches / 0.1524 m), as happens when loading conventionally from an ASCII file. Lithology Curves in Interactive Petrophysics are "flag" type curves with values mapped to Lithology Bitmaps (stored in Lithology.opt). They provide a graphical representation of a lithology curve with associated Fill Shadings in the Log Plot Display. Point Curves appear in the Interactive Petrophysics Log Plot as Points within a Log Plot Track. The resulting points can be output to the Clipboard as a list of Depth Measurements. One example of how this data might be used is to locate the exact points where Formation Pressure Tests, Fluid Samples, or Sidewall Cores are to be taken. Picture / Core Photo Curves consist of a set of graphics files, for example a set of white light or UV core photographs. Each graphics file has a defined top and bottom depth which allows the picture to be scaled to the log data. The images are not stored directly, but the graphics file and path name to the pictures are stored in the IP database. When a graphics file is selected, it is loaded into memory and converted into a bitmap for display. Text Curves contain "Text" strings which can then be viewed in a Log Plot Track in the Log Plot Display. It is useful, for example, for labelling RFT pressure points with actual pressure values or test comments, for labelling core or perforation top and bottom depths and for including core descriptions or test results from spreadsheet files.

Related Topics Creating Interactive Petrophysics Curves Working with Interactive Curves Curve Data Manipulation

Section 7.1 Working with Curve Data : Creating Interactive Petrophysics Curves

Working with Curve Data

Senergy

330

Manage Picture/Core Photo Data Manage Text Curves Array Image Data

7.1.1

Conventional Curves

'Conventional' curves, those sampled at the 'well step interval', can be named and created using the Create Curves Dialog. See Also: Array Curves. The Conventional Curve(s) can be populated with null values if the 'Null' box is 'checked', or with a single data value - available when the 'Null' box is 'un-checked'. Curves created by this module are saved using the existing 'well step' interval for the current well. The blank curve can be used subsequently in another editing mode such as 'Interactive Curve Edit', to create, for example, a facies or other flag-type curve.

Related Topics Array Curves Lithology Curves Point Curves Picture / Core Photo Curves Text Curves Curve Management

7.1.2

Array Curves

The 'Create Curve / Array Curve' functionality found under the 'Edit' menu, allows the user to create two types of curve; 'conventional' or 'array' curves. 'Conventional' curves, those sampled at the 'well step interval', can be named and created using the grid display shown below. The curve(s) can be populated with null values if the 'Null' box is 'checked', or with a single data value - available when the 'Null' box is 'un-checked'. Curves created by this module are saved using the existing 'well step' interval for the current well. The blank curve can be used subsequently in another editing mode such as 'Interactive Curve Edit ', to create, for example, a facies or other flag-type curve. There is an 'Array Curve' option to enable the user to create an 'Array'-type curve. This type of curve can contain numerous data values at a single depth-entry. The Array curve permits the display of data such as core analysis data points (porosity, permeability, grain density) at the

Section 7.1 Working with Curve Data : Creating Interactive Petrophysics Curves

331

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

actual depth that the core plug was cut, not at the IP database depth, which is the load-depth rounded to the nearest 'well step' interval (6 inches / 0.1524 m), as happens when loading conventionally from an ASCII file.

Loading Core Analysis Data as Array Curves To load core analysis data as array curves the user must : 1. Create the empty array curves - type in the curve name corresponding to the curve name in the ASCII file, into the'Crv Name' column, 2. 'Check' the 'Null' box as the default value, 3. 'Check' the 'Use Array' check-box. The 'X' and 'Z' dimension boxes will become 'active'. These entry boxes allow the user to type in values to set up the dimensions for the new array curves. 4. Set the 'X dimension' to a value of '1' and the 'Z dimension' to an appropriate value (see below) and click the 'Create' button.

The Array 'Z' Dimension' The user should consider the accuracy with which the data to be loaded needs to be visualized. If the 'well step interval' is 6 inches and there are core plugs more closely spaced than this, then the user could specify a 'Z' value of 6. This will resample the core data curve to the nearest one inch of the core plug depth. A value of 12 would place the core plug to the nearest 0.5 inch of the plug depth. The user-specified array 'Z value' will allow a smaller depth increment to be created than the existing well step. The diagram below illustrates how the 'Z value' affects the data sampling.

Section 7.1 Working with Curve Data : Creating Interactive Petrophysics Curves

Working with Curve Data

Senergy

332

5. Once the Array curves are created, the user should proceed to load the core analysis data using the 'ASCII Load' module, choosing the same curve names as those created for the Array curves. IP will warn that the curve name(s) already exists: 6. Confirm 'Yes' that it is OK to overwrite the existing curve(s). The user can check the array curve properties by selecting 'Edit / List Log Curve Headers' and looking at the 'Statistics' tab. The following diagram shows an example of how the 'Array' data appears versus 'conventional' data points. Conventional ASCII data depths are rounded to the nearest well step increment and data are lost if they are below the well step resolution. Array curve data are displayed at actual 'Load' depths and all points are shown (depending on array 'Z value' that is selected).

Section 7.1 Working with Curve Data : Creating Interactive Petrophysics Curves

333

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Core analysis information, loaded as Array curves can be visualized in the IP crossplot tool by checking the 'Expand Array Curve' box in the Edit Format window. If the Expand Array Curves Checkbox is Selected in the Crossplot Dialog, the Crossplot will display ALL the Curve Values in the Array.

If the Expand Array Curves in NOT Selected in the Crossplot Dialog, the Crossplot will only display the values that correspond to the Well Step Interval.

Section 7.1 Working with Curve Data : Creating Interactive Petrophysics Curves

Working with Curve Data

Senergy

334

Related Topics Array Curves Lithology Curves Point Curves Picture / Core Photo Curves Text Curves Curve Management

7.1.3

Lithology Curves

The 'Create / Edit Lithology Curve' module, located within the main IP 'Edit' menu, allows the user to interactively 'digitize' a graphic lithology curve with associated 'fill shadings' into a log plot display. The graphic shadings can then be used to generate a display such as that illustrated below: The 'Create / Edit Lithology Curve' module generates a curve called 'LITH', which is a 'flag' type curve, whose values are 'mapped' to the lithology bitmaps stored in the IP program '\Shading Bitmaps' subdirectory. The order in which these bitmaps are listed in the editor tool is stored either in the Lithology.opt file in the IP program directory or, if the user has defined their own Default lithology file, in the active IP Project directory as a 'local' Lithology.opt file. See the '

Section 7.1 Working with Curve Data : Creating Interactive Petrophysics Curves

335

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Edit Default Lithology' tool description for more details.

Creating a New LITH Curve The user must have an active single well log plot in the IP window. Select the 'Create / Edit Lithology Curve' option from the 'Edit' menu. The 'Create / Edit Lithology Curve' dialog window is launched as shown below:

Section 7.1 Working with Curve Data : Creating Interactive Petrophysics Curves

Senergy

Working with Curve Data

336

1. Select a log plot track, from the drop-down list, into which to digitize the 'LITH' curve. 2. Click the 'Plot Curve' button to place the curve in the selected track. 3. 'Click' the 'Start Edit' button (the button then toggles to 'Stop Edit').

4. Select a lithology description, from the drop-down list, to 'digitize'.

5. On the log plot, in the selected track, left -mouse 'click and drag' over the vertical interval you wish to 'fill' with the first lithology. The track will fill with the selected bitmap shading as

Section 7.1 Working with Curve Data : Creating Interactive Petrophysics Curves

337

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

shown above. Continue until the desired 'LITH' fill is complete.

6. The user can zoom in to a finer depth resolution (e.g.1:500 / 1:200 Scale) to refine the lithology interpretation. Thin beds (down to the well step increment (0.5ft, 0.1524m) can be digitized over the top of a thick interval of a single dominant lithology and the thin bed lithology is inserted into the Flag curve. The '' fill can be used to enter an interval of 'unknown' lithology. 7. To end the digitizing, either : 'click' the 'Stop Edit' button and the 'OK' button to save the edited curve into memory.

Section 7.1 Working with Curve Data : Creating Interactive Petrophysics Curves

Working with Curve Data

Senergy

338

Note: the curve will be saved to the active well when the user selects 'Save All Wells to Database' or clicks the 'Save Current Well to Database As' options, or 'click' 'Cancel' to abort the editing operation without saving the 'LITH' curve.

Plotting Lithology Curve Shading In a well where the user has created a Lithology curve, the initial log track display, after the curve has been digitized, will show all the shading bitmaps and their lithology descriptions in the Log Track header. This is usually impractical for plotting hardcopy, since each log plot could contain up to 30 bitmap shadings in the Log Plot header and plot footer. To remove this long list of shadings from the log plot header, the user can simply type in the word 'None' in the 'Shading Description' column for the track containing the 'LITH' curve, as illustrated below. Click the 'Run ' or 'Apply' button to see the effect on the log plot.

Section 7.1 Working with Curve Data : Creating Interactive Petrophysics Curves

339

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Adding a Lithology Legend to a Hardcopy Log Plot An enhanced metafile (.emf) file called Lithology Legend.emf, can be found in the '\Shading Bitmaps' sub-directory where IP is installed on the users PC. This subdirectory also contains the IP 'default' lithology bitmap files. To include a 'Lithology Legend' in a log plot, graphics file or output to clipboard displaying lithology shadings, the user can use the following steps: 1. In the log plot 'Hardcopy' dialog, On the 'Main Plot' tab, click the 'Plot Size' Button to see the dimensions of your log plot. Note the 'Width' measurement. 2. Then go to the 'Plot Header' tab and select either the 'Standard' or 'Full' Plot Header style. 3. 'Click' in a blank row of the 'Graphics' panel and use the 'Browse' button to locate the ' Lithology Legend.emf' file. Select this file. Set the 'Width' measurement to the 'width' from step 1. 4. Type in a 'height' value around half the 'width' value to preserve the graphics files aspect ratio. 5. 'Check' the 'Use' cell at the end of the row you are working in. When the log plot is output to File, printer or clipboard, the legend will be embedded in the log plot header, as illustrated below.

Section 7.1 Working with Curve Data : Creating Interactive Petrophysics Curves

Working with Curve Data

Senergy

340

A Microsoft Powerpoint file, called 'Lithology Legend.ppt', also found in the IP program '\Shading Bitmaps' subdirectory, contains the text and graphic elements that were used to create the IP 'Lithology Legend.emf' metafile. The user can use / edit this .ppt file to create their own custom 'Legend' and save it as a metafile for use in the hardcopy plotting routine. NOTE: this module accesses the following IP modules, located within the IP 'Tools' menu, in order to 'map' bitmap shadings to lithology shadings.

Section 7.1 Working with Curve Data : Creating Interactive Petrophysics Curves

341

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Firstly, 'Shading Types' where all bitmaps and single-colour shadings are set up for IP. Secondly, the 'Edit Default Lithology' tool which allows the user to set up bitmap shadings in the IP default list.

Related Topics Array Curves Lithology Curves Point Curves Picture / Core Photo Curves Text Curves Curve Management

7.1.4

Point Curves

The 'Create/ Edit Point Curve' module allows the user to interactively digitize points into a log plot track. The resulting points can be output to the WINDOWS™ clipboard as a list of depths that can be used, for example, to confirm with wellsite staff where to take formation pressure tests / fluid samples /sidewall cores. The points can also be displayed in a log plot, which can be copied to the clipboard as a further visual aid to test / core point selection. The module is launched from the 'Edit' menu. NOTE: a log plot must be active in the main IP window. The following dialog window is launched with the default curve name 'Points' filled in the text box at the top of the window. The user can change this name and the 'Output Set' that the curve will be written to.

If the curve is new, the user should select a track within the active log plot to work in, by selecting

Section 7.1 Working with Curve Data : Creating Interactive Petrophysics Curves

Working with Curve Data

Senergy

342

from the 'Select track' drop-down list. Click on the 'Plot Curve' button to put the points curve into the selected log track. Click the 'Start Edit' button (this then toggles the button to 'Stop Edit') and proceed to digitize points.

Points are created by left mouse button clicking in the selected track. A point symbol will appear in the log track and a depth value will be added to the 'Picked Points' listing. The user can use the log scale control to zoom in / zoom out of the log plot display when selecting / creating / deleting points. Points can be moved by 'clicking and dragging', with the mouse cursor pointing to a point in the log track. NOTE: dragging a point over another point in the display will delete that point. Points can be deleted by positioning the mouse cursor over the required point (the cursor changes to a cross shape) and clicking the keyboard 'Delete' key. To finish creating / editing the point curve, click the 'Stop Edit' button. Click the 'OK' button to save the newly created / edited curve into memory. The curve will be written to the well when either the 'Save All Wells to Database' or 'Save Selected Well to Database As' option is selected. Click 'Cancel' to abort the 'Create / Edit Point curve' operation. The list of 'Point Depths' shown in the 'Picked Points' panel is pasted into the WINDOWS

Section 7.1 Working with Curve Data : Creating Interactive Petrophysics Curves

343

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

clipboard by clicking the 'Clipboard' button. The user can then use the right-mouse-buttonclick 'Paste' or 'Crtl V' paste functionality to add the points into an e-mail or other external document.

Related Topics Array Curves Lithology Curves Point Curves Picture / Core Photo Curves Text Curves Curve Management

Section 7.1 Working with Curve Data : Creating Interactive Petrophysics Curves

Working with Curve Data

Senergy

7.2

344

Working with Interactive Curves

This Chapter outlines the Interactive Curve Features within Interactive Petrophysics. Interactive Curve Edit: The 'Interactive Curve Edit' tool allows the user to edit any curve currently included in a log plot display in the IP 'workspace'. NOTE: The tool is only 'active' when a log plot window is on-screen. Interactive Baseline Shift: The 'Interactive Baseline Shift' allows the user to graphically apply a baseline shift to any curve currently shown on a log plot. Interactive Trend / Square Curve: The 'Interactive Trend / Square Curve' allows the user to; graphically define and save a 'Trend curve' for any log curve or calculation parameter in IP or graphically define and save a stepped, 'Square' curve from a chosen input curve. The 'Trend Curve' is very useful, for example; for defining 'GRclean' and 'GRshale' lines over large log intervals, or for capturing Rw trends over long well sections as input to Sw determination. Trend Curves can be created for any log analysis parameter and substituted in any IP calculation module where a parameter is called for. The trend curve can be used to compute straight line trends for logarithmically-scaled curves for example, or for defining normal shale compaction trend curves for sonic/resistivity in pore pressure analysis. The 'Square Curve' functionality can be used, for example, to create stepped sonic and density curves for input to acoustic impedance modelling. Interactive Depth Shift: The 'Interactive Depth Shift' module allows the user to depth-shift one, or many, curves against another, 'reference' curve, either; using 'rubber-band' type shifts to stretch / squeeze the 'curve-to-shift' relative to the reference curve, or using 'block' depth shifts to move entire curves up or down relative to the reference curve. Depth Shift Other Curves: This new module allows shifting of curves using the depth shift offset curve generated by the original depth shift module. Interactive Block Depth Shift: The 'Interactive Block Depth shift' module allows the user to depth-shift a single curve or groups of curves by a fixed amount. This is useful, for example, for depth-matching two log runs before splicing them together. This module differs from the ' Interactive Depth Shift' module described in the previous chapter in that only one block depth shift can be made per curve. Interactive Curve Splice: The 'Interactive Curve Splice' allows the user to splice together multiple curves to form a single continuous curve. The module can also be used to set certain intervals in a curve to Null (absent) data. This can be useful for removing bad dta from a log. Splice Curves: The 'Splice Curves' module allows the splicing of multiple sets of curves at the same time. It can be used in conjunction with the 'Interactive Curve Splice' module.

Section 7.2 Working with Curve Data : Working with Interactive Curves

345

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Interactive Dip Picking: The module is launched from the 'Edit'

Senergy

'Interactive Dip Picking'

menu. Before launching the module an appropriate log plot has to be created that shows the image and has a track available to display the results of the picked dips. For more information on how to set up a log plot to display image logs go to this chapter - Images.

Related Topics Creating Interactive Petrophysics Curves Working with Interactive Curves Curve Data Manipulation Manage Picture/Core Photo Data Manage Text Curves Array Image Data

7.2.1

Interactive Curve Edit

The 'Interactive Curve Edit' tool allows the user to edit any curve currently included in a log plot display in the IP 'workspace'. NOTE: The tool is only 'active' when a log plot window is onscreen. The editing of a particular curve is performed in the log plot, using the attributes selected on the 'Edit Curve' dialog. The user selects 'Interactive Curve Edit' from the main 'Edit' menu. The following window will be displayed:

The user must select the 'Curve to edit'. This is done by 'clicking' on the appropriate curve trace in the active plot display, or by 'clicking' on the 'Curve Name' in the log track header. The 'Edit Curve' window will display the selected curve name. Any Log Plot format, which shows the ' Curve to edit', can be used for editing. NOTE: You cannot manually type a curve name into the 'Curve to edit' box, since the program has to establish where in the log display the 'Curve to edit' can be found.

Section 7.2 Working with Curve Data : Working with Interactive Curves

Working with Curve Data

Senergy

346

The 'Result Curve' name defaults to the input curve name with a number '1' appended to the name. By 'clicking' the option 'Create Backup Curve' the window will change as follows:

In this case, the selected input curve will be copied to the 'Backup Curve' name (RHOBbu) before any edits are performed, and the editing will be performed on the original curve name (RHOB). This is useful, for example, when editing a spike out of a curve in the middle of an interpretation, since the curve names in the interpretation input windows do not need to be changed. There are two 'modes' of interactive editing: 'Stream Mode' - In 'Stream mode', 'click & hold' the left-mouse-button down to draw a new piece of curve. Release the mouse button and click the 'Interval Break' button to move to a different section of the log curve. 'Point Mode' - In 'Point mode' 'click' the left-mouse-button to start an edit. Each mouse 'click' will draw a straight line between the mouse 'click' points. To make an interval break in ' Point mode' either right mouse 'click' or 'click' the 'Interval Break' button. Click the 'Start Edit' button to begin the interactive edit. The 'Curve to edit' will change colour and the user redraws the curve as described above.

Section 7.2 Working with Curve Data : Working with Interactive Curves

347

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

You can scroll up and down the log while in edit mode.

The 'Null the Data' box, if 'checked', will set the interval being edited to Null (absent) data. This gives the option of setting bad log data to absent rather than editing it to a new value. The 'Use Fixed Value' box, if 'checked', will set the interval being edited to the entered ' Fixed Value'. The 'Undo Edit' Button launches another dialog window which shows an interactive 'slider bar' with which the user can undo a part, or all, of the edits that have just been performed.

Even if the 'Interval Break' function has been used, the 'Undo Edit' operation will reset the curve values to the original data across editing gaps. To 'undo' and save the part-edited curve, move the slider bar to the appropriate position then click 'OK' to return to the main

Section 7.2 Working with Curve Data : Working with Interactive Curves

Working with Curve Data

Senergy

348

interactive 'Edit Curve' dialog. To exit from 'Undo Edit' mode, without making any changes click the 'Cancel' button to return to the 'Edit Curve' dialog.

'Click' the 'Finish Edit' button to complete the edit.

Clicking the 'Cancel Edit' button will abort the edit operation and delete any new or backup curves, leaving the original curve untouched.

Related Topics Interactive Curve Edit Interactive Baseline Shift Interactive Trend / Square Curve Interactive Depth Shift Depth Shift Other Curves Interactive Block Depth Shift Interactive Curve Splice Splice Curves

Section 7.2 Working with Curve Data : Working with Interactive Curves

349

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Interactive Dip Picking

7.2.2

Interactive Baseline Shift

The 'Interactive Baseline Shift' allows the user to graphically apply a baseline shift to any curve currently shown on a log plot. The user selects the 'Interactive Baseline Shift' under the main ' Edit' menu. The following window will be displayed:

The user must now select the 'Curve to shift'. This is done by clicking on the appropriate curve in the log plot display or by clicking on the curve name in the track header. The 'Curve to Shift' window will display the selected curve. Any plot format, which shows the curve, can be used for editing. The user cannot edit a curve that is being displayed on backup scale (you will not be able to select it). Therefore, make sure the curve is on main scale before trying to select it. NOTE: The user cannot manually type in a curve name, since the program has to establish in which track in the log display the 'Curve to shift' can be found.

The 'Result curve' name defaults to the input curve with a '1' appended to the 'Curve to shift' name. By 'clicking' the option 'Create Backup Curve' the window will change as follows:

Section 7.2 Working with Curve Data : Working with Interactive Curves

Working with Curve Data

Senergy

350

In this case the 'Curve to shift' will be copied to the backup curve, and the shifts will be performed on the original curve. The shifts are made by creating a baseline on the plot. The 'Result curve' values will be the separation between the baseline and the shift value plus any 'Baseline Value' the user enters. Click 'Start Shift' to begin the interactive Baseline shifts. The dialog window will be displayed where the user can optionally select the program to create a result track. The result track can be used to view what the final shifted curve will look like while the editing is being made.

The Baseline will be drawn as a vertical thick line at the value entered in the 'Baseline Value' box. Click in the track to move the baseline. The baseline will consist of line sections joining up the user-entered points. The user-entered points are displayed as small blue circles on the baseline. The user can move a point by placing the cursor on a point (the cursor will change to a cross) and while holding down the left mouse button the point can be dragged to a new position. To delete a point, move the cursor over the point and press the keyboard 'Delete' key.

Section 7.2 Working with Curve Data : Working with Interactive Curves

351

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Click the 'Finish Shift' button to complete the shifts. The user will be asked whether the shifts are to be saved to disk to a BaselineShifts.bls file. This will allow the user at a later date to recall the shifts and make changes. To recall an old set of shifts 'click' on the 'Recall Shifts' button and select the BaselineShifts.bls shift file. NOTE: the user must select a shift curve before starting the interactive shifts, even if a shift table has been recalled. In the log plot track are the 'Curve to shift' and the 'Result curve' from the BaselineShifts.bls file. Select the curve on the log plot to which to apply the recalled shift. After choosing the curve, the result curve is automatically renamed by putting a '1' at the end of the 'Curve to shift name', even if there is already a curve with that name. The 'Result curve' name should be manually edited to avoid confusion. There is a 10 character limit. NOTE: if the user leaves the 'Result curve' as SP1, even though SP1 already exists, a warning message will appear when 'Start Shift' is 'clicked' saying that SP1 already exists and does the user want to overwrite it or not. Select 'Start Shift'. If 'Finish Shift' is clicked then the 'Curve to shift' will be shifted by the recalled shift values and the 'Result curve' will reflect these recalled shifts. The 'Cancel Shift' button will abort the shifts and delete any backup curves, leaving the original curve untouched.

Related Topics Interactive Curve Edit Interactive Baseline Shift Interactive Trend / Square Curve

Section 7.2 Working with Curve Data : Working with Interactive Curves

Working with Curve Data

Senergy

352

Interactive Depth Shift Depth Shift Other Curves Interactive Block Depth Shift Interactive Curve Splice Splice Curves Interactive Dip Picking

7.2.3

Interactive Trend / Square Curve

The 'Interactive Trend / Square Curve' allows the user to : graphically define and save a 'Trend curve' for any log curve or calculation parameter in IP. graphically define and save a stepped, 'Square' curve from a chosen input curve. The 'Trend Curve' is very useful, for example; for defining 'GRclean' and 'GRshale' lines over large log intervals, or for capturing Rw trends over long well sections as input to Sw determination. Trend Curves can be created for any log analysis parameter and substituted in any IP calculation module where a parameter is called for. The trend curve can be used to compute straight line trends for logarithmically-scaled curves for example, or for defining normal shale compaction trend curves for sonic/resistivity in pore pressure analysis. The 'Square Curve' functionality can be used, for example, to create stepped sonic and density curves for input to acoustic impedance modelling. The user selects 'Interactive Trend / Square Curve' under the main 'Edit' menu (menu item is only active if a log plot is currently displayed). The following window will be launched:

First, choose the type of trend curve you want to create ('Trend' or 'Square'), using the radio buttons. This will determine the resulting curve suffix ('_t' or '_s') for the output curve. Now select the curve from which the trend or square curve is to be created. This is done either: by 'clicking' on the appropriate curve in the log plot display, or by 'clicking' on the curve name in the log track header. The user should make sure that the input curve is visible entirely on the main scale in the plot, not 'wrapped' on a backup

Section 7.2 Working with Curve Data : Working with Interactive Curves

353

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

scale. You cannot select a curve on a backup scale. NOTE: The user cannot manually type in the curve name, since the program has to establish the curve track where the subject curve can be found.

The 'Result curve' name defaults to the 'Curve to trend' name with a postscript '_t' or '_s' attached, depending on whether 'Trend ' or 'Square' curve is selected. The user can rename the output to any required name. Click 'Start Trend' to begin the trend line creation. The trend line will initially be drawn as a vertical thick line in the curve track. 'Click' in the track to create the trend line definition points. The trend line will consist of line sections joining up the user-entered points. The user-entered points are displayed as small blue circles on the trend line as shown in the diagram below. The user can move a point by placing the mouse cursor over a point (the cursor will change to a cross) and while holding down the left-mouse-button, the point may be dragged to a new position. To delete a point, move the cursor over the point and press the 'Delete' key on the keyboard. The left-hand well plot illustrates the 'Trend Curve', the right-hand plot illustrates the appearance of the 'Square curve'.

Section 7.2 Working with Curve Data : Working with Interactive Curves

Working with Curve Data

Senergy

354

Click the 'Finish Trend' button to create the Trend Curve. The user will be asked whether to display the resulting trend curve in the plot track.

The user is then prompted whether the trend curve points are to be saved.

Saving the trend curve calibration points to disk allows the user to recall and edit the data at a later date. The trend curve is scaled to the 'Curve to trend' and details can be found in the ' Manage Curve Headers' display.

Editing Trend Lines Editing trend lines is performed using the 'Recall Trend' option and can only be performed on ' Trend' or 'Square' curves that have been saved to disk. The user should select the 'Recall

Section 7.2 Working with Curve Data : Working with Interactive Curves

355

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Trend' button and choose the appropriate disk file for editing.

The user is then prompted for an appropriate curve on the plot to use for calibration of the trend line definition points. A gamma ray trend line, for example, cannot be plotted in a RHOB/Neutron log track.

Choose the appropriate curve by 'clicking' on the curve name in the log curve header or by 'clicking' on the curve in the plot track. The 'Start Edit' button is activated and the user can ' move', 'add' or 'delete' calibration points as required. 'Click' on 'Finish Trend' and save the edited trend curve to the database and the edited calibration points to disk as shown above.

Section 7.2 Working with Curve Data : Working with Interactive Curves

Working with Curve Data

Senergy

356

Related Topics Interactive Curve Edit Interactive Baseline Shift Interactive Trend / Square Curve Interactive Depth Shift Depth Shift Other Curves Interactive Block Depth Shift Interactive Curve Splice Splice Curves Interactive Dip Picking

7.2.4

Interactive Depth Shift

The 'Interactive Depth Shift' module allows the user to depth-shift one, or many, curves against another, 'reference' curve, either; using 'rubber-band' type shifts to stretch / squeeze the 'curve-to-shift' relative to the reference

Section 7.2 Working with Curve Data : Working with Interactive Curves

357

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

curve, or using 'block' depth shifts to move entire curves up or down relative to the reference curve. Depth shifts can either; be applied manually, using the mouse cursor, or in IP Version 3.3 and later, depth shifts can be set up using the built in 'Auto-Depth Shift' functionality, which is activated from within the 'Interactive Depth Shift' log plot display. NOTE: This functionality does not operate when 'Block Depth Shift' mode is selected. The 'Interactive Depth Shift' module works in a log plot display that the user must set up or else the user can use the 'Depth Shift Wizard' to set the log plot up. When the 'Interactive Depth Shift' module is launched an information screen appears asking if the user wants to 'Run Depth Shift Wizard?'. If the user answers 'Yes' then the 'Depth Shift Wizard' starts. If the user answers 'No' then a blank 'Log Plot Format' set-up window is opened. The user sets up log tracks and the curves to be displayed and shifted. Each log track can act as an independent set of depth shifts. This allows the user to perform multiple depth shifts simultaneously. Interactive depth shifts are performed in a graphical, log plot display. The typical set-up screen for the log plot is illustrated below. This screen allows you to : Select the 'type' of depth-shift method you wish to apply ('interpolate' or 'block shift') Choose the required 'input' curves, Pick a 'reference (Ref.) curve', 'curves-to-display' and 'curves-to-shift', and Assign the log plot track number ('track #') that the curves will be displayed in. In this example, shown below, 2 tracks have been set up. In Track #1, the GREC and RHOB curves will be depth-shifted relative to the GR curve, with output curves GRECds and RHOBds. In Track #2, the depth-shifted RHOBds curve will be displayed together with the NPHI curve which can be depth-shifted relative to the RHOBds curve.

Section 7.2 Working with Curve Data : Working with Interactive Curves

Working with Curve Data

Senergy

358

The set-up 'options' check-boxes, located at the top of the Set-up window are described below. 'Interpolate curve data' check-box : if 'checked' (default), will allow the program to interpolate between curve data points if the depth shift operation results in a value falling between two database depth step increments. If not 'checked', then the closest input value for the shift depth will be chosen. NOTE: For point data (core data) this box should not be 'checked', otherwise it could result in interpolations between Null data point (-999) and good data. 'Shift data using blocks' check-box : This box controls the way IP shifts curve data. If the box is not 'checked' (default), then the user works with interactive 'depth shift points'. The 'shift curves' are stretched or squeezed between the selected depth shift points. If the box is 'checked', then, rather than define interactive points for depth-shifting, the user defines a 'block' of data to shift. This is designed to simplify shifting core data. 'Result Curve Name Default extension' : This box contains a text entry that is the default extension that is added to an input curve name to define the output curve name. For example, using the program default extension of 'ds', an input curve name of GR would have an output curve name of GRds. 'Output Set' button :

Section 7.2 Working with Curve Data : Working with Interactive Curves

359

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Allows the user to select the set into which the output depth-shifted curves will be placed. Clicking the button brings up a small dialogue box where the user can select previously created sets or else 'Create New Set'. If 'Create New Set' is selected then the 'Manage Curve Sets' dialog is opened. 'Apply to track' : Use the drop-down 'Apply to track' menu to select a track that the 'Output Set' will be applied to. Different 'Output Sets' can be selected for each track or the same 'Output Set' can be selected for all the tracks. The 'Depth Offset' box allows the user to define the name of the depth curve associated with the depth-shift for each track. The depth curve will default to the 'Default depth curve name prefix' plus the track number. The 'Default depth curve name prefix' is user editable.

With IP v 3.4 irregular stepped curve sets can be created. The 'Depth Offset' curve can not be in an irregular step curve set. Shifting curves in an irregular curve set will create extra depth entries in the set for the shifted curves to accommodate for their shifted positions. If this is not required then a new shifted irregular set should be created in order to accommodate the shifted curves. To illustrate how the module works we will look at the following scenario: Two separate log runs have been recorded, GR/LLDLLS/MSFLC and SGR/RHOB/TNPH/DRHO. The nuclear log curves are off-depth relative to the reference GR/LLD tool and the neutron log

Section 7.2 Working with Curve Data : Working with Interactive Curves

Working with Curve Data

Senergy

360

(TNPH) is also off depth relative to the density log (RHOB) curve, as illustrated below.

In this case, curve GR will be set up in Track #1 as the reference curve to depth shift the SGR and the RHOB and TNPH curves to. In addition, RHOB and TNPH are set up in Track #2, where TNPH will be depth-shifted again to match the depth-shifted density curve RHOBds. Note that any additional curves, named in each track, but not displayed ('Display Curve' entry not 'checked'), will be depth-shifted by the same amount as the displayed 'Shift Curve' in that track. The Set-up 'grid' defines the appearance of the interactive log plot that will be used to perform the depth shifts. The grid columns are described below.

Section 7.2 Working with Curve Data : Working with Interactive Curves

361

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

'Trk #' : This column defines the depth-shift track number for the interactive log plot that will be launched from this set-up window. Up to eight depth shift tracks can be defined. A 'depth' track is automatically assigned as the first log track to be drawn. 'Input Curve' :This is the name of the input curve to 'shift', 'display' or to use as a 'reference'. The curve name must either already exist in the well being edited or it can be an output from a previously-defined shift track. In the example shown above, curve DS:RHOBds is used as an input curve to track 2, and is already defined as an output curve from track 1. This curve is therefore allowed as an input to track 2, even though it may not yet exist in the well when the interactive log plot is launched. 'Output Curve' : This column sets up the names for the output, depth-shifted curves. A 'default' output name will automatically appear when the mouse cursor is moved out of an 'input curve' box. IP will default to the 'Input curve' name with the 'default extension' ('ds') appended to the curve name. The 'output curve' name is not used unless the 'Shift Curve' box is 'checked' to flag the output as an edited curve. 'Shift Curve' : 'Check' this column for each row of the grid if the selected input curve is to be depth-shifted. The first log curve with both 'Shift Curve' and 'Display Curve' 'checked' in a log track defines the curve that will be interactively moved on-screen during the selection of shifts. In the above example, the SGRds curve will be the interactive curve displayed in track 1 and the TNPHds curve will be the interactive curve in track 2. Any additional curves named / listed in a log track will be shifted by the same amount as the 'Shift Curve', but will not be displayed in the log plot unless the 'Display Curve' column has been

Section 7.2 Working with Curve Data : Working with Interactive Curves

Working with Curve Data

Senergy

362

'checked' for these curve entries. 'Display Curve' : 'Check' this box to display the selected input curve on the depth-shift log plot. If the selected curve is also flagged as a 'Shift Curve', then the displayed curve will be the 'depth-shifted result curve', otherwise it will be the input curve. Any curve can be displayed in any track. 'Ref. Curve' : This column is used to define a 'Reference Curve'. Only one curve can be defined as the 'reference' and it can not be a 'Shift Curve'. The 'Reference Curve' does not have to be defined. If a 'Reference Curve' is selected, that curve will be displayed in all log tracks in the modules interactive log plot. The 'function' buttons at the foot of the Depth Shift Log Plot Display Dialog are described below: 'Start' : Clicking the 'Start' button checks the input curves, launches the depth-shift 'interactive log plot' and activates the depth-shifting routines. Load' : The 'Load' button is used to reload previously saved depth-shift files. It will reload all the old curve names and options along with the associated shifts. This can be useful if you either wish to modify the previous shifts or add a new curve to shift. 'Clear Grid' : Clicking this button removes all curve names and track numbers from the grid display The order that curves are added to the input screen is not that important, apart from those exceptions stated above. If you forget to set up a curve to shift in the grid display, it can be added into the interactive log plot track header using the right-mouse-button click functionality. Continuing with our example depth-shift operation: Clicking the 'Start' button launches the interactive log plot. A separate dialog, the 'Run Depth Shift' window is also displayed, which provides a tabular listing of the shift depths and shift magnitudes that have been defined by the user. Initially this window is empty. This window can be re-sized to view more or less of the shifts. The 'Run Depth Shift' window cannot be edited to change the shift values that have been set graphically on the log plot. The user 'clicks and drags' the 'Shift Curve' to match the 'Reference Curve'. In the background, the other curves listed in Track 1 are shifted by the same amount as the 'Shift Curve'. Continue from top to bottom of the logs to check the SGR-to-GR depth match.

Managing Interactive Depth Shifts To interactively depth-shift a curve in a track, 'Click' in the track and a new horizontal blue shift line will appear. The red tie line that joins the blue line shows the position of the start of the shift. The blue horizontal line is shown at the shifted position. The Depth values in the 'Run Depth Shift' window are the depths for the start of the shift, where the red tie line meets the right side

Section 7.2 Working with Curve Data : Working with Interactive Curves

363

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

of the track. To move a depth shift point, Put the mouse cursor over a horizontal shift line, the cursor will change shape to an up/down drag-type cursor. 'Click' the left-hand mouse button and hold down while you drag the interactive curve to the new position. Alternatively, with the cursor positioned over a Shift line, use the keypad '+' and '-' keys to nudge the shift-curve up or down relative to the reference curve. To remove a depth shift point, place the mouse cursor over the horizontal line, it will turn into the up/down arrow cursor shown above. Click the keyboard Delete button to remove the point from the plot. In the interactive log plot the curve and depth scales can be changed at any time using the normal plot format window (Edit Plot Format). If a curve does not have its default scales set up it would be best to do this before running the depth shift module, since every time you run the module you would have to change the scales manually. See Manage Curve Headers.

Depth Shift Wizard The aim of the 'Depth Shift Wizard' is to guide a new IP user through the process of populating the 'Log Plot Format' screen so that the user can then perform simple depth-shifts. PLEASE NOTE: the wizard is not aimed at the 'expert' IP user. From the Edit Menu Select Interactive Depth Shift. The following Information Dialog Box will be displayed. Click Yes to start the Interactive Depth Shift Wizard.

The 'Wizard' guides the user step-by-step through the process of setting up the 'Log Plot Format' screen, starting with curves that will be displayed in 'Track 1'.

Section 7.2 Working with Curve Data : Working with Interactive Curves

Working with Curve Data

Senergy

364

The user defines a 'Reference Curve', then moves onto the curves the user would like to shift 'Curve to shift' and 'Other Curves to Shift'.

Section 7.2 Working with Curve Data : Working with Interactive Curves

365

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The 'Depth output curve' is the depth offset output curve for the specified track and contains the depth shifts for that track.

Section 7.2 Working with Curve Data : Working with Interactive Curves

Working with Curve Data

Senergy

The 'Extension' screen allows the user to change the 'Output Curves extension' name. The default is 'ds'. The output Set can be defined here as well. Either select a pre-existing Set or create a new Set by clicking on the 'Output Set' button.

Section 7.2 Working with Curve Data : Working with Interactive Curves

366

367

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

The 'Add track' screen asks the user if they want to add another track or not.

Section 7.2 Working with Curve Data : Working with Interactive Curves

Senergy

Working with Curve Data

Senergy

368

If the user answers 'Yes' then the 'Wizard' starts again, this time for 'Track 2'. Answering 'No' moves the user onto the 'Data blocks' screen.

Section 7.2 Working with Curve Data : Working with Interactive Curves

369

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Here the user has two questions to answer 'Do you want to shift the data using blocks?' and 'Do you want to extrapolate the curve data while shifting?'. After these two questions have been answered then the 'Wizard' is closed by 'clicking' the 'Finish' button.

Section 7.2 Working with Curve Data : Working with Interactive Curves

Working with Curve Data

Senergy

370

The above screenshot is an example of the 'Log Plot Format' screen setup to shift five curves relative to a 'Reference Curve' after using the 'Depth Shift Wizard'.

Depth Shifting using the Depth 'Auto Correlator' An 'Auto Depth Match' operation can be set up to automate the depth shifting operation. This option, when activated, uses a regression analysis to seek out the closest fit between the 'reference' and 'shift' curves and moves the 'shift curve' incrementally relative to the reference curve to find the best fit, based upon an input R2 correlation coefficient threshold. The 'Run Auto Depth Match' option is launched by right-mouse button clicking in the interactive log plot, in the curve track you wish to work with:

Section 7.2 Working with Curve Data : Working with Interactive Curves

371

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The 'Auto Depth Shift' window opens, displaying the 'Reference Curve' and 'Correlation Curve' (Shift curve) for that log track. The remaining entry boxes allow you to configure the autocorrelator routine. 'Correlation Window height' This is the length (in depth units) of the 'Shift Curve' to use for the depth-match exercise. The 'Correlation Window height', together with the length of the 'Maximum shift', which is added above and below the Correlation Window, sets the depth interval over which the 'Correlation' (Shift) curve regression is computed. 'Maximum shift' This is the maximum value (in depth units) that you want to move the correlation curve window up or down the well to find the best depth match to the reference curve. 'Maximum difference between shifts' This is the maximum 'step' you want the curves to move relative to one another when trying to find the best fit. 'Remove shifts with correlation R2 less than' This option is used to filter out low R2 correlations and sets a minimum threshold regression R2 value that is acceptable for a depth match. 'Delete all shifts in track' check-box - if 'checked', all previously-defined depth-shift values

Section 7.2 Working with Curve Data : Working with Interactive Curves

Working with Curve Data

Senergy

372

will be deleted when the 'Run' button is pressed. When the 'Delete all shifts in track' is 'unchecked' the user can now specify the 'Minimum distance from original shifts' that a new shift can be added. The purpose of this is to preserve the original shifts and only add new shifts away from the original shift. 'Correlation Type' options allow the user to specify what type of correlation between the reference and correlation curve is allowed. A 'Positive' correlation is when both curves move in the same numerical direction i.e. both curves increase or decrease in numerical value together. If both curves are of the same type only 'Positive' correlations are valid. A 'Negative' correlation is when the curves move in opposite numerical directions. A Neutron and Density log will be negatively correlated in clean sands with variable porosity - when the porosity goes up the Neutron will read greater whereas the Density will read less. If 'Both' is selected then either positive or negative correlations are accepted (this was the default in IP v3.3). The Neutron and Density logs are quite often positively and negatively correlated in the same well - negative in sands and positive in shales. 'Top' and 'Bottom' Depths sets the depth range over which to execute the routine. Leave blank to select the whole well. 'Run' - clicking the 'Run' button executes the auto-correlator routine. 'Close' closes the 'Auto Depth Shift' dialog. The interactive log plot should be 'checked' carefully to see that the 'Auto Depth Shift' has worked in the way it was expected to.

Section 7.2 Working with Curve Data : Working with Interactive Curves

373

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The 'Finish' button, on the 'Run Depth Shift' tabulation, is used to stop the depth-shifting and compute the other curves that are not on the display. The user will be asked whether to save the shifts to a disk file. It is always recommended to do this, since this allows the user to reload the shifts and make changes, if necessary, at a later time. The saved file is an ASCII file, which can be viewed using Windows NotepadTM or other similar programs. It gives the curve names and the shifts made. The 'Cancel' button on the 'Run Depth Shift' tabulation, will stop the depth-shifting but will not compute the non-displayed curves.

Related Topics Interactive Curve Edit Interactive Baseline Shift

Section 7.2 Working with Curve Data : Working with Interactive Curves

Working with Curve Data

Senergy

374

Interactive Trend / Square Curve Interactive Depth Shift Depth Shift Other Curves Interactive Block Depth Shift Interactive Curve Splice Splice Curves Interactive Dip Picking

7.2.5

Depth Shift Other Curves

This new module allows shifting of curves using the depth shift offset curve generated by the original depth shift module - Interactive Depth Shift.

Enter an 'Input Curve', the 'Output Shifted Curve' name will automatically be created with the input name plus the 'Result Curve Name Default extension' will be appended to it. The 'Depth Offset Shift Curve' is selected from the drop down list, which will show all 'Depth' type curves in the well. The 'Interpolate curve data' if 'checked' will allow interpolation of the curve data to find the exact value at the new depth. For point data, such as core data, this should be turned off. The data values will not be altered but shifted to the closest database step. The 'Run' button is 'clicked' to perform the shifts. Shift files can be saved and reloaded.

Section 7.2 Working with Curve Data : Working with Interactive Curves

375

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Related Topics Interactive Curve Edit Interactive Baseline Shift Interactive Trend / Square Curve Interactive Depth Shift Depth Shift Other Curves Interactive Block Depth Shift Interactive Curve Splice Splice Curves Interactive Dip Picking

7.2.6

Interactive Block Depth Shift

The 'Interactive Block Depth shift' module allows the user to depth-shift a single curve or groups of curves by a fixed amount. This is useful, for example, for depth-matching two log runs before splicing them together. This module differs from the 'Interactive Depth Shift' module described in the previous chapter in that only one block depth shift can be made per curve. The amount of the depth shift is entered as a multiple of the curve step size. If a curve has a step of 0.1524 then a block shift of 10 will move each data point an equivalent of 1.524m The module will only be available if there is a log plot display on-screen. The curves in the active log plot will be the only curves that can be depth-shifted. On launching the module, a window, similar to that illustrated below, is opened. The window contains a list of all the curves in the currently-active log plot display.

Section 7.2 Working with Curve Data : Working with Interactive Curves

Working with Curve Data

Senergy

376

To set up the Block Depth Shift operation: 'Select a Reference Curve' : The user clicks the 'Select Reference' button on the 'Block Depth Shift' window and then clicks on a curve in the active log plot window. The selected curve trace changes colour to a heavy black line. This step is used for highlighting the 'depth reference curve'. This is purely for use as a visual guide.

There are a number of modes of operation to perform a block depth shift on single or multiple curves: 1. For an individual Curve Click the 'Select Shift Curve' button and 'click' on a single log curve trace in the active log plot display. A 'tick' will appear in the check-box next to the curve name in the 'Shift Curves' list. Click the 'Start Shift' button. The 'Curve-to-Shift' will change to a light green colour in the log plot. THEN, EITHER 'Click & drag' the 'Curve-to-Shift' up or down, in the log plot, to the new depth position. The

Section 7.2 Working with Curve Data : Working with Interactive Curves

377

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

'Shift Increment' value will change as the curve is moved. When you are happy with the depth match, click the 'Finish Shift' button to move the selected curve by the entered shift value. The Log plot will update with the depth-shifted curve. OR, Type in a 'Shift increment' value (in depth 'steps') into the 'Shift Increment' box, and click the 'Shift Curves' button. The Log plot will update with the depth-shifted curve.

2. To Shift Multiple Curves by the same shift increment Click the 'Select Shift Curve' button and 'click' on a single log curve trace in the active log plot display. A 'tick' will appear in the check-box next to the curve name in the 'Shift Curves' list. Click the 'Start Shift' button. The 'Curve-to-Shift' will change to a light green colour in the log plot. 'Tick' any other curves in the 'Shift Curves' list that you want to move by the same depth shift value or use the 'Select All' button to select all the listed curves. 'Click & drag' the 'Curve-to-shift' up or down, in the log plot, to the new depth position. The '

Section 7.2 Working with Curve Data : Working with Interactive Curves

Working with Curve Data

Senergy

378

Shift Increment' value will change as the curve is moved. When you are happy with the depth match, click the 'Finish Shift' button to move the selected curves by the entered shift value. The Log plot will update with the depth-shifted curves. 3. To shift other curves in the log plot by a different shift increment: Click the 'Clear Selected' button. The 'Shift Curves' list will be 'un-checked' and the 'Shift Increment' box will be cleared. Select the new curves to shift by 'ticking' their check-boxes. Enter a 'Shift Increment' value. Click the 'Finish Shift' button to perform the bulk shift operation. NOTE: The 'Cancel Shift' button will 'undo' unsaved interactive depth shifts. However, once the ' Finish Shift' button has been pressed, the shift is saved and 'Cancel Shift' will have no effect. In this situation, select ('tick') the curves again, if necessary, type in a 'Shift Increment' value of '0' and click 'Finish Shift' again to return them to their original depth positions. NOTE: Depth shifts made using this module can be manually undone by changing the curve ' Shift Inc.' attribute at the right hand side of the the 'General' tab on the 'Manage Curve Headers' window.

Managing Block Depth-Shifts This functionality is useful, for example, for depth-shifting concatenated core analysis data files where correlation with log curves e.g. Log analysis derived porosity, shows that rubble zones have not been correctly measured or other depth discrepancies have been introduced. To add a new block shift: 'Click' at the depth for the top of the block and a blue horizontal line will be drawn. Then 'click' at the depth for the bottom of the block and the block will be created. The thick vertical line on the left of the track defines the block. The shift for the block is defined by the red tie line on the right of the track in a similar manner to the normal point shift. To move a block shift: Put the cursor in a block, and it will change shape to a cross. 'Click' the left-hand mouse button and hold down while you drag the interactive curve to the new position. To change a block size: Put the cursor on a block boundary, and it will change shape to an up/down drag type cursor. 'Click' the left-hand mouse button and hold down while you drag the block boundary to a new position. To delete a block shift: Put the cursor in a block, and it will change shape to an up/down

Section 7.2 Working with Curve Data : Working with Interactive Curves

379

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

drag type cursor. Press the 'delete' button on the keyboard and the shift will be removed. The block shift forces all the data in the block to be shifted by an equal amount. Data between blocks will be rubber band shifted. For core data, one should set up the blocks so that there is no core data between blocks. Consider a scenario where there is one core Porosity curve that contains data from five cores. Core 3 is off depth and needs to be shifted to match the log data. This would require creating blocks around the other 'cores' but not shifting the data. A block would be created around core 3 data and this block would be shifted. If only one block was created around core 3 and the data shifted then all the cores (1 to 5) would be shifted by the same amount. A further scenario would be to shift two cores independently. This would require 'blocks' on the cores above and below the cores that are going to be shifted.

Related Topics Interactive Curve Edit Interactive Baseline Shift Interactive Trend / Square Curve Interactive Depth Shift Depth Shift Other Curves Interactive Block Depth Shift Interactive Curve Splice Splice Curves Interactive Dip Picking

7.2.7

Interactive Curve Splice

The 'Interactive Curve Splice' allows the user to splice together multiple curves to form a single continuous curve. The module can also be used to set certain intervals in a curve to Null (absent) data. This can be useful for removing bad dta from a log.

Section 7.2 Working with Curve Data : Working with Interactive Curves

Senergy

Working with Curve Data

380

The user enters the 'Result Curve' name and the 'Input Curves' which will be used to create the Result curve. Click 'OK' to display the 'Interactive Curve Splice' plot. Old splice results can be loaded from saved disk files by clicking on the 'Load Old Splice' button.

Section 7.2 Working with Curve Data : Working with Interactive Curves

381

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The splice intervals are shown in track two. To select the Result curve for an interval: click on the curve trace to use from the available curves in the input curve track. The result of the selection will be shown in the result track. To create a new interval, click in the interval track (track 2) and select 'Split Zone' from the popup menu. Interval top and bottom depths can be changed by putting the cursor on the interval boundary (the cursor will change to a split horizontal cursor) and while holding down the left mouse button drag the boundary to the required depth. The splice result curve will change automatically to show the new splice depth.

Once the Curves have been selected, Click Finish Splice to complete the Interactive Splice.

Section 7.2 Working with Curve Data : Working with Interactive Curves

Working with Curve Data

Senergy

382

To finish the splicing click the 'Finish Splice' button. You will be asked whether you wish to splice other curves at the same depths. If you reply 'yes', then the 'Splice Curves' module will be run and the 'Interactive Curve Splice' results loaded into it. A reply of 'no' will prompt to save the current splice results to disk.

Setting Null Data To set an interval to Null (-999) right mouse click in the relevant interval 'Output Curves' track in the 'Interactive Curve Splice' Plot and select 'Null Curve – turn on' from the drop-down menu. To turn the null data off, repeat the process and select 'Null Curve – turn off' from the dropdown menu.

Section 7.2 Working with Curve Data : Working with Interactive Curves

383

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Data editing of 'stuck hole' logs If the user wants to systematically remove bad log data where the logging tool has become stuck, the following workflow is useful : 1. Remove the depth lag on the tool sensors by temporarily block-depth-shifting the sensors. This can be done by changing the 'Shift Increment' for a curve in the 'Edit /List Curve Headers'. (The user needs to know the length from the tool zero to the sensor. Divide this number by the 'well step' increment and this will be the shift increment required. The log curves need to be shifted down the well so the shift increment will be positive). 2. Run the 'Interactive Curve Splice' module with one of the curves that needs to be edited. Once the plot is displayed, add the tension curve to the plot. Use the tension curve to decide where the tool was stuck and zone the stuck areas and set the result curve to 'Null data' over these areas. 3. Once finished with the zoning, click the 'Finish Splice' button and choose to 'splice other curves'. Add the other curve sensors to the 'Splice Curve' window, using the same splice depths for the Null data. Run the curve splice on all the curves, setting the bad hole sections to Null data. 4. In the 'Manage Curve Headers' return the 'Shift Increment' (second from right-hand

Section 7.2 Working with Curve Data : Working with Interactive Curves

Working with Curve Data

Senergy

384

column, 'General' tab) to zero and this will put back in the depth lag between the sensors.

Related Topics Interactive Curve Edit Interactive Baseline Shift Interactive Trend / Square Curve Interactive Depth Shift Depth Shift Other Curves Interactive Block Depth Shift Interactive Curve Splice Splice Curves Interactive Dip Picking

7.2.8

Splice Curves

The 'Splice Curves' module allows the splicing of multiple sets of curves at the same time. It can be used in conjunction with the 'Interactive Curve Splice' module. In this case the user should choose the splice intervals using the 'Interactive Curve Splice'. Then, when finished, select the option to 'Splice Other Curves'. If the 'Interactive Curve Splice' results have been loaded then the splice depths and the first column of input curves will be loaded. To add other curves, select their input 'Splice curves' for each depth interval and add a 'Result Curve' name at the top of the table. The 'Best Splice' line on the table allows the program to try and adjust the splice depth to give the most seamless splice. The user puts a check in the box to turn this feature on. If set to 'on', the program will use the search interval, set at the bottom of the window to find the depth where the two curves that are to be spliced, have the most similar value.

Section 7.2 Working with Curve Data : Working with Interactive Curves

385

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Click 'Ok' to run the splice. Splice table results can be saved to disk and restored from the hard disk using the appropriate buttons. Note that the splice results generated in this module can be loaded into the 'Interactive Curve Splice' module. If Null data gaps are required in the spliced output curve, then a curve name of 'Null Data' can be selected from the drop-down curve list box.

Related Topics Interactive Curve Edit Interactive Baseline Shift Interactive Trend / Square Curve Interactive Depth Shift Depth Shift Other Curves Interactive Block Depth Shift Interactive Curve Splice Splice Curves Interactive Dip Picking

Section 7.2 Working with Curve Data : Working with Interactive Curves

Working with Curve Data

Senergy

7.2.9

386

Interactive Dip Picking

The module is launched from the 'Edit'

'Interactive Dip Picking' menu. Before launching the

module an appropriate log plot has to be created that shows the image and has a track available to display the results of the picked dips. For more information on how to set up a log plot to display image logs go to this chapter - Images.

Depending on how the image was referenced when the data was being collected the user has a choice of orientating the displayed image to 'True North' or to the 'High Side of the Hole'. Only after 'clicking' the 'Start Edit' button does the image re-orient.The user selects the 'Output Curves'. NOTE: In order to align the dip curve exactly to a bed boundary it is best to select an Irregular Set to store these curves in. If a regular depth step Set is selected the depths of dips can only be placed at the exact depths stored in the depth curve for the selected Set. The 'Input Curves' are the hole azimuth and deviation plus the hole size. If two caliper curves are entered then the hole size is assumed to be the average of the two calipers. The hole size is required to calculate the apparent dip of the formation. Select the Image and Dip result track in the 'Plot Tracks' section of the window, according to the layout of the appropriate log plot . 'Clicking' the 'Start Edit' button will start the editing and the ' Dip Picking' window will switch to the 'Picked Dips' tab.

Section 7.2 Working with Curve Data : Working with Interactive Curves

387

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

This tab displays the results of the interactively picked dips - see the section below 'Interactive Dip Picking' for more information on how to do this. It is possible to manually change the dip and azimuth by changing the numbers in the table. There is also an option to add new dips manually by using the 'Add new Dip Depth' section. The dip 'Type' has to be manually selected from the drop-down menu. Dip type is reflected on the log plot by the colour and shape of the displayed tadpoles. Dip types can be changed in the ' Edit Dip Symbols' accessed from the 'Tools' menu. Here dip types can be modified or new types created.

Interactive Dip Picking With an appropriate log plot, such as the one displayed in the screenshot below, and the 'Dip

Section 7.2 Working with Curve Data : Working with Interactive Curves

Working with Curve Data

Senergy

388

Picking' module open then the user can pick dips on the log plot itself.

New Dip :To add a new dip, left mouse click on the image log at the depth you want to the dip to be at and while holding down the mouse button drag the interactive sine shape curve, left / right and up / down to match the shape seen on the image log. Edit Dip angle and azimuth : To change a dip angle or azimuth, place the mouse cursor on top of a dip line on the image. The cursor will change to a cross. Left mouse 'click' and while holding down the mouse button drag the interactive sine shape curve , left / right and up / down to match the shape of the image. Edit Dip depth : To change a dip depth on the log plot, place the cursor on top of the appropriate dip curve on the image. The cursor will change to a cross. Right mouse click and while holding the mouse button drag the dip line to a new depth. Delete Dip : To delete a dip on the display, place the cursor on top of the dip to delete. The cursor will change to a cross. Press the 'Delete' key and the dip will be removed from the display. Change Dip type : To change the dip type for an individual dip, place the cursor on appropriate dip. The selected dip will then be highlighted in green on the 'Picked Dips' tab and then the type can be changed from the drop-down box.

Related Topics Interactive Curve Edit Interactive Baseline Shift

Section 7.2 Working with Curve Data : Working with Interactive Curves

389

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Interactive Trend / Square Curve Interactive Depth Shift Depth Shift Other Curves Interactive Block Depth Shift Interactive Curve Splice Splice Curves Interactive Dip Picking

Section 7.2 Working with Curve Data : Working with Interactive Curves

Senergy

Working with Curve Data

Senergy

7.3

390

Curve Data Manipulation

This Chapter Outlines the Curve Data Manipulation Methods available from the Interactive Petrophysics Edit Menu. Curve Filter: The 'Curve Filter' module allows the user to filter, or smooth, a curve. Three predefined filter types are available. These are 'Square' (box) filter, 'Bell' Filter and 'Median' Filter. Curve Average: The 'Curve Average' module allows the user to compute the average value of several input curves and write the results to an Output curve. This can be useful if several logging passes have been made over a zone and the user wants the average results. Curve Rescale: The 'Curve Rescale' module allows log curves that have been digitized, but using the wrong scales, to be rescaled. This module can also be used to convert count-rate neutron logs to neutron porosity logs. Fill Data Gaps: The 'Fill Data Gaps' module allows the extrapolation of data over any gaps (Null values: -999) found in a curve. It can be very useful for filling in data gaps when a new curve dataset, with a lower sample rate, is loaded into a well sampled at a high rate, or for producing continuous curve data from discrete 'point' datasets such as in routine core analysis plug data.

Related Topics Creating Interactive Petrophysics Curves Working with Interactive Curves Curve Data Manipulation Manage Picture/Core Photo Data Manage Text Curves Array Image Data

7.3.1

Fill Data Gaps

The 'Fill Data Gaps' module allows the extrapolation of data over any gaps (Null values: -999) found in a curve. It can be very useful for filling in data gaps when a new curve dataset, with a lower sample rate, is loaded into a well sampled at a high rate, or for producing continuous curve data from discrete 'point' datasets such as in routine core analysis plug data. The fill gap interval is set by entering a value in the 'Fill gap maximum width' box and by choosing whether this will be 'In Samples' (i.e. the well step interval) or in depth units.

Section 7.3 Working with Curve Data : Curve Data Manipulation

391

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Individual curve names are entered in the 'Input Curves' grid. The output or result curve names can be entered manually or one of the curve option boxes ' Create backup', 'New Curve' or ' Overwrite Curve' can be 'checked'. 'Create backup' curve option will append a 'bu' to the curve names. When 'Run' is selected, the program will copy the input curves using the backup names, and the results of 'Fill data gaps' will be overwritten as the input name curves. After a run, the input and output curve names in the window will be swapped, and the curve option will be set to 'Overwrite Curve'. 'New curve' curve option will add a '1' to the input curve names. 'Overwrite Curve' curve option will make the input and output curve names the same, and the program will overwrite the input data. 'Clear all names' button will clean out the input and output curve names and set them to blanks. 'All curves' button will put the first 100 curve names into the grid. A maximum of 100 curves can be worked on at one time. When 'Run' is selected, the program looks for gaps (-999 data) in the data that are less than the maximum data gap. When found, a linear extrapolation is done using the first sample either side of the gap. There is no limit to the size of the gap that can be filled. Clicking 'Save' allows the user to save the current set-up to the current well directory as a .fdg

Section 7.3 Working with Curve Data : Curve Data Manipulation

Working with Curve Data

Senergy

392

file. This file can then be used to to set up the 'Fill data gaps' display on another well(s) by using the 'Load' button and selecting the *.fdg file.

Related Topics Curve Data Manipulation Fill Data Gaps Curve Rescale Curve Filter Curve Average

7.3.2

Curve Rescale

The 'Curve Rescale' module allows log curves that have been digitized, but using the wrong scales, to be rescaled. This module can also be used to convert count-rate neutron logs to neutron porosity logs. The example shown below will convert a density log (Rhob) that had been incorrectly digitized at a scale of 1.95 –2.95 gm/cc to be rescaled to left and right values of 2.00 - 3.00 gm/cc.

To use this module to calculate a porosity curve from a count-rate neutron curve the user must first identify a log interval of very low or zero porosity reading (high count rate). Then, using core data or some other porosity method, find the count-rate-equivalent value of a high porosity. The low and high porosities, along with their equivalent count rates are entered into the module, the output 'Logarithmic' box is 'checked' and the 'Run' button 'clicked' to calculate a neutron porosity curve.

Section 7.3 Working with Curve Data : Curve Data Manipulation

393

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

NOTE: the 'Logarithmic' options use the 'Natural Logarithm' of input / output values. The example shown above illustrates that the count-rate-neutron log reads about 14500 counts at low (0.01) porosity and 9720 at high (0.4) porosity.

Related Topics Curve Data Manipulation Fill Data Gaps Curve Rescale Curve Filter Curve Average

7.3.3

Curve Filter

The 'Curve Filter' module allows the user to filter, or smooth, a curve. Three pre-defined filter types are available. These are: 'Square' (box) filter 'Bell' Filter 'Median' Filter A user-defined filter is also included. The maximum filter length is 121 database sample increments if the user-filter table is used, otherwise 2001 sample increments can be used.

Select the 'Input Curve' you wish to filter. The Output curve name is pre-defined depending

Section 7.3 Working with Curve Data : Curve Data Manipulation

Working with Curve Data

Senergy

394

on whether the 'Create Backup Curve' or 'Create New/Overwrite Curve' check boxes are set. With the 'Create New/Overwrite Curve' 'checked', the output curve will have the same name as the input curve with a '1' appended to it. If the user wishes to overwrite the input curve, they should edit the output curve name to make it the same as the input curve name. With the 'Create Backup Curve' 'checked', a backup curve will be copied from the input curve. The backup curve name will be the input curve name with 'bu' appended to it. If the 'Create Backup Curve' is 'checked', the 'View' button at the base of the window will be 'active' and visible. This allows the user to view the filtered curve before committing to the final filter operation. This is only possible if the original curve is displayed on the log plot. Once the filter is correct / acceptable, 'click' the 'Run' button to save the filtered curve. The 'Number of levels' box allows the user to define the 'filter length', in units of 'depth steps'. A number must be entered, which must be a whole, odd number between 3 and 121 (2001 for square, bell or median filters). The 'Filter height' is the well 'step' multiplied by the 'Number of levels'. The units are picked up from the well units. The 'Top Depth' and 'Bottom Depth' boxes allow the user to specify the interval over which the filter will be run. There is also a 'Select Zone Depths' icon which will open the 'Select Zone Depths' module and the interval can be defined using available Top Sets and zones. The 'Square (or box) Filter' will apply an equal weight to all samples in the filter. The 'Bell Filter' applies a sine wave shaped filter to the data. The following formula is used to calculate the filter weights.

Wt j

1 Cos 2

j FiltLen 1 FiltLen 1

Where: Wtj

=

FiltLen =

Filter weight at j'th level Filter length

The 'Median Filter' returns the statistical 'median' value for all values sampled in each filter length. For the 'User Filter', the user must enter the weights in the table. The weights will be normalized before they are used, therefore it is not necessary to ensure that they add up to 1.0.

Related Topics Curve Data Manipulation

Section 7.3 Working with Curve Data : Curve Data Manipulation

395

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Fill Data Gaps Curve Rescale Curve Filter Curve Average

7.3.4

Curve Average

The 'Curve Average' module allows the user to compute the average value of several input curves and write the results to an Output curve. This can be useful if several logging passes have been made over a zone and the user wants the average results.

'Output Curve and Units' : The user selects the output curve and units. 'Input Curves' : The user selects the input curves from which to create the average. Up to ten curves may be used. 'Curve search Mask' : This allows the program to select the input curves using a mask. This is useful if the input curves have nearly the same name except for one or two letters. For example, if the user wanted to select the following curves RHOB1, RHOB2, RHOB3, RHOB4, RHOB5, then the user would enter RHOB* in the 'Curve search mask' box and click 'Apply'. The '*' is used as a 'wild' character for the searching process. 'Lateral Average or Arithmetic Average' : The user selects the type of averaging that will be applied to the chosen curves. The 'arithmetic' average takes a straight average of the

Section 7.3 Working with Curve Data : Curve Data Manipulation

Working with Curve Data

Senergy

396

input curves at each well step depth. The 'Lateral' average can give better results since it gives a median-type average that will not be badly skewed by any outliers in the data. 'Top and Bottom Depth' : The user enters the depth interval over which to perform the averaging. Or by clicking the

symbol then the 'Select Zone Depths' dialogue box

appears. Within this it is possible to select zone tops by using the drop-down menus.

Lateral Averaging Lateral averaging is performed by creating pair products of the input data and then taking the median of the results. For example, if we had a set of five curves, at a depth XXXX ft the curves values are: 5, 8, 10, 3, 6 The data would be combined in pairs. 5+8, 5+10, 5+3, 5+6, 8+10, 8+3, 8+6, 10+3, 10+6, 3+6 The pairs would then be sorted. 8, 9, 11, 11, 13, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18 The result would be half the middle value, or if the number of pairs is even, the mean of the two middle values (2 pairs therefore 4 values). (13 + 13) / 4 = 6.5 This is almost identical to the Hodges-Lehmann method (J.L Hodges and E. L Lehmann, Basic Concepts of Probability and Statistics, Holden-Day 1970).

Related Topics Curve Data Manipulation Fill Data Gaps Curve Rescale Curve Filter Curve Average

Section 7.3 Working with Curve Data : Curve Data Manipulation

397

7.4

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Manage Picture/Core Photo Data

The 'Picture Curves' tool allows the user to manipulate and display graphics files in IP log plot displays.

Two tools are included within the 'Picture Curves' menu item: 'Edit Picture Curve Headers' 'Edit / Load Picture Curve Data'

Related Topics Working with Curve Data Manage Picture/Core Photo Data Array Image Data Manage Text Curves

Section 7.4 Working with Curve Data : Manage Picture/Core Photo Data

Working with Curve Data

Senergy

7.4.1

398

Edit / Load Picture Curve Data

The 'Edit / Load Picture Curve Data' module is the main module for manipulating graphics (picture) data. A 'Picture curve' consists of a set of graphics files, for example a set of white light or UV core photographs. Each graphics file has a defined top and bottom depth which allows the picture to be scaled to the log data. The images are not stored directly, but the graphics file and path name to the pictures are stored in the IP database. When a graphics file is selected, it is loaded into memory and converted into a bitmap for display. IP recognizes the following graphics file formats: Bitmap, JPEG, GIF, TIFF, metafile (.wmf) and enhanced metafile (.emf).

Before any graphics file can be loaded, a 'Picture Curve' must be selected -'Select Picture Curve' - or a new one created 'Create New Curve'. The IP database can create and store up to 10 picture curves per well. To 'load' a new graphics file into a picture curve, 'click' the 'Load Graphics File' button or 'click' in a blank cell under the 'Graphics File Name' column header. A file browser dialog will allow you to select the graphics file to load. Once selected, you will be asked whether you want to make a copy of the picture, which will be stored in the wells 'Pictures' sub-directory. If a copy is made, then the picture file will be copied and renamed to a unique file name. It is good practice to copy the picture, as prompted, because all related images for the well will then be grouped together under one directory within the wells' own data directory in the IP database. This facilitates project saving and back-ups. Once a graphics file is loaded into the interface, it is necessary to enter the 'Top Depth' and '

Section 7.4 Working with Curve Data : Manage Picture/Core Photo Data

399

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Bottom Depth' depths for the picture. These depths can be pasted in from an Excel spreadsheet using the 'Paste Rows' button. A 'Comments' field is available for the user to add a description for the file for future reference. To 'delete' a picture (an individual graphics file), 'click' in the row you wish to delete (do not 'click' on the 'Graphics file Name' cell because this will launch the file browser) and then 'click' the ' Delete Row' button. The 'Update Plots' button will refresh any active Log Plots with any new information that has been added to the picture curve. This is useful if you are trying to depth match the picture curve and conventional curve data. Depth shifting the pictures to log data can be done either : by typing in the 'Top Shift' and 'Bottom Shift' values, or by using the results of an interactive depth shift performed on the regular log data. To use the results of an Interactive Depth Shift operation: enter the appropriate depth shift curve generated by the 'Interactive Depth Shift' module. These are depth curves with a name of type 'DepOff$_££' (default name will be 'DepOff1_ds') where the '$' will be a number which depends on which track the depth shift was run in (for a one track depth shift this will be 1). The '££' will refer to the default extension the user set on the depth shift setup window (default is 'ds'). The depth offset curve is overwritten each time the interactive depth shift module is run, therefore, it will be necessary to run the image depth shifts straight after the interactive depth shift before the curve gets overwritten by another interactive depth shift. Another option would be to rename the depth offset curve using the Manage Curve Headers module straight after the interactive depth shift so that it does not get overwritten. Click the 'Apply Depth Shift' button to update the 'Top Shift' and 'Bottom Shift' depths columns. Individual pictures can be viewed by clicking the 'View' button which is found to the right-hand side of the 'Graphics File Name' column. This will bring up the 'Picture Viewer'.

Section 7.4 Working with Curve Data : Manage Picture/Core Photo Data

Working with Curve Data

Senergy

400

The 'Picture Viewer' allows the user to see the image at various resolutions. Options are available to send the picture directly to the printer or to copy it to the clipboard for inclusion in another document. Placing the cursor on the picture will display the log depth of the image at that cursor position at the base of the window. A picture can be split into two separate files by placing the cursor at the required split depth and then right mouse clicking. The following dialog will appear.

If the user confirms the split, the picture's current graphics file will be split at the requested depth

Section 7.4 Working with Curve Data : Manage Picture/Core Photo Data

401

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

and two new separate files will be created. The old picture file will not be altered but will no longer be used in the Picture curve. Splitting pictures can be very useful for core photographs in rubble zones where the core photo can not be made to match log depths. The split photos can then be separately depth matched to the log data.

Related Topics Working with Curve Data Manage Picture/Core Photo Data Array Image Data Manage Text Curves

7.4.2

Edit Picture Curve Headers

The 'Edit Picture Curve Headers' module displays information about 'Picture' type curves inside the IP database. This module is analogous to the 'Manage Curve Headers' module which works with the standard log curve data.

'Out Name' : To rename a picture curve, highlight the 'Out Name' and type in the new name. If you 'blank out' the 'Out Name' box the curve will be deleted from the well when you click 'Update'. 'Created Module': This displays the module name that created the curve. 'Create date': This is the date the curve was created. The format of the displayed date is set by the users default regional settings, set in the Windows control panel. 'Updated Module': This shows the module name that last changed the curve. 'Update date': Time the module was last updated. 'Comments': User-entered comments about this Picture curve.

Related Topics

Section 7.4 Working with Curve Data : Manage Picture/Core Photo Data

Working with Curve Data

Senergy

Working with Curve Data Manage Picture/Core Photo Data Array Image Data Manage Text Curves

Section 7.4 Working with Curve Data : Manage Picture/Core Photo Data

402

403

7.5

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Manage Text Curves

The 'Text Curves' function allows the user to create a 'curve' containing text strings and then to view the text within a curve track on a log plot. It is useful, for example, for labelling RFT pressure points with actual pressure values or test comments, for labelling core or perforation top and bottom depths and for including core descriptions or test results from spreadsheet files. The 'Text Curves' function is located under the 'Edit' menu.

Related Topics Edit Text Curve Headers Edit / Load Text Curve Data Manage Zones / Tops Curve Management

Section 7.5 Working with Curve Data : Manage Text Curves

Working with Curve Data

Senergy

404

Load Data into IP

7.5.1

Edit Text Curve Headers

The 'Edit Text Curve Headers' dialog is similar to the 'Manage Curve Headers' dialog for conventional curve data. The editor allows the user to rename or delete text curves from the database.

To 'delete' a Text Curve, highlight the curve in the 'Out Name' column and hit the Delete key on the keyboard. Confirm the deletion when the prompt appears. To 'rename' a Text curve, highlight the curve in the 'Out Name' column, type in a new name and click on the 'Update' button.

Related Topics Edit Text Curve Headers Edit / Load Text Curve Data Manage Curve Headers Manage Zones / Tops Curve Management

7.5.2

Edit / Load Text Curve Data

The 'Edit / Load Text Curve data' option allows the user to create, load and edit text strings for display as 'Text Curves' from the dialog screen shown below. NOTE: Only one text curve is permitted per log track, in a log plot. From the Edit Menu, Select Text Curves, Edit / Load Text Curve Data To create a new 'Text Curve', the user must first click the 'Create New Curve' button. This launches a 'Curve Name' dialog, where a new curve name can be typed in. The Text

Section 7.5 Working with Curve Data : Manage Text Curves

405

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Curve name should not contain any characters.The user should click 'OK' and then choose the newly-created curve from the 'Select Text Curve' drop-down menu at the top of the screen.

If a 'Text Curve' already exists, select it from the 'Select Text Curve' drop-down list. The user then has a number of options for adding text strings to the Text Curve: 1. Manually type in depth values and text strings into the window on the screen. 2. Paste data from an external spreadsheet, using the 'Paste from clipboard' facility at the top of screen. 3. Load data from an external ASCII format (tab delimited) file with column 1 being Measured Depth, Column 2 being 'shift' and column 3 being the 'text string' as illustrated below. Click on the 'Load' button to select the text file to be used to populate the table. 4. Load Formation / Zone Tops 'labels' from an existing Zones / Tops Set in the currentlyactive well. Click on the 'New from Zone/Tops' button and select the Set name from the drop-down list. The depth can be included with the label by (.txt).

The data are loaded and displayed in the window and can be edited on-screen if necessary.

Section 7.5 Working with Curve Data : Manage Text Curves

Working with Curve Data

Senergy

406

The 'Shift' column can be used to nudge individual text strings up or down on a plot. There is also an option to use a 'Depth Shift Curve', created in 'Interactive Depth Shift', to adjust the position of the text strings en masse. The Text Curve entries can be loaded and viewed in a log plot by: 1. 'clicking' in a log track header, or adding a new, blank track. 2. Select the first empty row in the 'Log Plot Format' table and choose the 'Text Curve' option in the 'Style' column at the right hand side of the window. NOTE: you must select the 'Style' before selecting the 'Text Curve' name or you will only be able to see 'conventional' log curve names in the 'Curve Name' drop-down list.

The 'Text Curve' can then be selected under the 'Curve Name' drop down list. A 'Font' button appears at the right hand side of the screen. This can be used to alter the

Section 7.5 Working with Curve Data : Manage Text Curves

407

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

appearance of the text you wish to display. Text colour is controlled by the 'Line Colour' drop-down menu. The text can be 'left', 'right' or 'centre' justified in its' track, using the 'Left Scale' menu and can be 'wrapped' to fit to the track width using the 'Back Up' drop-down menu.

The text strings are linked to their depth 'anchors' by a tick and expandable bar. Where text strings are closely spaced, they may be offset relative to the anchor depth. The degree of offset can be changed, either by expanding the vertical display scale of the plot or by making the text curve track wider. The 'Right Scale' column allows the user to set the depth 'anchor' position. The anchor can be set to the left or right side of the text curve track, or turned 'off' by selecting the 'Anchor None' option.

Section 7.5 Working with Curve Data : Manage Text Curves

Working with Curve Data

Senergy

408

Text curves can be displayed in tracks along with 'conventional' curve data as shown below. The display order can be modified, for example to show a log curve on top of the text curve, by clicking in the track header, selecting the 'All Tracks' button and changing the 'Plot Order' at the right hand side of the 'Grid' tab.

Section 7.5 Working with Curve Data : Manage Text Curves

409

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The 'Clear' button will delete all entries in the text grid. The 'Delete Row' button will remove a single row from the text grid, where the mouse cursor is currently placed.

Related Topics Edit Text Curve Headers Edit / Load Text Curve Data Manage Zones / Tops Curve Management Load Data into IP

Section 7.5 Working with Curve Data : Manage Text Curves

Working with Curve Data

Senergy

7.6

410

Array Image Data

Array image data processing modules are found under the 'Edit' menu. Two modules allow the conversion of array data to normal curves and the creation of array curves from groups of normal curves. There are two additional modules for the creation of image curves from acoustic and electrical array data.

The 'Array Image Data' tools include: 'Curves to Array Data' 'Array data to Curves' 'Create Acoustic Image' 'Create Electrical Image' 'Merge Images'

Section 7.6 Working with Curve Data : Array Image Data

411

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The 'Merge Images' option allows the user to combine, for example, two electrical images from 2 tools run together in the same logging run. An example is shown in the 'Merge Images' Help item.

Related Topics Curves to Array Data Array data to Curves Create Acoustic Image Create Electrical Image Merge Images

7.6.1

Curves to Array Data

The 'Curves to Array Data' module allows the combining of old (IP pre version 2.7) array curves (one curve per array sample) into proper array curves.

The user selects one of the curves in the set of curves that make up the array, or gives the 'Input base curve name', the program will find the other curves that make up the array. The module will then combine all the input curves into the one output array curve. The 'Start sample number' and 'Stop sample number' allows the user to select part of the set of curves to put into the final array set. If the boxes are left blank the program will select all curves in the well with the same common 'base name'.

Section 7.6 Working with Curve Data : Array Image Data

Working with Curve Data

Senergy

412

Related Topics Curves to Array Data Array data to Curves Create Acoustic Image Create Electrical Image Merge Images

7.6.2

Array Data to Curves

The 'Array Data to Curves' module is used to extract data from an array curve into 'conventional' curves.

The user selects the 'input array curve name' and types in the 'output base curve name'. The module will then create one output curve per sample in the input array curve. In the above example the input array curve, 'FCA1', which has 12 samples per depth will be converted into 12 curves named Pad1_1, Pad1_2, Pad1_3 .... Pad1_12. The 'Start sample number' and 'Stop sample number' allows the user to select only part of the input array. If the boxes are left blank the program will output all samples in the input array. It is allowable to have the same 'Start sample number' and 'Stop sample number', this will then extract just one sample and produce one output curve. The 'Output high sample rate data' box, if 'checked', will make the output curves have the same high depth sample rate as the input array curve. This will mean that the output curves are array curves but they only have one 'X' sample but potentially multiple 'Z' depth samples per well

Section 7.6 Working with Curve Data : Array Image Data

413

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

depth sample. If the box is not 'checked' then the output curves will be at the standard 'well step' sample frequency. The output value will be the average of the data points in the 'Z' direction. For example if the array data was stored at 0.1" in a 6" sample well then the output would be the average of the 60 values in that 6" depth increment.

The above example will output one curve called Res_Pad11 at the database sample frequency. The curve name has '11' at the end since the base name is Res_Pad1 and the sample chosen was '1' which has been appended to the base name. This example could be used to extract a resistivity curve from a FMI raw data curve.

Related Topics Curves to Array Data Array data to Curves Create Acoustic Image Create Electrical Image Merge Images

7.6.3

Create Acoustic Image

The 'Create Acoustic Image' module is used to create corrected image data from acoustic image logs (CBIL, UBI, CAST, AST). The raw data input array curves can be plotted directly. However, this module will align the image to true north using the 'azimuth' curve and optionally dynamically normalize the image to enhance geological features in the image.

Section 7.6 Working with Curve Data : Array Image Data

Senergy

Working with Curve Data

414

The user enters the 'Amplitude' and 'Transit Time' uncorrected curves along with the 'Azimuth ' curve. The 'Input' and 'Output' boxes allow the user to change the way the input curve values are mapped to the output curve values. The defaults will generally give acceptable results. The output defaults of '0' and '255' are the default number of colours used for creating the image. All images are created using 256-colour palettes. The defaults therefore allow direct mapping of the image values to the palette colours. The 'Get Max / Min' buttons will look up the maximum and minimum input values and display them in the 'Input' boxes. If the 'Input' boxes are left 'blank'

Section 7.6 Working with Curve Data : Array Image Data

415

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

then the maximum and minimum values will automatically be used. The 'Clip Output to low high value' will clip any input values that fall outside the 'Input' low to high value range. This can be useful if there are some spurious data values in the image which have no meaning and need to be removed from the image. The option to 'Dynamically normalize image' will enhance the image to emphasize geological features. The user enters the 'window length' over which the enhancement is performed. The normalization is executed in a number of steps : The maximum and minimum values of the data at each depth sample are computed, for the specified window length. These maximum and minimum values are then filtered, using the same window length, in order to remove any sudden change in scaling. The final filtered maximum and minimum values are then used to rescale the input curve so that the full dynamic range of colours can be seen in the image for each window length. The user can also optionally correct the input Pad 1 Azimuth (P1AZ) curve for magnetic deviation from true north. This correction is sometimes performed by the logging company at the time of acquisition. The user can also change the mapping position of the input arrays to the azimuth input curve. The default setting maps the first 'X' sample in the input arrays to the azimuth curve. [Note: If a Relative Bearing curve (i.e. RB) is used to correct the image to the top side of the borehole (as in cased-hole applications where magnetic azimuthal curves are invalid due to magnetised casing) it is possible that the Relative Bearing curve could be recorded on an inverted scale (i.e. increasing 'anti-clockwise' looking into the borehole rather than 'clockwise' as expected by IP). In this case the correction will be in the wrong direction, so the user should rescale the RB curve from 0-360 to 360-0 using 'Edit > Curve Rescale'.] It is possible to run the module only over certain depth intervals by entering a 'Top' and 'Bottom' depth. The 'Save' and 'Restore' buttons will allow the input data values to be saved to an external file and restored at a later date. NOTE: IF YOU DO NOT SAVE THE SETTINGS - you will lose any changes you have made from the default settings, when you exit the module.

Related Topics Curves to Array Data Array data to Curves Create Acoustic Image Create Electrical Image

Section 7.6 Working with Curve Data : Array Image Data

Working with Curve Data

Senergy

416

Merge Images

7.6.4

Create Electrical Image

The 'Create Electrical Image' module is used to create corrected image data from raw electrical image curves. The output image data from pad-type imaging tools (example FMI, FMS, OBMI, EMI) consists of a number of array curves that correspond to the button arrays on the imaging tools. This module takes the input curves and maps them to an output array image. The format of the mapping can be controlled by the user or a pre-defined format can be selected from the ' Load Defaults' drop-down list. The screen, shown below, illustrates the default mapping for a standard FMI tool input. IP is set up with default settings for FMI, FMS, OBMI and EMI tools.

Section 7.6 Working with Curve Data : Array Image Data

417

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Input Array Curves The user should select one of the default formats for the logging tool being used. If a default is not available then the format will have to be built. To do this the mapping of the input array curves to the physical button positions on the tool must be known. 'Input Curve' : The input name of the array curve to map. The 'Change input set' box will change all the inputs curve names so that the selected set is added to the start of the name. This allows the user to select a default template and then the input set name for the raw data image curves. 'Number Buttons' : The number of buttons or array samples in the input curve. 'Button Spacing' : The spacing between the buttons in inches. 'Orient to Azimuth' : The orientation of the 1st array sample to the azimuth curve in degrees. (example 90 degrees will indicate that this curve is 90 degrees clockwise, looking down hole, to the azimuth curve). 'Depth Shift' : This is the depth shift in inches that needs to be applied to this curve before mapping it to the image. 'Rotation Shift' : This is the rotational shift, clockwise looking down hole, in inches that is applied to the curve after it has been orientated using the azimuth curve. 'Button order file name' : This is an optional input file that allows for mapping of each button individually. The file consists of ASCII text, with one line of data per button. Each line contains two numbers: 1. The first number is the rotation shift for the button in inches, clockwise around the hole, looking down hole, 2. The second number is the depth shift in inches, positive for a shift downwards. Lines that start with a '$' character are ignored. These individual button shifts are added to the overall curve shift before mapping the button to the image. An example input file could look like this, the first button will be moved 2.2 inches clockwise and no added depth shift will be applied. : $ Button order for Schlumberger FMI tool $ 12 buttons order is counter clockwise around hole 2.2 0 2.0 0 1.8 0 1.6 0 1.4 0 1.2 0 1.0 0

Section 7.6 Working with Curve Data : Array Image Data

Working with Curve Data

Senergy

418

.8 0 .6 0 .4 0 .2 0 0 0

The normal button mapping is counter clockwise looking down the hole. This is left to right button order looking at the face of the tool pad. The button order file can therefore override this.

Image Output The 'Input' and 'Output' 'Low Value' and 'High Value' boxes allow the user to change the way the input curve values are mapped to the output image values. The defaults will generally give acceptable results. The output defaults of 0 and 255 are the number of colours used for creating the image. All images are created using 256-colour palettes. The defaults therefore allow direct mapping of the image values to the palette colours. NOTE: for resistivity image devices such as the FMI, mapping low resistivity values to Low Output values and high resistivity to High Output Values results in an image-shading scale which grades from light to dark colours. However, the Schlumberger Oil-Based-Mud Imager (OBMI) is a conductivity device. So, to give an equivalent look for this tool, compared to the other electrical images - reverse the output values to Low Value = '256' and High Value to '0'. The 'Get Max / Min' buttons will look up the maximum and minimum array input values and display them in the 'Input' boxes. If the 'Input' boxes are left blank then the maximum and minimum values will automatically be used. It is a useful step to check the curve data Max / Min values. This is done by loading an array curve into a plot track, right 'click' in the track and select / display the histogram for that curve. The max/min values selected by IP may reflect extreme outlying data points which means that more realistic max/min values can be manually set by the user. An example is illustrated below:

Section 7.6 Working with Curve Data : Array Image Data

419

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The 'Clip Output to low high value' will clip any input values that fall outside the 'Input' low high range. This can be useful if there are some spurious data values in the image which have no meaning and need to be removed from the image. The option to 'Dynamically normalize image' will enhance the image to bring out geological features. The user enters the window length over which the enhancement is done. The normalization is done by taking first the maximum and minimum of the data at each depth sample for the specified window length. This maximum and minimum is then filtered using the same window length in order to remove any sudden change in scaling. The final filtered maximum and minimum is then used to rescale the input curve so that the full dynamic range of colours can be seen in the image for each window length. The 'Hole Size' and 'Image Resolution' boxes are used to create the size of the output curve image arrays. The image 'X' dimension size will be Hole Size / Image Resolution. The Image resolution needs to be set to the button resolution of the tool (for FMI tool this is 0.1 inch). The depth 'Y' sample increment for the output curve array is set the same as the input array curves.

Azimuth The user can also optionally correct the input Pad 1 Azimuth curve (P1AZ) for magnetic deviation

Section 7.6 Working with Curve Data : Array Image Data

Working with Curve Data

Senergy

420

from true north. This correction is sometimes made by the logging company at the time of acquisition. [Note: If a Relative Bearing curve (i.e. RB) is used to correct the image to the top side of the borehole, it is possible that the Relative Bearing curve could be recorded on an inverted scale (i. e. increasing 'anti-clockwise' looking into the borehole rather than 'clockwise' as expected by IP). In this case the correction will be in the wrong direction, so the user should rescale the RB curve from 0-360 to 360-0 using 'Edit > Curve Rescale'.]

Depths It is possible to run the module only over certain depth intervals by entering a 'Top' and 'Bottom' depth. The 'Save' and 'Restore' buttons will allow the input data values to be saved to a file and restored at a later date. Otherwise you will lose all changes from the defaults when you exit the module.

Images from Dipmeter Curves It is possible to create an image type display from a set of dipmeter curves. The following example shows a set to create an image.

Section 7.6 Working with Curve Data : Array Image Data

421

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The four high-resolution dipmeter button curves (Pad11, Pad21, Pad31, Pad41) are selected. These are single 'X' value array curves. However the number of buttons is set to 20. This will set the width of each curve in the image. In this example the width of the image will be 20 x 0.1 = 2 inches. This will then create an image which makes four 2" images around the 8.5" borehole. The image resolution value should be set to the same value as the button spacing (0.1" in the example shown above). An example of an image plot made this way is displayed below.

Section 7.6 Working with Curve Data : Array Image Data

Working with Curve Data

Senergy

422

Processing Images from 2 OBMI Tools run in tandem Load data from file, selecting the Pad-1 Azimuth curves, the 4 pad-array curves for each tool, the gamma ray curve and the caliper curves for the two tools.

Process the Array curves to create the Image logs for tools 1 and 2:

Section 7.6 Working with Curve Data : Array Image Data

423

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Repeat the process for the second tool, selecting all the '*****_2' curve names, outputting data to a new image curve name. Open up a new plot or one of the IP default formats with empty tracks. Set the curve names and display parameters as illustrated below:

Section 7.6 Working with Curve Data : Array Image Data

Working with Curve Data

Senergy

424

In order to merge the images from the two tools, follow the instructions under the 'Merge Images ' Help item.

Related Topics Curves to Array Data Array data to Curves Create Acoustic Image Create Electrical Image Merge Images

7.6.5

Merge Images

The 'Merge Images' option allows the user to combine the processed images from a number of tools into one 'Image'. This could be used, for example, to view the data recorded by 2 borehole imaging tools run in tandem.

Section 7.6 Working with Curve Data : Array Image Data

425

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Select the two processed image curves to be merged and type in a name for the 'Result Image '. Select 'Run'. The example shown below is of 2 Oil-based-mud Imaging tools (OBMI) run connected together. The sensor pads on the second tool are oriented rotated at 45 degrees to the pads on the first tool. Image logs for each tool are processed separately (Tracks 1 and 4) and the merged image ('Image 3') is shown in Track 3.

Section 7.6 Working with Curve Data : Array Image Data

Working with Curve Data

Senergy

426

NOTE: that the image traces are not a constant distance apart - this indicates that the second tool must have rotated out of phase with tool 1 in some parts of the wellbore.

Related Topics Curves to Array Data Array data to Curves Create Acoustic Image Create Electrical Image Merge Images

Section 7.6 Working with Curve Data : Array Image Data

Section

8 View Well and Curve Data

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

8

428

View Well and Curve Data

The 'View' menu allows the user to visualize log analysis data. Working with the Log Plot Display: Interactive Petrophysics (IP) is built around a graphical user-interface which allows the user to perform the majority of interpretation workflow steps using unique 'Interactive Log Plot' displays. In addition, there is considerable flexibility built into the program to allow the setting up, saving and recall of user-defined 'Plot Formats' (.PLT files). Some basic log template 'formats' are provided with the software. These formats can be launched from drop-down menus and then customized by adding, moving or deleting log tracks and log curves to the users preferred display characteristics. The modified plot format can be saved and applied to other wells within an IP database. Histograms: The Histogram has a 'new look' in that a sunburst background colour has been added and there is also an improved statistics table. Multiple histograms can be displayed simultaneously. Histograms can be created for a single well or can be set up to display multiple wells. When a histogram is launched and a log plot for the active well is on-screen - if you move the mouse cursor over the log plot window, a small light blue bar, visible on the histogram display, tracks the mouse cursor movement. The histogram curve value updates as the mouse is moved. The bar disappears when the cursor is moved back over the histogram window. The bar is visible, simultaneously, on as many histograms as you have open for the active well. Managing Crossplots: The Crossplot has a 'new look' in that a sunburst background colour has been added. 3D Parameter Viewer: The 3D Parameter Viewer and 3D Visualization provides a versatile, interactive, graphical representation of the selected well data and can output results from any Interpretation module within Interactive Petrophysics v3.6. The 3D Visualization Window enables calculated reservoir parameters, for example Porosity and Water Saturation, Net Reservoir and Net Pay Thickness for all wells or for selected wells in an Interactive Petrophysics v3.6 database. Deeper investigation and Data Examination, for example Rw, Wet Clay Density, m, n, used in Porosity and Water Saturation can be completed on a fieldwide basis. Using the 3D Parameter Viewer enables the comparison of parameter values across different Interactive Petrophysics modules, or in the same module after different Interpretations have been run. Multi-Well Correlation Viewer: The 'Multi-Well Correlation Viewer' module provides the user with an interface to view multiple wells and to plot correlation lines between wells held in an IP database. Zone tops can be displayed and edited and wells can be 'datumed' (Flattened) on a zone top or to a reference depth by simple 'mouse click' operations. Wells can be added or

Section 8.

View Well and Curve Data :

429

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

removed from the display window and moved around within the multi-well viewer. Multi-well plot formats can be saved into the database directory for easy recall and re-display. Plots can be output to the clipboard for pasting into external documents or can be sent directly to available printers. Well Map: The 'Well Map' is a graphical interface where wells can be viewed together with geographical and cultural information loaded into IP from external SHAPE, .OVL or .DAT files. The interface allows users to identify and discriminate between wells that are in the database but not loaded into memory ("Available Wells") and in-memory ("Loaded Wells") based on symbol colours. Montage Builder: The IP 'Montage Builder' is a standalone application, shipped with IP, that provides a graphical-object editing and display 'workspace' in which the user can combine log plots, crossplots, histograms, correlation panels, core photographs and text on one montage. A comprehensive set of paper-sizing and orientation attributes allows you to work in a scaled workspace, to change display scales (Zoom in / out) and modify object orientation (rotate / flip), to add shape 'primitives' with user-specified colours and colour fill to enhance your presentation.

Related Topics Log Plot Horizontal Log Plot Set Default Plot Format Histogram Crossplot Multi-curve Crossplot 3D Parameter Viewer Multi-Well Correlation Viewer Montage Builder

Section 8.

View Well and Curve Data :

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

8.1

430

Working with the Log Plot Display

Interactive Petrophysics (IP) is built around a graphical user-interface which allows the user to perform the majority of interpretation workflow steps using unique 'Interactive Log Plot' displays. In addition, there is considerable flexibility built into the program to allow the setting up, saving and recall of user-defined 'Plot Formats' (.PLT files). Some basic log template 'formats' are provided with the software. These formats can be launched from drop-down menus and then customized by adding, moving or deleting log tracks and log curves to the users preferred display characteristics. The modified plot format can be saved and applied to other wells within an IP database. The 'Log Plot' interface is launched in a number of ways in IP: by selecting the 'Log Plot' or 'Horizontal Log Plot' options from the 'View' menu, by using the speed buttons on the 'Data View' toolbar,

By 'clicking and dragging' a Log Plot icon from the 'Database Browser' into the programs' workspace, by 'double-clicking' on a log plot icon in the 'Database Browser' tree view. Up to 250 log plots can be displayed simultaneously. Multiple log plots can be launched for one well or many different wells, as long as the wells are loaded in memory. 'Clicking' on a log plot makes the well associated with the plot the 'active well'. The active 'Well Name' is displayed at the top of the main IP window. Any module, which is selected from the main menu bar, will then be primed to work on data from the active well.

Related Topics Navigating the Log Plot Window Log Plot Track Management Define the Log Plot Formats Log Plot File Output Using the Plot Range Editor Using the Pre-Defined Plot Format Files Manage the Interactive Log Plot Create a Horizontal Log Plot

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

431

8.1.1

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Navigating the Log Plot Window

The following links provide detailed instruction on the Navigation and Use of the Log Plot Window. Log Plot Navigation and Sizing: The log plot shown below consists of 10 log tracks, including the depth and TVD depth tracks, plus an 'Overview' track on the right hand side of the display (track number 10 is 'hidden'). The 'Overview' track shows the entire depth range for the well, with the current display section (in the main plot window) as two horizontal red lines (top and bottom). By 'clicking' in the overview track, the user can quickly navigate to any part of the log display in the main log plot window. The user can change the depth interval being displayed by right mouse clicking on one of the red marker lines and dragging it to a new position. The main log plot will be re-scaled to fit into the window. Using Zoom in a Log Plot: Interactive Petrophysics provides the ability to Zoom into a user defined range in the Log Plot Window. Log Plot Display Shortcuts: describes the shortcuts available for manipulating the Log Plot Window.

Related Topics Navigating the Log Plot Window Log Plot Track Management Define the Log Plot Formats Log Plot File Output Using the Plot Range Editor Using the Pre-Defined Plot Format Files Manage the Interactive Log Plot Create a Horizontal Log Plot 8.1.1.1

Log Plot Navigation and Sizing

The log plot shown below consists of 10 log tracks, including the depth and TVD depth tracks, plus an 'Overview' track on the right hand side of the display (track number 10 is 'hidden'). The 'Overview' track shows the entire depth range for the well, with the current display section (in the main plot window) as two horizontal red lines (top and bottom). By 'clicking' in the overview track, the user can quickly navigate to any part of the log display in the main log plot window. The user can change the depth interval being displayed by right mouse clicking on one of the red marker lines and dragging it to a new position. The main log plot will be re-scaled to fit into the window.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

432

The curve 'Header' box can be resized by 'clicking' on the bottom border of the header box and dragging it up or down to a new size. The vertical scroll bar, to the left of the Overview track, allows the user to scroll the main log screen display up or down. Clicking above or below the scroll button in the scroll track will move the display up or down by one screen interval. Clicking on the arrows at the top or bottom of the scroll track, will scroll the display up or down 10% of the display interval. The horizontal scroll bar, located in the bottom right-hand corner of the log plot window, moves the display horizontally in increments of one track. Normally, it is better to simply expand the whole window if some of the tracks are not displayed, rather than scrolling horizontally. If the 'Fit' box is 'checked' the horizontal scroll bar has no effect. The 'Scale 1: ' and its associated drop-down list of plot scales allows the user to quickly change the vertical scale of the log plot display. The user selects a scale, for example 1: 500, 1:200 etc.. and the window redisplays at the appropriate vertical scale. The user can also use the keypad '+' and '-' buttons to change the vertical display scale of the plot in the display. The '+' button zooms in, expanding the vertical scale. The '-' button zooms out, compressing the vertical scale. The user can also type in a vertical scale value into the text box.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

433

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The 'Fit' check box, (illustrated above) in the log plot window header, when 'checked', will adjust the width of all the log plot tracks so that the whole log plot fits exactly into the plot window. Setting the box to 'checked' does not change the width of the tracks when a log plot is sent to the printer. Un-checking this box displays the log plot at its correct 'physical', hardcopy width. The 'Lock' check box, (illustrated above) in the log plot window header, when 'checked', sets the currently-displayed plot as the 'Default Plot' for this well. The 'Default Plot' format is saved into the database and is the log plot displayed automatically when a new plot window is launched or when the well focus for a log plot is changed. If the user launches a second plot for the same well, the 'Default Plot' will be launched. The 'checked' lock box will be set in the newly-activated 'Default Plot' window and the 'tick' will be cleared on the original plot. This feature allows the user to set up and customize individual log plots for IP wells in a database so that, when a well is loaded into memory and a log plot is launched, the log plot defaults to the 'locked' plot format.

Colour Coded Curve Values The Status Bar displays the values for the selected Curve in the associated Color of the Curves in the Selected Track.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

434

Related Topics Navigating the Log Plot Window Log Plot Navigation and Sizing Using Zoom in a Log Plot Log Plot Display Shortcuts

8.1.1.2

Using Zoom in a Log Plot

Interactive Petrophysics v3.6 provides the ability to Zoom into a user defined range in the Log Plot Window. To Zoom In to a User Defined Range: Right Click any Panel in the Log Plot Window and Select Zoom In from the Shortcut Menu.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

435

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Click the Top Depth of the required Interval. Note: this depth will be displayed as a solid red line.

Click the Bottom Depth of the required Interval to automatically zoom the Log Plot Display to the selected Interval.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

436

To reset the Log Plot Display Window to Normal, Right Click any panel on the Log Plot Display Window and Select Un-Zoom.

Note: the Un-Zoom Shortcut Menu Item will only be displayed if the Zoom-In Menu Item in the Shortcut Menu has previously been utilised.

Shortcut Keys To Zoom In to a Log Plot, Click the Start Depth with the Middle Mouse Button, THEN Click the End Depth with the Left or Middle Mouse Button.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

437

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

To Zoom In and Out of the Log Plot Display, Press the + or - Sign on the Number Key Pad to Zoom In or Out by one Step in the Scale Box.

To Zoom to the End of the Log Plot Display, Press the End Key on the Number Key Pad to Zoom to the End of the Log Plot.

To Zoom to the Start of the Log Plot Display, Press the Home Key on the Number Key Pad to Zoom to the Start of the Log Plot.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

438

To Scroll Through a Log Plot, Either Turn the Mouse Wheel Or Press the Page Up Key or the Page Down Key in the Number Key Pad.

Related Topics Navigating the Log Plot Window Log Plot Navigation and Sizing Using Zoom in a Log Plot Log Plot Display Shortcuts 8.1.1.3

Log Plot Display Shortcuts

The following list outlines the Navigation Shortcuts available when working in a Log Plot Display. To display the Normal Shortcut Menu from a Zone Track, Press the Ctrl Key and Right Click the Zone Track

To Copy a Depth to the Clipboard for pasting into a Depth Field, Left Click at required Depth on a Log Plot, the Paste into a DEPTH field.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

439

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

To Swap Track Positions in a Log Plot Display, Right Click the Required Header and Drag to a New Position.

To Change track width, Click and Drag the Track Border to change the Track Width.

To Copy a Curve from one Track to another, Press Ctrl, Right Click the Curve Name then Drag to move a Curve from one Track to another.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

440

To Move a Curve from one track to another, Press Shift, Right Click the Curve Name and Drag to Move the Curve to another Track.

To Delete a Curve from a Track, Press, Shift, Right Click the Curve Name and Drag Downwards off the Bottom of the Curve Header.

To re-arrange the Plotting Order of Curves within a Track, Press, Shift, Right Click the Curve Name and Drag to a different position in the same Track Header.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

441

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

To Zoom In to a Log Plot, Click the Start Depth with the Middle Mouse Button, THEN Click the End Depth with the Left or Middle Mouse Button.

To Zoom In and Out of the Log Plot Display, Press the + or - Sign on the Number Key Pad to Zoom In or Out by one Step in the Scale Box.

To Zoom to the End of the Log Plot Display, Press the End Key on the Number Key Pad to Zoom to the End of the Log Plot.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

442

To Zoom to the Start of the Log Plot Display, Press the Home Key on the Number Key Pad to Zoom to the Start of the Log Plot.

To Scroll Through a Log Plot, Either Turn the Mouse Wheel Or Press the Page Up Key or the Page Down Key in the Number Key Pad. To Make a Cross Plot. Press and Hold the X Key, Left Click the X Axis Curve Header Name, then the Y Axis Curve Header Name and then the Z Axis Curve Header Name (Optional). Continue to Hold the X Key and either Select Crossplot from the View Menu or Click the Crossplot Button. See Also: Crossplots

Related Topics Navigating the Log Plot Window Log Plot Navigation and Sizing Using Zoom in a Log Plot Log Plot Display Shortcuts

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

443

8.1.2

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Log Plot Track Management

Right-mouse-button 'clicking' in a log plot track launches a pop-up menu, which allows the user to select a histogram display for any curve found in that track, as shown in the following figure. Other editing functions are also available. These are described below. NOTE: a 'Zone' track in a log plot has different functionality from 'conventional' log curve tracks. 'Zones' can be interactively edited and deleted in the log plot display. The user should right mouse button 'click' in order to launch the normal pop-up menu for a 'Zone' track. Selecting the ' Edit Zone' opens the 'Edit Zone tops' module where the zone names, depths and colours can all be changed.

The editing options available on the curve track pop-up menu are described below: The 'Add Annotation' option launches a text editor which allows the user to write annotations / add lines / arrows to the log plot. This is the same functionality as clicking the ' Annotations' button on the log plot window header. The 'Expand Track' function expands the chosen track to fill the whole plot, apart from a depth track. To return the plot to a normal view, right-mouse click in the track and choose ' Normal Track' from the pop-up menu. The 'New Track' function will create a new track. If the user 'clicks' in the right half of a log track, then the new track will appear to the right hand side of the track that has been clicked in. If the user 'clicks' in the left half of the track, then the new track will appear to the left hand side of the track that has been clicked in. The vertical grid lines in the new track will be set up the same as for the track the user clicked in.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

444

The 'Duplicate Track' function will copy the current track settings, with all curves and shadings, into a new track. If the user clicks in the right half of the track-to-duplicate, then the new track will appear to the right of the track that has been selected. If the user clicks in the left half of the track-to-duplicate, then the new track will appear to the left of the track that has been selected. A log track, together with its curves and shadings settings, can be copied from one log plot display to another as long as the same well is displayed in each log plot. This is achieved using the 'Copy Track' and 'Paste Track' options. The user right-mouse clicks in the 'track-to-copy' and selects the 'Copy Track' option. Then right-mouse click in the plot you wish to add the new track into and select the 'Paste Track' option. The 'Delete Track' function removes the selected track from the log plot. The 'Hide Track' function will temporarily hide a track. The track can be re-displayed by clicking the 'Edit Format' button in the log plot header, selecting the 'Grid' tab and re-'checking' the 'show track' cell for the hidden track. 'Show / Hide Curves' - this option allows the user to choose to hide any curve that is displayed in a log track. The user should 'un-check' the curve-to-hide in the drop-down curve list. The curve can be turned 'on' again by 'checking' the hidden curve name in the same drop-down menu.

Related Topics Navigating the Log Plot Window Log Plot Track Management Define the Log Plot Formats Log Plot File Output Using the Plot Range Editor Using the Pre-Defined Plot Format Files Manage the Interactive Log Plot Create a Horizontal Log Plot 8.1.2.1

Moving Curves and Tracks within a Log Plot

Log curve tracks can be moved to different positions in a Log Plot by right-mouse-button 'clicking' in a track header and dragging the track to a new position.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

445

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Curves can be copied, moved and deleted from the tracks in which they occur: To 'move' a curve - hold down the 'Shift' button, right 'click' on the curve name in the track header and drag the curve to a new track. To 'copy' a curve - hold down the 'Ctrl' button, right 'click' on the curve name in the track header and drag the curve to a new track. To 'delete' a curve - hold down the 'Shift' button, right 'click' on the curve name in the track header and drag the curve out of the header.

Related Topics Navigating the Log Plot Window Log Plot Track Management Define the Log Plot Formats Log Plot File Output Using the Plot Range Editor

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

446

Using the Pre-Defined Plot Format Files Manage the Interactive Log Plot Create a Horizontal Log Plot

8.1.3

Define the Log Plot Formats

Log Plot 'Formats' are used by IP to save and restore log plot display settings such as; Log curve track order, Curve line colour, Line style and thickness, Curve fill colours / patterns. IP provides the user with a number of 'default' log plot formats which are launched from the 'File' menu in the Log Plot interface. An example log plot format is shown at the end of this chapter. See the 'Format Files' section.

Log Plot Formats are available from a number of sources: 1. The 'Program Default Plots' are normally stored in the IP program directory under a subdirectory called '..\Default Plots'. However, this location can be changed by editing the 'ProgDefs.opt' file and changing the file location. Using the IP '..\Default Plots' directory allows networked users to share common log plot formats. Each user sets their default plot location to the common directory. Any plot format file saved into the directory will automatically appear in each users menu system.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

447

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

2. The 'Project / Well Plots' list will display all plot formats that have been saved either to the main IP project directory or in the selected wells' sub-directory (WELL000X). Under the 'File' menu the 'project-specific' plot formats will appear at the top of the list ('Complog', 'cpi' and 'triple combo' in the example shown above) followed by the 'well-specific' plots ('LITHtest' and 'TempPlotFile' in the example shown above). Other log plot formats can be loaded by clicking the 'Load Plot Format' menu option. This allows the user to 'browse' to a plot file from another well or IP project. 3. 'Load Plot Format' - To recall a previously-saved plot, that is not displayed in the menu, click the 'Load Plot Format' menu item and select the plot to recall. Log plot formats can be created either using actual curve names or generic curve 'Types'. Curve 'Types' are defined when curves are created or they can be changed using the 'Manage Curve Headers' module. When curves are loaded, their default 'Types' are looked up in the CparmDef.par file (see 'Edit Curve System Defaults'). 4. 'Save Plot Format' - The 'Save Plot Format' menu item allows the user to save a plot format for later use. All the interactive features in the plot are saved. The default directory to save a plot will be the 'Output directory' set under 'Default file Location' or the well directory, if this option is being used. 5. 'Save Plot Format Generic' - The 'Save Plot Format Generic' option saves the complete log plot exactly the same as the 'Save Plot Format' operation, except that curve 'Types' are substituted for curve 'names' in the format file . This allows the creation of a plot format which can be used in different wells where curve names are different but curve 'types' are the same. NOTE: in IP Version 3.3 and later, log plot formats are saved in such a way that, if a particular plot format is selected for a well, and that well does not contain some of the log curve names in the .PLT file, the program will still keep the missing curve name in the log track headers in the

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

448

second well. For example, if a plot format is saved in 'Well A' with a porosity log curve PHIE in it, and the plot format is then applied to 'Well B', that does not have a PHIE curve, the curve name will still appear in the plot format. Each time you edit that log track ,containing the missing PHIE curve name, in 'Well B', a Confirm dialog will be displayed. This 'Confirm' dialog recognizes that curve name PHIE does not exist in the current IP well and allows you either: To Click 'Yes' - to acknowledge that the curve is absent, but still to continue plotting the log plot. To click 'No' - to go back into the 'track manager' and select another log curve in place of PHIE. To click 'Yes to All' - to acknowledge that curve name PHIE and some other curves do not exist in the current IP well, but still allow further curves to be added / deleted / changed into the log plot, without launching this 'Confirm' dialog repeatedly.

Related Topics Navigating the Log Plot Window Log Plot Track Management Define the Log Plot Formats Log Plot File Output Using the Plot Range Editor Using the Pre-Defined Plot Format Files Manage the Interactive Log Plot Create a Horizontal Log Plot

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

449 8.1.3.1

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Edit the Log Plot Format

The 'Edit Format' window allows the user to set up and change the Log plot format.

The module is accessed under the main menu 'Log Plot Menu'

'Edit Format' or using the '

Edit Format' button on the log plot window. The window is arranged on three 'tabbed' screens. These are : 'Grid' - where the log track background grid lines are defined 'Curves'- where the curves to display are defined 'Shading' - where shadings between two curves or between a curve and a constant value can be defined.

Related Topics Edit the Log Plot Format Define the Log Plot Grid Parameters Define the Log Plot Curves Parameters Define the Log Plot Shading Parameters Set Default Plot Format

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

450

8.1.3.1.1 Define the Log Plot Grid Parameters

'Grid' Tab The 'Grid' tab contains the track numbers ('Trk #'), user-defined track name ('Trk Name' optional), track width dimensions and settings for depth grid (horizontal) lines and curve scale (vertical) grid lines. The following table summarizes the function of the columns in the 'Grid' tab. Trk #

Track Number - this is the order in which the tracks are displayed across the page. 'Clicking' on a track number, in the grey, left-hand column and dragging it up or down to another position in the list can change the track order. Whole tracks can be re-arranged very easily in this manner.

Track Name

The user has the option to add track titles to a log plot. By typing in names in this column and 'checking' the 'Show Track Headers' box, user-defined labels will be displayed in the track header in each track. If the Track Name fields are blank and the 'Show Track Headers' box is 'checked', the Track Number is automatically displayed on the Log Plot.

Width inch/

The approximate width of the track in inches (or cm).

cm Show Trk

If 'checked', the track will be displayed. If not 'checked', the track will be hidden.

Plot Grid

'Check' to plot grid lines in the track.

Depth Lines

This column allows you to set up different display options for horizontal 'depth' lines. The options are 'Full' where depth grid lines are drawn across the full width of a log track, 'Left' or 'Right' where depth 'ticks' are plotted on the left hand or right hand margin of the log track. 'Center' where the depth 'tick' is in the centre of the track; 'Lft &Rht' where depth 'ticks' are placed at both left and right hand margins; and 'None' where no horizontal lines or 'ticks' are plotted in the log track.

Scale Lines

A number is typed in here which represents the number of vertical 'scale' lines that will be drawn in a log track.

Log Grid # Dec Left Scale

'Check' this column to display logarithmic grid lines. Number of log decades to be drawn for logarithmic track. Starting left-scale value for a logarithmic track. 0.2 or 2 will give the same result.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

451

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Minor Lines

Senergy

If 'checked', all the logarithmic vertical lines will be plotted; if not, only the 'major', decade lines will be plotted.

Overview

Check the track that will be the overview track on the right of the plot. Only one track can be the overview track, and it must be the last track number.

Plot Set

To plot a horizontal line across a track, at the top of each zone in a Zone / Tops or Parameter Set , 'check' the 'Plot Set' box. Then click the 'Define' button next to the 'checked' cell to select the appropriate Tops Set. See below for an illustration.

Define Set

The 'Define' button allows the user to select the Parameter / Zone tops to display in the Plot. On clicking the 'Define' button a set-up window appears. The user selects the 'Tops' or 'Parameter' Set from the drop-down list and then has the options of choosing Line 'colour' & whether or not to show Zone Name 'labels' as well as lines. If 'Plot Names' is selected, 'Font Size' and 'Font Style' can be selected. Select 'OK' to display the lines/labels in a single track. The 'All Subsequent' button provides a useful shortcut to set up all subsequent tracks with the same Top Set line and Name settings for display on the log plot. If you do not want to see lines/labels in a particular track simply 'un-check' the 'Plot Set' for the appropriate Track number. To display lines but not labels, 'un-check' the 'Plot Names' box.

Plot Order

The 'Order' button launches a window which allows the order that objects are layered in a track, on the plot, to be changed. Click in the 'Order' column and drag objects up / down in the order to effect changes. See below for an illustration.

The user can add horizontal lines, coincident with a user-defined Zone /Tops Set, across one or all log curve tracks. The Zone Tops are set up as described below. Click a Column Header in the Log Plot to display the Log Plot Format Dialog. From the Grid Tab, 'Tick' the 'Plot Set' column in the track you wish to view 'Tops' labels in. Click the 'Define' button to launch the 'Tops Set selection' dialog. Choose a Set name from the drop-down list and select the label colour, font and font size you want to see on the log plot. Click 'OK' to set this Tops set to display only in this one log track, or Click the 'All Subsequent' button to set up these labels and display features in all other (subsequent) log tracks in the log plot.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

452

The 'Plot Order' in which curves, shadings and gridlines are overlain in a track is controlled by the 'Plot Order' column, 'Order' button, as illustrated above. The 'Order' button launches a window which allows you to set up the drawing order in which log curves, depth grids, curve shadings, text curves etc... are displayed in a particular log track. The user can click in the lefthand margin of the dialog and drag a feature up or down the list to change the display order of the features. The 'Plot Order' can be different for each log track or by using the 'All Tracks' button all the tracks can have the same 'Plot Order'.

Depth Grid Datum and Depth Labelling The depth grid horizontal lines displayed on a log plot are controlled from the check-boxes and drop-down options located at the bottom of the 'Grid' tab. The 'Depth Grid Datum Curve' selection box allows the user to change the log plot grid

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

453

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

datum. This allows the user to plot 'TVD' or 'TIME' datumed log plots. The user selects a depth-type curve from the drop-down box. Only 'DEPTH' or 'TIME' type curves can be selected. If the curve required is not displayed, then find the curve name and change its type to Depth or Time in the 'Manage Curve Headers' module.

NOTE: Unpredictable results will occur if the selected TVD curve reverses in direction. Therefore, you cannot use a highly-deviated wells' TVD curve, if the well path goes up and down. The 'Depth Grid Line and number Spacing' options allows the user to override the 'default' depth grid plotting settings. If the 'Default' box is not 'checked' then the grid line and number spacing will be fixed to whatever is set in the text-entry boxes, regardless of the log vertical scale.

Log Plot Headers and Log Track Borders These log plot elements are controlled using the options illustrated in the screen captures shown below: The 'Show Track Headers' 'tick-box controls whether or not log 'Track Headers' are displayed on the top of a log plot display. 'Tick' the box to display track headers, 'Un-tick' the box to omit log track headers

The drop-down colour list can be used to set the 'Log Track Header Background colour'

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

454

for each individual log plot. Different background colours can be set up for different wells.

The 'Track Border Width' (thickness) number affects the thickness of the lines separating log tracks in a log plot, as illustrated below:

Related Topics Edit the Log Plot Format Define the Log Plot Grid Parameters Define the Log Plot Curves Parameters Define the Log Plot Shading Parameters Set Default Plot Format 8.1.3.1.2 Define the Log Plot Curves Parameters

The 'Curves' tab is a 'grid' type display that allows the user to see all the curve names / Zone Sets that are being used in the log plot, together with the curve left and right scales; whether the curve is

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

455

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

shown in a linear (Lin) or Logarithmic (Log) scale, the line width (Wth) and Line Style (described below).

Trk: Enter the track to plot the curve in. Curves can be entered in any order Curve Name: Enter the curve name to plot, or choose it from the drop-down box. If the Style is set to 'Zone', then choose the 'Parameter Set' from the drop-down menu. If Style is 'VDL' or ' Waveform' then the user enters one of the curves that makes up the VDL or Waveform input set. (See VDL or Waveform). Curve 'Type' can be substituted for curve name by appending a '* ' in front of the Type. For example '*GammaRay' will pick up a gamma ray curve. If style is ' Image' then choose from an image curve. (see Image / picture plots). If the user wishes to display a 'Text Curve' firstly select 'Text Curve' from the Line 'Styles' column, this will filter to any Text-type curves and the required curve can then be selected from the 'Curve Name' dropdown list. Left Scale: Left scale value. If left blank, its value will be taken from the preceding curve. For ' Text Curves' Left Scale offers the options for text justification in the track (left, right and centre) Right Scale: Right scale value. If left blank, its value will be taken from the preceding curve. For 'Text Curves' Right Scale offers the options for text 'anchoring' in the track . An 'anchor' links the Text strings in the curve to their depth entries. Visible: This allows the temporary removal of an individual curve from the log plot. The curve stays in the format and can be re-displayed by re-applying the tick.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

456

Back Up: Curve back-up option. Choose options from the drop down box. None, LBU (left backup) or RBU (right backup). x10 (multiplies the original scale by 10) and Wrap (allows the curve to wrap using a continuation of the original scale). For 'Text Curves' the back-up options switch text 'wrap' on or off. Log Sc: Choose whether to plot the log with a linear or logarithmic scale.

Line colour:

Choose line colour from drop-down box. If the 'Style' has been set to Zone then the drop-down box will allow the choice of: Plot num : This will plot the zone number in the middle of the zone colour boxes, Names : This will plot the Zone name in the middle of the zone colour boxes, No Text : This will plot just the zone colour boxes Clear : This will plot the zone name but will remove the colour from the zone box. Width: Choose line width 1-3. This will also control the size of the points for point plotting. Style: Choose the style of the display from the drop-down box. Lines can be Solid, Dot, Dash, Dot-Dash. Blocked lines will be drawn as blocked curves rather than smooth curves. For Point plotting choose from the cross, square, circle, triangle or star. Tadpoles can have circular, triangular, square or diamond shape heads. If a tadpole is chosen then a define button will allow the setting up of the other tadpole parameters (See Tadpoles). The Numeric style allows plotting data as numeric values at defined intervals. The column next to the style will change to a define button, which allows the user to set up the Numeric display (See Numeric). The Pip style is designed to plot horizontal lines from the data point to the value zero. Cumulative is used, for example, to plot lithology-type shading. The value plotted for a 'cumulative' style curve is equal to the curve value plus the values of all other 'cumulative' style curves in the log track whose names appear higher in the curve list than the curve being plotted. Mirror will plot the selected curve with its mirror image (same curve with reversed scale). The gap between the two curves is shaded with the selected curve colour. Zone will turn this track into Zone track (See Zones). For VDL the Line colour column entry will change to a button, which allows the user to set up the displays (See VDL). For Waveform the column next to the style will change to a define button, which allows the user to set up the waveform display (See Waveforms). For Pictures select this option and then select the picture curve under the curve name column (See Pictures).

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

457

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

For Images the Line colour column entry will change to a button, which allows the user to set up the displays (See Images). The Dip Image allows the displaying of dips as sine wave curves on an image log (See Dip Image). The Text Curve is used for curves containing text strings (See Text Curves)

Edit Track Header If the user clicks in the header of a track then the 'Log Plot Format' window will appear with the curves for the selected track. The user can add or delete curves or change shading for the track. By clicking on the 'All Tracks' button the 'Log Plot Format' window will revert to the standard display with all curves shown and will include the 'Grid' tab.

Automatically Update Shading For complicated Log Plots it is sometimes necessary to be able to retain the shading attributes that have been defined when Curve Names are changed in the Log Plot Format Dialog, Curves Tab. This is useful for mud log which have been set up with many default shading types The Default Setting for shading to be automatically updated is On. If the Curve Names are to be changed but the existing shading is still required, the Auto Update Shading Checkbox in the Curves Tab of the Log Plot Format Dialog should be un-checked. If the Auto-Update Check-Box is un-checked, when the Curve Name is Changed in the Curves Tab, the existing Curve Name and Shading will remain in the Shading Tab.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

458

Related Topics Edit the Log Plot Format Define the Log Plot Grid Parameters Define the Log Plot Curves Parameters Define the Log Plot Shading Parameters Set Default Plot Format 8.1.3.1.3 Define the Log Plot Shading Parameters

The 'Shading' tab allows the user to define colour and pattern shading for use between 2 curves or between curves and 'Fixed values' to enhance the appearance of log plots. Trk: Enter the track for the shading. This must be done first. Left Side of Shading: Curve Name: Choose a curve from the drop down curve box or leave blank to shade to a fixed value. Fixed Value: Enter a value to shade to. Leave blank to shade to a curve. Right Side of Shading: Curve Name: Choose a curve from the drop-down curve box or leave blank to shade to a fixed value. Fixed Value: Enter a value to shade to. Leave blank to shade to a curve. Visible: This allows the removal of shading from the log plot. The shading stays in the format and can be re-displayed by re-checking the box. Shading Type: Choose from the drop-down box the type of shading to use.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

459

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Variable Shading: If the 'Variable' Shading type is selected then a 'Define' button will appear in this column, adjacent to the Variable 'type'. Click the button to set up the variable shading. See 'Variable Shading' for more details on setting up this type of display. Shading Description: This is the text string which is displayed in the shading box in the curve header. Examples from the above figure: Line 1 : Shade a Variable shading between the value 0 and the SGR curve. Line 2 : Shade 'Yellow' between the two curves when the RHOB curve is to the left of the TPNH curve. Line 3 : Shade 'Green' between the two curves when the TPNH curve is to the left of the RHOB curve.

Adding Shading Patterns User-defined bitmaps can be loaded to IP and used as alternative shading to the default shadings provided with the program. Bitmaps can be designed in PC applications such as Microsoft 'Paint'. Bitmaps should have dimensions of 16x16 pixels. See the 'Tools' menu item 'Shading Types' for further details.

Shading Tab Buttons

OK : The 'OK' button will create a new plot using the current format. Apply : This button will update the current plot but not close the log plot format window. This is useful for previewing changes to the log plot format.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

460

Save Format : The 'Save Format' button saves the current plot format to disk. The program will first apply the format to check it before saving. The user will be asked for a name under which to save the format. Load Format : The 'Load Format' button allows the user to load a previously saved format from the hard disk. The program will load and apply the format, plotting all curves that are available. In the 'Log Plot Format' window all the curves from the saved format will be displayed. This allows the saving of generic formats that can be applied to other wells with different curve names. The user loads the format and modifies the curve names to match the current well.

Related Topics Edit the Log Plot Format Define the Log Plot Grid Parameters Define the Log Plot Curves Parameters Define the Log Plot Shading Parameters Set Default Plot Format

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

461 8.1.3.2

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Set Default Plot Format

The 'Set Default Plot Format' is a new option that gives the user the ability to set the place where the default plot for a well comes from. When selected the following Dialog appears;

There are two basic options: 'Use Well Default Format for new plots' - currently the method employed with IP v3.3. 'Use the following plot Format as default for new plots in all wells' - this option allows the user to pick a plot template to be applied on all the wells within a database when a new plot is created. The 'Browse' button allows the selection of the plot format template:

If the 'Look in Project Plots' box is 'checked' then the file select dialogue opens up within the current project. If it is not 'checked' then the global 'Default Plots' dialogue opens, as seen above. The 'Default Plots' are stored in C:\Documents and Settings\\Local

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

462

Settings\Application Data\IntPetro35 folder.

Related Topics Edit the Log Plot Format Define the Log Plot Grid Parameters Define the Log Plot Curves Parameters Define the Log Plot Shading Parameters Set Default Plot Format

8.1.3.3

Log Plot Styles

This topic outlines the Line Styles available to be used in the Log Plot Window. Zones: Zone Sets, whether they contain geological formation tops data or Petrophysical interpretation zones, for example 'fluid' zones, are displayed in 'Zone' tracks. Zone labels and colours can be displayed on their own or they can be viewed in 'conventional' log curve tracks, overlaying log curves. Only one 'Zone / Tops' Set can be displayed per single log track. If no Zone Set exists then it will first need to be created - see 'Manage Zones / Tops' for details on how to do this. Once the Zone Set has been created then it can be viewed in the log plot. Depth /Time Index: The way that the user sets up and visualizes 'depth Index' values has been updated for Version 3.3 and later. The user now has more interactivity with the way depth values are plotted in a log plot display. Numeric: The 'Numeric' style of log curve plotting results in log curve 'values' being plotted in the user-selected track, rather than as a line or symbols. If 'Numeric' style has been selected then, when the user 'clicks' the 'Define' button, the 'Set up Numeric' window will be launched. Variable Shading: If 'Variable Shading' type has been selected then the user must 'click' the 'Define' button to set up the shadings. The Define Variable Shading Dialog will be displayed. The 'Shading controlled by curve' entry box allows the user to select the curve that will determine the shading colours. The curve name is selected from the available curves, in the drop-down list. This can be any curve in the well. The value of the curve at a depth in a well will be used to decide the type of shading to apply at that depth. Two types of variable shading are available: VDL Plots: In order to plot a 'Variable Density Log' ('VDL') the IP well must contain either; An array curve to use to define the VDL, or A group of curves in the well which make up the

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

463

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

VDL. Where a group of curves make up the VDL, all the curve names must have the same 'Base Name' with a numeric extension attached to them. For example, curve names 'Prob1', 'Prob2', 'Prob3', 'Prob4' would be acceptable. Tadpoles: If a curve style of 'Tadpole' is chosen, then a 'Define' button will appear next to the 'Style' column. Clicking the button will allow the set-up of the tadpole curve type. The tadpole 'Dip Azimuth curve' must be entered (allowed values 0-360 degrees). Waveforms: In order to plot a 'Waveform' the user must have an array curve or a group of curves in the well which make up the 'waveform'. If the user is trying to visualize a set of related conventional curves, all the curve names must have the same 'base name' with a number extension attached to it. For example C1, C2, C3, C4, ….C29, C30 would be acceptable. Where a group of related curves are used to create a waveform, the program will automatically select all the curves with the same 'base name' and use them to plot the waveform with the lowest extension number plotted on the left hand margin of the waveform track and the highest extension number on the right hand side. If the user selects an arraytype curve, for example CMR 'T2_DIST', then IP will automatically load the array data. Pictures: 'Picture' curves can be displayed in any log track by selecting the 'Pictures' style for a curve on the 'Curves' tab. The picture curve is then selected under the 'Curve name' column. Pictures with a scale from 0-1 will be displayed across the whole track. Scales can be adjusted if the picture is to fill only part of a track. Other normal curves can be plotted on top of a picture curve. Only one picture curve can be plotted in each track. Images: To plot an 'Image', the array curve is entered on the 'Curves Tab' under curve name. The curve 'Style' is set to 'Images'. The left and right scale values for the Image can be filled in and, if this is done, the scales will be displayed in the curve header. However, the scales are not used for creating the Image. Dip Image: The 'Dip image' plot object allows the plotting of tadpoles as sine wave curves on an image log. To plot a dip image, the tadpole dip curve is entered on the 'Curves Tab' under curve name. The curve 'Style' is set to 'Dip Images'. The left and right scale values for the Image can be filled in and if done will be displayed in the curve header. However the scales are not used for creating the Image. Annotations: Three types of 'Annotations' can be displayed in the Log Plot Window; 'Text' annotations can be single or multi-line and the user has total control on the formatting of the text, 'Line' annotations can be a single line or an arrow. The user can control the direction, length, colour, type and size of the line, 'Graphical Image' annotations allows the user to place any graphical image onto the log plot. The image is loaded from a disk file and can be re-sized to fit any area on the plot

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

464

Related Topics Navigating the Log Plot Window Log Plot Track Management Define the Log Plot Formats Log Plot File Output Using the Plot Range Editor Using the Pre-Defined Plot Format Files Manage the Interactive Log Plot Create a Horizontal Log Plot 8.1.3.3.1 Zones

Zone Sets, whether they contain geological formation tops data or petrophysical interpretation zones, for example 'fluid' zones, are displayed in 'Zone' tracks. Zone labels and colours can be displayed on their own or they can be viewed in 'conventional' log curve tracks, overlaying log curves. Only one 'Zone / Tops' Set can be displayed per single log track. If no Zone Set exists then it will first need to be created - see 'Manage Zones / Tops' for details on how to do this. Once the Zone Set has been created then it can be viewed in the log plot. To load and view an existing 'Zone /Tops' Set in a log plot, the user must: 1. Either 'click' in an existing log track header, or right mouse button click in an existing log track and select 'NewTrack' to create a new log track. 2. In the first blank row in the 'Log plot Format' screen' you must select line 'Style' (righthand column) of 'Zone'. 3. This sets up the 'Curve Name' drop-down list to display available 'Zone / Tops' Sets, from which you can choose the Set required for visualization. The Zone Set name will be displayed in the log plot track header. 'Zone' tracks can be plotted in several different 'styles'. The style is selected on the Plot Format Window on the 'Curves' tab under the 'Line colour' column.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

465

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The styles of Zone Labelling listed in the Line/Colour drop down menu are: 'Plot Num.' - Displays a coloured background with Zone Numbers overlaid. 'Names' - Displays a coloured background with Zone Names overlaid. 'No Text' - Displays a coloured background with no text overlaid. 'Clear' - Displays a clear background with Zone Name overlaid. The following plot illustrates the styles. For the 'Names' and 'Clear' options the zone name text is plotted horizontally if the 'Zone' track width allows, otherwise it is plotted vertically.

Right Click a Zone Track to display the Zone Track Shortcut Menu, illustrated above left. This menu is different to the Shortcut Menu in a conventional Curve Track. The 'Normal' Track

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

466

Shortcut Menu is displayed by holding down the keyboard CTRL or SHIFT button while rightmouse-button 'clicking' in the 'Zone' track. See Also: Log Plot Display Shortcuts.

Split Zone Split Zone: From the Zone Track Shortcut Menu, Select Split Zone to Split One Zone into Two.

Delete Zone Delete Zone: From the Zone Track Shortcut Menu, Select Delete Zone to Delete the Selected Zone.

Display Zone Table This displays the Zone Parameters Dialog, which enables the user to, for example, add

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

467

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

'zone names' and 'zone colours' to an existing Tops Set.

NOTE: Zone Sets, associated with particular interpretation modules (for example, 'Cutoff' or 'Porosity /Water Saturation') can only be edited from within their respective modules. You are limited to being able to change zone colours for such Sets in this module. NOTE: The Zone Parameters Dialog now contains a Lock Zone Column, which displays a Tick Mark if any of the Zones in the Log Plot are Locked.

Display Zone Names Change Zone Numbers to Zone Names: The Zone Names for a Specific Zone Track can also be displayed by Selecting Display Zone from the Shortcut Menu. This menu item toggles between Display Zone Names and Display Zone Numbers. If the Zone Names are already displayed the Shortcut Menu will have the Menu Item Display Zone Numbers instead.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

468

Lock/Un-Lock Zone Each individual Zone with a Zone Track can be locked to a specific Top and Bottom Depth. When a Zone is locked the Zone cannot be moved or changed unless the Zone becomes Un-Locked. To lock a specific Zone, Right Click the required Zone and Select Lock Zone from the Shortcut Menu.

Note: In the screenshot below, Zone 1 has been locked and the Bottom Depth of Zone 2 moved. If Zone 1 was unlocked, then the Top Depth of Zone 1 would remain the same as the Bottom Depth of Zone 2. While Zone 1 is locked, the Top Depth of Zone 1 will remain static.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

469

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

To unlock a previously locked zone, Right Click the required Zone and Click Un-lock Zone from the Shortcut Menu.

Edit a Zone Name Right Click the required Zone Track and Select Edit Zone Name from the Shortcut Menu to display the Rename Zone Dialog.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

470

Related Topics Log Plot Display Shortcuts Zones Depth /Time Index Numeric Variable Shading VDL Plots Tadpoles Waveforms Pictures Images Dip Image Annotations 8.1.3.3.2 Numeric

The 'Numeric' style of log curve plotting results in log curve 'values' being plotted in the userselected track, rather than as a line or symbols. If 'Numeric' style has been selected then, when the user 'clicks' the 'Define' button, the 'Set up Numeric' window will be launched. The window allows the the user to set up the vertical spacing of the numeric data in the plot and

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

471

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

has 3 'Plot Reference' check boxes that can be selected. 'Position data on major depth / time lines' 'Position data on its own depth / time axis (Depth / Time curve)' 'Plot depth / time Ticks in track' With all options, there is a 'Decimal Places' entry box to allow the user to specify the number of decimal places the numeric data should be displayed to. If the 'Position data on major depth / time lines' box is 'checked' then the curve values will be plotted at the same depth as the heavy grid lines in the log plot display

The 'Position data on its own depth / time axis (Depth / Time curve)' check-box, if 'checked', will plot curve values every 'Depth Plot Interval' (The 'Plot Depth every ....' entry box), not synchronized with the heavy depth grid lines.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

472

By checking this box the user then has the ability to check the 'Plot depth / time Ticks in track' check box to allow tick marks to be associated with the numeric data. This will sensitize the rest of the form

The following log plot example shows the TVDSS curve being plotted as numeric data with all the different 'Tick Alignment' options.

The position of numeric text in the track depends on its left and right scale value. The text will be plotted so that the middle of the text will be at a value of 0.5 in relationship to the left and right

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

473

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

scale value. This means that a scale of 0 - 1 will plot the text in the middle of the track. The text cannot be plotted outside the track boundaries.

Related Topics Log Plot Display Shortcuts Zones Depth /Time Index Numeric Variable Shading VDL Plots Tadpoles Waveforms Pictures Images Dip Image Annotations

8.1.3.3.3 Depth /Time Index

The way that the user sets up and visualizes 'depth Index' values has been updated for Version 3.3 and later. The user now has more interactivity with the way depth values are plotted in a log plot display. Depth value labels can be rotated through 0, 90 or 270 degrees within the Depth track. Depth value label Font Size can be adjusted.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

Senergy

View Well and Curve Data

474

Additional attributes called depth 'ticks' can be added to further enhance a log plot output. Depth 'ticks' are illustrated in the following screen capture.

Depth 'ticks' can be added to a 'Depth' track on a log plot using the 'Edit Format'

'Grid'

screen. 'Ticks' are synchronized to the 'Depth Grid Datum Curve' and 'tick spacing' is controlled by the 'Depth Grid Line and number Spacing' properties. When 'Default' is 'checked', and the user changes the log plot vertical scale, the depth ticks adjust to the new depth grid lines.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

475

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

By default, where a 'Depth' curve is displayed in a log plot, 'ticks' are turned 'off'. To turn them 'on', on the 'Grid' tab, place a 'tick' in the 'Plot Grid' column, in the row containing the track with the 'Depth' curve, as shown in the following illustration:

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

476

Related Topics Log Plot Display Shortcuts Zones Depth /Time Index Numeric Variable Shading VDL Plots Tadpoles Waveforms Pictures Images Dip Image Annotations 8.1.3.3.4 Variable Shading

If 'Variable Shading' type has been selected then the user must 'click' the 'Define' button to set up the shadings. The Define Variable Shading Dialog will be displayed. The 'Shading controlled by curve' entry box allows the user to select the curve that will determine the shading colours. The curve name is selected from the available curves, in the drop-down list. This can be any curve in the well. The value of the curve at a depth in a well will be used to decide the type of shading to apply at that depth. Two types of variable shading are available: a continuous spectrum or palette of colours, or a fixed colour / pattern for a range of values.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

477

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

'Use Spectrum' Option When this radio button is selected, the user sets the low and high log curve values that will correspond to the high and low colour values. The colour 'values' can be any positive integer. A colour value greater than 256 will cause the spectrum to repeat. The 'colour spectrum' window to the left of the user input boxes will change as the user adjusts the high and low colour numbers. It is possible to switch the high and low colour value order. This will 'reverse' the spectrum. To clip the value of the control input curve to stay within the high / low entered values, 'check' the 'Clip values outside range to high / low colour' check box. If the box is not 'checked' then the spectrum is repeated when the value of the control input curve is greater than the entered high value.

'Use Palette' Option This option, if selected, will allow the user to select a different colour range from the normal 'spectrum' palette. Palettes can be edited and new ones created using the 'Tools' menu

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

'Edit

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

478

Palettes' module.

'Use Values' Option If the 'Use Values' option is 'checked', then the user enters the range (Low Value – High Value) for each selected type of shading. If the 'High Value' box is left blank then it is assumed to be the same as the 'Low Value'. The 'Description' box can be used to describe the shading. This description will be included along with shading coding in the Log Track header. If the ' Description' column is left completely blank, then the shading descriptions will not appear in the Log Track Header.

Lithology Curve Shading In a well where the user has created a 'lithology' curve, the initial display, after the curve has been digitized, will include all the shading bitmaps in the Log Track header. This is usually impractical for plotting hardcopy, since each log plot would contain 27 bitmap shadings and their descriptions in the Log Plot. To remove this long list of shadings from the log plot header, the user can simply type in the word 'None' in the 'Shading Description' column for the track containing the 'Lithology' curve, as illustrated below. Click the 'Run' or 'Apply' button to see the effect on the log plot.

The 'Save' button allows the user to save a shading set-up to an external 'colour Info.' (.col ) file for use in other wells, or other projects. NOTE: clicking the 'Save' button only saves the 'Variable Shading' set-up, not the log plot. The 'shading control curve' name is not saved with the set-up. The 'Restore' button allows the user to restore a particular setup for use in another plot containing the correct 'shading control curve' name.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

479

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Use Red Green Blue Curve Mixing The User Red Green Blue Curve Mixing option enables the user to control the colour using three input curves, each one controlling a primary colour, Red, Green or Blue. Each Input Curve determines the amount of Primary Colour to be included in the final colour used to shade at a particular depth. This type of shading can be very useful when trying to correlate wells where the Red, Blue and Green colors can be assigned to the spectral Gamma Ray Thorium, Potassium and Uranium curves. To define Red Green and Blue Curve Mixing: Click the Plot Header to display the Log Plot Parameters Dialog, In the Shading Tab, specify the Curve to be used as the left boundary for the shading and the curve name to be used as the right boundary for the curve name. Set the Shading Type as Variable and Click Define to Display the Define Variable Shading Dialog.

From the Define Variable Shading Dialog, Select the Use Red Green Blue Curve Mixing Option. Specify the Curves or Values for each of the Primary Colours.

Note: It is only necessary to complete one colour, however to make use of the full colour range all three colours should be completed. All inputs in the grid can either be curves or fixed values. This allows the user to change the calibration of the colours by depth range.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

480

The Control Curve or Value Column is used to define the colour within the range of the ‘Zero Colour’ and ‘Max Colour’ range values. When the ‘Control’ value is less than or equal to the ‘Zero Colour’ then the colour intensity is zero. When the ‘Control’ values is greater than or equal to the ‘Max Colour’ then the colour intensity is maximum. Zero intensity for all colours will result in ‘Black’ shading. Full intensity for all colours will result in ‘White’ shading. Click OK to return to the Log Plot Display Parameters Dialog, then Click OK to return to the Log Plot Display with the Shading applied.

Related Topics Log Plot Display Shortcuts Zones Depth /Time Index Numeric Variable Shading VDL Plots Tadpoles Waveforms

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

481

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Pictures Images Dip Image Annotations 8.1.3.3.5 VDL Plots

In order to plot a 'Variable Density Log' ('VDL') the IP well must contain either : An array curve to use to define the VDL, or A group of curves in the well which make up the VDL. Where a group of curves make up the VDL, all the curve names must have the same 'Base Name' with a numeric extension attached to them. For example, curve names 'Prob1', 'Prob2', 'Prob3', 'Prob4' would be acceptable. The program will automatically sort all the curves with the same 'Base Name' and plot them from left to right across the log track, in the order of increasing curve extension number. Using the above example, the 'Prob' VDL track would be divided into 4 and curve 'Prob1' would be plotted in the left-most quarter of the track as solid shading, the shading type being defined by the VDL colour set-up and the value of the curve. It is possible to define a VDL made up of one curve. In this case the curve would be plotted across the whole track. The 'Array' curve name or 'Base Curve' name must be entered on the Log track 'Curves' tab, in the 'Curve Name' column. Set the curve 'Style' to 'VDL'. The left and right scale values for the VDL can be filled in, however the scales are not used for creating the VDL. Click the 'Define' button, which appears in the 'Line colour' box, to display the 'Define VDL colours' window shown below.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

482

The 'Define VDL colours' window is set up in the same way as the 'Define Variable Shading' window except that the 'Shading controlled by curve' curve selection list box is fixed to the ' Curve Name' and cannot be changed. An example plot showing a VDL and variable type shading is illustrated below. The lithology in track 2 is plotted using the 'Cumulative' option for the VWCL, VLime and VSand curves. The ProbB array is displayed as a VDL with the BinN-ml curve overlaying the VDL shading.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

483

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Related Topics Log Plot Display Shortcuts Zones Depth /Time Index Numeric Variable Shading VDL Plots Tadpoles Waveforms Pictures Images Dip Image Annotations

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

Senergy

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

484

8.1.3.3.6 Tadpoles

If a curve style of 'Tadpole' is chosen, then a 'Define' button will appear next to the 'Style' column. Clicking the button will allow the set-up of the tadpole curve type.

The tadpole 'Dip Azimuth curve' must be entered (allowed values 0-360 degrees). The 'Dip Grade curve' is optional. If entered, it must contain a value of 1,2 or 3. Values less than 1 will be assumed to be 1 and values greater that 3 will be assumed to be 3. The value is used to decide how the head of the tadpole is plotted. A 1 value will plot a solid head, a 2 value will plot a hollow head with a heavy line and a 3 value will plot a hollow head with a thin line. The 'Dip Symbol curve' is also optional. If entered the value will be used to decide how each tadpole is plotted as far as its colour and head shape. This will override the selection in the ' Curves' tab for colour and dip head type. The symbol curve must contain a set of integer values that correspond to the types of tadpoles. To change or add to the tadpole symbol definitions use the module 'Edit Dip Symbols' found under the 'Tools' menu item. The 'Plot all Tadpoles' and 'Plot average Tadpoles' options allows the user to either plot every good tadpole or to plot an average tadpole over an interval. The average tadpole is useful for plotting things like hole deviation and azimuth. Here there would normally be a hole dip value every database sample and therefore if all tadpoles were plotted the tadpoles would be unreadable, especially at large plot scales. However if one plotted an average value every ten feet the plot will be much easier to interpret. The following plot shows some tadpoles plotted on a logarithmic scale with the tadpole colour and head being defined by a Dip Symbol type curve. Hole dip and azimuth are plotted in track 4 using a 10 foot average value.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

485

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Related Topics Log Plot Display Shortcuts Zones Depth /Time Index Numeric Variable Shading VDL Plots Tadpoles Waveforms Pictures Images Dip Image Annotations

8.1.3.3.7 Waveforms

In order to plot a 'Waveform' the user must have an array curve or a group of curves in the well which make up the 'waveform'. If the user is trying to visualize a set of related conventional curves, all the curve names must have the same 'base name' with a number extension attached to it. For example C1, C2, C3, C4,

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

486

….C29, C30 would be acceptable. Where a group of related curves are used to create a waveform, the program will automatically select all the curves with the same 'base name' and use them to plot the waveform with the lowest extension number plotted on the left hand margin of the waveform track and the highest extension number on the right hand side. If the user selects an array-type curve, for example CMR 'T2_DIST', then IP will automatically load the array data. NOTE: the maximum number of 'conventional' curves that can be used to create a waveform is currently set at 400. This is so because there is a maximum curve limit per well of 500 curves, enabling the user to load, compute and store another 100 curves, in addition to the waveform curve data. This waveform curve limit does not apply when Array-type curves are used to generate a waveform. If a curve style of 'Waveform' is chosen in a Log Plot track header then a 'Define' button will appear next to the 'Style' column in the track header. 'Clicking' the 'Define' button will launch the following window, which allows the user to set up the waveform curve attributes. There is now no limit on the number of waveforms that can be displayed in each track.

The user can check the selected array curve statistics in the Edit/ List Curve headers tabulation, or make a histogram display to view the data range of the array curve. This should point out any spurious outlier points that are not representative of the majority of the data. This will help when setting the 'Log Low' and 'Log High' values. The 'Waveform height' setting defines the maximum physical height of the waveform on the log plot. This will represent the waveform height as determined from the user-entered 'Log high

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

487

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

value' and 'Log low value'. The 'zero crossing' value for the waveform (the value where the waveform line will be at the depth of the waveform being plotted) will be the log value half way between the 'Log high value' and the 'Log low value' (see the following diagram).

NMR-type waveforms are only 'half waveforms' because they are clipped to a minimum value of 'zero'. Therefore, to display this type of data, with the zero amplitude value at the actual depth of the reading, the 'Log low value' should be set to the negative value of the 'Log high value'. This will produce, for example - a T2 distribution waveform displayed at the depth of the zero amplitude value, as illustrated below.

To add colour shading to the waveform above a certain value, set the 'value' in the 'Log value shading cut-off' box. Choose the shading colour from the drop-down colour box. To exclude shading, leave the 'Log value shading cut-off' box blank. The depth frequency with which the waveforms are drawn on the log plot is set in the 'Plot waveform every' box. If the user 'checks' the 'Average Data over interval' box, then waveforms will be stacked (averaged) over the depth interval specified, before being plotted. For example, if a CMR array curve 'T2_DIST' with 6 inch sample interval is plotted every 1 ft, then, if the 'Average Data over interval' box is 'checked' the waveform is calculated as the

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

488

average of the data in 2 depth steps. If the 'Average Data over interval' box is left 'un-checked' then waveform data, between the user-specified output intervals, is ignored. The 'Start sample number' and 'Stop sample number' allow part of a waveform to be plotted. This can be useful for certain types of array data where only part of the array contains useful information.

The waveforms in the plot shown here (track 5) were set up as illustrated in the 'Set Up Waveforms' window, shown above.

Related Topics Log Plot Display Shortcuts Zones Depth /Time Index Numeric Variable Shading VDL Plots Tadpoles Waveforms Pictures Images Dip Image Annotations

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

489

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

8.1.3.3.8 Pictures

'Picture' curves can be displayed in any log track by selecting the 'Pictures' style for a curve on the 'Curves' tab. The picture curve is then selected under the 'Curve name' column. Pictures with a scale from 0-1 will be displayed across the whole track. Scales can be adjusted if the picture is to fill only part of a track. Other normal curves can be plotted on top of a picture curve. Only one picture curve can be plotted in each track. To Create a Picture Curve: From the Edit Menu, Select Picture Curves, Edit/Load Picture Curve Data.

Picture curves will be plotted at the same scale as the rest of the plot. To view a picture at higher resolution, either zoom in on the Log Plot by changing the plot scale or 'right mouse click' on the picture and select 'Expand Image' from the drop-down menu. The picture will then be loaded into the picture viewer at its native resolution.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

Related Topics Log Plot Display Shortcuts Zones Depth /Time Index Numeric Variable Shading VDL Plots Tadpoles Waveforms Pictures Images Dip Image Annotations

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

490

491

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

8.1.3.3.9 Images

To plot an 'Image', the array curve is entered on the 'Curves Tab' under curve name. The curve ' Style' is set to 'Images'. The left and right scale values for the Image can be filled in and, if this is done, the scales will be displayed in the curve header. However, the scales are not used for creating the Image. Click the 'Define' button in the 'Line Colour' box to display the 'Define Image Shading' window.

The user selects the 'colour Palette' from the drop-down box. Palettes can be edited and new ones created using the 'Edit Palettes' module under the 'Tools' menu. The 'Low' and 'High' entry boxes allow the user to select the limits between which the image will be plotted. If array values fall outside these limits then these areas in the image are set to transparent. This can be used to remove bad data from the image plot. If the 'Clip values outside range to high / low colour' is 'checked' then, rather than becoming transparent, the plotted colour will be set to either the high or low colour value as defined in the palette. The 'Get Min and Max' button allows the user to find the total dynamic range of the data in the image. If the image was created by the 'Create Acoustic Image' or the 'Create Electrical Image' modules the dynamic ranges will normally be 0 to 255, which is the dynamic range of colours in a palette.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

492

Images can be dynamically normalized while being displayed. If the 'Dynamic' button is selected then the user can either normalize the image over the currently displayed window interval (check 'Selected Range') or over a defined depth interval (enter 'Depth Range'). This type of dynamic normalization will depend on the scale and exact interval being displayed. If the screen is scrolled a little then the image could change its colours. To obtain a stable, dynamically-normalized image log - use the dynamic normalization options in the Create Acoustic Imageor the Create Electrical Image Modules. The 'Transparent Colour' sets the colour in the image that will plot as transparent. Normally this does not make any difference since the transparent part of the images are set to null or absent data and as such automatically plot as transparent. However for CGM output, it is necessary to set the 'Transparent Colour' to the colour of the track background, normally white. The following is a small section of an FMI image.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

493

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

'Right mouse clicking' on an image will display a pop-up menu. If the 'Expand Image' option is selected then the image will be displayed in a 3D picture viewer. Any transparent sections in the picture will be displayed using the 'Transparent Colour'.

The 'Picture Viewer' has many options to allow the user to view the picture at different angles. Use the pop-up 'hint' help boxes for help on the many options.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

Palette Modify If the 'Change Palette' option is selected the 'Palette Modify' window is displayed.

The overall palette can be changed by selecting a different palette from the drop-down box. There are three palette editing modes that allow manipulation of the palette to enhance the image. Any changes to the palette will be instantly reflected on the log plot image. 1.

Line

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

494

495

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The line mode allows the user to change how the log values are mapped to the colour palette. By changing the shape of the line one can emphasise certain features in the plot.

The line end points can be moved as well as adding pivot points in the line. The line can be set horizontally in which case the image will have just two colours that are the palette end points.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

496

The following plot has been made by setting the line horizontally.

2.

Scroll

The scroll mode allows the user to rotate the colour palette. The user right mouse clicks on the palette colours and drags the colours either left or right.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

497

3.

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Stretch

The stretch mode allows the user to stretch part of the colour palette. The user right mouse clicks on the palette colours and drags either the image left or right. Several stretches can be made on the same palette.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

498

The 'Reset' button will reset the palette back to its default settings. The 'Reverse colours' check box will reverse the current colours so what appears on the left will now be on the right.

Related Topics Log Plot Display Shortcuts Zones Depth /Time Index Numeric Variable Shading VDL Plots Tadpoles Waveforms Pictures Images Dip Image Annotations

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

499

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

8.1.3.3.10 Dip Image

The 'Dip image' plot object allows the plotting of tadpoles as sine wave curves on an image log. To plot a dip image, the tadpole dip curve is entered on the 'Curves Tab' under curve name. The curve 'Style' is set to 'Dip Images'. The left and right scale values for the Image can be filled in and if done will be displayed in the curve header. However the scales are not used for creating the Image. Click the 'Define' button to the right of the 'Style' box to display the 'Dip Image setup' window.

The tadpole 'Dip Azimuth curve' must be entered. The 'Dip Grade curve' is optional. If set, then a value of 1or less will produce a solid curve, a value of 2 a dashed curve and 3 or more a dotted curve. The 'Dip Symbol curve' is optional. If set, then it defines the colour of the dip image curves. The colour coding is set up in the 'Edit Dip Symbols' module. This allows the colour of the dip image to correspond to the colour of a corresponding tadpole. The 'Bore Hole Azimuth' and 'Bore Hole Deviation' are optional inputs, but must be entered if the dip image is to be corrected for hole deviation from the vertical and thus allow the dip image to align properly with an image log. The 'Caliper 1 / hole size' box must either contain a caliper curve or a fixed hole size value. This is used to calculate the magnitude of the dip image curve.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

500

The 'Caliper 2' input is optional and is used if both X and Y axes caliper curves are available. The program then will average the two caliper values and use the average value to calculate the magnitude of the dip image curve. The 'Plot All Dips' and 'Plot average Dips' options allows the user to either plot every good dip curve or to plot an average dip curve over an interval. The following plot shows a dip image curve overlaying an image log. The same dip is plotted as a tadpole in the next track.

Related Topics Log Plot Display Shortcuts Zones Depth /Time Index Numeric Variable Shading VDL Plots Tadpoles Waveforms Pictures Images Dip Image Annotations

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

501

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

8.1.3.3.11 Annotations

The 'Edit Annotations' module can be launched in a number of ways : by clicking the 'Edit Annotations' button in the 'Log Plot Menu' on the main IP menu bar, or by right-mouse-button 'clicking' on the active log plot and selecting 'Add Annotation' from the pop-up menu. The depth and position of the cursor will be pasted as a new annotation line in the 'Annotations' window. by 'clicking' the 'Annotations' button on the active Log Plot header bar. on a log plot place the cursor on the top left hand corner of an annotation and when the cursor changes to the drag cursor (

) double click on the plot. This will bring up the 'Edit

Annotations' window and allow the user to perform the editing. annotations once they have been created can be saved to a well and can be edited from within the 'Plot Annotations' tab in the 'Manage Well Header Info' module. NOTE: the annotations cannot be associated with a plot from within this tab. Three types of 'Annotations' are allowed: 'Text' annotations can be single or multi-line and the user has total control on the formatting of the text. 'Line' annotations can be a single line or an arrow. The user can control the direction, length, colour, type and size of the line. 'Graphical Image' annotations allows the user to place any graphical image onto the log plot. The image is loaded from a disk file and can be re-sized to fit any area on the plot. Groups of annotations can now be created. This gives the user greater flexibility in the use of annotations across different log plot formats and from well to well. To create an annotation in the 'Edit Annotations' module right mouse button 'click' in the grey area below the first row. An 'Edit Annotations' sub-menu will appear.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

502

'Add New Annotation' : this will create a new row with the 'Plot', 'Group', 'Depth', ' Position' and 'Type' all filled in with values from the preceding row. The user can edit these as required as well as the 'Annotation' column. 'Plot' : check this box to plot the annotation line. By clicking at the top of this column on the word 'Plot' all the plot lines will either be turned on or off. This is a quick way of turning off the annotations without deleting them all. 'Group' : this is a user editable column. There is a limit of 20 characters for the name of the 'Group'. The user can group annotations together and then use these annotation groups in different log plots. The user can double click on the 'Group' name cell to enable/disable the plotting of all other annotations within that 'Group'. 'Depth' : this specifies the depth for the annotation. 'Position' : this is the distance in inches (or centimetres) from the left hand edge of the plot. 'Type' : this is selected from the drop-down menu and can be either 'Text', 'Line' or ' Image'. 'Annotation' : what is displayed here depends on the annotation type. 'Delete Annotation' : 'click' on the row that is to be deleted and select 'Delete Annotation'. A message box will appear asking the user to confirm that they wish to delete the annotation in row X. 'Delete Group' : 'click' on a row that contains a group that is to be deleted and select 'Delete Group'. A message box will appear asking the user that they wish to delete the 'Group'. 'Copy To Well' : this copies an individually selected annotation to the active well. They are then stored in the 'Manage Well Header Info' 'Plot Annotations' tab. 'Copy Group To Well' : this copies a number of annotations that all have the same 'Group'

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

503

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

name to the active well. Again they are stored in the 'Manage Well Header Info' 'Plot Annotations' tab. 'Copy All To Well' : this copies all of the annotations irrespective of groups to the active well. In the screenshot below a number of different annotation groups can be seen.

The annotations can be applied on a plot by plot basis by 'checking' the 'Plot' column and they can be saved to individual wells. To quickly select all the annotations associated with a 'Group' for adding to a plot double click on the required 'Group' cell. This will 'check' all of the 'Plot' cells for that particular 'Group'. In order to make the task of recalling the annotations easier there is a 'Filtering' section with the options; 'Well/Plot Annotations' : the user can choose between displaying all the 'Plot Annotations' or the 'Well Annotations'. If the 'Plot Annotations' option is chosen then if the user right mouse button 'clicks' on the gray area then all the Copy options in the submenu relate to copying annotations / Groups to the well. However, if the 'Well Annotations' option is chosen then the Copy options relate to copying annotations / Groups to the plot. 'Annotation Group' : here the user can '-- View All --' the annotations or select the annotations according to 'Group'. The screenshots below illustrate these features:

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

Senergy

View Well and Curve Data

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

504

505

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

Senergy

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

506

The 'File Load/Save/Import' box contains: 'Load File' and 'Save to File' Buttons : these buttons allow the user to save and restore groups of annotations. This allows the transfer of annotations between wells. The annotations are saved to the Well folder as a '.ano' file . Annotations are also saved as part of the normal Save Plot Format procedure. Paste from Excel' Button : allows annotations to be prepared in an excel spreadsheat and then simply highlighted, copied and pasted into IP. 'History' Button : opens up the 'History' module. 'OK' Button : this applies the annotation to the plot and closes the annotation window. 'Apply' Button : this applies the annotation to the plot but leaves the window open for further editing. The top panel of the window will change depending on the type of annotation you are editing. Clicking on an annotation line will change the top panel to allow you to edit the selected annotation type.

Text Annotation

The user enters the text into the multi-line drop-down box.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

507

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The following formatting can be made to each line: Font type; Font size; Bold; Italic; Underline; Rotation (any rotation number 0-360 deg. can be entered). The text orientation convention is illustrated in the diagram shown below. The angle of rotation is counterclockwise from 'Zero' degrees. Note the different orientation angles for the 'normal' and 'Landscape' log plot displays.

Vertical text position in relation to input depth (Centre will align the middle of the text at the requested depth), Text colour; Background colour ('Transparent' background colour will allow information under the annotation to be seen).

Line Annotation

The 'Length' of the line can be set in inches (or centimetres). The 'Width' in pixels (1-3). The ' Rotation' will change the angle of the line. The 'Type' can either be 'Line', 'Left Arrow', 'Right Arrow' or 'Unconformity'. The 'Style' can be 'Solid', 'Dash', 'Dot' or 'Dot Dash'. The 'Colour' of the line can be chosen from one of the colours in the drop-down box. The 'Full Width' box will make the line a horizontal line going across the full width of the log plot. If this box is selected the ' Length' and 'Rotation' options will not do anything. The 'Unconformity' option will draw a horizontal sinusoidal line.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

508

Image Annotation

When the 'Image' type is selected the location of the image picture on disk must be entered. The 'Browse' button can be used to select the file. Images must be one of the following formats: Bitmap, JPEG, GIF, TIFF, Icon, metafile or enhanced metafile. When the picture is loaded its width and height will be displayed in the 'Picture width' and 'Picture height' boxes. The height and width can be changed. The 'Use Log heights' box, if 'checked', will change the meaning of the 'Picture height' box from a direct measurement (inches or centimetres) to a relative height based on the log plot scale. For example if 10 were entered in the 'Picture height' box and the plot depth scale was in feet, then the image would be displayed over the equivalent of 10 feet of well depth. The 'Justification' allows the setting of how the image will be displayed in relation to its 'Depth' and 'Position'. The following plot shows the annotations that were set up in the above 'Edit Annotations' window.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

509

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Annotations can be moved and resized interactively. To move a 'Text' annotation: place the cursor on the top left line of the text. The cursor will change shape to an arrow attached to a small white square. The user clicks and holds down the left-hand mouse button and drags the cursor to the new position. When the mouse button is released, the annotation will be displayed in its new position. To move a 'Line' annotation: place the cursor at the beginning of the line. The cursor will change shape to an arrow attached to a small white square. The user clicks and holds down the lefthand mouse button and drags the line to the new position. To change the 'Length' or 'Direction' of a line: place the cursor at the end of the line. The cursor will again change shape to an arrow attached to a small white square. The user clicks and holds down the left-hand mouse button and drags the line to a new length or direction.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

510

To move an 'Image' annotation: place the cursor at the top left corner of the image. The cursor will change shape to an arrow attached to a small white square. The user clicks and holds down the left-hand mouse button and drags the image to the new position. To change the 'Size' of an image: place the cursor at the bottom right hand corner. The cursor will again change shape to an arrow attached to a small white square. The user clicks and holds down the left-hand mouse button and drags the image to a new size.

Related Topics Log Plot Display Shortcuts Zones Depth /Time Index Numeric Variable Shading VDL Plots Tadpoles Waveforms Pictures Images Dip Image Annotations

8.1.4

Log Plot File Output

Log Plots can be output in a number of ways: As Graphics files, Sent directly to a connected printer, or Copied into the WINDOWS clipboard for incorporation in other documents. Click the 'Output to Plotter' menu item or the 'Print' button on a log plot window, to launch the 'Plot Output' window.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

511

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The 'Plot Output' window is arranged on five 'tabbed' screens. 1. 'Main Plot' controls the depth intervals, vertical scales, depth gridline spacing, border line colour and background shading options for the 'hardcopy'. The output 'device' - to 'Graphics File', to 'Printer' or to 'Clipboard' format for the Log Plot are also selected here. 2. 'Advanced' allows settings to be adjusted for resolving some printer problems associated with different MS WINDOWS

printer drivers.

3. 'Plot Header' controls the addition of an optional 'Header' to the Log Plot and allows the user to customise the plot header. 4. 'Curve Titles' allows the user to control how each curve is titled in the Log track header. 5. 'Plot Footer' controls an optional Log plot 'Footer' for the Log Plot.

Related Topics Navigating the Log Plot Window Ouput Plot to the Deep Plot Viewer Output Log Plot Curves to a Crossplot Copy Depth Values to Clipboard

8.1.4.1

Plot Output: Main Plot

The Log Plot output can be sent to any of the following: Output to a WINDOWSä printer. 'Check' the 'Printer' radio button and click the 'Setup Printer' button to set up the printer you wish to send the log plot to.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

512

The 'Fit Plot to printer page' option only operates on output sent to a 'physical' printer. If the box is 'checked', the plot routine will shrink or expand the Log Plot to fit one page on the selected Printer. If left 'un-checked', the Log Plot will be output on multiple pages, as required by the dimensions of the log plot. If the Log Plot is too wide for the selected printer/plotter, the log plot width will always be shrunk to fit the selected page width, regardless of whether 'Fit Plot to printer page' is 'checked'. The 'Eject page at start of plot' option will force the selected printer to start a new page at the start of a Log Plot. This can be very useful for continuous feed, fan-fold type plotters (e.g. EPSON 1500, 3000) where the user wants each Log Plot to start at the top of a new page. With this option turned 'on' you can batch print multiple plot copies, with each copy starting at the top of a new fan fold page. Output to a Graphics File. 'Check' the 'Graphics File' option and set the 'File name'. The output format is determined by the file extension used on the output file

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

513

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

. The 'Rotate Plot 90 Deg' option is only available when output is directed to the 'Clipboard', or to a 'Graphics File' (excluding .emf or .CGM graphics file formats). If 'checked', the output to the graphics file or clipboard will be rotated through 90 degrees. A Horizontal log plot will be re-oriented vertically (portrait mode). A vertical log plot will be re-oriented horizontally (landscape mode). The following graphics file formats are supported: Enhanced Metafile (*.emf), a vector file and as such, .emf outputs can be re-sized easily without losing their resolution. Bitmap (*.bmp). CGM (*.CGM), a vector file and as such, .CGM outputs can be re-sized easily without losing their resolution. If 'Graphics File' output is selected and set to 'CGM' then a temporary enhanced metafile is produced which is converted automatically to CGM format using Larson CGM Software. The Larson EMF to CGM converter is included with IP. See Also Plotting of CGM Files. For more information on CGM viewing, montaging and printing and see www.cgmlarson.com. GIF (*.gif) .GIF format output will generally produce the most compact picture-type file. JPEG (*.jpg). Portable Network Graphics File (*.png). TIFF Image Files (*.tif). NOTE: When OK is clicked if outputting to a Graphics file the following Confirm Dialog will be displayed.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

514

Click 'Yes' to preview the new graphics file in a WINDOWS viewer. Click 'No' to not launch a preview of the new graphics file in a WINDOWS viewer. Click 'Yes to All' to automatically launch a preview of all graphics files created in the current IP session. Click 'No to All' to switch off the preview functionality for the current IP session. (The option will be available again if the user closes IP and opens it again). Output to the WINDOWS

'Clipboard'. Selecting the 'Clipboard' option will output the Log

Plot to the WINDOWS clipboard as an Enhanced Metafile (.emf). This can then be pasted directly into other documents that accept this format, for example MS WORD, MS EXCEL.

The 'Rotate Plot 90 Deg' option is only available when output is directed to the 'Clipboard', or to a 'Graphics File' (excluding .emf or .CGM graphics file formats). If 'checked', the output to the graphics file or clipboard will be rotated through 90 degrees. A Horizontal log plot will be reoriented vertically (portrait mode). A vertical log plot will be re-oriented horizontally (landscape mode). Output to Deep Plot View. The Deep Plot View will be saved in the Output Folder with the file extension *.dpv.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

515

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Plotting multiple depth ranges - Multiple depth intervals and log vertical scales can be set up to be output in one continuous Log Plot. The user fills in the 'grid' with the depth intervals and vertical scales required. The 'Major', 'Minor' and 'Lite' depth grid lines displayed on each Log Plot can be set up as required.

If the 'Use Default Grid Line Spacing' check box is 'checked' then, when the user clicks on the 'Plot Scale' drop-down list box and selects a log vertical scale, the grid line spacing boxes will be updated to the default settings for that vertical scale. For example a Scale of 1:500 has 'Major', 'Minor' and 'Lite' grid lines plotted at 50m / 100ft, 25m / 50ft, 5 m / 10 ft respectively.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

516

'Set Top/Bottom Depths' - The 'Set Top/Bottom Depths' button, if 'clicked', will set the ' Top Depth' and 'Bottom Depth' fields to the values of the current 'Plot Range' for the well to be plotted. The user should click in a row of the grid and click 'Set Depths to Plot Range' to paste the top and bottom depths into the grid.

The 'Use 'Depth Grid Datum' depths' option allows the user to specify a log plot depth range in terms of another datum curve, for example a TVDSS 'depth', or or TWT 'Time' curve, The check-box, if 'checked', will allow the user to specify the depth range for their log plot in whatever 'Depth Type' (MD, TVD, TVDSS, TWT etc...) that has been set as the ' Depth Grid Datum curve' for the users log plot. See 'Log Plot Display' - 'Depth Grid Datum and Depth labelling' for more details.

'Plot Track Header Titles' - when 'checked' Track Header Titles will be included on the output log plot.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

517

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The 'Plot Scales at bottom of log' box, if 'checked', will append the curve scales labelling to the base of the Log Plot as well as the top.

The 'Plot Shading description in header' box, if 'checked', will output the shading coding boxes with their shading description inserted into the boxes in the curve track headers. This is what the user sees in the on-screen Log Plot. 'Hide Track Scales' - 'If this option is 'checked', then the output Log Plot will not display any curve name / colour / scales details in the Log track headers. The following example has the Track Header Titles Displayed AND the Track Scales displayed.

The following example has the Track Header Titles Displayed BUT the Track Header Scales are Hidden.

The following examples displays only the Track Header Scales.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

518

The 'Plot Well Name Comment with Well Name' box, if 'checked', will attach the 'Well Name Comment' to the well name for output in the Log Plot header (see Manage Well Header Info.).

The 'Grid and Border line Colour' drop-down list box allows the selection of the colour to be used for the plot boundaries and gridlines. The 'default' is black.

The 'Plot Background Colour' drop-down list box allows the selection of the colour to be used for the background of the Log Plot. The 'default' is white. The 'Plot Border Colour' drop-down list box allows the selection of the colour to be used for a border line to be placed around the Log Plot.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

519

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The 'Border Width' box sets the width of the border in inches (centimetres). If a value of 'zero' is entered then no border is printed. The 'Left hand Margin' box is the offset to the left hand side of the page before the Log Plot will start. If the Log Plot width is changed to fit a page, then this left hand margin will be rescaled to match. NOTE: Continuous, long Log Plots can be generated if the selected plotter can handle continuous paper feed. For example; to plot to the Epson 1550 or 3000, with continuous tractor feed paper, the user sets the paper type to 'banner' and paper size to the correct 'width' of the paper (the length is not important). The Log Plot will be output to the plotter one page at a time, but the pages will join up, making a continuous plot.

Absolute Plot Calibration The absolute scaling of a Log Plot can be adjusted for an individual printer (i.e. if a printer always makes a Log Plot 3% too long, this can be adjusted for). To do this, the user edits the file 'Plotter Calibration.opt' file found in the IP program directory and adds the 'calibration factors' for the printer, to the file. Instructions for doing this are in the file.

Related Topics Plot Output: Main Plot Ouput Plot to the Deep Plot Viewer Plot Output: Advanced Plot Output: Plot Header Plot Output: Curve Titles Plot Output: Plot Footer 8.1.4.2

Plot Output: Advanced Settings

The Plot Output Advanced Tab enables greater flexibility in the way the Log Plot is output to a printer. Printer drivers vary greatly under WINDOWS

and some have problems plotting IP

enhanced metafiles, especially the 'lithology' bitmap shading. Some older Postscript drivers will totally seize up when plotting. If this happens, the user can try turning 'on' the 'Use large Bitmaps for bitmap shading' option. If this does not work, then removing the bitmap shading (e. g. 'Limestone' or 'Sandstone') or changing them to solid colour shading will generally overcome the problem.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

520

The 'Output resolution (dpi)' list box sets the resolution that the Log Plot will be generated at. This generally affects the width of the border and curve lines and can affect the size of the 'lithology' patterns. The higher the resolution, the thinner the lines become. The resolution setting will not affect the shape of the log curves. A resolution of 200 DPI will normally give an optimum result. However, if the lithology patterns are too big or small then the resolution can be changed. The 'Set Graphics File and Clipboard output to screen resolution' option, if 'checked', will force the shading patterns in a log plot to be the same size in the clipboard image as that seen on the IP screen plot.

The 'Use Accelerated Shading' box and the Use Print Compatibility Mode, if 'checked', changes the method used for plotting lithology bitmap shading. 'Checking' this option will increase the plotting speed considerably, but will not work for some printer drivers. If the printing is very slow try switching 'on' this option to see if things improve.

The 'CGM bitmap shading expansion factor' allows the user to increase this number if the printed bitmap shading is too small.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

521

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

If 'Graphics File' output is selected and set to 'CGM' then a temporary enhanced metafile is produced which is converted automatically to CGM format using Larson CGM Software. The Larson EMF to CGM converter is included with IP. Plotting of CGM files to printers can be problematical and it will probably be necessary to make several trial and error plots in order to obtain the required results. Most of the problems will be associated with the size of the lithology code shadings which use bitmaps, like 'Sandstone' or 'Clay'. These shadings can sometimes be very large or very small, depending on the plotting software. The IP program allows the user to change the 'CGM bitmap shading expansion factor' (' Advanced' Tab). If the shading is too small, then increase this factor. If the shading is too large, then reduce the factor (a value of '1' is the minimum setting). The 'Output resolution' option will also affect the size of the shading. The larger the DPI number, the larger the shading patterns (this will only have an effect if the 'Plot Metafile and Clipboard output at screen resolution for shading patterns' is turned 'off' by 'un-checking' the box next to the label. In order to plot images to CGM files with transparent parts in the image, the user must set the 'transparent' colour for the image to the track background colour. See Image plotting. For more information on CGM viewing, montaging and printing and see www.cgmlarson. com. The 'Do not print interactive lines' check box, if 'checked' will remove the vertical interactive lines from any output Log Plot. This can be useful if one of the automatic interactive plots, from one of the IP Interpretation modules, is required as final hardcopy output.

Related Topics Plot Output: Main Plot Ouput Plot to the Deep Plot Viewer Plot Output: Advanced Plot Output: Plot Header Plot Output: Curve Titles Plot Output: Plot Footer

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy 8.1.4.3

522

Plot Output: Curve Titles

The 'Curve Titles' tab allows the user to change how the log curve names are displayed in the Log Plot header. Four options are available: 1. 'Display Name (With Set Name)' - Curve names are displayed as in the on-screen log plot. 2. 'Name Only (No Set Name)' - Curve names are displayed without their Set names prefixed to the curve name. 3. 'Use Curve Type as Name' - Curve names are replaced with the 'Curve Type' name. When no 'Curve Type' is set then the screen plot display name will be used. 4. 'Curve Alias Name' - Curve Alias names will be used. If no Alias name has been set, then the screen plot display name will be used.

Curve Alias names can either be set on this screen or in the 'Manage Curve Headers' form, on the 'Descriptions' tab.

Related Topics Plot Output: Main Plot Ouput Plot to the Deep Plot Viewer Plot Output: Advanced Plot Output: Plot Header Plot Output: Curve Titles Plot Output: Plot Footer

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

523 8.1.4.4

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Plot Output: Plot Header

The Plot Header Tab in the Plot Output Dialog allows the user to set up the Header format for a well Log Plot. The Log Plot headers are fully customisable. However, there are a number of header templates which can be adapted to suit the users requirements. The Header template options can be accessed from the drop-down list in the 'Plot Header' box:

'None', 'Full', 'Full Rotated', 'Minimum', 'Minimum Rotated', 'Standard Footer', 'Standard Footer Rotated', 'Standard Multiwell No Logo', 'Standard Multiwell', 'Standard', 'Standard Rotated' The Header styles are more fully described in the following section. 'None' - Adds only the Well Name and Depth / vertical scale information as a header to the Log Plot, as illustrated below:

'Standard' - Adds an IP 'Standard' Log header as illustrated below. Data fields in the Header are filled in when equivalent information is entered into the 'Manage Well Header Info.' module. The user can fill in boxes to add logo's, graphics files, text files to the header.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

524

'Full' - The 'Full' Well header is similar to an API style Log header and contains details of logging measurements and borehole fluid properties, if such data has been entered into the 'Logging' tab of the 'Manage Well Header Info.' module. 'Minimum' - the 'Minimum' header Style in IP displays the following basic well Information and any user-supplied Logo.

'Standard Multiwell' - displays just the logo and the plot title.

Customising a Log Plot header Log Plot Headers can be edited or created from new.

Edit Log Plot header Select a 'Plot Header' from the drop down list, preferably 'Full' and then 'click' on the 'Edit' button.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

525

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

A message similar to the screenshot below will appear. 'Clicking' 'Yes' will open up the ' Montage Builder' window with the 'Full' header copy ready for editing. If 'No' is selected then the user is returned to the 'Plot output' window.

Each of the fields on the Log Plot Header can be edited by moving the mouse cursor over the field, waiting for the cursor to change to a cross symbol and then left mouse button clicking on the field.

Once the field has been highlighted double left mouse button 'click' on the field to open up a ' Text Box Settings' window. Alternatively, right mouse button click and select 'Properties'.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

526

Within this window it is possible to change the font, style, size, colour and alignment of the text within the field. It is also possible to change the item to one held within the 'Well Attributes', 'Log Attributes' 'Well Attributes Display Alias' or 'Log Attributes Display Alias' lists. This gives the user total flexibility over the content and style of their Log Plot Headers. All the fields can be moved, resized and reshaped according to the users requirements. New fields can be added.

Create New Log Plot Header Selecting 'New' opens up a blank Montage Builder window which allows the user to produce their own Log Plot Header using the design capabilities of Montage Builder. All the Plot headers are saved to the IntPetro35\Default Plots directory as *.svg files. Headers can contain company logos, ASCII text files and graphics files. The user selects the options for the Header and gives the file names where the data can be found. Multiple graphics and text files can be included in the same Header. The 'logo' and 'graphics files' can be one of several graphics file types (bitmap, GIF, TIFF, JPEG. enhanced Metafile). The graphics file will be scaled using the dimensions input in the 'Height' and 'Width' columns. Company 'Logos' will be scaled to be one inch high, keeping the same height/width ratio as their original graphics file (. jpeg, .bmp). Header Remarks are now completely user editable and unlimited in number. Each line can be 'checked' on or off or all the header remarks can be turned off using the 'Header Remarks' check-box. The well specific remarks can be edited in the 'Plot Remarks' tab of

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

527

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

the 'Manage Well Header Info' module or they can be edited in the 'Header Remarks Text ' window and then saved to the 'Plot Remarks' tab of the 'Manage Well Header Info' module by 'clicking' on the "+" 'Add to Defaults' button. If the 'Add to Defaults' button isn't used then changes to the 'Header remark Text' are specific to the log plot. If they are saved to the 'Plot Remarks' tab of the 'Manage Well Header Info' module then the remarks become well specific.

Curve descriptions for the Log Plot output curves can be optionally listed in the Plot Header by 'checking' the 'Curve Descriptions' box. The curve descriptions can be edited using the 'Manage Curve Headers' module, or by 'clicking' the 'Edit' button on the 'Plot Header' tab. Clicking the 'Edit' button launches the following window, where the log curve names in the Log Plot display will be listed and their 'Curve Descriptions' can be edited.

The 'Clipboard' button on the 'Edit' dialog will copy the curve names and their descriptions to the WINDOWS clipboard. The Clipboard contents can then be pasted into an external report. The 'Zonal Summation Report' box, if 'checked', will list the current 'Summation' results report in the Log Plot header. This is the report that is displayed when the 'Print parameter Set'

'Cut-off and Summation' menu item is selected.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

528

The 'Clay Volume Parameters' and 'Porosity and Sw parameters' boxes, if 'checked', will output a reduced set of parameters used in the current interpretation. The values listed will be the values of the most recent analysis. The 'Mineral Solver Parameters' and 'Simple Log Interpretation Parameters' boxes if 'checked' will output a reduced set of parameters used in the current interpretation. The values listed will be the values of the most recent analysis. The following diagram is an example of the 'Standard' Log plot header with a crossplot (graphics file) and a small section of log plot.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

529

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Related Topics Plot Output: Main Plot Ouput Plot to the Deep Plot Viewer Plot Output: Advanced Plot Output: Plot Header Plot Output: Curve Titles

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

Senergy

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

530

Plot Output: Plot Footer 8.1.4.5

Plot Output: Plot Footer

The 'Plot Footer' tab allows the user to set up a title block to be displayed at the base of a log plot. This can be selected from the drop-down list in the 'Plot Footer' window. In a similar way to the Log Plot Header the Plot Footer can be edited or created from scratch using the 'Edit' and 'New' buttons respectively. 'Footer Title' - Text String. Defaults to the 'Plot Header Title' if one has been entered on the 'Plot Header' tab. The user has the ability to browse to a logo graphics file.

An example of a Plot Footer is shown below:

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

531

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Related Topics Plot Output: Main Plot Ouput Plot to the Deep Plot Viewer Plot Output: Advanced Plot Output: Plot Header Plot Output: Curve Titles Plot Output: Plot Footer 8.1.4.6

Ouput Plot to the Deep Plot Viewer

The Deep Plot Viewer enables large Log Plots to be output and viewed in a raster format. A Deep Plot View file is selected in the Plot Output Dialog. Once the Output variables have been defined and the OK button pressed, the Log Plot will be split, and the Images displayed in the Deep Plot Viewer. To display a Log Plot using the Deep Plot Viewer: From the Log Plot Menu, Select Output to Plotter to display the Plot Output Dialog. In the Main Tab Select Output to Deep Plot View. Specify a Folder Path for the Deep Plot View File to be Saved. The Deep Plot View will be saved in the Output Folder with the file extension *.dpv.

Click OK to Split the Log Plot and Open the Deep Plot Viewer.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

532

Navigating the Deep Plot Viewer To navigate freely around the Log Plot Image, Click and Drag using the Left Mouse Button. To Scroll up and down the Log Plot Image, Roll the Mouse Wheel forwards and backwards. To navigate to the Top of the Log Plot Image, Click the Top Button in the Navigation Toolbar.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

533

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

To navigate to the Bottom of the Log Plot Image, Click the Bottom Button in the Navigation Toolbar.

To Zoom In to the Log Plot Image, Either Click the Left Mouse Button on the Log Plot Image. Or, Roll the Mouse Wheel forwards. Or Click the Zoom In Button in the Navigation Toolbar.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

To Zoom Out of the Log Plot Image, Either Press Ctrl and Roll the Mouse Wheel forwards and backwards. Or Click the Zoom Out Button in the Navigation Toolbar.

To Fit the Log Plot Image to the Width of the Window, Click the Fit Image Width Button.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

534

535

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

To Fit the Log Plot Image to the Height of the Window, Click the Fit Image Height Button.

Using the Deep Plot Viewer Selection Tools To enable Area Selection for Copying, Click the Area Selection Tool Button

, the cursor

will become a Cross-Hair (+). Click and Drag the required area in the Log Plot Image using the Left Mouse Button. NOTE: Press Ctrl+A to Select the Whole of the Log Plot Image.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

536

Click the Copy Button to Copy the Selection to the Clipboard. NOTE: Alternatively, Press Ctrl+C to Copy the Selection to the Clipboard.

Click the Area Selection Tool Button

again to disable Area Selection.

NOTE: The Deep Plot Viewer Requires Microsoft Silverlight to be installed. If Microsoft Silverlight is NOT installed the following Window will be displayed. Click the Install Microsoft Silverlight Button and follow the Instructions to Install Microsoft Silverlight. Once Installed the Deep Plot Viewer will be able to Display the Deep Plot View file. See Also: http://silverlight. net/.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

537

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Sharing the Deep Plot Viewer Output Files Once created, the Deep Plot View file can be located in the file location specified in the Main Tab of the Plot Output Dialog.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

538

To distribute the Deep Plot View file, Copy both the *.dpv file and the Hidden folder with the same name to the new location. In the example above the file called 10_0001 - DPTH.dpv and the folder called 10_0001 - DPTH both need to be copied to the new location. From Explorer, Double Click the *.dpv file to open the Deep Plot View file in the Deep Plot Viewer.

Related Topics Plot Output: Main Plot Navigating the Log Plot Window Ouput Plot to the Deep Plot Viewer Output Log Plot Curves to a Crossplot Copy Depth Values to Clipboard

8.1.4.7

Output Log Plot Curves to a Crossplot

Curves can be selected by holding down the 'X' key and using the left mouse button to click on the curve name in the log track header and, whilst continuing to hold down the 'X' key, opening the Crossplot window. This will automatically populate the Crossplot with those curves selected. The first curve selected occupies the X-axis, the second curve is the Y-axis and the third curve is the Zaxis. This functionality applies to both vertical and horizontal log plots.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

539

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Zone Sets can also be selected, if they are available on the log plot, by holding the 'X' key down and clicking on the actual Zone name in the track header at the same time as selecting the curves. The default zone shown is the first available one.

Related Topics Navigating the Log Plot Window

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

540

Ouput Plot to the Deep Plot Viewer Output Log Plot Curves to a Crossplot Copy Depth Values to Clipboard 8.1.4.8

Copy Depth Values to Clipboard

By left-mouse clicking in one of the plot tracks the user can automatically copy the depth, where they 'click', into the clipboard. This depth value can be pasted into any input box that requires a depth entry. This can be very useful for quickly setting depth intervals for example, in the 'Plot Range Editor'. A depth is registered automatically every time the user left-mouse-button clicks in a plot. NOTE: There is no visible indication that it has happened. To paste the depth value into an edit-box, right-mouse-button 'click' in the edit-box and select 'Paste'.

Related Topics Navigating the Log Plot Window Ouput Plot to the Deep Plot Viewer Output Log Plot Curves to a Crossplot Copy Depth Values to Clipboard

8.1.5

Using the Plot Range Editor

This feature allows the user to quickly change the plot depth interval for the current plot. See the Plot Range Editor Section for a full description.

Related Topics Navigating the Log Plot Window

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

541

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Log Plot Track Management Define the Log Plot Formats Log Plot File Output Using the Plot Range Editor Using the Pre-Defined Plot Format Files Manage the Interactive Log Plot Create a Horizontal Log Plot

8.1.6

Using the Pre-Defined Plot Format Files

Plot format files must end with the file extension of '.plt'. The pre-defined plots are very flexible. They can, for example, plot a Gamma Ray that is called by different names (GR, SGR, GRC etc.). The pre-defined plot formats use curve name 'Types' to define the curves. Plot format files can be created outside the program using an editor such as Notepad. It is good practice to copy an existing example and make changes to it. The following is an example of a plot format containing some shading: $ Density Neutron plot file with shading $ $ Track Format $ --------Logarithmic Tracks-------- OverView $TRACK Width Grid Grid Decades Left_Scale Minor_Grid Track Grid Lines $ $ Curve Format $CURVE Name Left_Scale Right_Scale Backup Thickness colour Log/Lin Point_Plotting $ Names that start with a '*' are curve Types $ $ Grid and depth Format $ Depth ---Grid Spacing--- User Defined ----------------Hard Copy-------------$GRID Curve Heavy Medium Light Spacing Top Depth Bottom Depth Scale Grid colour $ $Recognised colours are: $ Aqua, Black, Blue, DkGray, Fuchsia, Gray, Green, Lime, LtGray, $ Maroon, Navy, Olive, Purple, Red, Teal, White, Yellow $ $ $ gr caliper track TRACK 2.00 Yes No 2 0.200 No No 5 $CURVE Name Left_Scale Right_Scale Backup Thickness colour Log/Lin Point_Plotting CURVE *GammaRay 0.0000 150.0000 RBU 1 Green LIN Solid CURVE *Caliper 6.0000 16.0000 RBU 1 Blue LIN Solid $ make depth track TRACK 0.50 No No 2 0.200 No No 5 CURVE DEPTH 0.0000 1.0000 NONE 1 Black LIN Solid $ density neutron track TRACK 4.00 Yes No 4 0.200 Yes No 10 CURVE *Density 1.9500 2.9500 LBU 1 Red LIN Solid CURVE *Neutron 0.4500 -0.1500 LBU 1 Green LIN Solid CURVE *Drho -0.7500 0.2500 NONE 1 Black LIN Solid $ shade when Density curve is to the left of Neutron curve using YELLOW SHADE *Density Curve *Neutron Curve Yellow $ shade when Neutron curve is to the left of Density curve using GREEN

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy SHADE *Neutron Curve *Density Curve Green $ OverView Track TRACK 0.50 No No 2 0.200 CURVE DEPTH 0.0000 1.0000 NONE CURVE *GammaRay 0.0000 150.0000 RBU $ Grid and depths GRID DEPTH 100.00 10.00 2.00 FALSE $ end of plo

No 1 1 -999.000

Yes Black Green

542

5 LIN LIN

-999.000

Solid Solid -1.00

Black

NOTE: Lines starting with a '$' are comments. When the file is read by IP, only those lines that have valid curve names or curve name 'Types' are included in the plot. This allows the user to make 'Generic' plot formats that can be used with curve mnemonics from different logging service companies.

Related Topics Navigating the Log Plot Window Log Plot Track Management Define the Log Plot Formats Log Plot File Output Using the Plot Range Editor Using the Pre-Defined Plot Format Files Manage the Interactive Log Plot Create a Horizontal Log Plot

8.1.7

Manage the Interactive Log Plot

The interactive plot allows the changing of several parameters interactively by placing the cursor on the vertical parameter line and dragging the line to a new position. When the mouse button is released the program will automatically recalculate the zone and update the result on the plot. This gives the user immediate feedback on changes to parameters. The Interactive Log Plot is launched from the following Interpretation Modules: 'Basic Log Analysis', 'Clay Volume', 'Porosity and Water Saturation', 'Cut-off and Summation', ' Multi Well Cut-off and Summation', 'NMR Normalization', 'NMR Interpretation', TDT StandAlone Sw analysis, TDT Time Lapse. From any one of the above Interpretation Modules, Click Make Plot to Display the Interactive Log Plot. The following example has been taken from the Basic Log Analysis Module.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

543

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Undo/Redo Once the Parameter lines have been altered undo/redo arrows appear in the top left-hand corner of the log plot. These allow the user to go back to the original position of the parameter lines. As the arrows are 'clicked' the parameter lines move and the output curves are recalculated. The undo/redo arrows only work if the well and zones remain unchanged during the current interpretation session.

The Undo/Redo Buttons have a Drop Down Menu which enables specific actions be be Undone or Re-done.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

544

Related Topics Navigating the Log Plot Window Log Plot Track Management Define the Log Plot Formats Log Plot File Output Using the Plot Range Editor Using the Pre-Defined Plot Format Files Manage the Interactive Log Plot Create a Horizontal Log Plot

8.1.8

Create a Horizontal Log Plot

The 'Horizontal Log Plot' display has been introduced to give the user more options for log curve visualization. Selecting the 'Horizontal Log Plot' option from the 'View' menu, or from the 'Data View' toolbar, will launch the currently-active, in-memory wells' 'Default plot format', rotated through 90 degrees, from a 'Portrait' to a 'Landscape' orientation.

This allows users with multiple computer monitors to see more of their logs for any particular log vertical scale, since the log plot can be expanded across more than one screen. Single-monitor

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

545

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

users can also utilize this display to visualize their log curves in the new orientation.

Much of the 'normal' functionality associated with the 'Portrait' plot, for example; launching histograms, moving / creating / deleting / editing log tracks and moving / creating / deleting log curves is retained. 'Clicking' in the log track header activates the Log Plot Format editor, where curve graphic characteristics and shadings can be set up and changed. The user can use the ' Well' scroll arrows or the 'Select Well to Display' dialog to change the well in the display.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

546

The 'Horizontal Log Plot' window is designed to display a 'hardcopy' length of 8 feet / 2.44 metres of log data. The Overview track and slider bars on the main horizontal log plot window provide the navigation tools for the interface and the log 'vertical scale' drop-down list functions exactly as in the 'normal' log plot display. Changing the log display scale will be reflected in the positions of the red marker bars in the Overview track. Depending upon the vertical scale selected, the horizontal slider bar will either fill the window or will appear somewhat smaller than the window. The user simply scrolls the horizontal scroll bar to move through a section of log data. NOTE: log curve editing functions are not enabled in the Horizontal log plot view so curve editing operations such as curve depth-shifting and curve splicing must all be performed in the conventional 'portrait' log plot orientation.

Interactive Log plots, launched from the Interpretation modules in IP, can be re-oriented to the 'Landscape' display and retain their interactivity in terms of interactive lines and the ability to launch histograms and crossplots from a drop-down menu selection. NOTE: it is very important that you should 'un-check' the 'Lock' setting for the active well 'Default' plot format and close other log plots for the subject well before launching the Horizontal Log Plot.

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

547

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

It is also possible to change the log scale by using the '+' and '-' keys on the numeric part of the keyboard.

Log Track Management Log track management is identical to that in the conventional 'Portrait' log plot window. 'Right-mouse-button' clicking in a log track header allows the user to drag the selected track to a new location within the log plot. The Right-hand mouse button, when used with the keyboard SHIFT or CTRL buttons allows the user to move , or copy, curves from one log track to another. If you hold down the SHIFT button and right-mouse-button 'select' a curve, then dragging the curve from the log plot header removes that curve from the log plot display. Left-mouse-button clicking in a log track header launches the Log Plot Format editor for that track, where curve display characteristics can be modified. Left-mouse-button clicking in a log track opens the track editing and curve histogram dialog for that particular track. The dialog, illustrated above, allows the user to : 1. View the histogram for any curve in the selected track. 2. Add Annotation at the last place the mouse button was clicked. 3. Use any of the Track editing options in the pop-up menu ('Expand Track', 'New Track', 'Duplicate Track' etc...).

Related Topics Navigating the Log Plot Window Log Plot Track Management Define the Log Plot Formats Log Plot File Output Using the Plot Range Editor Using the Pre-Defined Plot Format Files Manage the Interactive Log Plot Create a Horizontal Log Plot

Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

8.2

548

Histograms

The 'Histogram' graphic plot can be activated in a number of ways. by selecting the 'Histogram' menu item under the 'View' menu. by using the speed button ( ). by 'right-mouse-button clicking' in the track of a Log Plot and choosing the appropriate histogram from the pop-up menu. In this case the histogram plot will activate with default parameters. by 'right-mouse-button clicking' in the log track of an interpretation module interactive log plot brings up a particular interactive histogram plot with user-editable lines used, for example, to define 'GRclean' and 'GRshale' values in the Vclay module. by 'clicking & dragging' a histogram format name from the 'Database Browser' into the IP workspace. by 'double-clicking' on a histogram format name in the 'Database Browser' view. Multiple histograms can be displayed simultaneously. Histograms can be created for a single well or can be set up to display multiple wells. When a histogram is launched and a log plot for the active well is on-screen - if you move the mouse cursor over the log plot window, a small light blue bar, visible on the histogram display, tracks the mouse cursor movement. The histogram curve value updates as the mouse is moved. The bar disappears when the cursor is moved back over the histogram window. The bar is visible, simultaneously, on as many histograms as you have open for the active well. The Histogram has a 'new look' in that a sunburst background colour has been added and there is also an improved statistics table. The sunburst background can be disabled / enabled in 'Tools '

'Options'

'Miscellaneous Options'

switched off in 'Tools'

'Options'

'Enable Background'. The statistics table can be

'Miscellaneous Options'

'Show Histogram

Statistics Table'. Enabling or disabling these options within the 'Miscellaneous Options' will affect how the histogram appears on the screen. Within the Histogram module there are controls that determine how the histogram appears as hard copy. These will be discussed below. The Histogram set-up is arranged on 3 'tabbed' screens. These are : Scales Discriminators Options

Section 8.2 View Well and Curve Data : Histograms

549

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The 'Scales' Tab This is used to set up the wells, curves and zones to be visualized in the Histogram plot. The 'Curve Name' is selected from the drop-down list which displays all curves for the currently selected well. The 'Number of divisions' box allows the user to define the number of 'classes' into which to divide the curve data. For example, the GR curve in the screen shown above will be displayed as 50 divisions from GR value '0' to Gr value '150' i.e. in classes 0-3, 46, 7-9, 10-12 ...145-147, 148-150. The smaller the 'Number of divisions' is, the larger the class size. This also has implications for the appearance of the histogram data. For example, under the 'Type' menu, in the Histogram plot window, - if the data is displayed and 'Plot Curves' is selected, the smaller the number of divisions, the coarser the curves will look. The 'Left Scale' and 'Right Scale' entries are user-editable numbers, but should default to the values entered into the curve system defaults file - CPARMDEF.PAR, if the curve is listed there. The 'Logarithmic' check box is used if the user wishes to define a log scale. Appropriate 'Left Scale' and 'Right Scale' values will have to be set. The 'Y Axis' scale can be displayed either as a 'Frequency Count' (actual number of

Section 8.2 View Well and Curve Data : Histograms

Senergy

View Well and Curve Data

550

points in each division) or as a 'Percentile' percent of the total number of points. The 'Y Axis Max' value can be set to override the IP default value, which is designed to maximise the histogram size in the window. The 'Normalize each curve to 100%' box is used to re-scale each histogram curve in the plot so that equal areas are seen under each curve. This option would be used, for example, if the number of points in one histogram is very different from other wells in the display and the curves with the low number of points are hardly visible. The depth interval for the plot can be defined by either a 'Top' and 'Bottom' depth, or by using 'Zonal Depths'. For 'Zonal Depths', select a 'Parameter Set' and choose the ' Active zone'. The 'Load Format' button will load a previously saved histogram format. The format is saved by using the menu on the histogram plot, click 'File' 'Save Format'. The 'Multi-well / Curve Histograms' check box should be 'checked' if the user wishes to compare similar log curves from a number of wells. 'Check' this box and 'Click' the ' Select Wells and Curves' button to launch the following window, allowing you to select additional wells and curves for the histogram plot:

Well Name : Click in a 'blank' Well Name' row and select the required 'Well Name' from the drop-down list, to be added to the histogram. If the selected curve on the 'Scales' tab is named consistently across the database, IP will select the appropriate curve, in this case GR, for any newly selected well. By clicking on the 'Well Name' column header, all the wells currently loaded in memory will be loaded into the data grid. Plot Curve : Place a 'tick' in the box to add the selected curve to a plot. 'Clicking' in the column header will toggle between 'on' or 'off' for all the curves. Curve Name : Select the 'Curve Name', from the drop-down box, to plot in the histogram. Top Depth – Bottom Depth : The Top and Bottom depths can be changed to view part of a well when the 'Interval Depths' option is selected on the Histogram Scales window. Discriminator Set : A 'Discriminator Set' is used to select which parts of the chosen curve to plot in the histogram. Details of how to set up discriminators are given in The 'Discriminators' tab description, below. Up to 10 different Discriminator 'Sets' can be set up. This allows the user the flexibility to apply different sets of display criteria for different curves. For example, the user could have ' Discriminator Sets' of rules to differentiate between gas sands, water sands and for shales. The

Section 8.2 View Well and Curve Data : Histograms

551

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

user could then produce a histogram with the same 'Curve Name' plotted three times with each 'curve' filtered by different discriminators. An example of such a process is given below :

Section 8.2 View Well and Curve Data : Histograms

Senergy

View Well and Curve Data

Section 8.2 View Well and Curve Data : Histograms

552

553

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Cumulative Curve Set name : This feature allows several input curves to be 'accumulated' into one curve on the histogram. The user must type in a distinguishing name for the 'Cumulative Curve Set'. When the next curve is entered to add to the set, select the same 'Set Name' from the drop-down menu. For normal histograms leave this box 'blank'. Curve colour : This will be the colour of the curve on the histogram. Leave at 'Default' to let the program choose the colour. If a colour is chosen and 'Zonal Depths' is selected on the histogram scales window, then all histogram curves associated with this input curve will have this same fixed colour (the default is a different colour for each zone). The following is an example of 'Cumulative Curve Sets' working with the 'Discriminator Sets' to produce single histogram curves for the gamma ray from two wells for 'Gas Sands', 'Water Sands' and 'Shales'.

Section 8.2 View Well and Curve Data : Histograms

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

'Advanced Well Select' : uses the 'Select Wells' module for creating, saving and retrieving well lists. The 'Zone/Well List' list at the side of the histogram can be detached from the histogram window and resized as required.

Section 8.2 View Well and Curve Data : Histograms

554

555

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The detached 'Zone/Well List' can be easily reattached to the crossplot either by dragging the window onto the crossplot window or else 'clicking' on the

icon in the top right-hand corner of

the 'Zone/Well List' window. The 'Discriminators' Tab

Section 8.2 View Well and Curve Data : Histograms

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

556

The 'Discriminators' tab allows the user to refine which data are displayed in the histogram. The user can up to 10 discriminator 'Sets'. Up to 6 discriminator criteria can be set up and used, per 'Set'. The discriminators can be combined using 'and' or 'or' type logic. Discrimination can either be between a curve and a value or between two curves. If the 'Multi Well / Curve Histogram' box is 'checked', under the 'Scales' tab, then up to ten different Discriminator Sets can be defined. The user can scroll through the different Sets by clicking the left and right arrow buttons next to the Set number at the head of the tab. The 'Options' tab

The 'Options' tab allows the user to override the defaults for histogram plot titles. Leave the title boxes 'blank' to in order to use the default titles. If no title is required then put a blank space (space bar key) in the text-entry box. The 'Hard Copy' options allow the width and height of the

Section 8.2 View Well and Curve Data : Histograms

557

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

plot to be specified. If this is left blank the plot is automatically fitted to the plot page. 'Un-checking' the 'Plot Zone, depth and parameter information' removes this information (which appears as a 'Legend' for the plot) from the hard copy plot. 'Un-checking' the 'Show Curve Statistics' will remove the statistics table from the output hardcopy. 'Un-checking' the 'Plot Active Zone title' removes this information from the output hard copy plot. 'Un-checking' the 'Display Colored Background' removes the 'sunburst' background from the output hard copy plot. NOTE: even if the 'Enable Background' is 'un-checked' within 'Miscellaneous Options', a 'sunburst' background colour will appear in the hardcopy histogram plot if the 'Display Colored Background' is 'checked' on within the 'Options' tab. The 'Display Colored Background' is by default 'un-checked'. Percentile Statistics Each of the percentile statistic boxes are user definable. The default values are 10th percentile, 50th percentile and 90th percentile. Users can enter whatever value they like in the percentile statistic boxes i.e. P0.5, P90.5 etc. 'Un-checking' the 'Show Percentile 1' box(es) will remove the percentile from the statistics table, if the table is being shown. Interactive Histogram Plots 'Interactive' Histograms are launched from within the 'Log Plot' windows of the Interpretation modules. The user should 'right -click' in a log curve track to activate a drop-down list of available histograms and crossplots.

Section 8.2 View Well and Curve Data : Histograms

Senergy

View Well and Curve Data

558

The 'ZONES' section of the histogram will only be visible if zone depths are selected in the 'Histogram Scales' window. The colour of the histogram bar chart for a zone is the same as the colour of the zone bar on the log plot. Viewing zones : to change the zones visible in the histogram, click on 'ZONES' on the right side of the histogram window to activate or de-activate any zone. Changing parameter values : to change parameters associated with the histogram (example : Gamma Ray Clean, Gamma Ray Clay), drag the parameter lines, which will be displayed on the histogram, to their new value. The values displayed are shown at the bottom of the window along with their cumulative percentile. When the mouse button is released, the zone will be recalculated automatically with the new parameter values, and all displays will automatically be updated with the new results of the calculations. There are now undo/redo buttons in the top left-hand corner of the 'interactive' histograms. These enable the user to change the parameter lines and then go back to how the parameter lines were originally set. As the user 'clicks' on the arrows the parameter lines change on the histogram and also on the interactive plot. The undo/redo buttons only become visible once a parameter line has been moved. The undo/redo only works if the well/zones are the same as when the first parameter line move was made.

Section 8.2 View Well and Curve Data : Histograms

559

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Section 8.2 View Well and Curve Data : Histograms

Senergy

Senergy

View Well and Curve Data

Section 8.2 View Well and Curve Data : Histograms

560

561

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

By 'clicking' on the drop-down icon (between the two arrows) a list of user operations can be seen. This gives the user the opportunity to select the action that they would like to un-do or re-do. Any 'greyed-out actions relate to a previous set-up of the module. To reset any of these 'greyed-out' actions the user must reset the histogram back to how it was when the actions were made.

Changing Active Zone : the 'Active zone' is the zone name displayed at the top of the window, below the histogram title. Any parameter changes that the user applies are made to this zone. To change the active zone, the user can either : click on the 'Edit Format' button and change the Active Zone in the Histogram Scales window, or click on the 'Active Zone' button on the Histogram main menu bar. In this case, after clicking the 'Active Zone' menu button, select the new active zone(s) from the list of zones on the right hand side of the window. Then, to end the selection process, click again on the 'Active Zone' button. Selecting multiple active zones : It is possible to have multiple zones active at the same time. This allows the user to change the same parameter for multiple zones. To do this, follow the same instructions for 'Changing Active Zone', except this time, select all the zones wanted as active zones before ending the selection with a second click of the 'Active Zone' button. The 'All Zones' box will allow the selection of all zones. The first

Section 8.2 View Well and Curve Data : Histograms

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

562

zone selected will have its parameters displayed on the plot. Then, when any parameters are changed, the same changes will be made to all the active zones. If the chosen active zones do not have the same starting parameters, a warning message will be displayed to see if you wish to continue. Histogram Main Menu items The Histogram main menu bar comprises of 4 buttons:

'File' 'Edit Format' 'Active Zone' 'Type' 'File' Button:

The 'File' menu allows the user to save and load histogram formats, output the histogram to a plotter, file or clipboard and to close the histogram window. The Normalize Curves module is also started from here. 'Program Default Histograms' : Provides a drop-down list which can be populated with histogram formats. These formats are located in the IP program directory, under the ' \Default Plots' subdirectory. 'Default' histogram formats can be saved to this folder and

Section 8.2 View Well and Curve Data : Histograms

563

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

will then be available from any IP project the user opens. 'Project / Well Histograms' : At the top of the list will be any histogram format files saved into the IP Project's 'Root' directory, followed by histogram format files saved into a wells IP subdirectory. 'Save Format' allows you to save a particular histogram set-up to a disk (.hst) file. The histogram can be restored by clicking the 'Load Format' button and browsing to the required format file. 'Print' - will print the current histogram plot directly to a connected printer. 'File' - The histogram graphic display can output to a number of graphics file formats. The graphic format is selected in the file selection dialog and it depends on the file name extension. Graphics formats available are : EMF, CGM, GIF, TIFF, PNG, JPEG and BMP. 'Clipboard' - selecting this option copies the graphic display as an .emf file, to the WINDOWS clipboard. You can paste the graphic directly into other applications such as Excel or Powerpoint. 'Clone' - 'clicking' this will create an exact copy of the active histogram. 'Save and View Histogram Report' - this saves the details of the histogram as a text file, HistoStats.txt, with the statistics table and cumulative curve values. An example of the text file is shown below:

Section 8.2 View Well and Curve Data : Histograms

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

564

The 'Edit Format' button is described above, under the headings 'Scales' tab, 'Discriminators' tab and 'Options' tab

The Active Zone button is described above under the 'Changing Active Zone' header.

Histogram 'Type' Button: The Histogram 'Type' menu allows the user to choose how a histogram is to look on-screen. The user 'clicks' on an option in the menu bar to select it. A marker, or 'tick' appears next to the selected option. The user toggles between display options by 'clicking' on the option in the dropdown menu.

Section 8.2 View Well and Curve Data : Histograms

565

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The default histogram 'Type' is a 'Bar' chart with different wells / zones cumulatively added to the display. 'Clicking' the 'Type' button on the Histogram main menu bar, and selecting 'Plot Curves' changes the plot into a series of curves, one curve for each well / zone,as illustrated below:

The 'Cumulative Curve ?' option allows the user to display a cumulative frequency curve for the data displayed in the histogram. The Y axis scale for the histogram can be plotted in a number of ways:

Section 8.2 View Well and Curve Data : Histograms

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

566

'Plot as Frequency': this will display the actual number of points in each division. 'Plot as Percent': points are plotted as a percentile of the total number of points. If the 'Equal areas under curves ?' option is 'checked' then each histogram curve is normalized so that the areas under each curve are the same. This option is only valid when 'Plot Curves' is selected. The following plot illustrates a 'curve' histogram without the cumulative frequency curve. The heavy line curve indicates the active zone (1).

'Colour by Zone' : sets the histogram shading and line colour to the active zone colour. 'Colour by Well' : sets the histogram shading and line colour to distinguish between wells in a multi-well histogram plot. 'Show Statistics Table' : enables the user to hide or show the statistics table. For multiwells the statistics table can become very large. 'Hide All Statistics Lines' : removes any statistical line that had previously been selected and displayed on the histogram plot. 'Show Gaussian Fit' : draws the Gaussian fit curve for the frequency distribution shown in the histogram. The Gaussian fit curve is drawn as a thin dashed line when drawn with bars or curves. When 'Plot Bars' or 'Plot Curves' are de-selected the Gaussian lines appear as bold, solid lines in the plot area.

Section 8.2 View Well and Curve Data : Histograms

567

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

NOTE: separate Gaussian fit lines for multi-well displays are only available when the 'Plot Curves' option, not 'Plot Bars', is selected.

'Show Standard Deviation' : switches on the +/- 1 Standard Deviation lines for the Gaussian Fit line. The standard deviation lines appear as green dashed lines. 'Show Minimum Line' : switches on the minimum line. This appears as a solid blue line when histogram bars are displayed. 'Show Maximum Line' : switches on the maximum line. This appears as a solid blue line when histogram bars are displayed 'Show Mean Line' : switches on the mean line for the Gaussian Fit line. This appears as a solid blue line when histogram bars are displayed . 'Show Mode Line' : switches on the mode line. This appears as a solid blue line when histogram bars are displayed. NOTE: if there is no single mode value for the data then the 'Mode' statistics cell will be blank. 'Show Percentile 1 Line' : switches on the first percentile line if it has been 'checked' in the 'Options' tab. 'Show Percentile 2 Line' : switches on the second percentile line if it has been 'checked' in the 'Options' tab. 'Show Percentile 3 Line' : switches on the third percentile line if it has been 'checked' in the 'Options' tab. 'Show All Gaussian Lines' : switches on all the Gaussian Lines (Gaussian Fit, Mean and Standard Deviation) for the histogram on display. 'Show No Gaussian Lines' : switches off any Gaussian lines that are currently displayed. 'Plot Only Gaussian Lines' : shows only the Gaussian Line fits to the histogram data. Displays as separate curves when 'Plot Curves' is selected and displays as a single curve when 'Plot Bars' is selected.

Section 8.2 View Well and Curve Data : Histograms

Senergy

View Well and Curve Data

568

If the 'Plot Curves' option is chosen then all the statistical lines appear as the same colour as that chosen for the zone colour, as shown in the screenshot below:

Section 8.2 View Well and Curve Data : Histograms

569

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

This feature is useful for when the user is comparing multi-well curve values.

Section 8.2 View Well and Curve Data : Histograms

Senergy

Senergy

View Well and Curve Data

570

If the user wants to copy specific values from the statistics table for a histogram then rightmouse 'clicking' on the cell enables the user to see the following two options: 'Copy Selected Cell(s) to Clipboard' - the user can select one cell or a number of cells (by selecting the first cell and then holding down the left-mouse button and dragging across to the other cells to be selected, which are highlighted in blue as they are selected. 'Copy All to Clipboard' - this copies all of the statistics table to the clipboard.

Section 8.2 View Well and Curve Data : Histograms

571

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

'Print', 'Copy to the Clipboard' and 'Output to File' : These options, described above, under the 'File' button ,are also available by right-mouse-button clicking in the Histogram graphic display. They allow the histogram to be sent either: to the currently-selected printer, or copied to the windows clipboard, or output to a disk file The clipboard option is very useful for pasting copies of the histograms into other documents. The data is copied to the clipboard as a windows enhanced metafile (.emf). This allows the histogram to be easily re-scaled inside the host document with no loss of picture resolution. To output histogram statistics for each zone 'check' the 'Show Curve Statistics' box within the ' Options' tab of the 'Edit Format' window.

Section 8.2 View Well and Curve Data : Histograms

Senergy

View Well and Curve Data

Multi-well zonal histograms allow the selection of multiple zones from different wells. The following plot is displaying three zones from 'A2 and one zone for well 'A3'.

Section 8.2 View Well and Curve Data : Histograms

572

573

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The text statistics file from this histogram will look like the following. The cumulative values have been cut out after the 10th bin to shorten the listing. HISTOGRAM STATISTICS

Date :

10/31/2008 13:17:54

GR (API)

Mean

Minimum

Maximum

Mode

- Zone : (1) RN36

31.125

147.25

34.5

- Zone : (2) N28

21.156

46.812

28.5

- Zone : (3) N26

24.796

67.125

31.5

- Zone : (3) N26

21.531

125.68

25.5

21.156

147.25

34.5

Std Dev

Well(16): A2 : 24353762 58.003

31.44

Well(16): A2 : 24353762 32.084

6.93

Well(16): A2 : 24353762 33.742

7.683

Well(24): A3 36.376

19.69

All Zones 42.949

Value

24.59

Total

Section 8.2 View Well and Curve Data : Histograms

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy GR

Cum %

1.5

0.

4.5

0.

7.5

0.

10.5

0.

13.5

0.

16.5

0.

19.5

0.

22.5

3.142

25.5

15.14

28.5

27.14

8.2.1

574

Curve Normalization

'Normalization' is a mathematical process that adjusts for differences among data from varying sources, in order to create a common basis for comparison. 'Well Log Normalization : Methods and Guidelines' - Daniel E. Shier Petrophysics, Vol45, No.3 (2004) is a good reference paper on the subject of log normalization. The Histogram module can be used to normalize curves, for example; between log runs within a single well or between multiple wells in an IP project. To do this: set up the histogram so that it contains the curve or curves you want to normalize and include a 'Reference Well' and 'Reference Curve', if appropriate. NOTE: a 'Reference Curve' is only necessary if the user is going to use the 'Normalize to fixed percentiles' option. For other normalization types the 'Reference Curve' entry box can be left blank. The Normalization window is accessed either : by using the Histogram menu item 'File' 'Normalize Curves' option, or by right-mouse-button clicking on the histogram graphic display and selecting ' Normalize Curves' from the menu that is launched.

Section 8.2 View Well and Curve Data : Histograms

575

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The following window is launched plus the histogram changes from displaying data as bars to displaying data as curves:

Section 8.2 View Well and Curve Data : Histograms

Senergy

View Well and Curve Data

576

The user selects the 'Curve to normalize' from the drop-down box. This curve will now be plotted on the histogram with a thick line style, but not as thick as the 'Reference Curve' line, if one is specified. The 'Result Curve' box will be filled in with the userselected curve name, with the characters in the 'Default curve extension' box appended to it. The user can change the 'Result Curve' name or curve extension as required. Where curves are to be normalized to a 'Reference Curve', the 'Reference Curve' should be selected from the drop-down list box. This curve will now be plotted on the histogram with a very thick line style to distinguish it from the curve to be normalized. Normalization Type Three types of curve normalization operation are enabled in IP : '1 Point Linear Shift' : This will add / subtract a fixed value to / from the user-selected curve, as illustrated in the screen capture shown below.

Section 8.2 View Well and Curve Data : Histograms

577

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

'1 Point Scale Factor' : This will multiply the user-selected curve by a fixed value, as illustrated below:

'2 Point' : This combines the first two types, allowing a scaling plus a linear shift operation, as illustrated below:

Section 8.2 View Well and Curve Data : Histograms

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

578

The 'Normalization Values' text-entry boxes display the available normalization factors. A box will be 'greyed out' (inactive) depending on the type of normalization the user selects (for example: if the '1 Point Linear Shift' is selected, then the multiplication box (X) becomes noneditable and fixed to the value 1.0. Interval to Normalize The user can choose to normalize the input curve over the 'Whole Well' or just over the intervals of the currently 'Selected Zones' on the main histogram window. if the 'Use Discriminators' 'check-box' is 'checked', then any discriminators that were set up for the normalization curve on the Histogram 'Discriminators' tab, will be applied to decide if a particular depth step should be normalized. In this way discriminators can be applied to both the 'Whole Well' and 'Selected Zones' options.

Section 8.2 View Well and Curve Data : Histograms

579

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The output 'Result Curve' is created when the 'Keep' or 'Next' buttons is 'clicked'. The output curve is created using the factors in the 'Normalization Values' box. Normalizing One / Multiple Curves to a Reference Curve There are three possible methods for setting the normalization factors for one/many 'Curves to

Section 8.2 View Well and Curve Data : Histograms

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

580

Normalize' with respect to a 'Reference Curve'. 1. Use one or two fixed percentile value(s) to normalize the selected curve to the reference curve - 'Normalize to Fixed Percentiles' option. 2. The user interactively selects the amount to shift a curve, on the histogram. This method does not use any reference curve. 3. The user can manually type in the scale factors in the 'Normalization Values' boxes. The histogram is updated so the user can see the effect. 1. Normalize to Fixed Percentile Values To normalize to Fixed Percentiles: Select the 'Reference Curve' and 'Curve to Normalize'. Select 'Normalization Type' - '1 Point Linear Shift', '1 Point Scale Factor' or '2 Point'. Type in the 'Lower %' and 'Upper %' (percentile values) to normalize the 'Curve to Normalize' to, into the 'Normalize to fixed Percentiles' text-entry boxes . The 'Upper %' box is only used for '2 Point' normalization. The histogram plot will be updated to show the percentile lines for the 'Reference Curve' and the curve being normalized. The vertical percentile lines are coloured the same as the input curves. The numbers that are displayed are the actual curve values corresponding to the chosen percentiles. Click the 'Calculate' button to calculate the normalization factors, which are displayed in the 'Normalization Values' box, and the normalized curve is added to the histogram as a dashed line. NOTE: that no output curve has been created at this stage. The following screen capture shows a '1 Point Linear Shift', 10% (Percentile) normalization. Note that the actual percentile values are displayed on the histogram.

The following screen capture illustrates a '2 Point' normalization using fixed percentiles (10% and 90%)

Section 8.2 View Well and Curve Data : Histograms

581

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The output curve, in this case 'GRn', is created when either of the 'Keep' or 'Next' buttons are 'clicked'. Clicking the 'Close' button will cancel the normalization operation without saving a normalized curve. 2. Interactive Normalization The 'Interactive Normalization' procedure is set up as follows (a 2 Point Normalization is described) : Select the 'Normalization Type'. Click the 'Interactive' button. On the Histogram Plot - Click at a point on the 'Curve to Normalize'. A vertical line

Section 8.2 View Well and Curve Data : Histograms

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

582

labelled 'Norm 1' is displayed. Click at the point on the 'Reference Curve' that you wish to shift line 'Norm 1' to. A second vertical line labelled 'Ref 1' is displayed. Click at a second point on the 'Curve to Normalize'. A third vertical line labelled 'Norm 2' is displayed. Click at the point on the 'Reference Curve' that you wish to shift line 'Norm 2' to. A second vertical line labelled 'Ref 2' is displayed. The following is an example of a '2 Point Shift'.

The vertical reference lines are interactive and can be dragged to a new position. When the mouse button is released the 'Shifted Curve' and the 'Normalization Values' will automatically update. 'Keep' / 'Next' / 'All' Buttons

Clicking one of the 'Keep', 'Next' or 'All' buttons, located at the bottom of the Curve Normalization screen, executes the normalization routine on the selected curves. 'Keep' Button - By clicking the 'Keep' button the 'Result Curve' is created or updated with the normalized data. If the 'Result Curve' is a new curve then all the data from the original curve is copied into it before the normalization is performed on the selected parts. 'Next' Button - The 'Next' button performs the same operation as the 'Keep' button, except that afterwards it automatically selects the next curve in the list of 'Curves to Normalize' and will automatically recalculate the percentiles and 'Normalization Values'

Section 8.2 View Well and Curve Data : Histograms

583

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

for the new curve . This can allow the user to process multiple curves quickly, with minimal user-input, except for checking that the normalization looks optimal, before selecting the next curve. 'All' Button - The 'All' button does the same as clicking the 'Next' button until all the wells in the histogram have been normalized. Listing When the user closes the normalization window an optional output listing of all the curves normalized and their normalization values and intervals can be made. The following is an example listing. Curve Normalization 04/09/01 15:25:58 Well : Test Well 1 Input curve : GrC Result curve : GrCn Reference curve : SGR (XYZ # 1) 10 Percentile , Reference : 25.0249 90 Percentile , Reference : 105.4834 GrCn = 0.84827 x GrC + 7.13713 Interval 7614. - 8738. Well : Test Well 3 Input curve : SGR Result curve : SGRn Reference curve : SGR (XYZ # 1) 10 Percentile , Reference : 25.0249 90 Percentile , Reference : 105.4834 SGRn = 1.0035 x SGR + 4.56156 Interval 7614. - 8738.

Value : 21.0873 Value : 115.9373

Value : 20.392 Value : 100.57

Section 8.2 View Well and Curve Data : Histograms

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

8.3

584

Managing Crossplots

'Crossplots' can be launched in a number of ways within IP: From the View Menu, Select Crossplot Click the Crossplot button' in an interpretation module 'Interactive Log Plot' - by 'right-mouse clicking' in a track and choosing the appropriate Crossplot option from the pop-up menu. In this case the Crossplot will launch with curve default parameter values set and will show interactive lines and endpoints. by 'clicking & dragging' a Crossplot format name from the 'Database Browser' into the IP workspace. by 'double-clicking' on a Crossplot format name in the 'Database Browser' view. from a log plot hold the 'X' key down and use the left mouse button to select curves and zones and then click on the Crossplot icon on the main menu bar. See 'Selecting Log Plot Curves for Output to Crossplot' for more details. The Crossplot has a 'new look' in that a sunburst background colour has been added. The sunburst background can be disabled / enabled in 'Tools' '

'Options'

'Miscellaneous Options

'Enable Background'.

Navigating the Crossplot Dialog The Crossplot display set-up is arranged on 4 tabbed windows. These are: 'Scales' - sets up curves, symbols, depth ranges, Crossplot 'Type' ('Normal', 'Frequency', 'Pressure Gradients', 'Standalone Pickett') and optional overlay lines. 'Discriminators' - sets up the data filtering criteria for user-defined displays. 'Z Axis colours' - sets up the colours when a Z axis curve is selected. 'Options' - allows the user to add Crossplot and XY axis titles, switch 'on/off' regression line equations, plot zone depth and parameter information, set the dimensions (inches/cm) of the output graphics file.

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

585

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Related Topics Working with the Crossplot Dialog Working with the Crossplot Window Working with Crossplot Areas Working with Crossplot Overlay Files Interactive Modifications in a Crossplot Crossplot Types

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

Senergy

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

8.3.1

586

Working with the Crossplot Dialog

When Creating a Crossplot the Crossplot Dialog is used to define the Crossplot Attributes. To display the Crossplot Dialog Click the Crossplot Button.

The 'Scales' tab is where the input curves and their display scales and display symbols are set up. Crossplot overlay lines for many standard chartbook plots can be added to the display from this screen. The 'X axis' and 'Y axis curves', and 'Z1' and 'Z2' curves where required, are selected from the drop-down curve lists. Where curve display parameters have been set up in the 'Manage Curve Headers' module, these default minimum and maximum values will be automatically set. NOTE: the user can type in curve 'types', prefixed by either a '@' or '*' character, into the 'Curve Name' entry boxes in order to pick up curves 'generically'. For example, typing in '@density' will pick up the 'final' (if flagged), or most recently loaded / updated density curve, '*sonic' will pick up the default sonic curve, as illustrated below.

The user must 'check' the 'Log' check-box in order to display any selected curve on a logarithmic scale. The 'Vert. Lines' / 'Hori. Lines' 'Number' text entry box should be set to '10' to display the correct Logarithmic decade grid lines. The depth interval for the Crossplot can be defined either by selecting: 'Interval Depths' - a top and bottom depth are typed in, or by using 'Zonal Depths' - the user must select from a list of available IP 'Parameter set' and choose the 'Active Zone'. The 'Z axes' settings are optional, and if entered, can be turned 'off' from the Crossplot window to allow the zonal display only.

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

587

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The 'Z1 axis' changes the colour of a point in the Crossplot, depending on the value of the Z1 axis curve. The 'Z2 axis' changes the symbol of a point in the Crossplot, depending on the value in the Z2 axis curve.

The 'Number' of 'Colours' and 'Symbols', entered into the text boxes in the right hand column of the screen, sets the number of sub-divisions to use for the 'Z1' and 'Z2' axes. The maximum number of colours is 13. The maximum number of symbols is 35. An example of a Crossplot incorporating 'Z1' and 'Z2' curves is shown in the figure shown below:

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

Senergy

View Well and Curve Data

588

The 'Point Symbol' drop-down box, found below the curve selection panel, will allow the user to change the style of the symbol displayed on the Crossplot. The following styles are available.

If the user elects to create a multi-well Crossplot, the additional wells, when selected, will be

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

589

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

displayed, initially, with the same 'Point Symbol' as that for the primary, in-focus well. The 'Point Size' drop-down box allows the user to change the size of the symbol selected in the ' Point Symbol' drop-down box. The size range is from one to five. If the small points (1 pixel square) are selected then the 'Point Size' is grayed out. The 'OverLay Lines' box allows the user to select Service Company chart book 'Neutron / Density' and 'Neutron / Sonic' porosity lines to display with Crossplot data. The user can choose what kind of overlay, if any, to display on a Crossplot. If a required overlay is not available from the IP program list, it is possible for the user to create / add a new overlay to the program. See 'Creating New Crossplot Overlays' for a full description.

The 'Crossplot Options' Panel Four check boxes can be used to launch additional Crossplot functionality. These are: 'Expand Array Curves' - If the user selects an array-type curve to display in the Crossplot as an X or Y curve, this check box will be 'activated'. If the box is 'checked', the array curve will be 'expanded' so that every point in the array curve has a separate point in the Crossplot. If the box is left 'un-checked', then the array curve data will be averaged to the well depth step increment, and the average array curve value will be plotted against the other user-selected curve. 'Frequency Crossplot' - The 'Frequency Crossplot' check-box launches an additional menu that allows the user to display Crossplot data as 'Frequency' - type displays; either as alpha-numeric characters or as colour-coded cells. See 'Frequency Crossplots' for a full description. The menu is launched when the user clicks the 'OK' button. 'Pressure Gradients' - The 'Pressure Gradients' check-box launches an additional menu that allows the user to analyse formation test pressures versus depth. See Pressure Gradient Plots for a full description. The menu is launched when the user clicks the 'OK' button. 'Standalone Pickett Crossplot' - The 'Standalone Pickett Crossplot' check box launches the Pickett Crossplot which is independent of the 'Porosity and Water Saturation' module. NOTE: The relevant porosity and resistivity curves, with logarithmic scales, have to be selected before the Crossplot will launch. See 'Standalone Pickett Plot' for a full description.

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

590

The 'Discriminators' tab The 'Discriminator' tab allows the user to refine what data are displayed in the Crossplot. Up to 6 discriminators can be used at once and combined using 'and' or 'or' type logic. Discrimination can either be between a curve and a value or between two curves. There are a maximum of 10 discriminator sets that can be used. To access the other discriminator sets use the arrow buttons to move between the sets. These discriminator sets are especially useful for multiwell Crossplots, where different sets can be used on different wells depending on the data.

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

591

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The 'Z AXES CLIPPING' check boxes at the base of the 'Discriminators' tab allows the user to decide whether Z axis curve data values that fall outside the defined scales are to be included on the Crossplot. When the boxes are not 'checked' the data that are outside the defined scale range will be plotted with the colour or symbol of the maximum or minimum value of the scale range. The 'Display every th point' box allows the user to filter the amount of data being displayed on the Crossplot. Displaying every 1th point displays all the data. Displaying every 5th point will display the 1st, 6th, 11th, 16th... etc data points. To change the start point of the data to be filtered alter the top depth to be displayed. For example, if the user has GR data over a 100 ft interval with a 0.5 ft step and the first data point is at 100ft and the user wants to display only the 2nd data point i.e the foot values then in the 'Interval Depths' 'Top' box on the 'Scales' tab the user would enter 100 and in the 'Bottom' box 200. On the 'Discriminators' tab the user would enter 2 in the 'Display every th point' box.

The 'Z Axis Colours' tab

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

592

The 'Z Axis Colours' tab allows user-defined colours to be specified for ranges of values. The Z1 axis curve must be selected on the 'Scales' tab. The user 'checks' the 'Use these Z Axis colours' box to override the scales defined in the 'Scales' tab. The table is filled out to define the colour associated with a range of Z axis values. The 'Label' column is optional and is shown alongside the colour scale, to the right of the Crossplot.

'Save Colours to File' : if you 'click' this button the current colour / label set-up scheme will be saved to an external ascii (.zcl) file. 'Load Colours from File' : 'clicking' this button allows you to restore a colour/ label scheme that has been saved to an external .zcl file. 'Fill From Z1 Settings' : 'clicking' this button will take the Z1 curve 'Min' and 'Max' values and divide the colour bar, using the 'Number' of Z1 divisions' from the 'Scales' tab, to create a colour bar and associated labels, as illustrated below:

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

593

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The following Crossplot is an example of a plot with a user-defined Z1 axis colour scheme which has been manually entered into the 'Z Axis colours' tab.

The 'Options' tab The 'Options' tab allows the user to override the program defaults for Plot titles. If the user leaves the boxes 'blank', the program default titles and axis labelling are applied. If no title is required, then put a 'space' character (space bar key) in the 'Main Title (Hard Copy)' box.

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

594

The 'Hard Copy' options allow the width and height of the plot to be specified. If 'Width' and ' Height' boxes are left 'blank' the plot is automatically scaled to fit to the plot page. Un-checking the 'Plot Zone, depth and parameter information' check box removes this information from the plot. Un-checking the 'Plot Active Zone title' check box, removes this label from the plot.

The 'Put regression Line equation on plot' check box at the bottom of the 'Options' tab, if 'checked' will display a regression line equation on the plot when the 'Regression' option is run. There is no limit on the number of different equations that can be displayed. The placement of the equation on the plot can be changed by placing the mouse cursor on the first letter of the equation line (the cursor changes to a drag cursor) and then by dragging the line to a different position. The equation will appear on the hard copy output in approximately the same position as it is displayed on the screen. The 'Turn off 'Areas' for output to clipboard' check box option, when 'checked' will remove any user-digitized polygons from the Crossplot before the graphic is sent to the clipboard. This is a useful option for 'cleaning' up a Crossplot display before using the graphic in other applications.

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

595

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Load a Pre-Defined Crossplot Format The 'Load Format' drop-down button in the Crossplot Dialog can be used to pick up IP default Crossplot formats to help to speed up the process of setting up Crossplots. IP program default Crossplot formats are stored in the IP Program directory, normally C: \Program Files\IntPetro3x, within the 'Default Plots' subdirectory. They are further subdivided into functional groups. These are 'core', 'fluid', 'lithology', 'parameter' , ' porosity' and 'saturation'.

The user can create their own 'default' Crossplot formats and save them into the IP Project directory or the Well directory. They will then appear as submenu items from the 'Load Format' drop-down menu. The order of the sub-menu items can be changed, more folders can be created and the paths to the folders can be defined within the 'Corporate Search Paths' menu item within 'Tools'

'Options'.

Related Topics Working with the Crossplot Dialog Working with the Crossplot Window Working with Crossplot Areas Working with Crossplot Overlay Files Interactive Modifications in a Crossplot Crossplot Types

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

8.3.2

Working with the Crossplot Window

The Crossplot Window is illustrated in the figure below.

The Crossplot 'File' menu The following options can be located in the Crossplot File Menu.

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

596

597

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

'Program Default Crossplots' : Provides a drop-down list of IP default Crossplot formats. These formats are located in the IP program directory, under the '\Default Plots' subdirectory. The default formats are further classified in terms of their application. The following screen shot illustrates the 'functional' groupings:

The plot formats are listed in the following order:

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

598

At the top of the list are Crossplot format files saved into the 'Default Plots' subdirectory, followed by Crossplot formats saved into the 'functional' subdirectories ('core', 'fluid', 'lithology', parameter', 'porosity', 'saturation'). The user can create their own hierarchy of Crossplot formats for an IP project by manually creating a subdirectory in the IP Project directory with the 'NAME'.xpt extension and saving Crossplot format files into it. The default formats are saved as 'generic' formats and work where a user has set up curve 'Types' correctly. 'Project / Well Crossplots': Provides a drop-down list of user-defined Crossplot formats saved either into the IP Project directory or into individual 'WellXXXX' subdirectories within the IP project. 'Save Format' and 'Load Format': These options allow the user to save a Crossplot format to a disk file and restore it at a later time. The default location for these files will be the IP project directory. The 'Load Format' option can also be activated from the 'Edit Format' window, from the 'Load Format' button on the bottom of the Crossplot window. 'Save Format Generic': the user can type in curve 'types', prefixed by either a '@' or '*' character, into the 'Curve Name' entry boxes in order to pick up curves 'generically'. For example, typing in '@density' will pick up the 'final' (if flagged), or most recently loaded / updated density curve, '*sonic' will pick up the default sonic curve. The 'Print', 'File' and 'Clipboard' options on the menu allow the Crossplot to be sent to the current printer, copied to the WINDOWS clipboard or output to a file. Output to a 'File' can be in a number of graphics formats. The graphic format is selected in the file selection dialog and it depends on the file name extension. The supported graphic file formats are : EMF, PNG, CGM, GIF, TIFF, JPEG and BMP. NOTE: to remove the sunburst background before outputting the Crossplot to a graphics file or printer go to 'Tools' Miscellaneous Options'

'Options'

'

'Enable Background' and 'uncheck' the 'Enable Background'

option. The 'Clipboard' option is very useful for pasting a copy of a Crossplot into other documents / spreadsheets / slide presentations. The data is copied to the clipboard as a WINDOWS enhanced metafile (.EMF). This allows the Crossplot to be easily re-scaled inside the host document with no loss of resolution. The 'Clone Crossplot' option allows the user to launch a new Crossplot window with exactly the same set up as the current, active Crossplot. It is useful for example, for setting up a number of Crossplots using different discriminator parameters, for a common set of wells. If areas have been selected on the active Crossplot then these will also come through on the cloned Crossplot

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

599

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The Crossplot 'Edit Format' Menu The 'Edit Format' button returns the user to the Crossplot set-up windows where curve values, symbols, overlay files etc.. can be modified.

The Crossplot 'Z Axes' Menu The 'Z Axes' Menu allows the user to change the 'sense' of the Z axis colour or symbol on the Crossplot display.

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

600

The Z axis on the Crossplot is a colour or symbol display that allows the user to apply visual 'discriminators' to the display: 'Zone' : The symbol colour will correspond to the colour of the zone that the point comes from. This is for plots utilising zone / tops Sets or parameter Sets. 'Curve' : The symbol colour will correspond to a Z axis curve value. In this case the colour scale and or symbol scale for the Z axis will be displayed to the right hand side of the Crossplot. 'Well' : For multi-well Crossplots the symbol colour will be set to the colour in the multi-well Crossplot set-up. In this case, each well name will be highlighted in a separate colour in the list to the right hand side of the Crossplot. To change the sense of the Z axis, 'click' the 'Z Axes' button and choose the type of Z axis.

The Crossplot 'Active Zone' Button The 'Active Zone' functionality is only available when the user selects: The 'Zonal Depths' option,

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

601

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

a 'Parameter set' from the list of available Sets, or an 'Active Zone' from the selected Parameter Set.

These are all selected in the 'Scales' tab window. 'Active Zone' allows the user to select one or more zones, in one or multiple wells to be 'active' at any one time. In the Crossplots launched from an interpretation module interactive log plot, this enables the user to change an interpretation parameter in multiple zones, potentially in multiple wells in an IP project. The 'Active Zone' is shown as the zone number ('Z:1, 2, 3...') displayed at the top of the Crossplot display window. This is the zone /zones that any parameter changes are made to, should the user change any associated interactive lines or end-points. To change the 'Active Zone', the user can either : 'click' on the 'Edit Format' button and change the active zone in the 'Zonal Depths' set-up panel, OR 'click' on the 'Active Zone' button. Select the new active zone / zones by clicking in the required 'cells' in the list of zones on the right hand side of the window. Then, to end the selection process, click on the 'Active Zone' button again. 'Double clicking' in a zone box will automatically select that particular zone in all the selected wells. 'Double clicking' the zone box again will deselect the active zone selection.

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

602

Data point symbols will either display in the colour of the appropriate zone as shown in the right hand part of the display window, or will be dependent on the Z axis scales selected by the user. The 'All Zones' box , found below the Well Name, to the right hand side of the Crossplot, is a shortcut to select all the zones in a well to be plotted on the Crossplot. The first zone selected will have its parameters displayed on the plot. Then, when any parameters are changed, the same changes will be made to all the active zones. If the chosen active zones do not have the same starting parameters, a warning message will be displayed to ask if you wish to continue.

The Crossplot 'Function' Menu The 'Function' menu allows the user : to set up and manage 'Areas' for use in regression analysis, or for creating 'Flag' type curves. See the 'Areas' topic for a full description. to set up, manage and display 'Regression lines' for selected areas of the Crossplot. See the 'Regression' section for a full description. to activate the 'Pressure Gradient' menu, to activate the 'Frequency Plot' menu,

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

603

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

to create and display 'User-defined lines' on a Crossplot window. See 'User-Defined Lines' for a full description. to ensure that any overlay lines are plotted on top of the data rather than being plotted behind, and hence hidden by, the data points. To reset the Crossplot axes ('Reset Axes') to their original set-up if the user has zoomed in / out of the Crossplot window.

The Crossplot Display Navigation Buttons Three buttons and their associated menus provide the user with the ability to 'zoom in', 'zoom out' and to 'rubber-band'-select a part of a Crossplot to view.

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

604

Drop-down menus, activated by clicking the arrows to the right hand side of the navigation buttons sets the 'Mode' of the button. The user can 'Zoom In' or 'Zoom Out' on: 'Both axes' - expands / shrinks the display in both x and y directions simultaneously. 'X axis only' - expands / shrinks the display in the x axis direction only. 'Y axis only' - expands / shrinks the display in the y axis direction only. 'Reset Axes' - restores a display to the scales set on the 'Edit Format' screen. The 'Area Zoom' allows the user to quickly focus on a particular area of a Crossplot by clicking on the icon in order to activate the 'mode' and then by clicking the left hand mouse button and dragging the mouse cursor in the graphic window over the area of interest. The user can also use the zoom functionality in the graphic window by using the following keys and the mouse wheel: 'Zoom X Axis only' - hold down 'x' character key and scroll the mouse wheel in / out. 'Zoom Y Axis only' - hold down 'y' character key and scroll the mouse wheel in / out. 'Zoom Both Axes' - hold down 'Ctrl' key and scroll the mouse wheel in / out. By holding down the mouse wheel in the graphic window and dragging the mouse, the user can move / 'pan through' the data in any direction.

Related Topics Working with the Crossplot Dialog Working with the Crossplot Window Working with Crossplot Areas Working with Crossplot Overlay Files Interactive Modifications in a Crossplot Crossplot Types

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

605

8.3.3

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Working with Crossplot Areas

'Areas' are created interactively, as graphical discriminators, in the Crossplot window to generate data 'sub-sets' in the display. 'Areas' are used in conjunction with the 'Regression' functionality for Crossplot data analysis. Areas can be selected on the Crossplot by clicking the 'Function' button and then 'Create Area'. They can also be created by 'right clicking' the mouse on the Crossplot graphic and choosing ' Create Area' from the pop-up menu. The cursor will turn to a cross and the area can be 'digitized' by clicking on the Crossplot to define the corners of the Area. To end and close the polygon, click with the right mouse button or press any keyboard key. The user must select at least three points to create an area. Up to 10 areas can be defined per Crossplot. Once areas have been defined, the user can edit them in the following ways:

The corners of an area can be moved by clicking on a corner and dragging the point to a new location. To delete an area - put the mouse on a corner of the area, the cursor will change to a cross, press the Delete key on the keyboard and the area will be removed. To delete all areas use the menu function 'Delete all Areas'. In the following Crossplot 4 areas have been defined.

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

606

Creating Curves from Areas To create a 'Flag' curve from user-defined 'Areas', select the 'Create curve from Areas' item on the 'Function' menu or from the pop-up menu. The following window will be displayed:

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

607

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The user can select the flag value assigned to each area. The defaults are '1' for area '1', '2' for area '2' etc. If a Crossplot data point falls within an area the Flag value for that area will be written at the appropriate depth in the output curve. If areas overlap, then points that fall in several areas will be assigned the value of the highest area number. For example if a point falls in areas 2 and 4 then the value assigned for that point will be the value for area 4. The user can type in the name of the output curve (default - 'XpFlag') into which the results are written. If the 'Add Results' button is 'checked' then only those depth levels that fall within the areas will have their values changed. The 'Delete before Write' button allows the output curve to be set to 'Null' values before the program starts adding the data from the areas. The 'Add To Plot' check-box, when 'checked, will automatically put the Flag curve in the depth track of the active log plot of the in-memory well. The colours in the flag curve will correspond to the colours of the areas. If the Crossplot is a multi-well Crossplot then the 'Create curve for:' panel will be 'active'. This allows the user to decide whether to create a Flag curve for all wells in the plot or just the current well (the current well is the well name that is shown at the top of the Crossplot window).

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

608

When the 'Run' button is 'clicked' the Flag curve will be written and the log plots updated. If the ' Create Flag Curve' window is left open and the 'Auto Update' check box is 'checked', any changes made to the areas on the Crossplot will automatically run the 'Create Flag Curve' module, updating the current flag curve and then refreshing the active log plot. This means that any changes to the areas are instantly reflected in the log plot display.

Related Topics Working with the Crossplot Dialog Working with the Crossplot Window Working with Crossplot Areas Working with Crossplot Overlay Files Interactive Modifications in a Crossplot Crossplot Types

8.3.4

Working with Crossplot Overlay Files

There are default IP Crossplot Overlay files contained in the IP Program Directory. New Overlay Files can be added to the IP Program Directory and the added to the IP Overlay File Listing (Overlay_Files.ovlx) for use in the Crossplot.

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

609

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

To Create a new Density / Neutron overlay file using the following format as a template. Save the file to the IP program directory with the file extension '.ovl '. The following is an example of a neutron density overlay file with a single Limestone ('LS') Line. Lines that begin with a '$' are 'comment lines'. The X and Y values are the coordinates of the overlay line values for 0, 5, 10, 15 pu etc... on the Neutron vs. Density Crossplot.

The first data line gives the 'Tool Types'. In this case 'Neutron' and 'Density'. This information is used for automatically picking up the correct overlay files. The second data line is the 'Label' of the line. This will be displayed as a label on the plot, at the bottom end of the line. If there are more than one overlay line, the line names must be separated by spaces. The number of names indicates the number of lines in the overlay. In the above case, there is one name 'LS', therefore only one line in the overlay.

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

610

The third data line is the 'Colour of Line'. For a list of acceptable colour names, see the file CparmDef.par'in the program directory. The file can be opened and edited by selecting the menu item 'Tools -> Edit Curve System defaults'. A maximum of thirty (30) lines can be defined in an overlay file. The data (calibration points) follow the 'Colour of line' entry, and each data point is described by the format ;'X value', 'Y value', 'Type' for the first overlay line, followed by the same format for any other lines. The 'X Value' and 'Y Value' inputs are self explanatory. The 'Type' tells the program whether to put a tick (enter 'Tick') by this point on the line, a 'Value' (enter the value, for example '10') or nothing (enter '-'). NOTE: If there are multiple overlay lines in the file it is not necessary to have the same number of points to define each line. In the example shown below, the SS and DOL line have 11 points while the LS line is defined by 10 points. However, It is necessary to fill out lines with no data with hyphens '-' for X and Y values so that there is always the same number of parameters per line. The maximum number of points per overlay line is 20. Data labels can be added to the overlay. For example, one could add the Crossplot definition, as shown in the example below and lithology points to a cross plot. Up to 30 data labels can be added. The format of the data label lines is 'X position', 'Y position', 'Text rotation' (0 degrees is a normal horizontal line), 'text colour' and the 'label text'. If the X and Y values in the first data label line are set to 0, the line will be plotted as a title label at the bottom left hand corner of the plot. Data labels start after the text line '$ Data Labels'. NOTE: the line '$ Data Labels' is required in the file in order to make the overlay file work correctly. To Add the new overlay file name to the overlay list: Save the Overlay file to the IP Program Directory (C:\Program Files\IntPetro36\) Edit the Overlay List file by editing the Overlay_Files.ovlx file in the IP program directory. Note: The file contains comment lines that describe its format.

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

611

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Restart Interactive Petrophysics to Update the Installation Files and Include the New Overlay in the Overlay Lines Drop Down Menu of the Crossplot Dialog.

The overlay lines are normally displayed underneath the data but can optionally be displayed on top. 'Check' the option under the 'Function' menu to show 'Overlays on top of data' or rightmouse click on the Crossplot graphic window to launch the same menu.

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

612

Related Topics Working with the Crossplot Dialog Working with the Crossplot Window Working with Crossplot Areas Working with Crossplot Overlay Files Interactive Modifications in a Crossplot Crossplot Types

8.3.5

Interactive Modifications in a Crossplot

These are associated with a number of IP interpretation modules. They allow the user to graphically change interpretation parameters for one or more wells, in one or multiple zones, by manipulating interactive lines and mineral end-points in Crossplot displays. 'Changing parameter values' : to change a parameter associated with the Crossplot. For example : Density/Neutron Crossplot launched from the 'Clay Volume' module Interactive Log

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

613

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Plot, where Density and Neutron clay indicators have been 'checked', 'Click and drag' the parameter point, which is marked by a heavy red 'Square' symbol, to its new value. The associated 'Neutron Clay' / 'Density Clay' parameters will change as the line or end-point is moved. Once the parameter lines have been moved undo/redo arrows appear in the top left-hand side of the Crossplot. These allow the user to 'scroll' through changes made to the parameter lines during an interpretation session. They only allow the user to see historical changes if the wells and zones are kept the same during the session.

If the drop-down icon (between the two arrows) is 'clicked' then a list of all the possible undo's / redo's is displayed. This facilitates the selection of which undo / redo the user wants to complete.

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

614

If the user changes zones or wells then the drop-down list will contain 'greyed-out' lines as these actions weren't performed on the changed set-up.

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

615

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

On some Crossplots it is possible to move the whole line. If the mouse cursor changes to a '+' when it is over an interactive line, then the line can be moved. The parameter values of the endpoints are shown at the bottom of the window. When the mouse button is released after moving a line/point, the active zone(s) will be re-calculated automatically with the new parameter values, and all displays will automatically be updated with the new results of the calculations. Multi-well zonal Crossplots allow the selection of multiple zones from different wells. If the parameters are interactively changed, then all active wells will be re-calculated. Multi-well interval Crossplots allow the user to select individual wells by 'clicking' on the 'Well Name' to the right of the Crossplot. The following Crossplot is displaying data from intervals defined on the Crossplot 'Select Well' window for two wells. The Z axis colour and plot symbol corresponds to the well that the data comes from, set up in the multi-well Crossplot set up. This is the same data as in the Crossplot shown above, but this time the 'Z Axes' is set with the ' Well / Curve Set' selected. So the data points are coloured according to the well colour not the zone colour as previously.

Related Topics Managing Crossplots Working with the Crossplot Dialog Working with the Crossplot Window Calculate a Regression Line

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

616

Create a User-Defined Line Display a Crossplot Section in a Log Plot Crossplot Dockable Zone Window 8.3.5.1

Calculate a Regression Line

The 'Regression' function can be used to calculate a regression line using the data in the crosslot.. If 'Areas' are defined, then all the points falling within each coloured polygon are used in the regression analysis. If the 'Use All Points on Xplot' box is 'checked' then the areas are ignored and all the data on the Crossplot are used in the regression analysis. When the ' Regression' function is 'clicked', the 'Regression Analysis' window will be launched.

From within the 'Regression Analysis' window it is possible to apply regression functions etc for one regression line. However, if the user wants to apply regression analysis on a number of areas within a Crossplot then there is an 'Advanced' button that brings up another window where multiple regression functions can be manipulated. The user can choose the type of regression function to be applied to the Crossplot data ('Linear', 'Polynomial', 'Exponential', 'Power'). Multiple regression types can be selected and displayed simultaneously. For the Linear regression options of 'Y=f(x)' and 'X=f(y)', the user can optionally enter a point, in the 'Force fit' text-boxes, through which the regression line will be forced. The regression lines are displayed on the Crossplot.

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

617

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Ordinary least-squares (OLS) regression minimises the sum of the squares of the 'error' distances from the line to the data points. For Y=f(x), the squared Y-error distances are minimised. For X=f(y), the squared X-errors are minimised. For example, if porosity is being predicted from bulk density, porosity is positioned as the Y variable and the Y=f(x) prediction equation is used. In this way, 'central' values of porosity are predicted at each bulk density value. Outlying data points should be edited from the dataset before carrying-out OLS regression. The Crossplot must be inspected to determine whether a linear or a 'curved' relationship is appropriate for the data being analysed. Curved relationships are analysed either by using the non-linear regression tools ('Polynomial', 'Power', 'Exponential' options) or by transforming X and/or Y data before regressing using power, logarithm, exponential or other functions. The 'RMA' (reduced major axis) line-fit gives an equation that is midway between the two OLS methods. Normally, 'RMA' is not used to predict Y from the usual 'error-included' measured X data. Normally, 'RMA' estimates the underlying theoretical relationship between the 'error-free' counterparts of X and Y, and presumes that X and Y each have the same error fraction. When plot scatter is caused by difficult core depth shifting (i.e. poor X-Y pairing), RMA provides a plausible line-fit when standard regression methods may not. RMA always reproduces the standard deviation of Y, from any X variable. Predicted porosity highs and lows will be located at different depths to the calibration data but the predicted standard deviation will be the same. Y=f (x) OLS predictions underestimate the standard deviation of porosity when depth shifting is the primary cause of the scatter. The 'Robust fit' minimises the sum of the errors in the Y direction. Instead of minimising the squared distances, the 'Robust fit' minimises the Y error distances (not squared). The variable being predicted must be selected as Y. Compared to OLS, the method reduces the effect of outliers. The robust method used in IP is free to calculate the optimum gradient and intercept, and the line is not forced to pass through the mean, or the median, of the calibration data. All regressions produce a R2 (multiple R2 ) which is calculated as : 2

^

Yi Y mean R

2

Yi Yi

2

Yi Ymean

2

Where Yi : Y value at the i'th sample Ymean : Mean value of all Y samples ^

Yi

: Y result at the i'th sample calculated from the regression equation.

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

618

By clicking 'View Report' the user will be asked to type a file name into which to save the regression results. The regression results report (example below) will be displayed in the WINDOWS NotePad. The user can cut and paste the equation directly from NotePad straight into the 'User Formula' module. Regression analysis example report REGRESSION PARAMETERS Date :

02/12/02 14:20:11

Well Name Test well number 1 Test well number 1

X Curve RHOB RHOB

Y Curve PHICORE PHICORE

Top 7800.00 8300.00

Bottom 8300.00 8730.00

Discriminators Data Points used :339 Y function of X linear regression PHICORE = 1.015328643 - 0.343891436 * RHOB R2 = 0.483892 X function of Y linear regression PHICORE = 1.876137408 - 0.710678635 * RHOB R2 = 0.483892

Advanced Regression Options The following example demonstrates using the Advanced Regression Options. From the Function Menu, Select Regression to display the Regression Analysis Dialog.

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

619

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Click the Advanced Button to Display the Advanced Options Dialog.

Click Close to Save the Regression File and Display the Regression Line in the Crossplot.

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

Senergy

View Well and Curve Data

620

The 'Advanced' features window of the Crossplot has similar features as to the 'Pressure Plot' set-up window. Multiple regression lines can be selected with different areas to be included or excluded from the regression. The regression line and equation can be selected to be displayed by using the check boxes 'Display Line' and 'Display Eqn'. The 'Line Style' box opens up the Choose Line Style Dialog. The 'Width' of the line can be altered by either using the up/down arrows or typing a number (between 1 and 10) into the box.

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

621

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

'Regression Type' is a drop down menu allowing the user to select between 'Linear', ' RMA', 'Robust', 'Poly 2nd', 'Poly 3rd', 'Poly 4th', 'Poly 5th', 'Exponential' and 'Power' functions. If the 'Inverse' box is ticked then the regression equation is inverted. The 'Include / Exclude' box allows the user to specify which areas are to be included within the regression analysis. This is used in conjunction with the 'Areas to select data from' boxes. 'Areas to select data from' boxes are coloured according to the colour of the created area on the Crossplot. The areas can be selected by 'clicking' on the box. If no boxes are ticked then the regression will be applied to all the data points. 'Force Fit' applies to the 'Linear' regression options of 'Y=f(x)' and 'X=f(y)', the user can optionally enter a point, in the 'Force fit' text-boxes, through which the regression line will be forced. The 'Show Key' brings up a 'Crossplot Key' window in which each regression line is listed with the line type and colour plus the regression equation. This could then be cut and pasted into a report.

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

622

The 'Use mean point of area' if ticked will calculate the mean value of a selected area and then uses this mean point in the regression calculation. The user can select between 'Arithmetic Mean', 'Geometric Mean' and 'Harmonic Mean' for both the 'X' and 'Y' coordinates. The 'Arithmetic Mean' is the sum of all the points divided by the number of points. Using the arithmetic mean can lead to data skewing. The 'Geometric Mean' is the nth root of the product of all members of the data set. The 'Harmonic Mean' is the number of data set points divided by the sum of the reciprocals of the points. The harmonic mean in certain situations, provides the correct notion of 'average'.

It is possible to redefine the selected area by 'dragging' one of the area corner points to a new position. 'Click' on 'Apply' and this then recalculates the area mean point and the new regression line.

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

623

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The 'View Report' button allows the user to save the regression details to a text file (default name is Regression.txt) in the well sub directory folder. This can then be pasted into a report.

To return to the main 'Regression Analysis' window from the 'Advanced' window 'click' on the button again.

Viewing Regression Line Equations The display of regression line equations on the Crossplot can be turned 'off' and 'on' from either: the 'Options' tab on the Crossplot format window - 'Put regression line equation on plot', or the 'Display Equation Labels' 'check' box on the 'Regression Analysis' set-up window. The placement of the equation line on the plot can be changed by placing the cursor on the first letter of the equation line text (the cursor changes to a drag cursor) and dragging the text to a different position. The equation line will appear on the hard copy output in approximately the same position as it is displayed on the screen. The colour of the regression lines on the Crossplot can be changed by clicking on the colour button to the right of each regression type. The user can then select the colour of the line from the colour menu box. More information about use of regression analysis in Petrophysics can be found in "Statistical Regression Line-Fitting in the Oil and Gas Industry" by Richard (Dick) Woodhouse, 2002, published as both e-book and hardcopy by PennWell Publishers.

Related Topics Managing Crossplots Working with the Crossplot Dialog Working with the Crossplot Window Calculate a Regression Line Create a User-Defined Line

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

624

Display a Crossplot Section in a Log Plot Crossplot Dockable Zone Window

8.3.5.2

Create a User-Defined Line

To create a user-defined line on the Crossplot, select the 'Create User Line' menu option from the 'Function' menu.

Within the 'User Line' module the following functions are available by clicking on the icons: - Loads a user line formula from disc, if one has been saved. - Saves a user line formula to disc. Default file extension is '.XUL' and the default file location is the project directory. - Deletes the currently selected user line formula. - Edit the currently selected user line. NOTE: If the line was created using the mouse then a message will appear telling the user to edit the line by dragging the ends of the line. - Sets the style, colour and thickness of the user defined line from the 'Choose Line Style' module. - Copies the selected user line formula to the clipboard. From the clipboard the user can paste the equation into a document or directly into an IP User Formula.

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

625

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

- Removes the user line label from the Crossplot window. - Creates a user defined line by the user entering a formula into the text box. NOTE: in order for the equation to be calculated, it must be written with the following syntax: The equation should be typed in, excluding the 'Result' term - 'Y', for 'Y as a function of X', or 'X' for 'X as a function of Y'. For example 'Y=2.5*X - 3.5' would be written '2.5*X - 3.5'. NOTE: use 'X' and 'Y', not the curve names used to set up the Crossplot. - Creates a user line by using the mouse. With a left mouse 'click' on the Crossplot, drag the mouse cursor to define a straight line in the graphical display. The line can be interactively moved once displayed. The User line equation will update as the end-points are moved. The equation for the line will be automatically displayed on the plot. To quickly clear all the user defined lines off a Crossplot then select 'Function'

'Delete All User Lines'.

The position of the equation text on the Crossplot can be moved by 'hovering' the mouse cursor over the character at the beginning of the text. The cursor should change to this

. The text

can now be dragged to a new position. There is no limit to the number of user lines that can be created in any one session. Each time a line is created it is added to the system memory. It is possible to recall these lines using the 'drop-down' button.

It is possible to close down the 'User Line' module and then re-open it without losing the unsaved-to-disc user-defined lines. However, if the Crossplot module is closed down then the unsaved user-defined lines will be cleared out of system memory and won't be available for subsequent recall.

Related Topics Managing Crossplots Working with the Crossplot Dialog Working with the Crossplot Window Calculate a Regression Line Create a User-Defined Line Display a Crossplot Section in a Log Plot Crossplot Dockable Zone Window

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

8.3.5.3

626

Display a Crossplot Section in a Log Plot

Crossplot Sections can be selected and displayed in a Log Plot using the new Crossplot to Log Plot Tools. If a section of a Crossplot is selected the data can be displayed on the corresponding Log Plot. NOTE: The Corresponding Log Plot must already be Open when selecting the section of the Crossplot. Ensure the Required Log Plot is Open. To Select a section of the Crossplot, Click the Select Section Button on the Crossplot and define the Crossplot Selection parameters, then Click the required section in the Crossplot to Create the Selection Point. NOTE: The Select Points Checkbox MUST be Selected to enable the Select Section Function.

The Log Plot will now display the Selected Section.

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

627

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

NOTE: The Highlight Selection Button in the Log Plot Display is ACTIVE and will display the Highlights for that SPECIFIC Log Plot. If the Highlights do not display in the Log Plot the Highlight Selection Button in both the Crossplot and Log Plot MUST be Selected.

NOTE: The Highlight Selection Button in the Crossplot Window will display the Highlights on ALL Open Log Plots.

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

Senergy

View Well and Curve Data

628

Multiple Selections can be made using the Select Section Button.

Selections can be removed by either; Clicking the Clear Points Button or by Selecting Clear Points from the Function Menu. It is also possible to Clear a Selected Point by placing the Cursor over the point and pressing either the Backspace Key or the Delete Key.

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

629

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Place the Cursor over a Selection Point and Click and Drag to Move.

Related Topics Managing Crossplots

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

Senergy

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

630

Working with the Crossplot Dialog Working with the Crossplot Window Calculate a Regression Line Create a User-Defined Line Display a Crossplot Section in a Log Plot Crossplot Dockable Zone Window 8.3.5.4

Crossplot Dockable Zone Window

The 'Zone/Well List' of the Crossplot window can be moved off the Crossplot in order to create more space within the Crossplot window. 'Click' and 'drag' on the 'perforations' at the top of the ' Zone/Well List' to move to a more convenient place. Once moved off the Crossplot window the ' Zone/Well List' can be resized to suit.

To restore the 'un-docked' 'Zone/Well List' back onto the Crossplot window, 'click' the Close Button in the top left corner of the 'Zone/Well List'.

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

631

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Related Topics Managing Crossplots Working with the Crossplot Dialog Working with the Crossplot Window Calculate a Regression Line Create a User-Defined Line Display a Crossplot Section in a Log Plot Crossplot Dockable Zone Window

8.3.6

Crossplot Types

Interactive Petrophysics has the ability to create a variety of Crossplots, which are briefly described below. 3D Crossplots displays Curve Data in a 3-Dimensional Format. Cross Plots can be toggled between 2-Dimensional Format and 3-Dimensional Format. However, the Crossplot MUST have a Z Axis to be displayed and modified in 3D. Frequency Crossplots displays curve data as Frequency distributions, either as alphanumeric characters or as colour coded cells. Pressure Gradient Plots displays Wireline Formation Tester pressure data and applies 'reference lines' to compare pressures versus depth , and hence fluid gradients and fluid contacts. Standalone Pickett Plot displays a Curve Data as a Double Logarithmic plot of a resistivity measurement versus a porosity measurement. Multi-Well Crossplots displays Curve data from Multiple Wells in a single Crossplot. Multi-Curve Crossplots use a selected number of curves and quality checking the data . It can be performed on one well or many wells (upto 500). Multi-Zone Crossplots enable Curve Data to be displayed in a Crossplot for a specific Zone,

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

632

Multiple Zones or All Zones in a Well.

Related Topics Managing Crossplots 3D Crossplots Frequency Crossplots Pressure Gradient Plots Standalone Pickett Plot Multi-Well Crossplots Multi-Curve Crossplots Multi-Zone Crossplots 8.3.6.1

3D Crossplots

Crossplots with a 'Z axis' defined in the set up can be displayed in three dimensions by checking the '3D' box on the Crossplot header. The following screenshot is an example of a 3D Crossplot.

3D Crossplots can be rotated left / right / up / down using the scroll bars on the bottom left hand corner of the Crossplot display. Rotating the plot can also be performed by left mouse clicking on the plot and holding and then moving the mouse up and down or left and right. The Crossplot will

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

633

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

rotate with the mouse movements. The X and Y axes scales can be moved by right mouse clicking and holding and then moving the mouse up and down or left and right. The data will move across the axes with the mouse movements. However this does not add data to the Crossplot that might have got clipped due to the original scale values. It is best to go back into 'Edit Format' and change the original 'Scale' values. The Crossplot can be zoomed by using the Zoom scroll bar. The Z-axis 'depth' of any overlay lines can be changed by using the 'Overlay Lines' scroll bar in the bottom left-hand corner of the display. No interactive functions are available for the 3D Crossplot. The user should return to 2D mode, by 'un-checking' the '3D' check box to return to 'interactive' mode.

Related Topics Managing Crossplots 3D Crossplots Frequency Crossplots Pressure Gradient Plots Standalone Pickett Plot Multi-Well Crossplots Multi-Curve Crossplots Multi-Zone Crossplots 8.3.6.2

Frequency Crossplots

The 'Frequency Crossplot' functionality enables the user to display curve data as Frequency distributions, either as alphanumeric characters or as colour coded cells, as illustrated below.

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

634

The user selects the Frequency Crossplot options either: by 'checking' the 'Frequency Crossplot' box on the 'Scales' Tab of the Crossplot Dialog, or

by selecting the 'Frequency Crossplot' option from the pop-up menu, which is activated by 'right-mouse button clicking' in the Crossplot graphical window.

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

635

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The 'Frequency Crossplot' Dialog is described below:

The 'Number of Columns and Rows' sets up the dimensions of the Frequency 'bins', in terms of the input curve values, into which the Crossplot data will be divided.

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

636

The 'Drop Value' is the 'Minimum Frequency' value that will be displayed on the Frequency plot. For example, set to '1' means that every 'bin' containing 1 or more values will be displayed. Applying a higher 'Drop value' removes from the display those data bins that contain only a few points. A drop value of 4, for example, will display only those bins containing 4 or more data points. The 'Display as Symbols' radio button, when selected, will place an alphanumeric character in each 'bin' where numbers 1 to 9 are assigned to bins which contain between 1 and 9 data points. Alphabetic characters ('a' to 'z') are assigned to bins which contain data frequencies of between 10 and 35 points. Bins with data frequencies of greater than 35 are displayed as a '#' symbol. The 'Frequency' selector allows the user to further modify the data display. The entered number is used to divide the bin frequency values by, to allow the visualization and discrimination of bins containing high frequencies. A frequency of 2 will divide all bin frequencies by '2' so that bins containing up to 70 values will have an alphanumeric character assigned (70 divided by 2 = 35,symbol 'z'), rather than the '#' symbol. For multiwell Crossplots, where there may be many hundreds of points in each bin, setting ' Frequency' to a value of 50, for example, would allow visual discrimination of frequency bins containing up to 1750 points. The 'Display as Colour Cells' radio button, when selected, sets up a colour scale for the frequency bins in the Crossplot. The user can assign a spectrum ('Use Spectrum') or colour palette ('Use Palette') and use the 'slider bar' to optimise the number of colours used to visualize the frequency data. An example is shown in the screen capture at the top of this section. NOTE: if a Crossplot data point lies on the border line of a data 'bin' then the point is included in the 'Frequency' count for the next highest data bin, because the data point value is counted as "> or equal to" the bin 'low value'. To switch back to normal Crossplot viewing mode, close down the 'Frequency Crossplot' menu and right click on the Crossplot and 'un-tick' the 'Frequency Crossplot' from the popup menu.

Related Topics Managing Crossplots 3D Crossplots Frequency Crossplots Pressure Gradient Plots Standalone Pickett Plot

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

637

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Multi-Well Crossplots Multi-Curve Crossplots Multi-Zone Crossplots

8.3.6.3

Pressure Gradient Plots

The 'Pressure Gradient Plot' is set up so that the user can tailor a standard Crossplot window to display Wireline Formation Tester pressure data and apply 'reference lines' to compare pressures versus depth , and hence fluid gradients and fluid contacts. The user should select the pressure data (units should be 'psi' or 'bar') as the 'X Axis' and DEPTH, TVD or TVDSS curves as the 'depth' curve (depending on well deviation and TVD preference - KB or MSL) as the 'Y Axis'. To activate additional functionality associated with the pressure versus depth plot, 'check' the ' Pressure Gradients' check box in the 'Crossplot Options' panel of the 'Scales' tab window. Set up 'Zonal Depths' and check the 'Multi well Crossplot' option, if required. Click 'OK' to display the Crossplot.

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

638

Alternatively select Pressure Gradients from the Crossplot Function Menu.

The conventional Crossplot display will be initiated PLUS the 'Pressure Plot' Dialog., as shown in the diagram below. This Dialog has three tabs; Regression Lines, Reference Lines, Line Intersections.

'Regression Lines' tab Pressure points can be analysed by using the Crossplot 'Areas' functionality. Additional control over which points are displayed can be implemented by applying a 'Z Axis' curve or by the use of 'Discriminators' which could, for example, be set to exclude low permeability points

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

639

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

associated with the pressure dataset / using, for example, 'mobility' as a discriminator.

Use the 'Pressure Plot' module to set up regression calculations and associate 'Areas' with ' Regression Line' colours.

The user 'checks' the 'Display Line' check box to choose the regression lines to plot in the Crossplot window. The user 'checks' the 'Display Eqn' check box to display the regression / gradient line equation in the Crossplot window. The display equation can be moved around the Crossplot window by 'hovering' the mouse cursor over the display equation until the mouse cursor changes from an arrow to an arrow plus white rectangle. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the display equation to a new position and release the left mouse button.

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

640

The 'Line Style' for the regression (gradient) line is selected by 'clicking' the icon in the 'Line Style' column. This launches the 'Choose Line Style' dialog box as illustrated above. 'Click' in the coloured cells in the 'Areas to select Data from' columns to link the 'Areas' and ' Regression lines'. The user can then either : 'check' the 'Fixed Grad' button and type in a pressure 'Gradient' value, or Click the 'Calculate' icon to allow IP to calculate the regression line for the points in the chosen area. The user has the option to select from a number of 'Regression Types' from the drop-down list. These are: x = f (y) x = RMA (y) x = Robust fit (y) (the default type) y = f (x) Up to 6 regression lines can be calculated from digitized 'Areas'.

'Reference Lines' tab The 'Reference Lines' tab provides the user with the facility to add further gradient lines to the display.

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

641

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

These could, for example, be used to display offset well pressure gradients and fluid contact depths for comparison with the well data being analysed. 'Reference Lines' are defined by a gradient, in appropriate units, and an (x,y) coordinate through which the line passes. Line style can be selected from the 'Choose Line Style' window.

Below is an example of a Pressure Plot with the References Lines crossing at the Passing Thro' point defined in the Pressure Plot Dialog.

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

Senergy

View Well and Curve Data

642

'View Report' allows the user to save the Pressure gradient interpretation data. A pop-up window prompts the user for a file name for the .txt file which will be saved to the external wellXXX directory. The report for the Crossplot illustrated above is listed below:

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

643

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The pressure versus depth Crossplot format can be saved for future use by selecting the 'Save Format' option from the 'File' menu.

'Line Intersections' tab The 'Line Intersections' tab enables the user to add line intersection points to regression lines and reference lines. The intersection points can be defined by selecting a line and then using the drop-down boxes in the 'Clip Left To' and 'Clip Right To' to select available boundary lines. Or by using these icons to select the clip point with the mouse cursor - 'click' on this icon and then use mouse cursor to select left intersection point. This will automatically fill in the 'Clip Left To' box with a value. - 'click' on this icon and then use mouse cursor to select right intersection point. This will automatically fill in the 'Clip Right To' box with a value.

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

644

'Show Label' - 'checking' the appropriate row turns 'on' /'off' the regression line intersection point label which appears on the Crossplot as a Pressure / depth pair of coordinates in parentheses. Below is an example of the 'Line Intersections' tab with Regression Lines 2 and 3 Clipped to Regression Line 4.

The Intersection Points are where the Lines are Clipped to Regression Line 4.

Printing

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

645

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Crossplots can be sent to the clipboard for pasting into other applications for annotation. If the user wishes not to have 'areas' displayed on the output image there is an option, found by clicking the 'Edit Format' button to display the Crossplot Dialog, on the 'Options' tab, to 'Turn off 'Areas' for output to clipboard'. This should be 'checked'.

In common with other Crossplot print options, the user can save the plot as an image (.emf) or print directly to the IP default printer.

Related Topics Managing Crossplots 3D Crossplots Frequency Crossplots Pressure Gradient Plots Standalone Pickett Plot Multi-Well Crossplots Multi-Curve Crossplots Multi-Zone Crossplots

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy 8.3.6.4

646

Standalone Pickett Plot

The 'Standalone Pickett Plot' can be accessed from the main Crossplot window. The necessary Pickett Plot curves are required to be entered into the 'X' and 'Y' axes. Both the X and the Y Axis MUST be defined as a LOG SCALE and have a value GREATER THAN ZERO. NOTE: whatever porosity curve is used it MUST have its 'Curve Type' set to Porosity. Or use 'Load Format'

'Project Defaults Crossplot'

'saturation'

'Pickett' to chose the

default Pickett plot.

'Clicking' 'Apply' causes the following screen to be displayed. Here it is possible to set up the lines of equal Water Saturation and enter values of Rw, m, n, and a.

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

647

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The 'Lock' feature allows the Rw or m values to be fixed whilst the interactive line on the Pickett plot plot is adjusted. Locking one value will allow only the other value to be adjusted and can be used to prevent any rounding errors occurring as the line is moved. The Rw values calculated and displayed in the 'Sw Pickett plot lines' screen or in the task bar of the Crossplot window are at the formation temperature. NOTE: this temperature is the average formation temperature in the zone being worked on and is from the inputted temperature curve. The values of Rw, m, n and a are not fed through to any other IP module from the 'Standalone Pickett Plot'.

The 'Sw Pickett plot lines' screen can be accessed by left mouse button clicking on the

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

648

Crossplot to bring up the Crossplot menu and then selecting 'Sw lines for Pickett plot'.

Values of Rw, m, n and a can be manually entered into the 'Sw Pickett plot lines' screen and the lines on the Crossplot will adjust accordingly. The undo/redo functionality becomes available once the Sw parameter lines are adjusted. This allows the user to easily restore the pickett plot to its original state.

Related Topics Managing Crossplots 3D Crossplots Frequency Crossplots Pressure Gradient Plots Standalone Pickett Plot Multi-Well Crossplots Multi-Curve Crossplots Multi-Zone Crossplots

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

649 8.3.6.5

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Multi-Well Crossplots

A Multi Well Crossplot displays Curve data from Multiple Wells in a single Crossplot. To define a Multi Well Crossplot. Open the Cross Plot Dialog From the Cross Plot Dialog Select the Multi Well Crossplot Check Box, then Click Select Wells and Curves to display the Crossplot Select Wells and Curves Dialog.

From the Crossplot Select Wells and Curves Dialog, Select the additional wells and curves for the Crossplot. The same well and / or curves can be added many times if necessary. NOTE: In the top row of the grid, the selected well is the current 'active' IP well'. The 'Plot Well' 'tick' is locked in this row, so the well cannot be 'un-checked'.

'Well Name' : Enter the well(s) from which to add data to the Crossplot. By clicking on the ' Well Name' column header, all the wells currently loaded in memory will be added to the column. The user can 'check' and 'uncheck' rows to change the well selection available for

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

650

cross plotting. Alternatively, 'click 'in a blank 'Well Name' cell and choose an in-memory well from the drop-down list. 'Plot Well' : Place a 'tick' in the box to add a well and its data to the Crossplot. Clicking in the column header will toggle between turning 'on' / 'off' all data rows in the grid. 'Data Identification' : This is a user editable text box. Whatever is placed in this is displayed on the Crossplot under the 'Well' list. 'X & Y Axis Curve Names' : Select the curve names for each axis of the Crossplot. Z axis curve names are only necessary if a Z axis is to be displayed. By clicking in the 'X , Y, Z axis' column headers the user can refresh the default curve name for each data line. The default curve name will be the curve name shown in the top data row of the grid. 'Top Depth – Bottom Depth' : The top and bottom depth can be changed to view part of a well when the 'Interval Depths' option is selected on the Crossplot 'Scales' tab window. 'Discriminator Set' : By 'clicking ' in this column a drop-down list of all the available discriminator sets appears. The discriminator sets are set up within the 'Discriminators' tab. NOTE: to quickly change all the wells 'Discriminator Set', change the top well ' Discriminator Set' and then click on the 'Discriminator Set' header. 'Point Style' : The default symbol will be that of the 'Point Symbol' chosen on the 'Scales' tab. The user can choose the style in which to plot the points for individual wells by selecting a symbol from the drop-down list box at the end of each row. NOTE: to quickly change all the wells 'Point Style', change the top well 'Point Style' and then click on the ' Point Style' header. 'Point Size' : The default size will be that of the 'Point Size' chosen on the 'Scales' tab.The user can choose the size in which to plot the points for individual wells by selecting a size from the drop-down list box at the end of each row. 'Point colour' : Choose the colour in which to plot the points from the drop-down box . This will not be used if the 'Z axis colour' is set to be the zone colour or if the 'Z axis colour' is set to another curve. 'Advanced Well Select' : launches the 'Select Wells' module in which the user can create, save and retrieve well lists. The 'Clear' button will clear all data from the input grid. Click OK to return to the Crossplot Dialog. Click OK to Create the Multi Well Crossplot.

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

651

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

NOTE: To remove the 'active well' from the Crossplot, simply deselect it from the well list, found to the right hand side of the graphical display. The user can also toggle between a single well and multi-well Crossplot format by Selecting or De-Selecting the 'Multi well Crossplot' check box on the 'Scales' Tab of the Crossplot Dialog.

Related Topics Managing Crossplots 3D Crossplots Frequency Crossplots Pressure Gradient Plots Standalone Pickett Plot Multi-Well Crossplots Multi-Curve Crossplots Multi-Zone Crossplots 8.3.6.6

Multi-Curve Crossplots

The 'Multi-curve Crossplot' can be used for making up Crossplots using a selected number of curves and quality checking the data . It can be performed on one well or many wells (upto 500). Almost the same Crossplot functionality can be found within the 'Cluster Analysis' module. To create a Multi-Curve Crossplot, From the View Menu, Select Multi-Curve Crossplot to display the Multi-Curve Crossplot Dialog. This displays all the curves cross-plotted against each other with the Z axis showing the clusters.

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

652

The cluster mean points are displayed as filled circles. Histograms for each of the curves with all of the data from the selected wells is also shown.

Related Topics Managing Crossplots Crossplot Types Input Curves in Multi Curve Crossplot Define Multi-Curve Discriminators Define Multi-Curve Crossplot Scales 8.3.6.6.1 Input Curves in Multi Curve Crossplot

The user can select up to 500 wells and 8 curves plus a Z-axis curve to Crossplot in this tab. The cells can be populated in a number of ways.

The user can set up their 'Curve Alias' table so that the correct curve is selected for each well. Alternatively, they can use the drop-down curve list and select curves manually. 'Use Curve' - 'check' this column to select a curve. 'Clicking' on the Column Arrow will select/deselect all the curves.

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

653

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

'Default Name' column - Each 'Default Name' is automatically filled in the first time a curve is selected for that row, and can be changed manually thereafter. The values in the 'Default Name' cells are used as the default curve names when a new well is added to the grid. When a new well is added, if the well contains curves that match the default names then those curves are pre-selected for the user. This can be over-ridden if the user has 'Curve Aliasing Mode' set to 'Manual' or 'Automatic'. 'Log' column - if 'checked' will take the base 10 logarithm of the curve before cross plotting. 'Well' column - in the top ('Well Name') row of the grid, the user selects the wells for cross plotting. 'Input Curve' rows - contain the names of the curves that the user wishes to use for cross plotting. The 'Input Curve' types should be the consistent for all wells. For example, all gamma ray logs should be in the same row of the grid, all density log curves should be in the same row of the grid. NOTE: Curve names can vary from well to well. You can use up to eight input curves per well. 'Clicking' on the arrow next to the 'Input Curve' after first entering a 'Default Name' and 'checking' the 'Use Curve' column will autopopulate all the selected wells in that row with the curve name associated with the 'Default Name' curve type. 'Use Well for Xplot Build' - if this is 'checked' then the data from that well will be used in the cross plot. 'Top Depth' and 'Bottom Depth' – these rows are used to specify the depth interval over which to cross plot in the subject well. The default depths are the log minimum and maximum depths in the well. These depths can be changed with the 'Get Depths from Zones' button, or by manually entering new values. 'Show Plot' - this button opens a log plot window for the appropriate well which shows all of the input curves, each in a separate track.

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

654

'Discriminator Crv1' and 'Discriminator Crv2' rows are used to input 'discriminator curves', which can be used to further constrain the data displayed and also to restrict which depth intervals to run the model over. The 'Get Depths from Zones' button, in the bottom left-hand corner of the 'Input' tab, launches a 'Select Depths' dialog. The 'Select Depths' dialog provides the user with an alternative way of specifying the depth ranges. If the 'Full Well Range' box is 'checked' then the 'Zone/Top Set', 'Top' and 'Bottom' boxes are grayed out as the full well range will be used. To select zones then 'uncheck' the 'Full Well Range' box the user then has the option to select a Zone/Tops Set from the drop-down list and use these depths in one well or in multiple wells (click the 'All Wells' button).

The Advanced Well Select Button enables the selection of Wells from the Select Wells Dialog. When the button is clicked a drop down menu is displayed, where the user has the following options.

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

655

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The Add Wells option will Display the Select Wells Dialog to Select the required Wells for the Multi-Curve Crossplot. The Delete Current Wells option removes all the current wells, but leaves the Default curve names and any model currently in use. This then allows a new group of wells to be easily selected using the other options. Once loaded the current selected model can easily be applied to them. 'Use Custom Plot Format' - if this is 'checked' then it allows the user to type in or browse for a saved plot format that they wish to use. 'Multi-well Plot' - creates a multi-well plot, in the 'Well Correlation Viewer' module, of the currently selected 'Use Well for Xplot Build' wells. The 'Reset form' button clears all the user defined entries in the 'Input' tab of the module, returning this tab to its default state. The 'Load model' and 'Save model' buttons allows the loading and saving of models. A model can also be saved using the 'Save Parameter Set' menu item.

Related Topics Managing Crossplots Crossplot Types Input Curves in Multi Curve Crossplot Define Multi-Curve Discriminators Define Multi-Curve Crossplot Scales

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

656

8.3.6.6.2 Define Multi-Curve Discriminators

The 'DISCRIMINATORS' can be used for limiting the data for input into the model and also limiting the interval over which to run the model.

Related Topics Managing Crossplots Crossplot Types Input Curves in Multi Curve Crossplot Define Multi-Curve Discriminators Define Multi-Curve Crossplot Scales 8.3.6.6.3 Define Multi-Curve Crossplot Scales

Within this tab the user can refine the scales of the curves that are going to be displayed in the Crossplots. If the curve has a mnemonic that exists within theCPARMDEF.PAR file then the curve will be displayed with its 'default' display characteristics. See 'Tools'

'Defaults'

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

'Edit Curve

657

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

System Defaults' for more information on the CPARMDEF.PAR file.

If the user wishes to change their curve selection then they will have to go back to the 'Input' tab to do this. The number of 'Z axis Colors' can be defined here. To view the 'Multi-curve Crossplot' 'click' the 'Crossplot' button. Depending upon the number of wells and curves selected then it can take a few seconds for the 'Multi-Curve Crossplot' window to populate.

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

658

This displays all the curves cross-plotted against each other with the Z axis showing either the Z axis curve or the well(s). There are also histograms of each of the curves with data included from all the wells selected. It is possible to increase or decrease the size of the Crossplots by using the buttons in the topleft of the module. If data falls outside the scales then a quick way of seeing the data is to hold the cursor over a Crossplot and then drag, whilst holding down the right mouse button, the cursor vertically - this changes the Y axis scale. If the right mouse button is held down and the cursor dragged horizontally then the X axis is changed. Alternatively the scales for each curve can be set in the 'Crossplot' tab. To zoom in on a certain area of the Crossplot hold the left mouse button and drag the cursor over the data that needs to be enlarged. A small white box will be drawn.

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

659

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Once the left mouse button is released the Crossplot resizes focussed in on the area of interest.

If the 'Wells Z Axis' box is 'checked', the 'Display Z Axis Colors' and colour bar become hidden from view. By using the 'Show' check box it is possible to quickly select/deselect wells.

If the 'Auto Update' box is 'checked' then every change made occurs immediately. However, if there are many curves and wells selected then the Crossplots could take time to refresh with the changes. In this case in would be best to 'un-check' the 'Auto Update' box. If wells are now deselected, the 'Show' column for the de-selected well turns a peach colour.

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

660

Only when the 'Update' button is 'clicked' do the changes take effect and the 'Show' column changes back to white.

The 'Show Lower diagonal plots only' box is available to speed up the refresh of the screen after any changes have been made. This is particularly needed if many wells and curves have been chosen.

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

661

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

'Clicking' on the 'Output' button gives the option of outputting the 'Multi-Curve Crossplot' screen to 'Printer' - output goes directly to the users 'default' printer. 'Clipboard' - allows the user to paste the 'Multi-Curve Crossplot' screen to a Word, PowerPoint or Excel document. 'File' - save the screen as an .emf, .bmp, .cgm, .gif, .jpg, .png, or .tif file in the project folder.

Related Topics Managing Crossplots Crossplot Types Input Curves in Multi Curve Crossplot Define Multi-Curve Discriminators Define Multi-Curve Crossplot Scales 8.3.6.7

Multi-Zone Crossplots

Crossplots can be created for Multiple Zones within a Well. To define a Mutli Zone Crossplot. Open the Cross Plot Dialog From the Cross Plot Dialog, Select the Zonal Depths Radio Button, Specify the required Parameter Set and Active Zone to display in the Crossplot.

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

Click OK to Display the Multi-Zone Crossplot.

Related Topics Managing Crossplots

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

662

663

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

3D Crossplots Frequency Crossplots Pressure Gradient Plots Standalone Pickett Plot Multi-Well Crossplots Multi-Curve Crossplots Multi-Zone Crossplots

Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots

Senergy

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

8.4

664

3D Parameter Viewer

The 3D Parameter Viewer and 3D Visualization provides a versatile, interactive, graphical representation of the selected well data and can output results from any Interpretation module within Interactive Petrophysics v3.6. The 3D Visualization Window enables calculated reservoir parameters, for example Porosity and Water Saturation, Net Reservoir and Net Pay Thickness for all wells or for selected wells in an Interactive Petrophysics v3.6 database. Deeper investigation and Data Examination, for example Rw, Wet Clay Density, m, n, used in Porosity and Water Saturation can be completed on a field-wide basis. Using the 3D Parameter Viewer enables the comparison of parameter values across different Interactive Petrophysics modules, or in the same module after different Interpretations have been run. The 3D Parameter Viewer is arranged over 3 separate Tabs, Well Selection, Parameter Selection and Define 3D View, providing a logical sequence to producing a 3D Visualization. Select the Required Well Specify 3D Viewer Parameters Define 3D Viewer Settings View the 3D Visualization Data can be viewed on a single-zone (row) basis or can be combined to provide composited (Multiple row) averaged or summed results. These options can be used, for example, to view average porosity across a number of reservoir zones or to view total net pay thicknesses over a number of zones. Note: The tool is not a 'mapping' application and does not produce output such as 'grids' that can be used in other applications. Note: Wells should have location data (Lat. / Long. or UTM E / N), and in the case of deviated wells - deviation surveys, loaded to Interactive Petrophysics. (See Manage Well Header Info. ) in order to display data points in correct spatial position relative to adjacent wells.

Section 8.4 View Well and Curve Data : 3D Parameter Viewer

665

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Related Topics Select the Required Well Specify 3D Viewer Parameters Define 3D Viewer Settings View the 3D Visualization 3D Visualization Examples

Section 8.4 View Well and Curve Data : 3D Parameter Viewer

Senergy

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

8.4.1

666

Select the Required Well

The first step to viewing well data as a 3 Dimensional Model is to Select the Required Well. 1. From the View Menu, Select 3D Parameter Viewer to display the 3D Parameter Viewer Window.

NOTE: It is important for the correct spatial distribution of the wells and parameters in the 3D view, that wells have valid Locations (Lat /Long or UTM) and, if deviated, have deviation surveys loaded to Interactive Petrophysics v3.6.

The Surface Location Information can be

entered manually into the Position Tab of the Manage Well Header Info Dialog. Well Deviation Survey Data can be loaded by selecting True Vertical Depth from the Calculation Menu.

Section 8.4 View Well and Curve Data : 3D Parameter Viewer

667

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

2. Select the required wells and ensure all TVD Curves are specified for the selected wells. 3. Click Next to display the Parameter Selection Tab and Specify the 3D Viewer Parameters.

Related Topics Select the Required Well Specify 3D Viewer Parameters Define 3D Viewer Settings View the 3D Visualization 3D Visualization Examples

8.4.2

Specify 3D Viewer Parameters

Once the required well is selected, the Parameter Selection Tab in the 3D Parameter Viewer is displayed. The Parameter Selection tab enables the definition of the Parameter Sets and associated Parameters to be viewed in the 3D Viewer. Wells appear in the Parameter Selection Tab in a Tabular Grid display, sorted by Zone Name, Depths and Values. 1. From the Parameter Set Drop Down Menu, Select the required Parameter Set to display the list of available Parameters in the Parameter to View Drop Down Menu. 2. From the Select Parameter to View Drop Down Menu, Select the required Parameter. 3. Click either the Well Header, the Zone Name or the Individual Well Zones to Select the

Section 8.4 View Well and Curve Data : 3D Parameter Viewer

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

668

required Well Zones. Note: Clicking an individual cell, selects a single Well Zone, Clicking the Well Header, selects all Zones for the Selected Well and Clicking the Zone Header selects all Wells for the selected Zone. Note: Comparison of Parameters can be done per zone or by selecting multiple rows. Values can be Summed or Averaged by Selecting either Averaged Values or Summed Values. For example: the Total (Sum) Net Pay for All Wells, or Average Porosity/Water Saturation for a Range of Zones. Note: When the Auto-Refresh button is selected, any modifications to the Well / Zone Grid will be saved to the 3D Viewer, once the initial 3D View has been executed.

Related Topics Select the Required Well Specify 3D Viewer Parameters Define 3D Viewer Settings View the 3D Visualization 3D Visualization Examples

Section 8.4 View Well and Curve Data : 3D Parameter Viewer

669

8.4.3

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Define 3D Viewer Settings

The Define 3D View tab enables the definition of the properties of the graphical representation displayed in the 3D Viewer.

1. From the Z Axis and Contours section and the Colour Scale, specify either Depth or Parameter. Note: When Depth is selected the Scale Text Boxes display Shallow Value and Deep Value and are populated with the minimum and maximum depths of the selected data range. These values can be entered manually and Saved by selecting Keep My Scale.

Note: When Parameter is selected the Scale Text Boxes display Min Value and Max Value and are populated with the minimum and maximum values of the selected Parameter

Section 8.4 View Well and Curve Data : 3D Parameter Viewer

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

670

range. These values can be entered manually and Saved by selecting Keep My Scale.

Note: Contour Spacing is set to a default nominal value which can be user-defined and saved by Clicking Keep My Scale.

2. Click Save to Save the 3D Visualization parameters for each 3D Plot, (saved as a *.p3d file). Click Load to open a *.p3d file and Load the parameters into the 3D Parameter Viewer dialog.

3. Once the 3D View Settings have been defined, Click Run Visualization to display the selected wells in the 3D Visualization Window.

Section 8.4 View Well and Curve Data : 3D Parameter Viewer

671

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Related Topics Select the Required Well Specify 3D Viewer Parameters Define 3D Viewer Settings View the 3D Visualization 3D Visualization Examples

8.4.4

View the 3D Visualization

The 3D Visualization Window displays a 3-dimensional graphical representation of the well data. 1. Click and Drag the Visualization to rotate. 2. Select the required Colour Spectrum from the Spectrum Drop Down Menu

Section 8.4 View Well and Curve Data : 3D Parameter Viewer

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

672

3. Select Show Contours to display or remove the contours from the 3D Visualization. 4. Increase the Thickness Value to increase the line thickness of the displayed contours. 5. Click Show Well Labels and Select either Names, Values, or Names and Values to display the Well Labels in the 3D Visualization. Note: The Well Labels Radio Buttons are only active when Show Well Labels is selected.

6. Click Show Grid Lines to display the rectangular grid lines that define the depth or parameter surface. Note: The 3D Grid dimensions are defined in the 3D Parameter Viewer dialog, Define 3D View Tab. When edited in the 3D Parameter Viewer dialog, the changes will be displayed in the 3D Visualization. 7. Click Show Whole Well Path to display the entire well path and it's orientation within the selected Depth Scale. Note: The Show Whole Well Path is only active if the Z Axis in the 3D Parameter Viewer dialog is set to Depth. By default, well paths are truncated at the intersection of the well and the Depth or Parameter surface.

Section 8.4 View Well and Curve Data : 3D Parameter Viewer

673

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

8. Click 3D View mode to display the Visualization as a 3-Dimensional Graphical Representation. If this Check Box is not selected the Visualization will be displayed as a 2Dimensional Map. 9. Click Setup to display the 3D Parameter Viewer - Output Setup dialog.

Note:This dialog enables the addition of Titles for the 3D Visualization. Note: The Plot Size dimensions will set the size of any clipboard image to the Height and Width Settings. Note: The default font for the Title and Annotation can also be defined. 10.Click Clipboard to copy the current 3D Visualization to the clipboard for use in other applications. Click Print to send the 3D Visualization to the Interactive Petrophysics default printer (File Menu, Printer Setup).

Related Topics Select the Required Well Specify 3D Viewer Parameters Define 3D Viewer Settings View the 3D Visualization 3D Visualization Examples

Section 8.4 View Well and Curve Data : 3D Parameter Viewer

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

8.4.5

3D Visualization Examples

Below are some examples of 3D Visualization in Interactive Petrophysics v3.6.

Z axis Depth / colour Scale Depth

Z Axis Depth / colour Scale Parameter (Net Pay)

Section 8.4 View Well and Curve Data : 3D Parameter Viewer

674

675

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Z Axis Parameter / colour Scale Parameter (Net Pay)

Section 8.4 View Well and Curve Data : 3D Parameter Viewer

Senergy

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

Z Axis Parameter / colour Scale Parameter (net Pay)

Section 8.4 View Well and Curve Data : 3D Parameter Viewer

676

677

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Related Topics Select the Required Well Specify 3D Viewer Parameters Define 3D Viewer Settings View the 3D Visualization 3D Visualization Examples

Section 8.4 View Well and Curve Data : 3D Parameter Viewer

Senergy

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

8.5

678

Multi-Well Correlation Viewer

The 'Multi-Well Correlation Viewer' module provides the user with an interface to view multiple wells and to plot correlation lines between wells held in an IP database. Zone tops can be displayed and edited and wells can be 'datumed' (Flattened) on a zone top or to a reference depth by simple 'mouse click' operations. Wells can be added or removed from the display window and moved around within the multi-well viewer. Multi-well plot formats can be saved into the database directory for easy recall and redisplay. Plots can be output to the clipboard for pasting into external documents or can be sent directly to available printers.

Section 8.5 View Well and Curve Data : Multi-Well Correlation Viewer

679

8.5.1

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Multi-Well Correlation Viewer

The 'Multi-Well Correlation Viewer' is launched by selecting the 'Multi-Well Correlation Viewer' menu item under the 'View' menu, or by using the speed button (

).

Up to 10 multi-well plots can be displayed simultaneously. Each multi-well view can display up to 50 wells. However, there is an overall display limit of 250 individual well plots. The multi-well viewer uses 'Zone / Tops Sets' (tops) to draw correlation lines and shading between the wells in the view window. The same 'Zones / Tops' Set should be available in all wells in order to draw the correlation lines between the wells. The module uses the 'Zone Name' to decide which zones correlate between wells. It is therefore essential that a consistent naming convention is used. The module does not distinguish between upper and lower case characters, therefore 'C zone' and 'c Zone' would be considered to be the same. In the Multi-Well Correlation viewer the user can create a new Zone / Tops Set, then interactively create, move or delete zone tops in that Set. Alternatively, the user can select an existing multiwell Zone / Tops Set, make a copy of it and perform the same operations on that Set. When the Multi-Well Correlation Viewer window launches, the user uses the header bar buttons to set up and modify the correlation viewer display.

The Buttons are: 'Wells' 'File' 'Settings' 'Options' The functionality associated with each button is described below. Creating, editing and re-naming tops in this module is covered in the 'Editing Tops in the Multiwell Correlation Viewer' Section. A 'New Correlation workflow' is presented at the end of this chapter.

'Wells' Button The user must first select the wells to be displayed. Click on the 'Wells' button and, in the 'Select Wells' dialog, move the wells to be displayed from the 'Available Wells' column to the 'Selected Wells' column. The 'arrow' buttons allow the user to move wells between the 'Available Wells' and 'Selected Wells' panels. It is also possible to 'left mouse click' on a well name and drag it to the opposite panel while holding down the mouse button. The order, from top to bottom, in which the selected wells appear in the 'Selected Wells'

Section 8.5 View Well and Curve Data : Multi-Well Correlation Viewer

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

680

list will be the order, left to right, in which they are displayed in the Multi-Well Correlation Viewer display.

Click 'OK' to display the wells in the plot. At this stage only the well names and tops and bottom depths will be displayed.

Section 8.5 View Well and Curve Data : Multi-Well Correlation Viewer

681

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

To display a Zone Set 'click' on the 'Zone Set' drop-down list box and select a Zone / Tops Set to use. The zone tops and bottoms will be displayed in the window, together with any zone colours scheme that has been set up in the 'Edit Zone / Tops Set' module. A number of interactive 'handles/markers' and menus are available in the Correlation window to allow the user to modify / create / delete zones in the correlation viewer. The user can 'datum' the multi-well view on a zone top, at an arbitrary depth ('Align Reference Depth') or at a user-selected depth ('Set Align Depth'). These are illustrated in the following screen capture.

Section 8.5 View Well and Curve Data : Multi-Well Correlation Viewer

Senergy

View Well and Curve Data

'Checking' the 'Fit' check box in the correlation viewer header bar will force all wells to be displayed in the plot window. If 'Fit' is not 'checked', the wells will be displayed at their proper width and the user will have to scroll left and right to display all wells.

Section 8.5 View Well and Curve Data : Multi-Well Correlation Viewer

682

683

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

In the display shown above the 'Tops' set is being used for the correlation. The plot is depthaligned on the top 'Ness' Zone. The vertical scale has been expanded to make the zone names legible. The 'Tops Only' check box allows the user to toggle between a 'Tops Only' display (illustrated above) and a 'Log Plot' view. To view the Log Plot display 'uncheck' the 'Tops Only' check box. In this case the 'default' log plot format for each well will be displayed. To display all wells in the correlation panel with a common plot format, use the 'File'

'Load

Single Well Format to all Wells' option, which copies a user-selected log plot format to all wells in the window. 'Overview' tracks can be displayed for each well. However, these can often detract from the overall plot appearance and it is suggested that a plot format, without an overview track, is used. Overview tracks can be turned 'off' from the 'Options' menu

'Hide all overview tracks'.

Section 8.5 View Well and Curve Data : Multi-Well Correlation Viewer

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

684

To edit an individual well plot format, click in the track header of the well you wish to change. The normal 'Log Plot Format' window will appear. To get access to the grid properties click the 'All tracks' button on this window. This will also allow you to load a saved log plot format for that specific well. This will only affect the well being worked on. Editing Tops in the Multi-Well Correlation Viewer

Interactive Changing of Tops There are two methods for changing zone tops interactively. 1. If a zone track is displayed in a well then its zone tops and bottoms can be interactively changed in the same way as the normal single well plot (click on, and drag). 2. With the Ctrl key held down place the cursor on one of the correlation lines in between plots next to the well for which you want to change the zone top. The cursor will change to an up-down pointer. 'Click and drag' the zone top to the new position. Re-Naming Tops Place the mouse cursor on one of the correlation lines between two wells, next to the well that

Section 8.5 View Well and Curve Data : Multi-Well Correlation Viewer

685

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

you want to rename a zone top. The cursor will change to a 'pointing hand'. A right mouse 'click' will bring up the following dialog box. Using this dialog you can choose whether to rename the well top in the left- or right -hand well, or bring up the 'Create/Edit Zone Link' window by selecting 'Properties'.

If the 'Rename Left Side' or 'Rename Right Side' option is 'clicked' then the 'New Zone Name' window appears.

If you rename a Top, the correlation will no longer be valid, since you have broken the 'connection' between adjacent wells. The correlation line will be deleted. Linking Tops Un-named tops or tops with different names can be linked so that a common 'Top' name is used. This is done by 'clicking' on the 'Zone Top' marker (small green square) and dragging the top line

Section 8.5 View Well and Curve Data : Multi-Well Correlation Viewer

Senergy

View Well and Curve Data

686

to the next well to the 'Top' that is to be linked. When the mouse button is released the 'Create/Edit Zone Link' window (see above) will appear, allowing the user to set the name for the top and therefore link the tops.

Adding New Tops To add a new zone to a well where no zone previously existed, hold the 'Ctrl' key down and right mouse 'click' in the grey area between wells next to the well where the zone is to be created. Select the 'New Zone' pop-up menu item and the new zone will be created. The new zone has a top and bottom depth. The bottom depth can be changed by holding the 'Ctrl' key down and then placing the cursor on the zone bottom marker and dragging the line to a new depth.

Section 8.5 View Well and Curve Data : Multi-Well Correlation Viewer

687

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Deleting Tops / Splitting Zones To delete or split a zone, hold the 'Ctrl' key down and right mouse click in the grey area between wells next to the well where the zone is to be deleted or split. Select the required function from the pop-up menu .

Changing Zone associated with analyses modules If the selected Zone Set is not of type 'Tops', for example from the 'PhiSw' interpretation module (the zone Set type is displayed in brackets next to the zone name) then every time a zone top or bottom is moved, the analysis routine associated with the Set will automatically be run. This can be very useful if the user uses the multi-well Correlation module to align analysis tops so that similar parameters are used in the same zones in each well in a field.

'File' Button

The 'File' button allows the user to save and restore (Load) multi-well formats (Wells / well order / plot formats) as well as providing the facility to load a single well format to all wells in the multi-well plot. This last function is very useful for applying an identical plot format to all wells in the display. A format can be created in a single well and then saved to disk using the 'Save Plot Format Generic' menu option, this can then be recalled from the multi-well plot 'File' menu and used for all wells. When the user saves a particular cross section format and then recalls/loads the format file (.

Section 8.5 View Well and Curve Data : Multi-Well Correlation Viewer

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

688

wmp), the name of the format/cross section panel is displayed in the multi-well panel header bar, in parentheses after the Multi-Well Correlation label, in the top left-hand corner, as illustrated below:

'Settings' Button Click the 'Settings' button to open up the 'Multi-Well Settings Format' window. This window allows the user to change the overall format of the wells in the correlation panel. The user can change a number of display parameters and zone colour shading. The Settings are arranged on two 'tabbed' screens. These are : 'Wells' and 'Zones'.

Section 8.5 View Well and Curve Data : Multi-Well Correlation Viewer

689

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The 'Wells' Tab

'Trk # ': This column shows the order in which the selected wells will be displayed in the Correlation window. 'Clicking and dragging' on a track number in the 'Trk #' column, will allow the order of the wells in the plot to be re-arranged. 'Well Name' : This column allows the user to change or remove wells from the plot. Wells can be changed by clicking on a 'Well Name' entry in the grid and selecting a different well name from the drop-down well list. A well can be removed by clicking on a Well Name in the grid and selecting the 'blank' entry in the well name list. A well can be added more than once to the correlation plot. 'Width' : This column shows the width of each well log plot in the correlation panel, in IP project 'default units' (inches or cm). 'Gap' : This column shows the width of the gap that is set between wells in the correlation panel (inches or cm). 'Top Depth' : Enter the top depth for the well. This is the well measured depth, regardless of what curve is used as the 'Ref Depth'. The 'Default' value is well 'Top Depth'. 'Bot Depth' : Enter the bottom depth for the well. The 'Default' value is the well 'Bottom Depth'.

Section 8.5 View Well and Curve Data : Multi-Well Correlation Viewer

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

690

'Ref Depth' : Enter the Depth reference curve name from the drop-down list. The Depth Reference curve will be used to align the wells in the correlation panel. This can be set to DEPTH (Measured Depth) or to TVD / TVDSS (True Vertical Depth) for all wells in the display. NOTE: IP will warn you if you select, for example, wells which have TVDSS curves in a mix of 'positive' and 'negative' depth notation. TVDSS curves must ALL be in a common positive' or 'negative' notation. 'Define' : Click the 'Define' button to set the well display depths from the selected 'Zone/ Top Set' tops and bottoms. This will display the 'Select Plot Range' window, similar to that illustrated below:

The 'Select Plot Range' window allows wells to be displayed using depths picked from the current Tops Set. Select the 'Top' and 'Bottom' from the drop-down boxes. The 'Tolerance' column is used to modify the log display relative to the selected top depths. In the above example, for 'Well A1', the data will be displayed 100 ft/meters shallower ('minus' notation) than the 'RN36 (Top)' and 100 ft/meters deeper than the ' Bottom' of the 'RN12 (Bottom)'. The 'Full Well Range' box, if 'checked', will set the depths to the full well range for the selected well. The 'All Wells' button, if clicked, will apply the 'Select Plot Range' criteria to all wells currently loaded in the multi-well panel display. This allows the user to quickly make a plot over a selected zonal range for all wells. The 'Ok' button will set the depths for all the displayed well. 'Default Widths' : The 'Default widths' box on the 'Multi-Well Settings Format' window, allows the user to set the same 'Well Gap' and 'Well Width' for all wells. 'Set Ref. Depth Curve for all Wells' : this option gives the user a shortcut to set the depth reference curve for all wells in a multi-well correlation. The user can select TVD or Measured Depth (MD) options. The program will find the relevant curve in every well in the correlation, if the curve exists. The 'Zones' Tab

Section 8.5 View Well and Curve Data : Multi-Well Correlation Viewer

691

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The 'Zones' tab sets up the display criteria for the area between wells. The window shows a list of the Zone names in the user-selected Zone Set, the number of wells ('No Wells') in which each zone is present in the display and a Zone colour selection column. A number of check boxes that affect the correlation view are described below: 'Hide Shading' check box : If the 'Hide Shading' box is not 'checked' (the default setting) then the inter-well gaps will be shaded with the colours shown in the colour table. The user can change the colours as needed. 'Hide Zone Markers' check box : The 'Hide Zone Markers' option, if 'checked', will remove the small square zone markers which are shown to the sides of each well in a correlation panel. This option allows the user to 'clean up' a correlation display before printing or copying to the clipboard for pasting into other applications. 'Show Zone Names above Zone Tops' : if 'un-checked' will remove the zone names from above the zone correlations. 'Set Zone colours in Wells' check box : if 'checked', this option allows the user to save any changes they make to the zone colours in the multi-well display, back into the Zone Set that was selected when setting up the correlation viewer.

Section 8.5 View Well and Curve Data : Multi-Well Correlation Viewer

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

692

'Options' Button The 'Options' button launches a number of display controls that affect all wells in a correlation view, simultaneously.

'Hide All Overview Tracks' : This will remove from the well plots any overview track which has been included in the plot format. The overview track is generally not useful in the correlation plot. 'Add a Zone Track to all Wells - Names only' : This will add a zone track, containing the currently-selected Zone Set, to the left hand side of all well plots. This can be useful for changing zone tops. 'Add a Zone Track to all Wells - Colour Zones' : This will add a zone track, containing the currently-selected Zone Set and colour coded (as set up in the 'Edit Zones /Tops Sets' module), to the left hand side of all well plots in the correlation view. 'Remove Zone track from all Wells' : This removes the zone track from all wells in a correlation view, if the Zone tracks are present as the left-hand track in each log plot. 'Add Zones / Tops lines to all Tracks': This will add horizontal lines across each log track in each log plot, using the currently-selected Zone Set. The following dialog box will allow the user to select the colour of the lines.

'Remove Zone / Tops lines from all Tracks' : This reverses the 'Add Zones / Tops

Section 8.5 View Well and Curve Data : Multi-Well Correlation Viewer

693

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

lines to all Tracks' operation. 'Create a New Zone / Tops Set for selected wells' : This allows the user to create a new multi-well Tops Set in the wells in the correlation panel in order to start a new correlation. The following dialog allows the user to choose the name of the Tops Set.

'Add this Zone Set to all selected wells' : This is useful if one wants to add a new well into a correlation and then to correlate between it and surrounding wells. This option, when selected, will add the current Zone Set into the new well. 'Create a copy of the selected Zone / Tops Set' : This will make a copy of the currentlyselected Zone Set and make this copy the 'active' Zone Set. This is useful if the user wants to edit the current correlation but does not want to overwrite the existing correlation zones.

'Change Track Border Width All Wells' : This option, if selected, allows you to change the line thickness used to define log track boundaries on each log plot. The line thickness change is applied to all wells in the correlation panel. The default line thickness is set to '2'. Thicker border lines can be achieved by typing in a higher value and clicking 'OK'.

Output to Printer or File

Section 8.5 View Well and Curve Data : Multi-Well Correlation Viewer

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

By clicking on the print button

694

the plot can be output to a printer, the Clipboard or to a

graphics file. The same options are available as for the single well plot output, except that plot depths are now set up in the multi-well plot 'Settings' window and horizontal, log track depth grid lines can be set up for each well.

The 'Advanced' tab allows you to set up further 'hardcopy' options. These are described below:

Section 8.5 View Well and Curve Data : Multi-Well Correlation Viewer

695

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

In the 'MultiWell' Panel on the 'Advanced' tab, highlighted above, the user is able to select one, or more, of the following options: 'Hide Shading' - 'Ticking' this option will remove any Zone shading, that may be visible inside IP, from between the wells in the multi-well panel on the hardcopy output. 'Hide Zone Markers' - 'Ticking' this option will remove the Zone Tie symbols, the small, dark green markers on the sides of each well log, from the hardcopy output. 'Plot Well Name Header just above well plot' - 'Ticking' this option will 'anchor' the ' Well Name' title box to the top of each individual well log plot, rather than to the top of the Correlation panel. 'Plot Well Header at bottom of log' - 'Ticking' this option will put a 'Well Name' title box at the bottom of the correlation Panel. If 'Plot Well Name Header just above well plot' is also 'checked', the title boxes on the bottom of the panel are 'anchored' to the base of

Section 8.5 View Well and Curve Data : Multi-Well Correlation Viewer

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

696

each individual log plot.

New Correlation Workflow The following workflow is one way in which a new correlation could be made. 1. Create a Multi-well correlation and load all wells in the correlation into it ('Wells' button). 2. Load a simple correlation log plot for each well. 'File' 'Load a Single Well Format to all Wells' and display the log plots ('Tops Only' 'un-checked').

3. Create a new Tops Set for all wells. ('Options' selected wells').

'Create a New Zone / Tops Set for

Section 8.5 View Well and Curve Data : Multi-Well Correlation Viewer

697

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

4. Add the Tops to each well plot as lines. ('Options' 'Add Zone / Tops lines to all Tracks'). A confirm message appears which also allows the user to select the colour of the Tops lines.

5. In the first well, create a new zone and drag its top and bottom depth to cover the total correlation interval. The top should be aligned to the top zone in the correlation. NOTE: the green solid rectangle is the zone marker; the yellow solid rectangle is for guidance purposes only. Therefore tops can only be drawn between green solid rectangles. If the green rectangles don't exist then 'Ctrl' right click and 'Split Zone' to create new zones between the green solid rectangle and the yellow solid rectangle. 6. In the second well, create another new zone and align as in the first well.

Section 8.5 View Well and Curve Data : Multi-Well Correlation Viewer

Senergy

View Well and Curve Data

698

7. Link and name the top correlation. Click on the left-well top marker and drag it to the rightwell top marker.

8. Create the next zone down by splitting the upper zone. Do this for both left and right wells.

Section 8.5 View Well and Curve Data : Multi-Well Correlation Viewer

699

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

9. Name and link the next zone by dragging the left-well top marker to the right-well top marker as done in step 7.

10. The correlation can be continued in the same way by splitting zones and linking markers. When the first two wells are correlated then the user can move on to the next well using exactly the same methodology until the whole correlation has been built up.

Section 8.5 View Well and Curve Data : Multi-Well Correlation Viewer

Senergy

View Well and Curve Data

Section 8.5 View Well and Curve Data : Multi-Well Correlation Viewer

700

701

8.6

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Well Map

The 'Well Map' is a graphical interface where wells can be viewed together with geographical and cultural information loaded into IP from external SHAPE, .OVL or .DAT files. The interface allows users to identify and discriminate between wells that are in the database but not loaded into memory ("Available Wells") and in-memory ("Loaded Wells") based on symbol colours. NOTE: IP only recognizes Latitude and Longitude values that use the WGS84 datum. A 'datum' is the combination of an ellipsoid, which specifies the size and shape of the earth, and a base point from which the latitude and longitude of all other points are referenced. Well location coordinates based on one datum will not necessarily overlay data based on another datum. For example, entering Latitude and Longitude coordinates using any other datum, e.g. ED50, will not compute a correct UTM Easting / Northing for a well, since the IP Geographical to rectangular coordinates conversion assumes values are input as WGS84. Geographical coordinates are entered for a well, using the appropriate text entry boxes on the ' Position' tab of the 'Manage Well Header Info.' module. The 'Well Map' interface is launched from the 'View' menu or from the 'Project' toolbar.

The 'Well Map' enables the user to view an often extensive IP well list to either: load wells individually into memory, or load multiple wells into memory at one time by dragging a box around the wells in the graphical display and selecting 'Load'. 'Available Wells' (those wells included in the current IP project, but not loaded into memory) and

Section 8.6 View Well and Curve Data : Well Map

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

702

'Loaded Wells' (in-memory) are distinguished by their symbol colours and the text colour in the ' Well List' panels; Fuschia coloured symbols on the map and Maroon coloured names in the 'Available Wells' panel for 'non-loaded IP Project' wells, Blue coloured symbols on map and Blue coloured names in 'Loaded Wells' panel for 'inmemory', and therefore 'active' wells. The size of the well symbol indicates whether a well has a deviation survey loaded for it, or not. A well which does not have a deviation survey loaded to IP will display with a smaller colour-filled circle than a well which has a deviation survey loaded to the program. The symbol colour denotes 'in-memory' or 'available', as described above.

NOTE: wells must have a 'Well Position' entered in the 'Position' tab of their respective 'Well Header Info.' editors (diagram below), before they will appear on the 'Well Map'. The 'default' position for a well with no position loaded is Latitude 0 degrees / Longitude 0 degrees. Also, in order to be able to see deviated well paths, a deviation survey must have been processed through the 'True Vertical Depth' module for each well, or alternatively 'Departure' curves (' EDIST' and 'NDIST') must be loaded into the well and then be selected in the 'Well Path' panel

Section 8.6 View Well and Curve Data : Well Map

703

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

as illustrated below. In the 'Manage Well Header Info..' window the 'Well Surface Positions' can be entered as either : Latitude/Longitude (WGS84 datum) as Degree, Minutes and Seconds (DMS),or Latitude / Longitude as Decimal Degrees (DD), or UTM Eastings and Northings (UTM Zone must be known). The user can convert Lat/Long (DMS or DD) to UTM co-ordinates and vice versa by clicking on the UTMs/Lat-Long radio buttons. When changing from Lat/Long to UTM co-ordinates, IP will calculate the UTM Zone value from the current Longitude value. The user must 'check' one of the 'Well Path Data Format' radio buttons to tell IP how to interpret the 'East Distance Curve' and 'North Distance Curve' when they have been loaded to the program or computed within IP.

Screen Navigation Controls

Section 8.6 View Well and Curve Data : Well Map

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

704

'Pan or drag screen' : Click the red arrows to scroll the screen display in the direction of the arrow, or 'click & drag' the mouse cursor on the actual map display to position the display where you want it. 'Zoom' : 'Click and drag' the slider button to change the magnification level. The zoom scale range is: 'Minimum' - 6000miles, to 'Maximum' - 8 metres. A range scale bar is shown on the bottom of the screen to aid distance measurements. The same 'zoom' operation is performed by rotating the mouse-wheel when the cursor is in the map display area. 'Font Size' : Use the 'Font Size' buttons to change the size of the text displayed on screen.

Well Position Display 'Well Names' : 'check' to display the well name at the wells' surface location. 'Show at end of Path' : for platform wells, well names plotted at the surface location will overwrite and be illegible. 'Checking' the 'Show at end of Path' button will display the well name at the bottom hole location. 'Well Paths' : Well path information are stored as 'East' and 'North' curves in IP wells. These curves are calculated in the 'True Vertical Depth' module or they are imported from external data. The user must choose these 'departure' curves in the 'East Distance' and ' North Distance' curve drop-down boxes in the 'Manage Well Header Info.' module - ' Position' tab.

Section 8.6 View Well and Curve Data : Well Map

705

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

For depth correction, a TVD curve may also be selected. The 'TVD Type' selection allows you to set the type of TVD curve. Well paths will be shown on the 'Well Map' if the user zooms in to a suitable scale, and has 'checked' the 'Display'

'Well Path' option box.

Cultural Data Overlays Adding overlays to a well location map improves the visual quality of the map. Overlay files can be standard GIS Shape (*.SHP) files, or ASCII (.DAT) and (.OVL) formatted data. The Field outlines shown in the map above are part of a GIS Shape file drawn in light yellow as a 'Polygon', see the section on 'Display Options' below for setting this up. Click the 'Load' button to load an overlay file.

Find Text The 'Find Text' text-entry box allows the user to type in a text string, for example a 'Well name', and IP will locate the well and centre the map on that well. If a text field is associated with a SHAPE file, for example 'Block Number', then you can enter a Block Number into the 'Find Text' box, click 'Find' and the Map will centre on the 'Block Number', if it is found.

Web Resources Many useful web sites containing free Shape files exist. A few useful sites for extracting coastline and other geographical data from are found at : http://oas.ngdc.noaa.gov/mgg/plsql/extractor.search_screen http://www.esri.com For UKCS cultural Information, Shape files can be downloaded from the DEAL website at: http://www.ukdeal.co.uk/ Files downloaded from this site can simply be re-named with a '.OVL' file extension and used directly as a map overlay. 'Right-click' on a map overlay label to activate the pop-up parameter menu.

Draw Sequence and Overlay Priority Overlays are drawn on the map in the order listed on screen, from bottom to top. In the screen capture shown below the 'licgeo.shp' file will be drawn first and the 'IP WELLS' will be drawn last, on top of everything else. The user can move an overlay up / down the display order to achieve the best visual result.

Section 8.6 View Well and Curve Data : Well Map

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

706

'Show overlay text' : GIS Shape files (*.SHP) usually have associated database files containing relevant textual information. When loading a SHP file the user is asked to choose one or more of these text fields. Selecting 'Show Overlay Text' will show the text on screen at the position defined in the database. NOTE: .DAT & .OVL files do not contain any textual information. 'Set colour': Use this setting to choose the colour of the lines for your overlay. 'Change UTM Zone' : .DAT files are written using UTM coordinates, as such, a UTM zone is required before they can be correctly imported. If you used the wrong zone during the import process, this option allows you to change the zone and therefore the position of the overlay. 'Draw as filled Polygon' : Sequential points making up a closed shape lend themselves for display as polygons. A polygon is another way to describe a closed-outline shape with many points. Polygons can be colour-filled (as in the screen shot above) and look nicer on screen. The inside of a polygon shape is your chosen colour and the outline will always be drawn in black. The disadvantage with polygons is they must be closed shapes and drawn in a sequential manner, strange results will be seen if your overlays are not proper polygons. Select this option to see if your file will display properly as a polygon, if not, de-select this option.SHP files are sometimes best shown as polygons. 'Change text fields' : Allows the user to change the text associated with each point as described in 'Show overlay text', above. Use this option to add or remove any available text fields. Text Fields are only available for .SHP files where a DBF file is present. The following descriptions show the format for allowed polygon files: .DAT file format

Section 8.6 View Well and Curve Data : Well Map

707

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The valid ASCII DAT file format is as follows:x, y, segid 409349.77, 409258.76, 409319.43, 409440.78,

6836961.80, 6837295.51, 6837811.23, 6838266.29,

1 1 1 1

etc... The first line is ignored. The positions are in UTM co-ordinates. IP will ask you for a UTM Zone number when you load files of this type. Column 3 is the Segment ID ('segid'). Segments (or polygons) are listed sequentially and a new segment ID number signifies the start of a new segment. For closed shapes the start and end positions must be defined as the same number. .OVL file format The format for ASCII OVL files are as follows:# -b [LF] -61.102493 -52.006747[LF] -61.102493 -52.005866[LF] -61.101613 -52.005280[LF] -61.100146 -52.005573[LF] etc... The file is read sequentially and new segments are defined by the presence of "# -b" flag. Co-ordinates are in Lat / Long format (decimal degrees) and separated by a Line Feed [LF] character, decimal 10, or 0Ah.

Mouse Position

These information panels on the bottom of the Map View display the position of the mouse as you move it about in the map view. UTM Eastings and Northings and UTM Zone values are calculated automatically and displayed with the corresponding Latitude/Longitude position. The Lat / long co-ordinates are in the WGS84 Datum.

'Available Wells' / 'Loaded Wells'

Section 8.6 View Well and Curve Data : Well Map

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

708

The upper, 'Available Wells' panel displays the wells available in the current IP database, but which are not loaded into memory. These wells are shown in the map display by a 'Fuschia' coloured symbol. The lower, 'Loaded Wells' panel lists all those wells currently loaded into IP memory. Wells listed in the lower window are shown as blue coloured symbols in the map view. These are the wells that the user can scroll through using the main menu 'Well' toolbar. The Map View can be used to load wells from the 'Available Wells' list, into memory in a number of ways: Drag & drop a well from the top window to the bottom window, or Select the well on the Map display by clicking it, then click the 'Load' button below the '

Section 8.6 View Well and Curve Data : Well Map

709

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Available Wells' panel, or Use the 'Load Wells by Area' method which is described below. NOTE: wells must have a valid 'position' before they will be displayed on-screen in the correct geographical location. Wells with no 'Position' (see 'Manage Well Header Info.') have IP default co-ordinates Lat / Long (0 degrees North, 0 degrees East) and are displayed on the Equator. 'Go to' button :The 'Go to' button will move to, and centre the screen on, the highlighted well. This makes finding a particular well in a large database very easy. There are 'Go to' buttons for 'Available Wells' and 'Loaded wells'. 'Load' button: In the 'Available Wells' list, click on a single well or use the 'SHIFT' and mouse click to select multiple wells to load into memory. Click the 'Load' button to load the selected well or wells. The well names will transfer from the 'Available Wells' list to the ' Loaded Wells' list. 'Refresh' button: The 'Refresh' button re-loads the current database file. You may have to use the 'File' ->Save All Wells to Database option, before some changes are visible. 'Load Wells by Area' button: Click the 'Start draw' (left hand button) and then 'click & drag' out a rectangle on screen. Wells falling within this box are highlighted in the map view and in the 'Available Wells' panel to be loaded into memory. The usual Windows 'SHIFT' key can be used to select / de-select more wells. Click the 'Load' button to load the selection into memory. Click on the right hand button to erase the selection rectangle if you do not want to load the selected wells. 'Properties' button: Select a well in the 'Loaded Wells' list and click the 'Properties' button to take you to the Manage Well Header Info. dialog for that well. Click the 'Position' tab and enter XY location information if needed.

Related Topics Log Plot Horizontal Log Plot Set Default Plot Format Histogram Crossplot Multi-curve Crossplot 3D Parameter Viewer Multi-Well Correlation Viewer

Section 8.6 View Well and Curve Data : Well Map

Senergy

View Well and Curve Data

Montage Builder

Section 8.6 View Well and Curve Data : Well Map

710

711

8.7

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Montage Builder

The IP 'Montage Builder' is a standalone application, shipped with IP, that provides a graphicalobject editing and display 'workspace' in which the user can combine log plots, crossplots, histograms, correlation panels, core photographs and text on one montage. A comprehensive set of paper-sizing and orientation attributes allows you to work in a scaled workspace, to change display scales (Zoom in / out) and modify object orientation (rotate / flip), to add shape 'primitives' with user-specified colours and colour fill to enhance your presentation.

The 'Montage Builder' application is launched from the 'View' menu.

Section 8.7 View Well and Curve Data : Montage Builder

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

712

The application allows the user to 'capture' graphic objects using the IP 'Clipboard' feature which saves the IP graphic as an enhanced metafile (.emf). These emf files can be pasted directly into the 'Montage Builder' 'canvas' using traditional WINDOWS controls. Graphic files, saved outside of the IP program as .EMF, .GIF, .TIFF, .BMP , .CGM, .JPEG or .PNG files can be inserted into a montage as standalone images or as 'linked' images. A 'linked' image allows you to update a Montage, without repeatedly cutting / pasting graphics elements (log plots, crossplots, histograms etc...) into the montage when an interpretation changes or new log curves become available. You should save the modified IP log plot, crossplot etc.. to the same graphics file name that was used in the original Montage (overwriting / replacing the existing file). Then on the 'Montage Builder' tool, with your montage open, click 'View'

'Refresh' and all edited / modified, linked graphics files

will be updated with your changes applied. Shape 'primitives' - Lines, squares, rectangle, triangles, circles, ovals, can be added as border polygons and colour-filled to highlight some feature on a log plot, for example or to add a border line. colourfill can be added and modified using the 'Transparency' tool to

Section 8.7 View Well and Curve Data : Montage Builder

713

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

modify the effect, from completely opaque (0%) to completely transparent (100%). A Text editing tool allows you to manually type in text or numeric strings and to select the Font, font size, colour, and orientation of the text.

The 'MontageBuilder' User Interface The 'Montage Builder' interface is illustrated below. Many familiar WINDOWS editing functions are available from the toolbars on the main menu bar.

Toolbars can be switched on / off from the 'View' menu

'Toolbars' option. 'Hints', opened by

placing the mouse cursor over a toolbar icon, explain the functionality of the toolbar icon. To remove a toolbar, 'un-tick' the toolbar name from the list.

Setting Up a New Montage When you wish to set up a new montage you must select a paper size on which to build the montage. The paper size is selected from the 'File' menu

'Page Set Up' option, which

launches a 'Document Properties' dialog which incorporates a Paper Size drop-down list from which you can choose the required dimensions and orientation ('Portrait' or 'Landscape'). Click '

Section 8.7 View Well and Curve Data : Montage Builder

View Well and Curve Data

Senergy

714

OK' when you have made your selections.

Building a Montage The 'Montage Builder' workspace will open with a 'blank' document in which to work. The montage can then be compiled, using a combination of IP 'Clipboard' functionality, the 'shape' elements, inserted graphics files and the 'Text' tool in the application workspace. All the components in the montage can be moved and resized as required. NOTE: all log plot output from IP, either to the clipboard or to a graphics file will be at the vertical scale set in the hardcopy output routine. Rescaling these graphics in the 'Montage Builder' will change the 'hardcopy' vertical scale of the graphics file or clipboard contents.

Saving a Montage File Click the 'File' menu

'Save' option to save a montage that you have built. By default this

creates a montage (.ipm) file. A montage itself can also be saved to the following graphics file formats:

Section 8.7 View Well and Curve Data : Montage Builder

715

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Related Topics Log Plot Horizontal Log Plot Set Default Plot Format Histogram Crossplot Multi-curve Crossplot 3D Parameter Viewer Multi-Well Correlation Viewer Montage Builder

Section 8.7 View Well and Curve Data : Montage Builder

Senergy

Section

9 Parameter Set Management

717

9

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Parameter Set Management

IP stores Petrophysical interpretation parameters in 'Parameter Sets'. 'Parameter Set Management' is an important topic that the user should understand before undertaking an interpretation using IP. 'Parameter Sets' are managed using a number of tools. The important topic of 'Parameter Set Management' is discussed here, since a knowledge of the appearance and function of 'Parameter Sets' is integral to the operation, and underlies the flexibility, of many of the interpretation tools within the IP program. A 'Parameter Set' consists of a set of 'zones'. In the simplest form, called a 'Zone / Tops Set' the Set is comprised of entries containing a 'Zone name' with an associated 'Top' depth and ' Bottom' depth. For the interpretation module parameter sets, for example the 'Clay Volume' parameter Set, this basic structure is extended to store a number of petrophysical 'Parameters' associated with the interpretation module. The names and numbers of parameters in a ' Parameter Set' depend on the interpretation module selected . The working 'Parameter Sets' for the interpretation modules are automatically saved into the IP database every time a well is saved. The 'Parameter Sets' are restored when the well is loaded into memory. The 'Parameter Set Management' screen is used to manage the 'Parameter Sets' from the 'zonable' interpretation modules. The tool is available in the set-up window of any of the following modules: 'Clay Volume' 'Porosity and Water Saturation' 'Cutoffs and Summation' 'Mineral Solver' 'Basic Log Analysis' 'NMR Interpretation' 'TDT Standalone' 'TDT TIme Lapse' 'Pore Pressure Gradient' For information on how to distribute 'Parameter Sets' between wells then look at the chapter on ' Multi-Well Parameter Distribution'. The 'Parameter Set Management' window is displayed when you click the 'Load / Save Parameter Sets' button, which is found on the 'set-up' window for each of these interpretation

Section 9.

Parameter Set Management :

Parameter Set Management

Senergy

718

modules. The 'Clay Volume' module is illustrated below:

Parameter Set 'types' are related to specific interpretation modules. Set 'types' are as follows : Tops : Generic, user-created 'Tops' Set. No parameters. Clay : Clay volume module Parameter Set. PhiSw : Porosity and water saturation module Parameter Set. Cutoff : Cut-off and summations module Parameter Set. Splice : Zones from the interactive splice module. Basic_Loganal : Basic log analysis module Parameter Set. TDT_Stand_Alone : TDT-Stand-Alone analysis module Parameter Set. TDT_Time_Lapse : TDT time-lapse analysis module Parameter Set. NMR : NMR interpretation analysis module Parameter Set. Minsolve : Mineral Solver module Parameter Set. Pore_Pres_Grad : Pore pressure gradient module. Parameter Set management screen not available.

Section 9.

Parameter Set Management :

719

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

UP****** : Zoned user program modules. '******' will be the name of the user program. The 'Parameter Set Management' dialog window allows the user to save and restore Parameter Sets in addition to the working Parameter Sets. This can be useful if you want to try a different interpretation technique but still have the ability to go back to the original interpretation set-up. You can save the original 'Parameter Set' under a user-defined name, change the interpretation parameters / equations and run the new interpretation model. The original parameters can be recalled / restored from the saved 'Parameter Set' at a later date. You can save 'Parameter Sets' either ; To an external disk file, given a user-defined name (this is the same procedure as that accessed from the main menu 'Input / Output

'Save Parameter Set to File' operation)

or, The Parameter Set can be saved into the well database under a user-specified name. The 'Parameter Set Management' window is divided into two sections, one for saving the ' Parameter Set' and one for loading the 'Parameter Set'. Both sections allow the user to save and restore 'Parameter Sets' from the database, as well as from separate, external disk files. The 'Save' section, however, allows the user to restore a 'Parameter Set' from a different well or a 'Parameter Set' of a different type (from the database only). If a Parameter Set of a different 'Type' to the module that is being run is restored, then only the 'Top', 'Bottom 'and 'Zone name' fields are copied for each zone. Not all of the interpretation parameters associated with each zone will be copied and values will be set to the default values for that type of Set. Copying 'Parameter Sets' of a different 'Type' between interpretation modules can be very useful. For example, if the user has loaded a Tops Set (Type 'Tops') using the ' Manage Zones / Top Sets' module, these tops might be the ones required for the 'Cut-off and Summation' module and can be loaded using the 'Load from Database' option, which is activated from the screen launched by clicking the 'Load / Save Parameter Sets' button.

Related Topics: Load Parameter Set Save Parameter Set to file Delete Parameter Sets Print Parameter Set

Section 9.

Parameter Set Management :

Parameter Set Management

Senergy

9.1

720

Load Parameter Set

To load a 'Parameter Set' from the database; in the 'Load Parameter set' window, 'click' on the required 'Parameter Set' name to highlight it, as shown in this example using the Clay Volume Dialog. From the Clay Volume Analysis Dialog, Click Load / Save Parameters to display the Parameter Set Dialog.

Note: The Parameters Sets Dialog can also be displayed from the Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis Dialog and the Cut Off and Summation Report Dialog. From the Parameters Sets Dialog, Click Load from Database to Load the Parameter Sets from the active Database.

Section 9.1 Parameter Set Management : Load Parameter Set

721

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

If the 'All Sets' box is 'checked' then all the Sets, regardless of 'type', will be displayed in the window. If the user loads a Set of a different 'Set Type' to the module from where the ' Parameter Set Manager' window is launched, then only the 'Top', 'Bottom' and 'Zone name' are loaded and the parameters are all set to their internal IP 'default' values.

Section 9.1 Parameter Set Management : Load Parameter Set

Senergy

Parameter Set Management

722

If the 'All Wells' box is 'checked' then the Sets for other in-memory wells are also displayed. The well name will be added to the 'Parameter Set' window for all wells except for the 'active' well. An example window with this option set is displayed below.

Section 9.1 Parameter Set Management : Load Parameter Set

723

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Section 9.1 Parameter Set Management : Load Parameter Set

Senergy

Parameter Set Management

Senergy

724

The 'Delete Set from Database' button allows the user to delete a highlighted Set from the Set list. The 'Load from Disk File' allows the user to load a 'Parameter Set' from a disk file. Only ' Parameter Sets' of the correct 'type' can be loaded to an IP module in this way.

Related Topics: Load Parameter Set Save Parameter Set to file Delete Parameter Sets Print Parameter Set

Section 9.1 Parameter Set Management : Load Parameter Set

725

9.2

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Save Parameter Set to File

'The Save Parameter Set to File' functionality has largely been superseded, since the IP ' Parameter Sets' are currently stored together with the curve data in the IP database .DAT files. However, the function has been retained as an alternative method for saving an interpretation ' Parameter Set'. It is definitely worth saving 'All Sets all wells' at the end of a project for data security purposes. 'Save Parameter Set to file' is a useful method of moving parameters between wells. The user saves the 'Parameter Set' for the current well using this function. The new well is then selected and using the 'Load / Save Parameter Set' button on the 'Interpretation' input screen, the user can select the previously saved 'Parameter Set' belonging to the other well.

To save a 'Parameter Set' for an interpretation, select the interpretation module name and the complete Set will be saved to disk. This disk file can be restored from within the interpretation

Section 9.2 Parameter Set Management : Save Parameter Set to File

Parameter Set Management

Senergy

726

module's interface at a later date (see Parameter Set Management), and contains all the information used in the interpretation. The file will be stored under the Set name, used in the interpretation module, with the extension of '.set' and will be put in the output data directory, which can be set under Set Default File Location. 'All Sets current Well' and 'All Sets all wells' allows the user to save multiple Sets at one time. This is very useful for making an archive record of all the 'Parameter Sets' used in all the wells in a project database.

Save Parameter set The user can edit the 'Save Parameter set name' in the text entry box, to distinguish one Parameter Set from any other.

Clicking the 'Save to Database' button will copy the Set into the database and the name will be added to the list in the 'Parameter set' window. Clicking the 'Save to Disk File' button will activate a file directory dialog box to select where the file should be saved. The default is the output directory (see 'Set Default File Location').

Related Topics:

Section 9.2 Parameter Set Management : Save Parameter Set to File

727

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Load Parameter Set Save Parameter Set to file Delete Parameter Sets Print Parameter Set

Section 9.2 Parameter Set Management : Save Parameter Set to File

Senergy

Parameter Set Management

Senergy

9.3

728

Print Parameter Set

To print 'Parameter Sets' from the interpretation modules, or to save them to a disk file, select the 'Print Parameter Set' menu item, followed by the interpretation module name, followed by your choice of printer or file name. If 'Printer' is selected, then the output will be directed to the default printer or whichever printer has been selected under 'Printer Setup'. If 'File' is chosen, then the output will be sent to a hard disk file. The file will be stored under the Set Name used in the interpretation module, with the extension of ".txt" and will be put in the output data directory, which can be set under Set Default File Location.

Selecting the 'All wells - Printer' and 'All wells - File' allows the user to save multiple Parameter Sets at one time. These options are also available for individual modules by using the 'Print' button on the ' Parameter' windows.

Related Topics: Load Parameter Set Save Parameter Set to file Delete Parameter Sets Print Parameter Set

Section 9.3 Parameter Set Management : Print Parameter Set

729

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Section 9.3 Parameter Set Management : Print Parameter Set

Senergy

Parameter Set Management

Senergy

9.4

730

Delete Parameter Sets

Selecting the 'Delete Parameter Sets' option will delete an interpretation 'Parameter Set' from the current, active well. This is helpful if the current 'Parameter Set' is found to be incorrect and the user wants to start an interpretation again from the beginning. This will not delete any Parameter Sets saved on the hard disk.

Only the 'Parameter Sets' associated with the currently-active well can be deleted. 'Other Sets' option - rather than have an exhaustive list of 'Parameter Sets' in the list, the 'Other Sets' option, if 'clicked' will launch the 'Manage Zones / Tops' module, from which the user can highlight the 'Parameter Set' to delete, then click the 'Delete' button. If the 'Multi Well' box is ticked then all 'Parameter Sets' are displayed for all wells. This enables

Section 9.4 Parameter Set Management : Delete Parameter Sets

731

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

fast deletion of 'Parameter Sets' across many wells - a warning message will appear before the Sets are deleted.

Related Topics: Load Parameter Set Save Parameter Set to file Delete Parameter Sets Print Parameter Set

Section 9.4 Parameter Set Management : Delete Parameter Sets

Section

10 Interpretation

733

10

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Interpretation

The following 'standard' Modules are available under the 'Interpretation' Menu: 'Basic Log Analysis' The 'Basic log Analysis' module is used to make a quick and 'basic' log analysis. The functionality has been deliberately simplified to perform a type of analysis that could be easily duplicated using a calculator. 'Clay Volume' The 'Clay Volume' interpretation module is used to interactively calculate clay volume curves from multiple clay indicators. 'Clay Volume Parameters' The 'Clay Volume Parameters' window allows the user to manually change any Clay Volume interpretation parameter and to create, modify and delete interpretation Zones. 'Porosity and Water Saturation' The 'Porosity and Water Saturation' interpretation module is used to interactively calculate porosity (PHI), water saturation (Sw), flushed zone water saturation (Sxo), matrix density (RHOMA) , hydrocarbon density (RHOHY) and wet and dry clay volumes (VWCL & VDCL). The number and type of output curves depends on the porosity model chosen and the logic selected. 'Porosity and Water Saturation Parameters' The 'Porosity Water Saturation Parameters' window allows the user to manually change any Porosity / Water Saturation computation parameter, and to create, edit and delete interpretation zones. The window is launched from the main menu ' 'Cut-off and Summation' The Cut-offs and Summation module allows the user to interactively define Net Reservoir and Net Pay cut-off criteria and zones, and to calculate the average petrophysical properties of porosity, clay volume and water saturation for each zone within a petrophysical interpretation. 'Cut-off and Summation Parameters' The Cutoff Parameters window allows the user to change any Cutoff parameter, and create, delete and edit interpretation Zones. 'Multi Well Cut-off and Summation' The Multi well Cutoff and Summation module allows the user to run the Cutoff and Summation computation for multiple wells from a single window. The module has sophisticated reporting options that allow results from multiple wells to be written to one report file. The module can be used to either re-run the current Cutoff and Summation results in each well with some modification, for example to a changed VCL cutoff, or can be run to create the Cutoff and Summation results for each well from scratch. 'NMR Normalization' 'NMR Interpretation' The 'NMR Interpretation' module allows the user to interpret the T2 array data produced from NMR tools. The module allows the user to set a T1 or T2 cut-off

Section 10.

Interpretation :

Interpretation

Senergy

734

for free fluid (FF) and also for clay-bound fluid (BF). Permeability is calculated using the ' Timur / Coates' permeability equations and, if some external permeability data is available, the module will allow automatic calibration of the equation coefficients. 'Cased Hole' The Cased Hole log interpretation tools are included here. The following tools are included under the Cased Hole menu item: TDT Stand-Alone Sw analysis: The TDT Stand Alone module is used to calculate water saturation from thermal decay tools (TDT) or any pulsed neutron tool that measures the formation capture cross section (Sigma). A Porosity curve is needed as input. A Clay Volume curve input is optional. These curves are best taken from an open hole log analysis. TDT Time Lapse: The TDT Time Lapse module is used to calculate water saturation from differences between two thermal decay tool (TDT) logs or any pulsed neutron tool logs that measures the formation capture cross section (Sigma). An accurate Porosity and original Water Saturation (Sw Base) curve is needed as input, which is best taken from an open hole log analysis.

Related Topics Parameter Set Management Basic Log Analysis Auto Update of Analysis Modules

Section 10.

Interpretation :

735

10.2

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Basic Log Analysis

The 'Basic log Analysis' module is used to make a quick and 'basic' log analysis. The functionality has been deliberately simplified to perform a type of analysis that could be easily duplicated using a calculator. 'Clay volume' is calculated from a Gamma Ray. 'Porosity' is either from the Density or Sonic tool. 'Water saturations' are calculated using the basic Archie equations. No hydrocarbon or bad-hole corrections are made. No flushed zone Sxo calculations are made. The analysis is zonable and an Interactive Plot can be used to apply/modify interpretation parameters. From the Interpretation Menu, Select Basic Log Analysis to Display the Basic Log Analysis Dialog.

Related Topics Define Input and Output Curves Define Basic Log Analysis Parameters Create Basic Log Analysis Interactive Log Plot Equations and Methodology

Section 10.2 Interpretation : Basic Log Analysis

Interpretation

Senergy

736

10.2.1 Define Input and Output Curves Input Curves : The user must enter either a 'Density' or 'Sonic' curve or both. If both are selected, then the density will be used by default. However, the user can manually select the sonic for designated zones (see parameters below). A 'Gamma Ray' curve can be entered. This will be used to calculate a clay volume. If the box is left blank, the clay volume will be assumed to be zero and no clay corrections will be made to the porosity. This can work sometimes for density porosities but sonic porosities will always be too large in shaly zones or shales. The 'Resistivity' curve is used to calculate water saturation. If a curve name is not entered, only porosity and clay volume will be calculated. Output Curves : The 'Porosity' (PHI) curve will be the porosity calculated from the Density or Sonic log. The 'Sw Unlimited' (SwU) curve will be the result of the Sw calculation from Archie's equation. No 'limits' have been applied. This means that the 'SwU' curve could have values greater than 1.0 (100 %). This curve is useful for assessing how much greater than the 100% wet line the computed curve values reach, in the wet zones. This allows the user to set interpretation parameters like 'm' or 'Rw' to give an average 100% Sw in a wet zone. The 'Sw' (SW)curve is the same as the unlimited curve except that it has been 'clipped' to have values between '0' and '1.0'. The 'Sw' curve is used in the summation and cut-off module for calculating average zonal water saturations. The 'Bulk Volume Water' (BVW)curve is computed from porosity multiplied by water saturation and shows the amount of water in the rock. It is used mainly for plot displays. The 'Clay Volume' (VCL) curve gives the result of the clay volume calculations. The curve is clipped so that the results lie between 0 and 1.0 (100%). The 'Rw apparent' (RWapp) curve is the result of a calculation to estimate the apparent water resistivity in a zone assuming the zone to be 100% wet. This curve is used on the interactive plot to allow the user to set 'Rw' in a wet interval. NOTE: the module will overwrite any current output curves with the same name, without warning, so the user should be careful not to use duplicate names. The 'Porosity and Water Saturation' module uses many of the same names, so if this and the 'Porosity and Water Saturation' module are run then it would be best to rename the output curves so as not to get confused.

Related Topics Define Input and Output Curves

Section 10.2 Interpretation : Basic Log Analysis

737

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Define Basic Log Analysis Parameters Create Basic Log Analysis Interactive Log Plot Equations and Methodology

10.2.2 Define Basic Log Analysis Parameters The 'Parameters' tab is subdivided into 4 'sub-tabs' described below: The 'Zones - Clay' Tab defines the Interpretation Zone Parameters; Zone Name, Zone Top, Zone Bottom, Zone Colour, Lock Zone, Gr Clean and Gr Clay (both used for calculating Clay Volume). The 'Density' Tab defines the Parameters required for the calculation of Porosity, where Density has been selected as the Porosity Model.. Once Density has been selected as the Porosity Model, the Sonic Parameters will be unavailable indicating that only the Density Porosity Model will be used in the calculations. The 'Sonic' Tab defines the Parameters required for the calculation of Porosity where Sonic has been selected as the Porosity Model. Once Sonic has been selected as the Porosity Model, the Density Parameters will be unavailable indicating that only the Sonic Porosity Model will be used in the calculations. The 'Archie' Tab defines the Formation Water Resistivity at Formation Temperature Parameters required for the Archie water saturation (SwU and Sw) calculation. Note: Changing a parameter will not immediately mean that a zone is re-calculated. The user must click the 'Run' button in order to re-calculate all zones and update all displays. See Also: Create a New Zone.

Column Edits in the Parameters Tab If the user wants to set all the parameters in one column of the 'Parameter' screen to be the same value, then the header of the column should be 'clicked'. This will turn the column header box green. Now, any one parameter that is changed in that column will change all the parameters in the column to the same value. To turn the column edit off, click the column header again and its colour will return to grey. Column edits remain active while the well stays loaded in memory. They have to be reset, if required, next time the well is loaded. The 'Parameter set name' box is used to name the file where the parameters will be if the parameters are saved to a disk file using the 'Save Parameter Sets' function in the IP main menu. The same name is also used to save the parameter Set listing to hard disk with an

Section 10.2 Interpretation : Basic Log Analysis

Interpretation

Senergy

738

extension of '.TXT'. The 'Load / Save Parameter Sets' button allows the user to manage the basic log analysis parameter sets. See Parameter Set Management and Link Zones / Top Sets. The 'Run' button runs the analysis for all zones and creates any output curves needed.

Related Topics Basic Log Analysis Define Zones - Clay Parameters Define Density Parameters Define Sonic Parameters Define Archie Parameters

10.2.2.1 Define Zones - Clay Parameters

The Zones - Clay Tab defines the Interpretation Zone Parameters; Zone Name, Zone Top, Zone Bottom, Zone Colour, Lock Zone, Gr Clean and Gr Clay (both used for calculating Clay Volume).

'Zone Name' : The zone name is an optional parameter and is used by the user to identify a zone by giving it a name. Zone names can be displayed in the log plot. See Zone plotting.

Section 10.2 Interpretation : Basic Log Analysis

739

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

'Zone Top' : The top depth of the zone. 'Zone Bottom' : The bottom depth of the zone. 'Zone Color' : This is the user editable Zone colour associated with the interpretation zone. 'Lock Zone' : If this is 'checked' then the zone becomes grayed out in all tabs and the parameters cannot be altered within that zone, including interactively. 'Gr Clean' : Gamma Ray clean value. Used for calculating Clay Volume. Should be set to the minimum Gamma Ray value seen in clean (non shaly) intervals. This defaults to the minimum Gamma Ray value seen in the Gamma Ray input curve. 'Gr Clay' : Gamma Ray clay value. Used for calculating Clay Volume. Should be set to the maximum Gamma Ray value seen in shale intervals. This defaults to the maximum Gamma Ray value seen in the Gamma Ray input curve.

Related Topics Basic Log Analysis Define Zones - Clay Parameters Define Density Parameters Define Sonic Parameters Define Archie Parameters 10.2.2.2 Define Density Parameters

The DensityTab defines the Parameters required for the calculation of Porosity; where Density has been selected as the Porosity Model. Once Density has been selected as the Porosity Model, the Sonic Parameters will be unavailable indicating that only the Density Porosity Model will be used in the calculations.

Section 10.2 Interpretation : Basic Log Analysis

Interpretation

Senergy

740

'Porosity Model' : To use the density log as porosity over a zone, select 'Density' from the drop-down menu. Once 'Density' has been selected then the 'Sonic' tab parameters 'grey' out indicating that only the density porosity model will be used in the calculation of porosity. 'Rho Matrix' : Matrix density of the clean rock. Used for calculating porosity from the density tool. Defaults to 2.65 gm/cc for sandstone. Set to 2.71 gm/cc for limestone. 'Rho Fluid' : Density of the fluid in the rock. Used for calculating porosity from the density tool. Defaults to 1.0 gm/cc for fresh water. Set to 1.1 gm/cc for salt water. To make hydrocarbon corrections to the porosity adjust the fluid density to account for the hydrocarbons. 'Rho Clay' : Density of the clay in the rock. Used to correct the density porosity for clay. Chosen from log plots as the density reading in shale. The default value is chosen as the maximum density reading over the interval where the sonic is high. Note: Once Density has been selected as the Porosity Model, the Sonic Parameters will be unavailable indicating that only the Density Porosity Model will be used in the calculations.

Section 10.2 Interpretation : Basic Log Analysis

741

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Related Topics Basic Log Analysis Define Zones - Clay Parameters Define Density Parameters Define Sonic Parameters Define Archie Parameters

Section 10.2 Interpretation : Basic Log Analysis

Senergy

Interpretation

Senergy

742

10.2.2.3 Define Sonic Parameters

The Sonic Tab defines the Parameters required for the calculation of Porosity where Sonic has been selected as the Porosity Model.

'Porosity Model' : To use the sonic log as porosity over a zone, select 'Sonic' from the drop-down menu. This is the same parameter that is on the 'Density' sub-tab. The setting can be changed in either tab. Once 'Sonic' is selected then the 'Density' tab parameters 'grey' out indicating that only the sonic porosity model will be used in the calculations. 'Sonic Equ' : Two models are available to calculate porosity from the sonic: the original ' Wyllie' time average and the empirical field observation 'Hunt-Raymer' formula. Select the required model from the drop-down menu. It is recommended that the 'Hunt-Raymer' equation is used by default since this equation automatically takes care of the problem of unconsolidated sands, whilst the 'Wyllie' equation has an extra compaction factor parameter which has to be estimated. 'DT Matrix' : Sonic matrix transit time of the clean rock. Used for calculating porosity from the sonic tool. Defaults to 55 uSec/ft for sandstone. Set to 49 uSec/ft for limestone. 'DT Fluid' : Sonic fluid transit time in the rock. Used for calculating porosity from the sonic tool. Default value is189 uSec/ft. For salt-saturated formation water use about 174 usec/ft. To make hydrocarbon corrections to the porosity adjust (increase) the fluid transit time to account for the hydrocarbons. 'DT Clay' : Sonic of the clay in the rock. Used to correct the sonic porosity for clay. Chosen from log plots as the sonic reading in shale. The default value is chosen as the maximum sonic reading over the interval.

Section 10.2 Interpretation : Basic Log Analysis

743

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

'Sonic Cp' : Wyllie equation compaction factor. Used for calculating porosity from the sonic tool when the Wyllie time average equation is chosen. Defaults to 1.0. For unconsolidated sands this needs to be increased. A rule of thumb for estimating this parameter is to divide the sonic clay parameter by 100. The result should be greater than 1.0 for a valid Cp value. Note: Once Sonic has been selected as the Porosity Model, the Density Parameters will be unavailable indicating that only the Sonic Porosity Model will be used in the calculations.

Related Topics Basic Log Analysis Define Zones - Clay Parameters Define Density Parameters Define Sonic Parameters Define Archie Parameters

Section 10.2 Interpretation : Basic Log Analysis

Interpretation

Senergy

744

10.2.2.4 Define Archie Parameters

The Archie Tab defines the Formation Water Resistivity at Formation Temperature Parameters required for the Archie water saturation (SwU and Sw) calculation.

'Rw' : Formation water resistivity at formation temperature. Defaults to 0.1 ohmm but must be adjusted by the user to the correct value. 'a factor' : Archie equation 'a' factor. Defaults to 1.0. 'm Exponent' : Archie equation 'm' (cementation) factor. Defaults to 2.0. 'n Exponent' : Archie equation 'n' (saturation exponent) factor. Defaults to 2.0.

Related Topics Basic Log Analysis Define Zones - Clay Parameters Define Density Parameters Define Sonic Parameters Define Archie Parameters

10.2.3 Create Basic Log Analysis Interactive Log Plot The interactive plot allows the changing of several parameters interactively by placing the cursor on the vertical parameter line and dragging the line to a new position. When the mouse button is released the program will automatically recalculate the zone and update the result on the plot. This gives the user immediate feedback on changes to parameters. See Also: Manage the Interactive Log Plot.

Section 10.2 Interpretation : Basic Log Analysis

745

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

To display the Interactive Log Plot. From the Interpretation Menu, Select Basic Log Analysis to Display the Basic Log Analysis Dialog. Define the Basic Log Analysis Parameters. From the Basic Log Analysis Dialog Click Make Plot to Display the Interactive Log Plot.

Changes made to the Interactive Log Plot can be Undone or Re-done. See Also: Manage the Interactive Log Plot.

Display a Histogram from the Interactive Log Plot Histograms of any of the curves can also be used to change parameters interactively. Right click in a track with an interactive parameter and select the appropriate curve from the pop-up menu (example RHOB curve).

Section 10.2 Interpretation : Basic Log Analysis

Interpretation

Senergy

746

The above histogram can be modified Interactively. Once the lines have been changed then the undo/redo arrows will appear in the top left-hand corner of the crossplot enabling the user to quickly revert the lines back to their original positions if required.

Related Topics Define Input and Output Curves Define Basic Log Analysis Parameters Create Basic Log Analysis Interactive Log Plot

Section 10.2 Interpretation : Basic Log Analysis

747

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Equations and Methodology

10.2.4 Equations and Methodology Clay Volume (Vcl) is calculated : Vcl

GrLog

GrClean

GrClay

GrClean

Porosity (Phi) is calculated : If Density is selected as the porosity method :

Rho matrix

Phi

Rho b

Vcl

Rho matrix

Rho matrix

Rho clay

Rho fluid

If Sonic porosity is selected : Wyllie

Dt

Phi

Dt matrix Vcl Dt Fluid

Dt Clay

Dt matrix

Dt matrix Cp

Raymer

Phiclay Phison Phi

2

Vma Vclay

2

Vma V log

2 Vma Vf

2 Vma Vf 4 Vma 2 Vma

2 Vma Vf

2 Vma Vf 4 Vma 2 Vma

Phison

Phiclay Vcl

Where Vma = 1/Dtmatrix Vf = 1/Dtfluid Vlog = 1/Dt Porosity is limited to being greater than 0.0.

Apparent water resistivity (RWapp) is calculated : Rwa

Phi m Rt a

Archie water saturation (SwU and Sw) is calculated : Unlimited water saturation

Section 10.2 Interpretation : Basic Log Analysis

Interpretation

Senergy

SwU

a Rw Phi m Rt

1

n

Sw is limited to be less than or equal to 1.0.

Related Topics Define Input and Output Curves Define Basic Log Analysis Parameters Create Basic Log Analysis Interactive Log Plot Equations and Methodology

Section 10.2 Interpretation : Basic Log Analysis

748

749

10.3

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Clay Volume Analysis

The 'Clay Volume' interpretation module is used to interactively calculate clay volume curves from multiple clay indicators. The module is accessed under the main menu 'Interpretation' Clay Volume' option. The 'Clay Volume' module can now be linked to the 'Porosity and Water Saturation' module see 'Linking Clay Volume module to Porosity Water Saturation' module in the 'Link Zones / Top Sets' chapter for more details.

The 'Clay Volume Analysis' window, shown above, sets up the clay indicators and their input and associated output curves. The input curve boxes will automatically be filled in with appropriate curve names if the input curve 'types' have been set up in the study well. The user can select an alternative input curve name if the selected IP default is not correct. The IP program default names for the output curves are displayed in the right hand column of the screen. The user can edit these names to any preferred nomenclature. The program assumes that any neutron curve entered is in 'Limestone matrix' units. If

Section 10.3 Interpretation : Clay Volume Analysis

'

Interpretation

Senergy

750

this is not the case, then the curve should be converted to Limestone porosity units using the appropriate service company environmental correction module or the Basic Log Analysis Functions module. The 'Minimum Clay Volume' (VCL) curve is calculated as the minimum clay volume response of all user-selected single and double clay indicators, and, by default is picked as the 'Wet Clay Volume' (VWCL) curve used in the set up of the 'Porosity and Water Saturation' Module. The clay indicators are divided into 2 sections, 'Single Clay Indicators', where a single curve is selected for use in the 'Clay Volume Interactive Plot'. One extra, user-defined 'Single Clay Indicator' can be set up. The 'Double Clay Indicators' are defined in the middle part of the window. These are standard curve crossplot combinations (Density/Neutron, Density/Sonic ,Sonic/Neutron). One extra ' Double Clay Indicator' can be specified in addition to the standard indicators. The user can enter the name of the indicator in the box provided under the 'Name' column. The 'Bad Hole Indicators for Double Clay Indicators' section allows the user to select curves that can be used in the 'Clay Volume Interactive Plot' to discriminate where the 'Double Clay Indicators' will be used. For example, a caliper curve could be used as the 'Bad Hole Indicator' to determine where a Density/Neutron 'Double Clay Indicator' is not going to be reliable. When using the caliper log as a 'Bad Hole Indicator', setting the minimum threshold parameter ' BadH1Min', the 'Bad Hole Indicator' will switch off the Density/Neutron 'Double Clay Indicator' where the caliper is greater than the user- entered threshold value. The user selects the 'Bad Hole Indicators' by 'checking' the boxes on the left hand side of the window. The indicators can be 'zoned', so 'checking' a box does not necessarily force the user to use the indicator in every interpretation zone. NOTE: It is good practice to 'check' any indicator that might possibly be used, BEFORE running a 'Clay Volume Analysis' interpretation, since this will allow the program to initialise the 'default clay parameters' and create the 'Bad Hole' tab parameters . The 'Parameter Set name' box is used to name the file where the parameters will be stored, if the parameters are saved to a disk file using the 'Save Parameter set' in the main 'Parameter Sets' menu. The same name is also used to save the parameter Set listing to hard disk with an extension of '.TXT'. The 'Print Parameter set' menu item can be used to do this or the print button in the parameter window can be used. The 'Load / Save Parameter Sets' button allows the user to manage the 'Clay Volume' Parameter Sets. See Parameter Set Management. The user 'clicks' the 'Run' button to start the Clay Volume analysis. If an old Parameter Set has been loaded, or the user has already run the clay volume module,

Section 10.3 Interpretation : Clay Volume Analysis

751

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

then the user will be asked whether the log plot should be re-initialized. The user should normally confirm 'Yes' to this, since this activates the special interactive plot features. Answering 'No' will leave the current plot active. If this is a new 'Run', then 'default' parameters will be calculated for each clay indicator and these values will populate the 'Clay Volume Parameters' Set. These defaults are not meant to be the optimum interpretation parameters, but are chosen simply to set the parameters within the correct range of values for a particular single curve or pair of curves. For the 'Single Clay Indicators' the defaults are generally the maximum and minimum readings for the indicator. For the 'Double Clay Indicators' the defaults will be the 'sandstone' line for the 'clean line', and the 'shale point' will be chosen towards the bottom right hand edge of the 'shale points', as seen on a standard crossplot.

Related Topics Clay Volume Analysis Define Clay Volume Output Curves Clay Volume Parameters Clay Volume Interactive Plot Clay Volume Equations and Methodology

10.3.1 Define Clay Volume Output Curves An Output curve will be produced for each clay indicator selected. The curve results for these indicators will not be limited to between 0 and 1.0. These curves are meant for quality control purposes, and should not be used in another module for Vclay, unless they are clipped first to between 0 and 1.0. This clipping could be done using the formula module. Vclay minimum (VCL)and Vclay average (VCLAV)curves will also be calculated. These curves are clipped to between 0 and 1.0. For the VCLAV curve, the separate Vclay indicator curves will first be clipped before the average curve is created. The Output curve, VCLMIX utilises both the VCL Minimum and the VCL Average curves. A parameter is set by zone that determines whether the selected curve is VCL Minimum or the VCL Average Curve. There are two new methods for calculating VCL Average. Currently the VCL A/verage is the mean value of all the VCL results at a level. The two new methods are ‘Median’ and ‘Lateral’. The ‘Lateral’ average is the median value of all the individual pair products. This is almost

Section 10.3 Interpretation : Clay Volume Analysis

Interpretation

Senergy

752

identical to the Hodges-Lehmann method. The new curve is defined in the Clay Volume Analysis Dialog Box, Clay Volume Mixed (VCLMIX).

From the Interpretation Menu, Select Clay Volume Parameters to display the Clay Volume Parameters Dialog, where the methods for calculation can be defined. For VCL Average; Mean, Median or Lateral and for VCL Mix; Minimum or Average.

Section 10.3 Interpretation : Clay Volume Analysis

753

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Select the VCLAV Parameter and Click Help to Display the Parameter Help for the VCL Average.

Select the VCLMIX Parameter and Click Help to Display the Parameter Help for the VCLMIX Parameter.

Section 10.3 Interpretation : Clay Volume Analysis

Interpretation

Senergy

754

Related Topics Clay Volume Analysis Define Clay Volume Output Curves Clay Volume Parameters Clay Volume Interactive Plot Clay Volume Equations and Methodology

10.3.2 Clay Volume Parameters The 'Clay Volume Parameters' window allows the user to manually change any Clay Volume interpretation parameter and to create, modify and delete interpretation Zones. The window is selected from the main menu 'Interpretation' button

'Clay Volume Parameters' or using the speed

next to the 'Clay Volume' speed button

.

Section 10.3 Interpretation : Clay Volume Analysis

755

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The 'Clay Volume Parameters' window displays the 'Clay Volume' interpretation parameters arranged on 'tabbed' screens across the page, with the interpretation 'zones' arranged vertically down the page. There are a number of tabs in addition to the 'Zone Depths' tab. Each tab sets up the 'clean' and 'clay' end-points for the 'Single' and 'Double' Clay indicators: 'Single Clay Indicators' use a single log curve to define 'clean and 'clay' cut-offs. These indicators are organized onto one or more 'tabs', depending upon how many single clay indicators have been selected. A maximum of two Single indicators will be stored on each tab. So, if 4 single clay indicators (Gamma Ray, Neutron, SP and Resistivity) are chosen, they will be arranged on two 'tabs'. The example shown above has only 'Gamma Ray' (Gr) and 'Resistivity' (Res) indicators selected. 'Double Clay Indicators' are crossplot combinations of log curves, Neutron/Density, Sonic/ Density. Each 'Double Clay indicator' that the user selects has its' own 'tab'. In the screen capture shown above two Double Clay indicators 'Neutron/Density' (Neu/Den) and 'Sonic / Density' (Son/Den) have been selected.

Related Topics Clay Volume Analysis Define Clay Volume Output Curves Clay Volume Parameters Clay Volume Interactive Plot Clay Volume Equations and Methodology

Section 10.3 Interpretation : Clay Volume Analysis

Interpretation

Senergy

756

10.3.2.2 Changing Parameters on Screen

To Display the Clay Volume Parameters Dialog: From the Interpretation Menu, Select Clay Volume Parameters to display the Clay Volume Parameters Dialog.

If a parameter is an 'On' / 'Off'- type flag, for example - any parameter with 'Use' in the title, then 'ticking' it will switch it between 'On' and 'Off'. In the following screen, the 'GR Use' and 'Neu Use' parameters are 'On' / 'Off' flag parameters.

If a parameter is a 'List'- type parameter - any parameter with the word 'Method', 'Model', ' Source' or 'Equation' in the parameter title, then 'clicking' on it will launch a pop-up menu where the parameter can be changed. In the screen shot shown below the parameter 'GR Method' is a 'list' parameter and launches the associated options list:

Section 10.3 Interpretation : Clay Volume Analysis

757

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Related Topics Clay Volume Analysis Changing Parameters on Screen Define Zone Depth Parameters Linking Clay Parameters Clay Volume Parameter Names 10.3.2.3 Define Zone Depth Parameters

The 'Zone Depths' tab allows the user to change interpretation zone top and bottom depths and to set optional 'Zone Names' and 'Zone colours'. The 'Zone Name' in this module is only used as a label when printing out the parameter listings.

Section 10.3 Interpretation : Clay Volume Analysis

Interpretation

Senergy

758

The user has the option to display zone names or zone depths, if they have been set up, on all Parameter tabs. This is accomplished by 'ticking' the 'Show Additional Zone info' tick-box. The user then has the option of showing the zone name or the zone depths on each tab. Depending on which option is chosen, when you select another Parameter tab, the zone names or zone depths will be shown in the left-hand column of the 'grid'. The 'Show Default Info' option is just displaying the 'Zone #' column populated with the zone number. Alternatively, left-mouse-button 'click' in the 'Zone (#)' column header box of any parameter screen and you will see the same three options as those seen from 'clicking' the 'Show Additional Zone Info' button.

Clicking the 'New Zone' button will display the Add Zone Dialog. See Also: Create a New Zone. The 'Delete zone' button on the 'Clay Volume Parameters' window allows the user to delete one or more interpretation zones. The user must select the zones to delete, and click 'OK'.

Section 10.3 Interpretation : Clay Volume Analysis

759

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The 'Print' button on the parameter window will pop up the following menu. This allows output of the summation report to the printer or to a file. The file will be written to the 'default output directory' using the file Set name, with the extension of ".txt".

The 'Close' button on the 'Clay Volume Parameters' window closes the window, but does not cancel any changes made to the parameters. If the user closes the window without clicking 'Run' then the changes made will not come into effect until some other interactive parameter is changed for that zone, and therefore forces a re-calculation of the zone. The 'Help' buttons on the parameter screens are unique to the IP program in the sense that they do not link to the Help document. The button will display a small window (example below) which will give some help on individual parameters in the display. Once the window is displayed, the user places the cursor on a parameter in the parameter window, and the help for that parameter is displayed.

Lock Zone

Section 10.3 Interpretation : Clay Volume Analysis

Interpretation

Senergy

760

The 'Lock Zone' column allows a user to lock any zone which will prevent any of the parameters of that zone in any of the tabs from being changed. It will also prevent any interactive lines on the interactive plots from changing the parameter for that zone. The 'Multi-Well Change Parameters' module will also be affected. If a zone has been locked by 'checking' the 'Lock Zone' column then the zone will be 'grayed' out throughout all the tabs of the module.

Related Topics Clay Volume Analysis Changing Parameters on Screen Define Zone Depth Parameters Linking Clay Parameters Clay Volume Parameter Names 10.3.2.4 Linking Clay Parameters

The 'Link Clay Paras' parameter (an 'On' / 'Off' tick box) has the following function: When 'checked' for example, where double clay indicators Density/Neutron and Density/Sonic are set up, any changes made to the 'common' curve (in this case Density) by moving a crossplot end-point (say 'ND Den Clay'), will simultaneously update the Density Clay parameter in the other double clay indicator ('DS Den Clay'). The interactive 'ND Den Clay' and 'DS Den Clay' lines in the 'Clay Volume Interactive Plot' will also update to reflect any changes.

NOTE: Setting this parameter to 'on' DOES NOT update Single Clay Indicators, so, for example a neutron log used as a single clay indicator (parameter 'Neu Clay') would not be affected if the double clay indicator parameter 'ND Neu Clay' were changed in a crossplot or in the parameter grid.

Section 10.3 Interpretation : Clay Volume Analysis

761

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Linking PhiSw Clay Parameters The 'Link PhiSw Clay' parameter turns on the clay link to the 'PhiSw' module. This parameter will only be active if the parameter sets are linked (the 'Linked Set' icon will be shown). In the case shown above there is no link icon

and the 'Link PhiSw Clay' column is 'greyed' out.

If the 'Clay Volume' and 'PhiSw' parameters sets were linked then 'ticking' the 'Link PhiSw Clay' column 'On' will mean that any changes made in either module to the Density, Neutron and Sonic clay parameters will be made to the other module as well. It will also cause the module to be re-run automatically with the new parameter value. NOTE: Changing a parameter in a grid display does not mean that a zone is re-calculated immediately. The user must click the 'Run' button in order to re-calculate all zones and update all displays unless the modules are linked.

Column Edits If the user wants to set all the parameters in one column of a parameter screen to the same value, then 'click' in the header cells of the column. This will turn the column header box to green. Now, changing a single value in the column will populate the entire column with the same new value. To turn the 'column edit' off, 'click' the column header again and its colour will return to grey. Column edits remain active while the well stays loaded in memory. They have to be reset, if required, next time the well is loaded. The following shows a column edit turned on for the 'Gr Clean' parameter.

Section 10.3 Interpretation : Clay Volume Analysis

Interpretation

Senergy

762

Related Topics Clay Volume Analysis Changing Parameters on Screen Define Zone Depth Parameters Linking Clay Parameters Clay Volume Parameter Names 10.3.2.5 Clay Volume Parameter Names

The following input parameters are used in the 'Clay Volume' module. Only those parameters that are selected on the 'Clay Volume Analysis' screen will be available in the interactive plot. The clay indicators will be displayed on separate 'tabs' in the 'Clay Volume Parameter' module window. Numbers in parentheses ( ), prefixing a parameter name, relate to the Monte Carlo Error Analysis module and correspond to Clay Volume inputs found in the file MonteCarloDefaults. par. (1) 'Gr Use' Flag Set to 'On' if you wish to use the gamma ray as a clay indicator in this zone. Set to 'Off' for 'Vclay from gamma ray' to be set to Null values over this zone. (2) 'Gr Clean' Value of the gamma ray in a clean, zero Vclay zone. (3) 'Gr Clay' Value of the gamma ray in a 100% clay zone. (4) 'Gr Method' The following methods can be selected: 'Linear' : Linear relationship between Gr and VclGr 'Curved' : A composite curved relationship. 'Clavier' : As per Clavier et al. 'Stieber' : As per Stieber et al (South Louisiana Miocene and Pliocene). 'Old Rock' : As per Larionov et al for older rocks (Mesozoic). 'Young Rock' : As per Larionov for younger rocks (Tertiary clastics). (5) 'Neu Use' Flag Set to 'On' if you wish to use the neutron as a clay indicator in this zone. Set to 'Off' for 'Vclay from neutron' to be set to Null values over this zone.

Section 10.3 Interpretation : Clay Volume Analysis

763

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

(6) 'Neu Clean' Value of the Neutron log in a clean, zero Vclay zone. The Neutron log should have been recorded in Limestone porosity units. The user should be careful in setting the 'Neu Clean' parameter at any value other than zero, since the indicator can easily under-estimate the clay volume if the parameter is set too high. (7) 'Neu Clay' Value of the neutron log in a 100% clay zone. (8) 'SP Use' Flag Set to 'On' if you wish to use the SP as a clay indicator in this zone. Set to 'No' for 'Vclay from SP' to be set to Null values over this zone. (9) 'SP Clean' Value of the SP in a clean, zero Vclay zone. (10) 'SP Clay' Value of the SP in a 100% clay zone. (11) 'Res Use' Flag Set to 'On' if you wish to use a resistivity log as a clay indicator in this zone. Set to 'Off' for 'Vclay from resistivity' to be set to Null values over this zone. The resistivity indicator will generally only work in hydrocarbon-bearing zones where the surrounding shales have low resistivities. (12) 'Res Clean' Value of the resistivity in a clean, zero Vclay zone. Generally chosen as the highest resistivity in a hydrocarbon-bearing, clay-free zone. (13) 'Res Clay' Value of the resistivity in a 100% clay zone. (14) 'Oth Use' ('Other single indicator')Flag Set to 'On' if you wish to use an extra user-defined single indicator as a clay indicator in this zone. Set to 'No' for 'Vclay from other single indicator' to be set to Null values over this zone. The 'other single indicator' is a linear indicator similar to the gamma ray linear indicator. (15) 'Oth Clean' Value of the other single indicator in a clean, zero Vclay zone. (16) 'Oth Clay' Value of the other single indicator, in a 100% clay zone. The Image below displays the layout of the parameter 'Neu/Den' tab for the Neutron/Density

Section 10.3 Interpretation : Clay Volume Analysis

Interpretation

Senergy

764

double clay indicators. NOTE: the input Neutron Porosity curve should have been recorded in limestone porosity units.

(17) 'ND Use' Flag Set to 'On' if you wish to use the Neutron/Density as a clay indicator in this zone. Set to 'Off' for Vclay Neutron/Density to be set to Null values over this zone. (18) 'ND Neu Clay' Neutron clay value for the Neutron / Density clay indicator. (19) 'ND Den Clay' Density clay value for the Neutron / Density clay indicator. (20) 'ND Den Clean1' Density value for point 1 on the clean line. The clean line is defined by two points on the crossplot. (21) 'ND Den Clean2' Density value for point 2 on the clean line. (22) 'ND Neu Clean1' Neutron value for point 1 on the clean line. (23) 'ND Neu Clean2' Neutron value for point 2 on the clean line. (24) 'SD Use' Flag Set to 'On' if you wish to use the Sonic/Density as a clay indicator in this zone. Set to 'Off' for Vclay Sonic/Density to be set to Null values over this zone. (25) 'SD Son Clay' Sonic clay value for the Sonic / Density clay indicator. (26) 'SD Den Clay'

Section 10.3 Interpretation : Clay Volume Analysis

765

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Density clay value for the Sonic / Density clay indicator. (27) 'SD Den Clean1' Density value for point 1 on the clean line. The clean line is defined by two points on the crossplot. (28) 'SD Den Clean2' Density value for point 2 on the clean line. (29) 'SD Son Clean1' Sonic value for point 1 on the clean line. (30) 'SD Son Clean2' Sonic value for point 2 on the clean line. (31) 'NS Use' Flag Set to 'On' if you wish to use the Neutron/Sonic as a clay indicator in this zone. Set to 'Off' for Vclay Neutron/Sonic to be set to Null values over this zone. (32) 'NS Neu Clay' Neutron clay value for the Neutron / Sonic clay indicator. (33) 'NS Son Clay' Sonic clay value for the Neutron / Sonic clay indicator. (34) 'NS Son Clean1' Sonic value for point 1 on the clean line. The clean line is defined by two points on the crossplot. (35) 'NS Son Clean2' Sonic value for point 2 on the clean line. (36) 'NS Neu Clean1' Neutron value for point 1 on the clean line. (37) 'NS Neu Clean2' Neutron value for point 2 on the clean line. (38) 'OD Use' ('Other Double') Flag Set to 'On' if you wish to use another, user-defined, double indicator as a clay indicator in this zone. Set to 'Off' for Vclay other double to be set to Null values over this zone. The other double clay indicator is calculated just like the Neutron /Density clay indicators with a clay point and a clean line. (39) 'OD Curv1 Clay' Clay value for curve 1 for the other double clay indicator.

Section 10.3 Interpretation : Clay Volume Analysis

Interpretation

Senergy

766

(40) 'OD Curv2 Clay' Clay value for curve 2 for the other double clay indicator. (41) 'OD Curv1 Clean1' Other double curve 2 value for point 1 on the clean line. The clean line is defined by two points on the crossplot. (42) 'OD Ot2 Clean2' Other double curve 2 value for point 2 on the clean line. (43) 'OD Ot1 Clean1' Other double curve 1 value for point 1 on the clean line. (44) 'OD Ot1 Clean2' Other double curve 1 value for point 2 on the clean line. (45) 'BadH1 Use' Flag Set to 'On' ('checked') if you wish to use the 'Bad Hole Indicator 1' curve in a zone. Set to 'Off' ('blank') to turn 'Bad Hole Indicator 1' curve off in a zone. (46) 'BadH1 Min' Bad Hole Indicator 1 Minimum value. When the 'Bad Hole Indicator 1' curve values are greater than this minimum value, any double clay indicators will be switched off. When the parameter is left 'blank', the discriminator curve is ignored. (47) 'BadH1 Max' Bad Hole Indicator 1 Maximum value. When the 'Bad Hole Indicator 1' curve values are less than this maximum value, any double clay indicators will be switched off. When the parameter is left 'blank', the discriminator curve is ignored. (48) 'BadH2 Use' Flag Set to 'On' if you wish to use the 'Bad Hole Indicator 2' curve in a zone. Set to 'Off' to turn 'Bad Hole Indicator 2' curve off in a zone. (49) 'BadH2 Min' Bad Hole Indicator 2 Minimum value. When the 'Bad Hole Indicator 2' curve values are greater than this Minimum value, any double clay indicators will be switched off. When the parameter is left 'blank', the discriminator curve is ignored. (50) 'BadH2 Max' Bad hole indicator 2 Maximum value.

Section 10.3 Interpretation : Clay Volume Analysis

767

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

When the 'Bad Hole Indicator 2' curve values are less than this Maximum value, any double clay indicators will be switched off. When the parameter is left 'blank', the discriminator is ignored.

Related Topics Clay Volume Analysis Changing Parameters on Screen Define Zone Depth Parameters Linking Clay Parameters Clay Volume Parameter Names

10.3.3 Clay Volume Interactive Plot The 'Clay Volume Interactive Plot' consists of (from left to right): A Depth track, 'Zone' track, 'Single Clay indicators' (one per track), 'Double Clay indicators' (one per track), a 'Bad Hole' track and a 'Result' track containing a curve for each of the clay indicator interpretations.

Zone Track The Zone track is used for displaying the current Clay Volume zonation used in the interpretation. Zones can be 'created', 'deleted' and zone 'tops' can be moved.

Section 10.3 Interpretation : Clay Volume Analysis

Interpretation

Senergy

768

To create a new zone by splitting a current zone: 'click' in the 'zone track' at the depth for the split and choose 'Split Zone' from the pop-up menu. To delete a zone, choose 'Delete Zone' from the pop-up menu. Zone tops and bottoms can be moved by placing the cursor on the top of a zone in the zone track and, with the left mouse button held, drag the top to a new position. It is possible to have gaps between zones. To remove a gap, drag the bottom of the zone above a gap to below the top of the zone below the gap. 'Clicking' 'Edit Zone' opens the 'Edit Zone tops' module. This has limited operability. It is only possible to import tops data from a spreadsheet, or output the created Clay Volume zones to a text file. For greater 'editability' of Clay Volume zones open the 'Clay Volume Parameters' module.

Single Indicator Track The track will consist of a single curve, which is the indicator, plus two vertical parameter lines, which are the indicators 'Clean' and 'Clay' parameter values. To interactively change a parameter, place the cursor on a parameter line. The name of the parameter and its value will be displayed at the bottom left corner of the main window. With the left mouse button, drag the line to its new value. When the mouse button is released, that zone will be re-calculated and all displays updated. By 'clicking' in a track , a pop-up menu will appear. Firstly, this allows the user to turn 'On' / 'Off' the indicator in this zone. Secondly, the user can select a histogram plot for the indicator. This will allow the user to change the parameter values using the interactive lines on the histogram plot. (See Histogram section).

Double Indicator Track This type of track will contain two curves which make up the 'double indicator', plus two vertical lines that will be the 'clay' parameter values for each of the two curves. The clay parameter lines can be moved interactively, as described for the single indicators. The pop-up menu has an additional feature, which allows a crossplot of the double indicator to be displayed. The crossplot will allow the user to interactively set the 'clay point' and the 'clean line' (See Crossplot section). The crossplot method is the most useful for setting the double indicator parameters. When the 'Link Clay Paras' parameter, on the 'Zone Depths' tab of the 'Clay Volume Parameters' interface is turned on ('checked') then, where multiple double clay indicators are active, any common double clay parameter- for example 'ND Den Clay' and 'DS Den Clay' will be simultaneously updated when a crossplot Clay point or interactive line on the 'Clay Volume

Section 10.3 Interpretation : Clay Volume Analysis

769

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Interactive Plot' is moved.

Bad Hole Indicator The bad hole indicator track will only be displayed when a curve is selected as a 'bad hole' indicator in the 'Clay Volume Analysis' module . Initially, the bad hole indicator logic is not active nor are its cut-off parameters set. The cut-off values need to be initialized in the 'Clay Volume Parameters' interface and then they will be displayed as vertical lines in a log track on the 'Clay Volume Interactive Plot'. Once displayed, the cut-off values can be changed interactively as described in the single indicator section above. Where a single Bad Hole Indicator curve, such as the Caliper log, is used to switch off doubleclay indicators where the borehole is washed out, the user needs to input a 'BadH1 Min' parameter value into the 'Clay Volume Parameters' 'Bad Hole' tab. When the caliper log values are greater than the 'BadH1 Min' parameter, the double clay indicators are switched off. The screen shot shown below illustrates a Bad Hole logic Flag set up to turn off double clay indicators in 2 zones where the Bad Hole Indicator (caliper) curve values exceed 10.5 inches. The user must set the 'BadH1 Min' parameter to the maximum allowable caliper value (in caliper curve units).

If the user wishes to discriminate 'bad hole' conditions using a caliper log for example, to switch off the double clay indicators where hole diameter is greater than a maximum threshold (over gauge) and also where the caliper tool is closed (caliper curve values over some intervals are less than a minimum threshold) the Caliper curve should be selected in both 'Bad Hole

Section 10.3 Interpretation : Clay Volume Analysis

Interpretation

Senergy

770

Indicators for Double Clay Indicators' 'Name' boxes in the 'Clay Volume Analysis' module. After clicking the 'Run' button and launching the 'Clay Volume Interactive Plot', open the 'Clay Volume Parameters' interface. On the 'Bad Hole' tab set the parameters as illustrated below; 'BadH1 Max' and 'BadH2 Min'. The double clay indicators will be switched off where these two thresholds are exceeded.

Result Track The result track will contain the resulting 'Clay Volume' curve for each clay indicator selected. The minimum and average of all the clay indicators will not be displayed but can easily be added, if required, by 'clicking' on the track header and adding the curve. A clay indicator which is not used in a zone will not be displayed in the result track for that zone (its values having been set to 'Null' over that zone).

Undo/Redo Once the Parameter lines have been altered undo/redo arrows appear in the top left-hand corner of the log plot. These allow the user to go back to the original position of the parameter lines. As the arrows are 'clicked' the parameter lines move and the output curves are recalculated. The undo/redo arrows only work if the well and zones remain unchanged during the current interpretation session.

Section 10.3 Interpretation : Clay Volume Analysis

771

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

If the drop-down icon (between the two arrows) is 'clicked' then a list of all the possible undo's / redo's is displayed. This facilitates the selection of which undo / redo the user wants to perform.

Section 10.3 Interpretation : Clay Volume Analysis

Interpretation

Senergy

Related Topics Clay Volume Analysis Define Clay Volume Output Curves Clay Volume Parameters Clay Volume Interactive Plot Clay Volume Equations and Methodology

10.3.4 Clay Volume Equations and Methodology Gamma Ray The Gamma Ray clay indicator (VclGr) can be calculated using the following methods:

Linear : VclGr

Gr GrClean GrClay GRClean

Curved : Z = VclGr as above

Section 10.3 Interpretation : Clay Volume Analysis

772

773

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

VclGr

for Z less than 0.55

Senergy

0.0006078

for Z greater than 0.55 and less than 0.73 VclGr 2.1212 for Z greater than 0.73 and less than 1.0 VclGr = Z

Z

Clavier : VclGr

1.7

3.38

Z

0.7

2

Stieber (South Louisiana Miocene and Pliocene) : VclGr

0.5 Z 1.5 Z

Larionov older rocks (Mesozoic) : VclGr

0.333 (2 2

Z

1)

Larionov younger rocks (Tertiary clastics) : VclGr

0.08336 (2 3.7

Z

1)

The following plot shows the different gamma ray Vclay relationships.

Section 10.3 Interpretation : Clay Volume Analysis

100.0 Z 0.81667

1.58527

Interpretation

Senergy

SP

VclSP

SP SPClean SPClay SPClean

Neutron VclNeu

neu

neu

neuClay

neuClay

neuClean neuClean

Resistivity Z

Rclay Rt

Rclean Rclean

Rt Rclay

for Rt greater than 2 x Rclay then otherwise

Vcl Re s

0.5

2 Z

0.67 Z 1

VclRes = Z

Section 10.3 Interpretation : Clay Volume Analysis

774

775

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Other Linear Vcl

LogCurve LogClean LogClay LogClean

Neutron / Density The 'Double Clay Indicators' work on the principle of defining a 'clean line' and a 'clay point'. The clay volume is calculated as the distance the input data falls between the 'clay point' and the 'clean line'. The following plot illustrates the principle:

VclND

DenCl 2 DenCl 2

DenCl1

DenCl1

Neu

NeuCl1

Den

DenCl1

NeuClay

NeuCl1

DenClay

NeuCl 2

DenCl1

NeuCl1

NeuCl 2

NeuCl1

Where DenCl1 & NeuCl1 and DenCl2 & NeuCl2 are the density and neutron values for the two ends of the clean line.

Sonic Density VclSD

DenCl 2 DenCl 2

DenCl1

DenCl1

Son

SonCl1

Den

DenCl1

SonClay

SonCl1

DenClay

SonCl 2

DenCl1

SonCl1

SonCl 2

SonCl1

Where DenCl1 & SonCl1 and DenCl2 & SonCl2 are the density and sonic values for the two ends of the clean line.

Neutron Sonic

Section 10.3 Interpretation : Clay Volume Analysis

Interpretation

Senergy

VclNS

NeuCl 2 NeuCl 2

NeuCl1

NeuCl1

Son

SonCl1

Neu

NeuCl1

SonClay

SonCl1

NeuClay

SonCl 2

NeuCl1

776

SonCl1

SonCl 2

SonCl1

Where NeuCl1 & SonCl1 and NeuCl2 & SonCl2 are the neutron and sonic values for the two ends of the clean line.

Other Double Indicator VclOD

OD1Cl 2 OD1Cl 2

OD1Cl1

OD1Cl1

OD2

OD2Cl1

OD1 OD1Cl1

OD2Clay

OD2Cl1

OD1Clay

OD2Cl 2

OD1Cl1

OD2Cl1

OD2Cl 2

OD2Cl1

Where OD1Cl1 & OD2Cl1 and OD1Cl2 & OD2Cl2 are the other double clay volume input curves (OD1 and OD2) values for the two ends of the clean line.

Bad Hole Indicator If the 'Bad Hole indicator' logic is used, then over any interval which is flagged as Bad Hole all the 'Double Clay Indicators' will be set to Null (-999).

Related Topics Clay Volume Analysis Define Clay Volume Output Curves Clay Volume Parameters Clay Volume Interactive Plot Clay Volume Equations and Methodology

Section 10.3 Interpretation : Clay Volume Analysis

777

10.4

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Porosity and Water Saturation

The Porosity and Water Saturation interpretation module is used to interactively calculate porosity (PHI), water saturation (Sw), flushed zone water saturation (Sxo), matrix density ( RHOMA) , hydrocarbon density (RHOHY) and wet and dry clay volumes (VWCL & VDCL). The number and type of output curves depends on the porosity model chosen and the logic selected. The module is accessed under the main menu Interpretation Saturation or from the

Porosity and Water

speed button.

The set-up screens allow the user to select default porosity and water saturation models which will initiate the Porosity and Water Saturation Parameters display. Once the OK button is clicked, any changes to calculation methods or interpretation parameters should be made using the Porosity and Water Saturation Parameters screen. The porosity and saturation equation defaults are also used to set up the Interactive Plot for this interpretation module. It is therefore important that the correct models are selected, in order for the appropriate Interactive Log Plot to be launched. The Porosity and Water Saturation module can now be linked to the Clay Volume module see Linking Clay Volume module to Porosity Water Saturation module within the Link Zones / Top Sets chapter for more details. The Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis module is arranged on three tabbed screens. These are, Input Curves, Output Curves, Plot Options.

Related Topics Define Input Curves Define Output Curves Define the Plot Options Porosity and Sw Interactive Plot Porosity and Sw Parameters Porosity and Sw Methodology Porosity and Sw Equations

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

778

10.4.1 Define Input Curves The Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis Set Up window shown above, sets up the input and output curves for these calculations, plus some default logic. The input curve entry boxes will be automatically filled in with appropriate curve names if IP finds them in the currentlyselected well. The user can change any input curve name if the defaulted curve name is not correct. To Display the Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis Dialog: From the Interpretation Menu, Select Porosity and Water Saturation to display the Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis Dialog.

Alternatively press the Keys Ctrl+Alt+P to display the Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis Dialog

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

779

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

It is not necessary to fill in all Input Curve boxes. Only those needed as input to the userselected Porosity and Saturation models are required. The Clay Volume will be assumed to be zero if the Clay Volume input curve entry box is left blank.

Default Models The Initial Porosity Model and Default Saturation Equation are selected from on-screen drop-down lists.

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

780

The Default Mud Type is OBM check-box allows the user to set up the mud type for this interpretation module.

Pass Through Porosity The Pass through Porosity entry box, illustrated below, allows the user to select a pre-existing

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

781

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

porosity curve (one calculated outside of this module) to be used in the Water Saturation computation.This input curve is used to override the default porosity calculations. When a curve name is entered into this box, the module will only calculate water saturation. On running the module, the user should check the Porosity Water Saturation Parameters table, On the Phi Logic tab, select the Input Crv option in the Porosity Method column and choose the Input Porosity type (Total or Effective) as shown in the diagram below. Then Run the calculation again.

Other Input Curves The program assumes that any neutron curve entered is in Limestone matrix units. If this is not the case, then the curve should be converted to Limestone porosity units using the appropriate service company environmental correction module or the Basic Log Analysis Functions module. The Bad Hole Discriminator curve entry box can be used to set up a curve as a flag to indicate depth intervals where hole conditions are such that the default porosity method is not valid, for example, in sufficiently badly-washed-out, rugose hole where the Density and Neutron tools are no longer in pad contact with the borehole wall. In such a case the Porosity model will default to calculating a Sonic Porosity over the bad hole interval. The Non Calculation Flag curve can be used to turn off the calculations over an interval. If this type of input flag contains any value other than 0 or Null, then such a depth level is not calculated (Porosities, clay volume, mineral volumes are set to 0 and Sw set to 1.0). This can be used to flag special minerals like Coal or Salt using techniques outside this module (for example these could be picked by hand using the Interactive Curve Splice module using the Null Curve option). The Temperature is an essential curve and must be calculated and selected as an input for

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

782

this module to operate. A Temperature curve can either be imported from an external source, or the curve can be calculated using the Temperature Gradient Module.The Temperature Units drop-down list box is used to define the units for any temperature entered as a parameter. For instance, the Rw parameter will have a temperature associated with it.

Multi-Mineral Interpretation Settings The Multi-Mineral Analysis Defaults are used to set up multi-mineral naming and Interactive log Plot defaults. Checking the box in the top left hand corner of this panel activates this analysis option.

The 3 Minerals and 4 Minerals radio button options allows the user to set the default number of mineral volumes to calculate. If the 4 Minerals option is selected for the initial model Run, the user can subsequently change and use the 3 Minerals option, over specified zones, by changing the Model Type parameter for that zone. This is achieved through editing the Porosity and Water Saturation Parameters. The mineral names are user-editable text entries and must be entered under the Name box. These names are used on the parameter screens to identify the different minerals that are being calculated. Changing the mineral name will change the Output Mineral Volume curve name on the Output Curves tab. The check boxes next to the mineral names are used to set up the default interactive log plot so that the correct lithology is displayed. The user can only select (check) one mineral type per line. If this is the first time the module is Run then the mineral type will be used to set default mineral parameters.

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

783

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Related Topics Define Input Curves Define Output Curves Define the Plot Options Porosity and Sw Interactive Plot Porosity and Sw Parameters Porosity and Sw Methodology Porosity and Sw Equations

10.4.2 Define Output Curves The Output Curves tab allows the user to select the output curves that are to be produced by the module. IP provides default output curve names for some outputs, but the user can edit any name to customize the outputs. Not all output curves are produced automatically. Those text entry boxes with no curve names in them are optional curves. You must type in a curve name to create them as output curves. The output curve list depends on the Default Saturation Equation used and the input curves selected.

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

784

Optional output curves include: Rw at Form. Temp - Formation Water Resistivity at formation temperature Density reconstruct - Reconstructed density curve Den Fluid Rxo Zone - Density of Fluid in the Flushed Zone computed from the following equation: Den Fluid Rxo Zone = RhoFiltrate * Sxo + (1-Sxo) * RhoHyd where: RhoHyd is the apparent hydrocarbon density, as seen by the density tool i.e. electron density. In addition to the curves defined on the Output Curves tab, the following curves are also created automatically by the program: RWAPP

:

Apparent water resistivity.

RMFAPP

:

Apparent flushed zone water resistivity.

QVN

:

Normalized Qv. Only if Juhasz water saturation model is chosen.

CWAPP

:

Apparent water conductivity. Only if Juhasz water saturation model is

chosen.

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

785

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

QVapp

:

Apparent Qv. Only if Waxman Smits water saturation model is chosen.

PhiT_recp

:

Reciprocal of PhiT. Only if Waxman Smits water saturation model is

chosen. QVN, CWAPP, QVapp and PHIT_recp are output curves based on the Water Saturation model selected. New output curves for v3.5 BVWT

:

Bulk volume total. PhiT * SwT

BVWSXOT

:

Bulk volume flushed zone total. PhiT * SxoT

PhiTLam :

Total porosity in laminated sand layer.

SwTLam :

SwT in the laminated sand layer.

BVWTLam RtLam

:

RxoLam :

:

Bulk volume water total in laminated sand layer. PhiTLam * SwTLam

Rt in the sand lamination used in the SwLam calculations. Rxo in the sand lamination used in the SxoLam calculations.

VFINES (Volume of Fines) is the sum of VSILT plus VWCL. The user can now use the Cumulative Curve Style option within log plots to create these intermediate type curves. The Interactive Log Plot will look slightly different, depending on the saturation equation chosen and the input curves selection. The most important difference is seen between a Dual Water saturation equation, where Rw bound can be interactively changed, and the other Archie type equations, where Rt clay can be interactively changed. If the Juhasz and the Waxman Smits equations are selected, additional output curves are created (listed above), which allow special Interactive Crossplots, designed for these equations, to be made available. The Multi-Mineral option, if selected, will also change how the Interactive Log Plot is formatted. It is therefore important that the input saturation equation and multi-mineral defaults are selected with due care. There is now the option in v3.5 to display just Total porosity curves on the Interactive Log Plot. The Parameter set name box is used to name the file where the Porosity and Water Saturation parameters will be stored after an interpretation is finished. Parameter Sets are saved by selecting the Save Parameter set in the main menu. The same name is also used to save the Parameter Set listings to the hard disk with an extension of .TXT. The Print Parameter set menu item is used to do this. Parameter sets are also stored automatically in the database. The Load / Save Parameter Sets button allows the user to manage the Porosity and Water Saturation Parameter Set. See Parameter Set Management. The user clicks the OK button to start the Porosity and Water Saturation interpretation. If this is the first OK using this module on a particular well, a new Parameter Set (default name

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

786

PhiSw) is created, and default parameters will be calculated or initialized for each interpretation parameter. The user will be asked whether the clay parameters from the Clay Volume module should be copied to initialize the PhiSw parameters. If the user chooses to copy the clay parameters, then all the zone top and bottom depths from the Clay Volume module will be copied to the Porosity and Water Saturation module along with the clay parameters for each zone. If an existing Parameter Set has been loaded, or the user has already run the Porosity and Water Saturation module, then the user will be asked whether the Interactive Log Plot should be created. The user should normally answer Yes to this, since this initializes all the special Interactive log Plot features.

Method Comparison Output Curves If the following porosity output curves are checked on then these porosities are calculated at the end of the analysis under Section 21 Final Calculations in the Porosity and Sw Equations and Methodology section. The porosities are calculated using the same equations as defined in the porosity methods section 5 through 10 in the Porosity and Sw Equations and Methodology section except that the Sw used in the equations is the Sw calculated from the main logic. Hence it is possible that these porosities will be marginally different than the same method selected as the Porosity Method parameter. Since Sw will be calculated using the Porosity Method parameter which may be different from the comparison porosity. These comparison methods are designed to compare porosity calculation methods. However, the final porosity used for summations should be the Phie curve derived using the method set with the Porosity Method parameter. This will ensure that the calculated Sw uses the correct porosity curve in the calculation.

A similar set of output comparison Sw curves can be created if the following boxes are checked. The saturations are calculated at the end of the analysis - Section 21 Final Calculations. The user can output effective and total water saturations for each method. The calculations are made

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

787

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

using the Phie and PhiT curves. The Phie and PhiT curves are hydrocarbon corrected using the Sxo curve which is calculated using the Sat Equation parameter in the Sw Logic tab of the Porosity Water Saturation Parameters module. Hence it is possible that these Sws will be marginally different than the Sw calculated from the same method selected as the Sat Equation parameter. These comparison methods are designed to compare water saturation methods they should not be used for anything other than this. The final Sw used for summations should be the Sw and SwT curves using the method set with the Sat Equation parameter. To illustrate the water saturation comparison method and the mnemonics used further we will use the Archie equation as an example. There are two Archie equations; the Archie and the Archie Total. Archie outputs an effective water saturation (SwArch). While Archie Total outputs a total water saturation (SwTArchT). One cannot compare Sw and SwT directly as they are different things. Hence, the program calculates a SwT from the Archie equation (SwTArch) and a Sw from the Archie Total (SwArchT) equation. It does the same for the all of the water saturation equations. These curves are meant for rough comparison purposes only as they havent been hydrocarbon corrected in the same way as water saturations calculated via the Sat Equation parameter in the Sw Logic tab of the Porosity Water Saturation Parameters module.

The default log plot will include these comparisons as separate tracks. These tracks will only appear if one or more comparison curves are output. The standard result (Phie and Sw curves) are included in the comparison tracks.

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

788

Clay Type Distribution Using the Thomas-Stieber method for shale (clay) distribution, IP can now output the volumes of Laminated, Dispersed and Structural clay in the rock. The method comes from the Juhasz SPWLA paper Assessment of the distribution of shale, porosity and hydrocarbon saturation in shaly sands. The techniques described within IP are the same as in the Thomas -Stieber paper but developed further so that Phie and Vcl can be used directly rather than the raw Neutron / Density crossplot. This allows for hydrocarbon corrected results. In IP we generally talk in terms of clay volumes, however, it is perfectly possible to adjust parameters so that calculated volumes are shale volumes. This is really up to the preference of the user. The results from the calculations are perfectly legitimate regardless of whether the user is calculating clay or shale volumes.

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

789

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The basic Thomas-Stieber crossplot model for shale distribution is shown above. Depending on whether a point falls above or below the Laminated line either a Dispersed / Laminated or a Laminated / Structural model is used. There is no option to have a Dispersed / Structural model. The Clay Type Distribution calculations are automatically made and the results are output only if the user selects in the Plot Options tab the following three options: Display Clay / Shale Type Display Sand Lamination properties track Display SwT Laminated in Sw track The twelve output curves related to the Clay Type Distribution are: Vclay Laminated (Vlam) - is the volume of laminated clay in the whole rock (i.e. sand and shale laminations combined). Vclay Dispersed (Vdisp) - is the volume of the dispersed clay in the whole rock. Vclay Structural (Vstruc) - is the volume of the structural clay in the whole rock. Phi Laminated (PhieLam) - is the effective porosity in the laminated sand layer. PhiT Laminated (PhiTLam) - is the total porosity in the laminated sand layer. Sw Laminated (SwLam) - is the effective water saturation in the laminated sand layer. SwT Laminated (SwTLam) - is the total water saturation in the laminated sand layer. BVW Laminated (BVWLam) - is the bulk volume water in the laminated sand layer. BVWT Laminated (BVWTLam) - is the total bulk volume water in the laminated sand layer. Vcl Laminated (VclLam) - is the dispersed clay volume in the actual sand laminations.

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

790

Rt Sand Lamination (RtLam) - is the deep resistivity (Rt) in the sand lamination used in the SwLam calculations. Rxo Sand Lamination (RxoLam) - is the invaded zone resistivity (Rxo) in the sand lamination used in the SxoLam calculations. For the equations showing the derivation of these curves go to Section 23. Clay Type Distribution Equations in the Porosity and Sw Equations and Methodology section. The Laminated result curves are the properties of the sand laminations in a Shale/Sand laminated sequence.

Related Topics Define Input Curves Define Output Curves Define the Plot Options Porosity and Sw Interactive Plot Porosity and Sw Parameters Porosity and Sw Methodology Porosity and Sw Equations

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

791

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

10.4.3 Define the Plot Options The Plot Options tab allows some customization of the default Phi/Sw plot.

The Porosity, Resistivity and Salinity track scales can be set here. The Auto scale input Density and Neutron logs check box allows the user to select auto scaling of the Density and Neutron curves. If the box isnt checkedthen the default curve scales will be displayed. If the Display Silt box is checked then Silt will be displayed in the lithology track. Tick the Display Coal / Salt / No analyses flags box if the user wants to output a flag showing that no analysis was performed over a coal or salt interval. A Gamma Ray track can be switched on or off using the Display a Gamma Ray track tick box. The Display Module Logic Track creates a logic track which displays the PhiFlag curve results.

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

792

The shading for the clean matrix can be selected from the drop-down selection box of all available lithology types Main Lithology shading. The Hydrocarbon Fluid shading options are used to set up the hydrocarbon display colour in the Interactive Log Plot. If the Oil option is chosen, then the plot will show the hydrocarbon as green shading. If the Gas option is chosen, hydrocarbon will be displayed as red shading. The Both option will set up a variable shading for hydrocarbon, which will make the shading green when the output hydrocarbon density is greater than 0.4 gm/cc and red when the density is less than 0.4 gm/cc. This cut-off value can be changed by the user in the Plot Format. The Make Total Porosity Display when checked will display the default PhiSw log plot with Total porosity curves. The Porosity track will show PhiT, BVWSXOT and BVWT curves. The Lithology track will contain VDCL (dry clay), VSILT (silt) and PHIT (total porosity). If the Laminated sand options are turned on then the Lithology track will still contain effective porosity curves. This is due to Thomas Steiber shale type analysis curves being wet clay curves.

The last three Plot Options relate to Clay Type Distribution. The Display Clay / Shale Type check box enables the user to display in the Lithology track of the default Phi/Sw plot the three types of shale. The normal VWCL curve is no longer shown since this is the sum of the three shale types. If the Display Sand Lamination properties track is checked, the default Phi/Sw plot has two tracks added to it; Sand Lam and Sand Lam Res. If the Display SwT Laminated in Sw track is checked then the SwTLam curve is added to

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

793

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

the Saturation track. NOTE: SWLam is not added in the effective porosity display since it is the same as Sw. For the equations showing the derivation of these curves go to Section 12. Laminated Sw Model in the Porosity and Sw Equations and Methodology section.

Related Topics Define Input Curves Define Output Curves Define the Plot Options Porosity and Sw Interactive Plot Porosity and Sw Parameters Porosity and Sw Methodology Porosity and Sw Equations

10.4.4 Porosity and Sw Interactive Plot The Porosity and Water Saturation module Interactive Plot format, from left to right, consists of: Depth track Zone track: The Zone track is used to display the current zonation scheme for the study well. Interpretation zones can be created, deleted and zone top depths moved for use in an interpretation. Gamma Ray track : Gamma Ray. This contains Gamma Ray curves. This track is for reference purposes only. It can be switched off by using the Display a Gamma Ray track check box in the Plot Options Tab of the Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis module. Porosity Input track : Neutron, Density and Sonic. The Porosity Input track will contain the Neutron, Density, Sonic and, if available, EPT TPL curves. Resistivity track : Rt and Rxo. The Resistivity track will contain the input Rxo and Rt curves, displayed along with their clay parameter interactive lines. Salinity track : Rw and Rmf apparent track. Rw Apparent (RWAPP)and Rmf Apparent ( RMFAPP) curves are automatically calculated from the Phi Total (PHIT) and resistivity curves, using the a and m parameters that are entered on the Sw Logic tab of the Phi/Sw Parameters table. The output RWAPP and RMFAPP curves have been converted, within IP, to the temperature entered for the Rw or Rmf parameter (Rw temp or Rmf temp.

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

794

parameter) on the Sw Logic parameters tab. Interactive lines for Rw and Rmf are available. If the Dual Water saturation model was selected as the default (see Input window above), then RwB (Rw bound) and RmfB (Rmf bound) interactive parameter lines will also be displayed in the track. Matrix Track : Rho matrix, Dt matrix and Hydrocarbon density. Three curves are generally displayed in this track. Rho matrix (RHOMA), DT matrix (DTMA)and Rho Hydrocarbon ( RHOHY). These are computed curves from the interpretation run. These curves are often seen as vertical lines, since they represent fixed values in the interpretation. Logic Flag: PHIFLAG Logic. The Logic track displays the PHIFLAG curve. This curve should contain no values after a normal execution of the PHI/Sw computation module. Water Saturations Track : Sw and Sxo. The Saturation track contains the computed SwU and SxoU curves, which are the unlimited curves. Calculated Porosity Track :Phi Effective and Phi Total. The Porosity track will contain the Total and Effective porosity computed curves plus a Moveable Oil Plot. Lithology track : Vclay, Vsilt, Vsand. The Lithology track will contain a display showing the proportion of the total rock for Wet Clay, Silt, Sand and Porosity. If the method comparison output curves for porosity and water saturation have been checked on in the Output Curves tab of the Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis then a further three tracks will be displayed: Sw Comparison track : Sw curves from the different water saturation equations calculated using Phie. SwT Comparison track : SwT curves from the different water saturation equations calculated using PhiT. Phie Comparison track : Phie curves calculated using the different porosity equations. If the Display Sand Lamination properties track has been checked on in the Plot Options tab of the Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis then a Sand Lam and Sand Lam Res track will be added to the Phi/Sw interactive plot. Below is the standard Phi/Sw Interactive Plot. See Also: Manage the Interactive Log Plot

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

795

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Related Topics Define Input Curves Define Output Curves Define the Plot Options Porosity and Sw Interactive Plot Porosity and Sw Parameters Porosity and Sw Methodology Porosity and Sw Equations 10.4.4.1 Define the Zone Track

The Zone track is used to display the current zonation scheme for the study well. Interpretation zones can be created, deleted and zone top depths moved for use in an interpretation. To create a new zone, split an existing zone: click in the Zone track at the depth for the split, choose the Split Zone option from the pop-up menu. To delete a zone, choose the Delete zone option from the pop-up menu. Zone tops and bottom depths can be moved by placing the cursor on the top of a zone in the Zone track and, with the left mouse button held, drag the top to a new position. It is possible to have

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

796

gaps between zones. To remove a gap, drag the bottom of the zone above the gap to some point below the top of the zone below the gap. Clicking Edit Zone opens the Edit Zone tops module. This has limited operability. It is only possible to import tops data from a spreadsheet, or output the created PhiSw zones to a text file. For greater editability of PhiSw zones open the PhiSw Parameters module.

Related Topics Define the Zone Track Define the Gamma Ray Track Define the Porosity Input Track Define the Resistivity Track Define the Salinity Track Define the Matrix Track Define the Logic (PHIFLAG) Track Define the Water Saturation Track Define the Calculated Porosity Track Define the Lithology Track Define the Apparent Matrix Track Define the Comparison Tracks Define the Sand Lam Tracks 10.4.4.2 Define the Gamma Ray Track

This contains Gamma Ray curves. This track is for reference purposes only. It can be switched off by using the Display a Gamma Ray track check box in the Plot Options Tab of the Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis module.

Related Topics Define the Zone Track Define the Gamma Ray Track Define the Porosity Input Track Define the Resistivity Track Define the Salinity Track Define the Matrix Track Define the Logic (PHIFLAG) Track Define the Water Saturation Track

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

797

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Define the Calculated Porosity Track Define the Lithology Track Define the Apparent Matrix Track Define the Comparison Tracks Define the Sand Lam Tracks 10.4.4.3 Define the Porosity Input Track

The Porosity Input track will contain the Neutron, Density, Sonic and, if available, EPT TPL curves. There will be one Interactive Parameter Line per curve, which will be the Wet Clay parameter value for that curve. To interactively change a parameter, place the cursor on a parameter line. The name of the parameter and its value will be displayed at the bottom left corner of the main window. With the left mouse button, drag the line to its new value. When the mouse button is released, that zone will be re-calculated and all displays updated. By clicking in the track, away from the parameter line, a pop-up menu will appear. Firstly, this menu allows the user to select a histogram plot for individual curves. The user can change the Wet Clay parameter values for each curve in the track, using the interactive line on the histogram plot. (See Histogram section). Secondly, the user can choose from several crossplots (Neutron/ Density, Neutron/Sonic and Sonic/Density), depending on the track contents. The crossplots allow the user to interactively change the Wet Clay and dry clay parameters. (See Crossplot section). The input Density and Neutron curves can be set on auto-scale by using the check box found in the Plot Options Tab of the Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis module.

Related Topics Define the Zone Track Define the Gamma Ray Track Define the Porosity Input Track Define the Resistivity Track Define the Salinity Track Define the Matrix Track Define the Logic (PHIFLAG) Track Define the Water Saturation Track Define the Calculated Porosity Track Define the Lithology Track Define the Apparent Matrix Track

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

798

Define the Comparison Tracks Define the Sand Lam Tracks 10.4.4.4 Define the Resistivity Track

The Resistivity track will contain the input Rxo and Rt curves, displayed along with their clay parameter interactive lines. The pop-up menu in this track contains Wet Clay Volume versus Resistivity crossplots, where the value of resistivity clay can be chosen interactively. Porosity versus Resistivity crossplots (Pickett plots) are also available. These allow the user to modify Rw and m (cementation factor) interactively . The information windows at the bottom left hand corner of the Pickett plot display the values of Rw at formation temperature (Rw Form Temp) as well as the Rw value that has been entered into the Waters tab of the Phi/Sw Parameters table, which could be at a different temperature (e.g. 60 degF).

Sw Lines can be defined Interactively from the Function Menu, Sw Lines for Picket Plot Option.

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

799

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Related Topics Define the Zone Track Define the Gamma Ray Track Define the Porosity Input Track Define the Resistivity Track Define the Salinity Track Define the Matrix Track Define the Logic (PHIFLAG) Track Define the Water Saturation Track Define the Calculated Porosity Track Define the Lithology Track Define the Apparent Matrix Track Define the Comparison Tracks Define the Sand Lam Tracks 10.4.4.5 Define the Salinity Track

Rw Apparent (RWAPP)and Rmf Apparent (RMFAPP) curves are automatically calculated from the Phi Total (PHIT) and resistivity curves, using the a and m parameters that are entered on the Sw Logic tab of the Phi/Sw Parameters table. The output RWAPP and RMFAPP curves have been converted, within IP, to the temperature entered for the Rw or Rmf parameter (Rw

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

800

temp or Rmf temp. parameter) on the Sw Logic parameters tab. Interactive lines for Rw and Rmf are available. If the Dual Water saturation model was selected as the default (see Input window above), then RwB (Rw bound) and RmfB (Rmf bound) interactive parameter lines will also be displayed in the track. If the Juhasz saturation model is chosen as the default water saturation equation in the Porosity and Saturation Analysis Dialog then a CwApp versus QvN crossplot will be added to the Salinity track Shortcut menu in the Porosity and Water Saturation Log Plot Display.

Select this Option to Display the CwApp versus. QvN crossplot

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

801

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

If Waxman Smits has been chosen as the default water saturation equation then a PhiT_recp (1/PhiT) versus QVApp crossplot will be added to the track pop-up menu.

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

Related Topics Define the Zone Track Define the Gamma Ray Track Define the Porosity Input Track Define the Resistivity Track Define the Salinity Track Define the Matrix Track Define the Logic (PHIFLAG) Track Define the Water Saturation Track Define the Calculated Porosity Track Define the Lithology Track Define the Apparent Matrix Track Define the Comparison Tracks Define the Sand Lam Tracks

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

802

803

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

10.4.4.6 Define the Matrix Track

Three curves are generally displayed in this track. Rho matrix (RHOMA), DT matrix (DTMA) and Rho Hydrocarbon (RHOHY). These are computed curves from the interpretation run. These curves are often seen as vertical lines, since they represent fixed values in the interpretation. Three interactive parameters are associated with the Rho matrix curve. These are: Rho GD, which is the input grain density. This value is not important if a variable output grain density is being calculated, but if the user elects to calculate the hydrocarbon density, or fixes the input grain density, then this interactive parameter can be used to change the input grain density. In the case where the grain density is varying, two other interactive lines come into play. These are Rho GD min - allows the output grain density to be clipped to this lower limit. Rho GD max - allows the output grain density to be clipped to this upper limit. For Hydrocarbon Density; the user has the options of either: calculating a variable hydrocarbon density, or fixing the Hydrocarbon Density value over a zone. For the Variable Hydrocarbon Density case, the HC Den min parameter will set a lower limit to the output hydrocarbon density and the HC Den parameter will set an upper limit. For the Fixed Hydrocarbon Density case, the HC Den interactive parameter sets the fixed value. The track pop-up menu has three logic options which can be turned on and off interactively.

The Variable Hc Den option switches on / turns off the calculation of hydrocarbon density. The Variable GD option switches on / turns off the calculation of a matrix density. The Variable Vcl option switches on / turns off the option to re-calculate the clay volume, if

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

804

needed, to resolve the input curves, parameters and logic (see section Equations and Methodology).

Related Topics Define the Zone Track Define the Gamma Ray Track Define the Porosity Input Track Define the Resistivity Track Define the Salinity Track Define the Matrix Track Define the Logic (PHIFLAG) Track Define the Water Saturation Track Define the Calculated Porosity Track Define the Lithology Track Define the Apparent Matrix Track Define the Comparison Tracks Define the Sand Lam Tracks 10.4.4.7 Define the Logic (PHIFLAG) Track

The Logic track displays the PHIFLAG curve. This curve should contain no values after a normal execution of the PHI/Sw computation module. However, if the PHIFLAG value is greater than zero the curve will be colour shaded, reflecting that some bad-hole logic is generally being invoked. The user must closely evaluate the results over these flagged sections. The PHIFLAG numeric codes are described under the Porosity and Saturation Equations and Methodology , PHIFLAG section. The Logic track can be turned on or off in the Display Module Logic track check box found in the Plot Options Tab of the Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis module.

Related Topics Define the Zone Track Define the Gamma Ray Track Define the Porosity Input Track Define the Resistivity Track Define the Salinity Track Define the Matrix Track Define the Logic (PHIFLAG) Track

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

805

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Define the Water Saturation Track Define the Calculated Porosity Track Define the Lithology Track Define the Apparent Matrix Track Define the Comparison Tracks Define the Sand Lam Tracks 10.4.4.8 Define the Water Saturation Track

The Saturation track contains the computed SwU and SxoU curves, which are the unlimited curves. The curves can have values greater than 1.0. The output Sw and Sxo curves will be clipped to 1.0 (100%). The xxU curves are good for visualizing how much greater than the 100% water saturation is being calculated in the water zones. Thus, it is possible to arrive at statistically 100% Sw in a water zone, by adjusting the Rw. If the Dual Water model is chosen as the default porosity model (see input window above) then the output curves SwTU, SxoTU and Sw will be displayed. SwTU is the unlimited total water saturation, and SxoTU is the flushed zone total unlimited water saturation.

Related Topics Define the Zone Track Define the Gamma Ray Track Define the Porosity Input Track Define the Resistivity Track Define the Salinity Track Define the Matrix Track Define the Logic (PHIFLAG) Track Define the Water Saturation Track Define the Calculated Porosity Track Define the Lithology Track Define the Apparent Matrix Track Define the Comparison Tracks Define the Sand Lam Tracks 10.4.4.9 Define the Calculated Porosity Track

The Porosity track will contain the Total and Effective porosity computed curves plus a Moveable Oil Plot. The shading for oil and gas can be turned on or off using the Hydrocarbon

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

806

Fluid shading buttons in the Plot Options Tab of the Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis module.

Related Topics Define the Zone Track Define the Gamma Ray Track Define the Porosity Input Track Define the Resistivity Track Define the Salinity Track Define the Matrix Track Define the Logic (PHIFLAG) Track Define the Water Saturation Track Define the Calculated Porosity Track Define the Lithology Track Define the Apparent Matrix Track Define the Comparison Tracks Define the Sand Lam Tracks 10.4.4.10 Define the Lithology Track

The Lithology track will contain a display showing the proportion of the total rock for Wet Clay, Silt, Sand and Porosity. The Silt display can be turned off using the Display Silt check box in the Plot Options tab of the Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis module. If the Display Clay / Shale Type is checked on in the Plot Options tab then three types of shale will be displayed. The normal VWCL curve will not be shown since this curve is the sum of the three shale types.

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

807

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

As well as getting the option of displaying histograms of all the curves listed in the Lithology track it is also possible to crossplot VWCL / PHIE and VWCL / PHIT. If the Laminated Sands option is turned on in the Plot Options tab of the Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis module then an interactive line allowing the adjustment of PhiMax, the critical parameter in the Thomas-Steiber shale type calculations, can be made.

Related Topics Define the Zone Track Define the Gamma Ray Track Define the Porosity Input Track Define the Resistivity Track Define the Salinity Track Define the Matrix Track Define the Logic (PHIFLAG) Track Define the Water Saturation Track Define the Calculated Porosity Track

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

808

Define the Lithology Track Define the Apparent Matrix Track Define the Comparison Tracks Define the Sand Lam Tracks

10.4.4.11 Define the Apparent Matrix Track

Multi-Mineral Analysis/Apparent Matrix Track The multi-mineral analysis Interactive Plot has an extra track for display of the Umatrix apparent (UMAPP), Dtmatrix apparent (DTMAPP) and Rho Matrix apparent (RHOMAPP) curves. The Multi-Mineral Analysis Defaults are defined in the Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis Dialog.

The Apparent Matrix Column is then added to the Porosity and Water Saturation Log Plot Display.

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

809

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Umatrix, Dtmatrix and Rhomatrix are calculated from the input curves for sonic, density and Pef. Corrections are made for hydrocarbons and for clay if the Vclay is an input curve and the Clay Correct input logic parameter is set to Yes. The Umatrix versus Rhomatrix and Rhomatrix versus Dtmatrix crossplots are used to select the mineral end-points. Right mouse clicking in the Apparent Matrix track produces a pop-up menu where these crossplots can be selected.

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

Related Topics Define the Zone Track Define the Gamma Ray Track Define the Porosity Input Track Define the Resistivity Track Define the Salinity Track Define the Matrix Track Define the Logic (PHIFLAG) Track Define the Water Saturation Track Define the Calculated Porosity Track Define the Lithology Track Define the Apparent Matrix Track Define the Comparison Tracks

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

810

811

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

10.4.4.12 Define the Comparison Tracks

Sw Comparison Track If the following curves are checked in the Output Curves Method Comparisons tab of the Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis module then the different water saturation equations are computed and the Sw curves are output.

SwT Comparison Track This track contains the total water saturation output curves calculated from the different water saturation equations. Check the required boxes in the Output Curves tab to compare the different methodologies.

Phie Comparison Track : Check the required boxes in the Output Curves tab to compare the different porosity methodologies.

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

812

If the method comparison porosity and water saturation output curves are checked in the Output Curves tab of the Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis then the Interactive Plot will look similar to this:

Related Topics Define the Zone Track Define the Gamma Ray Track Define the Porosity Input Track Define the Resistivity Track Define the Salinity Track Define the Matrix Track Define the Logic (PHIFLAG) Track Define the Water Saturation Track Define the Calculated Porosity Track Define the Lithology Track Define the Apparent Matrix Track

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

813

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Define the Comparison Tracks Define the Sand Lam Tracks

10.4.4.13 Define the Sand Lam Tracks

Sand Lam Track This track is added to the Phi/Sw interactive plot if the Display Sand Lamination properties track is checked on in the Plot Options tab of the Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis. The track contains the properties of the sand laminations. The volume of clay shown is therefore only the dispersed or structural clay in the actual sand lamination. The porosity is the porosity in the sand lamination and will always be greater than or equal to the effective porosity of the total rock, which includes the shale laminations. The screenshot below was created with the Make Total Porosity Display checked off.

Sand Lam Res Track : This track is added to the Phi/Sw interactive plot if the Display Sand Lamination properties track is checked on in the Plot Options tab of the Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis. The track contains the calculated Rt and Rxo curves for the sand laminations. There are also interactive lines for the parameters Res Lam Shale, Rt Lam Sand and Rxo Lam Sand in this track. The screenshot below was created with the Make Total Porosity Display checked on.

Display the Sand Lam Tracks in the Porosity and Water Saturation Log Plot Display If the Laminated sand options are turned on then the Lithology track will still contain effective porosity curves. This is due to Thomas Steiber shale type analysis curves being wet clay curves.

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

814

Related Topics Define the Zone Track Define the Gamma Ray Track Define the Porosity Input Track Define the Resistivity Track Define the Salinity Track Define the Matrix Track Define the Logic (PHIFLAG) Track Define the Water Saturation Track Define the Calculated Porosity Track Define the Lithology Track Define the Apparent Matrix Track Define the Comparison Tracks Define the Sand Lam Tracks

10.4.5 Porosity and Sw Parameters The Porosity Water Saturation Parameters window allows the user to manually change any Porosity / Water Saturation computation parameter, and to create, edit and delete interpretation zones. The window is launched from the main menu Interpretation ® Porosity Water Saturation Parameters option, or by using the speed button speed button

next to the Porosity and Water Saturation

.

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

815

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The Porosity Water Saturation Parameters window displays the Porosity / Water Saturation interpretation parameters organized onto tabbed screens arranged across the window, with the interpretation zones listed in rows vertically in the window. If a parameter is an On / Off-type flag, then ticking it will switch it between On and Off. In the following screen, the Variable Hc Den, Variable GD, Variable Vcl and OBM ? parameters are On/Off flag parameters.

If a parameter is a List-type parameter - including many parameters with the word Method, Model, Source or Equation in the Parameter title, then clicking on it will launch a pop-up menu where the parameter can be changed. In the screenshot shown below the parameters Porosity Method and Mineral Model are list parameters and launch the associated options list:

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

816

If the Multi-Mineral Analysis Defaults option is checked on the main Porosity and Water Saturation set-up window, then additional parameter tabs; MultiMin 1, MultiMin 2 and MultiMin 3 tabs will be visible in the Parameters window. Parameter cells in the tabular display that have a grey background are not used in the analysis for that zone. In the example shown below, the greyed out parameters are only associated with the Waxman Smits water saturation equation and, since the water saturation equation parameter is set to Dual Water in two zones, the Waxman Smits parameters are greyed out.

NOTE : Changing a parameter value on a tab does not mean that a zone is automatically recalculated. The user must click the Run button in order to re-calculate all zones and update all interactive displays. The Null all result curves before running calculations check box (illustrated below), if checked will set all output curve values from this module to null (-999) before re-running the computations. This is useful if the user runs an interpretation and then subsequently wishes to modify the depth interval over which the computations are run or to remove / merge interpretation zones.

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

817

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The Porosity and Water Saturation Parameters are listed on the following tabs; Zone Depths, Clay, Waters, Hydrocarbon, Matrix, Phi Logic, Sw Logic, Laminated Sand, Limits / Badhole, Den/ Neu, Sonic, EPT, Coal / Salt / Kill, MultiMin1, MultiMin2, MultiMin3 The Print button on the parameter window will produce the following menu. This allows output of the summation report to the printer or to a file. The file will be written to the default output directory using the file set name, with the extension of ".txt".

The Close button on the Parameters window closes the window, but does not cancel any changes made to the parameters. If the user closes the window without clicking Run, then the changes made to the parameters will not come into effect until some other interactive parameter is changed for that zone and therefore forces a re-calculation of the zone. The Help buttons on the parameter screens are unique to the IP program in the sense that they are not linked to this Help document. The button will display a small window (example below) which will give a definition / clarification for individual parameters in the display. Once the window is activated the user places the mouse cursor over a parameter in the Parameters window and the Help for that parameter is displayed.

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

818

Column Edits To set all the parameter entries in one column of the Parameters screen to the same value, the user should: click in the header (title cells) of the column. This action turns the column header boxes to a green highlight. Now, changing any one parameter value in the highlighted column will change all cells in that column to the same number. To turn the column edit function to off, click the column header again and its colour will return to a grey background. Column edits remain active while the well stays loaded in memory. They have to be reset, if required, next time the well is loaded. The following shows a column edit turned on for the Rw parameter. NOTE: if a zone has been locked by checking the Lock Zone cell within the Zone Depths tab then the value in the cell wont change.

Porosity and Water Saturation Parameter Names The following input parameters are used in the Porosity Water Saturation Parameters module. Only those that are relevant for the selected input curves will be displayed in the parameter window. Therefore, sections on the EPT will only be shown if the EPT TPL curve is entered.

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

819

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Numbers in parentheses ( ), prefixing a parameter name, relate to the Monte Carlo Error Analysis module and correspond to Porosity and Water Saturation inputs found in the file MonteCarloDefaults.par.

Related Topics Define Input Curves Define Output Curves Define the Plot Options Porosity and Sw Interactive Plot Porosity and Sw Parameters Porosity and Sw Methodology Porosity and Sw Equations

10.4.5.2 Define the Zone Depths

The Zone Depths tab allows the user to change interpretation zone top and bottom depths and to set optional Zone Names and Zone Colour. The Zone Name parameter can be used to facilitate the distribution of interpretation parameters to other wells in an IP dataset if the additional wells contain the same zone names as those in the interpreted well.

See Also: Define the Zone Track

.

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

820

The user has the option to display zone names or zone depths, if they have been set up, on all Parameter tabs except the Zone Depths tab. This is accomplished by ticking the Show Additional Zone info tick-box. The user then has the option of showing the zone name or the zone depths on each tab. Depending on which option is chosen, when you select another Parameter tab, the zone names or zone depths will be shown in the left-hand column of the grid. The Show Default Info option is just displaying the Zone # column populated with the zone number. Alternatively, left-mouse-button click in the Zone (#) column header box of any parameter screen and you will see the same three options as those seen from clicking the Show Additional Zone Info button. NOTE: this functionality is available on any of the tabs.

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

821

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The Zone Depths tab displays the current zonation scheme set up by the user. The zones can either be copied from the Clay Volume module if this has already been run, or the user can set up separate zones in the Porosity / Water Saturation interactive log plot. Clicking the New Zone button will display the Add Zone Dialog. See Also: Create a New Zone. The Delete zone button on the parameter window allows the deletion of one or more zones. Select the zones to delete, and click OK. The Lock Zone column allows a user to lock any zone which will prevent any of the parameters of that zone in any of the tabs from being changed. It will also prevent any interactive lines on the interactive plots from changing the parameter for that zone. The Multi-Well Change Parameters module will also be affected. If a zone has been locked by checking the Lock Zone column then the zone will be grayed out throughout all the tabs of the module. Also within this tab is the option to link or un-link zones to the Clay Volume module using the Link Clay Vol option. If the modules are linked then whatever changes are made in the Clay Volume module will be passed through to the Porosity Water Saturation module. In the screenshot above the Link Clay Vol column is grayed out, showing that the two modules are not linked. For more information on linking modules go to Link Zones / Top Sets. Below is a screenshot of how this tab would look if the two modules where linked.

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

Related Topics Zone Depths Clay Waters Hydrocarbon Matrix Phi Logic Sw Logic Laminated Sand Limits / Badhole Den/Neu Sonic EPT Coal / Salt / Kill MultiMin1 MultiMin2 MultiMin3

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

822

823

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

10.4.5.3 Define the Clay Parameters

The Clay Tab is used to Define the Clay Parameters to be Displayed in the Porosity and Water Saturation Log Plot Display.

(11) Rho Wet Clay Density of Wet Clay in gm/cc (kg/m3). Used for calculating porosity from the density log and for calculating Wet Clay Total Porosity if a value is not entered in the PhiT Clay column. A value must be entered if a density tool is selected on the set-up window.

(12) Rho Dry Clay Density of Dry Clay in gm/cc (kg/m3). Used for calculating clay total porosity, PhiT Clay. ( IP defaults to 2.78 gm/cc.)

(13) Neu Wet Clay Neutron Wet Clay reading in decimal notation. Used for calculating Neutron Porosity. A value must be entered if a neutron tool is selected on the set-up window.

(14) Sonic Wet Clay Sonic Wet Clay value in Sec/ft ( Sec/m). Used for calculating Sonic Porosity. A value must be entered if a sonic tool is selected on the set-up window.

Pef Clay Pef value of Clay. Used in the multi-mineral analysis to clay-correct Umatrix when the Clay Corr Input flag is set to On.

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

824

(15) Res Clay Resistivity of the Clay. Used for the Simandoux, Modified Simandoux and Indonesian water saturation equations. A value can be set using the interactive Resistivity versus Vclay crossplot.

(16) Rxo Clay Resistivity of the Clay seen by the micro resistivity tool. Used for the Simandoux, Modified Simandoux and Indonesian water saturation equations for calculating Sxo. The Rxo Clay value is normally the same as the Res Clay parameter, but can be different due to the different responses of the micro-resistivity and deep resistivity tools in Shaly zones. A value can be set using the interactive Rxo versus Vclay crossplot.

(82) PhiT Clay Total Porosity of Clay. If a cell is left blank, PhiT Clay will be calculated from the Rho Dry Clay and Rho Wet Clay parameter entries.

Related Topics Zone Depths Clay Waters Hydrocarbon Matrix Phi Logic Sw Logic Laminated Sand Limits / Badhole Den/Neu Sonic EPT Coal / Salt / Kill MultiMin1 MultiMin2 MultiMin3

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

825

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

10.4.5.4 Define the Waters Parameters

The Waters Tab is used to Define the Waters Parameters to be Displayed in the Porosity and Water Saturation Log Plot Display.

(1) Rw Formation Water Resistivity.

Rw Temp Temperature associated with Rw; units set on curve input/output window. The program will convert the Rw to formation temperature using the user-selected Temperature curve. If Rw Temp is left blank then the Rw value will be assumed to be at formation temperature, and no further conversion will be made. The user should understand that, because Rw is temperature sensitive, it must have an associated temperature to enable the interactive line in the Phi/Sw interactive plot to work. In the screen illustrated above, the Rw Temp is set to 60 degF. This means that the Rwapp curve computed by the module will be Rwapp at 60 DegF.

(3) Rmf Mud filtrate resistivity.

Rmf Temp Temperature associated with Rmf; units set on curve input/output window. The program will convert the Rmf to formation temperature using the user-selected Temperature curve. If Rmf Temp is left blank then the Rmf will be assumed to be at formation temperature, and no further conversion will be made.

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

826

(5) Rw bound Clay bound water resistivity. Used in the Dual Water saturation equation option. The value can be estimated from the Rw apparent curve in the Shaly wet sections. Rw bound can be adjusted to give 100% Sw in these zones.

Rwb Temp Temperature associated with Rw bound; units set on curve input/output window. The program will convert Rw bound to formation temperature using the user-selected Temperature curve. If Rwb Temp is left blank then Rw bound will be assumed to be at formation temperature, and no further conversion will be made.

(7) Rmf bound Clay bound water resistivity in the flushed zone. Used in the Dual Water saturation equation option. Normally the same as Rw bound but can vary, due to the different responses of the micro resistivity and the deep resistivity curve in Shaly zones. The value can be estimated from the Rmf apparent curve in the Shaly wet sections. Rmf bound can be adjusted to give 100% Sxo in these zones.

Rmfb Temp Temperature associated with Rmf bound; units set on curve input/output window. The program will convert Rmf bound to formation temperature using the user-selected Temperature curve. If Rmfb Temp is blanked out, then Rmf bound will be assumed to be at formation temperature, and no further conversion will be made.

Rho Sxo zone Flushed zone water density in gm/cc (kg/m3). Used in the density equation for the density of the water seen by the tool. If Rho Sxo zone is blank the value is calculated from the Rmf parameter. In oil-based mud Rho Sxo is calculated from Rw if the cell/column is left blank.

Salin Sxo zone Flushed zone water salinity in decimals (e.g. 25 KPPM entered as .025). Used for making formation salinity corrections to the neutron log and calculating TP water.

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

827

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

If Salin Sxo zone is left blank, the value is calculated from the Rmf parameter. In oil based mud Salin Sxo zone is calculated from Rw if the cell/column is left blank.

Related Topics Zone Depths Clay Waters Hydrocarbon Matrix Phi Logic Sw Logic Laminated Sand Limits / Badhole Den/Neu Sonic EPT Coal / Salt / Kill MultiMin1 MultiMin2 MultiMin3

10.4.5.5 Define the Hydrocarbon Parameters

The Hydrocarbon Tab is used to Define the Hydrocarbon Parameters to be Displayed in the Porosity and Water Saturation Log Plot Display.

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

828

(17) Hc Den Hydrocarbon density in gm/cc (kg/m3). Used to calculate the apparent hydrocarbon density seen by the density tool and the apparent hydrocarbon hydrogen Index seen by the neutron tool. If using the Density / Neutron model and the variable hydrocarbon density flag is set, then Hc Den will be the maximum allowable hydrocarbon density. If Hc Den is left blank, the value defaults to 1.0 gm/cc (1000 kg/m3).

Hc Den Min Minimum allowable hydrocarbon density in gm/cc (kg/m3). Used only in the Density / Neutron model and with the variable hydrocarbon density flag set. This value will set the minimum possible hydrocarbon density.

PhiShr limit Volume of hydrocarbon limit seen in the flushed zone in decimals (Phi*(1-Sxo) default 0.02 . Used only in the Density / Neutron model and with the variable hydrocarbon density flag set. When Phi*(1-Sxo) is less than PhiShr limit, then the level is considered to have too little hydrocarbon to accurately calculate a hydrocarbon density and the default value (Hc Den) is used.

Neu Hc HI Neutron hydrocarbon Hydrogen Index in decimals. If the user wants to override the default calculation then enter the value here; otherwise it will be calculated from the Hc Den parameter. Default calculation is Neu Hc HI = RhoH * 9 (4 - 2.5 RhoH) / (16 - 2.5 RhoH) where RhoH is the input hydrocarbon density (Hc Den) in gm/cc.

Den Hc app Density tool apparent hydrocarbon density in gm/cc (kg/m3). If you want to override the default calculation, then enter the value here, otherwise it will be calculated from the Hc Den parameter. Default calculation is Den Hc app = RhoH * 2 (10 - 2.5 RhoH) / (16 - 2.5 RhoH) where RhoH is the input hydrocarbon density (Hc Den) in gm/cc.

(21) Sonic Hc

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

829

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Sonic Hydrocarbon response in Sec/ft ( Sec/m). Must be entered if Sonic porosity model is chosen.

Related Topics Zone Depths Clay Waters Hydrocarbon Matrix Phi Logic Sw Logic Laminated Sand Limits / Badhole Den/Neu Sonic EPT Coal / Salt / Kill MultiMin1 MultiMin2 MultiMin3

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

830

10.4.5.6 Define the Matrix Parameters

The Matrix Tab is used to Define the Matrix Parameters to be Displayed in the Porosity and Water Saturation Log Plot Display. See Also: Define the Matrix Track.

GD source Matrix grain density source. Options are: Fixed value entered as a parameter Variable value entered as a curve Multi-mineral. Grain density is calculated from mineral volumes using the TRUE mineral densities. (Multi-mineral option only)

(24) Rho GD Matrix grain density in gm/cc (kg/m3). Used if the GD source parameter is set to param. For the density porosity model, this is the matrix density used to calculate porosity. For the neutron/density porosity model, this is the starting input matrix density. If the variable matrix grain density flag (Variable GD on the PHI logic tab) is set, then this value can be different to the output matrix density. For the neutron porosity model, this value will override any neutron matrix value (Neu Matrix) entered. For example: if you wanted to calculate a neutron sandstone, enter 2.65 (2650) , and the non-linear neutron sandstone transform will be used.

Rho GD max Matrix grain density maximum value in gm/cc (kg/m3). Used only in the Density / Neutron model and with the variable matrix grain density flag set (on the PHI logic tab). This value will set the maximum possible matrix density.

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

831

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Rho GD min Matrix grain density minimum value in gm/cc (kg/m3). Used only in the Density / Neutron model and with the variable matrix grain density flag set (on the PHI logic tab). This value will set the minimum possible matrix density.

Neu matrix Neutron matrix value in decimal porosity units. Used only in the Neutron porosity model. This is the neutron difference between 0% porosity limestone (assumed entered neutron porosity matrix) and 0% porosity of the formation matrix. A linear response is used. Therefore, if you want to convert to either sandstone or dolomite, it is better to enter a value of Rho GD, and the non linear transform will be used. Any value for the Rho GD parameter will totally override Neu Matrix, therefore if you want to use Neu Matrix, blank out the Rho GD parameter.

(28) Sonic matrix Sonic matrix travel time in Sec/ft. Used for sonic porosity model and bad hole sonic porosity.

Related Topics Zone Depths Clay Waters Hydrocarbon Matrix Phi Logic Sw Logic Laminated Sand Limits / Badhole Den/Neu Sonic EPT Coal / Salt / Kill MultiMin1 MultiMin2 MultiMin3

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

832

10.4.5.7 Define the Phi Logic Parameters

The Phi Logic Tab allows the user to set up the Porosity Method to be applied to each interpretation zone, together with the Mineral Model if the multi-mineral option was chosen, whether Oil-Based mud was used in the hole and, if Pass through Porosity was selected, whether the input curve is an effective or total porosity curve.

Porosity Method Porosity calculation method. Options are : Neutron/Density, Neutron/Sonic, Neutron, Density and Sonic

Input Crv. If a porosity curve is entered in the Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis module Pass through Porosity, the input curve name is used directly for porosity. In this case, the user needs to set the Input Porosity parameter to Total or Effective porosity.

Variable Hc Den Variable Hydrocarbon Density flag. Used in the Neutron/Density porosity model. Set to On to calculate hydrocarbon density in the hydrocarbon zones, defined by PhiShr limit parameter (on the Hydrocarbon tab). Parameters Hc Den Min and Hc Den define the limits of the result.

Variable GD Variable matrix grain density flag. Used in the Neutron/Density porosity model. Set to On to calculate matrix density. Parameters Rho GD max and Rho GD min define the

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

833

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

limits of the result. If the Variable Hc Den flag is also set, then the hydrocarbon density will be calculated firstly using the input matrix density. Only if the Hc Den is outside its limits will the matrix density be varied.

Variable Vcl Variable Clay Volume flag. Used in the Neutron/Density porosity model. Set to On to calculate clay volume. Result must be between 0 and 1. If the Variable Hc Den or Variable GD flag is also set, then these will be varied first. Only if both are at their limits will the input clay volume be varied. If Hc Den, Matrix Den and Clay Vol are all at their limits and no solution is possible, then the neutron and/or density input curve will be reduced in order to resolve the solution, given the input variables. When this happens the PHIFLAG curve will be set to 6 to indicate a reduction in density, and 7 to indicate a reduction in neutron.

Mineral Model Mineral model option. Used in the Neutron/Density, Neutron/Sonic and Neutron porosity models and for the EPT to calculate TP matrix. Options are : Sandstone/Limestone/Dolomite (ss/ls/dol). If matrix density is greater than 2.71g/cc (2710 kg/m3), then the model will be Limestone/Dolomite; less than 2.71g/.cc (2710 Kg/ m3), Sandstone/Limestone. Sandstone/Dolomite (ss/dol). Sandstone/Special mineral (ss/sp min). The special mineral matrix values must be entered. Limestone/Special mineral (ls/sp min). The special mineral matrix values must be entered. Dolomite/special mineral (dol/sp min). The special mineral matrix values must be entered. OBM ? Oil based mud flag. If set to On (ticked) then the following logic is applied: Sxo must be less than or equal to Sw. Invasion factor logic with OBM assumes that Sxo <= Invasion factor. Therefore, if the Invasion factor is set at 0.5 then Sxo will be the minimum of 0.5 or Sw. Input Porosity Used when a curve name is entered as an input in the Pass through Porosity box of the Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis module. Set to Total if input curve is Total Porosity

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

Set to Effective if input curve is Effective Porosity IP will calculate Total Porosity if Effective Porosity is entered and Effective Porosity if Total Porosity is entered.

Related Topics Zone Depths Clay Waters Hydrocarbon Matrix Phi Logic Sw Logic Laminated Sand Limits / Badhole Den/Neu Sonic EPT Coal / Salt / Kill MultiMin1 MultiMin2 MultiMin3

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

834

835

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

10.4.5.8 Define the Sw Logic Parameters

The Sw Logic Tab is used to Define the Sw Logic Parameters to be Displayed in the Porosity and Water Saturation Log Plot Display.

Sxo Method Method for Sxo calculation. Options are : Rxo Sxo calculated from Rxo resistivity. TPL Sxo calculated from EPT TPL curve. Invasion Factor (Inv Fac) Sxo calculated from invasion factor.

m source Source for Archie m factor. Options are : Parameter

Input from fixed parameter.

Curve

Input from a curve.

Shell

Calculate from the Shell formula m = 1.87 + 0.019 / PHIE

Rxo EPT

A variable m is calculated from Rxo, using the Sxo calculated from the

EPT. The resultant m value is limited by the parameters min m value and max m value. m*

Used only for the Waxman&Smits and Dual Water saturation equations. A

variable m* is calculated. m* = m + Cm(1.128 Y + 0.22 (1-e**(-17.3Y))) W&S m* = m + Cm(0.258 Y + 0.20 (1-e**(-16.4Y))) Dual Water Y = Qv PhiT / (1 - PhiT) Cm* is an input parameter Qv = a/PhiT + b where a and b are user-entered parameters. Qv can also

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

836

be entered as an input curve.

n source Source for Archie n factor. Options are : Parameter Input from fixed parameter. Curve

Input from a curve.

Rxo EPT

A variable m is calculated from Rxo, using the Sxo calculated from the

EPT. n is set equal to the resultant m plus the parameter m plus value (n = m + mPlus)

Sat Equation Saturation equation. Used both for calculation of Sxo and Sw. The following equations are available: Archie 1/Rt = Phi**m.Sw**n / (a.Rw) Archie PhiT 1/Rt = PhiT**m.Sw**n / (a.Rw) Same as Archie except PhiT used instead of Phie. Simandoux 1/Rt = Phi**m.Sw**n / (a.Rw) + Vcl.Sw / Rcl Modified Simandoux 1/Rt = Phi**m.Sw**n / (a.Rw.(1-Vcl)) + Vcl.Sw / Rcl Indonesian (Poupon-Leveaux) 1/Rt**.5 = ((Phi**m/(a.Rw))**.5 + Vcl**(1-(Vcl/2))/Rcl**.5 ).Sw**(n/2) Modified Indonesian 1/Rt**.5 = ((Phi**m/(a.Rw))**.5 + Vcl**((1-Vcl)/2)/Rcl**.5 ).Sw**(n/2) Dual Water 1/Rt = PhiT**m.SwT**n/a.(1/Rw + Swb/SwT(1/Rwb-1/Rw)) Juhasz 1/Rt = PhiT**m.SwT**n.(1+Bn.Qvn/SwT)/(a.Rw) Qvn = Vcl*PhiClay / PhiT Bn = B normalized, entered parameter Waxman-Smits 1/Rt = PhiT**m.SwT**n.(1+B.Qv/SwT)/(a.Rw) B = entered parameter or calculated from T and Rw

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

837

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Qv = a / PhiT + b where a and b are entered parameters. Qv can also be entered as an input curve.

(64) a factor Archie equation a factor or tortuosity factor.

(65) m exponent Archie m factor or cementation factor. Use when m source parameter is set to Param.

(66) n exponent Archie n factor or saturation exponent. Use when n source parameter is set to Param.

Invasion factor Used to calculate Sxo when no Sxo device is available. For water based mud Sxo = (Sw +InvasionFactor) / (1+ InvasionFactor). For Oil based mud

Sxo = InvasionFactor.

min m value Minimum m value when m is calculated from Rxo and Ept.

max m value Maximum m value when m is calculated from Rxo and Ept.

m plus value Addition to variable m to calculate n. Used when n source is set to Rxo and Ept. n = m + mPlus.

(94) B fact Juhasz B factor(equivalent conductance of clay cations) in the Juhasz Waxman-Smits equation. Default 1.0 meq/ml Can be set interactively using the Cwa versus Qvn crossplot.

(132) B fact W-S B factor(equivalent conductance of clay cations) in the Waxman-Smits equation. If left blank then this is calculated from formation temperature and Rw.

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

838

Qv W-S Source Qv source in the Waxman-Smits equation and Dual Water (variable m*) equation. Set to Param for calculation of Qv from the equation : Qv = a / PhiT + b Where a and b are the entered Qv a and b constant parameters. a and b can be selected interactively from the 1/PhiT versus QvApp crossplot. If set to Curve then Qv is taken from the input curve.

(134) Qv a Const The a Constant in the Qv equation : Qv = a / PhiT + b Used in the Waxman-Smits Sw equation. a and b can be selected interactively from the 1/PhiT versus QvApp crossplot.

(135) Qv b Const The b Constant in the Qv equation : Qv = a / PhiT + b a and b can be selected interactively from the 1/PhiT versus QvApp crossplot.

(140) Cm* Cm constant in the W&S and Dual Water, variable m* equation. Default value is 1.0. If set to 0.0, m* will be equal to equation input m. The variable m* option is turned on by setting the m source parameter to m*.

Related Topics Zone Depths Clay Waters Hydrocarbon Matrix Phi Logic Sw Logic Laminated Sand Limits / Badhole Den/Neu

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

839

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Sonic EPT Coal / Salt / Kill MultiMin1 MultiMin2 MultiMin3

10.4.5.9 Define the Laminated Sand Parameters

The Laminated Sand Tab is used to Define the Laminated Sand Parameters to be Displayed in the Porosity and Water Saturation Log Plot Display.

This tab is only visible if the Display Clay / Shale Type is checked in the Plot Options tab of the Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis module.

Sat Model This is the saturation model for a zone. Options are: Normal - the standard approach to Sw calculations is taken. Laminated - saturations are calculated in the sand lamination using the porosity, clay volume and resistivity of the sand lamination. Once the sand laminated Sws are calculated the normal Sw and SwT will be calculated, assuming that there is no hydrocarbon in the shale laminations.

Res Lam Shale This is the resistivity of the shale lamination. It is used to calculate Rt and Rxo in the sand lamination from the normal entered Rt and Rxo and the volume of laminated shale from the

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

840

Thomas Steiber calculations. This parameter is not used if the resistivity of the sand is entered.

Rt Lam Sand This is the deep resistivity (Rt) of the sand lamination. If the cell is left blank then it is calculated from the Res Lam Shale parameter and the entered Rt curve.

Rxo Lam Sand This is the invaded zone resistivity (Rxo) of the sand lamination. If the cell is left blank then it is calculated from the Res Lam Shale parameter and the entered Rxo curve.

Related Topics Zone Depths Clay Waters Hydrocarbon Matrix Phi Logic Sw Logic Laminated Sand Limits / Badhole Den/Neu Sonic EPT Coal / Salt / Kill MultiMin1 MultiMin2 MultiMin3

10.4.5.10 Define the Limits/Badhole Parameters

The Limits / BadHole Tab permits the user to set up and apply Limits parameters which allow the IP program: to limit the maximum porosity calculated in reservoir intervals

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

841

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

to reduce the porosity calculated in shales to set Water Saturation to 1.0 (100%) in very low (effective) porosity intervals to set effective porosity to a very small number (0.0001) and Sw to 1.0 (100%) where (effective) porosity is below a Limit value to set effective porosity to 0.0001 and Water saturation to 1.0 when Volume wet clay (VWCL) is greater than a limit value These limits are applied according to the logic described below. The logic statements also allow the computation of the Silt Index as shown in the diagram and described, below. The Vcl cutoff parameter can be used to remove porosity in shale zones and, in conjunction with the m vari wth Vcl logic, will also remove any spurious hydrocarbons from zones of high clay volume.

Phi max The Phi Max parameter should be set to the Maximum likely porosity value in silt-free sand, in decimal porosity units. It is used to calculate the Silt Index (VSILT), and also to limit porosity when used with the Vcl cut-off logic described below. It is important to note that the Silt Index is simply that, an index. That Silt volumes are not designed to be accurate and that the VSILT curve is used only for the Lithology display in the Porosity and Water Saturation modules interactive log plot. The premise is that a shaly sand can be thought of as being made up of clean sand of a certain porosity (PhiMax), Silt of zero porosity and Clay. If the calculated effective porosity is greater than Phi Max, then there is no silt in the rock. However, where PHIE is less than Phi Max and VClay is less than 1.0, then some proportion of the rock will be made up of non-porous Silt. The Silt Index is computed from the following formula : VSILT = 1 - VolwetClay - (Phie / PhiMax) The derivation of the VSILT index is illustrated in the following graph:

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

842

Delta Phi max This parameter, Addition to Phi Max can be adjusted by the user to remove unrealistic porosities. It is applied as follows: If Vcl > Vcl cut-off then: Phie <= (PhiMax+DeltaPhiMax)*(1.0-Vcl)*10**(-10.0*(Vcl-Vclcut-off)**1.6))

m vari wth Vcl This parameter Variable cementation factor m with Vcl flag is used in conjunction with the Vcl cut-off as follows: If set to On (box is checked) and If Vcl > Vcl cut-off then : m = m*10**(Vcl - Vcl cut-off). This has the effect of removing any hydrocarbons in zones of high clay content.

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

843

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Vcl cut-off The Vclay cut-off parameter (decimal) is used with the logic described below to remove porosity in Shale zones, as illustrated in the Silt Index and Phi Limits diagram shown above: If Vcl > Vcl cut-off then Phie <= (PhiMax+DeltaPhiMax)*(1.0-Vcl)*10**(-10.0*(Vcl-Vclcut-off)**1.6)) The Vcl cut-off parameter can also be used to boost the Archie parameter m in shales. This has the effect of removing unlikely hydrocarbon saturations in shales as described above. In addition, the Vcl cut-off logic is used to limit the output wet clay volume as follows: If Vcl > Vcl cut-off and variable Vcl logic (on the Phi Logic tab) is chosen then: VolWetClay (Vcl out) >= Vcl input.

Sxo Limit ? Limit Sxo flag. If set to On then the calculation of Sxo is limited by the following equation Sxo < Sw**SxoLimit.

Sxo Limit Sxo limit exponent. If the Sxo Limit ? flag is set to On, then the Sxo Limit exponent value is used in the following equation Sxo < Sw**SxoLimit.

Bad Hole Disc ? Bad hole discriminator flag. If a curve is selected in the Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis module set-up window (Bad Hole Discriminator entry) and is subsequently set to On (ticked) in the Porosity Water Saturation Parameters interface, the bad hole discriminator logic is turned on and a Porosity from Sonic log is calculated. If the values in the input Bad Hole Discriminator curve are greater than the Disc Min parameter, OR are less than the Disc Max parameter, then the minimum of the Sonic porosity or the user-selected porosity model is output. Where Sonic Porosity is the output, then the Phi Logic Flag will be set to a value of 1. The principle is illustrated in the following figure, which uses the caliper log curve (CALI) as the Bad Hole Discriminator. The user should only set up the discriminator with either the Disc Min or Disc Max parameter for a single zone. NOTE: the logic DOES NOT WORK if BOTH discriminators are set in a zone.

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

844

Disc Min Discriminator minimum value, in units of the input discriminator curve. If the parameter is blank, then this discriminator is not used. If the input discriminator curve value is greater than the Disc Min parameter then Phi Model <= Phi Sonic. If both the Disc Min and Disc Max parameters are left blank and the Bad Hole Disc flag is turned on, then Phi Model is always limited to be less than Phi Sonic.

Disc Max Discriminator maximum value, in units of the input discriminator curve. If the parameter is blank, then this discriminator is not used. If the input discriminator curve value is less than the Disc Max parameter, then Phi Model <= Phi Sonic.

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

845

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

If both the Disc Min and Disc Max parameters are left blank and the Bad Hole Disc flag is turned on, then Phi Model is always limited to be less than Phi Sonic. The following logic can be applied to clean up an interpretation by limiting Effective Porosity and Water saturation in poor quality, non-reservoir rock.

Phie Sw Limit The Phie Sw Limit: when effective porosity (PHIE) < Phie Sw Limit value, Sw and SwT etc.. will be set to 1.0 (100%).

Phie Limit The Phie Limit: when effective porosity (PHIE) < Phie Limit value, effective porosity (PHIE) will be set to 0.001, Sw, SwT etc.. will be set to 1.0 (100%).

Vcl Limit The Vcl Limit: when Volume Wet clay (VWCL) > Vcl Limit value, effective porosity (PHIE) will be set to 0.0001, Sw, SwT etc... will be set to 1.0 (100%).

Swi Limit The Swi Limit: when the saturation calculations give Sw, SwT etc. < Swi Limit, then the resultant Sw, SwT etc... will be set to the Swi Limit value before being used in other calculations (BVW, BVWSXO, PHIE etc.)

Related Topics Zone Depths Clay Waters Hydrocarbon Matrix Phi Logic Sw Logic Laminated Sand Limits / Badhole Den/Neu Sonic EPT Coal / Salt / Kill

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

846

MultiMin1 MultiMin2 MultiMin3

10.4.5.11 Define the Density/Neutron Parameters

The Density/Neutron Tab is used to Define the Density/Neutron Parameters to be Displayed in the Porosity and Water Saturation Log Plot Display.

Rho Sp mineral Density special mineral in gm/cc (kg/m3). Used for neutron/density porosity model when the mineral model chosen includes a defined special mineral.

Neu Form Sal Neutron formation salinity correction flag. Check the box(es) if you want IP to perform formation salinity corrections. The formation salinity correction depends on true porosity and water saturation. If the neutron log curve has already had formation salinity corrections applied, then un-check this option. It is better to have the program perform the salinity correction, since it will take into account water saturation in the flushed zone.

Neu Log Cont Neutron logging contractor. Select the appropriate contractor from the drop-down list.

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

847

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Neu Tool Type Neutron tool type. Select appropriate tool type from the drop-down list. If the appropriate tool type cannot be found, and its response is significantly different to any other tool type, it is possible for the user to create a new tool type and tool response parameter file. See Porosity and Sw Equations and Methodology.

Neu Sp mineral Neutron special mineral in decimal porosity units. Used for neutron/density and neutron/ sonic porosity models when the mineral model chosen includes a defined special mineral.

Related Topics Zone Depths Clay Waters Hydrocarbon Matrix Phi Logic Sw Logic Laminated Sand Limits / Badhole Den/Neu Sonic EPT Coal / Salt / Kill MultiMin1 MultiMin2 MultiMin3

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

848

10.4.5.12 Define the EPT Parameters

The EPT Tab will only be visible if the user has set up an ETP / TPL curve on the Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis module (Input Curves tab).

TP water Propagation time for water in nsec/m. Used for calculating Sxo from the EPT. If not entered, TP water will be calculated from formation temperature and salinity in the flushed zone.

TP Lime Propagation time for limestone in nsec/m. Used for calculating Sxo from the EPT. Must be entered if the EPT is used. Default 9.1.

TP Sand Propagation time for sandstone in nsec/m. Used for calculating Sxo from the EPT. Must be entered if the EPT is used. Default 7.2.

TP Dol Propagation time for dolomite in nsec/m. Used for calculating Sxo from the EPT. Must be entered if the EPT is used. Default 8.7.

TP Clay Propagation time for clay in nsec/m. Used for calculating Sxo from the EPT. Must be entered if the EPT is used. Default 8.0 normal range 7-16.

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

849

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

TP Hc Propagation time for hydrocarbon in nsec/m. Used for calculating Sxo from the EPT. Must be entered if the EPT is used. Normal values gas 3.3, oil 4.7-5.2.

TP Sp mineral Propagation time for special mineral in nsec/m. Used for calculating Sxo from the EPT when mineral model chosen includes a defined special mineral.

Related Topics Zone Depths Clay Waters Hydrocarbon Matrix Phi Logic Sw Logic Laminated Sand Limits / Badhole Den/Neu Sonic EPT Coal / Salt / Kill MultiMin1 MultiMin2 MultiMin3

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

850

10.4.5.13 Define the Sonic Parameters

The Sonic Tab is used to Define the Sonic Parameters to be Displayed in the Porosity and Water Saturation Log Plot Display.

Sonic Equ Equation used for calculating sonic porosity. Options are : Wyllie time average equation Raymer Hunt equation

Sonic Lime Sonic limestone travel time in Sec/ft. Used for neutron/sonic porosity model. Default 49 (160 Sec/m).

Sonic Sand Sonic sandstone travel time in Sec/ft. Used for neutron/sonic porosity model. Default 56 (180 Sec/m).

Sonic Dol Sonic dolomite travel time in Sec/ft. Used for neutron/sonic porosity model. Default 44 (145 Sec/m).

(40) Sonic water Sonic water travel time in Sec/ft. Used for neutron/sonic and sonic porosity model and bad hole sonic porosity. Default 189 (620 Sec/m).

Sonic Cp Sonic compaction factor. Used in the Wyllie time average equation (Default 1.0).

DT Sp mineral

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

851

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Sonic special mineral travel time in Sec/ft. Used for neutron/sonic porosity model when the mineral model chosen includes a defined special mineral.

Related Topics Zone Depths Clay Waters Hydrocarbon Matrix Phi Logic Sw Logic Laminated Sand Limits / Badhole Den/Neu Sonic EPT Coal / Salt / Kill MultiMin1 MultiMin2 MultiMin3

10.4.5.14 Define the Coal/Salt/Kill Parameters

The Coal/Salt/Kill Tab is used to Define the Coal/Salt/Kill Parameters to be Displayed in the Porosity and Water Saturation Log Plot Display.

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

852

Coal Logic Flag to turn on the Coal Logic. The level is considered to be Coal when : Density <

Rho Coal

Neutron >

Neu Coal

Sonic

Dt Coal

>

If either Rho Coal, Neu Coal or Dt Coal is left blank, then they will not be used in the logic.

Rho Coal Density limit to test for coal. The level is considered coal when : Density <

Rho Coal

Neutron >

Neu Coal

Sonic

Dt Coal

>

If either Rho Coal, Neu Coal or Dt Coal is left blank, then they will not be used in the logic.

Neu Coal Neutron limit to test for coal. The level is considered coal when : Density <

Rho Coal

Neutron >

Neu Coal

Sonic

Dt Coal

>

If either Rho Coal, Neu Coal or Dt Coal is left blank, then they will not be used in the logic.

DT Coal Sonic limit to test for coal. The level is considered coal when : Density <

Rho Coal

Neutron >

Neu Coal

Sonic

Dt Coal

>

If either Rho Coal, Neu Coal or Dt Coal is left blank, then they will not be used in the logic.

Salt Logic Flag to turn on the Salt Logic. The level is considered to be Salt when : Density <

Rho salt

Neutron <

Neu salt

Sonic

Dt salt

<

If either Rho salt, Neu salt or Dt salt is left blank, then they will not be used in the logic.

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

853

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Rho Salt Density limit to test for salt. The level is considered salt when : Density <

Rho salt

Neutron <

Neu salt

Sonic

Dt salt

<

If either Rho salt, Neu salt or Dt salt is left blank, then they will not be used in the logic.

Neu Salt Neutron limit to test for salt. The level is considered salt when : Density <

Rho salt

Neutron <

Neu salt

Sonic

Dt salt

<

If either Rho salt, Neu salt or Dt salt is left blank, then they will not be used in the logic.

DT Salt Sonic limit to test for salt. The level is considered salt when : Density <

Rho salt

Neutron <

Neu salt

Sonic

Dt salt

<

If either Rho salt, Neu salt or Dt salt is left blank, then they will not be used in the logic.

Kill Logic The Kill Logic parameters only become available if the Kill Analysis Flag output curve is selected in the Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis module Output Curves tab. The logic parameters have been added so that the user can now turn off the analysis over certain zones. Examples of zones over which to do this would be cased intervals, extreme bad hole or volcanic sections where standard analysis is impossible. The user sets the Kill Val/Crv 1 and Kill Val/Crv 2 plus the Kill Operator parameters to reflect the situation for when the analysis should be turned off. When the logic is true the porosity and volume outputs will be set to 0.0 and the water saturations will be set to 1.0. All other outputs will be set to null values. The default plot will show the killed zones as brown shading in the Lithology track.

Related Topics Zone Depths

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

854

Clay Waters Hydrocarbon Matrix Phi Logic Sw Logic Laminated Sand Limits / Badhole Den/Neu Sonic EPT Coal / Salt / Kill MultiMin1 MultiMin2 MultiMin3

10.4.5.15 Define the MultiMin Parameters

The MultiMin Tabs is used to Define the MultiMin Parameters to be Displayed in the Porosity and Water Saturation Log Plot Display. The MultiMin Tabs are ONLY displayed in the Porosity and Water Saturation Parameters when the Multi-Mineral Analysis Defaults have been Selected in the Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis Dialog.

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

855

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Multi-Mineral 1 Parameters Tab

Model Type Multi-mineral model type. Options are : U/Rho

: 3 mineral volumes will be calculated from Umatrix and Rhomatrix

Rho/Dt

: 3 mineral volumes will be calculated from Rhomatrix and DTmatrix

U/Rh/Dt

: 4 mineral volumes will be calculated from Umatrix, Rhomatrix and

DTmatrix Mineral 1

: mineral volumes will be set to 0 except Mineral 1 which will be 1-Phie-Vcl

Mineral 2

: mineral volumes will be set to 0 except Mineral 2 which will be 1-Phie-Vcl

Mineral 3

: mineral volumes will be set to 0 except Mineral 3 which will be 1-Phie-Vcl

Mineral 4

: mineral volumes will be set to 0 except Mineral 4 which will be 1-Phie-Vcl

The last four methods are used to force the mineralogy to a fixed value.

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

856

Clay Corr Input Flag: if set to On then the Umatrix, DTmatrix and RhoMatrix curves are corrected for clay using the input clay volume. The input clay volume curve is also used to clay-correct any water saturation equation. If set to Off then the input Vcl curve is ignored and clay can be calculated as one of the minerals. This is used only with the multi-mineral option.

Min1 Clay ? If the Clay Corr Input flag is set to Off (is not checked), then setting the Min1 Clay? flag to true (checked) allows this mineral to be counted as clay. The VWCL output curve will be the same as the mineral volume for Mineral 1. This clay volume will also be used to correct the water saturation equations for clay. If the Clay Corr Input flag is set to On (is checked) then the Min1 Clay? parameter has no effect. Clay volume is taken as the input VCL curve.

Min2 Clay ? If the Clay Corr Input flag is set to Off (is not checked), then setting the Min2 Clay? flag to true (checked) allows this mineral to be counted as clay. The VWCL output curve will be the same as the mineral volume for Mineral 2. This clay volume will also be used to correct the water saturation equations for clay. If the Clay Corr Input flag is set to On (is checked) then the Min2 Clay? parameter has no effect. Clay volume is taken as the input VCL curve.

Min3 Clay ? If the Clay Corr Input flag is set to Off (is not checked), then setting the Min3Clay? flag to true (checked) allows this mineral to be counted as clay. The VWCL output curve will be the same as the mineral volume for Mineral 3. This clay volume will also be used to correct the water saturation equations for clay. If the Clay Corr Input flag is set to On (is checked) then the Min3 Clay? parameter has no effect. Clay volume is taken as the input VCL curve.

Min4 Clay ? If the Clay Corr Input flag is set to Off (is not checked), then setting the Min4Clay? flag to true (checked) allows this mineral to be counted as clay. The VWCL output curve will be the

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

857

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

same as the mineral volume for Mineral 4. This clay volume will also be used to correct the water saturation equations for clay. If the Clay Corr Input flag is set to On (is checked) then the Min4 Clay? parameter has no effect. Clay volume is taken as the input VCL curve.

Multi-Mineral 2 Parameters Tab

Min1 Umat U matrix of Mineral 1

Min2 Umat U matrix of Mineral 2

Min3 Umat U matrix of Mineral 3

Min4 Umat U matrix of Mineral 4

Min1 RhoMat Rho matrix Mineral 1

Min2 RhoMat Rho matrix Mineral 2

Min3 RhoMat Rho matrix Mineral 3

Min4 RhoMat Rho matrix Mineral 4

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

858

Min1 DtMat DT matrix Mineral 1

Min2 DtMat DT matrix Mineral 2

Min3 DtMat DT matrix Mineral 3

Min4 DtMat DT matrix Mineral 4

Multi-Mineral 2 Parameters Tab

Min1 Rho True Rho matrix true Mineral 1. This is used along with the calculated mineral volumes to calculate a total clean matrix density. The clean matrix density is used to calculate porosity from the density if the grain density source parameter GD source, on the Matrix tab is set to Multi-mineral. This is the default setting if the multi-mineral options are activated.

Min2 Rho True Rho matrix true Mineral 2. This is used along with the calculated mineral volumes to calculate a total clean matrix density. The clean matrix density is used to calculate porosity from the density if the grain density source parameter GD source, on the Matrix tab, is set to Multi-mineral. This is the default setting if the multi-mineral options are activated.

Min3 Rho True Rho matrix true Mineral 3. This is used along with the calculated mineral volumes to calculate a total clean matrix density. The clean matrix density is used to calculate porosity

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

859

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

from the density if the grain density source parameter GD source, on the Matrix tab, is set to Multi-mineral. This is the default setting if the multi-mineral options are activated.

Min4 Rho True Rho matrix true Mineral 4. This is used along with the calculated mineral volumes to calculate a total clean matrix density. The clean matrix density is used to calculate porosity from the density if the grain density source parameter GD source, on the Matrix tab, is set to Multimineral. This is the default setting if the multi-mineral options are activated.

Min1 Dt True DT matrix true Mineral 1. This is used along with the calculated mineral volumes to calculate a total clean matrix DT. The DT matrix is used to calculate secondary porosity from the sonic.

Min2 Dt True DT matrix true Mineral 2. This is used along with the calculated mineral volumes to calculate a total clean matrix DT. The DT matrix is used to calculate secondary porosity from the sonic.

Min3 Dt True DT matrix true Mineral 3. This is used along with the calculated mineral volumes to calculate a total clean matrix DT. The DT matrix is used to calculate secondary porosity from the sonic.

Min4 Dt True DT matrix true Mineral 4. This is used along with the calculated mineral volumes to calculate a total clean matrix DT. The DT matrix is used to calculate secondary porosity from the sonic.

Min1 TP TPL matrix Mineral 1. Propagation time for mineral 1 in nsec/m. Used for calculating Sxo from the EPT. Must be entered if the EPT is used. This is used along with the calculated mineral volumes to calculate a total clean matrix Propagation time.

Min2 TP TPL matrix Mineral 2. Propagation time for mineral 2 in nsec/m. Used for calculating Sxo

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

860

from the EPT. Must be entered if the EPT is used. This is used along with the calculated mineral volumes to calculate a total clean matrix Propagation time.

Min3 TP TPL matrix Mineral 3. Propagation time for mineral 3 in nsec/m. Used for calculating Sxo from the EPT. Must be entered if the EPT is used. This is used along with the calculated mineral volumes to calculate a total clean matrix Propagation time.

Min4 TP TPL matrix Mineral 4. Propagation time for mineral 4 in nsec/m. Used for calculating Sxo from the EPT. Must be entered if the EPT is used. This is used along with the calculated mineral volumes to calculate a total clean matrix Propagation time.

Related Topics Zone Depths Clay Waters Hydrocarbon Matrix Phi Logic Sw Logic Laminated Sand Limits / Badhole Den/Neu Sonic EPT Coal / Salt / Kill MultiMin1 MultiMin2 MultiMin3

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

861

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

10.4.6 Porosity and Sw Methodology The following block diagrams summarise the overall methodology of the Porosity and Water Saturation module.

The Neutron Density Porosity option is treated separately since its logic is more complicated,

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

862

with three separate options for controlling the calculations. The three options are: Variable hydrocarbon density, Variable matrix density, and Variable clay volume. The options work in series, and can all be active at any depth level.

The Porosity and Water Saturation module logic options are described below, under the following headings: Coal and Salt Logic Calculate Filtrate Salinity and Density Calculation of TPL Water Calculate Hydrocarbon Hydrogen Index and Apparent Density Density Porosity model Neutron Porosity Model Neutron Look-up Tables

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

863

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Sonic Porosity Model Neutron - Density Porosity Model Variable Hydrocarbon Density Logic Variable Matrix Density Logic Variable Clay Volume Logic Neutron Sonic Porosity Model Pass Through Porosity Option Laminated Sw Model Porosity Limits / Bad Hole Logic Porosity Limit Shaly Zones and Bad Hole Total Porosity and Bound Water Saturation Calculation Multi-Mineral Analysis Water Saturation Equations Flushed Zone Sxo Calculations Sxo Limits Variable m Iteration Loops Final Calculations PHIFLAG Logic Clay Type Distribution Equations

Related Topics Define Input Curves Define Output Curves Define the Plot Options Porosity and Sw Interactive Plot Porosity and Sw Parameters Porosity and Sw Methodology Porosity and Sw Equations

10.4.7 Porosity and Sw Equations 1.

Coal and Salt Logic If the Coal and Salt logic are activated, and the input porosity tools meet their cut-off values,

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

864

then the output curve VCOAL or VSALT will be set to a value of 1.0 over those intervals, and all porosity outputs will be set to 0.0 and all water saturation outputs to 1.0. Coal is detected if : Density <

Rho Coal

Neutron >

Neu Coal

Sonic >

Dt Coal

Salt is detected if: Density <

Rho salt

Neutron <

Neu salt

Sonic <

Dt salt

It is not necessary to use all the porosity input tools to flag the Salt or Coal; only those which work. A blank parameter input will remove that cut-off criterion from the logic.

2.

Calculate Filtrate Salinity and Density If the mud filtrate salinity or mud filtrate density are not entered, then they are calculated from the entered Rmf.

Salinity

A log

3.562 Log Rmf 75 0.0123 0.955

1.0 7 Salinity 10

mf

7

Temp 80

2

10

ppm

6

gm/cc

Where Temp =

Entered formation temperature °F.

Rmf75 =

Rmf value converted to 75°F.

For oil-based mud, if filtrate salinity or density are not entered, they are calculated from Rw using the same equation as above.

3.

Calculation of TPL Water If TPL water is not entered, it is calculated as follows:

E ' (79.4 202.69 Sal ) 1 0.385 (T E"

4558 T

TPW

1.568

75) (3230.0 T ) 10

6 2

16 .34 Rmf

2.3586

E ' 2 E" 2

E'

Where Sal = Salinity of filtrate in ppm10-6

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

865

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

T=

Senergy

Formation temperature °F.

Rmf = resistivity of filtrate at formation temperature. For oil-based mud, Rw is substituted for Rmf.

4.

Calculate Hydrocarbon Hydrogen Index and Apparent Hydrocarbon Density NeuHydHI

9

DenHydApp

4 2.5 16 2.5

hden

2

hden

hden hden

10 2.5 16 2.5

hden hden

Where hden

5.

=

Input hydrocarbon density

Density Porosity Model If the density porosity model is selected, then porosity is calculated as follows: ma ma

b fl

Vcl Sxo

ma HyAp

cl

1 Sxo

Where ma

=

Matrix density, can be a curve, parameter or calculated from the mineral

volume (multi-mineral options). b

cl

fl

= Input bulk density log =

Wet clay density

=

Filtrate density, calculated in 2 or entered as a parameter

HyAp

Vcl =

=

Apparent hydrocarbon density, calculated in.4, entered as a parameter

Wet clay volume

Sxo = Flushed zone water saturation

6.

Neutron Porosity Model If the neutron porosity model is selected, then porosity is calculated as follows: neu

Vcl

NeuCl Sxo

NeuMatrix 1 Sxo

Exfact

NeuSal

NeuHyHI

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

866

2 ma

Exfact

2 Swx

2.65 Vcl NeuCl

x

2 x

0.04

Sxo (1 Sxo) * NeuHyHI

Swx

x

1 Swx

Vcl NeuCl

x

Where: neu

Vcl =

=

Input neutron log Wet Clay volume

NeuCl =

Neutron wet clay value

NeuMatrix =

Neutron matrix correction

Exfact =

Neutron excavation factor

NeuSal =

Neutron formation salinity correction

Sxo = Flushed zone water saturation NeuHyHI =

Neutron hydrocarbon apparent hydrogen index

The Neutron salinity correction is only calculated if the Neu Form Sal parameter on the Den / Neu parameters tab is checked as On. The salinity correction is calculated from the Neutron Tool look-up table that is defined for a particular neutron logging tool, selected with the Neu Tool Type parameter. The entry into the Look-up table will be formation porosity, flushed zone salinity and matrix density. The result will be an interpolation between the values in the Look-up table. The matrix type in the Look-up table will depend on the input matrix density and the Mineral Model parameter. For example, if the mineral model chosen was Sand/Dolomite and the input matrix density was 2.75 g/cc, then the correction would be half way in-between the correction for Sand and Dolomite. For special mineral models, the salinity correction will assume the same salinity correction for the special mineral as for the main mineral. The Neutron matrix correction NeuMatrix on the Matrix parameters tab will be calculated from the Neutron tool look-up tables for the defined tool. The result will depend on the actual formation porosity, the input matrix density and the mineral model. Therefore, if the matrix density indicates a mixture of minerals, then the same mixture will be used to define the overall neutron mineral response. If the Neutron hydrocarbon apparent hydrogen index (NeuHyHI) is entered as a parameter then the Neutron excavation factor (Exfact) will be set at 0.0. This is done to allow any corrections for hydrocarbons to be turned off by setting the NeuHyHI input parameter to 1.0 when calculating porosity from the Neutron log alone. The NeuMatrix parameter is either calculated from the look up tables using the entered Matrix Density to set the mineral type or if the Rho

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

867

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Matrix input parameter is set to a blank value. Its value then will be the value of the Neu Matrix parameter. Hence, if the user wants to use the input neutron log for porosity, with no corrections for matrix or hydrocarbon, the following parameters should be set : Neu Matrix = 0.0 Matrix Density = Blank NeuHyHI = 1.0

7.

Neutron Tool Look-up Tables The neutron tool look-up tables are ASCII user-editable text files, which define the response for a particular tool, for Limestone, Dolomite and Sandstone, at different porosity values. It is assumed that the input neutron porosity is in Limestone porosity units. Formation salinity corrections at each porosity value are defined for each standard matrix type. This allows proper matrix and salinity corrections to be defined for any type of neutron tool. A number of neutron tool look-up tables are provided with the IP software, but the user can create a new table for a tool not previously defined. To do this the user must : 1. Add the new tool into the file Neu_Parm_Files.neu, which is found in the IP program directory. This file defines the names shown in the Porosity and Water Saturation module Parameter table, plus the file names of the look-up tables. 2. Create the new look-up table. It is best to copy an existing file and modify it. The spacing between the parameters is not important, but the number of parameters in each line and the number of porosity lines are important. The following is an example of one of the tables: $ Interactive Petrophysics $ $ Sch_CNL.neu file $ Contains lookup table for Schlumberger CNL TNPH $ $ $ Data is arranged in columns as follows : $ True Phi (limestone matrix), Sandstone Matrix correction, Dolomite Matrix correction, Salinity correction Sand, Salinity correction Lime, Salinity correction Dol $ Formation Salinity corrections are for following values 50, 100, 150, 200, 250 Kppm and in this order $ Porosity values must not be changed $ $phi ss Dol 50 SS 100 150 200 250 50 LS 100 150 200 250 50 Dol 100 150 200 250 .00 .020 -.006 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0 000 .0000 .0000 .0000 .02 .022 -.009 -.0012 -.0032 -.0040 -.0056 -.0060 -.0012 -.0024 -.0032 -.0036 -.0040 -.0020 -.0044 -.0064 -.0076 -.0092

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

.05 .028 -.012 -.0050 -.0110 .10 .036 -.017 -.0100 -.0190 .15 .045 -.022 -.0120 -.0240 .20 .049 -.030 -.1960 -.0290 .25 .051 -.037 -.0180 -.0300 .30 .052 -.045 -.0180 -.0300 .35 .049 -.052 -.0160 -.0260 .40 .046 -.059 -.0150 -.0230 .45 .043 -.066 -.0150 -.0220 .50 .040 -.073 -.0140 -.0200 .55 .037 -.080 -.0130 -.0180 .60 .034 -.087 -.0120 -.0160

-.0030 -.0160 -.0070 -.0270 -.0120 -.0330 -.0160 -.0370 -.0160 -.0370 -.0150 -.0340 -.0130 -.0290 -.0100 -.0240 -.0120 -.0210 -.0110 -.0180 -.0100 -.0150 -.0090 -.0120

-.0080 -.0190 -.0140 -.0330 -.0220 -.0400 -.0270 -.0420 -.0370 -.0400 -.0350 -.0360 -.0180 -.0280 -.0140 -.0210 -.0140 -.0170 -.0120 -.0130 -.0100 -.0090 -.0080 -.0050

-.0100 -.0230 -.0190 -.0380 -.0290 -.0450 -.0340 -.0440 -.0330 -.0410 -.0290 -.0330 -.0190 -.0260 -.0140 -.0180 -.0140 -.0130 -.0110 -.0080 -.0080 -.0030 -.0050 .0020

868

-.0140 -.0160 -.0030 -.0060 -.0080 -.0090 -.0100 -.0230 -.0280 -.0060 -.0120 -.0160 -.0200 -.0210 -.0340 -.0350 -.0100 -.0190 -.0260 -.0300 -.0340 -.0370 -.0380 -.0140 -.0260 -.0320 -.0350 -.0390 -.0340 -.0330 -.0160 -.0290 -.0350 -.0390 -.0390 -.0290 -.0270 -.0200 -.0310 -.0380 -.0380 -.0380 -.0190 -.0150 -.0200 -.0310 -.0350 -.0350 -.0330 -.0120 -.0070 -.0180 -.0280 -.0310 -.0300 -.0270 -.0100 -.0030 -.0170 -.0240 -.0280 -.0260 -.0220 -.0060 .0020 -.0160 -.0220 -.0250 -.0220 -.0170 -.0020 .0070 -.0150 -.0200 -.0220 -.0180 -.0120 .0020 .0120 -.0140 -.0180 -.0190 -.0140 -.0070

The Neutron tool look-up table shown above has been colour-coded so that the reader can more easily understand the file layout. Each lithology type is colour coded; Limestone (Black), Sandstone (Red) and Dolomite (Blue) and the numbers are the Porosity Unit corrections (in decimal notation) for Sandstone and Dolomite at different salinities. The values of porosity extend to 60 pu., and it is necessary to complete the table up to this value even though it is unlikely that there are any published results for these high porosities. It is necessary to extrapolate the data as accurately as possible.

Creating a Neutron Look-up Table The Look-up table is created in the following way: Take the Neutron Porosity Equivalence Curves Chart for the tool you wish to add to IP. An example is shown in the diagram below. Tabulate, using an existing look-up file as a template, the corrections between the Limestone porosity values (at 0%, 2%, 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55% and 60% p.u.) and the true porosities for a Sandstone matrix and a Dolomite matrix. For example, in the diagram below, Limestone Porosity is 20%, the correction for a Sandstone matrix is the difference between the true Sandstone matrix porosity 25% and 20% i.e +5%.

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

869

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The correction for Dolomite matrix is the difference between the Limestone matrix porosity 20%, and the true Dolomite matrix porosity, 15% i.e. - 5%. NOTE: all values in the table should be in decimal notation.

The Formation Salinity corrections are calculated and tabulated in the following way: Using the Neutron Porosity equivalence chart and the appropriate Neutron log environmental correction nomograph for the tool you are considering, back-calculate the Limestone matrix porosity for true sandstone and dolomite porosities at 0%, 2%, 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55% and 60% p.u. for each matrix type. Take the environmental correction nomograph and select the Formation Salinity panel. An example is shown below:

Calculate the equivalent Limestone matrix porosity value for Sandstone or Dolomite

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

870

porosities of 0%, 2%, 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55% and 60%. Enter each equivalent Limestone matrix porosity value into the Formation Salinity panel of the nomograph and calculate the magnitude and sign (+/-) of the porosity correction at 50, 100, 150, 200 and 250 k ppm formation salinity. Tabulate the data as shown in the example file shown above, in the column order described ( Sandstone - 50 SS 100 150 200 250, followed by Limestone - 50 LS 100 150 200 250 and Dolomite - 50 Dol 100 150 200 250).

8.

Sonic Porosity Model

If the sonic porosity model is selected, then porosity is calculated as follows:

Wyllie equation: Dt Dtfl

Dtma Vcl

Sxo

Dthy

Dtcl

Dtma

(1 Sxo)

Dtma

Cp

Where Dt =

Sonic input curve

Dtma =

Sonic matrix value

Dtcl = Sonic clay value Dtfl = Sonic filtrate value Dthy = Vcl =

Sonic hydrocarbon Wet clay volume

Sxo = Flushed zone water saturation Cp =

Compaction factor

Raymer equation: 2 Vma Vf clay

Vfc

1 Dtfl Sxo Dthy 2 Vma Vfc

son son

clay

2 Vma Vf 2 4 Vma 2 Vma

Vma Vclay

1 Sxo 2 Vma Vfc 2 2 Vma

4 Vma

Vma V log

Vcl

Where Vma =

1/Dtma

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

871

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Vf =

9.

Senergy

1/Dtfl

Vclay =

1/Dtclay

Vlog =

1/Dt

Neutron Density Porosity Model

For the logic flow, see the block diagram above.

Variable Hydrocarbon Density logic: The program solves the following equations for porosity and hydrocarbon density:

Vcl NeuCl NeuMatrix Exfact NeuSal Sxo 1 Sxo NeuHyHI

neu

Vcl ( ma cl ) Sxo HyAp (1 Sxo)

ma ma

fl

NeuHyHI

HyAp

b

9

2

hden

hden

4 2.5 16 2.5

10 2.5 16 2.5

hden hden hden hden

Variable Matrix Density logic: Using the input Mineral Model parameter, the program calculates the porosity for each mineral from the neutron and density logs. For the Sand/Limestone/Dolomite model, the program first decides, based on the matrix density, whether the Sand/Limestone or Limestone/Dolomite model should be used. Once the four porosities (density porosity for 2 minerals and neutron porosity for 2 minerals) have been calculated, using the equations in Section 5 (Density Porosity Model) and Section 6 (Neutron Porosity Model), above, the crossplot porosity is calculated as follows: N1 D1

1 (

N1

D1

N2 ) / (

D1

D2

)

Where N1

= Neutron corrected porosity for matrix 1

N2

= Neutron corrected porosity for matrix 2

D1

= Density corrected porosity for matrix 1

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy D2

872

= Density corrected porosity for matrix 2

Once the porosity has been calculated, then the matrix density is calculated from the density equation in section 5.

Variable Clay Volume logic: The program solves the same equations as for the variable hydrocarbon density logic described above, except for porosity and clay volume. The hydrocarbon density being known.

10.

Neutron Sonic Porosity Model The model uses the same logic as the Variable matrix density logic in the Neutron/Density model, except that the sonic log is substituted for the Density log, and Dt matrix is calculated from the porosity. Sonic porosities are calculated using the equations in Section 8, therefore the user has the choice of sonic porosity models.

11.

Pass Through Porosity Model This option assumes that porosity is calculated externally to the Porosity and Water Saturation module. The user inputs the porosity curve and it is used in the calculations of water saturation. The parameter Input Porosity (on the Phi Logic tab) must be set to indicate whether the input porosity is an effective or total porosity. If Input Porosity is set to Effective then : e

= Phi input

t

=

e

Vcl

tClay

If Input Porosity is set to Total then : e

Phi input Vcl

t

tClay

= Phi input

Where tClay

is entered as an input parameter or is calculated from the dry clay density (see

section below).

12. Laminated Sw Model When this option is selected Sw and Sxo are calculated in the sand lamination using the

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

873

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

selected Sw equation but substituting the following inputs; PhiT = PhiTLam Phie = PhiLam Vcl = VclLam Rt

= RtLam

Rxo = RxoLam RtLam and RxoLam are either input parameters / curves or are calculated as follows; RtLam

= (1.0 - Vlam) * Rt * Rshale / ((Rshale - Rt) *Vlam)

RxoLam = (1.0 - Vlam) * Rxo * Rshale / ((Rshale - Rxo) * Vlam) Where Vlam =

Calculated volume of shale / clay lamination in the whole rock.

Rshale =

The entered Res Lam Shale parameter.

If calculated then RtLam and RxoLam are output as curves. Due to the nature of the equation the results are very sensitive to the Rshale parameter. Hence, to keep results within sensible numbers the RtLam and RxoLam are limited to 200 ohmm.

The above chart shows the sensitivity of the laminated sand resistivity to the shale lamination pick. The three lines have been made to all go through 40% shale lamination. The three lines represent a resistivity of shale of 1.0, 1.5 and 2.0 ohmm. The resulting sand resistivities are respectively; 50.0, 5.75 and 2.83 ohmm. Hence, a small change in the pick of shale resistivity can have a large effect on the calculated Sw results. Hence, it is much better if an external, calculated sand resistivity can be used. Once the Sws in the sand laminations are calculated the total rock saturations are calculated assuming all hydrocarbons are in the sand laminations.

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

874

Sw = SwLam SwT = 1.0 - PhiTLam * (1.0 - SwTLam) * (1 - Vlam) / PhiT

13. Porosity Limits / Bad Hole Logic If the Bad Hole discriminator logic is switched on, then a Porosity from Sonic will be calculated over the Bad Hole interval, using the equations described in Section 8. The Dt matrix input value will be the parameter Sonic matrix. The following logic will be applied: If Disc. Curve > Disc Min and Disc. Curve < Disc Max then sonic

14.

Porosity Limit Shaly Zones and Bad Hole In order to limit porosity in very Shaly zones, or zones which are badly washed out (with unreasonably high porosities), the following limits are applied: limit

= (PhiMax+DeltaPhiMax)x(1.0-Vcl)

If Vcl > Vcl cut-off then

( PhiMax

lim it

DeltaPhiMa x) (1 Vcl ) 10

10 (Vcl VclCutoff )1.6

limit

15.

Total Porosity and Bound Water Saturation Calculation If the total clay porosity parameter is not entered, it is calculated from the dry clay density as follows: dryClay

wetClay

tclay dryClay

fl

Where dryClay

wetClay

fl

=

Dry clay input parameter

=

Wet clay input parameter

=

tClay

Filtrate density =

Phi total clay

Total porosity and bound water saturations are calculated as follows: t

e

Vcl

tclay

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

875

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

e

Swb 1

t

Where t

= Total porosity

e

= Effective porosity, result from porosity model equations

Swb =

Bound water saturation

Vcl =

Wet clay volume

16. Multi-mineral Analysis If the PEF curve is entered as an input, then U, U clay, U water and U hydrocarbon are calculated : U=

Pef x (

b

+ 0.1883) x 0.93423 wetClay

UClay =

PefClay x (

Uwat =

0.00481 x Sal + 0.3883

For gas (

hden

+ 0.1883) x 0.93423

less than 0.4)

Uhyd =

0.119 x

hden

0.133 x

hden

For Oil : Uhyd =

Rho matrix apparent is calculated as per Section 9, assuming a variable matrix density and a Sand/Lime/Dolomite mineral model. This will calculate a hydrocarbon-corrected apparent matrix density. Clay volume is set to zero unless the parameter option to Clay corrected input is set. In this case the Rho matrix apparent will be clay-corrected using the input VCL curve. If the PEF curve is entered then the U matrix apparent will be calculated as follows :

U matrixApp

U

Vcl U Clay

NDxp

1.0

U water NDxp

Sxo U hyd 1.0 Sxo Vcl

Porosity is the neutron/density crossplot porosity as calculated for the Rho matrix apparent calculation. Clay volume is set to zero unless the parameter option to Clay corrected input is set. In this case the U matrix apparent will be clay corrected using the input Vcl curve. If the sonic curve is used as an input, then DT matrix apparent will be calculated as in Section 10, above, using a Sand/Lime/Dol mineral model. This will make a hydrocarbon-corrected apparent sonic matrix. Clay volume is set to zero unless the parameter option to Clay

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

876

corrected input is set. In this case the DT matrix apparent will be clay corrected using the input Vcl curve. For the three mineral option the following equations are solved for mineral volumes: matrixApp

1

V1

2

V2

3

V3

If model is Umatrix/RhoMatrix

U matrixApp

U 1 V1

U 2 V2

U 3 V3

If model is Dtmatrix/RhoMatrix

DTmatrixApp

DT1 V1

1.0 V1 V2

DT2 V2

DT3 V3

V3

For the four mineral option the following equations are solved : matrixApp

1

U matrixApp

V1

U 1 V1

DTmatrixApp

2

U 2 V2

DT1 V1

1.0 V1 V2

V3

V2

3

V3

U 3 V3

DT2 V2

4

V4

U 4 V4

DT3 V3

DT4 V4

V4

Where : 1

4

are the entered mineral density parameters

U1 – U4

are the entered mineral U parameters

DT1-DT4

are the entered mineral DT parameters

V1 - V4are the result dry mineral volumes If negative volumes are calculated they are set to zero and the other volumes are recalculated keeping the same ratios so that the total of all volumes is 1. If the porosity method parameter has been set to Density and the matrix density option parameter set to Multi-mineral (default settings for Multi-mineral) then the matrix density is calculated as follows : matrix

True1

V1

True 2

V2

True3

V3

True 4

V4

Where : True1

True 4

are the entered true mineral density parameters

The true mineral density can be different to the apparent mineral density if the minerals are not the standard Limestone / Dolomite / Quartz. For example, Clay could have an apparent matrix density of 3.0 but a true density of 2.5. This is due to the apparent crossplot porosity in the clay calculating an apparent matrix density which is much too high. The dry mineral volumes are corrected to bulk volume as follows :

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

877

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

BV min 1

V1

1.0

BV min 2

V2

1.0

e

Vcl

BV min 3

V3

1.0

e

Vcl

BV min 4

V4

1.0

e

Vcl

e

Senergy

Vcl

Where Vcl is set to zero, unless the parameter option to Clay corrected input is set. The bulk volume minerals are set into the output mineral volume curves. If the parameter option to Clay corrected input is set to false and any of the parameter options Min1 Clay ? - Min4 Clay ? are set to true, then the output clay volume VWCL (default name) is set to sum of the minerals that have had their parameter option set to Clay. This allows one or more of the minerals to be identified as clay and used in the water saturation equations.

17.

Water Saturation Calculations The following options are available for calculation of water saturation:

Archie: m 1 Sw n Rt a Rw This can be re-arranged to give an effective water saturation:

Sw

a Rw Rt Phie m

n

For a total water saturation, which is used in the water saturation comparison, the equation is as follows:

SwT

Sw 1 Swb

Swb

Archie PhiT: 1 Rt

m T

SwT n a Rw

This can be re-arranged to give a total water saturation:

SwT

n

a Rw Rt PhiT m

For an effective water saturation, which is used in the water saturation comparison, the equation is as follows:

Sw

SwT Swb 1 Swb

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

878

Simandoux: m

Sw n a Rw

1 Rt

Vcl Sw Rcl

Modified Simandoux: m

1 Rt

a

Sw n Rw (1 Vcl )

Vcl Sw Rcl

Indonesian (Poupon-Leveaux): m

1

Vcl 1

a Rw

Rt

(Vcl 2 )

Sw n 2

Rcl

Modified Indonesian m

1

Vcl

a Rw

Rt

(1 Vcl ) 2

Rcl

Sw n 2

Dual Water: m* T

1 Rt

SwT n a

1 Rw

Swb 1 SwT Rwb

1 Rw

if the m source parameter is set to m* then m is calculated as follows

m*

minput Qv 1

C m 0.258

0.2 1 e

16.4

T T

Qv is either entered as a curve or is calculated from PhiT using the a and b input parameters. The a and b parameters can be interactively selected through the 1/PhiT versus Qvapp crossplot.. The Cm* parameter is used to adjust the weighting on the variable m* and is entered as a parameter (Default is 1.0). If the m source parameter is not set to m* the m* used in the equation will be the input m parameter.

Juhasz (Waxman-Smits):

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

879

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

1 Rt Qvn

m T

SwT n a Rw Vcl Tclay

1 Bn Qvn

Senergy

Rw SwT

T

Waxman-Smits: 1 Rt

m* T

SwT n a Rw

1 B Qv

Rw SwT

Qv is either entered as an input curve or is calculated from the following equation:

Qv

a PhiT

b

a and b are entered parameters and can be interactively selected through the 1/PhiT versus Qvapp crossplot.(see the Interactive plot section above). B is either an entered parameter or it is calculated from the following equation:

B

1.28 0.225 T

0.0004059 T 2

1 Rw1.23 0.045 T

0.27)

if the m source parameter is set to m* then m is calculated as follows :

m* minput Cm 1.128 Qv 1

0.22 1 e

17.3

T T

The Cm* parameter is used to adjust the weighting on the variable m* and is entered as a parameter (Default is 1.0). If the m source parameter is not set to m*, the m* used in the equation will be the input m parameter. Where m

=

Cementation factor

m*

=

Cementation factor used for "Dual Water" or "W & S" equations

n

=

Saturation exponent

a

=

Tortuosity factor

Vcl

=

Wet clay volume

Sw

=

Effective water saturation

SwT

=

Total water saturation

Swb

=

Bound water saturation

Rw

=

Formation water resistivity

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

880

Rwb

=

Bound water resistivity

Rt

=

Input resistivity curve

Rcl

=

Resistivity of the clay

Qvn

=

"Normalized" cation exchange capacity per unit total pore volume

Bn

=

"Normalized" equivalent conductance of clay cations (Qvn/ Cwapp crossplot)

Qv

=

Cation exchange capacity per unit total pore volume

B

=

Equivalent conductance of clay cations

T

=

Formation temperature in degrees centigrade

Qvn is output as a curve if the Juhasz W&S equation is set as the default Sw equation. Apparent water conductivity is also output (see Section 20). The interactive Qvn versus Cwapp crossplot can be used to set the Bn factor. The Bn factor is adjusted on the crossplot so that the 100% wet line goes through the wet shaly points. It should be noted that there is a strong correlation between the bound water volume (PhiT minus Phie) and the Bn factor. If you change the bound water by changing the dry clay density (or total porosity clay) then the Qvn/ Cwapp relationship will change and the Bn should be adjusted. The cementation factor can either be entered as a parameter, an input curve, calculated using the Shell formula, or calculated from the EPT/Rxo logs. If calculated from the Shell formula, the following equation is used:

m

187 .

0.018 e

If the m vari wth Vcl parameter is set to On, then over zones where Vcl > Vcl cut-off, m is adjusted as follows:

m m 10 Vcl VclCutoff This logic has the effect of removing any hydrocarbons from shale intervals. The saturation exponent can be entered as a parameter, an input curve, or if m has been calculated from the EPT/Rxo logs, then n can be set to m plus a fixed value. This is done by setting the m plus value parameter. If the Archie PhiT, Dual Water, Juhasz or Waxman Smits saturation equation has been used, then the effective water saturation is calculated as follows:

Sw

18.

SwT Swb 1 Swb

Flushed Zone Sxo Calculations Sxo can be calculated in the following ways:

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

881

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

from a user-selected Rxo curve, estimated using an empirical formula, or from a user-selected EPT TPL curve.

Rxo curve: The same equation that was chosen for the Sw calculation will be used for Sxo. The parameters are substituted as follows: Rmf for Rw Rxo for Rt Rmfb for Rwb RxoCl for Rcl

Empirical formula: Sxo

Sw InvasionFactor 1 InvasionFactor

The Invasion Factor is a user-entered parameter.

EPT TPL curve: Sxo

TPL Vcl TPclay

1

e

TPwater

Vcl

TPmatrix

TPhyd

e

TPhyd

e

Where TPL =

Input TPL curve

TPclay =

Input parameter TP clay

TPhyd =

Input parameter TP hydrocarbon

TPmatrix is calculated from the input parameters for TPlime, TPsand, TPdolomite and TPspecialMineral. Using the calculated matrix density and the Mineral Model parameters, an extrapolation is made between the TP matrix parameters to calculate an apparent TPmatrix, which is used in the Sxo calculation. If the multi-mineral option is set then TPmatrix is calculated using the mineral volumes and the entered TPmatrix parameters.

TPmatrix

TP1 V1

TP2 V2

TP3 V3

TP4 V4

Where :

TP1 TP4

are the entered mineral TP matrix parameters

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

882

Sxo Limits The porosity logs generally have a shallow depth of investigation and as such measure in the Flushed zone. An estimate of the water saturation seen by the porosity tools (Sxo) is therefore required for porosity determination. No matter which Sxo method has been selected, the following limits are always applied to the final Sxo curve, in order to give sensible water saturation values for a given drilling mud environment. This limited Sxo curve is then utilised in the porosity equations.

Oil Based Mud (OBM) As no additional water is introduced into the formation with the use of oil-based muds then Sxo can not be greater than the water saturation in the undisturbed zone (Sw). Therefore, when the OBM? option is selected (when the OBM Flag? is checked) for a zone, the Flushed zone water saturations are limited using the following logic:

Sxo Sw Consequently, Sxo is usually the same as Sw in hydrocarbon zones in OBM environments. If the OBM Flag? is turned on, (on the Phi Logic tab) then Sxo can be calculated (Sxo Method parameter, on the Sw Logic tab) either from : an input Rxo curve or an input EPT TPL curve, or set to Invasion Factor, in which case Sxo will be equal to the Invasion Factor parameter. The Invasion Factor parameter is the same parameter used in water-based mud logic, when no Rxo tool is available, but is used in a different way with OBM. NOTE: the Sxo Limit logic (Limits / Bad Hole tab) is not used (options are greyed out) when the OBM? option is selected.

Water Based Mud (WBM) Water based muds introduce additional water into the formation and as such Sxo will be greater than or equal to Sw. Therefore, when the OBM? option (Phi Logic tab) is not selected for a zone, the saturations are limited using the following logic

Sxo Sw SxoLimit Consequently, Sxo is usually the same as Sw in water bearing zones in WBM environments.

Sxo Limit? Option The Sxo Limit ? option, in the Limits /Bad Hole parameter tab, when checked, turns on the

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

883

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

upper bound limit Sw^SxoLimit in the Mud Logic as described in the Sxo Limits above. NOTE: It is only available in water-based mud where the Sxo Method parameter (Sw Logic tab) is set to Rxo or ETP TPL. It is useful to turn this option on in WBM environments for the situation where a micro resistivity (Rxo) tool loses pad contact and calculates too high an Sxo. This will limit the Sxo to the value of Sw^SxoLimit in such zones. The Sxo Limit is generally not reached in OBM environments.

19.

Variable m If the user has selected to calculate a variable m, then this is calculated using the chosen water saturation equation given in Section 16, solving it for m by using the Sxo value calculated from the EPT TPL curve. The resultant m, which can be output as a curve, can be limited in its values by setting the parameters min m value and max m value. These limits allow the restriction of m to sensible values.

20. Iteration Loops The input porosity logs have a hydrocarbon correction applied, using the Sxo value calculated from the porosity. Since Sxo is needed to calculate porosity, and porosity is needed to calculate Sxo, an iterative process is used. The iteration loop continues until the difference between iterations in porosity and Sxo are as follows: e

difference < 0.001

Sxo difference < 0.002

21.

Final Calculations Vdcl =

Vcl

1

Sw

e

BVW =

e

Sxo

e

/

BVWsxo = Vsilt =

1

tClay

Volume dry clay Bulk volume water Bulk volume water flushed zone

Vcl

max

Vshale = Vcl + Vsilt Rwapp = Rmfapp =

m

Rt

t

Rxo

Shale volume

/a m t

Volume Silt

Rw apparent

/a

Rmf apparent

Cwapp = 1 / Rwapp Apparent water conductivity

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

884

Rwapp, Rmfapp and Cwapp are converted to the temperature entered for Rw and Rmf respectively.

a

Qvapp

B Rt PhiT_recp

1.0 B Rw

m

= 1 / PhiT

Apparent Qv Reciprocal of PhiT

If both the EPT TPL and the Rxo curve are entered, and Sxo is calculated from the EPT, and the m is not calculated from the EPT/Rxo logs, the following calculations are made: 1. Rmf equivalent. The equations in sections 16 and17 are solved for Rmf using the value of Sxo calculated from the EPT TPL curve. The results are output in the RMFEQ curve. 2. A Bulk volume irreducible water is calculated. This is the amount of formation water left in the flushed zone. The Rmf equivalent calculated in 1 (above) should be the value of Rmf if all the formation water is flushed out by the filtrate. Any variance from this can be used to calculate the amount of unflushed formation water.

BVWIRR

Sxo

e

Rw Rmf

Rmf

Rmfeq

Rmf

Rw

Bulk volume water irreducible

The following limits are applied to BVWIRR: BVW > BVWIRR > 0 If hydrocarbon corrected log is requested to be output, the following calculations are made: Density hydrocarbon corrected DenHcCor

(1 Sxo) ( fl

b

=

HyAp )

Neutron hydrocarbon corrected NeuHcCor

ExFact

neu

=

NeuSal

NeuSalWet

(1 Sxo) (1 NeuHyHI )

Sonic hydrocarbon corrected for Wyllie DtHcCor

=

DT

Cp(1 Sxo)

( Dthy

Dtfl )

for Raymer DtHcCor

=

Vflc

=

1. 1 / Dt 1. Dtfl

* (Vflc 1 / Dtfl ) Sxo

Dthy (1 Sxo)

If a Ro output curve is entered then Ro is calculated from the appropriate Sw equation in Section 16 with Sw set to 1.0. This curve can be useful to judge the appropriateness of the water saturation model. Ro should equal Rt in the non-hydrocarbon zones.

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

885

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

If a Density Reconstructed output curve is entered then this density curve is calculated using the equation in Section 5. This curve will generally be the same as the input density curve except in regions of bad hole where the porosity could have been calculated from the sonic. The curve is useful for input into the Rock Physics modules or where a bad-hole corrected density is needed. If the multi-mineral option is selected and a sonic curve is available then a secondary porosity is calculated : Sonic matrix density is calculated from the mineral volumes and the true DT matrix values:

DTmatrix

DTTrue1 V1

DTTrue2 V2

DTTrue3 V3

DTTrue4 V4

Where :

DTTrue1

DTTrue4

are the entered true mineral DT matrix parameters

Sonic porosity is calculated as per section 8 using the DT matrix calculated above. Clay volume is set to zero unless the parameter option to Clay corrected input is set. Secondary porosity is calculated : sec ondaryUnlim ited

effective

sonic

The secondary porosity unlimited can go negative therefore another curve is output which limits the secondary porosity to be greater than zero.

22. PHIFLAG Logic The output curve PHIFLAG is a Logic flag curve. It can contain any combination of the following values: PHIFLA LOGIC G VALUE 0

No limits were applied to the results.

1

Bad hole logic used. Porosity set to be equal to the sonic porosity.

2

Hydrocarbon iteration loop did not converge after 20 loops.

3

Porosity set to be equal to the maximum porosity limit (see section 12).

4

Porosity was limited to be greater than 0.

5

Sxo Limit parameter is set.

6

Neutron/Density model. Porosity was calculated from only the neutron log. Density log was incompatible with selected logic options.

7

Neutron/Density model. Porosity was calculated from only the density log. Neutron log was incompatible with selected logic options.

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

886

8

Iterative solving of the saturation equations did not converge after 10 loops

9

If the calculated VWCL curve is greater than the VCL Limit or the calculated Phie curve is less than the Phie limit then Phie = 0.0001 and all output saturation curves are set to 1.0

10

If the calculated Phie curve is less than the Phie Sw Limit then all output saturation curves are set to 1.0

11

The Sw or SwT curves have been clipped to the Swi Limit. The SwU or SwT curves have not be changed.

For a normal execution of the program at any depth level, the PHIFLAG value should be zero. Any time the curve reads any other value, then the user should investigate the depth level to see if the results are reasonable.

23. Clay Type Distribution Equations Shale/Clay Volumes

PhiMax Phie PhiMax

Vlam

If Vlam < Vcl then the model Dispersed/Laminated is used and

Vcl

Vlam

Phie PhiMax 1 PhiMax

Vstruc = 0 Vdisp = Vcl - Vlam Otherwise the Laminated/Structural model is used and Vdisp = 0 Vstruc = Vcl - Vlam

Limits Vlam must be between 0 and 0.99 Vlam + Vstruc + Vdisp = Vcl Where Vlam

: Volume laminated clay / shale.

Vcl

: Volume wet clay, normally the input Vcl.

Phie

: Effective Porosity.

Phi Max

: Maximum Porosity in clean sand. Input parameter in Limits / BadHole tab.

Laminated properties These are the properties of the sand laminations.

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

887

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Phie 1 Vlam

PhieLam

PhieLam is limited using the same logic as the Phie curve. This is shown in Section 13. It is assumed that there is no hydrocarbon in the shale lamination but that the entire hydrocarbon content is in the sand laminations. Hence, BVH can be written in the form:

Phie Sh

PhieLam ShLam (1 Vlam)

and in terms of Sw:

Phie (1 Sw)

PhieLam (1 SwLam) (1 Vlam )

which can be written in terms of SwLam:

Phie (1 Sw) PhieLam (1 Vlam)

SwLam 1

or SwLam = Sw SwLam is limited to be between 1.0 and 0.001

BVWLam

PhieLam

SwLam

Vcl Vlam 1 Vlam

VclLam Where PhieLam

: Effective Porosity in the sand lamination.

SwLam

: Effective Water Saturation in the sand lamination.

BVWLam

: Bulk Volume Water in the sand lamination.

VclLam

: Clay Volume in the sand lamination.

If using the Make Total Porosity Display option then the following extra calculations are made for the new output curves:

PhiTLam

PhiLam

1

SwTLam

BVWTLam

VclayLam

PhiTCl

1 SwLam PhiLam PhiTlam

PhiTLam

SwTLam

Where PhiTCl : Total porosity in 100% clay The following are extra output curves

BVWT

PhiT

BVWSXOT

SwT PhiT SxoT

Related Topics Define Input Curves

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Interpretation

Senergy

Define Output Curves Define the Plot Options Porosity and Sw Interactive Plot Porosity and Sw Parameters Porosity and Sw Methodology Porosity and Sw Equations

Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

888

889

10.5

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Cut-off and Summations

The Cut-offs and Summation module allows the user to interactively define Net Reservoir and Net Pay cut-off criteria and zones, and to calculate the average petrophysical properties of porosity, clay volume and water saturation for each zone within a petrophysical interpretation. The Cut-off and Summation functionality allows the user to compute zone average values for up to 7 input curves, in addition to the 3 default porosity, Sw and clay volume curve inputs. The user also has the option to set up and execute up to 5 Summation Reports. This allows the user to generate 3 extra sets of output, in addition to the traditional Net Reservoir and Net Pay Summation reports. The increased versatility of this new set-up will allow the user, for example, to compute zonal average properties for reservoirs containing different fluid types (gas/oil/water) or, in a mixed clastic / carbonate geological section, to determine the zonal properties of the separate clastic or carbonate beds in the well. In the simplest case, should the user simply not apply any cut-off criteria, then the module will compute and report zonal averages for all defined zones / formations in the subject well. The Summation results are output in various file formats and/or to a printer. The module is accessed under the main menu Interpretation

Cut-off and Summation

option or from the icon on the Interpretation toolbar. The Cut-offs and Summation Setup window is used primarily to set up the curves to be used, the curve cut-off values to be applied, any additional Reports that the user wishes to generate and any output curves to be created. NOTE: after the first time that the Run button is pressed, any changes to the cut-off parameter values must be made on the Cut-off and Summation Parameters screens or on the interactive log plot. However, the number of curves selected for averaging and the input curve names can be updated/changed on the setup Input Curves screen. Clicking the Apply button will update the curves used in the Summation exercise.

Related Topics Create a Cutoff and Summations Report Cut-off and Summations Parameters Printing Cut-off and Summation Results Cut-off and Summations Interactive Plot Mutli-Well Cutoff and Summation Cut-off and Summations Equations and Methodology

Section 10.5 Interpretation : Cut-off and Summations

Interpretation

Senergy

890

10.5.1 Create a Cutoff and Summations Report The Cut-offs and Summation Setup window is used primarily to set up the curves to be used, the curve cut-off values to be applied, any additional Reports that the user wishes to generate and any output curves to be created. NOTE: after the first time that the Run button is pressed, any changes to the cut-off parameter values must be made on the Cut-off and Summation Parameters screens or on the interactive log plot. However, the number of curves selected for averaging and the input curve names can be updated/changed on the setup Input Curves screen. Clicking the Apply button will update the curves used in the Summation exercise. To Display the Cuttoffs and Summations Reports Dialog: From the Interpretation Menu, Select Cutoffs and Summation to Display the Cutoffs and Summation Report. Alternatively press the Keyboard Short-cut Ctrl_Alt_X.

The Cutoffs and Summation Dialog is organised on 3 tabbed screens. These are Input Curves, Reports Set-Up / Default Cut-offs and Output Curves.

Section 10.5 Interpretation : Cut-off and Summations

891

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Related Topics Cut-off and Summations Create a Cutoff and Summations Report Define the Input Curves Define the Output Curves Define the Reports Set Up and Default Cutoffs 10.5.1.1 Define the Input Curves

Up to 10 input curves can be entered into this screen for use in the summation computation. The first three curves are pre-defined as 1. Porosity, 2. Water Saturation, and 3. Clay Volume. The additional 7 curves (rows 4 - 10) are user-defined options and can be any curve the user selects as an input. For example, a calculated permeability curve might be used. The Cut-off Name column allows the user to type in a text string which describes the curve being used as a cut-off. The names are used as log track titles in the Cut-off and Summation Interactive log plot.

Section 10.5 Interpretation : Cut-off and Summations

Interpretation

Senergy

892

If the Use column is checked next to a curve then zonal average values for the checked curve will be computed and presented in the output report, whether or not the checked row is used as a cut-off. This gives the user the flexibility to experiment with the number and type of curves used in the Summation calculation and the number of curve averages reported in the output file or printed report.

The Short Name column allows the user to type in an abbreviated curve name. When the user selects either the Run or Apply button and the summation calculation is performed, the Short

Section 10.5 Interpretation : Cut-off and Summations

893

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Name is used to populate the column headers in the Cut-off and Summation Parameters Screens.

In addition, when the user creates an output report to file or printer, the Short Names are used as column headers in the report. The Curve Type column allows the user to set a Type for the input Porosity, Water Saturation and Clay Volume curves. In effect, setting a Curve Type applies a pre-processing routine to the input curves. The CurveTypes perform the following operations 1. Phi - clip the input curve to values greater than zero. 2. Vcl - clip the input curve to values between zero and one. This allows the user, for example, to select a clay volume from GR curve as the input. The program will clip the curve values to lie between zero and one before the summation calculations are performed.| 3. Sw - clip the input curve to values between zero and one. Also, this Type tells the program to compute a porosity-weighted average for the input curve when computing zonal averages. The Input Curve column allows the user to select the curves to be used in the Summation Report, either as curves for defining the cut-off criteria or as curves for which average values, by zone, are required. The Cut-off Type column allows the user to set the sign of the the cut-off type if a curve is to be used as a cut-off criterion. Options are selected from a drop-down list. The Average Method column allows the user to define the averaging method to apply to input curves. The options are available from a drop-down list. The options are : Arithmetic, Geometric and Harmonic.

Section 10.5 Interpretation : Cut-off and Summations

Interpretation

Senergy

894

The Result Precision column allows the user to type in / define the number of decimal places to which the zonal average values are reported in the file or print output. The default setting is 3 decimal places. The maximum setting is 6 places of decimal. However, the text string length to file or printer is set to 8 characters, so setting to a Result Precision of 6 is only useful for reporting very small decimal numbers, for example very low, small fractional permeabilities. The Output Curve Cum CrvH column allows the user to create cumulative curve thickness curves, if required. For example, if a permeability curve is specified as an input, then checking the Output Curve cum CrvH cell for this row in the Input Curves screen will compute a cumulative permeability footage curve which sums all depth steps meeting the specified Net Pay cut-off criteria. The Add Zone X/Y location to report checkbox, if checked, will include the zonal mid-depthpoint UTM rectangular coordinates for each interpretation zone in the output file or print-out for the Summation exercise. These coordinates can only be computed if the well has a valid deviation survey and surface location loaded into IP. The TVD, TVT Depth Curve box allows the user to calculate TVD or TVT Net and Pay thicknesses. The user selects the name of the TVD or TVT curve for the well, from the dropdown curve list. The Use same cut-off value for all zones box forces the same cut-off values to be used for all zones. This is useful if the user does not want to change cut-offs for different interpretation zones. The Parameter set name box is used to name the file where the Cutoff parameters will be stored after an interpretation is finished. Parameter Sets are saved by selecting the Save Parameter sets option in the main menu. The same name is also used to save the Parameter Set listing to the hard disk with an extension of .TXT. The Print Parameter set menu item is used to do this. The Load / Save Parameter Sets button allows the user to manage the Cutoff Parameter Sets. See Parameter Set Management. The Run button will execute the summation calculations and will offer the user the option to launch the Cut-off and Summation interactive log plot. NOTE: once the Run button has been used, the default settings for cut-off values can no longer be edited on the second set-up tab. Any further modifications must be made in the Cut-off and Summation Parameters window. The Apply button allows the user, after the Run button has been used once, to modify the Input curves screen, for example to modify the optional curve selection for which to calculate zonal averages.

Section 10.5 Interpretation : Cut-off and Summations

895

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Related Topics Cut-off and Summations Create a Cutoff and Summations Report Define the Input Curves Define the Output Curves Define the Reports Set Up and Default Cutoffs 10.5.1.2 Define the Reports Set Up and Default Cutoffs

The Reports Set-Up / Default Cut-offs Tab allows the user to set up the cut-off criteria to be used in the Summation exercise. The default computation only requires the user to fill in cut-off values in the Reservoir report and Pay report columns for the selected Porosity, Water Saturation and Clay Volume curves on the Input Curves Tab. An additional three optional reports can be set up in the remaining columns to the right of the default columns. In the example shown below the cut-offs are set up as: Reservoir (default) - Porosity >= 0.1, Clay Volume ,<= 0.5 Pay (default) - Porosity >= 0.1, Clay Volume <= 0.5, Water Saturation <= 0.5 Sw < 0.45 (optional) - Porosity >=0.1, Clay Volume <= 0.5, Water Saturation <= 0.45 PHIT > 0.15 (optional) - Clay Volume <= 0.5, Water Saturation <= 0.5, Porosity (note different porosity curve selected) >=0.15

Section 10.5 Interpretation : Cut-off and Summations

Interpretation

Senergy

896

The Default Cut-offs values are used to initialize the calculations. If the user subsequently wishes to make changes to cut-off values, these changes must be applied from the Cut-off and Summation Parameters screens. The Report Title row allows the user to type in names that will be used to distinguish each Summation calculation in an output report. The defaults are Reservoir and Pay reports. Report titles permit a maximum 25 alphanumeric characters in each text box. The Report Title text entries are used as headings in the output file/printout and as the name shown in the Cut-off and Summation interactive log plot Flag shadings. See Cut-off and Summation Interactive Plot. The Short Name row allows the user to type in an abbreviated report name that will be used to name the Flag Curve generated by each summation calculation. The Short Name allows a maximum of 4 characters in the name. The Use report row allows the user to switch on/off one or more of the summation reports by unchecking /checking the appropriate cell in the grid. Un-checking a column will deactivate that report. The user can then use the Apply button to re-run the summations, excluding the unchecked report(s). The Default Cut Value grid allows the user to set up the curve cut-off values to be used for each summation report. Values typed into the Reservoir report column for Porosity, Water Saturation

Section 10.5 Interpretation : Cut-off and Summations

897

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

and Clay Volume automatically populate the appropriate cells in the Pay report column. For optional reports, the user can type in the cut-off values to be used in the appropriate row(s) of the grid. In the example shown above, Report 3 (REP3) uses a lower Sw cut-off than that in the default reports and Report 4 (REP4) uses a different porosity curve to define Net Reservoir / Net Pay. The Default Use column allows the user to check / uncheck options in the grid to modify the summation computation criteria.

Related Topics Cut-off and Summations Create a Cutoff and Summations Report Define the Input Curves Define the Output Curves Define the Reports Set Up and Default Cutoffs 10.5.1.3 Define the Output Curves

The Output Curves tab allows the user to set up the names of the output curves generated from the Cut-off and Summation module. If a particular output curve is not needed, then the user can set its name to a blank entry. The PayFlag and ResFlag curves are used in the interactive log plot display, and should always be calculated.

Section 10.5 Interpretation : Cut-off and Summations

Interpretation

Senergy

898

The other default curves are: Cumulative Reservoir Porosity Thickness (ResPhiH) Cumulative Reservoir Thickness (ResPhiSoH - net) Cumulative Reservoir Clay Volume Thickness (ResVclH) Cumulative Pay Porosity Thickness (PayPhiH) Cumulative Pay Thickness (PayPhiSoH - pay) Cumulative Pay Clay Volume Thickness (PayVclH) The Net Flag row displays the Flag curve names for each active / selected report. The Net Height row displays the name of the Cumulative height curve for each active / selected report. The Cumulative Output Curve column headers provide the user with a shortcut to typing in many curve names for the various reports. By clicking in either the Cumulative or Output Curve column header cells, the program will automatically fill in appropriate cumulative output curve names for each report scenario. In the example above the REP3 column has been filled in with all required output curve names. The same operation was performed for the REP4 column, but only the cumulative permeability thickness curve (REP4RHOBH) was required as an output. The other curve names were deleted by clicking in individual cells and hitting the keyboard Delete key. The user clicks the Run button to start the Cut-offs and Summation Report interpretation. If an old parameter set has been loaded, or the user has already run the module, then the user will be asked whether the log plot should be re-initialized. The user should normally answer Yes to this, since this sets up all the special interactive plot features. An answer of No will leave the current plot active. If the user has already Run the summation calculations but subsequently wishes to change the input curve selection or to deactivate one of the optional reports, for example, simply make the changes then click the Apply button. This will update the parameters and report results. You will also be asked whether you want to re-initialize the interactive log plot. The user should normally answer Yes to this, since this sets up all the special interactive plot features. An answer of No will leave the current plot active. Note: The output cumulative curves are calculated after each zonal computation. They include only the data within all the defined zones. Therefore, if a level is not defined as being in a zone, it will not be included in the cumulative curves, regardless of whether the level meets the cut-off criteria.

Related Topics

Section 10.5 Interpretation : Cut-off and Summations

899

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Cut-off and Summations Create a Cutoff and Summations Report Define the Input Curves Define the Output Curves Define the Reports Set Up and Default Cutoffs

10.5.2 Cut-off and Summations Parameters The Cutoff Parameters window allows the user to change any Cutoff parameter, and create, delete and edit interpretation Zones. The window is selected from the main menu Interpretation Cut-off and Summation Parameters option or using the speed button on the Interpretation toolbar. To Display the Cutoff and Summation Parameters Dialog: From the Interpretation Menu, Select Cutoff and Summation Parameters to Display the Cutoff and Summation Parameters Dialog.

The Cutoff and Parameters Dialog is divided into the following Tabs; Zone Depths, Reservoir Cutoffs, Pay Cutoffs, Additional Cutoffs, Reservoir Results, Pay Results and Additional Results.

Section 10.5 Interpretation : Cut-off and Summations

Interpretation

Senergy

900

If additional Reports are Activated, by checking the Use report cell in the Reports Set-Up / Default Cut-offs tab of the launcher screen, then correspondingly more Parameter tabs will be available for editing. This is shown below, where a third report (Sw < 0.45) and fourth report (PHIT > 0.15) have been checked for execution:

In terms of the number of parameters visible, the Parameters tabs expand to accommodate up to 7 optional additional curves that the user can specify in the Setup screens. Each additional curve will have a Curve Short Name / Cut e.g. RHOB Cut column where the user can type in a new cut-off value (See Input Curves tab on the Set-up screens) and a Short Name / Use e.g RHOB REP3 Use column which the user needs to check if the cut-off values are to be used in the computation (see Reports Set-Up / Default Cut-offs tab). The user can then further tailor cut-off criteria, for example, by Using an additional curve cut-off in a particular zone or set of

Section 10.5 Interpretation : Cut-off and Summations

901

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

zones. The Cutoff Parameters tabs are arranged left to right across the Parameters window. They are Zone Depths, Reservoir Cut-offs, Pay Cut-offs, Additional Cut-offs, Reservoir Results , Pay Results, Additional Report Results. The Parameter tabs displays the Cut-off parameters arranged as columns, left to right, across the page and with the zones arranged in rows down the page.

Cut-off and Summation Parameter Help The Help buttons on the parameter screens are unique to the program in the sense that they will launch a small window (example below) which will provide information on individual parameters in the display. Once the window is displayed, the user places the mouse cursor over a parameter in the parameter window, and the help for that parameter is displayed.

Column Edits If the user wants to set all the parameters in one column of the parameter screen to the same value then the header of the column should be clicked. This will turn the column header box to green. Now, any one parameter that is changed in that column will change all the parameters in the column to the same value. To turn the column edit off, click the column header again and its colour will return to grey. Column edits remain active while the well stays loaded in memory. They have to be reset, if required, next time the well is loaded. The following shows a column edit turned on for the Phi cut-off parameter.

Section 10.5 Interpretation : Cut-off and Summations

Interpretation

Senergy

902

The Close Button The Close button on the parameter window closes the window, but does not cancel any changes made to the parameters. If the user closes the window without clicking OK then the changes made will not come into effect until some other interactive parameter is changed for that zone, and therefore forces a re-calculation of the zone.

Related Topics Cut-off and Summations Cut-off and Summations Interactive Plot Cut-off and Summations Parameters Printing Cut-off and Summation Results Cut-off and Summations Equations and Methodology Manage Zone Depths Manage Cutoffs Manage Results

10.5.2.1 Manage Zone Depths

The Zone Depths Tab permits the user to manage the zone names for the Summation report. Zone names and associated top and bottom depths can be edited manually under the Zone Depths tab.

Section 10.5 Interpretation : Cut-off and Summations

903

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The user has the option to display zone names or zone depths, if they have been set up, on all Parameter tabs except the Zone Depths tab. This is accomplished by ticking the Show Additional Zone info tick-box. The user then has the option of showing the zone name or the zone depths on each tab. Depending on which option is chosen, when you select another Parameter tab, the zone names or zone depths will be shown in the left-hand column of the grid. The Show Default Info option is just displaying the Zone # column populated with the zone number. Alternatively, left-mouse-button click in the Zone (#) column header box of any parameter screen and you will see the same three options as those seen from clicking the Show Additional Zone Info button. NOTE: this functionality is available on any of the tabs.

The Zone Name column is there if the user wishes to type in an optional zone name. The Zone Name will be output in the report. The Zone Top is the Top Depth for a zone. The Zone Bottom is the Bottom Depth for a zone.

Section 10.5 Interpretation : Cut-off and Summations

Interpretation

Senergy

904

The Lock Zone column enables the user to lock zones. This prevents any changes being made to the parameters in that zone in any of the tabs within the module. It also prevents changes being made interactively to the zones in the Cut-off and Summation Interactive plot. The Sub Total parameter allows the user to compute average reservoir properties for two different scenarios: 1. Sub Total can be used to compute average reservoir properties over a number of zones, as illustrated above; A Sand (1980.13 - 2079.342m) is a Sub Total of A Sand Oil (1980.13 2007.652m) and A Sand Water (2007.562 - 2079.342m), or 2. Sub Total can be used to compute average reservoir properties for a user-defined depth interval, which is, for example, half the thickness of an existing zone. Sub Total zones are not displayed on the interactive plot and have no associated cut-offs, but use the interpretation results from the normal zones to determine net pay or net reservoir average properties. The user flags that a zone is a Sub Total by checking the appropriate cell in the grid. In the example shown above, the A Sand zone is flagged as a Sub Total zone whose top depth is that of the A Sand Oil zone and whose bottom depth is that of the A Sand Water zone. NOTE: If a TVD Curve has been selected on the Input Curves Tab of the launcher screens then additional columns will be reported on the Zone Depths Tab. These are: TVD/TVT Top - the True vertical depth of the Zone Top. TVD/TVT Bottom - the True vertical depth of the Zone Bottom Clicking the New Zone button will display the Add Zone Dialog. See Also: Create a New Zone. The Delete zone button on the parameter window allows the deletion of one or more zones. Select the zones to delete, and click OK.

Related Topics Manage Zone Depths Create a New Zone Manage Cutoffs Manage Results 10.5.2.2 Manage Cutoffs

The Reservoir Cutoffs and Pay Cutoffs Tabs are initially populated with the cut-off parameters that the user sets up on the Cutoff and Summation launch screens. If a parameter is an On / Off-type flag, then clicking it will change its state. If it is a list-type

Section 10.5 Interpretation : Cut-off and Summations

905

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

parameter, then clicking on it will produce a pop-up menu where the parameter can be changed. The Zone Depths tab allows the user to change zone tops and bottoms, and set a zone name. The Reservoir Results, Pay Results and any additional report Results tabs have no editable fields and are used to display the results of the calculation. NOTE: Simply changing a parameter in the display will not immediately mean that a zone is recalculated. The user must click the OK button again in order to re-calculate all zones and update all displays. The default Reservoir and Pay cut-off parameters are described in the topics; Manage Reservoir Cutoffs and Manange Pay Cutoffs. NOTE: Numbers in parentheses ( ), prefixing a parameter name, relate to the Monte Carlo Error Analysis module and correspond to Cut-off module inputs found in the file MonteCarloDefaults.par.

Related Topics Cut-off and Summations Parameters Manage Cutoffs Manage Reservoir Cutoffs Manange Pay Cutoffs Manage Additional Cutoffs

10.5.2.2.1 Manage Reservoir Cutoffs

The Reservoir Results, Pay Results and any additional report Results tabs have no editable fields and are used to display the results of the calculation. The default Reservoir and Pay cutoff parameters are described below. NOTE: Numbers in parentheses ( ), prefixing a parameter name, relate to the Monte Carlo Error Analysis module and correspond to Cut-off module inputs found in the file MonteCarloDefaults.par. The default Reservoir Cutoffs are Selected:

Section 10.5 Interpretation : Cut-off and Summations

Interpretation

Senergy

906

Min Res Height Allows the user to set the minimum thickness of a zone in order for it to count as net reservoir. Default is 0. (All depth intervals will count towards net if they meet the cut-off criteria). (3) Phi Cut Res/Pay Porosity cut-off value. If the input porosity curve value is greater than or equal to this value, then the level can be considered for Pay or Reservoir if the level also meets all the other cut-offs. Phi Res Use Flag Set to On (checked) to use the porosity input for a Net Reservoir cut-off. (6) Sw Cut Res/Pay Water saturation cut-off value. If the input water saturation curve is less than or equal to this value, then the level can be considered for pay or reservoir if the level also meets all the other cut-offs. Sw Res Use Flag Set to On (checked) to use the water saturation input for a Net Reservoir cut-off. (9) Vcl Cut Res/Pay Clay volume cut-off value. If the input clay volume curve is less than or equal to this value, then the level can be considered for pay or reservoir if the level also meets all the other cut-offs. Vcl Res Use Flag Set to On (checked) to use the clay volume input for a Net reservoir cut-off.

Related Topics Cut-off and Summations Parameters Manage Cutoffs Manage Reservoir Cutoffs Manange Pay Cutoffs Manage Additional Cutoffs

Section 10.5 Interpretation : Cut-off and Summations

907

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

10.5.2.2.2 Manange Pay Cutoffs

The Reservoir Results, Pay Results and any additional report Results tabs have no editable fields and are used to display the results of the calculation. The default Reservoir and Pay cutoff parameters are described below. NOTE: Numbers in parentheses ( ), prefixing a parameter name, relate to the Monte Carlo Error Analysis module and correspond to Cut-off module inputs found in the file MonteCarloDefaults.par. The Default Pay Cutoffs are Selected:

Min Pay Height Allows the user to set the minimum thickness of a zone in order for it to count as Net Pay. Default is 0. (All depth intervals will count towards pay if they meet the cut-off criteria). Phi Pay Use Flag Set to On (checked) to use the porosity input for a Net pay cut-off. Sw Pay Use Flag Set to On (checked) to use the water saturation input for a Net Pay cut-off. Vcl Pay Use Flag Set to On to use the clay volume input for a Net pay cut-off.

Related Topics Cut-off and Summations Parameters Manage Cutoffs Manage Reservoir Cutoffs Manange Pay Cutoffs Manage Additional Cutoffs

Section 10.5 Interpretation : Cut-off and Summations

Interpretation

Senergy

908

10.5.2.2.3 Manage Additional Cutoffs

The Additional Cutoffs and Reports Tabs are only activated if the user sets up additional Reports with associated input curves in the Cutoff and Summation set-up screens. Up to three extra reports can be set up, each with its own optional set of cut-off criteria. The user has immense flexibility in how to use these additional reports. They do not necessarily have to be set up to report Net and/or Pay. The example shown below, however, is set up as a Pay report with a Report Title "SW < 0.45", Short Name "REP3". The number of columns displayed will depend on the number of curves selected in the Set-up Input Curves screen.

For each selected curve there will be a pair of adjacent columns named using the following syntax: CurveName / Cut / Report Short Name (e.g. Phi Cut REP3) and CurveName / Report Short Name / Use (e.g. Phi REP3 Use). Type in a cut-off value in the ...Cut... column and check the adjacent ...Use column if you wish to use a particular curve as some form of discriminator. The Additional Reports parameters are described below. NOTE: Numbers in parentheses ( ), prefixing a parameter name, relate to the Monte Carlo Error Analysis module and correspond to the Cutoff inputs found in the file MonteCarloDefaults.par. All additional Cutoff Parameter tabs have a common column format, with the Report Short Name (in the example shown above, REP3) inserted into the column headers and the Cutoff Tab labelled with the Report Title (SW < 0.45). The Short Name has been replaced by XXXX in the following listing, for simplicity. Min XXXX Height Allows the user to set the minimum thickness of a zone in order for it to count in whatever Report computation is being executed. Default is 0. (All depth intervals will be counted, if they meet any cut-off criteria that may have been set).

Section 10.5 Interpretation : Cut-off and Summations

909

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

(12) Other cut-off 1 Other input curve 1 cut-off value. If the user decides to apply some cut-off criteria, and if the other input curve 1 is >= or <= (depending on setting on input curve window) to this value, then the level can be used in the report if the level also meets all the other cut-offs. Other cut-off 1 Use Set to On (checked) to use the extra cut-off curve 1 input for a cut-off. (15) Other cut-off 2 Extra input curve 2 cut-off value. If the extra input curve 2 is >= or <= (depending on setting on input curve window) to this value, then the level can be considered for pay or reservoir if the level also meets all the other cut-offs. Other cut-off 2 Use Set to On (checked) to use the extra cut-off curve 2 input for a cut-off. (18) Other cut-off 3 Extra input curve 3 cut-off value. If the extra input curve 3 is >= or <= (depending on setting on input curve window) to this value, then the level can be considered for pay or reservoir if the level also meets all the other cut-offs. Other cut-off 3 Use Set to On (checked) to use the extra cut-off curve 3 input for a cut-off.

Related Topics Cut-off and Summations Parameters Manage Cutoffs Manage Reservoir Cutoffs Manange Pay Cutoffs Manage Additional Cutoffs

10.5.2.3 Manage Results

The Reservoir Results tab allows the user to view the results of a summation calculation for Net Reservoir - determined by the application of the Porosity and optional Clay Volume cut-off criteria - for each defined zone. The Pay Results tab allows the user to view the results of a summation calculations for Net Pay - determined by the application of the Vclay, Porosity and Water Saturation cut-off criteria - for each defined zone. The Additional Cutoffs and Reports Tabs are only activated if the user sets up additional Reports

Section 10.5 Interpretation : Cut-off and Summations

Interpretation

Senergy

910

with associated input curves in the Cutoff and Summation set-up screens. Up to three extra reports can be set up, each with its own optional set of cut-off criteria. The user has immense flexibility in how to use these additional reports. They do not necessarily have to be set up to report Net and/or Pay.

Related Topics Manage Results Manage Reservoir Results Manage Pay Results Manage Additional Results 10.5.2.3.1 Manage Reservoir Results

The Reservoir Results tab allows the user to view the results of a summation calculation for Net Reservoir - determined by the application of the Porosity and optional Clay Volume cut-off criteria - for each defined zone.

The Reservoir Results parameters are described below: Gross Interval Gross interval. Result parameter. Non-editable. Net Res Net reservoir interval. Result parameter. Non-editable. Net/Gross Res Net/Gross ratio for the reservoir interval. Result parameter. Non-editable. Av Phi Res Average porosity in the reservoir interval. Result parameter. Non-editable. Av Sw Res Average water saturation in the reservoir interval. This is a porosity-weighted average. Result parameter. Non-editable.

Section 10.5 Interpretation : Cut-off and Summations

911

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Av Vcl Res Average clay volume in the reservoir interval. Result parameter. Non-editable. Other Curve Av (Name) Res Average of the additional input curves 1-7 in the reservoir interval. Average type (Arithmetic, Geometric, Harmonic) is specified on the input curve window. Result parameter. Noneditable. PhiH Res Computed Porosity - Thickness product of reservoir rock meeting the Porosity and optional clay volume cut-off criteria. Result parameter. Non-editable. PhiSoH Res Computed Hydrocarbon Pore thickness product of reservoir rock meeting the Porosity and optional clay volume cut-off criteria. Result parameter. Non-editable. Other Curve (Name)H Res Cumulative thickness of the additional input curves 1-7 in the reservoir interval. Average type (Arithmetic, Geometric, Harmonic) is specified on the input curve window. Result parameter. Non-editable. NOTE: If a TVD Curve has been selected on the Input Curves Tab of the launcher screens then additional data will be reported in the Reservoir Results Tab. These are: TVD/TVT Gross True vertical depth Gross Zone Thickness. Result parameter. Non-editable. TVD/TVT Net Res True vertical depth Net Reservoir Thickness. Result parameter. Non-editable. TVD / TVT N/G Res True Vertical Depth Net to Gross Ratio. Result parameter. Non-editable. NOTE: If $$ are seen in the columns then this indicates that there is null data in that zone interval.

Related Topics Manage Results Manage Reservoir Results Manage Pay Results Manage Additional Results

Section 10.5 Interpretation : Cut-off and Summations

Interpretation

Senergy

912

10.5.2.3.2 Manage Pay Results

The Pay Results tab allows the user to view the results of a summation calculations for Net Pay - determined by the application of the Vclay, Porosity and Water Saturation cut-off criteria - for each defined zone.

The Pay Results parameters are described below: Gross Interval Gross interval. Result parameter. Non-editable. Net Pay Net pay interval. Result parameter. Non-editable. Net/Gross Pay Net/Gross ratio for the pay interval. Result parameter. Non-editable. Av Phi Pay Average porosity in the pay interval. Result parameter. Non-editable. Av Sw Pay Average water saturation in the pay interval. This is a porosity-weighted average. Result parameter. Non-editable. Av Vcl Pay Average clay volume in the pay interval. Result parameter. Non-editable. Other Curve Av (Name) Pay Average of the additional input curves 1-7 in the reservoir interval. Average type (Arithmetic, Geometric, Harmonic) is specified on the input curve window. Result parameter. Noneditable. PhiH Pay Computed Porosity - Thickness product of reservoir rock meeting the Porosity and optional clay volume cut-off criteria. Result parameter. Non-editable. PhiSoH Pay

Section 10.5 Interpretation : Cut-off and Summations

913

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Computed Hydrocarbon Pore thickness product of reservoir rock meeting the Porosity and optional clay volume cut-off criteria. Result parameter. Non-editable. Other Curve (Name)H Pay Cumulative thickness of the additional input curves 1-7 in the reservoir interval. Average type (Arithmetic, Geometric, Harmonic) is specified on the input curve window. Result parameter. Non-editable. NOTE: If a TVD Curve has been selected on the Input Curves Tab of the launcher screens then additional data will be reported in the Pay Results Tab. These are: TVD/TVT Gross True vertical depth Gross Zone Thickness. Result parameter. Non-editable. TVD/TVT Net Pay True vertical depth Net Pay Thickness. Result parameter. Non-editable. TVD / TVT N/G Pay True Vertical Depth Net to Gross Ratio. Result parameter. Non-editable. NOTE: If $$ are seen in the columns then this indicates that there is null data in that zone interval.

Related Topics Manage Results Manage Reservoir Results Manage Pay Results Manage Additional Results 10.5.2.3.3 Manage Additional Results

The Additional Cutoffs and Reports Tabs are only activated if the user sets up additional Reports with associated input curves in the Cutoff and Summation set-up screens. Up to three extra reports can be set up, each with its own optional set of cut-off criteria. The user has immense flexibility in how to use these additional reports. They do not necessarily have to be set up to report Net and/or Pay. If the user has set up any additional Reports in the set-up screens, each scenario will create an extra Results tab. The SW < 0.45 Results tab shown in the screen above is an example. Up to 3 reports, in addition to the default Net Reservoir and Net Pay reports are possible. The user has complete flexibility in how to set up and use these additional reports. The input curve selection is therefore important in determining whether the computed output is a Net Reservoir, Net Pay or Other type of report.

Section 10.5 Interpretation : Cut-off and Summations

Interpretation

Senergy

914

Related Topics Manage Results Manage Reservoir Results Manage Pay Results Manage Additional Results

10.5.3 Printing Cut-off and Summation Results The Print button on the Cutoff Parameters window will launch the following list of options:

This menu allows the user to output the summation results report to a printer, file or to the clipboard in a variety of different formats with or without a listing of curves. The Normal Report

File option launches a Save Parameters to File dialog where the

results will be written to a user-defined file name in the default output directory . The default file name uses the name, with the ".txt" extension. The Comma Delimited option will write the file using commas to separate the fields and will have a file extension of ".csv". This facilitates loading the data into a spreadsheet

Section 10.5 Interpretation : Cut-off and Summations

915

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

application. To output the .csv file using semi-colons instead of commas as the delimiter go to Tools

Options

Miscellaneous Options

CSV Delimiter.

The Tab Delimited option will write the file using tabs to separate the fields and will also have a ".txt" extension but will be a Tab Delimited type. The RTF format can be used to load into word processing software and contains the formatting information for the text. The output file will have a ".RTF" extension. The ClipBoard options allow the user to save the reports directly onto the clipboard for subsequent pasting into WordTM or PowerPoint TM documents. If the Report With Curve Listing options are chosen then, in-between the normal summation results a listing of curve data can be displayed. See the section below to set up the listing. Note: The Output Report has been changed to put the average values on the second line when TVD reports are made.

Note: When the Cumulative curve height is put in the same Column as the average value (only output to printer, RFT, clipboard) the order is changed as is the order in the header. This means the average value is on the second line.

Related Topics Cut-off and Summations Cut-off and Summations Interactive Plot Cut-off and Summations Parameters Printing Cut-off and Summation Results

Section 10.5 Interpretation : Cut-off and Summations

Interpretation

Senergy

916

Cut-off and Summations Equations and Methodology Report with Curve Listing Report with Interval Breakdown

10.5.3.1 Report with Curve Listing

The Report with Curve Listing option creates an output report / file in which summation results for each zone are listed, followed by a listing of the user-selected curves for that depth interval. If the option to create a curve listing in the report is selected, the following window is displayed.

The functionality of this window is identical to the Curve Listing / Curve Edit set-up module. Any curve in the database can be selected. Discriminators can be used to limit the output as well as setting the output data frequency. In the above example only data that count as net reservoir will be listed. The listing data frequency is at all levels.

Related Topics Printing Cut-off and Summation Results Report with Curve Listing

Section 10.5 Interpretation : Cut-off and Summations

917

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Report with Interval Breakdown 10.5.3.2 Report with Interval Breakdown

The Report with Detail Interval Breakdown option gives the user the ability to view a listing similar to the report generated within the Cut Off and Summation module.

Plus there is a detailed breakdown for each zone with a Gross Interval, Total Number of Intervals, Total Net Thickness, Mean Interval Thickness, Thinnest Interval Thickness and Thickest Interval Thickness for each of the Reservoir and Pay intervals. Both the Reservoir and Pay intervals can be listed or either Reservoir or Pay can be listed by using the drop-down selection box. The net thickness is determined by Bottom minus Top plus depth step. The Top is the depth of the first instance of where the flag curve turns on. The Bottom is last depth where the flag curve is on. To illustrate this further; think of an interval where there is just one step with the flag curve on. Top = Bottom but thickness will be the depth step. Interval averages are the average values of all the intervals. The main report zonal averages are the thickness weighted averages. Hence interval average multiplied by the number of intervals does not necessarily equal zonal average. On the main report all zone averages are thickness weighted averages not arithmetic averages.

Section 10.5 Interpretation : Cut-off and Summations

Interpretation

Senergy

918

The Default curves for the interval listing are PHIE, SW and VWCL although more curves can be added by clicking on an empty box within the Curves to output and using the drop-down curve listing to pick other curves. An example of part of a detailed interval breakdown is shown below.

Section 10.5 Interpretation : Cut-off and Summations

919

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Related Topics Printing Cut-off and Summation Results Report with Curve Listing Report with Interval Breakdown

10.5.3.3 Example Output Listing

Result Output Listing To obtain the result output listing, use the Print Parameter set menu item on the main menu under File or the Print button on the cut-off parameters window.

Section 10.5 Interpretation : Cut-off and Summations

Interpretation

Senergy

920

Example listing 1 : cut-off SUMMARY REPORT Well : Date :

Test well # 1 09/02/98 11:24:31

NET RESERVOIR ROCK SUMMARY

Zn Zone Name Vcl Phi*H Phi*So*H #

Top

Bottom

Gross

Net

N/G

TVDSS

TVDSS

TVDSS

TVDSS

TVDSS

1

7790.00

7875.00

85.00

69.50

0.818

-7590.00

-7675.00

85.00

69.50

0.818

7875.00

8225.00

350.00

282.50

0.807

-7675.00

-8025.00

350.00

282.50

0.807

8270.00

8420.00

150.00

90.00

0.600

-8070.00

-8220.00

150.00

90.00

0.600

8420.00

8620.00

200.00

181.75

0.909

-8220.00

-8420.00

200.00

181.75

0.909

7790.00

8620.00

785.00

623.75

0.795

-7590.00

-8420.00

785.00

623.75

0.795

Zn Zone Name Vcl Phi*H Phi*So*H #

Top

Bottom

Gross

Net

N/G

TVDSS

TVDSS

TVDSS

TVDSS

TVDSS

1

7790.00

7875.00

85.00

65.00

0.765

-7590.00

-7675.00

85.00

65.00

0.765

7875.00

8225.00

350.00

46.25

0.132

-7675.00

-8025.00

350.00

46.25

0.132

8270.00

8420.00

150.00

70.50

0.470

-8070.00

-8220.00

150.00

70.50

0.470

8420.00

8620.00

200.00

14.50

0.073

-8220.00

-8420.00

200.00

14.50

0.073

2

3

4

Top Gas Zone 13.620 10.041

Water 48.976

Av Phi

Av Sw

Av

0.196

0.263

0.147

0.173

0.629

0.168

0.187

0.360

0.177

0.195

0.659

0.127

0.184

0.556

0.155

Av Phi

Av Sw

Av

0.200

0.248

0.130

0.215

0.208

0.093

0.199

0.291

0.138

0.202

0.405

0.115

18.169

Bottom Gas 16.797 10.746

Bottom Water 35.505 12.102

All Zones 114.899 51.058

NET PAY SUMMARY

2

3

4

Top Gas Zone 13.013 9.785

Water 9.960

7.887

Bottom Gas 14.031 9.945

Bottom Water 2.931 1.744

Section 10.5 Interpretation : Cut-off and Summations

921

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

All Zones 39.935 29.362

Senergy

7790.00

8620.00

785.00

196.25

0.250

-7590.00

-8420.00

785.00

196.25

0.250

Zone Name

Top

Bottom

Top Gas Zone Water Bottom Gas Bottom Water

7790.00 7875.00 8270.00 8420.00

7875.00 8225.00 8420.00 8620.00

0.203

0.265

0.123

cut-offs USED Zn # 1 2 3 4

Depth Units : ft TVD / TVT depth curve name : TVDSS

> > > >

Phi Pay PHIE 0.100 0.100 0.100 0.100

< < < <

Sw Pay SW 0.500 Y 0.500 Y 0.500 Y 0.500 Y

< < < <

Vcl Pay VWCL 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500

Units : ft

Example listing 2 : Part listing with option of including curve listing between zonal summaries. cut-off SUMMARY REPORT Well : Date :

Test Well 3 03/12/02 16:55:33

NET RESERVOIR ROCK SUMMARY

Zn Zone Name Phi*H Phi*So*H #

Top

Bottom

Gross

Net

N/G

Av Phi

Av Sw

Av Vcl

1 Upper Oil 30.336 19.323

7778.00

7924.50

146.50

142.50

0.973

0.213

0.363

0.057

DEPTH FT 7790. 7800. 7810. 7820. 7830. 7840. 7850. 7860. 7870. 7880. 7890. 7900. 7910. 7920.

VWCL Dec 0.05327 0.3844 0.2673 0.05524 0.5224 0.01823 0.03271 0.1014 0.03495 0.04284 0.03141 0.03785 0.1669 0.03822

PHIE Dec 0.2008 0.09666 0.1397 0.2044 0.1188 0.2184 0.2272 0.1846 0.2362 0.2058 0.2395 0.196 0.1822 0.2229

SW Dec 0.6609 0.9356 0.4536 0.2316 0.5447 0.2054 0.2322 0.4652 0.3478 0.1591 0.1348 0.2191 0.3379 0.5205

ResFlag 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1.

PayFlag 0. 0. 1. 1. 0. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 0.

Zn Zone Name Phi*H Phi*So*H #

Top

Bottom

Gross

Net

N/G

Av Phi

Av Sw

Av Vcl

2 Upper water 51.287 1.269

7924.50

8250.50

326.00

288.50

0.885

0.178

0.975

0.099

Section 10.5 Interpretation : Cut-off and Summations

Interpretation

Senergy DEPTH FT 7930. 7940. 7950. 7960.

VWCL Dec 0.06897 0.1337 0. 0.02743

PHIE Dec 0.1768 0.1587 0.1885 0.1863

SW Dec 0.8746 0.8541 1. 0.9994

ResFlag 1. 1. 1. 1.

922

PayFlag 0. 0. 0. 0.

Related Topics Create a Cutoff and Summations Report Cut-off and Summations Parameters Printing Cut-off and Summation Results Cut-off and Summations Interactive Plot Mutli-Well Cutoff and Summation Cut-off and Summations Equations and Methodology

10.5.4 Cut-off and Summations Interactive Plot The Cut-offs and Summation module interactive plot consists (from left to right) of: a Depth track, Zone track, a TVD Depth track (if theTVD option is selected) and Input Curve tracks (one track per input curve) with track titles as typed into the Input Curves Tab of the set-up screen.

The Zone track is used to perform the following functions: 1. To display the current zonation used in the interpretation 2. To create and delete interpretation zones 3. To move zone tops.

Section 10.5 Interpretation : Cut-off and Summations

923

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

To create a new zone by splitting a current zone, click in the zone track at the depth for the split and choose from the pop-up menu Split Zone. To delete a zone, choose Delete Zone from the pop-up menu. Zone tops and bottoms can be moved by placing the cursor on the top of a zone in the zone track, and, with the left mouse button, drag the top to a new position. It is possible to have gaps between zones. To remove a gap, drag the bottom of the zone above a gap to below the top of the zone below the gap. The Input Curve tracks are all similar in appearance. They contain a single input curve, together with the flag curves of all the Reports that the user has defined in the set-up screens. If a particular curve is used in a Report as a cut-off criterion, a cut-off line is also displayed in the log track. 1. The Flags are labelled as in the Report Title field in the Reports Set-Up / Default Cutoffs Tab of the set-up window. The Flag curves appear as coloured bars at either side of each track. 2. The Cut-Off values that were set up for individual curves are displayed as vertical interactive lines in their respective tracks. To interactively change a cut-off, place the mouse cursor on the cut-off line. The name of the cut-off parameter and its value will be displayed at the bottom left hand corner of the main window. Use the left mouse button to drag the line to its new value. When the mouse button is released, that zone will be re-calculated and all displays updated. 3. If the right-hand mouse button is clicked in a log track, a pop-up menu will appear. The menu will allow the user to: turn on and turn off the net pay /net reservoir /optional report use options. This function is identical to the user opening the Cut-off and Summation Parameters screen and checking or unchecking the equivalent curve Use column on the appropriate Report tab. a histogram of the input curve or any of the Flag curves in the track can be displayed, with an interactive line to change the cut-off value (See Histogram Section). Crossplots of the cut-off parameters can be displayed, with interactive lines allowing the changing of cut-off parameters (See Crossplots Section).

Section 10.5 Interpretation : Cut-off and Summations

Interpretation

Senergy

924

Undo/Redo Once the Interactive cutoff lines lines have been altered undo/redo arrows appear in the top lefthand corner of the log plot. These allow the user to go back to the original position of the interactive lines. As the arrows are clicked the interactive lines move and the output curves are recalculated. The undo/redo arrows only work if the well and zones remain unchanged during the current interpretation session.

Related Topics Create a Cutoff and Summations Report Cut-off and Summations Parameters Printing Cut-off and Summation Results Cut-off and Summations Interactive Plot Mutli-Well Cutoff and Summation

Section 10.5 Interpretation : Cut-off and Summations

925

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Cut-off and Summations Equations and Methodology

10.5.6 Cut-off and Summations Equations and Methodology Each depth in the data is considered a discrete interval, with the recorded depth being the centre of the interval. Therefore, when making averages over an interval, only half of the top and bottom depth increments are counted. The following diagram provides an example explaining how net reservoir would be calculated:

It is worth pointing out that the above equation misses out the zero points as in total there are nine intervals and so the equation should really be written like this: Net = [((1 x 6) + (1 x 0)) + ((0.5 x 0) + (0.5 x 1))] x 0.5’ = 3.25 Average porosity: i n

av

hi

i i 1 i n

hi i 1

Average water saturation: i n

hi

i

S av

1

1 Sw

i 1 i n i

hi

i 1

Average Clay volume:

Section 10.5 Interpretation : Cut-off and Summations

Interpretation

Senergy

926

i n

Vcli

hi

i 1

Vclav

i n

hi i 1

Extra curves Arithmetic average: i n

Curvei Curveav

hi

i 1 i n

hi i 1

Extra curves Geometric average: i n

Curveav

C1 . C2 . C3 . C4 ..... Cn

1 i 1

hi

Extra curves Harmonic average: i n

hi Curveav

i 1 i n

hi Curvei i 1

Where i hi n

= ith input value = ith input interval = number of samples

For the Geometric and Harmonic averages, any input value which is less than or equal to zero, will be ignored and not included in the final average.

Related Topics Create a Cutoff and Summations Report Cut-off and Summations Parameters Printing Cut-off and Summation Results Cut-off and Summations Interactive Plot Mutli-Well Cutoff and Summation Cut-off and Summations Equations and Methodology

Section 10.5 Interpretation : Cut-off and Summations

927

10.6

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Cut-Off Sensitivity Results

The‘Cut-off Sensitivity Results’ module is a standalone tool which allows the user to load and visualize sensitivity run results saved from the 'Cut-off Sensitivity' module. When the user runs the 'Cut-off Sensitivity' module the inputs, calculated data tables and output graphic defaults can be saved to an external (.cosr) file. These saved data and settings can subsequently be reloaded into this module. The module is launched from the 'Interpretation' menu. The user interface is illustrated below. When the module is launched, initially the window is empty of graphics and data. 'Click' the 'Load Results' button and use the Windows browser to select the saved 'Cutoff Sensitivity Results' (.cosr) file you wish to look at. 'Click' Open. The forms are populated with the saved data and the graphic display is rebuilt.

Section 10.6 Interpretation : Cut-Off Sensitivity Results

Interpretation

Senergy

Related Topics

Section 10.6 Interpretation : Cut-Off Sensitivity Results

928

929

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Cut-Off Sensitivity Results Cut-Off Sensitivity Work Flow Cut-off Sensitivity Results Plot Cut-off Sensitivity Output Parameters Cut-off Sensitivity Computations

10.6.1 Cut-Off Sensitivity Work Flow For example, one could visualize the impact of different porosity (PHIE) cut-offs on Net Porosity Thickness (PhiH Reservoir). The workflow and set-up window for this example are illustrated below: The workflow is as follows: 1. Select the well or wells to work on. IP defaults to the current, in-focus well. 2. Select the cut-off parameter to investigate. This could be any of the cut-off parameters saved by the 'Cut-off and Summation' module, but normally will be Phie, Sw or Vcl. 3. Enter the 'Cutoff Start Value', 'Cutoff Stop Value' and the 'Cutoff Step' for the selected cut-off parameter. These numbers are the minimum and maximum limits for the selected cut-off parameter and the 'step' is the amount to increment the selected parameter between these two limits. In the screen capture shown below, the PHI cutoff limits to test are from 0.0 to 35 pu, using a 1.0 pu increment. 4. Select the 'Output Parameter' to plot (e.g. PhiH Reservoir). Multiple output results can be selected simultaneously by adding an entry in additional rows in the grid. Each result parameter will be shown as a sensitivity line on the 'Results' plot, when the 'Make Plot' button is clicked. 5. Select a named 'Zone' or ‘All Zones’ to get the data from, by clicking in the 'Zone' column, for each 'Output Parameter' row. For example, one could plot the PHiH Reservoir sensitivity to PHI Cut-off in different reservoir zones using the grid set-up. Note, that in the multi-well option, if a zone is missing in one or more wells, the computation will continue with a warning message about the well the zone is missing from. The 'Zone' column title box can be 'activated' by 'clicking' in it. This provides the same functionality as elsewhere in the Interactive Petrophysics software - when switched 'on' (Green color) selecting a particular zone and clicking away from the grid will populate all rows in the grid with that value. 6. Click the ‘Make plot’ button. The module cycles through the cut-off parameter limits from 'Start' to 'Stop' value, using the 'Step', running the 'Cutoff and Summation' module in each selected well. The results are accumulated for the selected well(s) and copied to the display

Section 10.6 Interpretation : Cut-Off Sensitivity Results

Interpretation

Senergy

930

module and the graphics are updated. On the first operation of this module the 'Update Plot' button will be 'greyed out'. 'Clicking' the 'Make Plot' button activates the 'Update Plot' functionality.

Within the Setup window there are options for modifying the parameters to be visualized: The 'Clear Row' and 'Clear All' buttons allow the user to remove one or all entries from the 'Output Parameters' grid. The 'Save Format' button is used to save the wells, set-up parameters and cut-off limits for a particular run of the module. The parameters are written to an external '.cos' file. The 'Load Format' button is used to reload a saved Cut-off Sensitivity format (.cos) file.

Related Topics Cut-Off Sensitivity Results Cut-Off Sensitivity Work Flow Cut-off Sensitivity Results Plot Cut-off Sensitivity Output Parameters Cut-off Sensitivity Computations

Section 10.6 Interpretation : Cut-Off Sensitivity Results

931

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

10.6.2 Cut-off Sensitivity Output Parameters The ‘Cut-off Sensitivity’ module is designed to provide the user with an easy-to-use tool for visualizing the effect of changing any single cut-off parameter (typically Vclay, Porosity, Water Saturation) on any 'Summation' Net Reservoir or Net Pay output parameter. The module is launched from the 'Interpretation' menu. The typical output parameters from the 'Cut-off and Summation' module are listed below:

Related Topics Cut-Off Sensitivity Results Cut-Off Sensitivity Work Flow Cut-off Sensitivity Results Plot Cut-off Sensitivity Output Parameters Cut-off Sensitivity Computations

10.6.3 Cut-off Sensitivity Computations The cut-off criteria that are used to generate a reservoir summary report for 'Net Reservoir' and 'Net Pay' can be critically important. Deciding what values of Vclay, Porosity and Sw to use as cut-offs is quite often guesswork and therefore sensitivities run on the cut-off values can be useful in helping to make a decision on the appropriate cut-off value to apply. The 'Cut-off Sensitivity’ and ‘Cut-off Sensitivity Report’ modules work in a complementary way to allow the visualization and reporting of the changes observed in Summation 'Net Reservoir' and 'Net pay' parameter outputs, based upon varying one cut-off parameter within user-defined limits and by a user-defined increment. The two modules can be used in 'single well' and 'multi-well' modes. Multi-well mode requires that input curves (typically the Porosity, Clay volume and Water saturation curves) in all the wells

Section 10.6 Interpretation : Cut-Off Sensitivity Results

Interpretation

Senergy

932

have the same names. In addition, when using multiple wells, a common Zone set should exist. Note that not all zones have to be present in every well. The module identifies if a zone is missing from a well and warns the user, before continuing to process other wells. As a prerequisite to using these modules the ‘Cut-off and Summation’ module or the 'MultiWell Cutoff and Summation' module must initially have been run on all wells that are to be run in the sensitivity computation. Sensitivities can then be set up to see the impact of changing any one of the cut-off inputs (Porosity, Clay Volume, Water Saturation etc..) on any output parameter e.g. “Hydrocarbon Pore Thickness Pay (PhiSoH Pay).

Calculating Multi-Well Output Values There are two types of 'Results' parameters output from the Summation computation. These are : 1. 'Average properties' e.g 'Av Vcl Res', 'Av Phie Res' or 'Av Sw Pay' & 2. 'Value Thickness' products e.g. 'PhiH Res' (Net Porosity Thickness Reservoir), 'PhiSoH Pay' (Net Hydrocarbon Pore Thickness Pay) In multi-well mode an 'average property' is computed by adding together the 'value thickness' of the parameter for all selected wells, then by dividing the result by the total thickness in all wells. This is illustrated in the following example:

Well 1 (Zone 1) Av Phi

0.195

Net Thickness

50ft

Phi H

50 x 0.195 = 9.75

Av Sw

0.25

Phi So H

9.75 x (1-0.25) = 7.313

Well 2 (Zone 1) Av Phi

0.165

Net Thickness

20ft

Phi H

20 x 0.165 = 3.3

Av Sw

0.30

Phi So H

3.3 x (1-0.3) = 2.31

Phi = Porosity Sw = Water Saturation So = Hydrocarbon saturation = 1 - Sw Phi So H = Net Hydrocarbon Pore thickness Phi H = Net Porosity thickness

Section 10.6 Interpretation : Cut-Off Sensitivity Results

933

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Combined values for the two wells for Zone 1: Phi H

9.75 + 3.3 = 13.05

Net Thickness

50 + 20 = 70ft

Phi So H

7.313 + 2.31 = 9.623

Av Phi

13.05 / 70 = 0.187

Av Sw

1.0 - 9.623 / 13.05 = 0.263

These averages are called 'thickness weighted' averages and are the values used inside the 'Cutoff and Summation' module.

Related Topics Cut-Off Sensitivity Results Cut-Off Sensitivity Work Flow Cut-off Sensitivity Results Plot Cut-off Sensitivity Output Parameters Cut-off Sensitivity Computations

10.6.4 Cut-off Sensitivity Results Plot 'Clicking' the 'Make Plot' button launches the 'Cut-off Sensitivity Results' window. The restored sensitivity run results are organized on two 'tabbed' screens 'Plot' and 'Data'. The 'Cutoff Sensitivity Results' plot window contains a graph in the upper panel, showing the crossplot of the results of the sensitivity run. The Cut-off parameter values are shown on the X-axis; the corresponding output parameter values are shown on the Y-axis. The statistical results associated with the sensitivity run are displayed in the table underneath the graph. The 'Plot' tab, illustrated below shows a crossplot display and grid of statistics associated with the input data. The 'Data' tab presents a tabular listing containing all the data that went into the construction of the 'Plot' graphic and the associated statistics grid. The 'Percentile' lines drawn on the graph are user-editable and can be changed by typing in a different value into the appropriate 'cell' in the grid and keying 'Enter'. The associated Cut-off value and Output parameter value for the modified Percentile are recomputed.

Changing the displayed 'Percentiles', 'Cutoff' or 'Output Parameter' Values. The Grid display in the bottom of the window shows the statistical values associated with the

Section 10.6 Interpretation : Cut-Off Sensitivity Results

Interpretation

Senergy

934

plot. The program defaults to display the 10th, 50th and 90th Percentile results. These include the 'Cut-off' value corresponding to that 'Percentile' and the 'Value' of the selected output parameter for that percentile. The user can type in a new 'Value', 'Percentile' or 'Cutoff' into the appropriate 'cell', Key 'Enter' or 'click' elsewhere on the grid and IP will recalculate the other two values and update the graphic display.

Column headers are 'active' in the grid part of the window. 'Click' in the 'title' cell of a column and it turns green (active). To change all displayed values in a column to a particular value, type in, for example, the value 5 in the top row of an active 'Percentile' column and key the 'Enter/ Return' button or 'click' elsewhere in the grid. All rows in that column of the grid will update with the new Percentile value and the associated output parameter and cut-off value will be recalculated. The graphic display will update to reflect the imposed changes.

Section 10.6 Interpretation : Cut-Off Sensitivity Results

935

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The 'Options' tab allows the user to modify the Y-axis scale(s) for any output parameter result. This could be used, for example to make display scales consistent if one is visualizing the effect of a Cut-off parameter on an Output for multiple zones. In the following screen capture the 'Options' screen has been used to set the 'PHISoH Pay' to the same scales for 2 reservoir zones and 'All zones':

Section 10.6 Interpretation : Cut-Off Sensitivity Results

Interpretation

Senergy

936

Save Results The 'Save Results' button allows the user to save all the results of a particular sensitivity run to an external 'Cut-off Sensitivity Results' (.cosr) file. Once such a file has been saved, it can be reloaded into the standalone 'Cut-off Sensitivity Results' module without having to re-run the sensitivity computation, which could be time-consuming, depending upon the number of wells / zones to be visualized. When run on a single well the 'Save Results' operation will save a results file into the active wells sub-folder in the active IP database. When run in multi-well mode the 'Save Results' operation will save the results file to the IP project folder level.

Section 10.6 Interpretation : Cut-Off Sensitivity Results

937

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Print Options Under the 'Print' button are options for saving the graphic display and for saving the digital data associated with the graphic display. The digital data and Plot can be sent directly to a printer, to external files (.txt for data, .emf file for plot) or into the WINDOWS Clipboard, from which they can be pasted into other applications such as Excel or PowerPoint. in addition, the digital data can be copied to the clipboard in a 'spreadsheet-friendly' format using the 'Data to Clipboard (Spreadsheet)' option, which avoids unnecessary formatting of the data for use in the external application.

Related Topics Cut-Off Sensitivity Results Cut-Off Sensitivity Work Flow Cut-off Sensitivity Results Plot Cut-off Sensitivity Output Parameters Cut-off Sensitivity Computations

Section 10.6 Interpretation : Cut-Off Sensitivity Results

Interpretation

Senergy

10.7

938

NMR Normalization

Schlumberger and Halliburton (post 2000) provide T2 and T1 distributions that span 4 log decades, 0.3ms to 3000ms or 0.5ms to 5000ms. Baker Atlas and Halliburton (pre 2000) provide T2 distributions that do not span complete decades and vary depending on the data gathered, e. g. 4ms to 512ms, 0.5ms to 1024ms, 1ms to 4096ms. The problem with asymmetric distributions is that they cannot be plotted properly on a log grid and as a result they are usually plotted without any grid behind them. That means the user cannot properly plot a cut-off or any other T2 value such as oil T2, max water T2, or peak value. It also means that when the user uses the interactive plot in the NMR Module to pick a cut-off they are not picking what they thought they were. It does calculate the correct results for whatever cutoff is in the parameter if the start and stop times are mapped correctly. But the cut-off does not sit against the T2 distribution properly in the log plot as the log plot cannot plot incomplete decades. The T2 Normalization module re-samples the T2 array and produces a polynomial fit through the array. This creates a smooth fitting curve through the array with many more points than the initial array. The polynomial curve then has to be normalised with the porosity in order to not overcall the porosity. The resulting T2 output array curve can then be correctly plotted and easily compared to other T2 arrays.

Section 10.7 Interpretation : NMR Normalization

939

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Related Topics NMR Normalization T2 Distribution T2 Advanced Setup Normalized Output T2 Distribution

10.7.1 T2 Distribution The 'Base T2 array distribution base curve name' must be entered for NMR porosities to be calculated (not necessary if only Sw calculations are wanted). Array data in IP are either stored in array curves or they consist of groups of curves with a common 'base name' with a numerical extension attached to the 'base name'. The user either selects an array curve or selects any curve in an array curve group, in which case the program will automatically select the other curves. The 'Units' box tells the program whether the input T2 data porosities are in measurements of '%' or 'dec'. The 'Tool Type' drop-down allows the user to select from one of the pre-defined tools. By changing the tool type the defaults for the setup are altered. All the defaults can be manually changed by 'clicking' on the 'Advanced Setup' button and adjusting the settings. NOTE: the defaults for the tools are found in the file NMR_Tools.csv in the IP program directory. These can be added to or modified by the user. The T2 distribution will be normally calibrated directly in porosity. However, it is found that for some older tools some calibration factor is needed to convert the T2 array data to porosity. This is best done by using the input T2 total porosity curve produced by the logging company to calibrate the T2 array data. This curve is always provided along with the T2 array data and should be loaded along with the T2 array data. To calibrate the T2 array data 'check' the 'Calibrate T2 Porosity using input curve' box and select the calibration curve name. The units of the input curve must also be selected. IP works with porosities in decimals. However, the NMR porosities as produced by the logging companies are often in percent.

Related Topics NMR Normalization T2 Distribution T2 Advanced Setup Normalized Output T2 Distribution

Section 10.7 Interpretation : NMR Normalization

Interpretation

Senergy

940

10.7.2 T2 Advanced Setup If the 'Advanced Setup' button is 'clicked' the following panel is displayed:

The 'Start sample number' and 'Stop sample number' allows the user to only use part of an array. If these fields are left blank then all of the array will be used. NOTE: the Schlumberger CMR plus tool can encode the T2 distribution in a 90 sample array. Only the last 30 samples represent the T2 distribution data. For this tool the 'Start sample number' should be set to 61 and the 'Stop sample number' to 90. The 'Start T2 time' and 'Stop T2 time' must be entered. They are time values for the end points of the T2 distribution. These can generally be found on the well site log header. The 'T2 Start, Stop times are bin mid point times' check-box tells the program whether values entered represent the left/right edge of the porosity T2 bins or whether they represent the middle values of the first and last bin. In general for all Schlumberger tools this box should not be 'checked' but for Numar (Halliburton / Baker Atlas) tools the box should be 'checked'. The difference in results will be small except for those tools that use a low number of bins. The defaults for the Schlumberger CMR are 3 and 3000. For the CMR plus tool, which can measure much faster decay times, the default values are 0.3 and 3000.

Section 10.7 Interpretation : NMR Normalization

941

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Related Topics NMR Normalization T2 Distribution T2 Advanced Setup Normalized Output T2 Distribution

10.7.3 Normalized Output T2 Distribution In this data set a Schlumberger CMR T2 array is converted from a 3 to 3000 ms T2 to a 0.3 to 3000 ms T2. The results of this can be seen below:

Related Topics NMR Normalization T2 Distribution T2 Advanced Setup Normalized Output T2 Distribution

Section 10.7 Interpretation : NMR Normalization

Interpretation

Senergy

10.8

942

NMR Interpretation

The NMR Interpretation module allows the user to interpret the T2 array data produced from NMR tools. The module allows the user to set a T1 or T2 cut-off for free fluid (FF) and also for clay-bound fluid (BF). Permeability is calculated using the Timur / Coates permeability equations and, if some external permeability data is available, the module will allow automatic calibration of the equation coefficients. With the optional input of a resistivity curve, water saturation can be calculated using the Dual Water equation. The logic uses the NMR for total porosity and clay bound water and the NMR Swi to limit the lower value of Sw. Capillary pressure curves can be generated from the T1 or T2 array curves. These need to be calibrated to an imported capillary pressure measurement made on the actual rock. The module provides an interactive tool for doing this calibration. Crossplots of the generated capillary pressure curves can be made. The curves can also be used to generate a Sw height curve from the entered FWL, water and hydrocarbon densities. To Display the NMR Interpretation Module: From the Interpretation Menu, Select NMR Interpretation to display the NMR Interpretation Dialog. The NMR Interpretation Dialog contains six Tabs, Input Curves, Output Curves: , Parameters, Permeability , Pc Calibration, Pc Crossplot

Related Topics Define Input Curves Define Output Curves Define NMR Interpretation Parameters Define Permeability Define PC Calibration Define PC Crossplot Display the QC Comparison Plot Display the NMR Interactive Plot NMR Equations and Methodology

10.8.1 Define Input Curves Define T2 Distribution The Base T2 array distribution base curve name must be entered for NMR porosities to be

Section 10.8 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation

943

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

calculated (not necessary if only Sw calculations are wanted). Array data in IP are either stored in array curves or they consist of groups of curves with a common base name with a numerical extension attached to the base name. The user either selects an array curve or selects any curve in an array curve group, in which case the program will automatically select the other curves. The Units box tells the program whether the input T2 data porosities are in measurements of % or dec. T1 distribution data can be handled exactly the same as T2 distribution data although, of course, different cutoffs will be required. Throughout this document T2 will be referred to but this should be considered as interchangeable with T1. The Tool Type drop-down allows the user to select from one of the pre-defined tools. By changing the tool type the defaults for the setup are altered. All the defaults can be manually changed by clicking on the Advanced Setup button and adjusting the settings. NOTE: the defaults for the tools are found in the file NMR_Tools.csv in the IP program directory. These can be added to or modified by the user. The T2 distribution will be normally calibrated directly in porosity. However, it is found that for some older tools some calibration factor is need to convert the T2 array data to porosity. This is best done by using the input T2 total porosity curve produced by the logging company to calibrate the T2 array data. This curve is always provided along with the T2 array data and should be loaded along with the T2 array data. To calibrate the T2 array data check the Calibrate T2 Porosity using input curve box and select the calibration curve name. The units of the input curve must also be selected. IP works with porosities in decimals. However, the NMR porosities as produced by the logging companies are often in percent.

NMR Sw Calculations Input Curves To make Sw calculations using the NMR the user must enter deep resistivity (Rt) and temperature curves. The temperature curve is used for correcting Rw values to formation conditions and also optionally calculating a bound water conductivity. The PhiT and VCL curve are used only when the user does not want to use the NMR input for clay bound water calculations (older tools didnt measure this). The user needs to set the CBF Method parameter in the Sw logic/Limits sub-tab of the Parameters tab to use these inputs.

Section 10.8 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation

Interpretation

Senergy

944

Optional Input Curves The Optional Input Curves are used partly for comparison purposes and partly to make moveable oil displays with the NMR clay bound fluid being compared to the Bulk Volume Water from normal log analysis (QC plot). The TVDss input is used for calculating a capillary pressure at a height above FWL. This is used for calculating the Sw height curve from the NMR Pc curves. If the T2 curve is not available (for example, when preliminary wellsite logs are only available) then it is still possible, given the NMR porosities, to use the module to calculate water saturations. In this case the user must enter the NMR total porosity and NMR free fluid optional curves to allow the module to run.

Section 10.8 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation

945

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Parameter Sets The Parameter set name is used to set the default name for the output of the parameter listings. The Load / Save Parameter Sets button allows the user to manage the NMR parameter Sets. See Parameter Set Management for more information on how to do this. Null all result curves before running calculations if checked will null all output curves from a previous interpretation before starting the calculations on a new interpretation.

T2 Advanced Setup If the Advanced Setup button is clicked the NMR Interpretation Dialog is expanded to display the T2 Advanced Setup Panel.

Section 10.8 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation

Interpretation

Senergy

946

The Start sample number and Stop sample number allows the user to only use part of an array. If these fields are left blank then all of the array will be used. The Start T2 time and Stop T2 time must be entered. They are time values for the end points of the T2 distribution. These can generally be found on the well site log header. The T2 Start, Stop times are bin mid point times check-box tells the program whether values entered represent the left/right edge of the porosity T2 bins or whether they represent the middle values of the porosity T2 bins. In general for all Schlumberger tools this box should not be checked but for Numar (Halliburton / Baker Atlas) tools the box should be checked. The difference in results will be small except for those tools that use a low number of bins.

Section 10.8 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation

947

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The defaults for the Schlumberger CMR tool are 3 and 3000. For the CMR-200 and CMR plus tools, which can measure much faster decay times, the default values are 0.3 and 3000. Tool

Start T2

Stop T2

30

3 ms

3000 ms

CMR-200 1

30

0.3 ms

3000 ms

CMR+

30

0.3 ms

3000 ms

CMR

Start

Stop

Sample

Sample

1

1

NOTE: If the Schlumberger CMR plus tool has been logged in a Multi-Wait mode it also encodes the T2 distribution in a 90 sample array T2_DIST_MW curve. Only the last 30 samples represent the T2 distribution data. For this input array the Start sample number should be set to 61 and the Stop sample number set to 90. For the new Schlumberger MR Scanner the following table provides information on how to set up IP depending on the mode logged. Mode

SP - T1

Start

Stop

Start T2

Stop T2

Sample

Sample

1

64

1 ms

9000 ms

1

64

1 ms

3000 ms

1

64

10

500,000

1

64

1 ms

9000 ms

1

64

1 ms

3000 ms

1

64

10

500,000

1

30

0.5 ms

3000 ms

1

30

0.5 ms

3000 ms

1

30

0.5 ms

3000 ms

1

30

0.5 ms

3000 ms

data SP - T2 data SP - DC data T1 - T1 data T1 - T2 data T1 - DC data RP - T2 data HR - T2 data BMR T2 data BF - T2 data

Section 10.8 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation

Interpretation

Senergy

948

Where SP mode is Saturation Profiling mode using shells 1+4 or 1+4+8 T1 mode is T1 Profiling mode using shells 1+4 or 1+4+8 RP is T2 Radial Profiling mode using shells 1+4 or 1+4+8 HR is High Resolution mode using shells LHR+3 or UHR+3 BMR is Basic MR Processing mode using shells 1+4 BF is Bound Fluid mode using shell 3 only Data directly from field MAXIS software cannot be displayed directly in Geoframe or IP. Data from the field must be processed through the Geoframe MRX Preprocessor module in order to split out the different shell information for processing. To display a distribution in IP, add the distribution to a Log Plot as a Waveform. Choose Define next to Waveform in Log Plot format window. For T2 distribution in SP mode the following Waveform settings are recommended:

The data format of Numar (Halliburton / Baker Atlas) MRIL NMR tools depends on the tool version, the vendor and the vintage of software used for processing; but the T2 bin times will always be mid-point bin times. For all Baker Atlas MRIL data and Numar (Halliburton) MRIL data prior to 2003 the output is typically an 8 to 12 bin T2 distribution, with T2 bin times as powers of 2, although some data sets were processed with more bins. The number of bins and the T2 times depends mostly on whether the tool logged effective or total porosity. Typically, 8 and 9 bin data will be effective porosity and go from 4 ms to 512 ms or 1024

Section 10.8 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation

949

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

ms. While 12 or 13 bin data will be total porosity and go from 0.5 ms to 1024 ms or 2048 ms. Tool

Start

Stop

Start T2

Stop T2

Sample

Sample

MRIL-B

1

8

4 ms

512 ms

MRIL-C

1

9

4 ms

1024 ms

MRIL-

1

12

0.5 ms

1024 ms

1

12

0.5 ms

1024 ms

1

13

0.5 ms

2048 ms

Ctp MRILPrime MRILPrime

Numar/Halliburton typically only provide discrete bin data which can be used as provided, whilst Baker Atlas often provide cumulative bin data which may need to be manipulated in order to provide discrete bins prior to use. Numar/Halliburton also typically provide a 200 element array curve for plotting purposes, TASPEC, which can also be used as an input. The start and stop times will, for this vector, be the same as used for the regular discrete bins. Array data provided by Baker Atlas frequently contain extra zero value samples at the beginning and end of the array, purely for plotting aesthetics. Care must be taken to make sure the correct T2 start and stop times are selected depending on whether these extra bins are included in the processing or not. For example, 8 bin data from 4 ms to 512 ms may be provided in a 10 bin array from 2 ms to 1024 ms. The data format of Halliburton/Sperry Sun MRIL-Prime (post 2003) and MRI-LWD tools will typically be a 54 bin array curve, T2DIST or T1DIST, although 200 element arrays were also provided for plotting, TASPEC curve. The 54 bins were based on multiples of the powers of 2 starting at 0.5 ms, and although they are usually presented to 5000 ms the last bin is actually at 4870.99 ms. The 200 bins were from 0.3 ms to 3000 ms in order to be comparable with previous generation logs. Again, the T2 bin times will always be mid-point bin times. Tool

MRIL-

Start

Stop

Sample

Sample

1

54

Start T2

Stop T2

0.5 ms

4870.99

Prime MRIL-

ms 1

200

0.3 ms

3000 ms

Prime

Section 10.8 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation

Interpretation

Senergy

950

Baker Atlas MREX T2 data is typically provided in a 26 bin array curve, TPOR. Again with the first and last bins set to zero for plotting aesthetics. The 24 T2 times solved for in the inversion are multiples of the powers of 2 starting at 0.3535 and ending at 1024, as given in the bin centre times array curve, BCNTR. NOTE: the T2 bin times are mid-point bin times. With the extra zeros the 26 bins go from 0.25 ms to 1448.15 ms. Tool

MREX

Start

Stop

Start

Sample

Sample

T2

1

26

0.25 ms

Stop T2

1448.15 ms

Related Topics Define Input Curves Define Output Curves Define NMR Interpretation Parameters Define Permeability Define PC Calibration Define PC Crossplot Display the QC Comparison Plot Display the NMR Interactive Plot NMR Equations and Methodology

10.8.2 Define Output Curves The Clay Bound Fluid Cutoff box should be checked if the NMR measures clay fluid (newer tools). When checked the T2 clay bound cutoff is used to calculate effective and total porosity. When not checked the NMR PhiT and Phie are the same. If the Remove Clay Bound fluid from Coates Permeability calculation box is checked then the option is available to remove the clay-bound fluid from the Timur / Coates permeability equation (effective porosity rather than total porosity is used). To output the porosity bin curves ‘check’ the ‘Make Porosity Bin Curves’ box. The user needs to select the number of bins to output and enter the bin start and stop times in the table. The value output in the bin curve will be the NMR porosity between the two T2 entered times. It is possible to have bins that overlap. However, when all the bins are summed, the results will no longer be the NMR porosity.

Section 10.8 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation

951

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

To output PC curves from the T2 distribution check the ‘Make Pc Curves from T2’ box. Set the output pressure units required.

The following are the output curves created by this module. If an output curve is not wanted then uncheck the box next to its name. NMR effective porosity (nmrPhie): Porosity calculated from the T2 spectrum above the clay bound cutoff. If no clay bound cutoff this equals the NMR total porosity. NMR total porosity (nmrPhiT): Porosity calculated from T2 spectrum with no cutoffs. NMR Total bound fluid (nmrBFT): The total bound fluid, both clay and capillary bound. This will be the same as nmrBFTc or NMRTt depending on the method selected

Section 10.8 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation

Interpretation

Senergy

952

NMR clay bound water (nmrCBW): The porosity calculated below the T2 clay bound cutoff. NMR capillary bound fluid (nmrBFE): The total bound fluid minus the clay bound fluid. NMR free fluid (nmrFF): The porosity calculated above the T2 bound water cutoff. For the tapered method this is nmrPhiT minus nmrBFT. NMR Swe irreducible (nmrSwiE): Effective irreducible water saturation. nmrBFE / nmrPhie. NMR SwT irreducible (nmrSwiT): Total irreducible water saturation. nmrBFT / nmrPhiT. NMR Sw bound (nmrSwb): Bound water saturation. nmrCBM / nmrPhiT. NMR permeability (nmrPerm): Permeability calculated from Timur/ Coates equation. Bound Fluid total cutoff (nmrBFTc): Total bound fluid calculated using the cutoff method. The calculated porosity below the T2 bound water cutoff. Bound Fluid eff. cutoff (nmrBFEc): Effective bound fluid calculated using the cutoff method. The calculated porosity below the T2 bound water cutoff and above the clay bound cutoff. Bound Fluid total Tapered (nmrBFTt): Total bound fluid calculated using the tapered method. Bound Fluid eff. Tapered (nmrBFEt): Effective bound fluid calculated using the tapered method. NMR SwT (nmrSwT): Total water saturation, calculated from the input Rt curve and the Dual Water equation. Limited between 1.0 and 0.0. NMR SwT unlimited (nmrSwtU): Total water saturation unlimited, calculated from the input Rt curve and the Dual Water equation. Values can be greater than 1.0. NMR SwE (nmrSw): Effective water saturation, calculated from SwT and nmrSwb. Limited between 1.0 and 0.0. NMR SwE unlimited (nmrSwU): Effective water saturation unlimited, calculated from Sw and nmrSwb. Can be greater than 1.0. Final effective porosity (Phie_f): Effective porosity used for calculating Sw. This will be the same as the nmrPhie except if the parameter ‘Phi Method’ is changed from ‘NMR’. In this case the porosity will be the entered porosity parameter / curve ‘Phi In’. Final total porosity (Phie_f): Total porosity used for calculating Sw. This will be the same as the nmrPhie except if the parameter ‘Phi Method’ is changed from ‘NMR’. In this case the porosity will be the entered porosity parameter / curve ‘Phi In’.

Section 10.8 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation

953

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Final clay bound water (Phie_f): Clay bound water used for calculating Swb used in the Sw calculations. This will be the same as the nmrCBW curve except if the parameter ‘CBF Method’ is changed from ‘NMR’. In this case the CBW will either be calculated from the entered input PhiT curve (CBW = PhiT – nmrPhie) or Vcl curve (CBW = Vcl x PhiT Clay). NMR BVW (nmeBVW_f): Bound water volume (Phie_f x nmwSw). NMR BVWT (nmeBVWT_f): Total Bound water volume (PhiT_f x nmwSwT). NMR Rw apparent (nmrRwapp): Apparent water resistivity. Calculated from Rt and Phie_f . NMR z wet (nmrZwet): Water saturation equation ‘z’ parameter assuming rock is 100% wet. NMR z Swi (nmrZwet): Water saturation equation ‘z’ parameter assuming rock is at irreducible saturation (at nmrSwirT). NMR z (nmrZ): Calculated ‘z’ parameter from ‘Z Slope’ and ‘Z offset’ parameters or if the ‘ “m” “n” Method’ parameter is set ‘Parameter’ then from the ‘m’ and ‘n’ parameters. T2 free cutoff (T2cutoff): T2 bound water cutoff output. T2 bound cutoff (CBFT2cut): T2 clay bound water cutoff output. Sw Logic flag (nmrLogic): Dual water Sw equation logic flag. NMR Pc pressure (nmrPc): Pc pressure curve calculated from the T2 input curve (array curve, same number of elements as the T2 input curve). NMR Pc Sw (nmrPcSw): Pc Sw curve calculated from T2 input curve (array curve). NMR Sw Height (nmrSw_Ht): Sw calculated from the T2 PC curves using the ‘FWL’, ‘ Water density’ and ‘Hydrocarbon density’ parameters. NMR phi Bin Curves (nmrBin*): Output porosity bin curves. Up to 7 different porosity bins can be output.

Related Topics Define Input Curves Define Output Curves Define NMR Interpretation Parameters Define Permeability Define PC Calibration Define PC Crossplot Display the QC Comparison Plot

Section 10.8 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation

Interpretation

Senergy

954

Display the NMR Interactive Plot NMR Equations and Methodology

10.8.3 Define NMR Interpretation Parameters There are 7 sub-tabs within the NMR Interpretation Parameters tab; Zone Depths, T2 Cutoffs, Permeability, Sw Parameters, Sw Fluids, Sw logic / Limits and Pc Curves.

Zone Depths: The Zone Depths Tab defines the Interpretation Zone Parameters; Zone Name, Zone Top, Zone Bottom, Zone Colour and Lock Zone. T2 Cutoffs: The T2 Cutoffs Tab defines the following parameters for each zone; Free Fluid Cut, Cly B Fluid Cut, BF Method, ‘T2 cutoff’, Tapered’, ‘Maximum´, Tapered Constants , Tapered “m” factor and Tapered “b” factor. Permeability: The parameters in this section are used with the Timur / Coates permeability equation. Sw Parameters / Sw Fluids : The parameters in this section and Sw Fluids section are used to calculate Sw from the Dual Water equations below. Two basic forms of the equation are used, one where the Archie parameters ‘m’ and ‘n’ are defined; the other where ‘m’ and ‘n’ are converted to the ‘Z’ function parameter, which is defined by the equation below. Sw logic / Limits: The Sw logic / Limits Tab defines Parameters used in both the Dual Water and the Permeability Equations. Pc Curves: These parameters are used when the ‘Make Pc Curves from T2’ option is checked on the ‘Output Curves’ tab.

Related Topics Define Input Curves Define Output Curves Define NMR Interpretation Parameters

Section 10.8 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation

955

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Define Permeability Define PC Calibration Define PC Crossplot Display the QC Comparison Plot Display the NMR Interactive Plot NMR Equations and Methodology

10.8.3.1 Define Zone Depths

The Zone Depths Tab defines the Interpretation Zone Parameters; Zone Name, Zone Top, Zone Bottom, Zone Colour and Lock Zone.

Zone Name : The zone name is an optional parameter and is used by the user to identify a zone by giving it a name. Zone names can be displayed in the log plot. See Zone plotting. Zone Top : The top depth of the zone. Zone Bottom : The bottom depth of the zone. Zone Color : This is the user editable Zone colour associated with the interpretation zone.

Section 10.8 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation

Interpretation

Senergy

956

Lock Zone : If this is checked then the zone becomes grayed out in all tabs and the parameters cannot be altered within that zone, including interactively.

Related Topics NMR Interpretation Zone Depths T2 Cutoffs Permeability Sw Parameters Sw Fluids Sw logic / Limits Pc Curves.

10.8.3.2 Define T2 Cutoffs

The T2 Cutoffs Tab defines the following parameters for each zone; Free Fluid Cut, Cly B Fluid Cut, BF Method, ‘T2 cutoff’, Tapered’, ‘Maximum´, Tapered Constants, Tapered “m” factor and Tapered “b” factor.

Free Fluid Cut : Free fluid cutoff value. This is displayed as an interactive line on the plot. A curve can be entered for a variable T2 cutoff. Cly B Fluid Cut : Clay bound fluid cutoff. Only used if the option on the ‘Output Curves’ tab Clay Bound Fluid Cutoff is checked. This is displayed as an interactive line on the plot. A curve can be entered for a variable cutoff. BF Method : The method for calculating the final Bound fluid porosities. ‘T2 cutoff’ will calculate the BF using a straight cutoff set in above parameters. ‘Tapered’ will use a weighted cutoff where each T2 bin will have a different cutoff.

Section 10.8 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation

957

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

‘Maximum´ option will take the maximum value calculated by the two other methods. Tapered Constants : Options are ‘Sand’, ‘Carbonate’ and ‘User’. By changing this parameter the ‘Tapered “m” factor’ and ‘Tapered “b” factor’ parameters are changed. The ‘User’ option will allow the user to set their own factors. Tapered “m” factor : This is the “m” factor is the weighting factor equation used to determine the bound fluid in each T2 bin. Wi = 1.0 / (m.T2 + b) Tapered “b” factor : This is the “b” factor is the weighting factor equation used to determine the bound fluid in each T2 bin.

Related Topics NMR Interpretation Zone Depths T2 Cutoffs Permeability Sw Parameters Sw Fluids Sw logic / Limits Pc Curves. 10.8.3.3 Define Permeability Parameters

The Permeabilty tab defines the following parameters for each zone; Perm Const, Perm FF/BF Exp and Perm Phi Exp. The parameters in this section are used with the Timur / Coates permeability equation, described below. An external source of permeability data must be available to do this.

Section 10.8 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation

Interpretation

Senergy

958

Perm Const : The “a” constant. Perm FF/BF Exp : The “b” exponent. Perm Phi Exp : The “c” exponent.

Timur / Coates permeability equation K

a

FF BF

b

Phi c

Related Topics NMR Interpretation Zone Depths T2 Cutoffs Permeability Sw Parameters Sw Fluids Sw logic / Limits Pc Curves. 10.8.3.4 Define Sw Parameters

The parameters in the Sw Parameters Tab and the Sw Fluids section are used to calculate Sw from the Dual Water equations described below.

“a” factor : Archie’s “a” factor. “m” exponent : Archie’s Cementation “m” exponent. “n” exponent : Archie’s Saturation “n” exponent.

Section 10.8 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation

959

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

“m” “n” Method : Select ‘Parameter’ to use the entered “m” and “n” parameters. Select ‘Z Function’ to use Z method of calculating the equations. Z wet : Z wet value used in the Z equation. Z irreducible : Z irreducible value used in the Z equation.

Dual Water Equations Two basic forms of the equation are used, one where the Archie parameters ‘m’ and ‘n’ are defined; the other where ‘m’ and ‘n’ are converted to the ‘Z’ function parameter, which is defined by the equation below.

Ct

z

PhiT SwT

Cw a

1

Swb SwT

Ccw

1

Swb SwT

Ccw

Swb SwT

Where

Z

Z offset

Z Slope SwT

or

Ct

PhiT m SwT n

Cw a

Swb SwT

Related Topics NMR Interpretation Zone Depths T2 Cutoffs Permeability Sw Parameters Sw Fluids Sw logic / Limits Pc Curves. 10.8.3.5 Define Sw Fluids

The parameters in the Sw Fluids Tab and the Sw Parameters Tab are used to calculate Sw from the Dual Water equations below.

Section 10.8 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation

Interpretation

Senergy

960

Rw : Formation water resistivity in ohmm. Rw Temp : Formation water resistivity temperature. Units of the value are set at the base of the tab. If left blank, then the Rw value entered will be assumed to be at formation temperature. If not blank then the Rw will be converted to formation temperature using this value and the entered temperature curve. Rwb Method : if set to ‘Parameter’ then Rwb will be calculated from the entered ‘Rwb’ and ‘Rwb Temp’ parameter. If set to ‘Function’ then Rwb will be calculated from the Coates Dual water Ccw function

Ccw

1 Rwb

0.000126

T 16.7

T 504.4

Where T is in degF Rwb : Bound water resistivity in ohmm. Rwb Temp : Bound water resistivity temperature. Units of the value are set at the base of the tab. If left blank, then the Rwb value entered will be assumed to be at formation temperature. If not blank then the Rwb will be converted to formation temperature using this value and the entered temperature curve.

Dual Water Equations Two basic forms of the equation are used, one where the Archie parameters ‘m’ and ‘n’ are defined; the other where ‘m’ and ‘n’ are converted to the ‘Z’ function parameter, which is defined by the equation below.

Section 10.8 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation

961

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Ct

PhiT SwT

z

Cw a

1

Swb SwT

Ccw

1

Swb SwT

Ccw

Senergy

Swb SwT

Where

Z

Z offset

Z Slope SwT

or

Ct

PhiT m SwT n

Cw a

Swb SwT

Related Topics NMR Interpretation Zone Depths T2 Cutoffs Permeability Sw Parameters Sw Fluids Sw logic / Limits Pc Curves. 10.8.3.6 Define Sw Logic/Limits

The Sw logic / Limits Tab defines Parameters used in both the Dual Water and the Permeability Equations.

Phi Method : This selects the source for the porosity used in the Dual Water and permeability equations. Select ‘NMR’ to use the NMR PhiT value. If analyzing a zone where the NMR porosity is not correct (i.e. gas affected) then select ‘Phie Para’ or ‘PhiT Para’ and

Section 10.8 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation

Interpretation

Senergy

962

enter a porosity curve under the ‘Phi In’ parameter. The selection of ‘Phie Para’ or ‘PhiT Para’ will depend on whether the entered porosity curve is a total or effective porosity. The program will convert an effective porosity to a total porosity using the NMR clay bound porosity. Phi In : This is the input curve used for porosity when the ‘Phi Method’ is set to ‘Phie Para’ or ‘PhiT Para’. CBF Method : This selects the source for the clay bound fluid used in the Dual Water equation to calculate Swb. Normally this would be ‘NMR’ but for older tools which did not measure CBF an alternative method can be selected. Select ‘PhiT in Crv’ to use the PhiT input curve setup on the ‘Input Curves’ tab. In this case CBF will be the difference between the NMR porosity (assumes effective) and the PhiT curve. Select ‘VCL in Crv’ to use the Vcl input curve setup on the ‘Input Curves’ tab. In this case CBF will be Vcl multiplied by the ‘PhiT Clay’ parameter. PhiT will be the NMR effective porosity plus the CBF. PhiT Clay : Total porosity of 100% clay. Used for calculating CBF porosity when the ‘CBF Method’ is set to ‘VCL in Crv’. Swi Limit : This is the minimum value of SwT that can be output. When the calculated SwT is less than the limit, SwT is set to the limit and the logic flag is set to 2. Defaults to 0.0. FF Sw Limit : When the NMR Free fluid is below this limit then it is assumed that there are no movable fluids and therefore any water saturation calculations are meaningless. When the FF is less than this limit, SwT is set to 1.0 and the logic flag is set to 3. Defaults to 0.005. Phi Sw Limit : When the NMR effective porosity is below this limit it is assumed water saturation calculations are meaningless. When the nmrPhie is less than this limit, SwT is set to 1.0 and the logic flag is set to 4. Defaults to 0.0. CBW Sw Limit : When the NMR clay bound fluid is above this limit it is assumed the rock is too shaly for meaningful water saturation calculations. When the nmrCBF is above this limit SwT is set to 1.0 and the logic flag is set to 5. Defaults to 1.0.

Related Topics NMR Interpretation Zone Depths

Section 10.8 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation

963

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

T2 Cutoffs Permeability Sw Parameters Sw Fluids Sw logic / Limits Pc Curves. 10.8.3.7 Define Pc Curves

These parameters are used when the ‘Make Pc Curves from T2’ option is checked on the ‘ Output Curves’ tab.

The T2 distribution is converted to PC pressures using the calibration parameters.

Pc i

A log Pc gain Log

1 T2i

Pc offset

Where Pci and T2i is the Pc and T2 value at the ith value in the T2 array. The results are in psi units. If the output units for the Pc curve is not psi then the results are converted to the selected output units The calculation of the Sw height curve is done by first calculating the capillary pressure at a depth and then using this to look up the saturation in the Pc curve which have been created from the T2 distribution.

Pc

FWL TVDss

Density

Water

Density

Hydrocarbon

Nmr to PC Offset : This is the Pc offset calibration parameter in the above equation. Nmr to PC Gain : This is the Pc gain calibration parameter in the above equation.

Section 10.8 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation

Interpretation

Senergy

964

FWL TVDss : Free water level used to calculate the height above contact used in the Sw height Pc calculation. Water Density : Density of the water used in the Pc height calculations. The units for this are set at the base of the input tab. Hyd Density : Density of the hydrocarbon used in the Pc height calculations. The units for this are set at the base of the input tab. If a curve is entered here to try and account for a variable hydrocarbon density its values at a depth must be the average hydrocarbon density of the hydrocarbons below this depth (i.e. the program does not integrate the hydrocarbon curve).

Related Topics NMR Interpretation Zone Depths T2 Cutoffs Permeability Sw Parameters Sw Fluids Sw logic / Limits Pc Curves. 10.8.3.8 Print the NMR Interpretation Parameters

The Print button in the NMR Interpretation Dialog will allow the parameters used in the interpretation to be output to a printer or a disk file. An example printout is displayed below. NMR PARAMETERS

NMR PARAMETERS Well : Date :

Test CMR 3.5 09/22/2008 17:57:16

Input T2 array : T2_norm (3 NMR Phi Cal. Curve : CMRP

Tool Type

: Schlumberger CMR-Plus

T2 Start time

: 0.3

T2 Stop time

: 3000.

Times are mid pnts : No

Rt

: ILD

Temperature

: Temp

Total Porosity

: Fnl:PHIT

Clay Volume

: Fnl:VWCL

Output Curves NMR effective porosity

: nmrPhie

NMR total porosity

Section 10.8 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation

: nmrPhiT

965

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

NMR capillary bound fluid

: nmrBFE

NMR Total bound fluid

: nmrBFT

NMR free fluid

: nmrFF

NMR clay bound water

: nmrCBW

NMR Swe irreducible

: nmrSwiE

NMR SwT irreducible

: nmrSwiT

NMR Sw bound

: nmrSwb

NMR permeability

: nmrPerm

Bound Fluid total cutoff

: nmrBFTc

Bound Fluid eff. cutoff

: nmrBFEc

Bound Fluid total Tapered

: nmrBFTt

Bound Fluid eff. Tapered

: nmrBFEt

NMR SwT

: nmrSwT

NMR SwT unlimited

: nmrSwtU

NMR SwE

: nmrSw

NMR SwE unlimited

: nmrSwU

Final effective porosity

: Phie_f

Final total porosity

: PhiT_f

Final clay bound water

: CBW_f

NMR BVW

: BVW_f

NMR BVWT

: BVWT_f

NMR Rw apparent

: nmrRwapp

NMR z wet

: nmrZwet

NMR z Swi

: nmrZswi

NMR z

: nmrZ

Sw Logic flag

: nmrLogic

T2 free cutoff

: T2cutoff

T2 bound cutoff

: CBFT2cut

NMR Pc pressure

: nmrPc

NMR Pc Sw

: nmrPcSw

NMR Sw Height

: nmrSw_Ht

NMR phi Bin 1

: nmrPhiB1

NMR phi Bin 2

: nmrPhiB2

NMR phi Bin 3

: nmrPhiB3

NMR phi Bin 4

: nmrPhiB4

NMR phi Bin 5

: nmrPhiB5

NMR phi Bin 6

: nmrPhiB6

NMR phi Bin 7

: nmrPhiB7

Zone number 1 Free Fluid Cut : 25. 13081.98047 Perm FF/BF Exp : 2.3012

Top : 4735.50 Cly B Fluid Cut : 2. Perm Phi Exp

: 4.

BF Method

: T2 cutoff

Tapered Constan : Sand

"a" factor

: 1.

"m" "n" Method

: Z Function

Z Slope

: 0.87746

Z offset

: 1.30172

Rw

: 0.256

Rw Temp

: 60.

Rwb Method

: Function

Phi Method

: NMR

Swi Limit

: 0.

FF Sw Limit

: 0.005

Phi Sw Limit

: 0.

CBW Sw Limit

: 1.

CBF Method

: NMR

nmr to PC Offse : 3.

nmr to PC Gain

: 1.

FWL TVDss

: 4850.

Water Density

Hyd Density

: 0.7

Zone number 2 Free Fluid Cut : 25. 13081.98047

Top : 4914.50 Cly B Fluid Cut : 2.

Bottom : 4914.50 Perm Const

Bottom : 5124.50 Perm Const

Section 10.8 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation

:

: 1.

:

Interpretation

Senergy Perm FF/BF Exp

: 2.3012

966

Perm Phi Exp

: 4.

BF Method

: T2 cutoff

Tapered Constan : Sand

"a" factor

: 1.

"m" "n" Method

: Z Function

Z Slope

: 0.877

Z offset

: 1.3

Rw

: 0.2

Rw Temp

: 60.

Rwb Method

: Function

Phi Method

: NMR

Swi Limit

: 0.

FF Sw Limit

: 0.005

Phi Sw Limit

: 0.

CBW Sw Limit

: 1.

CBF Method

: NMR

nmr to PC Offse : 3.

nmr to PC Gain

: 1.

FWL TVDss

: 4850.

Water Density

Related Topics Define Input Curves Define Output Curves Define NMR Interpretation Parameters Define Permeability Plot the NMR Parameters Print the NMR Interpretation Parameters NMR Equations and Methodology

Section 10.8 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation

: 1.

967

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

10.8.4 Define Permeability The Permeability tab allows the calibration of the Timur / Coates equation constants. Some external source of permeability data must be available to do this.

The user must enter the input curves for Porosity, Bound fluid, Free fluid and Permeability. The first three of these input curves would normally be the output from the NMR porosity calculations. The zone to work on is selected from the Zone to use drop-down box. When a zone is chosen, the current values for the a, b and c coefficient constants for that zone will be displayed in the a, b and c coefficient boxes. The user can calibrate the equation to the input permeability data by clicking the Calculate Coefficients button. The a, b and c coefficients will be computed and displayed. The Fix check

Section 10.8 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation

Interpretation

Senergy

968

boxes allow the user to fix a coefficient to a value and then calculate the other coefficients. It is possible to fix two coefficients and calculate the third. The Defaults button will return all coefficients to the default values. The Update Parameters button will copy the current parameters to the currently-selected zone and then re-run the NMR permeability. If, the Zone to use is changed to All before the Update Parameters button is clicked then, when the Update Parameters button is clicked, the constants will be copied to all zones. The Make Crossplot button will create a crossplot of the NMR permeability versus the input permeability. This will allow the user to see how well the calibrated permeability fits the known input permeability. An example of the crossplot follows.

Related Topics Define Input Curves Define Output Curves Define NMR Interpretation Parameters Define Permeability

Section 10.8 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation

969

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Define PC Calibration Define PC Crossplot Display the QC Comparison Plot Display the NMR Interactive Plot NMR Equations and Methodology NMR Equations and Methodology

10.8.5 Define PC Calibration The Pc Calibration tab allows the calibration of the T2 Pc equation. T2 is converted into Pc using the following equation :

Pc i

A log Pc gain Log

1 T2i

Pc offset

Where Pci and T2i is the Pc and T2 value at the ith value in the T2 array. The Pcgain and Pcoffset parameters are the calibration parameters.

Section 10.8 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation

Interpretation

Senergy

970

The calibration is done by matching a T2 distribution to a real Pc curve that has been loaded into IP. The Pc curve is converted to a pore radius distribution and overlaid with the raw T2 curve and the calibrated T2 curve. The conversion of the Pc curve to a pore radius distribution makes assumptions about the contact angle and interfacial tension and is only approximate but is adequate for the calibration since its absolute value is not necessary, as long as we know how to go back and forward from capillary pressure to Pore radius. The equation used is :

PoreRadius

100 Pc

Where Pc pressure is in units of Psi.

Section 10.8 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation

971

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The Pc curve Sets are selected in the top panel. The Pc Use Curve, which is optional, is the same flag curve used in the Capillary pressure module to flag bad points inside a Pc curve. Once the Pc curve Set is selected the depths of the individual curves found will be shown in the Pc Curve Depth box. The user selects the depth of the curve wanted. The curve will be displayed in the calibration graph. The T2 distribution, also displayed in the calibration graph, can be selected by changing the depth value in the T2 Depth box. It is possible to use a different depth for the T2 distribution and the Pc curve. The graphic Y axis will by default be a normalized pore volume. The T2 and Pc curves being normalized separately. The normalization adjusts the Y axis values so that when all are summed they add up to 1.0. If the ‘Y axis Sw values’ box is ticked the Y axis is converted to water saturation. The X axis stays the same.

Section 10.8 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation

Interpretation

Senergy

972

The calibration can be done either as a one point shift where the Offset parameter is changed and the gain is fixed at 1.0 or a two point calibration where the gain and offset are adjusted. For the calibration to be meaningful the T2 distribution should be from a water zone. Oil or gas zones will affect the T2 signal in the long wait times making their values meaningless as far as a comparison to a Pc curve. If calibrating in an oil or gas zone the late part of the T2 distribution should be ignored and the calibration done only near the irreducible water part of the Pc and T2 curves. The calibration is performed by clicking on the ‘Calibrate’ button. This will display on the graph two or four vertical lines. Two lines for the one point and four for the two point calibration. The lines are labeled and mark the start and end point of the shift required for the calibration. The

Section 10.8 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation

973

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

user can interactively adjust the point positions by placing the cursor on a line and dragging the line to a new position.

One Point Calibration The one point calibration can either calibrate the pore entry pressure point, i.e. the late T2 times corresponding to the largest pores (this will only be valid in a 100% wet T2 distribution). Or calibrate in the irreducible water saturation point, i.e. the early T2 times corresponding to the bound water. The following example is calibrated in the late T2 times to match the Pc pore entry pressure.

To calibrate at the irreducible end, the Y axis as Sw display may be more useful. Here we are trying to match the plateau seen in T2 distribution to the irreducible Sw seen in the Pc curve.

Section 10.8 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation

Interpretation

Senergy

974

Two Point Calibration The two point calibration allows both end points to be calibrated at the same time. Remember the T2 distribution is only valid in a water zone for the large pores.

Section 10.8 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation

975

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Using the calibrations To use the calibration to make the Pc curve from the T2 distribution the calibration parameters need to be copied into the NMR zonal parameter table. This is done by clicking the ‘Update Parameters’ button. The parameters will be copied into the zone displayed in the Zone box. If ‘ All’ is chosen then the same calibration parameters will be copied into all zones. It will probably be necessary to have different sets of calibration parameters for different rock types. This can either be done by zoning the well into different intervals or using trend curves as the calibration parameters. The trend curves values could be created in a user formula using a log facies curve to select the calibration parameters, which could be created in this module from different Pc curves selected by facies.

Related Topics Define Input Curves Define Output Curves Define NMR Interpretation Parameters Define Permeability Define PC Calibration Define PC Crossplot Display the QC Comparison Plot Display the NMR Interactive Plot NMR Equations and Methodology

Section 10.8 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation

Interpretation

Senergy

976

10.8.6 Define the PC Crossplot The Pc Crossplot tab allows the viewing of the T2 Pc curves inside the crossplot module. Since a Pc curve will be created at each depth step the options allow for a subset of the available curves to be displayed.

By default the NMR Pc curves are selected for display but the module could be used to display any PC curves.

Section 10.8 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation

977

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Related Topics Define Input Curves Define Output Curves Define NMR Interpretation Parameters Define Permeability Define PC Calibration Define PC Crossplot Display the QC Comparison Plot Display the NMR Interactive Plot NMR Equations and Methodology

10.8.7 Display the QC Comparison Plot By clicking the Make Plot button in the NMR Interpretation Dialog the user can select two interactive log plots. A QC comparison Plot for viewing the NMR data or an Interpretation Plot for displaying calculated results for permeability and water saturations.

Section 10.8 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation

Interpretation

Senergy

978

QC comparison Plot An example NMR QC comparison plot is shown below:

On the above plot, Track 2 contains the zoning scheme for the cut-off and permeability parameters. By right mouse clicking in the track, new zones can be created. This functionality is identical to the interactive zone functionality seen in other interpretation modules. Track Swi contains an overlay plot of Sw from the petrophysical analysis and SwiT (irreducible) calculated from the NMR (see NMR equations). Track Phi Bins contains the porosity bin results (if set up). Track Comparison is a quality control track which compares the input logging companys NMR porosities against the IP-calculated porosities. This can be used to check that the

Section 10.8 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation

979

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

correct start and stop T2 time have been set and that the results generated for free fluid match the logging companys free fluid with the same T2 cut-off. Track NMR Phi gives the breakdown of the clay-bound (if used), capillary-bound and free fluid volumes as seen by the NMR. Track Movable Fluids will give a display of the volumes of bound water, movable water and hydrocarbon seen in the rock, if a BVW (bulk volume water) input curve is entered. Track T2 displays the NMR T2 waveform with the interactive T2 cut-offs for free fluid and clay bound fluid (if set up). To change a cut-off value click on the cut-off line and drag it to a new value. While dragging, the value will be displayed in the bottom left corner of the log plot. Once the mouse button is released the porosities and permeabilities will be instantly recalculated and the plot re-displayed.

Related Topics Define Input Curves Define Output Curves Define NMR Interpretation Parameters Define Permeability Define PC Calibration Define PC Crossplot Display the QC Comparison Plot Display the NMR Interactive Plot NMR Equations and Methodology

10.8.8 Display the NMR Interactive Plot By clicking the Make Plot button in the NMR Interpretation Dialog the user can select two interactive log plots. A QC comparison Plot for viewing the NMR data or an Interpretation Plot for displaying calculated results for permeability and water saturations.

Section 10.8 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation

Interpretation

Senergy

980

Interpretation Plot An example NMR Interpretation plot is displayed below.

Track Swi contains the nmrSwiT (irreducible) calculated from the NMR; the water saturation calculated from NMR porosities and input resistivities nmrSwT; the saturation height curve calculated from T2 Pc curves using the entered FWL. Track Phi Bins contains the porosity bin results (if set up). Track NMR Phi gives the breakdown of the clay-bound (if used), capillary-bound and free fluid volumes as seen by the NMR. Track Resistivity contains the input resistivity Rt curve. From the NMR Interactive Plot, Right Click the the track an interactive Pickett plot can be displayed either Rt / Phie or Rt / PhiT. See the PhiSw module for more information on the working of these Pickett plots.

Section 10.8 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation

981

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Track Salinity displays the Rw apparent curve nmrRwapp which is calculated from PhiT and Rt assuming the interval is wet. The track contains a Rw and Rwb interactive line. These can be moved by clicking and dragging to a new value. Track Z param displays the Dual Water ‘Z’ parameters. nmrZswi is the Z factor assuming the zone is at irreducible water saturation. nmrZwet is the Z factor assuming the zone is 100% wet. The nmrZ curve is the calculated ‘Z’ parameter. The nmrZ curve will normally fall between the two other curves except when the interval calculates over 100% Sw in this case the curve will be greater than the nmrZwet curve. The track contains Z wet and Z irreducible interactive lines. These can be moved by clicking and dragging to new values. Z wet should be adjust to overlay nmrZswi in a clean wet zone and Z irreducible should be adjusted to indicate minimal free water in a zone assumed to be at irreducible conditions. For further details on the Z function please refer to the NMR Equations. Track Logic the nmrLogic curve displays the special logic results from the Sw calculations. A value of 0.0 means the calculations were made with no limit logic being applied. See NMR Equations for the values. Track Sw’. The track displays the nmrSwtU curve which is the SwT unlimited (not clipped between 0.0 and 1.0) from the Dual Water saturation equation. The nmrSwU curve is the

Section 10.8 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation

Interpretation

Senergy

982

equivalent Sw effective curve calculated from the SwT and Swb results, again unclipped. The nmrSwb curve is calculated from the NMR clay bound water. The unclipped Sw curves are displayed rather than the nmrSwT and nmrSw curves so that the user can see any overshoots from 100% values. Track ‘Porosity’ will give a display of the volumes of bound water, movable water and hydrocarbon seen in the rock. Track ‘Perm’ shows the NMR permeability and Core Permeability (if setup). Track ‘T2’ displays the NMR T2 waveform with the interactive T2 cut-offs for free fluid and clay bound fluid (if set up). To change a cut-off value click on the cut-off line and drag it to a new value. While dragging, the value will be displayed in the bottom left-hand corner of the log plot. Once the mouse button is released the porosities and permeabilities and saturation will be instantly recalculated and the plot re-displayed.

Related Topics Define Input Curves Define Output Curves Define NMR Interpretation Parameters Define Permeability Define PC Calibration Define PC Crossplot Display the QC Comparison Plot Display the NMR Interactive Plot NMR Equations and Methodology

10.8.9 NMR Equations and Methodology There are seven sections within this chapter on NMR Equations and Methodology. Basic NMR Equations NMR Tapered Cutoff Dual Water Saturation Calculations Limits SwLogic Flag Other Calculations NMR T2 to Pc curve

Section 10.8 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation

983

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Related Topics Define Input Curves Define Output Curves Define NMR Interpretation Parameters Define Permeability Define PC Calibration Define PC Crossplot Display the QC Comparison Plot Display the NMR Interactive Plot NMR Equations and Methodology

10.8.9.1 Basic NMR Equations

NMR total porosity (nmrPHIT) PhiT = Sum of the porosity in all the T2 bins.

NMR effective porosity (nmrPHIE) Phie = Sum of all the bins above the T2 clay bound cut-off. If no clay bound cut-off is set then this will be the sum of all the bins.

Clay bound fluid (nmrCBF) CBF = PhiT – Phie

Free Fluid (nmrFF) FF = Sum of all bins above the capillary bound fluid cut-off. Or if the tapered method is select a weighting factor is applied to each bin (see below).

Bound Fluid (nmrBFT)

Section 10.8 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation

Interpretation

Senergy

984

BF = PhiT - FF

Bound Fluid effective (nmrBFE) BFE = Phie - FF

Irreducible total water saturation (nmrSwiT) Swi = 1.0 – FF / PhiT = BFT / PhiT

Irreducible effective water saturation (nmrSwiE) Swi = 1.0 – FF / Phie = BFE / Phie

NMR permeability (nmrPerm) K

a

FF BF

b

Phi c

Where a, b and c are the entered Timur / Coates permeability constants. If the Remove the Clay Bound fluid from the Coates Permeability calculation has been checked (see Output Curves tab) then Phi will be substituted for PhiT in the equation. The Phi or PhiT used in this equation normally come from the NMR, however, in gas zones the NMR porosity will be too low. In these circumstances it is possible to change the ‘Phi Method’ to use an external porosity curve for the Sw and permeability calculations. The input curve is entered as the zonal parameter (‘Phi In’, ‘Sw Logic / Limit’ tab).

Related Topics NMR Equations and Methodology Basic NMR Equations NMR Tapered Cutoff Dual Water Saturation Calculations Limits SwLogic Flag Other Calculations NMR T2 to Pc curve

Section 10.8 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation

985

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

10.8.9.2 NMR Tapered Cutoff

In some situations the standard cut-off method can underestimate the total bound water volume and a tapered function can yield a more reliable result. For example when the T2 distribution has a very narrow spectrum that can be easily fitted with a single large exponential decay rate, i.e. a long T2 as would be the case in well sorted, coarse grained, high porosity sandstone. In this situation a cut-off will often yield unreasonably low bound water volumes, and sometimes even zero, which causes the computed permeability to be erroneously high. A tapered function, sometimes referred to as spectral function, addresses this by assuming that each pore size will contain some bound water and assigning weighting factors to each pore size. Small pores will have a large weighting factor as most of the water in a small pore will be bound, and large pores will have a small weighting factor as most of the water in a large pore will be mobile. The equation for the tapered bound fluid is as follows: n

nmrBFTt

Wi

PHI i

i 1

Where n = the number of bins in the input T2 distribution. PHIi = the porosity associated with each bin in the input T2 distribution. and Wi is the weighting factor associated with each bin given by:

1 Wi

m T2i

b

Where m = the input tapered function coefficient. b = the input tapered function offset. T2i = the T2 time associated with the ith bin in the input T2 distribution. Based on a global core study of some 340 sandstone samples and 71 carbonate samples default coefficients have been derived as follows: Sandstones

m= 0.0618

b=1

Carbonates

m = 0.0113

b =1

(Coates et al, "A new characterization of bulk-volume irreducible using magnetic resonance", paper QQ 38th Annual SPWLA Symposium 1977). The module allows the user to select one of the two default constants or input their own. Bound fluid effective for the tapered method is calculated as: nmrBFEt = nmrBFTt – nmrCBF

Section 10.8 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation

Interpretation

Senergy

986

There are also situations when the total bound water volume derived from a tapered function can be too low. For example, in a hydrocarbon bearing interval at irreducible water saturation, the water signal may have a weighting factor of less than one associated to it by the tapered function even though all of it is bound water. Hence, total bound water volume may more accurately be taken as the maximum of the tapered and cut-off methods. The module outputs both cutoff and tapered method bound fluids and the final answer used can be set to one or the other or the maximum of the two.

Related Topics NMR Equations and Methodology Basic NMR Equations NMR Tapered Cutoff Dual Water Saturation Calculations Limits SwLogic Flag Other Calculations NMR T2 to Pc curve 10.8.9.3 Dual Water Saturation Calculations

The standard dual water equation is displayed below. The big advantage of using this equation with the NMR is that one of the major uncertainties Swb is measured directly by the NMR (Swb = CBF / PHIT). Also PhiT is directly measured and does not need to be calculated from other porosity tools.

Ct

1 Rt

PhiT m SwT n

PhiT m SwT n

Cw a

1

Swb SwT

1 a Rw

1

Ccw

Swb SwT

Swb SwT 1 Rwb

or

Swb SwT

Where Rw : Entered parameter. The program will convert to formation temperature. Rwb : Either an entered parameter converted to formation temperature or calculated from the following equation.

Ccw

1 Rwb

0.000126

T 16.7

T 504.4

Section 10.8 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation

987

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

where T is in units of degF. Swb : Calculated from NMR (Swb = CBW / PHIT) or if NMR CBW is not available (older tools did not measure this) can be calculated from input PhiT curve or input VCL curve. PhiT and VCL being calculated from traditional logs in other modules. PhiT curve : PhiT = Input PhiT Curve CBW = PhiT – nmrPhie VCL curve : CBW = VCL(input curve) x PhiTClay PhiT = CBW + nmrPhie PhiTClay = total porosity in 100% clay, entered parameter PhiT : Normally nmrPhiT, but can be changed in gas zones to an external curve. Set the ‘Phi Method’ parameter to ‘Phie Para’ or ‘PhiT Para’ and enter the input porosity curve under the ‘Phi In’ parameter. Rt : Entered input curve. a : Archie ‘a’ parameter. m, n : Archie ‘m’ and ‘n’ parameters. These are not used if the ‘”m” “n” Method’ parameter is set to Z Function. Sw effective is calculated from SwT using the following equation :

Swe

SwT Swb 1 Swb

Z Function The dual water equation can be rewritten as :

Ct

PhiT SwT

Z

Cw a

1

Swb SwT

Ccw

Swb SwT

Where

Z

log PhiT m SwT n log PhiT SwT

m log phiT n log SwT log PhiT SwT

If Z is plotted against Sw for a particular PhiT, m and n then a plot like this shown below is produced:

Section 10.8 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation

Interpretation

Senergy

988

The actual curve is plotted in blue however it can easily be seen that apart from very low Sw’s the curve can be approximated very well by the linear curve in red. Z will always be the same as the cementation factor m when SwT = 1, at the left side of the plot. The module allows the user to use this linear line as an alternative method of selecting ‘m’ and ‘n’ and solving the equation. If the parameter ‘”m” “n” Method is set to ‘Z function’ then Z will be calculated by the equation:

Z

Z offset

Z Slope SwT

Where Z offset is the parameter Z irreducible and Z slope is the difference between the parameter Z irreducible and Z wet. The Z irreducible and Z wet parameters can be picked from Interactive Plot (see NMR Interactive Plotsection). In order to help pick the Z irreducible and Z wet parameters theoretical Z curves are output for the wet and irreducible conditions.

log Z

Ct Cw 1 Swb / SwT Ccw Swb / SwT log PhiT SwT

At SwT = 1, then this becomes

log nmrZwet

Ct Cw Swb Ccw Cw log PhiT

Section 10.8 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation

989

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

At irreducible, this becomes:

log nmrZwi

Cw

Ct Swb / nmrSwiT Ccw Cw log PhiT

nmrZwet and nmrZswi can be considered as end-points in the Sw computation; they will overlay each other where there is no free fluid, claystones and siltstones, and will separate with increasing free fluid with nmrZwet kicking to the right (higher Z) and nmrZswi kicking to the left (lower Z). The position of the computed Z between these two end-points is related to Sw, with increasing resistivity, i.e. decreasing conductivity Ct, giving a lower Z and hence lower Sw. The default values of 2.0 for Z wet and 1.6 for Z irreducible are reasonable values for most clastics and frequently give reliable results. Users should exercise caution when adjusting these parameters from the defaults. The Z wet parameter should be selected so that it overlays nmrZwet in a clean wet sand. This is effectively the cementation exponent ‘m’ and picking it is analogous to picking a wet trend on a Pickett Plot. If you pick through the middle of the trend you will show some ‘lobes’ of hydrocarbons and if you pick the extreme right hand edge of the trend (higher Z) you will show no hydrocarbons at all, i.e. SwU will be greater than 100%. The Z irreducible parameter should be selected so as to show minimal free water in a zone the user believes to be at irreducible saturation. In a zone with very little bound fluid Z irreducible should be just a little lower than nmrZswi, i.e. to the left, and further to the left of Z irreducible as the bound fluid volume increases. Z irreducible should not be picked to overlay nmrZswi as Z irreducible corresponds to the offset in the straight line relationship where SwT = 0 in the graph above, and Swi will not be zero. Alternatively, a cross-plot of nmrSwT against nmrZswi for the zone believed to be at irreducible can help in identifying the correct selection of Z irreducible. If a straight line is projected from the Z wet point at nmrSwT =1 on the right hand edge of the plot, down through the data believed to be at irreducible, to the left hand edge where nmrSwT =0, the value of Z at this point is Z irreducible. The example below shows a plot from a 40ft sand where Z wet was to taken as 2, determined from a nearby wet sand, and Z irreducible was determined as 1.7 from the crossplot.

Section 10.8 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation

Interpretation

Senergy

990

The difference between Z wet and Z irreducible is the slope of the Z function and is effectively a ‘gain’ control on the computed Sw, i.e. how much reduction in Sw there should be for a given increase in resistivity. Hence, caution needs to be used in selecting Z irreducible to avoid being overly optimistic. Z irreducible is typically between 0.2 and 0.5. If the Z function is not used for SW calculation the Z value is still calculated and output using the fixed values of “m” and “n”. The Z factor is limited to a minimum value of the nmrZswi. This limits the SwT calculation to the nmrSwiT. This limit is applied regardless whether the Z function is used or not.

Related Topics NMR Equations and Methodology Basic NMR Equations NMR Tapered Cutoff Dual Water Saturation Calculations Limits SwLogic Flag Other Calculations NMR T2 to Pc curve

Section 10.8 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation

991

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

10.8.9.4 Limits

Several limits can be applied to restrain the final results to reasonable values. Swi Limit : This limits the SwT calculated to a minimum of this value. Useful if unrealistically low values of Sw are being calculated. Default value 0.0. FF Sw Limit : This limit stops the calculation of SwT when the NMR is indicating so little free fluid to make any calculation meaningful (FF < limit makes SwT = 1.0). Default value 0.005. Phi Sw Limit : This limit stops the calculation of SwT when the effective porosity is too low to make any calculation meaningful (Phie < limit makes SwT = 1.0). Default value 0.0. CBW Sw Limit : This limit stops the calculation of SwT when the clay bound water is too high to make any calculation meaningful (CBF > limit makes SwT = 1.0). Default value 1.0. When any of the limits are invoked the Sw logic output curve will indicate which ones were used.

Related Topics NMR Equations and Methodology Basic NMR Equations NMR Tapered Cutoff Dual Water Saturation Calculations Limits SwLogic Flag Other Calculations NMR T2 to Pc curve 10.8.9.5 SwLogicFlag

The output curve SWLOGICFLAG is a logic flag curve. It can have one of the following values: SWLOGI

LOGIC

CFLAG VALUE 1

The Z equation loop did not converge after 20 iterations

2

SwT curve has been clipped to the Sw irreducible (Swi) parameter limit. The SwU and the SwTU curves have not changed.

3

SwT curve has been set to 1.0 due to the Free Fluid Volume being below the limit.

Section 10.8 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation

Interpretation

Senergy

4

992

SwT curve has been set to 1.0 due to the Effective Porosity being below the limit.

5

SwT curve has been set to 1.0 due to the Clay Bound Volume being above the limit.

8

SwT equation loop did not converge after 10 iterations.

For a normal execution of the program at any depth level, the SWLOGICFLAG should be zero.

Related Topics NMR Equations and Methodology Basic NMR Equations NMR Tapered Cutoff Dual Water Saturation Calculations Limits SwLogic Flag Other Calculations NMR T2 to Pc curve 10.8.9.6 Other Calculations

Rw apparent is calculated and displayed on the interactive log plot. It is calculated as follows :

Rt PhiT m a

Rwapp

Where m = entered ‘m’ parameter or if the Z function is being used m = Zoffset + Zslope Rwapp is converted to the temperature of the entered ‘Rw Temp’ parameter or if this is not entered left at formation temperature.

Related Topics NMR Equations and Methodology Basic NMR Equations NMR Tapered Cutoff Dual Water Saturation Calculations Limits SwLogic Flag Other Calculations

Section 10.8 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation

993

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

NMR T2 to Pc curve 10.8.9.7 NMR T2 to Pc Curve

The theory about converting T2 distributions to Pc curves an be found in the SPE paper 81057 ‘ Deriving Capillary Pressure and Water Saturation from NMR Transversal Relaxation Times’ by J. C. Glorioso. The module outputs two array curves which contain the capillary pressure results. nmrPC contains the pressures in units set by the user on the Output Curves’ tab. nmrPcSw contains the water saturations associated with each Pc pressure. The array curves will have the same dimensions as the T2 array curve. In IP we convert the T2 to Pc using the following equation. The PCgain and PCoffset parameters need to be found by calibrating results to an actual PC curve (see section on T2 to Pc calibration).

Pc i

A log Pc gain Log

1 T2i

Pc offset

The Pc Sw curve is calculated from T2 array values. The module assumes that the highest T2 time will be the 100% Sw value. From this value each T2 bin porosity is converted into a saturation (BinPhi / PhiT) and subtracted from the previous value. The lowest T2 time will have 0% Sw. The output Pc curves can be displayed in the crossplot module. The ‘PC Crossplot’ tab allows these to be easily setup. Saturation Height Curve The Pc curves can be used to calculate a saturation height curve. This is done by first calculating a capillary pressure at a depth and then using this to look up the Sw value in the T2 PC curve.

Pc

FWL TVDss

Density

Water

Density

Hydrocarbon

Where FWL : Entered parameter TVDss : Entered curve Density Water : Entered parameter Density Hydrocarbon : Entered parameter The Sw height curve is displayed in the Interpretation Plot. The values obtained by this method will only be as good as the calibration of the T2 to Pc curve. This calibration will change with rock type. Hence it is highly recommended to use these results with caution.

Section 10.8 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation

Interpretation

Senergy

Related Topics NMR Equations and Methodology Basic NMR Equations NMR Tapered Cutoff Dual Water Saturation Calculations Limits SwLogic Flag Other Calculations NMR T2 to Pc curve

Section 10.8 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation

994

995

10.9

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Cased Hole

The Cased Hole log interpretation tools are included here. The following tools are included under the Cased Hole menu item: TDT Stand-Alone Sw analysis: The TDT Stand Alone module is used to calculate water saturation from thermal decay tools (TDT) or any pulsed neutron tool that measures the formation capture cross section (Sigma). A Porosity curve is needed as input. A Clay Volume curve input is optional. These curves are best taken from an open hole log analysis. TDT Time Lapse: The TDT Time Lapse module is used to calculate water saturation from differences between two thermal decay tool (TDT) logs or any pulsed neutron tool logs that measures the formation capture cross section (Sigma). An accurate Porosity and original Water Saturation (Sw Base) curve is needed as input, which is best taken from an open hole log analysis. To access the Cased Hole Interpretation Tools: From the Interpretation Menu, Select Cased Hole, and the required Interpretation Tool.

Related Topics Basic Log Analysis Parameter Set Management Clay Volume Analysis Porosity and Water Saturation Cut-off and Summations

Section 10.9 Interpretation : Cased Hole

Interpretation

Senergy

996

Cut-off Sensitivity Computations NMR Normalization NMR Interpretation

10.9.1 TDT Stand Alone The TDT Stand Alone module is used to calculate water saturation from thermal decay tools (TDT) or any pulsed neutron tool that measures the formation capture cross section (Sigma). A Porosity curve is needed as input. A Clay Volume curve input is optional. These curves are best taken from an open hole log analysis.

The results are very sensitive to clay volume due to the high value of sigma clay. It is therefore important that a correct clay volume is entered into the module. The sigma curve can, in fact, be used as a clay indicator in the Clay Volume module (enter Sigma as the user-defined linear clay indicator). If no Clay Volume curve is entered then clay volume is assumed to be zero. The Matrix Density Curve, if entered, is used to set the value of sigma matrix. The Sw Open Hole and BVW Open Hole curves are optional choices and are only used as part of the display in the Interactive Plot. The Load / Save Parameter Sets button allows the user to manage the Parameter Sets (See Parameter Set Management). The working Parameter Set for this module is named : TDT_Stand_Alone and type TDT_Stand_Alone. This can be seen in the Edit Zones / Top

Section 10.9 Interpretation : Cased Hole

997

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

sets module.

Related Topics Create a New Interpretation Zone Define Sigma Parameters TDT Stand Alone Plots Output Curves, Equations and Methodology

10.9.1.1 Define TDT Stand Alone Parameters

The Parameters tab allows the user to change any of the input parameters. Column edits are possible by clicking in a column header, the header will turn green and then any changes to any parameter in the column will result in all the parameters in the column having the same value. However, if a zone is locked then the zone wont update with the new value.

The TDT Stand Alone Parameter Tabs are described below: The 'Zones' Tab allows the user to create and edit the interpretation zones. This can also be done on the interactive plot. It is also possible to lock zones using the 'Lock Zone' column. If this is 'checked' then the zone is shaded in all tabs and the parameters for that zone cannot be changed. This also applies to interactive parameter lines on the interactive plots.

Section 10.9 Interpretation : Cased Hole

Interpretation

Senergy

998

The Sigma Parameters Tab contains the main fluid and formation sigma parameters and is where the user selects the source for Sigma Matrix . The SigMat from Matrix Density Tab will only be ‘active’, i.e. not grayed out, when the parameter ‘Sigma Ma Source’ has been set to ‘Matrix Den’. The SigMat from Mineral Volumes Tab will only be ‘active’, i.e. not grayed out, when the parameter ‘Sigma Ma Source’ has been set to ‘Mineral Vols’. Up to six mineral volume curves can be input and this tab is where the sigma for each mineral is input. A drop down list is available with a list of default mineral sigma values The Limits Tab permits the user to set up and apply Limits which force the output Sw, SwTDT, to 1.0 allowing the user to clean up an interpretation by limiting Sw in poor quality, non-reservoir rock.

Related Topics Define TDT Stand Alone Parameters Create a New Interpretation Zone Define Sigma Parameters Define SigMat from Matrix Density Define SigMat from Mineral Volumes Specify Parameter Limits

Section 10.9 Interpretation : Cased Hole

999

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

10.9.1.1.2 Define Sigma Parameters

The Sigma Parameters contains the main fluid and formation sigma parameters and is where the user selects the source for Sigma Matrix .

Sigma Water : If formation water salinity is known, the sigma water value can be looked up in most log chart books(Schlumberger Tcor-2) or use the Conversions 2 tab within the Basic Log Analysis Functions module. The value can also be picked interactively from the SigWatApp curve or the Porosity/Sigma Xplot launched from the Interactive Log Plot. Sigma Hyd

: The sigma hydrocarbon value can be looked up in most log chart books

(Schlumberger Tcor-1) or use the Conversions 2 tab within the Basic Log Analysis Functions module. The value can also be interactively picked from the Porosity/Sigma Xplot launched from the Interactive Log Plot. Sigma Clay : Sigma clay can be interactively picked from the sigma curve in the shales or from the Clay Volume / Sigma Xplot launched from the Interactive Log Plot. It should be adjusted so that the SwTDTU curve reads 1.0 in the wet shaley zones. Sigma Ma Source : Selects whether Sigma Matrix is taken from the ‘Sigma Matrix’ parameter, computed from the optional input Matrix Density curve, or computed from the optional input Mineral Volume curves. The following options are available: 1. Parameter – This uses the current Sigma Matrix Parameter, i.e. a fixed constant, which is the interactive Sigma Matrix point on the Phi - Sigma Xplot.

Section 10.9 Interpretation : Cased Hole

Interpretation

Senergy

1000

2. Matrix Density – This computes Sigma Matrix from the entered Matrix Density, curve or parameter, using the mineral sigmas and model input as per current module 3. Mineral Vols – This uses the input Mineral Volume curves, MinVol1 through MinVol5, and the mineral sigmas, SigMin1 through SigMin5. Sigma Matrix: This is only available when the Sigma Matrix Source parameter is set to ‘Parameter’. The value can be interactively picked from the SigMat curve or the Porosity/ Sigma Xplot launched from the Interactive Log Plot..

Related Topics Define TDT Stand Alone Parameters Create a New Interpretation Zone Define Sigma Parameters Define SigMat from Matrix Density Define SigMat from Mineral Volumes Specify Parameter Limits 10.9.1.1.3 Define SigMat from Matrix Density

The SigMat from Matrix Density Tab will only be ‘active’, i.e. not shaded, when the parameter ‘Sigma Ma Source’ in the Sigma Parameters Tab has been set to ‘Matrix Den’.

Matrix Input : Selects whether the matrix density is taken from the optional input Matrix Density curve or the Matrix Den parameter.

Section 10.9 Interpretation : Cased Hole

1001

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Matrix Den : Input matrix density used to control the sigma matrix. Will be ignored if the Matrix Input parameter is set to Curve. Model Input : This selects the type of mineral mixture model that is used to calculate sigma matrix. The options are SS-LS-DOL which will use a sandstone-limestone-dolomite model or SS-DOL which will use a sandstone-dolomite model. Sigma Sand : Sigma matrix for sandstone. This value will be used when the input matrix density is 2.65 gm/cc (Default 4.3 CU). Sigma Lime : Sigma matrix for limestone. This value will be used when the input matrix density is 2.71 gm/cc (Default 7.1 CU). Sigma Dol : Sigma matrix for dolomite. This value will be used when the input matrix density is 2.85 gm/cc (Default 4.7 CU).

Related Topics Define TDT Stand Alone Parameters Create a New Interpretation Zone Define Sigma Parameters Define SigMat from Matrix Density Define SigMat from Mineral Volumes Specify Parameter Limits 10.9.1.1.4 Define SigMat from Mineral Volumes

The parameters in this tab will only be ‘active’, i.e. not shaded, when the parameter ‘Sigma Ma Source’ has been set to ‘Mineral Vols’ in the Sigma Parameters Tab. Up to six mineral volume curves can be input and this tab is where the sigma for each mineral is input. A drop down list is available with a list of default mineral sigma values.

Section 10.9 Interpretation : Cased Hole

Interpretation

Senergy

1002

Mineral Volume Inputs 5 additional input curves for Mineral Volumes, called VolMin1 through VolMin5, to allow for alternative computation of Sigma Matrix are included in the Parameter Pane. Five additional Sigma Mineral parameters will also be required, SigMin1 through SigMin5. Sigma Matrix is given by: SigMat = VolMin1*SigmaMin1 + VolMin2*SigmaMin2 + VolMin3*SigmaMin3 + VolMin4*SigmaMin4 + VolMin5*SigmaMin5

Related Topics Define TDT Stand Alone Parameters Create a New Interpretation Zone Define Sigma Parameters Define SigMat from Matrix Density Define SigMat from Mineral Volumes Specify Parameter Limits

Section 10.9 Interpretation : Cased Hole

1003

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

10.9.1.1.5 Specify Parameter Limits

The Limits Tab permits the user to set up and apply Limits which force the output Sw, SwTDT, to 1.0 allowing the user to clean up an interpretation by limiting Sw in poor quality, non-reservoir rock.

Phi Limit : If input ‘Porosity’ < Phi Limit then SwTDT is set to 1.0, default 0 Vcl Limit : If input ‘Clay Volume’ > Vcl Limit then SwTDT is set to 1.0, default 1 Sw Limit : If input ‘SW Open Hole’ > Sw Limit then SwTDT is set to 1.0, default 1

Related Topics Define TDT Stand Alone Parameters Create a New Interpretation Zone Define Sigma Parameters Define SigMat from Matrix Density Define SigMat from Mineral Volumes Specify Parameter Limits 10.9.1.2 TDT Stand Alone Plots

The TDT Stand Alone Model can be displayed as either an Interactive Plot or a Crossplot. The Interactive Plot provides the ability to view Sigma Clay, Sigma Water, Sigma Matrix, ‘Phi Limit’, Vcl Limit’ and ‘Sw OH Limit’ as an Interactive Plot. The Sw and BVW curves will only appear in the plot if they have been entered on the Curve tab. The Interactive Plot also contains

Section 10.9 Interpretation : Cased Hole

Interpretation

Senergy

1004

the reconstructed Sigma curves, SigRec, SigRecWat, SigRecHyd plus the original Sigma curve. The Clay Volume/Sigma Crossplot will show a strong correlation with increasing Clay Volume giving a higher Sigma. The aim is to pick a value for the Sigma of 100% pure wet clay but that usually does not occur in oil wells (that would be a china clay pit) to follow the increasing Sigma with increasing Clay Volume trend in the data and project it out to 100%. The data at low Clay Volumes should be ignored on this plot as it is the clean reservoir intervals and the Sigma will be responding more to the saline water in the reservoir than to the clay. The Sigma/Porosity Crossplot is also identifying trends but this time to try and identify the water, hydrocarbon and matrix Sigma values in the reservoir rocks and not the clay rich shales. Matrix is the basic rock fabric like sandstone, limestone etc. I have shown 3 such trends on the plot below. One trend goes NW, increasing sigma with decreasing porosity. This is the clay trend and where it reaches zero porosity is effectively the same clay point we established on the Volume Clay crossplot, but it is less ‘accurate’ so it is really on for QC. The second trend goes NE, increasing sigma with increasing porosity. This is the clean wet reservoir trend and if you follow that trend out to 100% porosity it would be the pure water point, which is what we are trying to pick. If you follow the same trend in reverse, down to zero porosity that is the pure matrix point which is another point we are trying to pick. This trend should follow the 100% wet blue overlay curve. The third trend goes SE and is the hydrocarbon trend, clean reservoir rock with increasing oil or gas content. If the rock had no water in it and all the porosity was filled with hydrocarbon this trend should reach down to the red 0% water line, but in reality there is always some water so it never get s down to this. If you followed the red 0% water line out to a porosity of 100% it would be the pure hydrocarbon point, another parameter we want to pick. Again, following the trend back to zero porosity takes you back to pure rock matrix.

Section 10.9 Interpretation : Cased Hole

1005

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Related Topics Create a New Interpretation Zone Define Sigma Parameters TDT Stand Alone Plots Output Curves, Equations and Methodology 10.9.1.2.1 Create Interactive Log Plot

The interactive plot is created by clicking on the Make Plot button. Six interactive lines are available to change parameters for Sigma Clay, Sigma Water, Sigma Matrix, ‘Phi Limit’, Vcl Limit’ and ‘Sw OH Limit’. Note: The Sw and BVW curves will only appear in the plot if they have been entered on the Curve tab. Track 4 contains the reconstructed Sigma curves, SigRec, SigRecWat, SigRecHyd plus the original Sigma curve. The yellow shading is between the sigma water (SigRecWat) and the sigma hydrocarbon (SigRecHyd) reconstructed curves. The actual sigma should fall in the yellow range if the parameters are all set correctly.

Section 10.9 Interpretation : Cased Hole

Interpretation

Senergy

1006

Track 3 contains the Interactive Line to modify the Sigma Clay Parameters. Click and Drag the Interactive Line to modify the Sigma Clay Parameters from within the Log Plot Display. Hover over the Sigma Clay Interactive Line to display the Sigma Clay Parameters in the Status Bar.

Track 5 contains the Interactive Line to modify the Sigma Water Parameters. Click and Drag the Interactive Line to modify the Sigma Water Parameters from within the Log Plot Display. Hover over the Sigma Water Interactive Line to display the Sigma Water Parameters in the Status Bar.

Section 10.9 Interpretation : Cased Hole

1007

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Track 6 contains the Interactive Line to modify the Sigma Matrix Parameters. Click and Drag the Interactive Line to modify the Sigma Matrix Parameters from within the Log Plot Display.

Undo/Redo Once the Parameter lines have been altered undo/redo arrows appear in the top left-hand corner of the log plot. These allow the user to go back to the original position of the parameter lines. As the arrows are clicked the parameter lines move and the output curves are recalculated. The undo/redo arrows only work if the well and zones remain unchanged during the current interpretation session.

Section 10.9 Interpretation : Cased Hole

Interpretation

Senergy

1008

Related Topics TDT Stand Alone Plots Create Interactive Log Plot Create Clay Volume/Sigma Crossplot Create Sigma/Porosity Crossplot

10.9.1.2.2 Create Clay Volume/Sigma Crossplot

The Clay Volume/Sigma Crossplot is launched from Track 3 of the Interactive Log Plot GR and Sigma track. Right Click Track 3 of the Interactive Crossplot and Select the VWCL/SGFM (Clay Volume Curve/Sigma Curve) Xplot. In the example below the Clay Volume Curve is VCLAV and the Sigma Curve is TDT:SGFM.

Section 10.9 Interpretation : Cased Hole

1009

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The Clay Volume/Sigma Crossplot will then be displayed.

The sigma scales may need to be adjusted. The interactive point on the right hand side is the

Section 10.9 Interpretation : Cased Hole

Interpretation

Senergy

1010

interactive Sigma Clay parameter and is ‘pinned’ to the Clay Volume of 1. Note: The Clay Volume/Sigma Crossplot includes a clay line where the parameter ‘Sigma Clay’ is the endpoint of the line at Vcl = 1. This is the same functionality as the VWCL – RT Xplot in PhiSw. The other end of the line is free floating as it does not represent any specific parameter. In this example the clean data (Vcl <0.2) shows 2 clear trends which are the wet and hydrocarbon sands. The clay trend is only apparent at higher Vcl, > ~0.5, such that Sigma Clay ~ 30.

Related Topics TDT Stand Alone Plots Create Interactive Log Plot Create Clay Volume/Sigma Crossplot Create Sigma/Porosity Crossplot 10.9.1.2.3 Create Sigma/Porosity Crossplot

The Sigma/Porosity Crossplot is launched from Track 3 of the Interactive Log Plot. Right Click Track 3 of the Interactive Crossplot and Select PHIE/SGFM (Porosity Curve/ Sigma Curve) Xplot to display the Sigma/Porosity Crossplot. In the example below the Porosity Curve is PHIE and the Sigma Curve is TDT:SGFM.

The Porosity/Sigma Crossplot will then be displayed. Note: The scales may need to be adjusted.

Section 10.9 Interpretation : Cased Hole

1011

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Apply Sigma Overlay Lines From the Porosity/Sigma Crossplot Window click the Edit Format Button to Display the Crossplot Dialog. From the Scales Tab, Overlay Lines Select Sigma / Porosity with Sw Lines and Click Ok to display the Sigma Overlay Lines on the Crossplot.

Section 10.9 Interpretation : Cased Hole

Interpretation

Senergy

1012

The overlay lines are created automatically when the Sw calculations are run and are adjusted for sigma matrix, water and hydrocarbons. If any of the sigma end-points are changed , then the crossplot will have to be re-launched in order to pick up the changed overlay lines. The lines on the crossplot are constant Sw lines. Shale intervals are normally plotted above the 100% Sw line. The overlay as used currently is constructed using three parameters: Sigma Water (blue dot) – sigma at a porosity of 1 on the ‘wet’trend Sigma Hydrocarbon (red dot) – sigma at a porosity of 1 on the ‘hydrocarbon’ trend Sigma Matrix (green dot) – sigma at a porosity of 0 The 100% Sw line goes from the matrix point to the water point and idealized data on this plot clearly shows the idea of a wet trend following the 100% Sw line. The 0% Sw line goes from the matrix point to the hydrocarbon point. The hydrocarbon trend does not follow the 0% Sw line as there is never 0% Sw. Instead it will follow a trend at the irreducible Sw, Swi, which in this case appears to be about 25% Sw. Note the trend between the 100% Sw line and the 25% Sw line is the transition zone, the hydrocarbon trend ids the small tail following the 25% Sw line. The data trend to the left of and above the 100-% Sw line are typically shales, and while this can be used to confirm Sigma Clay we should not include Sigma Clay on this plot as it is better picked for m the Vclay – Sigma Xplot. (Depending on the open hole interp methodology this may be Sigma Shale rather than Sigma Clay, and also clean tight zones can plot in this region if they have a different mineralogy than the main reservoir, hence,

Section 10.9 Interpretation : Cased Hole

1013

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

without discriminators an erroneous pick may be made) To use this Xplot to pick the 3 sigma parameters you need to identify these trends in the data and pick the endpoints accordingly. However, on such a large scale the trends may be very hard to make an accurate pick on, so the default scales will normally be used to do the actual picking on. This means the user will normally adjust Sigma Matrix and the slope of the 100% Sw and 0% Sw lines rather than Sigma Water and Sigma Hydrocarbon, although of course they need to be adjustable if the user changes the scales. Currently the Sw lines are saved as an overlay file so to get them to update after a parameter change the user has to go into Edit Format and Apply or OK. The 25%, 50% and 75% lines should be part of the interactive plot and update every time a change is made. If the user adjusts Sigma Matrix via the interactive Phi-Sigma Xplot they are implicitly forcing the model to use a constant value and not to compute a sigma matrix from the density. Currently this is achieved by entering a value in Sigma Matrix which then greys out the matrix density parameters and Sigma Matrix becomes an interactive parameter line on the interactive plot rather than the computed Sigma Matrix. The interactive Phi-Sigma Xplot must share this same functionality. If the user has selected to use Matrix Density to compute Sigma Matrix then the Sigma Matrix point on the will be plotted as the mean of the computed Sigma Matrix for that zone, as is done currently, but it should not be interactive. It should only be an interactive point when Sigma Matrix Parameter is the selected method.

Related Topics TDT Stand Alone Plots Create Interactive Log Plot Create Clay Volume/Sigma Crossplot Create Sigma/Porosity Crossplot 10.9.1.3 Output Curves, Equations and Methodology

Sigma Matrix - SigMat If the sigma matrix source parameter, ‘Sigma Ma Source’, is set to ‘Matrix Den’ then RhoMat (matrix density) will either be taken from the input Matrix Density curve or from the input parameter, ‘Matrix Den’, depending on the method chosen in ‘Matrix Input’. If the ‘Model Input’ is set to Sandstone - Dolomite then

SigMat SigDol

RhoMat 2.65 SigDol 2.85 2.65 SigMat Sigsand

SigSand

SigSand

Section 10.9 Interpretation : Cased Hole

Interpretation

Senergy

1014

If the ‘Model Input’ is set to Sandstone - Limestone - Dolomite then

if

RhoMat 2.71 RhoMat maximum of 2.65 or RhoMat RhoMat 2.65 SigMat SigLime SigSand SigSand 2.71 2.65 if RhoMat 2.71 RhoMat minimum of 2.85 or RhoMat RhoMat 2.71 SigMat SigDol SigLime SigLime 2.85 2.71 If the sigma matrix source parameter, ‘Sigma Ma Source’, is set to ‘Mineral Vols’ then RhoMat (matrix density) will be computed from the input Mineral Volume curves and corresponding mineral sigma, ‘Sig Mat 1’ through ‘Sig Mat 6’:

Water Saturation - SwTDTU SigLog

SwTDTU

SigMat SigWat

SigHyd SigHyd

SigMat

Vcl SigClay SigMat SigWat SigHyd

SwTDT will limit the SwTDTU curve to between 1 and 0.

Bulk Volume Water - BVWTDT BVWtdt

SwTDT

Sigma Water Apparent - SigWatApp SigWatApp

Sigma

SigMat (1 Vcl

) SigClay

Vcl

Reconstructed Sigma Curves - SigRec, SigRecWat, SigRecHyd These are QC type curves and are used to get a feel of the range of values to be expected for a 100% wet zone and a 100% hydrocarbon zone. The reconstructed open hole sigma curve should fall between the wet and hydrocarbon curves.

Sigma Open Hole Reconstructed - SigRec Sig Re c

(1 Vcl

) SigMat

Vcl SigClay

SwOH

SigWat

Sigma Water Reconstructed - SigRecWat Sig Re cWat

(1 Vcl

) SigMat

Vcl SigClay

SigWat

Sigma Hydrocarbon Reconstructed - SigRecHyd Sig Re cHyd

(1 Vcl

) SigMat

Vcl SigClay

SigHyd

Section 10.9 Interpretation : Cased Hole

(1 SwOH ) SigHyd

1015

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Related Topics Create a New Interpretation Zone Define Sigma Parameters TDT Stand Alone Plots Output Curves, Equations and Methodology

10.9.2 TDT Time Lapse The TDT Time Lapse module is used to calculate water saturation from differences between two thermal decay tool (TDT) logs or any pulsed neutron tool logs that measures the formation capture cross section (Sigma). An accurate Porosity and original Water Saturation (Sw Base) curve is needed as input, which is best taken from an open hole log analysis.

The method uses the differences between the two sigma curves, run at different times, to calculate the change in water saturation. Using this method the matrix properties of the rock do not influence the results and much more accurate changes in water saturation can be calculated in comparison to the TDT Stand Alone analysis. The method relies on the changes in sigma being wholly related to changes in water saturation. Hence, if different tool types are used for the different Sigma runs the tool difference must be somehow normalized out before an accurate Sw change can be calculated. The Sigma new curve is the most recently run log. The Sigma Base curve is the sigma curve that represents the formation saturated with hydrocarbons as shown by the Sw base curve. The Sigma Base curve should be run on the well after completion before any water movement has

Section 10.9 Interpretation : Cased Hole

Interpretation

Senergy

1016

occurred. Several sigma logging passes are usually made over the reservoir. These should be first depth matched and then averaged before using the averaged value in this module. The Curve Average module using the Lateral Averaging option can be used for this. The Clay Volume and Porosity input curve can be optionally used to set cut-offs for the intervals to apply the analysis. This is useful for removing non-net intervals. The BVW Open Hole curve is optional and is only used in the automatic plot. The Load / Save Parameter Sets button allows the user to manage the parameter sets. See Parameter Set Management. The working parameter set for this module is name : TDT_Time_Lapse and type TDT_Time_Lapse. This can be seen in the Edit Zones / Top sets module.

Related Topics TDT Time Lapse Create a New Interpretation Zone Define Sigma Parameters Create Interactive Log Plot Equations and Methodology

Section 10.9 Interpretation : Cased Hole

1017

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

10.9.2.1 Define TDT Time Lapse Parameters

The Parameters tab allows the user to change any of the input parameters. Column edits are possible by clicking in a column header, the header will turn green and then any changes to any parameter in the column will result in all the parameters in the column having the same value. However, if a zone is locked then the zone wont update with the new value.

This tab contains the main fluid and formation sigma parameters and is where the user selects the source for Sigma Matrix . Sigma Water : If formation water salinity is known, sigma water value can be looked up in most log chart books (Schlumberger Tcor-2) Sigma Hyd : The sigma hydrocarbon value can be looked up in most log chart books (Schlumberger Tcor-1). Phi Cutoff : If the input value of porosity is less than this value the interval is considered as non reservoir and the Delta Sw TDT output curve will be 0. Set to 0 to disable this option. Vcl Cutoff : If the input value of clay volume is greater than this value the interval is considered as non reservoir and the Delta Sw TDT output curve will be 0. Set to 1 to disable this option.

Related Topics TDT Time Lapse Create a New Interpretation Zone Define Sigma Parameters Create Interactive Log Plot

Section 10.9 Interpretation : Cased Hole

Interpretation

Senergy

1018

Equations and Methodology 10.9.2.2 Create Interactive Log Plot

The default plot is created by clicking of the Make Plot button. There are no interactive lines on the plot.

Related Topics TDT Time Lapse Create a New Interpretation Zone Define Sigma Parameters Create Interactive Log Plot Equations and Methodology 10.9.2.3 Equations and Methodology

Delta Sw - DltSwTDT Sw

SigNew SigBase SigWat SigHyd

Cut-offs if

cutoff Sw

or Vcl

Vclcutoff

0.0

Sw time lapse - SwTDTU and SwTDTU

Section 10.9 Interpretation : Cased Hole

1019

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

SwTDTU

SwBase

Sw

SwTDT will be the same as SwTDTU except it will be clipped between 0 and 1.0.

Bulk Volume Water - BVWtdt BVWtdt

SwTDT

Related Topics TDT Time Lapse Create a New Interpretation Zone Define Sigma Parameters Create Interactive Log Plot Equations and Methodology

Section 10.9 Interpretation : Cased Hole

Senergy

Interpretation

Senergy

1020

10.10 Auto Update of Analysis Modules The Auto Update Options enable the interpretation modules to be chained together so that changes in any one module will propagate through the other modules without the user having to manually run them. When Interactive Petrophysics is first started up these options are not switched on. The modules can also be linked using the 'Link Zones / Top Sets' module. NOTE: The Auto Update options should be turned 'off' IF using the 'Multi-well Parameter Distribution' module. This is because the Zone Sets will be automatically run before they are properly set up. If the 'Auto update Porosity and Water Saturation' menu item is 'checked', then every time the Clay Volume module is run, the Porosity and Water Saturation module will be run automatically afterwards.

If the 'Auto update Cut-off and Summation (PhiSw)' menu item is 'checked', then every time the Porosity and Water Saturation module is run, the Cut-off and Summation module will be run automatically afterwards.

Section 10.10 Interpretation : Auto Update of Analysis Modules

1021

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

If the 'Auto Update Cut-off and Summation (MS)' menu is 'checked' then every time the Mineral Solver module is run, the the Cut-off and Summation module will be run automatically afterwards.

Related Topics Parameter Set Management Basic Log Analysis Auto Update of Analysis Modules Clay Volume Analysis Porosity and Water Saturation Cut-off and Summations

Section 10.10 Interpretation : Auto Update of Analysis Modules

Section

11 Advanced Interpretation

1023

11

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Advanced Interpretation

A number of Modules are grouped under the banner of 'Advanced Interpretation'. The following modules are included : 'Mineral Solver': The interactive Mineral Solver module is used to solve for mineralogy, porosity and fluid saturations in a well. The Mineral Solver modules comprise the Mineral Solver Preprocessor tool and the Mineral Solver model interfaces. The interactive Mineral Solver module is used to resolve mineralogy, porosity and fluid saturations in a single reservoir or multiple reservoir zones within a wellbore. It can also be used for cased hole calculations using input sigma curves. 'Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis': The 'Monte Carlo Error Analysis Module' uses a Monte Carlo simulation to estimate the errors in a petrophysical analysis. The user enters the distribution of possible errors associated with the interpretation parameters and the input curves. The program, using the error distributions, randomizes the input parameters and makes multiple passes through the analysis modules. The results for each simulation are accumulated and a distribution of the results can be made. 'Batch Monte Carlo': The 'Batch Monte Carlo' module allows the user to set up and run the Monte Carlo simulation program on multiple wells. Since the Monte Carlo simulation can take considerable time to run (from minutes to hours depending of the workflow model), batching multiple wells can mean that the process can be run overnight without the need of user input. 'Fuzzy Logic Curve Prediction': The Fuzzy Logic Curve Prediction module uses the mathematics of Fuzzy Logic as described by Cuddy, S. (1997) in his paper "The Application of the Mathematics of Fuzzy Logic to Petrophysics" (Paper S. 38th Annual Symposium of the SPWLA), to allow the prediction of a Result curve from a number of Input curves. 'Multiple Linear Regression': The Multiple Linear Regression module allows the user to predict a result curve from a number of input curves, using a least squares regression routine, which will try and find the best fit to the input data. 'Neural Networks': The Neural Networks curve prediction module uses neural networks to allow the prediction of a result curve from a number of input curves. 'Cluster Analysis for Rock Typing': The Cluster Analysis module uses standard statistical routines to allow the user to cluster the data into groups to produce an electrical facies log. This log can then hopefully be used to correlate to geological facies. 'Principal Component Analysis': Principal component analysis (PC) is a technique used to

Section 11.

Advanced Interpretation :

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1024

reduce multidimensional data sets to lower dimensions for analysis. This technique can be useful in Petrophysics and Geology as a preliminary method of combining multiple logs in to a single or two logs without losing information. The PC curves then can be used for various tasks like multi-well tops correlation and regression analysis. 'Rock Physics': The Rock Physics section in IP contains the following independent modules; Shear Sonic QC/Create Module, Fluid Substitution Module, Density Estimation, Laminated Fluid Substitution, Elastic Impedance Module. 'Pore Pressure Calculations': The 'Pore Pressure Calculation' Modules comprise the following three tools; 'Overburden Gradient Calculation', 'Run Pore and Fracture Pressure gradient calculations'. These tools can be used to evaluate the subsurface pressures encountered within a well. They enable the user to model Overburden (OB), Pore (PP) and Fracture (FP) pressures based on conventional log curves, drilling information and seismic data input. It can be used as a pre-drill (predictive) and while-drilling (real-time) tool, as well as for post-drilling analysis to update and refine OB, PP and FP models. 'Saturation Height Modeling (Capillary Pressure)': The Capillary Pressure modules allow the user to QC the raw Pc measurements and make corrections for overburden stress, for clay-bound water and for laboratory to reservoir conditions conversion. Multiple Sw versus Capillary Pressure functions can be derived. Core plug Capillary Pressure array data and their associated Saturation, Porosity and Permeability values are loaded from external sources using the 'Capillary Pressure Data Loader' module. Alternatively, the 'ASCII Load' or 'Interval Loader' modules can be used if desired. 'Saturation Height modeling (Log Curves)': The 'Log Sw versus Height Functions' module is used to generate Water saturation (Sw) versus Height functions from log curve data. Logderived water saturation curves can be used, in conjunction with Free Water Level (FWL) depths to derive 'Sw versus Height above FWL' functions. This module does not require core data. 'Eastern European Resistivity Corrections': The 'Eastern European Resistivity Corrections' Module is a specialist tool developed by the A.G.H University of Science and Technology, Kraków, and integrated into IP. The module provides functionality enabling the correction of 'Normal' and 'Lateral' type resistivity curves for hole size and environmental effects. Formation Test Analysis: Formation Test Analysis is a process of evaluation that takes place to determine the viability of a reservoir of oil, prior to the production stage, in particular the type of fluid present in a reservoir and the potential for production. When Formation

Section 11.

Advanced Interpretation :

1025

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Testing takes place, measurements are taken using wireline testing methods and then recorded in a Data Log file for interpretation.

Related Topics Calculation and Correction Interpretation

Section 11.

Advanced Interpretation :

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

11.1

1026

Interactive Mineral Solver

The interactive Mineral Solver module is used to solve for mineralogy, porosity and fluid saturations in a well. The Mineral Solver modules comprise the Mineral Solver Preprocessor tool and the Mineral Solver model interfaces. The interactive Mineral Solver module is used to resolve mineralogy, porosity and fluid saturations in a single reservoir or multiple reservoir zones within a wellbore. It can also be used for cased hole calculations using input sigma curves. The Mineral Solver user interface comprises 2 modules: the Mineral Solver Preprocessor module the Mineral Solver module The user enters: a Mineral or Rock model of the formations penetrated, the logging tools / equations / constants to be used, and the parameters relating the tool equations to the Mineral model. The program will then try to solve the system of equations to find the most probable result for each layer in the well. This is traditionally called a Probabilistic Interpretation. The workflow used for this type of Probabilistic Interpretation in IP is as follows. 1. Create Mineral Models that describe the main minerals and fluids in the rock column. For a Carbonate / Oil reservoir such a model could include : Limestone, Dolomite, Anhydrite, Clay, Oil and Water. 2. Select the Logging tools (Equations) that are available in the well and add these to the model. The user should input at least the same number of tools (equations) as there are minerals and fluids in the model. 3. Enter the equation end-points (100% mineral readings) for each mineral. For example, 100% Calcite density would be 2.71 g/cc, for 100% fresh water the density would be set to 1.0 g/cc. 4. Enter the weighting factor for each equation. This is the relative importance of one equation to another. For example, the density tool is generally considered to provide a far more accurate measurement of porosity than the sonic tool. Hence, the weighting on the density should be higher. 5. The Model is run and the reconstructed tool responses are compared to the original input tool responses. The results are presented in a log plot view. 6. The user adjusts the end-point parameters and / or Mineral model to give the best possible reconstruction.

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

1027

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

One often finds that a single Mineral Model is not sufficient to describe all the formations present in a well. For example, one model is needed for a carbonate interval, another for a clastic interval. Special models are often required for zones of bad-hole conditions, where some of the logging tools are not reading valid values. For multiple Mineral Model interpretations the typical workflow is extended as follows : 7. Each Mineral model is individually set up and adjusted to give the best results for the depth interval to which it applies. 8. The separate Mineral models are combined to give a final Combined Result. The models are combined on a zonal basis, using a Mixing Routine. The Mixing Routine allows the use of logic statements to decide which model should be used for the Combined Result. Mixing routines can be as simple as setting a single model over a zone or more complex - for example, using multiple logic statements to determine which model to use for each individual depth level. 9. When making the final combined plot it is now possible to smooth the transition between models using the Mdl Merge Dist function.

Fluids Most logging tools that respond to lithology read quite shallow and are normally assumed to read in the flushed zone close to the borehole wall. The normal way to set up a Miner Solver model is to include in the model only the fluids in the flushed zone. The Sw value is calculated after the model has been resolved from the porosity and deep resistivity curve. However, it is possible to run the Mineral Solver with both flushed zone fluids and un-invaded zone fluids in the same model. This allows the user to then specify for each input tool whether the tool reads in the flushed zone, the un-invaded zone or somewhere in between the two. This can become important for tools like the neutron, which read somewhat deeper than the density and hence can need more correction for hydrocarbon than what is calculated in the flushed zone. To Display the Mineral Solver Module: From the Advanced Interpretation Menu, Select the required Mineral Solver Module.

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

Below is an example Log Plot created from the Mineral Solver Module.

Related Topics Interactive Mineral Solver Mineral Solver Preprocessing Mineral Solver Plot the Mineral Solver Results Mineral Solver Calibration Mineral Solver Equations and Methodology

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

1028

1029

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

11.1.1 Mineral Solver Preprocessing The Mineral Solver MinSolve Preprocessing module consists of two tabs.

General - this allows the user to calculate : Volumetric Cross Section (U) curve from inputs of density and PEF curves U is calculated from the equation U = Pef x (RHOB + 0.1883) x 0.93423 Conductivity (Ct and Cxo) curves from input Rt and Rxo curves. Dry Weight to Volume Conversion - this performs : Elemental volume fractions conversion from mineral dry-weight fractions . Dry weight fractional data from XRD core analysis, can be converted to mineral volume fractions and used as input to the Mineral modelling.

Related Topics Interactive Mineral Solver Mineral Solver Preprocessing

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1030

XRD Weight % to Volume % Conversion Mineral Solver Plot the Mineral Solver Results Mineral Solver Calibration Mineral Solver Equations and Methodology 11.1.1.1 XRD Weight % to Volume % Conversion

XRD Weight % to Volume % Conversion Core X-ray diffraction mineral analysis data is usually provided by core laboratories in weight percent of the dry fraction of the rock. In order for this data to be used in the Mineral Solver module it should be converted into a wet volume percent. This conversion is performed here. The conversion is controlled by the following equation : Wet Vol % = (Dry Weight %) x (1 – Porosity) x (Rock Grain Density) / (Mineral Grain Density)

The Rock Grain Density and Porosity can be taken from the routine core analysis results. The Mineral Grain Density will be fixed for a particular mineral and can be found in the standard Log chart book reference tables ( See Useful Links). The Porosity part of this correction is usually the most important input and, if the Mineral Grain Density is not known exactly - for example in clay, then a good estimate is generally quite satisfactory. The user must load XRD weight % curves, for example, from an XRD analysis results spreadsheet, as illustrated below, together with the Grain Density (GDen) and Porosity (CPor) curves.

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

1031

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

In the Dry Weight to Volume Conversion tab, the user sets up the XRD mineral Weight % curves and the appropriate Porosity and Grain Density curves and fills in the names for the output Mineral Volume Curves. The Input Mineral Density values for many common minerals are stored in an external file, MINDEF.PAR, located in the IP program directory. The user has three options for filling in the Mineral Density data: You can either; Take the presented default density value for a mineral, or Manually type in a new value for an existing mineral, or If the mineral is not in the list, type in an appropriate density value. The Pre -Processor settings can be saved to an external Mineral Solver Preprocessor ASCII file (.mpp) for later recall.

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1032

Click the Run Tab button to execute the calculations.

Related Topics Interactive Mineral Solver Mineral Solver Preprocessing Mineral Solver Plot the Mineral Solver Results Mineral Solver Calibration Mineral Solver Equations and Methodology

11.1.2 Mineral Solver The modelling interface to Mineral Solver consists of a window with 4 tabbed sections. These are : Curves - allows the user to set the input curves used for Sw calculations and the names of the output curves which are generated for each separate model and for the Combined Model. Parameters - contains input data which are mainly used for Sw calculations, with the

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

1033

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

parameters arranged on sub-tabs listed on a zone by zone basis. The tab also allows the user to set options for the neutron and sonic equations. Models - sets up the different Mineral Models used in the interpretation. Mixings - sets up the different Mixing Models that can be used to generate the final Combined Result model.

Related Topics Interactive Mineral Solver Mineral Solver Preprocessing Mineral Solver Plot the Mineral Solver Results Mineral Solver Calibration Mineral Solver Equations and Methodology

11.1.2.1 Define Mineral Solver Curves

The Curves Tab is used to define the Input and Output Curves to be used in the Mineral Solver Module.

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1034

Input curves The input Temperature curve is used to convert the input resistivity parameters, like Rw and Rmf, to their downhole values. The input Rt and Rxo curves are used to calculate Sw and Sxo. If these curves are not entered, it is still possible to calculate Sxo inside the model using an Rxo conductivity curve or an EPT TPL curve. If no Sw can be calculated, then Sw is assumed to be 1.0 and the Sxo result must also be 1.0, unless the OBM ? option (on the Parameters - Sw Logic sub-tab) is turned on. Checking the OBM ? option forces Sxo <= Sw. A No Calculation flag curve can be used to turn off calculations over certain zones. When the input Flag curve is any value, other than Zero or Null Value (-999), then no calculations are made over this depth level. In such No Calculation zones, the water saturation curve results are set to 1.0, porosity curves to 0.0 and mineral volumes to 0.0. This can be useful if zones where no analysis is possible have been flagged using a different IP module and the user just wants to turn off the module over these zones. An example for use would be over coal beds which have been picked using the interactive curve splice.

Output Curves The output curves are created for each Model and for the Combined Model. No Set names should be included with the curve names. The output curves will automatically be put into the appropriate curve Set for the model that is being run. Some of the result curves are only calculated for particular water saturation equations, for use in some of their special interactive plots. If a curve is not needed as an output, the user can delete the curve name from the Output Curves list and it will not appear in the result curve Sets. In addition to these output curves, each model will output the model mineral volumes and fluid volumes and the reconstructed input curves (***_re) together with the input curve uncertainties curves (***_me) minus error and (***_pe) plus-error, where *** is the input curve name.

Related Topics Mineral Solver Define Mineral Solver Curves Define Mineral Solver Parameters Define Mineral Solver Models Define Mineral Solver Mixings

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

1035

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

11.1.2.2 Define Mineral Solver Parameters

The Parameters tab is used to enter parameters for all Models. There are 5 tabbed pages for entering the parameters. These are: Zones / Mixings: The Zones/Mixings Tab defines the Zones Parameters for use in the Mineral Solver Module. Waters Clays: The Waters/Clays Tab defines the Parameters to be used in the Mineral Solver for the Water and Clay Resistivity, Porosity and Temperature. Sw Logic / Limits: The Sw Logic / Limits Tab defines the Saturation Parameters, Equations and Limits for use in the Mineral Solver Module. Sw Params: Sonic /Neutron: The Sonic/Neutron Tab defines the Parameters for the Equation used to calculate Sonic Porosity.

Column Edits If the user wants to set all the parameters in one column of the Parameters screens to the same value, then click in the Header Title box of the column. This will turn the column header box to green as shown below. Now, any one parameter that is changed in that column will change all the parameters in the column to this same value. To turn the column edit off, click the column header again and its colour will return to grey. Column edits remain active while the well stays loaded in memory. They have to be reset, if required, the next time the well is loaded. The following shows a column edit turned on for the Rw parameter on the Waters Clays tab.

Related Topics Mineral Solver Define Mineral Solver Curves Define Mineral Solver Parameters Define Mineral Solver Models Define Mineral Solver Mixings

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1036

11.1.2.2.2 Define Zones/Mixings

The Zones/Mixings Tab defines the Zones Parameters for use in the Mineral Solver Module.

Zone Name : Optional zone name. Zone Top :

Top of current zone.

Zone Bottom : Bottom of current zone. Lock Zone : This column allows the user to lock zones within the module. After a zone has been checked then in all the tabs that zone is grayed out. Zone Mixing : Model mixing scheme to be used for this zone. Set up on the Mixings tab. Mdl Merge Dist : If the Mdl Merge Dist parameter is not zero then a smooth transition between the two models will be made where the transition will be the Mdl Merge Dist. For example, if the Mdl Merge Dist is set to 2.0 in a 0.5 step Set then the transition will occur over 4 samples. Assuming the transition is from Mdl1 to Mdl2 then the first depth step of the transition will take 20% of the volumes from Mdl1 and add those to 80% of Mdl2. The second step will take 40% of Mdl1 and 60 % of Mdl2. The third step will take 60% of Mdl1 and 40% of Mdl2 and the fourth step will take 80% of Mdl1 and 20% of Mdl2. Porosity, BVW, Sw, Sxo and Vcl along with mineral volume curves are transitioned between models. The combined reconstructed curves will not be transitioned and will be as if the Mdl Merge Dist is set to 0.0 (i.e. off). The Model_Num output curve will now be an array curve with a X dimension as the number of models in the analysis. Each X dimension represents the amount of contribution the model makes to the final result. The X columns will be in the same order as the models are created. The plot below shows three models being mixed to a final combined result. The Mix track shows

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

1037

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

where each model is being used. The brown bars indicate the model being used. The Mdl Merge Dist is set to 0.0 and no transitioning is used.

In the next example plot, shown below the Mdl Merge Dist is set to 2.0 and a 4 depth step transitioning is used. The Mix track colours indicate the percentage amount of each model used at a depth.

The Model_Num output curve displays the percentages of each model at a depth level. The columns will always add up to 1.0 (100%) at each depth level. The calculations are made by first setting each column in the array with either a 1 (model selected at depth level) or 0 (model not selected). Then the columns are filtered one at a time using the Mdl Merge Dist as the filter length and as a box filter. Finally, the array values are normalized at each depth level so that they add up to 1.0.

Related Topics Define Mineral Solver Parameters Create a New Zone

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1038

Define Zones/Mixings Define Waters/Clays Define Sw Logic/Limits Define Sw Params Define Sonic/Neutron 11.1.2.2.3 Define Waters/Clays

The Waters/Clays Tab defines the Parameters to be used in the Mineral Solver for the Water and Clay Resistivity, Porosity and Temperature.

Rw : Formation water resistivity. Rw Temp :

Temperature associated with Rw; Temperature units are set in the Temp.

input Units box at the bottom of the Parameters window. The program will convert the Rw to formation temperature using the entered temperature curve. If the Rw Temp field is blank then the Rw will be assumed to be at formation temperature, and no conversion will be performed. Rmf : Mud filtrate resistivity. Rmf Temp : Temperature associated with Rmf; Temperature units are set in the Temp. input Units box at the bottom of the Parameters window. The program will convert the Rmf to formation temperature using the entered temperature curve. If Rmf Temp field is blank then the Rmf will be assumed to be at formation temperature, and no further conversion will be performed.

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

1039

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Rw bound : Clay-bound-water resistivity. Used in the Dual Water saturation equation option. The value can be estimated from the Rw apparent curve in the Shaly wet sections. Rw bound can be adjusted to give 100% Sw in these zones. RwbTemp : Temperature associated with Rw bound; Temperature units are set in the Temp. input Units box at the bottom of the Parameters window. The program will convert Rw bound to formation temperature using the entered temperature curve. If Rwb Temp is blank then Rw bound will be assumed to be at formation temperature, and no further conversion will be performed. Rmf bound : Clay-bound-water resistivity in the flushed zone. Used in the Dual Water saturation equation option. Normally the same as Rw bound but it can be different due to the different response of the micro-resistivity curve to the deep resistivity curve in Shaly zones. The value can be estimated from the Rmf apparent curve in the Shaly wet sections. Rmf bound can be adjusted to give 100% Sxo in these zones. RmfbTemp : Temperature associated with Rmf bound; Temperature units are set in the Temp. input Units box at the bottom of the Parameters window. The program will convert Rmf bound to formation temperature using the entered temperature curve. If Rmfb Temp is blank, then Rmf bound will be assumed to be at formation temperature, and no further conversion will be performed. Res Clay :

Resistivity of the Clay. Used for the Simandoux, Modified Simandoux and

Indonesian water saturation equations. Can be chosen on the resistivity / Vclay crossplot. Rxo Clay :

Resistivity of the Clay seen by the micro-resistivity tool. Used for the

Simandoux, Modified Simandoux and Indonesian water saturation equations for calculating Sxo. Normally the same as Res Clay, but could be different due to the different response of the micro-resistivity curve to the deep resistivity curve in Shaly zones. Can be chosen on the Rxo / Vclay crossplot. PhiT Clay : Total porosity of the Clay. Must be entered and greater than 0 unless Bound Water is part of the Mineral Model. PhiT Clay can be calculated from the mineral volumes and output as an Output equation curve. This curve can then be entered as the PhiT Clay parameter.

Related Topics Define Mineral Solver Parameters Create a New Zone Define Zones/Mixings Define Waters/Clays

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1040

Define Sw Logic/Limits Define Sw Params Define Sonic/Neutron 11.1.2.2.4 Define Sw Logic/Limits

The Sw Logic / Limits Tab defines the Saturation Parameters, Equations and Limits for use in the Mineral Solver Module.

Saturation (Sat) Equation : Saturation equation. Used for calculation of Sxo and Sw. The following equations are available: Archie 1/Rt = Phi**m.Sw**n / (a.Rw) Archie PhiT 1/Rt = PhiT**m.Sw**n / (a.Rw) Same as Archie except PhiT used instead of Phie. Simandoux 1/Rt = Phi**m.Sw**n / (a.Rw) + Vcl.Sw / Rcl Modified Simandoux 1/Rt = Phi**m.Sw**n / (a.Rw.(1-Vcl)) + Vcl.Sw / Rcl Indonesian (Poupon-Leveaux) 1/Rt**.5 = ((Phi**m/(a.Rw))**.5 + Vcl**(1-Vcl/2)/Rcl**.5 ).Sw**(n/2) Dual Water

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

1041

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

1/Rt = PhiT**m.SwT**n/a.(1/Rw + Swb/SwT(1/Rwb-1/Rw)) Juhasz 1/Rt = PhiT**m.SwT**n.(1+Bn.Qvn/SwT)/(a.Rw) Qvn = Vcl*PhiClay / PhiT Bn = B normalized, entered parameter Waxman-Smits 1/Rt = PhiT**m.SwT**n.(1+B.Qv/SwT)/(a.Rw) B = entered parameter or calculated from T and Rw Qv = a / PhiT + b where a and b are entered parameters. Qv can also be entered as a fixed parameter or an input curve.

Sw Method : Method for Sw calculation. Options are : Rt : Sw calculated from Rt resistivity input curve. Min Model : Sw will be calculated from the mineral model. It is assumed that the model will output Sw ((1-Hydrocarbon Volume un-invaded zone) / Total Fluid volume). If the model does not output an Sw, then Sw will be 1.0. No Calc. : If set then Sw calculations will not be made. The following curves will be set to a null value: Sw, Swu, SwT, SwTu and BVW. The Sxo Limit logic will not be used. The No Calc options are designed to solve models where either no Rt curve is available (eg. cased holes) or models where no hydrocarbons are wanted./

Sxo Method : Method for Sxo calculation. Options are : Rxo : Sxo calculated from Rxo resistivity input curve. Min Model : Sxo will be calculated from the mineral model. It is assumed that the model will output Sxo ((1-Hydrocarbon Volume) / Fluid volume). If the model does not output an Sxo, then Sxo will be 1.0. Inv Fac: If the Sxo Method is set to Inv Fac (invasion factor) then This is used to calculate Sxo when no Sxo device is available. For water based mud Sxo = (Sw + InvasionFactor) / (1 InvasionFactor). For Oil based mud Sxo = InvasionFactor. No Calc. : If set then no Sxo calculations will be made. The following curves will be set to null values: Sxo, Sxou, SxoT, SxoTu, BVWsxo. The No Calc options are designed to solve

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1042

models where either no Rt curve is available (eg. cased holes) or models where no hydrocarbons are wanted. OBM ? : (Oil base mud ?) flag. If set to On then the following logic is applied: Sxo must be less than or equal to Sw. Invasion factor logic with OBM assumes that Sxo <= Invasion factor. Therefore if the Invasion factor is set at 0.5 then Sxo will be the minimum of 0.5 or Sw. The default value is 0.5. Sw Sxo Inv Logic : This sets the Sw Sxo invasion logic. By default this is set to true. When checked on Sxo >= Sw in Water Based Mud and Sxo <= Sw in Oil Based Mud. When un-checked this logic is disabled along with the Sxo Limit logic. Overall, this logic can be used to model complicated invasion where the normal relationship between Sxo and Sw no longer holds true. An example of the could be situations where the OBM breaks down and the water fraction in the OBM invades. m vari wth Vcl : Variable cementation factor m with Vcl flag. Used for bad-hole with the Vcl cut-off. If set to On and If Vcl > Vcl cut-off then m = m*10**(Vcl-Vcl cut-off). This has the effect of removing any hydrocarbons in zones of high clay content. Vcl cut-off : Vclay cut-off as a decimal fraction. If Vcl > Vcl cut-off and m vari wth Vcl flag is set then; m = m*10**(Vcl-Vcl cut-off) Sxo Limit ? : Limit Sxo flag. If set to On then Sxo < Sw**SxoLimit. Sxo Limit : Sxo limit exponent. If the Sxo limit flag is set, then Sxo < Sw**SxoLimit. The default value is 0.2. Invasion factor : Invasion factor. This is used to calculate Sxo when no Sxo device is available. For water based mud Sxo = (Sw + InvasionFactor) / (1 + InvasionFactor). For Oil based mud Sxo = InvasionFactor. Phi Sw Limit : When effective porosity PHIE < Phie Sw Limit value, Sw and SwT etc.. will be set to 1.0 (100%). Vcl Sw Limit : When Volume Wet clay VWCL > Vcl Sw Limit value, effective porosity PHIE will be set to 0.0001, Sw, SwT etc... will be set to 1.0 (100%). Swi Limit : The minimum value of Sw allowed. This limit is applied to the effective water saturation Sw, if an effective Sw equation is used. The limit is applied to the total water saturations if a total Sw equation is used. NOTE: this limit does not affect the SwU or SwTu curves, just the Sw and SwT curves. If the Swi Limit has be used at a depth level then the

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

1043

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

PhiFlag output curves is set at a value of 7.

Related Topics Define Mineral Solver Parameters Create a New Zone Define Zones/Mixings Define Waters/Clays Define Sw Logic/Limits Define Sw Params Define Sonic/Neutron 11.1.2.2.5 Define Sw Params

m source : Source for Archie m factor. Options are : Parameter:

Input from fixed parameter or enter an input curve.

Shell:

Calculate from the Shell formula m = 1.87 + 0.019 / Phie

m*:

m variable with Qv. Only available for Dual Water and W&S equations.

Rxo and Ept: A variable m is calculated from Rxo, using the Sxo calculated from the EPT from the mineral model. The resultant m value is limited by the parameters min m value and max m value. m*:

Used only for the Waxman&Smits and Dual Water equations. A variable

m* is calculated.

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1044

m* = m + Cm(1.128 Y + 0.22 (1-e**(-17.3Y))) Waxman-Smits m* = m + Cm(0.258 Y + 0.20 (1-e**(-16.4Y))) Dual Water Y = Qv PhiT / (1 - PhiT) where Cm is an input parameter Qv = a/PhiT + b where a and b are entered parameters. Qv can also be entered as an input curve. n source : Source for Archie n factor. Options are : Parameter :

Input from fixed parameter or enter an input curve.

Rxo and Ept : A variable m is calculated from Rxo, using the Sxo calculated from the EPT from the mineral model. n is set equal to the resultant m plus the parameter m plus value. n = m + mPlus a factor : Archie equation a factor / tortuosity factor. m exponent : Archie m factor or cementation factor. Use when m source parameter is set to parameter. n exponent : Archie n factor or saturation exponent. Use when n source parameter is set to parameter. min m value : minimum m value when m is calculated from Rxo and Ept. max m value : maximum m value when m is calculated from Rxo and Ept. m plus value : addition to variable m to calculate n. Used when n source is set to Rxo and Ept. n = m + mPlus. B fact Juhasz : B factor (equivalent conductance of clay cations) in the Juhasz Waxman-Smits equation. Default 1.0 meq/ml Can be set interactively using the Cwa / Qvn crossplot. B fact W&S : B factor (equivalent conductance of clay cations) in the Waxman-Smits equation. If left blank then this is calculated from formation temperature and Rw. Qv : Qv factor for Waxman-Smits or Dual Water (variable m*) equation can be a fixed parameter or an input curve. Qv can be calculated from the mineral volumes and output as an Output equation curve. This curve can then be entered as the Qv parameter. If left blank then Qv is calculated from : Qv = a / PhiT + b

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

1045

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Where a and b are the entered Qv a and b constant parameters. a and b can be selected interactively from the 1/PhiT QvApp crossplot. Qv a Const : The a Constant in the Qv equation : Qv = a / PhiT + b Used in the Waxman-Smits Sw equation. a and b can be selected interactively from the 1/PhiT QvApp crossplot. Qv b Const : The b Constant in the Qv equation : Qv = a / PhiT + b a and b can be selected interactively from the 1/PhiT QvApp crossplot. Cm* : Used in the m* equation to vary the weighting factor of the variable m*. Default is 1.0. m* = m + Cm(0.258 Y + 0.2 0(1 - e**(-16.4Y))) Dual Water m* = m + Cm(1.128 Y + 0.22 (1 - e**(-17.3Y))) Waxman-Smits

Related Topics Define Mineral Solver Parameters Create a New Zone Define Zones/Mixings Define Waters/Clays Define Sw Logic/Limits Define Sw Params Define Sonic/Neutron

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

Senergy

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1046

11.1.2.2.6 Define Sonic/Neutron

The Sonic/Neutron Tab defines the Parameters for the Equation used to calculate Sonic Porosity.

Sonic Equ : Equation used for calculating sonic porosity. Options are : Wyllie time average equation Hunt Raymer equation Sonic Cp : Wyllie equation compaction factor. Default 1.0 Neu Form Sal : Neutron formation salinity correction flag. Set to On if you want the program to make formation salinity corrections. The formation salinity correction depends on true porosity and water saturation. If set to Off then the neutron water hydrogen index will be set to 1.0. If the neutron tool has already had formation salinity corrections applied, then un-check this option. It is better to have the program perform the salinity correction, since it will take into account water saturation in the flushed zone. This parameter will have no effect if the Neutron Water HI is not set to Auto. Neu Log Cont : Neutron logging contractor. Select the appropriate contractor from the dropdown list. Neu Tool Type : Neutron tool type. Select appropriate tool type from the drop-down list. If a tool type cannot be found, and its response is significantly different to any other tool type, it is possible for the user to create a new tool type and tool response parameter file. See Porosity and Water Saturation module. This parameter will have no effect if the Neutron mineral end points for Sand, Limestone and Dolomite are not set to Auto.

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

1047

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Related Topics Define Mineral Solver Parameters Create a New Zone Define Zones/Mixings Define Waters/Clays Define Sw Logic/Limits Define Sw Params Define Sonic/Neutron 11.1.2.3 Define Mineral Solver Models

The Models tab is the main window for setting up the Mineral Models.

Models are created or viewed by clicking the left and right arrow buttons at the top left hand corner of the Models window. Up to 20 models can be created and used together in a well.

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

Senergy

Advanced Interpretation

1048

The Model Name can be typed into the Name box. This is useful for reflecting the use of each model. For example Main Sands, Bad Hole, Fulmar Sand, Reef etc, depending on the complexity of the geological section in the well under analysis. If the Model Name is changed, the user is prompted whether the long Set name should be changed to reflect the Model name. The Result set box will display the Set name that the results from the model will be written to. The Set can be selected from the drop-down menu or a new Set can be created by clicking the Edit Sets button.

The Add Global Set Names window will display all the Set names in the current well and allow the user to add a new Set name. The actual Set will only be created when the model Run button is clicked. The Full name usually should reflect the model name and the Short Set name, the model numbers. However, the user has full control over naming conventions.

The Model Grid

The Model grid is set up by specifying a set of minerals across the top row of the window and a set of equations which are selected in the second-from-left-hand column in the window.

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

1049

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

For each Mineral and Equation there will be an end-point parameter (the result of the equation if the rock was composed 100% of that mineral). The grid can be visualized as setting up a matrix of linear equations, each equation being of the form : Y = Min1 x Vol1 + Min2 x Vol2 + Min3 x Vol3 + Min4 x Vol4 ………. Where Y

= Input tool value or fixed constant

Min1 - Min4 = Mineral end-point values for each mineral 1-4 Vol1 - Vol4

= Result volumes

Equation Columns (on the left hand side of the Models window) 1. Curve / Val : This is the Y value of the equation. Enter either an input curve name, or a fixed value for constant, or, in the case of mineral volumes, the unity equation which ensures that all mineral volumes, when modelled and summed, total 100%, or 1. 2. Equation : This is the Equation type. The Equation type is used to decide what sort of logic to use for the equation. For example the non-linear equations are recognised by the Equation type. NOTE: It is very important that this is set correctly, especially for Density, Neutron, U, Sonic, EPT and the Conductivity equations. The equations are explained in more detail in the Mineral Solver Equations and Methodology Section. 3. Eq. Mode : the Equation Mode options are selected from the drop-down list. They are: Model - The equation is used in the model for solving the mineralogy.
Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1050

>Limit - The equation is a limit equation. The results of the mineralogy must be greater than the input Curve / Val. This can be used for setting minimum limits for resultant minerals or fluids. Output - The equation is not used in the model, but the results of the mineralogy is used to output a result curve. This can be used to output useful curves that can be used to QC the interpretation (Grain Density) or intermediate curves that are needed to calculate Sws (Qv, Total Clay porosity). It can also be used to create conventional logging curves that are missing in a well (e.g. sonic, density etc). 4. Use : The Use column, if checked for an Equation row will mean that the equation will be included in the model. If not checked, the equation will not be used. This is useful for temporarily removing an equation from the model in order to see what effect this has on the results. 5. Confidence : The equation Confidence sets the weighting factor for the equations. The smaller the confidence number, the more the weight that will be attached to this equation (exception to this is the resistivity equation). The values entered are in the units of the equation. For example Density confidence would be in gm/cc, GammaRay in API units. One can directly relate the confidence value to how accurate the reading of the tool is, in terms of the response equation. Constant equations also have confidence numbers which again relate to the weighting on these equations. It is possible to enter an input curve for the equation confidence. This will allow the user to change the confidence for each database step interval. This can be useful, for example, in badly washed-out hole, where the density equation / tool accuracy decreases markedly. Equation confidence curves can be created in other modules in IP (e.g. User Formula). 6. Inv. Fact. : The Invasion Factor sets the invasion depth of the equation. A value of 1.0 means the equation reads in the flushed (Sxo) zone and will be effected by fluids in this zone. A value of 0.0 means the equation reads in the un-invaded (Sw) zone. Values between 0 and 1 are possible and allows the equation to read partly in the flushed and partly in the un-invaded zone. It is possible to enter a curve for the invasion factor. The curve must have values between 0 and 1. This would allow the depth of invasion to be controlled at a level by level basis.

Mineral Columns A mineral is added to the grid by clicking in an empty cell in the top Mineral row of the grid. Mineral parameters are then set up in the separate columns defined by the user. The Mineral, Type, Shading and Use rows are described below:

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

1051

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

1. Mineral : The Mineral row entries define a label for each mineral in a model. The mineral name is used for picking default properties for mineral end-points from the default tables. The Mineral name can be selected from the drop-down list or a name can be manually typed in. Names that are not in the drop-down list will not have any default end-point values defined. 2. Type : Type can only be selected from the drop-down list. It can have values of : Water Sxo - flushed zone water Bound Water Hyd. Sxo - flushed zone hydrocarbon Matrix Wet Clay or Dry Clay Water Sw - un-invaded zone water Hyd. Sw - un-invaded zone hydrocarbon This field is very important in calculating the Model results. The mineral Type is used for calculating porosity, water saturation and clay volume. NOTE: The user cannot mix Wet Clay and Dry Clay types in the same model or Wet Clay and Bound Water. This field is also used for telling the program whether a fluid is in the flushed zone Water Sxo and Hyd. Sxo or is in the un-invaded zone Water Sw and Hyd. Sw. It is not necessary to include un-invaded fluids in the model unless one of the input equations is set to read in the un-invaded zone (Inv. Fact. < 1.0). 3. Shading : This is used for the default Log Plots. It allows the user to specify how each mineral will appear on the interactive log plot displays. 4. Use : The Use row, if checked for a mineral column, will mean that the mineral will be included in the model. If not checked, the mineral will not be calculated. This is useful for temporarily removing minerals to see what effect this has on the results. 5. Result : The Mineral Volume output curve name.

Mineral End-Points The Mineral End-Point parameters need to be completed for all minerals and all equations.

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1052

Certain end-point parameters can be automatically calculated. If this is possible, then the parameter entry cell will have a blue background colour. If Auto is entered then the parameter will be automatically calculated. If a value is entered then that actual value will be used. In order for the program to use the non-linear equations for the Neutron curve, the Calcite, Quartz and Dolomite parameters must be left at Auto. For the water minerals the Auto option will mean that the density and HI of the water will be calculated from the entered Rmf value (in the Parameter table) corrected for current depth and temperature. For OBM or un-invaded zone water the value will be calculated from the Rw parameter. If the parameter entry cell background colour is green, then this will be a hydrocarbon-entry cell and the entered value should be in down-hole true hydrocarbon density. The program will convert the true hydrocarbon density to its tool response equivalent (i.e. for density - electron density and for neutron - hydrogen index). Any end-point value can be entered as a curve. This would allow Trend curves created by the Interactive Trend curves module, to be used to vary parameters on a level by level basis.

New Models By selecting the Equation type first, all the default mineral end-points will be automatically entered in the table when Minerals are selected. The program will also try to look up an appropriate input Curve Name for each equation. If a curve is not found, the user will have to manually select the input curve. The Defaults for this list can be changed by editing the MINEQDEF.PAR file found in the IP program directory or by selecting the menu item Tools Defaults

Edit Mineral Solver Mineral Equation Defaults which launches the file in the

WINDOWS Notepad. The Mineral Equation Defaults (MINEQDEF.PAR) and Mineral System Defaults (MINDEF. PAR) files work together and allow the user to define new minerals with new default values for

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

1053

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

the input equations. Mineral names can be selected from a drop-down box in the topmost, Mineral, row of the Model grid or the name can be typed in. The drop-down list is activated by clicking in a Mineral cell. When the user highlights a Mineral and releases the mouse button, the Mineral is selected and its default properties populate the appropriate column in the Model grid.

The minerals displayed in the drop-down box are pre-defined with default parameters for some tools. The mineral defaults list can be changed or added to, by editing the MINDEF.PAR file found in the IP program directory or by selecting the menu item Tools

Defaults

Edit

Mineral Solver Mineral System Defaults. If the user wants to delete a line then changing the Equation type to blank will do this.

Selecting a Depth Interval The Depth interval on the Models tab is used to select the depths to run the current model over, when the Run Model button is clicked. The user inputs a top depth and bottom depth into the appropriate boxes or uses the (...) button to select depths from a Parameter or Zone /Tops Set.

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1054

These Model depths will be ignored when the Combined Model is created using the Run button at the bottom of the Mineral Solver window. In this case the intervals are taken from the Mineral Solver parameter zones.

Options When the Options button is clicked, the following window is launched. This screen allows the user to change various settings for how the model is run and results displayed. The separate panels are described below:

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

1055

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Water Saturations If the Automatically Add Sxo equation into Model is checked (default) then the Sxo equation will be added into the model at run time. The Sxo equation looks like the following : 0 = (Sxo-1)Vwater + Sxo *Vhydrocarbon1 + Sxo * Vhydrocarbon2 + ... Where Vwater

: Volume of water flushed zone

Vhydrocarbon1 : Volume of first entered hydrocarbon flushed zone Vhydrocarbon2 : Volume of second entered hydrocarbon flushed zone Sxo

: Calculated from entered Rxo curve using the selected Sw equation

NOTE: if No Calc has been set in the Parameters Sw Logic sub tab Sxo Method then do not check this option. If the Automatically Add Sw equation into Model is checked then the Sw equation will be

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1056

added into the model at run time. This is used if un-invaded fluids have been added into the model. If no un-invaded fluid are used then checking this will have no effect. The Sw equation looks like the following : 0 = (Sw-1)VwaterU + Sw *VhydrocarbonU1 + Sw * VhydrocarbonU2 + ... Where VwaterU

: Volume of water un-invaded zone

VhydrocarbonU1

: Volume of first entered hydrocarbon un-invaded zone

VhydrocarbonU2

: Volume of second entered hydrocarbon un-invaded zone

Sw

: Calculated from entered Rt curve using the selected Sw equation

NOTE: if No Calc has been set in the Parameters Sw Logic sub tab Sw Method then do not check this option. The Sw and Sxo equation confidence can be set using the relevant boxes. The default value of 0.01 (1 saturation unit) gives good results normally.

Hydrocarbon Densities By checking the boxes in this section the user can enter true hydrocarbon densities on the mineral end-point parameter grid. For the neutron tool this will also allow a gas excavation factor correction to be made.

Model Plot Options (Applies to all Models) Display reconstructed resistivity curves : if checked, this option will add two more tracks to the Model Plot, which will contain the input Rt and input Rxo curves with the reconstructed Rt and Rxo curves superimposed. These reconstructions are not part of the main equation solver and do not indicate how well the model end-point parameters are set up. However, they do indicate how well the water saturation equation works, especially in the water zones. In the hydrocarbon zones the curves should reconstruct perfectly. Display reconstructed Sxo and Sw curves : if checked, then on the Model Plot, tracks will be added to show the reconstructed Sw and Sxo curves superimposed on the model input Sxo and Sw curves. These tracks will only be shown if the Automatically Add Sxo and/or Sw into Model options are on. Normally the curves will overlay perfectly. However, if the user has relaxed the Sxo and/or Sw equation confidences then there could be slight differences between the input and reconstructed curves. Display valid but unselected input curves and their model reconstructions : if the user has entered an equation as part of a model, but has chosen not to use the equation (the Use cell is not checked), IP will continue to reconstruct the input equation / curve if this option is

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

1057

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

checked and display the results on the Model Plot. The curve reconstruction track for such a curve will not have the yellow shading seen on the curves that are actually used in the Model. Display output equation results : if checked, a new log curve track for each output equation will be added to the Model Plot. Display Constant and limit equation results : if checked, this option will add a curve track to the Model Plot for each constant and/or limit equation in the model. Each track will display a straight line (i.e. a constant value) where a limit is reached. Display invaded zone fluids in separate track : if checked a track will be created to the right of the Model track and it will contain the invaded fluid porosity curves. These are the same fluid porosities that are shown in the model volumes track except if the Display Movable fluids plot in Model results track option has been checked on. Display Un-invaded zone fluids in separate track : if checked and un-invaded fluids are used then a track will be created to the right of the Model track and it will contain the uninvaded fluid porosities. Display Movable fluids plot in Model results track : if checked the model results track, rather than containing the mineral and fluid volumes in the flushed zone, will contain a movable fluid plot to the right side of the minerals volumes. The movable fluid plot will contain Phie, BVW and BVWSxo. The following example shows the separate tracks for invaded and un-invaded fluids plus the movable oil display in the Model track.

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1058

Save, Load and Delete Models The Save Model button will save an individual model to a disk file. This can be useful for moving models between wells or for copying models when creating a new model.

The Load Model button will reload a saved model and replace the current model with its values. There are two options from where to pickup saved models :

Project Model This will present a dialog to select a model from the project well directory. Default Model This will present a dialog to select a model from the default Mineral Solver

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

1059

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

model area. This is a directory (..\Mineral Solver Models) found in the IP program directory. The user may add models to this directory by using the Save Model button and selecting this directory to save to. This directory allows users to save their common models for reuse in other wells or projects.

The Delete Model button deletes the current model. Sets of models and their Mixings can be saved though the Load and Save Parameter Sets button. This will save everything associated with the Mineral Solver set-up for the well. If model Sets need to be copied between wells, the correct way to achieve this is by using the Load /Save Parameter Sets functionality, NOT by using the Save Model and Load Model buttons.

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1060

Related Topics Mineral Solver Define Mineral Solver Curves Define Mineral Solver Parameters Define Mineral Solver Models Define Mineral Solver Mixings 11.1.2.4 Define Mineral Solver Mixings

The Mixings tab allows the user to create sets of rules on how to combine Models to create the final Combined Model Results.

Further details on the Mixings functionality is found under the Combined Model Results section of this document.

Cased Hole Calculations If the mineral solver is to be used for cased hole calculations using sigma curves then the following parameters should be set.

Curves tab Input Curves - Rt and Rxo curves should be absent.

Parameters tab - Sw Logic sub-tab

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

1061

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Sw Method is set to No Calc Sxo Method is set to Min Model. The saturation is then calculated from the input sigma curve in the model.

Parameters tab - Waters Clays sub-tab Rmf should still be entered as this will be used to calculate salinities, which are used for automatically calculated parameters for neutron logs.

Models tab From the Options button the Model Options window can be accessed. Turn off the Automatically Add Sxo equation into Model and Automatically Add Sw equation into Model options. The output curves Sxo and SxoT will be the saturations calculated by the model. The difference being the clay bound water. Sw and SwT will be absent since the Sw Method is set to No Calc.

Related Topics Mineral Solver Define Mineral Solver Curves Define Mineral Solver Parameters Define Mineral Solver Models Define Mineral Solver Mixings

11.1.3 Plot the Mineral Solver Results The interactive functions enabled in both the log plot and the cross plot depend on the settings in the zonal parameters. Most of the special interactivity is concerned with the type of water saturation equation selected. Therefore, if the user changes the water saturation equation it is best to recreate the interactive plot by re-clicking the Make Plot button from the Mineral Solver Dialog. Interactive Plot: The Make Plot button on the Models tab of the Mineral Solver Dialog creates a Log Plot from the parameters defined in the Mineral Solver Dialog. Interactive Crossplots: The Crossplot button on the Models tab allows the creation of crossplots of any of the input curves with the mineral end-points displayed on them. Clicking the Crossplot button will display the follow window. The user can select a crossplot and then select the mineral end-points to be displayed on the crossplot. A maximum of 8 mineral end-points can be displayed on each crossplot.

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1062

Combined Model Results: When the user clicks the Run button at the bottom of the main Mineral Solver window, the Combined Model results are calculated. The results will be stored in the Combined Models Result Set (Msol).

Related Topics Interactive Mineral Solver Mineral Solver Preprocessing Mineral Solver Plot the Mineral Solver Results Mineral Solver Calibration Mineral Solver Equations and Methodology 11.1.3.1 Interactive Plot

The Interactive Plot is created by clicking the Make Plot button to the right of the Options button. The Make Plot button at the bottom of the page will create the Combined Model plot.

The interactive functions enabled in the log plot depend on the settings in the zonal parameters. Most of the special interactivity is concerned with the type of water saturation equation selected. Therefore, if the user changes the water saturation equation it is best to recreate the interactive plot by re-clicking the Make Plot button. See Also: Manage the Interactive Log Plot

Track 2: Zones

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

1063

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The Zone track is used to display the current zonation used in the interpretation. This track allows the user to create and delete zones and to move zone tops. To create a new zone by splitting a current zone, right mouse click in the zone track at the depth for the split and choose Split Zone from the pop-up menu . To delete a zone, choose Delete Zone from the pop-up menu. Zone tops and bottoms can be moved by placing the cursor on the top of a zone in the zone track and, with the left mouse button, drag the top to a new position. It is possible to have gaps between zones. To remove a gap, drag the bottom of the zone above a gap to below the top of the zone below the gap.

Track 3: Resistivity The Resistivity track will have the Rxo and Rt input curves displayed. If the Indonesian, Simandoux or modified Simandoux equations are selected then the Clay parameter interactive lines will be displayed. The pop-up menu will also allow a Wet Clay Volume / Resistivity crossplot, where the value of clay resistivity (Res Clay) can be chosen interactively.

Also available are Porosity / Resistivity crossplots (Pickett plots) where Rw and m (cementation factor) can be changed interactively. The text boxes at the base of the Pickett crossplot list the Rw at formation temperature (Rw Form Temp) as well as the Rw value that is entered into the Parameter table, which could be at a different temperature (default 60 degF).

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1064

Track 4: Salinity Rw Apparent and Rmf Apparent are automatically calculated from the Phi Total, resistivity curves, and a and m parameters. The resulting resistivity is converted to the temperature used for the Rw or Rmf parameter (Rw or Rmf temp. parameter). The displayed interactive lines are Rw and Rmf. If the Dual Water model is selected, then RwB (Rw bound) and RmfB (Rmf bound) interactive parameter lines will also be displayed. If the Juhasz / W&S equation is chosen then a Cwapp / Qvn crossplot will be added to the track pop-up menu.

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

1065

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

If the Waxman-Smits equation is chosen, then a PhiT_recp (1/PhiT) / Qvapp crossplot will be added to the track pop-up menu.

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1066

Track 5: Saturations The Saturation track will contain the calculated SwU and SxoU curves, which are the unlimited curves and can have values greater than 1.0. The Sw and Sxo curves will be clipped to 1.0 (100%). The xxxU curves are good for visualizing, in the water zones, how much over the 100% line Sw and Sxo are being calculated. Thus, it is possible, by adjusting Rw, to arrive at statistically 100% Sw in a water zone. The SxoU curve has no logic limits applied to it. Hence it could be less than Sw in a WaterBased Mud system, or greater than Sw in an Oil-Based Mud system. NOTE: Replace SxoU and SwU with Sxo and Sw for any final plots.

Track 6: Porosity The Porosity track will contain the Total and Effective porosity calculations plus a moveable-oil plot (BVW and BVWSXO).

Track 7: Model Volumes Results The model volumes will be displayed. The shading used will be the same as that set up in the model grid. The hydrocarbon and water displayed will be the flushed-zone volumes . The water volume may not exactly match the BVWSXO curve. This is due to the Sxo and BVWSXO curves being calculated after the model calculations from the input Rxo curve. However, they should be very close.

Track 8: Error The Model Normalized Total Error curve (TotErr) is displayed. Error values greater than 2.0 are displayed in red. This can be used by the user to visualize how well the results reconstruct. The PhiFlg curve will display any error or logic flags output by the calculations. Curve values and their meaning are shown in the equations and methodology section. The user needs only to be concerned if the PhiFlg curve value is non-zero.

Track 9+ Curve Reconstructions There will be one track per input curve equation. Constant equations are not displayed. The track contains the original input curve plus, in yellow shading, the Confidence Band for the curve. The

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

1067

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Confidence Band width is set on the Model grid. The reconstructed curve is displayed in red colour. The closer the reconstructed curve is to the original curve, the better the Model and the results fit and the lower the Total Error will become.

Track … Rt Reconstruction If the Display reconstructed resistivity curves on model plots option is checked on the Options page, then two extra tracks will be displayed. One for Rt and one for Rxo. Two curves will be displayed in each track: the original resistivity and the reconstructed resistivity. Yellow shading will show any differences between the curves. Note that there are no confidence shading associated with these curves since they are not part of the Mineral model.

Related Topics Plot the Mineral Solver Results Interactive Plot Interactive Crossplots Combined Model Results

11.1.3.2 Interactive Crossplots

The Crossplot button on the Models tab allows the creation of crossplots of any of the input curves with the mineral end-points displayed on them. Clicking the Crossplot button will display the follow Dialog.

The user can select a crossplot and then select the mineral end-points to be displayed on the

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1068

crossplot. A maximum of 8 mineral end-points can be displayed on each crossplot. NOTE: The Select Minerals panel will only list those minerals which can be displayed on the selected crossplot. Mineral end-points which are entered as Auto (blue shaded boxes in the Model grid) or hydrocarbon parameters that are entered as true down-hole densities (green shaded boxes in the Model grid) will not be included in the Select Minerals list. The Swap Axes check box allows the user to interchange X and Y axes in the crossplot set-up window. The Interactive Run Check box allows the user to turn off the automatic re-running of the model each time an endpoint parameter is changed on the crossplot. For slow computers or complicated models it is better to make all the changes needed to the parameters then run the model manually at the end.

The crossplot will show the mineral end-points as red circles, labelled with the mineral name. By left clicking on the mineral point the user can drag the point to a new position. When the mouse button is released the model will automatically be re-run and the user can evaluate the results. Multiple crossplots can be displayed at the same time. Each one has to be set up as described

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

1069

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

above. Mineral end-points that are displayed in different crossplots will move simultaneously when the user moves any of the single points. Once the interactive points have been moved then redo/undo arrows appear in the top left-hand edge of the crossplot. These allow the user to go back to the original positions of the mineral endpoints.

Related Topics Plot the Mineral Solver Results Interactive Plot Interactive Crossplots Combined Model Results

11.1.3.3 Combined Model Results

When the user clicks the Run button at the bottom of the main Mineral Solver window, the Combined Model results are calculated. The results will be stored in the Combined Models Result Set (Msol). The user can select the Combined Models Result Set from the drop-down box or create a new Set by clicking on the Edit Sets button. If the user has checked the Auto Update Cutoff and Summation (MS) option in the Advanced Interpretation menu then each time the Mineral Solver module is run the Cutoff and Summations module (if set-up) will be run as well.

The Combined Model Results are created zone by zone. The zones are those set up in the Parameters tab.

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1070

The program looks at the Mixings model for each zone and then runs all the individual models needed for the mixing rules. The Combined Model results for the zone are then created using the mixing rules for the zone. For an explanation on how the program deals with transitions between models see the Mineral Solver chapter and the Zones / Mixings tab.

Tab 4 (Mixings) The Mixings tab allows the user to create sets of rules on how to combine models to create the final Combined Model results.

Mixings are created or viewed by clicking the left and right arrow buttons at the top of the window, next to the Mixing label. Up to 5 different sets of mixing rules can be created and applied in an interpretation.

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

1071

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The Name box allows the user to name each Mixing. This name is used to identify and set the Zone Mixing on the Parameters tab - Zones / Mixings sub-tab. The Default Model name must be selected from the drop-down list at the top of the Mixings tab This list contains all the models that have been created in the Models tab. The Default Model is used if all the mixings rules fail to come up with a model for a depth step. If a single, constant model is required over a zone then the only thing that needs to be set is the Default Model. The other rules can be left blank.

Mixing Rules For each depth level in a zone the program applies the mixing rules sequentially from the top of the list downwards and stops when any statement becomes true. The model selected will be the one for that rule. If no rule evaluates to true then the default model will be used. The Columns in the Mixings grid are described below: Column 1. Use - To have the program evaluate the row then a tick must be entered in a row. Column 2. Value / Curve / Formula - the user can input either; A fixed value, or A curve name must be entered. The curve can be any curve in the database and can include the output of a model. Since all the models are evaluated before the final Combined Model results are made using the mixings, then a model result curve is perfectly valid. However, do not include a result curve from the Combined Model set, or A Formula, which can be typed into the appropriate grid cell. Column 3. Func -This is selected from the drop-down box and can be one of the standard logic functions. Column 4. Value / Curve / Formula - A fixed value, a curve name or a formula must be entered. Column 5. What to do - The user selects from the drop-down box either Then, and or or. Then allows the selection of a model from the 6th column. and joins this logic statement with the next line with the and logic. or joins this logic statement with the next line with the or logic.

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1072

The lines are evaluated from the top down and when an or or and statement is found, the two lines that are connected with the statement are evaluated before the next line is read. For example, if we have three logic lines (Line1, Line2 Line3) : Line1 or Line2 and Line3 : will evaluate true if Line3 is true and either Line1 or Line2 is true. Line1 and Line2 or Line3 : will evaluate true if Line3 is true regardless whether Line1 or Line2 is true. Column 6. Model - The user must select a Model from the drop-down list if the previous column was a Then statement.

Interactive Combined Model Plot When the Make Plot button is clicked at the bottom of the screen an interactive Combined Model plot is made. The user has a choice of No Reconstructed Curves or Include Reconstructed Curves to make before the selected Combined Model plot is created.

The Combined Model plot has the same Resistivity, Salinity, Saturation and Porosity tracks as the Single Model result plots. The same interactive line and water saturation parameter crossplots are available as in the Single Model plot.

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

1073

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The results of each Model are displayed in separate tracks. The Mix track contains the Model_Num output curve which is automatically created and put into the Combined Model Set. The curve shows which model is used for the Combined Model results, on a level-by-level basis. The values will correspond to the Model number in the Model tab. The Error track will contain the Combined Model normalized total error curve plus the combined PhiFlag curve.

Print The Print button gives the user the following options.

If outputting to an external file, the file name will be the Parameter Set Name as entered on the Mineral Solver window, with an extension of .txt. The output file gives all the models, parameters and mixings used in the analysis.

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1074

Load / Save Parameter Sets The Load / Save Parameter Sets button allows the user to save the full Mineral Solver parameter Set into the database under a separate name or to a disk file. Saved parameter Sets can also be recalled. See Parameter Set management. The currently- displayed parameter Set is automatically saved into the well database when the well is saved. To completely delete the current parameter Set use the Manage Zones/ Tops Sets module, select the Mineral Solver parameter Set, called MinSolve, and click the Delete button.

Related Topics Plot the Mineral Solver Results Interactive Plot Interactive Crossplots Combined Model Results

11.1.4 Mineral Solver Calibration This functionality can be used to calibrate the mineral end-points using core data. The calibration can be made from data from any wells currently loaded to the IP database. Discriminators can be used to filter the data to be used in the calibration. The calibration is performed using multilinear regression and is made for each equation, separately. Certain parameters can be selected as fixed and the regression will be run to find the best solution for the other, variable parameters. The Calibrate button on the Mineral Solver Dialog launches the MinSolve Model Calibration window.

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

1075

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The Calibration window is arranged on 3 tabbed screens. These are : Callibrate Multi-well Select Discriminators Core X-ray diffraction mineral analysis data is usually provided by core laboratories in weight percent of the dry fraction of the rock. In order for this data to be used in this module it should be converted into a wet volume percent. This conversion can be made in the the Preprocessor module. The Rock Grain Density and Porosity can be taken from the routine core analysis results. The Mineral Grain Density will be fixed for a particular mineral and can be found in the standard Log chart book reference tables( See Useful Links). The Porosity part of this correction is usually the most important input and, if the Mineral Grain Density is not known exactly - for example in clay, then a good estimate is generally quite satisfactory.

Reset Button The Reset button is used to re-set the minerals and equations back to the Model defaults. This is useful if the model is changed (new mineral or new equation added) since the changes will not be reflected in the calibration window until the Reset button is clicked. NOTE : The Reset button will clear all input volume curve names.

Copy Parameters Button

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1076

The Copy Parameters button, when clicked, will transfer the selected mineral end-point values back to the Model grid. The selected parameters are chosen by using the Use column and row selectors. In this way it is possible to select each individual parameter. It is not necessary to transfer all the parameters that were used in the regression Calculation.

Related Topics Interactive Mineral Solver Mineral Solver Preprocessing Mineral Solver Plot the Mineral Solver Results Mineral Solver Calibration Mineral Solver Equations and Methodology 11.1.4.1 Define the Calibration

The Calibrate grid is very similar to the Model set-up grid and it consists of a number of equations arranged in rows down the grid and a number of mineral columns across the grid. It is not possible to change either the number of equations or the number of minerals since these are selected from the original Model grid. However, if the user changes the minerals or number of equations in the Model grid then the Reset button on the Calibrate window will change the Calibrate grid to conform to these changes.

NOTE: if Reset is selected, all input mineral volume curves will have to be re-entered. If a mineral or equation is not required for the calibration, then this can be turned off by unchecking the Use box.

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

1077

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Equation Columns 1. Curve : Input equation result curve. Cannot be changed on this grid. This is picked up automatically when the module is first run or the Reset button is clicked. The curve can be changed on the Multi-well Select tab. 2. Use : If checked then the calibration will be run for the equation when the Calculate button is clicked. It is also used to decide what end-point parameters are passed back to the Model grid when the Copy Parameters button is clicked. 3. Corr Coeff : Displays the correlation (R2) coefficient of the regression. The field is noneditable. 4. Num Points : Displays the number of points used in the regression. The field is noneditable.

Mineral Rows 1. Mineral : This is the name of the mineral as displayed in the Model grid. 2. Curve / Val : The input curve name for this mineral is entered. This can also be entered on the Multi-Well Select tab. It is also possible to enter a fixed-value volume for a mineral by typing a number in this row. If the user leaves an input curve volume blank, then the program will add up all the volumes from the other curves and assume the remainder belongs to the blank input entry. It is only possible to leave one input curve blank. The units of the input volume curves must be set as either Dec (V/V) or Percent % using the drop-down box on the top left of the grid. 3. Use : If checked then this mineral will be used in the regression. If un-checked then all parameter-end points for this mineral will be ignored. It is also used to decide what end-point parameters are passed back to the Model grid when the Copy Parameters button is clicked. 4. Fixed / Var : By clicking in this row the user can change the option for each mineral from Variable to Fixed and back again. When the option is Variable and the Calculate button is clicked, the regression will return the calculated mineral end-point. When the mineral is set to Fixed the user can manually enter the end-point value into the grid and the regression will use this value as a fixed part of the equation. This allows the user to enter known end-points, for example the density of fresh water at 1.0 gm/cc.

Related Topics Mineral Solver Calibration Define the Calibration

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1078

Select Multiple Wells Define Calibration Discriminators 11.1.4.2 Select Multiple Wells

The Multi-well Select grid allows the the user to select input logs and mineral volume curves from multiple wells. The user selects the Well from the drop-down list of wells loaded in memory and then selects the compatible logs and mineral volume curves. The Top Depth and Bottom Depth rows allow the user to select a specific part of a well to use for the calibration.

The first column of the grid will contain the well which is currently being evaluated with the Mineral Solver module. Changing the curve names in the Logs section will automatically change the names on the main Calibrate grid. The Use row is used to decide which wells are to be used in the calibration. This allows the user to quickly evaluate the influence of individual wells on the calibration results.

Related Topics Mineral Solver Calibration Define the Calibration Select Multiple Wells Define Calibration Discriminators

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

1079

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

11.1.4.3 Define Calibration Discriminators

The Discriminator grid allows the user to apply more stringent filters to data that are to be used in the model calibration. For example, if the user believed the core mineral volumes were not accurate when the permeability was very low, then the discriminator shown above could be used to select only those data where the permeability is greater than 0.1mD.

NOTE: If using log data from multiple wells, then any discriminator curve must be available in all wells.

Calculate Button When the Calculate button is clicked, a multiple linear regression is run for each equation line that is selected (Use column ticked). The equation of regression is : Input Curve = Min1 x Vol1 + Min2 x Vol2 + Min3 x Vol3 ….. Where Min1, Min2, Min3

… are the mineral end-point parameters that are solved for.

Vol1, Vol2, Vol3

… are the input curve mineral volumes

For cases where the mineral end points are Fixed the equation is re-arranged so that the fixed minerals are subtracted from the Input curve before the regression is run. Notice that the difference between this equation and the normal multi-linear regression is that there is no constant term in the result co-efficients. By using the Use equation and Use mineral selections the user can work on one equation at a time to get the optimum result. It may be necessary to fix several of the mineral end-points in

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1080

order to get a sensible result. Several iterations will normally be needed to obtain the optimum result.

Related Topics Mineral Solver Calibration Define the Calibration Select Multiple Wells Define Calibration Discriminators

11.1.5 Mineral Solver Equations and Methodology This chapter defines the Equations and Methodology used in the Mineral Solver Module. Equation Solver: The linear-equation solver incorporated into this module comes from Numerical Recipes (Cambridge University Press) and the technique used is Singular Value Decomposition. This technique is very fast and stable. The equation solver solves a set of normalized linear equations. Equations: The entered equations can be used for four different uses or modes. The equation mode (Eq. Mode) is selected on the model grid and can be one of the following; Model, >Limit,
Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

1081

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Iteration Loops: The input auto-calibrated end-point parameters and the Sxo equation need the porosity and flushed-zone water saturation to be entered. To calculate the porosity and Sxo, the mineral calculation needs to be solved. Hence, an iterative loop is used to solve the results. The iteration loop continues until the difference between iterations in porosity and Sxo are as follows: Final Calculations: The Final Calculations for the Mineral Solver Module define the Bulk Volume Water, the Bulk Volume Water Flushed Zone, the Rw Apparent, the Rmf Apparent and the Apparent Water Conductivity Calculations. Phi Flags: The output curve PHIFLAG is a logic flag curve. It can have one of the following values, 2 (A Limit equation was used in the model results), 4 (Main linearization loop did not converge after 20 iterations), 5 (Solver did not converge after 30 iterations), 6 (Sw curve set to 1.0 due to Phi Sw Limit or Vcl Sw Limit parameter limits being reached), 7 (Sw limited to Sw irreducible parameter) or 8 (Sw equation loop did not converge after 10 iterations). For a normal execution of the program at any depth level, the PHIFLAG should be zero.

Related Topics Interactive Mineral Solver Mineral Solver Preprocessing Mineral Solver Plot the Mineral Solver Results Mineral Solver Calibration Mineral Solver Equations and Methodology

11.1.5.1 Mineral Solver Workflow

The main flow logic in Mineral Solver is shown below in the work flow diagram. The logic consists of an iterative loop which is repeated until the porosity and Sw terms converge between loops. This methodology allows for the solving of non-linear equations using a linear equation solver. The non-linear equations are made linear by adjusting their input end-point mineral values knowing what the porosity and water saturation values are. The results of the process should be very similar to those obtained by non-linear solvers. The advantages of this technique over the non-linear solver are speed and stability. Both techniques use iterative processes to refine their results and find the best result. However this technique keeps the iteration outside the pure mathematical manipulations where knowledge of what is going on can be used to converge on the correct result many times faster. Non-linear solvers

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

Senergy

Advanced Interpretation

can also from time to time be extremely sensitive to the input initialization and may become unstable.

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

1082

1083

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Related Topics Mineral Solver Equations and Methodology Mineral Solver Workflow Equation Solver Equations Limit Equations Output Equations Mineral Types Water Saturations Iteration Loops Final Calculations PHIFlag 11.1.5.2 Equation Solver

The linear-equation solver incorporated into this module comes from Numerical Recipes (Cambridge University Press) and the technique used is Singular Value Decomposition. This technique is very fast and stable. The equation solver solves a set of normalized linear equations. The following steps are used to solve the equations : 1. Each equation is normalized by dividing all terms in the equation by its confidence weighting. 2. The equations are solved by Singular Value Decomposition. 3. If any of the volume result terms are negative then the largest negative term is set to zero and removed from the model. The equation solver is re-run and results checked for negative terms. This continues until all volumes are positive. 4. The result volumes are adjusted so that they add up to 1.0. Due to the way the equation solver works, the unity equations will not necessarily force the results to absolutely 1.0. (The tolerance of the unity equation is set at 0.01 by default). 5. The input logs are reconstructed from the volume results. 6. The total normalized error is calculated from the difference between the input log and results. The following equation is used to calculate the total error.

Total Error

Abs InputLog i

Re constructedLog i ConfidenceWeight i

Where InputLog i

= ith input log

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

Reconstructed i

1084

= ith reconstructed log from the volume results

Confidence Weight i = ith log confidence weighting

Related Topics Mineral Solver Equations and Methodology Mineral Solver Workflow Equation Solver Equations Limit Equations Output Equations Mineral Types Water Saturations Iteration Loops Final Calculations PHIFlag

11.1.5.3 Equations

The entered equations can be used for four different uses or modes. The equation mode (Eq. Mode) is selected on the model grid and can be one of the following : Model :

The equation is used in the model for solving the mineralogy.

> Limit :

The equation is a limit equation. The results of the mineralogy must be less than the input

Curve / Val:

This can be used for setting maximum limits for resultant minerals or fluids.

< Limit :

The equation is a limit equation. The results of the mineralogy must be greater than the input

Curve / Val:

This can be used for setting minimum limits for resultant minerals or fluids.

Output :

The equation is not used in the model, but the results of the mineralogy are used to output a result curve. This can be used to output useful curves to QC the interpretation (Grain Density) or intermediate curves that are needed to calculate Sws (Qv, Total Clay porosity). It can also be used to create normal logging curves that are missing in a well (sonic, density etc).

The general form of an input equation for all equation modes is : Y = Vol1 x Min1 + Vol2 x Min2 + Vol3 x Min3 ...

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

1085

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Where Y = Input tool curve or fixed value. For Output equations, this will be the result curve. Vol1,Vol2,Vol3… = Calculated result volumes Min1,Min2,Min3… = Mineral end-point values The Equation Type selected on the Model grid controls the non-linear equations. Output equations also use the equation type to control the end point parameters used in the construction of the output curve. The following sections describe how different equation Types are handled in Mineral Solver. Unity Equation, Porosity equalization, Invasion Factor, Density equation, Neutron equation, Neutron Tool look-up tables, Sonic equation, EPT equation, Weight Percent (Wt%) equation, Volumetric cross-section (U) equation, Conductivity equation, Resistivity equation, Uninvaded Zone Resistivity / Conductivity equations, Constant equation, Sxo equation, Sw equation and Saturation Output equation.

Unity equation The unity equation, which is always included in the model, states that the sum of all the mineral & Fluid volumes must be equal to 1 : 1 = Vol1 + Vol2 + Vol3 ….

Porosity equalization If invaded and un-invaded fluids are included in the model then the fluid porosity in both the flushed and un-flushed zone must be the same. This equation is automatically added if both invaded and un-invaded fluids are used in a model. VwatU + VhydU1 + Vhyd2U + ... = Vwat + Vhyd1 + Vhyd2 + ... or 0 = -VwatU – VhydU1 - Vhyd2U - ... + Vwat + Vhyd1 + Vhyd2 + ...

Invasion Factor The invasion factor for each equation sets the proportion of un-invaded zones and invaded zone fluids seen by the equation. A value of 1.0 indicates the equation sees only invaded fluids. A value of 0.0 then only un-invaded fluids. Values in between allow mixing of volumes. Whether a fluid is in the invaded or un-invaded zone is setup by the Mineral Type option. Water Sxo and Hyd. Sxo are invaded zone fluids. Water Sw and Hyd. Sw are un-invaded zone fluids. When the model is solved, the mineral end points for the fluid are multiplied by the Invasion Factor (IF) for invaded fluids and 1-IF for un-invaded fluids. The Invasion Factor (IF) is used for those tools which are believed to read deeper than the

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1086

flushed zone. The neutron tool, for example, is quite often felt to read more in the un-invaded zone than the flushed zone therefore a value of closer to 0.0 might be appropriate.

Density equation The density equation is linear. However, the hydrocarbon and water mineral end-points can be automatically calculated. Basic equation: b

min 1

Salinity

Den

water

Vol1

min 2

3.562

A log

Vol 2

Log Rmf 75 0.0123 0.955

7 Salinity 10

1.0

Vol 3.........

min 3

7

Temp

80

ppm 2

10

6

gm/cc

where Temp = Entered formation temperature F. Rmf75 = Rmf value converted to 75 F. For oil-based mud Rw and Rw temperature will be used in same equation as above. Denhydrocarbon

2

hden

10 16

2.5 2.5

hden hden

where = Entered hydrocarbon end-point value

Neutron equation The neutron tool end-points for sand, limestone and dolomite are non-linear and depend on the type of neutron tool. If the user selects the mineral end-points for these minerals to be Auto then the end-points will be calculated, dependent on porosity and water saturations. Basic equation: neu

Vcl NeuCl NeuMatrix Exfact NeuSal Sxo 1 Sxo NeuHyHI

The hydrocarbon and water Hydrogen Indices (HI) end-points can also be calculated. If the user has selected to have the program calculate the hydrocarbon HI then this will be adjusted for excavation effects. It is also possible to change the zone where the neutron tool is reading from the flushed (Sxo) zone to the un-invaded (Sw) zone.

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

1087

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Water-HI The water-HI is calculated from the neutron salinity look-up tables and takes into account the matrix type and the water salinity seen by the neutron tools. If the Neutron Salinity parameter is set to off, then the water-HI will be 1.0. Dolomite and Quartz matrix HI If the end-point parameter is set Auto then it will be calculated from the neutron look-up tables taking into account the porosity at the depth level. Hydrocarbon-HI If the hydrocarbon-HI end-point is set to be calculated from an entered hydrocarbon density, then it is calculated as follows:

NeuHyHI

9

4 2.5 16 2.5

hden

hden hden

2

Exfact

ma

2.65

2

2 Swx

x

0.04

x

1 Swx

Vcl NeuCl

x

Sx (1 Sx) NeuHyHI

Swx

Vcl NeuCl

x

Neu hydrocarbon

NeuHyHI Exfact 1 Sx

Where Vcl

= Wet Clay volume.

NeuCl

= Neutron wet clay value end point.

Exfact

= Neutron excavation factor.

NeuSal = Neutron formation salinity correction. Sx

= Water saturation as seen by the neutron tool.

NeuHyHI = Neutron hydrocarbon apparent hydrogen index. Neutron Tool look-up tables The neutron tool look-up tables are ASCII-formatted, user-editable text files, which define the response for a particular tool, for Dolomite and Sandstone, at different porosity values. It is assumed that the entered neutron porosity is in Limestone units. Formation salinity corrections at each porosity value are defined for each standard matrix type. This allows for the proper matrix and salinity corrections to be defined for any type of neutron tool.

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1088

Several neutron tool look-up tables are provided with the software, but the user can easily create a new table for a tool not previously defined. To do this: 1. Add the new tool into the file Neu_Parm_Files.neu, which is found in the program executable directory. This file defines the names shown in the module parameter table, plus the file names of the look-up tables. 2. Create the new look-up table. It is best to copy an old one and modify it. The spacing between the parameters is not important, but the number of parameters in each line and the number of porosity lines are. The following is an example of one of the tables: $ Interactive Petrophysics $ $ Sch_CNL.neu file $ Contains lookup table for Schlumberger CNL TNPH $ $ $ Data is as follows $ True Phi, Sandstone Matrix, Dolomite Matrix, Salinity $ Salinity correction are for following values 50, 100, $ Porosity values must not be changed $ $phi ss Dol 50 SS 100 150 200 250 250 .00 .020 -.006 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 .02 .022 -.009 -.0012 -.0032 -.0040 -.0056 -.0060 -.0076 -.0092 .05 .028 -.012 -.0030 -.0080 -.0100 -.0140 -.0160 -.0190 -.0230 .10 .036 -.017 -.0070 -.0140 -.0190 -.0230 -.0280 -.0330 -.0380 .15 .045 -.022 -.0120 -.0220 -.0290 -.0340 -.0350 -.0400 -.0450 .20 .049 -.030 -.0160 -.0270 -.0340 -.0370 -.0380 -.0420 -.0440 .25 .051 -.037 -.0160 -.0370 -.0330 -.0340 -.0330 -.0400 -.0410 .30 .052 -.045 -.0150 -.0350 -.0290 -.0290 -.0270 -.0360 -.0330 .35 .049 -.052 -.0130 -.0180 -.0190 -.0190 -.0150 -.0280 -.0260 .40 .046 -.059 -.0100 -.0140 -.0140 -.0120 -.0070 -.0210 -.0180 .45 .043 -.066 -.0120 -.0140 -.0140 -.0100 -.0030 -.0170 -.0130 .50 .040 -.073 -.0110 -.0120 -.0110 -.0060 .0020 -.0130 -.0080 .55 .037 -.080 -.0100 -.0100 -.0080 -.0020 .0070 -.0090 -.0030 .60 .034 -.087 -.0090 -.0080 -.0050 .0020 .0120 -.0050 .0020

corr Sand, Salinity corr Lime, Salinity corr Dol 150, 200, 250 Kppm and in this order

50 LS

100

150

200

250

.0000 -.0012

.0000 -.0024

.0000 -.0032

.0000 -.0036

.0000 -.0040

-.0030

-.0060

-.0080

-.0090

-.0060

-.0120

-.0160

-.0100

-.0190

-.0140

50 Dol

100

150

200

.0000 -.0020

.0000 -.0044

.0000 -.0064

.0000

-.0100

-.0050

-.0110

-.0160

-.0200

-.0210

-.0100

-.0190

-.0270

-.0260

-.0300

-.0340

-.0120

-.0240

-.0330

-.0260

-.0320

-.0350

-.0390

-.1960

-.0290

-.0370

-.0160

-.0290

-.0350

-.0390

-.0390

-.0180

-.0300

-.0370

-.0200

-.0310

-.0380

-.0380

-.0380

-.0180

-.0300

-.0340

-.0200

-.0310

-.0350

-.0350

-.0330

-.0160

-.0260

-.0290

-.0180

-.0280

-.0310

-.0300

-.0270

-.0150

-.0230

-.0240

-.0170

-.0240

-.0280

-.0260

-.0220

-.0150

-.0220

-.0210

-.0160

-.0220

-.0250

-.0220

-.0170

-.0140

-.0200

-.0180

-.0150

-.0200

-.0220

-.0180

-.0120

-.0130

-.0180

-.0150

-.0140

-.0180

-.0190

-.0140

-.0070

-.0120

-.0160

-.0120

The values of porosity go up to 60 pu., and it is necessary to complete the table up to this value, even though it is unlikely that there are any published results for these high porosities. It is advisable to extrapolate the data as accurately as possible.

Sonic equation The sonic Wyllie equation is linear as long as the compaction factor is set to 1.0 Dt Dtma Vcl Dtcl Dtfl Sxo Dthy (1 Sxo)

Dtma Dtma

Cp

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

1089

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

This can be re-written:

Dt

Dtma 1

Cp Vcl

Dtfl Sxo Cp

Dthy 1 Sxo Cp

Dtcl Vcl

or in the terms of volumes: Dt

Dtma VolMat Dtfl VolWater

Dthy VolHyd

Dtcl VolClay

To accommodate the compaction factor we multiply all the fluid parameters (water plus hydrocarbon) by the compaction factor and we ignore the compaction factor term in the VolMat term. Since the compaction factor term is only an adjustment to give reasonable porosities in unconsolidated formations, it is felt that this compromise is acceptable. The Hunt-Raymer equation as used in IP is : Vfc

1 Dtfl Sxo Dthy 2 Vma Vfc

1 Sxo 2 Vma Vfc

2

4 Vma

Vma V log

2 Vma

Where Vma

= 1/Dtma

Vf

= 1/Dtfl

Vlog

= 1/Dt

This is a non-linear equation and as a non-linear equation it has been hard-coded into the module. To accommodate this in Mineral Solver a relationship has been determined between the Wyllie compaction factor, as used in Mineral Solver and the Hunt-Raymer equations above. This relationship is : Cp = 0.65156 + 0.8109 * Phi + 0.01322 * Dtma - 0.003261 * Dtfl Phi units are decimals, Dtma and Dtfl units are usec/ft. This relationship is used as part of the iteration loop. Dtma and Phi come from the results of the Model solver. The calculated Cp value is used in the Wyllie equation above.

EPT equation The TPL curve can be used for calculating flushed-zone water saturation directly in the Mineral model. If the EPT equation is entered, then the Sxo equation should be removed from the model. See the Options selection on the model window. The Sxo Method parameter should be set to Min Model so that, for the final results, Sxo will come from the EPT result. If the TPL curve from the EPT tool is entered, equation type EPT, then the water end-point values can be set to Auto and it will be calculated from the flushed-zone water salinity as follows : E ' (79.4

202 .69 Sal)

1 0.385 (T

75) (3230 .0 T ) 10

6 2

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

4558 T 1.568

E" TPW

1090

16.34 Rmf

2.3586

E ' 2 E" 2

E'

Where Sal

= Salinity of filtrate in ppm10-6

T

= Formation temperature F.

Rmf

= resistivity of filtrate at formation temperature.

For oil-based mud, Rw is substituted for Rmf.

Weight Percent (Wt% ) equation Spectral Gamma Ray tools output curves that measure dry weight percent results either in the form of minerals or actual elements. In order to use them inside the mineral solver these curves need to be converted into volumes. This can be done automatically by setting the Equation type to a Wt% curve. As well as this, an output Grain Density equation needs to be setup. The key to the conversion is that the equation type has the Wt% in the name. If the input curve is really in units of percent then it will also get divided by 100. This conversion will happen if the curve units are % or pec. The equation used for the conversion from weight to volume is: Wet Vol % = (Dry Weight %) x (1 - PhiT) x (Rock Grain Density) / (Mineral Grain Density) Where Rock Grain Density =

Total dry rock grain density

Mineral Grain Density = Dry grain density of the mineral / element being converted The Rock Grain Density and Mineral Grain Density come from the Grain Density equation.

A type setup for an ECS tool is shown above. The output grain density equation will give the dry grain density of the rock. The density of wet clay has been entered as 2.78 which is the dry grain density not the wet grain density. The ECS_Clay (Wt%) equation sets the value of Wet Clay as 0.85 rather than as 1.0. This is

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

1091

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

because the setup is using a wet clay model and the ECS is measuring dry clay. Hence, if the zone is 100% wet clay and the total porosity in the clay is 0.15 then the ECS_Clay input curve will read 0.85 after conversion from weight to volume. ECS_Clay (Vol) = ECS_Clay (Wt%) x (1 - 0.15) x (2.78 / 2.78) For a dry clay model the ECS_Clay parameter would be 1.0. For a dry clay model a typical setup is shown below.

Volumetric cross-section (U) equation If the U equation is selected, then both the hydrocarbon and water end-point values can be automatically calculated from the true hydrocarbon density and the water salinity. The following equations are used. Uwat

= 0.00481 x Sal + 0.3883

For gas (Input Hyd Den less than 0.4) U

hyd

hden

0.119

For Oil : U

hyd

hden

0.133

U must be calculated from the Pef and Rhob curves outside of the Mineral Solver module. The equation for this is as follows : U

Pef

b

0.1883

0.93423

Conductivity equation Flushed-zone water saturation is normally calculated from the input of the Sxo equation into the model. However, it is possible to add a conductivity curve directly into the model. This is not the recommended method, since the water saturation equation used is limited to a modified Archie with n = m. Archies equation

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1092

m

1 Rxo

Sxo

n

a Rmf

Is re-written in terms of conductivity with n = m Cxo

Sxo

m

C rmf a

or Cxo1 / m

Sxo

C rmf a 1 / m

If the input curve and end-point parameters have the 1/m th root taken, then the equation becomes linear. In Mineral Solver this equation is generalized so that conductive minerals and multiple waters can be entered. The generalized equation is : Cxo1 / m

Vwati

Cwat i / a

1/ m

V min i

C min i

1/ m

where Cwati = ith input water end point parameter. Cmini = ith input conductive mineral end point parameter. Vwati = ith result water volume. Vmini = ith result mineral volume. The user enters the flushed-zone conductivity curve and the conductivity of the waters and any conductive minerals (Clays). The program takes care of the conversions to the 1/m th root. The confidence factor has 1/m th root taken of it before using in the solver. The input confidence shading shown on the result track is shown in terms of errors in the solver. Hence the shading width is related to 1/m th root of the entered confidence. Example : Input conductivity = 500 mmho Input confidence = 5 mmho m=2 Solver input value = 22.3 (1/m th root) Solver confidence = 2.24 Output confidence range + error

= (22.3 + 2.24)^2 = 602.2 mmho

- error

= (22.3 - 2.24)^2 = 402.4 mmho

An example of a set-up for the conductivity equation is shown below.

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

1093

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Clay conductivity has been set at 250 mmhos or4.0 ohmm. Rmf is set at 16,000 mmhos or 0.063 ohmm. The parameter set-up has been changed to use the results from the model for Sxo. Sxo Method set to Min Model.

The model option has been changed from default to remove the Sxo equation from the model.

Sw will still be calculated using the input Rt curve and the specified water saturation equation (in this case Indonesian).

Resistivity equation Flushed-zone water saturation is normally calculated from the input of the Sxo equation into the model. However, it is possible to add a resistivity curve directly into the model. This is not the recommended method, since the water saturation equation used is limited to a modified Archie with n = m. The logic for this is exactly the same as the Conductivity equation above except resistivites are used instead of conductivities.

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1094

The user enters the flushed-zone resistivity curve and the resistivity of the waters and any conductive minerals (Clays). The program converts the resistivites to conductivities and takes the 1/m th root. The confidence factor is converted to conductivity and has 1/m th root taken of it before using in the solver. The input confidence shading shown on the result track is shown in terms of errors in the solver. Hence the shading width is related to 1/m th root of the entered confidence. Example : Input resistivity = 2 ohmm = 500 mmho Input confidence = 200 ohmm = 5 mmho m=2 Solver input value = 22.3 (1/m th root) Solver confidence = 2.24 Output confidence range + error

= (22.3 + 2.24)^2 = 602.2 mmho = 1.661 ohmm

- error

= (22.3 - 2.24)^2 = 402.4 mmho = 2.485 ohmm

An example of a set-up for the resistivity equation is shown below.

Clay resistivity has been set at 4 ohmm. Rmf is set at 0.063 ohmm. The confidence has been set at 200 ohmm. The parameter set-up has been changed to use the results from the model for Sxo. Sxo Method set to Min Model.

The model option has been changed from default to remove the Sxo equation from the model.

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

1095

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Sw will still be calculated using the input Rt curve and the specified water saturation equation (in this case Indonesian).

Un-invaded Zone Resistivity / Conductivity equations For direct calculation of Sw within the model a Cond. Sw and Res. Sw type equations can be added. These equation work the same as the Cond. Sxo and Res. Sxo equations described above. Except the entered water parameters relate to formation water (Rw) not Rmf. Since these equations read in the un-invaded zone the Invasion Factor must be set to 0.0. The Automatic Add Sw equation option must be turned off and the parameter Sw Method must be changed to use Min Model.

This is not the recommended method, since the water saturation equation used is limited to a modified Archie with n = m.

Constant equation Constant equations are extra equations that the user adds to give more information about the mineral model. The Unity equation can be considered as a constant equation. An example of a constant equation would be 2% of the rock contains Pyrite. This can be written simply : 0.02 = VPyrite and added into the model. The following example shows this equation added.

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1096

Another example could be that the bound water volume in the wet clay was 0.15. This equation would be written.

0.15 or 0.0

VboundWater VdryClay VboundWater 0.15 VdryClay 0.85 VboundWater

This would be entered into the model like this :

If multiple clay volumes are used in the model then the total porosity for each clay mineral can be set. The equation for bound water would be written as follows :

V BoundWater

VdryClay 1 1

Tclay 1

VdryClay 2 1

Tclay 1

Tclay 2

....

Tclay 2

or 0

Tclay 1

1

Tclay 1

VdryClay 1

Tclay 2

1

VdryClay 2

....

1

V BoundWater

Tclay 2

The constant end point parameters for the equation are the clay total porosity divided by one minus the clay total porosity. This is to take into account that the output volumes are dry clay volumes.

The above example shows how the bound water porosity can be set for Illite and Chlorite. By choosing the BoundWater equation the defaults for this constant equation can be set

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

1097

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

automatically. The confidence level for these constant equations should be set at about 0.01. This would represent a 1% volume error in the result, since the constant equations have units of volume. Dependencies between different minerals can be set up such as in this example below: If Orthoclase is 20% of Quartz Orthoclase = 0.2 * Quartz Hence 0 = (0.2 * Quartz) - Orthoclase This would be entered into the model like this:

Linear relationships between different mineral assemblages can be entered as constant equations: If VGlau = VQtz * a + b then re-arranging b = VGlau - a * VQtz The Constant equation will be entered with b in the left hand column (this will be zero for an intercept at 0,0). The parameter for VGlau is 1.0. The parameter for VQtz is a. All other parameters will be zero. This is how it could be entered into the model:

Sxo equation When the Sxo equation is added into the model the equation is as follows: Vwateri

Sxo Vwateri

Vhydrocarbon i

which can be re-written:

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy 0

Sxo

Vhydrocarbon i

1 Sxo

1098

Vwateri

Where Vwater i = ith Mineral of type Water in the invaded zone Vhydrocarboni = ith Mineral of type Hydrocarbon in the invaded zone Sxo = Flushed zone saturation calculated from Rxo The equation controls the ratio of the Water to the hydrocarbon in the model in the flushed zone. Sxo is calculated as part of the iteration loop using the input Rxo curve and the selected water saturation equation. The use of Sxo as part of the model allows the proper non-linear saturation equations to be used and fully integrated into the model.

Sw equation The Sw equation is similar to the Sxo equation except it works in the un-invaded zone. When the Sw equation is added into the model the equation added is as follows:

VwaterU i

Sw

VwaterU i

VhydrocarbonU i

which can be re-written:

0

Sw

VhydrocarbonU i

1 Sw

VwaterU i

Where VwaterUi = ith Mineral of type Water in the un-invaded zone VhydrocarbonUi = ith Mineral of type Hydrocarbon in the un-invaded zone Sw = Un-invaded zone saturation calculated from Rt The equation controls the ratio of the Water to the hydrocarbon in the model in the un-invaded zone. Sw is calculated as part of the iteration loop using the input Rt curve and the selected water saturation equation.

Saturation Output equation If the user wants to calculate a fluid saturation directly from the model results it is possible by selecting the output equation ‘SaturationEff’ or ‘SaturationTot’. The output curve name then needs to be changed to reflect what is being calculated. The user then selects the fluids that will go into the saturation calculation by placing a 1.0 in the parameter value for the fluid. Multiple fluids can be selected. The effective saturations are calculated by:

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

1099

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Vol i

Saturation

eff

Saturation

Tot

Senergy

EndPo int Parameter

Phie The total saturations are calculated by: Vol i

EndPo int Parameter

PhiT The following is a model that includes Gas and Oil in the flushed zone and outputs the effective gas and oil saturations of the flushed zone.

Related Topics Mineral Solver Equations and Methodology Mineral Solver Workflow Equation Solver Equations Limit Equations Output Equations Mineral Types Water Saturations Iteration Loops Final Calculations PHIFlag 11.1.5.4 Limit Equations

Limit equations are used to control the maximum or minimum results for individual minerals / fluids or groups of minerals / fluids. The program first solves the model without any limit equations and then checks the limit equations to see if the result fits within the limits. If the results fall outside a limit equation then this equation is added into the model and a new solution is

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1100

sought (see the flow diagram above). The limit equations are added one at a time and the model is completely resolved before adding another equation. The order that equations are added is the order that they are entered into the grid. Limit equations added into the model are treated like constant equations. The Confidence value for the limit equation is used to adjust the weighting on the equation. This means that the results could still be outside the limits of the equation depending on how well the model works. Setting a maximum porosity limit over a zone where the hole is badly washed out and the density is reading far too low will not necessarily produce a good result. The figure below shows a result in a zone where the hole is washed out and a porosity limit of 0.05 has been added. The results show all the curves to be badly reconstructed with a large total error. The results are clearly wrong because the model does not work in this interval. Limit equations should only be used to make minor adjustments to the results. If a limit equation is going to radically alter the balance of the other equation, as in this example, then it probably should not be used. In this case a bad hole model should be constructed that removes the density curve from the model.

The porosity limit equation is written as follows :

0.3 Vwater Vhyrocarbon This will set the maximum porosity to 0.3. The following shows how this is set up on the Model grid. If the equation type of PhiLimit is selected from the drop-down menu in the Equation column then the equation will be automatically set up.

Setting a maximum limit of 0.2 Calcite in a model would be set up as follows:

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

1101

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Related Topics Mineral Solver Equations and Methodology Mineral Solver Workflow Equation Solver Equations Limit Equations Output Equations Mineral Types Water Saturations Iteration Loops Final Calculations PHIFlag 11.1.5.5 Output Equations

If the Eq. Mode is set to Output then the equation is not used in the model to calculate mineral volumes but it is used to output a log curve that is created from the result mineral volumes and the end point parameters for the Output equations. The output curve name is set under the Curve / Val column. The Equation column is used to set the type of output equation used in the creation of the curve. For Sonic, Density, Neutron, Conductivity, Ept and U equations the same parameter end-points and special processing that is performed when used in the model is also performed when used as an Output equation. For example, if an output equation type was set to Sonic then the sonic equation type (Wyllie or Hunt Raymer) and compaction factor would be taken into account. For normal linear equations the following equation is used to calculate the output curve.

OutputCurve

Voli

EndPointParameteri

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1102

The following extra special procession Equation types are available for Output equations :

Grain Density This output equation is designed to output a rock grain density. The user enters the matrix density of the minerals that are to be included in the grain density and sets a parameter value of 0.0 for those minerals or fluids that are not to be included. The program will calculate the grain density as follows :

Voli

GrainDensi ty

EndPointParameteri Voli

for all minerals that do not have a 0.0 EndPointParameter

The above example will give the clean grain density of rock. To include the clay in the grain density one would need to set the Wet Clay end point parameter to the density of the clay. The fluids have the end point parameters set to 0.0 so are not included in the grain density.

Qv This output equation is designed to output a Qv curve for use in the Waxman Smits or Dual Water equation. The output Qv curve is calculated as follows.

Qv

Voli

EndPointParameteri T

T

Total Porosity of the Rock

The mineral end point parameters need to be set for the clay minerals only. The end point parameters can be calculated from the CEC of the clay and its density and total porosity. Since :

Qv

dcl

Vdcl

CECdcl

T

Then the end point parameter for wet clay parameters will be :

EndPointParameter

dcl

CECdcl

1

Tclay

and for dry clay parameters

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

1103

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

EndPointParameter

dcl

Senergy

CECdcl

The above example will output a Qv curve (Qv_ms) for the Illite and Chlorite clay minerals. The output Qv curve can be fed directly into the Sw parameter grid (see below) and used in the Waxman & Smits or Dual Water equations. The output curves are calculated after each loop of the mineral solver and before the water saturation calculations are made.

PhiTClay This output equation is designed to output a clay total porosity curve for use in the Waxman Smits or Dual Water equation. This should be used for wet clay models only. The output PhiTClay curve is calculated as follows.

Voli Tclay

EndPointParameteri Voli

for all minerals that do not have a 0.0 EndPointParameter The mineral end point parameters are set for the wet clay minerals only. The other minerals and fluids are set to zero. The Wet clay minerals end point parameters used in the PhiTClay equation are the total porosities in 100% wet clay for each mineral. If only one clay mineral is used then the result curve will be a fixed constant and its value can be entered directly into the parameter grid PhiT Clay parameter.

The above example will output the curve PhiTcl_ms. The Illite wet clay porosity is set to 0.156 and the Chlorite to 0.101. The output curve will have values between 0.156 and 0.101. In zones of zero clay the program will output the value of the first clay mineral (in this case it would be 0.156).

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1104

The PhiTcl_ms curve can be input into the parameter grid (see below) to be used to calculate the total porosity from the effective porosity that is calculated from the model. T

e

Vclay

Tclay

For dry clay models the PhiTClay is the bound water and should be entered as a mineral / fluid directly into the model grid. The bound water volume should be calculated by using a constant equation (see the above section on Constant Equations).

Related Topics Mineral Solver Equations and Methodology Mineral Solver Workflow Equation Solver Equations Limit Equations Output Equations Mineral Types Water Saturations Iteration Loops Final Calculations PHIFlag

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

1105

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

11.1.5.6 Mineral Types

The Mineral Types, set from the drop-down menu, control how a mineral is to be used to make the final results. It is very important that the correct Type is set.

Un-invaded Fluids Matrix types of Water Sw and Hyd. Sw are the fluids in the un-invaded zones. These are not used for calculating porosity and do not have to be entered unless an equation has fluids that read in the un-invaded zone (see Invasion Factor above). The porosity in the un-invaded zone will be the same as the porosity in the invaded zone (see Porosity equalization above).

Clay Model and Porosity The clay added into the model can either be Dry Clay or Wet Clay. An error message will result if wet and dry clays are mixed in a model. Bound Water can only be added into a Dry Clay model. Regardless of whether a Dry or Wet clay model is created, the program calculates effective and total porosity and any of the water saturation equations can be used. Wet Clay Model

Phie Vcl Phit Vdcl

Vwater i

Vhydrocarbon i

Vwet clay i Phie Vcl PhitClay Vcl Phit Phie

Where Vwateri = ith Mineral of type Water Sxo Vhydrocarboni = ith Mineral of type Hydrocarbon Sxo

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1106

Vwetclay i = ith Mineral of type Wet Clay Phie = Effective Porosity Phit = Total Porosity Vcl = Wet clay volume Vdcl = Volume dry clay PhitClay = Entered parameter total clay porosity (PhiT Clay) Dry Clay Model If bound water is included in the model then :

Phie

Vwater i

Vdcl

Vdry clay i

Phit Vcl

Phie

Vhydrocarbon i

Vboundwater i

Vdcl ( PhiT

Phie)

If no Bound water is entered into the model then we assume that the water entered is total porosity then :

Phit

Vwater i

Vdcl

Vdry clay i

Vhydrocarbon i

Vcl Vdcl 1 PhitClay Phie PhiT PhitClay Vcl PhitClay is the Total Clay Porosity parameter entered in the zonal parameter section (PhiT Clay). This can be a curve which can be calculated from the mineral volumes as an Output equation curve.

Flushed Zone Water Saturation If the Sxo Method parameter is set to Min Model in the parameter section, the resulting Sxo will be calculated from the mineral model volumes.

For the Wet Clay model or the Dry Clay model where Bound water is included in the model :

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

1107

Sxo

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Vwateri Vwateri

Vhydrocarbon i

For the Dry Clay model where Bound water is not included in the model and the Water mineral is taken as total porosity :

Vwateri

Sxot

Vwateri

Vhydrocarbon i

Related Topics Mineral Solver Equations and Methodology Mineral Solver Workflow Equation Solver Equations Limit Equations Output Equations Mineral Types Water Saturations Iteration Loops Final Calculations PHIFlag 11.1.5.7 Water Saturations

Water Saturations (Sw and Sxo) can either be calculated directly from the model by setting the Sw Method and Sxo Method parameter in the parameter table or by using one of the Sw equations below. It is recommended not to use the direct method, since the water saturation equation used is limited to a modified Archie with n = m. Flushed zone and un-invaded zone water saturations are calculated after the porosity is obtained from the linear-equation solver. The following options are available for calculation of water saturation: Archie: 1 Rt

m

a

Sw n Rw

Archie PhiT:

1 Rt

m T

SwT n a Rw

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1108

Simandoux: 1 Rt

m

Swn a Rw

Vcl Sw Rcl

Modified Simandoux: 1 Rt

m

Swn a Rw (1 Vcl)

Vcl Sw Rcl

Indonesian (Poupon-Leveaux): m

1

Vcl 1

a Rw

Rt

Vcl 2

Swn 2

Rcl

Modified Indonesian: m

1

Vcl

a Rw

Rt

(1 Vcl ) 2

Sw n 2

Rcl

Dual Water:

1 Rt

m* T

SwT n a

1 Rw

Swb 1 SwT Rwb

1 Rw

if the m source parameter is set to m* then m is calculated as follows

m*

minput Qv 1

C m 0.258

0.2 1 e

16.4

T T

Qv is either entered as a curve or calculated from PhiT using the a and b input parameters as below. Qv can be calculated from mineral volumes and output as an Output Equation curve and then entered as an input parameter curve. The Cm parameter is used to adjust the weighting on the variable m* and is entered as a parameter (Default is 1.0). If the m source parameter is not set to m* the m* used in the equation will be the input m parameter.

Juhasz (Waxman-Smits): 1 Rt Qvn

m T

SwT n a Rw Vcl Tclay

1 Bn Qvn

Rw SwT

T

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

1109

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Waxman-Smits: m* T

SwT n a Rw

1 Rt

1 B Qv

Rw SwT

Qv is either entered as a fixed value or input curve or calculated from: a PhiT

Qv

b

Where a and b are entered parameters and can be interactively selected through the 1/PhiT / Qvapp crossplot.(see the Interactive Plot section above) B is an entered parameter or calculated from: 1.28 0.225 T 0.0004059 T 2 1 Rw1.23 0.045 T 0.27 )

B

if the m source parameter is set to m* then m is calculated as follows

m*

m C m 0.258 Qv 1

0.2 1 e

16.4

T T

The Cm parameter is used to adjust the weighting on the variable m and is entered as a parameter (Default is 1.0). If the m source parameter is not set to m* the m* used in the equation will be the input m parameter. Where m

= Cementation factor

m*

= Cementation factor used for Dual Water or W & S equations

n

= Saturation exponent

a

= Tortuosity factor

Vcl = Wet clay volume Sw = Effective water saturation SwT

= Total water saturation

Rw = Formation water resistivity Rwb

= Bound water resistivity

Rt = Input resistivity curve Rcl = Resistivity of the clay Qvn

= "Normalized" cation exchange capacity per unit total pore volume

Bn = "Normalized" equivalent conductance of clay cations (Qvn/Cwapp crossplot) Qv = Cation exchange capacity per unit total pore volume

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1110

B = Equivalent conductance of clay cations T = Formation temperature in degrees centigrade Qvn is output as a curve if the Juhasz equation is set as the default Sw equation. Apparent water conductivity is also output. The interactive Qvn/Cwapp crossplot can be used to set the Bn factor (see the Interactive Crossplot section above). The Bn factor is adjusted on the crossplot so that the 100% wet line passes through the wet shaly points. It should be noted that there is a strong correlation between the bound-water volume (PhiT-Phie) and the Bn factor. If the user changes the bound-water by changing the PhiTclay parameter, then the Qvn/Cwapp will change and the Bn should be adjusted. The cementation factor can either be: entered as a parameter. entered as an input curve. calculated using the Shell formula. calculated from the EPT/Rxo logs. calculated from Qv to produce a variable m*. Dual Water and W&S equations only. For the EPT/Rxo option then the EPT tool must be part of the mineral model and the Sxo Method parameter must be set to Min Model. The Sxo equation option should not be included in the mineral model since the EPT equation will be used to calculate the flushed-zone saturation as part of the mineral model. If m is calculated from the Shell formula, the following equation is used: m 1.87

0.018 e

If the m vari wth Vcl parameter is set to On, then over zones where Vcl > Vcl cut-off, m is adjusted as follows:

m

m 10Vcl

VclCutoff

This has the effect of removing any hydrocarbons in the shales. This adjustment occurs after any calculation of a variable m*. The saturation exponent can be entered either: as a parameter, as an input curve, or if m has been calculated from the EPT/Rxo logs, then n can be set to m plus a fixed value. This is done by setting the m plus value parameter. If the Archie PhiT, Dual Water, Juhasz or Waxman Smits saturation equation has been used, then the effective water saturation is calculated as follows:

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

1111

Sw

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

SwT Swb 1 Swb

Swb 1 Phie Phit

Flushed zone water saturations The same equation that was chosen for the Sw calculation will be used for Sxo. The parameters are substituted as follows: Rmf

for Rw

Rxo

for Rt

Rmfb

for Rwb

RxoCl

for Rcl

If no Rxo tool is available then Sxo can be calculated from an empirical formula. The Sxo Method parameter must be set to Inv Fac and the Invasion Factor parameter is used to set the relationship between Sw and Sxo. The equation used is :

Sxo

Sw InvasionFactor 1 InvasionFactor

The default value of the Invasion Factor is 2.0. The following graph shows the relationship between Sxo and Sw with different invasion factors.

In Oil-Based Mud, the invasion factor parameter gives the actual value of Sxo in the flushed

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1112

zone. Hence an invasion factor of 0.5 would give a maximum Sxo in the flushed zone of 0.5.

Sxo limits For water based mud (WBM) Sxo is limited to be greater than Sw. If the Sxo Limit flag parameter is set, then Sxo will also be limited to the following:

Sw SxoLimit

Sxo Sw

For oil based muds (OBM) Sxo is limited to be less than Sw.

Sw

Sxo

Variable m and n If the user has selected to calculate a variable m, then this is calculated using the chosen water saturation equation, solving it for m by using the Sxo value calculated from the EPT TPL curve. The resultant m, which can be output as a curve, can be limited in its values by setting the parameters min m value and max m value. These limits allow the restriction of m to sensible values.

Related Topics Mineral Solver Equations and Methodology Mineral Solver Workflow Equation Solver Equations Limit Equations Output Equations Mineral Types Water Saturations Iteration Loops Final Calculations PHIFlag 11.1.5.8 Iteration Loops

The input auto-calibrated end-point parameters and the Sxo equation need the porosity and flushed-zone water saturation to be entered. To calculate the porosity and Sxo, the mineral calculation needs to be solved. Hence, an iterative loop is used to solve the results. The iteration loop continues until the difference between iterations in porosity and Sxo are as follows: e difference

< 0.001

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

1113

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Sxo difference

Senergy

< 0.002

Related Topics Mineral Solver Equations and Methodology Mineral Solver Workflow Equation Solver Equations Limit Equations Output Equations Mineral Types Water Saturations Iteration Loops Final Calculations PHIFlag 11.1.5.9 Final Calculations

The Final Calculations for the Mineral Solver Module are described below: BVW

e

BVWsxo = Rwapp

=

Cwapp

Bulk volume water

Sx

Bulk volume water flushed zone m

Rt

Rxo

Rmfapp =

Sw

e

=

t m t

/a

Rw apparent

/a

Rmf apparent

= 1 / Rwapp

Apparent water conductivity

Rwapp, Rmfapp and Cwapp are converted to the temperature entered for Rw and Rmf respectively. Vcl

Qvn =

QvApp =

Tclay T

Normalized Qv (Juhasz W&S plot)

a B Rt

m

PhiT_recp = 1 / PhiT

1.0 B Rw

Apparent Qv (W&S plot) Reciprocal of PhiT (W&S plot)

If the Rxo curve is entered, and Sxo is calculated from the EPT mineral model, and m is not calculated from the EPT/Rxo logs, the following calculations are made: 1. Rmf equivalent. The flushed-zone water saturation equations are solved for Rmf using the

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1114

value of Sxo, calculated from the mineral model. The results are output in the RMFEQ curve. 2. A Bulk volume irreducible water is calculated. This is the amount of formation water left in the flushed zone. The Rmf equivalent, calculated in 1 (above), should be equal to the value of Rmf if all the formation water is flushed out by the filtrate. Any variance from this can be used to calculate the amount of residual formation water. BVWIRR

e

Sxo

Rw Rmf

Rmf Rmfeq Rmf Rw

Where BVWIRR = Bulk volume water irreducible The following limits are applied to BVWIRR: BVW > BVWIRR > 0

Related Topics Mineral Solver Equations and Methodology Mineral Solver Workflow Equation Solver Equations Limit Equations Output Equations Mineral Types Water Saturations Iteration Loops Final Calculations PHIFlag 11.1.5.10 PHIFlag

The output curve PHIFLAG is a logic flag curve. It can have one of the following values: PHIFLAG

LOGIC

VALUE 2

A Limit equation was used in the model results

4

Main linearization loop did not converge after 20 iterations

5

Solver did not converge after 30 iterations

6

Sw curve set to 1.0 due to Phi Sw Limit or Vcl Sw Limit parameter limits being reached

7

Sw limited to Sw irreducible parameter

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

1115

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

8

Sw equation loop did not converge after 10 iterations

For a normal execution of the program at any depth level, the PHIFLAG should be zero.

Related Topics Mineral Solver Equations and Methodology Mineral Solver Workflow Equation Solver Equations Limit Equations Output Equations Mineral Types Water Saturations Iteration Loops Final Calculations PHIFlag

Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

Senergy

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

11.2

1116

Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis

The 'Monte Carlo Error Analysis Module' uses a Monte Carlo simulation to estimate the errors in a petrophysical analysis. The user enters the distribution of possible errors associated with the interpretation parameters and the input curves. The program, using the error distributions, randomizes the input parameters and makes multiple passes through the analysis modules. The results for each simulation are accumulated and a distribution of the results can be made. The module is accessed under the main 'Advanced Interpretation' menu

'Monte Carlo

Error Analysis'.

Related Topics Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis Navigating the Monte Carlo User Interface Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis Workflow Define Monte Carlo Parameters Batch Monte Carlo

Section 11.2 Advanced Interpretation : Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis

1117

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

11.2.1 Navigating the Monte Carlo User Interface The user interface is organized on 'tabbed' screens. The 'Model' tab is used to set up the interpretation workflow that will be analyzed.

The user selects the IP interpretation modules to include in the workflow. Each module that is selected (the 'Use' column is 'checked') has a 'set-up' screen. The 'module' set-up tabs have some properties which are common throughout the interface for setting up curves and parameters for the Monte Carlo simulation runs. These properties are illustrated for the 'Clay Volume' module in the following screen capture.

Section 11.2 Advanced Interpretation : Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1118

The 'Use' column - 'checking' a row, flags that the entered row is to be used in the Error analysis workflow. 'Parameter Name' - lists the parameter names found within the interpretation modules' (in this case 'Clay Volume') Parameter Set. The 'Type Shift' column allows the user to select the 'type of shift' to be applied to each parameter. Three options are available from the a drop-down box list: 'Linear' : The parameter is changed by adding or subtracting the shift. Result = Input + Shift 'Percent' : The parameter is changed by using a percent shift. Result = Input x (1 + Shift / 100) 'Reciprocal' : The reciprocal of the parameter is changed by adding or subtracting the shift. Result = 1 / ( 1 / Input + Shift ) The 'Shift Distribution' column allows the user to select the type of random distribution to apply to each parameter. Three options are available from the drop-down box list: 'Gaussian' 'Triangular', and 'Square'. The program uses a random number generator, seeded through the CPU clock time, to calculate the shifts for each parameter for each simulation. At the start of each simulation, each parameter is changed using a different random number. The 'Initial Value' column displays the current range of starting values for the parameter. Since each module could have multiple zones with different values in each, the maximum and minimum values are shown in the 'Initial Value' entries. The 'Low Value Shift' and 'High Value Shift' columns set the ranges for the shifts in the parameters. These values must be positive values. For the 'Gaussian' distribution the 'Low Value Shift' + 'High Value Shift' represents four standard deviations. The following diagrams show how the distribution type, 'Low Value Shift' parameter and 'High Value Shift' parameter affect the distribution shape.

Section 11.2 Advanced Interpretation : Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis

1119

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The 'Gaussian' distribution is limited to 2.5 standard deviations either side of the Mean value. If the random number generator comes up with a value outside of this range, then another random number will be chosen. This is done to try and keep the distribution within reasonable limits, since very large shifts in parameters will make some parameters, like Rw, have non-sensible results (negative) and will result in the interpretation module refusing to run. The number of visible 'set-up' screens in the Monte Carlo Error Analysis interface depends upon which interpretation modules / Parameter Sets are selected for use in the Monte Carlo simulation workflow on the 'Model' tab. The following list includes all the IP modules that can be run in a simulation, together with the output curves and output graphic results in the form of histograms, crossplots and Tornado plot.

The 'Start' Button The 'Start' button will activate the Monte Carlo simulation run. The following window is displayed.

The 'Simulation Count' allows the user to see how many iterations have been made. The 'Pause' button temporarily pauses the simulation to allow the user to look at the current results without the screens continually updating. Once paused, the 'Run' button becomes active, and 'clicking' this restarts the simulations. The 'Stop' button stops the simulation at the current count, restores all parameter sets and curves to their starting position, and cleans up the temporary curves. Results from the simulation can be output to the printer or to a disk file by selecting 'Print

Section 11.2 Advanced Interpretation : Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1120

Parameter set' under 'File' on the main menu.

'Run Errors' It is quite likely that the user will experience error messages similar to that shown below.

These are caused when the input parameter has been adjusted by the program to have a value that lies outside the normal expected range, and the interpretation module will not run with that value. If this happens, click 'OK' and then stop the simulation. It will then be necessary to adjust the appropriate parameter, which is going outside its normal range, by changing the 'Shift' values associated with that parameter. The parameters that are most likely to cause this problem are resistivity-type parameters, which make no sense if they become negative.

Print Button If the 'Print' button is 'clicked', the user has the option to output the simulation results to a text file or to the printer. The listing will include result listing plus a list of all input parameters used in the simulations along with their shifts.

If the 'Simulation Raw results data to file' is 'clicked', then a '.csv' (comma delimited) file is produced containing all of the raw output data from each simulation run. This file will contain one line of text per simulation run. Each line will have all the input shifts and output results. This file is designed to be loaded into a spreadsheet for detailed analysis by the more expert user. To output the '.csv' file using semi-colons instead of commas as the delimiter go to 'Tools' 'Miscellaneous Options'

'CSV Delimiter'.

Related Topics Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis Navigating the Monte Carlo User Interface

Section 11.2 Advanced Interpretation : Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis

'Options'

1121

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis Workflow Define Monte Carlo Parameters Batch Monte Carlo

11.2.2 Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis Workflow The Workflow displayed below shows the process which is required to run the Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis Module.

Related Topics Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis Navigating the Monte Carlo User Interface Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis Workflow Define Monte Carlo Parameters Batch Monte Carlo

Section 11.2 Advanced Interpretation : Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1122

11.2.3 Define Monte Carlo Parameters This Topic describes the Parameters available for definition in the Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis Module. Define Monte Carlo Model: The 'Model' tab allows the user to set up the Monte Carlo analysis workflow. For each simulation iteration, the program will run the interpretation modules in the order displayed on this screen (from top to bottom). The interpretation modules are selected by choosing the module name from the drop-down box and then 'checking' the 'Use' box adjacent to the Module name. Define Clay Volume, Porosity Sw and Cutoff: The 'Clay Volume', 'Porosity Sw' and 'Cutoff' tab screens allow the user to specify the input parameters to be used for the simulations. The defaults are read from a user-editable disk file 'MonteCarloDefaults.par', stored in the IP program directory. Define Mineral Solver Parameters: When the 'Mineral Solver' is selected as an input module to the Monte Carlo Error analysis and the 'Use' column is 'checked' adjacent to the module name, the 'Mineral Solver' tab will be available. The 'Mineral Solver' tab contains two subtabs; 'Zonal Parameters' and 'Model Parameters'. Define the Dependencies: The 'Dependencies' tab allows the user to set dependencies between parameters. This can mean that if one parameter is changed, for example - to increase its value, then the second, 'dependent' parameter will also be increased. The degree of correlation between the parameters can be set using the 'Correlation' parameter. A 'Correlation' parameter of zero (0) will mean that there is no correlation. A value of 1 equates to a 100% correlation and a value of '-1' equals an inverse 100% correlation. Define the Output: The 'Output Curve Names' allows the user to select up to 10 curves to be output. For each output curve, the program will calculate the Mean and Standard Deviation statistics on a level-by-level basis. Any curve can be chosen as an output curve. For example, if the user wants to see how a simulation input curve varies, add its name to the output list. The output statistics curves (Mean, plus one standard deviation & minus one standard deviation) are output to the 'Curve Set' entered in the box below the 'Output Curve Names' list panel. To add a new Set to the well click the 'Edit Sets' button. Define the Monte Carlo Histograms: The 'Histo's' tab allows the user to set up the histograms to be displayed. Up to nine different histograms can be displayed together.

Section 11.2 Advanced Interpretation : Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis

1123

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Histograms can be either made from the input parameters and curves (in this case what is displayed are the shifts applied to the parameter at each simulation level), or made from one of the output summation results. The user selects the parameter to create a histogram for from a drop-down box and 'checks' the 'Use' box to display the histogram. Define the Monte Carlo Crossplots: The 'Xplot's' tab allows the user to set up the crossplots to be displayed. Up to nine different crossplots can be displayed together. Crossplot axes can be made either of the input parameters and curves (in this case what is displayed are the shifts applied to the parameter at each simulation level), or one of the output summation results. The user selects the names of the different axes from drop-down boxes and 'checks' the 'Use' box to display the crossplot. Define the Tornado Plot: The 'Tornado Plot' error analysis display shows the relative importance of each parameter in the overall error associated with a result parameter. In order to calculate the errors, a set of workflow runs is made. For each parameter in the Monte Carlo analysis, two runs are made; one with the parameter set to its low value and one set to its high value (± 2 standard deviations for Gaussian distributions). All other parameters are kept to their default values. This can take a little time to run, but once run, a tornado plot can be made for any output parameter without having to re-do the simulation runs. Any change in the Monte Carlo Error Analysis set-up will mean the 'Tornado Plot' error runs will have to be re-made.

Related Topics Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis Navigating the Monte Carlo User Interface Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis Workflow Define Monte Carlo Parameters Batch Monte Carlo

Section 11.2 Advanced Interpretation : Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1124

11.2.3.1 Define the Monte Carlo Model

The 'Model' tab allows the user to set up the Monte Carlo analysis workflow. For each simulation iteration, the program will run the interpretation modules in the order displayed on this screen (from top to bottom). The interpretation modules are selected by choosing the module name from the drop-down box and then 'checking' the 'Use' box adjacent to the Module name.

NOTE: The order in which modules are run can be changed by 'clicking' in the grey space to the left of the 'Use' column. The user can then drag a Module entry line up or down, to a new position. The 'Mineral Solver' can be run as a 'module'. This allows the results of a probabilistic interpretation to be included in the Monte Carlo Error computation. The 'Mineral Solver' module must already have been run on the subject well before selecting the 'Mineral Solver ' Parameter Set in the Monte Carlo operation. An additional 'Mineral Solver' tab will be visible in the MonteCarlo interface when this module is 'checked', as described below. The 'Formula' and 'Multi-Line Formula' modules can be used to perform functions that are not available in the standard log analysis modules. Multiple 'Formula' modules can be included in a workflow. Therefore, a simple log analysis workflow could be built up by simply running 'Formula' or 'Multi-Line Formula' several times without using the 'Clay Volume' or 'Porosity Sw' modules.

Section 11.2 Advanced Interpretation : Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis

1125

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The 'Fuzzy Logic' and 'Multi-Linear Reg(ression)' modules can be included in the workflow. This allows results from these analysis modules, to be added to the Monte Carlo Error computation. Hence, if you are using the 'Fuzzy Logic' module to compute a permeability curve, for example, then the errors in the input to the Fuzzy Logic computation can be modeled. The 'Curves from Zones' module can also be included in the workflow. This module turns zoned parameters into curves. Since the Monte Carlo Error Analysis changes the parameters in modules, then, if the results of these parameters are used to calculate other results, the inclusion of this module in the workflow allows the user huge flexibility over what calculations are made. For example, the zone average PHI Res values from the 'Cut-off and Summation' module could be written to an output curve using this module and then another computation ('User Formula' / 'Multi-line Formula') could be run using the parameter 'Curve', for instance, to compute permeability for each Monte Carlo model iteration. Any 'User Program' that is currently available to the program can also be used in the model. In the drop-down box there will be the name of the user programs. In the example above, only the Archie user program is available. NOTE: In order for any modules to be used in the workflow, they must have been set up and run on the well data before using the Monte Carlo module. You must, therefore, have made an interpretation before starting. This includes the User Programs. The 'Set Name' box on the 'Model' tab gives the name of the Parameter Set to be used for the module. For the 'Clay Volume', 'Porosity Sw' and 'Cutoff' modules this Set name will default to the current Parameter Set loaded in memory. If the user wants to select another Parameter Set from disk, then the full file name can be entered. To use the 'Formula' or the 'Multi-line Formula' modules, the user must have first saved the formula to disk using the 'Save Formula' button in their respective windows. The user then enters the full file name of the saved user formula in a row under the 'Set Name' column heading. The 'Browse' buttons are very useful in selecting the full file names. The 'Cutoff' module is not required in the workflow list, but when not used, it limits the results to only showing the foot by foot errors on the output curves. The 'Set Name' box, below the data input 'grid', allows the user to select the output name of the file into which to store the full Monte Carlo simulation results. The results and input parameters are saved by 'clicking' the 'Save' button or 'File'

Save Parameter Set

'Monte Carlo' on

the main menu. The results, once saved, can be re-loaded by clicking the 'Load' button on the

Section 11.2 Advanced Interpretation : Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1126

Monte Carlo window and selecting the saved file name.

Related Topics Define Monte Carlo Parameters Define the Monte Carlo Model Define Clay Volume, Porosity Sw and Cutoff Define Mineral Solver Parameters Define the Input Curves Define the Dependencies Define the Output Define the Monte Carlo Histograms Define the Monte Carlo Crossplots Define the Tornado Plot

11.2.3.2 Define Clay Volume, Porosity Sw and Cutoff

'Clay Volume', 'Porosity Sw' and 'Cutoff' tab screens allow the user to specify the input parameters to be used for the simulations. The defaults are read from a user-editable disk file ' MonteCarloDefaults.par', stored in the IP program directory.

The user can select which parameter to use by 'clicking' in the 'Use' box. All parameters by default are selected. Many of these parameters will in fact not be used in the analysis. This does not cause a problem, since changing a parameter that is not used will have no effect on the

Section 11.2 Advanced Interpretation : Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis

1127

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

results. The parameter names are identical to those shown in each Interpretation module's 'Parameter' windows.

Related Topics Define Monte Carlo Parameters Define the Monte Carlo Model Define Clay Volume, Porosity Sw and Cutoff Define Mineral Solver Parameters Define the Input Curves Define the Dependencies Define the Output Define the Monte Carlo Histograms Define the Monte Carlo Crossplots Define the Tornado Plot 11.2.3.3 Define Mineral Solver Parameters

When the 'Mineral Solver' is selected as an input module to the Monte Carlo Error analysis and the 'Use' column is 'checked' adjacent to the module name, the 'Mineral Solver' tab will be available. The 'Mineral Solver' tab contains two sub-tabs; 'Zonal Parameters' and 'Model Parameters'. The 'Model Parameters' sub-tab contains the following elements: 'Model Name' drop-down list - a list of the 'models' contained within the 'Mineral Solver' Parameter Set. 'Use' column - 'check' a row to use it in the Monte Carlo computation. 'Mineral Column' - drop-down list of the 'Minerals' and 'Fluids' used in the Mineral Solver model. 'Equation Line' - drop-down list of the 'Equations' / 'Tools' used in the Mineral Solver model. 'Shift Type' - 'Linear', 'Percent' or 'Reciprocal'. 'Shift Distribution' - 'Gaussian', 'Triangle' or 'Square'. 'Initial Value' - Equation end-point value for the selected 'Mineral', taken from the Mineral Solver model. 'Low / High Values' - 'default values' are filled in which are equal to the Mineral end-point value plus or minus 10% of the 'valid value'. The user can change these values.

Section 11.2 Advanced Interpretation : Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

The 'Zonal Parameters' screen is illustrated below:

The user can edit any of the 'Initial Value' and 'Low / High Value Shift' entries for the

Section 11.2 Advanced Interpretation : Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis

1128

1129

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

parameters loaded from the 'Mineral Solver' Parameter Set. The 'Parameter Name' correspond to the saved 'Mineral Solver' parameters in that module.

Related Topics Define Monte Carlo Parameters Define the Monte Carlo Model Define Clay Volume, Porosity Sw and Cutoff Define Mineral Solver Parameters Define the Input Curves Define the Dependencies Define the Output Define the Monte Carlo Histograms Define the Monte Carlo Crossplots Define the Tornado Plot 11.2.3.4 Define the Input Curves

The 'Input Curves' tab allows the user to specify the type of errors to be applied to the input curves. The same options are available as for the Interpretation module parameter shifts.

The 'Input Curves' options are the only way the user can vary results in the 'Formula' module. If

Section 11.2 Advanced Interpretation : Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1130

you want to use a constant value in an equation and vary that constant during the simulation; then the constant value must be converted into a 'Constant' curve (using the formula module) and use the curve, instead of the constant value, in the original formula. You can then add the constant curve to the 'Input Curves' list and vary it as a normal curve.

Related Topics Define Monte Carlo Parameters Define the Monte Carlo Model Define Clay Volume, Porosity Sw and Cutoff Define Mineral Solver Parameters Define the Input Curves Define the Dependencies Define the Output Define the Monte Carlo Histograms Define the Monte Carlo Crossplots Define the Tornado Plot

Section 11.2 Advanced Interpretation : Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis

1131

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

11.2.3.5 Define the Dependencies

The 'Dependencies' tab allows the user to set dependencies between parameters. This can mean that if one parameter is changed, for example - to increase its value, then the second, ' dependent' parameter will also be increased. The degree of correlation between the parameters can be set using the 'Correlation' parameter. A 'Correlation' parameter of zero (0) will mean that there is no correlation. A value of 1 equates to a 100% correlation and a value of '-1' equals an inverse 100% correlation.

The 'Correlation' works by taking the randomly-selected shift for 'Parameter 1' and applying the same shift to dependent 'Parameter 2'. If the correlation is 'negative' then the shift will be the inverse amount. For correlation coefficients of less than 1, the correlated shift will then have a randomness applied to it - depending on the value of correlation. A coefficient of 0.5 will apply a randomness of half what would have been selected if the coefficient was 0.0. To illustrate the procedure the following crossplots show an 'm' and 'n' dependency correlation of 0.5 and a 'Neu Wet Clay' and 'Rho Wet Clay' dependency correlation of -0.8.

Section 11.2 Advanced Interpretation : Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

Related Topics Define Monte Carlo Parameters Define the Monte Carlo Model Define Clay Volume, Porosity Sw and Cutoff Define Mineral Solver Parameters Define the Input Curves Define the Dependencies Define the Output Define the Monte Carlo Histograms Define the Monte Carlo Crossplots Define the Tornado Plot

Section 11.2 Advanced Interpretation : Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis

1132

1133

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

11.2.3.6 Define the Output

The 'Output Curve Names' allows the user to select up to 10 curves to be output. For each output curve, the program will calculate the Mean and Standard Deviation statistics on a level-bylevel basis. Any curve can be chosen as an output curve. For example, if the user wants to see how a simulation input curve varies, add its name to the output list. The output statistics curves (Mean, plus one standard deviation & minus one standard deviation) are output to the 'Curve Set' entered in the box below the 'Output Curve Names' list panel. To add a new Set to the well click the 'Edit Sets' button.

The 'Top Depth' and 'Bottom Depth' boxes allow the user to limit the interval over which to run the simulation. The output curves will have their statistics calculated over this interval exactly. For the 'Clay Volume', 'Porosity Sw' and 'Cutoff' modules, each module zone will be calculated if its depth interval overlaps with the entered 'Top Depth' and 'Bottom Depth' interval. The 'User Formula' and 'Multi-Line Formula' modules, if they are included in the simulation run, make no checks to see if the depth ranges overlap, but just run the interval specified on the formula input screen. The 'Stop simulation at' box puts a maximum limit at which to halt the simulations. The user can halt the simulation at any time by 'clicking' the 'Stop' button. The maximum number of simulations allowable is 5000, the default value is 2000. The 'Update Graphics every' box allows the user to set the iteration steps between updates of

Section 11.2 Advanced Interpretation : Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1134

the graphical output displays. If the workflow runs very slowly then this number may need to be changed to meet the users speed requirements. The 'Output Percentiles' boxes allow the user to select the percentiles to display in the results listing. By default, the 10th percentile will be the 10th percent lowest value of all the simulation results, except for Sw where it will be the 10th percent highest value. If this convention does not suit the user, then it can be changed by editing the 'MonteCarloDefaults.par' file (stored in the IP program directory) and changing the 'Results' section at the end of the file. The 'Auto Log Plot' button will change the Log Plot display to a standard display giving the result curves mean values and their standard deviations. For each output curve, three other curves are created in the well. The curve mnemonics and format are illustrated below: XXXMN

'Mean Result' curve

XXXPSD

'Plus one standard deviation'

XXXMSD

'Minus one standard deviation'

Where XXX is the original curve name The following is an example of the 'Auto Log Plot' with the default input curves. The original curves (PHIE, SW, VWCL and PHIT) are displayed as dashed lines. It should be noted that the original curves are the direct output of the 'Interpretation' modules and that they will display the results of a single 'deterministic' simulation. The user will therefore see values that fall outside the standard deviation range during the Monte Carlo simulation run. Once the simulation is finished the curves will be restored to their original value and should fall very close to the Mean value.

Section 11.2 Advanced Interpretation : Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis

1135

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The 'Histograms' button will display a set of histograms, which can be set up under the 'Histo's' tab. The following is an example output.

Section 11.2 Advanced Interpretation : Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1136

The histograms are displayed with the Mean value displayed as a vertical blue line and a one standard deviation line in green either side of the Mean line. The green curve represents a 'Gaussian' distribution curve fitted to the data. Optionally a 'Triangular' distribution line can be fitted. By right-mouse 'clicking', or selecting the menu, the user can copy the graphics to either the printer or the clipboard. The graphics copied to the clipboard are saved as an enhanced metafile (.emf) and can be pasted and re-sized in standard presentation-type software. The 'Crossplots' button will display a set of crossplots, which can be set up under the 'Xplot's' tab. The following is an example output.

Section 11.2 Advanced Interpretation : Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis

1137

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The 'Result Listing' button will display the zonal results which were set up in the 'Cut-off' module, along with their percentile results from the simulation. The following is an example of part of a listing.

Section 11.2 Advanced Interpretation : Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1138

The top line for each zone lists the original 'deterministic' results from the 'Cutoff' module. The second line of the report gives the Mean value of all the individual 'probabilistic' simulation results. The following lines then display the probabilistic percentile results as defined by the user. NOTE: Each simulation run randomly changes the input curves and interpretation parameters. The parameters used for each simulation iteration are saved in-memory. At the end of the MonteCarlo simulation run, which could involve several thousand iterations, the values used for every parameter are ranked from low to high and basic statistics are run on each one. The Mean and Percentile results are calculated on an individual parameter-by-parameter basis. So, for example, the AvPhi Res P50 value will not necessarily come from the same simulation iteration as the Av VCL Res parameter P50 value. This means that a straight multiplication of the P50 'Gross thickness', P50 'Net to Gross Ratio', P50 AvPhi Res and P50 (1-Av Sw Res) values will not yield the exact P50 value for the 'Net PayThickness Res' (Phi*So*H) parameter, though it should be close. It is up to the user to decide on how to use the results and resolve the discrepancies between the interdependencies. Parts of the screen listing shown above can be copied to the clipboard by highlighting the required text, then with a right mouse 'click' select 'Copy Listing to clipboard'.

Section 11.2 Advanced Interpretation : Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis

1139

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Related Topics Define Monte Carlo Parameters Define the Monte Carlo Model Define Clay Volume, Porosity Sw and Cutoff Define Mineral Solver Parameters Define the Input Curves Define the Dependencies Define the Output Define the Monte Carlo Histograms Define the Monte Carlo Crossplots Define the Tornado Plot

Section 11.2 Advanced Interpretation : Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis

Senergy

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1140

11.2.3.7 Define the Monte Carlo Histograms

The 'Histo's' tab allows the user to set up the histograms to be displayed. Up to nine different histograms can be displayed together. Histograms can be either made from the input parameters and curves (in this case what is displayed are the shifts applied to the parameter at each simulation level), or made from one of the output summation results. The user selects the parameter to create a histogram for from a drop-down box and 'checks' the 'Use' box to display the histogram.

The 'Zone' box applies to the output result histograms. The user can select which zone to plot. The 'Lft Scale' and 'Rht Scale' boxes allow the user to select the histogram scale. If left blank, the program will select a scale that displays the total range of values. The 'Overlay' box allows the user to select what type of overlay lines are displayed on the histogram. The default is to have a 'Gaussian' distribution. The 'Triangular' distribution will put a triangle on the histogram connecting the left most point to the highest point to the right most point. The 'Display' button will update the histogram plot with any changes that have been made.

Section 11.2 Advanced Interpretation : Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis

1141

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Related Topics Define Monte Carlo Parameters Define the Monte Carlo Model Define Clay Volume, Porosity Sw and Cutoff Define Mineral Solver Parameters Define the Input Curves Define the Dependencies Define the Output Define the Monte Carlo Histograms Define the Monte Carlo Crossplots Define the Tornado Plot

Section 11.2 Advanced Interpretation : Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis

Senergy

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1142

11.2.3.8 Define the Monte Carlo Crossplots

The 'Xplot's' tab allows the user to set up the crossplots to be displayed. Up to nine different crossplots can be displayed together. Crossplot axes can be made either of the input parameters and curves (in this case what is displayed are the shifts applied to the parameter at each simulation level), or one of the output summation results. The user selects the names of the different axes from drop-down boxes and 'checks' the 'Use' box to display the crossplot.

The 'Zone' box applies when the user selects an X or Y axis name which is an output result. The user can select which zone to plot. The 'Lft Scale', 'Rht Scale', 'Bot Scale' and 'Top Scale' boxes allow the user to select the crossplot scales. If left blank, the program will select scales to encompass the total range of values. The 'Display' button will update the crossplots with any changes that have been made.

Section 11.2 Advanced Interpretation : Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis

1143

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The default crossplots and histograms can be changed by editing the 'MonteCarloDefaults. par' file (stored in the IP program directory).

Related Topics Define Monte Carlo Parameters Define the Monte Carlo Model Define Clay Volume, Porosity Sw and Cutoff Define Mineral Solver Parameters Define the Input Curves Define the Dependencies Define the Output Define the Monte Carlo Histograms Define the Monte Carlo Crossplots Define the Tornado Plot

Section 11.2 Advanced Interpretation : Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1144

11.2.3.9 Define the Tornado Plot The 'Tornado Plot' error analysis display shows the relative importance of each parameter in the

overall error associated with a result parameter. In order to calculate the errors, a set of workflow runs is made. For each parameter in the Monte Carlo analysis, two runs are made; one with the parameter set to its low value and one set to its high value (± 2 standard deviations for Gaussian distributions). All other parameters are kept to their default values. This can take a little time to run, but once run, a tornado plot can be made for any output parameter without having to re-do the simulation runs. Any change in the Monte Carlo Error Analysis set-up will mean the ' Tornado Plot' error runs will have to be re-made. The 'Calculate errors' button will run the error analysis.

The 'Display Plot' button will activate the 'Tornado Plot' and run the error analysis, if not previously run.

Section 11.2 Advanced Interpretation : Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis

1145

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The 'Tornado Plot' displays the errors associated with any of the output parameters. Parameters are selected from the 'X Axis Parameter' list box at the bottom of the plot. Parameters can be displayed by zone or 'All' zones can be displayed. The plot is displayed with all selected input parameters shown in the Y axis with decreasing importance towards the bottom of the plot. The red bands show the effect of the selected input parameter on the output parameter. The Monte Carlo error ranges for each parameter, along with their starting values, are displayed on the right of the plot. A '%' sign indicates that the shift for the parameter is in percent. An 'R' character indicates that this is a reciprocal shift (see the section on 'Clay Volume', 'Porosity SW' and ' Cut-offs' Tab, above). The Tornado plot can either be sent to the clipboard for inclusion in another document or sent directly to a printer by either using the 'Print' button or else right mouse 'clicking' on the plot to display the two options 'Copy Graphics to Clipboard' and 'Output to Printer'.

Related Topics Define Monte Carlo Parameters

Section 11.2 Advanced Interpretation : Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1146

Define the Monte Carlo Model Define Clay Volume, Porosity Sw and Cutoff Define Mineral Solver Parameters Define the Input Curves Define the Dependencies Define the Output Define the Monte Carlo Histograms Define the Monte Carlo Crossplots Define the Tornado Plot

11.2.4 Batch Monte Carlo The 'Batch Monte Carlo' module allows the user to set up and run the Monte Carlo simulation program on multiple wells. Since the Monte Carlo simulation can take considerable time to run (from minutes to hours depending of the workflow model), batching multiple wells can mean that the process can be run overnight without the need of user input. Before the 'Batch Monte Carlo' can be run, a parameter model file must be created in the regular Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis module. This is done by setting up and running the ' Monte Carlo Error Analysis' module on one well. Once run (only a few simulations are needed), the results are saved as a 'Model' file by using the 'Save' button at the bottom of the ' Monte Carlo Error Anaylsis' module window. To Display the Batch Monte Carlo: From the Advanced Interpretation Menu, Select Batch Monte Carlo.

Related Topics Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis Navigating the Monte Carlo User Interface

Section 11.2 Advanced Interpretation : Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis

1147

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis Workflow Define Monte Carlo Parameters Batch Monte Carlo 11.2.4.1 Select the required Wells

The user selects the wells to run the Monte Carlo analysis on and the 'Monte Carlo Parameter Model file' to use.

The 'Stop simulation at' box allows the user to select the number of simulations to run for each well. This will override the number set in the regular 'Monte Carlo Error Analysis' parameter file. The 'Output listing to disk' will output for each well the zonal result listing. This file will be put into each wells 'output directory'. Therefore, it is important that separate output directories are used for each well, otherwise the results will all be written to the same file. The 'Output listing to printer' will send the zonal result listing, for each well, to the printer. The 'Raw Simulation Results to disk' will output the raw simulation results for each well. This file will be put into the wells output directory.

Section 11.2 Advanced Interpretation : Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1148

The 'Save' and 'Load' buttons allow the saving and restoring of the setup for the batch job.

Related Topics Batch Monte Carlo Select the required Wells Define the Batch Model Define the Input Curves Define the Output Curves Running the Monte Carlo Batch

11.2.4.2 Define the Batch Model

The model set allows the user to set the parameter set names for the workflow for each well. This is necessary since the user might be using different parameter set names in different wells.

The 'Set Default Set names for all wells' button is very useful since it searches each well in turn and looks up the default set names for each module in the workflow.

Section 11.2 Advanced Interpretation : Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis

1149

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Related Topics Batch Monte Carlo Select the required Wells Define the Batch Model Define the Input Curves Define the Output Curves Running the Monte Carlo Batch 11.2.4.3 Define the Input Curves

The input curve set-up allows the user to check that all the correct curves have been selected for the curve input.

If a curve is missing for a well then an Error Dialog will be displayed informing the user that an Input Curve is missing and to Continue anyway with the Batch Run. The user can choose to ignore the error and continue. If this is done then this curve will be removed from the Monte Carlo input curves.

Section 11.2 Advanced Interpretation : Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1150

Related Topics Batch Monte Carlo Select the required Wells Define the Batch Model Define the Input Curves Define the Output Curves Running the Monte Carlo Batch

11.2.4.4 Define the Output Curves

The output curve setup allows the user to set the output curves that are created in each well. These are the curves that have been set up in the Monte Carlo to have foot by foot statistics generated on them.

If a curve is missing for a well then an Error Dialog will be displayed informing the user that an Output Curve is missing and to Continue anyway with the Batch Run. The user can continue but

Section 11.2 Advanced Interpretation : Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis

1151

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

no statistics will be generated for the missing output curve.

Related Topics Batch Monte Carlo Select the required Wells Define the Batch Model Define the Input Curves Define the Output Curves Running the Monte Carlo Batch 11.2.4.5 Running the Monte Carlo Batch

The 'Run' button starts the batch job. The first thing the module does is to check the input for each well before starting the simulations.

If any errors are found an Error Dialog will be displayed. Below is an example Error Dialog.

The user must fix the problem and then start the batch job again. The error message dialog at the bottom of the window reports the status of the job and whether any errors were found. Right mouse clicking on the dialog will bring up a pop-up menu where the selected messages can be copied into the clipboard for inclusion into another document.

Section 11.2 Advanced Interpretation : Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1152

It is recommended that a test run is made for all wells with 1 or 2 simulations set in the 'Stop simulation at' box so that the user is confident that every thing is setup correctly before setting the final number of simulation runs (2000) and letting the program run for many hours.

'Stop' Button The 'Stop' button will display the following message. The user can either let the current well finish and then the batch job will be aborted or stop the current Monte Carlo run using the 'Stop' on the Monte Carlo count window (see below) to abort the run immediately. The message window will report what has been done.

Related Topics Batch Monte Carlo

Section 11.2 Advanced Interpretation : Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis

1153

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Select the required Wells Define the Batch Model Define the Input Curves Define the Output Curves Running the Monte Carlo Batch

Section 11.2 Advanced Interpretation : Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis

Senergy

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

11.3

1154

Fuzzy Logic Curve Prediction

The Fuzzy Logic Curve Prediction module uses the mathematics of Fuzzy Logic as described by Cuddy, S. (1997) in his paper "The Application of the Mathematics of Fuzzy Logic to Petrophysics" (Paper S. 38th Annual Symposium of the SPWLA), to allow the prediction of a Result curve from a number of Input curves. Fuzzy Logic is a type of logic that recognizes more than just a simple true or false value. With Fuzzy logic , propositions can be represented with degrees of truthfulness or falsehood. The Fuzzy Logic module is arranged on 4 tabs, Input, Create Model, Model Statistics, Run Model These tabs allow the user to set all the curve Inputs, Create the Fuzzy Logic Model, view the Model Statistics and Run Model to generate the Output curve in the subject well. This Chapter describes the Tabs and what the user must do to create the model, evaluate the effectiveness of the model and run the model in a subject well (or wells). To Display the Fuzzy Logic Curve Prediction Module. From the Advanced Interpretation Menu, Select Fuzzy Logic to Display the Fuzzy Logic Curve Prediction Module with the Input Curves Tab Displayed. Alternatively Ctrl+Alt+F on the keyboard can be pressed to Display the Fuzzy Logic Curve Prediction Module.

Section 11.3 Advanced Interpretation : Fuzzy Logic Curve Prediction

1155

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Related Topics Fuzzy Logic Curve Prediction Input Curves to Prediction Model Create Prediction Model Specify Prediction Discriminators Display Prediction Model Statistics Run Prediction Model Equations and Methodology

11.3.1 Input Curves to Prediction Model The Input tab in the Fuzzy Logic Module allows the user to select multiple wells and their associated Input curve names that will be used to build the Prediction Model. Display the Fuzzy Logic Curve Prediction Module.

Section 11.3 Advanced Interpretation : Fuzzy Logic Curve Prediction

Senergy

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1156

Well Name - In the top (Well Name) row of the grid, the user selects the wells needed to create the model. For each well, the user must choose the input curves to be used in the Prediction Model. Curve to Predict - The second row of the grid, Curve to Predict, contains the name of the curve that the user wishes to predict. The Curve to Predict values are sorted in order of value then divided into bins so that all bins have the same number of data. In addition, all Input Curves are divided into the same bin sizes according to Input Curves data at the same depths as Curve to Predict depths. If a well is not to be used in the creation of a model, then leave the Curve to Predict cell blank for that well. In the grid shown above, the Curve to Predict cell is left blank in well Well 2. We are therefore trying to create a model to predict curve PERMCORE in Test Well 3 (Well 2), using the inputs of SGR, RHOB and TNPH. The user can use up to eight input curves per well, in a Prediction run. Input Curves(s) - The Input Curve types should be the consistent for all wells. For

Section 11.3 Advanced Interpretation : Fuzzy Logic Curve Prediction

1157

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

example, all gamma ray logs should be in the same row of the grid, all density log curves should be in the same row of the grid. Note, however that Curve Names can vary from well to well. Default Name Column - The Default Name column is used to identify the selected input curves on other displays. For example, the labels on the Bin Statistics crossplots (see later). The Default Name is also used to indicate whether or not an input curve row should be used in the Prediction model. If the Default Name cell is left blank then the row (and its associated curves) will not be used to build the Prediction model. This is very useful for switching between models without having to re-enter all the curve names for all the wells. For example, the user can enter the curve names for Neutron, Density, Sonic, Gr and Resistivity for multiple wells and then by just blanking out the Default Name, create a much simpler model, using (for example) just the Gr and Density curves. Log Norm Column - The Log Norm column, if set to Yes will normalize the curves in that particular row of the grid. This is done by taking the base 10 logarithm of the curve before using it in the Prediction model. All other displays in the Fuzzy Logic module will then reflect this. For example, when the Log Norm flag is set to Yes, then the minimum and maximum reported values for a curve (See Model Statistics) will be the logarithmic maximum and minimum for that particular input curve. The Top Depth - Model Build and Bottom Depth - Model Build rows are used to limit the depth range of the data used to create a Prediction model. The default top and bottom depths are the log minimum and maximum depths in each selected well. Changing these depth values allows the user to create a Prediction model using only a subset of the selected curve data, for example over an interval where core has been taken. Using the Top Depth - Model Run and Bottom Depth - Model Run rows allows the user to apply the Prediction model to the entire logged interval in the Prediction well. Once a Prediction Model has been built, The Top Depth - Model Run and Bottom Depth - Model Run rows are used to specify the depth interval over which to run the Prediction model in the subject well. The default depths are the log minimum and maximum depths in the well. The Discriminator Curve 1 and Discriminator Curve 2 rows are used to input discriminator curves, which can be used to further constrain the data used in model building and also to restrict which depth intervals to run the model over. The Get Depths from Zones button, in the bottom left-hand corner of the Input tab, launches a Select Depths dialog. The Select Depths dialog provides the user with an alternative way of specifying the depth ranges over which to build or apply the Fuzzy Logic model. To use the dialog you must click the mouse cursor in an appropriate depth entry box

Section 11.3 Advanced Interpretation : Fuzzy Logic Curve Prediction

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1158

(Top Depth / Bottom Depth Model Build or Model Run rows). You then have the option to select a Zone/Tops Set from the drop-down list and use these depths in one well or in multiple wells (click the All Wells button).

The Advanced Well Select Button enables the selection of Wells from the Select Wells Dialog. When the button is clicked a drop down menu is displayed, where the user has the following options.

The Add wells for Model build and Model Run option will select the model build and model run option for the newly selected wells. The Add wells for Model build only option will select only the model build option for the newly selected wells. The model run option will be turned off. The Add wells for Model Run only option will select only the model run option for the newly selected wells. The model build option will be turned off. The Delete Current Wells option removes all the current wells, but leaves the Default curve

Section 11.3 Advanced Interpretation : Fuzzy Logic Curve Prediction

1159

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

names and any model currently in use. This then allows a new group of wells to be easily selected using the other options. Once loaded the current selected model can easily be applied to them. The Report button gives the user the options to either Save Report or Print Report. If Save Report is selected then a Fuzzy.Txt file is saved in the currently loaded database folder. The report can then be viewed on the users screen. Below is a screenshot of part of the saved report. Selecting Print report will send the Fuzzy.Txt directly to the users default printer.

The Reset form button clears all the user defined entries in the module returning the module to its default state. The Load model and Save model buttons allows the loading and saving of models. A model can also be saved using the Save Parameter Set menu item. NOTE: To be able to select curves from a Curve Set the user must first click a cell in the appropriate Well column and then use the Curve Set drop-down menu. Specify Prediction Discriminators

Related Topics Fuzzy Logic Curve Prediction Input Curves to Prediction Model Create Prediction Model Specify Prediction Discriminators Display Prediction Model Statistics Run Prediction Model Equations and Methodology

Section 11.3 Advanced Interpretation : Fuzzy Logic Curve Prediction

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1160

11.3.2 Specify Prediction Discriminators The Discriminators Tab enables the user to specify Discriminators to be used both when the Prediction Model is Built and Run. The DISCRIMINATORS can be used for limiting the data for input into the model and also for limiting the interval over which to run the model. Display the Fuzzy Logic Curve Prediction Module. Click the Discriminators Tab to display the Discriminators Panel.

Specify the required Discriminators for the Prediction Model. Create Prediction Model

Related Topics Fuzzy Logic Curve Prediction Input Curves to Prediction Model Create Prediction Model Specify Prediction Discriminators Display Prediction Model Statistics Run Prediction Model Equations and Methodology

11.3.3 Create Prediction Model The Create Model tab is used to set up the Prediction Model logic and to create a Model. Display the Fuzzy Logic Curve Prediction Module. Click the Create Fuzzy Model Tab to Define the Model Attributes.

Section 11.3 Advanced Interpretation : Fuzzy Logic Curve Prediction

1161

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Input curve data will be divided into a number of data Bins for use in the Model. The number of bins must be between 2 and 100. Two types of bin sorting can be applied : 1. Variable size bins : This is generally used only for discrete input data such as facies numbers. The user must enter the starting bin number and the bin width. The data will then be sorted into bins according to the discrete values of the input data. For example, if you have facies-type data with facies numbers between 1 and 8, then set the number of bins to 8, the starting bin number will be 1 and the bin width will be 1. 2. Equal sampled bins : The program will make a preliminary pass through the input data to calculate the data maxima and minima for all curves. IP will then set the bin spacings so that an equal proportion of data will be placed in each bin. This will not always provide an exactly equal number of samples in each bin. Problems could arise when one has more identical data values than there should be samples in a bin.

Section 11.3 Advanced Interpretation : Fuzzy Logic Curve Prediction

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1162

For example, if one has a dataset with 100 samples and 20 of the samples have the same value, then, if the number of bins is set to 10 (i.e. ten samples per bin) the program can not distribute the data equally into each bin. This will not prevent the Model from running, since the data is handled in the same way as for the Variable size bins. However, the user should be aware of this potential complication when viewing the Model statistics - See below. The Weight bin by number of samples in bin is used in Prediction mode when the Variable size bins option is chosen. The default is to have this box checked. This then adjusts the probability that the data belongs to a bin by the number of samples in the bin. For example, if one is trying to predict facies and the input data are representative of the overall facies distribution, then the probability that a facies exists at a level is also dependent on the overall probability that the facies exists. If the input data are felt not to represent the distribution of facies, for example, you lack data for 1 facies, then uncheck this box will remove the weighting function when calculating the probabilities and better results can be obtained. The Model Set Name is the file name used to save the parameters, when using the Save Parameter Sets menu function. The Run button is used to calculate the statistics for the Prediction model. After the statistics are calculated the program will automatically display the Model Statistics tab.

Related Topics Fuzzy Logic Curve Prediction Input Curves to Prediction Model Create Prediction Model Specify Prediction Discriminators Display Prediction Model Statistics Run Prediction Model Equations and Methodology

11.3.4 Display Prediction Model Statistics The Model Statistics tab displays the results of the Model Build calculations. Statistics are displayed for individual bins (the Bin Number - Bin# is shown in the top left hand cell of the Model Statistics grid). To view the statistics for different bins in the model, use the Scroll Bin statistics left & right arrows. Display the Fuzzy Logic Curve Prediction Module.

Section 11.3 Advanced Interpretation : Fuzzy Logic Curve Prediction

1163

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The Model Statistics are Displayed in the Create Fuzzy Model Tab.

Number Values - shows a count of the data points for each input curve falling within each data bin. The Mean Value, Standard Deviation and Minimum / Maximum Value columns report the statistics for each input curve in the selected data bin. The Show Stats Histos button, when clicked generates a set of histograms for the input curves, for the data in the current data bin. The Bin # is shown in the title line, at the top of the Histogram plot. By clicking the Scroll Bin statistics left-right arrows, the user can scroll through the histograms of the input curves for individual data bins. An example of a histogram plot is shown below:

Section 11.3 Advanced Interpretation : Fuzzy Logic Curve Prediction

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1164

A normal Gaussian distribution line is overlain on the actual input curve data. The vertical green lines represent one Standard Deviation either side of the Mean value (the blue vertical line). To print these histograms, or copy the graphics to the clipboard the user should right mouseclick on the plot and select one of the Print options. The Show Curve Xplots button on the Model Statistics tab, when clicked, produces a set of crossplots of the bin Mean value versus bin number (Bin #) for each input curve. An example is shown below:

Section 11.3 Advanced Interpretation : Fuzzy Logic Curve Prediction

1165

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The green vertical bars represent one Standard Deviation either side of the bin Mean value (the horizontal orange bar). To print or copy the graphics to the clipboard right-mouse-button click on the plot and select the required Print option.

Related Topics Fuzzy Logic Curve Prediction Input Curves to Prediction Model Create Prediction Model Specify Prediction Discriminators Display Prediction Model Statistics Run Prediction Model Equations and Methodology

Section 11.3 Advanced Interpretation : Fuzzy Logic Curve Prediction

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1166

11.3.5 Run Prediction Model The Run Model tab in the Fuzzy Logic Module allows the user to set up the output curves for the Prediction Model and to run the Fuzzy logic model in the Prediction well. Display the Fuzzy Logic Curve Prediction Module. Click the Run Model Tab to Specify the Model Results Attributes.

The Run button will run the model displayed in the Model Statistics tab for all wells specified under the Input tab. The Output curves generated by the model will depend on which Output Result boxes are checked. The output curve names can be selected by checking the Output Result check boxes, next to the Most Likely, 2nd Most Likely and Wt av. 2 most likely labels. Most Likely : The result with the highest probability.

Section 11.3 Advanced Interpretation : Fuzzy Logic Curve Prediction

1167

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

2nd Most Likely : The result with second highest probability. Wt av. 2 most likely : A weighted average of the two most likely results. The following equation is used:

Re sult

Re s _ ml

Pr ob _ ml Re s _ 2l Pr ob _ 2l Pr ob _ ml Pr ob _ 2l

Where: Res_ml = Most Likely result Res_2l = 2nd Most Likely result Prob_ml = Probability of Most Likely result Prob_2l = Probability of the 2nd Most Likely result Probabilities all bins : Checking this box will generate a probability array curve. Each bin will be a different sample in the array. This can be used to make a VDL type plot of probability versus bin number. Most Likely high/low probability : checking this box will generate high (_mlH) and low (_mlL) probability results curves for the Most Likely result. Wt av. 2 most likely high/low probability : checking this box will generate high (_avH) and low (_avL) probability results curves for the weighted average of the two Most Likely results. The output curves, under the Curve Name column heading, are where the results of the model are stored. The values in these curves are the Mean bin values calculated in the model creation. The output curves, under the Probability column heading, give the probability associated with the computed results. This is a relative rather than an absolute probability, and its value does depend on the number of curves used in the model. Therefore, one cannot compare the absolute values of two models created using different numbers of input curves. (See Section 30.5.) The output curves, under the Closeness of fit column heading, provide an indication of how good the results are. The curve compares the result to the original curve, which was used to create the model. The comparison is made on bin distance. For example, if the original curve was in bin 4 and the result is in bin 6 then the Closeness of fit curve will have a value of 2. The result is always positive. If there is no data for the original curve then the Closeness of fit curve will have a null value (-999). No Closeness of fit curve is

Section 11.3 Advanced Interpretation : Fuzzy Logic Curve Prediction

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1168

generated for the weighted average result, since this makes no sense. The output curves, under the Result Bin column header, list the bin numbers of the result curves. This will be the bin number with the highest probability for the Most Likely result. These curves are useful when displaying the probabilities as VDL-type displays. The curve can be plotted on top of the VDL to show which bin has been selected for the result. The Output curves under the Low curve name and High curve name titles give the high / low probability results. See Most Likely Result Range Section, below. The values under the Percentile title give the percentile distance away from the selected result to calculate the high / low probability results. See Most Likely Result Range Section below. The Default Curve Name box is used to change the Output Curve names easily, without having to re-type all curve boxes. The user enters the root part of the output name and clicks Apply. This will change all the output curve names on the tab. The Show Log Plots button will generate a generic plot of the results. An example is displayed below. The Cfit_ml and Cfit_2l curves are displayed as points since the input curve to display, in this example, was core permeability PERM, also plotted as points. Curves can also be written to different Sets by choosing the Output Set name in the Output Results Set box or by creating a new Set by clicking the Add Set button. In multi-well exercise Sets will be automatically created in wells that do not contain the new Set. The Null All output Curves button will set to Null data (absent) all the Output curves from the module. This is useful for clearing the results from a plot before rerunning a model, to ensure that the model is outputting to the correct intervals.

Section 11.3 Advanced Interpretation : Fuzzy Logic Curve Prediction

1169

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

A histogram of the Closeness of fit curve can be easily generated by clicking the right mouse button in the track containing that curve. An example of such a histogram is shown below. From the cumulative frequency curve one can easily see, in this example, that 80% of the results are within 2 bins and 75% are within 1 bin of the Most Likely result.

Section 11.3 Advanced Interpretation : Fuzzy Logic Curve Prediction

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1170

The Show Cross Plot button will generate a generic plot of the results. An example is shown below. The crossplot will seem to be banded since the results have only discrete values (the mean of each bin).

Section 11.3 Advanced Interpretation : Fuzzy Logic Curve Prediction

1171

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Related Topics Fuzzy Logic Curve Prediction Input Curves to Prediction Model Create Prediction Model Specify Prediction Discriminators Display Prediction Model Statistics Run Prediction Model Equations and Methodology

11.3.6 Equations and Methodology The user chooses the number of bins into which the training data is to be divided. The program sorts the training data into roughly equal-sampled bins, starting at the lowest values and extending to the highest. For each data bin the program calculates the Mean (

Section 11.3 Advanced Interpretation : Fuzzy Logic Curve Prediction

) and the

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

Standard Deviation (

1172

) for all the associated curves to be used in the prediction. The Mean

and Standard Deviation values are then used by the program, when run in prediction mode, to find the Most Likely result. To make the prediction, the program first calculates the fuzzy probability that an input log is in a certain bin. The following equation is used for this:

P (Cb )

nb

e

C

2 b

/ 2

2 b

Where P(Cb ) - The probability that curve C is in bin b nb - The number of samples in bin b C - The input value for curve C The mean value for curve C for bin b

bb-

The standard deviation for curve C for bin b

The probabilities for all the input curves are then combined as follows:

1 Pb

1 P (C1b )

1 P(C 2 b )

1 .... P (C 3b )

Where Pb - The total probability for bin b P(C1b) - The probability for curve C1 for bin b The Most Likely solution will be the bin with the highest probability. The program outputs the Most Likely bin result, the second highest probability bin, and a weighted average of these two highest results. The weighting is done as follows:

Rav

Rml

Pml Pml

Rsl Psl

Psl

Where: Rav - Average weighted result Rml - Most likely result Rsl - Second most likely result Pml - Probability of most likely result Psl - Probability of the second most likely result

Most Likely Result Range To give a quantitative feel for the errors in the results, High and Low Result Curves can be generated for the Most Likely and the Weighted Average results. These curves are constructed as follows: At each level the bin probabilities are converted to a normalized (0-1) cumulative frequency distribution.

Section 11.3 Advanced Interpretation : Fuzzy Logic Curve Prediction

1173

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The Result Bin Percentile is found (ResPC). The Low result is the bin that has the percentile ResPc – Er. The High result is the bin that has the percentile ResPc + Er. Where Er is the percentile error entered on the Run Model tab.

The figure above shows an example of how the high and low bin numbers are calculated using a percentile error of 25%. To find the high and low result, extrapolations are made between the bins Mean result values. If the resultant shifted cumulative frequency is outside the normalized range (0–1) then the result value will be the Mean value for the first bin or last bin plus or minus two standard deviations of the spread of data in the bin. This gives some feel for the range of data in the end bin members. The following plot shows the results of the high and low curves in track 2. The heavy red curve is the Most Likely result while the yellow shading gives an indication of the range (fuzziness) of the results. Track 5 contains the bin probabilities plotted as a VDL. The heavy black curve is the position of the Most Likely bin.

Section 11.3 Advanced Interpretation : Fuzzy Logic Curve Prediction

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

Related Topics Fuzzy Logic Curve Prediction Input Curves to Prediction Model Create Prediction Model Specify Prediction Discriminators Display Prediction Model Statistics Run Prediction Model Equations and Methodology

Section 11.3 Advanced Interpretation : Fuzzy Logic Curve Prediction

1174

1175

11.4

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Multiple Linear Regression

The Multiple Linear Regression module allows the user to predict a result curve from a number of input curves, using a least squares regression routine, which will try and find the best fit to the input data. To Display the Multi Linear Regression Module. From the Advanced Interpretation Menu, Select Multi Linear Regression to Display the Multi Linear Regression Module. Alternatively press Ctrl+Alt+R on the keyboard to also Display the Multi Linear Regression Module.

Related Topics Multiple Linear Regression Input Curves to Regression Specify Regression Discriminators Run Regression Model Run Regression Model

Section 11.4 Advanced Interpretation : Multiple Linear Regression

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1176

11.4.1 Input Curves to Regression The Input tab sets up the input curve names to be used. Multiple wells can be used to create the prediction model. Display the Multiple Linear Regression Module The Input Tab will be displayed by default.

Select the wells needed to create the model on the first line of the grid. Once a well is selected, choose the curves to use in the model. The second line of the grid Curve to Predict is the data to be used to create the model. If a well is not to be used in the creation of a model, but only for prediction, then leave the Curve to Predict cell blank. The Default Name column is used to identify the input curve for reference on other displays. It is also used to see if an input curve row should be used in the model. If the Default Name is blank then the row will not be used. This is very useful for switching between models without having to re-enter all the curve names for all the wells. For example, the user can

Section 11.4 Advanced Interpretation : Multiple Linear Regression

1177

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

enter the curve names for Neutron, Density, Sonic, Gr and Resistivity for multiple wells and then by just blanking out the Default Name for a curve, create a much simpler model, using (for example) just the Gr and Sonic curves. The Log column will normalise the curve by taking the base 10 logarithm of the curve before using it. All other displays in the module will then reflect this. The Top Interval Model Build and Bottom Interval Model Build rows are used to limit the data used in the creation of a model. The defaults are the total well depths. They are not used for running a created model. This allows the creation of a model using a subset of the data, and checking of the model on all the data. The Top Interval Model Run and Bottom Interval Model Run rows are used to specify the interval over which to run the model. The defaults are the total well depths. The Show Plot row and button will generate a generic plot of the results. Since the curve to predict in the example below is core permeability Perm it is plotted as points.

The Discriminator Curve 1 and Discriminator Curve 2 rows are used to input discriminator curves which can be used to limit the data used in model building and also restrict which intervals to run the model over. The Get Depths from Zones button, in the bottom left-hand corner of the Input tab,

Section 11.4 Advanced Interpretation : Multiple Linear Regression

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1178

launches a Select Depths dialog. The Select Depths dialog provides the user with an alternative way of specifying the depth ranges over which to build or apply the Multi-linear regression model. To use the dialog you must click the mouse cursor in an appropriate depth entry box (Top Depth / Bottom Depth Model Build or Model Run rows). You then have the option to select a Zone/Tops Set from the drop-down list and use these depths in one well or in multiple wells (click the All Wells button).

The Advanced Well Select Button enables the selection of Wells from the Select Wells Dialog. When the button is clicked a drop down menu is displayed, where the user has the following options.

The Add wells for Model build and Model Run option will select the model build and model run option for the newly selected wells. The Add wells for Model build only option will select only the model build option for the newly selected wells. The model run option will be turned off.

Section 11.4 Advanced Interpretation : Multiple Linear Regression

1179

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The Add wells for Model Run only option will select only the model run option for the newly selected wells. The model build option will be turned off. The Delete Current Wells option removes all the current wells, but leaves the Default curve names and any model currently in use. This then allows a new group of wells to be easily selected using the other options. Once loaded the current selected model can easily be applied to them. The Load model from disk and Save model to disk buttons allow the user to load or save models to / from external disk files. Models can also be saved using the Save Parameter Set menu item. NOTE: To be able to select a Curve Set you first have to select a cell in a well column.

Related Topics Multiple Linear Regression Input Curves to Regression Specify Regression Discriminators Run Regression Model Run Regression Model

11.4.2 Specify Regression Discriminators The Discriminators Tab enables the user to specify Discriminators to be used both when the Regression Model is Built and Run. The DISCRIMINATORS can be used for limiting the data for input into the model and also limiting the interval over which to run the model. Display the Multiple Linear Regression Module Click the Discriminators Tab to display the Discriminators Panel.

Section 11.4 Advanced Interpretation : Multiple Linear Regression

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

Specify the required Discriminators for the Prediction Model. Create Regression Model

Related Topics Multiple Linear Regression Input Curves to Regression Specify Regression Discriminators Run Regression Model Run Regression Model

Section 11.4 Advanced Interpretation : Multiple Linear Regression

1180

1181

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

11.4.3 Create Regression Model The Create Regression Model tab is used to set up the model logic and create a model. Display the Multiple Linear Regression Module

The Create Regression Model tab displays the results of the model creation calculations. The coefficients are displayed, corresponding to each input curve. Norm Coefficients are also displayed to give an indication of how much each input curve affects the model. The closer the normalized coefficient value is to zero for an input curve, the lower its effect on the model build. Conversely, the closer the value is to one, the more important is the curves effect on the model build. Additional information such as the Total number of data points used from the input curves and the R2 (R-squared) value are shown. To obtain the result as a formula, right-click anywhere in the coefficients grid and click the Copy as Formula menu item. This will put the result in the clipboard as a formula and can be pasted into other fields or documents.

Section 11.4 Advanced Interpretation : Multiple Linear Regression

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1182

Related Topics Multiple Linear Regression Input Curves to Regression Specify Regression Discriminators Run Regression Model Run Regression Model

11.4.4 Run Regression Model The Run Model Tab defines the Output Discriminators for the Regression Model.

The Run button will run the model displayed in the Regression Results tab for all wells specified under the Input tab. The Result curve name box is the curve name used when the model is run on the wells entered in the Input tab. This curve can also be output to different sets by choosing the set name in the Output set box or creating a new set by clicking the Add Set button. The Run button is used to calculate the coefficients for the model. The Null All Output Curves button will set to Null data (absent) all the output curves from the module. This is useful for clearing the results from a plot before re-running a model to ensure that the model is outputting to the correct intervals. The Clip resultant curve box will, when checked, restrict the output curve to have values within the minimum and maximum values entered. The Show Crossplot button will generate a generic multi-well crossplot of the results. An example is shown below.

Section 11.4 Advanced Interpretation : Multiple Linear Regression

1183

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Related Topics Multiple Linear Regression Input Curves to Regression Specify Regression Discriminators Run Regression Model Run Regression Model

Section 11.4 Advanced Interpretation : Multiple Linear Regression

Senergy

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

11.5

1184

Neural Networks

The Neural Networks curve prediction module uses neural networks to allow the prediction of a result curve from a number of input curves. A neural network is a mathematical model that is inspired by the way biological nervous systems, such as the brain, process information. It is composed of a number of highly interconnected processing elements (called neurons) which work together to solve the problems presented to it. Neural Networks learn by example, a process known as training the network, which involves adjustments to the synaptic connections that exist between the neurons. The neural network that IP uses is a commercial product by Neuro Solutions - www. neurosolutions.com The IP neural networks are built with NeuroSolutions 5.5. The number of Hidden layers = 1. For further information visit their website at www.neurosolutions.com To Display the Neural Networks Module. From the Advanced Interpretation Menu, Select Neural Networks to Display the Neural Networks Module with the Input Curves Tab Displayed. Alternatively Ctrl+Alt+N on the keyboard can be pressed to Display the Neural Networks Module.

The ‘Neural Networks’ module is arranged on 4 tabs, Input, Training Settings, Discriminators, Model Run Settings.

Section 11.5 Advanced Interpretation : Neural Networks

1185

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Related Topics Neural Networks Input Curves to Neural Networks Module Define the Training Settings Specify the Training Discriminators Training the Neural Network Specify the Model Run Settings Running the Neural Network View Training Results Neural Networks Scenarios

11.5.1 Input Curves to Neural Networks Module The Input tab allows the user to select multiple wells and their associated Input Curve names that will be used to train the Neural Networks Model. Display the Neural Networks Module

Section 11.5 Advanced Interpretation : Neural Networks

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1186

Well Name - In the top (Well Name) row of the grid, the user selects the wells needed to create the model. For each well, the user must choose the input curves to be used by the Neural Network Model. Curve to Predict - The second row of the grid, Curve to Predict, contains the name of the curve that the user wishes to predict. This is only required for wells that the user wishes to train with. Input Curves(s) – The Input Curve rows contain the names of the curves that the user wishes to use to predict the Curve to Predict. The Input Curve types should be the consistent for all wells. For example, all gamma ray logs should be in the same row of the grid, all density log curves should be in the same row of the grid. NOTE: Curve names can

Section 11.5 Advanced Interpretation : Neural Networks

1187

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

vary from well to well. You can use up to eight input curves per well. Default Name column - The Default Name column serves several purposes: 1. The values in the Default Name cells are used as the default curve names when a new well is added to the grid. When a new well is added, if the well contains curves that match the default names then those curves are pre-selected for the user.Each Default Name is automatically filled in the first time a curve is selected for that row, and can be changed manually thereafter. 2. The Curve to Predict default name is used as the name of the output curve if a Curve to Predict has not been supplied for a well. 3. The default names are also used to indicate whether or not an input curve row should be used in the Neural Network Model. If the Default Name cell is left blank then the row (and its associated curves) will not be used to build the model. This is very useful for switching between models without having to re-enter all the curve names for all the wells. For example, the user can enter the curve names for Neutron, Density, Sonic, Gr and Resistivity for multiple wells and then by just blanking out the Default Name, create a much simpler model, using (for example) just the Gr and Density curves. Log Column - The Log column, if checked will take the base 10 logarithm of the curve before using it in the Neural Network Model. For curve data which is in logarithmic form (such as core permeability) this can greatly improve the accuracy of the predicted results. Use Well for Training’ – If this is checked for a well then the data from that well will be used when training the Neural Network. This (in conjunction with ‘Use Well for Model Run’) allows the user to include both wells that they wish to train on and wells that they wish to predict in the same model. Zone Set for Training’ – Neural network training is performed on ‘zones’ of data (see the Training section for more details). For this purpose special Neural Training Zones Sets are used. Use this drop-down box to select an existing Neural Training Zones Set, or type a new name to create a new one. The specified zone Set is created when the ‘Show Plot for Training’ button is clicked. Show Plot for Training’ – this button opens a Training log plot window for the appropriate well. See the Training section for more details. Use Well for Model Run’ – If this is checked for a well then an output curve will be predicted for that well when the neural network model is run. Top Depth and Bottom Depth – These rows are used to specify the depth interval over which to run the Neural Network Model in the subject well. The default depths are the log minimum and maximum depths in the well. These depths can be changed with the Get

Section 11.5 Advanced Interpretation : Neural Networks

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1188

Depths from Zones button, or by manually entering new values. Show Plot for Model Run’ – this button opens a log plot window for the appropriate well which shows the input curves and the output curve for the appropriate well. NOTE: If the model has not yet been run for the well, this will just show the input curves. The Get Depths from Zones button, in the bottom left-hand corner of the Input tab, launches a Select Depths dialog. The Select Depths dialog provides the user with an alternative way of specifying the depth ranges over which to run the Neural Network Model. If the Full Well Range box is checked then the Zone/Top Set, Top and Bottom boxes are grayed out as the full well range will be used. To select zones then uncheck the Full Well Range box the user then has the option to select a Zone/Tops Set from the drop-down list and use these depths in one well or in multiple wells (click the All Wells button).

The Advanced Well Select Button enables the selection of Wells from the Select Wells Dialog. When the button is clicked a drop down menu is displayed, where the user has the following options.

Section 11.5 Advanced Interpretation : Neural Networks

1189

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The Add wells for Model build and Model Run option will select the model build and model run option for the newly selected wells. The Add wells for Model build only option will select only the model build option for the newly selected wells. The model run option will be turned off. The Add wells for Model Run only option will select only the model run option for the newly selected wells. The model build option will be turned off. The Delete Current Wells option removes all the current wells, but leaves the Default curve names and any model currently in use. This then allows a new group of wells to be easily selected using the other options. Once loaded the current selected model can easily be applied to them. The Load Setup and Save Setup buttons allows the loading and saving of models. This remembers all the settings on the Neural Networks form. The Report button allows the user to print or save a report on the status of the neural network (Well details, Training Settings, Training Results and Model Run Settings). The button has two options when clicked; Save Report, which saves the report as a text file, and Print Report, which allows the report to be output directly to a printer. NOTE: To be able to select curves from a Curve Set the user must first click a cell in the appropriate Well column and then use the Curve Set drop-down menu.

Related Topics Neural Networks Input Curves to Neural Networks Module Define the Training Settings Specify the Training Discriminators Training the Neural Network Specify the Model Run Settings Running the Neural Network View Training Results Neural Networks Scenarios

Section 11.5 Advanced Interpretation : Neural Networks

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

11.5.2 Define the Training Settings The Training settings Tab of the Neural Networks Dialog provides the ability to specify the Training Zones and Parameters required when Training the Neural Network.

Related Topics Neural Networks Input Curves to Neural Networks Module Define the Training Settings Specify the Training Discriminators Training the Neural Network Specify the Model Run Settings

Section 11.5 Advanced Interpretation : Neural Networks

1190

1191

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Running the Neural Network View Training Results Neural Networks Scenarios

11.5.3 Specify the Training Discriminators The Discriminators Tab enables the user to specify Discriminators to be used when the Model is Run. The DISCRIMINATORS can be used for limiting the data for input into the model and also for limiting the interval over which to run the model.

Related Topics Neural Networks Input Curves to Neural Networks Module Define the Training Settings Specify the Training Discriminators Training the Neural Network Specify the Model Run Settings Running the Neural Network View Training Results Neural Networks Scenarios

Section 11.5 Advanced Interpretation : Neural Networks

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1192

11.5.4 Training the Neural Network To train the neural network click the ‘Train Neural Network’ button which appears at the top-left of each Training log plot window. A progress bar will appear showing the progress of the training. If large training zones are used the training may take a few moments to complete. Once the training is complete, each open Training log plot window will show a new curve (suffixed with ‘_nnt’ for neural network training) alongside the existing ‘Curve to Predict’. These curves allow the user to see how well the neural network has been trained. If there are areas where the network has not trained well try creating additional zones in those areas and training again. NOTE: that these ‘_nnt’ curves are temporary and will be removed when the Neural Networks form is closed. NOTE: that the results can be different each time the neural network is trained, even if the input data and training zones have not been changed. This is due to the fact that each training run begins with randomised settings and this is normal behaviour for a neural network. As such, it can often be helpful to train the network several times to see if the results vary each time and decide which results fit best. To aid this approach each training run can be ‘undone’ with the ‘ Undo Training’ button if the user decides that the results are ‘worse’ than the last training run. Once the user is happy with the training results they can, if desired, save the trained neural network model by clicking the ‘Save Model’ button. This saves the neural network’s trained state to a file, which can be re-used for subsequent model runs (see the Model Run Settings tab). The last trained model can also be saved in the ‘Model Run Settings’ tab. For each well that the user wishes to use to train the neural network the following steps should be performed: 1. Select the ‘Curve to Predict’. 2. Select the ‘Input Curves’. 3. Make sure the well’s ‘Use Well for Training’ entry is ticked. 4. Either select an existing ‘Training Zones Set or enter the name of a new Set that you wish to create. 5. Click the well’s ’Show Plot for Training’ to bring up the well’s Training log plot window. NOTE: The Training log plot is a specialised version of a normal plot window with some of the more advanced options removed, but new neural network specific buttons added. 6. On the Training log plot window, create zones (in the second log plot track) that contain representative examples of ‘good’ data. The data within these zones is what will be used to train the neural network. 7. For most purposes a small number (4-8) of narrow zones is enough to generate good

Section 11.5 Advanced Interpretation : Neural Networks

1193

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

results. See the Neural Networks Scenarios section for more details. NOTE: that in Training log plots, zones can be created simply be clicking in the zone track.

Once training zones have been created for all training wells the neural network can be trained. NOTE: that if any of the training wells do not contain training zones a warning message will appear and the training will not start.

Related Topics Neural Networks Input Curves to Neural Networks Module Define the Training Settings Specify the Training Discriminators Training the Neural Network Specify the Model Run Settings Running the Neural Network View Training Results Neural Networks Scenarios

Section 11.5 Advanced Interpretation : Neural Networks

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1194

11.5.5 Specify the Model Run Settings The Model Run Settings tab is used to specify various options that are used when running the neural network with the ‘Run Model for selected Wells’ button:

Output_Curve Suffix’ – This is appended to the output curve’s name so that the curve can be easily identified. The Overwrite existing output curves? check-box gives the user the ability to overwrite output curves from an old Neural Network session with curves from a more recent session. Output Result Set’ – Output curves can be written to different Sets by choosing the output Set name in the Output Results Set box or by creating a new Set by clicking the Add Set

Section 11.5 Advanced Interpretation : Neural Networks

1195

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

button. NOTE: In multi-well exercise Sets will be automatically created in wells that do not contain the new Set. Closeness of Fit Curve - Output curve displayed on the log plots which gives the user an idea of how close the predicted curve was to the original data. Round output to nearest integer?’ – This option will round all data in the output curves to the nearest whole number. This provides an alternative method of predicting Facies data. Overwrite existing output curves’ – This specifies whether to overwrite existing curves with the same name or not. For example: predicting a RHOB curve will create an output curve called RHOB_nn. If this option is ticked, predicting again will overwrite the existing RHOB_nn curve. If this option is not ticked then predicting again will create a RHOB1_nn curve, with the next run creating RHOB2_nn.......etc. Use the last trained model’ – Selecting this option instructs the neural network to use the last trained model when creating output curves. This option will not be available if the neural network has not been trained since opening the neural networks form. Save Model’ - - This saves the last trained model to a file, which can be re-used for subsequent model runs. Load Model’ – User can browse for a saved model.

Related Topics Neural Networks Input Curves to Neural Networks Module Define the Training Settings Specify the Training Discriminators Training the Neural Network Specify the Model Run Settings Running the Neural Network View Training Results Neural Networks Scenarios

11.5.6 Running the Neural Network For each well that the user wishes to run the neural network on the following steps should be performed: 1. Select the ‘Input Curves’. 2. Make sure the well’s ‘Use Well for Model Run’ entry is ticked. 3. Make sure the well’s Top Depth and Bottom Depth are correct.

Section 11.5 Advanced Interpretation : Neural Networks

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1196

Once the user is happy they can click the ‘Run Model for selected Wells’ button located at the lower-right of the ‘Input’ tab. A progress bar will appear showing the progress of the model run. Once the progress bar disappears the model run is complete.

The resulting output curves can be viewed by clicking the appropriate well’s ‘Show Plot for Model Run’ Show Plot button.

Related Topics Neural Networks Input Curves to Neural Networks Module Define the Training Settings Specify the Training Discriminators Training the Neural Network

Section 11.5 Advanced Interpretation : Neural Networks

1197

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Specify the Model Run Settings Running the Neural Network View Training Results Neural Networks Scenarios

11.5.7 View Training Results Additional Buttons Report - There are two options available View Report - this displays a text file of the Neural Networks Prediction Parameters similar to the one in the screenshot below:

An explanation of the Training Results displayed in the report is given below: Epochs Trained - number of epochs actually performed in that training pass, which may not be the same as the epochs per pass requested as the training may have decided to stop because cross-validation showed it was beginning to over train. Epoch of Best Cost - if present this shows which epoch produced the best results for that training pass. This is for information only and isn’t really of any practical use. If not present it

Section 11.5 Advanced Interpretation : Neural Networks

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1198

means that this training pass did not improve on the previous one. Best Cost - if present this shows the minimum error that was achieved in the training pass (the lower the better). This is the error that was achieved during the Epoch of Best Cost. Raw Sensitivity - shows the sensitivity of each input - basically how much affect each input has on the output. If all sensitivities are of the same magnitude then all inputs are equally important, but if for example one input is significantly lower than the rest (e.g. 5, 6, 0.1, 5.5) then you could probably exclude that input without adversely affecting the results, and it may in fact improve the results. Print Report - Sends the text file of the Neural Networks Prediction Parameters to the users default printer. Reset Setup - this will clear all the input wells and resets other options to their default settings. Load Setup - loads a saved Neural Network setup from a user defined location. Save Setup - saves a Neural Network setup to a user defined location. The file is saved by default as NeuralNetworks.nns into the IP project folder.

Related Topics Neural Networks Input Curves to Neural Networks Module Define the Training Settings Specify the Training Discriminators Training the Neural Network Specify the Model Run Settings Running the Neural Network View Training Results Neural Networks Scenarios

11.5.8 Neural Networks Scenarios This topic outlines specific Neural Networks Scenarios, Continuous Log Prediction, Core Porosity Prediction and Facies Prediction.

Continuous Log Prediction The following advice applies to predicting continuous log curves: When creating training zones, create a small zone for each distinct ‘lithology’ evident in each curve.

Section 11.5 Advanced Interpretation : Neural Networks

1199

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

A small number of zones (4-8) is often enough to produce good results. If certain ‘lithologies’ are not predicting well, try adding additional zones within the affected ‘lithologies’. Remember to select zones that represent examples of ‘good’ data. Ignore areas of obviously incorrect data. Do not use a classification network. Do not round the output. Using a single average value from each zone may be applicable if a large number of small zones are created.

Core Porosity Prediction The following advice applies to predicting core porosty curves: Create a single training zone that covers all of the core data. This is safe as input values that do not contain any core data will be automatically ignored during training. Do not use a classification network. Do not round the output. Do not use a single average value from each zone.

Facies Prediction There are two ways to predict Facies data: 1. Using a classification network: Enable the classification network option on the Training Settings tab. Do not round the output. Do not use a single average value from each zone. NOTE: that the classification network can predict a maximum of 10 categories of Facies. 2. Rounding the output curves Enable the Round output to the nearest integer option on the Model Run Settings tab. Do not use a classification network. Do not use a single average value from each zone.

Related Topics Neural Networks Input Curves to Neural Networks Module Define the Training Settings

Section 11.5 Advanced Interpretation : Neural Networks

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

Specify the Training Discriminators Training the Neural Network Specify the Model Run Settings Running the Neural Network View Training Results Neural Networks Scenarios

Section 11.5 Advanced Interpretation : Neural Networks

1200

1201

11.6

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Cluster Analysis for Rock Typing

The Cluster Analysis module uses standard statistical routines to allow the user to cluster the data into groups to produce an electrical facies log. This log can then hopefully be used to correlate to geological facies. To Display the Cluster Analysis Module. From the Advanced Interpretation Menu, Select Cluster Analysis to Display the Cluster Analysis Module with the Input Curves Tab Displayed. Alternatively Ctrl+Alt+T on the keyboard can be pressed to Display the Cluster Analysis Module.

The Cluster Analysis module is a arranged on six tabs: Input, Discriminators, Cluster Means, Cluster Consolidation, Cluster Output, Crossplot These tabs allow the user to set all the curve inputs, determine the number of clusters and the clustering method, to generate the cluster output in the subject well or wells. The following sections describe the Tabs and what the user must do to create the model, evaluate the effectiveness of the model and run the model in a subject well (or wells).

Related Topics Cluster Analysis Input Curves for Cluster Analysis Specify Cluster Analysis Discriminators Specify Cluster Means Define Cluster Consolidation

Section 11.6 Advanced Interpretation : Cluster Analysis for Rock Typing

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1202

Define the Cluster Output Cluster Analysis Crossplot Theory of Cluster Analysis

11.6.1 Input Curves for Cluster Analysis The Input tab allows the user to select multiple wells and their associated Input Curve names that will be used for clustering. Below is a multiple screenshot showing one way in which the columns can be populated. However, other ways of populating the grid are possible. One way is to select the Well from the drop-down box then select the curve, again from a drop-down list. The Use Curve and Default Name columns will auto-populate.

Use Curve - check this column to select a curve to be used in the cluster analysis. All Curves can be Selected or De-Selected using the Column Header Arrow. This is very useful for switching between models without having to re-enter all the curve names for all the wells. For example, the user can enter the curve names for Neutron, Density, Sonic, Gr and Resistivity for multiple wells and then by just un-checking the Use Curve, create a much simpler model, using (for example) just the Gr and Density curves.

Section 11.6 Advanced Interpretation : Cluster Analysis for Rock Typing

1203

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Default Name column - Each Default Name is automatically filled in the first time a curve is selected for that row, and can be changed manually thereafter. The values in the Default Name cells are used as the default curve names when a new well is added to the grid. When a new well is added, if the well contains curves that match the default names then those curves are pre-selected for the user. Log column - if checked will take the base 10 logarithm of the curve before using it in the cluster analysis. For curve data which is in logarithmic form (such as core permeability) this can greatly improve the accuracy of the predicted results. Well column - in the top (Well Name) row of the grid, the user selects the wells needed to create the model. For each well, the user must choose the input curves to be used by the cluster analysis module. Input Curve rows - contain the names of the curves that the user wishes to use for cluster analysis. The Input Curve types should be the consistent for all wells. For example, all gamma ray logs should be in the same row of the grid, all density log curves should be in the same row of the grid. NOTE: Curve names can vary from well to well. You can use up to eight input curves per well. Clicking on the arrow next to the Input Curve after first entering a Default Name and checking the Use Curve column will auto-populate all the selected wells in that row with the curve name associated with the Default Name curve type. Use Well for Model Build - if this is checked then the data from that well will be used in the cluster analysis model build. Top Depth and Bottom Depth – these rows are used to specify the depth interval over which to run the cluster analysis in the subject well. The default depths are the log minimum and maximum depths in the well. These depths can be changed with the Get Depths from Zones button, or by manually entering new values. Use Well for Model Run - if this is checked then the data from that well will be used in the cluster analysis model run. Show Plot - this button opens a log plot window for the appropriate well which shows as default; the input curves, cluster distribution curve and the facies clustering results curves each in a separate track. NOTE: If the model has not yet been run for the well then this will just show the input curves. Discriminator Crv1 and Discriminator Crv2 rows are used to input discriminator curves, which can be used to further constrain the data used in model building and also to restrict which depth intervals to run the model over.

Section 11.6 Advanced Interpretation : Cluster Analysis for Rock Typing

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1204

The Get Depths from Zones button, in the bottom left-hand corner of the Input tab, launches a Select Depths dialog. The Select Depths dialog provides the user with an alternative way of specifying the depth ranges over which to run the cluster analysis Model. If the Full Well Range box is checked then the Zone/Top Set, Top and Bottom boxes are grayed out as the full well range will be used. To select zones then uncheck the Full Well Range box the user then has the option to select a Zone/Tops Set from the dropdown list and use these depths in one well or in multiple wells (click the All Wells button).

The Advanced Well Select Button enables the selection of Wells from the Select Wells Dialog. When the button is clicked a drop down menu is displayed, where the user has the following options.

The Add wells for Model build and Model Run option will select the model build and model run option for the newly selected wells. The Add wells for Model build only option will select only the model build option for the newly selected wells. The model run option will be turned off.

Section 11.6 Advanced Interpretation : Cluster Analysis for Rock Typing

1205

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The Add wells for Model Run only option will select only the model run option for the newly selected wells. The model build option will be turned off. The Delete Current Wells option removes all the current wells, but leaves the Default curve names and any model currently in use. This then allows a new group of wells to be easily selected using the other options. Once loaded the current selected model can easily be applied to them. Use Custom Plot Format - if this is checked then it allows the user to type in or browse for a saved plot format that they wish to use. Report - this has two options Print or File. Selecting Print will send the ClusterAnalysis. txt file directly to the users default printer. The File option will save ClusterAnalysis.txt to the currently loaded database folder. Multi-well Plot - creates a multi-well plot, in the Well Correlation Viewer module, of the currently selected Model Run wells. This is very useful for comparing clustering results. The Reset form button clears all the user defined entries in the Input tab of the module, returning this tab to its default state. The Load model and Save model buttons allows the loading and saving of models. A model can also be saved using the Save Parameter Set menu item.

Related Topics Cluster Analysis Input Curves for Cluster Analysis Specify Cluster Analysis Discriminators Specify Cluster Means Define Cluster Consolidation Define the Cluster Output Cluster Analysis Crossplot Theory of Cluster Analysis

11.6.2 Specify Cluster Analysis Discriminators The DISCRIMINATORS can be used for limiting the data for input into the model and also limiting the interval over which to run the model.

Section 11.6 Advanced Interpretation : Cluster Analysis for Rock Typing

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1206

Related Topics Cluster Analysis Input Curves for Cluster Analysis Specify Cluster Analysis Discriminators Specify Cluster Means Define Cluster Consolidation Define the Cluster Output Cluster Analysis Crossplot Theory of Cluster Analysis

11.6.3 Specify Cluster Means The Cluster Means tab is used to run the K-mean clustering on the data. The data used is from all wells selected from ‘Model Build’ on the ‘Input’ tab. In order to calculate the clusters the ‘Mean values for each curve and each cluster must be initialized with some value. The initialization can be done in three ways: manually type numbers into the grid, click the ‘Seed Clusters’ button, use the ‘Crossplot’ button to interactively move pre-assigned points. If wanting to use the interactive crossplot it is best to use the ‘Seed Clusters’ as a starting point for the points on the crossplot. The ‘Seed Clusters’ button seeds the grid by performing a principal component analysis on the

Section 11.6 Advanced Interpretation : Cluster Analysis for Rock Typing

1207

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

input data. The results are sorted and the data is divided up equally into the required number of clusters using the Number of Clusters box. The input data in each cluster is then averaged to give the mean seed points. The screenshot below shows the mean values after clicking on the Seed Clusters’ button.

Once the Mean columns are filled with values click on the Run Clustering to fill the rest of the grid. An error message like this may appear;

If this happens then re-run the clustering again to get a similar result to the screenshot below.

Section 11.6 Advanced Interpretation : Cluster Analysis for Rock Typing

Senergy

Advanced Interpretation

1208

If a row has a small value in the # Points column then the row can be selected by clicking in the Mean column of the row to be deleted and then clicking on the Delete Row button. Clicking the Crossplot button displays the Multi-Curve Crossplot module.

Section 11.6 Advanced Interpretation : Cluster Analysis for Rock Typing

1209

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

In the Multi-Curve Crossplot Module that has been launched from the Cluster Analysis Module, the drop-down box in the top right corner allows the user to select from the different cluster Sets which have been created in the Cluster Consolidation tab. The Z axis and cluster mean colour bars will change to reflect the Set chosen. The colours and values of the cluster Sets can be changed in the Cluster Output tab. Z axis colors from "All Clusters" set - if this is checked then the Z axis colours set up in the Cluster Output tab for the All Clusters Set will be used even if a different User set is selected in the drop-down box. This is very useful for quickly comparing the differences between cluster Sets. Edit Cluster means - only if this is checked is the user able to move the cluster mean points interactively on the crossplots using the mouse cursor. When the cluster is released, after moving it with the mouse, the mean value on other crossplots with the same X and Y axis will update. The mean values in the Cluster Means tab will also update. Display only Selected - allows the user to display selected clusters. To select a cluster click on the Show cell next to the cluster to be displayed. To select all the clusters click on the Show cell itself. To deselect all the clusters click on the Show cell again Auto Update - having this checked means that any changes to selected wells or clusters

Section 11.6 Advanced Interpretation : Cluster Analysis for Rock Typing

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1210

will take effect immediately. However, if there are many wells and clusters the crossplots may be slow in refreshing. In this case it may be better to uncheck the box and use the Update button for applying changes. Display Cluster Means - Unchecking this will remove the cluster mean points from the crossplots. Display Z Axis Colors - if this is un-checked then all the cluster mean points are displayed in blue. NOTE: if the Run Clustering hasnt been run then all the crossplots points will be in blue and there will be no horizontal Z axis colour bar visible at the bottom of the module screen. It is possible to edit the displayed Z axis cluster colours by selecting different colours from the drop-down list. The Z axis colours for each individual cluster can also be turned on or off by checking the Show column. For any changes to take affect click the Update button, if the Auto Update is un-checked. Wells Z Axis - checking this box allows the user to view the cluster data with the Z axis displaying the well colour instead of the cluster colour. The cluster mean circle for each cluster remains visible depending on if it has been selected.

Related Topics Cluster Analysis Input Curves for Cluster Analysis Specify Cluster Analysis Discriminators Specify Cluster Means Define Cluster Consolidation Define the Cluster Output Cluster Analysis Crossplot Theory of Cluster Analysis

11.6.4 Define Cluster Consolidation Once the K-mean clustering is completed the user normally ends up with more clusters than can be justified geologically. The next step in the analysis is to consolidate the clusters into meaningful groups. This is done either manually by assigning clusters to groups using the crossplot or log plot displays or automatically by using hierarchical clustering on the individual clusters using the Cluster Consolidation Tab. The automatic grouping is done by using a hierarchical clustering technique and then specifying the number of groups wanted in the Number of cluster groups box. A Cluster Grouping Dendrogram plot shows how the

Section 11.6 Advanced Interpretation : Cluster Analysis for Rock Typing

1211

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

clusters are grouped hierarchically.

There are 5 different clustering methods which can give quite radically different results. The Dendrogram can be saved to Printer, File or Clipboard using the Output Dendrogram button. Cluster groupings can be copied to the Cluster Output tab using the Copy clusters to User set box for the creation of facies curves. This allows the user to plot different groupings on a log plot to try and determine which is more geologically feasible. NOTE: there is a maximum number of User sets which is seven, as this is the number allowed in the Cluster Output tab. A Cluster Randomness Plot’ can be used to help select the number of groups. This plot shows how random the clustering is in comparison to a completely random arrangement of clusters.

Section 11.6 Advanced Interpretation : Cluster Analysis for Rock Typing

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1212

Related Topics Cluster Analysis Input Curves for Cluster Analysis Specify Cluster Analysis Discriminators Specify Cluster Means Define Cluster Consolidation Define the Cluster Output Cluster Analysis Crossplot Theory of Cluster Analysis

11.6.5 Define the Cluster Output The ‘Cluster Output’ tab allows the creation of the cluster curves in the wells. It also allows the manual editing of cluster groups and the shading colours on the output plots. NOTE: users should not use colours with shading i.e. bitmaps as the crossplot program wont be able to recognise the bitmap and will supply an alternative colour.

Section 11.6 Advanced Interpretation : Cluster Analysis for Rock Typing

1213

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Null all output curves before running calculations - will set to Null data (absent) all the output curves from the module. This is useful for clearing the results from a plot before rerunning a model to ensure that the model is outputting to the correct intervals. Copy Selected Column - click in the column that you want to copy (either the Value or Shading column) and enter a User Set number and then click the Copy Selected Column button. Apart from creating copies of cluster Sets this is also a useful way of clearing unwanted results by selecting an empty User Set and then copying it to the unwanted User Set. Cluster Distance output curve - this is the distance between clusters that was calculated from the Clustering Method selected from the Cluster Consolidation tab. Output Curves - to create the output curves, which then can be plotted either in the Multiwell Plot or from the Input tab Show Plot, this button MUST be clicked. Output Curve set - the output curve Set for the Cluster Analysis output curves can be

Section 11.6 Advanced Interpretation : Cluster Analysis for Rock Typing

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1214

changed here. An existing Set can be selected from the drop-down menu or a new Set created using the Edit button and the Add Set Names module. In the screenshot below, four wells have been selected from the same field. K-mean clustering has been performed with an initial 15 clusters - the L_FaciesAll. The L_Facies used the same Clustering Method but was restricted to 11 cluster groups. The L_Facies2 used 8 cluster groups and the L_Facies3 used 5 cluster groups. The program attempts to keep similar colours and values for the cluster groups in order to keep the log plots looking broadly similar.

To view the results of the clustering click the Output Curves button and then click the Multiwell Plot button. This opens up the Multi-Well Correlation Plot with a default facies plot for each of the wells selected.

Section 11.6 Advanced Interpretation : Cluster Analysis for Rock Typing

1215

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Alternatively, the user could go to the Input tab and select Show Plot for one of the wells and a single well facies plot will be displayed.

Related Topics Cluster Analysis Input Curves for Cluster Analysis Specify Cluster Analysis Discriminators Specify Cluster Means Define Cluster Consolidation Define the Cluster Output Cluster Analysis Crossplot Theory of Cluster Analysis

11.6.6 Cluster Analysis Crossplot The Crossplot scales for each of the selected curves can be changed here and the multi-curve Crossplot can be opened by clicking the Crossplot button.

Section 11.6 Advanced Interpretation : Cluster Analysis for Rock Typing

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

Related Topics Cluster Analysis Input Curves for Cluster Analysis Specify Cluster Analysis Discriminators Specify Cluster Means Define Cluster Consolidation Define the Cluster Output Cluster Analysis Crossplot Theory of Cluster Analysis

Section 11.6 Advanced Interpretation : Cluster Analysis for Rock Typing

1216

1217

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

11.6.7 Theory of Cluster Analysis The module works in two stages. Firstly, the data is divided up into manageable data clusters. The number of clusters should be enough to cover all the different data ranges seen on the logs. 15 to 20 clusters would appear to be a reasonable number for most data sets. The second step, which is more manual, is to take these 15 to 20 clusters and group them into a manageable number of geological facies. This may involve reducing the data to 4 to 5 clusters.

Stage-1 K-mean clustering The first stage of Facies Clustering uses the K-mean statistical technique to cluster the data into a known entered number of clusters. For this to work an initial guess has to be made of the mean value of each cluster for each input log. The initial guess can affect the results and in order to get good results the initial values should cover the total range of the logs. The initial guesses can be manually entered in the K-mean table of the Cluster Means tab or the automatic seeding option can be used - Seed Clusters button of the Cluster Means tab. The automatic seeding option works by calculating the first principal component log of the data. This will normally contain most of the variation in the data and hence is an ideal way to seed the data to give maximum coverage in the seeded values. Once the principal component log is calculated the data is sorted. The data is then divided up equally into the number of wanted clusters. From the data in each cluster the average value for each log is calculated and this value is used as the seed point. K-mean clustering works by assigning each input data point to a cluster. The routine tries to minimize the within-cluster sums of squares of the difference between the data point and the cluster mean value. The routine works by calculating the sum of the squares difference for a data point and each cluster mean and assigning the point to the cluster with the minimum difference. Once all the data points have been assigned to the clusters the new mean values in each cluster are calculated. Using the new mean values the routines starts again re-assigning the data to the clusters. This loop continues until the mean values do not change between loops. These then become the results. All input log data is normalized (standardized) before starting so that each input log has the same dynamic range. The normalization is done by calculating the mean and standard deviation of the log and then normalizing the data by subtracting the mean and dividing by the standard deviation. Hence a normalized log data value of 1.0 or -1.0 will be one standard deviation. The Cluster Means grid shows the mean values plus other statistics.

Section 11.6 Advanced Interpretation : Cluster Analysis for Rock Typing

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1218

# Points : This is the number of data levels in each cluster. Cluster Spread : Within each cluster this is the standard deviation of the distance of each data point from the cluster mean (units are

standard deviation of the original data).

Hence, the lower this value the tighter the data is clustered around its mean value. Mean : This is the mean value of the log for the cluster in units of the input log (i.e. unnormalized). Std Dev. : This is the standard deviation of the data in a cluster for the log. This allows the user to see for an individual log how its data is grouped in an individual cluster. Large standard deviations for all clusters would indicate that this log bears little influence on which cluster the data is assigned to and could probably be excluded from the input with little change in the results.

Stage-2 Cluster Consolidation Cluster consolidation can be done completely manually by using the crossplot and log plot output to group data, or a hierarchical cluster technique can be used to group the data. Hierarchical clustering works by computing the distances between all clusters and then merging the two clusters closest together. The new cluster distance to all other clusters is then recomputed and the two closest clusters merged again. This process continues until you have only one cluster. The results can be plotted as a dendrogram, which IP displays. The dendrogram shows how the clusters were merged and the order they were merged. The

Section 11.6 Advanced Interpretation : Cluster Analysis for Rock Typing

1219

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

numbers at the top of each branch give the merging order. The original results from the K-mean clustering are shown at the base of the plot.

IP has five different clustering methods which decide how the clusters are merged. The different methods will show considerably different results. The default method Minimize the withincluster sum of squares distance gives good results for separating out the different log lithologies into different clusters. The five methods differ in how the distance calculation is updated after two cluster have been joined. If we assume, in the diagram below, cluster "A" and "B" have just been joined to form cluster "Z", and we need to calculate the distance of "Z" with another cluster called "C". For the different techniques the calculations are made as follows:

Minimum distance between all objects in clusters - the distance from Z to C is the minimum of the distances (A to C, B to C). Maximum distance between all objects in clusters - the distance from Z to C is the maximum of the distances (A to C, B to C). Average distance between merged clusters - the distance from Z to C is the average

Section 11.6 Advanced Interpretation : Cluster Analysis for Rock Typing

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1220

distance of all objects that would be within the cluster formed by merging clusters and C. Average distance between all objects in clusters - the distance from Z to C is the average distance of objects within cluster Z to objects within cluster C. Minimize the within-cluster sum of squares distance - clusters are formed so as to minimize the increase in the within-cluster sums of squares. The distance between two clusters is the increase in these sums of squares if the two clusters were merged. In general, Minimum distance between all objects in clusters will yield long thin clusters while Maximum distance between all objects in clusters will yield clusters that are more spherical. Average distance between merged clusters and Minimize the within-cluster sum of squares distance tend to yield clusters that are similar to those obtained with Average distance between all objects in clusters. The grouping of the clusters into a known number of groups is easily done by stopping the grouping at a certain cutoff level. In IP, the dendrogram automatically colours each grouping in a different colour. The groupings above the cutoff are in black. The following plot shows a cutoff at 5 groups.

It is possible to analyse the groupings to decide at which level adding another cluster gives more information or is just adding noise. The Cluster Randomness Plot provides this information.

Section 11.6 Advanced Interpretation : Cluster Analysis for Rock Typing

1221

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The chart calculates for each number of cluster groups the perceived randomness of the data. The higher the value the less random the clusters are - i.e. more structured data. The randomness is calculated by first calculating the average number of depth levels per cluster - i.e. the average thickness of a cluster layer. This is performed on the original log data. Then the theoretical average thickness is calculated assuming the clusters to be assigned randomly at each depth level. The randomness is the ratio of the two. A value of 1 would be totally random, higher values less random. Av. Thickness = Number of depth levels / Number of cluster layers Random Thickness =

pi / (1 – pi)

Where pi is the proportion of depth levels assigned to the ith cluster. Randomness index = Av. Thickness / Random Thickness The plot is interpreted by picking the number of clusters that are least random (highest peaks). In the above example, a cluster grouping of 6 or perhaps 10 would seem to give the most likely information into the grouping of the log data. For more information on Cluster Analysis techniques a good starting point is Multivariate Pattern Recognition and Classification Methods, Geological Log Analysis Using Computer Methods, J.H Doveton.

Related Topics Cluster Analysis Input Curves for Cluster Analysis

Section 11.6 Advanced Interpretation : Cluster Analysis for Rock Typing

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

Specify Cluster Analysis Discriminators Specify Cluster Means Define Cluster Consolidation Define the Cluster Output Cluster Analysis Crossplot Theory of Cluster Analysis

Section 11.6 Advanced Interpretation : Cluster Analysis for Rock Typing

1222

1223

11.7

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Principal Component Analysis

Principal component analysis (PC) is a technique used to reduce multidimensional data sets to lower dimensions for analysis. This technique can be useful in Petrophysics and Geology as a preliminary method of combining multiple logs in to a single or two logs without losing information. The PC curves then can be used for various tasks like multi-well tops correlation and regression analysis. To Display the Principal Component Analysis Module: From the Advanced Interpretation Module Menu, Select Principal Component Analysis. Alternatively, press Ctrl+Alt+A on the keyboard to display the Principal Component Analysis Module.

Related Topics Principal Component Analysis Input Curves for Principal Component Analysis Specify Principal Component Analysis Discriminators Specify Principal Component Analysis Output Method for Principal Component Analysis

Section 11.7 Advanced Interpretation : Principal Component Analysis

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1224

11.7.1 Input Curves for Principal Component Analysis The Input tab allows the user to select multiple wells and their associated Input Curve names that will be used for Principle Component Analysis. Display the Principal Component Analysis Module Select the wells on which to perform PC and the curves by using the drop-down lists in the Well column.

Use Curve - check this column to select a curve to be used in the PC analysis. Clicking on the Column Header Arrow will select/deselect all the curves. This is very useful for switching between models without having to re-enter all the curve names for all the wells. For

Section 11.7 Advanced Interpretation : Principal Component Analysis

1225

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

example, the user can enter the curve names for Neutron, Density, Sonic, Gr and Resistivity for multiple wells and then by just un-checking the Use Curve, create a much simpler model, using (for example) just the Gr and Density curves. Default Name column - Each Default Name is automatically filled in the first time a curve is selected for that row, and can be changed manually thereafter. The values in the Default Name cells are used as the default curve names when a new well is added to the grid. When a new well is added, if the well contains curves that match the default names then those curves are pre-selected for the user. Log column - if checked will take the base 10 logarithm of the curve before using it in the cluster analysis. For curve data which is in logarithmic form (such as core permeability) this can greatly improve the accuracy of the predicted results. Well column - in the top (Well Name) row of the grid, the user selects the wells needed to create the model. For each well, the user must choose the input curves to be used by the PC analysis module. Input Curve rows - contain the names of the curves that the user wishes to use for PC analysis. The Input Curve types should be the consistent for all wells. For example, all gamma ray logs should be in the same row of the grid, all density log curves should be in the same row of the grid. NOTE: Curve names can vary from well to well. You can use up to eight input curves per well. Clicking on the arrow next to the Input Curve

after first entering a

Default Name and checking the Use Curve column will auto-populate all the selected wells in that row with the curve name associated with the Default Name curve type. Use Well for Model Build - if this is checked then the data from that well will be used in the PC analysis model build. Top Depth and Bottom Depth – these rows are used to specify the depth interval over which to run the PC analysis in the subject well. The default depths are the log minimum and maximum depths in the well. These depths can be changed with the Get Depths from Zones button, or by manually entering new values. Use Well for Model Run - if this is checked then the data from that well will be used in the PC analysis model run. Show Plot - this button opens a log plot window for the appropriate well which shows as default; the input curves and the PC analysis result curves each in a separate track. NOTE: If the model has not yet been run for the well, this will just show the depth curve.

Section 11.7 Advanced Interpretation : Principal Component Analysis

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1226

Discriminator Crv1 and Discriminator Crv2 rows are used to input discriminator curves , which can be used to further constrain the data used in model building and also to restrict which depth intervals to run the model over. The Get Depths from Zones button, in the bottom left-hand corner of the Input tab, launches a Select Depths dialog. The Select Depths dialog provides the user with an alternative way of specifying the depth ranges over which to run the Neural Network Model. If the Full Well Range box is checked then the Zone/Top Set, Top and Bottom boxes are grayed out as the full well range will be used. To select zones then uncheck the Full Well Range box the user then has the option to select a Zone/Tops Set from the drop-down list and use these depths in one well or in multiple wells (click the All Wells button).

Section 11.7 Advanced Interpretation : Principal Component Analysis

1227

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The Advanced Well Select Button enables the selection of Wells from the Select Wells Dialog. When the button is clicked a drop down menu is displayed, where the user has the following options.

The Add wells for Model build and Model Run option will select the model build and model run option for the newly selected wells. The Add wells for Model build only option will select only the model build option for the newly selected wells. The model run option will be turned off. The Add wells for Model Run only option will select only the model run option for the newly selected wells. The model build option will be turned off. The Delete Current Wells option removes all the current wells, but leaves the Default curve names and any model currently in use. This then allows a new group of wells to be easily selected using the other options. Once loaded the current selected model can easily be applied to them. Use Custom Plot Format - if this is checked then it allows the user to type in or browse for a saved plot format that they wish to use. Report - this has two options Print or File. Selecting Print will send the PrinCompAnalysis.txt file directly to the users default printer. The File option will save PrinCompAnalysis.txt to the currently loaded database folder. Multi-well Plot - creates a multi-well plot, in the Well Correlation Viewer module, of the currently selected Model Run wells. This is very useful for comparing PC results. The Reset form button clears all the user defined entries in the Input tab of the module, returning this tab to its default state.

Section 11.7 Advanced Interpretation : Principal Component Analysis

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1228

The Load model and Save model buttons allows the loading and saving of models. A model can also be saved using the Save Parameter Set menu item.

Related Topics Principal Component Analysis Input Curves for Principal Component Analysis Specify Principal Component Analysis Discriminators Specify Principal Component Analysis Output Method for Principal Component Analysis

11.7.2 Specify Principal Component Analysis Discriminators The DISCRIMINATORS can be used for limiting the data for input into the model and also limiting the interval over which to run the model.

Related Topics Principal Component Analysis Input Curves for Principal Component Analysis Specify Principal Component Analysis Discriminators Specify Principal Component Analysis Output Method for Principal Component Analysis

Section 11.7 Advanced Interpretation : Principal Component Analysis

1229

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

11.7.3 Specify Principal Component Analysis Output After selecting Wells, curves and intervals in the Input tab and using the Discriminator tab to remove possibly erroneous data the Output tab is where the user can run the PC analysis and generate results.

The user has the option to select which curves to output using the Output check-box. The output curve names are also user selectable and editable. The % Variability column is only filled in once the Run button is clicked. The Output Curve Set is defaulted to PC (Principal Component), however, this is user editable. Clicking on the Edit button brings up the Add Set Names module where users can create a new curve Set.

Section 11.7 Advanced Interpretation : Principal Component Analysis

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1230

In the Analysis data selection section there are two options; Principal component analysis run on each individual well - this will run the PC analysis on each individual well in turn and then output the PC curves for each well. To see the results of the analysis use the Multi-well Plot. NOTE: the PC analysis runs nearly instantaneously so there will be no on-screen indication that the analysis has run. Principal component analysis run on model build wells - this runs the analysis on all the wells which have their Use Well for Model Build checked. A % Variability is calculated for all the combined wells and displayed. Null all output curves before running calculations will set to Null data (absent) all the output curves from the module. This is useful for clearing the results from a plot before re-running a model to ensure that the model is outputting to the correct intervals. The Run Model Only outputs the PC curves without recalculating the PC analysis equations. Run button runs the PC analysis and produces the PC output curves.

Related Topics Principal Component Analysis Input Curves for Principal Component Analysis Specify Principal Component Analysis Discriminators Specify Principal Component Analysis Output Method for Principal Component Analysis

Section 11.7 Advanced Interpretation : Principal Component Analysis

1231

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

11.7.4 Method for Principal Component Analysis The input data is normalized for each curve. This is done for each data point by subtracting the curve mean value and dividing by the curve standard deviation. The normalized data is then used to create the principal component curves. The total variability in the data for each PC curve is reported on the Output tab. The Eigen vectors are also reported in the listings. An example of the result is shown below. % Variability / Eigen vectors Pc

% Variability

rhob

dt

nphi

gr

1st

48.88

-0.29412

0.56258

0.66652

0.39083

2nd

37.51

0.68196

-0.27708

0.14744

0.66062

3rd

11.06

0.50637

0.77419

-0.36116

-0.11741

4th

2.54

0.43819

-0.08581

0.63527

-0.63012

Input curves normalization rhob

dt

nphi

gr

Mean Value

2.63535

64.53714

0.1321

79.13452

Std Deviation

0.15722

9.54118

0.07116

43.40833

In the above example 48.9% of the total variability in the data can be seen in the PC1 curve. PC2 curve will have 37.5%. Hence the first 2 curves will contain 86.4 of the variability. Hence we have practically reduced the information in the 4 curve input to 2 curves. The result PC curves are calculated from the Eigen vectors by taking an input data level in a well. Normalizing the data using the normalization data and then multiplying the normalized curves by the corresponding Eigen value for the curve and adding up the result. In the above example listing the PC1 curve will be computed as follows PC1 = -0.294 (Rhob – 2.635)/0.157 + 0.563 (Dt – 64.53)/9.54 + 0.667 (Nphi – 0.132)/0.071 + 0.391 (Gr – 79.13) / 43.41 The module is accessed under the main menu Advanced Interpretation menu list. The Principal Component Analysis module is set out in a similar way to the other Advanced Interpretation modules. There are three tabs Input, Discriminators and Output.

Related Topics Principal Component Analysis Input Curves for Principal Component Analysis Specify Principal Component Analysis Discriminators Specify Principal Component Analysis Output Method for Principal Component Analysis

Section 11.7 Advanced Interpretation : Principal Component Analysis

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

11.8

1232

Rock Physics

The Rock Physics section in IP contains the following independent modules: The Shear Sonic QC/Create module either creates a synthetic shear sonic curve from a compressional sonic log, or quality controls a recorded shear sonic curve. The Density Estimation module provides the user with a means to generate a density curve from sonic log data. When density log information is not available, it is often estimated from P-wave velocity (Vp) using an empirical relationship. A number of authors have published density-from-sonic transit time algorithms. The methodologies included here are those of Gardner1, Bellotti et al2 and Lindseth3. The Fluid Substitution module removes the effect of the drilling fluid from the sonic and density log measurements and then restoring the log responses to those resulting from the original reservoir fluids at their original saturations. The output density and sonic (velocity) curves are subsequently used to generate an Acoustic Impedance (AI) log. The AI log is used to calculate a reflection co-efficient (RC) series for the boundaries between rocks of different lithologies. The RC log is then used in the computation of synthetic seismograms. The Laminated Fluid Substitution is an Gassmann equation based fluid substitution application that transforms density and sonic logs to any saturation condition. Like many commercial programs there are two stages to the program. The input logs are first transformed to the 100% water saturated condition to verify the integrity of the invasion corrections, and then modeled at specified conditions of reservoir fluid type and saturation. The Elastic Impedance module The Elastic Impedance (EI) is as calculated by P. Connolly in The Leading Edge paper (1999). The equation used is the one for high angle inversion ( equation 4.1). There is little difference between the low angle equation and the high angle equation for angles below about 20°. For angles above 30° the low angle equation starts to become unstable.

Related Topics Shear Sonic QC/Create Density Estimation Fluid Substitution Laminated Fluid Substitution Elastic Impedance

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

1233

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

11.8.1 Shear Sonic QC / Create The Shear Sonic QC / Create module can be used to: create a synthetic shear sonic curve from a compressional sonic log, or to quality control a recorded shear sonic curve. The Shear sonic curve is a required input to the Fluid Substitution Module. The module is accessed under the main Advanced Interpretation menu Rock Physics Shear Sonic QC/Create and is arranged on 2 tabbed screens. The tabs are described below:

Create a DT Shear Curve The user must enter the DT compressional input curve and the name of the DT shear output curve. The units of the input sonic curve can be selected by changing the radio button in the Units box. NOTE: while the input sonic curve can have metric or imperial units, the equation constants for calculating the shear sonic curve are always in Km/sec. The DT shear curve is calculated using the Greenberg-Castagna (1992) empirical relationships for different minerals. The default constants are those defined by Greenberg-Castagna for 100% brine-saturated rocks. The default constants (a const, b const and c const) can be changed by the user. If the user changes any of the constants, clicking the Reset default coefficients button will return the coefficient values to their original values.

The Mineral Method radio buttons allow the user to select the method of mineral input to the computation.

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1234

The input mineralogy can be set either : by selecting the Curves Mineral Method radio button and then by entering input curve names for each mineral volume in the Mineral - Input Curve column, or by selecting the Fixed Volumes radio button and entering fixed volumes of different minerals in the Volume column. Mineral volumes can be entered either in percent or decimals (default) by toggling between the Mineral Volumes - Percent or Decimals radio buttons. The Default mineral radio button specifies which mineral is used as the default when the other minerals do not add up to 100%. For the example above, only a Shale input mineral curve has been entered and the default mineral has been set to sandstone. Therefore, the mineral mixture will be the shale volume specified by the VCL curve with the sandstone volume being 1 – VCL. The resulting DT shear output curve is calculated by first computing the equivalent velocities for all the pre-defined minerals and then averaging the results using a Voigt-Reuss-Hill averaging technique. This technique creates mineral volume weighted arithmetic- and weighted harmonicaverages and then takes the average of these results. The following equation is used :

VS

1 2

4

1

4

X i Vsi i 1

X i Vsi i 1

Where Xi = Volume of ith mineral Vsi = Shear velocity of ith mineral Vs = Shear Velocity NOTE: Once the inputs are to the users satisfaction then click OK for the DT shear curve to be

calculated.

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

1235

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Define the DT Shear Quality Control The Shear Velocity QC Crossplot generated by this module uses the Greenberg-Castagna empirical relationship to check that the recorded shear sonic curve is a good shear curve and not a mud-wave or Stoneley-wave velocity produced by poor processing of the sonic waveform data.

The user enters the measured DT compressional and DT shear sonic curves. The module generates the equivalent compressional and shear velocity curves (Vp and Vs) plus the Poissons ratio (PoisRatio), Vp/Vs Ratio, Bulk Modulus (KB) and Shear Modulus (Mu) curves. The input units for the slowness curves and the output units for the velocity curves can be set by the user by selecting the appropriate radio buttons in the In Units and Out Units panels of the interface. The Poissons Ratio is calculated as follows :

Vp 2 2Vs 2 2 Vp 2 Vs 2

Youngs Modulus Curve The “Shear Sonic QC/Create” module outputs a Young’s Modulus curve under the “Dt Shear Qc” tab. The default curve name is ‘E’. Output is in GPa. The equation for this is : E = 2.0 x G (1 + Pr)

Where G is the shear modulus and Pr is the Poisson ratio. G = Rho x Vs2 Where Rho is the bulk density and Vs is the shear velocity.

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1236

Create a Shear QC Crossplot The Crossplot Interval and Lithology Lines panels of the interface are used to set up the QC crossplot.

The Crossplot Interval sets up the depth range to be covered by the crossplot and can be set either : by selecting the Interval Depths radio button and specifying the top and bottom depths, or by selecting the Zonal Depths radio button and specifying an Interval set and Zone number. The Lithology Lines panel allows the user to set up the crossplot overlay lines that will be displayed on the QC crossplot.These overlay lines are created each time the user clicks Run and they represent the relationships set up on the Create DT shear tab. Changing the coefficients for the relationships on the Create DT shear tab will change the shape of the overlay lines on the crossplot but only when OK is clicked, to make a new crossplot. When the user clicks OK, a crossplot of Vp versus Vs is created. The Crossplot Z axis curve is optional. The default setting is to use the gamma ray curve. The following crossplot, which was created by the DT Shear QC set up shown in the above window.

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

1237

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Related Topics Shear Sonic QC/Create Density Estimation Fluid Substitution Laminated Fluid Substitution Elastic Impedance

11.8.2 Density Estimation Density Estimation provides the user with a means to generate a density curve from sonic log data. When density log information is not available, it is often estimated from P-wave velocity (Vp) using an empirical relationship. A number of authors have published density-from-sonic transit time algorithms. The methodologies included here are those of Gardner1, Bellotti et al2 and Lindseth3.

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1238

The density-from-sonic transit time methodology has the advantage that it can be used ahead of drilling, by utilising seismic data, converting seismic interval velocities (V, in ft/sec) to sonic transit times (1/V *106 (usec/ft). The Input curve is a sonic log curve. The model to be run (Gardner, AGIP Bellotti, Lindseth) is selected by checking the appropriate box. Parameters such as the coefficients for the Gardner transform can be edited, saved and re-called. A number of passes can be made through the various models and, if possible, the Output Rhob curve can be calibrated against a well containing a RHOB curve. Output curves are RhoGard, RhoAgip and RhoLind , depending on which method is selected. Depth intervals for the computation can be input manually, or by selecting the

button and

choosing the appropriate Tops Set from the Select Zone Depths window. The default depth range is that covered by the sonic log.

Note Bellotti et al2 found more acceptable results comparing actual FDC curves to their Unconsolidated formations equation. (illustrated by examples from the Adriatic, Mauritania and

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

1239

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Indonesia – see Reference 2).

REFERENCES 1. Gardner G. L. F., Gardner L.W., & Gregory A.R. – (1974) Formation velocity and density - the diagnostic basics for stratigraphic traps Geophysics 39, 770-780. 2. Bellotti, P. Di Lorenzo, V. & Giacca, D. - Overburden gradient from sonic log Trans. SPWLA, London March 1979 3. Lindseth, R. O., (1979) – Synthetic Sonic Logs – a process for stratigraphic interpretation, Geophysics v.44 no.1 p.3-26

Related Topics Shear Sonic QC/Create Fluid Substitution Laminated Fluid Substitution Elastic Impedance

11.8.3 Fluid Substitution Fluid Substitution is a process of removing the effect of the drilling fluid from the sonic and density log measurements and then restoring the log responses to those resulting from the original reservoir fluids at their original saturations. The output density and sonic (velocity) curves are subsequently used to generate an Acoustic Impedance (AI) log. The AI log is used to calculate a reflection co-efficient (RC) series for the boundaries between rocks of different lithologies. The RC log is then used in the computation of synthetic seismograms. The Fluid Substitution module is accessed from the main Advanced Interpretation menu Rock Physics

Fluid Substitution.

The module input parameters and functionality are arranged on a number of tabs. These are: Fluid Properties Input Curves / Matrix Average Gassmann Discriminators Log Fluid Substitution

Fluid Properties Tab Fluid properties need to be calculated for all fluid zones used in the Fluid Substitution calculation. This, at a minimum, will include the Flushed zone (zone seen by the sonic tool) and the Reservoir zone (the zone away from well bore influence). The Substitution fluids need only

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1240

to be entered if different fluids are to be substituted into the reservoir. The same fluid properties can be used for all zones.

The View Properties panel and its associated radio buttons, highlighted in bold blue font, is used to toggle the screen view of the Fluid Properties Results between different fluid zones. The user can toggle the display between the the Flushed zone, Reservoir zone and Substitution zone fluid properties by clicking on the appropriate radio button (Flushed, Reservoir or Substitution). The Fluid Properties tab is arranged in 5 panels. These are Reservoir Pressure and Temperature, Water, Oil, Gas, Fluid Properties Results. To calculate the fluid properties the user can either; enter appropriate Density, Bulk Modulus (K) and Velocity values directly into the Fluid Properties Results panel at the bottom of the window, or alternatively, fill in the Water, Oil and Gas panels to calculate these fluid properties. When the Calculate button is clicked adjacent to each fluid type, the Fluid Properties Resultsare updated in the table. The Reservoir Pressure and Temperature values and their associated units must be entered, in order to calculate any of the fluid properties.

Water : The user can either enter the salinity (in ppm NaCl) of the formation water or an Rw value and the associated Rw Temperature. The user should select the appropriate radio button to flag that the formation water is Gas Free water or Gas Saturated water. Alternatively a Gas/Water Ratio (GWR) can be entered. By clicking the Calculate button the water properties will be updated in the Fluid Properties Results panel.

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

1241

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Oil : The user must enter the oil density (API) at atmospheric pressure, its associated Gas Density and either the Gas/Oil Ratio (GOR) value (and its units) or check the Gas Saturated check-box. Checking the Gas Saturated check-box prompts IP to calculate the GOR, assuming the oil is gas-saturated. By clicking the Calculate button the oil properties will be updated in the Fluid Properties Results panel.

Gas : The user must enter the Gas Density, relative to air, at atmospheric pressure. By clicking the Calculate button the gas properties will be updated in the Fluid Properties Results panel.

Fluid Properties Results : Fluid Properties (Density, Bulk Modulus (K) and Velocity), if known, can be entered directly into the data table or calculated from the Water , Oil and Gas calculations described above. If two properties of a given fluid are known / entered, the third property can be calculated by clicking the Calculate button in the bottom right hand corner of the panel.

For example, if the Density and the Velocity values are known then the Bulk Modulus can be automatically calculated by clicking Calculate. The formula used used is: Bulk Modulus = Density x Velocity^2 The correlations used for calculating the Oil, Gas and Water properties are the ones presented by Batzle and Wang (1992) in Seismic Properties of Pore Fluids.

Input Curves / Matrix Tab The user must provide the Input Curves for Compressional sonic and Shear sonic, either as velocity or slowness curves and select the curve units from the Sonic input Type and Units

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

Senergy

Advanced Interpretation

1242

panel. Bulk Density, Porosity, and Water Saturation curves are also required as inputs.

The user can either enter a flushed-zone water saturation (Sxo) curve name or, if no Sxo curve is available, then this can be calculated by using the Empirical Sxo option. When selecting the Empirical Sxo method, Sxo is calculated from the Water Saturation input curve. The user has the choice of two relationships, depending on whether the well was drilled with Oil-Based Mud or Water-based mud. The empirical relationships are the same as those used in the Porosity and Water Saturation Module and are shown on the screen as labels below the Water Based Mud and Oil Based Mud radio buttons. The IV parameter is the Invasion Factor in the Water Based Mud logic. The selection of one of the Display Velocity units options converts the units of all the velocity

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

1243

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

curves on this tab and on the Average Gassmann tab. NOTE: It also sets the units for the output velocity curves under the Log Fluid Substitution tab.

Matrix Properties Matrix Properties must be entered in the Matrix Properties grid. Several default minerals can be selected from the drop-down box or the user can create their own minerals and define the associated matrix properties. Each default mineral has a set of default matrix properties. These can be edited as necessary by the user. The default mineral values are taken from the publication The Rock Physics Handbook (Tools for Seismic Analysis in Porous Media) by G. Mavko, T. Mukerji and J. Dvorkin (1999). An input Mineral Volume curve must be entered for each mineral, except for the Default Mineral. The curves must contain the mineral volumes in decimal fractions. Only one mineral can be designated as the default. The default is used to make up matrix volumes to 100%. A mineral volume curve name is not needed for the Default Mineral.

Average Gassmann Tab The Average Gassmann tab is used to investigate the validity of the fluid and matrix properties with respect to the input velocities and input petrophysical parameters, on a zonal basis. It is also used for a rapid evaluation of the effects of fluid substitution. The input data are inverted for the dry rock parameters using Gassmanns equation.

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1244

The elastic parameters for two-phase fluid mixtures are calculated using a saturation curve and the fluid mixing approach of Brie et al (1995) "Shear Sonic interpretation in Gas-bearing Sands" SPE 30595 (pp701 - 710). The Fluid Mixing Law Exponent is designed to account for the effect of patchy saturation (different fluids in different pores) at logging frequencies. Accounting for this effect is more important with gas/water systems than oil/water fluid systems. Brie et al (1995) proposed using a value of 3 to simulate the effect of patchy saturation in gas/ water systems. In oil/water systems a value of 1.5 is close to a Voigt-Reuss-Average mix. It is important to note that this type of fluid mixing is only used for the dry parameter inversion. On the Log Fluid Substitution tab, homogenous (Reuss) mixing is used to simulate the effect of fluid mixing at seismic frequencies.

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

1245

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The Dry Rock Poisson Ratio parameter is subsequently used in the Log Fluid Substitution tab. It is also important in the set-up for the Fluid Substitution Crossplot which is launched from the button at the bottom of this interface. The IP program uses the approach of Gregory (1977) for Gassmann fluid substitution, to predict Vs from dry rock Poisson ratio and Vp inputs. As a rule of thumb, values of dry rock Poisson ratio range between 0.1 and 0.2 for consolidated rocks (average 0.15) and between 0.1and 0.25 for relatively unconsolidated rocks.

Zonal Log Average The user selects the interval over which the program is to average the log curve properties. The interval can be specified either: By selecting the Interval Depths radio button and entering a Top and Bottom depth, or By selecting the Zonal Depths radio button and using Zonal Depths (selected from an IP Parameter or Tops Set) and then selecting the Zone number. If the Use Discriminators for averages check-box is checked, then the selected interval is additionally constrained by the user-defined discriminators which can be set on the Discriminators tab. Clicking the Calculate Averages button will calculate the zonal averages for all the input curves and display the results in the list under the Log Average headings. The water saturation averages are porosity-weighted averages. The same average values will also be set into the white edit boxes, except for the Porosity value which is calculated from the input density log, mineral volumes, matrix densities and fluid properties. The Dry Rock Properties and Fluid Properties Flushed Zone are also calculated. The user can change the values in the white edit boxes to see what effect it has on other parameters. Changing the Vp or Vs values will change the Dry Rock Properties. Changing RhoB will change the Porosity value and the Dry Rock Properties. Changing the mineral volumes will change the Porosity value and the Dry Rock Properties . One can not change the volume of the default mineral since this is calculated from the other volumes. Changing the Fluid Density will change the Porosity value and the Dry Rock Properties. Changing the Fluid Modulus or Fluid Velocity will change the Dry Rock Properties. Changing the hydrocarbon type will change the Porosity value, Fluid Properties and the Dry Rock Properties. Changing the Porosity value will change RhoB and the Dry Rock Properties.

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1246

Sw cannot be changed since it is not used in the calculations. Changing Sxo or the Fluid Mixing Law Exponent will change the Porosity value, Fluid Properties and the Dry Rock Properties. Changing the Dry Matrix Bulk Modulus will change the Vp input. Changing the Dry Matrix Shear Modulus will change the Vs input. Changing the Dry Matrix Poisson Ratio has no effect on the other parameters but does affect the fluid substitution of the average data (Fluid Substitution Crossplot button) and the log curves (Log Fluid Substitution tab). Changing the Dry Matrix Modulus Ratio has no effect. An option is available to use the Reuss harmonic average formula for fluid mixing in order to back out the effect of flushed-zone hydrocarbons on the sonic log. This methodology uses a harmonic-type averaging of the fluid properties. This is normally considered to overestimate the influence of gas on the sonic tool and an empirical fluid mixing law is usually used. However, under certain conditions it is found to give better results. If this option is turned off (default) then the empirical mixing law is used.

Fluid Substitution Crossplot Clicking the Fluid Substitution Crossplot button produces a display similar to that illustrated below. The purpose of the Fluid Substitution crossplot is to enable the user to visualize the relationships between the velocities, density, AI and Poissons Ratio results. The user can change the Y and Z axes and scales for the crossplot. The data plotted in the graphic display are listed in the grid at the base of window. The user can edit the Sw values in the first row of the grid and, if the values are changed, then the other parameters will be recalculated.

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

1247

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The table data are calculated by taking the property values displayed on the Average Gassmann tab and computing the 100% wet values for velocities and densities. The 100% wet values are then fluid substituted with the varying amounts of hydrocarbons (1-Sws). The fluid properties for bulk modulus are calculated using the Reuss average formula (harmonic average). The Porosity panel allows the user to change the computed zonal averaged porosity value and to see the effect of this change on the fluid substitution. The equations used for recalculating the properties are only valid for relatively small changes in porosity. The Output button allows the crossplot to be output to a printer, to a file in enhanced metafile format or directly to the clipboard. The table can be output to the clipboard, which then can be directly pasted into other windows programs.

Discriminators Tab The Discriminators tab allows the user to further constrain which data are used for the Average Gassmann zonal log averages and also to discriminate the zones to be fluid-substituted in the

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1248

Log Fluid Substitution calculation. If different discriminators are required for the Average Gassmann and the Log Fluid Substitution then the user must manually change the values between running the two functions. Up to 6 discriminators can be used simultaneously and combined using and or or type logic. Discrimination can either be between a curve and a value or between two curves.

Log Fluid Substitution Tab

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

1249

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The Log Fluid Substitution tab performs a fluid substitution on the data in the input density and sonic logs at the well step increment. Along with the fluid-substituted density and sonic curves, both fluid-substituted Acoustic Impedance and Poissons Ratio curves are calculated and velocity and sonic slowness curves are output.

Flushed zone Hydrocarbon type The user selects the hydrocarbon type (Gas or Oil) that is seen in the flushed zone. The program will use the flushed-zone fluid properties for this hydrocarbon type to back out the effect of the flushed zone on the density and sonic logs. This allows wells drilled with Oil-Based mud which drill through gas-bearing reservoirs to use the Oil-Based mud oil properties to correct the logs before substituting the reservoir gas properties back into the logs.

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1250

Analysis Interval The output curves will only be changed over the user-selected analysis depth interval. The user has two choices : Interval Depths. The user sets the interval top and bottom depths manually or uses the Select Zones /Tops

button to select a depth range from an existing Zone / Tops Set in

the subject well. Zonal Depths. The user selects the required Top Set. The analysis will be run on all Zones in the selected Tops Set. NOTE: If the Tops Set has gaps between zones, then gaps will appear in the output results curves. The Use Discriminators for net reservoir check box and the Net reservoir input curve list box are used to discriminate reservoir rock (permeable rock with porosity) from non-reservoir rock (shale or non-permeable rock). The fluid substitution will only be performed on the reservoir quality rock. The non-reservoir rock will contain the same output values for density and sonic as those in the input curves. The Net reservoir input curve is a computed flag curve in which values greater than 0 are counted as reservoir rock. If both a Net reservoir input curve is selected andUse Discriminators for net reservoir is checked, then each depth level must pass both tests before any fluid substitution is performed.

Actual Reservoir fluid type (as seen by Sonic / Density tools) This box will either contain one interval, if the Interval Depths button is selected, or will contain one row per zone in the Top Set, if the Zonal Depths button is selected. The screen shot shown above illustrates the view when the Zonal Depths is selected. The user must select the hydrocarbon type for each zone. NOTE: If a zone is water-wet, then leave both the Oil and Gas check boxes un-checked.

Substitute Fluids If the user wants to substitute different fluids or use a different water saturation profile to that found in the actual well, then the Substitute Fluids check-box should be checked. The user must select the new hydrocarbon type for each zone. If the zone is water-wet then leave both the Oil and Gas columns un-checked. The Substitute Sw curve box must contain the curve name for the new Sw curve. The user can use the same Sw curve as that entered under the Input Curves / Matrix tab.

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

1251

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Output Curves The user enters the names for the result curves. The Substituted line of output curves is only created if the Substitute Fluids box is checked. If an output curve is not needed then delete the curve name from the Output Curves grid. The Run button will create the output curve, if necessary, and perform the fluid substitution. The Log Plot button creates a new log plot that contains the input curves and results curves of the fluid substitution. The following is an example plot.

The Null All Output Curves button will set null (absent) values in all the Output Curves. This can be useful if one wants to clear the result log data from a log plot and start again. The Save and Load buttons at the bottom of the window allow the user to save and re-load parameter Sets, which contain all the parameters associated with the Rock Physics modules. The Rock Physics modules are Shear Sonic QC / Create, Fluid Substitution, Elastic Impedance and Laminated Fluid Subs.

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1252

The Print button outputs a listing of the parameters used in the module and the results from the Average Gassmann calculations. The following is an example listing : Fluid Substitution Parameters Well : Date :

Test Well 1 22/08/01 17:12:34 Fluid Properties

Flushed zone Brine Density (gm/cc) 1.008 Bulk Modulus (GPA) 2.375 Velocity (ft/sec) 5035

Oil 0.675 0.589 3064

Gas 0.293 0.134 2223

Oil 0.675 0.589 3064

Gas 0.293 0.134 2223

Reservoir zone Brine Density (gm/cc) 1.008 Bulk Modulus (GPA) 2.375 Velocity (ft/sec) 5035 Matrix Properties Mineral Name Density (gm/cc) Modulus (GPA) Velocity (m/sec) Input Curve Default Mineral

Quartz 2.650 37.000 6050

Wet Clay 2.600 21.000 3410 VCL

Yes

Average Gassmann results Log Inputs Data from interval : 7776.00

Vp (m/sec) Vs (m/sec) Vp/Vs Ratio Poisson Ratio Density (gm/cc) Quartz (dec) Wet Clay (dec) Porosity (dec) Sw (dec) Sxo (Dec)

Log Value 3563 1982 1.797 0.276 2.307

7922.50

0.231

Value Used 3563 1982 1.797 0.276 2.307 0.769 0.231

0.179 0.332 0.503

0.184 0.332 0.503

Flushed zone fluid mixture is Oil / Brine Fluid mixing law exponent is 3.000 Fluid Properties Density (gm/cc) Modulus (GPA) Velocity (m/sec)

0.843 0.8162 984

Dry Rock Properties Bulk Modulus (GPA) 16.131 Shear Modulus (GPA) 9.066 Poisson Ratio 0.263

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

1253

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help Modulus Ratio

1.779

Related Topics Shear Sonic QC/Create Density Estimation Fluid Substitution Laminated Fluid Substitution Elastic Impedance

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

Senergy

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1254

11.8.3.1 Equations and Methodology

The following block diagram gives a possible workflow to use with the Rock Physics modules.

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

1255

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

Senergy

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

Average Gassmann Equations Shear Modulus

Vs 2 ρ b

µ

Where Vs = Input average shear velocity ρb = Input average density Wet Bulk Modulus

K

Vp 2 ρ b

43 µ

Where Vp = Input average compressional velocity Matrix Modulus using Voigt Reuss-Hill mixing scheme n

1 2

K ma

1

n

Vol i

Kmin i

i 1

Vol i Kmin i i 1

Where Voli = Average volume of ith mineral Kmini = Modulus of ith mineral n = Number of minerals Matrix Density n

ρ ma

Vol i ρ ma min i i 1

Where

ρ ma min i

= Matrix density of ith mineral

Fluid Density

ρf

Sxo ρ brine

(1 Sxo)ρ hydrocarbon

Where Sxo = Input average flushed zone water saturation ρ hydrocarbon = Oil or Gas density in the flushed zone Fluid Modulus calculated using fluid mixing law exponent

Kf

Sxo Exp

(K brine

K hydrocarbon ) K hydrocarbon

Where

K hydrocarbon

= Oil or Gas Modulus in the flushed zone

K brine

= Water Modulus in the flushed zone Exp = Fluid Mixing Law exponent If the Reuss Harmonic Average Formula option is selected (by ticking the check box) for flushed zone mixing, then the Fluid Modulus is calculated as follows:

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

1256

1257

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Kf

Sxo

K brine

1 1 Sxo

Senergy

K hydrocarbon

Porosity

ρ ma

ρb

ρ ma

ρf

Dry rock Modulus using Gassmann

Kd

K

K ma K f 1 K ma K f K K ma

K ma 1

Dry Poisson Ratio d

3 Kd 2 2 6 Kd

Modulus Ratio

R

Kd

Fluid Substitution Crossplot These equations assume that the pore Bulk Modulus and Dry Rock Poissons Ratio stay the same as porosity changes. This is true for small changes in porosity. Pore bulk modulus from original porosity from Average Gassmann

Kp

ag

1 K d 1 K ma

Where ag

= Porosity from Average Gassmann calculation

Dry bulk Modulus

1

Kd

K p 1 K ma

xp

Where xp

= Porosity from crossplot window

Shear Modulus

µ

1 3 Kd 3 4 1

d

1

d

Fluid Density for each Sw value in crossplot

ρf

Sw ρ brine

(1 Sw)ρ hydrocarbon

Where

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

ρ hydrocarbon

1258

= Oil or Gas density reservoir zone

ρ brine

= Water density reservoir zone Fluid Modulus for each Sw value in crossplot using Reuss average formula

Kf

Sw K brine

1 1 Sw K hydrocarbon

Where

K hydrocarbon

= Oil or Gas Modulus reservoir zone

K brine

= Water Modulus reservoir zone Density from porosity for each fluid density

ρb

ρf

(1

xp

xp

)ρ ma

Shear velocity for each density

Vs

b

Bulk Modulus wet for each fluid Modulus

K

1 K d K ma

Kd xp

K fl

1

xp

K ma

2

K d K ma

2

Compressional velocity for each Bulk modulus

K

Vp

43 b

Acoustic Impedance for each Vp and density

AI

b

Vp

Poisson ratio wet for each Vp and Vs

Vp 2 2Vs 2 2 Vp 2 Vs 2

Log Fluid Substitution Equations If Sxo is not entered as an input curve then Sxo can be calculated using one of the empirical equations: For Water based mud:

Sxo

Sw Inv 1 Inv

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

1259

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Where Sw = Input Sw curve Inv = User entered invasion factor (default 1.0) For Oil based mud: Sxo = minimum of Sw or SwMax Where SwMax = User entered maximum Sw (default 0.5) Fluid density is calculated for the invaded zone, reservoir zone and special fluid substitution

ρf

Sxo ρ brine

(1 Sxo)ρ hydrocarbon

Fluid substituted densities

ρ b100

b log

fBrine

fSxo

ρ bRes

b log

f Re s

fSxo

ρ bSub

b log

fSub

100% wet Reservoir conditions

fSxo

Special fluid substitution

Where

ρ blog

= Input log density

= Input porosity fBrine

fSxo

= Density of brine for the reservoir fluids = Density of the fluid mixture in the flushed zone

f Re s

fSub

= Density of the fluid mixture in the reservoir zone = Density of the fluid mixture for the special fluid substitution

Dry Matrix properties using Voight-Reuss-Hill average method

K ma

1 2

n

1

n

Vol i

Kmin i

i 1

Vol i Kmin i i 1

Where Voli = Vol of ith input mineral Kmini = Modulus of ith mineral n = Number of minerals Fluid Modulus in the flushed zone using fluid mixing law exponent.

K fSxo

Sxo Exp

(K brineSxo

K hydrocarbonSxo ) K hydrocarbonSxo

Where

K hydrocarbonSxo

= Oil or Gas Modulus flushed zone

K brineSxo

= Water Modulus flushed zone Exp = Fluid Mixing Law exponent

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

Dry Modulus from Dry Poisson Ratio as per Gregory 1977, Hampson & Russell

S

3

1 1

d d

c

S

a

S 1

b

S

Kd

b

Vp 2 K ma

K ma K fSxo

S

b

1

Vp 2 K ma

b2 4 a c 2 a

b

K ma 1

1

K ma K fSxo

Shear Modulus

K d 1.5

1 2 1

d d

Shear Velocity

Vs 100 b100

Vs Re s b Re s

Vs Sub bSub

Bulk Modulus flushed zone

K ma K Sxo 1

K fSxo K ma K fSxo K fSxo K ma K fSxo

Kd K ma K d Kd K ma K d

Bulk Modulus at 100% wet

K ma K 100 1

K Brine K ma K Brine K Brine K ma K Brine

Kd K ma K d Kd K ma K d

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

1260

1261

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Compressional Velocity at 100% wet

Vp 2

Vp 100

b

K Sxo

K 100

b100

Fluid Modulus at reservoir conditions using Reuss formula

K fRes

Sw K brineRes

1 1 Sw K hydrocarbonRes

Bulk Modulus at reservoir conditions

Compressional Velocity at reservoir conditions

Fluid Modulus at special fluid substitution conditions using Reuss formula

K fSub

Sw K brineSub

1 1 Sw K hydrocarbonsSub

Bulk Modulus at special fluid substitution conditions

K ma K Sub 1

K fSub K ma K fSub K fSub K ma K fSub

Kd K ma K d Kd K ma K d

Compressional Velocity at special fluid substitution conditions

Vp Sub

Vp 2

b

K Sxo

K Sub

bSub

Related Topics Shear Sonic QC/Create Density Estimation Fluid Substitution Laminated Fluid Substitution Elastic Impedance

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

Senergy

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1262

11.8.4 Laminated Reservoir Fluid Substitution This Gassmann equation based fluid substitution application transforms density and sonic logs to any saturation condition. Like many commercial programs there are two stages to the program. The input logs are first transformed to the 100% water saturated condition to verify the integrity of the invasion corrections, and then modeled at specified conditions of reservoir fluid type and saturation. The user selects one of two alternative models depending on whether the shale is evenly distributed within the sand or present in discrete laminations not resolved in the log interpretation1. If the shale is evenly distributed (the “shaley sand” model) the bulk modulus of the solid fraction is modeled as a weighted average of the moduli of all the components of the rock. In laminated reservoirs, fluid effects only occur within the sandy laminations, and the appropriate moduli and porosity are those of the sandy laminations. Experience shows that the modeled results are often more sensitive to the choice of shale distribution than to the uncertainty in fluid or rock properties, so it is very important to model the shale distribution appropriately. If a shear sonic log is not available the program iteratively solves the Gassmann equation for the 100% water filled result and uses the Greenberg-Castagna (GC) model to estimate the shear slowness. Although the program is principally a Gassmann implementation, alternative models for computing dry frame bulk modulus are also available. These are useful for validating results and parameter picks. The program was designed around the needs of the Petrophysicist and Geophysicist working in clastic environments. It has not been validated in carbonates, and reference to “sands” in this document reflects our awareness of the limitations of a Gassmann type model in carbonates. This module was developed by Chris Skelt, Chevron. 1 Skelt C, "Fluid substitution in Laminated Sands", The Leading Edge, May 2004. 2 Skelt C, "The influence of shale distribution on sensitivity of compressional slowness to reservoir fluid changes", SPWLA 45th Annual Symposium, 2004.

Related Topics Shear Sonic QC/Create Density Estimation Fluid Substitution Laminated Fluid Substitution Elastic Impedance

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

1263

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

11.8.4.1 Operational Instructions

The Laminated Reservoir Fluid Substitution module is accessed under the main menu Advanced Interpretation ‘Rock Physics’ Laminated Fluid Subs. Parameters, inputs and outputs are entered through a series of tabs: Fluid Properties Rock Properties Input Curves Output Curves Program theory and suggestions for QC are described in the Equations and Methodology chapter.

Fluid Properties Tab Fluid Property Calculators Fluid properties may be obtained from several sources. If the zone of interest is more than a single reservoir, we recommend setting up trend curves for the fluid properties. This can be done by interpolating between properties computed (say) every thousand vertical feet. Batzle and Wang 1992 Fluid Calculator. This is provided for compatibility with other commercial programs that still use these algorithms. This option is not generally recommended because the results are only valid over a limited range of temperature and pressure. Clicking on this button opens the following module

SM-UH FLAG program Fluid Calculator. Only available to Colorado School of Mines-

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1264

University of Houston consortium members. FLAG computes approximate water, oil and gas properties using limited input data. NOTE: The consortium members need to place the FLAG programs in the IP IntPetro35 directory. PVT data measured on locally acquired fluids is not always available, but is a better source of fluid properties, especially for oil.

Initial Saturations - Flushed Zone - Zonal Fluid properties The user enters density and bulk modulus for up to three fluids at initial saturations, that is to say the saturations corresponding to the input density and sonic logs specified on the Input Curves tab. Den Filtrate or Mod Filtrate may have oil or water properties depending on the mud type. In permeable reservoirs drilled with water base mud, standard log analysis practice is to assume that there is no formation water in the invaded zone. In OBM, filtrate invasion should be estimated as part of log analysis. If changes in hydrocarbon saturation are thought to influence the elastic properties of the rock, or to put in another way, the effect of invasion on the density and sonic log responses should be considered. In OBM we recommend using a multi-mineral multi-fluid program such as IP’s Mineral Solver for the log analysis with a model designed to solve for the three fluids actually present in the invaded zone. If a “shaley sand” log analysis program is run the computed hydrocarbon density ( RHOHY is the IP default mnemonic) needs to be transformed to the corresponding fractions of OBM filtrate and formation hydrocarbon.

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

1265

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

In wells with large vertical zones of interest or stacked oil and gas reservoirs, formation hydrocarbon properties may be defined by trend curves spliced from the oil and gas property trends. The Woods Mix Factor allows the user to simulate patchy saturation by stiffening the fluid mixture. A value of one honors Wood’s Law and zero mixes the fluids by Voigt average of the bulk moduli. Intermediate values are weighted averages of Woods and Voigt averaging. In general we assume that the logs respond to the invaded zone. However, if the user believes that, say, the density responds to the invaded zone while the sonic logs respond to the undisturbed zone, he could adjust the density to undisturbed zone saturation using simple linear superposition and specify undisturbed zone saturations in the initial saturations box of the inputs tab. When specifying invaded zone fluid properties used to substitute to the wet case the user should be aware of the distinction between bulk density and the apparent density of light hydrocarbons that determines the density log response. All fluid moduli are entered in GPa. Fluid densities are entered in the project density units, either g/cm 3 or kg/m 3.

Modelled Reservoir Saturations - Undisturbed Zone - Zonal Fluid Properties The user enters properties for oil, water and gas in the undisturbed zone. Usually we model oilwater and gas-water mixtures. There is also provision for three phase cases such as critical gas saturation in an oil column or a secondary gas cap on residual oil. The formation water properties specified here are usually the same as those in the invaded zone. The oil and gas properties may be actual or hypothecated. It is good practice to test the sensitivity of computed results to a range of hydrocarbon properties to assess the importance of accurate PVT data. For example, the sensitivity to oil GOR may be tested by running models with oil properties corresponding to zero GOR, and to bubble point.

Rock Properties Tab Fluid Substitution Model The user selects the type of shale distribution by using either the Laminated Sand Model or Shaley Sand Model radio buttons. The tabs appearing in the lower half of the screen under Zonal Properties reflect the different inputs needed by the two models. Once the parameters for both models have been set, the user can toggle between the two options and evaluate the effect of shale distribution model choice on computed results. The Pass Through Inputs on Computation Breakdown box is checked to make the outputs

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1266

continuous over intervals where the Gassmann equation breaks down. It should be left unchecked to identify these problem areas while refining the model, and checked for the final pass of the program. The program populates the Rocks and default parameters table from the FluidSub_Default_Parameters.par file in the IP installation directory. The user can edit this file to add rocks and minerals and change parameter values. The rocks listed under Rocks and default parameters are the default values for the solid components of the log analysis results. If the Laminated Sand Model is selected, laminated shale properties are specified under the Zonal Properties tab, and only the rocks and minerals present in the sand laminations are selected in this table. When running the Shaley Sand Model , shale should also be present in the table. The order of the columns determines the order in which the rocks are plotted from left to right in the results plots. The Default Mineral volume fraction is calculated as the volume unaccounted for after summing the porosity and the other volumes, not by its rock volume curve name. This allows the user to run fluid substitution using a solid model that is simpler than the log analysis results. The Bulk K and Greenberg-Castagna (G/C or GC) coefficients for the rocks and minerals appearing in the table are the program defaults used to populate new models.

Zonal Properties

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

1267

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

This panel contains a number of sub-tabs. NOTE: The Laminated Shale sub-tab is only available when the Laminated Sand Model radio button is checked. Zone Depths sub-tab - The zones can be manually edited in the Zone Depths sub-tab but new zones are created in the Fluid Properties tab using the New zone button, which opens the Add Zone selection window. Laminated Shale sub-tab - The Laminated Shale sub-tab is only available when the Laminated Sand Model radio button is checked. In Crv Phi Lam allows the user to specify a curve representing the porosity of the sand laminations in place of computing sand lamination porosity from effective porosity and the shale lamination fraction. The density (Rho Lam Sh) and compressional slowness (DTc Lam Sh) of the shale laminations may be constants or trend curves. NOTE: that the shale laminations within a sand package are usually denser and faster than the intervening massive shales. The definitions of the GC coefficients Lam Shale a’, Lam Shale ‘b, and Lam Shale ‘c’ are consistent with the constants used in Rock Physics

Shear Sonic QC / Create.

Rock Properties sub-tab - The user specifies the bulk modulus for each component of the rock other than laminated shale. The individual bulk moduli are mixed to determine the bulk modulus of the solid material using the Voigt and Reuss averages weighted by the Voigt Mix Fact. A value of 0.5 is synonymous with the Hill average and is recommended in the absence counter-indications.

G/C Coeffs sub-tab - The user specifies GC coefficients for the rocks in the Rock Properties menu. They are used for shear sonic prediction if a shear log is not available, and for estimation of the fluid effects in the laminated model whether or not a shear log was run. They should therefore be validated as part of the workflow any time the Laminated Model is run.

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1268

Cutoffs / Limits sub-tab - Phi Max is the maximum porosity allowed for the sand laminations and acts as a limit in cases where the computation of sand lamination porosity goes unstable in low net to gross intervals. It should be set at the highest porosity anticipated for the zone of interest. The Vsh Max and Phi Min are cutoffs beyond which the fluid substitution computations are suppressed and the outputs set equal to the inputs. The Kill Logic is additional to the cutoffs and allows the user to use an external flag to suppress computation. It uses the same logic as that defined in the Phi/Sw module.

K_df Model sub-tab - The program always computes dry frame bulk modulus using the Gassmann equation, but also offers alternative models that may help validate or diagnose problems with Gassmann results. In some circumstances, such as low net to gross laminated reservoirs or very unconsolidated formations the alternative models may yield more stable results than the Gassmann equation. The alternative models are all explained in detail in the literature, and are described in briefly in the accompanying “Program Theory” document. Each model uses different input parameters, and the unused parameters are greyed out in the menu. The menu of alternative models does not claim to be exhaustive, so the user may also enter an external K_df from another model or from laboratory measurements. NOTE: that the K_df model choice is a zoned parameter, so the user could for example use the Gassmann model in deeper reservoirs and one of the alternative models in higher porosity reservoirs where the Gassmann solution for K_df is ill-conditioned.

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

1269

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Input Curves Tab Elastic logs, Porosity and Shale fraction The Density, DT Compressional and DT Shear logs are usually the edited, quality controlled logs. If no shear log is available then the entry is left blank and the program uses the coefficients entered on the G/C Coeffs tab to compute DTs using the Greenberg-Castagna method. Porosity (Phie in this case) and Shale Lamination Index (VShLam) are from log analysis. VshLam and VShale are not synonymous. VShLam is the volume fraction of shale laminations, determined by reference to core data or using a log-based method such as Thomas-Stieber. When using the laminated model the program transforms the input porosity to sand lamination porosity using Phi_Slam = Phie / (1 – VshLam) unless the In Crv Phi Lam entry is checked on the Laminated Shale tab. The computation of Phie should take account of Gassmann’s contention that electrostatically bound water is part of the rock frame and capillary bound water part of the pore system. Additional solid fractions in more complex mineralogical models are input under the Rock Properties tab.

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1270

Initial Saturations In general these are the saturations of the fluids in the invaded zone. Only two should be specified. The program calculates the third on the basis that the three saturations sum to one. Saturations may be curves or constants. For example, for a gas well drilled with water-based mud, the user would specify Sxo for filtrate saturation and zero for oil saturation and the program would compute invaded zone gas saturation equal to 1 – 0 – Sxo.

Modelled Reservoir Saturations In this case Sw_HC is a modelled water saturation for a hydrocarbon-filled model. Setting oil saturation to zero describes a gas reservoir. Invasion corrections to the logs are made by entering the reservoir fluid saturations computed from the logs here. One special case is substituting to dry frame conditions to estimate the density and velocity of the formation in the absence of fluids. This is achieved by setting water saturation to zero and gas saturation to one and entering gas density and bulk modulus of zero.

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

1271

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Output Curves Tab Three sub-tabs are found under the Output Curve tab. Elastic Properties Output Curves - list the elastic properties computed from the density and slowness at observed, wet and modeled saturations. QC Checks Output Curves - essential QC outputs for the user to verify that the program has run as intended. Diagnostics and Output Curves - diagnostics to identify breakdowns in the computations.

Output Set In order to distinguish the results of each fluid and saturation scenario, it is recommended to use a three letter scheme where the letters specify the basic model (in this application Laminated or Shaley Sand) the hydrocarbon type (Gas, Oil, Water or In-situ) and the saturation model (H ydrocarbon filled, In-situ or Fizz). Some examples are tabulated. Code

Shale

HC type

Saturation

Comments

LII

Laminated

In-situ

In-situ

Laminated sand/shale invasion compensation

SII

Shaley sand

In-situ

In-situ

Evenly distributed shale invasion compensation

LGI

Laminated

Gas

In-situ

Fill all HC bearing intervals with gas according to the observed water saturation

LGH

Laminated

Gas

HC filled

Fill all sands with gas using hydrocarbon filled saturation model

SOH

Shaley Sand

Oil

Oil Filled

Fill all sands with oil using hydrocarbon filled saturation model

Output Curve units Elastic Moduli are output in GPa. The user may select velocity and impedance units. The selections shown in the figure are recommended for compatibility with Greenberg-Castagna and for unit compatibility with the output rock and fluid moduli. In the event that the user or his client wants to work with moduli in psi, the conversion from GPa to psi is 1 Mpsi = 0.145038 GPa. For conversions between feet and meters, note that 1 foot is precisely 0.3048 meters, and that I meter is approximately 3.2808 feet.

Elastic Properties Output Curves

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1272

The Observed properties are computed from the input density and slowness curves and are intended to provide the user with a complete set of elastic properties corresponding to the observed logs. Changing the substitution model has no effect on these results because they are computed from the input density and slowness. The formulae used are from linear elastic theory and are listed under Elastic Property Formulae. The Wet properties are derived from the wet density and slowness curve that are the result of substitution from the observed logs using the specified initial saturations and fluid properties. These outputs are unaffected by changes in the saturations and fluids specified for the undisturbed zone. The Modeled column holds the modeled reservoir saturations. All the entries in each column may be toggled on and off by clicking on the Use button. Since the observed and wet cases are unaffected by changes in the modeled saturation there is no need to compute these for all modeled cases.

QC Checks Output Curves These outputs allow the user to verify that the program is using the input data as intended, and for basic troubleshooting in the case of unexpected results. The curves specific to the model not

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

1273

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

being used are greyed out.

Curve definitions are tabulated below Phie_fs

Porosity used by the program. Usually the effective porosity from log analysis

K_Flxo

Bulk modulus of the mixture of three fluids in the invaded zone. Check this to verify that it behaves consistently with the specified saturations, fluid properties and Woods factor.

Rho_Flxo

Density of the mixture of three fluids in the invaded zone.

K_FlRes

Bulk modulus of the mixture of three fluids in the modeled zone

Rho_FlRes

Density of the mixture of three fluids in the modeled zone

Volume of Rock “n”

The individual rock volumes used by the program to compute the bulk modulus of the solid fraction if more than one non-shale material is in the model. There should be a simple mapping from log analysis results to these volumes.

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

No_Com_Flg

1274

= 0 if computation runs. = 1 if porosity or shale fraction outside cutoffs = 2 if the Gassmann equation cannot be applied, for example because the computed formation bulk modulus is greater than the computed modulus of the solid fraction.

Vshlam Phi_Slam

Shale lamination volumetric fraction Sand lamination porosity. This may be computed from input effective porosity or input directly.

Kvo_Slam

Voigt computation of bulk modulus for the solid fraction in the sandy laminations

Kre_Slam Kr_Slam

Reuss computation of bulk modulus for the solid fraction fraction in the sandy laminations. Hill average of the Voigt and Reuss computations.

K_df_lam

Dry frame bulk modulus of the sandy laminations, computed using the algorithm specified on the K_df Model tab.

K_df_Gas_Lm

Dry frame bulk modulus of the sandy laminations, computed using the Gassmann equation. This computation is always made, irrespective of which K_df_Model is selected.

K_ReSolFlL

Reuss average of solid and fluid components of the sandy laminations. Data points lying below this value are evidence of bad data or incorrect parameter picks.

PR_df_Lam

Sand lamination dry frame Poisson’s ratio.

Kvo_WRoc

Voigt computation of the bulk modulus of the mixture of non-shale solids and shale (Whole Rock).

Kre_Wroc

Reuss computation of the bulk modulus of the mixture of nonshale solids and shale.

K_Wroc K_df

Hill average of the Voigt and Reuss results. Computed whole rock dry frame bulk modulus using the algorithm specified on the K_df Model tab.

K_df_Gass

Dry frame bulk modulus of the whole rock, computed using the Gassmann equation. This computation is always made, irrespective of which K_df_Model is selected.

K_Re_SolFl

Reuss average of solid and fluid components of the whole rock. Data points lying below this value are evidence of bad data or incorrect parameter picks.

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

1275

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

PR_df

Senergy

Whole rock dry frame Poisson’s ratio

Diagnostics Output Curves These curves are not usually output but may be selected to help the user diagnose awkward error conditions in the results, especially those related to breakdown of the Gassmann equation. The formulae for the curves named tmp* are listed in the Equations and Methodology section Compressional Sonic Log substitution to wet document. NOTE: that the program computes K dry frame only once, during the computation from observed to wet (***OtoW). The same dry frame value is used to predict the ****_Wet (brine-filled) and ****_Res (modeled) elastic properties.

Elastic Property Formulae Conversion factors are for moduli are in GPa, velocities in ft/s, impedances in g/cm 3.km/s, density are in g/cm 3 and slowness in µs/ft. Compressional impedance

Alc

304.8

b

tc

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1276

Shear impedance

Als

304.8

b

ts

Compressional to shear velocity ratio

VpVs

ts

tc

Bulk Modulus

Kb

304.8 2 tc

b

4 304.8 2 3 ts

Compressional Velocity in km/s

vp

tc

304.8

Shear Velocity in km/s

vs

ts

304.8

Poisson’s ratio 2

PR

2

t s 2 tc 2 2 ts tc

0.5

Hilterman’s acoustic impedance

P5 Al

0.5 In 304.8

tc

b

Lamda Rho LaRh b

v p 0.3048 10

b

vs 0.3048 10

3 2

2

b

vs 0.3048 10

3 2

Mu Rho MuRh 3 2

Shear Modulus

G

vs 0.3048 10

b

3 2

Young’s Modulus 2

E

b

ts

2

3 t s 4 tc 2 2 ts tc

2

Compressional Modulus

M

b

V

0.3048 10

3 2

Make Plot The Make Plot button lists three template plot options, Elastic properties plot, Velocities and

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

1277

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Poissons Ratio Plot and QC plot :

Print There are three print options, Parameters to Printer, Parameters to File and Parameters to Both File and Printer.

Related Topics Shear Sonic QC/Create Density Estimation Fluid Substitution Laminated Fluid Substitution Elastic Impedance 11.8.4.2 Equations and Methodology

Laminated Reservoir Fluid Substitution

Introduction Fluid substitution follows petrophysical log analysis. The two activities share many input curves and parameters. For example, the lithology and invaded zone fluid saturations from log analysis are key principal inputs to fluid substitution, and the pressures and temperatures used for log analysis are used to estimate the bulk moduli and densities of the fluids used in fluid substitution. Inconsistencies in fluid substitution results may identify shortcomings in log analysis, so iteration between log analysis and fluid substitution is common. The four tabs on the main program define the order in which the user sets up the input and output parameters. Wherever possible, mnemonics are consistent with conventions used elsewhere in IP. The program first runs substitution from the observed logs to the 100% water saturated case,

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1278

and then uses these results as the input to a simulation of any modeled saturation condition. The user should run quality checks on the observed to wet results to verify correct treatment of the invaded zone fluids before drawing any conclusions from the modeled zone results.

Data Preparation Many of the inputs needed for fluid substitution are known once a provisional log analysis pass has been made. The log analysis outputs should include wet shale, effective porosity and an analysis of the invaded zone hydrocarbon density, or fractions of gas, oil and OBM filtrate in the invaded zone. In his classic paper1, Gassmann stated that electrostatically bound water should be considered part of the rock frame, while capillary bound water is included in the porosity. The rock fraction may include as many or as few components as the geology and data indicate. The user should verify that the solid fractions plus effective porosity sum to 1.0. If a simple sandshale model was run, a sand fraction should be calculated as:

Vsand

1 Vshale

effective

A Vshale rather than Vclay interpretation is recommended. If the shale intervals are interpreted as 100% shale with zero porosity, their density, slowness and bulk modulus may be estimated by reading the logs directly. If shale intervals are interpreted as clay-silt mixtures with significant porosity it is more difficult to estimate the clay properties because pure clay does not occur in the log analysis results. The Greenberg-Castagna compressional-shear velocity relation works well in many areas. The user needs to specify GC coefficients for all the rock components present in the sand laminations in the laminated model. It is permissible to assign small fractions of secondary minerals with unknown GC coefficients the same coefficients as sand, or alternatively to lump together quartz and any secondary mineral into a single composite rock quartz-feldspar-mica or QFM type rock.

Fluid Substitution program theory and model - Observed to Wet This section describes the fluid substitution from observed to wet conditions using the Gassmann equation. The density, shear sonic and compressional sonic are handled sequentially, and the validity of each step depends on the previous results. So for example, there is no point in trying to diagnose a problem with compressional sonic substitution if there are inconsistencies in the density and shear substitution.

Density log substitution to wet

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

1279

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The observed density log is transformed using the estimated hydrocarbon density ρHC from log analysis using the formula: wet

obs

1 S xo

wtr

HC

In practice, the hydrocarbon density is the properties of the mixture of hydrocarbons in the invaded zone, for example, OBM filtrate and gas.

Shear sonic log substitution to wet On the assumption that the density and shear sonic log are both reading the same fluid mix, the shear sonic log may be transformed using the assumption that shear modulus is unaffected by fluid content:

t swet

wet

t sobs

obs

Compressional sonic log substitution to wet Selection of the Laminated Sand or Shaley Sand model determines whether the following logic applies to the whole formation, or to the sand laminations alone. Compute invaded zone fluid modulus Kf using a weighted average of the Woods (or Reuss) and Voigt mixing models. Weight the Woods model by Woods factor (Woodfac), for which the default value is 1 for Woods mixing. This approach is a simple way of honoring the observation that the invaded zone fluid mixture often behaves as though stiffer than predicted by the Woods model. See the Fluid Properties tab for more details.

1 K fW oods K fVoigt Kf

S filtrate

SW KW SW

K filtrate KW

S HC K HC

S filtrate K filtrate S HC

Woodfac K fW oods

1 Woodfac

K HC K fVoigt

Start with a Woods factor of 1.0, and reduce if necessary to achieve a plausible result in substitution to the wet case. The figure below shows how a Brie2 exponent of 3 compares with various values of Woodfac.

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1280

Woods Factor for Fluid Mixing 3.000 K_Woods 2.500

K_Serial

Bulk Modulus (GPa)

Woodfac 0.25 2.000

Woodfac 0.5 Woodfac 0.75

1.500

Brie Exp 3

1.000

0.500

0.000 0.000

0.200

0.400 0.600 Water Saturation

0.800

1.000

Compute the solid rock bulk modulus Kr using a weighted average of the Reuss and Voigt mixing models. Weight the two cases by the Voigt factor, for which the default value of 0.5 yields the Hill average. A maximum of five rocks is allowed. Generally the secondary minerals such as feldspars, micas and heavy minerals are lumped together with sand to create a quartz-feldsparmica or QFM rock. For simplicity this example shows only three solids.

1

Vsand Krsand

K r Re uss K r Voigt Kr

Vsilt Krsilt

Vshale Krshale

1

Vsand K r sand Vsilt K r silt Vshale K r shale

Voigtfac K rVoigt

1 Voigtfac

1

K r Re uss

Compute the formation shear modulus. NOTE: that we assume that this is unaffected by changes in fluid content, and therefore in principle there are two alternative formulae:

G

wet

t swet

obs 2

t sobs

2

Compute the observed formation bulk modulus from the observed density and sonic logs:

Kb

1 2 tc

4 2 3 ts

Compute the dry frame bulk modulus using the Gassmann equation, assigning K for the invaded zone fluid mixture to the porosity. The numerator and denominator are available as tmp1_OtoW and tmp2_OtoW and are useful diagnostics of program breakdown.

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

1281

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

kb K df

K flxo

1 Kr

1 Kr

2 Kr

K flxo

Senergy

1 tmp1 _ OtoW tmp2 _ otoW

Kb Kr

2

Compute the wet bulk modulus using the Gassmann equation rearranged as shown, assigning the formation water bulk modulus to the porosity. The numerator and denominator of the formula are output by the program as tmp3_OtoW and tmp4_OtoW.

1 K bW et

K df

K df Kr 1 Kr

K wtr

2

K df Kr

K df

tmp3 _ OtoW tmp4 _ OtoW

2

Compute the wet compressional sonic using the following formula:

tc W et

b W et

K b W et

4G 3

These wet results, particularly the wet compressional, should be compared with the GC derived wet compressional, and any discrepancies understood. This completes the observed to wet program sequence in the shaley sand case. Similar logic applies to the laminated model, but it differs in several key aspects.

Laminated model considerations The following figure shows how effective porosity and shale fraction relate to the laminated reservoir model.

The laminated model differs from the shaley sand model in two key respects: 1. The porosity relates to the sand laminations. It is derived from the effective porosity using the formula:

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy sand lams

effective

1282

1 Vshalelams

The shale lamination fraction may be derived from a correlation with core based sand fraction, or a Thomas-Stieber density-neutron analysis. 2. The fluid effects — the differences between the observed and fluid substituted values of the logs — only occur in the sand laminations, and need to be attenuated by multiplying by the sand lamination fraction

1 Vshalelams

Laminated and Shaley Sand models compared The laminated model estimates the shear slowness in the sand laminations using GreenbergCastagna, and adds the computed fluid effect to the input log. Consequently the two shale models give different results in the absence of shale laminations, although the difference is negligible if valid Greenberg-Castagna coefficients are specified. To a first approximation, the shaley sand model may be considered a special case of the laminated model with a shale lamination index equal to zero, but with one important difference. In the laminated model, the magnitude of the fluid effects is determined using a shear slowness estimated from the compressional using the Greenberg-Castagna method. This is done to preserve stability in low net to gross laminated intervals where the shale correction becomes illconditioned. The output shear slowness is equal to the observed log plus the computed fluid effects. If a shear log is available, the shaley sand model uses it in substitution to wet and from wet to modeled saturation. If no shear log is present, the program iterates to wet compressional predicted shear using Greenberg-Castagna. In these circumstances the evenly distributed shale model is a special case of the laminated model with a shale lamination fraction VshLam of zero throughout.

Alternative models for dry frame bulk modulus: Gassmann Model Computer programs apply the Gassmann equation in the forms:

K dryframe

f K b , K fluid , K solid ,

or

Kb

f K dryframe, K fluid , K solid ,

An alternative statement of the model:

K dryframe

Kb K solid

Kb

K solid

K dryframe

K fluid ( K solid

K fluid )

leads to the graphical illustration.

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

.

1283

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Graphical illustration of the Gassmann equation. Points lying on the Reuss average of the solid and fluid properties have zero dry frame modulus, and points lying below the line have negative calculated dry frame modulus, or more likely incorrect fluid, solid, porosity or solid material composition. The intercept porosity

R

is implicit in

the equation and not normally computed.

Critical Porosity Model The critical porosity model3 is based on the observation that bulk moduli of water saturated samples measured in the laboratory lie close to a straight line between the solid material modulus at zero porosity and the Reuss average of the solid and fluid properties at the critical porosity, the point at which the sample transitions between solid and emulsion like behaviour. At this point the bulk and shear moduli of the dry frame are both zero. The equation for dry frame bulk modulus is

K df (CPM )

K solid

1 crit

The shear modulus is unaffected by fluid content and points lie on a straight line between zero at critical porosity and the solid material shear modulus at zero porosity.

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1284

The model is purely empirical and no claims are made for any basis in physics. Nonetheless, the parallel with the graphical display of the Gassmann model is noteworthy, though the implied analogy between the critical porosity and Gassmann’s fR is apparently illusory.

Graphical illustration of bulk versus the critical porosity model. Shear modulus is zero at the critical porosity, implying zero shear velocity. Our implementation of fluid substitution does not honour this precisely, and instead estimates shear modulus from the bulk modulus and GC coefficients.

Krief Model The Krief model is another empirical model that differs from the critical porosity model at very high porosity as shown on the figure. The model may be refined by altering the term “m” from its default value of 3. Unlike the critical porosity model, the Krief model allows for shear propagation at very high porosity.

K df ( Krief )

K solid

1

m1

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

1285

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Bulk modulus from the Krief Model

Soft, Stiff, Intermediate and Mixed sand models This family of models4 is based on the premise that the stiffness of the dry frame is related to the effective stress (simplified to an equivalent average effective stress) via the mechanics of grain to grain interaction defined by the Hertz-Mindlin theory. Dry frame modulus is also a function of the porosity of the original sand pack at the time of deposition, the coordination5 number, the degree of adhesion between grains and the shear modulus of the solid material. The Hertz-Mindlin theory gives the following pressure dependent expressions for dry frame bulk and shear moduli where a fraction f of the grain contacts have perfect adhesion: 2

K HM GHM

2

C 2 1 0 GR P 2 18 2 1 2 3f 1 3f 52

1 3

3C 2 1 2 21

2 0

GR 2

2

P

Where C is the coordination number GR the solid rock material shear modulus

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1286

P the average effective stress the Poisson’s ratio of the solid material 0

the original porosity.

The (uncemented) soft sand model follows the lower Hashin-Shtrikman bound between the properties at the original and zero porosity. Cementation is assumed to occur away from the grain contacts. The intermediate model is a special case of the soft sand model with KHM defined by a coordination number equal to 15. 1

1 D

K eff ( soft) K HM

4 G HM 3

4 G HM 3

D

K

4 G HM 3

The stiff sand model follows the upper Hashin-Shtrikman bound between the original and zero porosity end points, and assumes an adhesion fraction of one, that friction prevents slippage between the grains. 1

1 D

K eff ( stiff ) K HM

D

4 GR 3

K

4 GR 3

4 GR 3

The mixed model is a weighted average of the soft and stiff sand models, favouring the soft model at high porosity and the stiff model at low porosity in line with some6 observations. The figures below compare the models, and show the influence of the adhesion fraction.

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

1287

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Bulk Modulus from soft, intermediate, stiff and mixed sand models. Models other than Stiff Sand have zero adhesion between grains

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

Senergy

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

Bulk Modulus from soft, intermediate, stiff and mixed sand models. All models have total adhesion (zero slippage) between grains.

Block diagrams showing Observed to Wet logic

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

1288

1289

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

Senergy

Senergy

Advanced Interpretation

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

1290

1291

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Quality control - Substitution to wet Quality control should verify that the results of saturation to wet have no visible imprint from the original saturations. The scheme shown here has worked in many areas. The figure below shows key inputs and outputs for QC. Track 3 shows the formation volumes that should match

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1292

the log analysis results. Tracks 4 and 5 show the invaded and undisturbed zone saturations. At this stage the undisturbed zone saturations are only relevant for identifying hydrocarbon-bearing intervals. Track 6 shows the input effective porosity, and if a laminated model was used the computed un-discriminated sand lamination porosity. The remaining tracks show some of the key elastic logs. This plot shows a subset of the curves plotted under Make Plot

Elastic

Properties Plot.

Cross-plots are also useful. The distribution of density versus effective porosity should not depend on water saturation. The left hand plot shows the observed (olive) and water substitution (blue) over the water and gas legs in the same well. The presence of gas reduces the density for a given effective porosity. The right hand plot shows the substitution to wet for the entire interval, coloured by the computed water saturation. Correct treatment of the fluid effects on the density log is indicated by the wet substitution collapsing on to a single trend with no saturation dependence as shown on the right.

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

1293

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The fluid effects on shear slowness are small, but it is still worthwhile making the plots as they may also be used to validate the raw shear data.

The Gassmann equation is defined in terms of bulk modulus, so successful computation of wet bulk modulus can be verified using similar logic. As before, the left hand plot shows the observed and wet data, while the right hand plot shows how bulk modulus has collapsed on to a single trend after fluid substitution.

Wet compressional slowness is computed from wet bulk modulus, and similar reasoning is applied.

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1294

Geophysicists are interested in the effects of fluids on the VpVs ratio. This may be examined by reference to cross-plots of shear against compressional slowness for the observed (left) and wet substituted data (right) as shown below. The gas effect on compressional slowness is evident on the left hand plot, while on the right the points from the gas bearing intervals lie on a similar trend to the data from the water leg.

Alternatively, the consistency of the VpVs ratio may be evaluated in plots against effective porosity as shown below.

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

1295

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Substitution to Modeled Saturation Fluid substitution program theory and model - wet to modeled Once a model for substitution from observed to wet has been established, substitution to any other fluid condition and saturation profile is a largely mechanical exercise. The undisturbed zone saturations are used to specify the modeled saturation condition. There are a number of common scenarios. 1. 100% water saturated. The program always computes the responses (Rho_Wet, DTc_Wet and DTs_Wet) with the effective porosity filled with formation water. A number of QC checks are made with this set of curves. 2. Observed fluids and saturations. The water saturation input is the petrophysicist’s best estimate of true formation saturation. Any low hydrocarbon saturations in water zones must be removed to prevent spurious effects in the modeled results. In a gas reservoir, set the oil saturation to zero. In wells with oil and gas, compute one or other of oil and gas saturation equal to zero or one minus Sw according to the hydrocarbon present. 3. Fill zones with hydrocarbon. The effect of filling wet zones with hydrocarbon can be simulated by selecting a modeled water saturation curve driven off a correlation observed in hydrocarbon bearing zones. A simple correlation with shale fraction or effective porosity often works well. The example shown below worked in one of our fields. The correlation was picked off a cross-plot and clipped at one.

S wHC

a b

e

c

2 e

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1296

4. Fill zones with fizz. A fizz saturation may be defined by limiting a curve such as SwHC specified above between 0.85 and 1.0. This is illustrated below where Swirr_Phie (track 19) came from the function in the cross-plot above and closely matches the calculated saturations in the hydrocarbon bearing intervals. Sw_Fiz_Phi is Swirr_Phie clipped at a minimum value of 0.85. Sw1 in track 18 is the water saturation from log analysis. The are fill identifies the oil and gas sands.

5. Compute dry frame properties. Correlations with static mechanical properties measured in the laboratory are usually made with respect to dry frame properties which may be thought of as the density and slowness of the rock frame with no contribution from fluids. This case is achieved by setting gas saturation to unity, and specifying a gas with zero density and bulk modulus.

Block diagrams showing wet to modeled logic

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

1297

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

Senergy

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1298

Quality control - Substitution to modelled saturation QC of computed outputs should address these questions 1. Were the fluid saturations and properties correctly specified, or did the user make an error? Do the different cases differ as expected? The standard plot formats provided in IP are designed to illustrate the key input saturations. For example, the plot below identifies the filtrate invasion and reservoir hydrocarbon (gas) in the invaded zone and fluids in the undisturbed zone in tracks 4 and 5.

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

1299

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Other checks depend on circumstances For example, since most reservoir fluids are have lower density and stiffness than mud filtrate, the invasion corrected logs should lie further from the wet case than the observed logs. The result of running a gas-filled model in a gas bearing sand should be similar to the invasion corrected case. Filling a zone with gas at low (fizz) saturation should lower the density slightly. At moderate pressure it should yield a compressional sonic close to the gas filled case. The effect of low gas saturation is reduced at high pressure. 2. Are there any spikes or other obviously wrong results? Density and shear slowness substitution results are generally stable, as the equations are robust and unlikely to break down. Several conditions cause Gassmann equation breakdown. - If the formation bulk modulus is higher than the computed modulus of the solid fraction the Gassmann equation cannot be applied. This condition tends to occur in tight streaks, typically carbonates, in shales or very shaley formations. Because the formation is tight, fluid effects are likely to be small and the user should pass the input curves though to the outputs. This condition is identified by No_Com_Flg equal to 2. - Poorly specified parameters or the application of a shaley sand model in a laminated reservoir can result in unstable, zero or negative dry frame bulk modulus. This condition can be identified by inspecting the K_df output curve. This is not usually a problem when applying the laminated model 3. How confident should we be in the results?

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1300

The QC of the wet case result should verify that initial saturation effects have been removed, and similar plots of the results of filling the interval with gas or oil should verify consistency in the modeled results. There is often uncertainty in the modeled fluid properties, particularly for oil. Passes may be made using a range of fluid properties to quantify the effects of uncertainty. We generally find that the oil-filled model results are quite sensitive to the specified GOR, and that PVT measurements and FLAG estimates are quite different, while in gas models at moderate temperature and pressure the results are very insensitive to changes in the specified gas properties. The influence of the choice of shale distribution model may be assessed by running passes with the laminated and evenly distributed shale model. The sensitivity to shale model choice is often larger than the sensitivity to the plausible fluid property range.

Notes 1

. Gassmann classic paper, translated by Berrymans students.

2

. Brie A, et al, "Shear Sonic Interpretation in Gas-Bearing Sands", 1995, SPE 30595

3

Mavko, Mukerji and Dvorkin, 1998, "The Rock Physics Handbook", Cambridge University

Press. 4

. Mavko, Mukerji and Dvorkin, 1998, "The Rock Physics Handbook", Cambridge University

Press. 5

. The coordination number is the number of grains in contact with each grain. Published data

from Murphy (1982) suggests that this varies from about 8 to 14 as porosity reduces from 0.4 to 0.2. it is also thought to increase with clay content. 6

. R.Beardsley, personal communication, 2007.

Related Topics Shear Sonic QC/Create Density Estimation Fluid Substitution Laminated Fluid Substitution Elastic Impedance

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

1301

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

11.8.5 Elastic Impedance The Elastic Impedance (EI) is as calculated by P. Connolly in The Leading Edge paper (1999). The equation used is the one for high angle inversion (equation 4.1). There is little difference between the low angle equation and the high angle equation for angles below about 20°. For angles above 30° the low angle equation starts to become unstable.

EI

Vp 1

Sin 2

Vs

1 4 K Sin 2

8 K Sin 2 b

Where Vp = Compressional velocity Vs = Shear velocity K = Constant representing the average ρb = Bulk Density θ = Incidence angle

Vs 2 Vp 2

for the interval

Input curves The user enters the Vp, Vs and density curves and their appropriate units.

Result Elastic Impedance Curves Base Name : One EI curve will be generated for each angle requested to be processed. The result curve names will consist of the Base Name plus the angle number. For the above example the output curve names are EI_10, EI_20 and EI_30. Angles grid box : The user enters the angles to process. Up to 10 different angles can be processed at once.

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1302

K constant The K constant for the EI equation must be entered. The Calculate K from interval button can be used to calculate the average K over the selected interval. If this button is clicked the following pop-up window will appear :

If the user selects Yes then an output curve called EI_Kconst will be created in the well. This will be the instantaneous K value over the whole well.

K

Vs 2 Vp 2

The average K value, for the selected depth interval, will be displayed in the K Constant box window regardless of whether the user has chosen to create an EI_Kconst curve.

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

1303

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Calculation Units The user can select the calculation units for the velocity and density input into the EI equation. Due to the form of the equation the result curve shapes will be different depending on the calculation units. NOTE: Unit conversion can not be made afterwards on the output curve but must be made on the input curves.

EI Normalization Since the overall average values of the EI curves depend on the angles, the EI normalization allows the curves to be normalized to the AI curve at defined depths so that the differences between the AI curve and the EI curves can be easily seen. Check the Normalize to AI curve box to turn on the normalization.

Enter the logs depths at which to normalize the curves. At these depths the EI normalized curves will be identical in value to the AI curve. The normalization is done by taking the ratio of AI/EI at the normalization depths and applying this ratio to the EI curve away from these depths. If more that one normalization depth is entered then the normalization value between the entered depths will be a linear extrapolation of the values at the entered depths.

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1304

Intervals The user can either select the depth range over which to calculate the EI curves or select a tops set and the zones over which the calculations are to be made.

The Run button will make the calculations and update the log plots. The Log Plot button will produce a drop-down box that will allow the user to choose either to add to the current log plot or to create a new log plot.

The following is an example of a New Plot. If the Add to current plot is selected then the right hand EI/AI track, seen in the example below, will be added to the right hand side of the current plot.

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

1305

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Related Topics Shear Sonic QC/Create Density Estimation Fluid Substitution Laminated Fluid Substitution

Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

Senergy

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

11.9

1306

Pore Pressure Calculations

The 'Pore Pressure Calculation' Modules comprise the following three tools: 'Density Estimation', 'Overburden Gradient Calculation' 'Run Pore and Fracture Pressure gradient calculations' These tools can be used to evaluate the subsurface pressures encountered within a well. They enable the user to model Overburden (OB), Pore (PP) and Fracture (FP) pressures based on conventional log curves, drilling information and seismic data input. It can be used as a pre-drill (predictive) and while-drilling (real-time) tool, as well as for post-drilling analysis to update and refine OB, PP and FP models.

In pore pressure computations many data types are integrated to provide as comprehensive a sub-surface pressure analysis as possible. Data collation, preparation and QC are essential pre-analysis steps. The diagram below, while not providing an exhaustive list, illustrates the types of data that should be retrieved and accessible before starting an analysis.

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

1307

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

When data compilation is complete, the following 'Preparation workflow', should be followed within Interactive Petrophysics (IP); before proceeding to the Pore Pressure evaluation modules:

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

Then proceed to the main 'Interpretation' menu

1308

'Pore Pressure Calculations'. The

following options are available under the 'Pore Pressure Calculation' menu:

The technical papers on which these modules are based are listed in the 'Pore Pressure References' Section. The inexperienced user is advised to locate and read at least a few of these references to familiarize themselves with the techniques / calculations being used. Recommended reading would include the following: 1. SPE Reprint Series No.49 "Pore Pressure and Fracture Gradients". 2. Mouchet, J-P., Mitchell, A. Abnormal Pressures While Drilling - Manuels Techniques 2 Elf Aquitaine (1989)

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

1309

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Related Topics Pore Pressure Calculations Density Estimation Pore & Fracture Pressure Gradient Calculations

11.9.2 Overburden Gradient Calculation The 'Overburden Gradient Calculation' tool is the second module within the Pore Pressure Calculation 'suite' and calculates the instantaneous average overburden gradient and overburden pressure curves relative to the 'reference depth' datum , whether that is KB (TVD KB) , Mean Sea Level (TVDSS) or TVD Sea Bed. NOTE: we are working in a 'True Vertical Depth' domain in both the 'Overburden Gradient Calculation' module and the 'Run Pore and Fracture Pressure gradient calculation' module.

This module permits the user to model the overburden gradient OBGrad and overburden pressure OBPres curves for the well under evaluation. The OBGrad curve can be modelled directly from a combination of : User-selected density curve data and / or User-input average density values (with associated top and bottom depths). in the absence of density logs, 'Look-up tables' or An empirical 'Amoco' relationship can be used. NOTE: While a default 1 psi/ft (19.25 lbs/gal) overburden gradient may give acceptable results for onshore wells, it is not recommended for use with deep water interpretations, where the effects of depth of water and thickness of poorly-consolidated sediments need to be evaluated more rigorously. The 'Overburden Gradient Calculation' screen is divided into a number of 'panels': 'Input Well Data' 'Input Density Curves or Fixed Values' 'Intervals where Density Curve is Missing' 'Overburden Results Curves'

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1310

Input Well Data This section requires the user to select a 'Depth Curve'. If the subject well is vertical then the 'measured depth' DEPTH curve would be suitable. However, if the well is significantly deviated then a TVD KB, TVD SS or TVD SB (referenced to Sea Bed) depth curve should be computed and selected. The user should also, if necessary, use the 'Well Depths Editor' functionality to extend the subject wells depth range to surface before running this module. This enables the Overburden Gradient and Overburden Pressure curves to be computed over the entire well, rather than only where wireline logs have been loaded. 'KB Height' is picked up from the 'Well Header Info.'

'Default Parameters' tab if the data

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

1311

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

has been entered there. Otherwise, type in a KB elevation above your well depth datum - usually Mean Sea Level offshore ( the 'Air gap'). 'Water Depth' / 'Density'. In the offshore drilling situation the Water Depth and Water Density values are required to compute the overburden contribution of the water column. The water density value can be input using the following units - lbs/gal, psi/ft, gm/cc, Kg/m 3.

Input Density Curves or Fixed Values This 'grid' table enables the user to select a density curve, either from the 'Density Estimation' calculation, or from an existing well log, or user-entered constant values of bulk density over a depth range, for use in the computations. The OBGrad and OBPres curves are then created by an integration operation performed on the density log data and any other values added into the grid. The values of 'Water Depth' / 'Density' allow the calculation of the overburden gradient contribution of this interval to the final model.

Intervals where density curve is missing For intervals within the subject well, where no density curve exists, the following section provides a means to compute 'missing' overburden gradient and pressure data. This section allows the user to apply a number of methods for computing a 'continuous' overburden gradient curve from surface / reference depth to Well Total Depth.

1. The user can apply an empirical relationship, selected by 'checking' the 'Amoco Avg. Sediment Density' option, then by typing an average sediment density value into the text box and selecting a density 'unit' from the drop-down list. This method is documented by Traugott, M.4. The relationships are shown below: OBG

8.5 W

avg

D W

A

D

if you know the

avg

value to input

Where OBG = Overburden Gradient W

= water depth (ft)

8.5

= assumed sea water density (lbs/gal)

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

D

= TVD depth below KB (ft)

A

= Air gap (ft) avg

1312

= average sediment density (lbs/gal, gm/cc, etc.)

If you do not have a

avg

value, 'checking' the 'Amoco Compaction Relationship' option

will calculate the average sediment density input to the 'Amoco Avg. Sediment Density' method, using the following equation. avg

= 16.3 + [(D-W-A) / 3125] 0.6

This simple compaction relationship is only suitable for sand/shale sequences that have not experienced unloading/uplift. The value, 0.6, is an empirical exponent. 2. Alternatively, a user-defined 'Lookup tables' overburden gradient curve can be loaded directly into IP. Details of the data formatting and file naming conventions required for this are included in the 'Overburden Gradient Curves' section. Three overburden gradient curves have been included with IP. These are:

The 'Offshore Texas/Louisiana' dataset was provided by Unocal. The 'Average GOM (Amoco)' data was taken from Figure 2 in the 'Fracture Prediction for the New Generation' paper, by Eaton and Eaton5. The 'Deepwater GOM (Amoco)' data was based on calculations by Barker and Wood6. By including an air gap and water depth / water density in the computation, the 'Barker & Wood' overburden gradient curve can be calculated for any water depth from the rig depth reference point (RT / KB) using the following equation: Cum. Av. Formation. Bulk Density (lb/gal) = 5.3 * (TVDBML) 0.1356 (where depth units are in feet and TVDBML = TVD depth Below Mud Line)

Overburden Results Curves The output results curves OBGrad (gradient) and OBPres (Pressure) curves, their curve units and the 'Output Depth Type' can all be selected in this panel.

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

1313

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The 'Output Depth Type' drop-down list allows the user to change the datum for the output curves. For example, if the input data is relative to TVD KB, the output curve could be adjusted to a TVD Sub Sea datum or TVD Sea Bed datum, depending upon the way the user wishes to use the 'Pore Pressure Calculations' Module. NOTE: It is good practice to decide upon an Output Depth Type for the Overburden Gradient calculations and use that same reference consistently in the Pore /Fracture gradient module. The Module buttons have the following functions: 'OK' - executes the computations using the curves, values and methodology that the user has selected. 'Make Plot' - launches a QC log plot to show the computed overburden gradient and overburden pressure curves. 'Save' - allows the user to save the module settings to an external (.obu) file. 'Load' - allows the user to re-load a set of saved settings from an external (.obu) file.

Related Topics Pore Pressure Calculations Density Estimation Pore & Fracture Pressure Gradient Calculations

11.9.3 Pore & Fracture Pressure Gradient Calculations 'Run Pore and Fracture Pressure gradient calculation' is the third module within the 'Pore Pressure Calculations' suite.

This module provides the user with the methodologies to generate Pore Pressure and Fracture Pressure gradient models for the study well, based on the analysis of input log curves and

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1314

additional drilling information, when this is available. The 'Pore Pressure Gradient' parameters and set-up are organized on a number of screen ' tabs'. These are:

'Input' 'Output Curves' 'Parameters' 'Well Data' 'Result Xplot'

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

1315

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

An additional tab, 'Daines Parameters', will only be visible if the user elects to 'Calculate Fracture Gradient / Pressure from:' and selecting 'Daines' methodology. The tabs are described below. References to technical papers whose techniques are implemented in this module are provided in the 'Pore Pressure References' section.

'Input' Tab The 'Input' tab allows the user to select the log curves and well depth data to be used in the interpretation, together with the Pore Pressure and Fracture Pressure Gradient models to be applied to the data. Log curves can be selected from the drop-down menu boxes.

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1316

The 'Input' tab is split into a number of panels:

'Well Input Data' Panel This section allows the user to set up a number of well properties which IP uses in the pore pressure calculations. The 'Overburden Gradient Curve' input is the output results curve calculated in the ' Overburden Gradient Calculation' module or a user-supplied curve. The input curve units are selected from the adjacent drop-down list. Overburden Gradient Curve 'Ref' - This is the depth 'Reference Datum' that was used to

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

1317

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

create the Overburden Gradient (OBGrad) and Overburden Pressure (OBPres) curves. The 'Depth Curve' should be the curve that was used in the Overburden Gradient calculation module. This could be the DEPTH curve if the subject well is vertical, or a computed TVD KB or TVDSS curve when the well is significantly deviated. The Depth Curve 'Ref' (reference) is selected from the adjacent drop-down list. The 'Shale Discriminator Curve' can be selected from the drop-down list box and should be either : 1. A clay volume curve from the output of running the 'Clay Volume' interpretation module, or 2. Another 'clay indicator' curve (e.g.GR). When the 'Shale Discriminator Curve' check box is 'checked' and the interactive Log plot for this module is launched, a shale discriminator track with interactive cut-off line will be visible. This helps the user to select shale intervals for use in the pore pressure calculations. 'KB Height (Air Gap)' - the Kelly Bushing elevation for the well. This value will be automatically filled in, if the appropriate value has been entered into the 'Manage Well Header Info.' module, on the 'Default Parameters' tab. The user can type the 'KB Height' value into the box if it is empty. 'Water Depth' - The 'Water Depth' value will be automatically filled in, if the appropriate value has been entered into the 'Manage Well Header Info.' module, 'Default Parameters' tab. The user can type the 'Water Depth' value into the box if it is empty. The water depth value should be a positive integer. 'Water Density' - The pore pressure calculations take into account the pressure exerted by the height of the water column in the offshore environment. The user should type in an appropriate sea water density value and 'Unit'. The IP default value is 8.5 lbs/gal, which is equivalent to 0.441psi/ft or 1.018 gm/cc.

Pressure Gradient Conversion Factors Typical conversion factors between lbs/gal, psi/ft and gm/cc are included here for reference: 1.0 lbs/gal = 0.051948 psi/ft 1.0 psi/ft

= 19.25 lbs/gal

1.0 gm/cc = 8.3454 lbs/gal 1.0 psi/ft

= 2.30666 gm/cc

A Fresh water pressure gradient would be 0.434 psi/ft or 8.345 lb/gal A Saturated brine pressure gradient would be 0.519 psi/ft or 9.991 lb/gal.

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1318

'Calculate Pore Pressure Gradient / Pressures from' Panel The 'Calculate Pore Pressure Gradients / Pressure from' panel sets up the curves to be used as Pore Pressure 'indicators'. The underlying computations are based on Eaton's7 methodology and use a deep-reading resistivity, a sonic log and/or a Drilling Exponent (Dxc) curve as inputs. The user 'checks' the models to be initiated when the calculations are executed. Eaton established the following empirical relationships, based on the principle that the relationship between an 'observed' parameter versus a 'normal' parameter ratio and the formation pressure depends on changes in the overburden gradient. In IP, Shale 'Normal Compaction Trend' (NCT) lines are established for each input curve (sonic, resistivity and Dxc) and the deviation of the 'observed' log response from the appropriate NCT line is used to compute a Pore Pressure, using the calculated overburden gradient OBGrad curve. The Eaton relationships are illustrated below: Resistivity:

P D

S D

S D

P Rsh observed * Dn Rsh normal

S D

S D

P * Dn

1.2

Sonic:

P D

Tshale normal Tshale observed

3.0

Drilling Exponent:

P D

S D

S D

P Dxc observed * Dn Dxc normal

1.2

Where S/D = Overburden Stress Gradient (Psi/ft) P/D = Formation Pore Pressure gradient (Psi/ft) P/Dn = Normal Pore pressure gradient (Psi/ft) Rsh = Shale resistivity (ohmm) Tshale = Shale travel time (usec/ft) Dxc = Drilling exponent in Shale The Eaton 'exponents' used in these equations are sufficiently reliable for widespread use in exploration wells. However, where for example, calibration pressure data is available from offset wells, the exponents can be validated. The Eaton exponents can be modified on the 'Parameters ' tab of this module.

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

1319

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

In equations where the Eaton exponent is 1.2 (Resistivity and Dxc) , the range can be between 0.9 – 2.00. In the Tshale equation, where the exponent is 3.0, the range can be 2.0 – 4.0. Eaton's method is generally accepted as the most widely applied pore pressure evaluation technique. If the Resistivity model is 'checked' there is an option, on the input screen, to correct the resistivity curve to a constant temperature, using a user-defined temperature curve.

The Arps equation has been used to temperature correct the resistivity log. The temperature correction has the effect of reducing the drift of the resistivity curve with increasing depth/ temperature. The temperature-corrected resistivity curve is called ResCorr in the 'Output curves' scheme. An alternative temperature correction equation (Amoco) replaces (+6.77) with (-6) in the Arps equation and can be applied as a 'user-formula' from the 'User Defined Formula ' module. Note that the 'Resistivity' method has a number of limitations which must be considered during an evaluation: Variations in Cation Exchange Capacity (CEC) will affect the normal shale compaction trend line (NCT_Res). Formation temperature and fluid salinity effects are significant, especially at shallow depths. The computation calculates pore pressures in low TOC shales only. The methodology becomes less accurate at deep burial depths where porosity is low.

'Calculate Fracture Gradient / Pressure from' Panel The 'Calculate Fracture Gradient / Pressure from' Panel allows the user to select a Fracture Gradient calculation model to apply in the subject well. The available models are : 'Eaton' 'Matthews & Kelly' 'Modified Eaton' 'Barker & Wood' 'Daines'

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1320

These models are described more fully in the 'Fracture Gradient Models' section. The user should 'check' the radio button of the 'Model' to be used. Both the 'Eaton' and 'Matthews and Kelly' models incorporate additional 'Options', which can be selected from the drop-down lists. Please refer to the 'Fracture Gradient Models' section for more details.

'Output Curves' Tab The 'Output Curves' tab allows the user to either; take the default IP curve names for computed pressure and gradient curves, or to rename individual curves to the users own specifications. Output pressure units, gradient units and depth references are also selected here.

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

1321

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The 'Calculate Pore Pressure Tolerances' check box, if 'checked' before the model is run, will create 'High-side' and 'Low-side' curves for each input to the Pore Pressure model. For example, If the sonic log is used to model pore pressure, then the interactive log plot display will show the computed Pore-Pressure-from-Sonic curve within a shaded 'envelope' defined by the ' High-side' and 'Low-side' curves. The user must type a value into the '% Tolerance' box to be used to calculate these additional curves. For example, a value of '5', the default value, would allow IP to calculate the 'Pore Pressure plus 5%' ('High-side') and Pore Pressure minus 5% ('Low-side') curves. The 'Null Output Curves' button, when 'clicked' allows the user to set all output curve values to -

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1322

999. This can be useful if the user has 'run' a model and then wishes to experiment with different depth ranges for the pore/fracture pressure gradient calculations, for example, or if the user wishes to change the Fracture Pressure model and re-run the calculations without having to delete the results curves before proceeding.

'Parameters' Tab The 'Parameters' tab contains a number of 'sub-tabs' which give the user further interactivity with the Pore and Fracture pressure calculations. The sub-tabs are:

'General'

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

1323

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

'Resistivity' 'Sonic' 'D Exponent' The 'General' sub-tab permits the user to create / delete zones, to edit zone top/ bottom depths and to manually edit the cut-off value for the Shale Discriminator curve, including the ability to turn on/off the Shale discriminator curve in any zone. The tab also allows the user to input a 'normal' hydrostatic gradient value, the 'Hydro Gradient' parameter, and 'Hyd Grad Units' (hydrostatic gradient units). This value is used in the Eaton Pore Pressure models (the 'P/Dn' term). The IP default normal hydrostatic gradient is set at 1.0 gm/cc (Fresh water).

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

Senergy

Advanced Interpretation

1324

The 'Resistivity', 'Sonic' and 'D Exponent' sub-tabs allow the user to modify the Eaton exponents (described above), if the default values do not generate a pore pressure curve that matches closely to some measured subsurface calibration pressures from, for example, RFT. All tabs contain the same column headings, which are described below.

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

1325

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The 'Eaton Exp.' (Exponent) column contains the 'default' exponent for resistivity, sonic and Dxc as determined by Eaton. This parameter is user-editable. The 'Filter Length' option allows the user to select a 'smoothing' distance over which the output Pore Pressure, Fracture gradient and pressure curves ('PPG_XXX', 'FG_XXX'and ' PP_XXX') are averaged. The filter length, in units of 'depth steps', must be entered, and be a whole, odd number between 3 and 2001 for both the 'Square' and 'Bell' filters. NOTE: setting the 'Filter Length' to a value of '1' will compute the output curves at the input curve depth increment and will calculate the exact output values according to Eatons equations. Applying a 'Filter Length' will result in an 'averaging' of the Output curves, which will depend on the 'type' of filter selected and the 'Filter Length' value. The 'Filter Type' parameter, can be 'toggled' to select an appropriate filtering algorithm. The choices are 'Square' and 'Bell'. These are described briefly below: The 'Square' (or box) filter will apply an equal weight to all samples in the filter. The 'Bell' shape filter applies a sine wave shape filter to the data. The following formula is used to calculate the filter weights. 1 Cos 2 Wt j

j Filtlen 1

Filtlen 1

Where Wtj = Filter Weight at j'th level FiltLen = Filter Length The 'Extra Gaps' parameter allows the user to extrapolate across data gaps in the selected Res_Shale, Son_Shale or Dex_Shale curves since these curves will have gaps where the ' Shale discriminator' cut-off value is not reached. When 'checked' this option helps to make a continuous pair of output Pore Pressure and Fracture gradient results curves for each selected

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1326

pore pressure indicator curve. The'Extrap Abv Zone' parameter allows the user, in a 'zoned' interpretation, to select to extrapolate above a zone, in order to create continuous pore pressure and fracture gradient and pressure curves. If 'checked' the output curves will be displayed as continuous curves.

'Daines Parameters' Tab The 'Daines Parameters' tab is only visible when the 'Daines Fracture Gradient Model' is selected on the 'Input' Tab. This screen allows the user to set up the data to create or load a ' Poissons Ratio' curve that is intrinsic to the Daines methodology. See the 'Fracture Gradient Models' section for a full description. The tab contains two data input 'panels'. 1. The upper 'Manual Input for User-Created Poissons Ration Curve' panel is used to manually create a Daines 'Poissons Ratio' curve. The user enters a top and bottom depth value and selects a 'Lithology' from the drop- down list. The Daines Poissons ratio value is filled in automatically. By tabulating the lithologies penetrated in the subject well, IP will create the Poissons Ratio curve for the well when the 'OK' button is 'clicked'. IP also creates a ' Facies Code' curve (Facies_PP) based on the selected lithologies. This curve is added to the interactive log plot display as a 'graphic lithology' track with bitmap shading for each lithology type.

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

1327

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

2. The lower panel is used to input 'Daines Leak Off Test' (LOT) Data Input' information. These data are used to calibrate the 'Daines Fracture Gradient' Model. The user should fill in the data 'grid' with any LOT data that has been acquired in the subject well. See the ' Fracture Gradient Models' section for more information.

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1328

'Well Data' Tab The 'Well Data' tab is used : To record 'Casing Strings' details, including Leak Off Test pressures. To compute 'Mud Weight' (gradient) and mud pressure curves. NOTE: If a 'Mud Weight' curve is selected or created, it will automatically appear in the 'Pore Pressure Gradient Results' and 'Fracture Gradient Results' tracks of the Interactive Log Plot. To record 'Operational Problems', for use in the interactive and final crossplots.

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

1329

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

'Casing Strings' sub tab Casing string details are manually entered into the blank 'Casing information' table. Users can select a casing size from the drop-down list or type in their own values.

The 'Mud Weight' sub-tab The 'Mud Weight' sub-tab allows the user either: to select an existing mud weight curve (loaded elsewhere in IP) which can be used to to

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1330

generate a 'mud pressure' curve, or to manually enter depths and mud weights into a table, choosing the appropriate mud weight units, and select the 'Create curves' button.

Mud weight (gradient) and pressure curves are created with the names that the user enters into the data entry boxes at the top of the tab.

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

1331

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The 'Operational Problems' sub-tab The 'Operational Problems' sub-tab gives the user the opportunity to record any operational or formation/drilling information that might be useful to store and display on the Results Xplot.

Symbols have been linked to some common problem types and these can be added to the Xplot annotations by using the

button at the bottom of the 'Well Data / Operational

Problems' sub tab. This operation pastes the well data information into the 'Results Xplot Annotations' table with the ability to add to the existing annotations or to replace the current annotations. Additional comments can then be added in the text box of the 'Annotations' tab

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1332

When the user is satisfied with the pore and fracture pressure interpretation in the interactive window, a results crossplot (Xplot) can be output.

'Results Xplot' Tab This 'tab' allows the user to choose whether to plot modelling results as Depth versus Pressure or as Depth versus Pressure Gradients, by selecting the appropriate 'X axis Scale '. The user can then choose the units to be used to display the pressures. 'Mud weight lines' can be displayed as overlays on the Pressure plot by toggling the 'Display Lines' 'check' box. Overlay line units can be selected from the drop-down 'Units' box.

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

1333

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Default overburden-, pore- and fracture pressure curve names from the interpretation are available to plot. Curves can be added or de-selected by 'un/checking' the 'Plot' column on the left hand side of the window. Curve attributes (colour, symbol, weight, title) can all be changed interactively. The plot is displayed by selecting

.

Additional well information can be added to a plot from the 'Annotations' tab. Text and symbols are placed on the plot by inputting XY coordinates (which depend on the type of plot required) and then by typing in comments and selecting font size and colour. Plots are updated for new annotation data by clicking on the

button.

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1334

Both the Depth versus Pressure 'Fan Diagram' and the Depth versus Pressure Gradient ' Gradient' Plot' can be annotated with casing shoe symbols, RFT pressure points, Leak Off Pressure values and operational comments to identify hole stability problems such as mud losses, stuck pipe, Kicks / well flows. Additional curve data such as mud weight /ECD curves can be added to the display. Examples of the two plot formats are illustrated below. All annotations, log curves and plot scales can be saved to a format file (.fpt) in order to be able to reproduce the plot at a later date. The 'Options' tab allows the user to add a plot title and subtitle, set X and Y axis names, depth labelling intervals and add a legend to the gradient and pressure plot.

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

1335

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Example of a Depth versus Pore/Fracture Pressure Plot

Example of a Depth versus Pore / Fracture Gradient Plot

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

Senergy

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1336

Related Topics Pore Pressure Calculations Density Estimation Pore & Fracture Pressure Gradient Calculations 11.9.3.1 Running the Model

When all input curve data, Leak Off Test information (for 'Daines' Fracture Gradient Model), Mud Weight and Output curve options are entered into the interface and the Pore and Fracture Gradient models have been selected, the module should be initiated by 'clicking' the 'OK' button. Click the 'Make Plot' button to launch the module's 'Interactive Log Plot'. The 'Interactive Log Plot' comprises of:

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

1337

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

a 'Depth' track, a 'Zone' track, a 'Shale Discriminator' track, 'Pore Pressure Model' tracks; one each for Resistivity , Sonic, Dxc, depending on what was 'checked' in the 'Input' tab. The sonic and resistivity curves are displayed on a logarithmic scale versus depth. 'Pore Pressure Gradient Result' and 'Fracture Pressure Gradient Result' tracks'. The computed output Pore and Fracture Pressure gradient curves are illustrated in the two tracks on the right hand side of the plot. If a 'Mud Weight' curve has been selected or created in the 'Well Data' - 'Mud Weight' sub tab, then this curve will also be automatically added to the 'Results' log tracks.

The 'Zone' track enables the well to be 'zoned' according to user requirements; for example - to separate major intervals of shale lithology from non-shale. The 'Shale Discriminator' track allows the user to set the interactive 'Shale discriminator line' for the well, in the log plot display. The Shale indicator can also be switched 'on'/'off ' (right-mouse-button 'click' in track) for a particular zone. This is the 'default' method for

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1338

selection of Shale Intervals which will be used for computing the Pore and Fracture pressures and gradients.

Moving the interactive 'Shale Discriminator' cut-off line results in corresponding changes to the amount of highlighted log curve (in red) in the adjacent 'Pore Pressure Model' tracks. Only the highlighted (red) 'Shale' data are used in the computations. The Pore Pressure Gradient (PPG) and Fracture Gradient (FG) Results tracks are immediately updated for any changes the user makes to shale cut-offs or for any manual edits that are made to shale intervals in the Resistivity, Sonic and Dxc evaluation tracks. Sonic, Resistivity and Drilling Exponent are displayed in separate 'Model' tracks in the interactive display. A Normal Compaction Trend (NCT) line for sonic log response in shale ( NCT_Son), for resistivity in shale (NCT_Res) and for D exponent in Shale (NCT_Dex) are also displayed in the appropriate track.

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

1339

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Editing 'NCT' Lines The 'NCT' (Normal Compaction Trend) lines are interactive and are initially defined by 2 blue marker points, which can be moved around within each input curves 'Model' track. To change the position / slope of the NCT line in a particular track: 1. Left-mouse-button 'click' in a 'Model' track to open the editing dialog, Right-mouse-button 'click' on the 'Editing NCT' option (highlighted in the following figure). 2. Place the mouse cursor over one of the blue coloured interactive points. The cursor changes to a cross (+) symbol. 3. 'Click' and hold down the mouse button and drag the point to another place in the log track. The NCT line will be re-oriented and the pore and Fracture pressure gradient calculations for that input curve will be recalculated. 4. Additional NCT 'points' can be added to an existing line by right-mouse button clicking in a track. The point will be added to the NCT line and the pore and fracture gradient calculations will be re-run.

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

Senergy

Advanced Interpretation

1340

The NCT lines can be 'zoned' by adding extra calibration points. This is done by 'clicking' the left hand mouse button to create a point, and then by dragging the cursor to an appropriate place in the track.

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

1341

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Adding points either side of a zone boundary preserves the original trend line and new trend. To remove unwanted points, put the mouse cursor over a blue calibration point, the cursor changes to a cross, press the 'Delete' key on the keyboard. Based on Eaton's methodology, the difference between the 'normal' trend line and the 'observed' (log) curve is converted to a Pore Pressure measurement. This is immediately updated in the 'Pore Pressure Results' track on the right hand side of the plot. The 'Fracture gradient' curve is similarly updated as a result of changing the Pore pressure curve, since it is calculated as a function of the Pore pressure and Overburden pressure gradients. This is only true if either the 'Daines', 'Eaton' or 'Matthews & Kelly' models are selected.

Editing Shale Intervals for Individual Pore Pressure Models Further interactivity is included within the evaluation plot. 'Right-mouse-button clicking' in a 'Pore Pressure Model' track launches a drop-down menu. Editing options are found at the top of the menu list. In order for the Editing options to be active, the 'Shale Discriminator' must be switched 'off' in the zone the user is working in. This is done by right -mouse-button 'clicking ' in the ' Shale discriminator' track and selecting 'Use Cutoff turn Off' option, or, alternatively, go to the 'Parameters' tab / 'General' sub-tab, 'un-check' the 'Use Cutoff' entries and click the 'OK' button. As well as allowing the NCT line to be edited, additional options - 'Add Interval' and 'Delete Interval' are available to allow the user to manually edit the 'Shale' data, highlighted in red, in the

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

Senergy

Advanced Interpretation

1342

interactive plot. An editing option is selected by clicking on it. A 'tick' will appear next to the 'active' editing mode, as shown below, where 'Delete Interval' is the active mode.

The 'Add Interval' option allows the user to 'digitize' additional shale points, which might not have been picked up by the Shale discriminator and interactive Shale cut-off line. The user can either add individual 'Shale points' by 'clicking' in the log curve track or shale 'intervals' can be added by 'clicking & dragging' with the mouse cursor over the depth interval to be added as 'Shale'.

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

1343

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The 'Delete Interval' option can be used to de-select some, or all, of the highlighted 'Shale points' selected for a particular pore pressure indicator. The user selects the editing option from the drop-down menu in the interactive log track and 'click & drags' the left mouse button over the interval to be deleted. The highlighted, red coloured ResShale, SonShale or DexShale points/ line are removed from the plot. The computations are automatically re-run for the edited pore pressure indicator curve and the results curves are updated. When you are happy that the Pore and Fracture Gradient interpretation you have made supports the observations and measurements made while drilling / logging the subject well, you can proceed to make the summary Crossplots. Summary Crossplots can be created for the subject well, either as 'Pore / Fracture pressure gradients versus depth' or as 'Pore / Fracture Pressure versus depth', the socalled 'Fan diagram'. These are described in the 'Viewing Output Results' section.

Related Topics Pore & Fracture Pressure Gradient Calculations Running the Model Viewing Output Results

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1344

Fracture Gradient Models Overburden Gradient Curves Pore Pressure References

11.9.3.2 Viewing Output Results

The 'Result Xplot' 'tab' allows the user to choose whether to plot modelling results as 'Depth versus Pressure' or as 'Depth versus Pressure Gradients'; to add 'Annotations'; and to add ' Plot titles and axis titles' for the output to clipboard.

The 'Curves / Scales' sub-tab The 'Curves / Scales' sub-tab is where the user sets up the curves , depth range and type of 'Results' plot to output. The 'Y Axis' panel allows the user to select a Depth curve and its' depth 'Type' for the output plot. The 'X Axis' panel allows the user to toggle between the two available plot formats - 'Plot Gradients' or 'Plot Pressures'. The 'Plot Gradients' option, if selected, will created a 'Depth versus Pressure Gradient' plot. The 'Units' drop-down list allows the user to select an output pressure gradient 'unit' for the crossplot. The user chooses a unit from lbs/gal, gm/cc, Kg /m3, psi/ft. The 'Plot Pressures' option, if selected will create a 'Depth versus Pressure' plot. The ' Units' drop-down list changes to list appropriate pressure units. These are 'Bar and psi. 'Mud weight lines' can be displayed as overlays on the Results Pressure plot by toggling the ' Display Lines' 'check' box. Overlay line units can be selected from the drop-down 'Units' box. If the user changes the Mud weight line 'units', clicking the 'Set Default' button will refresh the Mud Weight lines for the selected units. The line values can also be edited manually to change the overlay lines on the results crossplot.

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

1345

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The 'Input Curves' panel - Default overburden, pore and fracture 'pressure' or pressure 'gradient' curve names from the interpretation are available to plot. Changing the 'X Axis Scale' between ' Plot Gradients' and 'Plot Pressures' changes the default settings for the curves to be used in the crossplot. Curves can be added or de-selected by 'un/checking' the 'Plot' column on the left hand side of the window. Curve attributes (colour, symbol, weight, title) can all be changed interactively. For example the user might have some RFT pressure points which they wish to display. These can be added as a new curve in the 'Input curves' grid in an empty row in the grid. Fill in the 'Title' cell for each curve. This will set up the legend that appears on the bottom of the Results Crossplot.

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1346

The Annotations sub-tab Additional well information can be added to a plot from the 'Annotations' tab. Text and symbols are placed on the plot by inputting XY coordinates (which depend on the type of plot required) and then by typing in comments and selecting font size and colour. Plots are updated for new annotation data by clicking on the 'Make Plot' button.

Both the Depth versus Pressure 'Fan Diagram' and the Depth versus Pressure Gradient ' Gradient' Plot' can be annotated with casing shoe symbols, RFT pressure points, Leak Off Pressure values and operational comments to identify hole stability problems such as mud

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

1347

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

losses, stuck pipe, Kicks / well flows. Additional curve data such as mud weight /ECD curves can be added to the display. Examples of the two plot formats are illustrated below. All annotations, log curves and plot scales can be saved to a format file (.fpt) in order to be able to reproduce the plot at a later date.

The 'Options' sub-tab The 'Options' sub-tab allows the user to add a plot title and subtitle, set X and Y axis names, depth labelling intervals and add a legend to the gradient and pressure plot.

The 'Pore Pressure Gradient' module outputs two Crossplot displays that are set up in the '

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1348

Results Xplot' tab - 'Curves / Scales' sub tab. The options are to display results as depth versus 'Gradients' or depth versus 'Pressures' plots. Both the depth versus pressure 'Fan Diagram' and the depth versus pressure gradient ' Gradient' plot can be annotated with casing shoe symbols, RFT pressure points, Leak Off Pressure values and operational comments to identify hole stability problems such as mud losses, stuck pipe, Kicks / well flows. Additional curve data such as mud weight /ECD curves can be added to the display. Examples of the two plot formats are illustrated below. All annotations, log curves and plot scales can be saved to a format file (.fpt) in order to be able to reproduce the plot at a later date. Example of a Depth versus Pore/Fracture Pressure Plot

Example of a Depth versus Pore / Fracture Gradient Plot

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

1349

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Related Topics Pore & Fracture Pressure Gradient Calculations Running the Model Viewing Output Results Fracture Gradient Models Overburden Gradient Curves Pore Pressure References

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

Senergy

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1350

11.9.3.3 Fracture Gradient Models

Five Fracture Gradient models are implemented in IP. These are: 'Eaton' 'Matthews & Kelly' 'Modified Eaton' 'Barker and Wood' 'Daines' The Eaton, Matthews & Kelly and Daines Fracture gradient models utilise the Overburden Gradient curve computed in the 'Overburden Gradient Calculation' module. Pore Pressure and Fracture Pressure gradients are computed simultaneously when these models are run. The Barker & Wood methodology is an empirical relationship based on observations of actual well Leak Off Test (LOT) data and was established for application to the Deep Water Gulf of Mexico region. An outline of the four models is given below. PLEASE NOTE that Mouchet et al6 (1989) were very critical of all fracture gradient methodologies because, either the computations considered over-simplistic geologic/tectonic models or they introduced additional unknowns e.g. Daines tectonic component to the stress determined by Poissons ratio. The methods should therefore be approached with caution and take into consideration other critical factors such as well trajectory, the nature of the formation being tested to leak off and knowledge of the in-situ stresses on a local as well as regional scale.

'Eaton' Fracture Gradient Model Eaton10 (1969) attempted to take into account the subsurface stress regime in fracture gradient calculation, by using the Poisson's Ratio – an elastic constant reflecting the horizontal to vertical stress ratio.

Where : = Poissons ratio. F/d = Fracture Gradient. S/d = Overburden Gradient. P/d = Pore Pressure Gradient. This equation can be applied worldwide given that the following 3 steps are followed:

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

1351

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

1. determine overburden gradient 2. determine pore pressure gradient 3. determine Poisson's Ratio for the study area. Eaton further developed algorithms to calculate the input Poisson's Ratio values for Gulf Coast and Deep water GOM cases. Eaton and Eaton11 (1997) describes equations applicable for Poissons Ratio calculations for well depths from 0 – 5000 ft below mud line/Sea Bed and for depths of > 5000 ft below mud line/Sea Bed for the US Gulf Coast and Deep Water GOM cases. These equations are illustrated below and are implemented under the 'Model' drop-down list when the 'Eaton' Model is selected.

'Gulf Coast' Poisson's Ratio Calculation 0 – 4999 ft (Depth) below mud line/Sea Bed:

> 5000 ft (Depth) below mud line/Sea Bed:

'Deep Water' Gulf of Mexico Poisson's Ratio Calculation 0 – 4999 ft (Depth) below mud line/Sea Bed:

> 5000 ft (Depth) below mud line/Sea Bed:

The Poisson's Ratio versus depth curves resulting from these equations are illustrated below:

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1352

The appropriate curve is then applied in the calculation of Fracture Gradient and Fracture Pressure for the interactive plot and the Results Xplot.

'Matthews & Kelly' Fracture Gradient Model Matthews and Kelly9 (1967) model is based on Gulf Coast Texas and Louisiana sandstones and assumes a constant OBG of 1 psi/ft, therefore it is of little use outside the GOM coast region The Fracture Pressure formula is of the form:

Where: F = Fracture Pressure

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

1353

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Ki =

Senergy

the 'effective stress coefficient'

= (S – P) = net effective overburden stress S = Overburden stress P = Pore pressure Matthews and Kelly derived Ki curves from plots of effective overburden stress (S-P) vs Ki, back-calculated from offset well Leak Off data. Ki curves exist in the literature (Reference 9) for South Texas Gulf Coast (S Tx Coast) and Louisiana Gulf Coast (LA G Coast). These have been digitized and incorporated as look-up tables which the user can select from the 'Options' dropdown list.

NOTE: It is only possible to use this approach when the Ki vs depth is well known for a specific area.

'Modified Eaton' Fracture Gradient Model Simmons and Rau (1988) proposed a 'Modification' to the Eaton technique for predicting Fracture Pressures / Gradients in the offshore drilling environment. The 'modification' they proposed was to take into account the effect of a water column on the composite vertical rock stress at the depth of interest in the subject well. This recognizes that the hydrostatic pressure of the sea water above the sediments would provide a contribution to the overburden load. In using this Fracture Gradient model the input Overburden Gradient curve should be referenced to a TVD Sub Sea datum. 1. The Overburden gradient curve is used as an input to the 'Composite Vertical Stress' equation: vc

0.442 WD

OBGrad Dsed

(Equation 1)

Where: vc

= Composite Vertical Stress.

WD = Water Depth.

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1354

OBGrad = Overburden Gradient curve. Dsed = Sediment Penetration Depth. 2. This is input to the calculation of the 'matrix stress ratio' (Ke) at the 'Effective Depth' (Deff), where;

Ke 0.05329427 0.99996 Deff Deff 0.3006479

(Equation 2)

and Deff = the 'effective sediment penetration depth' defined by : Deff = (Water Depth/2) + DSed

(Equation 3)

Where DSed = Sediment penetration depth 3. Using Eaton's basic Fracture Pressure equation (Equation 4), the anticipated Fracture Pressure is calculated.:

FP PP Ke

vc

PP

(Equation 4)

Where: FP = Fracture Pressure. PP = Pore Pressure. Ke = Matrix stress Ratio. = Composite Vertical Stress. 4. The Fracture Pressure Gradient is calculated by dividing each calculated pressure by its associated depth value. NOTE: the resulting Fracture Pressure and Fracture Gradient curves are referenced to a TVD subsea datum and will have to be adjusted if a Rig Floor/ Kelly Bushing datum is required.

'Barker & Wood' Fracture Gradient Model Barker and Wood13 (1997). This method has been used specifically for the pre-drill estimation of shallow below mud line (BML), Deep Water Gulf Of Mexico (GOM) fracture gradients in the Central and Western parts of the GOM (to a depth of ca. 8000 ft below mud line, in water depths ranging between 2000 and 7000 ft). The method utilizes a typical GOM deep water, shallow below mud line sediment bulk density estimate and requires no other data. The method is limited to depths up to approximately 8000ft BML. More than 50 Leak off Tests (LOT) from 20 GOM wells were analysed. Using the water depth and LOT information from all these wells, the authors' found the best fit curve through these data to be given by: Cum. Av. Formation. Bulk Density (ppg) = 5.3 * (TVDBML) 0.1356

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

1355

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Therefore, adding the hydrostatic pressure of the water column (assumed an 8.55 lbs/gal water density) to the bulk density from the equation above computes the total overburden pressure. Since the model assumes that the fracture gradient is equal to the overburden gradient in the shallow sediment overburden, the fracture gradient can be calculated by dividing the overburden pressure by the depth of interest RKB. If choosing to run this option for fracture gradient computation, the output curve name will correspond to whichever curves are being utilised for the pore pressure calculation. For example, if pore pressure is being computed using the sonic log, the output fracture gradient curve will be FG_Son since the IP naming scheme does not include the methodology used to create the curve. The user has the facility to change the fracture gradient and fracture pressure curve names to appropriate defaults (e.g. FG_BW, FP_BW) before running the model.

'Daines' Fracture Gradient Model Daines12 (1980). This method attempts to account for regional stress ratios, rock type and variable overburden in the computation of Fracture Gradient and Fracture Pressure. Daines solves the following equation to compute Fracture Gradient (FG):

Where:

= Poisson's Ratio (Daines reference table) = Horizontal tectonic stress (equivalent to minimum effective stress -

)

= Maximum effective compressive stress (Overburden Pressure (S) minus Pore Pressure (P)) S

= Overburden Pressure

P = Pore pressure The methodology assumes that, in a relatively relaxed basin setting, the horizontal to vertical

stress ratio, termed

, remains relatively constant with depth and is defined by :

for the test depth can be calculated at the first good Leak-Off test point in a well. Knowing

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

(S-P) will allow the calculation of

and thus values of

1356

can be readily calculated for all other

depths in the well. The Daines Fracture Gradient model is calibrated to the first Leak Off Test (LOT) in compacted formation. This is manually input in the 'Daines Parameters' tab as a 'LOT Depth' and 'LOT Press' (psi). In a 'zoned' well, all rows in the table must contain a depth and LOT pressure for the computation to run. A single LOT depth / pressure pair can be copied to all rows by ' switching on' the column headers and filling in the first row of data.

Daines Fracture Gradient methodology uses as input 'Poissons Ratio' data for the overburden, in order to calculate the Fracture Gradient curve. The Daines Poissons Ratio data can either : 1. be entered into the upper grid in the 'Manual Input for User-Created Poissons Ratio Curve' panel, or 2. the user may load and use a 'Poissons Ratio' curve derived elsewhere, by 'checking' the ' Use existing PR Curve' radio button.

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

1357

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The geological column must be divided up by the user into broad lithological units using all available data (cuttings descriptions / wireline logs / composite and mud logs). The top and bottom depths for each lithology interval are entered manually into the 'Poissons Ratio' table. A drop- down list of descriptive lithologies appears by 'clicking' on the 'Default Lithology' column. The data for the table are found in the IP program directory in the 'Poisson_Ratio_Lithologies. par' file. The descriptors correspond to a table in Daines original paper. Each lithology descriptor has a default 'Poissons Ratio' value associated with it, taken from Daines12. When a lithology is selected, the Daines 'Poissons Ratio' is automatically filled in on the grid. These values can be manually edited. A 'Facies Code' field is also automatically filled in when a lithology is chosen. This code is linked to a symbol library and can be used to generate a 'Facies Curve' (Facies_PP), which in turn can be used to create a lithology column for the final Pressure Plot.

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1358

Related Topics Pore & Fracture Pressure Gradient Calculations Running the Model Viewing Output Results Fracture Gradient Models Overburden Gradient Curves Pore Pressure References

11.9.3.4 Overburden Gradient Curves

User-created overburden gradient curves can be created externally to IP and then loaded for use with the Pore Pressure modules. A number of Overburden Gradient (OBG) curves have been included within the IP Pore Pressure module; namely 'Offshore Texas / Louisiana' (Unocal) and 'Deepwater GOM (Amoco)' and ' Average GOM (Amoco)'. These overburden gradient curves have been taken from the available literature and are stored within the IP source directory as text files. Where sufficient local well data and burial history knowledge is available, further OBG curves can be added to IP by the user. The data is stored as a space-delimited text file with the '.obg' file extension (e.g. Amoco_Deep_GOM.obg). The file name must also be recorded in the 'OBG_Files.obg' file which references all the individual OBG data files. Examples of the text file formats is included below: (extract from 'Offshore_Texas_Louisiana.obg'): $ Overburden gradient for Louisiana Texas offshore $ Supplied by Unocal March 2003 $ Units Ft lbs/gal $ $ Data 5.000 9.009

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

1359

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help 10.000 15.000 20.000 25.000 30.000 35.000

Senergy

9.061 9.112 9.164 9.216 9.268 9.320

Note: Lines with a '$' prefix are comment lines added to describe the source of the overburden gradient data. Format for the OBG_Files.obg file: $ Interactive Petrophysics $ $ OBG_Files.obg file $ Contains list of overburden gradient files that are available $ $ Format is $ OBG file name ',' Name displayed in the OBG module $ Offshore_Texas_Louisiana.obg, Offshore Texas/Louisiana Amoco_Deep_GOM.obg, Deepwater GOM (Amoco) Gulf_of_Mexico_Amoco.obg, Average GOM (Amoco)

Related Topics Pore & Fracture Pressure Gradient Calculations Running the Model Viewing Output Results Fracture Gradient Models Overburden Gradient Curves Pore Pressure References

11.9.3.5 Pore Pressure References

REFERENCES 1. Gardner G. L. F., Gardner L.W., & Gregory A.R. – (1974) Formation velocity and density the diagnostic basics for stratigraphic traps Geophysics 39, 770-780. 2. Bellotti, P. Di Lorenzo, V. & Giacca, D. - Overburden gradient from sonic log - Trans. SPWLA, London March 1979. 3. Lindseth, R. O., (1979) – Synthetic Sonic Logs – a process for stratigraphic interpretation, Geophysics v.44 no.1 p.3-26. 4. Traugott, M. - Pore Pressure and Fracture Pressure Determinations in Deepwater Deepwater Technology Supplement to World Oil, August 1997. 5. Eaton B.A. and Eaton T.L. Fracture gradient prediction for the new generation - World Oil

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1360

(October 1997). 6. Barker, J. W. and Wood, T.D. – Estimating Shallow below Mudline Deepwater Gulf of Mexico Fracture Gradients (1997) Houston AADE Annual Technical Forum. 7. Eaton, B.A. (1972) Graphical Method Predicts Geopressures Worldwide - World Oil 182, 6, 51-56. 8. Matthews, W.R. and Kelly, J.(1967) – How to Predict Formation Pressure and Fracture Gradient - Oil &Gas Journal, 65, p92-106. 9. Eaton B. A., (1969) Fracture Gradient Prediction and its Application in Oil Field Operations J.Pet.Tech. 21, p1353-1360. 10. Daines S.R. (1980) The Prediction of Fracture Pressures For Wildcat Wells - SPE 9254. 11. Simmons E.L. & Rau, W.E. (1988) Predicting Deepwater Fracture Pressures: A Proposal (SPE 180250)

OTHER USEFUL REFERENCES 12. Pore Pressure and Fracture Gradients - SPE Reprint Series No.49 (1999 edition). 13. Mouchet, J-P., Mitchell, A. Abnormal Pressures While Drilling - Manuels Techniques 2 Elf Aquitaine (1989).

Related Topics Pore & Fracture Pressure Gradient Calculations Running the Model Viewing Output Results Fracture Gradient Models Overburden Gradient Curves Pore Pressure References

Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

1361

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

11.10 Saturation Height Modelling The 'Saturation Height Modelling' suite of modules is designed to enable the IP user to create ' Saturation versus height' functions from either capillary pressure (Pc) data or from calculated water saturation curves, or a combination of both approaches. The 'Saturation Modelling' modules have a multi-well interface and allow the user to consolidate, QC and interrogate data from multiple wells in a field / study area. Capilliary Pressure: The Capillary Pressure modules allow the user to QC the raw Pc measurements and make corrections for overburden stress, for clay-bound water and for laboratory to reservoir conditions conversion. Multiple Sw versus Capillary Pressure functions can be derived. Core plug Capillary Pressure array data and their associated Saturation, Porosity and Permeability values are loaded from external sources using the 'Capillary Pressure Data Loader' module. Alternatively, the 'ASCII Load' or 'Interval Loader' modules can be used if desired. Log Curves: The 'Log Sw versus Height Functions' module is used to generate Water saturation (Sw) versus Height functions from log curve data. Log-derived water saturation curves can be used, in conjunction with Free Water Level (FWL) depths to derive 'Sw versus Height above FWL' functions. This module does not require core data. The 'Saturation Modelling' suite is comprised of 4 tools that are interrelated: 1. 'Capillary Pressure Set-Up' 2. 'Capillary Pressure Functions' 3. 'Saturation versus Height Curves' 4. 'Log SW versus Height Functions' For example, the 'Capillary Pressure Set-up' module is used to QC and edit capillary pressure (Pc) curves. The core plugs flagged as 'Good' or 'Part Good' plugs from this module are used as input to the 'Capillary Pressure Functions' module. The 'Saturation versus Height Curves' module is used with the functions derived in the 'Capillary Pressure Functions' or the 'Log SW versus Height Curves' module to model Saturation versus Height above the FWL in multiple wells. NOTE: All four modules write their parameters / set-up to a common external parameter file. When the 'Save' button is clicked on any one of the module interfaces, the parameters are written to this external Parameter Set (.cap file) which, by default, is located in the IP project root directory. The parameters are also saved automatically into the project database file IPDBProj. dat. These project files are saved for each user logging into the database. Hence, if the parameters need to be shared by multiple users it is highly recommended to save them

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1362

separately using the 'Save' button.

Related Topics Saturation Height Modelling Capillary Pressure Loader Capillary Pressure Set-Up Capillary Pressure Functions Saturation Versus Height Curves Log Sw Versus Height Functions

11.10.1 Capillary Pressure Loader The Capillary Pressure modules allow the user to QC the raw Pc measurements and make corrections for overburden stress, for clay-bound water and for laboratory to reservoir conditions conversion. Multiple Sw versus Capillary Pressure functions can be derived. Core plug Capillary Pressure array data and their associated Saturation, Porosity and Permeability values are loaded from external sources using the 'Capillary Pressure Data Loader' module. Alternatively, the ' ASCII Load' or 'Interval Loader' modules can be used if desired. To display the Capillary Pressure Loader Features: From the Advanced Interpretation Module, Select Saturation Height Modelling (Capillary Pressure).

The Capillary Pressure Module comprises the following three Features: Capillary Pressure Set-Up: The 'Capillary Pressure Set-Up & Corrections' interface is used to

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

1363

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

set up the study well (or wells) and their Capillary Pressure (Pc) and associated Water Saturation (Sw) datasets. The corrected / converted Pc and water saturation curves that are output from this module are subsequently used in the 'Capillary Pressure Functions' module. Capillary Pressure Functions: The computations built into the 'Capillary Pressure Functions' module are used to find a curve fitting function or a set of curve fitting functions which can be used to represent the Qc'd and corrected capillary pressure (Pc) dataset from the 'Capillary Pressure Set-up' module. Saturation Versus Height Curves: The 'Saturation Versus Height Curves' module is used to take the functions that have been developed in the 'Capillary Pressure Functions' and 'Log Sw Vs. Height Functions' modules and to apply these functions to multiple wells and multiple reservoir zones. The module can also be used to calculate an unknown 'Free Water Level ' (FWL) in a well, using a function to predict the 'Most Likely' value.

Related Topics Saturation Height Modelling Capillary Pressure Loader Capillary Pressure Set-Up Capillary Pressure Functions Saturation Versus Height Curves Log Sw Versus Height Functions 11.10.1.1 Capillary Pressure Set-Up

The 'Capillary Pressure Set-Up & Corrections' interface is used to set up the study well (or wells) and their Capillary Pressure (Pc) and associated Water Saturation (Sw) datasets. The corrected / converted Pc and water saturation curves that are output from this module are subsequently used in the 'Capillary Pressure Functions' module. The functionality within the 'Capillary Pressure Set-Up & Corrections' module allows the user to : Set-up the study wells and input Pc and saturation curves to use, Select the output Set into which the results curves will be written, Convert Pc data from different measurement techniques to a common 2 phase system, Optionally stress-correct and /or apply a Clay-bound water correction to the Pc data. Visualize raw and corrected Pc Curve data and quality check the data. Edit bad data points from the Pc dataset. The following Tabs are available in the Capillary Pressure Set-Up Dialog:

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1364

Curves Set Up: The 'Curves Set-up' tab is used to select wells and their associated Capillary Pressure (Pc) and Saturation (PcSw) curve data. The interface is a large tabular display, where each row in the grid can be used to set up a different well for QC and correction of its Pc dataset. Each output name for each Pc curve is differentiated by appending a number (1,2,3.....) automatically to the end of the curve name. Correction Parameters: As well as depending upon grain size, grain shape, sorting and cementation, the relationship between capillary pressure and water saturation is dependant upon the interfacial tension between the two immiscible fluid phases present and the contact angle between the wetting phase and the rock surface and the density difference between the two fluids. Capillary pressure curves can be defined for any 2 phase fluid system in a given rock. The only variables are the 'Contact Angle' (

and the 'Interfacial tension' (

. One

can therefore normalize capillary pressure curves from different measurement techniques to a single system. One can also convert from one fluid system to another, given the knowledge of these two variables in the two systems. The 'Correction Parameters' tab is set up to allow the user to define the 'Laboratory' and 'Reservoir' values of 'Contact Angle' and 'Interfacial Tension' for the respective 'Mercury Injection', 'Centrifuge' or 'Porous Plate' methodologies. These values will be used to convert laboratory measured capillary pressures to a Reservoir fluid system and not the core porosity. Data View / EditThe 'Data View / Edit' tab is used to set up a Crossplot graphical window which will allow you to visualize and perform data edits on a multi-well Pc dataset. Two tables, 'Select Pc Curves for Display' and 'Select Individual Plugs for display' control which core plugs are available for visualization and editing. The two tables are connected and interactive. 'Clicking' between 'Curve Identification' rows in the left-hand table changes the entries in the core plug table on the right hand side of the screen.

'Capillary Pressure Functions'

regression routines are also set up from the Data View / Edit Tab. Capillary Pressure Crossplot: The Crossplot display is used to visually quality-check the 'Corrected' (& / or 'Raw') Pc datasets. You must make your own decisions as to whether each curve is 'Good' or 'Bad'. If for example, you think a Pc Curve is a 'Double curve', i.e. a 'composite' curve composed of two curves, each representing one pore network, it should be excluded from your dataset. Obviously invalid Pc versus Saturation curves

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

1365

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

should also be discarded. Simply set the 'Plug Bad' flag to 'on' (ticked) in the 'Data View / Edit' right hand table. Typical QC Workflow: This Topic defines a Typical Workflow for using the Capillary Pressure Dialog. NOTE: IT IS IMPORTANT TO UNDERSTAND THAT ALL CORE PLUGS (FROM ALL WELLS) THAT ARE 'FLAGGED' AS 'GOOD' OR 'PART GOOD', ON THE 'DATA VIEW / EDIT' TAB IN THIS MODULE AND WHICH HAVE THE 'SELECT PLUG' COLUMN 'TICKED' ARE AUTOMATICALLY SELECTED FOR USE IN THE 'CAPILLARY PRESSURE FUNCTIONS' MODULE AND WILL BE LOADED WHEN THAT MODULE IS LAUNCHED. SUBSEQUENT PROCESSING, TO DERIVE PC VS SW FUNCTIONS, REQUIRES THE USER TO SET UP & USE 'DISCRIMINATOR' LOGIC TO CREATE SUBSETS OF THE CORE PLUG DATASET FOR ANALYSIS.

Related Topics Capillary Pressure Set-Up Curves Set Up Correction Parameters Data View / Edit Capillary Pressure Crossplot Typical QC Workflow 11.10.1.1.1 Curves Set Up

The 'Curves Set-up' tab is used to select wells and their associated Capillary Pressure (Pc) and Saturation (PcSw) curve data. The interface is a large tabular display, where each row in the grid can be used to set up a different well for QC and correction of its Pc dataset. Each output name for each Pc curve is differentiated by appending a number (1,2,3.....) automatically to the end of the curve name. This gets over the problems seen in previous versions of IP of how to handle multiple Pc curves all at the same depth. To overcome the problem of incompatible input and output Sets,where one input Pc curve might be in a regular Set while another is in an irregular Set, an option has been added 'Output Sets same as PC curve Input sets'. This option will be 'checked' by default for all new projects. When it is 'checked' the output Set will have the same step size as the input Set. NOTE: if the Capillary Pressure module has been previously run using IP v3.4 then this option won't be 'checked' and the output curves won't have a number appended to them. This is to maintain compatibility with IP v3.4 datasets.

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1366

NOTE: it is no longer possible to select an 'Output Set' in the 'Capillary Pressure Functions' module. All output curves from this module will be placed in the Set selected in the 'Curves Setup' tab of the 'Capillary Pressure Set-Up & Corrections' module. The user chooses a 'Well Name' from the drop-down list box in the 'Well Name' column and then sets up the remaining curve entry boxes and input curve units for each well. IP will accept capillary pressure (Pc) data in the following units; psi, Bar, Kg/M 2, Mpa The program converts Pc pressure values to 'psi' based on the user-input units. Saturation values and Porosity values can be supplied either as Percentages or as decimals. IP will convert to decimals based on the user-input units. Permeabilities can be supplied as milliDarcies (mD) or m 2. IP will convert the values to milliDarcies for all computations. Default output curve units are 'psi' for corrected Capillary Pressure curves and decimals for Corrected Pc Saturation curves.

The grid column names and their functions are described below, progressing from left to right through the screen. 'Curve Identification' - The 'Curve Identification' column is found on all 3 'Set-up and Correction' Tabs. Because of the multi-well functionality of this module, this column is present to help the user to keep track of which well and which curves they are working on and visualizing. When the user selects the Capillary Pressure (Pc) and Pc Saturation curve names for a well on the 'Curve Set-up' tab, this column populates with a summary text string, containing the 'Database Well Number' followed by the input Pc and Pc Saturation Curve names in the following notation: For example - W:6 Pc/PcSw which translates to IP database "Well 6" followed by the 'Capillary

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

1367

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Pressure input curve name' & 'Pc Saturation input curve name', as illustrated below:

Identically named 'Curve Identification' columns are found on both the 'Correction Parameters ' and 'Data View /Edit' tabs to help the user to navigate through the corrections and visualization screens. NOTE: - THIS COLUMN IS USER EDITABLE - you can clear the 'default' text and manually type in a simpler, or more informative text string if you wish to do so.

The screen capture shown above illustrates the interactive drop-down menus available within the 'Curves Set-up' interface.

Column Descriptions: 'Well Name' - This column allows the user to select the database wells to be worked on. Wells are chosen by 'clicking' in a blank cell in the 'Well Name' column, then selecting a well name from the drop-down well list.

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1368

'Pc Curve In' - Select the Capillary Pressure (Pc) curve / array name for the subject well from the curve drop-down list. 'Pc Units In' - Select the input Capillary Pressure (Pc) curve units from the drop-down list. The options are: Pounds per square inch (psi) Bar (Bar) Kilograms per square meter (Kg/m2) MegaPascals (MPa) 'Pc Sat Curve In' - Select the input Saturation Curve / Array for the subject well from the curve drop-down list. 'Pc Sat Units In' - Select the Saturation Curve units from the drop-down list. The options are: '%' - percentage 'dec' - decimal 'Pc Sat Type in' - The 'Pc Sat Type in' parameter is used to indicate how the input Pc Saturation data has been reported in the external data file. The user must set whether the Pc Saturation data is being reported in terms of the 'wetting' or 'non-wetting' fluid phase. For example, in the case where the Mercury Injection saturations are being reported as Mercury Saturation (the non-wetting fluid) ,'SHg', then the user would choose the 'Non Wet' option and the IP program would compute the wetting-phase Saturation as the output 'corrected Pc Water Saturation' ('SwPcCorr') curve using a formula of the following form: SwPc = 1 - (Snw) Where: Snw = input Non-wetting-phase Saturation. SwPc = Wetting Phase Water Saturation. Water Wet - should be set when the measurement technique reports saturation as the wetting phase saturation. Non Wet - should be set when saturation data is reported in terms of the non-wetting fluid. 'Measurement Type In' -Select an option from the drop-down list. The choices are: Mercury Inj - Measurements from Mercury Injection Centrifuge - Measurements from Centrifugation Porous Plate - Measurements from Porous Plate Apparatus Curve - If Capillary pressure data are loaded into IP from an external source, for example a

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

1369

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

spreadsheet, which contains data measurements from different Pc measurement techniques ('Mercury Injection', 'Porous Plate', 'Centrifuge'), the measurement techniques can be differentiated by giving each a numerical 'Measurement Method' 'flag' value in the spreadsheet. The 'Measurement Method' 'Flag' values can be loaded into IP, as a curve, at the same time as the Pc and Pc Saturation data and this curve can then be selected from the 'Measurement Type In' drop-down list. The 'Measurement Type In' curve values then have to be 'mapped' to the correct 'measurement technique' values on the 'Correction Parameters' tab, in the 'Method ID' column of the 'Reservoir and Laboratory Fluid /Rock Properties' table. 'Porosity Curve In' - the input Core Porosity curve name. NOTE: the core porosity should be overburden corrected as the function generated will be used with log porosity. 'Porosity units In' - the units of the data in the Core Porosity curve. 'Permeability Curve In' - the input Core Permeability curve name. NOTE: the core permeability should be overburden corrected only if used with log data which has generated an overburden corrected permeability. I.e. log and core data should be the same with respect to overburden correction. 'Permeability Units In' - the units of the input Core Permeability curve. 'Pc Corr. Out' - The Corrected Capillary Pressure (PcCorr) output curve. 'Pc Corr. Units Out' - the units of the data in the Corrected Capillary Pressure curve. 'Pc Sat Corr. Curve Out' - The Corrected Pc Water Saturation (SwPcCorr) output curve. 'Pc Sat Curve Units Out' - The units of the data in the Corrected Pc Water Saturation curve. 'Pc Use Flag Curve Out' - This is an array curve of the same dimensions as the input Pc Pressure and Pc Saturation array curves The array contains values, either 'zero' or 'one', which 'indicate 'Bad' or 'Good' data points, respectively, within the Pc data input arrays. Where a 'Bad' point on a Pc curve has been edited out during the QC process, a 'PcUse' Flag value of 'zero' is set in the corresponding array position in the 'PcUse' curve. This curve is updated when the user performs any edits to the Pc versus Saturation dataset, using the Crossplot tool. See 'Data View / Edit' below. 'Pc Height Curve Out' - This converts the corrected Pc curve to a height curve. Allows for the crossplot of Height against Sw for each plug to be made. It is an array curve with the same dimensions as the Pc curve. 'Closure Correction Curve Out' - This curve contains any Sw closure correction that needs to be applied to the Raw Sw curve. The values in this curve can be set from the 'Data

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1370

View / Edit' tab. 'Pore Size Curve Out' - This curve converts the Pc and Sw input curves into an array curve of pore size. The curve is an array curve of X dimension of 80. Each X value represents a pore size. The first X value is a pore size of 0.01 microns and the 80th X value is a pore size of 100 microns. The scale is logarithmic with 20 X values per decade. The curve is plotted as a waveform. 'Pc Normalized Curve Out' - This curve converts the Pc and Sw input curves into an array curve which represents the Pc curve and can be used to plot the Pc curve on the log plot as a waveform. The curve has an X cell dimension of 51. Each cell represents 2.0 saturation units. The value in the cell is the pressure value. The transformation is approximate due to the coarseness of the cells.

Related Topics Capillary Pressure Set-Up Curves Set Up Correction Parameters Data View / Edit Capillary Pressure Crossplot Typical QC Workflow

11.10.1.1.2 Correction Parameters

As well as depending upon grain size, grain shape, sorting and cementation, the relationship between capillary pressure and water saturation is dependant upon the interfacial tension between the two immiscible fluid phases present and the contact angle between the wetting phase and the rock surface and the density difference between the two fluids. Capillary pressure curves can be defined for any 2 phase fluid system in a given rock. The only variables are the ' Contact Angle' (

and the 'Interfacial tension' (

. One can therefore normalize capillary

pressure curves from different measurement techniques to a single system. One can also convert from one fluid system to another, given the knowledge of these two variables in the two systems. The 'Correction Parameters' tab is set up to allow the user to define the 'Laboratory' and 'Reservoir' values of 'Contact Angle' and 'Interfacial Tension' for the respective 'Mercury Injection', 'Centrifuge' or 'Porous Plate' methodologies. These values will be used to convert laboratory measured capillary pressures to a Reservoir fluid system and not the core porosity. Pc data can also be 'Stress-corrected' to reservoir conditions and 'Clay-Bound Water'

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

1371

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

corrections can be applied.

Clicking the 'Run Corrections' button will perform all the stress / clay-bound water corrections and the Laboratory-to-Reservoir conversions to create a consistent set of Pc and associated wetting-phase saturation data for analysis.

Reservoir and Laboratory fluid / rock properties Table This table is used to set up the 'default' values for 'Contact Angle' ( ) and 'Interfacial Tension' ( ) values for the 3 Capillary Pressure methodologies. This will allow the user : 1. To 'Normalize' capillary pressure data from different laboratory methods, or 2. To convert Pc data from one fluid system to another, say from 'Laboratory' to 'Reservoir'. Default values for 'Interfacial Tension' and 'Contact Angle' parameters are provided. However, the table is fully editable to the users own requirements.

'Measurement Type' - The 'Measurement Type' column lists the 3 Pc experimental methodologies. These are: Mercury Injection

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1372

Centrifuge Porous Plate 'Method ID.' - if the user has imported Capillary Pressure data into IP, for example, from a spreadsheet containing a combination of 'Mercury Injection' and 'Porous Plate' measurements, where each plug is 'flagged' with a value to represent the measurement 'method', IP can be set up to recognize the Capillary Pressure measurement method so that the program can automatically apply the appropriate conversions. To do this: 1. The user loads the 'Measurement Method' data from the external spreadsheet, as a curve, into IP. 2. On the 'Curves Set-up' tab, under the 'Measurement Type In' column, select this ' Measurement Method' flag curve. 3. On the 'Correction Parameters' tab, in the 'Method ID' column, Type in the flag curve values that correspond with the measurement techniques in the data file. 'Contact Angle Laboratory' - This is the laboratory-defined Contact Angle for the measurement system used. 'Interfacial Ten. Laboratory' -This is the laboratory-defined Interfacial Tension for the measurement system used. 'Contact Angle Reservoir' - This is the subsurface Contact Angle for the fluid system under investigation. 'Interfacial Ten. Reservoir' - This is the subsurface Interfacial Tension for the fluid system under investigation. The 'Restore Defaults' button - should the user edit the default Laboratory 'Contact Angle' and 'Interfacial Tension' values and then decide to return the values to the IP default settings, clicking the 'Restore Defaults' button will reset the values in the first 3 columns of the table.

Reservoir properties Default Reservoir Fluid system 'default values' for 'Contact Angle' and 'Interfacial Tension' for a 'Gas / Water' or an 'Oil / Water' system can be quickly set by 'clicking' either of the buttons in the ' Reservoir properties Default' panel, as shown below:

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

1373

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Clicking 'Set Gas / Water' returns 'Contact Angle Reservoir' 0 degrees and 'Interfacial Tension Reservoir' 50 dynes/cm. Clicking 'Set Oil / Water' returns 'Contact Angle Reservoir' 30 degrees and 'Interfacial Tension Reservoir' 30 dynes/cm. These default values are user- editable in the 'Reservoir and Laboratory fluid / rock properties' table, should you have an independent source for these data.

Pc Height The 'Pc Height' box allows the user to select the densities used for the conversion from Pc pressure to Height above FWL. The formula used in the conversion is: Height = PcCorr / (Water Density - Hyd Density) PcCorr will be the corrected Pc value. The Height will be in the same units as the database depth curve. Densities are converted to the correct units for the formula. The corrections are performed when the 'Run Corrections' button is 'clicked'.

Corrections to Pc Curves Table The 'Corrections to Pc Curves' table allows the user: 1. to convert the Laboratory Pc data to a 'Reservoir' fluid system, 2. to apply stress corrections and

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1374

3. to 'Clay Correct' the Pc data. During cleaning and drying of 'shaly' core plug samples, claybound water could be lost. IP allows you to correct for the lost clay-bound water. A 'Qv' input curve is required for the Clay correction to work. Several Columns ('Stress Correct', 'Clay Correct' and 'Convert to Reservoir') are 'Flag' columns. To set all rows in a column to 'on', click in the first row of the table so a 'tick' appears, then 'click' the Column header and the remaining cells will be ticked automatically. To de-select a column, clear the tick from the top row, then 'click' in the column header, all rows will be cleared. Similarly, if you wish to fill any column with the same numerical value, type the value into the appropriate cell in the first row in the table, 'click' the column header and the value will be copied to all empty rows in that column.

'Curve Identification' - The 'Curve Identification' column lets you see which well you are setting up corrections for. For example, in the picture shown above, All three wells are to be Stress-corrected, using the 'PhiRes/PhiLab Factor' set to 0.9562, while only Well 6 is to be 'Clay Corrected' using an input Qv curve and a Salinity of 30Kppm NaCl. All three wells will have the 'Convert to Reservoir' applied. See 'Convert to Reservoir' , below.

Stress Corrections 'Stress Correct' - This is a 'Flag' which switches the Stress-correction calculation 'on' ('checked') or 'off' ('un-checked'). The Stress Correction is performed by applying the following formulae: PcCorr = Pc * ('PhiRes/PhiLab Factor') ^ (-0.5) & SwPcCorr = 1- [(1-SwPc) * (PhiRes/PhiLab Factor)] Where: Pc = input Raw Pc pressure curve SwPc = input Pc saturation (wetting phase) curve PcCorr = Stress Corrected Pc Curve SwPcCorr = Stress Corrected Pc Saturation (wetting phase) PhiRes/PhiLab Factor = Stress Correction Factor. 'PhiRes/PhiLab Factor' - This is the Porosity correction factor (in decimal notation), from

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

1375

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Laboratory to Reservoir conditions, that is activated / applied when the 'Stress Correct' Flag is 'on' (ticked).

Clay-bound-water Corrections 'Clay Correct' - This is a 'Flag' which switches the 'Clay Correction' 'on' ('checked') or 'off' ('un-checked'). During cleaning and drying of core plug samples, clay-bound water could be lost. Where an Air/Mercury measurement system has been used, applying the 'Clay Correct' Flag provides a correction for the missing clay-bound water, using a supplied 'Qv' input curve and a Formation Water Salinity value. The 'Clay Correction', based on the method described by Hill, Shirley and Klein 1979 ( SPWLA 20th annual Symposium Paper AA - "The Central Role of Qv and Formation Water Salinity in the Evaluation of Shaly Formations") is performed by applying the following two equations to the input Pc and PcSw curves: PcCorr = Pc* (F) ^ (-0.5) & SwPcCorr = 1- (1 - SwPc) * F Where: Pc = input Raw Pc pressure curve SwPc = input Pc saturation (wetting phase) curve PcCorr = Clay-Corrected Pc Curve SwPcCorr = Clay-Corrected Pc Saturation (wetting phase) F = Clay Correction Factor which is calculated from the equation : F = 1 - [0.6425 * (Salinity ^ (-0.5) + 0.22 ] * Qv] Where: Salinity = formation water salinity (Kppm NaCl equivalent). Qv = Cation exchange Capacity per total pore volume (meq/ml). 'Salinity (Kppm NaCl)' - This is the salinity input value to be used, together with 'Qv' input curve, for the 'Clay Correct' calculation. 'Qv meq/ml Curve In' - The user must choose the Qv input curve, from the drop-down list box, if the 'Clay Correct' Flag is 'on' (ticked).

Conversion to Reservoir Fluid System 'Convert to Reservoir' - This is a 'Flag' which switches 'on' ('checked') / 'off' ('un-checked') the 'Laboratory to Reservoir' conversions set up in the upper, 'Reservoir and Laboratory fluid / rock properties' table. If 'Convert to Reservoir' is ticked for a row in the table, the

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1376

Laboratory Pc data will be converted to the selected Reservoir 'Oil / Water' or 'Gas /Water' fluid system when the 'Run Corrections' button is clicked. The conversion uses the following equation, multiplying the known Pc values by the 'absolute' ratio of the Laboratory and Reservoir '

Cos ' values:

Where: Pc, Res = Capillary Pressure at Reservoir Conditions. Pc, Lab = Capillary Pressure at Laboratory Conditions. Lab = Interfacial Tension under Laboratory Conditions. Lab = Contact Angle under Laboratory Conditions. Res = Interfacial Tension under Reservoir Conditions. Res = Contact Angle under Reservoir Conditions.

Closure Correct If the 'Closure Correct' column is ticked, then the values in the 'Closure Corr.' curve will be used to correct the input Sw curve to give the 'SwCorr' curve. The correction is performed as follows: SwCorr = Sw (input) - SwClosure Sw(input) is the water saturation input curve. The units of the Closure curve will be the same as the output Sw units. 'Run Corrections'- 'Clicking' the 'Run Corrections' button will execute all the fluid system (Lab. / Reservoir) conversions and stress / Clay-bound-water corrections that have been set up on the 'Correction Parameters' tab in the following order: 1. Convert input Pc Saturation data to Non-wetting phase saturations (check the 'Pc Sat Type In' parameter setting). 2. Perform the Stress Correction, if selected, on the input Cap. Pressure curves and Nonwetting phase saturation data. 3. Apply the Clay-bound-water correction, if selected. 4. Convert saturation data to Wetting phase saturations. 5. Perform the Laboratory to reservoir Pc Corrections, if selected. 'Clear All' - 'Clicking' the 'Clear All' button will remove all well and curve settings from the ' Curves Set-up' grid. You will be prompted to confirm that this is what you want to do.

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

1377

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

NOTE - any Pc curve edits that you have performed up until the point when you click 'Clear All' will be lost by confirming 'yes' to this operation. 'Save' - 'Clicking' the 'Save' Button WILL ONLY SAVE the current curve set-up, Correction parameter table settings and Data View options. IT DOES NOT SAVE the output curves or edited curves for each well to the IP database. REMEMBER to save your study wells to the IP database at the end of a session using either the 'Save current well to database As.' or 'Save All Wells to Database', under the IP 'File' menu. 'Load' - 'Clicking' the 'Load' button will launch a browse window that allows you to restore the parameter settings from a 'Saved' session.

Related Topics Capillary Pressure Set-Up Curves Set Up Correction Parameters Data View / Edit Capillary Pressure Crossplot Typical QC Workflow

11.10.1.1.3 Data View / Edit

The 'Data View / Edit' tab is used : 1. To set up a Crossplot graphical window which will allow you to visualize and perform data edits on a multi-well Pc dataset. Two tables, 'Select Pc Curves for Display' and 'Select Individual Plugs for display' control which core plugs are available for visualization and editing. The two tables are connected and interactive. 'Clicking' between 'Curve Identification' rows in the left-hand table changes the entries in the core plug table on the right hand side of the screen. 2. To select the core plugs that will go into the 'Capillary Pressure Functions' regression routines. The 'Data View / Edit' tables give the user the ability to visualize: The 'Raw' & / or 'Corrected' Pc vs Pc Saturation curve for a single core plug from one well, The 'Raw' & / or 'Corrected' Pc vs Pc Saturation curves for multiple core plugs from one well, The 'Raw' & / or 'Corrected' Pc vs Pc Saturation curves for multiple core plugs from multiple

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1378

wells. Individual core plug data from each well can be visualized using the 'Make Crossplot' functionality and then plugs can be 'Flagged' as 'Good' or 'Bad'. Where a plug is flagged as ' Bad', the Pc curve will be excluded from the dataset that is used in the 'Capillary Pressure Functions' module. Edited Pc curves, where one or more data points have been 'deleted', are given a 'Part Good' status. The 'Data View / Edit' interface contains 2 tables; 'Select Pc Curves for Display' and 'Select Individual Plugs for display'.

Select Pc Curves for Display Table Clicking in the 'Curve Identification' column in a row refreshes the adjacent 'Select Individual Plugs for display' table with the core plug details for that particular well.

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

1379

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

'Curve Identification' - the common 'Well / Curve' identification field that allows you to keep track of which well you are processing through the 'Capillary Pressure Set-up and Corrections' module. Click in the well row to set up the right-hand table with the core plug data for that well. 'Plot Raw' column - 'tick-box' entry field that flags that you want to view the 'Raw' input Pc vs. input Pc Saturation curves for a particular well or wells. 'Plot Correction' column - 'Tick-box' entry field that flags that you want to view the 'Corrected' output 'PcCorr' vs. 'SwPcCorr' curves for a particular well or wells. 'Corrected' curves can be viewed after you have set up and run all the curve unit conversions and executed the curve stress / clay / reservoir correction routines found on the 'Correction Parameters' tab. 'Select All Plugs' column - 'tick-box' entry field that flags that you want to view all plugs for a particular well. Depending upon the combination of 'checked'boxes in a row in this table, you can choose to view all raw curves, all corrected curves or all raw curves and all corrected curves', simultaneously. Putting a 'tick' in this column in a particular row of the grid, automatically 'ticks' all the individual plug entries in the adjacent table. The selected plugs are automatically available for use in the 'Capillary Pressure Functions' module. 'No. Plugs Selected' - This column contains the 'count' of 'core plugs that have been flagged in the right-hand table, by placing 'ticks' in the 'Select Plug' column . The user can

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1380

view individual Pc versus Saturation curves and decide whether the data is valid, or not, or to be edited. 'Bad' plugs can be switched 'off' by 'ticking' the 'Plug Bad' column in the righthand table.

Select Individual Plugs for display Table This table gives you the option to classify individual core plugs in each well in the dataset as ' Good' or 'Bad'. Setting a plug to 'Bad' will exclude it from further calculations. A plug status of ' Good' or 'Part Good' flags a core plug for inclusion in the dataset for further processing in the ' Capillary Pressure Functions' module. Setting a core plug Status to 'Good' or 'Bad' is usually done after visualizing the Pc versus Sw data for that core plug, using the 'Make Crossplot' tool. You can manually select the plugs you wish to pass through to the 'Capillary Pressure Functions' module by 'ticking' the 'Select Plug' column in an individual row in the grid. Alternatively, click in the 'Select Plug' column header to select all core plugs, or use the 'Select All Good Plugs - This Curve' button to quickly select all the 'Good' and 'Part Good' core plugs from the highlighted well for further processing.

The columns in the table are described below:

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

1381

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

'Colour column' - This colour is the same colour as the plug will be plotted on the crossplot if the Z axis option is set to 'Well /Curve Set'. This is a visual reference only. To edit the plug colour use the 'Edit Format' -> 'Select Wells and Curves' option within the the crossplot module. 'Select Plug' - Place a tick in this column for each core plug you wish to see displayed with the crossplot tool. 'Click' in the column header to toggle between 'select all plugs' and ' select no plugs', or use the 'Select All Good Plugs - This Curve' button to select curves to visualize. Those plugs that have the 'Select Plug' column ticked will become part of the dataset that will be available to the 'Capillary Pressure Functions' module. 'Plug Depth' - This is the core plug depth taken from the input Pc array dataset. 'Plug Type' - This is the capillary pressure measurement 'Method', set using the ' Measurement Type In' parameter on the 'Curves Set-up' tab. 'Plug Phi' - This is picked up from the input core porosity curve. 'Plug Perm' - Picked up from the input core permeability curve. 'Plug Status' - Text field, the text reflects the position of the user-entered 'ticks' in the adjacent 'Plug Good' or 'Plug Bad' Columns. The text entries are: 'Good', 'Bad' and, 'Part Good' - if a plug has been QC'd using the crossplot tool and some of its Pc /Sw data points have been edited out, it will have a 'Plug Status' of 'Part Good'. 'Plug Good' / 'Plug Bad' - The 'Plug Good' and 'Plug Bad' columns are 'Flag'-type entry fields which let the user set the 'Use' status of individual core plugs during the QC process. ' Plug Good' means that all Pc and associated Sw data points for a core plug are valid data points. WARNING - clicking in the 'Plug Good' or 'Plug Bad' column header is a quick way to change the status of all the data points for all plugs in a well, HOWEVER - there are serious implications for your data should you use this functionality. Clicking the 'Plug Good' column header will launch the following Warning Message

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1382

Changing all Plugs to 'Plug Good' status will reset all the plugs that you have QC'd and possibly edited (by removing spurious data points) to 'Good'. Your data is returned to its unedited state. Any edits you have made are discarded. If a core plug is labelled as Plug Status = 'Part Good' (meaning that one or more data points have been edited out), clicking in an individual cell in the 'Plug Good' column launches the following warning message:

Changing a single plug from 'Part Good' to 'Plug Good' status will reset all the data points in the core plug that you have edited. Your data is returned to its un-edited state. Any edits you have made are discarded. Clicking the 'Plug Bad' column header will launch the following Warning Message

Changing all plugs for a well to 'Plug Bad' status will mean that none of the Pc / Sw data for that particular well will be available for the next 'curve fitting' step in data processing. Clicking in an individual cell in the 'Plug Bad' column launches the following warning message:

Changing a single plug to 'Plug Bad' status will set all the Pc data points for that plug to ' Bad'. This means that none of the Pc / Sw data for that particular plug will be available for the next 'curve fitting' step in data processing.

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

1383

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

'Closure Correction' - This is picked up from the input closure curve. The values can be edited in the table. Changing the values in the table changes the values in the input curve. 'Select All Good Plugs - All Curves' Button - allows the user to quickly set-up all curves in all wells for visualization in the crossplot interface. 'Select All Good Plugs - This Curve' Button - allows the user to quickly set-up all curves in the currently-highlighted well for visualization in the crossplot interface and for use in the ' Capillary Pressure Functions' module. Make Crossplot' - 'Clicking' the 'Make Crossplot' button launches the crossplot tool, with the Pc datasets you have selected on the 'Data View / Edit' screen loaded into the graphic interface. See Also: Capillary Pressure Crossplot.

Related Topics Capillary Pressure Set-Up Curves Set Up Correction Parameters Data View / Edit Capillary Pressure Crossplot Typical QC Workflow 11.10.1.1.4 Capillary Pressure Crossplot

The Crossplot display is used to visually quality-check the 'Corrected' (& / or 'Raw') Pc datasets. You must make your own decisions as to whether each curve is 'Good' or 'Bad'. If for example, you think a Pc Curve is a 'Double curve', i.e. a 'composite' curve composed of two curves, each representing one pore network, it should be excluded from your dataset. Obviously invalid Pc versus Saturation curves should also be discarded. Simply set the 'Plug Bad' flag to 'on' (ticked) in the 'Data View / Edit' right hand table. Rogue data points within individual Pc curves can be edited out using the crossplot functionality as described below. The Crossplot displayed below has been set up using the Well A4 and its' corrected core plug data. The plotting 'set-up' tables provide you with the flexibility to set up and visualize any combination of Pc curves on one crossplot. You can set up a crossplot for : a single raw or corrected Core Plug Pc dataset in one well. The raw and corrected Pc datasets for a single core plug in one well. Multiple raw or multiple corrected Pc datasets for one well The same flexibility is available for multi-well displays.

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1384

To set up a Pc pressure versus Pc Saturation crossplot 'Click' on a 'Curve Identification' cell in the 'Select Pc Curves for Display' table, the cell background changes to a green colour. The 'Select individual Plugs for display' table refreshes to show all the plug entries in that well /curve. 'Click' in the 'Plot Correction' cell for that row. 'Click' the 'Select All Good Plugs - This Curve' button. A tick appears in the 'Select Plug' column in the right-hand table. Note the Well Number is displayed in the title of the right-hand table, after the colon (:). Initially, all core plugs are flagged as 'Plug Good', with a tick in the ' Plug Good' column of the 'Select individual Plugs for display' set-up table.

'Clicking' the 'Make Crossplot' button displays the following menu which allows different crossplot templates to be selected. For QC'ing plug data the 'Pc V Sw. Z axis Use flag' crossplot must be selected. The Phi and Perm crossplots cannot be used for QC'ing the plugs interactively. The reason for this is that these crossplots don't know about the PcUse curves and hence can't change their values.

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

1385

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The height plots allow the Pc curve to be displayed as height against the Sw curve and thus give a better indication as to which part of the curve is applicable to the reservoir. If the 'Pc v Sw. Z axis Use flag' crossplot is selected then the following crossplot is displayed.

The initial view displays the Pc versus Pc Saturation curves for all the plugs for all the wells selected in the 'Curves Set-up' tab. The plugs corresponding to well A4 (database well 8) have to be selected and the 'Z Axes' 'Well / Curve Set' ticked. We can see that there are a number of curves with suspect data points. These plugs can be

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1386

removed by either; Flagging the entire plug in the 'Plug Bad' column in the 'DataView / Edit' screen, which removes all the data points in the Pc curve from further analysis. Then re-launch the crossplot with the 'excluded' plugs not displayed, or Alternatively we can 'clean up' the obvious incorrect data points in each Pc curve using the crossplot editing menu. We may have to expand the crossplot scales to see all the data points in the graphic interface, as shown below. The editing sequence is shown in the next screen capture.

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

1387

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

Senergy

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1388

NOTE: if multiple points are on top of each other then the 'Remove / Restore data point' will only change the top point. Hence, it is best when QC'ing Pc curves to work on one Pc curve at a time. The Graphical window 'Z Axes' button can be used to 'toggle' the crossplot view of the core plugs. By setting 'Z Axes' to 'Curve' you will see the data points drawn in colours to represent either 'Good' or 'Bad' status (see below left). By setting 'Z Axes' to 'Well / Curve Set' you will see each Pc curve in a separate colour (see below right):

All 'Bad' Pc points have a 'zero' value written into the output 'PcUse' Flag curve. The 'PcUse' curve is an array curve of the same dimensions as the input Pc and Pc Saturation arrays. Valid Pc / Pc Saturation data have a 'PcUse' Flag value of 'one'.

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

1389

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The Crossplot module has been changed to allow sets of discriminators to be assigned to different Pc curves. This now allows multiple 'PcUse' flag curves to be created in different output curve sets.

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1390

Related Topics Capillary Pressure Set-Up Curves Set Up Correction Parameters Data View / Edit Capillary Pressure Crossplot Typical QC Workflow 11.10.1.1.5 Typical QC Workflow

1. Load Pc and Pc Saturation data from external spreadsheet / array curves. Import Core Porosity & Permeability curves and a 'Measurement Method' Flag, if such data is available. 2. Open the 'Curves Set-up' tab and select each well and its Capillary Pressure (Pc) and Pc Saturation (PcSw) curves, setting the input curve units to the correct values. 3. Type in a 'Well identifier' in the 'Curve Identification' column for each well that has been set up. 4. Ensure that the 'Pc Sat Type In' is set to 'Water Wet' if the input PC Saturation data is reported as Water saturation, or 'Non Wet' if the raw Pc Saturation data is reported in terms of the laboratory 'Non-wetting' fluid phase. 5. Select a 'Measurement Type In' from the drop-down list or, if a 'Measurement Method' flag curve has been loaded into IP, select the Flag curve from the drop-down list.

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

1391

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

6. Select the Core Porosity and Core Permeability curves and their associated curve units. 7. Select the Output Results Curve Set from the 'Output Results Set' list-box at the bottom of the window. 8. Select the Output corrected Pc curve, 'Pc Corr', units. 9. Select the Output corrected Pc Saturation curve, 'SwPcCorr', units. 10.Crossplot Raw Pc curves. 11.Determine 'Closure Correction'. 12.On the 'Correction Parameters' tab: If 'Measurement Type In' was set to a Flag curve name, type in the curve values corresponding to the Measurement type - 'Mercury Injection', 'Centrifuge' &/or 'Porous Plate' techniques. 13.Set up the 'Reservoir and Laboratory Fluid /Rock Properties' table. Ensure that you are happy with the Laboratory and Reservoir values for the fluid and rock system 'Contact Angle' and 'Interfacial Tension' parameters. 14.Set up the lower, 'Corrections to Pc Curves' table if you want to apply Stress corrections or Clay-bound-water corrections to the raw Pc and Pc Saturation data. 15.'Tick' the rows in the 'Convert to Reservoir' column that you wish to apply the 'Contact Angle' / 'Interfacial Tension' (laboratory to reservoir) conversions to. Leave this column blank if you simply wish to convert input Pc Pressure curves from multiple wells to a consistent output curve unit (psi, Kg/m2/Mpa/Bar) or to convert Pc Saturation values from '%' to 'decimal'. 16.'Tick' the 'Stress Correct' rows and enter a 'PhiRes/PhiLab Factor' for the wells that require stress correction applying. 17.'Tick' the 'Clay Correct' rows and enter a 'Salinity' and 'Qv Curve in' curve name for the wells that require clay-bound-water correction applying. 18.'Tick' the 'Closure Correct' rows for wells that require closure correction. 19.'Click' the 'Run Corrections' button. 20.On the 'Data View/ Edit' Tab: 'Click in a 'Curve Identification' row in the left-hand table. The 'Curve Identification' Name will be highlighted in green. The right-hand table will refresh with a list of core plugs available in that well. 21.If you have clicked the 'Run' button, to perform Pc Pressure and Pc Saturation corrections, 'tick' the 'Plot Correction' cell (in the 'Select Pc Curves for Display' table) for the highlighted row. This will set up the crossplot to only display the corrected Pc and Pc Saturation data.

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1392

22.'Click' the 'Select All Good Plugs -This Curve' button. This will set all the core plugs for display in the crossplot. 23.'Click' the 'Make Crossplot' button and Select the required Pc vs Sw Curve from the Drop Down Menu at the bottom of the screen to launch a crossplot which will display all the core plugs for your selected well. 24.Right Click the Crossplot and use the Select Points Function to QC individual Pc vs PcSw curves, flagging 'Bad' curves and editing invalid points from individual curves. 25.Save all your set-up parameters by 'clicking' the 'Save' button. 26.Important - Under the 'File' menu, use the 'Save all Wells to Database' or 'Save Current Well to Database as..' options to save all your output curves.

Related Topics Capillary Pressure Set-Up Curves Set Up Correction Parameters Data View / Edit Capillary Pressure Crossplot Typical QC Workflow

11.10.1.2 Capillary Pressure Functions

The computations built into the 'Capillary Pressure Functions' module are used to find a curve fitting function or a set of curve fitting functions which can be used to represent the Qc'd and corrected capillary pressure (Pc) dataset from the 'Capillary Pressure Set-up' module. There are two basic methods of doing this : 1. 'One Equation for all Pc curves' option - Find a single equation which fits all (or a subset) of the data, or 2. 'Separate equation for each Pc curve' option - Fit curves through each individual Pc curve, then combine the fitting parameters into a 'Combined equation'. When 'One Equation for all Pc curves' is selected, the user can create 'Leverett 'J' function' curves for all, or selected groups of Pc curves by setting up 'Models' and 'Discriminator' logic. Different 'Models' can be created which represent different Pc functions. A 'Model' may represent a particular function equation (eg Leverett-J Function) or may represent the application of different 'Discriminators' used to create the function. For example, a standard scenario would be to create separate models that can be applied over different porosity ranges. i.e. a model that

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

1393

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

works in the 10-15% porosity range, a second model for the 15-20% porosity range and a third for the 20-25% porosity range. To speed up the selection of a model there is a 'Regression Function Comparator' which will run through all of the models and give a rating for each. The user can then select the one that suits. An alternative approach is to use the 'Separate equation for each Pc curve' option. When this option is selected, the user can run one of three non-linear regression equations on all, or selected Pc curves, by setting up 'Models' and 'Discriminator' logic. The curve fit coefficients for each individual Pc curve can then be combined into a 'Combined Equation' which describes the best fit line for those Pc curves. The 'Capillary Pressure Functions' module takes, as inputs, the wells and Pc curves ('PcCorr ', 'SwPcCorr', 'PcUse') that are created in the 'Capillary Pressure Set-up' module. Each core plug that was flagged as 'Plug Status' 'Good' or 'Part Good' and has the 'Select Plug' column ' ticked' in the 'Individual Plugs for Display' table on the 'Data View / Edit' tab is loaded into this module. Therefore, to be able to modify the number of core plugs being used as inputs to this module, the 'Capillary Pressure Set-Up' module should be kept open. Each Model can have a different set of plugs. The Model being used is displayed in the 'Capillary Pressure Set-up and Corrections' window. This module creates 'Curve Fitting Model' functions. These functions are then applied, using the 'Saturation versus Height Curves' module. NOTE: it is no longer possible to select an 'Output Set' in the 'Capillary Pressure Functions' module. The output curve from this module will be placed in the Set selected in the 'Curves Setup' tab of the 'Capillary Pressure Set-Up & Corrections' module. The output curve will automatically have a 1.2.3....etc appended to its name as it is stored in the defined Set. The user does not have to do anything to the output name or output Set within this module. The 'Capillary Pressure Functions' module is set up on two 'tabbed' screens. These are; ' Equations', and 'Discriminators' Different Pc 'Models' can be set up using the control buttons and 'scroll arrows' at the top of the module interface. The menu bar is illustrated below:

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1394

'Model' - The 'Model' number in the top left-hand corner of the screen is incremented if more than one Pc curve fitting model is defined by the user. The 'left' and 'right' arrows allow the user to scroll through the Pc curve fitting models defined for the current dataset. For example, one could set up different models to reflect different porosity or permeability classes. 'Name' - the model 'Name' can be manually typed into the text entry box to allow the user to discriminate between Pc curve fitting models. 'Type' - the model 'Type' determines how the capillary pressure curves will be used to build a curve fitting model. The options are: 'One Equation for all Pc curves' 'Separate equation for each Pc curve' Depending upon the users choice of 'Type', the 'Equations' tab will toggle between two distinctly different views. These two views are described below. 'New Model' - This button creates a new Pc curve fitting Model. The user is offered the choice of copying the current model or of opening a new, 'blank' model. 'Clicking' the 'New Model' button opens the following message:

NOTE: Copying an existing model can be a quick way of setting up multiple models using the same curve fitting routines, but allows you to set up different 'Discriminator' logic for each new model, for example by applying different porosity or permeability ranges or different facies classes. 'Delete Model' - This button deletes the currently-displayed Pc Curve fitting model. Clicking the 'Delete Model' button will launch a message similar to the following message:

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

1395

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Click 'Yes' to confirm the delete operation, Click 'No' to cancel the operation.

Related Topics Saturation Height Modelling Capillary Pressure Capillary Pressure Set-Up Capillary Pressure Functions Saturation Versus Height Curves Log Curves 11.10.1.2.1 One Equation for all Pc Curves

When the 'One Equation for all Pc curves' option is selected, the 'Equations' tab looks similar to the screen capture shown below.

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1396

To apply the 'One Equation for all Pc curves' curve fitting 'Type' : 1. Select a 'Method' from the drop-down list box. The options are: a. 'Leverett J Function' b. 'Leverett J Function, porosity modifier' c. 'Porosity & Height Function 1' d. 'Porosity & Height function 2' e. 'Porosity & Height function 3' f. 'Porosity and Pc Lambda function' g. 'Thomeer function' 'Leverett J Function' - If this option is selected, the program will compute the Leverett 'J' function for all the Pc curves in the dataset, depending upon the 'Discriminator' logic set up by the user. The Leverett 'J' function allows Pc data to be normalized to take into account changes in permeability ('K' - the input Core Permeability curve) and Porosity (' ' - the input core porosity curve). The following screen display is opened:

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

1397

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The screen displays the equation of the 'Leverett J Function': J = 0.2166 * Pc / (

* COS

Where: J = dimensionless capillary pressure (Pc) function. Pc = the input, corrected capillary pressure ('PcCorr' curve), psi (input curve is converted to psi). = Interfacial Tension (Gas/water or Oil/water system), dynes/cm. = Contact Angle (Gas/water or Oil/water system), degrees. K = Core Plug Permeability, mD. This curve is selected in the 'Capillary Pressure SetUp' module, 'Curves Set-Up' tab). = Core Plug Porosity, fractional. This curve is selected in the 'Capillary Pressure SetUp' module, 'Curves Set-Up' tab). You must enter 'Interfacial Tension' (

and 'Contact Angle' (

values. Default settings for (

gas / water) or (oil / water) can be set up by 'clicking' one of the two buttons; 'Set Gas / Water' or 'Set Oil / Water'. The text-box entries are user-editable if you want to input different values for these parameters. The curve fitting 'Regression Equation', used to fit the 'J' function curves, is selected from a drop-down list. Three non-linear regression methods are available. They are:

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1398

'Lambda' - Lambda is a capillary pressure-specific curve fitting function, where Sw = a * J^ (- ) + b 'Hyperbola' - A hyperbolic curve fitting function, where Sw = a / (J-b) + c. 'Exponential' - an exponential curve fitting function, where Sw = a * e^(b*J) + c. Where 'a', 'b', ' ' and 'c' are fitting constants in the respective equations If the 'Weight Regression' box is ticked on then the points that go into the regression are weighted by the reciprocal of the Sw value. The Sw value will be in decimal units and the maximum weighting factor will be 10. Therefore an Sw of 1.0 will have a weight of 1 and an Sw of 0.1 will have a weight of 10. The overall effect of this is to weight the regression towards low Sw values. 'J' output curve name' - The 'Leverett J function' curve is output for each well/core plug in the dataset. The 'default' name is 'Lev_J'. NOTE: it is no longer possible to attach a Set name to the output curve name. The output curves will be automatically output to the same Set as the Pc corrected curves. In addition a 1, 2, 3..... is appended by default at the end of the curve name. This ensures that each curve is unique and plugs at the same depth won't overwrite. Hence, if the output Pc curve for the second Pc curve group is called PCcore:PcCorr2 then the output regression curve will be called PCcore:SwCpReg2. The same restrictions apply to the output curves from the 'Separate equation for each Pc curve' type models. 'Leverett J Function, porosity modifier'- This method uses the cementation exponent 'm' to incorporate a 'tortuosity' factor into the equation, which can reduce scatter in the corrected Pc data. This could be used where the permeability range of the core plugs is large. If this option is selected the following screen display is opened:

The screen displays the equation of the 'Leverett J Function, porosity modifier' which is . J = 0.2166 * Pc / (

* COS

^m

where: J = dimensionless capillary pressure (Pc) function. Pc = the input, corrected capillary pressure, psi (input curve is converted to psi).

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

1399

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

= Interfacial Tension (Gas/water or Oil/water system), dynes/cm. = Contact Angle (Gas/water or Oil/water system), degrees. K = Core Plug Permeability, mD. = Core Plug Porosity, fractional. m = cementation exponent. The user needs to input 'Interfacial Tension' (

, 'Contact Angle' (

and Porosity modifier ('m

') values. Default settings for Contact Angle and Interfacial Tension (gas / water) or (oil / water) can be set up by 'clicking' either of the two buttons 'Set Gas / Water' or 'Set Oil / Water'. The text-box entries are user-editable if you have different values for these parameters. The 'default' ' m' value is set at a value of 2.8. The curve fitting 'Regression Equation' used to fit the 'Leverett J function, porosity modifier' data is selected from a drop-down list. Three non-linear regression methods are available. These are: 'Lambda' - Lambda is a capillary pressure-specific curve fitting function, where Sw = a * J^ (- ) + b 'Hyperbola' - An hyperbolic curve fitting function, where Sw = a / (J-b) + c. 'Exponential' - an exponential curve fitting function, where Sw = a * e^(b*J) + c. Where 'a', 'b', ' ' and 'c' are fitting constants in the respective equations Both 'Hyperbola' and 'Exponential' regression fits are better suited to use in poor quality rock, because they are not very good at representing sharp transition zones seen in high porosity / permeability reservoir. If the 'Weight Regression' box is ticked on then the points that go into the regression are weighted by the reciprocal of the Sw value. The Sw value will be in decimal units and the maximum weighting factor will be 10. Therefore an Sw of 1.0 will have a weight of 1 and an Sw of 0.1 will have a weight of 10. The overall effect of this is to weight the regression towards low Sw values. ''J' output curve name' - The 'Leverett J function, porosity modifier' output curve is saved for every well/plug in the analysis dataset. The 'default' curve name is 'Lev_J'. Three additional non-linear 'Porosity / Height' functions, relating wetting-phase saturation to Capillary Pressure can be selected from the 'Method' drop-down list. These methods are suitable for poor quality (low porosity & permeability) reservoir rocks which have significant transition zones : 'Porosity & Height Function 1' - If this option is selected the following screen display is

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1400

opened:

'Porosity & Height function 2'- If this option is selected the following screen display is opened:

'Porosity & Height function 3'- If this option is selected the following screen display is opened:

'Porosity & Pc Lambda Function' - if this option is selected the following screen display is opened:

The units of the Pc variable in the equations will be the units of the 'output Pc curve' set-up in the 'Capillary Pressure Set-Up and Corrections' module. The porosity variable ( ) units will always be decimals. 'a', 'b', ' ' and 'c' are fitting constants in the respective equations. 'Thomeer Function' - if this option is selected the following screen display is opened:

The screen displays the equation of the 'Thomeer Fuction' which is . Sw = 1.0 - (BVnw

/ Ф) e^( -G / Log10(Pc/Pd) )

where: Pc = the input, corrected capillary pressure, psi (input curve is converted to psi). BVnw8 = Fitted constant, represents the bulk volume of the non wetting phase fluid at

infinite PC pressure. Ф = Input porosity

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

1401

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

G = Fitted constant, defines the curve shape. Pd = Fitted constant, defines the displacement pressure (PC pressure needed to start reducing saturations). When analyzing the results of applying one of these four functions, using the crossplot tool, no Regression line function is created. 2. After selecting a 'Curve Fitting Method', click the 'Run Regression' button which is located above the grid which occupies the bottom half of the interface. The 'Regression Results' table in the lower part of the window will be populated with data.

Regression Function Comparator The 'Regression Comparison' button is only visible when the 'One Equation for all Pc curve' curve fitting type is selected. When 'clicked' a regression is performed for all models and a comparison of the results is shown in a separate window, sorted with the best R2 at the top. The user can select any result and then click 'Use Selected' and the main form will update with this model. This allows the user to quickly review all models to find the best fitting one.

The 'Regression Results' Panel When the 'Run Regression' button is clicked, the grid panel in the lower part of the 'Equations' tab display will update to display the 'Best Fit' (Result) regression line equation and other statistics and coefficients associated with the regression equation solution. The tabulated entries depend upon the Curve 'Method' and 'Regression Equation' selected. The following screen

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1402

capture illustrates the 'Equations' tab display after setting up a 'Leverett J, porosity modifier' Function, and 'Lambda' curve fitting regression equation:

The data rows in the table are described below: 'Result Equation' - the regression 'best fit' equation is illustrated in the top row of the grid. This equation can be 'copied' from the table, using right-mouse-button functionality, into the WINDOWS clipboard so that it can be pasted into the IP 'User Formula' calculation module or into an external document. The equation cannot be edited directly in this row of the table. However, individual coefficients can be edited in their respective data rows. 'R2 Regression Coeff.' - The R2 correlation coefficient for this line fit is shown in row 2 of the grid. 'Num of Pc Crvs used' - this is a 'count' of the number of input Pc curves meeting the 'Discriminator' cutoffs. 'Discriminators are set on the 'Discriminators' tab and by default the 'PcUse' Flag from the 'Capillary Pressure Set-up and Corrections' module is included in order to discriminate 'Good' from 'Bad' data points. 'Num of Points used' this is a 'count' of the number of valid data points in the Pc Curves,

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

1403

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

used in the regression. 'Coefficient' rows - depending upon the curve fitting 'Regression Equation' selected, there will be one row in the table for each coefficient in the regression equation. In the example shown above there are entries for 'a', ' ',and 'b' coefficients. The coefficient entries are user-editable fields. If you edit a coefficient entry, the corresponding entry in the 'Result Equation' line will be updated. To reset an edited coefficient to its original value, either; manually type in the original value and click the 'Output Regression Sw Curves' button, or 'clear' the coefficient entry value and 'click' the 'Run Regression' button again. 'Clicking' the 'Output Regression Sw Curves' button at the bottom of the screen will then apply the regression equation to the input Pc or 'J' function data and will compute the 'Water Saturation from Pc Regression' (SwPcReg) curve for each core plug. If in the 'Capillary Pressure Set-up and Corrections' module the 'Output Sets same as PC curve Input sets' box has been 'checked' then the output curve SwPcReg will be automatically output to the Set that the input Pc curves are in. Plus a 1,2,3....will be appended to the curve name for each time the module is run, so the user will see SwPcReg1, SwPcReg2 etc curves. in the Set that contains the input capillary pressure curves. This removes the old problem of over-writing the output curve every time the module was run. The 'Crossplot Results' button, launches a number of QC plots. The options are described below, in the 'Output and Visualization' section.

Output and Visualization Buttons Output regression curves and data visualization is performed using the buttons at the bottom of the 'Equations' window

'Output Regression Sw Curves' button - 'clicking' the 'Output Regression Sw Curves' button creates a 'Water Saturation from Pc Regression' curve ('SwPcReg') for each Core Plug in the active dataset. The default output curve name is shown in the text-entry box next to the 'Sw Regression Results Curve Name' label. The text box curve name is usereditable, should you wish to change the name. The default output Curve Set is the Set that was created / selected as the output curve Set for the corrected curves from the 'Capillary Pressure Set-up and Corrections' module. If the user wants to place the Sw Regression result curve into a different Set than the output Set defined in the 'Capillary Pressure Set-

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1404

up and Corrections' module then use the 'Output Set' button to select the Set from the drop-down list. If the user then chooses another model the 'Output Set' will have to be defined again. 'Crossplot Results' button - clicking the 'Crossplots Results' button opens a drop-down menu containing 3 options. These are: 'Sw measured / Sw regression comparison' 'Individual Pc curve comparison' 'Input Pc curves with Regression line' Examples of the crossplot types are given below:

'Sw measured /Sw regression comparison' This display illustrates the effectiveness of the curve fitting computations. Plotting input corrected water saturation curves (SwPcCorr) versus water saturation from a regression fit (SwPcReg) gives a visual indication of how well the regression equation fits to the input data.

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

1405

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

'Individual Pc curves comparison' This display illustrates, for each core plug, the input, corrected Water Saturation (SwPcCorr) curve and its corresponding 'J' function regression curve, (Lev_J). The crossplot should only be used to compare a single core plug and its 'J' function regression equivalent. Displaying all the wells / curves is meaningless in this plot. In the well list, to the right-hand side of the crossplot display, wells are listed in the following order : '(1) Well 1 Plug 1' '(1) Well 1 Plug 1 Reg' (regression) '(1) Well 1 Plug 2' '(1) Well 1 Plug 2 Reg' (regression) etc...

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1406

'Input Pc curves with Regression line' This display allows you to view the input saturation (SwPcCorr) versus 'J' function (Lev_J) for all the selected core plugs in one crossplot, together with the 'Single Fitting Curve' that has been computed from these data. In the screen capture shown below the 'Lambda' regression line solution is shown as a green dashed line and the associated Regression equation is shown on the crossplot as a 'User Line'.

Related Topics Capillary Pressure Functions One Equation for all Pc Curves Separate Equation for each Pc Curve Discriminators

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

1407

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

11.10.1.2.2 Separate Equation for each Pc Curve

This Model 'Type', as shown below, will take all the corrected Pc versus saturation input data from the 'Capillary Pressure Set-up and Corrections' module and will allow the user to fit curves through each individual Pc curve, then combine the fitting parameters into a 'Combined Equation' iteratively running regression calculations on each individual curve fit calculation.

The 'Equations' tab, when 'Separate equation for each Pc curve' is selected looks similar to the following screen capture.

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1408

You should : 1. Select a 'Regression Equation' from the drop-down list at the top of the window which will be applied to the Pc data for each 'Good' or 'Part Good' core plug. Three non-linear regression methods are available. These are: 'Lambda' - Lambda is a capillary pressure-specific curve fitting function, where Sw = a * Pc^(- ) + b 'Hyperbola' - An hyperbolic Pc curve fitting function, where Sw = a / (Pc-b) + c. 'Exponential' - an exponential Pc curve fitting function, where Sw = a * e^(b * Pc) + c. 'Thomeer' - The Thomeer equation models Bulk volume fluid against capillary pressure,

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

1409

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

where Sw = 1.0 - (BVnw / Ф) e^( -G / Log10(Pc/Pd) ). Where BVnw8 = Fitted constant, represents the bulk volume of the non wetting phase fluid at

infinite PC pressure. Ф = Input porosity

G = Fitted constant, defines the curve shape. Pd = Fitted constant, defines the displacement pressure (PC pressure needed to start reducing saturations). The units of the Pc variable in the equation will be the units of the output Pc curve set-up in the ' Capillary Pressure Set-Up and Corrections' module. 2. Set up any 'Discriminators' you wish to apply, on the 'Discriminators' tab, for example, to select data from within a certain porosity range. 3. 'Tick' the 'Weight Regression' box to weight the points by the reciprocal of the Sw value if a weighting is required. 4. 'Click' the 'Run Regression' button at the top of the screen. Underneath the 'Run Regression' button, the number of Pc curves found is presented. If Discriminator logic is turned on, this number will be updated to reflect the number of 'Good' and 'Part Good' plugs detected in the current dataset that meet the discriminator logic cut-offs. The two on-screen tables are populated with the results of the regression run. The upper, 'Individual Equations Statistics' table provides a listing of each individual core plugs Pc curve fitting coefficients, the R2 correlation coefficient and the number of data points used in each regression. The equation coefficients change, depending upon the 'Regression Equation' selected, when the 'Run Regression' button is clicked. The 'Use' column for a plug can be 'un-checked' if the user wants to remove the regression results from the 'Combined Equation Statistics' results. The vertical scrollbar on the right hand side of the table allows you to analyze the list of individual plug statistics.

The 'Combined Equation Statistics' table, in the lower part of the window, contains the combined statistics for each regression equation coefficient, from all the selected core

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1410

plugs.

The data rows in the 'Combined Equation Statistics' table are described below: 'Average Value' - reports the average value, for each coefficient, of all the individual core plug curve fit regressions. 'Median Value' - reports the Median value, for each coefficient, of all the individual core plug curve fit regressions. 'Min / Max Values' - reports the minimum and maximum values found in the individual core plug curve fit regressions for each coefficient. 'Standard Deviation' - reports the Standard Deviation of the individual core plug curve fit regressions for each coefficient. 'Correlation Curve (X)' - Drop-down curve selection list. Choose a curve name to correlate a coefficient against. 'Correlation Type' - Drop-down list box. Select a correlation 'Type' from the drop-down list. The options are: 'y = Av. Value' 'y = Median Value' 'y = f(x)' 'x = f(y)' 'RMA' '2nd Order Poly' '3rd Order Poly' These are described more fully, below:

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

1411

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

'y = Av. value' - This is the 'default' setting when the module is first opened. The coefficient values in the 'Combined Equation' text box correspond to the 'a', 'b' and ' ' or 'c' coefficient 'Average Value' (first row in the table) from the 'Combined Equation' statistics table, as illustrated below:

'y = Median value' - select this option to return the 'Median Value' (second row in the table) for each coefficient from the 'Combined Equation' statistics table.

Correlation 'Types' can also be equations. The options are: 'y = f(x)' - linear regression where 'Coefficient' (Y) is a function of the selected 'Correlation Curve' (X). The squared Y-error distances are minimised. 'x = f(y)' - linear regression where 'Correlation Curve' (X) is a function of the selected 'Coefficient' (Y). The squared X-errors are minimised. 'RMA' - The 'RMA' (reduced major axis) line-fit gives an equation that is midway between the above methods. '2nd Order Poly' - Second Order Polynomial regression equation. '3rd Order Poly' - Third Order Polynomial regression equation. In the case, where one of the five 'Correlation Type 'equations' is selected, then you should follow the workflow steps listed below. 1. Select the 'Correlation Curve (X)' curve by clicking in the ''a' Coeff' column, in the ' Correlation Curve (X)' cell and choose a curve from the curve drop-down list.

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1412

2. Select the 'Correlation Type' in the ''a' Coeff' column - the example illustrated below uses ' RMA' for the 'a' Coefficient versus Core Porosity ('RawC: Phi') regression. 3. If you want to set either the 'X' or 'Y' curve as a logarithmic curve, 'tick' the 'Log (X)' and / or 'Log (Y)' tick boxes. 4. Click the 'Run' button in the ''a' Coeff' column - the regression R2 value and equation coefficients are listed underneath the 'View' button. The 'Combined Equation' text box is updated to reflect the new calculation 'Type' and coefficients. So, in the example illustrated below, the equation 'a' and 'b' coefficients, for the relationship between Core Porosity (RawC: Phi) and ''a' Coeff' are included into the 'Combined Equation' window.

The relationship between the Correlation Type (X) and coefficient (Y) can be visualized by clicking the 'View' button in the appropriate 'coefficient' column. A crossplot window is launched which shows the cross plotted data and includes the regression line fit to the data and its' equation. An example is shown below:

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

1413

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The crossplot display options are described below : 'Copy Graphics to Clipboard' - the graphics can be copied to the WINDOWS clipboard. 'Output to Printer' - the graphics can be output directly to a connected printer. 'Edit Regression Line' - if this is selected the regression line can be moved by grabbing the ends of the line and moving the line. The new equation is shown at the base of the plot and also transferred back into the module window. 'Create Area' - this is used to select an area on the plot by clicking on the plot. Each click will create a new point and which joins to the last created point. The area automatically closes. Each point can be dragged to a new position. A point can be deleted by placing the

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1414

cursor on a point and hitting the 'Delete' key. 'Delete Area' - deletes the created area. 'Re-run Regression using Area' - this re-runs the regression using the points within the created area. The results will be displayed at the base of the plot and also in the 'Combined Equation' text box within the 'Capillary Pressure Functions' module. In the example illustrated below, If the 'Correlation Type' is set to '2nd Order poly' function for the 'a' coefficient and this regression is run, the 'Combined Equation' text box will be updated such that the second order polynomial best fit regression equation is substituted for the single coefficient (''a' Coeff') value in the equation, as shown below:

'Combined Equation Statistics' table entries (continued): 'Log(X)' - 'tick' -box flag that, when ticked, takes the Log of the 'X' value before the regression is run (click the 'Run' button). 'Log(Y)' - 'tick'-box flag that, when ticked, takes the Log of the 'Y' value before the regression is run (click the 'Run' button). 'Run Regression' - 'Clicking' the 'Run' button in a coefficient column, runs the regression computation for that particular coefficient. 'View' - 'clicking' the 'View' button in a coefficient column launches a crossplot display of the 'coefficient' versus 'X' curve data. The regression line will also be shown on the crossplot. 'R2 Correlation' - output correlation coefficient statistic for the X (curve) versus Y (coefficient) regression function. ''a' Coeff' - output regression coefficient for the X (curve) versus Y(coefficient) regression function. ''b' Coeff' - output regression coefficient for the X (curve) versus Y(coefficient) regression

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

1415

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

function. ''c' Coeff' - output regression coefficient for the X (curve) versus Y(coefficient) regression function. The 'Combined Equation' text box displays the regression equation resulting from whichever Correlation 'Type' has been selected for the Combined regression dataset. 5. Click the 'Output Regression Sw Curves' button. An 'Sw-from-regression' output curve ('SwCpIndReg') will be calculated for each core plug in the list. In addition a 'Combinedequation-Sw-from-regression' output curve ('SwCpReg') will be computed for each core plug in the list.

Output and Visualization Buttons Output regression curves and data visualization is performed using the buttons at the bottom of the 'Equations' window

'Output Regression Sw Curves' button - 'clicking' the 'Output Regression Sw Curves' button creates a 'Water-Saturation-from-Regression' curve ('SwCpIndReg') for each Core Plug in the active dataset that meets the users 'Discriminator Logic' settings for a particular 'Model'. The default output curve name is shown in the text-entry box next to the ' Individual Curve Sw Regression Results, Curve Name' label. The text box curve name is user-editable, should you wish to change the name. If the user wants to output the results curves to a different Set than that defined in the 'Capillary Pressure Set-up and Corrections' module then use the 'Output Set' button to select a different Set. The result curve for the 'Combined equation Sw Regression Results, Curve Name' is output as curve 'SwCpReg'. 'Crossplot Results' button - clicking the 'Crossplots Results' button opens a drop-down menu containing 4 options. These are:

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1416

'Ind. Eqs : Sw mea / Sw Reg comparison' 'Ind Eqs : Pc curves comparison' 'Comb. Eqs : Sw mea /Sw Reg comparison' 'Comb. Eqs : Pc curves comparison' Examples of the crossplot types are given below: 'Ind. Eqs : Sw mea / Sw Reg comparison' Plot, using a Porosity discriminator, (in this example porosity must be < 15% - nine plugs are filtered from a larger dataset and are displayed in the crossplot). The output shows a near-perfect 1:1 regression curve fit for each separate plug, as we are regressing only one curve at a time.

'Ind Eqs : Pc curves comparison': This plot is used to view each individual plugs' Pc versus Sw relationship and its' individual regression equation curve fit.

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

1417

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

'Comb. Eqs : Sw mea /Sw Reg comparison' - This plot illustrates the comparison between the individual Core plug saturations versus the 'Combined Equation' computed Saturation line fit. This plot will show much wider data scatter than for the individual curve regressions since it is using a single 'Combined Equation' to try and fit each individual plugs' Pc versus Sw data.

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

Senergy

Advanced Interpretation

1418

'Comb. Eqs : Pc curves comparison' - Compares each individual core plug Pc versus saturation relationship against the 'Combined Equation' regression curve fit. The 'Combined Equation' regression fit has a postscript 'Reg' after the plug depth label.

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

1419

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The regression results can be output to a printer, text file or to the clipboard from the dropdown menu visible when the 'Print' button is clicked. The report includes all the regression results for the individual plugs. Below is a sample from an output report. Model (1) : Lev J Phi < .15 Individual regression run of each Cap Pressure curve Regression Type

: Lambda

Regression Equation

: Sw = a.Pc^(-?) + b

Number of Pc curves

:3

Sw Weighted regression used : No Pc Plug

Use 'a' Coeff '?' Coeff 'b' Coeff 'R2' corr. No. Points

W(8) Depth:4400.19

Yes 0.2885

-1.9828

0.1932

0.998

41

W(8) Depth:4403.23

Yes 0.6839

-2.3015

0.1945

0.995

31

W(8) Depth:4403.39

Yes 0.3272

-1.067

0.1733

0.981

47

'?' Coeff

'b' Coeff

(Y)

'a' Coeff

'R2' corr.

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

Average Value

0.43323

-1.78377

Median Value

0.32724

-1.9828

0.18698 0.19318

0.99119 0.99451

Min Value

0.28852

-2.30148

0.17326

0.98145

Max Value

0.68392

-1.06704

0.19449

0.9976

Std Deviation

0.218

0.6408

Corr. Curve (X)

RawC:Phi

Correlation Type

RMA

0.0119

RawC:Phi

1420

0.0086

RawC:Phi

y = Av. Value y = Av. Value

Log (X)

No

No

No

Log (Y)

No

No

No

'R2' correlation 'a' Coeff 'b' Coeff 'c' Coeff 'd' Coeff Result equation Sw = (-999. - 999. * RawC:Phi) * Pc^(-1.78377) + 0.18698 Discriminators RawC:Phi

<

0.15

<

0.9

and SwPcCorr

Zones Selected from set : Tops1 RN26

RN23

LS-3 (top 4C)

Related Topics Capillary Pressure Functions One Equation for all Pc Curves Separate Equation for each Pc Curve Discriminators 11.10.1.2.3 Discriminators

The 'Discriminators' tab is used to partition core plug data. Discriminators can be used to 'tune' the input data for the regression computation, for example using Porosity or Permeability curves, or a Facies flag to investigate the relationships to these parameters. Different discriminators can be set up for a number of models and used to generate appropriate Pc curve fitting functions to represent your core data. There is now an option to select a generic input curve as a discriminator, for example 'Input

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

1421

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

PcSw(dec)', since each input Pc curve Set will have a different name, discriminating multiple input Sets is now impossible. The generic input curve will automatically select the correct input curve when getting data from each Pc curve group. The units of the generic input curve, in brackets, show the user the input curve units. These units are setup when the output curves are setup in the 'Capillary Pressure Set-up and Corrections' module.

Zones can now be used to select the Pc data to be used within Models. If 'Use Zones' is ticked then only Pc plugs found within the selected zones will be used.

Related Topics Capillary Pressure Functions One Equation for all Pc Curves Separate Equation for each Pc Curve Discriminators

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1422

11.10.1.3 Saturation Versus Height Curves

The 'Saturation Versus Height Curves' module is used to take the functions that have been developed in the 'Capillary Pressure Functions' and 'Log Sw Vs. Height Functions' modules and to apply these functions to multiple wells and multiple reservoir zones. The module can also be used to calculate an unknown 'Free Water Level' (FWL) in a well, using a function to predict the 'Most Likely' value. The user sets up the input wells and curves and then creates 'Hydrocarbon Models' incorporating Free Water Level depths and depth ranges over which to run a set of functions. ' Function Sets' are created in the 'Function Mixing Setup' tab. This allows the user to specify which function is to be used in which circumstance. An example of this would be the use of different functions dependent on a certain porosity range or facies coding. Obviously, the ' Functions Mixing' set up should follow closely the discriminators used to create the functions in the first place, however a considerable degree of flexibility is allowed. Hence it is possible to create a function using discriminators for porosity > 0.1, for example, but apply the function to all porosity ranges. The module has been further enhanced to handle situations of gas over oil reservoirs. To calculate capillary pressure in the gas leg, for use in a Pc function, it is necessary to know the gas/oil contact plus the density of the gas and oil. NOTE: 1. The 'Functions Mixing Setup' relies on a consistent curve naming convention in all selected wells. So, for example, if a 'Function' discriminator setting uses a curve called 'PHIE', then this curve must be available in all wells. 2. On the 'Sw Height' tab ('Setup Input / Output curves' sub-tab) 'continuous' porosity / permeability input log curves, calibrated to core data (where available), are the required 'input' types. Sparse data Core Porosity and / or Core Permeability curves are not suitable for use in this module. The user interface is organized on tabbed screens. These are: 'Sw Height', which has 2 sub-tabs: SW Height Input / Output Curves SW Height Hydrocarbon Models And the Functions Mixing Setup tab

Related Topics Saturation Height Modelling

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

1423

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Capillary Pressure Capillary Pressure Set-Up Capillary Pressure Functions Saturation Versus Height Curves Log Curves 11.10.1.3.1 SW Height Input / Output Curves

The 'Sw Height' - 'Input / Output Curve' tab is illustrated below. This interface is used to set up the input wells, input porosity, permeability and water saturation log curves and the TVDSS curve for each well. The outputs from this module are 4 curves; 'Sw Height Curve Out' - Water Saturation as a function of Height above FWL (Sw_Ht). 'Sw Pc Curve Out' - Water Saturation from Pc curves calculated from height above FWL ( Sw_PcHt). This curve will only contain data if Capillary Pressure data has been entered in the 'Capillary Pressure Set-up and Corrections' module. For each Pc plug found above the FWL, the calculated capillary pressure for this depth will be used to look up the Sw value in the Pc curve. The corrected Pc data is used. 'Hght Above Cont Curve Out' - Height above contact (HtAbCont). This is the height, in units of the well (feet / metres), above the FWL in vertical depth. 'Pc pressure Curve Out' - Pc pressure above contact (PcAbCont). This is the Pc pressure calculated at each depth level from the vertical depth above the contact using the hydrocarbon and water densities. This does not include any IFT correction factor.

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1424

The porosity and water saturation input curves must be in decimal units. The permeability input curve which is used in the 'J' function and the 'RQI' function should either be in units of milliDarcies (mD) or SI units of 'm 2'. The units are read from the curve 'Units' attribute and the input value is converted to 'mD' before being used in the calculations.

Related Topics Saturation Versus Height Curves SW Height Input / Output Curves SW Height Hydrocarbon Models Functions Mixing Setup 11.10.1.3.2 SW Height Hydrocarbon Models

The 'Sw Height' - 'Hydrocarbon Models' tab is used to set up the 'Wells', 'Free Water Level', 'calculation depth ranges' for the study wells. There are a number of control buttons at the top of the 'tab' interface which are there to help the user to set up different hydrocarbon models, for example, for different reservoir intervals and

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

1425

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

different hydrocarbon fluid types. The controls are illustrated below:

The user interface is used to set up separate Hydrocarbon models in multiple wells - in order to accommodate one, or more, field-wide Hydrocarbon contact scenarios. Subsets of wells can be selectively evaluated, for example, in a fault compartmentalized reservoir where different Free Water Levels exist in different fault blocks.

'Use' – Wells to be used in the current model are selected for use by ticking the box. 'TVD Free Water Level' – True Vertical Subsea Depth value must be entered for each selected well. 'TVD Gas Oil Contact' - True Vertical Subsea Depth of the gas oil contact. This is only required for calculations using Pc models and for Gas-over-Oil reservoirs, otherwise leave

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1426

blank. 'MD Calc. Top Depth' – Top depth for the output calculated Sw curve. If not entered will be the top of the well. 'MD Calc. Bot Depth' – Bottom depth for the output calculated Sw curve. If not entered will be the bottom of the well or the FWL, which ever is shallower. 'Hyd Density' – Hydrocarbon density. Used for calculating capillary pressure. Not required if Log Functions are used. Can be entered as a fixed value or as a curve. This allows compositional hydrocarbon densities to be used. If a curve is entered the capillary pressure at a level is calculated by calculating the thickness weighted average of the input density curve from this level to the contact (either FWL or GOC). This allows for high angle wells where the hole angle may be varying over the interval of calculation. 'Gas Density' - This is the gas density for Gas-over-Oil reservoirs. The oil density is entered under the 'Hyd Density' column. The column will be 'greyed' out if no GOC has been entered. Numbers can still be entered in the column but no calculation will be made on them. Can be entered as a fixed value or as a curve. This allows compositional hydrocarbon densities to be used. 'Water Density' – Water density. Used for calculating capillary pressure. Not required if Log Functions are used. 'Density Units' – Units of the Hydrocarbon and Water density values. Used for calculating capillary pressure. Not used if Log Functions are used. 'IFT Corr Factor' – Interfacial tension correction factor. Used either for converting Pc Functions fluid type to actual fluid type or for normalizing Pc functions to Log Sw values. 'IFT Gas Corr Fact' - This is the gas IFT for Gas-over-Oil reservoirs. It is used to adjust the Pc value to account for the differences between the IFT and contact angle used in the corrected Pc curve data and the actual reservoir IFT and contact angle. The column will be 'greyed' out if no GOC has been entered. 'Function Mixing' – Select the function mixing to use for each selected well. These are set up on the 'Function Mixing Setup' tab. 'Make Plot' – Click the 'View' button to create an interactive plot for the well showing the results of the saturation height curve.

Model Calculations Click the 'Run All Wells' button to make the calculations for the selected wells for this hydrocarbon model. This outputs the 'Sw_ht' and 'Sw_PcHt' curves set up on the 'Setup Input /

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

1427

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Output Curves' tab. If the 'Null output Sw Curves' box is 'checked' then the output curves are deleted and reinitialized before the calculations are made. Warning: if you are using multiple hydrocarbon models, checking this box will delete the results from other models.

Oil Situation The calculations are made using the functions setup for the function mixing selected. If capillary pressure functions are used, the Pc value used in the functions is calculated as follows. Pc = (DenWater – DenHyd) x HT x IFTCorrFactor Where DenWater = Entered density of the water DenHyd = Entered density of the hydrocarbons HT = TVD height above the entered FWL IFTCorrFactor = Entered IFT correction factor Output units are the same as the corrected Pc output curves in the 'Capillary Pressure Set-up' module. These are the units expected by the functions.

Gas over Oil Situation The Pc value is calculated as follows. Between the FWL and GOC Pc = (DenWater - DenHyd) x (FWL - HT) x IFTCorrFactor Above the GOC Pc = (DenWater - DenHyd) x (FWL - GOC) x IFTCorrFactor + (DenWater - DenGas) x (GOC - HT) x IFTCorrFactorGas Where DenWater = Entered density of the water DenHyd = Entered density of the hydrocarbons FWL = TVD free water level GOC = TVD gas oil contact HT = TVD height above the entered FWL IFTCorrFactor = Entered IFT correction factor DenGas = Entered density of gas IFTCorrFactorGas = Entered IFT correction factor for the gas zone If a Pc function has been developed and is to be used in both the Gas and Oil zones then the '

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1428

IPTCorrFactorGas' is used to adjust the IFT and contact angle differences between the gas and oil fluid properties. For example, if the function was developed for oil with an IFT value of 30 and a contact angle of 30 degrees, then used in gas with an IFT of 50 and a contact angle of 0 degrees. The ' IFTCorrFactorGas' would be equal to 50 x Cos(0.0) / (30 x Cos(30.0) = 1.924

Interactive Log Plot By clicking the 'View' button under the 'Make Plot' column an interactive plot for the selected well will be displayed. The plot shows a comparison of the calculated Sw curves against the log Sw curve. The Pc Sw values curve 'Sw_PcHt' is also displayed as individual points wherever a Pc value exists.

A Zone Set is automatically created in the well called 'CapPress FWL'. The FWL for the model is the bottom of the zone. By dragging the bottom of the zone up or down, the Sw model will be recalculated and the results displayed. If multiple models are used then the Zone Set will have more than one zone. Each zone will represent a model, for example, for different fluids in different reservoirs. In the Sw comparison track (track 4) the 'IFT Corr Factor' is displayed as an interactive line. The user can drag this line to adjust this parameter. When the value is changed the Sw model is run and the plot updated. This allows the user to manually set the value to give the best match with log Sw results.

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

1429

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Track 7 displays the pore size distribution curve. The pore size is given as a radius in microns and the equation for its calculation is shown below: R = 2* IFT * Cos (CA) /Pc Where R = Radius IFT = Interfacial tension at lab conditions CA = Contact angle at lab conditions Pc = Capillary pressure The report from the module has been enhanced to give the Pc equation for each well and also the Function model equation. The equations can easily be cut and pasted for use in other applications. SATURATION HEIGHT Hydrocarbon Model : Gas Well :Exp 4 TVD FWL

: 3128.8

MD Top Depth

Hyd. Density : 0.2 gm/cc Water Density 1.14 Functions Mixing : Log Mixing Pc = (3128.8 - TVDSS) * 1.29659 psi

:

MD Bot. Depth

:

: 1. gm/cc

IFT Corr. Factor :

Function Mixing : Log Mixing Default Function = Log Function : Log Function 1

Model Functions Pc Function : Lev J Phi > .2 Sw = 0.1174 * (Pc * 3.84900E-2 * (K/Φ)^0.5)^(-0.43881) + 0.28661 Log Function : Log Function 1 Sw = 1.0 / ( (3.59475 + h^0.3406) * Φ^0.74781 )

Fluid Contact Fitting If an Sw model has been established for a field this can be used to asses whether a new well with no clear FWL fits the established field FWL or has a different FWL. This is done by estimating the depth range within which the FWL sits and then running the Sw model many times over this depth range to see which set of results best fits the log-calculated water saturation. The 'Search for best contact using log Sw data in selected wells' panel at the bottom of the window allows the user to do this.

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1430

The panel works the following way: 1. Select the well or wells for which to run the search. 2. Enter the 'Contact between' depth range over which to run the search. 3. The 'Use Hydrocarbon volumes' button is 'checked' (default) to make the comparison between model results and log results using porosity-weighted results. If not 'checked', then the comparisons are made on just the Sw curves. 4. 'Click' the 'Search' button and the following window is launched, which shows the progress of the comparison and the results of the computation. The 'Cumulative Difference' value is the sum of the differences of the hydrocarbon volumes (or Sw's) for each depth step above the current FWL, for all selected wells. The lowest values will be the 'Most Likely' FWL.

5. The 'Best Fit FWL' depth is displayed as a label at the bottom of the panel. 6. 'Click' the 'Use Contact' button to copy this 'Best Fit FWL' depth into the 'TVD Free Water Level' column of all selected wells and 'click' the 'Run All Wells' button to re-run the model using this FWL depth.

IFT Fitting When using capillary pressure curves to create Sw functions for a reservoir, one of the uncertainties is the IFT value and contact angle for the fluids in the reservoir. Sometimes it is felt

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

1431

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

that the log interpretation Sw values give better absolute values of water saturation due to these uncertainties. The 'Search for best IFT correction factor' panel allows the user to find the best IFT correction factor that makes the Pc functions match the log Sw values.

The panel works the following way: 1. Select the well or wells for which to run the search. 2. Enter the IFT 'Factor Between' range over which to run the search. The range is logarithmic and the defaults of 0.1 to 5 are normally adequate. 3. The 'Use Hydrocarbon volumes' button is 'checked' (default) to make the comparison between model results and log results using porosity weighted results. If not 'checked' then the comparisons are made on just the Sw curves. 4. Click the 'Search' button and the window, shown below, will be displayed to show the progress and the results of the comparison. The 'Cumulative Difference' value is the sum of the differences of the hydrocarbon volumes (or Sw's) for each depth step above the current FWL for all selected wells. The lowest values will be the best match IFT correction factor.

5. The 'Best Fit IFT Correction Factor' is displayed as a label at the bottom of the panel. 6. 'Click' the 'Use' button to copy this factor into the 'IFT Corr. Factor' column for all selected wells and 'click' the 'Run All Wells' button to re-run the model using this correction factor.

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1432

Related Topics Saturation Versus Height Curves SW Height Input / Output Curves SW Height Hydrocarbon Models Functions Mixing Setup 11.10.1.3.3 Functions Mixing Setup

The 'Functions Mixing Setup' Tab is used to set up the combination of 'Capillary Pressure' and / or 'Log Sw Vs. Height' functions that will be applied in the selected wells. The screen has a number of 'control' buttons and text-entry boxes at the top of the window. These are illustrated below:

The user sets up the 'Discriminator' grid, illustrated below, along with the selection of the ' Default Function' to choose the functions to be applied to the study wells. NOTE: It is good practice to give 'Capillary Pressure' functions and 'Log Sw Vs. Height' functions descriptive 'Function Names' that help you to select them from the drop-down list box. This helps when you are trying to set up 'Mixing' discriminator logic. An example 'Mixing' setup is shown below:

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

1433

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

If working with log functions, capillary pressure is not required. The equations only work with height above contact. The Oil / Gas density and IFT correction factors are not used.

Related Topics Saturation Versus Height Curves SW Height Input / Output Curves SW Height Hydrocarbon Models Functions Mixing Setup

11.10.2 Log Sw Versus Height Functions The 'Log Sw versus Height Functions' module is used to generate Water saturation (Sw) versus Height functions from log curve data. This module does not require core data.

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1434

The user sets up the input data from one or multiple wells on the 'Input Curves' tab. A Free Water Level (FWL) must be known in each well, from which the 'height above FWL' is calculated for use in the functions. It is assumed that all wells are in the same depth units, whether this is 'Feet' or Metres'. DO NOT mix wells with imperial (Feet) and metric units (meters) in the same function, unless the TVDSS input curves which are used as an input have been converted so they all contain consistent units. NOTE: This module can only be run after an interpretation to evaluate Porosity and Water Saturation has been made in each well. If the RQI (Rock Quality Index) functions are to be used, then a permeability curve will be also be required as an input. The module allows the user to apply different curve fitting techniques to the log curve data with the option to apply 'Discriminator' logic, for example, to derive average 'saturation versus height' functions for different porosity classes. The 'Use' and the 'FWL TVDSS' is now setup and saved by the model 'Function'. Hence, in a reservoir with multiple stacked reservoirs different functions can be developed for each reservoir, with the the setup saved by function. To speed up the selection of a model there is a 'Regression Function Comparator' which will run through all of the methods and equations and give a rating for each. The user can then select the one that suits. The module is organized on 2 'tabbed' screens. These are: 'Input Curves' and 'Functions'.

Related Topics Saturation Height Modelling Capillary Pressure Loader Capillary Pressure Set-Up Capillary Pressure Functions Saturation Versus Height Curves Log Sw Versus Height Functions 11.10.2.1 Input Curves

The 'Input Curves' Tab is used to set up the wells and curves to be used in determining the log Sw versus Height relationships. As noted above, the input Porosity (PHIE), Water Saturation (SW ) and Bulk Volume Water (BVW) curves must have already been computed in all subject wells. An optional permeability curve, which is used in the 'Rock Quality Index' (RQI) calculation, may also need to be supplied.

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

1435

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

A True Vertical Depth 'TVDSS' curve (NOTE: the 'Curve Type' of the TVDSS curve must be set to depth in the 'Manage Curve Headers' module) and a Free Water Level (FWL) depth value in ' True Vertical Depth', must also be entered into the table. Click in a blank cell in the 'Well Name' column to open the 'select well' drop-down list. All inmemory wells are listed. Select a well from the list to load it into the interface. Choose the curves for each well, in the appropriate columns. Type in an appropriate 'Free Water Level' depth value, in ft / m TVDSS, for each well. The Sw, Porosity and BVW input curves must be in the units of decimals (this is the standard output for all IP interpretation modules). The permeability input curve which is used in the 'RQI' function should either be in the units of 'md' or SI units of 'm 2'. The units are read from the curve ' Units' attribute and the input value is converted to 'md' before being used in the calculations.

Related Topics Log Sw Versus Height Functions Input Curves Functions

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1436

11.10.2.2 Functions

'Log Sw versus Height Functions' are managed using the function 'counter' and operations buttons found at the top of the 'Functions' tab.

'Function' - The 'Function' number in the top left-hand corner of the screen is incremented if more than one log Sw vs. Height function is defined by the user. The 'left' and 'right' arrows allow the user to scroll through the log Sw vs. Height functions defined for the current dataset. For example, one could set up different models to reflect different porosity or permeability classes. 'Name' - the Log Function 'Name' can be manually typed into the text entry box to allow the user to visually discriminate between log Sw vs. Height functions. 'New Function' - This button creates a new Log Sw vs. Height function. The user is offered the choice of copying the properties of the current function or, of opening a new, 'blank' function. 'Clicking' the 'New Function' button opens the following message:

NOTE: Copying an existing function can be a quick way of setting up multiple functions using the same fitting routines, but allows you to set up different 'Discriminator' logic for each new function. For example, you could apply different porosity or permeability ranges or different facies discriminators for different functions. 'Delete Function' - This button deletes the currently-displayed 'Sw versus Height function '. Clicking the 'Delete Function' button will launch a message similar to the following message:

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

1437

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Click 'Yes' to confirm the 'delete' operation, Click 'No' to cancel the operation. The 'Functions' tab is further subdivided onto 2 screens. These are 'Equations' and ' Discriminators'

The 'Equations' Sub-Tab The 'Equations' sub-tab is used to set up one or more 'Sw versus Height Functions' which represent the wireline-log-derived 'Water Saturation as a function of height' curve. One function or a number of functions can be used to describe a set of Sw versus height relationships, using different equations and discriminator logic.

'FWL TVDSS' - If the free water level is changed on this tab then all the FWL values will be

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1438

changed on the 'Input Curves' tab. If the user wants to use different FWL's for different wells in the development of the function then leave the 'FWL TVDSS' box blank on the 'Functions' tab and enter values on the 'Input Curves' tab. NOTE: If the same FWL's have been entered for each well on the 'Input Curves' tab then this value will automatically be shown on the 'Functions' tab. 'Methods' - The 'Method' drop-down list, illustrated in the screen capture shown below, provides the user with a number of methods of calculating water saturation, based upon the user-selected Input curves and FWL depths set up in the 'Input Curves' tab.

The available 'Methods' are: 'Sw function of height',

where Sw = f(h)

'BVW function of height',

where BVW = f(h)

'Rock Quality Index',

where Sw = f(RQI.h) & RQI =

'Rock Quality Index, porosity modifier',

where Sw = f(RQI.h) & RQI =

^m) (where an 'RQI' method is selected, an additional 'RQI' curve is output by the module) Where: Sw = Water Saturation BVW = Bulk Volume of Water h

= Height above FWL

RQI

= Rock Quality Index

K

= Permeability (from logs) in mD = Porosity (from logs) in decimal format

m

= cementation exponent

Four additional non-linear 'Porosity versus Height' functions, relating log water saturation to height-above-FWL can be selected from the 'Method' drop-down list. These are: 'Porosity & Height function 1'

where Sw = 1.0 / [(a +h^b). ^c]

'Porosity & Height function 2'

where Sw = 1.0 / [(a +b.h^c)). ^d]

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

)

1439

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

'Porosity & Height function 3'

Senergy

where Sw = [a + b.Log(h) + c.Log(h)^2

+ d. Log(h)^3 ] / [ ^f 'Porosity & Height Lambda function'

where Sw = a.h^(b. + c) + d

Where: a, b, c, d, f are fitting constants. 'Regression Equation' - the 'Regression Equation' drop-down list, illustrated below, provides the user with a number of options to line-fit the selected 'water-saturation-fromheight' function that the user has selected from the 'Method' list.

The available Regression Equations are: 'Linear'

where Sw = a + b.h

'Linear / Log'

where Sw = a + b.Log(h)

'Log / Linear'

where Log(Sw) = a + b.h

'Log / Log'

where Log(Sw) = a + b.Log(h)

'Lambda'

where Sw = a.(h)^(- ) + c

'Hyperbola'

where Sw = a / (h - b) + c

'Exponential'

where Sw = a.e^(b.h) + c

Where: Sw = Water Saturation h = Height above FWL a, b, c,

= Fitting constants

Before running the regression it is possible to apply a weight to the non-linear regression functions by 'ticking' the 'Weight Regression' box. This then weights the points that go into the regression by the reciprocal of the Sw value. The Sw value will be in decimals and so the maximum weighting factor will be 10. The effect of this is to weight the regression towards low Sw values.

Evaluating Log Sw Versus Height above FWL relationships

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1440

To evaluate different 'Methods' and 'Regression Equations', the user should : Select options from these two drop-down lists, then Click the 'Run Regression' button. The 'Result Equation', the 'R2 correlation coefficient ', the 'Number of points used' in the regression and the regression fitting constants (depending on the regression equation selected) are listed in the tabular display in the centre of the window. An example is illustrated below: To see a rating of all available models (there are 32 models) click on the 'Regression Comparison' button.

Click the 'Output Regression Sw Curves' button. The 'Water Saturation from Log Sw vs. Height' regression ('SwLogHt') and the Height above FWL curve ('Ht_FWL') are output to the selected 'Output Results' Set.

Click the 'Crossplot Results' button to launch the QC crossplots:

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

1441

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Regression Function Comparator The 'Regression Comparison' button when 'clicked' performs a regression for all methods and equations and a comparison of the results is shown in a separate window, sorted with the best R2 at the top. The user can select any result and then click 'Use Selected' and the main form will update with this model. This allows the user to quickly review all models to find the best fitting one.

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1442

Fitting an 'External' Sw vs. Height' function An additional option in IP, for the scenario where the user already has a Log Sw vs. height function from some external source and wants to apply that to the wells in IP, is to: Select the wells & Plugs / Discriminator logic. Find an equation of the required form, from the drop-down 'Regression Equation' list. Manually enter the equation coefficients in the appropriate rows of the table. The 'Result Equation' row will update. Click the 'Output Regression Sw Curves' button. Use the 'Crossplot Results' options to QC the results.

The 'Discriminators' Sub-Tab The 'Discriminators' sub-tab provides the user with a means to set up and experiment with discriminator logic. Discriminators can be set, for example to filter data into different porosity or permeability 'classes' or 'facies' classes. Different Log Sw Vs. Height above FWL functions can be created using this functionality. Generic versions of the input curves can be selected. The discriminators can be used to select data over certain depth ranges. This can be done by typing in the depths. However if a 'Tops' set is available a flag curve can be created from the tops using the 'Curves from Zones' module. Set the flag values for each zone to group together the intervals to analyse so that the data intervals can be selected by using the result flag curve in the discriminators.

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

1443

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Related Topics Log Sw Versus Height Functions Input Curves Functions

Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling

Senergy

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1444

11.11 Eastern European Resistivity Corrections The 'Eastern European Resistivity Corrections' Module is a specialist tool developed by the A. G.H University of Science and Technology, Kraków, and integrated into IP. The module provides functionality enabling the correction of 'Normal' and 'Lateral' type resistivity curves for hole size and environmental effects. The documentation for this module is organised within 2 chapters, 'EERC Interface' and 'EERC Theory' which provide details on how to use the module and secondly, give some background to the theory and principles underpinning this module.

Related Topics Eastern European Resistivity Corrections EERC Interface EERC Theory

Section 11.11 Advanced Interpretation : Eastern European Resistivity Corrections

1445

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

11.11.1 EERC Interface The 'Eastern European Resistivity Corrections' (EERC) Module is accessed from the ' Advanced Interpretation' menu.

The Module is arranged on two 'tabs' allowing corrections to be applied to 'Lateral and Normal Logs' and 'Multiple Lateral Logs' respectively. The 'Lateral and Normal Logs' tab contains the largely automated functionality to correct a combination of Normal and Lateral resistivity curves for borehole and environmental effects, producing output curves for Rt, Ri, Rxo and a Di (diameter of invasion) curve. The 'Multiple Lateral Logs' tab provides more sophisticated modelling functionality for use when only Lateral resistivity curves are available.The user must understand and apply the criteria for bed boundary definition using Lateral resistivity logs. The principles for utilising this functionality are discussed further, under 'EERC Theory', Sections 1 and 2 .

Section 11.11 Advanced Interpretation : Eastern European Resistivity Corrections

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1446

The 'Lateral and Normal Logs' Tab This screen allows the user to select and process a combination of Normal and Lateral resistivity logs taking into account tool configuration, borehole temperature and mud resistivity characteristics. 'Input Curves' : Requires the selection of a minimum of 3 Lateral and Normal resistivity curves for processing. 'Tool Length' : this is determined from a consideration of the the tools electrode configuration as illustrated in EERC Theory, Section 1.2 and Figure 4. The 'Tool Length' is calculated depending on the type of device. Often in FSU/ Eastern European logging, the Sonde name provides the required information. For Lateral devices the Tool length is equal to : AB/2 + AM For Normal Devices the Tool Length is equal to: AM. For example : Sonde Name (Type)

Electrode Spacing

Tool Length

B2.5A0.25M

B - 2.5m - A -

0.25m

(Normal)

0.25m -M

B0.5A2M (Lateral)

B - 0.5m - A - 2.0m

0.5m / 2 + 2.0m = 2.25m

-M B7.5A0.75M

B - 7.5m - A -

0.75m

(Normal)

0.75m - M

M2A0.25B (Lateral)

M - 2.0m - A -

2.0m + 0.25m / 2 =

0.25m - B

2.125m

NOTE: electrode configuration is often determined by local geology (Clastics or carbonates) and resistivity conditions. 'Filter Lateral curves' : applies a 'smoothing' factor to the input Lateral curves. If the 'Filter Lateral curves' box is 'checked', the user should select the number of depth steps to filter over. The filter value must be a whole, odd number. 'Input Temperature curve or value' : Select the temperature curve for the well, computed in the 'Calculation' -> 'Temperature Gradient' module, or type in a representative downhole temperature value to correct the resistivity curves to. 'Input Caliper curve or value' : Select a caliper curve for use in the hole size correction or type in a hole size value. 'Mud Resistivity' : type in the mud resistivity value for the subject well.

Section 11.11 Advanced Interpretation : Eastern European Resistivity Corrections

1447

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

'Mud Resistivity Temperature' : type in the temperature measurement at which the mud resistivity reading was made. 'Hole Size' : 'Hole Size' must be entered in the default units for the caliper log - See Set Default Units. 'Top / Bottom Depths' : These are the top and bottom depths over which the user wishes to run the corrections. Leave the boxes blank to apply the environmental corrections to the entire well. The

button allows the user to specify depth intervals from a 'Zone / Tops

Set' selection window. 'Run' : The 'Run' button will apply the mud resistivity / temperature and hole size corrections to the Input curves to create the output corrected Rt, Ri and Rxo resistivity and Di (depth of invasion) curves. 'Result Plot' / 'Make Plot' : The 'Make Plot' button is initially 'greyed out'. It is activated after the environmental corrections have been 'Run'. The following Log Plot is launched, which shows a depth track on the left hand side next to a track containing the Correlation Logs followed by the input curves in one track, the Results curves in the next and the Diameter of Invasion curve in the final, right hand, track. The Rt curve is also added to the 'Input Resistivities' track as a dashed line in red.

Section 11.11 Advanced Interpretation : Eastern European Resistivity Corrections

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1448

'Correlation Logs' : 2 Additional curves e.g GR and NPHI can be added to the 'Result Plot '. The two drop-down lists allow the user to choose the curves to display. 'View Normal Curves' : This Plot option activates a series of reference theoretical 'Normal ' curves. See EERC Theory, Section 2. 'View Lateral Curves' : This Plot option activates a series of reference theoretical 'Lateral' curves. See EERC Theory, Section 3. If the Normal Curves and Lateral Curves crossplots are activated, the user is able to 'click' at a depth point in the 'Input Resistivities' track of the 'Result Plot' and points, corresponding to the number of Normal and Lateral curves selected, will plot on the charts. In the example shown above, a single point will appear on the 'View Normal Curves' Crossplot reference charts and two points will appear on the 'View Lateral Curves' Crossplot charts as illustrated below.

'Save' / 'Load' : The 'Save' and 'Load' buttons allow the user to save the borehole / tool configuration set-up for the environmental corrections to an external (.env) file. 'Zone #' : The left and right arrow buttons allow the user to create new environmental 'Zones' for the environmental corrections. These could correspond to a new hole section with different bit size, a change of mud chemistry, change of logging tools ...etc. The set-up for each zone can be individually saved and recalled. NOTE: To update the current parameters you have to click 'Run'. 'Delete Zone' : The 'Delete Zone' button allows the user to select and delete a zone from the zone list.

Section 11.11 Advanced Interpretation : Eastern European Resistivity Corrections

1449

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The 'Multiple Lateral Logs' Tab This tab enables the user to set up the processing window for multiple Laterolog environmental corrections, in order to compute the Rt, Ri, Rxo, resistivity curves and the Di and DiRxo 'diameter of invasion' curves.

The theory relating to the environmental correction of the Lateral curves is described in EERC Theory, Section 2. 'Input Curves' : Lateral curves 1 - 5. The user selects the Lateral curves from the dropdown list boxes for use in the module. NOTE: a minimum of 4 Lateral curves is required. 'Bed Tops curve' : This is a user-created curve that controls where bed boundaries are modeled. This is critical for Lateral log processing and if this box is left blank, IP will prompt for a valid curve name if the user attempts to 'Run' the computation and the 'Interactive

Section 11.11 Advanced Interpretation : Eastern European Resistivity Corrections

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1450

Plot' is called up. Bed tops are identified by the user according to the rules described in the Theory section. See in particular EERC Theory, Sections 1.2 and Section 2.1 for a discussion of the principles involved in selecting 'Bed Tops'. The user works interactively on the screen, examining 5 (or 4) Lateral curves and two additional correlation logs in order to find minima or maxima on the curves. For both extremes the user should pick a common depth point for all logs, but a small depth misalignment between log extremes can often be observed and can be accepted. The user then decides the depth at which they want to put the top of the bed, according to the principles of the theory of Lateral logs and using their knowledge of the geological environment for the logged formation. In defining tops it should be remembered that the shortest Lateral log has the most important role, because its curve has the highest vertical resolution. When the model is 'Run' and the Interactive Plot is activated, the user can create / edit the Bed Tops curve on-screen as illustrated below:

'Input Temperature curve or value' : Select the temperature curve for the well, computed in the 'Calculation' -> 'Temperature Gradient' module or type in a representative downhole temperature value to correct the resistivity curves to. 'Input Caliper curve or value' : Select a caliper curve for use in the hole size correction or type in a hole size value. 'Mud Resistivity' : type in the mud resistivity value for the subject well. 'Mud Resistivity Temperature' : type in the temperature measurement at which the mud resistivity reading was made.

Section 11.11 Advanced Interpretation : Eastern European Resistivity Corrections

1451

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

'Hole Size' : 'Hole Size' must be entered in the default units for the caliper log - See Set Default Units. 'Top / Bottom Depths' : These are the top and bottom depths over which the user wishes to run the corrections. Leave the boxes blank to apply the environmental corrections to the entire well. The

button allows the user to specify depth intervals from a Zone Set

selection window. 'Run' : The 'Run' button will apply the mud resistivity / temperature and hole size corrections to the 'Input Curves' to create the output corrected Rt, Ri and Rxo resistivity and Di / Dixo (depth of invasion) curves. 'Interactive Plot' / 'Make Plot' : This button only becomes active after the 'Run' button has been executed. The Interactive plot is launched. The plot contains a Correlation track, Laterals (input curves) track, Result Resistivities track and Diameter of Invasion track. The ' Result Resistivities' track in the log plot contains the 'squared' Rt, Ri are Rxo curves computed from the input Lateral curves. 'Correlation Logs' : two additional log curves can be added to the 'Interactive Plot' as correlation curves e.g. GR, Neutron, Sonic. 'Result curves' : The 'Result curves' button is initially 'greyed out'. After the 'Run' button is 'clicked', the button becomes active and the user can view the model results by 'clicking' the 'Result curves' button. This action will launch a crossplot window which displays the ' Input Curves' average resistivity values (one 'dot' per input curve per bed) superimposed on the 'Lateral theoretical resistivity curves' charts. If the user moves the mouse cursor up / down the Laterals track between 'beds' on the Interactive Plot, the chart will automatically update to show the 'best fit' chart selected for that bed. In a 'thin bed', 4 charts are displayed - 'clicking' on a small chart launches a larger crossplot.

Section 11.11 Advanced Interpretation : Eastern European Resistivity Corrections

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1452

'Lateral curves' : Shortcut to theoretical Lateral curve reference charts (h/d > 32). See EERC Theory Section 2.2. The charts can be printed directly from the 'print' icon or copied to a clipboard for pasting into other applications. 'Thin beds curves' : Shortcut to theoretical Lateral 'Thin Beds' curve reference charts (h/d <= 32) See EERC Theory, Section 2.4 The charts can be printed directly from the 'print' icon or copied to a clipboard for pasting into other applications. 'Save' / 'Load' : The 'Save' and 'Load' buttons allow the user to save the borehole / tool configuration set-up for the environmental corrections to an external (.env) file. 'Zone #' : The left and right arrow buttons allow the user to create new 'Zones' for the environmental corrections. These could correspond to a new hole section with different bit size, a change of mud chemistry, change of logging tools ...etc. The set-up for each zone can be individually saved and recalled. By creating and applying environmental zones where necessary, the user can compute the required Rt, Ri and Rxo curves for an entire well section. 'Delete Zone' : The 'Delete Zone' button allows the user to select and delete a zone from the zone list.

Related Topics Eastern European Resistivity Corrections EERC Interface EERC Theory

Section 11.11 Advanced Interpretation : Eastern European Resistivity Corrections

1453

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

11.11.2 EERC Theory The following chapter provides a discussion of the theory applying to 'Normal' and 'Lateral' resistivity log environmental corrections.

1.

Introduction

'Normal' and 'Lateral' logs are the oldest resistivity measurements in well logging and are strongly influenced by the borehole environment in which the measurements have been recorded. The simple construction of the logging tools and, in particular, the fact that the electric current beam is not focussed, are the most important reasons for the application of environmental corrections. Recording five Lateral logs, or two Normal and one Lateral, in so-called 'Side-Wall Resistivity Logging' or 'Simplified Resistivity Logging', has been very popular in Central and Eastern European countries and in the Soviet Union for many years (Bala et al3 1999). Countless such logs are stored in archives everywhere and they are a very important source of information. In recent times and with other data, they provide very important additional information on reservoir formation parameters.

1.1 A Brief History of Classic Resistivity Logging Theory In early 1940's Alpin (Alpin2 1964, Dakhnov 6 1967) presented a theoretical solution for the Poisson equation for the electric field potential in a borehole surrounded by an invaded zone and a virgin formation, when the source of the electric field is located in the borehole axis. In his model it is assumed that each of the layers (the borehole, the flushed zone, the invaded zone and the virgin formation) is cylindrical, coaxial, homogeneous and isotropic, and is infinite in the z-direction (

h

, where h represents the bed thickness). Figure 1 presents the basic model

and the full nomenclature. The assumption of infinity allows neglecting the mutual influence between the electric field in a given bed (point) and an adjacent one, in the interpretation process.

Section 11.11 Advanced Interpretation : Eastern European Resistivity Corrections

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1454

The analytical solution of the field equations is the basis for constructing sets of theoretical curves for the Normal and the Lateral resistivity logging tools. The equation for the ideal Lateral device (

MN

or

AB

, see Figure 2 for the idealized tool representation) is shown

here below: Ra

Rm 1

4 L2 d

0

mC m (m) sin m

2L dm d

(Equation 1)

Where: Ra = apparent resistivity, Rm = mud resistivity, L = device length, and d = borehole diameter. C m ( m) is a function of the resistivity parameters of the formation and the invaded zone, and of the borehole geometrical parameters, i.e. diameter of the borehole and the invaded zone.

C m ( m)

is expressed in terms of the modified Bessel functions I0, I1 and K0, K1. The integrand is

complicated and oscillating, and to calculate the theoretical curves, the 64-point Gauss quadrature method has been chosen. The accuracy of the integral calculation is 0.5 per cent ( Abramovitz, Stegun1 1970).

Section 11.11 Advanced Interpretation : Eastern European Resistivity Corrections

1455

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The analytical solution is the basis for calculating sets of theoretical curves

Ra / Rm

f ( L / d; R t / R m )

, where Rt represents the true formation resistivity. The family of

theoretical curves calculated for a two-layer formation (only borehole and virgin zone) plays the main role. It comprises the curves

Ra / Rm

f (L / d )

for various modules

Rt / Rm

, and is

the starting point to any interpretation. The other theoretical curves, calculated for a three-layer formation (borehole, invaded zone and virgin zone) are grouped in families according to the constant parameters Ri/Rm and D/d, where Ri and D are the resistivity and the diameter of the invaded zone respectively. These theoretical curves are the basis of the interpretation, which consists in the comparison of five measured points (one for each device at the same depth reference) on each of the curves for each of the individual devices, theoretical values on the curves

Rt / Rm,Ri / Rm,D / d

Ra / Rm

f (L / d; R t / R m )

Ra / Rm

f (L / d)

to the

and choosing the parameters (

) that give the best-fit curve as a result. Figure 3 illustrates an example

of such an interpretation.

Section 11.11 Advanced Interpretation : Eastern European Resistivity Corrections

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1456

The theory is significantly more complicated for a formation consisting of a bed of given thickness, with adjacent beds above and below it, and intersected by a borehole. The solution for such cases has been found by Pierkov 9 (1964) using the results of analog modelling. A numerical solution has been also obtained on the basis of Alpin's 'induced charges' method and a way of calculating the full set of theoretical curves has been presented (Ossowski8 1990). Modeled and calculated curves have been collected for many cases of the two-layer formation (borehole and virgin zone) for a defined bed and surroundings. The theoretical curves

Ra / Rm

f ( L / d; R t / R m )

the formation model: h/d and

are grouped according to the constant parameters characterizing

Rs / Rm

, where: Rs represents the resistivity of the surrounding

beds (shoulder bed resistivity, assumed to be the same from the top and the base of the given

Section 11.11 Advanced Interpretation : Eastern European Resistivity Corrections

1457

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

bed).

1.2 Normal and Lateral Devices and Their Resistivity Curves Figures 4a and 4b show the schematic layout of Normal and Lateral logging devices, with various electrode arrangements. Each device consists of two circuits: the imposed current circuit, always including electrodes A and B, and the measuring (potential) circuit with electrodes M and N. A knowledge of the distance between electrodes is essential in defining whether the tool measures the potential of the electric field (Normal devices) or the potential gradient (Lateral devices). Exchanging the role of electrodes (AB to MN) has no influence on the logging results: the resistivity curves do not change. The length of the device is determined according to the sketch in Figure 4. The measurement reference point is also indicated in Figure 4. The radius of investigation of a device depends on its length and for Normal devices it is approximately twice the length and for Lateral devices only a single length (Pirson10 1963). The devices are named " bottom", when the pair of MN (AB) electrodes is placed in the lower part of a device and "top" in the reversed case. For the remainder of this consideration we will assume that a set of five Lateral logs, or two Normal and two Lateral logs, can deliver complete information on the resistivities in the flushed zone, the invaded zone and the virgin formation.

Section 11.11 Advanced Interpretation : Eastern European Resistivity Corrections

Senergy

Advanced Interpretation

1458

A characteristic resistivity anomaly is observed in the case of a single high resistivity bed in low resistivity surroundings. In Normal logs the resistivity curve shows the anomaly to be symmetrical with respect to the midpoint of the bed. With a Lateral device, however, the response is asymmetric with two characteristic points: a minimum at the top

Section 11.11 Advanced Interpretation : Eastern European Resistivity Corrections

1459

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

of the given bed and a maximum at the base. They are distinctly visible and are shown schematically in Figure 5. These points are the basis for identifying given beds in a continuous resistivity curve recorded in a borehole traversing discrete beds of varied lithology.

1.3

Interpretation

The approach to the interpretation, i.e. correcting the measured resistivity logs for borehole effects and presenting resistivity values for the various sections of the borehole and formation environments, is based on fitting the so-called measured curve (constructed on the basis of the measured logs and consisting of 5 (or 4 points minimum) in the case that only Lateral devices are available, and 4 (or 3 points minimum) in the case where both Normal and Lateral devices are available, obviously all at the same depth level, to the theoretical one (Bala et al.3 1999;

Section 11.11 Advanced Interpretation : Eastern European Resistivity Corrections

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1460

Jarzyna et al.5 1999; Jarzyna et al.7 2002). The two possible measurement set-ups require two different approaches: a). For five (four) Lateral logs of different radii of investigation the logged profile is subdivided into a sequence of discrete beds of different resistivity (different lithology and/or saturation of the pore space) and each bed is then treated as having constant parameters. The interpretation delivers a set of constant values for each bed, resulting in a set of 'squared', corrected resistivity curves. b). For two Lateral and two Normal curves (or for three of them) the interpretation is done continuously, i.e. for each set of resistivity samples at each depth level.

2. LATERAL CURVES 2.1.

Identification of the Beds and Apparent Resistivity Readings

The initial identification of the beds is necessary only when there are no Normal logs (Approach a). above). The beds are the basis for defining intervals of apparent resistivity. In Approach b). the apparent resistivity values at the given depth are sampled directly from the logs. As already mentioned, the Lateral resistivity curve has characteristic points - minima and maxima - associated with beds boundaries. Bed boundaries are selected as follows: for a high resistivity bed surrounded by low resistivity beds and for the "bottom" Lateral device, the maximum of an anomaly indicates the base of the bed and the minimum the top (see Figure 5). For the inverse case (a low resistivity bed surrounded by high resistivity beds or the "top" Lateral device) the appearance of the anomaly is also reversed and bed boundaries are selected accordingly. In practical terms the interpretation on the computer screen proceeds as follows: Looking at the plot of several apparent resistivity curves vs. depth, the interpreter picks the depths of the tops of beds that can be identified. The characteristic extremes should hopefully be visible on each curve (5 or 4 curves) and there may well be some depth shift between some of them. In this case, the interpreter has to decide on a single depth for an extreme, common for all logs. In these cases, the curve recorded by the shortest Lateral device is the most useful. The tops picked on it should be considered definitive for interpretation, since the shortest Lateral device is considered in this context as the log having the highest vertical resolution. Two additional logs (used as correlation logs, usually GR or NPHI or LL3) are also presented on the screen. They are helpful in identifying bed boundaries. The top-picking procedure is greatly

Section 11.11 Advanced Interpretation : Eastern European Resistivity Corrections

1461

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

helped by learning and understanding the nature of the geological formations under investigation: are the beds (fairly) homogeneous or laminated?, or fining (coarsening) upwards? Any information on the morphology of the beds will help to position the pick in the optimal place, bearing in mind that there will be a balance to be struck between the shape and amplitude of the apparent resistivity indicated by each device, their vertical resolution and the influence of the borehole environment. Knowledge of the stratigraphy will help to establish the best pick. There must be no gaps in the subdivision of the log profile into beds, i.e. the base of one bed becomes the top of the next bed. For each bed the following set of parameters is collected: the depth of the top (Htop ) and the depth of the base (Hbase ) defined according to the rule described above, and the thickness of the bed (h = Hbase - Htop ), the maximum resistivity, Ram ax, for the so called "thin" resistive beds (h/d <32), or the minimum resistivity, Ram in, when a low resistivity thin bed is surrounded by resistive neighbors, the average resistivity, Raav, for the so-called "thick" beds (h/d>=32), calculated taking into account all resistivity samples from the log inside the depth interval Hbase - (Htop - 0.2h), the average caliper, d, in the interval h, the resistivity of adjacent beds, Rs . This parameter is necessary in the interpretation of the "thin" beds. Rs is calculated as an average value of two readings from the curves recorded by the Lateral device at points LL=1.05 and LL=2.625 m. The Rs value is then taken as average resistivity in the section of 0.5h above the top of the given bed. This procedure to determine Rs is justified by the greater influence of the formation resistivity at the top of the given layer on the measured Ra under consideration, for the "bottom" Lateral device (which is in any case the most common tool configuration).

2.2 Interpretation in "Thick" Beds, h/d >= 32 In this case the Alpin's2 solution curves are the basis for the interpretation. The following assumptions (mentioned earlier) for the validity of theoretical curves are respected in every case: Thickness of the given bed is infinite (

h

),

Cylindrical coaxial layers: borehole (diameter d), homogeneous invaded zone (diameter D, resistivity Ri) and virgin zone (resistivity Rt) are present.

2.2.1 Determination of Rx0, Ri and Rt

Section 11.11 Advanced Interpretation : Eastern European Resistivity Corrections

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1462

At each depth level, values of apparent resistivity (Ram ax or Ram in, Raav) are read and normalized by dividing them by the resistivity of the mud Rm, corrected for formation temperature. The correction of mud resistivity for temperature is made according to the formula: Rm(tbed) = Rm(tmud pit) * (tmud pit + 21.5)/(tbed+21.5) (Equation 2)

t bed

t0

H 20 Gg 100

(Equation 3)

where:

R m ( t bed )

= resistivity of the mud at the temperature of the bed midpoint (tbed) [ohmm]

Rm(tmud pit) = resistivity of the mud in the mud pit (tmud pit) [ohmm] t0 = annual mean surface temperature [ºC] Gg = geothermal gradient [ºC/m]. For temperature expressed in [ºF] the factor 21.5 in ( Equation 2) should be changed to 6.77. Each apparent resistivity ratio borehole, yielding

Racorr / Rm

Ra / Rm

is individually corrected for the influence of the

. The two-layer theoretical curves are used for this correction.

Then, a so-called 'measured curve'

Racorr ( i ) / Rm

f ( L L (i ) / d )

is constructed. This curve

approximates the changes in resistivity of the given bed in the radial direction. The measured curve is then fitted to the theoretical curves to get the true (interpreted) resistivities of the cylindrical 'flushed', 'invaded' and 'virgin' zones. If all values of

R a (i )

corr

/Rm

are close (within 10%) we assume that there is no invaded zone,

and the true resistivity of a formation, Rt, is equal to:

1 i

R corr a (i ) i

, where i is a number of Lateral

curves included in the interpretation. If, after the correction, the values of

R a (i )

corr

/Rm

obtained from the short devices are different

from those obtained from the long devices, the three-layer case applies and an invaded zone is present. In this case we have "increasing" (Ri>Rt) or "decreasing"(Ri
Section 11.11 Advanced Interpretation : Eastern European Resistivity Corrections

1463

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

borehole effects represents the resistivity of the flushed zone,

R corr a ( i 1)

R x0

. If there is no

shortest device, Rx0 is not determined If

R a ( 2)

corr

/Rm

and

R a ( 3)

corr

/Rm

Ri, is derived from the average

1 2

are close (within 10%), the resistivity of the invaded zone, 3

R corr a (i ) i 2

. In the next step the theoretical three-layer curves

are chosen, which are closest to the just-calculated Ri. Then, four 5 are compared to curves of constant

Ri / Rm

R a (i )

corr

/Rm

values, i=2,…,

and various Di/d until the best fit of the four

points to the theoretical curve is obtained. Finally, the module of the theoretical curve

Rt / Rm

is taken as the basis to calculate the resistivity of the virgin zone, Rt. The

measure of the best fit is the minimum of the sum of the squares of the differences between the measured points and the corresponding relevant points on the theoretical curve. If two values of Ri have been chosen, Rt is calculated as an average, and D/d is also determined as an average of the parameters of the chosen theoretical curves used in the interpretation. If either the second device resistivity, (Ra(i=2)), Case aa), or the third device resistivity (Ra (i=3)), Case bb), are not available, the criteria for the determination of the invaded zone resistivity, Ri, and the diameter of that zone, D, are changed as follows: aa). bb).

Ri

R a ( 3)

corr

Ri

R a ( 2)

corr

and D = LL=3 (in most cases LL=3=2.625 m); and D= LL=2 (in most cases LL=2=1.05 m);

The so-called 'annulus' occurs only when the formation contains oil in addition to formation water. In the pore space, formation water is being displaced in preference to oil when mud filtrate invasion is taking place. In this case, low values of the apparent resistivity ratios

R a (i

3)

/Rm

or

R a (i

4)

/Rm

can be observed. If the difference in apparent resistivity ratio

between point 4 and point 5 is less then 20% then point 4 is taken into interpretation. If the difference between apparent resistivities of points 3 and 5 is also less then 20%, point 3 is included in the interpretation. In the opposite cases the mentioned points are excluded from the interpretation. These considerations are correct only in the case of decreasing mud filtrate invasion. An annulus is considered only when:

R corr a (1)

R corr a ( 2) / 2

R corr a ( 4)

R corr a (5) / 2

. If one of

these devices is unavailable, the assumptions mentioned are not applicable and an annulus is

Section 11.11 Advanced Interpretation : Eastern European Resistivity Corrections

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1464

not taken into consideration. If the apparent resistivity of the longest devices (LL(4) or LL(5)) was not recorded, the interpreting procedure (fitting of the measured points to the theoretical curves) uses the points from devices LL(2), LL(3) and LL(4) or LL(2), LL(3) and LL(5) and the module of the theoretical curve,

2.3

Rt /Rm

, yields the resistivity of the virgin zone.

Determination of the Diameter of the Flushed Zone and the Invaded Zone

It has been assumed that the shortest Lateral device delivers the information for the flushed zone. Bearing in mind the tool geometry, the diameter of this zone is considered to be equal to the length of the shortest device (in most cases 0.55m). If there is no log for the shortest device the parameters for the flushed zone are not determined. The diameter of the invaded zone is obtained automatically during the interpretation using threelayer theoretical curves. If the second (next longer) device has not been run, the diameter of an invaded zone is set equal to the length of the third one, or, conversely, if the third device has not been run, the diameter of the invaded zone is equal to the length of the second device.

2.4. Interpretation in "Thin" Beds, h/d < 32 The interpretation of the "thin" beds is based on the set of curves derived using an analog model and presented by Pierkov 9, for ratios h/d =1,…, 24 and on the results of numerical modelling for h/d=32, for the full set of ratios Rt/Rm and Rs /Rm. For all theoretical curves the assumption is made that the parameters characterizing layers and beds are constant. To perform the interpretation, the following parameters are chosen using the model of a two-layer geological formation without invaded zone: Maximum or minimum apparent resistivity, divided by mud resistivity at formation temperature, Ra/Rm, Thickness of the selected bed relative to borehole diameter, h/d, Resistivity of adjacent beds, also Normalized by the mud resistivity, Rs/Rm.

2.5

Selection of the Theoretical Curves

For each interpreted bed, after determining the parameters: and h/d, named now

Ra / Rm

h meas / d

f ( L / d, R t / R m )

Ra / Rm

named now

Rsmeas / Rm

, the four families of theoretical curves:

with the closest parameters:

R stheor / R m

and

h theor / d

Section 11.11 Advanced Interpretation : Eastern European Resistivity Corrections

, are

1465

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

selected. The interpretation is performed independently for each curve family and, at the end, a weighted average of the results is calculated.

2.6

Determination of the Weights for the Four Families of Theoretical Curves

The factors

R stheor / R m

and

h theor / d

are the selected parameters for the families of the

theoretical curves and they differ from the measured ones,

Rsmeas / Rm

and

h meas / d

.A

numerical measure of this difference for each family is defined as follows: wi

R stheor / Rm

1 /(1

where:

Rstheor

R smeas

R smeas / Rm

2

h theor / d

h meas / d

2

(Equation 4)

= the resistivity of an adjacent bed in the nomogram for a given model,

= the resistivity of an adjacent bed read from the measured resistivity curve.

Similar nomenclature is assumed for the thickness h. Weights are in the range [0-1]. If a weight is less then 0.25, the relevant family is not included in the interpretation. It is only possible to take a single curve family into the next stages.

2.7

Correction for Borehole and Shoulder Bed Effects

Corrections are made for each apparent resistivity in the selected bed on the basis of the curve recorded by each device. The outcome

Rt /Rm

R corr /Rm a

is the result of reading the module

of the theoretical two-layer curve in the family described by Rs /Rm and h/d closest

to the measured point. The value of

R corr /Rm a

derived in this way is the basis for the next steps

in processing.

2.8

Resistivity of the Virgin Zone

According to the approach proposed by Pierkov 9, the true resistivity of the virgin zone is determined on the basis of the apparent resistivity of the curve measured with the longest device,

Rt / Rm

R5corr / Rm

. In the interpretation procedure presented here, the true resistivity is the

weighted average of the values of

Rt / Rm

R5corr / Rm

taken from the four (or less) families of

curves included. Before determining true resistivity Rt, new weights have to be calculated:

Section 11.11 Advanced Interpretation : Eastern European Resistivity Corrections

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1466

N

Wi

wi /

wi i

(Equation 5)

where: N = the number of families of the theoretical curves fulfilling the previous criterion of

wi

0.25 N

Rt / Rm

. Resistivity of the virgin zone is then calculated according to the equation:

Wi [( Racorr (5) / Rm )] i

i

(Equation 6)

Double calculation of the weights (wi and W i ) follows naturally from their definitions. The sum of the weights at each level must be equal to unity. Calculation of the true resistivity of the virgin zone according to Equation 6 requires the determination of new weights W i . When there is only the resistivity curve recorded by the shorter LL(4) device,

R4corr / Rm

becomes

the basis for the determination of Rt.

2.9

Resistivity and Diameter of the Invaded Zone

The curves for the two-layer model are the basis for the determination of the diameter of the invaded zone. When five apparent resistivities, recorded by five devices with different radii of investigation and corrected for borehole and adjacent beds are available, the interpreter proceeds as follows, obtaining the following results: 2.9.1

Resistivity, Rx0, and diameter, Dx0, of the flushed zone, equal to

R corr a (1) / R m

and LL

(1) respectively; 2.9.2

If two short device curves give similar values of

Racorr / Rm

(within 20%) and the

third one gives a value that is distinctly different (the difference between the third and an average of the first two first higher than 20% of the average) the calculation proceeds as follows: 2.9.2.1

Determine the average of the resistivities of the two first devices

average1,

2.9.2.2

Determine the average of the resistivity of the third device and the average1 average2,

2.9.2.3

If (average2- average1)/ average1<35%, the third device is considered to still show the resistivity of the invaded zone, and Ri is calculated as follows:

Section 11.11 Advanced Interpretation : Eastern European Resistivity Corrections

1467

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Ri / Rm

1 2

Senergy

3

R corr a (i ) / R m i 2

, and the diameter of the invaded zone D is set to be equal

to LL(3) (in many cases 2.625 m), 2.9.2.4

If (average2- average1)/ average1>35%, the third device indicates a resistivity close to that of the virgin zone and Ri is calculated as follows:

Ri / Rm

R corr a ( 2) / R m

and the diameter of the invaded zone is set equal to LL(2) (in many cases 1.05 m), 2.9.3

If the first device resistivity differs by more then 20% from the resistivities of the second and third (either greater or smaller), the resistivity of the invaded zone is calculated as the average of the second and third device resistivity,

Ri / Rm

1 3 corr Ra ( i ) / Rm 2i 2

if the difference between them is not higher than 35%, in other cases the resistivity of the invaded zone is set equal to the resistivity of the second device,

Ri / Rm

Racorr ( 2 ) / Rm

and the diameter, D, is to the LL(2). 2.9.4

If

Racorr ( i ) / Rm

are similar for four devices, it means either; there is no invasion, or the

invasion is very deep. In this case Ri is calculated as an average of the four

Ri / Rm resistivities,

1 4

5

R corr a (i ) / R m i 2

and the diameter of invasion in the same

sense as previously described does not exist. In the authors' experience, however, a certain difference between resistivities Rx0, Ri and Rt can still exist despite previous considerations and the assumption of no invasion. If this is the case the interpreter should take into account following additional conditions:

Rt / Rm

Ri / Rm / ( Rt / Rm

Ri / Rm ) / 2

0.35

2.9.4.1

If

, D=Dx0=LL(1),

2.9.4.2

If not, D= LL(3).

2.10

If the shortest device (LL(1)) has not been run, resistivity Rx0, and the diameter Dx0, of the flushed zone are not determined. This case is similar to that discussed in point 3.5.4.1, only with D=LL(2).

2.11

If the second device (LL(2)) has not been run, the assumption for all the cases discussed above is that the resistivity of the invaded zone equals the resistivity

Section 11.11 Advanced Interpretation : Eastern European Resistivity Corrections

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

shown by the curve of the third device,

Ri / Rm

R corr a ( 3) / R m

1468

, and the diameter of

the invaded zone equals the length of this device, D=LL(3). 2.12

If the third device (LL(3)) has not been run, in all the cases discussed above the resistivity of the invaded zone equals the resistivity shown by the curve of the second device,

Ri / Rm

R corr a ( 2) / R m

, and the diameter of the invaded zone equals

the length of the second device, D=LL(2). In the case discussed in point 3.5.4.2 we have D=LL(4).

3. LATERAL AND NORMAL CURVES 3.1

Continuous Interpretation with a Combined Set of Lateral and Normal Logs

The method of resistivity interpretation with combined Lateral and Normal curves is different from that using only Lateral curves. There is no need to identify and pick beds and the interpretation is performed continuously, i.e. at each depth point. In the interpretation, the parameters obtained from four (or three) resistivity logs are used simultaneously. For each combination of apparent resistivities (Lateral and Normal logs) true resistivities for all zones (flushed, invaded and virgin) are calculated. The theoretical curves for two- and three-layer models of the formation are also obtained from Alpin's2 solutions for the Lateral devices:

R lateral /Rm a

f (L / d; R t / R m ; R i / R m ; D / d )

and for the Normal devices:

R anormal / R m

f (L / d; R t / R m ; R i / R m / D / d )

All assumptions made for this approach are also satisfied. Apparent resistivities are sampled at each depth from all curves in the combined Lateral-Normal set:

R a ( N1) , R a ( N 2 ) , R a ( L1) , R a ( L 2 )

.

They are corrected for the influence of the borehole (mud resistivity at formation temperature and borehole diameter) and then form the basis of Alpin's2 theoretical two-layer curves. Four independent, corrected resistivities are thus obtained: corr Racorr ( N 1) / R m , R a ( N 2 ) / R m

and

corr Racorr ( L1) / R m , R a ( L 2 ) / R m

.

As in the case of the Lateral curve interpretation and with the same procedures, the corrected resistivities are expressed as Normalized with the mud resistivity.

Section 11.11 Advanced Interpretation : Eastern European Resistivity Corrections

1469

3.2

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Resistivity and Diameter of the Flushed Zone

The assumption is made, that the short Normal device (length=LN1) delivers the resistivity of the flushed zone,

R x0

R corr a ( N1)

. According to the model of the Normal tool, the radius of

investigation of a Normal device is taken as being equal to the double of its length, for standard muds with resistivity 2-10 times greater than formation water resistivity (Chapellier4 1992). In this procedure it is assumed that Dx0 is a little less then 2LN1 and is taken to be 90% of the double length of the short Normal, 2LN(1).

3.3

Resistivity and Diameter of the Invaded Zone

The resistivity of the invaded zone, Ri, is calculated as the average of the resistivities of the two Normal devices:

Ri

1 2

2

R corr a ( Ni ) i 1

.

The diameter of the invaded zone, D, is obtained automatically from the average of the parameters in the families of curves selected for the computation of Fmin , as shown in Section 4.3 here below.

3.4

Resistivity of the Virgin Zone

The resistivity of the virgin zone is calculated on the basis of the resistivity ratios used to calculate the function F in Equation 7, below. The assumption here is that two short devices with small radius of investigation deliver the resistivity of the invaded zone (including the flushed zone), while two longer devices with greater radius of investigation deliver the resistivity of the virgin zone. This is shown schematically in Figure 6. On the background of the family of the theoretical two-layer curves, two lines have been drawn for LL1 and LL2 (Lateral) and for LN1 and L N2

(Normal) and they intersect all theoretical curves in the points with parameters

for all ratios Ri/Rm and D/d.

Section 11.11 Advanced Interpretation : Eastern European Resistivity Corrections

Rt /Rm

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

For each depth level the function F can now be calculated as follows: 3

F

{( X meas (i )

X theor(i ) ) 2

(Ymeas (i )

Ytheor(i ) ) 2 }

i 1

(Equation 7)

where:

X meas (1)

corr R corr a ( N 2) / R a ( L 2)

Ymeas (1)

corr R corr a ( N1) / R a ( L 2 )

X meas ( 2 )

corr R corr a ( L1) / R a ( L 2 )

Ymeas ( 2 )

corr R corr a ( N 2) / R a ( L 2)

X meas ( 3)

corr R corr a ( N 2 ) / R a ( L1)

Ymeas ( 3)

corr R corr a ( N1) / R a ( L1)

X meas ( 4 )

corr R corr a ( L1) / R a ( L 2 )

Ymeas ( 4 )

corr R corr a ( N 2) / R a ( L 2)

X theor(1)

corr R corr a ( N 2) / R a ( L 2)

Ytheor(1)

corr R corr a ( N1) / R a ( L 2 )

X theor( 2 )

corr R corr a ( L1) / R a ( L 2 )

Ytheor( 2 )

corr R corr a ( N 2) / R a ( L 2)

X theor( 3)

corr R corr a ( N 2 ) / R a ( L1)

Ytheor( 3)

corr R corr a ( N1) / R a ( L1)

and

Section 11.11 Advanced Interpretation : Eastern European Resistivity Corrections

1470

1471

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

X theor( 4 )

corr R corr a ( L1) / R a ( L 2 )

Ytheor( 4 )

Senergy corr R corr a ( N 2) / R a ( L 2)

Everywhere in Equation 7 the index meas(i) means the ratio calculated for the measured resistivities. Resistivity values used in the ratios with index theor(i) have been read from the theoretical curves. The complete set of four ratios is shown above, but in the calculation of function F only three of them are involved, as shown in Equation 7. The factors with index meas(4) and theor(4) are only used in the case when the short Normal device LN1 has not been run.

Ra / Rm

For each family of the theoretical curves

Ri / Rm

and D/d the individual values for

R corr a (i )

f ( L / d, R t / R m )

with given parameters

are taken on the vertical lines for L/d equal to LN1

/d, LN2/d for the Normal devices and on the vertical lines for LL1/d and LL2/d for the Lateral devices. Values of

Rt /Rm

are determined in most cases by suitable interpolation between

neighboring curves. In familiar fashion, the families of theoretical curves defined by the parameters

Ri / Rm

and D/d, for which function F has the minimum value Fmin has been

retained. They are the basis for the calculation of Rt and the final Rt value is calculated from the average of the three values obtained for the Lateral resistivities and for the longer Normal resistivity. In order to shorten the processing time of the interpretation, the given parameters Ri/Rm and D/d obtained from the resistivities of Normal devices have been used directly as keys for the selection of the nearest families of theoretical three-layer curves. Also, the F function is calculated for limited group of parameters and not for the entire possible set.

3.5

Absence of One Resistivity Curve

In the interpretation procedure there are provisions for such cases, when we have the minimum of three resistivity logs. In these cases the F function can still be calculated with the relevant ratios according to measured logs available. 3.5.1

When the second Normal device has not been run, only Rx0 is obtained and the

assumption is made that 3.5.2

Ri

R x0

R corr aN (1)

.

When the shortest Normal device has not been run, the resistivity of the flushed

zone is not determined. Ri is calculated only on the basis of

R corr a ( N 2)

.

Section 11.11 Advanced Interpretation : Eastern European Resistivity Corrections

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

3.6

1472

Additional Boundary Condition

When a measured point lies outside the space of the calculated theoretical curves, it is assumed that Rt/Rm =1000 if it is above or Rt/Rm=0.5 if it is below. In either case there is no differentiation between Dx0 and D.

4.

REFERENCES

Related Topics Eastern European Resistivity Corrections EERC Interface EERC Theory

Section 11.11 Advanced Interpretation : Eastern European Resistivity Corrections

1473

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

11.12 Formation Test Analysis Formation Test Analysis is a process of evaluation that takes place to determine the viability of a reservoir of oil, prior to the production stage, in particular the type of fluid present in a reservoir and the potential for production. When Formation Testing takes place, measurements are taken using wireline testing methods and then recorded in a Data Log file for interpretation. Specific pressure measurements are recorded using a pressure gauge lowered into the borehole using a wireline. A small amount of formation fluid is withdrawn from the reservoir, creating a Drawdown pressure measurement. Build Up measurements are then recorded over a period of time, until the pressure of the fluid in the pressure gauge reaches the pressure equal to that of the fluid in the reservoir, the formation pressure or Final Build Up measurement. Interactive Petrophysics using the Formation Test Analysis Module to record these pressure measurements Graphically, so that accurate analysis of the Formation Testing measurements can take place.

Drawdown Analysis The Drawdown Analysis Chart displays a Graphical representation of the Formation Testing Pressure measurements, Hydrostatic Pressure, Drawdown Pressure, Final Build Up Pressure for interpretation and analysis.

The Hydrostatic pressure is the measurement of pressure within the reservoir fluid prior to the Drawdown of reservoir fluid taking place. The Drawdown Pressure is the measurement of pressure within the withdrawn fluid over a period of time, as the withdrawal of fluid from the reservoir is taking place. The Build Up Pressure is the measurement of pressure within the withdrawn fluid taken over a period of time, until the point in time where the pressure of the withdrawn fluid is equal to that of the pressure of fluid in the reservoir. Additional known

Section 11.12 Advanced Interpretation : Formation Test Analysis

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1474

measurements can be added manually to the Drawdown Analysis in Interactive Petrophysics to calculate the Drawdown Permeability and the Drawdown Mobility.

Derivative Analysis A derivative plot is used when there is uncertainty in the detection of radial flow, a condition that may occur when the duration of the formation test has not elapsed over a sufficient period of time.

Build Up Analysis Once the primary measurements for the Drawdown Analysis have been recorded in the Formation Test Analysis Module of Interactive Petrophysics, the Build Up Analysis can then be completed. Analysis of the Build Up pressure measurements enables the determination of a reliable pressure gradient from the Formation Test data. There are three Build Up Analysis Plots used in the Formation Test Analysis Module.

Spherical Build Up Analysis Spherical flow pressure measurements can be acquired when the pre-dominant direction of flow in a reservoir is towards a point. Where there is Spherical flow in a reservoir the Vertical Permeability can be calculated.

Section 11.12 Advanced Interpretation : Formation Test Analysis

1475

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The Spherical Build Up Analysis calculates the Spherical Pressure Gradient and P* Radial. Additional known measurements can be added to the Spherical Build Up Analysis to calculate the Spherical Permeability and the Spherical Mobility.

Radial Build Up Analysis Radial Flow pressure measurements are taken at a late stage in the Formation Test and are indicated by a horizontal levelling in the pressure measurements taken. Where there is Radial flow in a reservoir the Horizontal Permeability can be calculated.

The Radial Build Up Analysis calculates the Radial Pressure Gradient and P* Radial. Additional known measurements can be added to the Radial Build Up Analysis to calculate the Radial

Section 11.12 Advanced Interpretation : Formation Test Analysis

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1476

Permeability and the Radial Mobility.

Related Topics Define the Formation Testing Parameters Create and Analyse a Formation Test Project Formation Testing Equations and Methodology

11.12.1 Define the Formation Testing Parameters The Formation Testing Project Parameters are defined using the Formation Testing Setup Dialog, where the Parameters are defined for each of the Formation Tests created and initialized for Analysis using the Formation Test Analysis Dialog. To Setup a Formation Test the following Parameters must be Selected: Define the Project Data: The Formation Testing Setup Dialog is initially displayed with the Data Tab Active. Each row contains the following information for each Formation Test that has been run using the Formation Test Analysis Dialog. Select the Required Wells: The Well Selection Tab enables the selection of the required well, for the loading of Formation Test Data. Once a well has been selected the Formation Tests available in the Selected Wells will be displayed in the Data Tab. Define the Well Data: The Well Data Tab enables the Data variables to be defined, for the loading of the Formation Test Data. Well Data Variables are selected from each Drop Down Menu. There are two Sub Tabs in the Well Data Tab, Time Based Data which enables the creation of Formation Tests from Time Based Data and Interpreted Depth Data which enables the creation of Formation Tests based upon Interpretation Data derived from the Formation Test Analysis Dialog. Define the Output Curves: The Output Curves displays the Parameters for the Output Curves derived from the Formation Test Analysis. This Tab displays the Parameter Name, the Base Curve Name, the Label and Units for each Output Curve. Define the Filters: The Filters Tab enables the application of Filters to each Formation Test. Define the Default Models: Default Models can be created and applied to the Formation Tests using the Default Models Tab. If Model Values are Changed in this Tab, the changes will not be applied to previously initialized tests. Define the Preferences: The Preferences Tab enables Formation Test specific Preferences to be defined; Project Preferences, Status Values, User Preferences, Axes Scales and Output Units.

Section 11.12 Advanced Interpretation : Formation Test Analysis

1477

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

To Display the Formation Testing Setup Dialog: 1. From the Advanced Interpretation Menu, Select Formation Testing to display the Formation Testing Setup Dialog.

2. The Formation Testing Setup Dialog is displayed with the Data Tab Active. As the Formation Testing Project Parameters are defined, these are then displayed in the Data Tab.

Formation Testing Setup Buttons This section describes the Buttons available in the Formation Testing Setup Dialog and their purpose. Regenerate Curves: Re-creates the Curves used in the Formation Testing Projects. Output Charts: Saves the Formation Testing Project Charts to a PDF File. Check for New Tests: Checks the Selected Wells for Newly Initialized Tests. Load Project: Loads a Previously Saved Formation Testing Project. Save Project: Saves the Current Formation Testing Project. Close: Closes the Formation Testing Setup Dialog. Help: Displays the Formation Testing Setup Dialog Help.

Related Topics

Section 11.12 Advanced Interpretation : Formation Test Analysis

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1478

Create and Analyse a Formation Test Project Formation Testing Equations and Methodology

11.12.1.1 Define the Project Data

The Formation Testing Setup Dialog is initially displayed with the Data Tab Active. Each row contains the following information for each Formation Test that has been run using the Formation Test Analysis Dialog.

View: Displays a View Button, which when clicked launches the Formation Test Analysis Dialog with the Selected Formation Test Displayed. To Print: Displays a Checkbox, which when selected Prints the Default Charts selected in the Preferences Tab. Crossplot Visibility: Displays a Checkbox, which when selected shows the selected well when the Formation Testing Crossplot is launched. Well: Displays the Well Number for each available Formation Test. DD#: Displays the Number of Available Drawdown Tests. Depth: Displays the Depth for each available Formation Test. TVDSS: Displays the TVDSS Value for each available Formation Test, this field can be filtered to display only X, Y, Z or Z2 Axis values. Final Build Up Pressure (psi): Displays the Final Buildup Pressure for each available Formation Test. Drawdown Mobility: Displays the Drawdown Mobility Value for each available Formation Test. Analysis Status: Displays the Analysis Status for each available Formation Test, Not Analyzed, Drawdown only, Drawdown and Build Up or Bad Test.

Section 11.12 Advanced Interpretation : Formation Test Analysis

1479

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Test Status: Displays the Test Status for each available Formation Test. This field is UserDefinable and Entries can be added or modified in the Preferences Tab.

Related Topics Select the Required Wells Define the Well Data Define the Output Curves Define the Filters Define the Default Models Define the Preferences Create Formation Testing Crossplot

11.12.1.2 Select the Required Wells

The Well Selection Tab enables the selection of the required well, for the loading of Formation Test Data. Once a well has been selected the Formation Tests available in the Selected Wells will be displayed in the Data Tab.

Related Topics Define the Project Data Define the Well Data Define the Output Curves Define the Filters Define the Default Models Define the Preferences Create Formation Testing Crossplot

Section 11.12 Advanced Interpretation : Formation Test Analysis

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1480

11.12.1.3 Define the Well Data

The Well Data Tab enables the Data variables to be defined, for the loading of the Formation Test Data. Well Data Variables are selected from each Drop Down Menu. There are two Sub Tabs in the Well Data Tab, Time Based Data which enables the creation of Formation Tests from Time Based Data and Interpreted Depth Data which enables the creation of Formation Tests based upon Interpretation Data derived from the Formation Test Analysis Dialog.

For Time Based Data the following fields should be defined. Well: Displays the Well Number for each available Formation Test. Tool: Use the Tool Drop Down Menu to Select the Tool used for the Formation Test. Model: Use the Model Drop Down Menu to select a Pre-Defined Model of Parameters to be used in the Formation Test. TVDSS: Select the required TVDSS Curve to be used in the Formation Test. Input Set: Select the required Input Curve Set that contains the Curve Data to be used in the Formation Test. Time: Select the required Time Curve to be used in the Formation Test. Pressure: Select the required Pressure Curve to be used in the Formation Test. Volume: Select the required Volume Curve to be used in the Formation Test Flowrate: Select the required Flowrate Curve to be used in the Formation Test. Porosity: Select the required Porosity Curve to be used in the Formation Test. Output Set: Select the required Output Curve Set that contains the Curve Data to be used in the Formation Test. For Interpreted Depth Data, the following fields are defined as per the Time Based Data. Well: Displays the Well Number for each available Formation Test. Tool: Use the Tool Drop Down Menu to Select the Tool used for the Formation Test. TVDSS: Select the required TVDSS Curve to be used in the Formation Test.

Section 11.12 Advanced Interpretation : Formation Test Analysis

1481

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Output Set: Select the required Output Curve Set that contains the Curve Data to be used in the Formation Test. User-Definable fields are then used to build the Formation Test Well Data Parameters for Interpreted Depth Data. These Parameters are derived from the Formation Test Analysis. Below is a list of the User-Definable Fields available in the Well Data, Interpreted Depth Tab. Hydrostatic Before, Hydrostatic After, Drawdown Start, Drawdown End, Final Build Up Pressure, Delta Time, Drawdown Pressure, Volume, Flowrate, Drawdown Permeability, Drawdown Mobility, P* Spherical, Spherical Permeability, Spherical Mobility, P* Radial, Radial Permeability, Radial Mobility, Comments, Crossplot Visibility and Crossplot Regression Flag.

Related Topics Define the Project Data Select the Required Wells Define the Output Curves Define the Filters Define the Default Models Define the Preferences Create Formation Testing Crossplot 11.12.1.4 Define the Output Curves

The Output Curves displays the Parameters for the Output Curves derived from the Formation Test Analysis. This Tab displays the Parameter Name, the Base Curve Name, the Label and Units for each Output Curve.

Section 11.12 Advanced Interpretation : Formation Test Analysis

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

Related Topics Define the Project Data Select the Required Wells Define the Well Data Define the Filters Define the Default Models Define the Preferences Create Formation Testing Crossplot 11.12.1.5 Define the Filters

The Filters Tab enables the application of Filters to each Formation Test. Select Filter: Select a Previously Created Filter from the Drop Down Menu.

Section 11.12 Advanced Interpretation : Formation Test Analysis

1482

1483

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Create New: Click the Create New Button to make the Filter Definition Fields Active. Name: Type the Name of the New Filter.

Discriminators Combine With: Select the Combination Method from the Drop Down Menu.

Use: Select the Use Checkbox to Include the Selected Discriminator in the Filter Value/Curve: Specify a Value or Curve to use in the Discriminator Function: Specify the required Function to use in the Discriminator, either Greater Than, Less Than, Equal To, Greater Than or Equal To or Less Than or Equal To.

Zones Zone Set: Specify the required Zone Set to use in the Filter. Select the required Zones within the Selected Zone Set.

Delete: Click Delete to Delete a Previously Saved Filter. Save: Click Save to Save the Newly Defined Filter.

Note: When Save has been Clicked, a Confirm Message will be displayed in Red.

Related Topics

Section 11.12 Advanced Interpretation : Formation Test Analysis

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1484

Define the Project Data Select the Required Wells Define the Well Data Define the Output Curves Define the Default Models Define the Preferences Create Formation Testing Crossplot 11.12.1.6 Define the Default Models

Default Models can be created and applied to the Formation Tests using the Default Models Tab. If Model Values are Changed in this Tab, the changes will not be applied to previously initialized tests.

Tool: Select the required Tool to be used in the Selected Model. Click the Save Tool Button to Save the Tool to the Model. Note: If the Tool for a Model is changed, the following dialog will be displayed requesting confirmation that the Tool is to be changed and that the previously saved values will now be changed. Model: Select the required Model for modification. Delete Model: Click the Delete Model Button to Delete the Model from the Formation Testing Setup Dialog. Label: Defines the Label for the Model Parameters. Value: Edit this field to change the Default Value of the Selected Field. Units: From the Drop Down Menu, Select the Default Units for the Selected Field.

Related Topics

Section 11.12 Advanced Interpretation : Formation Test Analysis

1485

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Define the Project Data Select the Required Wells Define the Well Data Define the Output Curves Define the Filters Define the Preferences Create Formation Testing Crossplot 11.12.1.7 Define the Preferences

The Preferences Tab enables Formation Test specific Preferences to be defined; Project Preferences, Status Values, User Preferences, Axes Scales and Output Units.

Project Preferences: Drawdown Options The Drawdown Options in the Project Preferences Tab define Parameters specific to the Drawdown Analysis in the Formation Test Analysis Workflow.

Multiple Drawdown Test as Single: Displays Multiple Drawdown Tests as one Single Drawdown Test in the Drawdown Analysis Tab. Flowrate Option for Permeability: Select either Average or Maximum. Volume Value Source: Select either Volume Curve, Flowrate Curve or Model Value. Flowrate Value Source: Select either Volume Curve or Flowrate Curve.

Project Preferences: Status Values The Status Values in the Preferences Tab of the Formation Testing Setup Dialog defines the Default User-Definable Status Values for the Formation Test Analysis Project. Test Status Values: These Values are User-Definable, and are displayed in the Drawdown Analysis Tab of the Formation Testing Analysis Dialog..

Section 11.12 Advanced Interpretation : Formation Test Analysis

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1486

User Preferences: Chart Options The Chart Options defines the User Preferences when displaying Formation Test Analysis Charts. Zoom after Drawdown Selection: Show Volume Curve: Show Rate Curve: Show Temperature Curve: Show Flowing Pressure Lines: Show Average Pressure Lines: Reverse Time Function Axes: Pick Mode: Defines the Default Pick Mode for the Drawdown Analysis, either Manual or Semi-Automatic. Split RFT Drawdown End/Start: Defines the Default for Splitting the Drawdown End/Start, either Ask, Always or Never.

User Preferences: Output Units The Output Units in the Preferences Tab of the Formation Testing Setup Dialog defines the Default Output Unit Types for the Formation Test Analysis Project.

Section 11.12 Advanced Interpretation : Formation Test Analysis

1487

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Pressure: Defines the Default Output Units for the Pressure Value; either psi, psia, bar, Pa, KPa or MPa. Volume: Defines the Default Output Units for the Volume Value, either L, mL, m 3 cm 3 bbl, gas (US), gal (imp), floz (US) or floz (imp). Flowrate: Defines the Default Output Units for the Flowrate Value, either cm 3/s, l/s, l/min, US G/min or m 3/s. Permeability: Defines the Default Output Units for the Permeability Value, either D, mD or m 2. Viscosity: Defines the Default Output Units for the Viscosity Value, either P, cP or Pa.S. Radius: Defines the Default Output Units for the Radius Value, either in or mm.

User Preferences: Print Options The Print Options in the Preferences Tab of the Formation Testing Setup Dialog defines the Default Print Options for the Formation Test Analysis Project. Print Drawdown Chart: Sets the Default Print Options to include the Drawdown Chart. Print Derivative Chart: Sets the Default Print Options to include the Derivative Chart. Print Spherical Chart: Sets the Default Print Options to include the Spherical Chart. Print Radial Chart: Sets the Default Print Options to include the Radial Chart.

Related Topics Define the Project Data Select the Required Wells Define the Well Data Define the Output Curves Define the Filters Define the Default Models Create Formation Testing Crossplot 11.12.1.8 Create Formation Testing Crossplot

Specific Formation Tests can be selected for inclusion in a Formation Test Crossplot using the Formation Testing Setup Dialog. To Create a Formation Test Crossplot: From the Formation Testing Setup Dialog, Select the required Formation Tests in the Crossplot Visibility Column.

Section 11.12 Advanced Interpretation : Formation Test Analysis

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1488

Click Create Crossplot to Launch a Formation Testing Crossplot for the Selected Formation Tests.

Related Topics Define the Project Data Select the Required Wells

Section 11.12 Advanced Interpretation : Formation Test Analysis

1489

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Define the Well Data Define the Output Curves Define the Filters Define the Default Models Define the Preferences

11.12.2 Create and Analyse a Formation Test Project This Chapter describes the workflow for Creating and Analyzing a Formation Test Analysis Project. Define the Formation Test Parameters: Prior to the Formation Test Data can be analyzed the Formation Test Project Parameters need to be defined. Save a Formation Test Analysis Project: A Formation Test Project can be saved using the Save Project feature in the Formation Testing Setup Dialog. The Formation Test Project is saved with the file extension *.fta. The default location for the Formation Testing Project to be saved is C:\users\username\appdata\local\IntPetro36\Formation Testing\. Load Formation Test Data into the Current Well: The 'Formation Tester LIS/DLIS Loader' module allows the user to load curves specific to Formation Testing services from LIS or DLIS files. The module allows only curves of interest (by way of a Tool Type mask) to be loaded into Tool Specific Sets to be used in the Formation Test Analysis module. Produce the Drawdown Analysis: Once the Formation Test Parameters have been defined, the Drawdown Analysis can be produced. The Drawdown Analysis Chart displays a Graphical representation of the Formation Testing Pressure measurements, Hydrostatic Pressure, Drawdown Pressure, Final Build Up Pressure for interpretation and analysis. Produce the Derivative Analysis: Once the Drawdown Analysis has been completed, the Derivative Build Up Analysis Chart will be displayed in the Derivative Plot Tab. Produce the Spherical Analysis: Once the Drawdown Analysis has been completed, the Spherical Build Up Analysis Chart will be displayed in the Spherical Plot Tab. Produce the Radial Analysis: Once the Drawdown Analysis has been completed, the Radial Build Up Analysis Chart will be displayed in the Radial Plot Tab.

Related Topics Define the Formation Testing Parameters Formation Testing Equations and Methodology

Section 11.12 Advanced Interpretation : Formation Test Analysis

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1490

11.12.2.1 Load Formation Test Data into the Current Well

The 'Formation Tester LIS/DLIS Loader' module allows the user to load curves specific to Formation Testing services from LIS or DLIS files. The module allows only curves of interest (by way of a Tool Type mask) to be loaded into Tool Specific Sets to be used in the Formation Test Analysis module. 1. From the Input/Output Menu, Select Load Data then Formation Tester LIS/DLIS Load to display the Select FT Files to Load dialog.

2. Browse to locate the required Formation Test Data File and Click Open to return to the Formation Tester DLIS/LIS Loader Dialog.

Section 11.12 Advanced Interpretation : Formation Test Analysis

1491

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

3. Select the required Tool Type from the Select Tool Type Drop Down Menu to automatically populate the Curves to Load and the Set to Load the Curves into.

Section 11.12 Advanced Interpretation : Formation Test Analysis

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1492

Note: The Curves to Load variables can be edited manually. The Curves to Load Table displays the available Curves for the selected Tool to be loaded into the Formation Testing Module. Note: A different Set to Load the Curves into can be selected/created by clicking the Edit Sets Button. Note: The Select Files Button displays the Select FT Files to Load dialog to change the Data File. Note: The Set Well Button enables a different well to be selected for the Formation Test Data to be loaded into. 4. Click the Load Button to Load the Formation Test Data into the Current Well. Note: The Loaded Curve Set and Curves will be displayed in the Database Browser.

Section 11.12 Advanced Interpretation : Formation Test Analysis

1493

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Related Topics Create and Analyse a Formation Test Project Define the Formation Test Parameters Save a Formation Test Analysis Project Produce the Drawdown Analysis Produce the Derivative Analysis Produce the Spherical Analysis Produce the Radial Analysis 11.12.2.2 Define the Formation Test Parameters

Prior to the Formation Test Data can be analyzed the Formation Test Project Parameters need to be defined. 1. From the Interpretation Menu, Select Formation Test Setup to display the Formation Testing Setup Dialog.

Note: The Formation Testing Setup Dialog will display the Data Tab with no wells selected. 2. Click the Well Selection Tab to Select the required Well, Click the Move Button to Select the required well.

Section 11.12 Advanced Interpretation : Formation Test Analysis

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

3. Click the Well Data Tab to define the Well Data Parameters for loading.

4. The Data Tab will Display the Formation Tests for the Selected Well Data.

5. From the Data Tab click Show to display the Formation Test Analysis Dialog for the Selected Well.

Section 11.12 Advanced Interpretation : Formation Test Analysis

1494

1495

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

6. Produce the Drawdown Analysis.

Related Topics Create and Analyse a Formation Test Project Save a Formation Test Analysis Project Load Formation Test Data into the Current Well Produce the Drawdown Analysis Produce the Derivative Analysis Produce the Spherical Analysis Produce the Radial Analysis 11.12.2.3 Save a Formation Test Analysis Project

A Formation Test Project can be saved using the Save Project feature in the Formation Testing Setup Dialog. The Formation Test Project is saved with the file extension *.fta. The default location for the Formation Testing Project to be saved is C: \users\username\Appdata\local\IntPetro36\Formation Testing\. 1. From the Advanced Interpretation Menu, Select Formation Testing to Display the Formation Testing Setup Dialog. 2. From the Formation Testing Setup Dialog, Type the Name of the Formation Testing Project and Click Save Project to display the Save Formation Testing Analysis Well dialog.

Section 11.12 Advanced Interpretation : Formation Test Analysis

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1496

3. Type the Formation Testing Project File Name and Click Save to Save the Formation Testing Project (*.fta) file.

Related Topics Create and Analyse a Formation Test Project Define the Formation Test Parameters Load Formation Test Data into the Current Well Produce the Drawdown Analysis Produce the Derivative Analysis Produce the Spherical Analysis Produce the Radial Analysis 11.12.2.4 Produce the Drawdown Analysis

Once the Formation Test Parameters have been defined, the Drawdown Analysis can be produced. The Drawdown Analysis Chart displays a Graphical representation of the Formation Testing Pressure measurements, Hydrostatic Pressure, Drawdown Pressure, Final Build Up Pressure for interpretation and analysis. The Project Data Section displays Formation Test Analysis Project Data along with the Hydrostatic Start and End Values, when they have been defined using the Picks Feature in the Drawdown Analysis Chart.

Produce the Drawdown Analysis in the Formation Test Analysis Dialog

Section 11.12 Advanced Interpretation : Formation Test Analysis

1497

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

1. Set the Formation Test Parameters and Display the Formation Test Analysis Dialog. 2. In the Test Data Section, Specify a number for the current Formation Test Analysis. 3. If required Click and Drag the Hydrostatic Start and Hydrostatic End Picks the the Drawdown Analysis Chart.

4. Click and Drag the Drawdown Start Pick from the Toolbar to the Drawdown Start position on the Drawdown Analysis Chart.

Note: The Drawdown Start variable will appear in the Drawdown Analysis Calculation Pane.

Section 11.12 Advanced Interpretation : Formation Test Analysis

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1498

5. Click and Drag the Drawdown End Pick from the Toolbar to the Drawdown End position on the Drawdown Analysis Chart.

Note: When the Drawdown Start and the Drawdown End Picks are selected in the Drawdown Analysis Chart, the Drawdown Time and the Flowing Pressure are automatically populated in the Drawdown Analysis Pane and the Data Pane. Flowing pressure can be adjusted by clicking on the dashed line and moving the line to the correct pressure. This can be useful if there are any pressure spikes on the data.

6. Click and Drag the Final Build Up Pick from the Toolbar to the Final Build Up position on the Drawdown Analysis Chart.

Section 11.12 Advanced Interpretation : Formation Test Analysis

1499

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Note: The Final Build Up Pressure and the Drawdown Pressure are automatically populated in the Drawdown Analysis Pane and the Data Pane. 7. The Drawdown Permeability and Drawdown Mobility are automatically calculated once all the Picks have been selected.

8. The Drawdown Analysis Calculations are updated automatically in both the Drawdown Analysis Pane and the Drawdown Analysis Table.

Section 11.12 Advanced Interpretation : Formation Test Analysis

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1500

Related Topics Create and Analyse a Formation Test Project Define the Formation Test Parameters Save a Formation Test Analysis Project Load Formation Test Data into the Current Well Produce the Derivative Analysis Produce the Spherical Analysis Produce the Radial Analysis 11.12.2.5 Produce the Derivative Analysis

Once the Drawdown Analysis has been completed, the Derivative Plot of the buildup data will be displayed in the Derivative Plot Tab. A derivative plot can be useful to determine the flow regime exhibited in the buildup data and hence the type of buildup analysis which is most appropriate (spherical flow or radial flow). Classic well test theory suggests that the derivative indicates spherical flow when the gradient of the derivative is -1/2 and radial flow when the gradient of the derivative is zero. A user defined line is also supplied that will return its gradient value to aid the user in other techniques. Note: This technique is borrowed from well test analysis and may not be appropriate due to the small volumes of fluid involved with a formation tester. 1. Click the Derivative Plot Tab to display the Derivative Build Up Analysis.

Section 11.12 Advanced Interpretation : Formation Test Analysis

1501

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Note: due to the nature of the derivative plot and the buildup data used as input to it, gauge noise in late time causes large fluctuations in the derivative. Filters have been supplied with the Derivative plot to filter the input data and / or the the derivative. 2. Click the Filter Raw Build-up Data Button to display the Filter Raw Build-up Data Dialog.

Type the Required Number of Levels to Filter the Raw Build-up Data by and Click Apply to Apply the Filter to the Derivative Plot.

Section 11.12 Advanced Interpretation : Formation Test Analysis

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1502

3. Click the Filter Raw Derivative Data to display the Filter Raw Derivative Data Dialog.

Type the Required Number of Levels to Filter the Raw Derivative Data by and Click Apply to Apply the Filter to the Derivative Plot.

Section 11.12 Advanced Interpretation : Formation Test Analysis

1503

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Add a Gradient Line or a User Line to the Derivative Plot Either a Zero Gradient Line or a Negative Half Gradient Line can be added to the Derivative Plot using the Gradient Line Buttons in the Derivative Plot Pane. The following example shows a Zero Gradient Line in the Derivative Plot.

The next example shows a Negative Half Gradient Line.

Section 11.12 Advanced Interpretation : Formation Test Analysis

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1504

A User Line can also be added to the Derivative Plot by Clicking the Add User Line to the Chart Button.

Related Topics Create and Analyse a Formation Test Project Define the Formation Test Parameters Save a Formation Test Analysis Project Load Formation Test Data into the Current Well Produce the Drawdown Analysis

Section 11.12 Advanced Interpretation : Formation Test Analysis

1505

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Produce the Spherical Analysis Produce the Radial Analysis 11.12.2.6 Produce the Spherical Analysis

Once the Drawdown Analysis has been completed, the Spherical Build Up Analysis Chart will be displayed in the Spherical Plot Tab. The Spherical Buildup plot uses pressure data since the stop of the drawdown (the buildup) plotted against the Spherical Time Function. Once a spherical flow regime is achieved in late time the plot exhibits a constant gradient that can be extrapolated to the y-axis (infinite time) where a theoretical extrapolated formation pressure is read off (P*). The gradient can be used to determine mobility (and permeability if the fluid viscosity is known). 1. Click the Spherical Plot Tab to display the Spherical Build Up Analysis.

2. Click the Select Points for Regression Button and Click the Required Points in the Spherical Build Up Analysis Chart to define the Spherical Build Up Gradient and P* Spherical.

Section 11.12 Advanced Interpretation : Formation Test Analysis

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1506

3. Right Click the Spherical Build Up Analysis to automatically draw the Spherical Build Up Gradient on the Spherical Build Up Analysis Chart and to automatically add the values for the Spherical Build Up Gradient and P* Spherical to the Data Table and the Spherical Build Up Analysis Pane.

4. Manually enter the values for Viscosity, Compressibility and Porosity to automatically update the Spherical Permeability and the Spherical Mobility values in the Data Table and the Spherical Build Up Analysis Pane.

Section 11.12 Advanced Interpretation : Formation Test Analysis

1507

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Related Topics Create and Analyse a Formation Test Project Define the Formation Test Parameters Save a Formation Test Analysis Project Load Formation Test Data into the Current Well Produce the Drawdown Analysis Produce the Derivative Analysis Produce the Radial Analysis 11.12.2.7 Produce the Radial Analysis

Once the Drawdown Analysis has been completed, the Radial Build Up Analysis Chart will be displayed in the Radial Plot Tab. The Radial Buildup plot uses pressure data since the stop of the drawdown (the buildup) plotted against the Radial Time Function. Once a radial flow regime is achieved in late time the plot exhibits a constant gradient that can be extrapolated to the y-axis (infinite time) where a theoretical extrapolated formation pressure is read off (P*). The gradient can be used to determine mobility (and permeability if the fluid viscosity is known). 1. Click the Radial Plot Tab to display the Radial Build Up Analysis.

Section 11.12 Advanced Interpretation : Formation Test Analysis

Senergy

Advanced Interpretation

1508

2. Click the Select Points for Regression Button and Click the Required Points in the Radial Build Up Analysis Chart to define the Radial Build Up Gradient and P* Radial.

3. Right Click the Radial Build Up Analysis to automatically draw the Radial Build Up Gradient on the Radial Build Up Analysis Chart and to automatically add the values for the Radial Build Up Gradient and P* Radial to the Data Table and the Radial Build Up Analysis Pane.

Section 11.12 Advanced Interpretation : Formation Test Analysis

1509

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

4. Manually enter the values for Viscosity and Thickness to automatically update the Radial Permeability and the Radial Mobility values in the Data Table and the Radial Build Up Analysis Pane.

Related Topics Create and Analyse a Formation Test Project Define the Formation Test Parameters Save a Formation Test Analysis Project Load Formation Test Data into the Current Well Produce the Drawdown Analysis Produce the Derivative Analysis Produce the Spherical Analysis

11.12.3 Formation Testing Equations and Methodology The single drawdown and buildup equations (listed below) can be used for both single and multiple drawdown types of Formation Tester tools on the market. The only exception is when Schlumberger's RFT (Repeat Formation Tester) data is available. In this case the RFT dual-rate

Section 11.12 Advanced Interpretation : Formation Test Analysis

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1510

equations are listed.

1. Equations Used For Drawdown Analysis Drawdown Analysis uses the following equation (SI Units):

Drawdown Analysis Equation There are 2 methods available for calculating 'Effective Probe Radius', rpe , from Muskat , from Carlson and Jaeger The 'Drawdown Analysis Equation' can be re-written in terms of field units (and mobility) as,

Nomenclature: rs

= snorkel radius (inches)

∆Pdd = Drawdown Pressure (psi) V

= Volume of pre-test chamber (cc)

T

= Pre-test drawdown time (sec)

Q

= Flow rate of pretest (V/T, cc/sec)

C

= Flow coefficient (1.0 to 1.5 dimensionless)

2. Equations Used For Spherical Buildup Analysis Analysis is based on spherical flow in an infinite acting homogeneous medium from the expression:

Spherical Flow Equation where, is the 'Single Rate Spherical Time Function' and is used for all Formation Testing tools except for RFT, and,

is the '2-Rate Spherical Time Function' and is only used for spherical analysis of RFT data. A plot of P versus 'Spherical Time Function' yields a straight line once spherical flow is achieved

Section 11.12 Advanced Interpretation : Formation Test Analysis

1511

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

and the effect of wellbore (or system) storage is minimal. 'Spherical Permeability' is calculated from the gradient of this straight line from:

which rearranged gives,

Spherical Permeability Equation Finally the extrapolated pressure, P*, is given by the intercept of this gradient line and the Pressure axis. Nomenclature and units used: pi

= initial formation pressure, psi

ps

= probe pressure (spherical buildup), psi

q1

= flowrate during the first sampling period, cc/sec

q2

= flowrate during the second sampling period, cc/sec

µ

= viscosity of fluid in uncontaminated formation, cp

Φ

= porosity of formation, fraction

ct

= total compressibility of fluid in uncontaminated formation, psi-1

ks

= isotropic spherical build-up permeability, md

T1

= sampling time at rate q1, seconds or minutes

T2

= sampling time at rate q2, seconds or minutes

∆t

= elapsed time after shut-in, seconds or minutes

3. Equations Used For Radial Buildup Analysis Used to calculate a P* at time function = 0 by using a best fit line through the radial part of the plot (if it exists), extrapolated to the pressure axis. Can also be used to calculate a permeability, however viscosity, µ, and bed thickness, h, is required. (h can be estimated from open hole logs). Generally flowrate, q, is average rate from drawdown. Analysis is based on radial flow in an infinite acting homogeneous medium from the expression:

Radial Flow Equation where,

is the 'Single Rate Radial Time Function' and is used for all Formation Testing tools except for RFT, and,

Section 11.12 Advanced Interpretation : Formation Test Analysis

Advanced Interpretation

Senergy

1512

is the '2-Rate Radial Time Function' and is only used for radial analysis of RFT data. A plot of P versus 'Radial Time Function' yields a straight line once radial flow is achieved and the effect of wellbore (or system) storage is minimal. 'Radial Permeability' is calculated from the gradient of this straight line using the equation:

Radial Permeability Equation Finally the extrapolated pressure, P*, is given by the intercept of this gradient line and the Pressure axis. Nomenclature and units used: pi

= initial formation pressure, psi

pc

= probe pressure (radial buildup), psi

q1

= flowrate during the first sampling period, cc/sec

q2

= flowrate during the second sampling period, cc/sec

µ

= viscosity of fluid in uncontaminated formation, cp

Φ

= porosity of formation, fraction

ct

= total compressibility of fluid in uncontaminated formation, psi-1

kr

= isotropic radial build-up permeability, md

h

= thickness of bed, ft

T1

= sampling time at rate q1, seconds or minutes

T2

= sampling time at rate q2, seconds or minutes

∆t

= elapsed time after shut-in, seconds or minutes

4. Equations used For Derivative Plot The Derivative plot is plotted on a Log-Log scale and plots 2 sets of data which are calculated based on the buildup starting at Time=0 and the corresponding flowing pressure. The first set of data is 'Delta-P' which is t he difference between the buildup pressure (at Time>0) and the flowing pressure (at Time=0), ∆P=P(t)-Pf lowing The second set of data is the 'Derivative' itself,

Derivative t.

d ( P) dt

Section 11.12 Advanced Interpretation : Formation Test Analysis

1513

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Related Topics Define the Formation Testing Parameters Create and Analyse a Formation Test Project

Section 11.12 Advanced Interpretation : Formation Test Analysis

Senergy

Section

12 Working with Multiple Wells

1515

12

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Working with Multiple Wells

To handle large multi-well projects within IP a number of modules have been developed to make the task easier. These modules can be accessed from this menu or from some of the other main menu items as shown below.

Manage Multi-Well Header Info.. This module can also be accessed from within the Well Multi-Well Options menu. Manage Multi-Well Curve Sets. This module can also be accessed from within the Well Multi-Well Options menu. Manage Multi-Well Curve Headers. This module can also be accessed from within the Well Multi-Well Options menu. Manage Multi-Well Zones/Tops. This module can also be accessed from within the Well Multi-Well Options menu. Multi-well Parameter Distribution. Multi-Well Batch Operation. Multi-Well Change Parameters. Multi-Well Curve Statistics. This module can also be accessed from within the View menu. Multi-Well Correlation Viewer. This module can also be accessed from within the View menu. Multi-well Cutoff and Summation. This module can also be accessed from within the Interpretation menu.

Related Topics Multi-Well Parameter Distribution Multi-Well Batch Operation

Section 12.

Working with Multiple Wells :

Working with Multiple Wells

Senergy

Multi-Well Change Parameters Multi-Well Curve Statistics

Section 12.

Working with Multiple Wells :

1516

1517

12.1

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Working with Curves in Multiple Wells

The Multi-well Options menu item was introduced in Version 3.3. to un-clutter the Well dropdown menu. All the multi-well Well Header management, Curve Header management, Curve Set management and editing of multi-well Zone/Tops Sets tools can be launched from both the Well Menu and the Multi-Well Menu.

Related Topics Manage Multi-Well Well Header Info. Manage Multi-Well Curve Sets Manage Multi-Well Curve Headers Multiple Well Zones/Top Sets Multi-Well Curve Statistics

12.1.1 Manage Multi-Well Well Header Info. The Manage Multi-Well Well Header Info. module provides the user with an editing interface where cultural well data entries can be edited and checked for consistency. For example, one could have a database containing 20 wells drilled from the same platform / drilling rig and you might like to make all the Rig Name or Operating Company names consistent. This interface allows the user to make multi-well edits simultaneously which will be saved to the IP database

Section 12.1 Working with Multiple Wells : Working with Curves in Multiple Wells

Working with Multiple Wells

Senergy

1518

when Save all Wells to Database is selected from the File menu. The module is launched from the Multi-Well Options sub-menu, located under the main Well menu. Selecting this module launches a Select Wells dialog. The user can create a well list using the wells loaded in memory or retrieve a saved well list. Once the wells have been selected the Manage Multi-Well Header Info. window is initialized. The editing operations are all performed within this single grid type interface, illustrated below:

The module is based around a spreadsheet style interface which lists, in columns, the Well Attributes loaded for all selected, in-memory wells. Click the Change Wells Button to Display the Select Wells Dialog and Edit the Loaded Wells.

Section 12.1 Working with Multiple Wells : Working with Curves in Multiple Wells

1519

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Each well occupies one row in the table. The user navigates through the Well Attributes by scrolling left-to-right across the screen. Individual well entries can be edited for any attribute, or global changes can be applied to multiple wells in the well list. To change a single well attribute in a single well : Type a new value or select an option from a drop-down menu (where available) into the single cell. Click Apply to make the change and save the change into the well.

To change a single well attribute in multiple wells : 1. Tick the Select column for all the rows (wells) you wish to edit. Then either: 2. Select an existing entry value or text string for an attribute you wish to make consistent, by clicking in the cell containing that value. 3. Then click the Column Same button. All entries in all selected wells will update to the chosen value, or 4. In a column that is entirely blank, type in a value in a single cell, then click the Column Same

Section 12.1 Working with Multiple Wells : Working with Curves in Multiple Wells

Working with Multiple Wells

Senergy

1520

button. All entries in all selected wells will update to the new value.

Display Well Location as - gives the user the choice of displaying a Wells surface coordinates as UTMs or as Latitude / Longitude.

The Output button allows the user to create a text file (WellHeaders.Txt) of the Multi-Well header Info. listing or to output the listing to the clipboard where it can then be pasted into an ExcelTM spreadsheet document.

Related Topics

Section 12.1 Working with Multiple Wells : Working with Curves in Multiple Wells

1521

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Manage Multi-Well Well Header Info. Manage Multi-Well Curve Sets Manage Multi-Well Curve Headers Multiple Well Zones/Top Sets Multi-Well Curve Statistics

12.1.2 Manage Multi-Well Curve Sets The Manage Multi-Well Curve Sets module allows the user to edit Curve Set names within a multi-well IP project. This functionality could be used in numerous ways. For example: To standardize Set names within an IP project. To check and correct for inconsistencies in Set naming conventions across multiple wells in an IP project. To tidy up a database, by removing any Sets which do not contain any curves. To create well lists which the user knows contain certain Sets. These well lists are then used in other IP modules. Selecting the module launches a Select Wells dialog. Once the wells have been selected the Manage Multi-Well Curve Sets window is initialized. The editing operations are all performed within this single grid type interface, illustrated below:

The window comprises a Set Filter control panel in the top left hand corner of the window, the Operations buttons in the top right hand corner and a grid display panel. The grid panel is

Section 12.1 Working with Multiple Wells : Working with Curves in Multiple Wells

Working with Multiple Wells

Senergy

1522

initially populated with all the curve Sets in all the selected wells. The data is arranged in the grid with each row showing a Well Name and a Set Name. The columns are, from left to right, Well Name, Short Set Name, New Set Name, Long Set Name, Curve Count (the number of curves each Set contains) and Selected and Delete Columns.

Set Filter Panel In the Set Filter panel, the user should type in a text string into either the Short Set Name or Long Set Name text box. The star symbol,*, wildcard can be used as a quick way to filter for Sets with similar names. The wildcard can be used in the following ways: text * - find any Set names starting with the characters text. * text - find any Set names ending with the characters text. * text * - find any Set names which contain the characters text within them. NOTE: the following notation is not valid: *text*text* Using both Short and Long Set names in the filter allows the user a further level of filtering capability. Clicking the Apply Filter button applies the user-defined filter to the current well selection. The editing grid is populated with curve Set names meeting the users filter criteria. Multiple filter operations can be performed by changing the filter text string and clicking Apply Filter. The user has the ability to either: Add to List - Appends multiple filter results rows to the grid display. Select the Add to List radio button before clicking Apply Filter. Replace List - Clears the existing filter results and only displays the new results. Select the Replace List radio button before clicking Apply Filter. The grid refreshes with wells and Curve Sets that meet the filter criteria. The rows can be sorted alphabetically, either by selecting a category in the Sort Order drop-down box, or by clicking in the title cell of a column in the grid. This has the same effect as sorting in ascending / descending alphabetic order, depending on the column the user clicks on. The Reverse Sort check box performs the same function.

The Operations Buttons: Clear Filter - clears all entries from the grid display. Apply Filter - after typing in a filter text string in the Short Name or Long Name box clicking the Apply Filter performs the operation. Select All Sets - this button sets a flag in all rows in the grid display in the Selected column. The button toggles between Select all Sets and Un-select all Sets - allowing the user to quickly select/un-select multiple rows in the grid.

Section 12.1 Working with Multiple Wells : Working with Curves in Multiple Wells

1523

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Select Empty Sets - sets a delete flag in the Delete Column in grid rows where Curve Count is 0. The user can scroll down the grid and uncheck any rows that they do not want to delete. Click the Apply button to perform the delete operation. Change Wells - launches the Select Well dialog, allowing the user to change the wells being used in the filter process. Column Same - this button is only active when the mouse cursor is clicked in a cell in either the New Set Name or Long Set Name columns. The button allows the user to paste a selected Curve Set name into all Well rows in the grid display. Make Well List - this creates a well list of the wells selected using the Set filters. This list can then be used to load wells which the user knows contain certain Sets into other IP modules.

Renaming Multiple Curve Sets Multiple Curve Sets can be renamed to a consistent Short Set Name / Long Set Name by filtering on a character string, selecting a name to call all rows in the grid and then clicking the Column Same operation button. This works in the following way: 1. Apply the required filter to the well selection. 2. Click the Select All Sets button. A tick will appear in each Selected row. Un-check the Selected column for any rows containing Sets you do not wish to change. 3. Click in the grid cell of the New Set Name you wish to use for all selected wells. Either use an existing Set Name or type in a character string (max. 4 characters and must not start with a number). 4. Click the Column Same button. 5. To change the Long Set Name - click in the Long Set Name cell you wish to copy to other wells, or type in a new Long Set Name in a cell. 6. Click the Column Same button.

Section 12.1 Working with Multiple Wells : Working with Curves in Multiple Wells

Working with Multiple Wells

Senergy

1524

The selected rows will update to the user-selected New Set Name. Clicking the Apply button commits any changes the user has made to the IP in-memory database wells. Trying to rename sets within the same well to the same name will cause warning messages to be displayed as IP will attempt to merge the contents of the sets into the one newly named set. This is not recommended.

Deleting Empty Curve Sets Empty Curve Sets (Curve Count = 0) can be deleted from the IP project by : Clicking the Select Empty Sets button to flag all empty curve Sets for deletion. (a tick appears in the Delete column of the selected Sets). Click the Apply button to perform the delete operation.

Related Topics Manage Multi-Well Well Header Info. Manage Multi-Well Curve Sets Manage Multi-Well Curve Headers Multiple Well Zones/Top Sets Multi-Well Curve Statistics

Section 12.1 Working with Multiple Wells : Working with Curves in Multiple Wells

1525

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

12.1.3 Manage Multi-Well Curve Headers The Manage Multi-Well Curve Headers functionality allows the user to select and edit curve names and curve display parameters for multiple wells in an IP database. The module is able to filter and perform edits to curve display parameters for up to 1024 curves at one time, in the selected database. It also allows the user to delete multiple curves from multiple wells using curve filtering criteria. Selecting the module launches a Select Wells dialog. Once the well selection is confirmed by clicking the OK button the editing window is initialised. The Manage Multi-Well Curve Headers editing window contains a number of panels. The upper panel is used to set up and execute search criteria to filter to desired groups and types of curves and to select the type of edit that will be performed on the curves. The lower panel contains an interactive grid organised into four tabs General, Descriptions, Statistics and History, as per the single well Manage Curve Headers option, to show curve display parameters.

The user can apply a number of filters to select the curves to be edited or deleted. The Curve Type filter allows a generic sorting of curves in the selected wells. For example, filter for all curves of type Density or type Neutron. The Curve Name box can be filled in by typing in a known curve name, or by typing in a text character or text string plus wild character *. For example, typing in GR selects all curves named GR while entering G* will select all curves beginning with the letter G. The filter is not case sensitive. The Set Name box allows the user to filter for a particular Set Name across a multi well data set. The box can be filled in by typing in a known Set name, or by typing in a text character or text string plus wild character * , which will look for all matching Set name text strings.

Section 12.1 Working with Multiple Wells : Working with Curves in Multiple Wells

Working with Multiple Wells

Senergy

1526

The Update Module filter offers a further level of curve discrimination, for example to view Gamma ray curves that have been modified by the Curve Splice module. The Update Date From and To filters allow the user to select curves loaded or updated within a particular time window. This is over-ridden by checking the Any Date check box (default). Final Curves only selects only those curves that have been been checked as Final in each respective, single well, Manage Curve Headers module. The Curve Sort Order drop-down list displays the criterion on which the filtered curve names will be displayed. The filter criteria are applied by selecting Go. The grid will be populated with the wells and curves that meet the filter criteria.

The curves selected by the search / filter criteria can be edited collectively, using the operator buttons in the top right hand corner of the editing window. The Delete All button will add a tick to all the rows in the Delete Column in the table. Click on Apply to execute the curve deletions. The Lock All button will add a tick to all the rows in the Lock column in the table. The Lock function prevents the user from inadvertently changing curve display attributes. Click on Apply to lock all selected curve entries.

Section 12.1 Working with Multiple Wells : Working with Curves in Multiple Wells

1527

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The Row all Same button permits the user to globally assign curve display parameters from one row in the grid to all other rows in the grid. This would be used, for example, to standardize curve type, curve line colour and right and left scales for all instances of a particular curve in the database. This option does not change curve names in the grid. The user clicks in one of the three left hand columns of the row which has the desired display parameters, click the Row All Same button and all the display parameters in the rest of the grid change to those of the selected row. Click on Apply to commit the changes to the database.

The Column Same button allows the user to globally change individual curve names or curve display parameters for all curves meeting the filter criteria. Click in the cell which contains the desired curve name or parameter. Select Column Same button and all selected cells in that column of the grid will change to the selected cell value. Click Apply to save the changes to the database.

Section 12.1 Working with Multiple Wells : Working with Curves in Multiple Wells

Working with Multiple Wells

Senergy

1528

Combining and Clearing Filter Results The user has the option to combine a number of searches and display the results in the same grid using the Add to List and Replace List radio buttons. After displaying the first set of search results and then applying a second set of filter criteria with Add to List selected, will concatenate the results of the two searches in the grid. If you wish to select a new set of curves to edit and you wish to see only those new curves, select the Replace List radio button to clear the grid before clicking the Go button. The Count of Wells meeting filter criteria message at the bottom left hand corner of the interface lets the user see how many wells meet the search criteria for a particular curve or curves. The Change Wells button allows the user to re-select the wells selected for use in the editing operation. The Clear Filters button allows the user to completely clear the curve display grid at any point and start again. Make Well List button creates a well list. This well list file (Well List.wst) can then be used in another module to load wells that the user knows contain a certain curve. Print button can output a listing to a printer, file or to the clipboard. The printer listing is limited and does not contain curve statistics. This is due to the limited width of hardcopy output. This function will allow the user to output all or selected curves in a project.

Search for a Specific Curve Type The Multi Well Curve Headers Dialog can be used to Filter Specific Curve Types for the Selected

Section 12.1 Working with Multiple Wells : Working with Curves in Multiple Wells

1529

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Wells. In the Filter Pane, Select the required Filter Parameters and Click Go to Display the Filter Results in the Lower Pane. NOTE: in the example below the Filter is for the GR Curve.

Related Topics Manage Multi-Well Well Header Info. Manage Multi-Well Curve Sets Manage Multi-Well Curve Headers Multiple Well Zones/Top Sets Multi-Well Curve Statistics

12.1.4 Multiple Well Zones/Top Sets If the Multi Well check-box, in the top right-hand corner of the Zone Sets window, is checked, the Zone Sets window will display all available Zone Sets for all in-memory wells. All the editing functions that can be performed on a single well basis can now be performed on the Zone Sets for all wells currently loaded into memory apart from Edit. For example, if you want to create the same Tops Set for all wells, click the New button and a multi-well Tops Set will be created for each well loaded in memory. The Wells column shows the number of wells, currently loaded in memory, that contain a particular Zone Set.

Section 12.1 Working with Multiple Wells : Working with Curves in Multiple Wells

Working with Multiple Wells

Senergy

1530

Edit Zones for Multiple Wells The Multi Well Edit Zone tops window has the same functionality as the single well window. However, when the New, Copy, Copy as Tops, or Edit Zones button is clicked then the Edit Zone tops window appears and the window now has an additional column , Well Name, to select the well to add a zone to. If the user is manually adding new Tops entries for additional wells, a well name can be selected by clicking in a blank row in the Well Name Column and then selecting a well name from the drop-down list box that is launched.

Section 12.1 Working with Multiple Wells : Working with Curves in Multiple Wells

1531

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

The File and Paste from Spreadsheet File and Paste from Spreadsheet

Senergy

buttons work in the same way as for a single well operation, except that the first column of the data

selected from the spreadsheet must now contain the Well Name entries. It is possible to load all tops for all wells simultaneously using this wi1ndow. The window allows up to 19,999 rows of tops data to be loaded. When the OK button is clicked the tops are loaded into the specified wells. If the well name cannot be found amongst the currently loaded-in-memory wells then the row in the table is ignored. NOTE: no error message is given. To check what was actually loaded, return to the Edit Zone tops window by clicking Edit Zones on the Zones Sets window. All loaded tops for all wells will then be listed.

Load Zones using the API or UWI in Multiple Wells When loading the data in the Edit Multiple Zones Dialog the Well Name column can now contain either the Well Name, the Well API Number or the Well UWI number. The option on what it contains is selected at the base of the window ‘Use to Select IP well’.

Section 12.1 Working with Multiple Wells : Working with Curves in Multiple Wells

Working with Multiple Wells

Senergy

1532

Note when loading the program first will use the option selected, if it can not find a well to load the data against it will make another search of open wells using the Well Name to match against.

Output Zones using the API or UWI in Multiple Wells When the ‘Output’ button is clicked this makes an ASCII file of the data in the window. The ‘Output Option’ section allows the addition of extra columns for API and UWI into the ASCII file. The option of ‘DB Well Number’ if checked will add the database IP well number in front of the well name.

Section 12.1 Working with Multiple Wells : Working with Curves in Multiple Wells

1533

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Note that if the API or UWI are included in the output then the data file can no longer be reloaded using the ‘File’ load option in the module. Below is an example of the Output file displaying the API Number and the UWI Number for each of the wells.

Related Topics Manage Multi-Well Well Header Info. Manage Multi-Well Curve Sets Manage Multi-Well Curve Headers

Section 12.1 Working with Multiple Wells : Working with Curves in Multiple Wells

Working with Multiple Wells

Senergy

Multiple Well Zones/Top Sets Multi-Well Curve Statistics

Section 12.1 Working with Multiple Wells : Working with Curves in Multiple Wells

1534

1535

12.2

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Working with Parameters in Multiple Wells

The Multi-Well Change Parameters module allows the user to change one or more parameters in an interpretation module and (optionally) to re-run the analysis with the new parameter(s). This can be useful if a field-wide interpretation has been made and new data has been acquired (for example a new Rw value, or a different cementation factor m) that means changing an interpretation parameter in all wells in the Field. The Multi-well Parameter Distribution module is used in a multi-well field-type interpretation. It is used to copy Parameter Sets from one well to other wells in the same project. The correct input and output curves should be created and the user can check to see if the input curves have been correctly chosen. At the same time as copying the parameters, the Zone Tops for each Parameter Set are changed to reflect the zone tops in the other wells. NOTE: If zones have been locked in a wells Parameter Set which is then subsequently distributed to other wells then the locked zones will appear in the other wells Parameter Sets. A typical workflow for a multi-well field study could be as follows :

Section 12.2 Working with Multiple Wells : Working with Parameters in Multiple Wells

Senergy

Working with Multiple Wells

1536

Related Topics Multi-Well Change Parameters Multi-Well Parameter Distribution Multi-Well Batch Operation Multi-Well Curve Statistics

12.2.1 Multi-Well Change Parameters The Multi-Well Change Parameters module allows the user to change one or more parameters in an interpretation module and (optionally) to re-run the analysis with the new parameter(s). This can be useful if a field-wide interpretation has been made and new data has been acquired (for example a new Rw value, or a different cementation factor m) that means changing an interpretation parameter in all wells in the Field. The module comprises 2 tabbed screens. The Wells tab allows the user to select / deselect wells to make changes to. The Parameters tab allows the user to set up the Parameter Sets and petrophysical parameters that are to be changed in all the selected wells. 1. On the Wells tab the user selects the wells to work on , either by ticking individual well entries or by clicking the Select All button which will tick all in-memory wells. The UnSelect All button will remove any ticks from the selected wells. The Select - Well List allows the user to select wells using a previously created well list. When a Parameter Set is selected, any well that does not contain that particular Set will be greyed out on the Wells tab.

Section 12.2 Working with Multiple Wells : Working with Parameters in Multiple Wells

1537

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

2. On the Parameters tab, select the Parameter Set which includes the parameter that is to be edited. 3. The Output Parameter drop-down list will be populated with all the relevant Parameters for that particular Parameter Set. The values for the selected parameter will be displayed in the grid panel, organized by zone (rows) and by well (columns). The program will try to set all zones with the same Zone name on the same line, if no zone names have been used, then the zones will be listed in increasing depth order. Petrophysical parameter values can be edited in two ways: 1. One at a time - by manually changing each value in the grid by typing the value in or by selecting a curve from the drop-down list,

Section 12.2 Working with Multiple Wells : Working with Parameters in Multiple Wells

Senergy

Working with Multiple Wells

1538

2. collectively - by clicking in a row or column header, which will turn green (indicating a column or row edit). In this mode, changing one value in the selected row or column will automatically change all the values in that row or column to the selected value. If a curve has been selected rather than a value the curve will be selected for all rows or columns. These actions are illustrated below: Column Edit:

Row Edit:

Section 12.2 Working with Multiple Wells : Working with Parameters in Multiple Wells

1539

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

3. If all values of a parameter need to be changed in all zones and all wells then edit the value in the New Value box and click the Apply to All Wells All Zones button. For flag-type parameters (yes / no), for example, GR Use, OBM?, N/D Use, the check box to the left of the New Value box is activated and can be used to switch on or off the selected flag.

Section 12.2 Working with Multiple Wells : Working with Parameters in Multiple Wells

Senergy

Working with Multiple Wells

Section 12.2 Working with Multiple Wells : Working with Parameters in Multiple Wells

1540

1541

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Multiple parameter values for the same Parameter Set can be changed simultaneously. After changing one parameter, select the second parameter and make the changes to that one. Continue selecting parameters and making changes until finished. The parameters that have been modified are listed in the panel in the top right hand corner of the window. The Parameter Values can be copied to the clipboard and then pasted into another application, for example, Microsoft Excel, using the Copy Button in the lower left corner of the dialog.

Modifications are not applied to the IP wells until the the OK button or the Re-Run Analysis button is clicked. NOTE: If the user changes the Parameter Set before clicking the OK or ReRun Analysis button, any modifications to the previously selected Parameter Set will be lost. The OK button, when clicked, will make the changes to the selected parameters for each well. Changes that are made are recorded in the message panel at the base of the window.

Section 12.2 Working with Multiple Wells : Working with Parameters in Multiple Wells

Senergy

Working with Multiple Wells

1542

By right mouse button clicking in the message window box, the selected messages can be copied to the clipboard for inclusion in a document, all messages can be deleted and all lines in the dialog box can be selected. The message box size can be re-arranged by placing the cursor on the grey area just above the box and then dragging the box to a different height. The Re-Run Analysis button, when clicked, will firstly save all parameter changes and then rerun the analyses used by the Parameter Sets. Results are reported in the message window.

Related Topics Multi-Well Parameter Distribution Multi-Well Batch Operation Multi-Well Change Parameters Multi-Well Curve Statistics

12.2.2 Multi-Well Parameter Distribution The Multi-well Parameter Distribution module is used in a multi-well field-type interpretation. It is used to copy Parameter Sets from one well to other wells in the same project. The correct input and output curves should be created and the user can check to see if the input curves have been correctly chosen. At the same time as copying the parameters, the Zone Tops for each Parameter Set are changed to reflect the zone tops in the other wells. NOTE: If zones have been locked in a

Section 12.2 Working with Multiple Wells : Working with Parameters in Multiple Wells

1543

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

wells Parameter Set which is then subsequently distributed to other wells then the locked zones will appear in the other wells Parameter Sets. The user sets the well focus to the well with the interpreted Parameter Sets and then starts the Parameter Distribution module. The following window will appear.

The user should select the multi-well Zone /Tops Set that is common to all wells, from the Common Tops/Zones set drop-down list box. These zones do not have to be the same as the interpretation parameter zones. If this box is left blank then the Zones Sets will still be copied to the user-selected wells but the zone tops depths will remain the same as in the original well. Wells to Populate. The user selects the wells into which to copy the selected Parameter Sets. Tops/Zones sets to distribute. The user selects the Parameter Sets from the current well to copy to the other wells. The Clay Volume, Porosity / Sw and cut-off are the three primary interpretation Parameter Sets. The Select All and Select None buttons, located beneath the Wells to Populate list enable

Section 12.2 Working with Multiple Wells : Working with Parameters in Multiple Wells

Senergy

Working with Multiple Wells

1544

you to toggle between selecting or de-selecting all wells in the list. Select - Well List allows the user to use a previously created well list to check the Wells to Populate boxes. The Select All button, located beneath the Tops/Zones sets to distribute list, if clicked, will automatically select all the listed Parameter Sets. Use the Select None button to deselect all the Sets. Copy using zone names - If checked, will allow the user to more-accurately distribute Parameter Sets to multiple wells in an IP project or to distribute parameters to multiple penetrations of reservoir zones in a single horizontal well. NOTE: this is a special case as the user is required to be more rigorous in setting up the zones in the interpretation modules. It is only useful if the names of all zones are defined in all the Sets being distributed and in the common Tops Set. The Run button will distribute the Parameter Sets. The user will be asked to confirm whether or not to overwrite existing Sets. The following is an illustration of how the tops are correlated between the common Parameter Sets and the distributed Sets.

Section 12.2 Working with Multiple Wells : Working with Parameters in Multiple Wells

1545

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

To illustrate the usage of the Copy using zone names option further see the following example below: In this example there are three wells B7, B1 and B4. B7 is the active well. "Final Tops" is the common Tops Set. The user wants to distribute the Tops Set "Test" to wells B1 and B4. NOTE: the Tops Set "Test" has zone names and depth intervals that are not found in any Set within the wells B1 and B4. If the parameter distribution is performed with the Copy using zone names unchecked then a "Test" Tops Set is created in wells B1 and B4. The depth intervals for each zone are realigned using the common Tops Set as a guide. This method does not require that the zones in the parameter Sets being copied have the same top and bottom depths or have the same number of zones as the common Tops Set. This gives this method the advantage of allowing interpretation Sets with different zonation schemes to be moved from well to well with their depth intervals being realigned using a different zonation scheme.

Section 12.2 Working with Multiple Wells : Working with Parameters in Multiple Wells

Senergy

Working with Multiple Wells

1546

If this procedure is now repeated but with the Copy using zone names checked then an Error message will appear informing the user that the well B1 does not have any zone names in common with the "Test" Tops Set. The user can either remove the well or select a Set (to be distributed) that does have similar zone names to the common Set or uncheck the Copy using zone names box.

Section 12.2 Working with Multiple Wells : Working with Parameters in Multiple Wells

1547

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

So this option is only really useful if all zones are named consistently between wells. If this is done then it is possible to have a base vertical well interpretation parameter Set being copied to a horizontal well with repeat zones (named the same). If an interpretation Parameter Set is selected in the Top/Zones sets to distribute list then a tab will appear with the name of the interpretation module. This allows the user to look through all the wells and check that the Input Curves for that module have the correct curves assigned to them. Currently, the list of Input Curves includes all of the curves in the interpretation module whether they are used in the interpretation or not. The screenshot below illustrates this point.

Section 12.2 Working with Multiple Wells : Working with Parameters in Multiple Wells

Senergy

Working with Multiple Wells

Section 12.2 Working with Multiple Wells : Working with Parameters in Multiple Wells

1548

1549

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

When the Distribute button is clicked a number of Confirm messages may appear depending on the individual database circumstances. If, as in the case illustrated above, there are missing curves then the following message will appear:

If the user answers Yes to this then they are taken back to the Clay Volume tab of the Parameter Distribution module and can type in a curve name or select a curve name from the drop down lists for the missing curves. If, however, they are quite happy that all the wells have the correct curves for the module then the user should select No or No to All. If the user answers No to All then all the {Try to populate on run} messages disappear. As the Clay Volume module is normally the first module to be run in a petrophysical analysis the input curves are not dependant on another module so there isnt a chance of missing curves being populated on run. However, for the Porosity and Water Saturation and Cutoff and Summation modules if these have missing curves, due to the modules not previously being run, then the curves will be filled in as they are created. The module then checks to see if the wells have the Clay Volume parameter Set already and if they do then the following message will appear:

This gives the user the chance to remove a well that they dont want the Clay Volume parameter Set replacing in. In the following example the Clay Volume parameters are being distributed from well A1 to wells A2, A3, A4, A6 and A7. The Distribute and Re-run Analysis button is clicked.

Section 12.2 Working with Multiple Wells : Working with Parameters in Multiple Wells

Senergy

Working with Multiple Wells

1550

The reason why the analysis failed in well A3 was because there wasnt a neutron curve available in that well. The user had the chance to correct this when they received the second Confirm message but chose to ignore it and attempted to run the analysis. To avoid this type of scenario the user could have removed the well from the Parameter Distribution module or furnished a neutron curve for the well or changed the Clay Volume Analysis in well A1 to use a Double Clay Indicator of Density and Sonic instead of Density and Neutron. The output curves for each well can be the same as those in the Parameter Set being distributed. However, within the module there is the functionality to create new Sets and change the depths and step of the output Set. In the example below the Clay Volume Analysis module has been run on well A1 with the output curves going into a Set called "O" (Output). To distribute this Parameter Set to wells A2, A3 and A4 the Parameter Distribution module is opened. As well as the Clay Volume tab there is now an Output Sets tab.

The Output Sets tab allows the user to quickly see which wells have the same output Set as the in-focus well.

Section 12.2 Working with Multiple Wells : Working with Parameters in Multiple Wells

1551

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

By clicking on a yellow cell, i.e. a well that has the output Set already in it, the Well Set Depths Editor is opened. The user can then change the output Set depth interval, the step and the units of that output Set. If the well does not have an output Set of the same name as the in-focus wells Parameter Set then this Set will be created in the well when the Distribute button is clicked. The top and bottom depths and step for the created output Set will be taken from that wells Default Set. This can subsequently be changed by going back to the Output Sets tab and clicking on the now yellow cell to bring up the Well Set Depths Editor.

Note: If the Mineral Solver Parameter Set is chosen to be distributed then he trend curves as well as the input curves for each model appear in the MinSolve Interp tab.

Section 12.2 Working with Multiple Wells : Working with Parameters in Multiple Wells

Senergy

Working with Multiple Wells

Related Topics Multi-Well Parameter Distribution Multi-Well Batch Operation Multi-Well Change Parameters Multi-Well Curve Statistics

Section 12.2 Working with Multiple Wells : Working with Parameters in Multiple Wells

1552

1553

12.3

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Multi-Well Batch Operation

The Multi-Well Batch Operation module is used to run multiple IP module scripts, on one or more wells, in a single batch procedure. The module is accessed from the main Multi-Well menu

Multi-Well Batch Operation.

Well Selection List Loaded Wells - If this option is chosen then by clicking in a blank row in the Wells panel a well name can be chosen from the drop-down well list. Alternatively, all the wells currently loaded in memory and those not loaded can be added to the list simultaneously, by clicking on the Wells panel title.

Section 12.3 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-Well Batch Operation

Working with Multiple Wells

Senergy

1554

All Database Wells - If this option is chosen then only those wells which have been saved to memory will be shown. When this option is chosen the Display with Well Name panel becomes active.

Display with Well name There are a number of choices from which the user can choose to include a well comment or API number or UWI with the well name. This should make it easier for the user to distinguish wells. None Well Comment API number UWI NOTE: if a selection other than None has been made, the user wont see any change to the well name until the Wells column header is clicked or the individual well is reselected from the dropdown list within the Wells column. The Select - Well List button allows the user to utilize the Well List functionality to select and load sub-sets of database wells.

The Batch Operation Panel The Batch Operation panel contains 6 columns; Use, Module, Parameter File Name / Set Name, Output Set, Top Dep and Bot Dep.

Section 12.3 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-Well Batch Operation

1555

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The Use column lets the user select which modules are to be run in the batch process. To select / de-select individual modules to run in the batch process, the user should tick the Use cell for that module. Clicking on the Use column title, toggles all module rows that have been filled in, between selected (checked) and de-selected (un-checked) modes. The Module options for each line can be selected from the drop-down menu.

Click in the first empty Module cell to see the full drop-down list of options. as illustrated above. The small zone icon in front of some of the modules indicates that in these modules, if selected, the user can define the interval over which the module will run. For the other modules the interval over which they will run has been defined within the module. If the user wants to change the interval then they would have to go into the module, select the depths, run the module and then

Section 12.3 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-Well Batch Operation

Working with Multiple Wells

Senergy

1556

select it within the Batch Operation module. NOTE: The shown list includes User Programs which may not be available to every IP user. The following modules can be run in the batch process. NOTE: the text in parentheses "()" at the end of each line in the following list is the file extension that IP uses to identify different Set types when they have been saved externally as disk files: Formula

: User Formula module (.frm)

Multi-Line Formula : Multi-Line Formula module (.mlf) Temperature

: Temperature Gradient module (.tem)

ZoneCurves

: Zones to Curves. Converts zone numbers into a Flag curve or Interpretation module parameters, for example Gr Clay, to a continuous curve. Or, where a Tops Set has been set up to define a Flag curve, the curve is created using Zone Names and an associated user-selected flag value (.ztc).

Filter

: Filter module. Filters log curves (.flt)

Basic Log Func

: Basic Log Functions module. One or more of the function tabs can be run (.blc)

Fill Data gaps

: Fill Data Gaps module (.fdg)

Basic Log Anal

: Basic Log Analysis module. One or more of the calculation tabs can be run (.set)

Clay Volume

: Clay Volume Interpretation module (.set)

Porosity Sw

: Phi /Sw interpretation module (.set)

Mineral Solver

: Mineral Solver module (.set)

Cutoff

: Cut-off and Summation module (.set)

UserPrograms

: Any available user program (Archie, Differentiate, Normalize Array, etc....) (UsrProg..)

The modules that are to be run in the batch process for the selected list of wells must have saved Parameter Sets. Parameter Sets are saved from within the actual interpretation modules that have been run on individual wells. The user can see them by using the Load / Save Parameter Sets button

Save to Database or Save to Disk File buttons in each module. See

Parameter Set Management for more details. The Parameter File Name / Set Name column - The user adds the Parameter Set name to the data grid. Zoneable Parameter Sets, generated by the interpretation modules, can either be saved internally within the IP database, or as external (.set) files in individual well subdirectories. Internal

Section 12.3 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-Well Batch Operation

1557

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

parameter sets are distinguished by having a grey background colour and a name without any file path prefix. External parameter sets are distinguished by containing a full file path and file name. NOTE: In the example shown below, the Clay Volume parameter Set is an internal set ("Clay") and the Porosity / Water Saturation parameter set ("PhiSw.set") is an external parameter set.

See Parameter Set Management for more details. The Browse buttons can be used to find and select the required external file names (.set, .frm, .mlf, etc...). When an Interpretation module is selected from the list e.g. Clay Volume, the Parameter File Name / Set Name cell in that row of the grid will default to pick up the internal Parameter Set type for the selected module. To choose another, external Set, click the Browse button to search for and load an appropriate Parameter Set file (file extension is .set). Output Set column - this allows the user to select a Set into which the output curves from the selected module will be output to. The Module Set is the output Set of the selected module. The output Set can be different to the Module Set of the module. So if the user decides to run the Clay Volume module on a number of wells the user can output the results of the Clay Volume module to a different Set than the Clay Volume Parameter Set (Module Set) which is defined within the module. Output Sets can be selected from the drop-down list of all available Sets.

Top Dep / Bot Dep column - this allows the user to define the depths over which a module will be run. Depths can either be typed directly into the Top Dep / Bot Dep columns or can be selected using the

symbol. Clicking on this opens the Select Zone Depths dialogue box.

Here the user can select Top Sets and individual zones. These can be displayed within the Multi-Well Batch Operation module as either depths or zones using the Return radio buttons.

Section 12.3 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-Well Batch Operation

Working with Multiple Wells

Senergy

1558

The modules will be run in the order they are displayed (from top to bottom) in the window. Therefore, if one module depends on the results of another, it will be important that the running order in the list is correct. The order the modules are run in can be re-arranged by clicking in the grey column to the left of the Use column and dragging a row up or down to another position.

Curve Sets If a Set name is not available in the drop-down list then clicking the Add Set button will launch the Add Set Names dialog which allows the user to create a new Set name which will appear in all the in-memory wells.

Separate Parameter Set per Well - This check box has the following functions: If not checked - the program will search for the specific Parameter Set / Formula / User

Section 12.3 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-Well Batch Operation

1559

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Program that is displayed in the Parameter File Name / Set Name column and these Parameter Sets / Formulae / User Programs will be run on all wells in the Well list, when the Run button is clicked. If checked - the program will search the WELL**** subdirectories of each well in the well list for the particular Parameter Set / Formula / User Program names set up in the Module list. This gives the user the ability, for example, to call slightly different user formulae for different wells (as long as the user formulae have the same name) or to select different interpretation Parameter Sets for individual wells (as long as they are named consistently). The Parameter File Name / Set Name column display will change to show the Parameter Set / formula name only, without the full directory path extension. When the Run button is clicked, the Batch Operation Process Log panel in the lower part of the window will indicate whether a Module has been run successfully in a well or an error message will be displayed where a Parameter Set / Formula does not exist. Set Path button : The user can use this button to fully specify the directory path of each of the Modules called in the Multi-Well Batch operation. This is useful if several users need to run the same multi-well batch files, since the full file location of each Set/ Formula/User Program is saved into the Batch (.fbt) file. Clicking the Run button will start the batch processing operation. The process is run by loading the saved Parameter Set into the module and executing it. As the batch operation executes, a scrolling information log will be visible in the Batch Operation Process Log text panel at the bottom of the window.

Any errors found while running the module will stop the batch process and a Confirm dialog will appear along with an error message in the Batch Operations Process Log. The user will be prompted to Continue with the batch items ?. The user has three choices: 1. If the user chooses Yes, to continue with the process, then the Confirm dialog will be closed and the rest of the batch process will continue, step by step, for every well in the routine. Choosing this option then requires the user to confirm Yes to every error that is flagged in the process log window. This could be a laborious task if there are tens or even hundreds of wells in the batch operation. The alternative in such a situation is to click the Yes to All

Section 12.3 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-Well Batch Operation

Working with Multiple Wells

Senergy

1560

button (See below). 2. If the user chooses No, the batch process will stop. The Multi-Well Batch Operation window will stay open but the user can try to correct the errors in the failed well, before rerunning the batch operation. NOTE: Any modules showing errors in the information window will not have been run. 3. Clicking the Yes to All button will continue to run the selected modules and will simply provide error information on failed processes. The batch process will not stop at each failure but will continue to run all selected modules on all wells in the well list. When the batch operation has finished, the user can then examine the Batch Operation Process Log, analyse the failures and correct the modules, re-selecting only the failed wells and rerun the batch routine. It is possible to cancel a running Multi-Well Batch operation by clicking on the Cancel button. The Batch Operation Process Log can be copied to a text file by right-mouse-clicking on the information window to launch the Select All / Copy / Delete All dialog. Select All - selects all the text in the process log Copy - copies the selected text into the Windows clipboard Delete All - clears all text from the Process Log information window. The selected messages will be copied to the clipboard and can be pasted into another application.

The Save button - allows the user to save a batch operation to a text (.fbt) file. The Load button - allows the user to re-load a batch process from a saved (.fbt) file. The Clear All button - allows the user to clear both the selected Wells and the Modules from the Batch Operation interface. The Clear Wells button - allows the user to clear the Wells panel of all entries.

Related Topics Multi-Well Parameter Distribution Multi-Well Batch Operation Multi-Well Change Parameters

Section 12.3 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-Well Batch Operation

1561

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Multi-Well Curve Statistics

Section 12.3 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-Well Batch Operation

Senergy

Working with Multiple Wells

Senergy

12.4

1562

Multi-Well Curve Statistics

Multi-Well Curve Statistics allows the user to display and report curve statistics on multiple curves in multiple wells in an IP database. The module is organized on 3 tabs, MultiWell Curves, Report, Discriminators.

Multi-Well Curves Tab Select the wells to report curve statistics for, by clicking in a blank row and highlighting a well from the drop-down list. Alternatively, click on the Well Name column title to quickly select all in-memory wells. The selected well list can then be further modified by ticking or unticking the Use column on the left-hand side of the grid. Click on the Use column title to toggle between selecting all wells / selecting no wells to include in the report.

Clicking the Advanced Well Select allows the user to utilize the Well List functionality to select and load sub-sets of database wells. Curves are selected by highlighting a curve name in the Available Curves panel and then either; Click on the > chevron to copy the curve name into the Selected Curves All Wells panel, or Drag/drop a curve name from the Available Curves panel to the Selected Curves All Wells panel. If the selected curve is present in the other selected wells in the list, the curve name will be highlighted in red text colour in those wells. If the equivalent curve is not named consistently between wells, the user must identify and select all appropriate curve names in all the wells, before running the statistics. To do this, click in a well row. The curves associated with that

Section 12.4 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-Well Curve Statistics

1563

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

well will be listed in the Available Curves list. Select the curves you wish to include by drag/drop or using the > or >> buttons. Alternatively, the user could use the Multi-Well Manage Curve Headers module to name curves consistently across the entire well dataset. The user can choose to display curve statistics over a particular zone or group of zones in multiple wells by using the Define button at the right-hand end of each selected Well row. The following window is launched:

If a selected well does not contain the Zone / Tops Set or the Top or Bottom are not defined in a well, the well will be de-selected from the main Multi-Well Curve Statistics window.

The corresponding check box in the Use Column will be cleared. At this point the user can choose either : to continue with the operation, excluding wells that have been de-selected, or to edit the appropriate Zone /Tops set (See Edit Zone Tops) to add the missing Tops and Bottoms in the de-selected wells, save the edits and re-apply the Define filter.

The Report Tab The Report Tab allows the user to select the statistics that are to be saved in the report, including an interactive selection of percentile values to return. The report can either be output as

Section 12.4 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-Well Curve Statistics

Working with Multiple Wells

Senergy

1564

a Space Delimited (.txt) text file for viewing in Notepad or as a Comma Delimited (.csv) file for viewing in a spreadsheet program.

The Discriminators Tab The Discriminators tab can be used to further refine the selection of data for which to report the statisitics. Discriminators are particularly useful if the user wants to find out the average value or net interval of a curve over an interval. For example: the user wants to do a quick net sand count for an interval and use a gamma ray of less than 30 API to discriminate the sand interval. When the Run button is clicked the user will be prompted for a file name under which to save the report. Once the report is created the file will be automatically opened and displayed. The following is an example of a Multi-Well curve statistics report: Da t e

We l l

Ru n

:

2 7 / 0 7 / 2 0 0 5

Cu r v e

Me a n

A1

I mp : G R

1 6 0 . 0 0 0 A2

GA P I 6 8 . 3 6 7

GR

1 8 3 . 3 7 5 A4

GA P I

7 9 . 0 9 5

GR

1 6 0 . 3 7 5 A3

Un i t s Me d i a n

GA P I 8 6 . 6 1 6

GR

1 6 7 . 3 7 5

GA P I 7 0 . 0 9 6

1 1 : 3 2 : 4 9

Nu l l s

F a i l Di s c

Mo d e

1 9 8 1 . 8 1 3 0 5 7 . 2 1 9 0 9 7 . 3 7 5 0 8 0 . 0 0 0

St d

0 2 1 . 2 1 1 0 3 2 . 5 9 1 0 9 8 . 7 7 0 0 9 6 . 7 0 4

To p

Bo t t o m

Ne t

Mi n

3 1 4 2 . 0 4 0

3 5 9 . 2 9 9

7 . 4 8 4

3 6 8 4 . 9 7 2

1 8 5 . 1 2 6

1 9 . 9 5 3

3 2 2 0 . 0 6 4

3 6 0 . 2 1 1

1 0 . 7 1 1

3 3 2 7 . 9 6 3

3 1 8 . 1 1 3

1 0 . 3 2 8

De v

2 7 8 1 . 9 7 6 4 3 . 3 9 5 3 5 0 0 . 0 0 0 3 4 . 5 3 3 2 8 6 0 . 0 0 0 4 4 . 1 8 6 3 0 1 0 . 0 0 0 3 1 . 1 2 6

Related Topics Manage Multi-Well Well Header Info. Manage Multi-Well Curve Sets Manage Multi-Well Curve Headers

Section 12.4 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-Well Curve Statistics

Ma x

1565

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Multiple Well Zones/Top Sets Multi-Well Curve Statistics

Section 12.4 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-Well Curve Statistics

Senergy

Working with Multiple Wells

Senergy

12.5

1566

Multi-Well Correlation Viewer

The Multi-Well Correlation Viewer module provides the user with an interface to view multiple wells and to plot correlation lines between wells held in an IP database. Zone tops can be displayed and edited and wells can be datumed (Flattened) on a zone top or to a reference depth by simple mouse click operations. Wells can be added or removed from the display window and moved around within the multi-well viewer. Multi-well plot formats can be saved into the database directory for easy recall and redisplay. Plots can be output to the clipboard for pasting into external documents or can be sent directly to available printers.

The Multi-Well Correlation Viewer is launched by selecting the Multi-Well Correlation Viewer menu item under the View menu, or by using the speed button (

).

Up to 10 multi-well plots can be displayed simultaneously. Each multi-well view can display up to 50 wells. However, there is an overall display limit of 250 individual well plots. The multi-well viewer uses Zone / Tops Sets (tops) to draw correlation lines and shading between the wells in the view window. The same Zones / Tops Set should be available in all wells in order to draw the correlation lines between the wells. The module uses the Zone Name to decide which zones correlate between wells. It is therefore essential that a consistent naming convention is used. The module does not distinguish between upper and lower case characters, therefore C zone and c Zone would be considered to be the same. In the Multi-Well Correlation viewer the user can create a new Zone / Tops Set, then interactively create, move or delete zone tops in that Set. Alternatively, the user can select

Section 12.5 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-Well Correlation Viewer

1567

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

an existing multi-well Zone / Tops Set, make a copy of it and perform the same operations on that Set. When the Multi-Well Correlation Viewer window launches, the user uses the header bar buttons to set up and modify the correlation viewer display.

The Buttons are, Wells, File, Settings, Options The functionality associated with each button is described below. Creating, editing and renaming tops in this module is covered in the Editing Tops in the Multi-well Correlation Viewer Section. A New Correlation workflow is presented at the end of this chapter.

Wells Button The user must first select the wells to be displayed. Click on the Wells button and, in the Select Wells dialog, move the wells to be displayed from the Available Wells column to the Selected Wells column. The arrow buttons allow the user to move wells between the Available Wells and Selected Wells panels. It is also possible to left mouse click on a well name and drag it to the opposite panel while holding down the mouse button. The order, from top to bottom, in which the selected wells appear in the Selected Wells list will be the order, left to right, in which they are displayed in the Multi-Well Correlation Viewer display.

Section 12.5 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-Well Correlation Viewer

Working with Multiple Wells

Senergy

1568

Click OK to display the wells in the plot. At this stage only the well names and tops and bottom depths will be displayed.

To display a Zone Set click on the Zone Set drop-down list box and select a Zone / Tops Set to use. The zone tops and bottoms will be displayed in the window, together with any zone colours scheme that has been set up in the Edit Zone / Tops Set module. A number of interactive handles/markers and menus are available in the Correlation window to allow the user to modify / create / delete zones in the correlation viewer. The user can datum the multi-well view on a zone top, at an arbitrary depth (Align Reference Depth) or at a user-selected depth (Set Align Depth). These are illustrated in the following screen capture.

Section 12.5 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-Well Correlation Viewer

1569

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Checking the Fit check box in the correlation viewer header bar will force all wells to be displayed in the plot window. If Fit is not checked, the wells will be displayed at their proper width and the user will have to scroll left and right to display all wells.

Section 12.5 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-Well Correlation Viewer

Working with Multiple Wells

Senergy

1570

In the display shown above the Tops set is being used for the correlation. The plot is depthaligned on the top Ness Zone. The vertical scale has been expanded to make the zone names legible. The Tops Only check box allows the user to toggle between a Tops Only display (illustrated above) and a Log Plot view. To view the Log Plot display uncheck the Tops Only check box. In this case the default log plot format for each well will be displayed. To display all wells in the correlation panel with a common plot format, use the File

Load

Single Well Format to all Wells option, which copies a user-selected log plot format to all wells in the window. Overview tracks can be displayed for each well. However, these can often detract from the overall plot appearance and it is suggested that a plot format, without an overview track, is used. Overview tracks can be turned off from the Options menu

Hide all overview tracks.

Section 12.5 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-Well Correlation Viewer

1571

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

To edit an individual well plot format, click in the track header of the well you wish to change. The normal Log Plot Format window will appear. To get access to the grid properties click the All tracks button on this window. This will also allow you to load a saved log plot format for that specific well. This will only affect the well being worked on.

Editing Tops in the Multi-Well Correlation Viewer Interactive Changing of Tops There are two methods for changing zone tops interactively. 1. If a zone track is displayed in a well then its zone tops and bottoms can be interactively changed in the same way as the normal single well plot (click on, and drag). 2. With the Ctrl key held down place the cursor on one of the correlation lines in between plots next to the well for which you want to change the zone top. The cursor will change to an updown pointer. Click and drag the zone top to the new position. Re-Naming Tops Place the mouse cursor on one of the correlation lines between two wells, next to the well that you want to rename a zone top. The cursor will change to a pointing hand. A right mouse click will bring up the following dialog box. Using this dialog you can choose whether to rename the

Section 12.5 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-Well Correlation Viewer

Working with Multiple Wells

Senergy

1572

well top in the left- or right -hand well, or bring up the Create/Edit Zone Link window by selecting Properties.

If the Rename Left Side or Rename Right Side option is clicked then the New Zone Name window appears.

If you rename a Top, the correlation will no longer be valid, since you have broken the connection between adjacent wells. The correlation line will be deleted.

Linking Tops Un-named tops or tops with different names can be linked so that a common Top name is used. This is done by clicking on the Zone Top marker (small green square) and dragging the top line to the next well to the Top that is to be linked. When the mouse button is released the Create/ Edit Zone Link window (see above) will appear, allowing the user to set the name for the top and therefore link the tops.

Section 12.5 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-Well Correlation Viewer

1573

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Adding New Tops To add a new zone to a well where no zone previously existed, hold the Ctrl key down and right mouse click in the grey area between wells next to the well where the zone is to be created. Select the New Zone pop-up menu item and the new zone will be created. The new zone has a top and bottom depth. The bottom depth can be changed by holding the Ctrl key down and then placing the cursor on the zone bottom marker and dragging the line to a new depth.

Section 12.5 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-Well Correlation Viewer

Working with Multiple Wells

Senergy

1574

Deleting Tops / Splitting Zones To delete or split a zone, hold the Ctrl key down and right mouse click in the grey area between wells next to the well where the zone is to be deleted or split. Select the required function from the pop-up menu .

Changing Zone associated with analyses modules If the selected Zone Set is not of type Tops, for example from the PhiSw interpretation module (the zone Set type is displayed in brackets next to the zone name) then every time a zone top or bottom is moved, the analysis routine associated with the Set will automatically be run. This can be very useful if the user uses the multi-well Correlation module to align analysis tops so that similar parameters are used in the same zones in each well in a field.

File Button

The File button allows the user to save and restore (Load) multi-well formats (Wells / well order / plot formats) as well as providing the facility to load a single well format to all wells in the multiwell plot. This last function is very useful for applying an identical plot format to all wells in the display. A format can be created in a single well and then saved to disk using the Save Plot Format Generic menu option, this can then be recalled from the multi-well plot File menu and used for all wells. When the user saves a particular cross section format and then recalls/loads the format file (. wmp), the name of the format/cross section panel is displayed in the multi-well panel header bar, in parentheses after the Multi-Well Correlation label, in the top left-hand corner, as illustrated below:

Section 12.5 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-Well Correlation Viewer

1575

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Settings Button Click the Settings button to open up the Multi-Well Settings Format window. This window allows the user to change the overall format of the wells in the correlation panel. The user can change a number of display parameters and zone colour shading. The Settings are arranged on two tabbed screens. These are Wells and Zones.

The Wells Tab

Section 12.5 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-Well Correlation Viewer

Working with Multiple Wells

Senergy

1576

Trk # : This column shows the order in which the selected wells will be displayed in the Correlation window. Clicking and dragging on a track number in the Trk # column, will allow the order of the wells in the plot to be re-arranged. Well Name : This column allows the user to change or remove wells from the plot. Wells can be changed by clicking on a Well Name entry in the grid and selecting a different well name from the drop-down well list. A well can be removed by clicking on a Well Name in the grid and selecting the blank entry in the well name list. A well can be added more than once to the correlation plot. Width : This column shows the width of each well log plot in the correlation panel, in IP project default units (inches or cm). Gap : This column shows the width of the gap that is set between wells in the correlation panel (inches or cm). Top Depth : Enter the top depth for the well. This is the well measured depth, regardless of what curve is used as the Ref Depth. The Default value is well Top Depth. Bot Depth : Enter the bottom depth for the well. The Default value is the well Bottom Depth.

Section 12.5 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-Well Correlation Viewer

1577

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Ref Depth : Enter the Depth reference curve name from the drop-down list. The Depth Reference curve will be used to align the wells in the correlation panel. This can be set to DEPTH (Measured Depth) or to TVD / TVDSS (True Vertical Depth) for all wells in the display. NOTE: IP will warn you if you select, for example, wells which have TVDSS curves in a mix of positive and negative depth notation. TVDSS curves must ALL be in a common positive or negative notation. Define : Click the Define button to set the well display depths from the selected Zone/Top Set tops and bottoms. This will display the Select Plot Range window, similar to that illustrated below:

The Select Plot Range window allows wells to be displayed using depths picked from the current Tops Set. Select the Top and Bottom from the drop-down boxes. The Tolerance column is used to modify the log display relative to the selected top depths. In the above example, for Well A1, the data will be displayed 100 ft/meters shallower (minus notation) than the RN36 (Top) and 100 ft/meters deeper than the Bottom of the RN12 (Bottom). The Full Well Range box, if checked, will set the depths to the full well range for the selected well. The All Wells button, if clicked, will apply the Select Plot Range criteria to all wells currently loaded in the multi-well panel display. This allows the user to quickly make a plot over a selected zonal range for all wells. The Ok button will set the depths for all the displayed well. Default Widths : The Default widths box on the Multi-Well Settings Format window, allows the user to set the same Well Gap and Well Width for all wells.

Section 12.5 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-Well Correlation Viewer

Working with Multiple Wells

Senergy

1578

Set Ref. Depth Curve for all Wells : this option gives the user a shortcut to set the depth reference curve for all wells in a multi-well correlation. The user can select TVD or Measured Depth (MD) options. The program will find the relevant curve in every well in the correlation, if the curve exists.

The Zones Tab The Zones tab sets up the display criteria for the area between wells. The window shows a list of the Zone names in the user-selected Zone Set, the number of wells (No Wells) in which each zone is present in the display and a Zone colour selection column. A number of check boxes that affect the correlation view are described below:

Hide Shading check box : If the Hide Shading box is not checked (the default setting) then the inter-well gaps will be shaded with the colours shown in the colour table. The user can change the colours as needed. Hide Zone Markers check box : The Hide Zone Markers option, if checked, will remove the small square zone markers which are shown to the sides of each well in a correlation panel. This option allows the user to clean up a correlation display before printing or copying

Section 12.5 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-Well Correlation Viewer

1579

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

to the clipboard for pasting into other applications. Show Zone Names above Zone Tops : if un-checked will remove the zone names from above the zone correlations. Set Zone colours in Wells check box : if checked, this option allows the user to save any changes they make to the zone colours in the multi-well display, back into the Zone Set that was selected when setting up the correlation viewer.

Options Button The Options button launches a number of display controls that affect all wells in a correlation view, simultaneously.

Hide All Overview Tracks : This will remove from the well plots any overview track which has been included in the plot format. The overview track is generally not useful in the correlation plot. Add a Zone Track to all Wells - Names only : This will add a zone track, containing the currently-selected Zone Set, to the left hand side of all well plots. This can be useful for changing zone tops. Add a Zone Track to all Wells - Colour Zones : This will add a zone track, containing the currently-selected Zone Set and colour coded (as set up in the Edit Zones /Tops Sets module), to the left hand side of all well plots in the correlation view. Remove Zone track from all Wells : This removes the zone track from all wells in a correlation view, if the Zone tracks are present as the left-hand track in each log plot. Add Zones / Tops lines to all Tracks: This will add horizontal lines across each log track in each log plot, using the currently-selected Zone Set. The following dialog box will allow the user to select the colour of the lines.

Section 12.5 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-Well Correlation Viewer

Working with Multiple Wells

Senergy

1580

Remove Zone / Tops lines from all Tracks : This reverses the Add Zones / Tops lines to all Tracks operation. Create a New Zone / Tops Set for selected wells : This allows the user to create a new multi-well Tops Set in the wells in the correlation panel in order to start a new correlation. The following dialog allows the user to choose the name of the Tops Set.

Add this Zone Set to all selected wells : This is useful if one wants to add a new well into a correlation and then to correlate between it and surrounding wells. This option, when selected, will add the current Zone Set into the new well. Create a copy of the selected Zone / Tops Set : This will make a copy of the currentlyselected Zone Set and make this copy the active Zone Set. This is useful if the user wants to edit the current correlation but does not want to overwrite the existing correlation zones.

Change Track Border Width All Wells : This option, if selected, allows you to change the line thickness used to define log track boundaries on each log plot. The line thickness change is applied to all wells in the correlation panel. The default line thickness is set to 2. Thicker border lines can be achieved by typing in a higher value and clicking OK.

Section 12.5 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-Well Correlation Viewer

1581

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Output to Printer or File By clicking on the print button

the plot can be output to a printer, the Clipboard or to a

graphics file. The same options are available as for the single well plot output, except that plot depths are now set up in the multi-well plot Settings window and horizontal, log track depth grid lines can be set up for each well.

Section 12.5 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-Well Correlation Viewer

Senergy

Working with Multiple Wells

1582

The Advanced tab allows you to set up further hardcopy options. These are described below:

Section 12.5 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-Well Correlation Viewer

1583

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

In the MultiWell Panel on the Advanced tab, highlighted above, the user is able to select one, or more, of the following options: Hide Shading - Ticking this option will remove any Zone shading, that may be visible inside IP, from between the wells in the multi-well panel on the hardcopy output. Hide Zone Markers - Ticking this option will remove the Zone Tie symbols, the small, dark green markers on the sides of each well log, from the hardcopy output. Plot Well Name Header just above well plot - Ticking this option will anchor the Well Name title box to the top of each individual well log plot, rather than to the top of the Correlation panel. Plot Well Header at bottom of log - Ticking this option will put a Well Name title box at the bottom of the correlation Panel. If Plot Well Name Header just above well plot is also

Section 12.5 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-Well Correlation Viewer

Working with Multiple Wells

Senergy

1584

checked, the title boxes on the bottom of the panel are anchored to the base of each individual log plot.

New Correlation Workflow The following workflow is one way in which a new correlation could be made. 1. Create a Multi-well correlation and load all wells in the correlation into it (Wells button). 2. Load a simple correlation log plot for each well. File

Load a Single Well Format to all

Wells and display the log plots (Tops Only un-checked).

3. Create a new Tops Set for all wells. (Options

Create a New Zone / Tops Set for

selected wells).

Section 12.5 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-Well Correlation Viewer

1585

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

4. Add the Tops to each well plot as lines. (Options

Senergy

Add Zone / Tops lines to all Tracks

). A confirm message appears which also allows the user to select the colour of the Tops lines.

5. In the first well, create a new zone and drag its top and bottom depth to cover the total correlation interval. The top should be aligned to the top zone in the correlation. NOTE: the green solid rectangle is the zone marker; the yellow solid rectangle is for guidance purposes only. Therefore tops can only be drawn between green solid rectangles. If the green rectangles dont exist then Ctrl right click and Split Zone to create new zones between the green solid rectangle and the yellow solid rectangle. 6. In the second well, create another new zone and align as in the first well.

Section 12.5 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-Well Correlation Viewer

Working with Multiple Wells

Senergy

1586

7. Link and name the top correlation. Click on the left-well top marker and drag it to the rightwell top marker.

8. Create the next zone down by splitting the upper zone. Do this for both left and right wells.

Section 12.5 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-Well Correlation Viewer

1587

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

9. Name and link the next zone by dragging the left-well top marker to the right-well top marker as done in step 7.

10. The correlation can be continued in the same way by splitting zones and linking markers. When the first two wells are correlated then the user can move on to the next well using exactly the same methodology until the whole correlation has been built up.

Section 12.5 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-Well Correlation Viewer

Senergy

Working with Multiple Wells

Section 12.5 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-Well Correlation Viewer

1588

1589

12.6

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Multi-well Cutoff and Summation

The Multi well Cutoff and Summation module allows the user to run the Cutoff and Summation computation for multiple wells from a single window. The module has sophisticated reporting options that allow results from multiple wells to be written to one report file. The module can be used to either re-run the current Cutoff and Summation results in each well with some modification, for example to a changed VCL cut-off, or can be run to create the Cutoff and Summation results for each well from scratch. This module works with the single well Cut-off and Summation module. It provides a multi-well front-end to the module. Once this module is run, all the settings and results produced will also be found populating the single well module. Therefore, if one does not want to lose the settings and results that are currently in the single well cut-offs they should be saved before starting to use the multi-well cut-off module. To do this, see the section below on the Topsets. The module is accessed under the main menu Interpretation

Multi Well Cutoff and

Summation. On selecting Multi Well Cutoff and Summation the Select Wells module appears. This allows the user to create a well list or to select from a saved well list.

To select a well, click on one or more of the available wells and then use the left arrow (>) to move the selected item to the right panel. Wells can also be dragged from the Available Wells panel to the Selected Wells column. The double arrow (>>) boxes will move all wells from the available to the selected or vice versa.

Section 12.6 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-well Cutoff and Summation

Working with Multiple Wells

Senergy

1590

Once the wells have been selected the Multi Well Cutoff and Summation module opens. It consists of 7 tabs: Curve Set-Up, Input Curves, Output Curves, Zones, Reports, Cutoffs, Results

The user must set up all the window tabs before clicking the OK button to calculate the Summation Results.

Curve Set-up Tab The Curve Set-up tab allows the user to select the curves that will be used in the Cutoff / Summation routine. One must set up the Porosity and Water Saturation curves to be used for the report. A Clay Volume curve is optional. One can also optionally select up to 7 additional curves that will have zonal averages computed for them, in each selected well. For example, one might want to report average Gamma Ray value, average bulk density or average computed Permeability by zone. You must type in a Cutoff Name and Short Name for each additional curve to be used. The averaging technique used for each additional input curve can also be changed using the drop-down list in the Average Method column. Clicking in a cell in this column allows you to choose on of Arithmetic, Geometric or Harmonic averages.

Section 12.6 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-well Cutoff and Summation

1591

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The Use column allows the user to include or exclude an input curve row from the Summation report. For example, if the user had made a report as shown above and then wished to remove all the optional curves from the report, the user could simply uncheck the Use column for the extra Cutoff Name entries and re-run the report without having to remove the extra input curves for every well. If you have deviated wells, which have TVDSS curves, you can output a Summation report using TVDSS depths by checking the Calculate TVD/TVT report check-box.

Input Curves Tab The Input Curves tab sets up the input curves for the selected wells. Curves must be entered into the Porosity and Water Saturation rows in the grid, for each well. The Clay Volume curve is optional, but must be entered if clay volume is used as a cut-off. Up to 7 other input curves can be entered. If a name is entered in the Cutoff Name column of the Curve Set-up tab, a corresponding row will be set up on the Input Curves tab. If an input curve is not used as a cutoff then it is not necessary that the curve is entered for all wells. For example, if the average core permeability was going to be included in the report then this curve could be entered only for the cored wells in which the curve exists. If a curve name is typed into the Default Curve Name column, the program will try and find the appropriate curve in all selected wells and will populate that row of the grid. Alternatively, manually select curve names by clicking in a cell and selecting the curve from the drop-down list.

Section 12.6 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-well Cutoff and Summation

Working with Multiple Wells

Senergy

1592

The TVD/TVT entry is used for entering TVD or TVT depth curves. If entered, the net thicknesses will be output in TVD or TVT thickness. It is not necessary that all wells have a TVD curve. The report will show which depth reference is being used for each well.

Output Curves Tab The Output Curves tab allows the selection of curve names for the output results. If a curve name cell is left blank then no curve will be output. To change a curve name, select the cell and type in a new name or choose a curve name in the well from the drop-down list. To change all curve names in one row, type the new curve name in the Default Curve Name column. Typing a blank in a cell in this column will remove the curve output for all wells. The Pay Flag and Reservoir Flag curves must be output. However, their names can be changed from the default names.

Section 12.6 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-well Cutoff and Summation

1593

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Zones Tab The Zones tab allows the user to set up Summation Zones. Zones do not have to exist in all wells. Blank zone Top and Bottom depth cells indicate that a zone is absent in a well. For example, in Well A3, below, zone d is not present. To create a new zone, type a zone name into an empty cell in the Zone Name column. To delete a zone, click the mouse cursor in a cell in the appropriate row and click the Delete Zone button.

Section 12.6 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-well Cutoff and Summation

Senergy

Working with Multiple Wells

1594

The Sub Total parameter column allows the user to compute average reservoir properties either: over a number of zones, i.e. a composite zone, or to compute a sub total which is, for example, half the thickness of an existing zone. Sub Total zones have no associated cut-offs, but use the interpretation results from the normal zones to determine net pay or net reservoir average properties. The user flags that a zone is a Sub Total by checking the appropriate cell in the grid. For example, if one wants to have a summary of the top two zones one could create a Sub Total of the top two zones. To make a zone a Sub Total, click in the Sub Total column. To automatically create a new Sub Total for all wells, click the New Sub Total button. The following window will appear.

Section 12.6 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-well Cutoff and Summation

1595

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Select the zones to be grouped together as a Sub Total and enter a name for this Sub Total. Clicking the OK button will then create the new Sub Total.

The order in which zones appear in the final report depends on the type of report required. If a separate result file is created for each well, then the zones will be ordered by depth. For reports with all the well results in a single file, the order of the zones will be the same as the order in the Zone tab. To change the order of zones click in a row and use the up and down arrows on the

Section 12.6 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-well Cutoff and Summation

Working with Multiple Wells

Senergy

1596

Zone tab.

Reports Tab The Reports tab allows the user to set up the type of report to be produced. The default setting is to create a combined Net Reservoir and Net Pay report, labelled Reservoir and Pay for each of the selected wells. To output a Report Name, check the Use column.

Cutoffs Tab The Cutoffs tab allows the user to set up cut-off values for each zone. The same zonal cut-offs are used in each selected well in the grid. All zones, set up in the Zones tab, will be displayed here except Sub Totals. Sub Totals have no associated cut-off values, since they are created from other zones, which have their own cut-offs defined.

Section 12.6 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-well Cutoff and Summation

1597

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

If cut-offs do not need to be applied to an input curve, for example for Gamma Ray in the screen capture shown above, remove the ticks from the Use column for that curve. To turn on and off all the ticks in a column, click on the Use label in the column header, to activate it, then click in a cell in the column to toggle between checked and un-checked. To change the cut-off value for all zones in a column, edit the value in the top row of the grid and then click on the Value label in the column header. This will set all the cut-off values to the same as the top cell value. The Minimum Height allows the user to set the minimum thickness of a zone in order for it to count as net reservoir (Reservoir sub-tab) or net pay (Pay sub-tab). The default is 0. (All depth intervals will count towards net if they meet the cut-off criteria). The Cutoffs tab grid can be scrolled to the right to view any extra input curves, if these are required in the output report.

Results Tab The Results tab sets up the type of report to generate. Two basic outputs can be produced. These are: Output Individual files per well radio button, if selected, will create a separate output file for each well. Each of these files will be identical to that which is normally produced by the single well cut-off and summation module. The Output one file for all wells radio button, if selected, will output all the well summation

Section 12.6 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-well Cutoff and Summation

Working with Multiple Wells

Senergy

1598

results into one single file.

The Separate pay and Reservoir results check-box, if checked, will activate the Sort by Zone and Sort by Well radio buttons, which allow the separation of the pay results and reservoir results so that they can be grouped by zone or well. If not checked, results will be output in a similar format to the single well summation report, combined in one file. The Sort by zone box, if checked, will output the results sorted by zone. For example all the results for top zone will be displayed for each well then all the results for the second zone etc... The Sort by Well option will output the results sorted by well, but separating the pay and reservoir results into different sections. The Output Field average results check-box, if checked, will create a new entry in the output results file called All Wells. This entry will contain the field average values for all the zones. The field averages are net thickness weighted averages. Add Zone X/Y location to report check-box, if checked, will include, where deviation survey data are available in the selected wells, in the output report, the X/Y coordinates of the top of each reservoir zone. Output TVD depths on same line as Measured Depths check-box, if checked, will create additional columns in the output file reporting the top and bottom depths in TVDSS, and net TVD thickness for each reservoir zone. The default option (un-checked) is to put a second line in the report that contains the TVD/TVT/ Net results for each zone.

Section 12.6 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-well Cutoff and Summation

1599

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Output to - Summation Reports can be sent directly to a printer or to a disk file by selecting one of the Output to radio buttons. Selecting the File option allows the user to choose the format of the output file. The comma-delimited file is compatible with spreadsheet programs. The .rtf file output will contain a format similar to what was sent to the printer. When the OK button is clicked, the program will automatically launch a program to display the file results. The program launched will depend on the setup default program for the file type. For example .csv could launch Microsoft Excel, .txt could launch Microsoft NotePad and .rtf could launch Microsoft Word. To output the .csv file using semi-colons instead of commas as the delimiter go to Tools

Options

Miscellaneous Options

CSV Delimiter.

Topsets button The Topsets button has several functions: It allows the user to save all the current cut-off results, for all wells, under a new cut-off Set name. This could be useful if one wanted to restore the previous cut-offs and zones at a later date. It allows the user to reload a saved Tops Set. It loads Tops Sets of different types to the cut-offs Tops Set. This means that a Tops Set that has been loaded to IP using the Edit Zones /Tops Sets functionality, can be imported into the multi-well cut-offs module and then used for producing summation reports. Clicking the Topsets button produces the following window:

Section 12.6 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-well Cutoff and Summation

Working with Multiple Wells

Senergy

1600

The top section of the window allows the user to save the current parameters for the cut-off modules for the individual wells selected. This is the same functionality as seen in the Load and Save Parameter Sets button on the cut-off input window, except that it runs on all wells currently selected in the module. The Set name is entered into the box and then the Save to Database or Save to Disk File is clicked. To restore a previously saved Parameter Set, select the required Set in the list window and click Load from Database. If the All Sets box is checked then Sets of a different type to a Cutoff Set can be loaded. In this case only the zone names and zone top depths will be loaded. It is possible that Parameter Sets for all wells may not be available to load. The number of wells Num Wells found for each Parameter Set name is displayed. If a Parameter Set is not available for a particular well then nothing will be loaded for that well. However, the Parameter Sets will be loaded for the other wells. The Load From Disk File button allows the the user to re-load Parameter Sets that have been written to separate disk files using the Save to Disk File button.

Section 12.6 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-well Cutoff and Summation

1601

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The Save and Load buttons on the main window allow the user to save and restore the multi-well cut-off setup windows. The multi-well cut-off setup is not saved when you exit the program or change the database. Therefore, it is good practice to save the format after running the module. An example output for two wells, plus the all wells average follows. The listing was generated using the Sort by Zone option. cut-off SUMMARY REPORT Date : 25/04/02 10:23:44

NET RESERVOIR ROCK SUMMARY Well Phi*So*H All Wells XYZ 1 XYZ 3 All Wells XYZ 1 XYZ 3 All Wells XYZ 1 XYZ 3 All Wells XYZ 1 XYZ 3 All Wells XYZ 1 XYZ 3

Zone Name Type Units Top C Sand C Sand C Sand B Sand B Sand B Sand Mid Shale Mid Shale Mid Shale A Sand A Sand A Sand All Zones All Zones All Zones

MD MD MD MD MD MD MD MD MD MD MD MD MD MD MD

Bottom Gross

97.75 ft 7295.00 7416.50 121.50 ft 6970.00 7044.00 74.00 97.00 ft 7416.50 7552.00 135.50 ft 7044.00 7102.50 58.50 19.50 ft 7552.00 7565.50 13.50 ft 7102.50 7128.00 25.50 52.00 ft 7565.50 7656.50 91.00 ft 7128.00 7141.00 13.00 66.56 ft 7295.00 7656.50 361.50 ft 6970.00 7141.00 171.00

Net 97.00 121.50 72.50 97.00 135.50 58.50 6.50 2.75 10.2 44.8 77.5 12.2 61.3 337.25 153.50

N/G Av Phi Av Sw Av Vcl Phi*H 0.992 1.000 0.980 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.333 0.204 0.402 0.863 0.852 0.942 0.922 0.933 0.898

0.222 0.206 0.248 0.236 0.223 0.265 0.171 0.187 0.167 0.189 0.187 0.201 0.220 0.029 0.064

0.141 0.197 0.064 0.131 0.194 0.010 0.128 0.478 0.022 0.681 0.770 0.161 0.222 0.161 0.161

0.024 0.021 0.030 0.043 0.039 0.053 0.156 0.086 0.174 0.046 0.037 0.099 0.039 0.032 0.054

21.517 25.020 18.014 22.905 30.284 15.527 1.112 0.514 1.710 8.475 14.492 2.458 13.502 9.832 9.832

18.477 20.087 16.867 19.895 24.421 15.368 0.970 0.268 1.672 2.701 3.339 2.063 10.511 8.252 8.252

Well Zone Name Type Units Top Bottom Gross Net N/G Av Phi Av Sw Av Vcl Phi*H Phi*So*H All Wells C Sand MD 97.75 97.00 0.992 0.222 0.141 0.024 21.517 XYZ 1 C Sand MD ft 7295.00 7416.50 121.50 121.50 1.000 0.206 0.197 0.021 25.020 XYZ 3 C Sand MD ft 6970.00 7044.00 74.00 72.50 0.980 0.248 0.064 0.030 18.014 All Wells B Sand MD 145.88 145.13 0.995 0.231 0.134 0.037 33.581 XYZ 1 B Sand MD ft 7416.50 7552.00 135.50 134.75 0.994 0.224 0.192 0.039 30.119 XYZ 3 B Sand MD ft 7044.00 7102.50 58.50 58.50 1.000 0.265 0.010 0.053 15.527 All Wells Mid Shale MD 92.44 78.19 0.846 0.227 0.129 0.047 17.720 XYZ 1 Mid Shale MD ft 7552.00 7565.50 13.50 1.00 0.074 0.149 0.381 0.218 0.149 XYZ 3 Mid Shale MD ft 7102.50 7128.00 25.50 10.25 0.402 0.167 0.022 0.174 1.710 All Wells A Sand MD 98.22 54.59 0.556 0.217 0.174 0.045 11.866 XYZ 1 A Sand MD ft 7565.50 7656.50 91.00 20.50 0.225 0.187 0.415 0.012 3.835 XYZ 3 A Sand MD ft 7128.00 7141.00 13.00 10.50 0.808 0.207 0.111 0.096 2.178 All Wells All Zones MD 66.56 53.69 0.807 0.225 0.144 0.038 12.069 XYZ 1 All Zones MD ft 7295.00 7656.50 361.50 337.25 0.933 0.026 0.111 0.032 8.711 XYZ 3 All Zones MD ft 6970.00 7141.00 171.00 153.50 0.898 0.057 0.111 0.054 8.711 7.744

18.477 20.087 16.867 29.092 24.339 15.368 15.428 0.092 1.672 9.803 2.243 1.936 10.325 7.744

NET PAY SUMMARY

cut-offs USED Zone Name C Sand B Sand Mid Shale

Phi Pay > 0.100 > 0.100 > 0.100

Sw Pay < 0.500 Y < 0.500 Y < 0.500 Y

Vcl Pay < 0.500 < 0.500 < 0.500

Section 12.6 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-well Cutoff and Summation

Working with Multiple Wells

Senergy A Sand

> 0.100

< 0.500

Y

1602

< 0.500

Related Topics Cut-off and Summations Manage Cutoff and Summation Results Launch Mutli-Well Cutoff and Summation Output to a Single File

12.6.1 Launch Mutli-Well Cutoff and Summation To launch the Multi-Well Cutoff and Summation Module: From the Multi-Well Menu, Select Multi-Well Cutoff and Summation to display the Select Wells Dialog.

Select the Required Wells and Click OK to Display the Multi-Well Cutoff and Summations Dialog.

Section 12.6 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-well Cutoff and Summation

1603

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Related Topics Cut-off and Summations Manage Cutoff and Summation Results Launch Mutli-Well Cutoff and Summation Output to a Single File

12.6.2 Output to a Single File Output to a Single File The Reporting Panel when Outputting Individual Files per well displays the File Output Panel. This panel is only available when output is to individual files.

Section 12.6 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-well Cutoff and Summation

Working with Multiple Wells

Senergy

1604

‘Output files to well directories’ if checked (default) will output each file to the individual well directory. If unchecked then all files will go to the project directory. ‘Use Well Name in file name’ if checked (default) will change the output file name to ‘Summation ----‘ where ‘----‘ is the well name. If not checked the file name will be the same as the cutoff set name for each well.

Related Topics Cut-off and Summations Manage Cutoff and Summation Results Launch Mutli-Well Cutoff and Summation Output to a Single File

Section 12.6 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-well Cutoff and Summation

Section

13 Calculation and Correction

Calculation and Correction

Senergy

13

1606

Calculation and Correction

The 'Calculation and Correction' Modules provide the user with the functionality to perform log environmental corrections and to compute and convert various basic petrophysical parameters such as 'Temperature gradients', 'Rw from SP' and 'Curves from Zones / Parameters'. In addition, there are a number of modules that deal with interpretation 'parameters' and their distribution in a multi-well project setting. See 'Parameter Set Management' for a discussion of this important topic.

Related Topics User Formula Multi Line User Formula Basic Log Analysis Functions Temperature Gradient Rw from SP True Vertical Depth True Vertical / True Stratigraphic Thickness Curve From Zone / Parameters Curve Integration Environmental Corrections

Section 13.

Calculation and Correction :

1607

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Section 13.

Calculation and Correction :

Senergy

Calculation and Correction

Senergy

13.1

1608

Use-Defined Formula

The 'User-Defined formula' module can be used to manipulate 'conventional' single dimensional curve and multi-dimensional 'array' curve data, either: using a simple one-line-formula format, or incorporating various discriminator and 'if' / 'then' / 'else' logic statements as part of the computation. The module can be used to very-easily create a curve with a fixed value, or to calculate a complex formula. Discriminators can be used to limit the depth range over which the calculation can take place. It is worth avoiding the use of single letter curve names in the formula, such as the letter 'e' or combining letters and numbers in the same curve name, for example e42 etc. This can cause syntax errors. Performing math functions on array-type curves is discussed in the section on 'Working with array (multi-dimensional) curves'. The module is accessed from the main 'Calculation' menu

'User Formula' option.

The module works using the FORTRAN type expression; 'If … or / and … then … else …'. The example shown above uses values of the RDEEP and VCL curves to decide which porosity formula to use to create the result curve PHIden. The use of 'Discriminator logic', found in the top row of the window, is optional, and if the discriminator text boxes are left 'blank' then only the top Formula line ('then') is computed. The discriminator boxes can either contain curve names or numeric values. The following functions are available (The syntax for each function is shown in bold font at the end of each line) : * + -

: : :

Multiply Add Subtract

Section 13.1 Calculation and Correction : Use-Defined Formula

1609

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

/ ** ^ Log Alog

: Divide : Raise to power - x**y : Raise to power (same as '**') - x^y : Returns the Logarithm to the base 10 - LOG(number or curve name) : Returns the Antilogarithm to the base 10 of a number - ALOG(number or curve name) Ln : Returns the Natural logarithm of a number - LN(number or curve name) EXP : Returns 'e' raised to the power of a given number - EXP(number or curve name) Tan : Returns the tangent of an angle. Input in degrees - TAN(number or curve name) Sin : Returns the Sine of an angle. Input in degrees - SIN(number or curve name) Cos : Returns the Cosine of an angle. Input in degrees - COS(number or curve name) ATan : Returns the Arctangent of an angle. Output in degrees - ATAN(number or curve name) ASin : Returns the Arcsine of an angle. Output in degrees - ASIN(number or curve name) ACos : Returns the Arccosine of a number. Output in degrees - ACOS(number or curve name) Sqrt : Returns the Square Root of a number - SQRT(number or curve name) Abs : Returns the Absolute value of a number, a number without its sign - ABS( number or curve name) Min : Returns the smallest of two parameters separated by a comma - MIN( number1 or curve1, number2 or curve2,...) Max : Returns the maximum of the two parameters separated by a comma - MAX( number1 or curve1, number2 or curve2,...) Trunc : Truncates a number by removing all digits after the decimal place - TRUNC( number or curve name,num_digits) Random : Generates a random number between 0 - 1 at each depth level. Useful for adding noise to a curve. The 'Min' and 'Max' functions can be 'nested', for example - to provide limits to function equations. The following example would calculate a VCL curve from the GR curve and limit its result to between 0 and 1.

Section 13.1 Calculation and Correction : Use-Defined Formula

Calculation and Correction

Senergy

1610

The order in which expressions are evaluated is traditional. Braces/brackets can be used to 'nest' expressions. An example of using the 'Random' expression is given below:

NOTE: Since the result is completely random each time the formula is run then a different result curve will be generated.

Curve Name Selection using 'Curve Type'

Section 13.1 Calculation and Correction : Use-Defined Formula

1611

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Text-entry boxes that allow the user to manually type the curve name in, will also allow the curve to be selected using the generic 'Curve Type' reference (see Manage Curve Headers). The user prefixes an '@' character to the 'Curve Type'. For example '@GammaRay' will select the gamma ray curve, '@density' will select the density curve, etc...

Output 'Control' Options In the lower part of the 'User-Defined Formula' window, the check- and text entry-boxes enable the user to set the output curve properties: 'Clip Resultant Curves' - The 'Clip Resultant curves' check box, when 'checked' can be used to clip the output 'Result Curve' maximum and minimum values to within user-defined limits. The 'Minimum value:' and 'Maximum Value:' text entry boxes are only active when this check box is 'checked'. 'Result Curve' - The 'Result Curve' list box allows the user to select an output curve to write the computation results to, from the existing curve list. Alternatively, the user can type in a curve name for the 'Result Curve'. 'Units' - The 'Units' text box enables the user to type in a measurement unit for the 'Result Curve'. 'Check for null data' - The 'Check for null data' box, if 'checked', will check all input curves for null data (-999) and, if nulls are found, will set the output curve to null values at the same depth step. If not 'checked', then the user is responsible for handling null data problems within the equations. 'Auto Save' - The 'Auto Save' box, if 'checked', will automatically save a user-defined formula to an external ".frm" file when the 'Run' button is clicked. The ".frm" file will be named using the 'Result Curve' name. In the screen shown above, the auto-saved formula file will be called PHIden.frm. The 'Top' and 'Bottom' depths over which to run the computation, if left 'blank' will default to the entire well depth range. The user can manually type in depth values. Computation depth ranges can also be set using 'Zone Names'. 'Clicking' on the

button launches the

following 'Select Zone Depths' window:

Section 13.1 Calculation and Correction : Use-Defined Formula

Calculation and Correction

Senergy

1612

The user selects the 'Top Set' or 'Zone Set' from the drop-down list at the top of the window. You can then select the 'Top' and 'Bottom' depths from the zone list drop-down boxes. In the ' Return' panel, the user has the option of returning numerical values or zone names. If the 'Depth' option is selected, numbers are returned in the main User-Formula window. If the 'Zones' option is selected, then the actual zone names are returned, as illustrated below. When the 'OK' button is 'clicked' on the window, the selected zone top and bottom depths are returned to the formula window.

If 'Zone Names' are returned and the formula is 'Run' and 'Auto Saved' or 'Save Formula' is 'clicked', then these zone names will be used to look up the depth range over which to run the user-formula. The advantage of this option is that the same formula can be then be used in multiple wells and run over the same formation interval, even though the formation top and bottom depths will vary from well to well. This can be especially useful if the formulae are being run in the 'Multi-Well Batch' module.

Section 13.1 Calculation and Correction : Use-Defined Formula

1613

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Once the formula has run successfully a confirmation message will appear in the Status Bar.

The 'Save Formula' and 'Load Formula' buttons are used to save and reload the userformula so that they can be re-called and re-used. The default directory in which to save the expressions is defined under 'File'

'Set Default

File Location' on the main IP menu. 'Clear' button - The 'Clear' button clears all entries in the window so that a new formula can be created.

Working with Array (multi-dimensional) Curves All the Math functions that can be performed on conventional curves execute on array type curves. For example, applying the 'SQRT' function to an array curve will calculate and return the square root of each value in the input array curve to an output array curve with the same dimensions as the input array. In addition, functions can be executed involving multiple array curves. The following section describes how multi-dimensional array operations will be handled within the IP 'User Formula' and 'Multi-line Formula' modules. The examples show how IP handles math operations on arrays of different dimensions: The examples use the multiply (*) function for the illustrations. If the following array curve dimensions are defined ; 'Cap' : X = 100, Z = 2 'Por' : X = 1, Z = 2 'Phi' : X= 1, Z = 1 non array curve

Section 13.1 Calculation and Correction : Use-Defined Formula

Calculation and Correction

Senergy

1614

'Cp' : X = 2, Z = 2 'Result' : X = 100, Z = 2 Example 1. Result = Cap x Cp should yield : Result(1, 1) Result(1, 2) Result(2, 1) Result(2, 2) Result(3, 1) Result(3, 2) Etc etc

= = = = = =

Cap(1, 1) * Cp (1, 1) Cap(1, 2) * Cp (1, 2) Cap(2, 1) * Cp (2, 1) Cap(2, 2) * Cp (2, 2) NullValue Cp(3,1) does not exist NullValue Cp(3,2) does not exist

NOTE: Calculations only work where array dimensions are compatible. Example 2. Result = Cap x Por should yield : Result(1, 1) = Cap(1, 1) * Por(1, 1) Result(1, 2) = Cap(1, 2) * Por(1, 2) Result(2, 1) = Cap(2, 1) * Por(1, 1) Result(2, 2) = Cap(2, 2) * Por(1, 2) Result(3, 1) = Cap(3, 1) * Por(1, 1) Result(3, 2) = Cap(3, 2) * Por(1, 2) Etc etc NOTE: This is a special case where the Por array has only one X dimension. Example 3. Result = Cap x Phi should yield : Result(1, 1) = Cap(1, 1) * Phi(1, 1) Result(1, 2) = Cap(1, 2) * Phi(1, 1) Result(2, 1) = Cap(2, 1) * Phi(1, 1) Result(2, 2) = Cap(2, 2) * Phi(1, 1) Result(3, 1) = Cap(3, 1) * Phi(1, 1) Result(3, 2) = Cap(3, 2) * Phi(1, 1) Etc etc NOTE: This is a special case where the Phi curve has only one X and one Z dimension i.e. Non array curve

Related Topics User Formula Multi Line User Formula Basic Log Analysis Functions Temperature Gradient Rw from SP True Vertical Depth True Vertical / True Stratigraphic Thickness Curve From Zone / Parameters Curve Integration Environmental Corrections

Section 13.1 Calculation and Correction : Use-Defined Formula

1615

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Section 13.1 Calculation and Correction : Use-Defined Formula

Senergy

Calculation and Correction

Senergy

13.2

1616

Multi Line User Formula

The 'Multi-Line User Formula' module allows the user to create and execute multiple formula lines in a single interface. Intermediate steps in a calculation 'stream' can be set up to create output curves in order to QC the formula workflow. Formula lines can be 'flagged' as 'continuation lines' to enable very long character strings to be implemented in a user-friendly way. The module incorporates 'Excel' Spreadsheet style logic key words 'IF', 'AND', 'OR', compiles and executes 'nested' logic equations, allows formula lines to be 'commented' out and allows formulae to be saved and reloaded to be applied in multiple wells. NOTE: It is worth avoiding the use of single letter curve names in the formula, such as the letter 'e' or combining letters and numbers in the same curve name, for example e42 etc. This can cause syntax errors. The module is able to perform mathematical operations on array-type curves. This is explained in more detail in the 'Working with array (multi-dimensional) curves' section. The module is launched from the main IP 'Calculation' menu list or from the 'User Formula' Toolbar, which is launched from the 'View' menu

'Toolbars' option.

The user interface comprises a 'grid' type display which is organized in the following column order, from left to right:

'Line' : The Line number of the formula, saved to the external multi-line formula text file (.mlf) when the 'Save' Button is selected. 'Use' : A 'check' box flag, which toggles between 'on' / 'off', instructing IP to treat a line as a

Section 13.2 Calculation and Correction : Multi Line User Formula

1617

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

formula or not. If the box is not 'checked' then the line is treated as a text / comment line. The text is saved in the .mlf file, when the 'Save' button is clicked. This allows the user to include some explanatory documentation with the multi-line formula, as illustrated in Line 2, Line 4 and Line 7, above. 'Cont.' : A 'check' box flag, which toggles between 'on' / 'off', instructing IP to treat a line as the 'continuation' of the preceding equation line. This is useful for breaking up a long, complex formula into more manageable components. 'Out' : A 'check' box flag, which toggles between 'on' / 'off', instructing IP to treat the result of an equation line as an 'output'. 'Name' : When 'Out' is 'checked', the 'Name' text box is used to either type in a 'result curve name' or select the name of an existing curve from the drop-down curve list. 'Unit': When 'Out' and 'Name' are selected, the user can type in the 'curve units' for the output curve. 'Formula' : This text box is where the user either types in the formula that you wish to execute ('Use' column 'checked') or the user can type in comments that explain the multiline workflow ('Use' column 'un-checked') , as illustrated above. The following functions are available (The syntax for each function is shown in bold font at the end of each line) : * + / ** ^ Log Alog Ln EXP Tan Sin Cos ATan ASin ACos

: Multiply : Add : Subtract : Divide : Raise to power - x**y : Raise to power (same as '**') - x^y : Returns the Logarithm to the base 10 - LOG(number or curve name) : Returns the Antilogarithm to the base 10 of a number - ALOG(number or curve name) : Returns the Natural logarithm of a number - LN(number or curve name) : Returns 'e' raised to the power of a given number - EXP(number or curve name) : Returns the tangent of an angle. Input in degrees - TAN(number or curve name) : Returns the Sine of an angle. Input in degrees - SIN(number or curve name) : Returns the Cosine of an angle. Input in degrees - COS(number or curve name) : Returns the Arctangent of an angle. Output in degrees - ATAN(number or curve name) : Returns the Arcsine of an angle. Output in degrees - ASIN(number or curve name) : Returns the Arccosine of a number. Output in degrees - ACOS(number or

Section 13.2 Calculation and Correction : Multi Line User Formula

Calculation and Correction

Senergy

1618

curve name) : Returns the Square Root of a number - SQRT(number or curve name) : Returns the Absolute value of a number, a number without its sign - ABS( number or curve name) Min : Returns the smallest of two parameters separated by a comma - MIN( number1 or curve1, number2 or curve2,...) Max : Returns the maximum of the two parameters separated by a comma - MAX( number1 or curve1, number2 or curve2,...) Trunc : Truncates a number by removing all digits after the decimal place - TRUNC( number or curve name,num_digits) Random : Generates a random number between 0 - 1 at each depth level. Useful for adding noise to a curve. Sqrt Abs

Logical 'IF' / 'THEN' / 'ELSE' / 'AND' / 'OR' statements can also be implemented in the user scripts. They need to be formatted in 'Excel spreadsheet' style i.e. in brackets with comma separators between each statement. The 'AND', 'OR' statement only applies to one logical condition. If more than one logical condition is required then the 'AND' statement has to be nested. IF : IF(logical_test, value_if_true, value_if_false) AND : AND (logical1) OR : OR (logical1) The following example shows the syntax for an IF / THEN / ELSE type equation.

NOTE: the first processing step, when the 'Run All' button is clicked, is to re-combine all 'Continuation' lines into a single line statement to check the syntax, like that shown in row 6 of the example shown above. NOTE: The 'Output Curve' (the 'Results' curve) should be named in the first row of the grid, in the 'Name' cell. Curve 'Dpor' is the output curve for the formula shown above. NOTE: Rows in the multi line formula can be re-ordered by clicking in the 'Line' number box on the left-hand margin of the screen and dragging the row to another position in the interface.

Section 13.2 Calculation and Correction : Multi Line User Formula

1619

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Some examples of IF / AND and IF / OR statement syntax are illustrated in the following screen captures:IF(AND(x y),value_if_true, value_if_false) This is one way this statement could be entered:-

Alternatively, it could be written all on the same line:-

A statement which includes a number of 'AND' conditions could be entered like this:-

Section 13.2 Calculation and Correction : Multi Line User Formula

Calculation and Correction

Senergy

IF(OR(x z), value_if_true, value_if_false)

For more than one 'OR' condition then the equation can be entered like this:-

Section 13.2 Calculation and Correction : Multi Line User Formula

1620

1621

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

An example of using the 'Random' expression is given below:

NOTE: Since the result is completely random each time the formula is run then a different result curve will be generated.

Error Messages When the user 'clicks' the 'Run All' button, IP checks the multi-line formula syntax. If there are syntax errors, a message is launched which advises the user of the location of the error in the entered formulae. An example is illustrated below where a missing brace, ')', has been detected.

Section 13.2 Calculation and Correction : Multi Line User Formula

Calculation and Correction

Senergy

1622

This allows the user to 'de-bug' their formula.

The position of the missing brace, ')' is given as position 19. The text file below, is a manually created representation of how the Multi-Line Formula positional logic works.

The buttons which allow the user to add and delete rows in the grid and to set the depth range over which to execute the formulae are arranged below the formula text 'grid'. These are shown below:

Section 13.2 Calculation and Correction : Multi Line User Formula

1623

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

'Output Set' button - Allows the user to select the output Curve Set for the results curve from the formula execution. 'Insert Line' button - The user can insert additional lines in between entered lines in the multiline interface by clicking this button 'Add Line' button - The user can append additional lines to the multi-line interface by clicking this button. 'Delete Line' button - The user can delete a line from the multi-line interface by clicking in any 'cell' in the 'row-to-delete', then clicking the 'Delete Line' button. Alternatively, if you just want to temporarily switch 'off' an equation line, un-check the 'Use' cell in that line of the formula. 'Check for null data' 'check' box - when 'checked' the program will interrogate all input curves for null values. If null data are found then the multi-line formula will return a null value at the equivalent depth, in the result curve(s). if the option is left 'un-checked', null values will be counted in the computations and it is likely that there will be some unpredictable values in the output curves. 'Show Progress Bar' 'check box' - when 'checked' a progress bar is displayed indicating how far through the Multi-Line Formula calculation the module is once the 'Run' button is pressed. It should be noted that the progress bar adds overhead to processing resulting in increased time for the module to run. When used in a Multi-well Batch process this overhead can be significant. 'Top' and 'Bottom' depth entry boxes - the user can either: manually type in a depth range over which to run a multi-line formula. The default depth range, if the boxes are left 'blank, is the well top to well bottom depths, or use the 'Select Zone Depths'

shortcut button to launch the dialog from which to

choose a Tops Set and the Top Zone depth and Bottom Zone depth for the calculations,

Section 13.2 Calculation and Correction : Multi Line User Formula

Calculation and Correction

Senergy

1624

as shown above. The user selects the 'Top Set' or 'Zone Set' from the drop-down list. You can then select the 'Top' and 'Bottom' depths from the zone list drop-down boxes. When the 'OK' button is 'clicked', the selected zone top and bottom depths are returned to the formula window. In the 'Return' panel, there are two options to choose from. If the 'Depth' option is selected, numeric values are returned in the main Multi-Line Formula window. However, if the 'Zones' option is selected, then the actual zone names are returned, as illustrated below.

If 'Zones' are returned and the formula is executed and 'Save' is 'clicked', then these zone names will be used to look up the depth range over which to run the user-formula. The advantage of this option is that the same formula can be then be used in multiple wells in an IP database and run over the same formation interval, even though the formation top and bottom depths will vary from well to well. This can be especially useful if the formulae are being run in the 'MultiWell Batch' module. The 'function' b1uttons are arranged at the bottom of the interface:

'Run All' button - Clicking this button will execute all the 'active' formula lines (those lines with the 'Use' column 'checked'). The user will be informed if the formula(e) ran successfully or an error dialog window will be launched if the formula syntax is incorrect , for example having mismatched parentheses '()' in a long equation. The error message will indicate which part of the equation is incorrect. A 'Status' message is also displayed in the information bar at the bottom left-hand corner of the window. 'Load' button - Use this button to re-load a previously saved multi-line formula (.mlf) from file. 'Save' button - Use this button to save a newly-created multi-line formula to the IP database. 'Clear All' button - Use this button to clear all entries/ comments in the multi-line formula 'grid'.

Section 13.2 Calculation and Correction : Multi Line User Formula

1625

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Changing the order of Formula Lines The user has the functionality to change the order in which formula lines are executed by 'clicking' in the left-hand column and dragging a row up or down, to another position in the grid.

Inserting 'Comments' lines The user can insert text strings into a formula line in the interface which will be saved with the multi-line formula file. The 'Use' check box must be 'un-checked' so that IP does not try to use the line in the formula workflow.

Curve Name Selection using 'Curve Type' Text-entry boxes that allow the user to manually type the curve name in, will also allow the curve to be selected using the generic 'Curve Type' reference (see Manage Curve Headers). The user prefixes an '@' character to the 'Curve Type'. For example '@GammaRay' will select the gamma ray curve, '@density' will select the density curve, etc...

Using the 'List Curves / Sets' Functionality Curve names can be dragged / dropped into a formula line from the 'List Curves /Sets' list box as illustrated below. Note: a formula line will only allow curves to be dragged / dropped into it when the 'Formula' text box is bordered in a dark grey colour. Click once in a 'Formula' box to set the box to accept drag / drop entries. When the Formula text is 'highlighted' (white text on blue background) the drag / drop functionality does not work.

Section 13.2 Calculation and Correction : Multi Line User Formula

Calculation and Correction

Senergy

1626

Working with Array (multi-dimensional) Curves The 'Multi-Line Formula' module has been built to accommodate the use of array-type curves in calculations. All the Math functions that can be performed on conventional curves will now execute on array type curves. For example, applying the 'SQRT' function to an array curve will calculate and return the square root of each value in the input array curve to an output array curve with the same dimensions as the input array. In addition, functions can be executed involving multiple array curves. The following section describes how multi-dimensional array operations will be handled within the IP 'User Formula' and 'Multi-line Formula' modules. The examples show how IP handles math operations on arrays of different dimensions: The examples use the multipy (*) function for the illustrations. If the following array curves have dimensions defined as; 'Cap' : X = 100, Z = 2 'Por' : X = 1, Z = 2 'Phi' : X= 1, Z = 1 (non array curve) 'Cp' : X = 2, Z = 2 'Result' : X = 100, Z = 2 (the 'result' array curve dimensions) Example 1. Result = Cap multiplied by Cp should yield : Result(1, 1) Result(1, 2) Result(2, 1) Result(2, 2)

= = = =

Cap(1, 1) * Cp (1, 1) Cap(1, 2) * Cp (1, 2) Cap(2, 1) * Cp (2, 1) Cap(2, 2) * Cp (2, 2)

Section 13.2 Calculation and Correction : Multi Line User Formula

1627

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Result(3, 1) = NullValue Cp(3,1) does not exist Result(3, 2) = NullValue Cp(3,2) does not exist Etc etc NOTE: Calculations only work where array dimensions are compatible. Example 2. Result = Cap multiplied by Por should yield : Result(1, 1) = Cap(1, 1) * Por(1, 1) Result(1, 2) = Cap(1, 2) * Por(1, 2) Result(2, 1) = Cap(2, 1) * Por(1, 1) Result(2, 2) = Cap(2, 2) * Por(1, 2) Result(3, 1) = Cap(3, 1) * Por(1, 1) Result(3, 2) = Cap(3, 2) * Por(1, 2) Etc etc NOTE: This is a special case where the 'Por' array has only one X dimension. Example 3. Result = Cap multiplied by Phi should yield : Result(1, 1) = Cap(1, 1) * Phi(1, 1) Result(1, 2) = Cap(1, 2) * Phi(1, 1) Result(2, 1) = Cap(2, 1) * Phi(1, 1) Result(2, 2) = Cap(2, 2) * Phi(1, 1) Result(3, 1) = Cap(3, 1) * Phi(1, 1) Result(3, 2) = Cap(3, 2) * Phi(1, 1) Etc etc NOTE: This is a special case where the 'Phi' curve has only one X and one Z dimension i.e. Non array curve

Related Topics User Formula Multi Line User Formula Basic Log Analysis Functions Temperature Gradient Rw from SP True Vertical Depth True Vertical / True Stratigraphic Thickness Curve From Zone / Parameters Curve Integration Environmental Corrections

Section 13.2 Calculation and Correction : Multi Line User Formula

Calculation and Correction

Senergy

13.3

1628

Basic Log Functions

The 'Basic Log Analysis Functions' module performs a number of simple log analysis calculations and unit conversions. The module is arranged on five 'tabs'. These are: The Porosity Tab calculates Porosity from Density, Sonic and Neutron Curves. The Matrix Tab calculates various lithology indicator curves. The Rw Apparent / Sw Tab calculates quick-look type apparent water resistivities plus water saturations calculated from Archie's equation. The Permeability tab calculates permeability using an industry standard formula. The Derivatives Tab calculates the first and second derivative of a curve. The first derivative operation calculates the slope of the input curve, the second derivative operation, the rate of change of the slope. These derivative curves can be useful for automatic bed boundary picking. The Miscellaneous Tab calculates Velocity, Differential Caliper, Volumetric Cross Section and Conductivity. The Conversions Tab completes some standard conversions of log analysis type data. The conversions provide the functionality of various charts found in the standard chart books. The Conversions 2 calculates downhole oil and gas densities from surface density measurements. The correlations used are the same as those used in the 'Rock Physics' module and come from the paper by Batzle and Wang "Seismic Properties of Pore Fluids", Geophysics (1992). The Horner Plot Tab calculates a formation temperature from bottom hole temperature measurements. A Log / Lin plot of Horner Time against temperature is created. The points are curve fit and the line extrapolated to a Horner time of 1.0 to give the formation temperature. Each 'tab' works as a stand-alone operation and the 'Run Tab' button must be 'clicked' for each page to compute the calculations. However, if the module is used in the 'Multi-Well Batch' module, then each tab will be run automatically, if an output curve name is specified and the module tick box is 'checked'.

Related Topics User Formula Multi Line User Formula Basic Log Analysis Functions Temperature Gradient Rw from SP True Vertical Depth

Section 13.3 Calculation and Correction : Basic Log Functions

1629

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

True Vertical / True Stratigraphic Thickness Curve From Zone / Parameters Curve Integration Environmental Corrections

13.3.1 Density Porosity The Porosity Tab calculates Porosity from Density, Sonic and Neutron Curves. To Display the Basic Log Functions Dialog: From the Calculation Menu, Click Basic Log Functions to Open the Basic Log Functions Dialog with the Porosity Tab displayed.

Calculate Density Porosity To calculate Density Porosity, Select the Density Checkbox Specify the Input Density Curve, the Output Porosity Curve , the Matrix Density and the Fluid Density.

Click Run Tab to Run the Calculation and Output the Result to the Output Porosity Curve. Density porosity is calculated using :

Rho ma Rho ma

Rhob Rho Fluid

'Convert density porosity to Bulk Density' check box enables the user to calculate a bulk density curve from an input porosity curve using :

Rhob

Rho ma

1

Rho Fluid

When the 'Convert density porosity to Bulk Density' check box is 'checked' the 'Input Density' name changes to 'Input Porosity' and the 'Output Porosity' name changes to '

Section 13.3 Calculation and Correction : Basic Log Functions

Calculation and Correction

Senergy

1630

Output Density'. The selected curves within the boxes DO NOT change. It is up to the user to select the required input and output curves from the drop-down curve lists or to manually type in curve names before 'clicking' the 'Run Tab'.

Calculate Sonic Porosity To calculate Sonic Porosity, Select the Sonic Checkbox Specify the Input Curve Variables and the Output Porosity Curve.

Click Run Tab to Run the Calculation and Output the Result to the Output Porosity Curve. Sonic porosity is calculated using : Wyllie DT DTmatrix DTFluid DTmatrix

Cp

Hunt - Raymer 2 Vma Vf

2 Vma Vf

2

4 Vma

Vma V log

2 Vma

Where: Vma Vf Vlog

= 1/Dtma = 1/Dtfl = 1/Dt

Calculate Neutron Porosity

Section 13.3 Calculation and Correction : Basic Log Functions

1631

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

To calculate Neutron Porosity, Select the Neutron Checkbox Specify the Input Curve Variables and the Output Porosity Curve Variables.

Click Run Tab to Run the Calculation and Output the Result to the Output Porosity Curve. The Neutron input is already in porosity units and the routine simply performs lithology transformations. The user sets the input and output lithology along with the type of neutron tool. The program then looks up the lithology transform for the tool and outputs the corrected neutron porosity. The neutron tool lithology conversions are made using Look-up Tables. These are also used by the 'Porosity and Water Saturation' module. The 'Output Porosity' curve PhiNeu is a Neutron 'Curve Type' rather than a Porosity (Phi) 'Curve Type'. The 'Limits' option allows the user to limit the resultant porosity curve values to lie within a certain range. This can be useful for making sure no negative porosities are calculated.

Related Topics Porosity Matrix

Section 13.3 Calculation and Correction : Basic Log Functions

Calculation and Correction

Senergy

1632

Rw Apparent / Sw Permeability Derivatives Miscellaneous Conversions Conversions 2 Horner Plot

13.3.2 Matrix The 'Matrix' tab outputs various lithology indicator curves. The user enters the input curves and then selects the outputs required.

Define the Matrix Input Curves For the 'Density' curve a 'Fluid Density' value is required in the adjacent box. This will be the fluid density in the flushed zone. The 'Neutron' curve input must be in decimal limestone lithology units and its tool type must be set. If the input neutron is in sandstone units it must first be converted to limestone using the neutron equations in the 'Porosity' tab. The 'Sonic' curve input requires the fluid sonic input and the equation type, Wyllie or HuntRaymer.

Define the Matrix Output Curves

Section 13.3 Calculation and Correction : Basic Log Functions

1633

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The ability to Define the Matrix Output Curves are only enabled when the Input PEF Curve is defined.

'Rho matrix apparent' is calculated by first calculating the neutron / density crossplot porosity and then the matrix density using the density equation in the 'Porosity' tab. The neutron/density crossplot porosity uses the neutron tool type to generate the standard chartbook neutron/density crossplots for sandstone, limestone and dolomite and then calculates the crossplot porosity from where the data falls on the chart. 'DT matrix apparent' is calculated using the neutron / sonic crossplot porosity and the requested sonic equation to solve for DT matrix. The neutron / sonic crossplot porosity is calculated in a similar fashion to the neutron / density crossplot porosity. 'U matrix apparent' is calculated from the PEF equation using the neutron / density crossplot porosity. U matrixApp

U

U water

NDxp

1.0

NDxp

'U' and 'Uwater' are calculated from the PEF curve and the water density. Equations used for this can be found in the 'Porosity and Water Saturation' module. The 'M' and 'N' lithology identifiers are calculated as follows :

'M ' 'N'

DT fluid Rhob 1 Rhob

DT Rho fluid

0.01

neu

Rho fluid

Output Matrix Curves to a Crossplot Crossplots can be output automatically by checking the required crossplot and clicking the 'Make Crossplots' button.

Section 13.3 Calculation and Correction : Basic Log Functions

Calculation and Correction

Senergy

Related Topics Porosity Matrix Rw Apparent / Sw Permeability Derivatives Miscellaneous Conversions Conversions 2 Horner Plot

13.3.3 Rw Apparent / Sw The 'Rw Apparent / Sw' Tab outputs quick-look type apparent water resistivities plus water saturations calculated from Archie's equation.

Define Rw Apparent / Sw Input Variables

Section 13.3 Calculation and Correction : Basic Log Functions

1634

1635

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

NOTE: Either Input Curves or Fixed Values can be defined as the Input Variables, which could be useful for things like formation temperature where a fixed value may be required.

Define Rw Apparent / Sw Output Variables If a Porosity Curve / Value has not been defined in the Input Section, the Output Curve Options will be disabled. A Porosity Curve / Value MUST be defined to enable the Output Curves Checkboxes.

The Archie formation factor (FF) is also output. The following equations are used:

FF

' a' 'm '

Rt FF Rxo Rmfapp FF Rwapp

Sw

FF Rw Rt

Sxo

FF Rmf Rxo

1

'n '

1

'n '

Rw and Rmf will be converted to formation temperature using their entered temperature values and the formation temperature curve. If the Rw temperature and / or the Rmf temperature box are left blank then no temperature conversion will be made.

Related Topics Porosity Matrix Rw Apparent / Sw Permeability Derivatives Miscellaneous

Section 13.3 Calculation and Correction : Basic Log Functions

Calculation and Correction

Senergy

1636

Conversions Conversions 2 Horner Plot

13.3.4 Permeability The 'Permeability' tab allows for the calculation of permeability using an industry standard formula.

Define Permeability Input Variables The constants in the formula can be entered by 'clicking' on the 'Use' button in the 'Defaults' box or else selected as curves in the 'Input Curves / Values'.

Define Permeability Default Variables The 'Timur', 'Morris Biggs oil' and 'Morris Biggs gas' defaults come from the Western Atlas chartbook, whilst the 'Schlumberger Chart K3' is from the Schlumberger chartbook.

These equations are applicable only over zones which are at irreducible water saturation i.e. hydrocarbon zones above the transition zone.

Section 13.3 Calculation and Correction : Basic Log Functions

1637

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Define Permeability Output Variables

Related Topics Porosity Matrix Rw Apparent / Sw Permeability Derivatives Miscellaneous Conversions Conversions 2 Horner Plot

13.3.5 Derivatives The 'Derivatives' Tab allows the calculation of the first and second derivative of a curve.

Define Derivatives Input Variables The Input Variables required for the Derivatives Calculation are an Input Curve and the Number of Samples to use in Average numeric value. The 'Number of samples to use in average' field is used to determine the averaging of the data that goes into the calculations. A value of 2 will use the two data samples above and the two below the level of calculation for determining the slope.

Section 13.3 Calculation and Correction : Basic Log Functions

Calculation and Correction

Senergy

1638

Define Derivatives Output Variables Two Output Curves can be defined for the Derivatives Calculation. The first derivative operation calculates the slope of the input curve, the second derivative operation, the rate of change of the slope. These derivative curves can be useful for automatic bed boundary picking.

Related Topics Porosity Matrix Rw Apparent / Sw Permeability Derivatives Miscellaneous Conversions Conversions 2 Horner Plot

13.3.6 Miscellaneous The Miscellaneous Tab calculates Velocity, Differential Caliper, Volumetric Cross Section (U) and Conductivity. To Display the Basic Log Functions Dialog:

Section 13.3 Calculation and Correction : Basic Log Functions

1639

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

From the Calculation Menu, Click Basic Log Functions to Open the Basic Log Functions Dialog with the Porosity Tab displayed, Click the Miscellaneous Tab.

Calculate Velocity To calculate Velocity, Select the Velocity Checkbox Specify the Input Curve, the Output Curve and the Output Units.

Click Run Tab to Run the Calculation and Output the Result to the Output Curve. NOTE: Velocity = 1 / DT

Input Units are acquired from the Input DT Curve. If no Input Units

are defined, the System Default for Sonic can be used. “UnitsConversion.pas” contains all the default routines and defaults needed for conversions.

Calculate Differential Caliper To calculate the Differential Caliper, Select the Differential Caliper Checkbox. Specify the Input Curve, the Output Curve and the Output Units.

Section 13.3 Calculation and Correction : Basic Log Functions

Calculation and Correction

Senergy

1640

Click Run Tab to Run the Calculation and Output the Result to the Output Curve. There are two options for calculating Differential caliper (DCal), Either Use DCAL as the Input Curve and Caliper as the Output Curve

or Use Caliper as the Input Curve and DCAL as the Output Curve

NOTE: Output units options should included, “Inches”, “mm” or “m”. “UnitsConversion.pas” contains all the default routines and defaults needed for conversions. The Parameter, Bit Size is displayed in the Default Units for the Caliper Curve. Caliper = DCal + Bit Size.

Calculate the Volumetric Cross Section (U) To calculate the Volumetric Cross Section (U) (U = Rhob * PEF), Select the Volumetric Cross Section (U) Checkbox. Specify the Input Density Curve, the Input PEF Curve, and the Output Curve.

Section 13.3 Calculation and Correction : Basic Log Functions

1641

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Click Run Tab to Run the Calculation and Output the Result to the Output Curve.

Calculate Conductivity To calculate Conductivity, Select the Conductivity Checkbox. Specify the Input Curves and the Output Curves.

Click Run Tab to Run the Calculation and Output the Result to the Output Curve. NOTE: Ct = 1000 / Rt and Cxo = 1000 / Rxo

Related Topics

Section 13.3 Calculation and Correction : Basic Log Functions

Senergy

Calculation and Correction

Senergy

1642

Porosity Matrix Rw Apparent / Sw Permeability Derivatives Miscellaneous Conversions Conversions 2 Horner Plot

13.3.7 Conversions The 'Conversions' tab completes some standard conversions of log analysis type data. The conversions provide the functionality of various charts found in the standard chart books. These routines do not output any curves. 'Resistivity Temperature Conversion' will either convert resistivities at one temperature to another temperature with its equivalent salinity or, if the salinity and temperature is entered, the resistivity will be calculated.

The 'Pressure' routine calculates pressure at a given depth in a well from a fluid weight.

The 'Water Density' routine calculates water density at a given temperature pressure and salinity.

Section 13.3 Calculation and Correction : Basic Log Functions

1643

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The 'Mud Resistivity' routines use empirical relationships to calculate Rmf and Rmc from Rm, or Rm and Rmc from Rmf. The equations are valid for salinities below 70 Kppm. The 'Lowe and Dunlap' option does not calculate Rmc.

The Lowe and Dunlap equations come from "Estimation of Mud Filtrate Resistivity in Fresh Water Drilling Mud's" The Log Analyst (March-April 1986). The Overton and Lipson equations come from "A Correlation of the Electrical Properties of Drilling Fluids with Solids Content" Transactions AIME (1958)

Related Topics Porosity Matrix Rw Apparent / Sw Permeability Derivatives Miscellaneous Conversions Conversions 2 Horner Plot

13.3.8 Conversions 2 This new tab calculates downhole oil and gas densities from surface density measurements. The correlations used are the same as those used in the 'Rock Physics' module and come from the paper by Batzle and Wang "Seismic Properties of Pore Fluids", Geophysics (1992). The Reservoir Pressure and Temperature Measurements MUST be defined for Calculation of all

Section 13.3 Calculation and Correction : Basic Log Functions

Calculation and Correction

Senergy

1644

Conversions to Run. The Oil, Gas, Sigma Water, Sigma Oil and Sigma Gas Sections will not be ACTIVE unless the Reservoir Pressure and Temperature Measurements have been defined.

Downhole oil density is calculated from the entered 'Oil' API and 'Gas Density'. Either the 'GOR' can be entered or the 'Gas Saturated' option 'checked'. In which case the 'GOR' will be automatically calculated assuming a gas saturated oil.

Downhole gas density is calculated from the entered 'Gas Density'.

'Sigma Water' is calculated using the charts in the Schlumberger chart book (Tcor-2a and Tcor3b).

'Sigma Oil' is calculated from 'GOR' using charts in the Western Atlas chart book (8-6 Rev1 1295 chart book).

'Sigma Gas' is calculated using the Schlumberger chart for 'Methane' (Tcor-1). If 'Wet Gas' is selected then the methane sigma is corrected as per chart 8-4 in the Western Atlas chart book. If 'Condensate' is selected then the methane sigma is corrected as per chart 8-5 in the Western Atlas chartbook.

Section 13.3 Calculation and Correction : Basic Log Functions

1645

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Related Topics Porosity Matrix Rw Apparent / Sw Permeability Derivatives Miscellaneous Conversions Conversions 2 Horner Plot

13.3.9 Horner Plot A Horner plot is used to calculate a formation temperature from bottom hole temperature measurements. A Log / Lin plot of Horner Time against temperature is created. The points are curve fit and the line extrapolated to a Horner time of 1.0 to give the formation temperature. To Create a Horner Plot: From the Calculation Tab, Select Basic Log Functions to display the Basic Log Functions Dialog, Click the Horner Plot Tab. Type Depth, Circulation Time, and then the Measured Temperature / Time Since Circulation Stopped. The Horner Plot will then be displayed with the result.

Section 13.3 Calculation and Correction : Basic Log Functions

Calculation and Correction

Senergy

1646

NOTE: The “Read Log Runs” button will look up the temperatures and Time since circulation stopped from the wells log attributes. The Parameter ‘Read from Log Run” will set where the program should start reading from. When clicked this should clear the current table before starting the read. It is possible to have multiple sets of these tables and graphics stored in the well. One set will be used for each logging job. The “Next Depth Level” and “Previous Depth Level” will allow the user to access all the levels. There should be some indication of how many of these tables are currently available.

Section 13.3 Calculation and Correction : Basic Log Functions

1647

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Click Read Log Runs to Display the Select Log Runs Dialog.

Click OK to Import the Values from the Log Runs into the Selected Horner Plot. Click Export to Temp Gradient to Export the Horner Plot Data to the Temperature Gradient Dialog. You will be prompted to Overwrite if the Temperature Gradient Values already exist.

Section 13.3 Calculation and Correction : Basic Log Functions

Calculation and Correction

Senergy

Click Yes to Overwrite the Temperature Gradient Values and Open the Temperature Gradient Dialog.

The Selected Horner Plot can be copied to the Clipboard by Selecting the Output to Clipboard Button. NOTE: The “Output Clipboard” will copy graphics to clipboard in EMF format.

Section 13.3 Calculation and Correction : Basic Log Functions

1648

1649

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Related Topics Porosity Matrix Rw Apparent / Sw Permeability Derivatives Miscellaneous Conversions Conversions 2 Horner Plot

Section 13.3 Calculation and Correction : Basic Log Functions

Senergy

Calculation and Correction

Senergy

13.4

1650

Temperature Gradient

The 'Temperature Gradient' module is used to create a continuous temperature curve, used in the interpretation modules for converting water resistivities to formation temperatures. The module is accessed under the main menu 'Calculation'

'Calculate Temperature Gradient'.

The temperature curve can either be calculated by entering a temperature gradient, or by entering temperatures at fixed points and the program will extrapolate between them. The temperature gradient is entered in degrees per 100 feet or meters, depending on the units of the well. A reference depth and temperature also need to be entered to give a starting point for the temperature curve. The output curve units are important and are used in the interpretation modules to make the correct temperature conversions. They are set by toggling the box to the right of the 'Output Curve' name box. 'F' for Fahrenheit, 'C' for Centigrade. The 'Save' and 'Load' buttons are used to save and reload the parameters in the module. This is particularly important if you want to use this module in the Multi-Well batch module.

Related Topics User Formula

Section 13.4 Calculation and Correction : Temperature Gradient

1651

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Multi Line User Formula Basic Log Analysis Functions Temperature Gradient Horner Plot Rw from SP True Vertical Depth True Vertical / True Stratigraphic Thickness Curve From Zone / Parameters Curve Integration Environmental Corrections

Section 13.4 Calculation and Correction : Temperature Gradient

Senergy

Calculation and Correction

Senergy

13.5

1652

RW from SP

The 'Rw from SP' module is used to create a continuous Rw curve. This is useful for estimating Rw values over a number of zones. The module is accessed under the main menu 'Calculation' 'Rw from SP'.

The user enters the baseline-shifted SP curve. The shale baseline must have been set to 0.0 mv. The baseline shifts can be made in the 'Interactive Baseline Shift' module. A Formation Temperature curve must be entered. If not available, one can be created using the ' Temperature Gradient' module. The result RwSP curve will be calculated and corrected to the output temperature entered. The output temperature can either be a curve or a fixed value. The optional Salinity curve (leave box blank if not wanted) converts the RwSP results to a salinity in units of Kppm NaCl equivalent. The 'Start Depth' and 'Stop Depth' boxes allow the user to specify the calculation interval. If left blank the whole well will be used.

Related Topics User Formula

Section 13.5 Calculation and Correction : RW from SP

1653

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Multi Line User Formula Basic Log Analysis Functions Temperature Gradient Rw from SP True Vertical Depth True Vertical / True Stratigraphic Thickness Curve From Zone / Parameters Curve Integration Environmental Corrections

Section 13.5 Calculation and Correction : RW from SP

Senergy

Calculation and Correction

Senergy

13.6

1654

True Vertical Depth Calculations

The 'True Vertical Depth' calculations module is used to create a continuous TVD curve from an input deviation survey file. It is essential that the TVD curve is calculated over the whole well interval. If the survey does not cover the whole well interval then a couple of assumptions are made by the IP program in order to calculate the TVD curve over the whole well interval. If the survey does not extend to the top of the well then a survey point at zero depth with zero deviation is added so that the survey can be calculated. This will mean that if at the first measured survey point the deviation is greater than zero then the deviation values from surface to the first measured survey point will be incremented to the value of the deviation at the first measured survey point. If the survey does not extend to the bottom of the well then a survey point at the bottom of the well is added with the same azimuth and deviation as the last measured survey point. If these assumptions do not fit the users' particular circumstances then they should take action to remedy their particular situation. The module is accessed under the main menu 'Calculation'

'True Vertical Depth' option.

The module is organized on two 'tabbed' screens. These are : 'TVD Model' Tab 'File or Keyboard Input' Tab Well deviation survey data can be loaded into the module in four different ways: 1. As curve data: The user should select 'Deviation' and 'Azimuth' curves that already exist in the IP well and 'check' the 'Input data from well curves' check-box. NOTE: the input curves must be continuous curves with data at every well depth step. No null values are permitted in the input Deviation and Azimuth curves. 2. File or Keyboard Input: The user supplies the deviation survey file name and format and loads the file using the 'File or Keyboard Input' tab. 3. Keyboard Entry of Deviation Data: The user manually enters the deviation data on the 'File or Keyboard Input' tab. 4. Load Data from External Files: The user loads data in from an external file using the 'File or Keyboard Input' tab.

Related Topics User Formula Multi Line User Formula Basic Log Analysis Functions

Section 13.6 Calculation and Correction : True Vertical Depth Calculations

1655

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Temperature Gradient Rw from SP True Vertical Depth True Vertical / True Stratigraphic Thickness Curve From Zone / Parameters Curve Integration Environmental Corrections

13.6.1 TVD Model The 'TVD Model' tab allows the user to set up some of the parameters used in computing TVD / TVDSS and XY coordinate curves, including the well datum depth, output curve names and deviation computation algorithm to be used.

Section 13.6 Calculation and Correction : True Vertical Depth Calculations

Calculation and Correction

Senergy

1656

'Correct for magnetic deviation' - The 'Correct for magnetic deviation' box allows the user to make adjustments to the input azimuth data, to correct it for magnetic declination changes between true north and magnetic north. If used, then the result-listing Azimuth will be the corrected Azimuth.

Calculation Method Panel The 'Calculation Method' is set by selecting the required 'Method' radio button. Only one method can be run at a time but, by saving the result listings to different curve names, comparisons between the methods can be made.

The following are brief descriptions of the calculation methods. 'Average angle' : The direction between two stations is assumed to be the average of the direction at each station. 'Triangular Tangential' : The hole is assumed to have a direction the same as the upper station for half the interval between the stations and a direction the same as the lower station for the lower half. 'Radius of Curvature' : A spherical arc is generated that passes through the two stations at the measured station angles. 'Minimum Curvature' : A circular arc is generated between the stations with a minimum curvature but still being tangential to the borehole at the two stations.

Calculation Reference Panel The 'Calculation Reference' panel allows the user to specify the positional references for the deviation survey calculations. These are the depth and X, Y position that the input survey uses as a starting position. The user can specify a reference depth which is above, below or in the middle of a deviation survey. For example, if the user wanted to match a known TVD – MD pair in a well they would enter these depths and the rest of the survey would be extrapolated up and down from this depth.

If the user wanted the program to calculate 'departure' curves 'EDIST' and 'NDIST' containing the

Section 13.6 Calculation and Correction : True Vertical Depth Calculations

1657

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

rectangular coordinates of the well bore from surface to well TD, type in the Surface UTM coordinates for the well location into the 'East distance at reference' and 'North distance at reference' boxes before running the module.

Output Curves Panel The 'Output Curves' panel allows the user to select the names of the output curves to be computed by IP. IP will compute both TVD and TVDSS curves, as well as XY positional curves, ' EDIST' and 'NDIST'. NOTE: It is essential that the TVD ,TVDSS, EDIST and NDIST curves are created for all wells in an IP database, if the user wishes to use either of the programs visualization tools; 'Well Map' and/or '3D Parameter Viewer' effectively.

The 'Azimuth' (HAZI) and 'Deviation' (HDEVI) curves are optional outputs. If a name is inserted into the output boxes, then the Azimuth and Deviation curves are generated at the Well Step increment, from the input deviation survey data, using the user-selected calculation method. MD Elevation - The 'MD Elevation' box will automatically pick up the value in the 'Above Permanent Datum' field in the 'Manage Well Header Info.' module, on the 'Default Parameters' tab, if it has been filled in. Alternatively, the user can type in the well reference depth value (usually height above Mean Sea Level) into the 'MD Elevation' box to allow the program to compute TVD and TVDSS curves. Note: if the TVD calculation module is run and the 'MD Elevation' value is subsequently changed in the 'Manage Well Header Info.' module, then the user will have to manually type in the new 'MD Elevation' value and the TVD calculation will have to be re-run for the well, before hitting the 'Run' button. Make TVDSS depths negative - The 'Make TVDSS depths negative' 'check' box is used to flag that the TVDSS depth curve, calculated by IP, should be written as negative values e.g 100, -200, -300 etc... below Mean Sea Level. The default setting, with the box 'un-checked', is that TVDSS depths are written as positive values below Mean Sea Level.

Related Topics

Section 13.6 Calculation and Correction : True Vertical Depth Calculations

Calculation and Correction

Senergy

1658

TVD Model File or Keyboard Input Load Data from External Files Keyboard Entry of Deviation Data View the Calculation Results

13.6.2 File or Keyboard Input The 'File or Keyboard Input' screen allows the user to view and confirm the input format of deviation survey data which can either be loaded from an external ASCII file, pasted in from an Excel or ASCII file or by manually typing data entries into the empty 'grid' at the top of the window. When an ASCII file is loaded and the appropriate data column format is applied, the ASCII data is copied into the Upper 'grid' window. Data points can be edited and added into this 'grid', if necessary, before running the computation.

Related Topics TVD Model File or Keyboard Input Load Data from External Files Keyboard Entry of Deviation Data View the Calculation Results

Section 13.6 Calculation and Correction : True Vertical Depth Calculations

1659

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

13.6.3 Load Data from External Files To load data from an external ASCII text file the user should first determine the format of the ASCII deviation data file: Is the Deviation / inclination data presented in 'Degrees' or 'Degrees and minutes' ? Is the Azimuth data presented in 'Degrees' or formatted as a 'Bearing' ? Then: Ensure the 'Load from file' check box is 'checked'. If either 'Deviation in deg /minutes' or 'Azimuth as a Bearing' applies to the input file, 'tick' the appropriate check-box. Enter the name of the ASCII survey file or select it using the 'Browse' button. 'Click' the 'Load' button to display the contents of the file in the lower panel of the window. The program will try and determine the format of the input file and will display the survey data in the grid at the top of the window if it can resolve the format. The user must make sure the formatting is correct before proceeding to calculate the survey. If the format is not correct, the user must manually set it. This is achieved in the 'Data Format' panel by: 1. If the Deviation (inclination) input is in 'degrees and minutes' then 'tick' the check-box 'Deviation in deg / minutes' in the upper right corner of the window. The 'Deviation is in column' number should point to the 'degrees' column of the Deviation / inclination entry in the input file. 2. If the Azimuth input is in a 'Bearing' format (for example 'N 30 W' or 'S 20.4 E', illustrated below) then 'tick' the 'Azimuth as a Bearing' check-box at the upper right hand corner of the window. The 'Azimuth is in column' number should point to the azimuth field on the Ascii file. The data should display in the upper, editing grid. 3. Set the line number for the first line of data in the 'Data starts at line' box. 4. Select the column numbers for the 'Depth', 'Deviation' and 'Azimuth' inputs. 5. Set the 'File Format Delimiter'. The options are 'Spaces', 'Tabs', 'Commas', ' Other' and 'Fixed'

Section 13.6 Calculation and Correction : True Vertical Depth Calculations

Calculation and Correction

Senergy

1660

The 'Fixed' format option allows the user to specify the format of the input data. This should only be necessary if the data has been generated using a 'fortran' type expression where one number can run into another. The user must enter the format of the data. This is done by entering the width of each input column separated by a comma. The following are valid format expressions: 8,8,10,12,12

This can be simplified by using brackets 2(8),10,2(12)

8,10,12,8,10,12 If an expression repeats you can leave out the repeat 8,10,12 10,10,10,10

This could be simplified as 4(10) or just 10

6. Click the 'Apply' button in the 'Data Format' panel of the window to apply the selected format. Once the data has been loaded into the 'grid' window at the top of the screen it can then be edited or added to by manually changing the numbers. The order of depths in the list is not important as the program sorts the data before making the calculations. The following examples illustrate the acceptable data formats for files to load deviation data into IP. NOTE: these deviation and Azimuth data could be included in much larger ASCII files, the user would then need to specify the column numbers to load into the TVD module interface. 1. Deviation in Degrees and Azimuth in Degrees: Dept h M 100 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500

Dev i at i on Deg 0. 4000 0. 9600 4. 8000 7. 7800 12. 5600 16. 5700 21. 4000 30. 2100

Az i mut h Deg 125. 03 98. 30 75. 32 65. 23 57. 92 56. 72 53. 20 53. 39

2. Deviation in Degrees / Minutes, Azimuth in Degrees:

Section 13.6 Calculation and Correction : True Vertical Depth Calculations

1661

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Dept h Dev i at i on M De g Mi n 100 0 56 500 0 27 1000 4 25 1500 7 36 2000 12 13 2500 16 29 3000 21 38 3500 30 06

Senergy

Az i mut h Deg 125. 03 98. 30 75. 32 65. 23 57. 92 56. 72 53. 20 53. 39

3. Deviation in Degrees, Azimuth as a Bearing: Dept h Met er s 100 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500

Dev i at i on Degr ees 0. 4000 0. 9600 4. 8000 7. 7800 12. 5600 16. 5700 21. 4000 30. 2100

Az i mut h Be a r i ng N 12. 01 N 16. 44 N 18. 96 N 34. 08 N 39. 68 N 45. 40 N 56. 72 N 58. 21

W E E E W W W W

4. Deviation in Degrees / Minutes, Azimuth as a Bearing: Dept h Dev i at i on M De g Mi n 100 0 56 500 0 27 1000 4 25 1500 7 36 2000 12 13 2500 16 29 3000 21 38 3500 30 06

Az i mut h Be a r i ng N 12. 01 N 16. 44 N 18. 96 N 34. 08 N 39. 68 N 45. 40 N 56. 72 N 58. 21

W E E E W W W W

Pasting in from an External File TVD data can be pasted in from an Excel spreadsheet or from an ASCII text file. It is easiest if the TVD data in the external file is in the same format as that in the module i.e. Depth, Deviation and Azimuth columns. Then it is simply a matter of copying the data in the external file, clicking in the first 'Depth' cell and then clicking the 'Paste' button. However, even if the data isn't in the correct format it is possible to copy and paste data on a cellby-cell basis either using the 'Paste' button or by utilising the 'Cut', 'Copy', 'Paste' and 'Delete' menu items which become available by highlighting the text within a cell and then right mouse button clicking.

Section 13.6 Calculation and Correction : True Vertical Depth Calculations

Calculation and Correction

Senergy

'Run' : Click the 'Run' button to calculate the survey and output the results to the well as continuous curves.

Related Topics TVD Model File or Keyboard Input Load Data from External Files Keyboard Entry of Deviation Data View the Calculation Results

Section 13.6 Calculation and Correction : True Vertical Depth Calculations

1662

1663

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

13.6.4 Keyboard Entry of Deviation Data Deviation Survey data can be typed manually into the input 'grid' at the top of the window. 'Check' the boxes to the right hand side of the grid window to select the format ('Deviation in deg / minutes' and / or 'Azimuth as a Bearing') if these are appropriate for your input data. The order of depths in the list is not important since the program sorts the data, using the Depth column entries, before making the calculations. Click the 'Add Line' button, located to the right hand side of the input grid to add new lines to the grid table. When manually entering data where 'Azimuth as a Bearing' is applicable, click in a cell in the ' Azi N/S' or 'Azi E/W' column to toggle between North/South or East/ West settings.

Related Topics TVD Model File or Keyboard Input Load Data from External Files Keyboard Entry of Deviation Data View the Calculation Results

13.6.5 View the Calculation Results The 'View Listing' button at the bottom of the window allows the user to list the calculated survey that has been saved to disk. When 'clicked', the user will be asked for the name of a file to save the survey to, and then the program will launch 'NotePad' with the survey file loaded. The resulting survey file can be reloaded at a later date, using the 'Input from file' option, and the calculation re-run. Example of part of a survey listing: TVD SURVEY CALCULATIONS Well : Date :

Test Well 1 07/02/2000 17:05:45

Section 13.6 Calculation and Correction : True Vertical Depth Calculations

Calculation and Correction

Senergy

Calculation Method Well reference depth TVD at Well reference depth East distance at Well reference depth North distance at Well reference depth Correction made for magnetic deviation

: : : : : :

1664

Minimum Curvature 0. 0. 0. 0. 10.

TVD output curve name : TVD East distance output curve name : EDIST North Distance output curve name : NDIST Measured TVD East North Input Input Leg Curvature Depth Depth Distance Distance Devi Azimuth Distance deg/100ft 0.00 0.00 0.0 0.0 Reference depth 0.00 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.000 10.000 0.000 0.000 1000.00 999.95 8.1 3.2 1.000 68.200 1000.000 0.100 1286.00 1285.78 17.3 5.8 2.820 76.200 286.000 0.642 1572.00 1571.16 35.6 8.7 4.640 84.200 286.000 0.660 1858.00 1855.81 63.2 9.2 6.460 92.200 286.000 0.690 2144.00 2139.45 99.5 5.0 8.280 100.200 286.000 0.729 2430.00 2421.78 143.6 -6.5 10.100 108.200 286.000 0.776 2716.00 2702.52 194.0 -27.4 11.920 116.200 286.000 0.829

Leg

Leg

TVD

East

Leg North

0.000

0.000

0.000

999.949

8.102

3.241

285.829

9.150

2.605

285.384

18.343

2.847

284.652

27.588

0.551

283.633

36.349

-4.265

282.329

44.096

-11.481

280.741

50.332

-20.876

Related Topics TVD Model File or Keyboard Input Load Data from External Files Keyboard Entry of Deviation Data View the Calculation Results

Section 13.6 Calculation and Correction : True Vertical Depth Calculations

1665

13.7

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

True Vertical / Stratigraphic Thickness

The 'TVT / TST' module is used to compute 'True Vertical Thickness' (TVT) and 'True Stratigraphic Thickness' (TST) depth curves which can then be used to make TVT / TST depth log plots and then these can be used as inputs to 'Cutoff & Summation' reports.

The module is accessed under the main menu 'Calculation

'True Vertical / True

Stratigraphic Thickness'.

Section 13.7 Calculation and Correction : True Vertical / Stratigraphic Thickness

Calculation and Correction

Senergy

1666

Before running this module, the True Vertical Depth module must be run or the results of the well deviation survey must have been loaded into IP. The borehole 'X', 'Y' and 'Z' ('NDist', 'EDist' and 'TVD') direction curves must be entered. The user must enter the 'Depth', 'Dip' and Dip 'Azimuth' of the formations to be calculated. The program calculates continuous TVT and TST curve over the whole well. Formations shallower than the 'top entered depth' will be assumed to have the same dip value as the entered top depth formation dip. Similarly, formations deeper than the 'bottom entered depth' will be assumed to have the same dip as that of the bottom entered depth. The 'Add Line' button is used for adding more lines to the grid for data entry. The depth order that the data is entered does not matter since it will be sorted into ascending depth order before running the calculations. Dip 'Azimuth' values can be entered as a bearing e.g. "N 12.01 W", by 'checking' the ' Azimuth in Bearing' box. The 'Pole Depth' is the starting position for the TVT / TST calculations and it is entered as the measured depth value from which the calculations are started. If a value is not entered, it is

Section 13.7 Calculation and Correction : True Vertical / Stratigraphic Thickness

1667

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

assumed to be the top depth of the IP well. The resulting 'TVT' and 'TST' curves will be aligned to the TVD depth at the Pole depth. Calculations for TVT and TST will be different, depending on whether the formation thickness being calculated is above or below the Pole depth (See diagram below).

'Click' the 'OK' button to first calculate the zonal TVT and TST thicknesses, which the program outputs as a report (click 'View Results' after first 'clicking' 'Save results' otherwise a message will appear informing the user that they have to re-run the calculations first). The program will then calculate the continuous TVT and TST curves which can be used for making TVT and TST log plots, or, in the 'Cut-off and Summation' module, for calculating TVT and TST zonal Net Reservoir / Net Pay results. The 'Save Results' button allows you to save the current result to disk (this has to be done before 'clicking' the 'View Results' button, the first time the module is run). The 'Load Results' button allows you to restore previously calculated results. The TVT and TST thicknesses between two formation tops / markers are calculated as follows: TST = H ( Cos(Hdev) – Sin(HDev) * Tan(Fdev) * Cos(Hazi - Fazi) ) * Cos(Fdev) TVT = H ( Cos(Hdev) – Sin(HDev) * Tan(Fdev) * Cos(Hazi - Fazi) ) Where: H

: Formation 'Measured Depth' thickness along the well bore

Hdev : Well bore deviation angle from the vertical Hazi

: Well bore azimuth

Section 13.7 Calculation and Correction : True Vertical / Stratigraphic Thickness

Calculation and Correction

Senergy

1668

Fdev : Formation dip angle from the horizontal Fazi

: Formation dip - azimuth

Display the TVDSS Report An example output listing follows: TRUE VERTI CAL AND STRATI GRAPHI Wel l : Tes t Wel l 1 Dat e : 08/ 04/ 2006 09: 28: 04 TVD i nput c ur v e name Nor t h i nput c ur v e name : Eas t i nput c ur v e name : Wel l Pol e dept h : TVT out put c ur v e name TST out put c ur v e name

CAL CALCULATI ONS : TVD NDI ST EDI ST 7614.

: TVT : TST

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| Meas ur ed Dept h | TVD Dept h | For mat i on | Hol e | Thi c k nes s | | Top Bot t om Di s t | Top Bot t om Di s t | Dev i Az i | Dev i Az i | St r at Ver t | -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------7614. 00 7700. 00 86. 00 7376. 92 7454. 32 77. 40 12. 00 60. 00 25. 79 127. 82 72. 81 74. 43 7700. 00 7779. 00 79. 00 7454. 32 7522. 41 68. 09 15. 00 90. 00 30. 44 135. 41 58. 52 60. 58 7779. 00 8000. 00 221. 00 7522. 41 7702. 20 179. 79 5. 00 270. 00 35. 42 139. 82 186. 61 187. 33 8000. 00 8634. 00 634. 00 7702. 20 8149. 28 447. 08 2. 00 256. 00 45. 12 145. 99 452. 46 452. 73 8634. 00 8726. 00 92. 00 8149. 28 8216. 57 67. 29 10. 00 330. 00 43. 00 144. 81 77. 11 78. 30 8726. 00 8738. 00 12. 00 8216. 57 8225. 34 8. 78 10. 00 330. 00 43. 00 143. 32 10. 05 10. 21

NOTE: unrealistic TVT / TST thicknesses can be computed in situations where the borehole deviation is high and formation deviation is high (>45 degrees), such that the well penetrates the bottom of the formation first , before penetrating the Top of the formation / interval of interest.

Related Topics User Formula Multi Line User Formula Basic Log Analysis Functions Temperature Gradient Rw from SP True Vertical Depth True Vertical / True Stratigraphic Thickness Curve From Zone / Parameters

Section 13.7 Calculation and Correction : True Vertical / Stratigraphic Thickness

1669

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Curve Integration Environmental Corrections

Section 13.7 Calculation and Correction : True Vertical / Stratigraphic Thickness

Senergy

Calculation and Correction

Senergy

13.8

1670

Curves from Zones / Parameters

The 'Curve from Zones / Parameters' module is used to create a continuous curve from a Zone / Tops set or from an interpretation module (Clay Volume, Porosity / Water Saturation, Mineral Solver etc...) Parameter set, where each zones depth interval is represented by a numerical 'Flag' value in the curve. The value applied in each zone can be set either to: the value of a particular interpretation parameter; for example Rw, m, ND DenClay, or the 'Zone Number', or A 'default', or user-defined value, based on 'Zone Names'. The module is accessed under the main menu 'Calculation'

' Curve from Zones /

Parameters'.

The user selects the 'Parameter Set' and the 'Result Curve' name. The zones for the selected ' Parameter Set' will be displayed in the right-hand panel. The user can edit the values to be set in the result curve for each zone. The 'default' value is to use the zone number as the 'flag' value. For example in the above example, if zone 'LS3' is from 7800'-8000' then the value '5' will be put into the result curve over this depth interval. If you have a multi-well Tops Set and you wish to assign flag curve values based on the Tops Set zone names this can be set up very easily - either take the default values based on the Zone Numbers (the numbers in brackets in the 'Zone Name' column) or change the 'value' entries to your own requirements. Click the 'Save' button to save the settings to an external, .ztc, disk file. You can then go to another well containing the same Tops Set, open this module and load the . ztc file you created earlier. This allows you to create a consistent 'flag' curve, based on your Tops Set zone names, for a multi-well dataset. If you select an interpretation module parameter Set, the 'Output parameter values' check-box

Section 13.8 Calculation and Correction : Curves from Zones / Parameters

1671

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

will become 'active'. If the box is 'checked' then a parameter associated with the user-selected Parameter Set can be chosen from the drop-down list box to populate the values in the output curve. The example, below, shows the 'Gamma Ray Clay' parameter (GR Clay) from the ' ClayVol' Parameter Set has been chosen. The number of Clay Volume interpretation zones in this well is displayed, along with the associated parameter values, in the right hand panel of the window.

The 'Save' and 'Load' buttons are used to save and re-load the parameters in the module. This is particularly important if you want to use this module in Multi-Well batch mode. When run in batch mode the actual parameter values that are saved into the saved parameter file are not used. The module loads only the 'Parameter Set', the 'Result Curve' name, the 'Output parameter values' option and the 'Output Parameter'. The number of zones and the zone values will be the default ones for the well. This means that the same parameter file can be used on multiple wells.

Related Topics User Formula Multi Line User Formula Basic Log Analysis Functions Temperature Gradient Rw from SP True Vertical Depth True Vertical / True Stratigraphic Thickness Curve From Zone / Parameters Curve Integration Environmental Corrections

Section 13.8 Calculation and Correction : Curves from Zones / Parameters

Senergy

Calculation and Correction

Section 13.8 Calculation and Correction : Curves from Zones / Parameters

1672

1673

13.9

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Curve Integration

The 'Curve Integration' module is used to integrate log curves. The module allows the integration of borehole volume, sonic transit time or any other curve in the database. The module is accessed under the main menu 'Calculation'

' Curve Integration'.

Borehole Integration For borehole integration the user enters an X caliper and optionally a Y caliper curve. The input and output units for the curves must be selected. The program will calculate a hole volume assuming a circular hole, X caliper only entered, or elliptical hole, X and Y calipers entered. The output curve will contain the integrated hole volume from the start depth to the stop depth. If the start depth is greater than the stop depth then the integration will be done in an upwards direction. The 'Delete Curve before write' check box, if 'checked', will delete the Output curve, if it already exists, before running the calculation. If the box is not 'checked', the output curve will be overwritten only between the start and stop depths. A 'Pip Curve' can be optionally output. This curve will contain a series of values of either 1 or 2, depending on the 'Small Pip' or 'Large Pip' values. The curve starts with a large pip (value 2) at the start depth. Each time the integrated curve reaches a multiple of the small pip value, a value 1 is stored in the curve. Each time it reaches an even multiple of the large pip value, a value 2 is

Section 13.9 Calculation and Correction : Curve Integration

Calculation and Correction

Senergy

1674

stored in the curve. In between the values, null (-999) data is stored. Pip curves can be plotted using the 'Pip' line style (example below).

Sonic Integration The sonic integration allows input in sec/m or sec/ft. Output can either be in seconds or milliseconds. The example below shows a pip curve displayed alongside the sonic log, giving the transit time in 1 millisecond per small pip.

Normal Integration The 'normal' curve integration operation will accumulate a curve from the 'Top Depth' to the ' Bottom Depth'. Each curve sample value will be divided by the well depth step between samples before it is accumulated. The result curve is therefore the 'Cumulative Value Thickness'. This is useful, for example, for calculating permeability footage (Md ft) across a reservoir interval.

Section 13.9 Calculation and Correction : Curve Integration

1675

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The 'direction' of the integration can be reversed, so that the accumulation is made from the bottom of the hole, upwards. This is done by putting the deepest well depth as the 'Top Depth' and the shallowest depth as the 'Bottom Depth'.

Related Topics User Formula Multi Line User Formula Basic Log Analysis Functions Temperature Gradient Rw from SP True Vertical Depth True Vertical / True Stratigraphic Thickness Curve From Zone / Parameters Curve Integration Environmental Corrections

Section 13.9 Calculation and Correction : Curve Integration

Calculation and Correction

Senergy

1676

13.10 Environmental Corrections The 'Environmental Corrections' calculations incorporate the functionality of the logging service company 'standard' chart book graphs and nomogram's. To Display the required Environmental Correction Dialog: From the Calculation Menu, Select Environmental Corrections, then the required Logging Company to display the required Environmental Correction Dialog.

Environmental correction calculations are presented here for: 'Schlumberger' 'Anadrill' 'Baker Atlas' 'Halliburton' 'Baker Hughes INTEQ' 'Sperry Sun' 'Weatherford/Reeves' 'PathFinder' An example of the environmental correction tabs are shown here for: 'Gamma Ray Logs' 'Density Logs' 'Neutron Logs'

Section 13.10 Calculation and Correction : Environmental Corrections

1677

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

'Resistivity Logs' The Baker Hughes INTEQ, Anadrill, Sperry Sun, Weatherford and PathFinder corrections are presented for their respective Logging-While-Drilling (LWD) tools. The Reference Chart Books are: Schlumberger - Log Interpretation Charts (2000) Halliburton - Log Interpretation Charts (1994) Baker Atlas - Log Interpretation Charts (1984) Baker Hughes Inteq 2002 Log Interpretation Charts (2002) Sperry Sun - Log Interpretation Charts (1996) Weatherford Log interpretation Charts Compact Tool Series (2007) Weatherford Log interpretation Charts Standard Tool Series (2007) Weatherford Log Interpretation Charts LWD Tool Series (2005) PathFinder LWD Log Interpretation Charts (2007) Log Interpretation Charts Links: Schlumberger : http://www.slb.com/content/services/resources/books/log_charts/index.asp? Baker Atlas : http://www.bakerhughesdirect.com (user login required) Baker Hughes Inteq : http://www.bakerhughesdirect.com (user login required) Halliburton : http://www.halliburton.com (user login required) Pathfinder : http://www.pathfinderlwd.com/pdf/dnsc_Environmental.pdf Sperry Sun : http://www.halliburton.com NOTE: We cannot guarantee that these links now work due to mergers, acquisitions, and just being downright awkward. The Corrections calculations are arranged on 'tabs', each 'tab' representing a different 'tool type'. The number of 'tabs' is determined by the tool-type corrections available from the Logging Service company. The following sections describe some of the controls and corrections available for each type of service: (Note: this list is not exhaustive but meant to clarify the operation of the tabs to someone already experienced with applying environmental corrections)

Gamma Ray The available environmental correction options are specific to the tool being corrected. The screen shot shown below is for the Gamma Ray log,

Section 13.10 Calculation and Correction : Environmental Corrections

Calculation and Correction

Senergy

1678

Here is a brief explanation of the options:

Input 'Gr input curve' - select the uncorrected gamma curve from the well data. 'Caliper input curve or Hole size (inch)' - allows the user to select a caliper curve or type in a fixed hole size for the borehole correction. 'Top Depth and Bottom Depth' - allows an interval for which the corrections are to be applied.

Outputs 'Gr output curve' - select or input the name of the output GR curve that will be

Section 13.10 Calculation and Correction : Environmental Corrections

1679

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

environmentally corrected. 'Filter curve' - The user is able to use the 'Filter curve' option, which applies a 'smoothing function' to the input curve, without running the borehole corrections, by 'un-checking' the 'Borehole Correct' 'check' box. The number of 'levels' of filtering can be set in the box next to the 'Filter curve' 'check' box - the levels must be a whole, odd number. The results can be viewed by selecting the 'Plot Results' button. A simple log plot will be launched showing the input curves and the GR output curve. The output curve name is editable.

Environmental Correction Options 'Borehole Correct' - This 'check box' is selected before pressing the 'Run Tab' button to ensure the following corrections are applied. The various 'Tool Position', 'Mud Type', 'Hole Type', 'Mud Weight', 'Tool Diameter', 'Standoff' and 'Cased Hole' corrections are only applied if 'Borehole Correct' is 'checked'. 'Tool Position [Eccentered/Centered]' - Selects the hardware configuration of the logging tool that recorded the data. 'Mud Type [Non barite/Barite]' - Selects whether barite mud was used. 'Hole Type [Open Hole/cased Hole]' - Selects whether the GR tool was run in open hole or through casing. 'Mud weight' - Allows the user to input the weight of mud that was used. 'Tool Diameter' - Allows the user to input the diameter of tool that was used to record the GR curve. 'Standoff' - Allows for a value of standoff to be input (should be completed if 'Eccentered' tool position was used. 'Cased Hole' - The user should complete these details if the GR should be corrected for casing effects.

Density The screen shot below is for the Density Log.

Section 13.10 Calculation and Correction : Environmental Corrections

Calculation and Correction

Senergy

1680

Here is a brief explanation of the options:

Input 'Density input curve' - select the uncorrected bulk density curve from the well data. 'PEF input curve' - select the Photoelectric factor curve from the well data. 'Caliper input curve or Hole size (inch)' - allows the user to select a caliper curve or type in a fixed hole size for the borehole correction. 'Top Depth and Bottom Depth' - allows an interval for which the corrections are to be applied. The number of 'levels' of filtering can be set in the box next to the 'Filter curve' 'check' box - the levels must be a whole, odd number.

Section 13.10 Calculation and Correction : Environmental Corrections

1681

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Outputs 'Density output curve' - select or input the name of the output Density curve that will be environmentally corrected. 'Filter curve' - The user is able to use the 'Filter curve' option, which applies a 'smoothing function' to the input curve, without running the borehole corrections, by 'un-checking' the 'Borehole Correct' 'check' box. The results can be viewed by selecting the 'Plot Results' button. A simple log plot will be launched showing the input curves and the 'Density' output curve. The output curve name is editable.

Environmental Correction Options 'Borehole Correct' - This 'check box' is selected before pressing the 'Run Tab' button to ensure the following corrections are applied. The various 'Mud weight' and 'Density Tool' corrections are only applied if 'Borehole Correct' is 'checked'. 'Mud weight' - Allows the user to input the weight of mud that was used. 'Density Tool [FDC/LDT]' - Allows the environmental corrections for the correct tool that recorded the data to be applied.

Compensated Neutron The following screens show the appearance of the 'CNL' neutron log.

Section 13.10 Calculation and Correction : Environmental Corrections

Calculation and Correction

Senergy

1682

Input 'Neutron input curve' - select the neutron input curve curve from the well data. (Note: by checking the 'Input Neutron hole size corrected' check box the user can indicate whether the Neutron input curve has a caliper correction already applied. By checking the box the caliper correction is 'backed out' and applied through the 'Holesize' check box.). 'Temperature curve or value' - select the temperature curve from the well data or input a temperature value that will be used in the temperature correction. (Select the 'DegF' or 'DegC' radio button). 'Caliper input curve or Hole size (inch)' - allows the user to select a caliper curve or type in a fixed hole size for the borehole correction.

Section 13.10 Calculation and Correction : Environmental Corrections

1683

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

'Top Depth and Bottom Depth' - allows an interval for which the corrections are to be applied.

Outputs 'Neutron Corrected' - select or input the name of the output Neutron curve that will be environmentally corrected. 'Filter curve' - The user is able to use the 'Filter curve' option, which applies a 'smoothing function' to the input curve, without running the borehole corrections, by 'un-checking' the 'Borehole Correct' 'check' box. The number of 'levels' of filtering can be set in the box next to the 'Filter curve' 'check' box - the levels must be a whole, odd number. The results can be viewed by selecting the 'Plot Results' button. A simple log plot will be launched showing the input curves and the 'Neutron corrected' output curve. The output curve name is editable.

Environmental Correction Options Borehole Correct - This 'check box' is selected before pressing the 'Run Tab' button to ensure the following corrections are applied. The various 'Hole size', 'Mud weight', 'Borehole salinity', 'Standoff', 'Matrix' and 'Pressure' corrections are only applied if 'Borehole Correct' is 'checked'. 'Neutron tool [CNT-A/CNT-C/D]' - Allows the environmental corrections for the correct tool that recorded the data to be applied. 'Input Matrix/Output Matrix [Limestone/Sandstone/Dolomite]' - Allows the Input Neutron Curve to be corrected for matrix. (If the user wishes simply to convert a Limestone matrix Neutron curve to Sandstone or Dolomite matrix, 'un-check' the 'Hole size', 'Mudcake', 'Temperature' etc.. 'check' boxes, select the 'Output Matrix' radio button for the appropriate matrix and press the 'Run Tab' button). 'Input Neutron hole size corrected' - (See Input). 'Holesize' - Allows for a correction to compensate for the hole size. The neutron tools response is calibrated for a hole of a particular diameter. The caliper curve or a fixed value can be selected in 'Caliper input curve or Hole size (inch)' as input to this correction. 'Mudcake' - This uses the 'Bit size' and then uses the 'Caliper or Hole Size' input to vary the amount of mudcake and correct for it (i.e. if the mudcake is 0.5" and the bit size is 8.5", enter the caliper as 8"). 'Borehole Salinity' - Corrects for Kppm (NaCl eq) in the borehole. 'Mud Weight' - Corrects for the density of the mud input in the associated box. The 'Barite

Section 13.10 Calculation and Correction : Environmental Corrections

Calculation and Correction

Senergy

1684

Mud' check box selects whether the correction used is for Natural Mud or Barite Mud. 'Borehole Temperature' - Applies the Borehole temperature correction from the 'Temperature curve or value' in the Input. 'Pressure' - Corrects the neutron tool's response for Wellbore Pressure. A single pressure value can be input into the associated box (the user should pick a value that best represents the wellbore pressure at the zone of interest). In addition, the correction is different for Oil Based Mud and this can be selected using the 'Oil Mud' check box and picking a value for the 'Compressibility Multiplier'. The pressure value can also be obtained from a depth curve selected from the 'Curve' drop-down box. To use this method the 'Calculate pressure from depth' box should be 'checked' and the 'Pressure' box 'unchecked' or the value left blank. This depth curve and the 'Mud Weight' are used to calculate the hydrostatic pressure which is then used in the correction. (NOTE: For deviated wells the TVD curve should be used for this correction). 'Formation Salinity' - Allows for a correction for Limestone formation salinity Kppm (NaCl eq).

Resistivity The following screens show the appearance of the 'DLL/MSFL/ MLL' resistivity corrections.

Section 13.10 Calculation and Correction : Environmental Corrections

1685

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Input 'Deep Laterolog (ohmm)' - select the uncorrected Deep Laterolog curve from the well data. 'Shallow Laterolog (ohmm)' - select the uncorrected Shallow Laterolog curve from the well data. 'Micro Resistivity (ohmm)' - select the uncorrected Micro Resistivity curve from the well data. 'Caliper input curve or Hole size (inch)' - allows the user to select a caliper curve or type in a fixed hole size for the borehole correction. 'Temperature curve or value' - select the Temperature curve from the well data or input a temperature value that will be used in the temperature correction. (Select the 'DegF' or

Section 13.10 Calculation and Correction : Environmental Corrections

Calculation and Correction

Senergy

1686

'DegC' radio button). 'Top Depth' and 'Bottom Depth' - allows an interval for which the corrections are to be applied.

Outputs 'Deep Laterolog (ohmm)' - select or create the environmentally corrected Deep Laterolog curve. 'Shallow Laterolog (ohmm)' - select or create the environmentally corrected Shallow Laterolog curve. 'Micro Resistivity (ohmm)' - select or create the environmentally corrected Micro Resistivity curve. 'Filter curve' - The user is able to use the 'Filter curve' option, which applies a 'smoothing function' to the input curve, without running the borehole corrections, by 'un-checking' the 'Borehole Correct' 'check' box. The results can be viewed by selecting the 'Plot Results' button. A simple log plot will be launched showing the input curves and the 'Resisitivity' output curves. The output curve name is editable.

Environmental Correction Options 'Borehole Correct' - This 'check box' is selected before pressing the 'Run Tab' button to ensure the following corrections are applied. The various 'Mud Resistivity', 'Mudcake Resistivity', 'Tool Type', 'Tool Position' corrections are only applied if 'Borehole Correct' is 'checked'. 'Mud Resistivity' - Correct for Resistivity of mud at reference temperature 'Mud Res Temp'. 'Mudcake Resistivity' - Correct for mudcake resistivity at reference temperature 'Mudcake Res Temp'. The mud cake thickness is calculated using the 'Bit size' and then the 'Caliper or Hole Size' input to vary the amount of mudcake and correct for it. 'Dual Laterolog Tool Type [DLT-B/DLT-D/E]' - Allows the user to chose the laterolog tool used to record the data. 'Tool Position [Eccentered/Centered]' - Selects the hardware configuration of the logging tool that recorded the data. 'Microresistivity Tool Type [MSFL(regular)/MSFL(Slim hole)/MLL]' -Selects the type of tool that was used to record the micro-resistivity measurement.

Related Topics

Section 13.10 Calculation and Correction : Environmental Corrections

1687

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Environmental Corrections Schlumberger Corrections Baker Atlas Corrections Halliburton Corrections Anadrill Corrections Baker Hughes Inteq Corrections Sperry Sun Corrections Weatherford Corrections PathFinder

13.10.1 Schlumberger Corrections The 'Schlumberger Corrections' environmental correction module uses the algorithms distributed by Schlumberger in their 'Green Book' library. Tool types are organized on a series of 'tabs' with appropriate parameter selection options on each tab, depending on the tool type. See Environmental Corrections for information on the operation of the tabs. The screen shown below illustrates the parameters for the Gamma Ray tool.

Section 13.10 Calculation and Correction : Environmental Corrections

Calculation and Correction

Senergy

1688

The list below gives an indication of which chart(s) (Schlumberger Log Interpretation Charts 2000 Edition) each of the tabs relate to. 'Gamma Ray' tab

Gamma Ray correction charts GR1, GR2 and GR3

'Density' tab

Environmental Corrections to Formation Density Log (FDC) and Litho-Density Log (LDT) chart Por-15a.

'CNL' tab

Compensated Neutron Log (CNL) Borehole correction charts Por-14a, Por-14c and Por-14d.

'Neutron

Compensated Neutron Log (CNL) NPHI-TNPH conversion

Conversion' tab

chart Por-14e.

'SNP' tab

Sidewall Neutron Porosity Log (SNP) mudcake and matrix correction charts Por-15a and Por-13a.

Section 13.10 Calculation and Correction : Environmental Corrections

1689

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

'DLL/MSFL/MLL' tab Dual Laterolog (DLT-D/E) Borehole correction charts Rcor-2b and Rcor-2c. Microlaterolog mudcake correction chart Rxo-2. MicroSFL mudcake correction chart Rxo-3. 'Induction' tab

Induction Log Borehole correction chart Rcor-4a. Spherically Focused Log (SFL) Borehole correction chart Rcor-3. Phasor Induction Borehole correction chart Rcor-4b and Rcor-4c.

'HALS Laterolog' tab No information at present. 'EPT' tab

EPT-G mudcake correction charts EPTcor-3a through to EPTcor-4b.

'DIL Invasion' tab

Dual Induction (DIL) - Spherically Focused Log (SFL) Invasion correction charts Rint-2b and Rint-2c. Deep Induction- Spherically Focused Log (SFL)-Rxo device Invasion correction chart Rint-5. Dual Induction (DIL)-Rxo device Invasion correction chart Rint-10.

'DLL Invasion' tab

Dual Laterolog (DLT-D/E)-Rxo device Invasion correction chart Rint-9b.

The 'Filter Curve' option allows the user to apply a filter to the result curve. This allows the user to resolution-match log curves. The Caliper and temperature input boxes always allow the user to enter a curve or a fixed value. The 'Save' and 'Load' buttons allow the user to save and restore the parameters associated with the environmental corrections to a disk file. The parameters are automatically stored in the well database. However, the 'Save' and 'Load' options give the user more flexibility. The

button has a similar function to those found in other modules.

Different 'environmental zones' can be created, selected and deleted, using the zone navigation buttons and the 'Delete Zone' button found at the bottom of the window. For example, if the number of zones is 1 and you click the 'right arrow' zone navigation button, you will be asked if you want to create a new zone. Click 'yes' and you will then be asked if you want to clear/reset the current parameters. Choose the appropriate button and a new environmental zone will be created. By 'clicking' the 'left arrow' navigation button you can go back to a previous environmental zone. NOTE: To update the current parameters you have to click 'Run Tab'.

Section 13.10 Calculation and Correction : Environmental Corrections

Calculation and Correction

Senergy

1690

The 'Run Tab' button only runs the corrections for the currently displayed tab page. The 'Plot Results' button displays a log plot showing the effect of the correction. Each correction page has its own plot format. An example of the Gamma Ray plot is shown below.

Related Topics Environmental Corrections Schlumberger Corrections Baker Atlas Corrections Halliburton Corrections Anadrill Corrections Baker Hughes Inteq Corrections Sperry Sun Corrections Weatherford Corrections PathFinder

Section 13.10 Calculation and Correction : Environmental Corrections

1691

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

13.10.2 Baker Atlas Corrections The 'Baker Atlas Corrections' environmental correction module uses the algorithms distributed by Baker Atlas in their environmental library. Tool types are organized on a series of 'tabs' with appropriate parameter selection options on each tab, depending on the tool type. See Environmental Corrections for information on the operation of the tabs. The screen shown below illustrates the parameters for the Gamma Ray tool.

Due to Senergy Ltd. receiving the Baker Atlas chartbook as a series of algorithms it has proved difficult to assign charts numbers from the actual chartbook to the tabs within the 'Baker Atlas Environmental Corrections' module. The list below is an indication of the different tools corrected on each of the tabs. 'Gamma Ray' tab

Gamma Ray Borehole Size correction charts 4-1, 4-3, and 4-13.

Section 13.10 Calculation and Correction : Environmental Corrections

Calculation and Correction

Senergy

'Density' tab

1692

Pe Borehole Size correction for Compensated Z-Densilog Series 2222 charts 6-7 and 6-8. Bulk Density Borehole Size correction for Compensated ZDensilog Series 2222 chart 6-9. Bulk Density Borehole Size correction for Compensated ZDensilog Se1ies 2227 chart 6-10.

'Neutron' tab

Compensated Neutron correction charts for Series 2418 CN Log charts 6-11, 6-29 plus charts 6-32 through to 6-35. Compensated Neutron correction charts for Series 2420 CN Log charts 6-12 through to 6-17, 6-26 and 6-30 plus charts 6-32 through to 6-35 . Compensated Neutron correction charts for Series 2435 CN Log charts 6-18 through to 6-23, 6-27, 6-28, 6-31 plus charts 6-32 through to 6-35 and 6-39. Compensated Neutron correction charts for Series 2436 CN Log charts. Neutron 2446 - no information available.

'SWNeu' tab

Sidewall Neutron Mudcake and Matrix correction charts 624 and 6-36.

'Laterolog/Micro'

Dual Laterolog Borehole correction.

tab 'Induction' tab

Borehole size correction for Induction 809, 815, 818 charts 7-6, 7-7. Borehole size correction for Induction 811 charts 7-2, 7-3. Borehole size correction for Induction 814 charts 7-4, 7-5. Borehole size correction for Dual Induction 1503, 1506 charts 7-8, 7-9.

'Spectral Gr' tab

Spectral Gamma Ray Borehole correction charts 4-5, 4-7, 4-9, 4-11, 4-15 and 4-17.

'DIL invasion' tab

Induction Invasion correction.

'DLL invasion' tab

Dual Laterolog Invasion correction.

The 'Filter Curve' option allows the user to apply a filter to the result curve. This allows the user to resolution-match log curves. The Caliper and temperature input boxes always allow the user to enter a curve or a fixed value. The 'Save' and 'Load' buttons allow the user to save and restore the parameters associated with

Section 13.10 Calculation and Correction : Environmental Corrections

1693

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

the environmental corrections to a disk file. The parameters are automatically stored in the well database. However, the 'Save' and 'Load' options give the user more flexibility. The

button has a similar function to those found in other modules.

Different 'environmental zones' can be created, selected and deleted, using the zone navigation buttons and the 'Delete Zone' button found at the bottom of the window. For example, if the number of zones is 1 and you click the 'right arrow' zone navigation button, you will be asked if you want to create a new zone. Click 'yes' and you will then be asked if you want to clear/reset the current parameters. Choose the appropriate button and a new environmental zone will be created. By 'clicking' the 'left arrow' navigation button you can go back to a previous environmental zone. NOTE: To update the current parameters you have to click 'Run Tab'. The 'Run Tab' button only runs the corrections for the currently displayed tab page. The 'Plot Results' button displays a log plot showing the effect of the correction. Each correction page has its own plot format.

Related Topics Environmental Corrections

Section 13.10 Calculation and Correction : Environmental Corrections

Calculation and Correction

Senergy

1694

Schlumberger Corrections Baker Atlas Corrections Halliburton Corrections Anadrill Corrections Baker Hughes Inteq Corrections Sperry Sun Corrections Weatherford Corrections PathFinder

13.10.3 Halliburton Corrections The 'Halliburton Corrections' environmental correction module uses the charts from the 1994 Halliburton Log Interpretation Charts book. Tool types are organized on a series of 'tabs' with appropriate parameter selection options on each tab, depending on the tool type. See Environmental Corrections help main page for information on the operation of the tabs. The screen shown below illustrates the parameters for the Neutron tool.

Section 13.10 Calculation and Correction : Environmental Corrections

1695

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

List of 'Halliburton Environmental Correction' tabs with associated charts taken from the 1994 Halliburton Log Interpretation Charts book. 'Gamma Ray'

Gamma Ray Borehole corrections chart GR1

tab 'Density' tab

Spectral Density Log (SDL) chart POR-1 Spectral Litho Density (SLD) chart POR-2 Hostile Spectral Density (HSDL) Log chart POR-3.

'Neutron' tab

Dual Spaced Neutron (DSN-II) charts POR-4a, POR-4b and POR-5a. Dual Spaced Neutron (CNT-K) charts POR-6a, POR-6b and POR-7a. Hostile Dual Spaced Neutron (HDSN) charts POR-8a, POR-8b and POR-9a.

'SNL' tab

Sidewall Neutron (SNL) POR-16.

Section 13.10 Calculation and Correction : Environmental Corrections

Calculation and Correction

Senergy

1696

'DLL/MSFL' tab Dual Laterolog (DLT-A) Deep Laterolog Borehole correction charts DLTA-1a, DLTA-1b. Dual Laterolog (DLT-F) Deep Laterolog Borehole correction charts DLTF-1a, DLTF-1b. Microspherically Focused Log (MSFL) Mudcake corrections chart Rxo-1. Microguard (MG) Mudcake corrections chart Rxo-2. 'Induction' tab

Dual Induction Laterolog 3 (DIL) Borehole correction charts DIL-1, DIL-2. Dual Induction Short Guard (DILTA) Borehole correction charts DILTA-1, DILTA-2. High Resolution Induction (HRI) Borehole correction charts HRI-1, HRI-2. Hostile Dual Induction (HDIL) Borehole correction charts HDIL1, HDIL-2.

'DIL Invasion'

Dual Induction Laterolog 3 (DIL) Invasion correction charts DIL-

tab

4a, DIL-4b. Dual Induction-Rxo Invasion correction charts DIL-5a, DIL-5b. Dual Induction-Short Guard Invasion correction charts DILTA4a, DILTA-4b. High Resolution Induction Invasion correction charts HRI-4a, HRI-4b. Hostile Dual Induction (HDIL) Invasion correction charts HDIL4a through to HDIL-6b

'DLL Invasion'

Dual Laterolog (DLT-A) Deep Laterolog Invasion correction

tab

charts DLTA-3a, DLTA-3b Dual Laterolog (DLT-F) Deep Laterolog Invasion correction charts DLTF-3a, DLTF-3b

'Spectral Gr'

Spectral Gamma Ray (SGR) Borehole corrections chart GR2.

tab The 'Filter Curve' option allows the user to apply a filter to the result curve. This allows the user to resolution-match log curves. The Caliper and temperature input boxes always allow the user to enter a curve or a fixed value. The 'Save' and 'Load' buttons allow the user to save and restore the parameters associated with the environmental corrections to a disk file. The parameters are automatically stored in the well

Section 13.10 Calculation and Correction : Environmental Corrections

1697

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

database. However, the 'Save' and 'Load' options give the user more flexibility. The

button is similar to buttons found in other modules.

Different 'environmental zones' can be created, selected and deleted, using the zone navigation buttons and the 'Delete Zone' button found at the bottom of the window. For example, if the number of zones is 1 and you click the 'right arrow' zone navigation button, you will be asked if you want to create a new zone. Click 'yes' and you will then be asked if you want to clear/reset the current parameters. Choose the appropriate button and a new environmental zone will be created. By 'clicking' the 'left arrow' navigation button you can go back to a previous environmental zone. NOTE: To update the current parameters you have to click 'Run Tab'. The 'Run Tab' button only runs the corrections for the currently displayed tab page. The 'Plot Results' button displays a log plot showing the effect of the correction. Each correction page has its own plot format.

Related Topics Environmental Corrections Schlumberger Corrections Baker Atlas Corrections Halliburton Corrections

Section 13.10 Calculation and Correction : Environmental Corrections

Calculation and Correction

Senergy

1698

Anadrill Corrections Baker Hughes Inteq Corrections Sperry Sun Corrections Weatherford Corrections PathFinder

13.10.4 Anadrill Corrections The 'AnaDrill Corrections' environmental correction module uses the charts from the 2000 Schlumberger Log Interpretation Charts book and the 2005 Schlumberger Log Interpretation Charts book. Tool types are organized on a series of 'tabs' with appropriate parameter selection options on each tab, depending on the tool type. See Environmental Corrections help main page for information on the operation of the tabs. The screen shown below illustrates the parameters for the Compensated Dual Resistivity (CDR) tool.

List of 'Schlumberger Environmental Correction' tabs with associated charts taken from the

Section 13.10 Calculation and Correction : Environmental Corrections

1699

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

2000 Schlumberger Log Interpretation Charts book and the 2005 Schlumberger Log Interpretation Charts book. 'CDN' tab

6 1/2" Compensated Density Neutron (CDN) correction charts Por-19, Por-20a, Por-20b, Por-20c and Por-20d 8" Compensated Density Neutron (CDN) correction charts Por-24c, Por-24d, Por-24e

'ADN' tab

4 3/4" Azimuthal Density Neutron (adnVISION475) environmental correction charts Neu-31, Neu-33 6 3/4" Azimuthal Density Neutron (adnVISION675) environmental correction charts Neu-35, Neu-37 4 3/4" Azimuthal Density Neutron (adnVISION475 BIP) environmental correction charts Neu-32, Neu-34 6 3/4" Azimuthal Density Neutron (adnVISION475 BIP) environmental correction charts Neu-36, Neu-38

'CDR' tab

6 1/2" Compensated Dual Resistivity (CDR) Borehole correction chart Rcor-11a. 8" Compensated Dual Resistivity (CDR) Borehole correction chart Rcor-11b. 9 1/2" Compensated Dual Resistivity (CDR) Borehole correction chart Rcor-11c.

The 'Filter Curve' option allows the user to apply a filter to the result curve. This allows the user to resolution-match log curves. The Caliper and temperature input boxes always allow the user to enter a curve or a fixed value. The 'Save' and 'Load' buttons allow the user to save and restore the parameters associated with the environmental corrections to a disk file. The parameters are automatically stored in the well database. However, the 'Save' and 'Load' options give the user more flexibility. The

button is similar to buttons found in other modules.

Different 'environmental zones' can be created, selected and deleted, using the zone navigation buttons and the 'Delete Zone' button found at the bottom of the window. For example, if the number of zones is 1 and you click the 'right arrow' zone navigation button, you will be asked if you want to create a new zone. Click 'yes' and you will then be asked if you want to clear/reset the current parameters. Choose the appropriate button and a new environmental zone will be created. By 'clicking' the 'left arrow' navigation button you can go back to a previous

Section 13.10 Calculation and Correction : Environmental Corrections

Calculation and Correction

Senergy

1700

environmental zone. NOTE: To update the current parameters you have to click 'Run Tab'. The 'Run Tab' button only runs the corrections for the currently displayed tab page. The 'Plot Results' button displays a log plot showing the effect of the correction. Each correction page has its own plot format.

Related Topics Environmental Corrections Schlumberger Corrections Baker Atlas Corrections Halliburton Corrections Anadrill Corrections Baker Hughes Inteq Corrections Sperry Sun Corrections Weatherford Corrections PathFinder

13.10.5 Baker Hughes Inteq Corrections The 'Baker Hughes INTEQ Corrections' environmental corrections module uses the charts from the 2002 publication 2002 Log Interpretation Charts book. Tool types are organized on a

Section 13.10 Calculation and Correction : Environmental Corrections

1701

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

number of 'tabs' with appropriate parameter selection options on each tab, depending on the tool type. See Environmental Corrections help main page for information on the operation of the tabs. The screen, shown below, illustrates the parameters for the MNP Neutron tool corrections.

List of 'Baker Hughes INTEQ Environmental Correction' tabs with associated charts taken from the 2002 Log Interpretation Charts book. 'Resistivity' tab

3 1/8" MPR Resistivity Correction charts 1-2 through to 1-17 4 3/4" MPR Resistivity Correction charts 2-2 through to 2-21 6 3/4" MPR Resistivity Correction charts 3-2 through to 3-29 8 1/4" MPR Resistivity Correction charts 4-2 through to 4-22 6 3/4" NaviGator Resistivity Correction charts 5-2 through to 5-13 8 1/4" NaviGator Resistivity Correction charts 6-2 through to 6-15

'Neutron' tab

6 3/4" Caliper-Corrected Neutron Correction charts 10-2 through to 10-5

Section 13.10 Calculation and Correction : Environmental Corrections

Calculation and Correction

Senergy

1702

8 1/4" Caliper-Corrected Neutron Correction charts 11-2 through to 11-4 The 'Filter Curve' option allows the user to apply a filter to the result curve. This allows the user to resolution-match log curves. The Caliper and temperature input boxes always allow the user to enter a curve or a fixed value. The 'Save' and 'Load' buttons allow the user to save and restore the parameters associated with the environmental corrections to a disk file. The parameters are automatically stored in the well database. However, the 'Save' and 'Load' options give the user more flexibility. The

button has a similar function to those found in other modules.

Different 'environmental zones' can be created, selected and deleted, using the 'zone navigation' buttons and the 'Delete Zone' button found at the bottom of the window. For example, if the number of zones is 1 and you click the 'right arrow' zone navigation button, you will be asked if you want to create a new zone. Click 'yes' and you will then be asked if you want to clear/reset the current parameters. Choose the appropriate button and a new environmental zone will be created. By 'clicking' the 'left arrow' navigation button you can go back to a previous environmental zone. NOTE: To update the current parameters you have to click 'Run Tab'. The 'Run Tab' button only runs the corrections for the currently displayed tab page. The 'Plot Results' button displays a log plot showing the effect of the correction. Each correction page has its own plot format.

Section 13.10 Calculation and Correction : Environmental Corrections

1703

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Related Topics Environmental Corrections Schlumberger Corrections Baker Atlas Corrections Halliburton Corrections Anadrill Corrections Baker Hughes Inteq Corrections Sperry Sun Corrections Weatherford Corrections PathFinder

13.10.6 Sperry Sun Corrections The 'Sperry-Sun Corrections' environmental corrections module uses the charts from the 1998 'Sperry-Sun Log Interpretation Charts' book. Tool types are organized on a series of 'tabs' with appropriate parameter selection options on each tab, depending on the tool type. See Environmental Corrections help main page for information on the operation of the tabs. The screen shown below illustrates the correction parameters for the DGR and SOLAR 175 Gamma Ray tools.

Section 13.10 Calculation and Correction : Environmental Corrections

Calculation and Correction

Senergy

1704

List of 'Sperry-Sun Environmental Correction' tabs with associated charts taken from the 1998 'Sperry-Sun Log Interpretation Charts' book. 'Gamma Ray'

4 3/4" Gamma Ray (DGR) Borehole correction charts 2-1, 2-8, 2-9

tab

and 2-10. 6 3/4" Gamma Ray (DGR) Borehole correction charts 2-2, 2-11, 2-12 and 2-13. 8" Gamma Ray (DGR) Borehole correction charts 2-3, 2-14, 2-15 and 2-16. 9 1/2" Gamma Ray (DGR) Borehole correction charts 2-4, 2-17, 2-18 and 2-19. 8" Gamma Ray (High Flow DGR) Borehole correction charts 2-5, 220, 2-21 and 2-22. 4 3/4" Gamma Ray (SOLAR 175) Borehole correction charts 2-6, 223, 2-24 and 2-25.

Section 13.10 Calculation and Correction : Environmental Corrections

1705

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

6 1/2" Gamma Ray (SOLAR 175) Borehole correction charts 2-7, 226, 2-27 and 2-28. 'Resistivity'

4 3/4" EWR-Phase 4 Resistivity correction charts 3-1 through to 3-4

tab

and 3-14 through to 3-16. 6 3/4" EWR-Phase 4 Resistivity correction charts 3-5 through to 3-8 and 3-17 through to 3-18. 8" EWR-Phase 4 Resistivity correction charts 3-9 through to 3-12 and 3-19 through to 3-22.

'Neutron' tab

4 3/4" Compensated Neutron Porosity (CTN) environmental correction charts 4-1, 4-2, and 4-7. 6 3/4" Compensated Neutron Porosity (CNF) environmental correction charts 4-3, 4-4, and 4-8. 8" Compensated Neutron Porosity (CNF) environmental correction charts 4-5, 4-6 and 4-8.

'Lithology' tab

4 3/4" Compensated Neutron Porosity (CTN) Lithology Effect correction charts 4-9. 6 3/4" Compensated Neutron Porosity (CNF) Lithology Effect correction charts 4-10. 8" Compensated Neutron Porosity (CNF) Lithology Effect correction charts 4-11.

The 'Filter Curve' option allows the user to apply a filter to the result curve. This allows the user to resolution-match log curves. The Caliper and temperature input boxes always allow the user to enter a curve or a fixed value. The 'Save' and 'Load' buttons allow the user to save and restore the parameters associated with the environmental corrections to a disk file. The parameters are automatically stored in the well database. However, the 'Save' and 'Load' options give the user more flexibility. The

button has a similar function to those found in other modules.

Different 'environmental zones' can be created, selected and deleted, using the zone navigation buttons and the 'Delete Zone' button found at the bottom of the window. For example, if the number of zones is 1 and you click the 'right arrow' zone navigation button, you will be asked if you want to create a new zone. Click 'yes' and you will then be asked if you want to clear/reset the current parameters. Choose the appropriate button and a new environmental zone will be created. By 'clicking' the 'left arrow' navigation button you can go back to a previous environmental zone. NOTE: To update the current parameters you have to click 'Run Tab'.

Section 13.10 Calculation and Correction : Environmental Corrections

Calculation and Correction

Senergy

1706

The 'Run Tab' button only runs the corrections for the currently-displayed tab page. The 'Plot Results' button displays a log plot showing the effect of the correction. Each correction page has its own plot format.

Related Topics Environmental Corrections Schlumberger Corrections Baker Atlas Corrections Halliburton Corrections Anadrill Corrections Baker Hughes Inteq Corrections Sperry Sun Corrections Weatherford Corrections PathFinder

13.10.7 Weatherford Corrections The 'Weatherford Corrections' environmental correction module uses the algorithms distributed by Weatherford including the old Reeves/Precision tools plus the Compact tool series. Tool types are organized on a series of 'tabs' with appropriate parameter selection

Section 13.10 Calculation and Correction : Environmental Corrections

1707

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

options on each tab, depending on the tool type. See Environmental Corrections help main page for information on the operation of the tabs. The screen shown below illustrates the parameters for the Gamma Ray tool.

List of 'Weatherford Environmental Correction' tabs with associated charts taken from the Weatherford Log interpretation Charts Compact Tool Series (2007) and Precision Wireline Services Log Interpretation Chart Book. 'Gamma Ray'

Compact Gamma Ray Borehole correction chart Gam-1,

tab

Gam-2 and Gam-3. Reeves/Precision Gamma Ray Borehole correction chart 4-1.

'Neutron' tab

Compact Neutron Porosity (MDN) Environmental correction charts Npor-5Npor-6a, Npor-8

Section 13.10 Calculation and Correction : Environmental Corrections

Calculation and Correction

Senergy

1708

Reeves/Precision Compensated Neutron correction charts 64 to 6-6, 6-11, 6-16, 6-18 to 6-22 'Laterolog/Micro' Compact Laterolog (MDL) Borehole correction charts Lat-4, tab

Lat-5, Lat-10, Lat-11 and Micro-3. Reeves/Precision Dual Laterolog (DLL) Borehole correction chart 5-2, 5-12 and 5-13.

'Induction' tab

No details available.

'FE Borehole'

Compact Focused Electric Borehole correction chart SFE-2

tab 'DLL Invasion'

Compact Laterolog (MDL) Invasion correction charts Lat-6

tab

and Lat-12.

'Spectral Gr' tab Reeves/Precision Spectral Gamma Ray correction charts 4-3 and 4-5 The 'Filter Curve' check-box option allows the user to apply a filter to the result curve. This allows the user to resolution-match log curves. The 'Save' and 'Load' buttons allow the user to save and restore the parameters associated with the environmental corrections to a disk file. The parameters are automatically stored in the well database. However, the 'Save' and 'Load' options give the user more flexibility. The

button has a similar function to those found in other modules.

Different 'environmental zones' can be created, selected and deleted, using the zone navigation buttons and the 'Delete Zone' button found at the bottom of the window. For example, if the number of zones is 1 and you click the 'right arrow' zone navigation button, you will be asked if you want to create a new zone. Click 'yes' and you will then be asked if you want to clear/reset the current parameters. Choose the appropriate button and a new environmental zone will be created. By 'clicking' the 'left arrow' navigation button you can go back to a previous environmental zone. NOTE: To update the current parameters you have to click 'Run Tab'. The 'Run Tab' button only runs the corrections for the currently-displayed tab page. The 'Plot Results' button displays a log plot showing the effect of the correction. Each correction 'tab' has its own plot format.

Section 13.10 Calculation and Correction : Environmental Corrections

1709

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Related Topics Environmental Corrections Schlumberger Corrections Baker Atlas Corrections Halliburton Corrections Anadrill Corrections Baker Hughes Inteq Corrections Sperry Sun Corrections Weatherford Corrections PathFinder

13.10.8 PathFinder The 'PathFinder Corrections' environmental correction module uses the uses the charts from the 2007 PathFinder LWD Log Interpretation Charts. Tool types are organized on a series of 'tabs' with appropriate parameter selection options on each tab, depending on the tool type. See Environmental Corrections help main page for information on the operation of the tabs. The screen shown below illustrates the parameters for the Gamma Ray tool.

Section 13.10 Calculation and Correction : Environmental Corrections

Calculation and Correction

Senergy

1710

List of 'PathFinder Environmental Correction' tabs with associated charts taken from the 2007 PathFinder LWD Log Interpretation Charts book. 'HDS1 Gamma

Gamma Ray Borehole correction charts POR-1a through to

Ray' tab

POR-1j.

'DNSC' tab

DNSC Neutron Environmental correction charts POR-2a through to POR-2f.

'SDNSC' tab

SDNSC Neutron Environmental corrections charts POR-2g through to POR-2j.

The 'Filter Curve' check-box option allows the user to apply a filter to the result curve. This allows the user to resolution-match log curves. The 'Save' and 'Load' buttons allow the user to save and restore the parameters associated with the environmental corrections to a disk file. The parameters are automatically stored in the well database. However, the 'Save' and 'Load' options give the user more flexibility. The

button has a similar function to those found in other modules.

Section 13.10 Calculation and Correction : Environmental Corrections

1711

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Different 'environmental zones' can be created, selected and deleted, using the zone navigation buttons and the 'Delete Zone' button found at the bottom of the window. For example, if the number of zones is 1 and you click the 'right arrow' zone navigation button, you will be asked if you want to create a new zone. Click 'yes' and you will then be asked if you want to clear/reset the current parameters. Choose the appropriate button and a new environmental zone will be created. By 'clicking' the 'left arrow' navigation button you can go back to a previous environmental zone. NOTE: To update the current parameters you have to click 'Run Tab'. The 'Run Tab' button only runs the corrections for the currently-displayed tab page. The 'Plot Results' button displays a log plot showing the effect of the correction. Each correction 'tab' has its own plot format.

Related Topics Environmental Corrections Schlumberger Corrections Baker Atlas Corrections Halliburton Corrections Anadrill Corrections Baker Hughes Inteq Corrections Sperry Sun Corrections

Section 13.10 Calculation and Correction : Environmental Corrections

Calculation and Correction

Senergy

Weatherford Corrections PathFinder

Section 13.10 Calculation and Correction : Environmental Corrections

1712

Section

14 Connecting to External Databases

Connecting to External Databases

Senergy

14

1714

Connecting to External Databases

This chapter has been written to give both UNIX and PC system managers / administrators sufficient information to configure networked UNIX and PC systems to allow IP to communicate with networked GEOLOG and OpenWorks databases. Interactive Petrophysics (IP) provides connectivity to a number of external data repositories. These are for Paradigm's GEOLOG6 , Landmark Graphics Corporation's (LGC) OpenWorks , PETCOM's Powerlog and Senergy's ODM3 databases. The connections for the OpenWorks and GEOLOG links require UNIX system administration expertise in order to install and set up the required software and network paths on the UNIX system. The connections to these two databases comprise a 'generic' IP interface which queries the external databases using one of two connection protocols. These are : A web-type HTTP server (e.g. Apache) A secure Shell (SSH) daemon (PuTTY freeware) The following documentation gives instructions on configuring a UNIX server to support the HTTP link through an APACHE server or through a Secure Shell (SSH) connection using PuTTY software. It is recommended that a UNIX system administrator performs the necessary installation and configuration on that end of the link. The PC (IP) configuration is also explained. NOTE: - the 'Read From / Write To DB' interfaces will only work if the Interactive Petrophysics installation is on the WINDOWS 2000, NT or XP operating systems. Note also that a GEOLOG6 licence is required in order for the link to this database type to work. NOTE: the number of wells and curves that can be loaded simultaneously is limited by the amount of system memory available. If the user wishes to load a large number of wells and/or a large volume of curve data into IP, there is potential for all the system memory to be filled before the data loading is finished, which could result in application stability issues. In this situation the user should consider loading the data in stages, saving and closing the loaded wells at each stage, freeing up system memory for the next loading stage. Once all the data is loaded then the user can re-open the wells. IP is able to use memory more efficiently if these steps are followed.

Related Topics

Section 14.

Connecting to External Databases :

1715

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Connecting to External Databases Common Database Connection Tasks Connection Protocols PC Configuration External Database Requirements

Section 14.

Connecting to External Databases :

Senergy

Senergy

14.1

Connecting to External Databases

1716

Common Database Connection Tasks

The Database Connection screens uses a generic user-interface (UI) for the GEOLOG, OpenWorks, PETCOM and ODM3 connections and the 'Read/Write Via OpenSpirit' module. The interface is organized on 2 tabbed screens. These are : 'Import into IP' tab, and 'Export' (not OpenWorks) The 'Import into IP' screen comprises a left-hand 'Tree View' panel and 2 panels on the right hand side ('Wells to Import' and 'Curves to Import'), which allow you to see the curve and tops data that are to be loaded into IP. Once a connection to an external database has been established, the UI can be used to perform the following common tasks : Create new IP well from an external database well and load all curves into IP Create a New IP well from an external database well and load selected curves into IP Deselecting curves from the 'import' operation Loading Well Tops from an external database well Deselecting Tops from the 'import' operation Editing Well Properties Editing a new wells' 'well attributes' before loading into the current IP database Updating well attributes in an existing IP well in the current IP database

Related Topics Connecting to External Databases Common Database Connection Tasks Connection Protocols PC Configuration External Database Requirements

14.1.1 Create New Well and Load ALL External Curves Create a New IP Well from an External Database Well and Load All Curves into IP : EITHER drag/drop a well icon from the left-hand panel 'Tree View' into the 'Wells to Import' panel, OR right-mouse button 'click' on a well icon and use the 'Add' option. This will move all log curves and Tops for the selected well into the 'Curves to Import' panel. You will see the following Confirmation message:

Section 14.1 Connecting to External Databases : Common Database Connection Tasks

1717

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Click 'OK' to confirm loading all the curves into the interface. Click 'Cancel' to abort the operation. Click the 'Load All' button to create the new IP database wells and load all the log curves into them. NOTE: You can import all external database wells and their log curves and formation tops at the same time, by drag/dropping the 'external database' (

) icon into the 'Wells to Import' panel.

There may be many more wells and curves than you actually need in the external database so it is good practice to at least expand the tree view, in the first instance, to see how many wells you might be dealing with.

Related Topics Create New Well and Load ALL External Curves Create New Well and Load SELECTED External Curves De-Select Curves during Import Load Tops from an External Well De-Select Tops during Import Edit Well Properties

14.1.2 Create New Well and Load SELECTED External Curves Create a New IP Well from an External Database Well and Load Selected curves into IP : 'Expand' a well by clicking on the (+) in the left-hand panel to view all the curve Sets and Tops in the external well. Then, EITHER drag/drop the required Curve Set (

) icon into the 'Curves to Import' panel

- this loads all the curves held within that curve Set into the transfer cache. OR, expand the Curve Set 'branch' and drag/drop individual curves into the 'Curves to Import' panel. Rightmouse-button clicking on a curve name in the left-hand panel and selecting 'Add' has the

Section 14.1 Connecting to External Databases : Common Database Connection Tasks

Senergy

Connecting to External Databases

1718

same effect. Curves are tagged with an 'Import Type' of 'Log' as illustrated in the following screen capture.

Click the 'Load All' button to create the new IP database wells and load the selected log curves into them.

Related Topics Create New Well and Load ALL External Curves Create New Well and Load SELECTED External Curves De-Select Curves during Import Load Tops from an External Well De-Select Tops during Import Edit Well Properties

14.1.3 De-Select Curves during Import To Deselect Curves from the 'Import' Operation: If you find you have mistakenly included a curve or a Formation Top you do not want to import to IP, you can deselect it by clicking in the curve 'row' in the 'Curves to Import' panel. Use a right-mouse-button click and select the 'Remove' option from the drop-down options list. Selecting the 'Remove All' option, or clicking the 'Remove All' button, will remove all wells and their associated curves and Tops from the Import selection panels.

Section 14.1 Connecting to External Databases : Common Database Connection Tasks

1719

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Related Topics Create New Well and Load ALL External Curves Create New Well and Load SELECTED External Curves De-Select Curves during Import Load Tops from an External Well De-Select Tops during Import Edit Well Properties

14.1.4 Load Tops from an External Well To Load Tops from an External Database Well: EITHER drag/drop a well icon from the left-hand panel into the 'Wells to Import' panel, OR right-mouse button 'click' on a well icon and use the 'Add' option. This will move all log curves and Tops for the selected well into the 'Curves to Import' panel. Alternatively, expand a well by clicking on the (+) in the left-hand panel to view all the curve Sets and Tops in the external well. Then, EITHER drag/drop the required Tops Set icon into the 'Curves to Import' panel - this loads all the Tops held within that Tops Set into the transfer cache. OR, expand the Tops Set 'branch' and drag/drop individual Formation Tops into the 'Curves to Import' panel. Tops are tagged with an 'Import Type' of 'Tops' as illustrated below:

Section 14.1 Connecting to External Databases : Common Database Connection Tasks

Senergy

Connecting to External Databases

1720

Click the 'Load All' button to load all Tops data into a new IP database well.

Related Topics Create New Well and Load ALL External Curves Create New Well and Load SELECTED External Curves De-Select Curves during Import Load Tops from an External Well De-Select Tops during Import Edit Well Properties

14.1.5 De-Select Tops during Import To Deselect Tops Entries from the 'Import' Operation: Click on the Tops row that you wish to delete, in the 'Curves to Import' panel, right-mousebutton click and select the 'Remove' option from the drop-down options list. Selecting the ' Remove All' option, or clicking the 'Remove All' button, will remove all wells and their associated curves and tops from the Import selection panels.

Related Topics Create New Well and Load ALL External Curves Create New Well and Load SELECTED External Curves De-Select Curves during Import Load Tops from an External Well De-Select Tops during Import Edit Well Properties

Section 14.1 Connecting to External Databases : Common Database Connection Tasks

1721

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

14.1.6 Edit Well Properties IP allows you two well editing options. You can either create a new IP database well from an external database well, or you can update an existing IP well with new data from an external database well.

Adding a New Well to the Current IP Database : If you select an external well and drop it into the 'Wells to Import' panel, you can check/edit its well properties by right-mouse-button clicking on the well entry row and selecting the ' Properties' option. This will launch a new screen which lists the 'cultural' data retrieved from the external database for that well. An example screen-shot is shown below:

You can manually type in entries into empty data fields. You can also change a wells Depth reference type by toggling between 'Units'. NOTE: You must also then type in new Top, Bottom and Step values, appropriate to the new depth Units.

Section 14.1 Connecting to External Databases : Common Database Connection Tasks

Senergy

Connecting to External Databases

1722

If deviation survey curves are available for the new well they will automatically be loaded into the IP well when 'Load All' is clicked.

Updating Well Attributes / Curves in an Existing IP Well in the Current IP Database : If you have an external well with a corresponding IP database well and you wish to update well attributes and add new curves for the existing IP well, you can set up the process through the well 'Properties' screen. 'Drag/drop', or 'Add', the external well into the 'Wells to Import' panel and open the well ' Properties' by right-mouse-button clicking on the well entry row and selecting the ' Properties' option. This will launch a new screen which lists the 'cultural' data retrieved from the external database for that well.

In the 'IP Well' column, select the IP well name, from the drop-down list box, that you wish to update from the external data . The 'Update' check-boxes adjacent to the well attributes boxes will become 'active'. You can then selectively 'tick' those well attributes you want to update, or toggle on/off the 'Tick All / None' check-box at the top right hand corner of the screen to update all / no attributes. Click the 'Apply' button to save any edited attributes. NOTE: in this display, the 'Load into Set' drop-down list is accessible. This allows you to load curves from the external well into a particular curve Set in the selected IP well. Click 'OK' to exit the 'Properties' dialog window with changes saved or click 'Cancel' to abort the editing of well attributes.

Section 14.1 Connecting to External Databases : Common Database Connection Tasks

1723

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Related Topics Create New Well and Load ALL External Curves Create New Well and Load SELECTED External Curves De-Select Curves during Import Load Tops from an External Well De-Select Tops during Import Edit Well Properties

Section 14.1 Connecting to External Databases : Common Database Connection Tasks

Senergy

Connecting to External Databases

Senergy

14.2

1724

Connection Protocols

The following Connection Protocols are available from within Interactive Petrophysics. Apache HTTP Server: When using the HTTP connection method, an Apache-type HTTP server, version 1.3 or later, must be installed with the suExec module enabled. More information about the Apache HTTP server, including downloads, may be obtained from http://httpd.apache.org. Secure Shell: Secure shell (SSH) is a protocol that provides a secure, remote connection to any device with SSH support. SSH provides authentication, encryption and authorization procedures. There are currently two versions of SSH available, SSH Version 1 and SSH Version 2. The PGLWdlink Package: The PGLWdblnk package, found in the IP program subdirectory called 'OpenWorks & Geolog' should be installed on the UNIX system under the /opt directory. The package includes the following files (grouped according to their use). The OpenWorks Link: The OpenWorks® link for IP relies on a binary executable, 'owlnk', which is installed as part of the PGLWdblnk. This binary communicates with the OpenWorks database. The GEOLOG Link: If the connection between GEOLOG and IP is established via an Apache HTTP server, a CGI script is installed for each user. Example CGI scripts are included as part of the PGLWdblnk package.

Related Topics Connecting to External Databases Common Database Connection Tasks Connection Protocols PC Configuration External Database Requirements

14.2.1 Apache HTTP Server When using the HTTP connection method, an Apache-type HTTP server, version 1.3 or later, must be installed with the suExec module enabled. More information about the Apache HTTP server, including downloads, may be obtained from http://httpd.apache.org. Several CGI scripts are installed in the public_html directory of each user. The Apache server must be configured to execute the CGI programs as the 'user to which the request is being directed'. Appropriate Apache authentication and access control should also be applied to

Section 14.2 Connecting to External Databases : Connection Protocols

1725

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

prevent unauthorised users accessing the CGI program. Documentation on compiling and enabling the suEXEC module within Apache 1.3 and Apache 2.0 may be found here: http://httpd.apache.org/docs/suexec.html (suExec with Apache 1.3) http://httpd.apache.org/docs-2.0/suexec.html (suExec with Apache 2.0). Pre-compiled Apache binaries are available at the Solaris Freeware website, http://www. sunfreeware.com. NOTE: The Secure Shell (SSH) connection method is generally preferable to the HTTP option, as it requires less administration and configuration and is also more secure.

Related Topics Apache HTTP Server Secure Shell The PGLWdblink Package The OpenWorks Link The Geolog Link

14.2.2 Secure Shell Secure shell (SSH) is a protocol that provides a secure, remote connection to any device with SSH support. SSH provides authentication, encryption and authorization procedures. There are currently two versions of SSH available, SSH Version 1 and SSH Version 2. OpenSSH is an open source version of the SSH protocol suite of network connectivity tools. More information is available at http://www.openssh.com. Installation packages for OpenSSH and further information are available at the Solaris Freeware site, http://www.sunfreeware.com. A suitable SSH client must also be installed on the PC where IP is loaded. The standard IP installation is configured to work with the 'PuTTY' PLINK.EXE application. The executable is found in the IP program installation directory. 'PuTTY' - the PuTTY application (PUTTY.EXE, located in the IP installation directory) is a free (MIT-licensed) Win32 SSH client. The executable should be run in order to set up the correct configuration for the connection to the UNIX system. See 'PC / IP Configuration Instructions' for more details. NOTE: The SSH transport method is generally preferable to the HTTP option, as it requires less administration and configuration and is also more secure. (PuTTY is a free implementation of telnet and SSH for Win32 platforms, and can be obtained from: http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty).

Section 14.2 Connecting to External Databases : Connection Protocols

Connecting to External Databases

Senergy

1726

Related Topics Apache HTTP Server Secure Shell The PGLWdblink Package The OpenWorks Link The Geolog Link

14.2.3 The PGLWdblink Package The PGLWdblnk package, found in the IP program subdirectory called 'OpenWorks & Geolog' should be installed on the UNIX system under the /opt directory. The package includes the following files (grouped according to their use).

OpenWorks Link /opt/PGLWdblnk/bin/owlnk

- Binary executable

/opt/PGLWdblnk/etc/owenv

- Environment settings

OpenWorks link (SSH option only) /opt/PGLWdblnk/bin/owlnk.sh

- Example launch script

OpenWorks link (HTTP option only) /opt/PGLWdblnk/bin/owlnk_import.cgi - CGI script /opt/PGLWdblnk/bin/owlnk_export.cgi - CGI script /opt/PGLWdblnk/public_html/owlnk.cgi - User's CGI script

GEOLOG Link NOTE: you do not need to install the PGLWdblnk Package to set up a Secure Shell (SSH) Connection to GEOLOG /opt/PGLWdblnk/etc/glenv - Environment settings Geolog link (HTTP option only) /opt/PGLWdblnk/bin/gllnk_import.cgi - CGI script /opt/PGLWdblnk/bin/gllnk_export.cgi - CGI script /opt/PGLWdblnk/public_html/gllnk.cgi - User's CGI script

Installing PGLWdblink The 'PGLWdblnk package' should be installed under /opt. 1. Extract the package from its 'tar' file to a temporary directory.

Section 14.2 Connecting to External Databases : Connection Protocols

1727

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

2. Run pkgadd as root, # pkgadd -d device PGLWdblnk where device is the full or relative path to the directory holding the extracted PGLWdblnk directory. The package will install to /opt. If an alternative location is required, the package subdirectories may be copied from PGLWdblnk/reloc/PGLWdblnk/ directly to an install directory of choice, without using the pkgadd utility. If the install directory is not /opt/PGLWdblink, the full path to the new install directory must be inserted at the beginning of each of the CGI files found in the /bin directory.

Related Topics Apache HTTP Server Secure Shell The PGLWdblink Package The OpenWorks Link The Geolog Link

14.2.4 The OpenWorks Link Unix System requirements: R2003 Sun Solaris Certification OS 2.8 Oracle 8.1.6 C/C++ libraries - Forte Developer 6 or later and, either: SSH daemon or Apache HTTP server 1.3 or later with suEXEC module enabled (the Apache server must be configured to execute the CGI program as the user to which the request is being directed). The OpenWorks® link for IP relies on a binary executable, 'owlnk', which is installed as part of the PGLWdblnk. This binary communicates with the OpenWorks database. If the connection to the PC application is established via an Apache HTTP server, a CGI script is installed for each user and the Apache configuration file updated as required. If an SSH connection is used, the owlnk binary will usually be launched from within a shell script, which sets the local environment.

Section 14.2 Connecting to External Databases : Connection Protocols

Connecting to External Databases

Senergy

1728

Secure Shell (SSH) Installation 1. Install the PGLWdblnk package (see Installing PGLWdblnk). 2. Configure the environment: Edit the file /opt/PGLWdblnk/bin/owenv and insert appropriate values for the environment values defined there. If the PGLWdblnk package is not installed in /opt/PGLWdblnk then edit the files /bin/owlnk. sh and set the variable INSTALLDIR to the correct location. 3. Test the operation of owlnk (see Testing).

HTTP (APACHE) Installation 1. Install the PGLWdblnk package (see Installing PGLWdblnk). 2. Configure the environment. Edit the file /opt/PGLWdblnk/etc/owenv and insert appropriate values for the environment values defined there. If necessary, also set and export the variable LM_LICENSE_FILE here. 3. If the PGLWdblnk package is not installed in /opt/PGLWdblnk then edit the 2 files owlnk_import.cgi and owlnk_export.cgi and set the variable INSTALLDIR to the correct location. 4. Create a ~/public_html directory for each OpenWorks user wanting access to the OpenWorks link, and place a copy of owlnk.cgi in that directory. Change ownership and permissions so that the file is owned by the user and only the user has execute permission (rwxr--r--). 5. Configure the Apache HTTP server to execute the CGI program as the user to which the request is being directed. Documentation on compiling and enabling the suEXEC module may be found at the Apache HTTP server project web pages for the relevant version of Apache: http://httpd.apache.org/ docs/suexec.html / http://httpd.apache.org/docs-2.0/suexec.html. 6. Test the configuration of the Apache HTTP server (see Testing). 7. Apply Apache authentication / authorization / access control, if required, to prevent unauthorized users accessing the CGI programs. 8. Test operation of the OpenWorks link (see Testing).

Testing A. To test operation of owlnk :

Section 14.2 Connecting to External Databases : Connection Protocols

1729

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

1. Log on as registered OpenWorks user. 2. Run the command $ /opt/PGLWdblnk/bin/owlnk -P If successful, a list of OpenWorks projects should be displayed. If unsuccessful, check the LD_LIBRARY_PATH environment variable (see Troubleshooting ). B.

To test operation of the owlnk.sh launch script (SSH option) 1. Log on as registered OpenWorks user. 2. Run the command $ /opt/PGLOWlnk/bin/owlnk.sh -P If successful, a list of OpenWorks projects will be displayed.

C.

To test configuration of the Apache HTTP server 1. Open the Apache test page. 2. Enter http:// (as defined in httpd.conf) into the address bar of Internet Explorer or other browser. If successful, you will see a message saying that the installation of the Apache web server was successful. 3. Run the Apache test-cgi script. 4. Enter http:///cgi-bin/test-cgi into the address bar of Internet Explorer or other browser. (It may be necessary to chmod +x /var/apache/cgi-bin/test-cgi) If successful, the Apache environment variables will be displayed. 5. Check that suEXEC is enabled. If Apache finds a properly configured suEXEC wrapper on start-up, it will print the following message in the error log (/var/apache/logs/error-log): "suEXEC mechanism enabled (wrapper: /usr/apache/bin/suexec)" or something similar. 6. Test operation of suEXEC. Copy /opt/PGLdblnk/public_html/whoami.cgi to a user's public_html directory. Browse to http:///~/whoami.cgi. If successful, the username will be displayed (not the name of the Apache user).

D.

To test operation of the OW link - HTTP connection 1. Point a browser to http:/~/owlnk.cgi. If successful, a list of OpenWorks projects will be displayed.

Section 14.2 Connecting to External Databases : Connection Protocols

Connecting to External Databases

Senergy

1730

Troubleshooting Some things to check 1. Ensure that the LD_LIBRARY_PATH environment variable includes paths to /usr/lib:/usr/ openwin/lib:$OWHOME/lib:$ORACLE_HOME/lib. 2. The public_html directory in the user's home directory must belong to the user and must have a group id that is the default group for that user. 3. The files in the public_html directory must have the same user and group settings as the public_html directory itself. 4. The CGI files in the public_html directory must have permission settings -rwxr--r--. Files that are group or world writeable will not be run by the suExec module. 5. Look at the bottom of the /var/apache/logs/error_log and /var/apache/logs/suexec_log for information about why things might not be working. "Internal Server Error" When testing the operation of the OpenWorks link via an HTTP connection, you receive an " Internal Server Error". The Apache suexec_log contains the line, crit: calling user mismatch (xxx instead of yyy) The problem is caused by a mismatch between the suExec caller (defined when the suExec module is compiled) and the userid with which the Apache server answers requests. The suExec caller must be the same as userid of the process that calls suExec. To resolve this mismatch, Either (1) Change the suexec caller to "xxx" within the httpd.conf file. The userid of each httpd child process is defined by the 'User' directive within the httpd.conf file. For example, change User yyy to User xxx (you may also need to change the corresponding Group directive). Or (2) Re-compile the suexec module, and define the suexec caller to be 'yyy'. The suexec caller ID can be defined using the 'configure' script. For example, % ./configure --with-layout=Solaris \ --enable-suexec \ --suexec-caller=yyy \

Section 14.2 Connecting to External Databases : Connection Protocols

1731

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

--suexec-gidmin=10

Related Topics Apache HTTP Server Secure Shell The PGLWdblink Package The OpenWorks Link The Geolog Link

14.2.5 The Geolog Link Unix System requirements: GEOLOG6 or later and a valid GEOLOG licence. and either : SSH daemon, or Apache HTTP server 1.3 or later with suEXEC module enabled (the Apache server must be configured to execute the CGI program as the user to which the request is being directed).

Secure Shell (SSH) Installation: No files have to be installed on the UNIX side, in order to set up the SSH connection. The 'PuTTY' application must be run and the UNIX Server, to which the PC will connect, must be authenticated. If the connection between GEOLOG and IP is established via an Apache HTTP server, a CGI script is installed for each user. Example CGI scripts are included as part of the PGLWdblnk package.

HTTP (Apache) Installation: 1. Install the PGLWdblnk package (see Installing PGLWdblnk). 2. Configure the environment : Edit the file /opt/PGLWdblnk/etc/glenv and insert appropriate values for the environment values defined there. If necessary, also set and export the variable PRDM_GEO_LICENSE_FILE here. 3. If the PGLWdblnk package is not installed in /opt/PGLWdblnk then edit the 2 files gllnk_import.cgi and gllnk_export.cgi and set the variable INSTALLDIR to the correct location.

Section 14.2 Connecting to External Databases : Connection Protocols

Connecting to External Databases

Senergy

1732

4. Create a ~/public_html directory for each GEOLOG user wanting access to the GEOLOG link, and place a copy of gllnk.cgi in that directory. Change ownership and permissions so that the file is owned by the user and only the user has execute permission (-rwxr--r--). 5. Configure the Apache HTTP server to execute the CGI program as the user to which the request is being directed. Documentation on compiling and enabling the suEXEC module may be found at the Apache HTTP server project web pages for the

relevant version of Apache: http://httpd.apache.org/

docs/suexec.html / http://httpd.apache.org/docs-2.0/suexec.html. 6. Test the configuration of the Apache HTTP server (see Testing). 7. Apply Apache authentication / authorization / access control, if required, to prevent unauthorized users accessing the CGI programs. 8. Create a ~/public_html directory for each GEOLOG user wanting to use the PC application's GEOLOG link and place a copy of gllnk.cgi in that directory. Change ownership and permissions so that the file is owned by the user and only the user has execute permission. 9. Test operation of the GEOLOG link.

Testing. A. To test the configuration of the Apache HTTP server: 1. Open the Apache test page. Enter http:// (as defined in httpd.conf) into the address bar of Internet Explorer or other browser. If successful, you will see a message saying that the installation of the Apache web server was successful. 2. Run the Apache test-cgi script. Enter http:///cgi-bin/test-cgi into the address bar of Internet Explorer or other browser. (It may be necessary to chmod +x /var/apache/cgi-bin/test-cgi) If successful, the Apache environment variables will be displayed. 3. Check that suEXEC is enabled. If Apache finds a properly configured suEXEC wrapper on start-up, it will print the following message in the error log (/var/apache/logs/error-log): "suEXEC mechanism enabled (wrapper: /usr/apache/bin/suexec)" or something similar. 4. Test operation of suEXEC. Copy /opt/PGLdblnk/public_html/whoami.cgi to a user's public_html directory.

Section 14.2 Connecting to External Databases : Connection Protocols

1733

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Browse to http:///~/whoami.cgi. If successful, the username will be displayed (not the name of the Apache user).

Related Topics Apache HTTP Server Secure Shell The PGLWdblink Package The OpenWorks Link The Geolog Link

Section 14.2 Connecting to External Databases : Connection Protocols

Senergy

Connecting to External Databases

Senergy

14.3

1734

PC Configuration

The Personal Computer (PC) connections between IP and GEOLOG, OpenWorks and ODM3 are described in the following section. The HTTP and SSH versions of the connection dialogs to GEOLOG and OpenWorks are illustrated for each external database. The database interfaces are set up by selecting the appropriate 'check' boxes in the 'Tools'

'Options'

'

External Database Connections' window. The interfaces are then launched from the 'Input / Output' main menu drop-down list. The interfaces for connections to GEOLOG, OpenWorks and ODM3 are 'generic' and identical in appearance. The configuration settings required to make the client connections to the external databases are described below. The discussion is organized under the following headings: PuTTY SSH client GEOLOG Interface Connection OpenWorks Interface Connection ODM Interface Connection

Saving the Configuration Settings The configuration details of the connection to the external database are saved to the IntPetro. config file, located in the IP program directory, when the user 'clicks' the 'Apply' button on the ' Client Connection' dialog. The settings are saved and restored when the user subsequently closes and re-opens IP.

Related Topics Connecting to External Databases Common Database Connection Tasks Connection Protocols PC Configuration External Database Requirements

14.3.1 PuTTY SSH Client PuTTY is a free (MIT-licensed) Win32 SSH client which allows IP users to log in to a multi-user computer operating system, in this case UNIX, from another computer, over a network. The PuTTY application, PUTTY.EXE, which can be located in the IP program installation directory, should be run on the users PC in order to set up the Domain Name Server (DNS) address. Running the PuTTY application launches the following dialog:

Section 14.3 Connecting to External Databases : PC Configuration

1735

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The user should: Fill in the 'Host Name (or IP Address)' text box with the internet host name or IP address of the UNIX machine that you want to connect to. Select the login 'Protocol' to use - in this case choose 'SSH'. When you use SSH to connect to a UNIX server for the first time, you will probably see the following 'Alert' message displayed when you click the 'Open' button at the bottom of the 'PuTTY Configuration' window:

This is a feature of the SSH protocol and is designed to protect you against a network attack known as 'spoofing' (secretly re-directing your connection to a different computer). PuTTY

Section 14.3 Connecting to External Databases : PC Configuration

Connecting to External Databases

Senergy

1736

records the host key for each server you connect to, in the Windows registry. every time you connect to a server, it checks that the host key presented by the server is the same host key as it was the last time you connected. However, when you connect to a server for the first time, PuTTY has no way of telling whether the host key is the right one or not. So it gives the warning shown above and asks whether you want to trust this host key or not. If you are working on an internal company network you would normally select 'Yes' to add the UNIX servers host Key to PuTTY's cache and carry on with the connection. Once the host key is registered, when you click the 'Open' button at the bottom of the 'PuTTY Configuration' window, a login screen to the UNIX server is launched. If this test works and the login screen is launched, you can close the login window / exit the PuTTY application.

14.3.2 Geolog Interface Connection As described in the Apache HTTP Server and Secure Shell sections, above, the IP client connection to the UNIX system may be made using either an HTTP or Secure Shell (SSH) protocol. In IP the 'Client Connection' dialog is launched from the 'Connection' button on the ' Read / Write To GEOLOG' interface. The 'Client Connection' window , shown below, allows the user to 'toggle' between the HTTP and SSH options using the radio buttons at the top of the screen.

GEOLOG HTTP Connection In order to connect to the external database using the HTTP protocol, the user will need to have a UNIX user account set up. The UNIX system administrator will have to have installed and configured the PGLWdblink package.

Section 14.3 Connecting to External Databases : PC Configuration

1737

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The PC client configuration settings are as follows: 'PNS File Location' - Paradigm Name Service (PNS) File location. The PNS file contains the directory addresses of all GEOLOG databases on the UNIX system. The directory path to this file is required to allow IP to locate the appropriate GEOLOG databases. This directory path should be entered into the 'PNS File Location:' text entry box. 'Read URL' - this is the 'Universal Resource Locator' for the cgi script installed on the UNIX 'Apache' Web server. This locator is made up of the following syntax: 'Protocol' - 'Server Domain Name' - 'User Name' - 'Cgi script'. For example: 'http://webpgl16.pgl/~pg58_r03/ gllnk.cgi' 'User Name' - This is the UNIX User account to which your UNIX system administrator has installed the Cgi script. 'Password' - This is the UNIX password for the user account in the previous step.

GEOLOG SSH Connection In order to connect to a GEOLOG database using the SSH protocol the user will need to have a UNIX user account and password. The UNIX server will also have to be authenticated using the PuTTY (plink.exe) application. See the PuTTY SSH Client section, above for details.

Section 14.3 Connecting to External Databases : PC Configuration

Connecting to External Databases

Senergy

1738

The PC client configuration settings are as follows. 'Geolog Directory' - the user will need to know the directory location of the GEOLOG6 binary files installation. For example: /raid5/mincom/geolog6/bin/ 'Server Address' - This is the Domain Name of the UNIX file server (DNS name). 'User Name' - This is the UNIX user account name. 'Password' - This is the password for the UNIX user account. Please note, the password should not contain either single quote (') or double quotation marks ("). 'Optional Variables' - this text entry box can be used to call UNIX configuration variables. For example, in an environment where there are multiple GEOLOG installations and hence more than one PNS file, you will need to know the settings for the variable 'MINSITE'. Any commands (for example, "SET MINSITE=") must be entered into the 'Optional variables' text box, using the syntax of the shell the user will acquire when the UNIX login is complete. Variables can be strung together using (;) semicolon separators. MINSITE - is the variable that controls the GEOLOG environment. GEOLOG6 tries to source the file MINSITE/bin.geolog6_env.tcl. This is a script file in which one can place any customizations, for example, licence location, PNS Server etc...

GEOLOG Windows Connection To connect to GEOLOG which is installed onto a PC using Windows TM then the directory where the GEOLOG program resides has to be defined.

Section 14.3 Connecting to External Databases : PC Configuration

1739

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

14.3.3 OpenWorks Interface Connection The IP 'Connection' dialog is launched from the 'Connection' button at the top of the 'Read From OpenWorks' interface. The connection dialog allows the user to 'toggle' between the HTTP and SSH options.

OpenWorks HTTP In order to connect to the external database using the HTTP protocol the user will need to have a user account set up on the UNIX ('Apache'-type) Web server. The UNIX system administrator will have installed and configured the PGLWdblink package. The PC client configuration settings are as follows:

Section 14.3 Connecting to External Databases : PC Configuration

Connecting to External Databases

Senergy

1740

'Read URL' - this is the 'Universal Resource Locator' for the cgi script installed on the Unix 'Apache' Web server. This locator is made up of the following syntax: 'Protocol' - 'Server Domain Name' - 'User Name' - 'Cgi script'. For example: 'http://webpgl16.pgl/~pg58_r03/ owlnk.cgi' 'User Name' - this is the UNIXUser account to which your Unix system administrator has installed the Cgi script. 'Password' - is the UNIX password for the above user account.

OpenWorks SSH In order to connect to the external database using the SSH protocol the user will need to have a user account set up on the Unix file server. The Unix system administrator will have installed and configured the PGLWdblink package.

Section 14.3 Connecting to External Databases : PC Configuration

1741

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The PC client configuration settings are as follows: 'OpenWorks Link' - the user will need to know the location of the UNIX Shell script that sets up the environment variables and runs the OWLNK.exe. i.e . /opt/PGLWowlnk/bin/owlnk. sh 'Server Address' - is the Domain Name of the UNIX file server (DNS name). 'User Name' - is the user account on the UNIX file server. 'Password' - is the password for the above user account.

14.3.4 ODM Interface Connection ODM Interface Connection The client connection may be made using an OLEDB connection string. This connection string is constructed automatically when the user selects the ODM3 MS Access database '.mdb' file. The IP user simply uses the browser dialog to locate the required ODM3 database (.mbd) file and selects 'Open'. Close the 'Connection' dialog and select a Project from the drop-down 'Project' list.

Section 14.3 Connecting to External Databases : PC Configuration

Connecting to External Databases

Senergy

14.4

1742

External Database Requirements

The following topics provide detailed instructions on how to Integrate Data from External Databases into Interactive Petrophysics. Read/ Write to PETCOM DB: The 'Read / Write to PETCOM DB' option allows users to load well curve data from a PETCOM (Powerlog) database into IP and to export log curves from IP into a PETCOM database. GEOLOG6: The 'Read / Write to GEOLOG DB' interface has been updated to run either as an HTTP web link, a Secure Shell (SSH) connection or through Windows. Full details of the Unix and PC system set-up requirements are provided in the 'Connecting to External Databases' introduction. OpenWorks: The 'Read from OpenWorks DB' interface has been updated to run either as an HTTP web link, or a Secure Shell (SSH) connection. Full details of the Unix and PC system set-ups are provided in the 'Connecting to External Databases' introduction. ODM: Oilfield Data Manager

(ODM) is a PC-based subsurface data management and

geoscience software package developed by Senergy. For more information on this application follow the link to the ODM3 website http://www.odmweb.com. Shell LOGIC Database Loader: This is a migration tool to copy Shell LOGIC database projects into an IP project. This module only works with LOGIC version S2001.2. Other versions are NOT supported. Read / Write via OpenSpirit: The 'Read / Write via OpenSpirit' functionality allows the user to load and save data between IP and other OpenSpirit -enabled databases such as OpenWorks

and GeoFrame . The OpenSpirit

website can be found at http://www.

openspirit.com

Related Topics Connecting to External Databases Common Database Connection Tasks Connection Protocols PC Configuration External Database Requirements

Section 14.4 Connecting to External Databases : External Database Requirements

1743

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

14.4.1 Read/ Write to PETCOM DB The 'Read / Write to PETCOM DB' option allows users to load well curve data from a PETCOM (Powerlog) database into IP and to export log curves from IP into a PETCOM database.

The user must check that the 'Tools'

'Options'

'External Database Connections'

'

PETCOM Link', is 'checked' for this option to be visible under the 'Input / Output' main menu item. The 'Read / Write to PETCOM DB' interface will only work if the IP installation is on the WINDOWS Vista, WINDOWS NT, XP or WINDOWS 2000 operating systems. NOTE: It will not work under Windows 95 or Windows 98. The interface is launched from the 'Input/Output' main menu list and comprises of 2 'tabbed' screens. These are: 'Import into IP' 'Export to PETCOM'

'Import into IP' Interface The 'Import into IP' Interface is shown below:

Section 14.4 Connecting to External Databases : External Database Requirements

Senergy

Connecting to External Databases

1744

The user must select the PETCOM database to connect to, by using the 'Connection' button which launches a 'browse' dialog' allowing you to search for the appropriate database folder. Once a PETCOM database is selected, IP will list all the wells in the database in an expandable 'Tree' view in the left-hand panel of the interface. IP reads the curve Sets, log curves and formation tops for all the wells in the external database. The list of wells can be filtered either by using the drop-down list available from the 'Display Well:' box or by typing in the 'Filter By:' box and 'clicking' the 'Filter' button. To Import Wells - Drag/drop the 'Well', using the left-hand mouse button, from the right-hand 'Tree' view panel into the upper, 'Wells to Import' panel. Alternatively right-mouse-click on a well name and click the 'Add' button that appears on-screen. IP will read the external database entries and will show the status window illustrated below while it is reading the external database well. The user has the option to terminate the 'import' operation at any time by clicking the 'Cancel' button. The 'import' operation will populate the 'Wells to Import' panel with the external database well names. All the available PETCOM curves will be listed in the 'Curves to Import' list. This can take some minutes, depending upon how many curves exist in the selected external well.

Section 14.4 Connecting to External Databases : External Database Requirements

1745

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

To Load Sets / Curves - drag/drop the Curve Set name or an individual curve name from the 'Tree' view panel into the lower, 'Curves to Import' panel. Alternatively, right-mouse-button-click on a Curve Set and click the 'Add' button that appears on-screen. IP will read the external database entries and will populate the 'Curves to Import' screen with the available curves. Click the 'Load All' button to execute the import operation. The selected Wells / Sets / Curves will be loaded into the current IP database. This can take some minutes, depending upon how many curves exist in the selected PETCOM Sets. External PETCOM wells can be imported to IP as new wells or they can be 'mapped' to existing IP database wells. In the 'Wells to Import' panel, right-mouse-button click on a well to be imported. This launches a 'Properties' dialog window, as illustrated below:

Section 14.4 Connecting to External Databases : External Database Requirements

Senergy

Connecting to External Databases

1746

The user can choose to leave all the well details as they are, in which case a new IP database well with the 'External Well' name will be created in the current IP database, or, if the PETCOM well already has a corresponding IP well name entry, that well can be selected from the well drop-down list at the top of the screen. In this case, imported log curves will be written to the IP well, into the user-selected curve set. Individual log curve properties can be viewed in the 'Curves to Import' panel by right-mousebutton clicking on a curve name. The following dialog will be launched:

Section 14.4 Connecting to External Databases : External Database Requirements

1747

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

If you wish to make changes to the curve properties, make them in this dialog and click 'OK'. The 'Curves to Import' panel entry will update to reflect the changes made.

The 'Operations' buttons: 'Load All' - the 'Load All' button will execute the import operation of wells / sets and curves from the external source database into IP. 'Remove All' - the 'Remove All' button clears all the wells and log curves from the two right-hand panels of the 'Import into IP' screen.

External Database Interface 'Check-box' Options The following import options can be 'checked' / 'un-checked' on the 'Import into IP' tab in order to manage the way Curve and Tops data are brought into IP from the external database:

'Overwrite Existing Curves'- if 'checked', when importing a curve or curves from the PETCOM database into an existing IP well where the identical curve name(s) exist, the PETCOM curves will overwrite the existing data in IP. If 'un-checked' the user will be warned that an identical curve name already exists in the IP well. 'Use "Load Into Set" option' - if 'checked' and the curves are being imported to an existing IP well,the import operation will ignore the PETCOM curve Set names and will write the imported curves into the user-selected IP curve Set (set up from the Well 'Properties' window). If the box is left 'un-checked', the PETCOM curve Sets will be created in the IP

Section 14.4 Connecting to External Databases : External Database Requirements

Senergy

Connecting to External Databases

1748

database and curves will be loaded into them. 'Fill Data Gaps' - if 'checked', IP will automatically extrapolate across any small (up to 5 depth increments) data gaps existing in the imported curves during the import operation. If the user wishes to copy Core analysis data (e.g.Core porosity, Core grain density., Permeability) then the 'Fill Gaps' option should be left 'un-checked'. Importing Continuous log curves and discrete core analysis data from PETCOM to IP would therefore require a two step import operation, with 'Fill Data Gaps' switched 'on' for continuous logs and 'off' for core data. 'Link Zones' - if 'checked', IP will import PETCOM Tops information and link the entries to make a continuous IP Zone Set where the base of one formation is automatically taken as the next deepest Formation Top depth.

'Export to Petcom' Interface The 'Export to Petcom' interface is shown below:

Select the IP well and the associated curves to write to the linked PETCOM database. Either, drag/drop a well name from the 'Tree' view panel into the upper 'Wells to Export' panel or rightmouse-button click on a well name and click the 'Add' button. This transfers all the curves associated with one well. If you only wish to export selected curves from an IP well, expand the 'Tree' view to see the curve Sets and expand the Set branch to see the curve names. Drag/drop

Section 14.4 Connecting to External Databases : External Database Requirements

1749

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

your required curves into the lower, 'Curves to Export', panel. Click the 'Export All' button to transfer the IP wells/curves to the attached PETCOM database. Click the 'Clear All' button to clear all entries from the 'Wells to Import' & 'Curves to Export' panels without exporting them to the linked PETCOM databsse. Curve set names are ignored when writing to a PETCOM database. PETCOM file names are limited to a maximum of 8 characters. This means the user must be careful not to select the same curve name from different sets or curves that have the first same 8 characters.

Related Topics Read/ Write to PETCOM DB GEOLOG6 OpenWorks ODM Shell LOGIC Database Loader Read / Write via OpenSpirit

14.4.2 GEOLOG6 The 'Read / Write to GEOLOG DB' interface has been updated to run either as an HTTP web link, a Secure Shell (SSH) connection or through Windows. Full details of the Unix and PC system set-up requirements are provided in the 'Connecting to External Databases' introduction. Please note: the 'old' GEOLOG6 link (IP Version 3.1 and earlier) is no longer supported. The user must have a valid GEOLOG6 licence to be able to read from / write to a GEOLOG6 database. The 'Read / Write to GEOLOG DB' interface includes a 'Tree View' browser, from which the user can 'drag and drop' an entire well, curves Sets or separate curves to load into IP from a connected GEOLOG6 database. This allows multiple well data to be selected for loading into IP, either as new IP wells or replacing / appending curves & Sets in existing IP wells. The 'Read / Write to GEOLOG DB' interface will only work if the Interactive Petrophysics installation is on the WINDOWS NT, XP or WINDOWS 2000 operating systems. It will not work under Windows 95 or Windows 98. The user should ensure that the IP 'Tools' menu

'Options'

'External Database

Section 14.4 Connecting to External Databases : External Database Requirements

Connecting to External Databases

Senergy

Connections'

1750

'Geolog Link' option is 'checked'.

The interface is viewed on 2 'tabbed' screens. These are: 'Import into IP', and 'Export to GEOLOG'

The 'Import into IP' Tab The 'Import into IP' Tab provides the user with the interface to connect to & load data from a GEOLOG6 database into IP. The 'Connection' button on the 'Import into IP' screen launches a dialog window similar to that shown below. The user must select one of the connection protocols - 'Web client' (HTTP), Secure Shell (SSH) or Windows and fill in the required fields for each connection type.

For the HTTP Connection you need to fill in the following: 'PNS File Location' : The Paradigm Name Service File Location. The PNS File contains

Section 14.4 Connecting to External Databases : External Database Requirements

1751

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

the Unix addresses of all the GEOLOG databases on the system. The directory path to this file is required to allow IP to display the available GEOLOG databases in the Project list. 'Read Url' : this is the 'Universal Resource Locator' for the cgi script installed on the Unix 'Apache' Web server. This locator is made up of the following syntax: 'Protocol' - 'Server Domain Name' - 'User Name' - 'Cgi script'. For example: 'http://webpgl16.pgl/~pg58_r03/ gllnk.cgi'. 'User Name' - This is the Unix User account to which your Unix system administrator has installed the Cgi script. 'Password' - This is the Unix password for the above user account. For the SSH Connection you will need to fill in the following: 'Geolog Directory' - the user will need to know the directory location of the GEOLOG6 binary files installation. For example: /raid5/mincom/geolog6/bin/ 'Server Address' - This is the Domain Name of the UNIX file server (DNS name). 'User Name' - This is the user account on the UNIX file server. 'Password' - This is the UNIX password for the above user account. 'Optional Variables' - The environment variable for GEOLOG - 'setenv PRDM_GEO_LICENSE_FILE\myPath' where myPath points to the users GEOLOGlicence. For the Windows Connection you will need to fill in the following: 'Geolog Directory' - enter the location of the GEOLOG program executable on the users computer. 'Optional Variables' - The Windows TM environmental variable for GEOLOG - 'set PRDM_GEO_LICENSE_FILE\myPath'. For multiple variables: set variablename=value; set variablename2=value2 etc. The configuration details are saved to the IntPetro.exe.config file, located in the IP program directory, when the user 'clicks' the 'Apply' button on the 'Connection' dialog. The settings are restored when the user subsequently closes and re-opens IP, so that the information does not have to be repeatedly entered each time the user requires the IP to GEOLOG6 link. Once the configuration has been set up and the connection established, the GEOLOG6 database wells will be displayed in the left-hand panel of the screen. The 'browser' is like a typical WINDOWS 'Explorer' interface, allowing the user to expand the Well 'Tree' to view the available Curve Sets and individual curves loaded for each GEOLOG6 well. NOTE: The following convention is observed when loading curves into IP from GEOLOG - GEOLOG6 curve names are displayed with a '_1', '_2', '_3' … after their name. This is the version number of that curve in GEOLOG6. When loading into IP, the '_1' will be removed, while

Section 14.4 Connecting to External Databases : External Database Requirements

Senergy

Connecting to External Databases

1752

any '_2', '_3' … will be left appended to the curve name to allow curves to be discriminated one from another. NOTE: IP will only allow one DEPTH curve to be stored for each well imported from GEOLOG. IP interrogates the user-selected GEOLOG well to determine the selected Set / curve with the smallest well step increment and uses this 'Depth' curve as the IP 'DEPTH' curve for the well. All other curves that are selected for loading into IP are referenced to this 'Depth' curve. Discrete data, for example core plug data (porosity, grain density, permeability etc..) would be loaded to the nearest IP well depth 'step', rather than at their 'true' depth, if they were imported to IP in this way. An alternative data flow route, exporting core plug data to LAS or ASCII files and then loading to IP as Array curves is recommended if such data are required at their actual recorded plug depths. See 'Create Curve / Array Curve' for more information.

Viewing GEOLOG6 Wells in the IP Interface Once a connection to a GEOLOG6 database has been established, by selecting a 'Project', the user can view the wells, curves and curve Sets in the GEOLOG6 database in the left-hand panel of the window. IP interrogates the external database to read wells, curve Sets, log curves and formation tops. The list of wells can be filtered either by using the drop-down list available from the 'Display Well:' box or by typing in the 'Filter By:' box and 'clicking' the 'Filter' button.

Section 14.4 Connecting to External Databases : External Database Requirements

1753

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Section 14.4 Connecting to External Databases : External Database Requirements

Senergy

Senergy

Connecting to External Databases

1754

This 'Browser' view can be used to expand 'Wells' and 'Sets' to show the curves in them. Wells, Curve Sets and curves are selected for import to IP by simple drag/drop operations: To Load Wells - drag/drop the 'Well' into the upper, 'Wells to Import' panel. Alternatively rightmouse-click on a well name and click the 'Add' button that appears on-screen. IP will read the external database entries and will show the status window illustrated below while it is reading the external database well. The user has the option to terminate the 'Read' operation at any time by clicking the 'Cancel' button. The 'Read' operation will populate the 'Wells to Import' panel with the Well name. All available GEOLOG curves will be listed in the 'Curves to Import' list. This can take some minutes, depending upon how many curves exist in the selected GEOLOG well.

To Load Sets / Curves - drag/drop the Curve Set name or curve name into the lower, 'Curves to Import' panel. Alternatively, right-mouse-click on a Curve Set and click the 'Add' button that

Section 14.4 Connecting to External Databases : External Database Requirements

1755

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

appears on-screen. IP will read the external database entries and will populate the 'Curves to Import' screen with the available curves. Click 'OK' to execute the operation. The selected Sets / Curves will be loaded into the interface. This can take some minutes, depending upon how many curves exist in the selected GEOLOG Sets.

To Load GEOLOG Formation Tops data: GEOLOG Formation Tops data can be imported into IP. The user can 'click and drag' the Tops Set into the 'Curves to Import' panel. The Tops data are flagged in the 'Curves to Import' panel, in the 'Import Type' column as type 'Tops', to distinguish them from conventional 'Log' data.

External Database Interface 'Check-box' Options The following import options can be 'checked' / 'un-checked' on the 'Import into IP' tab in order to manage the way Curve and Tops data are brought into IP from the external database: 'Use existing IP Well' - if 'checked', the user-selected curve Sets and curves will be loaded into an existing IP well with the same name as the GEOLOG well. If a well name match is not found, the user will be prompted for an action, as illustrated below:

Section 14.4 Connecting to External Databases : External Database Requirements

Senergy

Connecting to External Databases

1756

The user should click 'OK' to create a new IP well to load the curve data into, or 'Cancel' to abort the 'import' operation for that well. 'Overwrite Existing Curves'- if 'checked', when importing a curve or curves from the GEOLOG database into an IP well where the identical curve name(s) exist, the GEOLOG curves will overwrite the existing data in IP. If 'un-checked' the user will be warned that an identical curve name already exists in the IP well. 'Use "Load Into Set" option' - if 'checked' and the curves are being imported to an existing IP well,the import operation will ignore the GEOLOG curve Set names and will write the imported curves into the user-selected IP curve Set (set up from the Well 'Properties' window). If the box is left 'un-checked', the GEOLOG curve Sets will be created in the IP database and curves will be loaded into them. 'Fill Gaps' - if 'checked', IP will automatically extrapolate across any data gaps existing in the imported curves during the import operation. If the user wishes to copy Core analysis data (e.g.Core porosity, Core grain density., Permeability) then the 'Fill Gaps' option should be left 'un-checked'. Importing Continuous log curves and discrete core analysis data from GEOLOG to IP would therefore require a two step import operation, with 'Fill Gap' switched 'on' for continuous logs and 'off' for core data. 'Link Zones' - if 'checked', IP will import GEOLOG Tops information and link the entries to make a continuous IP Zone Set where the base of one formation is automatically taken as the next deepest Formation Top depth.

The 'Operations' Buttons The 'Operations' buttons are arranged along the bottom of the user interface. They are described below:

'Load All' - executes the 'import into IP' operation and loads all wells / curves listed in the 'Import' panels into the current IP database. 'Clear All' - clears all curve and well entries from the 'Wells to Import' and 'Curves to Import' list windows. 'Close' - closes the external database interface.

Section 14.4 Connecting to External Databases : External Database Requirements

1757

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Viewing GEOLOG Well Properties in the IP Interface The user can view available 'cultural' data associated with a GEOLOG well by right-mouse clicking on the well name in the 'Wells to Import' panel. This launches the following 'Well Properties' dialog window:

The user can either accept the GEOLOG well name, which will become the 'IP Well Name', or choose to load the curves into an existing IP well by selecting the appropriate IP well name from the 'IP Well' drop-down list. The user can choose the Curve Set to load the GEOLOG curves into, by selecting from the

Section 14.4 Connecting to External Databases : External Database Requirements

Senergy

Connecting to External Databases

1758

available choices in the 'Load into Set' drop-down list. If there are additional filled in data fields, for example 'Water Depth' or 'Kelly Bushing', stored in GEOLOG, these data can be copied into the appropriate 'Manage Well Header Info.' module entry boxes for the IP well, when the load operation is executed.

Viewing GEOLOG Curve Properties in the IP Interface Curve details can be viewed for curves selected for import, by right-mouse button 'clicking' on a curve in the 'Curves to Import' panel. A menu dialog is launched, as shown below. 'Clicking' the 'Properties' option opens the following 'Curve Properties' dialog:

The user can change the curve name, so that it loads to IP with the new curve name and can choose the Curve Set to load the curve into. The 'Edit Set' button launches the 'Edit Global Sets' module, allowing the user to create a new curve Set to use as the Load Set for this curve. The 'Details' button launches the 'Well Properties' window, shown above. If the user makes any changes to the curve name, Set or Units, clicking 'Apply' will save the changes and close the 'Curve Properties' window.

Section 14.4 Connecting to External Databases : External Database Requirements

1759

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Other Right-Mouse Button 'Click' Options The following options are also available from the 'right-mouse-button click' action in the 'Curves to Import' panel: 'Remove' - clears the selected curve from the 'Curves to Import' list. 'Remove All' - clears all curve names from the 'Curves to Import' list. 'Load' - loads the selected curve to IP using either a new IP well (the GEOLOG well name) or an existing IP well. 'Load All' - loads all the curves in the 'Curves to Import' list either to a new IP well (the GEOLOG well name) or an existing IP well.

The 'Export to GEOLOG' Tab The 'Export to GEOLOG' tab allows the IP user to write log curves and Tops back to a connected GEOLOG database. The interface is identical to the 'Import into IP' screen in terms of layout. The 'Browser' panel displays the current IP database and its associated wells. The functionality for selecting wells and curves is also the same. Wells can be drag/dropped into the 'Wells to Export' panel, Curve Sets and curves can be drag/dropped into the 'Curves to Export' panel. 'Right-mouse-button' clicking launches the 'Add' button, which also adds wells /curves into the Export panels. 'Export IP Tops' - if the 'Export IP Tops' check-box is 'checked', IP will automatically write all Zone / Tops Sets (of type 'TOPS') for the selected IP wells to the attached GEOLOG database. The user can then edit/delete the Tops sets as required, from within GEOLOG. 'Load All' - clicking the 'Load All' button, loads all selected curves and tops sets into the attached GEOLOG database. 'Clear All' : removes all entries from the 'Wells to Export' and 'Curves to Export' lists. PLEASE NOTE: when the user connects to an external database and IP reads the external wells, Sets and curves stored there, the information is stored in a data 'cache'. Essentially, IP takes a snapshot of the external database. If the IP user exports wells back into the external database and then goes back to the 'Import to IP' screen, the browser will not immediately be updated with the new well(s)/ curves. The user should close and re-open the external database link to refresh the data cache and hence the browsers well entries.

Related Topics Read/ Write to PETCOM DB GEOLOG6

Section 14.4 Connecting to External Databases : External Database Requirements

Connecting to External Databases

Senergy

1760

OpenWorks ODM Shell LOGIC Database Loader Read / Write via OpenSpirit

14.4.3 OpenWorks The 'Read from OpenWorks DB' interface has been updated to run either as an HTTP web link, or a Secure Shell (SSH) connection. Full details of the Unix and PC system set-ups are provided in the 'Connecting to External Databases' introduction. The 'Read from OpenWorks DB' interface includes a 'Tree View' browser, from which the user can 'drag and drop' an entire well, curves Sets or separate curves to load into IP from a connected OpenWorks database. This allows multiple well data to be selected for loading into IP, either as new IP wells or replacing / appending curves & Sets in existing IP wells. The 'Read from OpenWorks DB' interface will only work if the Interactive Petrophysics installation is on the WINDOWS NT, XP or WINDOWS 2000 operating systems. It will not work under Windows 95 or Windows 98. The user should ensure that the IP 'Tools' menu Connections'

'Options'

'External Database

'OpenWorks Link' option is 'checked'.

The 'Import into IP' Interface The 'Import' interface is viewed on the following 'Import into IP' screen. On clicking the 'Read from OpenWorks DB' option, the following screen is launched, which allows the user to set up the external database connection and to interrogate the available OpenWorks databases on the networked Unix system. The Connection protocols and configuration settings are described in detail in the 'Connecting to External Databases' chapter.

The 'Connection' button on the 'Import into IP' screen launches a dialog window similar to that shown below. The user must select one of the connection protocols - 'Web client' (HTTP) or Secure Shell (SSH) and fill in the required fields for each connection type.

Section 14.4 Connecting to External Databases : External Database Requirements

1761

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

For the HTTP Connection you need to fill in the following: 'Read URL' : this is the 'Universal Resource Locator' for the cgi script installed on the Unix 'Apache' Web server. This locator is made up of the following syntax: 'Protocol' - 'Server Domain Name' - 'User Name' - 'Cgi script'. For example: 'http://webpgl16.pgl/~pg58_r03/ owlnk.cgi' 'User Name' - This is the Unix User account to which your Unix system administrator has installed the Cgi script. 'Password' - This is the Unix password for the above user account. For the SSH Connection you will need to fill in the following : 'OpenWorks Link' - the user will need to know the directory location of the OpenWorks binary files installation. For example: /opt/PGLWowlnk/bin/owlnk.sh 'Server Address' - This is the Domain Name of the Unix file server (DNS name). 'User Name' - This is the user account on the Unix file server. 'Password' - This is the password for the above user account. The configuration details are saved to the IntPetro.exe.config file, located in the IP program directory, when the user 'clicks' the 'Apply' button on the 'Connection' dialog. The settings are restored when the user subsequently closes and re-opens IP, so that the information does not have to be repeatedly entered each time the user requires the IP to OpenWorks link. Once the configuration has been set up and the connection established, the OpenWorks database wells will be displayed in the left-hand panel of the screen. The 'browser' is like a typical WINDOWS 'Explorer' interface, allowing the user to expand the Well 'Tree' to view the available Curve Sets and individual curves loaded for each OpenWorks well.

Section 14.4 Connecting to External Databases : External Database Requirements

Senergy

Connecting to External Databases

1762

The user must first ensure that the 'Connection' method (SSH / HTTP), links and Unix user name and password are set up properly. See 'Connecting to External Databases' chapter, 'PC Configuration Instructions' section. The user can then select an OpenWorks project from the drop-down 'Project:' list. The left hand panel of the screen is a 'Project browser'-type interface that allows the user to view the wells, curve Sets and curves stored in the selected OpenWorks database. The browser view for the OpenWorks Project and wells can be expanded by clicking on the '+' symbol adjacent to the well icon, in order to view increasingly more detail on log curves.The 'Wells to Import' and 'Curves to Import' panels will be populated with OpenWorks wells and log curves when the user selects these data to load into IP. The list of wells can be filtered either by using the drop-down list available from the 'Display Well:' box or by typing in the 'Filter By:' box and 'clicking' the 'Filter' button. Data are selected for loading to IP by dragging / dropping 'wells', 'curve Set' names or individual 'curves' into the appropriate 'Wells to Import' or 'Curves to Import' panel.

Section 14.4 Connecting to External Databases : External Database Requirements

1763

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

This 'Browser' view can be used to expand 'Wells' and 'Sets' to show the curves in them. Wells, curve Sets and curves are selected for import to IP by simple drag/drop operations: To Load Wells - drag/drop the 'Well' into the upper, 'Wells to Import' panel. Alternatively rightmouse-click on a well name and click the 'Add' button that appears on-screen. IP will read the external database entries and will show the status window illustrated below while it is reading the external database well. The user has the option to terminate the 'Read' operation at any time by clicking the 'Cancel' button. The 'Read' operation will populate the 'Wells to Import' panel with the Well name. All available OpenWorks curves will be listed in the 'Curves to Import' list. This can take some minutes, depending upon how many curves exist in the selected OpenWorks well.

To Load Sets / Curves - drag/drop the curve Set name or curve name into the lower, 'Curves to Import' panel. Alternatively, right-mouse-click on a curve Set and click the 'Add' button that appears on-screen. IP will read the external database entries and will populate the 'Curves to Import' screen

Section 14.4 Connecting to External Databases : External Database Requirements

Senergy

Connecting to External Databases

1764

with the available curves. Click 'OK' to execute the operation. The selected Sets / Curves will be loaded into the interface. This can take some minutes, depending upon how many curves exist in the selected GEOLOG Sets. Click 'OK' to accept all the curve data in that Set. IP will read the external database entries and will populate the 'Curves to Import' screen with the available curves.

To load individual curves: 'Click and drag' a 'Curve' icon into the 'Curves to Import' panel, or right mouse button 'click' on a 'Curve' icon and click the 'Add' button which appears. IP will read the external database entry and will populate the 'Curves to Import' screen with the selected curve.

To Load OpenWorks Formation Tops data: OpenWorks Formation Tops data can be imported into IP. The user can 'click and drag' the Tops Set into the 'Curves to Import' panel. The Tops data are flagged in the 'Curves to Import' panel, in the 'Import Type' column as type 'Tops', to distinguish them from conventional 'Log' data.

Section 14.4 Connecting to External Databases : External Database Requirements

1765

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

External Database Interface 'Check-box' Options The following import options can be 'checked' / 'un-checked' on the 'Import into IP' tab in order to manage the way Curve and Tops data are brought into IP from the external database:

The user should click 'OK' to create a new IP well to load the curve data into, or 'Cancel' to abort the 'import' operation for that well. 'Overwrite Existing Curves'- if 'checked', when importing a curve or curves from the OpenWorks database into an IP well where the identical curve name(s) exist, the OpenWorks curves will overwrite the existing data in IP. If 'un-checked' the user will be warned that an identical curve name already exists in the IP well. 'Use "Load Into Set" option' - if 'checked' and the curves are being imported to an existing IP well, the import operation write the imported curves into the user-selected IP curve Set

Section 14.4 Connecting to External Databases : External Database Requirements

Senergy

Connecting to External Databases

1766

(set up in the Well 'Properties' window). If the box is left 'un-checked', the OpenWorks curve Sets will be created in the IP database and curves will be loaded into them. 'Fill Data Gaps' - if 'checked', IP will automatically extrapolate across any data gaps existing in the imported curves during the import operation. If the user wishes to copy Core analysis data (e.g.Core porosity, Core grain density., Permeability) then the 'Fill Data Gaps' option should be left 'un-checked'. Importing continuous log curves and discrete core analysis data from OpenWorks to IP would therefore require a two step import operation, with 'Fill Data Gaps' switched 'on' for continuous logs and 'off' for core data. 'Link Zones' - if 'checked', IP will import OpenWorks Tops information and link the entries to make a continuous IP Zone Set where the base of one formation is automatically taken as the next deepest Formation Top depth.

The 'Operations' Buttons The 'Operations' buttons are arranged along the bottom of the user interface. They are described below:

'Load All' Button - clicking this button will execute the import operation and will load all the selected OpenWorks wells, curve Sets and curves into the current IP database. 'Remove All' Button - clicking this button will remove all curve and well entries from the ' Import into IP' interface.

Viewing OpenWorks Well Properties in the IP Interface The user can view available 'cultural' data associated with a GEOLOG well by right-mouse clicking on the well name in the 'Wells to Import' panel. This launches the following 'Well Properties' dialog window:

Section 14.4 Connecting to External Databases : External Database Requirements

1767

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The user can either accept the Openworks well name, which will become the 'IP Well Name', or choose to load the curves into an existing IP well by selecting the appropriate IP well name from the 'IP Well' drop-down list. The user can choose the curve Set to load the Openworks curves into, by selecting from the available choices in the 'Load into Set' drop-down list. If there are additional filled in data fields, for example 'Water Depth' or 'Kelly Bushing', stored in OpenWorks, these data can be copied into the appropriate 'Manage Well Header Info.' module entry boxes for the IP well, when the load operation is executed.

Section 14.4 Connecting to External Databases : External Database Requirements

Senergy

Connecting to External Databases

1768

Viewing OpenWorks Curve Properties in the IP Interface Curve details can be viewed for curves selected for import, by right-mouse button 'clicking' on a curve in the 'Curves to Import' panel. A menu dialog is launched, as shown below. 'Clicking' the 'Properties' option opens the following 'External DB Curve Properties' dialog:

The user can change the curve name, so that it loads to IP with the new curve name and can choose the curve Set to load the curve into. The 'Details' button launches the 'Well Properties' window, shown above. If the user makes any changes to the curve name, Set or Units, clicking 'OK' will save the changes and close the 'External DB Curve Properties' window.

Other Right-Mouse Button 'Click' Options The following options are also available from the 'right-mouse-button click' action in the 'Curves to Import' panel: 'Remove' : Clears the selected curve from the 'Curves to Import' list. 'Remove All' : Clears all curve names from the 'Curves to Import' list.

Section 14.4 Connecting to External Databases : External Database Requirements

1769

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

'Load' : loads the selected curve to IP using either a new IP well (the OpenWorks well name) or an existing IP well. 'Load All' : loads all the curves in the 'Curves to Import' list either to a new IP well (the OpenWorks well name) or an existing IP well.

Related Topics Read/ Write to PETCOM DB GEOLOG6 OpenWorks ODM Shell LOGIC Database Loader Read / Write via OpenSpirit

14.4.4 ODM Oilfield Data Manager

(ODM) is a PC-based subsurface data management and geoscience

software package developed by Senergy. For more information on this application follow the link to the ODM3 website http://www.odmweb.com. The 'Read / Write to ODM DB' interface includes a 'Tree View' browser, from which the user can 'drag and drop' an entire well, curves Sets or separate curves to load into IP from a connected ODM database. This allows multiple well data to be selected for loading into IP, either as new IP wells or replacing / appending curves & Sets in existing IP wells. The 'Read / Write to ODM DB' interface is supported on Windows XP (SP2) installations or above.

Connecting to an ODM database The client connection is made using an OLEDB connection string. This connection string is constructed automatically when the user selects the ODM MS Access database '.mdb' file. 'Click' the 'Connection' button. Use the browser dialog that is launched to locate the required ODM database (.mbd) file. Select 'Open'. To access the ODM database, close the 'Connection' dialog and select a Project from the drop-down 'Project' list. The 'Read/Write to ODM DB' interface is organised on 2 'tabbed 'screens . These are : 'Import into IP', and

Section 14.4 Connecting to External Databases : External Database Requirements

Senergy

Connecting to External Databases

1770

'Export to ODM'

The 'Import into IP' Tab The 'Import into IP' Tab provides the user with the interface to connect to & load data from an ODM database into IP.

Viewing ODM Wells in the IP Interface Once a connection to an ODM database has been established, by selecting a 'Project', the user can view the wells, curves and Sets in the ODM database in the left hand panel of the window. IP interrogates the external database to read wells, curve Sets, log curves and formation tops. The list of wells can be filtered either by using the drop-down list available from the 'Display Well:' box or by typing in the 'Filter By:' box and 'clicking' the 'Filter' button.

This 'Browser' view can be used to expand 'Wells' and 'Sets' to show the curves in them. Wells, Curve Sets and curves are selected for import to IP by simple drag/drop operations: To Load Wells - drag/drop the 'Well' into the upper, 'Wells to Import' panel. Alternatively rightmouse-click on a well name and click the 'Add' button that appears on-screen. IP will read the external database entries and will show the status window illustrated below

Section 14.4 Connecting to External Databases : External Database Requirements

1771

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

while it is reading the external database well. The user has the option to terminate the 'Read' operation at any time by clicking the 'Cancel' button. The 'Read' operation will populate the 'Wells to Import' panel with the Well name. All available ODM curves will be listed in the 'Curves to Import' list. This can take some minutes, depending upon how many curves exist in the selected ODM well.

To Load Sets / Curves - drag/drop the Curve Set name or curve name into the lower, 'Curves to Import' panel. Alternatively, right-mouse-click on a Curve Set and click the 'Add' button that appears on-screen. IP will read the external database entries and will populate the 'Curves to Import' screen with the available curves. Click 'OK' to execute the operation. The selected Sets / Curves will be loaded into the interface. This can take some minutes, depending upon how many curves exist in the selected ODM Sets.

To Load ODM Formation Tops data: ODM Formation Tops data can be imported into IP. The user can 'click and drag' the Tops Set into the 'Curves to Import' panel. The Tops data are flagged in the 'Curves to Import' panel, in the 'Import Type' column as type 'Tops', to distinguish them from conventional 'Log' data.

Section 14.4 Connecting to External Databases : External Database Requirements

Senergy

Connecting to External Databases

1772

PLEASE NOTE : ODM tops often are stored in a way that preserves a stratigraphic hierarchy (e. g. Group, Formation, Member). The IP user will have to check the imported tops and may have to perform some editing, in the 'Edit Zones /Tops Sets' module, to get the ODM tops to display correctly in IP.

External Database Interface 'Check-box' Options The following import options can be 'checked' / 'un-checked' on the 'Import into IP' tab in order to manage the way Curve and Tops data are brought into IP from the external database: 'Use existing IP Well' - if 'checked', the user-selected curve Sets and curves will be loaded into an existing IP well with the same name as the ODM well. If a well name match is not found, the user will be prompted for an action, as illustrated below:

The user should click 'OK' to create a new IP well to load the curve data into, or 'Cancel' to abort the 'import' operation for that well. 'Overwrite Existing Curves'- if 'checked', when importing a curve or curves from the ODM database into an IP well where the identical curve name(s) exist, the ODM curves will

Section 14.4 Connecting to External Databases : External Database Requirements

1773

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

overwrite the existing data in IP. If 'un-checked' the user will be warned that an identical curve name already exists in the IP well. 'Use "Load into Set' Option' - ODM does not support curve Sets. If this check-box is 'checked' and the curves are to be imported into an existing IP well curve Set (set from the Well 'Properties' dialog) the import operation will write the ODM curves into the selected IP well curve Set. if the box is left 'un-checked', the ODM curves will be loaded into the IP database using an auto-created curve Set called CRVS. 'Fill Data Gaps' - if 'checked', IP will automatically extrapolate across any data gaps existing in the imported curves during the import operation. If the user wishes to copy Core analysis data (e.g.Core porosity, Core grain density., Permeability) then the 'Fill Data Gaps' option should be left 'un-checked'. Importing Continuous log curves and discrete core analysis data from ODM to IP would therefore require a two step import operation, with 'Fill Data Gaps' switched 'on' for continuous logs and 'off' for core data.

The 'Operations' Buttons The 'Operations' buttons are arranged along the bottom of the user interface. They are described below:

'Load All' - executes the 'import into IP' operation and loads all wells / curves listed in the 'Import' panels into the current IP database. 'Clear All' - clears all curve and well entries from the 'Wells to Import' and 'Curves to Import' list windows. 'Close' - Closes the external database interface.

The 'Export to ODM' Tab The 'Export to ODM' tab allows the IP user to write log curves and Tops back to a connected ODM database. The interface is almost identical to the 'Import into IP' screen in terms of layout. The 'Browser' panel displays the current IP database and its associated wells. The functionality for selecting wells and curves is also the same. Wells can be drag/dropped into the 'Wells to Export' panel, Curve Sets and curves can be drag/dropped into the 'Curves to Export' panel. 'Right-mousebutton' clicking launches the 'Add' button, which also adds wells /curves into the Export panels. 'Load All' - Clicking the 'Load All' button, loads all selected curves and tops sets into the attached ODM database. 'Clear All' - removes all entries from the 'Wells to Export' and 'Curves to Export' lists.

Section 14.4 Connecting to External Databases : External Database Requirements

Senergy

Connecting to External Databases

1774

NOTE: If Tops are Selected to be Exported to ODM, the following dialog will be displayed.

Select the required table for the Tops to be Exported to. NOTE: If Cancel is selected the Export will proceed, however NO TOPS will be exported.

Related Topics Read/ Write to PETCOM DB GEOLOG6 OpenWorks ODM Shell LOGIC Database Loader Read / Write via OpenSpirit

14.4.5 Shell LOGIC Database Loader This is a migration tool to copy Shell LOGIC database projects into an IP project. This module only works with LOGIC version S2001.2. Other versions are NOT supported.

Well Attributes To migrate the maximum amount of data from the LOGIC database into IP some preliminary steps are needed to configure IP. The following well attributes need to be created in IP.

Section 14.4 Connecting to External Databases : External Database Requirements

1775

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

1. 'Comment1' 2. 'Comment2' 3. 'XLoc' 4. 'YLoc' These attributes will be used to load these fields from the LOGIC database well header. 'Tools'

'Options'

'Well Attributes'. Click the 'Add' button, fill in the attribute name in the

dialog box 'New Attribute Name' and click 'OK'. Fill in the 'Display Alias' for the attribute. The ' Display Alias' is what is shown on the well header form.

Curve System Defaults If the user is planning to import a lot of curves which are not part of the standard IP set of curve names then it would be worth adding these non standard IP curve names to the CPARMDEF_USER.PAR file. By adding these non standard IP curve names to the CPARMDEF_USER.PAR these defaults will then be picked up automatically when loading. The CPARMDEF_USER.PAR can be accessed from the 'Tools'

'Defaults'

'Edit User Curve

System Defaults' menu.

Section 14.4 Connecting to External Databases : External Database Requirements

Senergy

Connecting to External Databases

1776

Load Shell LOGIC Database From 'Input/Output' select the 'Read from Shell LOGIC DB' option. Use the 'Browse' button to select the LOGIC database to import. The folder to select will be the folder that contains all the ‘WELL001’, ‘WELL002’ etc data folders. Select the wells to load. The normal windows selection controls work. ‘Ctrl’ click selects a well, ‘Shift’ click selects a range. Select the 'IP Well database sample frequency'. This will be the IP database step. Curves that are at a higher frequency than this in LOGIC will be loaded as an array curve. Curves with a lower frequency will be loaded as sparsely loaded data (ie data with gaps in it). The ‘IP Load Set’ can be selected. Capillary pressure curves will be loaded into a set called CapP. The ‘Edit Sets’ button can be used to create an IP set that is not available in the drop down menu. Click the ‘Load’ button to load the selected wells. The module loads the data well by well and saves each well to the IP database as it progresses. There is no limit to the number of wells that can be loaded at one time except the 9,999 well IP database limit. The IP database number will be the same as the LOGIC database number if possible (i.e. there is no IP DB number conflict).

Section 14.4 Connecting to External Databases : External Database Requirements

1777

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Capillary Pressure Capillary pressure data is all loaded into the CapP IP set. IP loads 5 curves for each LOGIC capillary pressure curve. To the LOGIC curve name is appended the follow extensions 1. pc. This will be an array curve that contains the pressure data of the Pc plugs. 2. sw. This will be an array curve that contains the saturation data of the Pc plugs. 3. perm. This is a regular curve that contains the permeabilities of the Pc plugs. 4. phi. This is a regular curve that contains the porosities of the Pc plugs. 5. GD. This is a regular curve that contains the grain densities of the Pc plugs.

Image Data Image data will be loaded as arrays and can be displayed in the normal way in IP.

Well Header Data All LOGIC header data will be copied to the IP well.

Curve Header Data

Section 14.4 Connecting to External Databases : External Database Requirements

Connecting to External Databases

Senergy

1778

The LOGIC header data will be copied to IP. This includes the module and the date curves showing when they were created and last updated in LOGIC. Curve comments will also be copied.

Journal File The LOGIC journal.dat file is copied from the LOGIC database into the IP well folders.

Related Topics Read/ Write to PETCOM DB GEOLOG6 OpenWorks ODM Shell LOGIC Database Loader Read / Write via OpenSpirit

14.4.6 Read / Write via OpenSpirit The 'Read / Write via OpenSpirit' functionality allows the user to load and save data between IP and other OpenSpirit -enabled databases such as OpenWorks OpenSpirit

and GeoFrame . The

website can be found at http://www.openspirit.com

The user must check that the 'Tools'

'Options'

'External Database Connections'

'

OpenSpirt Link' check-box, is 'checked' for this option to be visible under the IP 'Input / Output' main menu item. NOTE: The IP - OpenSpirit link will only work if OpenSpirit has been installed on the users PC, along with the OpenSpirit .NET components. These components are only found in

Section 14.4 Connecting to External Databases : External Database Requirements

1779

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

OpenSpirit version 2.5 and more recent versions. PLEASE NOTE: at time of writing (July 2006), the most recent version of OpenSpirit is Ver 2.9.1 and requires Microsoft .Net 1.1 in order to work properly. Also, there are additional required items in the OpenSpirit .NET install, so simply installing Microsoft's . NET components will not enable the IP - OpenSpirit connection. When you install OpenSpirit on your PC you will be prompted to specify the '.NET Installation options'. 'Check' all the options for the .NET Interface, Excel Adaptor and ArcView Extension, as shown below and click the 'Next' button.

NOTE: for a new OpenSpirit install on a PC there is a User registration phase to be completed before IP will communicate with OpenSpirit. A user 'Alias' must be set up using the 'OpenSpirit Launcher'. Opening the OpenSpirit Launcher will launch the following dialog:

Section 14.4 Connecting to External Databases : External Database Requirements

Senergy

Connecting to External Databases

1780

You will need to Alias a user, so 'click' the lower arrow and enter the appropriate Password for your Unix account/UserId in the text box at the bottom of the window (as shown below).

The OpenSpirit Launcher (shown below) should now start and you will be able to connect to an OpenSpirit 'Session'.

When the link is set up, IP will be able to communicate directly with any OpenSpirit-enabled databases that the user has access to. NOTE: 'PGL_IP' runtime licenses must be obtained from OpenSpirit in order for IP to communicate with an installed OpenSpirit system. Before IP can communicate with the OpenSpirit-linked database, the OpenSpirit 'User Server' must be running. The User Server is started when you activate the 'OpenSpirit Launcher', if it is not already running. You will be asked if you wish to shut it down when you exit the launcher,

Section 14.4 Connecting to External Databases : External Database Requirements

1781

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

as shown below. 'Check' the 'Do not shutdown any servers' Option and then 'Continue Exit'.

The OpenSpirit sessions are set up in the 'OpenSpirit Launcher' (installed when OpenSpirit is installed on the PC). A session allows access to various external database resources. Sessions must be set up before accessing OpenSpirit through IP. Help on setting up the OpenSpirit sessions can be found in the OpenSpirit help documentation.

PLEASE NOTE 1. At time of writing (July 2006) OpenSpirit has a limited ability to translate curve measurement 'units' residing in IP, to external databases. OpenSpirit recognizes POSC unit acronyms only. This means that many of the 'standard' curve units e.g. g/cc, v/v, dec., API , inches, will not be copied to the attached external database. The user may have to manually update/correct the curve units in the external database. 2. Co-ordinate Conversions - IP currently only recognizes external database well locations (Latitude / Longitude) where the parent project co-ordinates are defined in Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM) and WGS84 datum.

The 'Read / Write via OpenSpirit' Interface The 'Read / Write Via OpenSpirit' interface is used to load log curves, well Tops and Well Path (deviation) data into IP from an 'attached' external database, using an OpenSpirit connection. Log curves and Tops data can also be exported to a number of external databases from IP. The interface is organized on 2 'tabbed' screens. These are: 'Import into IP' 'Export to OpenSpirit' The 'tabs' are described below:

'Import into IP' Tab To Connect to an OpenSpirit Session:

Section 14.4 Connecting to External Databases : External Database Requirements

Senergy

Connecting to External Databases

1782

Click' the 'Connection' button to select an 'OpenSpirit Session' and 'Project' from which to retrieve well data. Click 'OK'. Select a 'Well Bore List' from the drop-down list at the top of the screen. The left-hand panel of the interface will be populated with available wells in a 'Tree' view presentation.

The following common tasks are described more fully in the 'Common Database Connection Tasks' chapter. 1. Loading all the log curves for a new IP well from the external project 2. Selectively loading log curves for a new IP well from the external project 3. Deselecting curves from the 'import' operation 4. Loading Well Tops 5. Deselecting Tops from the 'import' operation 6. Editing Well Properties Editing a new wells' 'well attributes' before loading into the current IP database Updating well attributes in an existing IP well in the current IP database

Writing Data via OpenSpirit

Section 14.4 Connecting to External Databases : External Database Requirements

1783

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Data are written to an OpenSpirit-connected external database from the 'Export to OpenSpirit' Tab.

PLEASE NOTE 1. At time of writing (July 2006) OpenSpirit has a limited ability to translate curve measurement 'units', defined in IP, to external databases. OpenSpirit recognizes POSC unit acronyms only. This means that many of the 'standard' curve units e.g. g/cc, v/v, dec., API , inches, will not be copied to the attached external database. The user will have to manually update/correct the curve units in the external database. 2. Co-ordinate Conversions - IP currently only recognizes external database well locations where the parent project co-ordinates are defined in Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM) and WGS84 datum.

'Export to OpenSpirit' Tab The following screen capture is typical of the 'Export to OpenSpirit' view seen when connected to an external database via the OpenSpirit link.

To export data to an OpenSpirit-connected database the 'Export to OpenSpirit' tab must be set up. The 'generic', expandable 'Tree View' panel on the left-hand-side of the user interface will contain the list of wells in the current IP database that are loaded into memory - and therefore available to

Section 14.4 Connecting to External Databases : External Database Requirements

Senergy

Connecting to External Databases

1784

export data from.

To select Wells and curves for export: Either 'click & drag' a 'Rig' icon into the 'Wells to export' panel. This will load all curve Sets and log curves associated with the selected well, into the lower, 'Curves to export' panel. Or, expand the 'Tree View' to see individual curve names, then 'click & drag' either the curve Set name or individual curve names into the lower, 'Curves to export' panel. The selected curves will appear in the panel.

Exporting an IP well to an 'External Database' By default an IP well,and its curves, when it is exported, will create a new external database well with the same well name as the IP well. Alternatively, to export the log curves to an existing external database well you should: right-mouse-button click on the 'Load Name' in the 'Wells to Export' panel. A dialog is launched, as illustrated below:

select an external database well name from the drop-down list to export the curve data to. Click 'OK'. Click the 'Export All' button on the main 'Export to OpenSpirit' screen. To confirm that the data have been exported to the correct external well, click on the 'Import into IP' tab. The 'Import' Tab will refresh and you can click on the well that you exported data to, to

Section 14.4 Connecting to External Databases : External Database Requirements

1785

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

see whether curves are present. The 'Export IP Tops' check-box, when 'checked', will export all the Zones / Tops Sets from the selected well to the external database.

Related Topics Read/ Write to PETCOM DB GEOLOG6 OpenWorks ODM Shell LOGIC Database Loader Read / Write via OpenSpirit

Section 14.4 Connecting to External Databases : External Database Requirements

Section

15 Tools

1787

15

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Tools

The 'Tools' menu provides the user with the ability to manage certain 'Defaults' property files associated with IP. The editable files include: Curve type and Curve system parameters Mineral Solver System and Mineral Solver Equations parameters Crossplot Overlay Lines Monte Carlo Error Analysis Parameters Log measurement unit conversions for Caliper, Density and Sonic logs Neutron Tool-Type set-up parameters

Related Topics Shading Types Edit Global Sets Edit Zone colours Edit Dip Symbols Edit Palettes Edit Default Lithology Edit Curve Aliasing Set Default Units Message Board 'IP Proprietary' Protection System Options

Section 15.

Tools :

Tools

Senergy

15.1

1788

Shading Types

The 'Shading Types' tool allows the user to define colour and pattern fills for use in log plotting and for creating a graphic Lithology fill (see 'Edit Default Lithology' tool). All the standard palette colours are available. The user has considerable interactivity with the 'style' of the shading that appears on plots. The 'Style' options are illustrated below and are selected from a dropdown menu on-screen. The IP default shading scheme is stored in the IP program directory, in the file ShadeType.opt. If the user edits the 'Shade Types' table and wishes to save the changes, 'check' the 'Save as Project Default' box on the 'Define Shade Types' window. On clicking 'OK', a ShadeType.opt file, containing the edited settings, is saved to the current IP 'project' directory. In effect, creating a project-specific shading look-up file. WARNING: If the user does not 'check' the 'Save as Project Default' box before clicking 'OK', the IP 'program' defaults file will be overwritten. The Default button will restore the available shade settings to the IP 'program' version of the ShadeType.opt file.

Bitmap images can be added into the 'Define Shade Types' window by clicking the 'Browse' button in an empty row in the table and then navigating to the appropriate folder and bitmap image. The bitmap file can be user-created or selected from the available bitmaps supplied with the IP software. Bitmaps for lithology fill should be 16 x 16 pixels dimensions to be compatible with Windows 98 installations. Larger bitmaps can be used with Windows NT, 2000 and XP installations. To delete an entry from the table the user simply deletes the 'Name' entry in the row -to-bedeleted and the row is removed.

Section 15.1 Tools : Shading Types

1789

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Lithology Curve Bitmaps A set of bitmaps have been created to be used in the 'Create Edit Lithology' module. These bitmaps are stored in the IP program directory in the 'Shading Bitmaps' sub-folder. The lithology symbols are mapped to a 'Name', which the user should type in, in the left-hand column of the 'Define Shade Types' table. These 'Names' are then used to set up the 'Edit Default Lithology' module. PLEASE NOTE: Shade 'Names' must be less than 10 characters in length. There is currently a maximum of 30 Lithology shadings allowed in the 'Edit Default Lithology' table. A user can add their own bitmap lithology shading to the 'Shading Types' table by setting the ' Style' cell in an empty row to 'Clear' and then using the 'Browse' button to locate the required bitmap file. To help manage these bitmaps it is good practice to organise the bitmap 'Names' in alphabetic order. New bitmaps can be selected and named. The user can 'click and drag' in the left hand column of the grid and move rows up / down the table to the appropriate position. This helps when setting up / changing the 'Edit Default Lithology' table. NOTE: if you have any Log Plots active when you try to edit the 'Shading Types', a warning message will appear advising that you cannot work on/save shading type edits. You must close all Log Plot displays while working on 'Shading Types'.

If the user clicks 'OK' to the 'Warning', the 'Shading Types' window is activated. However, no edits to the table can be saved until all log plots are closed down. If the user selects 'OK' on the 'Shading Types' window while a plot is still active, the following 'Error message' is displayed:

Section 15.1 Tools : Shading Types

Tools

Senergy

1790

Click 'OK' to the Error message then close all log plot displays, then click 'OK' on the 'Shading Types' to save your edits / additions. The user can create new curve fill shadings by using Windows

Paint or other bitmap editing

software to create a 16 x 16 bitmap. Save the file and add the bitmap file path to your 'Shading Types' list by using the 'Browse' button.

Related Topics Shading Types Edit Global Sets Edit Zone colours Edit Dip Symbols Edit Palettes Edit Default Lithology Edit Curve Aliasing Set Default Units Message Board 'IP Proprietary' Protection System Options

Section 15.1 Tools : Shading Types

1791

15.2

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Edit Global Sets

The 'Edit Global Sets' dialog window allows the user to create new 'Set Names' that will be copied to all 'in-memory' wells in an IP database. This provides a very quick method for ensuring that consistent Set Names are added to wells in a multiple well database. In addition, when the user moves between IP databases, the same 'Set Names' can automatically be made available to every well in every database that the user accesses. For example, you might want to add a 'Load' Set and a 'Calc' Set to every well in multiple databases. Type the names and a descriptions into the window and the Sets are created. This tool, when used in conjunction with the 'Manage Curve Sets' and 'Multi-Well Manage Curve Sets', provides the means for creating, editing and managing Sets within an IP project. The module launches from the 'Tools' Menu.

A blank 'Add Global Set Names' window is opened, which allows the user to type in a 'Short Name' and a 'Full Name'. The 'Short Name' is restricted to 8 characters in length. The 'Full Name' can contain a longer text string description that provides more information on the Sets contents, its' origin, or 'how the curves were calculated' etc.... 'Step Regular' allows the user to make the created Set a regular step Set or an irregular Step set. When the 'OK' button is clicked, the Set name is propagated throughout the in-memory wells. If additional wells are loaded into memory the Set names are also automatically created in these

Section 15.2 Tools : Edit Global Sets

Tools

Senergy

1792

wells. As long as a Set name remains in the 'Add Global Set Names' window, any new wells that are loaded into memory will have this Set name automatically created. If, however, the user deletes a Set Name from the 'Add Global Set Names' window and additional wells are subsequently loaded into memory, these wells will not have the 'global' Set name created for them. To delete a 'global' Set - clear the Short Name entry box for the Set you wish to delete and click ' OK'.

The 'Save as Project Default' 'check' box has the following functionality : If 'un-checked' (the default setting) the user-defined Set Names are available for any IP database that the user connects to. If 'checked' - the Set names that the user has defined are only applied in the currentlyactive IP database. If the user saves the 'global' Sets configuration with the check box 'checked', a file, ProjectFileDefaultsSets.OPT, will be created in the active database's 'Root' directory. If the user subsequently edits the configuration, for example to add another 'global' Set name in the ' Add Global Set Names' dialog window and 'un-checks' the box, a warning message will appear.

Section 15.2 Tools : Edit Global Sets

1793

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Clicking 'Yes' will overwrite the file ProjectFileDefaultsSets.OPT, found in the IP installation directory. This file contains a list of all 'global' (default) Set names. The message advises the user that any changes they have made will overwrite existing settings in this file. This means that newly created Set names will be available to all databases that the user has access to, not only the currently active database. Clicking 'No' cancels the operations and returns to the 'Add Global Set Names' window.

Related Topics Shading Types Edit Global Sets Edit Zone colours Edit Dip Symbols Edit Palettes Edit Default Lithology Edit Curve Aliasing Set Default Units Message Board 'IP Proprietary' Protection System Options

Section 15.2 Tools : Edit Global Sets

Tools

Senergy

15.3

1794

Edit Zone Colors

'Edit Zone colours' allows the user to choose the colours that are used to display zones in log plots, crossplots and histograms. The default colours shown below are used if no user-defined colour set is used. The colours are defined in a file called Zonecolors.opt which is created in each project.

To create a customized zone colour scheme the user 'clicks' on the colour box and selects from the drop-down box. The default colour scheme uses 25 different colours for zones. However, new zones with new colours can be added by 'clicking' the 'New Zone' button and selecting the colour for this zone. Zones can be deleted by selecting a zone and then 'clicking' the 'Delete Zone' button. 'Clicking' the 'Defaults' button returns all the colours to the system defaults.

Related Topics Shading Types Edit Global Sets Edit Zone colours

Section 15.3 Tools : Edit Zone Colors

1795

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Edit Dip Symbols Edit Palettes Edit Default Lithology Edit Curve Aliasing Set Default Units Message Board 'IP Proprietary' Protection System Options

Section 15.3 Tools : Edit Zone Colors

Senergy

Tools

Senergy

15.4

1796

Edit Dip Symbols

The tadpole symbol table is used in conjunction with the log plotting of tadpoles (see the TADPOLES section of the log plotting module). The form allows the user to assign a colour, shape and name of a tadpole to a certain value. This value can then be used along with a tadpole symbol curve to set the colour and shape of each tadpole in a log plot. The name is used in the ' Interactive Dip Picking' module so that the type of dip can be selected using the name.

The defaults are used if no user-defined set is created. The tadpole symbol sets are defined in a file called DipSymbols.opt which is created in each project. The user can add new rows or re-define the current rows. The value assigned to each symbol is completely flexible and does not have to be sequential.

Related Topics Shading Types Edit Global Sets Edit Zone colours Edit Dip Symbols Edit Palettes Edit Default Lithology Edit Curve Aliasing Set Default Units Message Board

Section 15.4 Tools : Edit Dip Symbols

1797

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

'IP Proprietary' Protection System Options

Section 15.4 Tools : Edit Dip Symbols

Senergy

Tools

Senergy

15.5

1798

Edit Palettes

There are two modes for editing or creating new palettes; 'Interactive' where ranges of colours can be set by 'clicking' on the two end-points, and 'Manual' where each colour in the palette can be changed individually.

The 'Palette' drop-down box allows the user to select a previously defined palette and edit it.

Interactive Mode 1. Highlight area in the palette result to change the colours. The 'All' button will highlight the total palette.

Section 15.5 Tools : Edit Palettes

1799

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

2. Select the 'From' button. 3. Select the colour by 'clicking' on the large colour box. 4. Select the brightness of the colour by clicking on the horizontal brightness bar. The selected colour will be displayed in the highlighted 'From' box. 5. Select the 'To' button. 6. Select the 'To' colour and brightness. The palette changes will be displayed in the palette bar. Colours can also be set by changing the R (Red), G (Green) and B (Blue) slider bars. The user can type in the actual R, G, B numbers. Steps 1 though 6 can be repeated for different areas of the overall palette to build up the total palette.

Section 15.5 Tools : Edit Palettes

Tools

Senergy

1800

Manual Mode The manual mode allows each value in the 256 colour palette to be individually changed.

Select box in the palette. Adjust the R, G, B slider bars to give the required colour. This must be repeated for each colour in the palette.

Buttons 'Spectrum' This will create the default 'Spectrum' palette. Useful in cases where this base palette has been changed or deleted. 'Save'

This will save the palette under the current name, overwriting the file on disk.

'Save As'

This will allow a new palette to be created under a user-defined name.

Section 15.5 Tools : Edit Palettes

1801

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

'Restore'

Senergy

This will re-load the current palette from the disk undoing any changes.

'Close' Closes the module.

Related Topics Shading Types Edit Global Sets Edit Zone colours Edit Dip Symbols Edit Palettes Edit Default Lithology Edit Curve Aliasing Set Default Units Message Board 'IP Proprietary' Protection System Options

Section 15.5 Tools : Edit Palettes

Tools

Senergy

15.6

1802

Edit Default Lithology

The 'Edit Default Lithology' tool provides the user with a pre-defined set of lithology bitmap shadings which are linked to lithology 'descriptions'. The 'descriptions' are used in the 'Create / Edit Lithology Curve' module to populate the drop-down list of shadings that the user chooses to build the Lithology Curve from. The 'Edit Default Lithology' tool permits the user to 'map' selected bitmap (.bmp) pictures, set up in the 'Shading Types' table, to lithology types for display in a log plot track. The default settings are saved in the Lithology.opt file in the IP program directory. The user can either: use the IP default bitmaps, or create your own bitmap file(s) and replace an existing IP default bitmap with the new one, or, edit the 'Default Lithologies' table to create your own, 'project specific' Lithology.opt file. NOTE: there is currently an upper limit of 80 lithology shadings permitted in the 'Edit Default Lithology' table. NOTE: If you make any changes to the 'Default Lithology' table, you should 'check' the 'Save as project default' check box BEFORE clicking the 'OK' button. This creates and writes a project-specific Lithology.opt file into the IP Project directory and prevents the user from overwriting the IP Program version of this file.

The IP Program Default Lithology Table. The Default Lithology File (Lithology.opt), shipped with the IP program, contains 39 bitmap shading files, linked to lithology descriptions. These descriptions are listed in ascending

Section 15.6 Tools : Edit Default Lithology

1803

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

alphabetic order so that the 'Create / Edit Lithology Curve' module is easier to work with. The user can choose to work with the IP Default Lithology bitmaps (stored in the IP Program directory, in the '\Shading Bitmaps' sub-directory), or can edit the table to their own specifications and include their own bitmap shadings. NOTE: bitmaps should have dimensions of 16 x 16 pixels. The Microsoft 'Paint' tool was used to build the current IP defaults. Also, as mentioned above, the table only allows a maximum 80 bitmaps to be used, so, if you wish to include different bitmaps you may have to replace some of the existing entries.

Editing the Default Lithology Table The user can edit the Default Lithology Table to their own specifications. You can: Shorten the list of Lithology descriptions : if you wish to shorten the list of available lithology bitmaps you should 'click' in a row that you want to remove from the IP Program default list and click the 'Delete Row' button. The row will be removed from the table. 'Check' the 'Save as project default' check-box before clicking the 'Ok' button to save your changes to a 'local', IP Project, Default Lithology file. Change the bitmap shadings used : Each shading 'Name' is linked to an entry in the ' Shading Types' table. If the user wishes to keep the shading name, but wants a different bitmap to be linked to it, the change should be made in the 'Shading Types' table, by 'browsing' to the new bitmap and selecting it. IMPORTANT: 'check' the 'Save as project default' check-box on the 'Shading Types' dialog to save your changes to the current IP project, otherwise you will overwrite the IP program shading defaults file. Change the Lithology Curve 'Index' Numbers : The 'Index' numbers are used in the ' Create / Edit Lithology Curve' module. The numbers are used to 'map' a bitmap shading to a curve value in the Lithology curve. The user can, for example, make a shorter Default Lithology table by deleting rows from the IP Program default table, then edit the Index numbers to their own scheme. Index numbers must be unique for each row of the Default Lithology Table. If you try to save your table, using the 'Ok' button, IP will warn you if there are rows with the same index value. You will then have to edit the index numbers to be unique. Remember to 'check' the 'Save as project default' check-box to save your changes to the current IP project, otherwise you will overwrite the IP program Lithology defaults file. Re-arrange the order in which the descriptions are listed : The order in which the rows are listed can be re-arranged by 'clicking' in the left hand border of the window, adjacent to the row you wish to move. Then, holding down the mouse button, drag the row up or down

Section 15.6 Tools : Edit Default Lithology

Tools

Senergy

1804

the list to a new position. Release the mouse button to place the row. Adding a new Lithology to the Default Lithology Table : Click in an empty cell in the ' Name' column (middle column) and then choose a bitmap name from the drop-down list. The user should then type in a 'Description' (in the right-hand column) which will be used as the display name for the Lithology shading in a Log Plot display. The 'Index' number should be filled in and be a unique number in the table. Deleting an entry from the 'Edit Default Lithology' table : the user 'clicks' in the row-tobe-deleted and the row is removed, when the 'Ok' button is clicked. NOTE: you should 'check' the 'Save as project default' check box if you make any changes to the default table . See below. NOTE: If you make changes and click 'Ok' to exit the 'Edit Default Lithology' module, then run the 'Create /Edit Lithology Curve' module for a well, and subsequently go back into the 'Edit Default Lithology' tool and change the bitmaps or index numbers or add new rows, the Lithology curve shadings could lose their mappings to the Lithology curve values and the curve will not display correctly in the log plot. If you add a 'Name' or 'Names' back into your IP Project Default Lithology table, make sure that it has an index number that has not previously been used/ saved. Then, in the log plot display that you are using the 'Create / Edit Lithology Curve' module in, drag the Lithology curve from the display (using 'SHIFT + Left-mouse-button 'click & Drag'), then re-select the track to plot the Lithology curve in. The Lithology curve will refresh with the new bitmap shadings correctly set. Alternatively, delete the IP Project Lithology.Opt file and rebuild it with the same names , bitmaps and index numbers, including the 'additional' entries and save again as the 'Project Default'. 'Save as project default' - The IP default Lithology shading scheme is stored in the IP program directory, in the file Lithology.opt. If the user edits the Default Lithology table and wishes to save the changes, 'check' the 'Save as project default' check box at the bottom of the window. On clicking 'Ok', a Lithology.opt file, containing the edited settings, is saved to the current IP ' project' directory. WARNING: If the user does not 'check' the 'Save as Project Default' box before clicking 'OK', the IP 'program' Lithology.opt file, located in the IP program directory, will be overwritten. 'Print' - The 'Print' option allows the user to create a reference hardcopy of the 'Default Lithology' settings, which includes the Index number, associated bitmaps pictures and 'Name' fields.

Related Topics

Section 15.6 Tools : Edit Default Lithology

1805

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Shading Types Edit Global Sets Edit Zone colours Edit Dip Symbols Edit Palettes Edit Default Lithology Edit Curve Aliasing Set Default Units Message Board 'IP Proprietary' Protection System Options

Section 15.6 Tools : Edit Default Lithology

Senergy

Tools

Senergy

15.7

1806

Edit Curve Aliasing

The 'Curve Aliasing' module can be accessed from 'Tools' be opened from within 'Tools'

'Options'

'Edit Curve Aliasing'. Or it can

'Curve Aliasing'.

The 'Curve Aliasing' module allows the user to construct a grid which reflects the user's preference for certain curve mnemonics. These curve mnemonics will be ranked according to their position in the grid with the top curve given the highest priority. When looking for a curve, to say fill in a default log plot, the module runs through the grid in order. The first curve of the 'Curve Type' it is looking for that exists in the well will be used. The module also works through the ' Curve Sets' in order if it can't find the curve of the correct 'Curve Type' in the 'Default Set'. The screenshot below shows the 'Curve Aliasing' module with default 'Curve Types' and curve names. As the 'Alias Mode' is set to 'Off' all the cells in the 'Curve Selection Order' and 'Set Selection Order' grids are grayed out.

Section 15.7 Tools : Edit Curve Aliasing

1807

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Curve Aliasing Modes There are three modes for the 'Curve Aliasing' module 'Off' - if this is 'checked' then IP will work as it previously used to by just using 'Curve Types' to select curves. For example, a density log can be selected in a module by typing in '@Density'. The program will look for a curve of type Density in the well, if several density curves are found it will select the most recent one. 'Manual' - in this mode the curve aliasing works in a similar manner to the 'Off' mode unless the entered curve name has a '#' symbol in front of it. This informs the curve aliasing that the user is asking for a specific curve to be aliased and if needs be it will

Section 15.7 Tools : Edit Curve Aliasing

Tools

Senergy

1808

locate a curve of the same type as the one entered if that specific curve can't be found in the well database. For example, if the user wants to populate the 'Clay Volume Analysis' module with gamma ray, density and neutron curves then they should enter '#GR', '#RHOB' and '#NPHI' in the relevant cells within the module. NOTE: within the alias Gamma, Density and Neutron 'Curve Type' column there must be respectively, a GR curve, RHOB curve and an NPHI curve entered. When the program is run, if a GR curve is found within the well database then it will use it. However, if no GR curve is found the program will look down the Gamma 'Curve Type' column and select the next available gamma ray curve in the list if it exists in the well. It will then do the same for the RHOB curve and finally the NPHI curve.

Section 15.7 Tools : Edit Curve Aliasing

1809

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The use of this method of curve aliasing provides for a very powerful tool when combined with the 'Multi-well Parameter Distribution' module as the user can set the alias table up with the curves that exist throughout the database in the order in which to be used and then have the 'Parameter Sets' using the generic form of the curve name which will then be applied across all the wells. NOTE: if curves exist within a database it is upto the user

Section 15.7 Tools : Edit Curve Aliasing

Tools

Senergy

1810

to make sure that they have a 'Curve Type' associated with them. The curve aliasing won't work if there are curves within a well but the curves don't have an associated ' Curve Type'. 'Automatic' - if a curve name is entered in a module but doesn't exist in the well then the aliasing module will attempt to find a curve of the same 'Curve Type' in the grid as long as there is a curve of similar name in the grid. It then uses the first available curve in the well that matches the first available curve in the grid. If there are no curves of that type in the well then the user will be informed. For example, in the alias grid below there is a curve called 'timscurve' in the GammaRay ' Curve Type' column. This curve does not exist in any well. However, if this curve name is entered into the 'Clay Volume Analysis' module as the Gamma Ray input curve and the module is run, the module uses the first available gamma ray curve that it finds in the well which matches the first available curve in the alias GammaRay 'Curve Type' column, which is the GRAM curve.

Section 15.7 Tools : Edit Curve Aliasing

1811

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The 'Curve Aliasing' module can be toggled between 'Off', 'Manual' and 'Automatic' from the main IP toolbar as well as from within the module.

'Use Final Curve' - if there is a 'check' in the 'Use Final Curve' column for that 'Curve

Section 15.7 Tools : Edit Curve Aliasing

Tools

Senergy

1812

Type' then the module will only look for 'Final Curves'. These are searched for using the same rules as for 'normal' curves. If a 'Final Curve' can't be located from the ones in the grid the module then goes through all the final curves in that well attempting to find one of the same type.

User Interface There are two main grids within the module;

Section 15.7 Tools : Edit Curve Aliasing

1813

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

'Curve Selection Order' grid - top grid. The top row of this grid is populated by 'Curve Types' or by user defined names. See 'Manage Columns' for more information about this. 'Set Selection Order' grid - lower grid. This grid is populated with all the Sets associated with each particular 'Curve Type'. In the screenshot above most of the 'Curve Types' have a 'Default' Set. With some, like the Core 'Curve Type', having a number of associated Sets other than just the 'Default' Set. When the program is first launched, the Curve Alias table is initially populated with a default table (defined by the file DefaultAlias.cax). The default table doesn't have any set names in it so the ' Set Selection Order' grid (lower grid) will be empty. The cells of the curve and Set grids can be typed into - NOTE: double click on the cell before typing - or the user can click the 'Auto Populate' or 'Load Defaults' button and fill the grid in that way. Users can also paste in from Excel.

Section 15.7 Tools : Edit Curve Aliasing

Tools

Senergy

Section 15.7 Tools : Edit Curve Aliasing

1814

1815

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

To move around the 'Curve Selection Order' grid more quickly than just using the horizontal scroll bar the user can 'click' on a cell and then type in a letter which corresponds to the first letter of the 'Curve Type' that the user wishes to find. For example, if the user is looking at the XDeepRes column but wants to quickly check what is in the DeepRes column then the user should click on an empty cell and type in 'D' and they will be taken to the DeepRes column which is the first 'Curve Type' starting with the letter 'D'. 'Auto Populate' - when this button is 'clicked' the module will run through all the loaded wells in the entire database looking for curves. If the curve has an associated type the module will add this curve to the grid along with its Set. The 'Curve Type' name will go into the column header of the 'Curve Selection Order' grid and the curve will go into the column under the 'Curve Type' header. If a curve doesn't have an associated 'Curve Type' then it won't be selected. If a curve of the same 'Curve Type' exists in a number of Sets then only one curve name is added to the column but the different Sets from which the curves reside will be added to the 'Set Selection Order' grid. The order in which the Sets are populated depends upon the order in which they appear in the well from which they came. They can be re-ordered on the grid by 'dragging' and 'dropping'. Curves can also be dragged and dropped to rearrange their column order. NOTE: the grid must be saved first before curve or Set re-ordering can occur. If the database has many different Sets then it isn't a good idea to use 'Auto Populate' as the 'Curve Aliasing' table becomes very unwieldy. 'Load Defaults' - loads a default curve aliasing grid - DefaultAlias.cax file. The default curve aliasing grid can be program specific - saved to the users C:\Documents and Settings\\Local Settings\Application Data\IntPetro35 folder or it can be made project specific by using the 'Save as Project Defaults' check-box. 'Manage Columns' - this is used to edit the list of 'Curve Types' seen in the 'Curve Selection Order' grid. The list is initially populated from the default curve alias file. ' Curve Types' can be deleted using the 'Delete Selected Columns' button or hidden by using the 'Hide Selected Columns' button. NOTE: to see 'hidden' columns 'uncheck' the box and click on the 'Hide Selected Columns' button again. If the box is not 'checked' then it gets shown. Additional 'Curve Types' can be added by typing the name of the new 'Curve Type' into the blank cell and clicking the "+" button.

Section 15.7 Tools : Edit Curve Aliasing

Tools

Senergy

1816

'Paste' - if a user has a curve alias table already created in Excel then it can be pasted into the grid using the 'Paste' button. Either the whole Excel sheet can be pasted or individual columns. 'Export to Excel' - this exports the whole grid to Excel as a .csv file. The user can then edit the curves, 'Curve Types' and Sets within Excel and re-import the grid back into the ' Curve Aliasing' module using the 'Paste' button. 'Clear' - this will clear all the curve names and Set names from the grid. NOTE: it won't clear the 'Curve Type' names. To clear the 'Curve Type' names use the 'Manage Columns' button and in the 'Column Selector' module 'Select All Columns' and use the 'Delete Selected Columns' button. For any changes made within the 'Curve Aliasing' module to take effect, the 'Save' button has to be 'clicked'. If the same curve name appears in more than one 'Curve Type' column then error messages will appear listing the conflicts when the 'Save' button is 'clicked'. The user will have to resolve the conflicts before being able to 'Save' the table.

Section 15.7 Tools : Edit Curve Aliasing

1817

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

'Clicking' 'OK' on the 'Error adding curve' message takes the user back to the 'Curve Aliasing' module and the conflicting curves are highlighted with a red box in the 'Curve Selection Order' grid.

Related Topics Shading Types Edit Global Sets Edit Zone colours Edit Dip Symbols Edit Palettes Edit Default Lithology Edit Curve Aliasing Set Default Units Message Board 'IP Proprietary' Protection System Options

Section 15.7 Tools : Edit Curve Aliasing

Tools

Senergy

15.8

1818

Set Default Units

'Set Default Units' instructs the IP program how to interpret curve values, specifically for Sonic, Density and Caliper logs, when their input curve 'units' have not been set to a 'Recognized Curve Unit'. For example, a density curve loaded to IP with curve unit 'UNKNOWN', will be treated as having density units 'gm/cc' if the input curve's 'Curve Type' is set to 'Density' and the 'Set Units' tab setting, for 'Density Logs', are as shown below, on the left hand screen capture. The recognized curve unit abbreviations are displayed on the 'Recognised Curve Units' tab (see below, right). If a curve has recognized units corresponding to an entry in the appropriate 'Density', 'Sonic' or 'Caliper' list, then its' values will be automatically converted by the interpretation modules in IP before being used. New unit abbreviations and their appropriate conversion factors can be added to the system defaults by editing the ASCII file UnitsConversion.par which can be found in the IP program directory. See 'Edit Unit Conversions Defaults' under the 'Tools'

'System Defaults' menu.

IP also uses the 'default units' to determine how parameters are displayed in the interpretation modules. For example, if the 'default units' for Density are set to Kg/m3, then all density parameters will be displayed in Kg/m3. Any interactive parameter line will also be displayed in the same units. However, this means that, for the interactive display parameter to work, the input logs for sonic,

Section 15.8 Tools : Set Default Units

1819

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

density and caliper must be in the appropriate 'default' units. If 'mixed' units are used (for example - a sonic curve is loaded to IP with units of'uSec/m, but sonic 'default units' is set to uSec/ft), the program will calculate the correct results, since IP recognizes the unit uSec/m, but any interactive parameter picking for the sonic log curve will not work. The crossplot overlay files (see crossplot) will be automatically converted to the default units when loading. The overlay disk files must be constructed using standard logging units (gm/ cc, uSec/ft and inches). The 'Screen Display' units can be set to either 'inches' or 'centimeters'. These units are used with the log plot to set various features, such as 'track width' and hardcopy length / width dimensions.

Curve defaults lookup file 'Use Project Defaults' check box - In the 'Curve defaults lookup file' panel, the 'Use Project Defaults' check box, if 'checked', will tell IP to look for a project level file called CPARMDEF_USER.PAR in the current IP project folder, from which the program can get userdefined curve display parameters, which will be applied to newly-loaded curves. These userdefined parameters will be used in preference to those defined in the IP program level file, CPARMDEF.PAR, when new curves are loaded into the IP project. When the box is 'checked' IP will create the CPARMDEF_USER.PAR project level file if it does not already exist. The file will initially be empty. The user should copy/paste/edit rows from the program level file, CPARMDEF.PAR, into the CPARMDEF_USER.PAR file to make it work. To reset a project to look up the IP program level Defaults CPARMDEF.PAR file, you must close the IP project and delete the CPARMDEF_USER.PAR file from the IP Project folder. The 'Use Project Defaults' check box will be 'un-checked' when you re-open the IP project. 'Use Metric File' - If the 'Use Metric file' check box is 'checked' then IP will look for the IP program level CPARMDEF_METRIC.PAR file when loading and setting the display parameters for imported curves. This file contains the metric-equivalent curve default display settings for Sonic, Density and Caliper curves. If the 'Use Project Defaults' check box is also 'checked', then IP will create a project level file called CPARMDEF_METRIC_User.PAR if it does not already exist and the curve display settings in this file will take precedence over the IP program level file CPARMDEF_METRIC.PAR, when new curves are loaded into the project. NOTE: The file CPARMDEF_METRIC.PAR is designed mainly for use in Canada, where the 'standard' units are; for Sonic- uSec/m, for Density - KG/m3 and caliper - mm. Hence, a set of

Section 15.8 Tools : Set Default Units

Tools

Senergy

1820

different defaults for scales and units to those used elsewhere. Unless you work in these units, do not use the metric option. 'Set as Project Default' - The 'Set as Project Default' check box, if 'checked' will save the currently selected settings for Density/Sonic/Caliper logs /Screen display to a project level defaults file called DefaultUnits.opt. This allows the user to save different combinations of settings for different projects. When a project is opened where a DefaultUnits.opt file exists, the box will be 'checked'. The program will first search for the project level defaults file rather than defaulting to the IP program level file, ProgDefs.opt. If you want to reset to the IP program ProgDefs.opt file, you need to close IP, delete the file DefaultUnits.opt from the project folder and re-start IP. This will 'un-check' the check box.

Related Topics Shading Types Edit Global Sets Edit Zone colours Edit Dip Symbols Edit Palettes Edit Default Lithology Edit Curve Aliasing Set Default Units Message Board 'IP Proprietary' Protection System Options

Section 15.8 Tools : Set Default Units

1821

15.9

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Message Board

The 'Message Board' tool allows the user to activate a 'logging' window which displays messages, for example, regarding log data input operations. The message board will normally only appear if there has been an error during the execution of an IP process. The message board can be launched from the 'Message Board' option on the 'Tools' menu.

The 'Stay on Top' check-box, if 'checked', means that the Message Board window will always launch as the topmost window on your monitor. To put the 'Message Board' in the background, 'un-check' the box. Clicking the 'Clear' button will clear all the text entries out of the Message Board.

Related Topics Shading Types Edit Global Sets Edit Zone colours Edit Dip Symbols Edit Palettes Edit Default Lithology Edit Curve Aliasing Set Default Units Message Board 'IP Proprietary' Protection System Options

Section 15.9 Tools : Message Board

Tools

Senergy

1822

15.10 System Defaults IP 'System Defaults' settings are found in the 'Tools' Menu item. The purpose of the IP 'Default' files is to provide the user with a mechanism to set up / edit / extend the functionality of some of the modules in IP. The 'Defaults' files are ASCII text files which set up parameters, for example, for the display characteristics for log curves when they are loaded into IP (CPARMDEF.PAR), or for the Monte Carlo Error Analysis module, initializing parameters (MonteCarloDefaults.par).

A user may want to set up their own 'user' Defaults files or to add extra options into the existing IP program Defaults files. The available operations are listed in the menu shown above. IP Defaults files exist for the following: Curve System Defaults (file - CPARMDEF.PAR). This file contains the IP program default display characteristics (line colour, left and right curve display limits, Crossplot & Histogram minimum and maximum scales) that are set for many common log curves when they are loaded into an IP project/database. See the 'Edit Curve System Defaults' section. Curve Type Defaults (file - CurveType.opt). This file contains the list of generic curve 'Types' that IP uses to auto-select curves for some IP modules.See the 'Edit Curve Types Defaults' section. Curve Alias Defaults (file - CurveAlias.txt) This file is used to set up alternative 'Load' names for logs being imported into IP. This is useful if you want log curves, from a number of data sources & with different curve mnemonics, to be loaded into IP with a common name. See the 'Edit Curve Alias Defaults' section.

Section 15.10 Tools : System Defaults

1823

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Mineral Solver Mineral System Defaults (file - MINDEF.PAR). This file contains the default minerals and their properties for the Mineral Solver module. The user can add extra minerals and their matrix properties to the table, or edit the properties of existing minerals. See the 'Edit Mineral Solver Mineral Defaults' section. Mineral Solver Mineral Equation Defaults (file - MINEQDEF.PAR). This file contains the mineral 'Equation' default settings for the Mineral Solver module. Any equation that is selected in the 'Model' screen is set up according to the parameters in this file. New equation types can be added to the list. See the 'Edit Mineral Solver Mineral Equations' section. Crossplot Overlays Setup File (file - Overlay_Files.ovl). This file contains the descriptions and file names of all available Crossplot overlay line files. If the user creates a new overlay file, the name must be added to this file in order for the new overlay lines to be visible within IP, in the Overlay drop-down list in the Crossplot set-up screen. See the 'Edit Crossplot Overlay Set-up File' section. Monte Carlo Defaults (file - MonteCarloDefaults.par). This file contains the default settings for the Monte Carlo Error Analysis module, including the parameters to be included, the distribution types (Gaussian, Square , Triangular) and the high and low shift values for each input curve or parameter. See the 'Edit Monte Carlo Defaults' section. Unit Conversions Defaults (file - UnitConversion.par). This file contains the list of curve unit abbreviations that IP recognizes for Density, Sonic and Caliper logs and the associated conversion factors from the input unit to gm/cc for Density, to uSec/ft for Sonic and to inches for Caliper. The user can add extra 'recognized units', together with their associated conversion factors to this file. See the 'Edit Unit Conversion Defaults' section. Neutron Tool Type Setup File (file - Neu_Parm_Files.neu). This file contains a list of the logging service companies and the neutron tool look-up tables that are available in IP. See the 'Edit neutron Tool Types Set-up File' section. User-defined 'Default' files can be created and / or edited using the following options: 'Edit User Curve System Defaults'. This will create a file called CPARMDEF_USER. PAR in the IP program directory if it does not already exist, or, if it does exist, it will open the file for editing. The purpose of this file is to allow the user to set up alternative curve display settings to those in the CPARMDEF.PAR file, without altering the CPARMDEF.PAR file contents. For example, if the user wishes to change the default curve colour for each possible Density curve (RHOB, ZDEN, RHOZ etc..) , you can create the

Section 15.10 Tools : System Defaults

Tools

Senergy

1824

CPARMDEF_USER.PAR file, cut and paste the row entries for the three curves from the CPARMDEF.PAR file into the '_USER.PAR' file and change the 'colour' setting for each row there. Save the CPARMDEF_USER.PAR file. When you next open IP and attempt to load one of the RHOB, RHOZ or ZDEN curves, IP will use the entries in the CPARMDEF_USER.PAR file in preference to the CPARMDEF.PAR entries. See the 'Edit Curve System Defaults' section. 'Edit User Curve Type Defaults'. This will create a file called UserCurveType.opt in the IP program directory if it does not already exist, or, if it does exist, it will open the file for editing. The user can add their own curve 'Types' into this file. See the 'Edit Curve Types Defaults' section. [Note: When Corporate Folders is enabled all the text files listed are searched for in each folder in turn from the top down]

'Program Level' and 'Project Level' Defaults All the Defaults files listed above can be found in the IP program directory. These are the ' Program Level' Defaults files. Editing any of these files will mean that any changes made to the files will be seen in any IP database that is opened using the current IP executable, when the appropriate interpretation module is launched. 'Project Level' Defaults files are files that are created / stored in an IP 'Project' directory and will only be called upon by IP when the user opens that particular project. Project Level Defaults allow the user to customize some parameters, without affecting the IP 'Program Level' settings. The Project Level Defaults will be used in preference to the IP Program Level Defaults, where they exist. The Lithology.opt, DefaultUnits.opt and ShadeTypes.opt files are examples of 'Defaults' files that can be saved at the Project level and allow the user to tailor colour tables, Lithology shading and Density/Sonic/Caliper Curve settings on a project by project basis. NOTE: if you have changed any Default files and you wish to keep your edited files when a new version of IP is installed on your PC, remember to save the edited files in another folder/directory before installing IP from the installation CD. Then copy your edited files back into the IP program directory, overwriting the existing files.

Related Topics System Defaults Edit Curve System Defaults Edit Curve Types Defaults

Section 15.10 Tools : System Defaults

1825

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Edit Curve Alias Defaults Edit Mineral Solver Mineral System Defaults Edit Mineral Solver Mineral Equations Defaults Edit Crossplot Overlay Set-up File Edit Monte Carlo Defaults Edit Unit Conversions Defaults Edit Neutron Tool Types set-up File

15.10.1 Edit Curve System Defaults The 'Edit Curve System Defaults' option allow the user to set the display properties of curves when they are loaded to IP.

When a curve is loaded to the IP program, IP cross checks the loaded curve name against the file 'CPARMDEF.PAR', which is found in the IP Program directory. If the curve name is found, its display properties (left / right scales, line colour, Lin/log scaling, histogram and Crossplot scaling) will be set, based on the properties in the CPARMDEF.PAR file. The user can add new lines to this file or change the existing settings for a particular curve or curves. If a user is continuously finding that they are loading curves to IP whose names are not in the CPARMDEF.PAR file, then they should add them into the file. This will save having to change the curve properties manually every time the curves are loaded. The 'Edit User Curve System Defaults' option allows the user further flexibility in setting curve

Section 15.10 Tools : System Defaults

Tools

Senergy

1826

display criteria. The user can copy text lines from the existing CPARMDEF.PAR file into this file ( CPARMDEF_USER.PAR) and set up line thickness, colour etc... for each curve. When IP is next launched, the two files CPARMDEF.PAR and CPARMDEF_USER.PAR are merged, with the curve display criteria from the _USER file taking precedence over the CPARMDEF.PAR file. This allows the user to perform curve system edits, without physically editing the CPARMDEF. PAR file. Alternatively, when curves have been loaded into IP, the user can use the 'Manage Curve Headers' module to pass new curve names and their display parameters to the CPARMDEF_USER.PAR file. This is performed by 'right-mouse clicking' in the 'In Name' column, in the appropriate row of the curve grid. Two options will be launched in a new window:

'Add Curve Type to file' will append the selected Curve Type details to the text file UserCurveTypes.opt, which is created in the IP program directory the first time this option is chosen. The new Curve Type is added to this file and subsequent additions are appended to the file contents. 'Add Curve Properties to file' will append the selected curve row display properties to the CPARMDEF_USER.PAR file. The menu items are simply shortcuts to editing the files. The editing is performed using Windows Notepad. If you are working on a single monitor PC or laptop and you wish to edit this file using the WINDOWS Notepad, in Notepad select the 'Format' menu item and switch off

Section 15.10 Tools : System Defaults

1827

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

(un'check') the 'Word Wrap' feature to activate the horizontal scroll bar to be able to see all the entries in the file.

Related Topics System Defaults Edit Curve System Defaults Edit Curve Types Defaults Edit Curve Alias Defaults Edit Mineral Solver Mineral System Defaults Edit Mineral Solver Mineral Equations Defaults Edit Crossplot Overlay Set-up File Edit Monte Carlo Defaults Edit Unit Conversions Defaults Edit Neutron Tool Types set-up File

15.10.2 Edit Curve Types Defaults The 'Edit Curve Types Defaults' menu item provide a shortcut to the file CurveType.opt located in the IP program directory.

Curve Types are used in IP to help with the auto-selection / 'aliasing' of curves used in some

Section 15.10 Tools : System Defaults

Tools

Senergy

1828

interpretation modules. On loading curves, the user can choose to fill in the 'Curve Type' cell in the load 'grid'. Alternatively, 'Curve Type' can be filled in later, in the Manage Curve Headers display. For example, a curve RHOB would be loaded as type Density, a curve GR as type GammaRay. If the user loads curve data into a well and wishes to add a new 'Curve Type' for a particular curve to IP, he can do so using the 'Edit / List Well Curve headers' module. The user types a ' Curve Type' name in the 'Curve Type' column. Then, by 'right clicking' in the 'In Name' column of the appropriate row, two options are available:

The first time the 'Add Curve Type to file' is run, a blank text file UserCurveTypes.opt is created in the IP program directory. The new 'Curve Type' is added to this file. Subsequent additions are appended to this file.

Related Topics System Defaults Edit Curve System Defaults Edit Curve Types Defaults Edit Curve Alias Defaults Edit Mineral Solver Mineral System Defaults Edit Mineral Solver Mineral Equations Defaults Edit Crossplot Overlay Set-up File

Section 15.10 Tools : System Defaults

1829

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Edit Monte Carlo Defaults Edit Unit Conversions Defaults Edit Neutron Tool Types set-up File

15.10.3 Edit Curve Alias Defaults The 'Edit Curve Alias Defaults' menu item allows the user to set up a default set of 'Curve Alias' names, which will be interrogated every time the user selects a LAS, LIS or DLIS formatted file to load into IP using the 'Load Data' modules. If an input curve has an 'alias' defined in the CurveAlias.txt file, found in the IP program directory, that 'alias' name will appear as the 'In Name' column entry in the 'Load Data' grid and the curve will be loaded to IP using the 'alias' name.

This 'Curve Alias' file is particularly useful if the user is loading curves from a number of different service company data files and wishes curves in IP to be named consistently, regardless of data source. The 'Curve Alias' defaults file can also be used in the 'LAS Batch Load' module as a type of 'm ask' file. The CurveAlias.txt file is used automatically by the IP program and does not have to be manually selected for use. Input curves from the external LAS file will be loaded according to any aliases that have been set up in the 'Curve Alias' file. Unlike a conventional 'mask' file however, all other curves in the external LAS files will be loaded to IP using their default 'external' name (a 'mask' file loads only those curves listed in it). Selecting the 'Edit Curve Alias Defaults' option launches the WINDOWS 'Notepad' application

Section 15.10 Tools : System Defaults

Tools

Senergy

1830

with the CurveAlias.txt file loaded into it. The file format is very simple and consists of pairs of curve names that should be 'linked', one pair per line in the file. The following characters are acceptable to separate the 'external file' name from the 'IP load' name: comma, space, tab and semicolon. An example 'alias' file is given below. $ Interactive Petrophysics $ 'Curve Alias Defaults' file $ Curve name order is as shown with 'external curve name' first, followed by 'IP Alias name'. $ Curve name should be separated by a space, tab, comma or semicolon character. LLD2 LLD MSFL1 MSFLC PHICORE2; PHICORE RHOB1, RHOB

The 'Curve Alias file name' box within the 'LAS Batch Load' module must contain the valid mask file name if the 'Use Mask to select curves' box has been 'checked'. The 'Edit Mask File' button can be used to create or browse to the correct file name. For information on the 'Curve Aliasing' module, which is a separate module to this and relates with how curves are handled within modules rather than in the initial loading of curves, then follow the link.

Related Topics System Defaults Edit Curve System Defaults Edit Curve Types Defaults Edit Curve Alias Defaults Edit Mineral Solver Mineral System Defaults Edit Mineral Solver Mineral Equations Defaults Edit Crossplot Overlay Set-up File Edit Monte Carlo Defaults Edit Unit Conversions Defaults Edit Neutron Tool Types set-up File

Section 15.10 Tools : System Defaults

1831

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

15.10.4 Edit Mineral Solver Mineral System Defaults The 'Edit Mineral Solver Mineral System Defaults' option allows the user to set up the default minerals for the 'Mineral Solver' probabilistic model.

The button is a shortcut key to a text editor that opens the MinDef.par file. This file contains the default mineral parameters for the 'Mineral Solver' module. If you are working on a single monitor PC or laptop and you wish to edit this file using the WINDOWS Notepad, in Notepad select the 'Format' menu item and switch off (un'check') the 'Word Wrap' feature to activate the horizontal scroll bar.

Related Topics System Defaults Edit Curve System Defaults Edit Curve Types Defaults Edit Curve Alias Defaults Edit Mineral Solver Mineral System Defaults Edit Mineral Solver Mineral Equations Defaults Edit Crossplot Overlay Set-up File Edit Monte Carlo Defaults Edit Unit Conversions Defaults Edit Neutron Tool Types set-up File

Section 15.10 Tools : System Defaults

Tools

Senergy

1832

15.10.5 Edit Mineral Solver Mineral Equations Defaults The 'Edit Mineral Solver Mineral Equation Defaults' option allows the user to set up the Mineral Equation defaults for the 'Mineral Solver' probabilistic model.

The button is a shortcut key to the WINDOWS 'Notepad' that opens the MinEqDef.par file. This file contains the mineral equation parameters for the 'Mineral Solver' module. Parameters can be added / changed by the user. If you are working on a single monitor PC or laptop and you wish to edit this file using the WINDOWS Notepad, in Notepad select the 'Format' menu item and switch off (un'check') the 'Word Wrap' feature to activate the horizontal scroll bar this makes it easier to see the format of the file.

Related Topics System Defaults Edit Curve System Defaults Edit Curve Types Defaults Edit Curve Alias Defaults Edit Mineral Solver Mineral System Defaults Edit Mineral Solver Mineral Equations Defaults Edit Crossplot Overlay Set-up File Edit Monte Carlo Defaults

Section 15.10 Tools : System Defaults

1833

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Edit Unit Conversions Defaults Edit Neutron Tool Types set-up File

15.10.6 Edit Crossplot Overlay Set-up File The 'Edit Crossplot Overlays setup file' menu item provides a shortcut to the file Overlay_Files.ovl. This file contains the names and descriptions of available crossplot overlay lines. The user can edit this file to add new overlay line file names that can be used within IP. See Creating Crossplot Overlay Files for more details

Related Topics System Defaults Edit Curve System Defaults Edit Curve Types Defaults Edit Curve Alias Defaults Edit Mineral Solver Mineral System Defaults Edit Mineral Solver Mineral Equations Defaults Edit Crossplot Overlay Set-up File Edit Monte Carlo Defaults Edit Unit Conversions Defaults Edit Neutron Tool Types set-up File.

Section 15.10 Tools : System Defaults

Tools

Senergy

1834

15.10.7 Edit Monte Carlo Defaults The 'Edit Monte Carlo Defaults' menu item provides a shortcut to the file MonteCarloDefaults.par. This file contains the defaults for the Monte Carlo Error Analysis module.

If you are working on a single monitor PC or laptop and you wish to edit this file using the WINDOWS Notepad, in Notepad select the 'Format' menu item and switch off (un'check') the 'Word Wrap' feature to activate the horizontal scroll bar. This makes it easier to see the format of the file.

Related Topics System Defaults Edit Curve System Defaults Edit Curve Types Defaults Edit Curve Alias Defaults Edit Mineral Solver Mineral System Defaults Edit Mineral Solver Mineral Equations Defaults Edit Crossplot Overlay Set-up File Edit Monte Carlo Defaults Edit Unit Conversions Defaults Edit Neutron Tool Types set-up File

Section 15.10 Tools : System Defaults

1835

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

15.10.8 Edit Unit Conversions Defaults The IP program works with Density, Sonic and Caliper log curves defined in units of 'grams per cubic centimetre', 'microseconds per foot' and 'inches', respectively.

The 'Edit Unit Conversions defaults' menu item provides a shortcut to the file UnitsConversion.par which contains the list of 'units' that IP recognizes for Sonic, Density and caliper curves and the conversion factors from the entered units to the 'defaults' described above. The user can edit the file to add other units for these types of curves, if available.

Related Topics System Defaults Edit Curve System Defaults Edit Curve Types Defaults Edit Curve Alias Defaults Edit Mineral Solver Mineral System Defaults Edit Mineral Solver Mineral Equations Defaults Edit Crossplot Overlay Set-up File Edit Monte Carlo Defaults Edit Unit Conversions Defaults Edit Neutron Tool Types set-up File

Section 15.10 Tools : System Defaults

Tools

Senergy

1836

15.10.9 Edit Neutron Tool Types set-up File The 'Edit Neutron tool types setup file' menu item provides a shortcut to the file Neu_Parm_Files.neu. This file contains a list of Logging companies and neutron tool types for which neutron parameter 'look-up' tables are available. The user can write a new lookup parameter file (xxx.neu) and add the name to this file to make it available in IP.

Related Topics System Defaults Edit Curve System Defaults Edit Curve Types Defaults Edit Curve Alias Defaults Edit Mineral Solver Mineral System Defaults Edit Mineral Solver Mineral Equations Defaults Edit Crossplot Overlay Set-up File Edit Monte Carlo Defaults Edit Unit Conversions Defaults Edit Neutron Tool Types set-up File

Section 15.10 Tools : System Defaults

1837

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

15.11 'IP Proprietary' Protection System A single, 'IP Proprietary' (IP) licensing mechanism is used for IP Version 3.3 and later versions. The original 'Copy Control' system by Microcosm is no longer supported. To view the licence properties for your installation, to transfer the licence from one PC to another and to update the specialist modules available in your installation go to the 'Tools'

'Program Protection 'IP''

options. The 'Program Protection' option, located on the 'Tools' menu sets up the program copyright protection for the users IP installation. The protection system can be set up either on an individual PC, or a working network protection system can be used.

IP Licence Information A unique customer ID number is provided for the user which allows one copy of the licence to be downloaded from the website and installed on a specific PC. Licences are tied to a physical PC and cannot be moved to another PC unless they are uninstalled back to the licensing web server. The network licensing system can be set up either by each user accessing the licence file directly, or a network licence server program can be used. The network licence server allows the licence to be totally isolated from the users and hence provides a higher level of security, ensuring that the licence file will not become accidentally corrupted or deleted. The protection system consists of a licence file 'IPSec.DAT'. This file must not be edited, otherwise the licence will become invalid. The licence file must reside in a designated directory on a designated PC. The directory and PC name are written into the file when the original licence is created. If the file is moved to another location it will no longer work. IMPORTANT: If you need to move the licence file; uninstall the protection (Check-out) and then re-install it (Check-in) to the new location. The properties of the licence can be viewed by listing the IPSec.DAT file. DO NOT edit this file. The file contains the encrypted licence information plus some readable text. Each licence can control the number of concurrent users for each module that is licenced. The expiry date for each licence module can be uniquely set. Example IPSec.DAT file : 131 130 136 131 141 139 134 136 143 181 182 171 168 174 177 184 119 162 144 182 189 154 176 192 191 189 127 129 132 131 134 136 131 135 138 138 135 140 137 115 114 116 117 124 118 119 117 121 128 120 129 143 123 130 137 126 148 149 129 154 141 136 144 137 147 141 113 114 118 $ This is an IP licence file. $ Please do not edit any data in this file $ Your licence is as follows $ DrivePath : c:\Program files\IntPetro $ NetworkLicence : Yes $ CanCheckOut : Yes $ Base 2 29/09/2003

Section 15.11 Tools : 'IP Proprietary' Protection System

Tools

Senergy $ $ $ $

Statistical Prediction Monte Carlo Rock Physics Pore Pressure Prediction

1 1 1 1

1838

29/09/2003 29/09/2003 29/09/2003 29/09/2003

The top of the file contains binary encoded data. The licence details follow. The number of licences for each IP module are given, followed by its expiry date (day / month / year). NOTE: an IP licence expires at 00h 00min 01ms, users' local time, on the expiry date.The example above shows that two 'Base' modules can be used simultaneously while there is only one each of the speciality modules available.

Upgrading Licences Licences normally have a maximum version of IP with which they will work set at the time of their creation. So if a user has purchased a licence at the same time as obtaining a copy of IP v3.5 then their IP licence max version will be v3.5. When they want to upgrade to IP v3.6 they will also have to upgrade their licence max version. To do this, users should contact [email protected]. Further details are given in IP Version 3.6 release Notes.pdf which are on the IP v3.6 CD.

Licence Checkout When a user starts using IP, a 'Base' licence will be checked out from the main licence. For each speciality module that the user runs, a licence will be checked out. The users who connect to the licence can only check out the number of module licences that are available. An error message will be displayed once the user-limit for a particular module is reached. Every few minutes the licence file is checked to see if it is still available and valid. If there is a break in the connection with the licence server then the user will be warned. If the connection is not restored then after three warnings the program will shut down (the user normally has between 10-15 minutes before this occurs). It is good practice to save all data after the first warning and then investigate the cause of the connection break. On the rare occasion that IP crashes, or if the program is terminated externally, then the licences that were being used will be re-instated for use by other people. However, there may be a delay of up to 6 minutes before the licence becomes available again. For a single user, non-server based licence it is possible to reinstate the licence before the six minutes elapses by deleting the file IPUser.dat found within the same folder as the main licence file. However, DO NOT delete this file in a multi-user system or the other users may be closed out of IP unexpectedly with all the accompanying negative issues. Also be very careful that the main licence file, IPSec.dat, is not deleted by mistake.

Section 15.11 Tools : 'IP Proprietary' Protection System

1839

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Use Logging Each time a user starts up or exits IP these events are logged to a text file 'IP_User_Log.txt'. This file is stored where the protection system is installed and the same file will be used by all network users. This allows system administrators to monitor the use of the program. An example of part of one of these files is given below. User User User User User

Logon Logoff Logon Logoff Logon

: : : : :

Frank Frank Frank Frank Frank

: : : : :

On On On On On

PC PC PC PC PC

: : : : :

pglpc65(11.11.11.2) : 15/10/02 18:22:52 pglpc65(11.11.11.2) : 15/10/02 18:22:58 pglpc65 (11.11.11.2) : 15/10/02 18:41:07 pglpc65 (11.11.11.2) : 15/10/02 18:41:11 pglpc65 (11.11.11.2) : 17/10/02 16:06:27

Multi-user network licences allow the movement of single licences to a local PC for work off site (see 'Uninstall or Transfer Protection'). This movement is logged to a file 'IP_offsite_Log.txt'. This file is also stored where the network protection system is installed and all users will use the same file. An example of part of one of these files is given below. Protection moved to local PC : pglpc65 (135.135.135.165) : by user : frank : 23/10/02 12:16:23 Protection returned from local PC : pglpc65 (135.135.135.165) : by user : frank : 23/10/02 12:16:56

Related Topics 'IP Proprietary' Protection System Install and Activate Protection Update Protection Options Uninstall or Transfer Protection View Protection Option

15.11.1 Install and Activate Protection The easiest way to Install and Activate Protection for IP is to select the Automatic Installation via Internet option in the Install and Activate Protection Dialog. The user, however, must have direct access to the Internet from the PC. If this is not possible then the 'Manual installation' option needs to be run.

Section 15.11 Tools : 'IP Proprietary' Protection System

Tools

Senergy

1840

For Internet installation the user should : 1. From the Tools Menu, Select Program Protection, then Install and Activate Protection to display the Install and Activate Protection dialog.

2. Select Automatic Installation via Internet (Must have Customer Number) and Click OK to Automatically Install the IP license via the Internet. 3. Type the Customer ID and Select the directory into which the licence file is to be saved, the 'Protection Directory', and click 'Ok'. 4. Click OK to Complete the Automatic Installation via the Internet. Note: IP will install the protection system and then dial out onto the Internet to obtain the activation code. This can take a little time if the Internet connection is slow. The activated license file IPSec.dat file will be generated and should not be deleted or moved from original location. Note: IP checks for a valid ethernet adaptor. If an adaptor is not found at the default IP address, the user can manually enter the valid IP number. This problem will only occur on network servers which have multiple network adaptors. The IP address that is needed is

Section 15.11 Tools : 'IP Proprietary' Protection System

1841

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

that of the PC on which the licence file will be installed (i.e. the PC which has the ' Protection Directory'). 5. The following Confirmation Dialog will confirm that the IP has now been activated on the selected Drive. Click OK to Display the Protection System Installed Successfully Information Dialog.

6. The following Information Dialog will be displayed once the Protection System has been installed successfully. Click OK to Complete the Activation.

7. IP v3.6 will now prompt you to select an IP database and to set the default units before proceeding as normal.

'Manual Installation' If direct access to the Internet is not possible from the PC then a 'Manual Installation' can be performed. The process is as follows: 1. From the Tools Menu, Select Program Protection, then Manual Installation to display the Install and Activate Protection dialog.

2. Select Manual Installation to display the following Information dialog.

Section 15.11 Tools : 'IP Proprietary' Protection System

Tools

Senergy

1842

Note: The IPSec.dat file is located in C:\Documents and Settings\username\Local\IntPetro36. 3. The licence file can then be sent by email the Senergy IP Support Team via email at [email protected] for activation. The activated file is returned to the user by the Senergy IP Support Team. The user then overwrites the original file with this activated IPSec.dat file.

'Connect to a Working Network Protection System' This allows the user to connect the program to a previously-installed network licence. 1. From the Tools Menu, Select Program Protection, then Manual Installation to display the Install and Activate Protection dialog.

2. Select Connect to a Working Protection System (Network or Local) to display the Connect to a Network Protection DialoG

Section 15.11 Tools : 'IP Proprietary' Protection System

1843

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

3. Select the Type of Connection Required. The 'Type' is used to set the type of network licence being used. If the user is connecting directly to the licence file, select the 'File Based' option. If a licence server program is being used, select either 'Host Name' or 'IP Address'. For the 'Host Name' option - enter the name of the PC that the IP licence server program is running on, in the 'Server Name' box. If the 'IP Address' option is 'checked' then the IP address of the PC that the IP licence server program is running on should be entered. 4. Either Select the directory that contains the licence file. 5. Or Type the Server Name if connecting to a licence server. 6. Click OK to Activate the Connection.

Related Topics 'IP Proprietary' Protection System Install and Activate Protection Update Protection Options Uninstall or Transfer Protection View Protection Options

15.11.2 Update Protection Options The 'Update Protection Options' menu item allows the user to change the licence parameters. This option is used to change the expiry date for the licence or to change the number of currentlyallowed specialist interpretation modules. NOTE: this option will be shaded most of the time as the licence won't require updating very often.

The 'Update automatically from Internet website' option is the only one available from the menu system. The user must have direct access to the internet to use this option. Otherwise, to update your licence you will need to obtain a new licence file from the Senergy IP Support Team via email at [email protected]. They will request a copy of the current licence file.

Section 15.11 Tools : 'IP Proprietary' Protection System

Tools

Senergy

1844

1. Update Automatically from Internet Website The 'Customer ID' should already be entered. Click 'Ok' to update the licence file.

2. Manual Update Licences can be updated manually by obtaining a new licence file from the Senergy IP Support Team via email at [email protected].

Related Topics 'IP Proprietary' Protection System Install and Activate Protection Update Protection Options Uninstall or Transfer Protection View Protection Options

15.11.3 Uninstall or Transfer Protection The options available under this menu depend on the type of protection system installed. In the case illustrated above the user is connected to a licence which is installed on the users hard drive. The main reason for uninstalling a licence is to 'check-in' the licence on one computer so that another user can then 'check-out' the same licence onto another computer.

Uninstall to Internet Website 1. From the Tools Menu, Select Program Protection the Uninstall or Transfer Protection to Display the Uninstall / Transfer Protection Dialog.

Section 15.11 Tools : 'IP Proprietary' Protection System

1845

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

2. Select Uninstall to Internet Website to display the Uninstall to Internet Website Dialog. This will uninstall the protection system to the Internet website. Once the protection is uninstalled it becomes available to reinstall on another PC. This is an easy way of moving the protection system from one PC to another PC.

3. Type the Customer ID then Click OK to Uninstall the Protection System to the Internet Website. 4. The following Confirm Dialog will Confirm that the Protection System has been Uninstalled.

Remove Protection To remove the current protection system click 'OK'. The licence file (IPSec.dat) will be deleted.

Section 15.11 Tools : 'IP Proprietary' Protection System

Tools

Senergy

1846

Move Network User Licence to Local PC This allows a user to temporarily transfer one of a set of Network licences to a local PC. This can be useful if the user wants to work temporarily off the network (for example, away from the office). This only works where there are at least two available network licences on the server.

The user selects the directory on the local PC where the protection system is to be installed. This is normally the IP program directory - C:\Program Files\IntPetro35. The user 'checks out' (tick) the IP specialist modules from the list of available modules. An IP 'Base' module is automatically checked out during this process. The user can now specify how long the licence is to be 'checked out' for. The minimum time is

Section 15.11 Tools : 'IP Proprietary' Protection System

1847

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

'0' - (zero) days, up to a maximum of 30 days. '0' days means that the licence will be checked out and activated up until midnight (24.00 hours) of the present day. '2' days means that the licence will de-activate at 24.00 hours, 2 days from the present day. When the local offsite licence expires, IP is deactivated on the PC. The available IP modules will automatically refresh to their original number on the Office licence Server at the same time. Another example: if someone is working offline, away from the office and does not have an IP licence loaded locally, they can: Create a licence file manually, See Manual Installation. The newly-created licence file, IPSec.DAT, is non-active. E-mail this file from the remote site to the office / Systems Administrator. The Systems Administrator uses the 'Move Network user licence to local PC' option to browse to the e-mailed licence file, 'checks out' the required licence features from the Server licence and 'checks' the 'Activate a remotely created licence' option. Click 'OK' to remove one licence from the server system and 'activate' the 'local' licence file. E-mail the activated local licence file to the remote site. The remote user can now replace their original licence file IPSec.DAT with the e-mailed, activated licence file and run IP. Return Local licence back to Network To return the licence, the user must first reconnect to the network server system and then start the program.

Section 15.11 Tools : 'IP Proprietary' Protection System

Tools

Senergy

1848

The user enters the directory of the original network protection system and then clicks 'OK'. The directory name will normally be already filled in. The protection system will be uninstalled from the local PC and reinstalled onto the network licence.

Related Topics 'IP Proprietary' Protection System Install and Activate Protection Update Protection Options Uninstall or Transfer Protection View Protection Options

15.11.4 View Protection Options The 'View Protection Options' window provides the user with information about the currentlyinstalled protection system and shows which program functions are active. This is an 'information only' window. licence and Feature information is arranged on the following 'tabs'.

'Program Options' Tab The 'Program Options' tab shows the available IP modules and their expiry dates. The licence ' numbers' show how many concurrent users there can be for each module. The 'Total' column displays the number of available licences for each IP 'Feature'. The 'In Use' column lists the number of licences being used at the time the 'View Protection Options' option is opened, including those being used by the current application. This list does not include any ' Off Site' licences. The 'Off Site' column lists the number of licences that have been temporarily

Section 15.11 Tools : 'IP Proprietary' Protection System

1849

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

transferred off site to a local PC.

'Checked Out' Tab The 'Checked Out' tab, illustrated below, shows which modules are currently 'checked out' to the user. The modules are only 'checked out' when they are being used. A user can only 'check in' licences by exiting from the IP program.

Section 15.11 Tools : 'IP Proprietary' Protection System

Tools

Senergy

1850

'Current Users' Tab The 'Current Users' tab displays the users who are currently logged into the licence. This can be useful if a licence is not available and the user needs to find out who is using the current licences. The user name and the PC name are displayed.

Section 15.11 Tools : 'IP Proprietary' Protection System

1851

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Related Topics 'IP Proprietary' Protection System Install and Activate Protection Update Protection Options Uninstall or Transfer Protection View Protection Options

Section 15.11 Tools : 'IP Proprietary' Protection System

Senergy

Tools

Senergy

1852

15.12 Options The 'Tools' menu

'Options' entry launches the 'IP Configuration' module.

The 'IP Configuration' interface is designed around a 'Tree View' window. The 'Tree' contents can be expanded / viewed in the left-hand panel of the display. Clicking on a Title within the 'Tree View' will populate the right-hand panel of the window with the linked 'Attribute' table or ' Connection' dialog. At the base of the 'IP Configuration' window the 'Working folder' directory structure is listed. Double clicking on this line opens the 'Working folder'. All the files that are accessed via the 'IP Configuration' window are stored in this 'Working folder'. The Current IP Configuration options are: External Database Options - manage IP connections to external databases. Well Options - display well position as Latitude / Longitude or UTM coordinates. Well Attributes - create / edit / delete IP well 'cultural' attributes. Log Attributes - create / edit / delete IP well 'logging' attributes. Well Attribute Mappings - link IP Well Attributes to File Loader 'cultural' parameters.

Section 15.12 Tools : Options

1853

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Log Attribute Mappings - link IP Log attributes to File loader 'logging' parameters. File Loader - create / edit / delete external file (LAS / LIS / DLIS) 'cultural' and 'logging' parameters. Well Folder Structure - setup the directory structure for an IP database. LAS 3 Configuration Miscellaneous Options - control error tracking messages in IP, set the Default Plots location, enable Tabbed Workareas and fading Parameter windows, adjust Irregular Set depth tolerance. Custom Toolbars and Menus - arrange toolbar icons and IP menus. Well Security - configure security options on 'in-memory' database wells. Curve Aliasing - produce database specific curve ordering tables. Corporate Search Paths - allows user greater control of IP file locations.

Related Topics External Database Options Well Options File Loader Well Folder Structure LAS 3 Configuration Miscellaneous Options Internet Connection Custom Toolbars and Menus Well Security Curve Aliasing Corporate Search Folders

15.12.1 External Database Options Clicking on the 'External Database Options' label launches a simple 'tick-box' dialog where the user can switch 'on'/'off' the links to a number of external databases. If an option is 'checked' then, under the 'Input / Output' menu, the corresponding 'External Database' connection icon will be activated and visible in the menu, as illustrated below.

Section 15.12 Tools : Options

Tools

Senergy

1854

Some External Database links have their own configuration screens. These are listed in the Tree view panel by expanding the 'External Database Options' branch. Set-up screens for the connections to GEOLOG , OpenWorks , ODM

and PETCOM

are launched by clicking on

the appropriate 'Connection' label in the tree view. The 'GEOLOG Connection' configuration screen is illustrated below. There are 3 possible connection protocols (HTTP, SSH and Windows). One can select the preferred protocol from the 'Use Protocol' drop-down list at the top of the screen. The connection details, including Usernames and Passwords are shown for each connection protocol. Details of the external database connection protocols and configuration of these links is provided under the ' Connecting to External Databases' chapter.

Section 15.12 Tools : Options

1855

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Related Topics External Database Options Well Options File Loader Well Folder Structure LAS 3 Configuration Miscellaneous Options Internet Connection Custom Toolbars and Menus Well Security Curve Aliasing Corporate Search Folders

15.12.2 Well Options Clicking on the 'Well Options' label allows the user to select the default 'well location display' mode (UTM Coordinates or Latitude / Longitude) for wells in the current database. If you change

Section 15.12 Tools : Options

Tools

Senergy

1856

the 'Display position as' setting and save the configuration, when you next open the 'Manage Well Header Info' module, on the 'Position' tab, the well co-ordinates, if they have been loaded into IP, will be in your selected format.

Expanding the 'Well Options' 'tree' enables the user to view 'Well Attributes', 'Log Attributes', 'Well Attributes Mappings' and 'Log Attributes Mappings'. 'Well Attributes' and 'Log Attributes' are types of Dynamic Attributes and they provide the user with the functionality to increase the number and types of data that can be loaded and stored for a well in an IP database. The attributes provide the means to 'map' the diverse log parameter and log header mnemonics found in LAS, LIS and DLIS files, to a consistent location within an IP database. The 'Reference' tables provide the place to store parameters within IP, 'File Loader' mnemonics lists are used / extended to include new data types, then the mnemonics are 'mapped' to a single IP Attribute. The principle is illustrated below:

Section 15.12 Tools : Options

1857

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Well Attributes 'Well Attributes' are 'cultural' well parameters such as 'Country', 'Location', 'Company', 'Field', that can either be loaded from external data files or can be user-defined within IP to store some data associated with a well. The 'Well Attributes' table is the 'reference' list of cultural attributes / parameters for the IP program. You can use the IP well attributes list in its current state or you can extend the list by adding new attribute names which will be created / activated in the 'Manage Well Header Info.' module. The user can create new well attributes with textual ' Display Alias' descriptions, for example 'Drilling Rig Name', 'Drilling Company', 'Block Number' and 'Quadrant Number'. These well attributes appear in IP as labelled text entry boxes that the user can fill in for each in-memory well. The data entered for these attributes is stored into the IP database. The user could also set up the attribute 'Display Alias' labels in a language other than English.

Section 15.12 Tools : Options

Tools

Senergy

1858

Clicking on the 'Well Attributes' branch, as illustrated above, launches a 'grid' display in the right hand side of the window. The grid contains four columns. The left-hand 'Name' column contains an 'internal' IP Attribute 'Name'. The second column contains a list of 'Display Alias' names. These 'Display Alias' names are user-editable text entries that are used as labels for the Well 'cultural' attributes in the ' Manage Well Header Info.' module, on the 'General' tab, when the user opens that module. The 'LAS Output' column holds the well attribute mnemonics that will be exported with any LAS file output from IP, if the attribute 'value' exists in the exported IP well. The 'LIS Output' column holds the well attribute mnemonics that will be exported with any LIS file output from IP, if the attribute 'value' exists in the exported IP well. There are two kinds of 'Well Attributes' in IP. These are: User-editable attributes - the user can add new attributes or delete existing attributes or edit 'Alias' names for these attributes. Fixed attributes - All the attributes prefixed with a double asterisk (**), as illustrated below, are considered 'Fixed' attributes and correspond with those attributes that have, to date, been stored in older versions of IP. The 'fixed' attributes are there to ensure compatibility

Section 15.12 Tools : Options

1859

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

when updating older IP databases to IP V3.3 and later versions. 'Fixed' attributes can not be deleted from the list, although their associated 'Alias' names can be edited. The list of 'Well Attributes' can be extended using the 'Add' button. One can insert additional entries to the list. For example, you might want to add the new attributes 'Interpretation By:' and 'Interpretation Date:' to be able to record who has performed the interpretations on the current database wells. Click the 'Add' button at the bottom of the screen and type in a new 'Attribute' name into the window that is launched. Click the 'OK' button to create the new entry. The 'Name' list will be sorted alphabetically with the newly-created attribute placed accordingly. Scroll down the page to the new 'Name' entry in the list and type in an 'Alias' in the blank 'Alias' text box, as shown below:

The new 'Well Attribute' will be visible in the 'Manage Well Header Info.' module on the ' General' Tab, as illustrated below. New entries are appended to the bottom of the list. When the user adds data entries into these new fields that information will subsequently be saved to the binary IPDBWellXXXXX.dat file when IP is closed or the well is saved to the database.

Section 15.12 Tools : Options

Tools

Senergy

1860

Any changes to the 'Well Attributes' can be exported to a file and distributed to other users using the 'Export' button. By clicking the 'Export' button the user is prompted to save the configuration to a file with the extension .configUpdate in the 'Working Folder'. This file can then be copied into a different users 'Working Folder'. When the new user launches IP any *. configUpdate files are read and merged into the main configuration file (Intpetro.CONFIG which contains all configuration settings available under the 'Options' window) before it in turn is used to configure IP.

Log Attributes 'Log Attributes' are those logging parameters, for example 'Mud Density', 'Mud Filtrate Resistivity' and 'Bottom Hole Temperature' that are loaded into IP from external LAS/ LIS/ DLIS files. In previous versions of IP the 'Log Attributes' were hard-wired into the program code and IP would only load those attributes that it 'recognized'. The 'Options' functionality allows the user to edit and expand the list of recognized attributes in order to capture new logging parameters. The 'Log Attributes' table is the 'reference' list of logging attributes/parameters for the IP program.

Section 15.12 Tools : Options

1861

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The 'Log Attributes' table illustrated in the right-hand panel, above, contains a reference list of external 'Log Header' parameters that can be saved to the IP well / database. The table comprises of an 'internal' IP Log Attribute 'Name' in the left-hand column and, in the right-hand column, a list of 'Display Alias' names. Log Attribute 'Names' prefixed with a double asterisk ( **) are 'fixed' attributes and cannot be deleted from the reference table. These fixed attributes enable users to upgrade Pre IP Version 3.3 databases and save the logging parameters stored in them. The 'Display Alias' names are user-editable text entries that the user can modify, if they wish, to their preferred language or naming convention. New attributes can be added, deleted and the 'Display Alias' name changed, if required. The 'Display Alias' list of names dynamically populates the parameter list on the 'Logging' tab' of the 'Manage Well Header Info.' module. The 'Log Attributes' table provides the reference list for a 'mapping' system which enables the user to associate different service company log header mnemonics / parameters to a single internal IP 'Log Attribute' name, so that the attributes can be recognized by the IP program and saved within the IP database. The 'Log Attributes' names are listed in alphabetical order in the IP Configuration table, but they are listed in the 'Manage Well Header Info.' module in the order seen in a typical API log header hardcopy. New, user-created log attributes that are added to the IP Log Attributes list will appear

Section 15.12 Tools : Options

Tools

Senergy

1862

at the bottom of the list on the 'Logging' tab.

Well Attribute Mappings The 'Well Attribute Mappings' table, shown below, allows the user to set up the connections (mappings) between the IP 'Well Attributes' reference table and external file (LAS / LIS / DLIS) 'cultural' mnemonics held within the 'File Loader' table. The mappings are used to identify external file header mnemonics at load time and to correctly load / store them into the 'Manage Well Header Info.' module for the selected IP well.

The 'Well Attribute Mappings' table has three columns 'File Loader Mnemonic', 'Description' and 'Well Attribute'. The first 2 columns correspond to the 'File Loader' table entries. The ' Well Attribute' column provides a drop-down list of the IP reference 'Well Attributes' that the user 'maps' to the 'File Loader' attribute. For example, if there is a well parameter in an external file with a mnemonic of LCNM (Logging Company Name) which is not currently mapped in IP. Then you need to: 1. Add a new 'File Loader' entry: Open the 'File Loader' dialog. 'Click 'Add' to launch the ' New Attribute Name' dialog. Type in the new mnemonic LCNM, add a description and click 'Save'. 2. Click on 'Well Attributes'. 'Add'. Type in 'ServiceComp' and in the 'Display Alias' column add a descriptive name for the attribute. NOTE: this step is only required if the 'Well

Section 15.12 Tools : Options

1863

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Attribute' does not already exist. 3. Click on the 'Well Attribute Mappings' label to open that dialog. 4. Click the 'Add' button. This launches an 'Add Mapping' window.

5. Choose the 'File Loader Mnemonic' (LCNM) from the upper drop-down list box. 6. Choose the appropriate IP 'Well Attribute', for example -'ServiceComp' (Service Company), from the 'Well Attribute' drop-down list in order to map the 'File Loader' attribute to the IP Well attribute. The attribute may have to be created - see point 2. 7. Click 'OK'. This ensures that any file that is loaded into IP, if it contains the log parameter LCNM mnemonic and a value, that IP will load its' value into the 'General' tab of the 'Manage Well Header Info.' module as the 'Service Company' parameter for that log file.

Log Attribute Mappings The 'Log Attribute Mappings' table allows the user to set up the connections (mappings) between the IP 'Log Attributes' reference table and external file (LAS / LIS/ DLIS) log header mnemonics held within the 'File Loader' table. The mappings are used to identify external log header mnemonics at load time and to correctly load / store them into the 'Manage Well Header Info.' module ('Logging' tab) of the selected IP well. For example, if there is a logging parameter in an external file with a mnemonic of RMTMP (Temperature of Mud Resistivity Measurement) which is not mapped in IP. Then you need to: Add a new 'File Loader' entry. Open the 'File Loader' dialog. 'Click 'Add' to launch the ' New Attribute Name' dialog. Type in the new mnemonic RMTMP and click 'OK'. Scroll down the 'Name' list to the new RMTMP entry and type in its' description into the '

Section 15.12 Tools : Options

Tools

Senergy

1864

Description' text entry box. Click the 'Save' button. Click on the 'Log Attribute Mappings' label to open that dialog. Click 'Add'. This launches an 'Add Mapping' window.

Choose the 'File Loader Mnemonic' (RMTMP) from the upper drop-down list box. Choose the appropriate IP 'Log Attribute' -RMTemp (Mud Resistivity Measured Temperature), from the 'Log Attribute' drop-down list to map the 'File Loader' attribute to the IP Log attribute. Click 'OK'. This ensures that any file that is loaded into IP, if it contains the log parameter RMTMP mnemonic and a value, that IP will load its' value into the 'Logging' tab of the 'Manage Well Header Info.' module as the 'Mud Resistivity Temperature' value for that log file.

Related Topics External Database Options Well Options File Loader Well Folder Structure LAS 3 Configuration Miscellaneous Options Internet Connection Custom Toolbars and Menus Well Security

Section 15.12 Tools : Options

1865

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Curve Aliasing Corporate Search Folders

15.12.3 File Loader The 'File Loader' window contains a list of 'external' mnemonic 'Names' together with a ' Description' in a second column for each mnemonic, as shown in the screen capture, below. These are LIS Log Header mnemonics which were previously hard-coded into IP. When a LIS file was loaded into IP, any mnemonic that was identified by the IP program at load time would be saved into the selected IP well. The extendable 'File Loader' list now allows the user to add new 'external' mnemonics and an associated description for each new 'Name' which can then be 'mapped' to an IP 'Well Attribute' or 'Log Attribute'.

To add a new 'File Loader' entry: Click the 'Add' button. This launches the 'New Attribute name' window. Type in a new attribute name. Attribute names must be unique entries. Click 'OK' to load the new 'Name' into the table. Scroll down to the new Attribute 'Name' and type in a description

Section 15.12 Tools : Options

Tools

Senergy

1866

The IP Configuration File (Intpetro.config) The Intpetro.config file (found in the IP program install directory - IntPetro35) contains all the 'default' settings and user-defined definitions and descriptions for a particular IP installation. These settings include : 'External Database Options' 'Well Attributes' 'Log Attributes' 'Well Attribute Mapping' 'Log Attribute Mapping' 'File Loader' 'Miscellaneous' This single HTML text file is organized into separate sections for each of these configuration 'elements'. If the user makes any changes in the 'Options' module user-interface, for example to add, define and 'map' a new Log Attribute and then 'clicks' the 'Save' button, the change will be stored directly into the Intpetro.config file. This means that the next time IP is launched, the updated configuration file will be loaded and the new attribute will be available to load data into. Also, if the user sets up connections to external databases through the 'Options' interface, these settings will be saved to the Intpetro. config file, so that, on launching IP at a later date, the connection settings will still be available.

Saving changes to a local Intpetro.config file

Section 15.12 Tools : Options

1867

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

To save any changes made in the 'Options' interface directly to the configuration file, click the ' Save' button at the bottom of the 'IP Configuration' screen, after you have made your changes to the tables.

Saving changes to individual Attribute Tables Each 'Attribute' table in the 'Options' interface can be saved separately to an external . configUpdate file. By default these files are saved into the IP installation directory. The Attribute tables and their associated configuration files are listed below: 'Well Attributes' Table

WellAttributes.configUpdate

'Log Attributes' Table

LogAttributes.configUpdate

'Well Attribute Mapping' Table

Well AttributeMapping.configUpdate

'Log Attribute Mapping' Table

LogAttributeMapping.configUpdate

'File Loader' Table

FileLoaderAttributes.configUpdate

Why might you want to do this ? For example, saving changes so that 'corporate' settings for a particular Attribute table can be distributed throughout an organization or between multiple IP users. In a non-English speaking company for instance, with multiple IP users, a corporate 'Log Attribute' naming convention could be set up by one user. By saving the 'Log Attribute' table to an external file, using the ' Export' button, these changes could be written to a text file and e-mailed to all other IP users. The other users could paste the file into their own IP installation directory and, the next time that IP is launched, the text file is merged with the existing IntPetro.config file and updates everyone's IP configuration.

Related Topics External Database Options Well Options File Loader Well Folder Structure LAS 3 Configuration Miscellaneous Options Internet Connection Custom Toolbars and Menus Well Security Curve Aliasing Corporate Search Folders

Section 15.12 Tools : Options

Tools

Senergy

1868

15.12.4 Well Folder Structure This enables the user to change the folder structure for any new wells created in an IP database. The well folder structure is only created when a new well is saved to the database.

The user has to 'click' 'Save' on the 'IP Configuration' module for the 'Well Folder Structure' changes to be applied. However, as noted above, the 'Well Folder Structure' will not appear in the database browser until the newly created well is saved, using the 'File'

'Save All Wells to

Database'. If the user wishes to add more folders to the 'Well Folder Structure' or to apply the 'Well Folder Structure' to wells already saved in the database then 'clicking' on the 'Apply To...' button opens the 'Select Database Wells' module. The user can then scroll down the well list and select the wells to which to apply this new 'Well Folder Structure' to.

Section 15.12 Tools : Options

1869

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

If the user removes folders from the 'Well Folder Structure' then it is only newly created Wells that will have the reduced 'Well Folder Structure'. The reduced 'Well Folder Structure' will not be applied to 'old' saved Wells within the database. This is to prevent users from inadvertently deleting data that may reside in the removed folders. If the user really wants to remove folders from old, saved Wells then the user will have to do it manually via Windows Explorer TM.

Related Topics External Database Options Well Options File Loader Well Folder Structure LAS 3 Configuration Miscellaneous Options Internet Connection Custom Toolbars and Menus

Section 15.12 Tools : Options

Tools

Senergy

Well Security Curve Aliasing Corporate Search Folders

15.12.5 LAS 3 Configuration

Related Topics External Database Options Well Options File Loader Well Folder Structure LAS 3 Configuration Miscellaneous Options Internet Connection Custom Toolbars and Menus Well Security

Section 15.12 Tools : Options

1870

1871

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Curve Aliasing Corporate Search Folders

15.12.6 Miscellaneous Options The 'Miscellaneous Options' screen allows the user to set up eleven configuration options. These are:

'Trace Level' - sets the level of IP process reporting that is sent to the IP Message Board. 'Warning on Bad Load of Parameter Sets' When checked this feature displays a Dialog that notify's the user if a Parameter Set does not load properly or is not found and lists the Parameter Sets that did not load properly. 'Show Database Browser' - 'ticking' the check-box means that whenever you open IP, the program will always launch with the IP Database Browser display on-screen. 'Default Plots Location' - this parameter, previously stored in the ProgDefs.OPT file, sets up where IP looks for the 'default' log plot format files . The default setting is to the IntPetro35 installation directory, 'Default Plots' sub-directory, which is shipped with the application. If you have another, network location for multiple users to access a common ' Default Plots' folder then this location should be set here.

Section 15.12 Tools : Options

Tools

Senergy

1872

'Use Tabbed Work areas' - 'check' if user wants multi-Work areas or 'uncheck' for just one Work area. See 'User Interface and Data Entry' for more details on multi-Work areas. 'Hide close button on Work areas' - 'check' if user wants to hide the close button on any Work area tab. This will prevent the user from inadvertently closing down Work areas. 'Enable fading Parameter windows' - if this is 'checked' then any Parameter window (for example Clay Volume Parameters) will 'fade' - i.e. become semi-transparent if the Parameter window is opened over an already opened window. This allows the user to see through the stay-on-top Parameter window to the underlying window. Moving the mouse cursor back over the faded Parameter window restores the Parameter window opacity. 'Show Histogram Statistics Table' - If this is 'checked' then the statistics table will be shown along with the curve histogram in the Histogram module. If 'Show Histogram Statistics Table' is 'un-checked' then the statistics table won't be shown with the curve Histogram. However, the user can select to show the statistics table from the 'Type' menu within the Histogram module by using the 'Show Statistics Table'. 'Irregular Set depth tolerance' - when loading data into an irregular step curve Set the program has to decide whether the depth of the data being loaded corresponds to depth already in the Set or whether a new depth in the Set has been created. The 'Irregular Set depth tolerance' parameter is the allowable difference between the two depths in order to count the depths as the same. For example : Current irregular Set depths: 8000.2 8010.6 8020.3 8040.1 Depths of data to be loaded: 8000.3 8020.6 8040.3 Using the default 'Irregular Set depth tolerance' of 0.2 ft then the irregular Set after loading the data will be: 8000.2 8010.6 8020.3 8020.6 8040.1 The 8000.3 data will be loaded at 8000.2 and the 8040.3 data will be loaded at 8040.1. A new 8020.6 depth will have to be created.

Section 15.12 Tools : Options

1873

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

'CSV Delimiter' - this allows the user to select either 'Comma' or 'Semicolon' for delimiting their output CSV files. This is especially useful for users of German language Excel. 'Enable Background' - if the 'sunburst' background which appears on Histograms and Crossplots in IP v3.5 is not to the users taste then 'unchecking' this box will revert the Crossplot and Histogram backgrounds to their standard Windows colour. 'Work area Background' - if the user wishes to replace the background colour of the Work area from the Windows default then they have the option of 'checking' the 'Solid Colour' option and changing the colour to whatever they wish.

Related Topics External Database Options Well Options File Loader Well Folder Structure LAS 3 Configuration Miscellaneous Options Internet Connection Custom Toolbars and Menus Well Security Curve Aliasing Corporate Search Folders

Section 15.12 Tools : Options

Tools

Senergy

15.12.7 Internet Connection

Related Topics External Database Options Well Options File Loader Well Folder Structure LAS 3 Configuration Miscellaneous Options Internet Connection Custom Toolbars and Menus Well Security Curve Aliasing Corporate Search Folders

Section 15.12 Tools : Options

1874

1875

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

15.12.8 Custom Toolbars and Menus This has the same functionality as accessing the Toolbars by using the 'View'

'Toolbars'

'

Your Toolbars and Menus'. Here it is possible to configure three user defined toolbars (User Defined 1, User Defined 2 and User Defined 3) and user defined menus from the 'Toolbar' and ' Main Menu' tabs respectively.

Customisation of a menu is achieved in a similar fashion in the 'Menus' tab, with the user setting the name of the menu and then selecting and ordering the menu items.

Section 15.12 Tools : Options

Tools

Senergy

1876

The Custom Menu will appear next to the IP standard menu items at the top of the IP window once 'Save' has been 'clicked'. To activate the User Defined toolbars 'click' 'View' and 'tick' on the 'User Defined x'

Section 15.12 Tools : Options

'Toolbars'

1877

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

To delete a User Defined toolbar select the toolbar in the 'Destination Menu' on the 'Main Menu' tab within 'Options'

'IP Configuration'

'Custom Toolbars and Menus' and then just

move all of the toolbar symbols out of the list using the left arrow button. This has the effect of deleting the User Defined toolbar.

Related Topics External Database Options Well Options File Loader Well Folder Structure LAS 3 Configuration Miscellaneous Options Internet Connection Custom Toolbars and Menus Well Security

Section 15.12 Tools : Options

Tools

Senergy

1878

Curve Aliasing Corporate Search Folders

15.12.9 Database and Well Security The purpose of this module is to allow the user to set access limits to wells in a shared IP database. This could be to stop un-authorised users from viewing and modifying IP wells. Also to control access to 'tight' (i.e. wells that have very limited authorised access) wells to one or two specified users. Some wells may need 'Read' access by many users but only 'Write' access by one user. To access the database security menu go to 'Tools'

'Options'

'Well Security'

Each well in a database can have its own security settings. These are stored in an encrypted format within the well's data file. The security settings stored within each well include: An optional password. If this is set then it must be re-entered on subsequent attempts to change the wells' security settings. A list of usernames and their access rights (none, read-only or full). The special user

Section 15.12 Tools : Options

1879

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

called 'All Other Users' is used to define the access rights for all users that are not specifically listed. The last time the security was set and the username of who set the security. In addition, each database can have a 'Project Default' security setting, which is used for newly created wells, or wells which do not have their own security settings. 'Clicking' on the 'Well Security' option the following screen appears:

Well Selection Within this area it is possible to select wells and then to view the security which has been applied to the wells. NOTE: Wells have to be saved to database before they will appear in the database lists - see 'Save All Wells to Database' for more information on saving wells. These are the different well selection options available: 'From List' - If this is selected then the 'Select Wells' button becomes 'active'. 'Clicking' the 'Select Wells' button brings up a screen very similar to the database loading screen where it is possible to select wells on an individual basis.

Section 15.12 Tools : Options

Tools

Senergy

1880

Once the wells have been selected and 'OK' has been 'clicked' then in the 'Well Selection' area the number of wells selected updates. 'Current Well' - Whatever is the current 'active' well is selected. If there is no current well then this option will not be available. 'All Wells in memory' - This will apply security to the loaded wells only. If there are no loaded wells then this option will not be available. 'All Wells in database' - This is the default option and selects all the wells in database whether they are loaded or not. The number of wells that security will be applied to is always shown in the top right of the module. If no wells are selected then the 'View Security for Selected Wells' and 'Apply Security' buttons will be 'greyed' out. After the wells have been selected it is possible to view the security settings for the wells using the 'View Security for Selected Wells' button.

Section 15.12 Tools : Options

1881

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Each well is listed in the 'Wells' pane and shows whether or not it has a password set and when the security was last updated and by whom. Selecting a well shows the list of usernames and their access rights in the 'Users' pane.

Password A password can be set by the user to stop other users from changing the security settings on any of the wells within an IP database. 'Click' on the 'Set New Password' and type in a 'New Password' in the text box. To activate the password 'click' on the 'Apply Security' button.

Once this password has been set then it must be entered into the 'Password' text box before any further changes can be applied to the security settings on the wells within the IP database or if the user wants to change the current password. The password can be removed from a well or wells by ticking 'Set New Password' but leaving the 'New Password' box empty. If the password is forgotten then clicking the 'Forgotten the password?' text brings up a dialogue box like this:

Section 15.12 Tools : Options

Tools

Senergy

1882

Users can use the 'Copy to Clipboard' button and paste the 'Password Override Request Key' into an email and send it to the Senergy IP Support Team via email at [email protected].

Users This area is used to determine which IP database users can have access to the IP database selected wells. A user can be given 'Read' or 'Read' and 'Write' privileges. If no boxes are 'checked' then the user has no access rights. When adding a user the 'Domain' defaults to the users current domain, but this can be changed if required. Once added, a user's access rights can be changed by 'ticking' or 'un-ticking' their ' Read' or 'Write' boxes. The 'All Other Users' user cannot be removed. The same username cannot be entered more than once. The list of user names can be saved to a text file using the 'Save' button. This could then be reloaded later using the 'Load' button instead of having to type them all in again. To illustrate the security functionality, imagine the scenario where there are 4 users; Tim, Andy, Martin and Derek. There are 10 wells in the IP database. All users can have 'Read' / 'Write' access to Well # 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10. Well #3 is a 'tight' well and only Derek can access this. This is how the security would be set up: Select wells 1,2,4,5,6,7,8,9,10 in 'Well Selection' In 'Users' 'Add' Andy, Derek, Martin and Tim 'Usernames'.

Section 15.12 Tools : Options

1883

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Give all the users 'Read' / 'Write' access Type in the password if one has been set. 'Click' 'Apply Security' In 'Well Selection' select well #3 In 'Users' just leave Derek with 'Read' / 'Write' access. 'Click' 'Apply Security'. 'Click' on 'View Security for Selected Wells' and 'click' on the wells. In the 'Users' box there is a list of 'Usernames' and their 'Access' rights. For well #3 it can be seen that only Derek has full access rights and for the rest of the wells all users have full access rights.

Section 15.12 Tools : Options

Tools

Senergy

1884

Project Defaults If 'Project Defaults' are present then they will be loaded and displayed when this 'Well Security' screen is first displayed. The user can save the current setting as the 'Project Defaults' by 'ticking' the 'Save as Project Defaults for new wells' before applying the security. This will create (or update) the security settings file. If the current 'Project Defaults' have a password set then they will only be updated if the supplied password matches. 'Project Defaults' can be reloaded at any time by clicking the 'Reload Project Defaults' button.

Applying Security 'Click' the 'Apply Security' button to apply the specified security to the selected wells. A progress bar will be displayed while the security is applied, followed by the 'Well Security Application Results' form. This includes a row for each well and whether or not the application worked, and if not, it will explain why not (such as password mismatch). Failures are shown in red. There is a tick box 'Only show failures'.

Section 15.12 Tools : Options

1885

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Implications of Security When using IP the current user's access rights will manifest themselves in the following ways: No Access 'Select Database Wells to Load' screen: Well is shown in red with no details other than the name of the well. Well cannot be loaded or deleted.

'Database Browser' screen: By default 'No Access' wells are not shown in the 'Database Browser'. To show them,

Section 15.12 Tools : Options

Tools

Senergy

1886

right-click and select 'Show/Hide' and tick 'Show Wells I Can't Access'. Once the well is visible it is shown with a no-entry icon and no further details.

Read-only Access 'Select Database Wells to Load' screen: Well(s) is shown in grey and loading the well will always create a copy of the well (shown in the 'Database Browser' with a different icon and 'Copy of' in front of the well name).

'Database Browser' screen: Well is shown with a read-only icon and loading it will always create a copy.

Section 15.12 Tools : Options

1887

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Full access IP operates as normal.

Related Topics External Database Options Well Options File Loader Well Folder Structure LAS 3 Configuration Miscellaneous Options Internet Connection Custom Toolbars and Menus Well Security Curve Aliasing Corporate Search Folders

Section 15.12 Tools : Options

Senergy

Tools

Senergy

1888

15.12.10Curve Aliasing By 'clicking' on the 'Click to Open in Own window' this will open the 'Curve Aliasing' module in its own window which may be more convenient than having it open from the 'Options' module.

This module can also be accessed from 'Tools'

'Edit Curve Aliasing'.

Related Topics External Database Options Well Options File Loader Well Folder Structure LAS 3 Configuration Miscellaneous Options Internet Connection Custom Toolbars and Menus Well Security Curve Aliasing

Section 15.12 Tools : Options

1889

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Corporate Search Folders

15.12.11Corporate Search Folders 'Corporate Search folders' (CSF) are designed to allow for a folder(s) (normally a networked shared folder) to be used as a common location allowing multiple users access to IP related resources. Use of this feature is ideal when many users require shared access to such files as Company Specific Log Plot Formats, User defined Overlay lines or User Programs, etc . The following files are serviced by the 'Corporate Search folders': Log Plot format files. Crossplot and Histogram saved format files. User Programs. Crossplot Overlay line files. All the default configuration files available from 'Tools'

'Defaults'.

When using Corporate folders the 'Load Format' pop-up menus (Crossplots/Histograms/User Programs) mimic the folder structure as defined in 'Tools'

'Options'

'Corporate Search

folders'. If the 'Corporate Folders' is 'Disabled' then IP uses the default folder settings for locating plot, crossplot and histogram formats; these are normally on the users hard drive. However, if the 'Corporate Folders' is 'Enabled' then the user can specify the location of their format files and map new folders to network drives as well as their hard drives. [Note: the order in which the system searches through and displays the Corporate Folders is from the top of the list down]

Section 15.12 Tools : Options

Tools

Senergy

1890

By 'clicking' on each of the 'Corporate search folders' their paths can be viewed in the 'Path' box. New paths can be created by using the browse button

and locating the required folder,

be it on the users hard drive or network drive. The order in which the folders are displayed can be changed using the 'Order' up/down arrows.

Section 15.12 Tools : Options

1891

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

If incorrect paths for folders are typed into the fields then the path will be grayed out and show as being offline. The user can use the browse for folder button to locate the correct path and use the 'Replace' button to update the 'Corporate search folders' list. The 'Validate Folders' button can be used to quickly check that the path to the folders is valid, if say, network drives are re-mapped.

Section 15.12 Tools : Options

Tools

Senergy

1892

If a user moves a folder which has been mapped within the 'Corporate search folders' and hasn't updated the 'Corporate search folders' then when the user attempts to access formats within the Log Plots, Crossplot or Histogram modules an error message will appear informing the user that the path to the folder that has been moved is no longer valid. The user could disable the 'Corporate Folders', re-map the moved folder or or use the 'Delete Invalid Paths' button to delete the path (NOTE: this only deletes the path within the 'Corporate search folders' and not the actual folders). NOTE: for User Programs a user cannot edit or delete programs that exist on a Network folder. This is a safety feature. Also with User Programs the programs must be stored on a network drive in a sub-folder called "UserPrograms" in order for IP to detect them. Sub-folders can be created and as long as they are named xxx.hst (histogram), xxx.xpt (crossplot) or xxx.plt (log plot) and a .hst, .xpt or a .plt file exist within the relevant sub-folder then the sub-folder will appear within the relevant module. For example, the user creates a sub-folder called Test.hst in his I:\IP Databases\IP Formats\Histogram Formats folder. Within this subfolder is a GR.hst file. If the user now opens up the Histogram module and 'clicks' on the drop-down arrow adjacent to the 'Load Format' button, the sub-folder 'Test' now exists within the 'My Histogram Formats Histogram' folder and the GR.hst histogram format file can be selected.

Section 15.12 Tools : Options

1893

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Program Default Files Many aspects of IP are configurable by editing various text files accessed from the 'Tools'

'

Defaults' menu. This feature along with Corporate folders can enable a group of IP users to work from a common set of configuration files. The configuration files currently catered for under this mechanism are as follows: Curve System defaults (default and User defined). Curve Type defaults (default and User defined). Curve Alias configuration. Mineral Solver (default and User defined). Crossplot Overlay setup file. Monte Carlo settings. Unit Conversions.

Section 15.12 Tools : Options

Tools

Senergy

1894

Neutron Tool Types. The configurable files (*.opt, *.ovl, *.par, *.neu) could be saved to a network drive folder and then each user maps a path to this folder in Corporate Search Folders.

Related Topics External Database Options Well Options File Loader Well Folder Structure LAS 3 Configuration Miscellaneous Options Internet Connection Custom Toolbars and Menus Well Security Curve Aliasing Corporate Search Folders

Section 15.12 Tools : Options

Section

16 User Programs

User Programs

Senergy

16

1896

User Programs

The 'User Programs' module allows the user to create their own analysis routines. The routines can be very simple, one line routines or more sophisticated, long routines which loop through the data multiple times. The routines are written by the user in either FORTRAN, PASCAL, C++, VB. NET or C#.NET. User program compiled code can be loaded and unloaded without exiting IP. A typical workflow for creating a user program is to setup the parameters, write the code and then compile. Once compiled without errors, the user will start testing. The testing and modifications of the code should be all possible without exiting IP.

The FORTRAN and C++ compiler and Linker are from the Free Software Foundation (GNU) and can be downloaded from the internet free of charge. http://gcc.gnu.org . The IP CD contains a Windows Installer for the GNU compiler version 2.95 which can be run by 'clicking' on the 'Install GCC Compiler' button. This installer will install all necessary files and setup all appropriate Environmental Variables. Alternatively, if a manual install is preferred, there is a zipped file containing version 2.95 GNU compiler in the GNU FORTRAN and C folder on the IP CD. Once this folder has been unzipped and the files installed on the users C: drive then the users Environmental Variables path has to be modified so that IP can locate the compiler. To modify the users environmental variables go to Control Panel

System

Advanced

Environmental Variables, scroll down and locate 'Path' within the 'System variables' window. Click on 'Edit' and then add the following ;C:\gcc-2.95.2\bin in front of the ;C\Program Files. NOTE: on some users computers it maybe necessary to remove the '-' and '.' from the gcc2.95.2 directory so that it reads as gcc2952 and use this in the Path. NOTE: it appears the GNU compiler does not like single Letter code names like 'A', 'B', 'C'. Output curve names need to be renamed to at least a 2 character mnemonic e.g. 'AA', 'BB', 'CC'.

Section 16.

User Programs :

1897

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The PASCAL compiler needed is Borland's DELPHI version 4 or higher (older versions of DELPHI may also work).

NOTE: 1. any existing user programs will need to be updated to take account of the new 'Trend curve' functionality. Old programs prior to 3.1, coded in Pascal, will fail to run and will need to be updated. Old Fortran programs should work, but it is in the users interest to update code as described in the main 'Help' document. 2. If the User re-writes a user program and adds / re-orders parameters, the old program 'Zone Set' is no longer valid and the user should delete and recreate the Zone Set.

Related Topics User Programs User Program Options User Program Code FORTRAN Guide Example User Programs

Section 16.

User Programs :

User Programs

Senergy

16.1

1898

User Program Options

The 'User Program' - 'Options' window allows the user to select the defaults for the 'Compiler ', 'Editor' (the program used to edit the program code) and the 'User Program Directory' into which the programs are stored. It also allows the user to select a program for editing User Program icons in the 'Icon Editor'.

On network systems, it is possible for users to share user programs by having the same 'User Program Directory' set for each user. NOTE: a user cannot edit or delete user programs that exist on a Network folder, they can only be run. This is a safety feature. Also with User Programs the programs must be stored on a network drive in a sub-folder called "UserPrograms" in order for IP to detect them. See 'Corporate Search Folders' for more information on sharing IP files.

Compiler A VB.Net and a C#.Net compiler have been added to the User Programs for v3.5 and beyond.

Icon Editor The 'Icon Editor' is only accessed from the 'Edit Program' menu item. Select a programme to edit and the 'User Programming' module opens. 'Click' on the 'Edit Icon' button and the current icon (UPImage.bmp) is opened in whatever editor the user had selected in the 'Icon Editor' box in the 'User Program Options' window.

Section 16.1 User Programs : User Program Options

1899

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

In this case the 'Icon Editor' is mspaint.exe so the UPImage.bmp is available for editing in Microsoft PaintTM.

Section 16.1 User Programs : User Program Options

User Programs

Senergy

1900

After changes have been made to the icon, the icon file must be saved as UPImage.bmp. This will enable the IP program to pick up the icon image and display it correctly. NOTE: all User Programs are contained within their own folders within the IntPetro35\UserPrograms folder, which means that files can have the same name.

Help Editor The 'Help Editor' is accessed through the 'New Program' and 'Edit Program' modules when the 'Create Help' button is 'clicked'. This functionality allows the user to write a help document for the user program with a word-processing program of choice. The 'Default Help File Ext.' should be used to determine the type of file to be used for the help document. For example, if the default type extension is set to "doc" then the Help button for a user program will be enabled if there is a valid UserProgram.doc file in the user program folder.

Related Topics User Programs User Program Options User Program Code FORTRAN Guide

Section 16.1 User Programs : User Program Options

1901

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Example User Programs

Section 16.1 User Programs : User Program Options

Senergy

User Programs

Senergy

16.2

1902

New User Program

The 'New User Program' option provides the user with the functionality to design and execute custom-built programs in IP. The module is arranged on a set of 'tabbed' input / output screens. These are: 'Input Curves' 'Output Curves' 'Input Parameters' 'Input Text Parameters' 'Input Logic Flags' 'Tabs set up' 'Plot Setup (Optional)' The 'tabs' are described fully, below.

The 'Module Name' is the name of the user program that is inserted into the 'User programs' menus. It is also the name of the subdirectory created to store all the information for the program. The subdirectory is created in the 'Userprograms' folder, which is a subdirectory of the main IP program directory, or is set in the User Programs 'Options' window. The programming language is selected by 'checking' the appropriate box at the top of the main window. The default programming language can be set in the User Program 'Options' window. The 'Use Zones' box, if 'checked', allows the created user program to have zonable parameters.

'Input Curves' Tab This 'tab' is used to define the 'Input Curves' to be used.

Section 16.2 User Programs : New User Program

1903

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

'Code Name' - is the name that is used in the code to access the input curve. 'Window Label' - this is the label which will appear in the runtime module, alongside the box where the input curve is selected. 'Default Type' - is the input curve default type. This can be used to try to auto-select the correct input curve ( it is an 'optional' parameter). NOTE: a maximum number of 70 input curves is allowed in each user program.

'Output Curves' Tab This tab is used to define the 'Output Curves'. These are curves that will be created if they do not already exist in a well. NOTE: the difference between input curves and output curves is that the input curves must exist in order to run the user program. However, it is allowed and possible for the user program to write to the input curve. 'Code Name' - is the name that is used in the code to access the 'Output Curve'. 'Window Label' - is the label which will appear in the runtime module, alongside the box where the output curve is selected. 'Default Name' - is the default name for the output curve (optional parameter). 'Curve Units' - are the units for the output curve, only used if the curve is being created by the user program (optional parameter). 'Curve Type' - is the curve type for the output curve, only used if the curve is being created by the user program (optional parameter). 'Plot Lft Scale' - is the plot default left scale for the curve, only used if the curve is being created by the user program (optional parameter). 'Plot Rht Scale' - is the plot default right scale for the curve, only used if the curve is being created by the user program (optional parameter). 'Plot Log/Lin' - is the plot default logarithmic or linear scale option for the curve, only used if the curve is being created by the program (optional parameter). 'Plot Colour' - is the plot default colour for the curve, only used if the curve is being created by the user program (optional parameter). 'Use Array' - check this value if the output curve is to be an array curve. '# X Array' - if the output curve is an array enter the number of samples in the X dimension in the array. '# Z Array' - if the output curve is an array enter the number of samples in the Z or depth

Section 16.2 User Programs : New User Program

User Programs

Senergy

1904

dimension in the array.

NOTE: Don't leave empty lines between lines of code as it can cause problems with the indexing of the code instructions.

'Input Parameters' Tab This 'tab' is used to define the 'Input Parameters' to be used. 'Code Name' - is the name that is used in the code to access the various input parameters. 'Window Label' - is the title label which will appear in the runtime module in the column header, above where the input parameter is selected. On the user Runtime screen, the column heading label will populate the two title cells, depending upon how the text string is written in the program screen. For example, the strings 'a'_value and 'm' value are translated to :

Section 16.2 User Programs : New User Program

1905

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The syntax applied is such that : words separated by an underscore '_' symbol will appear on the same line words separated by a space in the text string will appear in separate title cells. NOTE: 1. There is a maximum text string length of 15 characters allowed for the 'Window Label '. 2. To make changes to the existing titles, the user must first delete the 'Parameter Set' for the user program. See the 'Delete Parameter Set' module accessed from the 'Well' Delete Parameter Set'

'Other Sets'

'

'UPxxx' where 'UPxxx' is the User Program

Parameter Set name. 'Default Value' - is the default value which will appear in the parameter box in the runtime program (optional parameter). 'Min Value' - when the runtime module is run, the program checks that the input parameter is greater than or equal to this parameter. An error message will appear if the input parameter is less than this value (optional parameter). 'Max Value' - when the runtime module is run, the program checks that the input parameter is less than or equal to this parameter. An error message will appear if the input parameter is greater than this value (optional parameter). 'Display Tab Name' - this is a drop-down list of all the User Program 'Tabs' defined on the ' Tabs Set up' tab. 'Tab Disp Order' - is the order in which the defined parameters will appear on their respective tabs.The user needs to do some planning beforehand in order to decide how the

Section 16.2 User Programs : New User Program

User Programs

Senergy

1906

user program is to look in terms of; how many tabs? which parameters on which tab ? etc... NOTE : A maximum of 70 parameters are allowed in total per user program. A maximum of 20 parameters are permitted per 'tab'.

'Input Text Parameters' Tab Text parameters allow the user to select logic flow by choosing a text string from a drop down menu. An example of this usage is in the PhiSw module where the type of Sw equation can be selected from a drop down menu list.

'Code Name' - is the name that is used in the code to access the various input parameters.

Section 16.2 User Programs : New User Program

1907

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

'Window Label' - is the title label which will appear in the runtime module in the column header, above where the 'Parameter' is selected. On the user Runtime screen, the column heading label will populate the two title cells, depending upon how the text string is written in the program screen. 'Text Value' - contains sets of strings which will be used to make up the drop-down menu in the runtime module. 'Default Value' - this is the default string to display when the user program is initialised. 'Display Tab Name' - is a drop-down list of all the User Program 'Tabs' defined on the ' Tabs Set up' tab. 'Tab Disp Order' - is the order in which the defined parameters will appear on their respective tabs. The user needs to do some planning beforehand in order to decide how the user program is to look in terms of; how many tabs? which parameters on which tab ? etc...

'Input Logic Flags' Tab This tab is used to define 'Logic Flags'. Logic Flags can be used to change how the program works without having to rebuild the user program. 'Code Name' - is the name that is used in the code to access the 'Logic Flag'. 'Window Label' - is the title label which will appear in the runtime module in the column header, above where the 'Logic Flag' is selected. On the user Runtime screen, the column heading label will populate the two title cells, depending upon how the text string is written in the program screen. For example, the text string "m_? Shell" is translated to :

The syntax applied is such that : words separated by an underscore '_' symbol will appear on the same line words separated by a space in the text string will appear in separate title cells. NOTE: 1. There is a maximum text string length of 15 characters allowed for the Window Label. 2. To make changes to the existing titles, the user must first delete the 'Parameter Set' for the user program. See the 'Delete Parameter Set' module accessed from the 'Well'

Section 16.2 User Programs : New User Program

'

User Programs

Senergy

Delete Parameter Set'

'Other Sets'

1908

'UPxxx' where 'UPxxx' is the User Program

Parameter Set name. 'Default Value' - is the default value for the Logic Flag (this is an optional parameter). 'Display Tab Name' - is a drop-down list of all the User Program 'Tabs' defined on the ' Tabs Set up' tab. 'Tab Disp Order' - is the order in which the defined parameters will appear on their respective tabs. The user needs to do some planning beforehand in order to decide how the user program is to look in terms of; how many tabs? which parameters on which tab ? etc...

'Tabs set up' Tab The 'Tabs set up' tab allows the user to define the Tab 'titles' and the number of tabs that the user program will occupy. The Tab names are then available to the user when setting up the ' Input Parameters' tab. A maximum of 14 Parameter tabs can be set up. There is an option for placing parameters into a tab that can't be seen by the user of the User Program. The tab is called 'Hide' and any parameters placed into this tab will be hidden from view. This tab can be used to hold parameters that the user wants to keep as constants.

Section 16.2 User Programs : New User Program

1909

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

'Plot Setup' Tab Plots can only be set up for user programs that use zoning ('Use Zones' check box). The 'Plot Setup' tab only needs to be completed if a Log Plot is required with the user program. The three sub-tabs 'Grid', 'Curves' and 'Shading' are very similar to the normal Log Plot Format set-up. However, only 'Input' or 'Output Curves' that have been set up in the user program can be added to the plot. If additional curves are required for the log plot display but are not actually used in the user program, then they must be added to the 'Input Curves' tab listing. If a cross plot is required with the user program then the 'Crossplot' tab is the place for doing this. The 'Grid' sub-tab is illustrated below:

Section 16.2 User Programs : New User Program

User Programs

Senergy

1910

The 'Curves' sub-tab, illustrated below, has the option to add interactive lines. This is done by selecting the Parameter which is to be 'made interactive' in the 'Parameter1' and/or ' Parameter2' columns. The colour for the interactive lines in the plot is then set up in the 'colour1 ' and/or 'colour2' columns. The scaling for the Parameter will be the same as the scaling for the curve set-up in the same line. All Parameters must have an associated Curve in order to scale them. If an appropriate curve is not available, it is possible to generate one by adding another curve into the 'Output curves' list. For example, if we had a Parameter 'm' and an interactive line was needed for it, then create a curve called 'm' in the 'Output Curves' and add it to the plot. The plot will be displayed with the curve 'm' but it will have no values. You can assign this curve the value of the Parameter by adding a line of code into the user program to set the ' Output Curve' to the 'Parameter Value'.

Section 16.2 User Programs : New User Program

1911

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The 'Shading' sub-tab, shown below, allows the user to define shading that will be used in the Default Plot format.

The 'Crossplot' sub-tab allows the user to create interactive crossplots from the user program default plot. Upto three interactive lines can be set-up per crossplot.

Section 16.2 User Programs : New User Program

User Programs

Senergy

1912

'Trk' - specifies which track in the log plot the crossplot pop-up menu will appear in. 'X Curve' - this is the X axis curve name. By 'clicking' in this cell a drop-down of all the input and output curves used in the user program will appear. 'Y Curve' - this is the Y axis curve name. 'Line 1 X Param Start' - this defines the X axis parameter used for the start position of the line. The parameter is picked from a drop-down list. The parameters need to be entered in the 'Input Parameters' tab for them to appear in the drop-down list. 'Line 1 Y Param Start' - this defines the Y axis parameter used for the start position of the line. 'Line 1 X Param Stop' - this defines the X axis parameter used for the end position of the line. If left blank then rather than plotting a line, a point is plotted. 'Line 1 Y Param Stop' - this defines the Y axis parameter used for the end position of the line. Lines 2 and 3 have the same functionality as Line 1. If their positions are left blank then no line is drawn. Multiple crossplots can be defined per track. Interactive lines can use the same start and end parameters so it is possible too define an interactive triangle. The 'Create Default Plot' button will create a plot with one curve per track for all Input and Output curves. This is a good way to start creating a default plot, since it sets up all the zoning information.

'Create Help' The 'Create Help' button, if clicked, will open up a file called 'UserHelp.xxx' (the file is created in

Section 16.2 User Programs : New User Program

1913

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

the user program's directory). The user help extension is defined in the 'User Program Options '. Documentation about the created user program can then be written, which will be available to anyone who runs the user program. The word processor program used to write the help documentation can be defined in 'User Program Options'. When the user runs the user program, the 'Help' button on the form will open up this file.

Methodology To create a new user program the following steps should be followed : 1) Enter the Program Name. NOTE that user program names cannot end with a numeric character. 2) Enter the input and output curves, parameters and logic flags. 3) Choose the appropriate programming language. 4) Click the 'Edit Code' button and enter the code using the code editor (Notepad). 5) Save the code back to disk from the editor, using the 'Save' button in the editor. Do not rename the file for the code - it must be called 'UsersCode.pas' for Pascal or 'UsersCode. f' for Fortran. 6) Click the 'Compile' button on the 'User Programming' window. The program will be automatically compiled and linked to an executable DLL module. Any errors in the code that are found by the compiler will be displayed in a 'DOS' window. The following is an example of a successfully compiled program using Fortran:

The 'Warning' message given by the compiler can be ignored. However, all 'Error' messages must be fixed. The following is a compilation failure due to an error in the users code:

Section 16.2 User Programs : New User Program

User Programs

Senergy

7) Once the file is compiled and linked correctly, it is then ready to test. The program is accessible from the 'Users programs' menu.

Related Topics User Programs User Program Options User Program Code FORTRAN Guide Example User Programs

Section 16.2 User Programs : New User Program

1914

1915

16.3

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

User Program Code

Curve / Parameter Values in code Curve and parameters are handled exactly the same inside the code. Input and output curves are also treated the same. It is possible for a program to update an input curve from code (but not recommended). Output curves are checked that they all belong to the same compatible curve Set (same top, bottom, step) however input curves can belong to different Sets. Therefore, writing back into an input curve may not give the results expected if the input curve is not compatible with the output curves. Curve / Parameter values can be read from code and also updated from code. A reason for changing a parameter from code could be to calculate an average value for a curve in a zone (see user program example 1). Input parameters for zoned user programs can be either curves or fixed values. For this reason all access to parameters must include the current depth index to get the parameter. This is true either for reading or writing a parameter.

Reading Curves / Parameters If the ‘Code Name’ of a curve / parameter is Rw then to read the curve / parameter value into the variable ‘Xrw’ use the following : Xrw = Rw(index)

(FORTRAN, C, VB, Pascal and C#)

Writing Curves / Parameters If writing a variable ‘XphiA’ to a curve / parameter called PhiAv’then use the following : Call Save_PhiAv(index, XphiA) (FORTRAN) Save_ PhiAv(index, XphiA); (Pascal, C#, C and VB) Where ‘index’ is the depth index to write the curve / parameter. For a parameter if a index is not intended to be used (i.e. always a fixed parameter) then ‘index’ can be set to any fixed number (eg -1). The index number for a parameter is ignored if a fixed value parameter is used.

Processing Depth Indexes The user program code is called once per zone being processed (or once for non-zoned programs). In order to know the interval over which to process the data the Top and Bottom depth indexes are available in the program to allow looping through the data. The user sets up a loop to transverse the data level by level. It is possible to loop through the data more than once and to work with data at more than one

Section 16.3 User Programs : User Program Code

User Programs

Senergy

1916

depth level at a time (see user program example 2). However, the user should access the data only between the Top index and Bottom Index. The following is an example of the loop statement to access all the data over the zone being processed : DO index = Index_Topdepth() , Index_BottomDepth() (FORTRAN) FOR index:= Topdepth to BottomDepth do BEGIN (Pascal) for ( index = TopDepth() ; index < BottomDepth() ; index++ ) { (C) For index = TopDepth To BottomDepth (VB) for ( index = TopDepth ; index < BottomDepth ; index++ ) { (C#) NOTE: FORTRAN uses a different name for the Top and Bottom index.

Depth Curve The Depth curve is always available to obtain values at an index. The following example shows how the top and bottom depths of the interval being processed can be obtained and output. write(55,*) 'Top = ',Depth(Index_Topdepth()), ‘ Bottom = ',Depth(Index_Bottomdepth()) (FORTRAN) WriteLn(OutFile,'Top = ',Depth(Topdepth):8:3,' Bottom = ',Depth(Bottomdepth):8:3); (Pascal) writer.WriteLine(String.Format("Top = {0:00.0000}", Depth(TopDepth))) (VB) writer.WriteLine("Top = " + Depth(TopDepth) + " Bottom = " + Depth(BottomDepth)); (C#) fprintf(Outfile, " Top = %f Bottom = %f\n", Depth(TopDepth()), Depth(BottomDepth())); (C) Never write back to the Depth curve. This could completely mess up the well if bad values were posted back.

Zones The user code is run once per zone to process. However, it is possible to control the zone being processed from within the user program code. This can be used for example to write parameter reports to a file which include the parameters from all zones. The demo user program 'Interp_Demo' does this. Setting the Zone within the user code affects the results of calls to the zone depth indexes plus all calls to get and set parameters. To find the current zone being processed, use the ZoneNumber function which returns the current zone number as an integer: ZoneNumber() (FORTRAN, C) ZoneNumber (Pascal, VB, C#) To get the total number of zones in the parameter set use the TotalZones function which returns the total number of zones as an integer: TotalZones ()

(FORTRAN, C)

Section 16.3 User Programs : User Program Code

1917

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

TotalZones (Pascal, VB, C#) To change the current zone being processed use the SetZone procedure: Call SetZone(iZone) (FORTRAN) SetZone(iZone); (Pascal, C, C#) SetZone(iZone) (VB) Where iZone is the new zone number and must be of integer variable type. To find out whether the zone being processed is the last zone the following code could be used : IF (ZoneNumber() .EQ. TotalZones()) THEN if ( ZoneNumber() == TotalZones() ) { IF ZoneNumber = TotalZones THEN BEGIN If (ZoneNumber = TotalZones) Then if (ZoneNumber == TotalZones) {

(FORTRAN) (C) (Pascal) (VB) (C#)

Text Parameters in Code This allows the user to select parameters from a user defined text selection list. (see user program example 1). Inside the code, the name of 'Code Label' is used to access what was selected. I.e. if the 'Code Name' was called 'SwEq', then in code a function called 'SwEq' will be created that returns the current value of the list when called i.e. it returns a string. Inside the code this can be used like this; IF (SwEq() .EQ. 'Dual Water') THEN if (strcmp(SwEq (), "Dual Water”) == 0) { If SwEq() = ‘Dual Water’ Then If (SwEq = 'Dual Water') Then If (SwEq == “Dual Water”) {

(FORTRAN) (C) (Pascal) (VB) (C#)

Logic Parameters in Code Allows the user to select logic parameters (True / False) to direct the code flow. (see user program example 1). Inside the code, the name of 'Code Label' is used to access what was selected. I.e. if the 'Code Name' was called 'ShellM', then in code a logic function can be used like this; IF (ShellM()) Then If (ShellM()) { If ShellM() Then If (ShellM) Then If (ShellM) {

(FORTRAN) (C) (Pascal) (VB) (C#)

Curve Attributes in code The following curve attributes are available from code : (see user program example 1). For Each Curve

Section 16.3 User Programs : User Program Code

User Programs

Senergy

1918

XXX_Name() Curve Name XXX_Units() Curve Units XXX_Comments() Curve Comments Where XXX is the curve code name. The following is an example of how the curve Rt name and units can be accessed from code : write(55,*) 'Rt = ', Rt_Name(), '(', Rt_Units(), ')' (FORTRAN) WriteLn(OutFile, 'Rt = ', Rt_Name(), '(', Rt_Units(), ')'); (Pascal) writer.WriteLine(String.Concat("Rt = ", Rt_Name, " (", Rt_Units, ")")) (VB) writer.WriteLine("Rt = " + Rt_Name + " (" + Rt_Units + ")"); (C#) In the C code an extra parameter is passed (character pointer) which is the returned value. The user must create the space for the string. char *aString, *aUnits; aString = InitString( MAX_STRING_1 ); aUnits = InitString( MAX_STRING_1 ); Rt_Name( aString ); (C) Rt_Units( aUnits); (C) fprintf(Outfile, "\nRt = %s (%s)", aString, aUnits ); It is also possible to change the comments for a curve in the Curve Header. This is done by using the following procedure/subroutine call. Save_XXX_Comments( Text ) Where XXX is the curve code name and Text is a string value for the comment. The following is an example of how the curve Sw comment field can be changed from code : call Save_Sw_Comments('Curve written by Interp Demo user program') (FORTRAN) Save_Sw_Comments('Curve written by Interp Demo user program'); (Pascal) Save_Sw_Comments("Curve written by Interp Demo user program") (VB) Save_Sw_Comments("Curve written by Interp Demo user program"); (C#) In the C code the comment must be converted into a Character pointer before passing it to the routine. char *aString, *aUnits; aString = InitString( MAX_STRING_1 ); sprintf(aString, "Curve written by Archie user program"); Save_Sw_Comments(aString);

(C)

Well Attributes in code The following Well attributes are available directly : (see user program example 1). For The Well Code Function Well_Name() Well Name Well_Field() Field Well_Company() Company name The following examples shows how they can be accessed from code : write(55,*) ' Well : ', Well_Name() WriteLn(OutFile,' Well : ', Well_Name);

(FORTRAN) (Pascal)

Section 16.3 User Programs : User Program Code

1919

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

writer.WriteLine(" Well : " & Well_Name) (VB) writer.WriteLine(" Well : " + Well_Name); (C#) In the C code an extra parameter is passed (character pointer) which is the returned value. The user must create the space for the string. char *aString; aString = InitString( MAX_STRING_1 ); Well_Name( aString ); (C) fprintf(Outfile, " Well : %s\n" , aString ); For other Well attributes the following function can be used. Read_Well_Attribute( AttributeName ) Where AttributeName will be the 'Name' in the IP configuration tables.

The following examples shows how the KB Elevation (name ‘KBElev’) could be accessed from code : write(55,*) ' KB Elevation: ', Read_Well_Attribute(‘KBElev’) WriteLn(OutFile, ' KB Elevation: ', Read_Well_Attribute(' KBElev ')); writer.WriteLine("KB Elevation: " & Read_Well_Attribute("KBElev ")) writer.WriteLine("KB Elevation: " + Read_Well_Attribute("KBElev ")); In the C code the procedure has two variables, both character pointers. char *aString, * attribute; aString = InitString( MAX_STRING_1 ); attribute = InitString( MAX_STRING_1 ); sprintf(attribute, "KBElev"); Read_Well_Attribute(attribute, aString); fprintf(Outfile, " KB Elev : %s\n", aString ); To write an attribute in to the well the following procedure is used :

Section 16.3 User Programs : User Program Code

(FORTRAN) (Pascal) (VB) (C#)

User Programs

Senergy

1920

Write_Well_Attribute( AttributeName, AttributeValue) The AttributeName will be the 'Name' in the IP configuration tables. The AttributeValue will be the new value of the attribute. The following examples shows how the ‘Location’ could be updated from code : Call Write_Well_Attribute('Location', ‘North Sea Black 14/12’) Write_Well_Attribute('Location', ‘North Sea Black 14/12’); Write_Well_Attribute("Location", " North Sea Black 14/12") Write_Well_Attribute("Location", " North Sea Black 14/12"); Write_Well_Attribute("Location", " North Sea Black 14/12");

(FORTRAN) (Pascal) (VB) (C#) (C)

Log Run Attributes in code To read Log Run attributes from the well the following function is used : Read_Log_Attribute( AttributeName, LogRunNumber) The AttributeName will be the 'Name' in the IP Log configuration tables. The LogRunNumber will be the log number to look up the log attribute from. If a ‘-1’ is entered as the log number then the program will return the first log attribute not blank in a run number. I.e. if looking for log attribute ‘Rmf’ and there is no value in Run 1 but there is a value in Run 2 then the program will return the Run 2 value. The following examples shows how the Rw log parameter for run ‘1’ could be read from code : RwString = Read_Log_Attribute('Rw', 1) (FORTRAN) RwString := Read_Log_Attribute('Rw', 1); (Pascal) RwString = Read_Log_Attribute("Rw", 1) (VB) string RwString = Read_Log_Attribute("Rw", 1); (C#) In the C code the procedure has one extra variables which is the passed back attribute value, this needs to be a character pointer. char *aString, * attribute; aString = InitString( MAX_STRING_1 ); Read_Log_Attribute("Rw", aString, 1); (C) NOTE: the results of this call always returns a character string. Hence if a numeric value is needed this will have to be read from the string. To write Log attributes to the well the following function is used : Write_Log_Attribute( AttributeName, AttributeValue, LogRunNumber) The AttributeName will be the 'Name' in the IP Log configuration tables. The AttributeValue will be the new value of the attribute (string). The LogRunNumber will be the log number to write the attribute to, if a ‘-1’ is entered then the value will be populated in the first blank value in the log runs. The following examples shows how the Rw log parameter for run ‘2’ could be written from code : Call Write_Log_Attribute('Rw', RwString, 2) Write_Log_Attribute('Rw', RwString , 2); Write_Log_Attribute("Rw", RwString, 2)

(FORTRAN) (Pascal) (VB)

Section 16.3 User Programs : User Program Code

1921

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Write_Log_Attribute("Rw", RwString, 2); (C#) Write_Log_Attribute("Rw", RwString, 2); (C) Where RwString is the new the Rw log parameter character value.

Curve Array Data Array data curves can be accessed from within a user program and new array data curves created. For array data curves, each database sample level can have multiple samples in both the 'X' dimension and also the 'Z' or 'Y' depth dimension. In the user program code the depth dimension is referred to as the 'Y' dimension. Accessing array data from within a user program is similar to normal data except there are three parameters to pass; 'sample index', 'X index' and 'Y index'. To read an array curve the function is: Array_XXX(Index, Xindex, Yindex) Where XXX is the curve code name Index is the well depth sample index XIndex is the index into the array in the X dimension YIndex is the index into the array in the Y or depth dimension To save data into an array curve the procedure or subroutine is: Save_Array_XXX(Index, Xindex, Yindex,Value) Where XXX is the curve code name Index is the well depth sample index Xindex is the index into the array in the X dimension Yindex is the index into the array in the Y or depth dimension Value is the value to save at the index To find out the dimensions of an array curve the following functions can be used: Array_XXX_MaxX() X dimension Array_XXX_MaxY() Y or depth dimension The user program example 3 shows how these functions can be used.

Related Topics User Programs User Program Options User Program Code FORTRAN Guide Example User Programs

Section 16.3 User Programs : User Program Code

User Programs

Senergy

16.4

1922

FORTRAN Guide

The following is a brief summary of the most common expressions and statements used in Fortran. In Fortran Code layout on the page is important. The following basic rules apply: Comment lines start with the letter 'C' in column 1. Line label numbers must be placed in columns 1-5. Code Statements must be placed in columns 7-72 Any letter or number placed in column 6 indicates that this line is a continuation of the previous lines. Multiple continuation lines are possible. In the following examples "a" and "b" are real variables "I" and "j" are integer variables. Mathematical expressions Symbol = + * / ** INT(b) ABS(b) SQRT(b) EXP(b) LOG(b) LOG10(b) SIN(B) COS(B) TAN(B) ASIN(B) ACOS(B) ATAN(B)

Definition Equals Plus Minus Multiply Divide Exponent Take the integer of "b" Take the absolute value of "b" Take the square root of "b" Take the exponential of "b" Take the natural log of "b" Take the Common log of "b" Take the Sine of "b", "b" is in radians Take the Cosine of "b", "b" is in radians Take the Tangent of "b", "b" is in radians Take the Arcsine of "b", "b" is in radians Take the Arccosine of "b", "b" is in radians Take the Arctangent of "b", "b" is in radians

Example (a = b) (a = b + 2.3) (a = b – 4.2) (a = b * 3.2) (a = b / 3.4) (a = b ** 2) (a = b2 ) (I = INT(b)) (a = ABS(b)) (a = SQRT(b)) (a = EXP(b)) (a = eb) (a = LOG(b)) (a = LOG10(b)) (a = SIN(b)) (a = COS(b)) (a = TAN(b)) (a = ASIN(b)) (a = ACOS(b)) (a = ATAN(b))

Logical expressions Symbol Definition .EQ. Equal .NE. Not Equal .LT. Less than .LE. Less than or equal to .GT. Greater than .GE. Greater than or equal to .AND. Logical and

Example IF (A .EQ. B) IF (A .NE. B) IF (A .LT. B) IF (A .LE. B) IF (A .GT. B) IF (A .GE. B) IF (A .EQ. B .AND. I .EQ. J)

.OR.

IF (A .EQ. B .or. I .EQ. J)

Logical or

STATEMENTS

Section 16.4 User Programs : FORTRAN Guide

1923

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

DO [Label] Index = Start, Stop [Step] Where : 'Label' is the line reference number to end the 'DO' loop. This can be omitted and an ENDDO statement used to end the DO loop. 'Index' is the variable that controls the loop. 'Start' is the initial value of the index. 'Stop' is the last value of the index. 'Step' is the step between each loop of the index. If left out the step defaults to 1. Examples: DO I = 1,3 a= I+ b ENDDO

or 100

DO 100 I = 1,3 a= I+ b CONTINUE

GOTO (Label) Where : 'Label' is the line reference number that the program jumps to. IF (Exp) Statement Where : 'Exp' is a logical expression. 'Statement' is any executable statement. Examples IF (a .GT. b) res = 15.5 If a is greater than b, then set res to 15.5 IF (a .LT. b) GOTO 100 If a is less than b goto to line 100. IF (a .EQ. b) THEN Res = 15.5 ENDIF If a equals b then execute the following lines until ENDIF is reached. IF (Exp) THEN Statements ELSE Statements ENDIF Where : 'Exp' is a logical expression. 'Statement' is any executable statement. Example

Section 16.4 User Programs : FORTRAN Guide

User Programs

Senergy

IF (a .GT. b) THEN res = 15.5 ELSE Res = 20 ENDIF If a is greater than b then res = 15.5 else res = 20

Related Topics User Programs User Program Options User Program Code FORTRAN Guide Example User Programs

Section 16.4 User Programs : FORTRAN Guide

1924

1925

16.5

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Example User Programs

This Chapter provides four Example User Programs that can be utilised in Interactive Petrophysics. Example User Program 1: Interp-Demo: This example shows a user program created to perform a complete petrophysical analysis from the determination of clay volume through to pay and reservoir summations. Example User Program 2: Differentiate: This example shows a user program created to find the 'first-derivative' of a curve. This example shows how a curve can be accessed at multiple levels at the same time. The non-zonable option is being used ('Use Zones' box not 'checked'). Example User Program 3: Normalize Array: This user program example takes an array input curve and normalizes the values in it to lie between 0 and 1 and output the results to a new array curve. The non-zonable option is being used. One input curve is created. Example User Program 4: Manage Well Header Info: This example shows how to write a user program that can fill in the 'Manage Well Header Info' fields.

Related Topics User Programs User Program Options User Program Code FORTRAN Guide Example User Programs

16.5.1 Example User Program 1: Interp-Demo The following example shows a user program created to perform a complete petrophysical analysis from the determination of clay volume through to pay and reservoir summations. The program uses all of the new User program functionality including creating crossplots with interactive lines from log plots and parameter drop-down boxes for example. 'Input Curves' define the code names for the deep resistivity, gamma ray, density and sonic curves.

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

User Programs

Senergy

1926

'Input Parameter' tab defines all of the input parameters. Default values and limits are set so that the user cannot enter non-sensible values.

In the 'Input Text Parameters' tab there are two text parameters; a porosity equation with two choices and a water saturation equation, again with two choices. More choices could be added to the 'Text Value' box if required.

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

1927

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The 'Input Logic Flag' is set so that the user can switch on/off the use of the Shell formula for 'm'.

The 'Output Curves' will be called the 'Window Label' name in the code but the default database curve name is the 'Default Name'. This output curve name can be changed by the user at runtime. NOTE: the output Set has been defined with the 'Default Name'. The Set will have to be created in the well in which this user program is run if it does not already exist.

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

User Programs

Senergy

1928

The plot was created using the 'Create Default Plot' button and then edited to put the 'Rwapp' curve in the same track as the 'Rt' curve and the 'Rwapp' interactive line was added.

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

1929

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

Senergy

User Programs

Senergy

1930

The code is written for the different languages and is shown below 'GNU Fortran' 'Delphi Pascal' 'GNU C/C++' 'Microsoft VB .NET' 'Microsoft C# .NET' The code for the program in GNU Fortran is as follows. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------c c User Code for Fortran 77 c SUBROUTINE UserCode() IMPLICIT INTEGER (I-N) INCLUDE 'InOutDef.INC' CHARACTER*(40) RwString c c All user defined input parameters and logic flags are treated as functions. c As such they must be used with a () at the end of their name. c For example: Input parameter RW is used in an equation as RW(); AA = RW() + 2. c To use trend curves as input parameters the depth INDEX must also be passed into the function. c RW(INDEX), AA = RW(INDEX) + 2. c c Input curves are used in equations as functions. c Vclay = (GR(INDEX) - GRclean(INDEX)) / (GRclay(INDEX) - GRclean(INDEX)) c INDEX is the integer index into the curve array. GRclay and GRclean are defined c as input parameters. GR is the input curve. If GRclean is enterd by the use as a fixed value

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

1931

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

c then the INDEX parameter in GRclean(INDEX) is ignored. c Input curve DEPTH is always available and does not have to be defined as an input curve. c c Data is saved by using the SAVE_***(INDEX, VALUE) procedure. Where *** is the c output curve name. VALUE is the value to store at INDEX. c CALL SAVE_VCL(INDEX, 0.5) saves value 0.5 into the output curve VCL. c c c calculate the Pickett plot end point parameters Call CalculatePickett c c Intitalize zonal averages PayNet = 0.0 ResNet = 0.0 PhiPay = 0.0 PhiRes = 0.0 SwPay = 0.0 SwRes = 0.0 VclPay = 0.0 VclRes = 0.0 BVWPay = 0.0 BVWRes = 0.0 PayCount = 0.0 ResCount = 0.0 c c Loop through the data one level at a time c Index_Topdepth and Index_BottomDepth are the index equivalent depths entered on the run window. C DO 100 INDEX = Index_Topdepth() , Index_BottomDepth() c c c Calculate porosity depending om method IF (PorEq() .EQ. 'Sonic') THEN S = Son(INDEX) IF (S .GT. 0.0) THEN Por = (S - SonMat(INDEX)) * SonCp(INDEX) / > (SonFluid(INDEX) - SonMat(INDEX)) ELSE Por = -999.0 endif c Calculate clay porosity PorClay = (SonClay(INDEX) - SonMat(INDEX)) * SonCp(INDEX) / > (SonFluid(INDEX) - SonMat(INDEX))

>

ELSE D = Den(INDEX) IF (D .GT. 0.0) THEN Por = (D - DenMat(INDEX)) / (DenFluid(INDEX) - DenMat(INDEX)) ELSE Por = -999.0 ENDIF

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

User Programs

Senergy c >

c

>

c

c

c

c

c c c

c

c

Calculate clay porosity PorClay = (DenClay(INDEX) - DenMat(INDEX)) / (DenFluid(INDEX) - DenMat(INDEX)) ENDIF Calculate Clay volume G = GR(INDEX) IF (G .NE. -999.0) THEN VClay = (G - GRCLEAN(INDEX)) / (GRCLAY(INDEX) - GRCLEAN(INDEX)) IF (Vclay .GT. 1.0) THEN Vclay = 1.0 ELSEIF (Vclay .LT. 0.0) THEN Vclay = 0.0 ENDIF Correct Porosity for clay Por = Por - Vclay * PorClay IF (Por .LT. 0.0001) THEN Por = 0.0001 ENDIF ELSE VClay = -999.0 Por = -999.0 ENDIF

Calculate Water Saturation Res = Rt(Index) IF ((Por .LE. 0.0) .OR. (Res .LE. 0.0)) THEN WatSat = -999.0 Rwa = -999.0 BVW = -999.0 ELSE Check for Shell m IF (Shellm()) THEN XX = 1.87 + 0.019 / Por ELSE set m to input parameter XX = XM(INDEX) ENDIF Check for Archie equation IF (SwEq() .EQ. 'Archie') THEN calculate F F = XA(INDEX) / Por**XX calculate Sw WatSat = (F * Rw(INDEX) / Res)**(1.0/XN(INDEX)) ELSE calculate Sw Indonesian WatSat = (Res**0.5 * > ( VClay**(1.0-VClay/2.0) / Rclay(INDEX)**0.5 + > Por**(XX/2.0) / (XA(INDEX)*Rw(INDEX))**0.5 ) > ) ** (-2.0/XN(INDEX)) ENDIF Limit Sw IF (WatSat .GT. 1.2) THEN

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

1932

1933

C c

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

WatSat = 1.2 ENDIF calculate Rw apparent Rwa = Res * Por**XX / XA(INDEX) calculate BVW IF (WatSat .LT. 1.0) THEN BVW = WatSat * Por ELSE BVW = Por ENDIF ENDIF

c c

calculate the Net pay and net reservoir Limit Sw to 1.0 IF (WatSat .GT. 1.0) THEN WS = 1.0 ELSE WS = WatSat ENDIF IF ((Por .GE. PhiCut(INDEX)) .AND. > (VClay .LE. VclCut(INDEX))) THEN ResFlg = 1.0 IF (WS .LE. SwCut(INDEX)) THEN PayFlg = 1.0 ELSE PayFlg = 0.0 ENDIF ELSE ResFlg = 0.0 PayFlg = 0.0 ENDIF

c

add results to zone averages IF (ResFlg .EQ. 1.0) THEN ResCount = ResCount + 1.0 PhiRes = PhiRes + Por BVWRes = BVWRes + Por * WS VclRes = VclRes + VClay ENDIF IF (PayFlg .EQ. 1.0) THEN PayCount = PayCount + 1.0 PhiPay = PhiPay + Por BVWPay = BVWPay + Por * WS VclPay = VclPay + VClay ENDIF

c

output the curve results Call SAVE_Phi(INDEX,Por) Call SAVE_Vcl(INDEX,VClay) Call SAVE_Sw(INDEX,WatSat) Call SAVE_Rwapp(INDEX,Rwa) Call SAVE_BVW(INDEX,BVW) Call SAVE_NetResFlg(INDEX,ResFlg) Call SAVE_NetPayFlg(INDEX,PayFlg)

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

Senergy

User Programs

Senergy 100 CONTINUE c c c c

Calculate Well Step from first 2 depths Step = Depth(Index_Topdepth()+1) - Depth(Index_Topdepth()) Calculate the zonal averages ResNet = ResCount * Step IF (ResCount .EQ. 0.0) THEN PhiRes = 0.0 VclRes = 0.0 BVWRes = 0.0 SwRes = 0.0 ELSE PhiRes = PhiRes / ResCount VclRes = VclRes / ResCount BVWRes = BVWRes / ResCount SwRes = BVWRes / PhiRes ENDIF PayNet = PayCount * Step IF (PayCount .EQ. 0.0) THEN PhiPay = 0.0 VclPay = 0.0 BVWPay = 0.0 SwPay = 0.0 ELSE PhiPay = PhiPay / PayCount VclPay = VclPay / PayCount BVWPay = BVWPay / PayCount SwPay = BVWPay / PhiRes ENDIF

c c Output results back to parameters c We loop through all the data because it is possible that the result parameters are set as curves ! DO INDEX = Index_Topdepth() , Index_BottomDepth() Call SAVE_NetRes(INDEX,ResNet) Call SAVE_AvPhiRes(INDEX,PhiRes) Call SAVE_AvVclRes(INDEX,VclRes) Call SAVE_AvSwRes(INDEX,SwRes) Call Call Call Call ENDDO c c C

SAVE_NetPay(INDEX,PayNet) SAVE_AvPhiPay(INDEX,PhiPay) SAVE_AvVclPay(INDEX,VclPay) SAVE_AvSwPay(INDEX,SwPay)

Create a report to a file if this zone is the last zone IF (ZoneNumber() .EQ. TotalZones()) THEN OPEN (UNIT=55,FILE='Interp Demo FORTRAN Report.TXT', > STATUS='UNKNOWN') write(55,*) ' USER PROGRAM INTERP PARAMETERS' write(55,*) '' write(55,*) ' Well : ', Well_Name()

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

1934

1935 c

c c

c c

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Write well attributes using attribute name write(55,*) ' Company : ', Read_Well_Attribute('Company') write(55,*) ' Field : ', Read_Well_Attribute('Field') write(55,*) ' KB Elev : ', Read_Well_Attribute('KBElev') write(55,*) ' Input Curves ' write(55,*) ' Rt = ', Rt_Name(), '(', Rt_Units(), ')' write(55,*) ' Gr = ', Gr_Name(), '(', Gr_Units(), ')' write(55,*) ' Den = ', Den_Name(), '(', Den_Units(), ')' write(55,*) ' Son = ', Son_Name(), '(', Son_Units(), ')' write(55,*) ' Output Curve ' write(55,*) ' Phi = ', Phi_Name(), '(', Phi_Units(), ')' write(55,*) ' Vcl = ', Vcl_Name(), '(', Vcl_Units(),')' write(55,*) ' Sw = ', Sw_Name(), '(', Sw_Units(),')' write(55,*) ' Rwapp = ', RwApp_Name(), '(', RwApp_Units(), > ')' write(55,*) ' BVW = ', BVW_Name(), '(', BVW_Units(),')' write(55,*) ' NetPay = ', NetPayFlg_Name() write(55,*) ' NetRes = ', NetResFlg_Name() Write the parameters by zone DO I = 1, TotalZones() Set the zone number so we can get the parameters for each zone Call SetZone(I) write(55,*) '' write(55,*) ' Zone ', I, ' Input Parameters ' write(55,*) ' a = ', Xa(1) write(55,*) ' m = ', XM(1) write(55,*) ' n = ', XN(1) write(55,*) ' Rw = ', Rw(1) write(55,*) ' Sw Eq = ', SwEq() write(55,*) ' Son Matrix = ', SonMat(1) write(55,*) ' Son Fluid = ', SonFluid(1) write(55,*) ' Son CP = ', SonCp(1) write(55,*) ' Son Clay = ', SonClay(1) write(55,*) ' Den Matrix = ', DenMat(1) write(55,*) ' Den Fluid = ', DenFluid(1) write(55,*) ' Por Eq = ', PorEq() write(55,*) ' Den Clay = ', DenClay(1) write(55,*) ' Gr Clean = ', GrClean(1) write(55,*) ' Gr Clay = ', GrClay(1) write(55,*) ' Depth Interval' write(55,*) ' Top = ',Depth(Index_Topdepth()), > ' Bottom = ',Depth(Index_Bottomdepth()) ENDDO CLOSE (UNIT=55,STATUS='KEEP') ENDIF Write call > call > call > call >

to database who created these curves Save_Sw_Comments( 'Curve written by Interp Demo user program') Save_Rwapp_Comments( 'Curve written by Interp Demo user program') Save_Phi_Comments( 'Curve written by Interp Demo user program') Save_Vcl_Comments( 'Curve written by Interp Demo user program')

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

Senergy

User Programs

Senergy

1936

call Save_BVW_Comments( 'Curve written by Interp Demo user program') call Save_NetResFlg_Comments( > 'Curve written by Interp Demo user program') call Save_NetPayFlg_Comments( > 'Curve written by Interp Demo user program') >

c c c RETURN c END c c c c

Calculate the Pickett plot line end points SUBROUTINE CalculatePickett() IMPLICIT INTEGER (I-N) INCLUDE 'InOutDef.INC'

c c c

Calculate m amd Rw from end point lines Phi1 = PPphi1(-1) Phi2 = PPphi2(-1) Ro1 = PPres1(-1) Ro2 = PPres2(-1) IF (Phi1 .NE. Phi2) THEN xmc = ( Log10(Max(Ro1,0.01)) - Log10(Max(Ro2,0.01)) ) / > ( Log10(Max(Phi2,0.001)) - Log10(Max(Phi1,0.001)) ) ELSE xmc = xm(-1) ENDIF Rwc = Ro1 * Phi1**xmc / XA(-1) Rwc = Max(0.0001,Min(Rwc,100.0))

c c Check to see if the values calculated are the default values c If they are then assume that the pickett plot is not open and in use c and therefore assume that the values to use for m and Rw are the input normal parameters c IF ( ( ABS(Rwc-RwPick(-1)) .LT. 0.001) .AND. > ( ABS(xmc-MPick(-1)) .LT. 0.01) ) THEN Rwc = Rw(-1) Call SAVE_RwPick(-1,Rwc) xmc = xm(-1) Call SAVE_MPick(-1,xmc) c Recalculate the line using the parameter values of m and Rw and save Ro1 = XA(-1) * Rwc * Phi1**(-xmc) Ro2 = XA(-1) * Rwc * Phi2**(-xmc) Call SAVE_PPres1(-1,Ro1) Call SAVE_PPres2(-1,Ro2) ELSE c New values of m and Rw save these and also the pickett defaults Call SAVE_Rw(-1,Rwc) Call SAVE_XM(-1,xmc)

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

1937

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Call SAVE_RwPick(-1,Rwc) Call SAVE_MPick(-1,xmc) ENDIF c END

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

The code for the program in Delphi Pascal is as follows. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------unit UsersCode; interface uses Functions, Math; Procedure UserCode; stdcall; // declare other procedures and function in this Unit Procedure CalculatePickett; implementation {User Code} Procedure UserCode; stdcall; // declare all variables Var index, I : Integer; PayNet, ResNet, PhiPay, PhiRes, SwPay, SwRes, VclPay, VclRes, BVWPay, BVWRes, PayCount, ResCount : Single; D, S, G, Por, VClay, PorClay, Res, XX, WatSat, BVW, WS, Step, Rwa, F, ResFlg, PayFlg : Single; OutFile : TextFile; RwString : String; begin // calculate the Pickett plot end point parameters CalculatePickett; // Intitalize zonal averages PayNet := 0.0; ResNet := 0.0; PhiPay := 0.0; PhiRes := 0.0; SwPay := 0.0; SwRes := 0.0; VclPay := 0.0; VclRes := 0.0; BVWPay := 0.0; BVWRes := 0.0; PayCount := 0.0; ResCount := 0.0; // // Loop through the data one level at a time // Topdepth and BottomDepth are the index equivalent depths entered on the run window. //

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

User Programs

Senergy

1938

FOR index := Topdepth TO BottomDepth DO BEGIN // // //

Calculate porosity depending om method IF PorEq() = 'Sonic' THEN BEGIN S := Son(INDEX); IF (S > 0.0) THEN Por := (S - SonMat(INDEX)) * SonCp(INDEX) / (SonFluid(INDEX) - SonMat (INDEX)) ELSE Por := -999.0; // Calculate clay porosity PorClay := (SonClay(INDEX) - SonMat(INDEX)) * SonCp(INDEX) / (SonFluid (INDEX) - SonMat(INDEX)); END ELSE BEGIN D := Den(INDEX); IF (D > 0.0) THEN Por := (D - DenMat(INDEX)) / (DenFluid(INDEX) - DenMat(INDEX)) ELSE Por := -999.0; // Calculate clay porosity PorClay := (DenClay(INDEX) - DenMat(INDEX)) / (DenFluid(INDEX) - DenMat (INDEX)); END; //

//

//

//

Calculate Clay volume G := GR(INDEX); IF G <> -999.0 THEN BEGIN VClay := (G - GRCLEAN(INDEX)) / (GRCLAY(INDEX) - GRCLEAN(INDEX)); IF (Vclay > 1.0) THEN Vclay := 1.0 ELSE IF (Vclay < 0.0) THEN Vclay := 0.0; Correct Porosity for clay Por := Por - Vclay * PorClay; IF Por < 0.0001 THEN Por := 0.0001; END ELSE BEGIN VClay := -999.0; Por := -999.0; END; Calculate Water Saturation Res := Rt(Index); IF (Por <= 0.0) OR (Res <= 0.0) THEN BEGIN WatSat := -999.0; Rwa := -999.0; BVW := -999.0; END ELSE BEGIN Check for Shell m IF Shellm() THEN XX := 1.87 + 0.019 / Por

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

1939

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

ELSE set m to input parameter XX := XM(INDEX); // Check for Archie equation IF SwEq() = 'Archie' THEN BEGIN // calculate F F := XA(INDEX) / Power(Por,XX); // calculate Sw WatSat := Power(F * Rw(INDEX) / Res, 1.0/XN(INDEX)); END ELSE // calculate Sw Indonesian WatSat := Power( Sqrt(Res) * ( Power(VClay, (1.0-VClay/2.0)) / Sqrt (Rclay(INDEX)) + Power(Por, (XX/2.0)) / Sqrt(XA(INDEX)*Rw(INDEX)) ), -2.0/XN (INDEX)); // Limit Sw IF WatSat > 1.2 THEN WatSat := 1.2; // calculate Rw apparent Rwa := Res * Power(Por, XX) / XA(INDEX); // calculate BVW IF WatSat < 1.0 THEN BVW := WatSat * Por ELSE BVW := Por; END; //

// //

calculate the Net pay and net reservoir Limit Sw to 1.0 IF WatSat > 1.0 THEN WS := 1.0 ELSE WS := WatSat; IF (Por >= PhiCut(INDEX)) AND (VClay <= VclCut(INDEX)) THEN BEGIN ResFlg := 1.0; IF WS <= SwCut(INDEX) THEN PayFlg := 1.0 ELSE PayFlg := 0.0; END ELSE BEGIN ResFlg := 0.0; PayFlg := 0.0; END;

//

add results to zone averages IF ResFlg = 1.0 THEN BEGIN ResCount := ResCount + 1.0; PhiRes := PhiRes + Por; BVWRes := BVWRes + Por * WS; VclRes := VclRes + VClay; END; IF PayFlg = 1.0 THEN BEGIN PayCount := PayCount + 1.0;

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

User Programs

Senergy

1940

PhiPay := PhiPay + Por; BVWPay := BVWPay + Por * WS; VclPay := VclPay + VClay; END; //

output the curve results SAVE_Phi(INDEX,Por); SAVE_Vcl(INDEX,VClay); SAVE_Sw(INDEX,WatSat); SAVE_Rwapp(INDEX,Rwa); SAVE_BVW(INDEX,BVW); SAVE_NetResFlg(INDEX,ResFlg); SAVE_NetPayFlg(INDEX,PayFlg); END;

// // // //

// for index := Topdepth .....

Calculate Well Step from first 2 depths Step := Depth(Topdepth+1) - Depth(Topdepth); Calculate the zonal averages ResNet := ResCount * Step; IF ResCount = 0.0 THEN BEGIN PhiRes := 0.0; VclRes := 0.0; BVWRes := 0.0; SwRes := 0.0; END ELSE BEGIN PhiRes := PhiRes / ResCount; VclRes := VclRes / ResCount; BVWRes := BVWRes / ResCount; SwRes := BVWRes / PhiRes; END; PayNet := PayCount * Step; IF PayCount = 0.0 THEN BEGIN PhiPay := 0.0; VclPay := 0.0; BVWPay := 0.0; SwPay := 0.0; END ELSE BEGIN PhiPay := PhiPay / PayCount; VclPay := VclPay / PayCount; BVWPay := BVWPay / PayCount; SwPay := BVWPay / PhiRes; END;

// // Output results back to parameters // We loop through all the data because it is possible that the result parameters are set as curves ! FOR INDEX := Topdepth to BottomDepth do BEGIN SAVE_NetRes(INDEX,ResNet); SAVE_AvPhiRes(INDEX,PhiRes); SAVE_AvVclRes(INDEX,VclRes);

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

1941

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

SAVE_AvSwRes(INDEX,SwRes); SAVE_NetPay(INDEX,PayNet); SAVE_AvPhiPay(INDEX,PhiPay); SAVE_AvVclPay(INDEX,VclPay); SAVE_AvSwPay(INDEX,SwPay); END; // // // Create a report to a file if this is the last zone IF ZoneNumber = TotalZones THEN BEGIN AssignFile(OutFile,'Interp Demo Pascal Report.TXT'); Rewrite(OutFile); WriteLn(OutFile,' USER PROGRAM INTERP DEMO PARAMETERS'); WriteLn(OutFile); WriteLn(OutFile,' Well : ', Well_Name); // Write well attributes using attribute name WriteLn(OutFile, ' Company : ', Read_Well_Attribute('Company')); WriteLn(OutFile, ' Field : ', Read_Well_Attribute('Field')); WriteLn(OutFile, ' KB Elev : ', Read_Well_Attribute('KBElev')); WriteLn(OutFile, ' Input Curves '); WriteLn(OutFile, ' Rt = ', Rt_Name(), '(', Rt_Units(), ')'); WriteLn(OutFile, ' Gr = ', Gr_Name(), '(', Gr_Units(), ')'); WriteLn(OutFile, ' Den = ', Den_Name(), '(', Den_Units(), ')'); WriteLn(OutFile, ' Son = ', Son_Name(), '(', Son_Units(), ')'); WriteLn(OutFile, ' Output Curve '); WriteLn(OutFile, ' Phi = ', Phi_Name(), '(', Phi_Units(), ')'); WriteLn(OutFile, ' Vcl = ', Vcl_Name(), '(', Vcl_Units(),')'); WriteLn(OutFile, ' Sw = ', Sw_Name(), '(', Sw_Units(),')'); WriteLn(OutFile, ' Rwapp = ', RwApp_Name(), '(', RwApp_Units(),')'); WriteLn(OutFile, ' BVW = ', BVW_Name(), '(', BVW_Units(),')'); WriteLn(OutFile, ' NetPay = ', NetPayFlg_Name() ); WriteLn(OutFile, ' NetRes = ', NetResFlg_Name() ); // //

Write the parameters by zone FOR I := 1 TO TotalZones DO BEGIN Set the zone number so we can get the parameters for each zone SetZone(I); WriteLn(OutFile); WriteLn(OutFile, ' Zone ', I, ' Input Parameters '); WriteLn(OutFile, ' a = ', Xa(1):8:3); WriteLn(OutFile, ' m = ', XM(1):8:3); WriteLn(OutFile, ' n = ', XN(1):8:3); WriteLn(OutFile, ' Rw = ', Rw(1):8:3); WriteLn(OutFile, ' Sw Eq = ', SwEq()); WriteLn(OutFile, ' Son Matrix = ', SonMat(1):8:3); WriteLn(OutFile, ' Son Fluid = ', SonFluid(1):8:3); WriteLn(OutFile, ' Son CP = ', SonCp(1):8:3); WriteLn(OutFile, ' Son Clay = ', SonClay(1):8:3); WriteLn(OutFile, ' Den Matrix = ', DenMat(1):8:3 ); WriteLn(OutFile, ' Den Fluid = ', DenFluid(1):8:3); WriteLn(OutFile, ' Por Eq = ', PorEq() ); WriteLn(OutFile, ' Den Clay = ', DenClay(1):8:3);

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

User Programs

Senergy

WriteLn(OutFile, ' Gr Clean = ', GrClean(1):8:3); WriteLn(OutFile, ' Gr Clay = ', GrClay(1):8:3); WriteLn(OutFile, ' Depth Interval'); WriteLn(OutFile, ' Top = ',Depth(Topdepth):8:3,' Depth(Bottomdepth):8:3); END; CloseFile(OutFile); END; // // Write to database who created these curves Save_Sw_Comments('Curve written by Interp Demo user program'); Save_Rwapp_Comments('Curve written by Interp Demo user program'); Save_Phi_Comments('Curve written by Interp Demo user program'); Save_Vcl_Comments('Curve written by Interp Demo user program'); Save_BVW_Comments('Curve written by Interp Demo user program'); Save_NetResFlg_Comments('Curve written by Interp Demo user program'); Save_NetPayFlg_Comments('Curve written by Interp Demo user program');

1942

Bottom = ',

EXIT; // END; // // // // Calculate the Pickett plot line end points // Procedure CalculatePickett; Var Phi1, Phi2, Ro1, Ro2, xmc, Rwc : Single; BEGIN // // // Calculate m amd Rw from end point lines Phi1 := PPphi1(-1); Phi2 := PPphi2(-1); Ro1 := PPres1(-1); Ro2 := PPres2(-1); IF Phi1 <> Phi2 THEN xmc := ( Log10(Max(Ro1,0.01)) - Log10(Max(Ro2,0.01)) ) / ( Log10(Max(Phi2,0.001)) - Log10(Max(Phi1,0.001)) ) ELSE xmc := xm(-1); Rwc := Ro1 * Power(Phi1, xmc) / XA(-1); Rwc := Max(0.0001,Min(Rwc,100.0)); // // Check to see if the values calculated are the default values // If they are then assume that the pickett plot is not open and in use // and therefore assume that the values to use for m and Rw are the input normal parameters // IF ( ABS(Rwc-RwPick(-1)) < 0.001) AND ( ABS(xmc-MPick(-1)) < 0.01) THEN BEGIN Rwc := Rw(-1); SAVE_RwPick(-1,Rwc); xmc := xm(-1); SAVE_MPick(-1,xmc);

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

1943

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

//

Recalculate the line using the parameter values of m and Rw and save Ro1 := xa(-1) * Rwc * Power(Phi1, -xmc); Ro2 := xa(-1) * Rwc * Power(Phi2, -xmc); SAVE_PPres1(-1,Ro1); SAVE_PPres2(-1,Ro2); END ELSE BEGIN // New values of m and Rw save these and also the pickett defaults SAVE_Rw(-1,Rwc); SAVE_xm(-1,xmc); SAVE_Rwpick(-1,Rwc); SAVE_Mpick(-1,xmc); END; // END; end.

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

The same routine in C++ follows. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------#include #include #include #include #include #include

void

"Functions.h"

CalculatePickett() ;

extern __declspec (dllexport) {

void usercode_()

int index, i; char *aString; char *attribute; char *aUnits; FILE *Outfile; float PayNet, ResNet, PhiPay, PhiRes, SwPay, SwRes, VclPay, VclRes, BVWPay, BVWRes, PayCount, ResCount; float D, S, G, Por, VClay, PorClay, Res, XX, WatSat, BVW, WS, Step, Rwa, F, ResFlg, PayFlg; aString = InitString( MAX_STRING_1 ); attribute = InitString( MAX_STRING_1 ); aUnits = InitString( MAX_STRING_1 ); //

calculate the Pickett plot end point parameters CalculatePickett();

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

User Programs

Senergy // //

1944

Intitalize zonal averages PayNet = 0.0; ResNet = 0.0; PhiPay = 0.0; PhiRes = 0.0; SwPay = 0.0; SwRes = 0.0; VclPay = 0.0; VclRes = 0.0; BVWPay = 0.0; BVWRes = 0.0; PayCount = 0.0; ResCount = 0.0;

// // Loop through the data one level at a time // TopDepth and BottomDepth are the index equivalent depths entered on the run window. // for ( index = TopDepth() ; index < BottomDepth() ; index++ ) { // // // Calculate porosity depending om method if (strcmp(PorEq(), "Sonic") == 0) { S = Son(index); if (S > 0.0) { Por = (S - SonMat(index)) * SonCp(index) / (SonFluid(index) SonMat(index)); } else { Por = -999.0; } // Calculate clay porosity PorClay = (SonClay(index) - SonMat(index)) * SonCp(index) / (SonFluid (index) - SonMat(index)); } else { D = Den(index); if (D > 0.0) { Por = (D - DenMat(index)) / (DenFluid(index) - DenMat(index)); } else { Por = -999.0; } // Calculate clay porosity PorClay = (DenClay(index) - DenMat(index)) / (DenFluid(index) DenMat(index)); } //

Calculate Clay volume G = Gr(index); if (G != -999.0) { VClay = (G - GrClean(index)) / (GrClay(index) - GrClean(index)); if (VClay > 1.0) {

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

1945

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

VClay = 1.0;

//

} else if (VClay < 0.0) { VClay = 0.0; } Correct Porosity for clay Por = Por - VClay * PorClay; if (Por < 0.0001) { Por = 0.0001 ; } } else { VClay = -999.0; Por = -999.0; }

//

//

//

Calculate Water Saturation Res = Rt(index); if ((Por < 0.0) | (Res <= 0.0)) { WatSat = -999.0; Rwa = -999.0; BVW = -999.0; } else { Check for Shell m if (Shellm()) { XX = 1.87 + 0.019 / Por; } else { set m to input parameter XX = xm(index); }

//

Check for Archie equation if (strcmp(SwEq(), "Archie") == 0) { // calculate F F = xa(index) / pow(Por,XX); // calculate Sw WatSat = pow(F * Rw(index) / Res, 1.0/xn(index)); } else { // calculate Sw Indonesian WatSat = pow( pow(Res,0.5) * ( pow(VClay, (1.0-VClay/2.0)) / pow (Rclay(index),0.5) + pow(Por, (XX/2.0)) / pow(xa(index)*Rw(index),0.5) ), 2.0/xn(index)); } // Limit Sw if (WatSat > 1.2) { WatSat = 1.2; } // calculate Rw apparent Rwa = Res * pow(Por,XX) / xa(index); // calculate BVW

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

User Programs

Senergy if (WatSat < 1.0) { BVW = WatSat * Por; } else { BVW = Por; } } // //

calculate the Net pay and net reservoir Limit Sw to 1.0 if (WatSat > 1.0) { WS = 1.0; } else { WS = WatSat; } if ((Por >= PhiCut(index)) && (VClay <= VclCut(index))) { ResFlg = 1.0; if (WS <= SwCut(index)) { PayFlg = 1.0; } else { PayFlg = 0.0; } } else { ResFlg = 0.0; PayFlg = 0.0; }

//

add results to zone averages if (ResFlg == 1.0) { ResCount = ResCount + 1.0; PhiRes = PhiRes + Por; BVWRes = BVWRes + Por * WS; VclRes = VclRes + VClay; } if (PayFlg == 1.0) { PayCount = PayCount + 1.0; PhiPay = PhiPay + Por; BVWPay = BVWPay + Por * WS; VclPay = VclPay + VClay; }

// output the curve results Save_Phi(index,Por); Save_Vcl(index,VClay); Save_Sw(index,WatSat); Save_Rwapp(index,Rwa); Save_BVW(index,BVW); Save_NetResFlg(index,ResFlg); Save_NetPayFlg(index,PayFlg); }

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

1946

1947

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

// // //

Calculate Well Step from first 2 depths Step = Depth(TopDepth()+1) - Depth(TopDepth()); // Calculate the zonal averages ResNet = ResCount * Step; if (ResCount == 0.0) { PhiRes = 0.0; VclRes = 0.0; BVWRes = 0.0; SwRes = 0.0; } else { PhiRes = PhiRes / ResCount; VclRes = VclRes / ResCount; BVWRes = BVWRes / ResCount; SwRes = BVWRes / PhiRes; } PayNet = PayCount * Step; if (PayCount == 0.0) { PhiPay = 0.0; VclPay = 0.0; BVWPay = 0.0; SwPay = 0.0; } else { PhiPay = PhiPay / PayCount; VclPay = VclPay / PayCount; BVWPay = BVWPay / PayCount; SwPay = BVWPay / PhiRes; } // // Output results back to parameters // We loop through all the data because it is possible that the result parameters are set as curves ! for ( index = TopDepth() ; index < BottomDepth() ; index++ ) { Save_NetRes(index,ResNet); Save_AvPhiRes(index,PhiRes); Save_AvVclRes(index,VclRes); Save_AvSwRes(index,SwRes); Save_NetPay(index,PayNet); Save_AvPhiPay(index,PhiPay); Save_AvVclPay(index,VclPay); Save_AvSwPay(index,SwPay); } // // // Create a report to a file if this is the last zone if ( ZoneNumber() == TotalZones() ) { Outfile = fopen("Interp Demo C Report.txt", "w+"); if(Outfile==NULL) { } else {

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

Senergy

User Programs

Senergy

fprintf(Outfile, " USER PROGRAM INTERP PARAMETERS \n"); fprintf(Outfile, "\n"); Well_Name( aString ); fprintf(Outfile, " Well : %s\n" , aString ); // Write well attributes using attribute name sprintf(attribute, "Company"); Read_Well_Attribute(attribute, aString); fprintf(Outfile, " Company : %s\n", aString ); sprintf(attribute, "Field"); Read_Well_Attribute(attribute, aString); fprintf(Outfile, " Field : %s\n", aString ); sprintf(attribute, "KBElev"); Read_Well_Attribute(attribute, aString); fprintf(Outfile, " KB Elev : %s\n", aString ); fprintf(Outfile, "\n Input Curves\n" ); Rt_Name( aString ); Rt_Units( aUnits); fprintf(Outfile, "\n Gr_Name( aString ); Gr_Units( aUnits); fprintf(Outfile, "\n Den_Name( aString ); Den_Units( aUnits); fprintf(Outfile, "\n Son_Name( aString ); Son_Units( aUnits); fprintf(Outfile, "\n

Rt

= %s (%s)", aString, aUnits );

Gr

= %s (%s)", aString, aUnits );

Den

= %s (%s)", aString, aUnits );

Son

= %s (%s)", aString, aUnits );

fprintf(Outfile, "\n Output Curves\n" ); Phi_Name( aString ); Phi_Units( aUnits); fprintf(Outfile, "\n Vcl_Name( aString ); Vcl_Units( aUnits); fprintf(Outfile, "\n Sw_Name( aString ); Sw_Units( aUnits); fprintf(Outfile, "\n Rwapp_Name( aString ); Rwapp_Units( aUnits); fprintf(Outfile, "\n BVW_Name( aString ); BVW_Units( aUnits); fprintf(Outfile, "\n Phi_Name( aString ); fprintf(Outfile, "\n Phi_Name( aString ); fprintf(Outfile, "\n

Phi

= %s (%s)", aString, aUnits );

Vcl

= %s (%s)", aString, aUnits );

Sw

= %s (%s)", aString, aUnits );

Rwapp

= %s (%s)", aString, aUnits );

BVW

= %s (%s)", aString, aUnits );

NetPay = %s ", aString ); NetRes = %s ", aString );

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

1948

1949

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

// Write the parameters by zone for ( i = 1 ; i <= TotalZones() ; i++ ) { // Set the zone number so we can get the parameters for each zone SetZone(i); fprintf(Outfile, "\n"); fprintf(Outfile, "\n Zone %i Input Parameters\n", i ); fprintf(Outfile, " a fprintf(Outfile, " m fprintf(Outfile, " n fprintf(Outfile, " Rw // strcpy(aString, SwEq()); fprintf(Outfile, " Sw Eq fprintf(Outfile, " Son Matrix fprintf(Outfile, " Son Fluid fprintf(Outfile, " Son CP fprintf(Outfile, " Son Clay fprintf(Outfile, " Den Matrix fprintf(Outfile, " Den Fluid // strcpy(aString, PorEq()); fprintf(Outfile, " Por Eq fprintf(Outfile, " Den Clay fprintf(Outfile, " Gr Clean fprintf(Outfile, " Gr Clay

= = = =

%f %f %f %f

\n", \n", \n", \n",

xa(1)); xm(1)); xn(1)); Rw(1));

= = = = = = =

%s %f %f %f %f %f %f

\n", \n", \n", \n", \n", \n", \n",

SwEq()); SonMat(1)); SonFluid(1)); SonCp(1)); SonClay(1)); DenMat(1)); DenFluid(1));

= = = =

%s %f %f %f

\n", \n", \n", \n",

PorEq()); DenClay(1)); GrClean(1)); GrClay(1));

//Show Depth Interval fprintf(Outfile, " Depth Interval\n"); fprintf(Outfile, " Top = %f Bottom = %f\n", Depth (TopDepth()), Depth(BottomDepth())); } fclose(Outfile); } } // // Write to database who created these curves sprintf(aString, "Curve written by Archie user program1"); Save_Sw_Comments(aString); Save_Rwapp_Comments(aString); Save_Phi_Comments(aString); Save_Vcl_Comments(aString); Save_BVW_Comments(aString); Save_NetResFlg_Comments(aString); Save_NetPayFlg_Comments(aString); // //Write_Well_Attribute("Location", "IP Test Location"); //Read_Log_Attribute("Rw", aString, 1); //Write_Log_Attribute("Rw", aString, 2);

free( aString ); free( attribute ); free( aUnits );

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

User Programs

Senergy

1950

} // // // Calculate the Pickett plot line end points // void CalculatePickett() { // float Phi1, Phi2, Ro1, Ro2, xmc, Rwc; // // Calculate m amd Rw from end point lines Phi1 = PPphi1(-1); Phi2 = PPphi2(-1); Ro1 = PPres1(-1); Ro2 = PPres2(-1); if (Phi1 != Phi2) { xmc = ( log10(max(Ro1,0.01)) - log10(max(Ro2,0.01)) ) / ( log10(max(Phi2,0.001)) - log10(max(Phi1,0.001)) ); } else { xmc = xm(-1); } Rwc = Ro1 * pow(Phi1,xmc) / xa(-1); Rwc = max(0.0001,min(Rwc,100.0)); // // Check to see if the values calculated are the default values // If they are then assume that the pickett plot is not open and in use // and therefore assume that the values to use for m and Rw are the input normal parameters // if ( ( fabs(Rwc-Rwpick(-1)) < 0.001) && ( fabs(xmc-Mpick(-1)) < 0.01) ) { Rwc = Rw(-1); Save_Rwpick(-1,Rwc); xmc = xm(-1); Save_Mpick(-1,xmc); // Recalculate the line using the parameter values of m and Rw and save Ro1 = xa(-1) * Rwc * pow(Phi1,-xmc); Ro2 = xa(-1) * Rwc * pow(Phi2,-xmc); Save_PPres1(-1,Ro1); Save_PPres2(-1,Ro2); } else { // New values of m and Rw save these and also the pickett defaults Save_Rw(-1,Rwc); Save_xm(-1,xmc); Save_Rwpick(-1,Rwc); Save_Mpick(-1,xmc); } // }

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

1951

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The code for the program in VB .NET is as follows. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Imports System.IO Imports System.Windows.Forms Partial Public Class IPLink Public Sub UserCode() Dim index, i as Integer Dim writer As TextWriter = Nothing Dim PayNet, ResNet, PhiPay, PhiRes, SwPay, SwRes, VclPay, VclRes, BVWPay, BVWRes, PayCount, ResCount as Single Dim D, S, G, Por, VClay, PorClay, Res, XX, WatSat, BVW, WS, IStep, Rwa, F, ResFlg, PayFlg as Single Dim RwString as String ' Try ' calculate the Pickett plot end point parameters CalculatePickett() ' ' Intitalize zonal averages PayNet = 0.0 ResNet = 0.0 PhiPay = 0.0 PhiRes = 0.0 SwPay = 0.0 SwRes = 0.0 VclPay = 0.0 VclRes = 0.0 BVWPay = 0.0 BVWRes = 0.0 PayCount = 0.0 ResCount = 0.0 ' ' Loop through the data one level at a time ' TopDepth and BottomDepth are the index equivalent depths entered on the run window. ' For index = TopDepth To BottomDepth ' ' ' Calculate porosity depending om method If (PorEq = "Sonic") Then S = Son(index) IF (S > 0.0) Then Por = (S - SonMat(index)) * SonCp(index) / _ (SonFluid(index) - SonMat(index)) Else Por = -999.0 End If ' Calculate clay porosity

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

User Programs

Senergy

1952

PorClay = (SonClay(index) - SonMat(index)) * SonCp(index) / _ (SonFluid(index) - SonMat(index)) Else D = Den(index) IF (D > 0.0) Then Por = (D - DenMat(index)) / (DenFluid(index) - DenMat(index))

'

Else Por = -999.0 End If Calculate clay porosity PorClay = (DenClay(index) - DenMat(index)) / (DenFluid(index) -

DenMat(index)) End If '

'

'

'

'

' ' '

Calculate Clay volume G = GR(index) If (G <> -999.0) Then VClay = (G - GrClean(index)) / (GrClay(index) - GrClean(index)) If (Vclay > 1.0) Then Vclay = 1.0 Else IF (Vclay < 0.0) Then Vclay = 0.0 End If Correct Porosity for clay Por = Por - Vclay * PorClay IF (Por < 0.0001) Then Por = 0.0001 End If Else VClay = -999.0 Por = -999.0 End If Calculate Water Saturation Res = Rt(Index) If ((Por <= 0.0) OrElse (Res <= 0.0)) Then WatSat = -999.0 Rwa = -999.0 BVW = -999.0 Else Check for Shell m If (Shellm) Then XX = 1.87 + 0.019 / Por Else set m to input parameter XX = XM(index) End If Check for Archie equation If (SwEq = "Archie") Then calculate F F = XA(index) / Math.Pow(Por,XX) calculate Sw WatSat = Math.Pow(F * Rw(index) / Res,(1.0/XN(index))) Else

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

1953

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

'

calculate Sw Indonesian WatSat = Math.Pow( Math.Pow(Res,0.5) * ( Math.Pow(VClay, (1.0-VClay/2.0)) / Math.Pow(Rclay(index),0.5) + _ Math.Pow(Por, (XX/2.0)) / Math.Pow(xa(index)*Rw (index),0.5) ), -2.0/xn(index)) End If ' Limit Sw If (WatSat > 1.2) Then WatSat = 1.2 End If ' calculate Rw apparent Rwa = Res * Math.Pow(Por,XX) / XA(index) ' calculate BVW If (WatSat < 1.0) Then BVW = WatSat * Por Else BVW = Por End If End If ' '

calculate the Net pay and net reservoir Limit Sw to 1.0 If (WatSat > 1.0) Then WS = 1.0 Else WS = WatSat End If If ((Por >= PhiCut(index)) and (VClay <= VclCut(index))) Then ResFlg = 1.0 If (WS <= SwCut(index)) Then PayFlg = 1.0 Else PayFlg = 0.0 End If Else ResFlg = 0.0 PayFlg = 0.0 End If

'

'

add results to zone averages IF (ResFlg = 1.0) Then ResCount = ResCount + 1.0 PhiRes = PhiRes + Por BVWRes = BVWRes + Por * WS VclRes = VclRes + VClay End If If (PayFlg = 1.0) Then PayCount = PayCount + 1.0 PhiPay = PhiPay + Por BVWPay = BVWPay + Por * WS VclPay = VclPay + VClay End If output the curve results

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

User Programs

Senergy

1954

SAVE_Phi(index,Por) SAVE_Vcl(index,VClay) SAVE_Sw(index,WatSat) SAVE_Rwapp(index,Rwa) SAVE_BVW(index,BVW) SAVE_NetResFlg(index,ResFlg) SAVE_NetPayFlg(index,PayFlg) Next ' ' ' '

Calculate Well Step from first 2 depths IStep = Depth(TopDepth()+1) - Depth(TopDepth()) Calculate the zonal averages ResNet = ResCount * IStep If (ResCount = 0.0) Then PhiRes = 0.0 VclRes = 0.0 BVWRes = 0.0 SwRes = 0.0 Else PhiRes = PhiRes / ResCount VclRes = VclRes / ResCount BVWRes = BVWRes / ResCount SwRes = BVWRes / PhiRes End If PayNet = PayCount * If (PayCount = 0.0) PhiPay = 0.0 VclPay = 0.0 BVWPay = 0.0 SwPay = 0.0 Else PhiPay = PhiPay VclPay = VclPay BVWPay = BVWPay SwPay = BVWPay End If

IStep Then

/ / / /

PayCount PayCount PayCount PhiRes

' ' Output results back to parameters ' We loop through all the data because it is possible that the result parameters are set as curves ! For index = TopDepth To BottomDepth SAVE_NetRes(index,ResNet) SAVE_AvPhiRes(index,PhiRes) SAVE_AvVclRes(index,VclRes) SAVE_AvSwRes(index,SwRes) SAVE_NetPay(index,PayNet) SAVE_AvPhiPay(index,PhiPay) SAVE_AvVclPay(index,VclPay) SAVE_AvSwPay(index,SwPay) Next '

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

1955

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

' '

Senergy

Create a report to a file if this is the last zone If (ZoneNumber = TotalZones) Then writer = New StreamWriter("Interp Demo VB Report.TXT") writer.WriteLine(" USER PROGRAM INTERP PARAMETERS") writer.WriteLine() writer.WriteLine(" Well : " & Well_Name) ' Write well attributes using attribute name writer.WriteLine(" Company : " & Read_Well_Attribute("Company")) writer.WriteLine(" Field : " & Read_Well_Attribute("Field")) writer.WriteLine(" KB Elev : " & Read_Well_Attribute("KBElev")) writer.WriteLine() writer.WriteLine(" Input Curves ") writer.WriteLine(String.Concat(" Rt = ", Rt_Name, " (", Rt_Units, ")")) writer.WriteLine(String.Concat(" Gr = ", Gr_Name, " (", Gr_Units, ")")) writer.WriteLine(String.Concat(" Den = ", Den_Name, " (", Den_Units, ")")) writer.WriteLine(String.Concat(" Son = ", Son_Name, " (", Son_Units, ")")) writer.WriteLine(" Output Curves ") writer.WriteLine(String.Concat(" Phi = ", Phi_Name, " (", Phi_Units, ")")) writer.WriteLine(String.Concat(" Vcl = ", Vcl_Name, " (", Vcl_Units, ")")) writer.WriteLine(String.Concat(" Sw = ", Sw_Name, " (", Sw_Units, ")")) writer.WriteLine(String.Concat(" BVW = ", BVW_Name, " (", BVW_Units, ")")) writer.WriteLine(String.Concat(" Rwapp = ", Rwapp_Name, " (", Rwapp_Units, ")")) writer.WriteLine(String.Concat(" NetPay Flg = ", NetPayFlg_Name)) writer.WriteLine(String.Concat(" NetRes Flg = ", NetResFlg_Name)) For i = 1 To TotalZones ' Set the zone number so we can get the parameters for each zone SetZone(i) writer.WriteLine() writer.WriteLine(String.Concat(" Zone ", i, " Input Parameters ")) writer.WriteLine(String.Format(" a = {0:00.0000}", XA(1))) writer.WriteLine(String.Format(" m = {0:00.0000}", XM(1))) writer.WriteLine(String.Format(" n = {0:00.0000}", XN(1))) writer.WriteLine(String.Format(" Rw = {0:00.0000}", Rw(1))) writer.WriteLine(String.Format(" Sw Eq = {0:00.0000}", SwEq)) writer.WriteLine(String.Format(" Son Matrix = {0:00.0000}", SonMat(1)))

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

User Programs

Senergy

1956

writer.WriteLine(String.Format("

Son Fluid

= {0:00.0000}",

writer.WriteLine(String.Format("

Son CP

= {0:00.0000}",

writer.WriteLine(String.Format("

Son Clay

= {0:00.0000}",

writer.WriteLine(String.Format("

Den Matrix = {0:00.0000}",

writer.WriteLine(String.Format("

Den Fluid

= {0:00.0000}",

writer.WriteLine(String.Format("

Por Eq

= {0:00.0000}",

writer.WriteLine(String.Format("

Den Clay

= {0:00.0000}",

writer.WriteLine(String.Format("

Gr Clean

= {0:00.0000}",

writer.WriteLine(String.Format("

Gr Clay

= {0:00.0000}",

SonFluid(1))) SonCp(1))) SonClay(1))) DenMat(1))) DenFluid(1))) PorEq)) DenClay(1))) GrClean(1))) GrClay(1))) writer.WriteLine(" Depth Interval") writer.WriteLine(String.Format(" Top = {0:00.0000}", Depth (TopDepth))) writer.WriteLine(String.Format(" Bottom = {0:00.0000}", Depth(BottomDepth))) Next End If ' ' Write to database who created these curves Save_Sw_Comments("Curve written by Interp Demo user program") Save_Rwapp_Comments("Curve written by Interp Demo user program") Save_Phi_Comments("Curve written by Interp Demo user program") Save_Vcl_Comments("Curve written by Interp Demo user program") Save_BVW_Comments("Curve written by Interp Demo user program") Save_NetResFlg_Comments("Curve written by Interp Demo user program") Save_NetPayFlg_Comments("Curve written by Interp Demo user program") ' ' '

Write_Well_Attribute("Location", "IP Test Location") RwString = Read_Log_Attribute("Rw", 1) Write_Log_Attribute("Rw", RwString, 2)

' Catch exception As Exception MessageBox.Show(("Error occurred: " & exception.ToString)) Finally If (Not writer Is Nothing) Then writer.Flush() writer.Close() End If End Try End Sub ' ' ' '

Calculate the Pickett plot line end points Public Sub

CalculatePickett()

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

1957

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

' Dim Phi1, Phi2, Ro1, Ro2, xmc, Rwc as Single ' ' '

Calculate m amd Rw from end point lines Phi1 = PPphi1(-1) Phi2 = PPphi2(-1) Ro1 = PPres1(-1) Ro2 = PPres2(-1) If (Phi1 <> Phi2) Then xmc = ( Math.Log10(Math.Max(Ro1,0.01)) - Math.Log10(Math.Max (Ro2,0.01)) ) / _ ( Math.Log10(Math.Max(Phi2,0.001)) - Math.Log10(Math.Max (Phi1,0.001)) ) Else xmc = xm(-1) End If Rwc = Ro1 * Math.Pow(Phi1, xmc) / XA(-1) Rwc = Math.Max(0.0001,Math.Min(Rwc,100.0)) ' ' Check to see if the values calculated are the default values ' If they are then assume that the pickett plot is not open and in use ' and therefore assume that the values to use for m and Rw are the input normal parameters ' If ( ( Math.Abs(Rwc-RwPick(-1)) < 0.001) and ( Math.Abs(xmc-MPick(-1)) < 0.01) ) Then Rwc = Rw(-1) SAVE_RwPick(-1,Rwc) xmc = xm(-1) SAVE_MPick(-1,xmc) ' Recalculate the line using the parameter values of m and Rw and save Ro1 = XA(-1) * Rwc * Math.Pow(Phi1, -xmc) Ro2 = XA(-1) * Rwc * Math.Pow(Phi2, -xmc) SAVE_PPres1(-1,Ro1) SAVE_PPres2(-1,Ro2) Else ' New values of m and Rw save these and also the pickett defaults SAVE_Rw(-1,Rwc) SAVE_XM(-1,xmc) SAVE_RwPick(-1,Rwc) SAVE_MPick(-1,xmc) End If ' End Sub End Class

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

The code for the program in C# .NET is as follows. --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------using System;

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

User Programs

Senergy

1958

using System.IO; using System.Windows.Forms;

public partial class IPLink { public void UserCode() { int index, i; Single PayNet, ResNet, PhiPay, PhiRes, SwPay, SwRes, VclPay, VclRes, BVWPay, BVWRes, PayCount, ResCount; Single D, S, G, Por, VClay, PorClay, Res, XX, WatSat, BVW, WS, Step, Rwa, F, ResFlg, PayFlg; TextWriter writer = null; try { // calculate the Pickett plot end point parameters CalculatePickett(); // // Intitalize zonal averages PayNet = 0.0f; ResNet = 0.0f; PhiPay = 0.0f; PhiRes = 0.0f; SwPay = 0.0f; SwRes = 0.0f; VclPay = 0.0f; VclRes = 0.0f; BVWPay = 0.0f; BVWRes = 0.0f; PayCount = 0.0f; ResCount = 0.0f; // // Loop through the data one level at a time // TopDepth and BottomDepth are the index equivalent depths entered on the run window. // for (index = TopDepth; index <= BottomDepth; index++) { // // // Calculate porosity depending om method if (PorEq == "Sonic") { S = Son(index); if (S > 0.0f) { Por = (S - SonMat(index)) * SonCp(index) / (SonFluid(index) - SonMat(index)); } else {

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

1959

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Por = -999.0f; } // Calculate clay porosity PorClay = (SonClay(index) - SonMat(index)) * SonCp (index) / (SonFluid(index) - SonMat(index)); } else { D = Den(index); if (D > 0.0f) { Por = (D - DenMat(index)) / (DenFluid(index) DenMat(index)); } else { Por = -999.0f; } // Calculate clay porosity PorClay = (DenClay(index) - DenMat(index)) / (DenFluid (index) - DenMat(index)); } // Calculate Clay volume G = Gr(index); if (G != -999.0f) { VClay = (G - GrClean(index)) / (GrClay(index) - GrClean (index)); if (VClay > 1.0f) { VClay = 1.0f; } else if (VClay < 0.0f) { VClay = 0.0f; } // Correct Porosity for clay Por = Por - VClay * PorClay; if (Por < 0.0001f) { Por = 0.0001f ; } } else { VClay = -999.0f; Por = -999.0f; } // Calculate Water Saturation Res = Rt(index); if ((Por < 0.0) | (Res <= 0.0))

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

User Programs

Senergy

1960

{ WatSat = -999.0f; Rwa = -999.0f; BVW = -999.0f; } else { // Check for Shell m if (Shellm) { XX = 1.87f + 0.019f / Por; } else { // set m to input parameter XX = xm(index); } // Check for Archie equation if (SwEq == "Archie") { // calculate F F = xa(index) / (Single)Math.Pow(Por,XX); // calculate Sw WatSat = (Single)Math.Pow(F * Rw(index) / Res, 1.0f/xn(index)); } else { // calculate Sw Indonesian WatSat = (Single)Math.Pow( (Single)Math.Pow (Res,0.5f) * ( (Single)Math.Pow(VClay, (1.0f-VClay/2.0f)) / (Single)Math.Pow (Rclay(index),0.5f) + (Single)Math.Pow(Por, (XX/2.0f)) / (Single)Math.Pow(xa(index)*Rw(index),0.5) ), -2.0f/xn(index)); } // Limit Sw if (WatSat > 1.2f) { WatSat = 1.2f; } // calculate Rw apparent Rwa = Res * (Single)Math.Pow(Por,XX) / xa(index); // calculate BVW if (WatSat < 1.0f) { BVW = WatSat * Por; } else { BVW = Por; } }

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

1961

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

// calculate the Net pay and net reservoir // Limit Sw to 1.0 if (WatSat > 1.0f) { WS = 1.0f; } else { WS = WatSat; } if ((Por >= PhiCut(index)) && (VClay <= VclCut(index))) { ResFlg = 1.0f; if (WS <= SwCut(index)) { PayFlg = 1.0f; } else { PayFlg = 0.0f; } } else { ResFlg = 0.0f; PayFlg = 0.0f; } // add results to zone averages if (ResFlg == 1.0f) { ResCount = ResCount + 1.0f; PhiRes = PhiRes + Por; BVWRes = BVWRes + Por * WS; VclRes = VclRes + VClay; } if (PayFlg == 1.0) { PayCount = PayCount + 1.0f; PhiPay = PhiPay + Por; BVWPay = BVWPay + Por * WS; VclPay = VclPay + VClay; } // output the curve results Save_Phi(index,Por); Save_Vcl(index,VClay); Save_Sw(index,WatSat); Save_Rwapp(index,Rwa); Save_BVW(index,BVW); Save_NetResFlg(index,ResFlg);

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

User Programs

Senergy

1962

Save_NetPayFlg(index,PayFlg); } // // // Calculate Well Step from first 2 depths Step = Depth(TopDepth+1) - Depth(TopDepth); // Calculate the zonal averages ResNet = ResCount * Step; if (ResCount == 0.0f) { PhiRes = 0.0f; VclRes = 0.0f; BVWRes = 0.0f; SwRes = 0.0f; } else { PhiRes = PhiRes / ResCount; VclRes = VclRes / ResCount; BVWRes = BVWRes / ResCount; SwRes = BVWRes / PhiRes; } PayNet = PayCount * Step; if (PayCount == 0.0f) { PhiPay = 0.0f; VclPay = 0.0f; BVWPay = 0.0f; SwPay = 0.0f; } else { PhiPay = PhiPay / PayCount; VclPay = VclPay / PayCount; BVWPay = BVWPay / PayCount; SwPay = BVWPay / PhiRes; } // // Output results back to parameters // We loop through all the data because it is possible that the result parameters are set as curves ! for ( index = TopDepth ; index < BottomDepth ; index++ ) { Save_NetRes(index,ResNet); Save_AvPhiRes(index,PhiRes); Save_AvVclRes(index,VclRes); Save_AvSwRes(index,SwRes); Save_NetPay(index,PayNet); Save_AvPhiPay(index,PhiPay);

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

1963

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Save_AvVclPay(index,VclPay); Save_AvSwPay(index,SwPay); } // // // Create a report to a file if this is the last zone if (ZoneNumber == TotalZones) { writer = new StreamWriter("Interp Demo c# Report.TXT"); writer.WriteLine(" USER PROGRAM INTERP PARAMETERS"); writer.WriteLine(); writer.WriteLine(" Well : " + Well_Name); // Write well attributes using attribute name writer.WriteLine(" Company : " + Read_Well_Attribute ("Company")); writer.WriteLine(" Field : " + Read_Well_Attribute("Field")); writer.WriteLine(" KB Elev : " + Read_Well_Attribute ("KBElev")); writer.WriteLine(); writer.WriteLine(" Input Curves "); writer.WriteLine(" Rt = " + Rt_Name + " (" + Rt_Units + ")"); writer.WriteLine(" Gr = " + Gr_Name + " (" + Gr_Units + ")"); writer.WriteLine(" Den = " + Den_Name + " (" + Den_Units + ")"); writer.WriteLine(" Son = " + Son_Name + " (" + Son_Units + ")"); writer.WriteLine(" Output Curve "); writer.WriteLine(" Phi = " + Phi_Name + " (" + Phi_Units + ")"); writer.WriteLine(" Vcl = " + Vcl_Name + " (" + Vcl_Units + ")"); writer.WriteLine(" Sw = " + Sw_Name + " (" + Sw_Units + ")"); writer.WriteLine(" Rwapp = " + Rwapp_Name + " (" + Rwapp_Units + ")"); writer.WriteLine(" BVW = " + BVW_Name + " (" + BVW_Units + ")"); writer.WriteLine(" NetPay = " + NetPayFlg_Name); writer.WriteLine(" NetRes = " + NetResFlg_Name); for ( i = 1 ; i <= TotalZones ; i++ ) { // Set the zone number so we can get the parameters for each zone SetZone(i); writer.WriteLine(); writer.WriteLine(" Input Parameters "); writer.WriteLine(" a = " + xa(1)); writer.WriteLine(" m = " + xm(1)); writer.WriteLine(" n = " + xn(1)); writer.WriteLine(" Rw = " + Rw(1)); writer.WriteLine(" Sw Eq = " + SwEq); writer.WriteLine(" Son Matrix = " + SonMat(1)); writer.WriteLine(" Son Fluid = " + SonFluid(1));

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

User Programs

Senergy

1964

writer.WriteLine(" Son CP = " + SonCp(1)); writer.WriteLine(" Son Clay = " + SonClay(1)); writer.WriteLine(" Den Matrix = " + DenMat(1)); writer.WriteLine(" Den Fluid = " + DenFluid(1)); writer.WriteLine(" Por Eq = " + PorEq); writer.WriteLine(" Den Clay = " + DenClay(1)); writer.WriteLine(" Gr Clean = " + GrClean(1)); writer.WriteLine(" Gr Clay = " + GrClay(1)); writer.WriteLine(" Depth Interval"); writer.WriteLine(" Top = " + Depth(TopDepth) + " Bottom = " + Depth(BottomDepth)); } } // // Write to database who created these curves Save_Sw_Comments("Curve written by Interp Demo user program"); Save_Rwapp_Comments("Curve written by Interp Demo user program"); Save_Phi_Comments("Curve written by Interp Demo user program"); Save_Vcl_Comments("Curve written by Interp Demo user program"); Save_BVW_Comments("Curve written by Interp Demo user program"); Save_NetResFlg_Comments("Curve written by Interp Demo user program"); Save_NetPayFlg_Comments("Curve written by Interp Demo user program"); //Write_Well_Attribute("Location", "IP Test Location"); //string RwString = Read_Log_Attribute("Rw", 1); //Write_Log_Attribute("Rw", RwString, 2);

} // show any errors catch (Exception e) { MessageBox.Show("Error occurred: " + e.ToString()); } finally { // close the report file if (writer != null) { writer.Flush(); writer.Close(); } } } // // // Calculate the Pickett plot line end points // void CalculatePickett() { //

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

1965

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

float Phi1, Phi2, Ro1, Ro2, xmc, Rwc; // // Calculate m amd Rw from end point lines Phi1 = PPphi1(-1); Phi2 = PPphi2(-1); Ro1 = PPres1(-1); Ro2 = PPres2(-1); if (Phi1 != Phi2) { xmc = ( (Single)Math.Log10(Math.Max(Ro1,0.01f)) - (Single)Math. Log10(Math.Max(Ro2,0.01f)) ) / ( (Single)Math.Log10(Math.Max(Phi2,0.001f)) - (Single)Math. Log10(Math.Max(Phi1,0.001f)) ); } else { xmc = xm(-1); } Rwc = Ro1 * (Single)Math.Pow(Phi1,xmc) / xa(-1); Rwc = Math.Max(0.0001f,Math.Min(Rwc,100.0f)); // // Check to see if the values calculated are the default values // If they are then assume that the pickett plot is not open and in use // and therefore assume that the values to use for m and Rw are the input normal parameters // if ( ( Math.Abs(Rwc-Rwpick(-1)) < 0.001f) && ( Math.Abs(xmc-Mpick(-1)) < 0.01f) ) { Rwc = Rw(-1); Save_Rwpick(-1,Rwc); xmc = xm(-1); Save_Mpick(-1,xmc); // Recalculate the line using the parameter values of m and Rw and save Ro1 = xa(-1) * Rwc * (Single)Math.Pow(Phi1,-xmc); Ro2 = xa(-1) * Rwc * (Single)Math.Pow(Phi2,-xmc); Save_PPres1(-1,Ro1); Save_PPres2(-1,Ro2); } else { // New values of m and Rw save these and also the pickett defaults Save_Rw(-1,Rwc); Save_xm(-1,xmc); Save_Rwpick(-1,Rwc); Save_Mpick(-1,xmc); } // } //

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

User Programs

Senergy

1966

// }

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The user 'Runtime Window' looks like the following:

The 'Load / Save Parameter Sets' button allows the user to manage the Parameter Sets. See Parameter Set Management. The working Parameter Set for this user module will be : ' UsrProgInterp_Demo' and type 'UPInterp_Demo'. This can be seen in the Manage Zones / Tops module.

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

1967

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

The 'Zones' tab allows the user to create and edit the interpretation zones. This can also be done on the interactive plot. Clicking the 'New zone' button will display the following window.

To add a new zone, the user selects one of the old zones from the window. The user must click on one of the three buttons 'Add Before', 'Add After', or 'Split Zone'. For the 'Split Zone' the user must give the depth to split this zone. The 'Copy Zone #' box is used to select which zone to copy the parameters from for the new zone to be created. Once a new zone has been created, the user must select its depths in the parameter window in

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

User Programs

Senergy

1968

the 'Zone Depths' tab. Zones cannot overlap, but one can have a gap between zones. The 'Delete Zone' button allows the deletion of one or more zones. Select the zones to delete, and click OK.

The 'Parameters' tab allows the user to change any of the input parameters. Column edits are possible by clicking in a column header. The header will turn green and then any changes to any parameter in the column will result in all the parameters in the column having the same value. Clicking on the 'Print' button will display the following pop-up menu where the parameter listing can be set to a text file or direct to a printer. If set to a text file the file name used will be the ' Parameter set name' with an extension of '.txt'.

An example of a listing is displayed below: USER PROGRAM INTERP_DEMO PARAMETERS Well : Date :

B1 10/17/2008 11:35:02

Input Curves Rt

: RDEEP

Gamma Ray

: GR

Density

: RHOB

Sonic

: DT

Output Curves

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

1969

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Porosity

: UPTest:Phi

Vclay

: UPTest:Vcl

Sw

: UPTest:Sw

Rw App

: UPTest:RwApp

BVW

: UPTest:BVW

Net Pay Flag

: UPTest:NetPay

Net Res Flag

: UPTest:NetRes

Zone number 1 Top : 2780.00 Zones Parameters Clay Volume Parameters GR Clean : 10.

Bottom :

3142.04

GR Clay

: 100.

Water Saturation Parameters Sw Eq : Archie

'a'

: 1.

'm'

: 1.28386

'n'

: 2.

Rw

: 0.2294

Res Clay

: 1.

m_? Shell : Off Porosity Parameters Phi Eq : Density

Son Matrix

: 55.7

Son Fluid

: 189.

Son CP

: 1.

Son Clay

: 100.

Den Fluid

: 1.

Den Clay

: 2.7

Den Mat

: 2.65

Cutoffs Parameters Phi Cutoff : 0.1

Sw Cutoff

: 0.5

Vcl Cuttoff : 0.4 Summation Parameters Net Pay : 83.

Av_Phi Pay

: 0.1887

Av_Sw Pay

: 0.47377

Av_Vcl Pay

: 0.12999

Net Res

: 448.

Av_Phi Res

: 0.14777

Av_Sw Res

: 0.78591

Av_Vcl Res

: 0.1652

Hide Parameters PickPlt Phi1 : 0.01

PickPlt Phi2

: 0.4

PickPlt Res1

: 84.78302

PickPlt Res2

: 0.74385

PickPlt m

: 1.28386

PickPlt Rw

: 0.2294

'Clicking' on the 'Make Plot' button will bring up the plot that has been set up with any interactive lines. Right-mouse button 'clicking' in the tracks will display a sub-menu listing the options

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

User Programs

Senergy

available for the specific track such as displaying crossplots or histograms of curves.

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

1970

1971

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Every time the routine is run the text file created in the code will be output. The default directory will be the actual user program directory. In this case the 'C:\Documents and Settings\\Local Settings\Application Data\IntPetro35 \UserPrograms\Interp_Demo' directory. The following is the result of this file:

From FORTRAN program USER PROGRAM INTERP PARAMETERS Well : MinSolve Test Company : PGL Field : Somewhere KB Elev : 60ft Input Curves Rt = ILDC (OHMM Gr = SGR (GAPI Den = RHOB (G/C3 Son = DTLN (US/F Output Curve Phi = UPTest:Phi(dec Vcl = UPTest:Vcl(dec Sw = UPTest:Sw (dec Rwapp = UPTest:RwA(ohmm

) ) ) ) ) ) ) )

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

User Programs

Senergy BVW = UPTest:BVW(dec NetPay = UPTest:Net NetRes = UPTest:Net Input Parameters a = 1. m = 2. n = 2. Rw = 0.0885000005 Sw Eq = Archie Son Matrix = 55.7000008 Son Fluid = 189. Son CP = 1. Son Clay = 100. Den Matrix = 2.6500001 Den Fluid = 1. Por Eq = Density Den Clay = 2.70000005 Gr Clean = 10. Gr Clay = 100. Depth Interval Top = 7614. Bottom =

)

8738.

From Pascal program USER PROGRAM INTERP DEMO PARAMETERS Well : MinSolve Test Company : PGL Field : Somewhere KB Elev : 60ft Input Curves Rt = ILDC(OHMM) Gr = SGR(GAPI) Den = RHOB(G/C3) Son = DTLN(US/F) Output Curve Phi = UPTest:Phi(dec) Vcl = UPTest:Vcl(dec) Sw = UPTest:Sw(dec) Rwapp = UPTest:RwApp(ohmm) BVW = UPTest:BVW(dec) NetPay = UPTest:NetPay NetRes = UPTest:NetRes Input Parameters a = 1.000 m = 1.284 n = 2.000 Rw = 0.229 Sw Eq = Archie Son Matrix = 55.700 Son Fluid = 189.000 Son CP = 1.000 Son Clay = 100.000 Den Matrix = 2.650

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

1972

1973

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Den Fluid = 1.000 Por Eq = Density Den Clay = 2.700 Gr Clean = 10.000 Gr Clay = 100.000 Depth Interval Top = 7614.000 Bottom = 8738.000

From C++ program USER PROGRAM INTERP PARAMETERS Well Company Field KB Elev

: : : :

MinSolve Test PGL Somewhere 60ft

Input Curves Rt = ILDC (OHMM) Gr = SGR (GAPI) Den = RHOB (G/C3) Son = DTLN (US/F) Output Curves Phi = UPTest:Phi (dec) Vcl = UPTest:Vcl (dec) Sw = UPTest:Sw (dec) Rwapp = UPTest:RwApp (ohmm) BVW = UPTest:BVW (dec) NetPay = UPTest:Phi NetRes = UPTest:Phi Input Parameters a = 1.000000 m = 1.283862 n = 2.000000 Rw = 0.229396 Sw Eq = Indonesian Son Matrix = 55.700001 Son Fluid = 189.000000 Son CP = 1.000000 Son Clay = 100.000000 Den Matrix = 2.650000 Den Fluid = 1.000000 Por Eq = Density Den Clay = 2.700000 Gr Clean = 10.000000 Gr Clay = 100.000000 Depth Interval Top = 7773.500000

Bottom = 8738.000000

From VB .NET program

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

Senergy

User Programs

Senergy USER PROGRAM INTERP PARAMETERS Well Company Field KB Elev

: : : :

MinSolve Test PGL Somewhere 60ft

Input Curves Rt Gr Den Son Output Curves Phi Vcl Sw BVW Rwapp NetPay Flg NetRes Flg

= = = =

ILDC (OHMM) SGR (GAPI) RHOB (G/C3) DTLN (US/F)

= = = = = = =

UPTest:Phi (dec) UPTest:Vcl (dec) UPTest:Sw (dec) UPTest:BVW (dec) UPTest:RwApp (ohmm) UPTest:NetPay UPTest:NetRes

Input Parameters a = 01.0000 m = 01.2839 n = 02.0000 Rw = 00.2294 Sw Eq = Indonesian Son Matrix = 55.7000 Son Fluid = 189.0000 Son CP = 01.0000 Son Clay = 100.0000 Den Matrix = 02.6500 Den Fluid = 01.0000 Por Eq = Sonic Den Clay = 02.7000 Gr Clean = 10.0000 Gr Clay = 100.0000 Depth Interval Top = 7614.0000 Bottom = 8738.0000

From C# .NET program USER PROGRAM INTERP PARAMETERS Well Company Field KB Elev

: : : :

MinSolve Test PGL Somewhere 60ft

Input Curves Rt = ILDC (OHMM) Gr = SGR (GAPI) Den = RHOB (G/C3)

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

1974

1975

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Son = DTLN (US/F) Output Curve Phi = UPTest:Phi (dec) Vcl = UPTest:Vcl (dec) Sw = UPTest:Sw (dec) Rwapp = UPTest:RwApp (ohmm) BVW = UPTest:BVW (dec) NetPay = UPTest:NetPay NetRes = UPTest:NetRes Input Parameters a = 1 m = 2 n = 2 Rw = 0.0885 Sw Eq = Archie Son Matrix = 55.7 Son Fluid = 189 Son CP = 1 Son Clay = 100 Den Matrix = 2.65 Den Fluid = 1 Por Eq = Density Den Clay = 2.7 Gr Clean = 10 Gr Clay = 100 Depth Interval Top = 7780

Bottom = 8738

The differences between the listing is associated with how the languages handle strings.

Related Topics User Programs Example User Program 1: Interp-Demo Example User Program 2: Differentiate Example User Program 3: Normalize Array Example User Program 4: Manage Well Header Info

16.5.2 Example User Program 2: Differentiate The following example shows a user program created to find the 'first-derivative' of a curve. This example shows how a curve can be accessed at multiple levels at the same time. The nonzonable option is being used ('Use Zones' box not 'checked').

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

User Programs

Senergy

1976

The input curve to differentiate is called 'Curve' in the code. No 'Input Parameters' or 'Logic Flags' are used, so these tabs are left blank.

The 'Output Curve' is called 'Diff' in the code and no display defaults have been set for it. The code for the program in Fortran is as follows. The code the user has to write is highlighted in bold, blue colour. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------c c User Code for Fortran 77 c SUBROUTINE UserCode() IMPLICIT INTEGER (I-N)

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

1977

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

INCLUDE 'InOutDef.INC' c c All user defined input parameters and logic flags are treated as functions. c As such they must be used with a () at the end of their name. c For example: Input parameter RW is used in an equation as RW(); AA = RW() + 2. c c Input curves are used in equations as functions. c Vclay = (GR(INDEX) - GRclean()) / (GRclay() - GRclean()) c INDEX is the integer index into the curve array. GRclay and GRclean are c defined c as input parameters. GR is the input curve. c Input curve DEPTH is always available and does not have to be defined as an c input curve. c c Data is saved by using the SAVE_***(INDEX, VALUE) procedure. Where *** is the c output curve name. VALUE is the value to store at INDEX. c CALL SAVE_VCL(INDEX, 0.5) saves value 0.5 into the output curve VCL. c c Loop through the data one level at a time c Index_Topdepth and Index_BottomDepth are the index equivalent depths entered on c the run window. C DO 100 INDEX = Index_Topdepth()+1 , Index_BottomDepth() c c write user code here c c Check for curve equal to zero if (Curve(index-1) .eq. 0.0) then Call Save_Diff(index,-999.0) else c Calculate the first derivative Der = Curve(index) / Curve(index-1) Call Save_Diff(index,Der); endif 100 CONTINUE c RETURN c END

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The same code in Pascal. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------unit UsersCode;

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

User Programs

Senergy

1978

interface uses Functions, Math; Procedure UserCode; stdcall; implementation {User Code} Procedure UserCode; stdcall; Var index : Integer; begin for index := Topdepth+1 to BottomDepth do begin {enter user code here} {check for curve equal to zero} if Curve(index-1) = 0.0 then Save_Diff(index,-999) else {Calculate the first derivative} Save_Diff(index,Curve(index)/Curve(index-1)); end; end; end.

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The same code in C++ ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------#include #include #include #include #include

"Functions.h"

extern __declspec (dllexport) {

void usercode_()

int index; char *aString; char *aUnits; char aName[150]; FILE *Outfile; for ( index = TopDepth() ; index < BottomDepth()-5 ; index++ ) { //ENTER USER CODE HERE //check for curve equal to zero if ( Curve(index-1) == 0 ) {

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

1979

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help Save_Diff(index,-999); } else { //Calculate the first derivative Save_Diff(index,Curve(index)/Curve(index-1));

Senergy

}

//END OF USER CODE }

//Write to database who created these curves aString = InitString( MAX_STRING_1 ); sprintf(aString, "Curve written by User Program"); Save_Curve_Comments( aString ); Save_Diff_Comments( aString ); free( aString ); }

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The same code in VB ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Partial Public Class IPLink Public Sub UserCode() Dim index As Integer For index = Topdepth + 1 To BottomDepth ' Enter user code here ' Check for curve equal to zero If Curve(index - 1) = 0.0 Then Save_Diff(index, -999) Else ' Calculate the first derivative Save_Diff(index, Curve(index) / Curve(index - 1)) End If Next Save_Diff_Comments("Curve Written by User Program") End Sub End Class

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The same code for C# ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------using System;

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

User Programs

Senergy

1980

public partial class IPLink { public void UserCode() { for (int index = Topdepth + 1; index <= BottomDepth; index++) { // Enter user code here // Check for curve equal to zero if (Curve(index - 1) = 0.0) { Save_Diff(index, -999); } else { // Calculate the first derivative Save_Diff(index, Curve(index) / Curve(index - 1)); } } Save_Diff_Comments("Curve Written by User Program"); } }

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The user runtime window looks like the following:

The 'Save Parameters' and 'Load Parameters' buttons allow the parameters and curve names to be stored and reloaded at a later time.

Related Topics User Programs Example User Program 1: Interp-Demo Example User Program 2: Differentiate Example User Program 3: Normalize Array

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

1981

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

Example User Program 4: Manage Well Header Info

16.5.3 Example User Program 3: Normalize Array This user program example takes an array input curve and normalizes the values in it to lie between 0 and 1 and output the results to a new array curve. The non-zonable option is being used. One input curve is created.

One 'Output Curve' is created and is set as an array curve of size 12 x 60 elements for each normal depth sample. This output array is the same size as the input array that will be normalized.

The code for the program in Fortran is as follows. The code the user has to write is highlighted in

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

User Programs

Senergy

1982

bold, blue colour. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------c c User Code for Fortran 77 c SUBROUTINE UserCode() IMPLICIT INTEGER (I-N) INCLUDE 'InOutDef.INC' c c All user defined input parameters and logic flags are treated as functions. c As such they must be used with a () at the end of their name. c For example: Input parameter RW is used in an equation as RW(); AA = RW() + 2. c c Input curves are used in equations as functions. c Vclay = (GR(INDEX) - GRclean()) / (GRclay() - GRclean()) c INDEX is the integer index into the curve array. GRclay and GRclean are defined c as input parameters. GR is the input curve. c Input curve DEPTH is always available and does not have to be defined as an input curve. c c Data is saved by using the SAVE_***(INDEX, VALUE) procedure. Where *** is the c output curve name. VALUE is the value to store at INDEX. c CALL SAVE_VCL(INDEX, 0.5) saves value 0.5 into the output curve VCL. c c Loop through the data one level at a time c Index_Topdepth and Index_BottomDepth are the index equivalent depths entered on the run window. C c c write user code here c find max and min values in array data ValMax = -0.0000001 ValMin = 9999999999999.9 DO INDEX = Index_Topdepth() , Index_BottomDepth() Do IX = 1, Array_InCrv_MaxX() Do IY = 1, Array_InCrv_MaxY() R = Array_InCrv(Index,Ix,Iy) if (R .lt. ValMin .and. R .ne. -999.0) c ValMin = R if (R .gt. ValMax .and. R .ne. -999.0) c ValMax = R enddo enddo enddo c calculate the gain and shift to normalize gain = 1.0 / (Valmax - Valmin) shift = - gain * Valmin c output new array with normalized values DO INDEX = Index_Topdepth() , Index_BottomDepth() Do IX = 1, Array_InCrv_MaxX() Do IY = 1, Array_InCrv_MaxY()

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

1983

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

R = Array_InCrv(Index,Ix,Iy) * Gain + shift call Save_array_OutCrv(Index,Ix,Iy,R) enddo enddo enddo c Call Save_OutCrv_Comments('Updated by Fortran User Program Array'); RETURN c END

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The same routine, written in Pascal follows. Again, the bold, blue script is what the user enters. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------nit UsersCode; interface uses Functions, Math; Procedure UserCode; stdcall; implementation {User Code} Procedure UserCode; stdcall; Var index, Ix, IY : Integer; gain, shift, R, valmin, valmax : Single; begin {enter user code here} {find max and min values in array data} ValMax := -0.0000001; ValMin := 9999999999999.9; for index := Topdepth to BottomDepth do begin for IX := 1 to Array_InCrv_MaxX do begin for IY := 1 to Array_InCrv_MaxY do begin R := Array_InCrv(Index,Ix,Iy); if (R < ValMin) and (R <> -999.0) then ValMin := R; if (R > ValMax) and (R <> -999.0) then ValMax := R; end; end; end; {calculate the gain and shift to normalize} gain := 1.0 / (Valmax - Valmin); shift := - gain * Valmin; {output new array with normalized values} for index := Topdepth to BottomDepth do begin for IX := 1 to Array_InCrv_MaxX do begin for IY := 1 to Array_InCrv_MaxY do begin

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

User Programs

Senergy

R := Array_InCrv(Index,Ix,Iy) * Gain + shift; Save_array_OutCrv(Index,Ix,Iy,R); end; end; end; Save_OutCrv_Comments('Updated by Normalize Array User Prog'); end; end.

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The same routine, written in C follows. Again the bold, blue code is what the user enters. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------#include #include #include #include #include

"Functions.h"

extern __declspec (dllexport) {

void usercode_()

int index, IX, IY; float gain, shift, R, ValMin, ValMax; char *aString; char *aUnits; //ENTER USER CODE HERE //find ValMax ValMin for

max and min values in array data = -0.0000001; = 9999999999999.9; (index = TopDepth(); index < BottomDepth(); index++) { for (IX = 1; IX < Array_InCrv_MaxX(); IX++) { for (IY = 1; IX < Array_InCrv_MaxY(); IX++) { R = Array_InCrv(index,IX,IY); if ((R < ValMin) && (R != -999.0)) ValMin = R; if ((R > ValMax) && (R != -999.0)) ValMax = R; } }

} //Calculate the gain and shift to normalize gain = 1.0 / (ValMax - ValMin); shift = - gain * ValMin; //output new array with normalized values for (index = TopDepth(); index < BottomDepth(); index++) {

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

1984

1985

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help for (IX = 1; IX < Array_InCrv_MaxX(); IX++) { for (IY = 1; IY < Array_InCrv_MaxY(); IY++) { R = Array_InCrv(index,IX,IY) * gain + shift; Save_Array_OutCrv(index,IX,IY,R); } } }

//END OF USER CODE //Write to database who created these curves aString = InitString( MAX_STRING_1 ); sprintf(aString, "Updated by Normalize Array User Prog C++"); Save_OutCrv_Comments( aString ); free( aString ); }

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The same routine, written in VB follows. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Partial Public Class IPLink Public Sub UserCode() Dim index, Ix, IY As Integer Dim gain, shift, R, valMin, valMax As Single ' Enter user code here ' Find max and min values in array data valMax = -0.0000001 valMin = 9999999999999.9 For index = Topdepth To BottomDepth For IX = 1 To Array_InCrv_MaxX For IY = 1 To Array_InCrv_MaxY R = Array_InCrv(Index, Ix, Iy) If (R < ValMin) And (R <> -999.0) Then ValMin = R End If If (R > ValMax) And (R <> -999.0) Then ValMax = R End If Next Next Next ' Calculate the gain and shift to normalize gain = 1.0 / (Valmax - Valmin) shift = -gain * Valmin ' Output new array with normalized values

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

Senergy

User Programs

Senergy

For index = Topdepth To BottomDepth For IX = 1 To Array_InCrv_MaxX For IY = 1 To Array_InCrv_MaxY R = Array_InCrv(Index, Ix, Iy) * Gain + shift Save_array_OutCrv(Index, Ix, Iy, R) Next Next Next Save_OutCrv_Comments("Updated by Normalize Array User Prog") End Sub End Class

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The same routine, written in C# follows. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------using System;

public partial class IPLink { public void UserCode() { int index, ix, iy; Single gain, shift, R, valMin, valMax; // Enter user code here // Find max and min values in array data valMax = -0.0000001f; valMin = 9999999999999.9f; for (index = TopDepth; index <= BottomDepth; index++) { for (ix = 1; ix <= Array_InCrv_MaxX; ix++) { for (iy = 1; iy <= Array_InCrv_MaxY; iy++) { R = Array_InCrv(index, ix, iy); if ((R < valMin) && (R != -999.0)) { valMin = R; } if ((R > valMax) && (R != -999.0)) { valMax = R; } } }

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

1986

1987

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Senergy

} // Calculate the gain and shift to normalize gain = (Single)1.0 / (valMax - valMin); shift = -gain * valMin; // Output new array with normalized values for (index = TopDepth; index <= BottomDepth; index++) { for (ix = 1; ix <= Array_InCrv_MaxX; ix++) { for (iy = 1; iy <= Array_InCrv_MaxY; iy++) { R = Array_InCrv(index, ix, iy) * gain + shift; Save_Array_OutCrv(index, ix, iy, R); } } } Save_OutCrv_Comments("Updated by Normalize Array User Prog"); } }

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The user runtime window looks like the following:

A curve listing of the input and output data shows that the input array has values between '-600' and '1200'. The output 'normalized array' has values between '0' and '1'.

Related Topics User Programs Example User Program 1: Interp-Demo Example User Program 2: Differentiate Example User Program 3: Normalize Array Example User Program 4: Manage Well Header Info

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

User Programs

Senergy

1988

16.5.4 Example User Program 4: Manage Well Header Info This example shows how to write a user program that can fill in the 'Manage Well Header Info' fields. Create a new user program - in this case it is called 'Testing'. The code for the program in Fortran is as follows. The code the user has to write is highlighted in bold, blue colour. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------c c User Code for Fortran 77 c SUBROUTINE UserCode() IMPLICIT INTEGER (I-N) INCLUDE 'InOutDef.INC' c c All user defined input parameters and logic flags are treated as functions. c As such they must be used with a () at the end of their name. c For example: Input parameter RW is used in an equation as RW(); AA = RW() + 2. c To use trend curves as input parameters the depth INDEX must also be passed into the function. c RW(INDEX), AA = RW(INDEX) + 2. c c Input curves are used in equations as functions. c Vclay = (GR(INDEX) - GRclean(INDEX)) / (GRclay(INDEX) - GRclean(INDEX)) c INDEX is the integer index into the curve array. GRclay and GRclean are defined c as input parameters. GR is the input curve. If GRclean is enterd by the use as a fixed value c then the INDEX parameter in GRclean(INDEX) is ignored. c Input curve DEPTH is always available and does not have to be defined as an input curve. c c Data is saved by using the SAVE_***(INDEX, VALUE) procedure. Where *** is the c output curve name. VALUE is the value to store at INDEX. c CALL SAVE_VCL(INDEX, 0.5) saves value 0.5 into the output curve VCL. c c Loop through the data one level at a time c Index_Topdepth and Index_BottomDepth are the index equivalent depths entered on the run window. C c c write user code here CHARACTER*(120) CountryAttName CHARACTER*(120)

StateAttName

CHARACTER*(120)

DrillDepAttName

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

1989

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

CHARACTER*(120)

LogDepAttName

CHARACTER*(120)

BitSizeAttName

CHARACTER*(120)

Value

Senergy

CountryAttName = 'Country' // CHAR(0) StateAttName = 'State' // CHAR(0) DrillDepAttName = 'DrillDep' // CHAR(0) LogDepAttName = 'LogDep' // CHAR(0) BitSizeAttName = 'BitSize' // CHAR(0) Value = 'USA' // CHAR(0) CALL

Write_Well_Attribute(CountryAttName , Value)

Value = 'TX' // CHAR(0) CALL

Write_Well_Attribute(StateAttName, Value)

Value = '5640' // CHAR(0) CALL Write_Log_Attribute(DrillDepAttName, Value, 3); Value = '4500' // CHAR(0) CALL Write_Log_Attribute(LogDepAttName, Value, FIRST_AVAILABLE_LOG_RUN); Value = '6.7' // CHAR(0) CALL Write_Log_Attribute(BitSizeAttName, Value, LAST_AVAILABLE_LOG_RUN);

100 CONTINUE c RETURN c END

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Once the program has been compiled run the 'Testing' user program and then open the 'Manage Well Header Info' to check that the correct fields have been filled in. NOTE: the 'Bit Size' field has been filled in for Run 25 as this is the last available log run. It hasn't been shown on the screenshot below due to space constraints.

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

User Programs

Senergy

Related Topics

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

1990

1991

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

User Programs Example User Program 1: Interp-Demo Example User Program 2: Differentiate Example User Program 3: Normalize Array Example User Program 4: Manage Well Header Info

Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs

Senergy

Index

Index -33D Crossplots 632 3D Parameter Viewer - 3D Parameter Display 671 3D Parameter Viewer - 3D View Definition 669 3D Parameter Viewer - Parameter Selection 667 3D Parameter Viewer - Well Selection 666 3D Parameter Viewer Module 664

-AAcoustic Image 413 Acoustic Image Plotting 491 Alphanumeric Crossplot Display 633 Annotations - Adding To A Log Plot 501 Apache Server Installation 1714 Array Curve Data 11, 13 Array Image Data - Array Data to Curves 412 Array Image Data - Convert Curves to Array Data 410 Array image Data - Create Acoustic Image 413 Array image Data - Create Electrical Image 416 Array image Data - Merge Images 424 Array Image Data Processing 410 Array Image Plotting 491 ASCII File Input 207 ASCII File Load 207 ASCII Load - Creating Array Curves 214 ASCII Load Module 212 ASCII Write 293 ASCII Write Module 293 Auto Save Module 37 Auto Update of Analysis Modules 1020 Automatic Depth Shift 370

-BBaker Atlas Environmental Corrections 1691 Baker Hughes Inteq Environmental Corrections 1700 Barker and Wood Fracture Gradient Model 1313, 1354 Baseline Shift 349

1992

Basic Log Analysis 735 Basic Log Analysis Functions 1628 Batch LAS Load 250 Block Shift Curves 356 Build a Montage 711 BVW Function of Height 1433

-CCalculate Permeabilities 1628 Calculation - Basic Log Functions 1628 Calculation - Curve from Zones / Parameters 1670 Calculation - Curve Integration 1673 Calculation - Eastern European Resistivity Corrections 1444 Calculation - Environmental Corrections 1676 Calculation - Multi-Well Batch Operations 1553 Calculation - Multi-Well Change Parameters 1536 Calculation - Multi-Well Parameter Distribution 1542 Calculation - RW From SP 1652 Calculation - Temperature Gradient 1650 Calculation - True Vertical / True Stratigraphic Thickness 1665 Calculation - True Vertical Depth 1654 Calculation - User Formula 1608 Calculation and Correction 1606 Capillary Pressure - Contact Angle 1363 Capillary Pressure - Correction Parameters 1363 Capillary Pressure - Corrections to Pc Curves 1363 Capillary Pressure - Curves Set-Up 1363 Capillary Pressure - Data View / Edit 1363 Capillary Pressure - Interfacial Tension 1363 Capillary Pressure - Reservoir and Laboratory Fluid Properties 1363 Capillary Pressure - Reservoir and Laboratory Rock Properties 1363 Capillary Pressure - Reservoir Property Defaults 1363 Capillary Pressure Data Loader 264 Capillary Pressure Functions 1362, 1392 Capillary Pressure Model 1392 Capillary Pressure Model Type 1392 Capillary Pressure QC 1362 Capillary Pressure Set-Up and Correction Module 1363 Cased Hole - TDT Stand Alone 996 Cased Hole - TDT Time Lapse 1015 Cased Hole Log Interpretation 995 Cdit Curve Headers 150

1993

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Change Interpretation Parameters in Multiple Wells 1536 Change Plot Depth Range 106 Clay Volume 733, 749 Clay Volume - Clavier Method 772 Clay Volume Equations and Methodology 772 Clay Volume - Larionov Method 772 Clay Volume - Parameters 754 Clay Volume - Stieber Method 772 Clay Volume Interactive Plot 767 Clay Volume Module 749 Clay Volume Parameters - Bad Hole Logic 754 Clay Volume Parameters - Double Clay Indicators 754 Clay Volume Parameters - Link Clay Parameters 754 Clay Volume Parameters - Single Clay Indicators 754 Close Well 84 Cluster Analysis 1201 Common Database Connection Tasks 1716 Connecting to External Databases 1714 Convert Array Data to Curves 410 Convert Arrays to Curves 412 Convert Curves to Array Data 410 Convert Curves to Arrays 411 Convert surface oil and gas to downhole conditions 1628, 1642 Copying any Set Type 161 Copying Top Sets 172 Core Depth Shift 356 Create / Edit Lithology Curve Module 334 Create / Edit Point Curve Module 341 Create Acoustic Image 410 Create Acoustic Image Module 413 Create Average Curve 395 Create Curve / Array Curve Module 330 Create Curves From Parameters 1670 Create Curves From Zones 1670 Create Electrical Image 410 Create Electrical Image Module 416 Create Global Sets 1791 Create Integrated Hole Volume Curve 1673 Create Integrated Sonic Curve 1673 Create Integrated Sonic Pip Curve 1673 Create New Curve 190, 404 Create New Well 71 Create Point Curve 341

Creating TVD Sets 168 Creating Well Lists 69 Crossplot - 3D Crossplots 632 Crossplot - Color-Filled Cells 633 Crossplot - Creating Crossplot Areas 605 Crossplot - Creating Crossplot Overlay Lines 608 Crossplot - Creating Regression Lines 616 Crossplot - Crossplot Options Tab 593 Crossplot - Default Crossplot Formats 595 Crossplot - Expand Array Curves Option 589 Crossplot - Frequency Crossplot 589 Crossplot - Frequency Crossplot Module 633 Crossplot - MultiWell Crossplot 649 Crossplot - Plotting Pressures 637 Crossplot - Pressure Gradient Plots 637 Crossplot - User-Defined Line 624 Crossplot - Viewing Regression Line Equations 616 Crossplot Module 584 Crossplot Overlay Set Up 1822 Crossplot Overlay Set Up File 1833 Cumulative Curve Style 456 Curve Alias Defaults 1829 Curve Aliasing 1806 Curve and Set Names 132 Curve Average Module 395 Curve Edit 345 Curve Filter Module 393 Curve from Zones / Parameters Module 1670 Curve Headers 150 Curve Integration Module 1673 Curve List Filtering 132 Curve Listing / Curve Edit Module 137 Curve Management 115 Curve Management - Edit / List Multi-Well Sets 1521 Curve Management - Manage Curve Headers 150 Curve Management - Manage Curve Sets 116 Curve Management - Manage Zones / Tops 161 Curve Normalization in Histogram Module 574 Curve Rescale Module 392 Curve Sets - Database Interface 13 Curve Sets - Manage Curve Sets 116 Curve Statistics 145, 1562 Curve System Defaults 1822, 1825 Curve Type 153 Curve Type Defaults 1822, 1827 Curves Splice 384 Curves to Array Data Module 411

Index

Index Cutoff and Summation 733 Cutoff and Summation Module 889 Cutoff and Summation Reports 895 Cutoff and Summations Equations and Methodology 925 Cutoff and Summations Interactive Plot 922 Cutoff and Summations Parameters 899 Cutoff Sensitivity 931 Cutoff Sensitivity Calculation 931 Cutoff Sensitivity Report 933 Cutoffs and Summation Multi-well 1589

-DDaines Fracture Gradient model 1326 Data Editing 327 Data Editing - Create / Edit Lithology Curve 334 Data Editing - Create / Edit Point Curve 341 Data Editing - Create Curve / Array Curve 330 Data Editing - Curve Average 395 Data Editing - Curve Filter 393 Data Editing - Curve Rescale 392 Data Editing - Fill Data Gaps 390 Data Editing - Interactive Baseline Shift 349 Data Editing - Interactive Block Depth Shift 375 Data Editing - Interactive Curve Edit 345 Data Editing - Interactive Curve Splice 379 Data Editing - Interactive Depth Shift 356 Data Editing - Interactive Trend / Square Curve 352 Data Editing - Splice Curves 384 Data Gaps 390 Data Listing 137 Data Loading 203 Data Loading - ASCII Load Module 207 Data Loading - DBase4 Load 248 Data Loading - DLIS Load 236 Data Loading - Interval Loader 257 Data Loading - LAS / LBS Load 218 Data Loading - LAS Batch Load 250 Data Loading - LIS Load 228 Data Loading - Load Well Attributes 271 Data Loading - Real Time Data Loader 279 Data Loading - Schlumberger Datalink2 Connector 279 Data Loading - WITSML Data Loader 279 Data Saving 291 Data Saving - ASCII Write 293 Data Saving - DBase4 Write 321

1994

Data Saving - LAS Write 300 Data Saving - LIS Write 307 Data Saving - Save Zone Tops 323 Data Viewing 428 Database Interface 11 DataLink2 Adapters 279 Date 42, 45, 48, 53, 56, 59, 61 Date Time Curves 42, 45, 48, 53, 56, 59, 61 Date Time Wells 42, 45, 48, 53, 56, 59, 61 DBase4 Load Module 248 DBase4 Write Module 321 Default Curve Units 1818 Default Log and Screen Units 1818 Default Units 1818 Delete Parameter Sets 104 Delete Parameter Sets Module 730 Delete Well from Database 86 Deleting Areas on a crossplot 605 Deleting Zone Sets 176 Density Corrections 1679 Density Estimation 1232 Density Estimation Module 1237 Depth Index 473 Depth Sets 140 Depth Shift Curves 356 Depth Shift Wizard 363 Depth Ticks 473 Derivative 1473, 1476, 1478, 1479, 1480, 1481, 1482, 1484, 1485, 1487, 1489, 1490, 1493, 1495, 1496, 1500, 1505, 1507, 1509 Derivative Analyis 1473, 1476, 1478, 1479, 1480, 1481, 1482, 1484, 1485, 1487, 1489, 1490, 1493, 1495, 1496, 1500, 1505, 1507, 1509 Derivatives 1637 Dip Symbols 1796 DLIS File Load 236 DLIS Load Masks 236 Drawdown 1473, 1476, 1478, 1479, 1480, 1481, 1482, 1484, 1485, 1487, 1489, 1490, 1493, 1495, 1496, 1500, 1505, 1507, 1509 Drawdown Analysis 1473, 1476, 1478, 1479, 1480, 1481, 1482, 1484, 1485, 1487, 1489, 1490, 1493, 1495, 1496, 1500, 1505, 1507, 1509

-EEastern European Resisitivity Corrections 1445 Eastern European Resisitivity Corrections - Multiple Lateral Curve Corrections 1449

1995

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Eastern European Resisitivity Corrections - Normal Curve Corrections 1446 Eastern European Resistivity Corrections Module 1444 Eastern European Resistivity Log Correction - Theory 1453 Eaton Fracture Gradient Model 1350 Eaton Pore Pressure Model 1318 Edit / Load Picture Curve Data Module 197, 398 Edit / Load Text Curve Data Module 190, 404 Edit Crossplot Overlay Set Up File 1833 Edit Curve 345 Edit Curve Alias Defaults 1829 Edit Curve Sets 116 Edit Default Lithology Module 1802 Edit Dip Symbols Module 1796 Edit Global Sets Module 1791 Edit Lithology Curve 334 Edit Mineral Solver Mineral System Defaults 1831 Edit Monte Carlo Defaults 1834 Edit Multi-Well Sets 1521 Edit Multi-Well Well Header Information 1517 Edit Neutron Tool Types Set Up File 1836 Edit Palettes Module 1798 Edit Picture Curve Data 197, 398 Edit Picture Curve Headers Module 200, 401 Edit Point Curve 341 Edit Shading Types 1788 Edit Square Curve 352 Edit Text Curve Headers Module 190, 404 Edit Trend Curve 352 Edit Well Header Info 88 Edit Zone Colors Module 1794 Editing a Parameter Set 177 Editing Curve Properties 151 Editing Tops in the Multi-Well Correlation Viewer 684, 1571 Editing Well Properties 89 Electrical Image 416 Electrical Image Plotting 491 Environmental Corrections 1676, 1677, 1679, 1681, 1684 Environmental Corrections - Anadrill 1698 Environmental Corrections - Baker Atlas 1691 Environmental Corrections - Baker Hughes Inteq 1700 Environmental Corrections - Halliburton 1694 Environmental Corrections - Schlumberger 1687 Environmental Corrections - Sperry Sun 1703

Environmental Corrections - Weatherford 1706 Explore Database Folder 29 Exponential Curve Fitting Function 1392 External Database Connections 1716 External Database Links 1714

-FFading Parameter Screens 1872 File - Auto Save 37 File - Delete Well from Database 86 File - Explore Database Folder 29 File - Load Wells from Database 67 File - New Database 20 File - Open Database 23 File - Printer Setup 39 File - Reset Current Well 87 File - Save All Wells to Database 35 File - Save Current Well to Database As 30, 78 File - Set Default File Location 27 File - Well Map 701 File Location 27 Fill Data Gaps Module 390 Filter Curve 393 Final Curves 155 Finding IP Version Number 5 Fitting An External Log Sw Versus Height Function 1442 Fluid Properties 1239 Fluid Substitution 1232 Fluid Substitution Equations and Methodology 1254 Fluid Substitution Module 1239 Formation Test Analysis 1473, 1476, 1478, 1479, 1480, 1481, 1482, 1484, 1485, 1487, 1489, 1490, 1493, 1495, 1496, 1500, 1505, 1507, 1509 Formation Testing 1473, 1476, 1478, 1479, 1480, 1481, 1482, 1484, 1485, 1487, 1489, 1490, 1493, 1495, 1496, 1500, 1505, 1507, 1509 FORTRAN Guide 1922 Fracture Gradient 1313 Fracture Gradient Models 1350 Frequency Crossplot Menu 633 Fuzzy Logic Equations and Methodology 1171 Fuzzy Logic Module 1154

-GGamma Ray Corrections 1677 Gassmann Fluid and Matrix Properties

Index

1243

Index Generate Pip Curve 1673 GEOLOG Database Interface

1749

-HHalliburton Environmental Corrections 1694 Histogram - Cumulative Curve Set 553 Histogram Discriminator Sets 555 Histogram Module 548 Histogram Options 556 Histogram Scales 549 Horizontal Log Plot 544 How to save wells from one project to another project 32 HTTP Connection 1714 Hyperbola Curve Fitting Function 1398

1996

IP Proprietary Security - Update Protection Options 1843 IP Proprietary Security - View Protection Options 1848 IP Proprietary Security System 1837 IP User Forum 5 Irregular Sets 116

-L-

Lambda Curve Fitting Function 1398 LAS / LBS Load Module 218 LAS Batch Load Module 250 LAS Load - Mask Files 253 LAS Write Module 300 LAS3 Load 224 Lateral Resistivity Log Corrections 1446 LBS File Load 218 Leverett J Function Porosity Modifier 1396 LIS Load Module 228 IDEAL Data Link 279 LIS Write Module 307 Image Logs 386, 491 List Curve Headers 150 Import from GEOLOG Database 1749 List Curve Sets 116 Importing Zones / Tops from External Spreadsheet 164 List Multi-Well Sets 1521 Increasing Point Size in Crossplots 589 Listing Core Analysis Array Data 144 Integrate Curve Values 1674 Lithology Curve 334 Integrate Hole Volume 1673 Lithology Legend File 340 Integrate Sonic Curve 1674 Load Core Analysis Data as Arrays 330 Interactive Baseline Shift Module 349 Load Picture Curve Data 197, 398 Interactive Block Depth Shift Module 375 Load Well Attributes 271 Interactive Crossplots 612 Load Well Cultural Data to IP 271 Interactive Curve Edit Module 345 Load Wells from Database 67 Interactive Curve Splice Module 379 Loading ASCII Data to Array Curves 214 Interactive Depth Shift Module 356 Loading ASCII files 207 Interactive Dip Picking 386 Loading Curves from External Database Well 1716 Interactive Trend / Square Curve Module 352 Loading Multiple LAS Files 250 Interpretation - Clay Volume 749 Loading survey data into TVD calculator module 1658 Interpretation - Cutoff and Summation 889 Interpretation - Porosity and Water Saturation 777 Loading Tops From An External Database Well 1719 Interval Loader 257 Locking Zones 759 Interval Loader - Creating Array Curves 257 Log Environmental Corrections 1676 Interval Loader - Loading into Array Curves 257 Log Environmental Corrections Baker Atlas 1691 Interval Loader Module 257 IP Proprietary Security - Install and Activate Protection Log Environmental Corrections - Baker Hughes INTEQ 1700 1839 Log Environmental Corrections - Halliburton 1694 IP Proprietary Security - Transfer Protection 1844 1687 IP Proprietary Security - Uninstall Protection 1844 Log Environmental Corrections - Schlumberger Log Environmental Corrections - Sperry Sun 1703

-I-

1997

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Log Environmental Corrections - Weatherford/Reeves 1706 Log Plot - Annotations 501 Log Plot - Change Track Header Colour 453 Log Plot - Copy Depth Value to Clipboard 540 Log Plot - Copy Track 444 Log Plot - Cumulative Curve Style 456 Log Plot - Default Plot Depths 540 Log Plot - Delete Track 444 Log Plot - Depth Grid Datum Curve 452 Log Plot - Depth Grid Line and Number Spacing 452 Log Plot - Depth labels 430, 470, 473 Log Plot - Depth Number Spacing 452, 470 Log Plot - Depth Ticks 430, 473 Log Plot - Dip Image Plotting 499 Log Plot - Duplicate Track 443 Log Plot - Edit Plot Depths 540 Log Plot - Edit Track Header 453 Log Plot - Expand Track 443 Log Plot - Generic Plot Format 446 Log Plot - Hide Track 443 Log Plot - New Track 443 Log Plot - Numeric Curve Style 470 Log Plot - Paste Track 443 Log Plot - Pictures 489 Log Plot - Plot Formats 446 Log Plot - Plot Output 510 Log Plot - Plotting Images 491 Log Plot - Plotting NMR Waveforms 485 Log Plot - Show / Hide Curves 450 Log Plot - Show Track Headers 453 Log Plot - Track Border Width 453 Log Plot - Track Names 450 Log Plot - Track Numbers 450 Log Plot - Variable Shading Options 476 Log Plot - Waveform Plotting 485 Log Plot - Zones 464 Log Plot Output - CGM File Output 513 Log Plot Output - Customising Log Plot Header 524 Log Plot Output - Hide Track Scales 517 Log Plot Output - Plot Calibration 519 Log Plot Output - Plot Comment With Well Name 518 Log Plot Output - Plot Footer 530 Log Plot Output - Plot Header - Full 524 Log Plot Output - Plot Header - Minimum 524 Log Plot Output - Plot Header - None 523 Log Plot Output - Plot Header - Standard 523

Log Plot Output - Plot Header Options 523 Log Plot Output - Plot Output to File 512 Log Plot Output - Plot Output to Printer 511 Log Plot Output - Plot Scales at Bottom of Log 517 Log Plot Output - Plot Shading Description in Header 517 Log Plot Output - Plot Size 512 Log Plot Output - Plot Track Header Titles 516 Log Plot Output - Plotting Advanced Options 519 Log Plot Output - Setting Multiple Depth Ranges for Plotting 515 Log Plot Output - Setting Plot Depth Range 516 Log Saturation Versus Height Relationships 1362 Log Sw As A Function of Height 1433 Log Sw Height Functions 1433 Log Sw Height Input Curves 1433

-MManage Curve Headers Module 150 Manage Curve Sets Module 116 Manage Well Header Information 88 Manage Zone / Tops - Creating TVD Sets 168 Manage Zone / Tops - Copying any Set type 179 Manage Zone / Tops - Copying Top Sets 172 Manage Zone / Tops - Creating a New Zone 162 Manage Zone / Tops - Deleting Zone / Tops 176 Manage Zone / Tops - Edit Zones / Tops 173 Manage Zone / Tops - Multi-Well Zone / Tops 1529 Manage Zones / Tops - Editing a Parameter Set 177 Manage Zones / Tops - Setting Zone Colors 187 Manage Zones / Tops Module 161 Managing Block Depth Shifts 378 Managing Interactive Depth Shifts 362 Matthews and Kelly Fracture Gradient Model 1319 Max Version 1838 Merge Images Module 424 Merging IP databases 30, 78 Mineral Solver 1023 Mineral Solver - Equations and Methodology 1080 Mineral Solver - Interactive Crossplots 1067 Mineral Solver - Invasion Factor 1080 Mineral Solver - Limit Equations 1080 Mineral Solver - Output Equations 1080 Mineral Solver Calibration 1074 Mineral Solver Combined Model Results 1069

Index

Index Mineral Solver Dry Weight to Volume Percent Conversion 1029 Mineral Solver Equations 1080 Mineral Solver Interactive Plot 1062 Mineral Solver Methodology 1080 Mineral Solver Mineral Equation Defaults 1832 Mineral Solver Mineral System Defaults 1831 Mineral Solver Mixings 1060 Mineral Solver Module 1026 Mineral Solver Parameters 1035 MinSolve Mineral Equation Defaults 1822 MinSolve Mineral System Defaults 1822 Modifying Image Log Palettes 386, 494 Montage Builder Application 711 Monte Carlo Batch Module 1146 Monte Carlo Defaults 1822, 1834 Monte Carlo Eror Analysis - Clay Volume Tab 1126 Monte Carlo Eror Analysis - Cutoff Tab 1126 Monte Carlo Eror Analysis - Dependencies Tab 1131 Monte Carlo Eror Analysis - Histo's Tab 1140 Monte Carlo Eror Analysis - Input Curves Tab 1129 Monte Carlo Eror Analysis - Mineral Solver Tab 1127 Monte Carlo Eror Analysis - Models Tab 1124 Monte Carlo Eror Analysis - Output Tab 1133 Monte Carlo Eror Analysis - Porosity Sw Tab 1126 Monte Carlo Eror Analysis - Tornado Plot Tab 1144 Monte Carlo Eror Analysis - Xplot's Tab 1142 Monte Carlo Error Analysis 1023 Monte Carlo Error Analysis Module 1116 Multiple Linear Regression Module 1175 Multi-Well Manage Well Headers 1517 Multi-Well Batch Operations 1553 Multi-Well Change Parameters Module 1536 Multi-Well Correlation View 679, 1566 Multi-Well Correlation Viewer Module 678 Multi-Well Curve Sets Module 1521 Multi-Well Curve Statistics Module 1562 Multi-Well Cutoffs and Summation 1589 Multi-Well Manage Multi-Well Headers 1517 Multi-Well Parameter Distribution 1542

-NNeural Networks 1184 Neutron Corrections 1681 Neutron Tool Type Set Up 1836

1998

Neutron Tool Types Set Up / System Defaults 1822 New Database 20 New User Program 1902 New User Program - Input Curves Tab 1902 New User Program - Input Logic Flags Tab 1907 New User Program - Input Parameters Tab 1904 New User Program - Output Curves Tab 1903 New User Program - Plot Setup Tab 1909 New User Program - Tabs Set Up Tab 1908 NMR Interpretation 1023 NMR Interpretation - NMR Equations 982 NMR Interpretation Module 942 Normal and Lateral Log Corrections 1446 Normal Resisitvity Log Corrections 1449 Normalization 574 Numeric Curve Display Options 470

-OODM Database Interface 1769 Open Database 23 Open Database Folder 29 OpenSpirit Interface 1778 OpenWorks Database Interface 1760 Options - Irregular Set Depth Tolerances 1872 Options - Log Attribute Mappings 1863 Options - Log Attributes 1860 Options - Tabbed Workareas 1872 Options - Well Attributes 1857 Options - Well Attributes Mappings 1862 Output Device 39 Overburden Gradient Calculation Module 1309 Overburden Gradient Curves - Creating 1358 Overlays 608

-PPalettes Editing 1798 Parameter Set - Saving to External File 719 Parameter Set - Saving to IP Database 726 Parameter Set Distribution 1542 Parameter Sets 717 PathFinder Environmental Corrections 1709 PC Configuration for External Database Links 1714 PETCOM database 1743 PGLWDLink Package 1714 Pickett Plot 646 Picking Dips 386

1999

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Picture Curve 197, 398 Picture Curve Headers 200, 401 Picture Curves 196, 397 Picture Viewer 493 Plot Footer 530 Plot Header - Full 524 Plot Header - Minimum 524 Plot Header - None 523 Plot Header - Standard 523 Plot Header Options 524 Plot Header Remarks 526 Plot Output to File 512 Plot Output to Printer 511 Plot Range Editor 106 Plot Size 512 Plotting a Lithology Legend 334 Plotting Waveforms 485 Plotting Zone Tracks 464 Point Curve 341 Pore and Fracture Gradient Calculations Module 1313 Pore Pressure - Editing Normal Compaction Trend (NCT) Lines 1339 Pore Pressure - Editing Shale Intervals 1341 Pore Pressure - Overburden Gradient Calculation Module 1309 Pore Pressure Calculations 1023, 1306 Pore Pressure Model Interactive Plot 1336 Pore Pressure Module - Fracture Gradient Models 1350 Pore Pressure Module - Fracture Gradient References 1359 Pore Pressure Module - Overburden Gradient Curves 1358 Pore Pressure Module - Pore Pressure References 1359 Pore Pressure Module - Viewing Results 1344 Porosity & Height Function 1 1392, 1433 Porosity and Sw Interactive Plot 793 Porosity and Sw Interactive Plot - Lithology Track 806 Porosity and Sw Interactive Plot - Matrix Track 803 Porosity and Sw Interactive Plot - Porosity Input Track 797 Porosity and Sw Interactive Plot - Porosity Track 805 Porosity and Sw Interactive Plot - Salininty Track 799 Porosity and Sw Interactive Plot - Water Saturation Track 805

Porosity and Sw Interactive Plot - Zone Track 795 Porosity and Sw Parameters 814 Porosity and Water Saturation - Coal and Salt Logic 863 Porosity and Water Saturation - Density Porosity Model 863 Porosity and Water Saturation - Equations and Methodology 863 Porosity and Water Saturation - Flushed Zone Sxo Calculations 880 Porosity and Water Saturation - Hydrocarbon Apparent Density 865 Porosity and Water Saturation - Hydrocarbon Hydrogen Index 865 Porosity and Water Saturation - Neutron Density Porosity Model 865 Porosity and Water Saturation - Neutron Porosity Model 865 Porosity and Water Saturation - Neutron Sonic Porosity Model 872 Porosity and Water Saturation - Neutron Tool Lookup Tables 867 Porosity and Water Saturation - Pass Through Porosity Model 872 Porosity and Water Saturation - PHIFLAG Logic 885 Porosity and Water Saturation - Porosity Limit Shaly Zones and Bad Hole 874 Porosity and Water Saturation - Porosity Limits / Bad Hole Logic 874 Porosity and Water Saturation - Sonic Porosity Model 870 Porosity and Water Saturation - Total Porosity and Bound Water Saturation 874 Porosity and Water Saturation - TPL Water Calculation 864 Porosity and Water Saturation - U - Multi-Mineral Analysis 875 Porosity and Water Saturation - Variable Clay Volume Logic 872 Porosity and Water Saturation - Variable Hydrocarbon Density Logic 871 Porosity and Water Saturation - Variable 'm' 883 Porosity and Water Saturation - Variable Matrix Density logic 871 Porosity and Water Saturation - Water Saturation Equations 877 Porosity and Water Saturation Interpretation 733 Porosity and Water Saturation Module 777 Pressure Gradients 637 Principle Component Analysis 1223

Index

Index Print Parameter Set Module 728 Printer Setup 39 Printing Cutoff Results 914 Printing Summation Results 914 Probabilistic Log Analysis 1026 Pulsed Neutron Interpretation 996 PuTTY Server Installation 1714

2000

Save DBase4 Data 321 Save LAS data 300 Save LIS data 307 Save Parameter Set to File Module 725 Save Parameter Sets to External Disk Files 725 Save Zone Tops Module 323 Saving Old Databases to New Versions IP 36 Schlumberger Environmental Corrections 1687 Secure Shell Protocol 1714 Select Current Well 73 Radial 1473, 1476, 1478, 1479, 1480, 1481, 1482, Select Text Curve 190, 404 1484, 1485, 1487, 1489, 1490, 1493, 1495, 1496, Selecting Areas in Crossplots 605 1500, 1505, 1507, 1509 Sensitivity 931, 933 Radial Analysis 1473, 1476, 1478, 1479, 1480, Sensitivity Analysis 931 1481, 1482, 1484, 1485, 1487, 1489, 1490, 1493, Set Default File Location 27 1495, 1496, 1500, 1505, 1507, 1509 Set Default Units 1818 Random Functions 1608 Set Dictionary 119 Read / Write Via OpenSpirit Module 1778 Setting Zone Colours 187 Read from / Write to GEOLOG DB 1749 Shading Types Module 1788 Read from ODM Database 1769 Shear Sonic QC 1232 Read From OpenWorks Database 1760 Shear Sonic QC / Create Module 1233 Read/ Write to PETCOM Database Module 1743 Shift Baseline Operation 349 Real Time Data Link 279 Sigma Calculation 996, 1643 Regression Equations - Saturation Height Module Simple Log Interpretation 735 1439 Special Interpretation 1023 Regression Lines - Log Plots 616 Special Interpretation Density Estimation 1232, Renaming Curves 151 1237 Rescale Curves 392 Special Interpretation - Fluid Substitution 1232, Reset Current Well 87 1239 Resistivity Corrections 1684 Special Interpretation - Fuzzy Logic 1154 Resistivity Temperature Conversion 1642 Special Interpretation - Fuzzy Logic Equations and Rock Physics 1023, 1232 Methodology 1171 Rock Physics - Density Estimation 1237 Special Interpretation - Mineral Solver 1026 Rock Physics - Fluid Substitution 1239 Special Interpretation - Monte Carlo Batch 1146 Rock Physics - Shear Sonic QC / Create 1233 Special Interpretation - Monte Carlo Error Analysis Rock Quality Index Method - Saturation Height 1116 Functions 1438 Special Interpretation - Multiple Linear Regression Running Interpretation Modules in Batch Mode 1553 1175 Running User Formulae in Batch Mode 1553 Special Interpretation - NMR Interpretation 942 Running User Programs in Batch Mode 1553 Special Interpretation - Overburden Gradient Russian Resistivity Log Corrections 1444 Calculation 1309 RW From SP Module 1652 Special Interpretation - Pore and Fracture Gradient Calculations 1313 Special Interpretation - Pore Pressure Calculations 1306 Special Interpretation - Rock Physics 1232 Saturation Modelling Tools 1362 Special Interpretation - Shear Sonic QC 1232, 1233 Save All Wells to Database 35 Sperry Sun Environmental Corrections 1703 Save ASCII data 293

-R-

-S-

Save Current Well to Database As

30, 78

2001

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Spherical 1473, 1476, 1478, 1479, 1480, 1481, 1482, 1484, 1485, 1487, 1489, 1490, 1493, 1495, 1496, 1500, 1505, 1507, 1509 Spherical Analysis 1473, 1476, 1478, 1479, 1480, 1481, 1482, 1484, 1485, 1487, 1489, 1490, 1493, 1495, 1496, 1500, 1505, 1507, 1509 Splice Curves Module 384 SSH Connection 1714 Statistical Curve Prediction 1023, 1154 Summation 889 System Defaults 1822

-TTabbed Workareas 1872 Tadpole Symbols on Log Plots 484 Take Notes 112 TDT Stand Alone Module 996 TDT Time Lapse Module 1015 Temperature Gradient Module 1650 Text Curves 189, 403 Text Editor 112 Time 42, 45, 48, 53, 56, 59, 61 Time Curves 42, 45, 48, 53, 56, 59, 61 Time Lapse 1015 Time of Day 42, 45, 48, 53, 56, 59, 61 Tools 1787 Tools - Curve Type Defaults 1827 Tools - Edit Crossplot Overlay Set Up File 1833 Tools - Edit Curve Alias Defaults 1829 Tools - Edit Curve System Defaults 1825 Tools - Edit Default Lithology 1802 Tools - Edit Dip Symbols 1796 Tools - Edit Global Sets 1791 Tools - Edit Monte Carlo Defaults 1834 Tools - Edit Neutron Tool Types Set Up File 1836 Tools - Edit Palettes 1798 Tools - Edit Unit Conversions Defaults 1835 Tools - Edit Zone Colors 1794 Tools - Mineral Solver Mineral Equation Defaults 1832 Tools - Set Default Units 1818 Tools - Shading Types 1788 Tools - System Defaults 1822 Tools- Edit Mineral Solver Mineral System Defaults 1831 Tops Sets 161 True Stratigraphic Thickness Calculation 1665

True Vertical / True Stratigraphic Thickness Module 1665 True Vertical Depth Module 1654 True Vertical Thickness Calculation 1665 TVD Calculations 1654

-UUndo / Redo 558, 613, 770, 924 Unit Conversion Defaults 1822 Unit Conversions Defaults 1835 Unix System Configuration 1714 Upgrading Licences 1838 User Define Log Plot Header 524, 711 User Formula Module 1608 User Forum 5 User Program Code 1915 User Program Module - New User Program 1902 User Programs Module 1896 User Programs Module - FORTRAN Guide 1922 User Programs Options 1898 User-Defined Formula 1608 User-Defined Line in Crossplot Module 624

-VVariable Density Log Plotting 481 VDL Shading 481 View - 3D Parameter Viewer 664 View - Crossplots 584 View - Curve and Set Names 132 View - Curve Listing / Curve Edit 137 View - Curve Statistics 145 View - Histogram 548 View - Log Plot 430 View - Multi-Well Correlation Viewer 678 View - Multi-Well Curve Statistics 1562 View Core Photographs 196, 397 View Graphics Files 196, 397

-WWeatherford Environmental Corrections Web Client Connection 1714 Well Depths Editor 129 Well Header Information 88 Well Lists 69 Well Management 41

Index

1706

Index Well Management - Close Well 84 Well Management - Create New Well 71 Well Management - Delete Parameter Sets 104 Well Management - Manage Well Header Information 88 Well Management - Plot Range Editor 106 Well Management - Select Well to Display 73 Well Management - Take Notes 112 Well Map 701, 1654 WITSML Data Link 279 Write to GEOLOG Database 1749 Write to ODM Database 1769 Write to PETCOM Database 1743 Write Via OpenSpirit 1778

-ZZone Colors 1794 Zone Track Display Options Zones Sets 161

464

2002